197905_DP_Machines 197905 DP Machines
197905_DP_Machines 197905_DP_Machines
User Manual: 197905_DP_Machines
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 576
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
--------- --- -----------------'-
M 1.10
Jul 79
OP Machines
PRODUCT CLASSIFICATION LIST
All products are normally classified based on standard Sales Manual description of purpose. I/O or terminal products exclusive to one
division which attach to ""Iected products of the other division through RPQ's are considered Common (for those uses only)
MACHINES CURRENTLY IN THE PRODUCT LINE
29
59
83
88
129
403
419
519
534
557
803
1001
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1230
1231
1232
1255
1260
1282
1287
1288
1402
1403
1404
1416
1419
1442
1443
1445
2152
2222
2250
2305
2401
2415
2420
2501
2502
2520
2540
2560
2671
2701
2711
2740
2741
2791
2792
2793
2796
2797
2798
2803
2804
2816
2821
2822
2835
2840
2860
2870
2880
3017
3027
3031
3032
3033
3036
3037
3038
3041
3042
3046
3047
3052
3056
3058
3062
3066
3067
3068
3115
3125
3135
3138
(0)
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
COM
COM
DPO
DPO
OPO
OPO
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPD(')
DPO
OPD
COM
DPD
COM
COM
COM
COM(')
OPO
COM
GSD
COM
DPO
COM
COM
OPO
COM
COM
COM
DPO
COM
OPO
DPD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPD(')
OPD(')
DPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
3145
DPD
3148
OPO
3158
OPO
3168
DPO
3203
DPO
3210
DPO
3211
OPD
3213
DPD
3215
DPD
3216
DPD
3251
OPO
3255
OPD
3258
OPO
3262 1
OPD
Al,Bl GSO
3271
COM
3272
COM
3274
COM
3275
COM
3276
COM
3277
COM
3278 1,2,3,4 COM
2A
OPO
3284
COM
3286
COM
3287
COM
3288
COM
3289 1,2,3
COM
4
OPO
3310
OPO
3330
OPO
3333
DPD
3340
COM
3344
COM
3345
OPO
3350
DPD
3370 A1,B1 OPD
A11,B11GSO
3410
COM
3411
COM
3420
DPD
3501
DPO
3504
DPD
3505
DPO
3521
DPO
3525
OPO
3540
OPO
3601
COM
3602
COM
3603
COM
3604
COM
3606
COM
3608
COM
3610
COM
3611
COM
3612
COM
3614
COM
3615
COM
3616
COM
3618
COM
3624
COM
3631
OPO
3632
DPO
3641
OPO
3642
DPO
3643
OPO
3644
OPO
3645
DPO
3646
OPO
3647
OPO
3651
OPO
3653
OPD
3657
OPO
3659
OPO
3661
OPO
3663
OPO
3666
OPO
3667
OPO
3669
OPD
3683
OPD
3684
DPD
3704
OPO
3705
DPD
3713
COM
3715
GSO
(')
3717
3732
3735
3736
3741
3742
3747
3760
3762
3767
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
3781
3782
3784
3791
3792
3793
3800
3803
3811
3830
3838
3842
3845
3846
3851
3863
3864
3865
3872
3874
3875
3880
3881
3886
3890
3895
3896
4331
4341
4953
4955
4959
4962
4964
4973
4974
4978
4979
4982
4987
4990
4997
4999
5010
5012
5013
5014
5022
5024
5026
5028
5029
5100
5103
5106
5110
5114
5203
5211
5213
5231
5234
5235
5251
5256
5320
5340
5404
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
GSD
DPO
COM
OPO
GSD
GSO
GSD
OPD
OPO
COM
OPO
DPO
OPD
DPO
OPO
(.)
(')
COM
COM
DPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
DPD
OPO
OPD
OPO
OPD
OPO
5421
5422
5424
5425
5444
5447
5448
5471
5486
5496
7770
8101
8130
8140
8775
8809
GSD
GSD
COM
OPO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
COM
OPD
OPO
OPD
OPO
OPD
OPO
(')
COM
COM
DPD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPD
COM
COM
OPO
DPD
OPO
OPO
DPD
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
COM
GSO
COM
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
Certain models of these machine types have not heen withdrawn from marketing.
Not to be reproduced w!thout written permission.
,-------- - -----_.----------- -----
M 1.11
Jul79
DP Machines
PRODUCT CLASSIFICATION LIST
All products are normally classified based on standard Sales Manual description of purpose. I/O or terminal products exclusive to one
division which attach to selected products of the other division through RPQ's are considered Common (for those uses only)
Withdrawn 7XXX machines are not shown. Machine types indicated by
an (.) have certain models which have not been withdrawn from marketing. Refer to applicable machine page
for models that have been withdrawn from marketing.
MACHINES WHICH ARE WITHDRAWN FROM MARKETING
01
10
11
12
13
15
16
24
26
27
28
31
36
37
41
43
44
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
60
63
64
65
66
67
68
71
72
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
89
90
91
92
93
94
101
106
108
188
285
298
305
323
340
350
355
357
358
360
361
370
372
373
374
376
380
381
382
402
404
405
407
408
409
412
416
418
501
512
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
COM
GSD
GSD
GSO
COM
GSD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
GSD
GSD
COM
GSD
COM
COM
GSD
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
COM
GSD
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
DPO
DPD
OPO
DPD
DPD
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPO
OPD
OPO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
COM
513
514
516
517
518
520
521
522
523
524
526
527
528
529
533
534
535
536
537
541
542
543
544
545
548
549
550
551
552
556
557
601
602
603
604
605
607
608
609
610
614
630
631
634
635
636
637
638
641
645
648
649
650
652
653
654
655
701
702
704
705
706
709
711
712
714
716
717
719
720
721
722
726
727
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
DPD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
DPO
OPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPD
OPD
OPD
DPO
DPO
DPD
DPO
OPD
DPD
DPO
DPO
DPD
DPO
OPD
DPD
OPO
DPO
OPO
DPD
OPD
OPD
DPD
OPD
DPD
OPO
OPD
743 DPD
744 DPD
745 DPD
746 DPD
747 DPD
748 DPD
752 DPD
753 DPD
754 DPD
755 DPD
756 DPD
757 DPD
758 DPD
759 DPD
760 DPD
766 DPD
767 DPO
771 COM
772 COM
774 COM
775 COM
780 DPD
781 DPO
782 DPD
801 COM
802 COM
805 COM
808 COM
812 COM
813 COM
814 COM
815 COM
816 COM
817 COM
818 COM
819 COM
820 COM
824 GSD
826 GSD
834 GSD
836 GSD
838 DPD
850 COM
854 COM
856 'GSD
857 COM
858 GSD
863 GSD
865 GSD
866 GSD
867 GSO
868 GSD
869 GSD
884 COM
939 GSD
941 GSD
942 GSD
953 COM
954 GSD
955 COM
957 COM
961 GSD
962 GSO
963 COM
964 DPO
966 COM
972 GSO
973 GSO
1009 COM
1011 COM
1012 OPO
1013 DPO
1014 COM
1015 COM
1016 COM
1017 COM
1018 COM
1026' DPO
1051 COM
1052 COM
1053 COM
1054 COM
1055 COM
1056 COM
1057 COM
1058 COM
1061 OPO
1062 OPO
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1081
1082
1083
1084
1092
1093
1094
1131
1132
1133
1134
1201
1202
1203
1210
1219
1220
1221
1241
1259
1285
1287
1301
1311
1351
1352
1355
1361
1364
1365
1367
1401
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1411
1412
1414
1415
1418
1421
1428
1441
1443
1444
1446
1447
1448
1461
1462
1501
1502
1505
1510
1512
1518
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1801
1802
1803
1810
1816
1826
1827
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSO
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
COM
OPD
DPD(')
DPO
COM
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPD
OPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPO
DPO
DPO
OPD
OPD
OPD
COM(')
COM
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
GSO
GSO
COM
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSD
1828
1851
1854
1856
2020
2022
2025
2030
2040
2044
2050
2060
2065
2067
2070
2075
2085
2091
2095
2150
2167
2203
2213
2260
2265
2280
2282
2285
2301
2302
2303
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2318
2319
2321
2360
2361
2362
2365
2385
2395
2402
2403
2404
2495
2596
2680
2702
2703
2712
2715
2721
2730
2760
2772
2780
2795
2820
2802
2814
2826
2841
2844
2845
2846
2848
3060
3066
3067
3080
3085
3086
3155
3165
3195
3275
3346
3360
3611
3671
3672
3673
3674
3707
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPO
OPO
DPO
DPO
3773
3774
3775
3791
4872
5275
5445
5475
6405
6420
6422
6425
6426
6428
6454
6455
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
OPD
OPO
OPD
OPD
OPO
GSD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
DPD
DPO
DPO
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPD
COM
DPO
DPD
DPO
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPO
OPD
COM
COM
COM
DPD
OPD
DPD
OPD
COM
OPO
OPD
DPO
COM
OPO
OPD(')
DPO(')
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
(')
DPO
OPO
COM
OPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
GSO
('J Certain modeh of these machine types have not been withdrawn from marketing
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(' )
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
COM
DPD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
(')
(')
( ')
--------=-- =--- ---=------':' =
M 1.20
Mav 79
DP Machines
MACHINE TYPES/MODELS WHICH HAVE BEEN DISCONTINUED FROM LEASE AND RENTAL AGREEMENTS AND WITHDRAWN FROM IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS
1
12
15
16
27
28
31
36
44
51
52
55
58
70
71
72
75
76
78
79
81
86
89
90
91
92
93
94
106
210
211
212
285
298
305
323
340
350
355
370
380
381
404
405
409
412
416
417
418
501
512
515
516
518
520
522
527
528
529
533
535
537
542
543
544
550
551
554
556
601
603
605
607
608
610
623
625
626
644
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
701
702
Mechanical Punch
Duplicating Punch
Motor Drive Punch
Motor Drive Duplicating Punch
Card Proof Punch
Printing Card Proof Punch
Alpha Duplicating Punch
Alpha Printing Punch
Tape Control Punch
Mechanical Verifier
Verifier
Verifier
Card Typewriter
Vertical Sorter
Vertical Sorter
Collator
Sorter
Searching Sorter
Stencil Collator
Stencil Printing Collator
Stencil Sorter
Coupon Sorter
Collator
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Automatic Checking Machine
Coupon Statistical Machine
Electric Verifier
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
RAMAC
RAMAC Card Punch
RAMAC Power Unit
RAMAC Disk
Disk Storage
RAMAC Printer
RAMAC Console
RAMAC Printer
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Alphabetic Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
Numbering Gangpunch
Reproducer
Interpreting Reproducing Punch
Duplicating Summary Punch
Reproducer
Computing Punch
Duplicating Summary Punch
Electronic Calculator Punch
Accumulating Reproducer
Electronic Calculating Punch
Card /Read Punch
Card Read Punch
Card/Read Punch
Reader Punch
Card Reader
Card Punch
Interpreter
Interpreter
Interpreter
Interpreter
Multiplier
Electronic Multiplier
Electronic Calculator
Calculator
Transitor Calculator
Calculator
Calculating Punch
Calculating Punch
Calculating Punch
Calculating Punch
Paper Tape Punch for 632 System
Paper Tape Reader for 632 System
Console (650 System)
RPQ Machine
Control Unit
Storage Unit
Auxiliary Alphabetic Unit
Power Unit
Central Processing Unit (701 System)
Central Processing Unit (702)
704
705
709
712
714
717
719
720
722
726
727
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
766
767
771
774
775
776
777
781
782
786
801
805
838
850
856
857
858
861
863
865
868
869
884
919
920
921
933
942
953
964
966
973
1301-1
1405-1
1405-2
1411
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1608
1780
1783
1789
1902-3
1903-13
1905-22
1912-17
Central Processing Unit (704)
Central Processing Unit (705)
Central Processing Unit (709)
Card Reader
Card Reader
Printer
Printer
Printer
Card Punch
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Printer
Magnetic Drum Storage
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Drum
Print Control
Power Supply
Magnetic Core Storage
Magnetic Core Storage
Additional Core Storage
CRT Recorder
Power Supply
Power Unit
Power Supply
Power Unit
Power Unit
Power Distribution Unit
Tape Data Selector PS
Data Synchronizer
Tape Control
Tape Control
Tape Control
Tape Control
Control Unit
Printer Control
Card Punch Control
Card Reader Control
Control & Storage
Data Synchronizer
Data Synchronizer
Card/Tape Converter
Tape Data Selector
Record Storage Unit
Sp EDPM
Tape Record Coordinator
Console
Console Control Unit
Stretch
Proof Machine
Test Scoring Machine
Inquiry Station
Stencil Cutter
Card-A-Type
Document Writer
Control Unit
Stencil Charger
Arithmetic Unit
Output Typewriter
Transmitting Typewriter
Typewriter
Typewriter Tape Punch
Comparing Bill Feed
Bill Feed
Carriage
Carbon Ribbon Feed
Electronic Storage Unit
Multiline Posting Machine
Auxiliary Printing Tape Punch
Code Comparing Unit
Keyboard
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage
Disk Storage
Central Processing Unit (1410)
Central Processing Unit
Auxiliary Processing Unit
Input Output Processing Unit
Output Control Unit
Terminal and Multiplex Unit
Process Operators Console
Remote Printing Station
Space Plotter
Uptime 1500 Reader
Rixon Modem
Paper Tape Output (RPQ)
Paper. Tape Reader (RPO)
Self Check Numbering Unit
Teletype to Card
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -=--=-=.-=-:=
=
= ===--=
==::.:
';' ==
M 1.21
,May 79
DP Machines
MACHINE TYPES/MODELS WHICH HAVE BEEN DISCONTINUED FROM LEASE AND RENTAL AGREEMENTS AND WITHDRAWN FROM IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS
1912-22
1912-46
1922-1
1922-2
1922-4
1922-19
1924-12
1924-38
1924-44
1924-63
1924-66
1924-67
1927-1
1933-2
1939-1
1940-7
1944-5
1944-6
1944-9
1945-3
1946-4
1973-1
1974-2
1991-1
1998-9
1998-13
1998-14
1998-15
1998-16
1998-17
1998-18
1998-19
1998-24
1998-28
1998-33
1998-34
1998-43
2911-6
2976-3
2976-4
2976-5
2983-1
2989-11
7100
7101
7105
7152
7230-1
7256-1
7262
7266-1
7275-2
7286-3
7286-5
7293
7294-1
7300
7404
7503
7553
7605
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7619
7620
7622
7623
7634
7701
7710
7711
7803
7900
7951
7952
7956
7957
7958
7959
9809
9827
9828
9907
Teletype to Card
Buffer CRPO)
Tape Adapter CRPO)
Tape Adapter CRPO)
Tape Adapter CRPO)
Tape Adapter CRPO)
Control Unit CRPO)
Punch Control
Buffer Punch
Printer Control Unit
Control Unit (RPO)
Control Unit (RPO)
Inquiry Station (RPO)
Reader Punch
Serial Card Reader
Serial Printer CRPO)
Card Transceiver - 5 Channel
Terminal Control Unit
Reader Mark Sense (RPO)
Magnetic Tape Transfer Unit
Card Terminal CRPO)
Card Read Punch (RPO)
Data Transmission Processor
Sequence Keyboard (RPO)
SMS Cube
Storage foower Control Unit
Drum Power Converter
Drum Control Unit
D.C. C.E. Console
Drum
Drum Air Compressor
Drum Air Receiver
Impulse Readout Master Clock (RPO)
Clock
Card Proof Punch
Card Proof Punch
Data Channel Repeater
Switch
Transmission Control Unit
Printer Keyboard
Signal Converter
Supervisor Data Capture Unit
Basic Counter Unit
Central ProcesSing Unit
Central Processing Unit (7030)
Central Processing Unit (7072 System)
Stretch Console
Input Output Multiplexer
Photo Store Unit
Console
Lexical Processor
Toll Rating Interface
Channel Direct Data
Channel Direct Data & LCM
Power Supply & Power Control
Tape Independent Power
Disk Storage
Graphic Output Unit
Card Reader
Card Punch
Disk Storage Control
Disk SynchrOnizer & Storage
Tape Control
Card Reader Control
Card Punch Control
Printer Control
Exchange
Channel
Signal Control
Console Central
Graphic Control Unit
Tape Transmission Terminal
Data Communication Unit
Data Communication Unit
Power Distribution
Inquiry Station
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
Disk Channel
Drum Channel
Drum Channel CE Console
Disk Channel CE Console
Not to be reproduced without writ.ten permission.
------ ---- - ----= = =':' =
--
M 1.30
May 79
DP Machines
PLANNED DATES FOR DISCONTINUANCE OF LEASE AND RENTAL MACHINE TYPES/MODELS AND WITHDRAWAL OF IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT SERVICE
December 31, 1979
April 30, 1981
63
711
716
721
780
1014
1414
141 5
2280
7102
7104
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7114
7150
7151
7153
7301
7302
7305
7320
7400
7500
7501
7502
7550
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7606
7607
7608
7617
7618
7621
7631
7640
7741
7750
7802
7804
7904
7907
7908
7909
353
521
541
604
609
728
729
1011
1026
1241
1301-2
1301-11
1301-12
1301-21
1301-22
1302
1311
1401
1402
1403-1
1 403-4
1406
1407
1409
1421
1441
1442-1
1442-2
1442-3
1442-4
1443-3
1443-4
1444
1445-1
1446
1447
1448
1 461
1462
1620
1621
1622
1 623
1624
1625
1 626
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1791
1792
1793
1 794
1795
1 796
1797
1 798
1979-1
71 55
7330
7335
7340
7641
Card 10 Tape Punch
Card Reader
Prinler
Card Punch
CRT Display
Remote Inquiry Unit
Input/Oulput Synchronizer
Console
Film Recorder
Arithmetic & Logical Unit (7080 System)
High Speed Processor (7074 System)
Processing Unit (7040 System)
Processing Unit (7044 System)
Instruction Processing Unit (7090 System)
Arithmelic Sequence Unit
Instruction Processing Unit (7094 System)
Instruction Processing Unit (7094-11 System)
Processing Unit (7010 System)
Console Conlrol Unit
Console Control Unit
Console Control Unit
Core Storage
Core Storage
Central Storage & Input/Output Control
Drum Storage
Printer
Card Reader
Console Card Reader
Console Card Reader
Card Punch
Input/Oulput Control
Arithmetic & Program Control (7070 System)
Core Storage Control
Input/Oulput Synchronizer
Tape Control
Multiplexor
Data Channel
Power Converter
Data Channel Console
Power Control
Tape Control
File Control
Hyperlape Control
Programmable Transmission Control Unit
Programmed Transmission Control
Power Converter
Power Unit
Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
April 30, 1980
67
80
101
116
131
143
155
156
163
408
426
450
513
517
549
628
1202
1502
1506
1510
1512
1518
1903-2
1924-77
1925-22
1925-25
1935-1
7702
7765
Telegraph Signal Unit
Sorter
Statistical Sorter
Numeric Duplicating Punch
Alpha Duplicating Punch
Tape Controlled Card Punch
Numeric Verifier
Alpha Verifier
Card Controlled Tape Punch
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Reproducing Punch
Gang Summary Punch
Ticket Converter
Calculating Punch
Utility Inscriber
Station Control
Audio Unit
Instruction Display
Image Projector
Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader
Control Unit
Switch
Switch
Ticket Reader
Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal
Paper Tape to Magnetic Tape Converter
December 31, 1980
2712
Remote Multiplexer
Disk Storage Unit
Electronic Calculating Punch
Card Read Punch
Electronic Calculator
Calculator
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Paper Tape Reader
Transmission Control Unit
Bank Processing Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Uriit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Drive
Processing Unit
Card Reader Punch
Printer
Printer
Storage Unit
Console
Console Auxiliary Unit
Bank Transit Machine
Processing Unit
Card Reader Punch
Card Reader Punch
Card Reader
Card Reader
Printer
Printer
Card Punch
Printer
Printer
Console
Transmission Control Unit
Input Output Control
Printer
Central Processing Unit
Paper Tape Reader
Card Read Punch
Core Storage
Magnetic Tape Punch
Core Storage
Plotter Control
Data Converter
Multiplexer and Terminal
Manual Entry Unit
Sense Switch Unit
Digital Display Unit
Output Printer Control
Output Printer
Digital Input Control
Terminal Box for Control System
File Storage Unit
Additional Process Input Output
RPQ
Adapter Unit
Terminal Box for Control System
Data Control Unit
Reader Control Unit (RPQ)
Console
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Hypertape
Hypertape Control
February 28, 1982
151
1003
1004
1009
1013
1924-35
1924-43
1976-4
1998-29
2596
2902-1
2947-4
2962-1
2973-7
2989-10
3671-1
Verifier
SABRE Terminal
SABRE Controller
Data Transmission Unit
Communicating Reader Punch
RPQ SW1-1403
RPQ Controller for 2d 1403
RPQ Data Communication Terminal
RPQ Clock Input
Card Read Punch
RPQ .Communication Controller
RPQ Check Collection Controller
RPQ Display Controller
RPQ Two Channel Switch
RPQ Real Time Recorder
Shared Terminal Controller
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-
- -- -== ---------== ~ ==
=-=
M1.31
May 79
DP Machines
PLANNED DATES FOR DISCONTINUANCE OF LEASE AND RENTAL MACHINE TYPES/MODELS AND WITHDRAWAL OF IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT SERVICE
7473-2
7772
RPQ Display Terminal
Audio Response Unit
April 30, 1982
812
813
814
815
816
817
81 8
819
820
1081
1082
1 083
1084
1210
1 259
1412
Automatic Production Recorder
Portable Keyboard
Remote Control Unit
Automatic Typewriter
Remote Automatic Typewriter
Card Reader
Remote Shaft Position Converter
Printing Card Punch
Time Punch
Data Aquisition Control
Card Reader
Remote Control
Sampler Reader
Reader Sorter
Reader Sorter
Magnetic Character Reader
June 30, 1982
2321
Data Cell Drive
February 28, 1983
50
Magnetic Data Inscriber
108
Card Proving Machine
602
Calculating Punch
614
Typewriter for 632 and 634 Systems
630
Calculating Unit for 632 System
631
Calculating Unit for 632 System
634
Calculating Unit for 632 System
635
Calculating Unit for 632 System
636
Calculating Unit for 632 and 633 Systems
637
Calculating Unit for 632 and 633 Systems
638
Calculating Unit for 632 System
641
Card Reader for 632 System
645
Card Reader for 632 System
824
Typewriter Card Punch
826
Typewriter Punch Printer
867
Output Typewriter for 1 08
1980-14.15RPQ Selective Tape Listing Printer
2495
Tape to Card Reader
2911-14 RPQ Communication Switching Unit
4872
Modem
6405
Accounting Machine for 6400 System
6410
Accounting Machine for 6400 System
6420
Accounting Machine for 6400 System
6422
Automatic Ledger Feed for 6400 System
6424
Card Punch for 6400 System
6425
Magnetic Ledger Unit for 6400 System
6426
Card Punch for 6400 System
6428
Card Reader for 6400 System
6454
Paper Tape Reader for 6400 System
6455
Paper Tape Punch for 6400 System
February 29, 1984
834
836
866
961
962
972
1960-10
1960-20
2946-1
Control Unit (Non Printing)
Control Unit (Printing)
Non Transmitting Typewriter
Tape Punch (8 track)
Tape Punch (5 track)
Auxiliary Keyboard
RPQ Special Reader
RPQ Special Processing Unit
RPQ Terminal Control Unit
Nol to
b~ reprod\Jc~d)Nithqut wriU~n p~rmi$sion.
--------- --- --------_.--------
M2
May 79
DP Machines
TYPICAL MACHINE DESCRIPTION
The format used throughout the "Machines" section of the sales manual has been designed to give the reader, in "Highlights" form, as
much information as possible in as few words as possible. A bracket to the right of any entry indicates a chanp'p or addition. A study of the
points covered in this typical machine description will show where and how various types of information are covered in each description.
(1) Purpose -- a capsule description of the machine's major funcMetering -- indicates the type of meter on a Systems Plan "A"
tions.
machine.
(2) Models -- capsule description of major differences in available
models.
Useful Life Category --
(3) Model Changes -- there are three categories: Field Installable,
Not Recommended for Field Installation, or Available at Time of
Manufacture Only. For a rental machine, the new monthly availability charge (see "Prices" below) is effective the day following
installation of the model change.
(10) Special Features -- listed here are descriptions of the special
features which can be added to the base machine ... each description covers in capsule form the additional function(s) supplied by the feature.
(4) Highlights -- capsule comments on sales advantages and func-
Prerequisite(s)
other machines, special features,
"Specify" items required for installation of the feature.
Installation -- there are three categories for installation of
special features. Field Installable, Not Recommended for Field
Installation, or Available at Time of Manufacture Only.
tional operations.
or
(5) Limitation(s) (not shown in this example) -- only those which
apply to the machine itself ... limitations for Special Features
appear in "Special Features" descriptions.
(6) Prerequisite(s) -- other machines, special features, or "Specify"
items required for installation of the machine ... usually related
to system components.
(11) Special Feature Prices
(7) Bibliography -- base number only. Consult the current appropriate system bibliography for listing of all available manuals pertaining to the machine on that system.
MAC -- the monthly availability charge, exclusive of applicable
taxes, for the special feature. (SUC = Single Use Charge ...
item remains property of IBM)
(8) Specify -- this section lists items which will be furnished at no
Purchase -- the purchase price, exclusive of applicable taxes,
for the special feature. Also see FIC, below.
additional charge when specified on initial machine order for
plant installation at time of manufacture. Each item is identified
by a name and a four-digit (9XXX) number preceded by a number sign (#). 9XXX numbers are also used as detailed specifications for certain special features listed in "Special Features"
descriptions.
.
MMMC -- the Minimum Monthly Maintenance Charge for the
special feature on a purchased machine on a Maintenance
Agreement. (T&M = Time and Material)
FIC -- the service charge for field installation of the special
feature on a purchased machine. PO under this heading means
plant installation only (cannot be field installed). Note: FIC does
not apply to new machine types announced after June 1, 1970.
(9) Prices (for base machine)
Note: Under any of the above headings, NC = No Charge.
3782 CARD ATTACHMENT UNIT
Rental (MAC) -- the monthly rental (monthly availability
charge). exclusive of applicable taxes, for the base machine.
11) Purpose: Used to attach the 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2 to a 3774.
3775 or 3776 Communication Terminal. or to attach a 3521 Card Punch
to a 3771. 3774. 3775 or 3776 Communication Terminal.
12)
ETP, FTP --
Extended Term Plan (ETP) and Fixed Term
PIan (FTP).
Purchase -- the purchase price, exclusive of applicable taxes,
for the base machine.
13) Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
14) Highlights: The unit provides power and attachment circuits and serves
as a stand for mounting the card machine.
16) PREREQUISITES:
Model 1 -- requires 3782/3521 Card Punch Attachment 1#8150) on
the 3771. 3774. 3775 or 3776 and a 3521 Card Punch.
MMMC -- Minimum Monthly Maintenance Charge for maintenance service on a purchased machine on a Maintenance
Agreement ... charge provides for maintenance service availability during certain fixed weekdav hours.
.
(T&M = Time and Material)
Rental Plan -- the rental plan under which the machine is
offered.
For machines under
Systems Plan "A", the entry 10% here indicates that hours of
additional billable time are charged at an hourly rate of 1/ 176th
of 10% of the monthly availability charge. 30% indicates that
the hourly rate is charged at 1/176th of 30% of the monthly
availability charge.
Purchase Option -- the percentage of the first year's rental
which is credited against the purchase price when a rental
customer purchases an installed machine.
Warranty -- applies to machines ordered on an Agreement for
Purchase of IBM Machines
Maintenance -- indicates the machine group to be used when
calculating the additional charge for maintenance for optional
periods of Maintenance Agreement service availability.
Per Call -- the class of rates applicable to a purchased machine
if it is subject to hourly service charges (e.g., where no maintenance agreement applies, service is requested outside the hours
covered in the Maintenance Agreement, etc.).
Model 1 Attaches a 3521 Card Punch.
Model 2 Attaches a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2.
Model 2 -- requires a 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149)
on the 3774. 3775 or 3776 e~d a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2.
The following specify features are required on the 2502: #9901 for
115 VAC. and #9046 for white color.
17) Bibliography: GC20-0001
(8)
Specify: [1] Voltage 1115 V AC. l-phase. 3-wire. 60 Hzl: #9880 for
locking plug. or #9881 for n("n-Iock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue. or #9045 for
gray.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer to Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-3006.
191 Prices:
3782
Mdl
MAC
ETP
Purchase
1
$ 41
$ 35
$ 1,400
2
59
50
2,000
Rental Plan: B
Warranty: B
MMMC
$1.50
1.00
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option:60%
Useful Life Category: 2
1101
SPECIAL FEATURES
OPTICAL MARK READ 1#54551.' [Model 2 only] Required when the
attached 2502 is equipped with Optical Mark Read (#54501. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Refer to 2502 writeup for feature description and card
limitations. Field Installation: Yes.
1111 Special Feature Prices:
MAC
Optical Mark Read
#5455 $ 25
ETP
$ 21
I Purchase MMMC
$ 840
$ 1
On some pages in the "Machines" section, there is a "Codes"
heading under which will be shown SIU and ID. SIU = System
Identification Unit; ID = Identity Code.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3
May 79
DP Machines
INDEX OF MACHINES
ACCESSORIES
See M 10000 pages
FINANCE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3600 RETAIL STORE SYSTEM (3650)
AUXILIARY PROCESSOR
3838 Array Processor
BANKING EQUIPMENT
803 Proof Machine
1 255 Magnetic Character Reader
141 g Magnetic Character Reader
3890 Document Processor
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber
3896 Tape-Document Converter
(also see 1060)
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3790)
2741
3277
3284
3288
3287
3288
3411
3780
3760
3762
3791
3792
3793
Communication Terminal
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Mag Tape Unit & Control - mdl I
Dual Key Entry Station - mdl I, 2
Key Entry Station - mdl 3
Key Entry Station
Controller
Auxiliary Control Unit
Keyboard-Printer
DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM (1030)
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
Input Station
Digital Time Unit
Printer
Card Punch
Badge Reader
DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (2790)
1035
2715
2740
2791
2792
2793
2796
2797
2798
Badge Reader
Transmission Control Unit
Communication Terminal - mdl I
Area Station
Remote Communications Controller
Area Station
Data Entry Unit
Data Entry Unit
Guidance Display Unit
DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3770)
2502
3203
3501
3521
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3782
3784
Card Reader
Printer
Card Reader
Card Punch
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Card Attachment Unit
Line Printer
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
See next page
DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM (1001)
1001 Data Transmission Unit
7770 Audio Response Unit
DATA TRANSMISSION UNITS
2740 Communication Terminal
3767 Communication Terminal
DISTRIBUTED OFFICE COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (3730)
3277
3284
3286
3287
3288
3411
3732
3736
3791
3793
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Magnetic Tape and Control
Text Display Station
Printer
Controller
Keyboard-Printer
3601
3602
3603
3604
3606
3608
3610
3611
3612
3614
3615
361 6
361 8
3624
Finance Communication Controller
Finance Communication Controller
Terminal Attachment Unit
Keyboard Display
Financial Services Terminal
Printing Financial Services Terminal
Document Printer
Passbook Printer
Passbook and Document Printer
Consumer Transaction Facility
Administrative Terminal Printer
Passbook and Document Printer
Administrative Line Printer
Consumer Transaction Facility
INFORMATION SYSTEM (8100)
2741
3276
3277
3278
3284
3286
3287
3288
3289
3601
3602
3631
3632
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3767
3842
8101
8130
8140
8775
8809
Communications Terminal
Control Unit Display Station Mdl 11-14
Display Station
Display Station
Printer Modell, 2
Printer Modell, 2
Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Finance Communication Controller
Finance Communication Controller
Plant Communications Controller
Plant Communications Controller
Reporting Terminal
Encoder Printer
Keyboard Display
Automatic Data Unit
Printer
Scanner Control
Communication Terminal
Loop Control Unit
Storage and I/O Unit
Processor
Processor
Display Terminal
Magnetic Tape Unit
INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM (3270)
3271
3272
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3284
3286
3287
3288
3289
Control Unit
Control Unit
Control Unit
Display Station
Control Unit Display Station
Display Station
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
MODEMS
3872 Modem
3874 Modem
3875 Modem
OPTICAL MARK READERS
1230 Optical Mark Scoring Reader
1232 Optical Mark Page Reader
PLANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3630)
3631
3632
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3842
Plant Communication Controller
Plant Communication Controller
Reporting Terminal
Encoder Printer
Keyboard Display
Automatic Data Unit
Printer
Scanner Control
Time and Attendance Terminal
Loop Control Unit
PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM (3650)
3275
3284
3651
3653
3657
3659
3663
3666
3667
3669
3784
Display Station Model 3
Printer Model 3
Store Controller Model 25/75
Point of Sale Terminal
Ticket Unit
Store Communications Unit
Supermarket Terminal Mdl 1P, 2, 3P
Checkout Scanner
Checkout Scanner
Store Communications Unit
Printer
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
3275
3284
3651
3653
3657
3659
3784
Display Station Model 3
Printer Model 3
Store Controller Model 50
Point of Sale Terminal
Ticket Unit
Remote Communications Unit
Line Printer
SUPERMARKET SYSTEM (3660)
3651
3661
3663
3666
3669
Store Controller Model 60
Store Controller
Supermarket Terminal Mdl 1, 2, 3
Checkout Scanner
Store Communications Unit
PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM (3680)
3683 Point of Sale Terminal
3684 Point of Sale - Control Unit
PUNCHED CARD EQUIPMENT
KEYPUNCHES
5496 Data Recorder
OPTICAL READER CARD PUNCH
1 282 Optical Reader Card Punch
---- -
----- ----------_ .. --
--
M4
~V79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
PROCESSORS
3031
3032
3033
3115
Processor
Processor
Processor
Processing Unit
",?,; PmcARRlna Unit
3135 Processllll! Unit
3138 Processing Unit
3145 Processing Unit
3148 Processing Unit
3158 Processinll Unit
3168 Processing Unit
4331 Processor
4341 Processor
8130/8140 Processor
5010 Processor Module
PROCESSOR EXTENSION
3052
3058
3062
3068
3838
8101
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
3032
3033
4300 Processor
4331
4341
8100
S/7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
3032
3033
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
434'
8100
S!7
X
X
Attached Processlna Unit
MultisYstem Unit
Attached Processing Unit
Multisystem Communication Unit
Array Processor
Storalle and InDut/OutDut Unit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PROCESSOR STORAGE
3345 Main Stora e Frame
CONSOLE UNITS
2250
3036
3056
3066
3210
3210
3213
3215
3270
3278
5213
mdll
Dlsolav Unit
Console
Remote System Console
System Console - mdl 2 3
Console Prlnter-Kevboard
mdll
Console Prlnter-K!!Yboard
mdl 2
Console Printer
Console Printer-Kevboard
Units (see Systems oaoesl
Display Printer - mdl 2A
Printer -- mdl 1
DATA CHANNEL UNITS
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
3032
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
8100
S/7
8100
S!7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S 370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
2860 Selector Channel
2870 Multiplexer Channel
2880 Block Multiplexer Channel
X
X
3032
3033
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
x -- Attachment is made by standard equipment.
•• Through 2150 only.
tt Not S/370 mdl 145-3.
Not to ~e reproduced without written permission,
--------
=
- =-=:5?
----==
M5
May 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
INPUT /OUPUT UNITS (Including control units)
4300 Proc8aaor
4331
4 4
AUDIO RESPONSE UNITS
x
7770 Audio Res onse Unit
CARD READERS/PUNCHES
1442
1442
2601
2520
2520
2640
2680
2560
2821
2821
2821
3504
3505
3625
5424
6425
5496
115 125 135 13
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Card Reader Punch - mdl Nl
Card Punch - mdl N2
Card Reader - mdl Bl B2
Card Read Punch - mdl Bl
Card Punch -- mdl B2 B3
Card Read Punch
Multi-function Card Mach - AI
Multi-function Card Mach - A2
Control Unit - mdl 1 5
Control Unit - mdl 4
Control Unit - mdl 6
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Punch
Mult Function Card Unit .
Multi-function Card Unit
Dala Recorder
3032 3033
4300 Proc8aaor
4341
4331
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8100
8/7
8100
8/7
tt
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
13
X
3791 Controller
X
X
8370
116 126 135 138 146 148 16B 188 3031
COMMUNICA TIONS TERMINALS
2740
2741
3736
3767
3771
3774
3775
377B
3777
3780
5/370'
145 14 158 168 3031
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Communications Terminal
Communications Terminal
Proarammable Buffered Termll1al
Communication Terminal
Communlcallon Terminal
Communication Terminal - PI P2
Communication Terminal - PI
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Data Communications Terminal
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5 370
115 1 5 135 13B 145 148 158 16B 3031
DATA ADAPTER UNITS
3032 13033
X
X
-X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
4300 Proces8or
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
8100
6028 Enclosure
X
DATA TRANSMISSION MULTlPLXR
2701
2711
3704
3106
Data AdaDter Unit
Line AdaDter Unit
Communications Controller
Communlcallons Controller
8/7
5/370
115 125 135 13B 145 148 158 lSB 3031
X
X
X
X
1
1
11
11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8100
5/7
X
X
(I) See tile .3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming pagel for pouible
restnchons to any of the above attachments.
tt Not 145-3 models.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------
M6
May 79
~ .=-:':5~5: OP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
D/SPLA Y UNITS
2250
2798
2840
3271
3272
3274
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3284
3286
3287
3288
3289
8775
Display Unit mdll 3
Guidance DlsIlIl!Y Unit
Dlspl'~ Control
Control Unit
Control Unit
Control Unit - mdl 1 A lB
Control Unit mdl lC
Display Station
Control Unit Display Station
Display Station
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
DlsDlay Terminal
DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
1316 Disk Pack
2316 Disk Pack
3310 Direct Access Storaae
3330 Disk Storaae -- mdl 1 2
3330 Disk Storaoe - mdl 11
3333 Disk Storaae and Control -- mdl 1
3333 Disk Storaoe and Control
mdlll
3336 Disk Pack
3340 Disk Storaoe and Control
3344 Rlrect Access Storaoe
3348 Data Module
3350 Direct Acces Storaoe
3370 Direct Access StorMl!>
3830 Storage Control -- mdl 2
3830 Storage Control - mdl 3
"
3851 Mass Storage Facility
3880 Storage Control
5022 Disk Storaoe Module
5440 Disk Cartridge
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
4300 Processor
4341
4331
X
X
8100
S/7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8100
S/7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
'X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DISKETTE INPUT/OUTPUT UNIT
3540 Diskette In ut Out ut Unit
DRUM/FIXED HEAD STORAGES
2305
2305
2835
2835
Fixed Head Storaoe Fixed Head Storaoe -Storaoe Control -- mdl
Storaoe Control -- mdl
S 370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
mdl 1
mdl 2
1
2
MAGNETIC CHARACTER READERS
1255 Maanetlc Character Reader
1419 Magnetic Character Reader
3890 Document Processor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
8100
S/7
8100
5/7
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
4300 Processor
4341
4331
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M7
Mav 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
2401
2401
2415
2420
2803
2804
2816
3410
3411
3420
3420
3420
3803
3803
8809
Magnetic Taoe Unit -- mdl 1 2 3
Mao. Taoe Unit -- mdl 4 5 6 8
M'llLnetic Taoe Unit and Cntrt
MaDnetic Taoe Unit -- mdl 5 7
Taoe Control
Taoe Controt
Switchinlt Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit and Cntrl
Magnetic Tape Unit -- 3 5
Magnetic Tape Unit -- mdt 7
Magnetic Tape Unit -- mdl 4 6 8
Tape Controt -- mdl 1 2
Tape Control -- mdl 3
Magnetic Tape Unit
OPTICAL READERS
1287
1287
1288
3881
3886
Ooticat
Ootical
Optical
Opticat
Optical
Reader -- mdl 1 3
Reader -- mdl 5
PaDe Reader
Mark Reader
Character Reader
PAPER TAPE UNITS
2671 Paper Tape Reader
2822 Paoer Taoe Reader Control
5028 Ooerator Station
PRINTERS
1403
1404
1416
1443
1445
Printer -- mdl 2 7 Nl
Printer
Interchangeable Train Cartridae
Printer -- mdl Nl
Printer -- mdl Nl
2821 Control Unit -- mdl 1 2 3 5
2821
3203
3203
3203
3211
3216
3262
3287
3289
3289
3800
3811
5203
Control Unit -- mdl 4
Printer mdl 1 2
Printer mdl 4
Printer mdl 5
Printer
Interchangeable Train Cartridge
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer mdl 3
line Printer mdl 4
Printing Subsystem
Printing Control Unit
Printer
SL370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X'
X
8100
S/7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
3032
X
X
X
X
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
X
X
X
8100
5/7
8100
5/7
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
)(
SL370
115 1251135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X I X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
X
3033
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
8100
X
t
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
tt
t
t
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
• Model 4 only on 4331.
t Not 135-3 models.
tt Not 145-3 models.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
X
X
X
X
5/7
------ --,--
==-==~=
M8
May 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
PRINTER-KIrYBOARDS
3210
3210
3215
5028
Console Printer-Keyboard mdll
Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 2
Console Printer KeYboard
Ooeratdr Station
POWER UNITS
3017
3027
3037
3046
3047
3067
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Unit
& Coolant Dlst Unit
& Coolant Dist. Unit
Unit
Unit
& Coolant Dist Unit mdl 2 5
S1370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
3032
3033
4300 Proce""or
4331
4341
8100
5/7
X
X
X
X
X
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
3032
3033
4300 Processor
4331
4341
8100
5/7
4300 Processor
4331
4341
8100
5/7
X
X
X
X
X'
X
X
X
READER/INSCRIBER
3895 Document Reader Inscriber
SENSOR BASED MODULES
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
3032
3033
5012 Multifunction Module
5013 Digital Input/Output Module
5014 Analoa InDut Module
X
X
X
• Nat 3145-3 models.
•• Through 2150 only ... Not 3145-3 models.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- --- ------ ------_.------
M 9
Jul 79
OP Machines
LIST OF SPECIAL FEATURES/MODEL UPGRADES FOR PURCHASED MACHINES FOR WHICH THE REPLACED PARTS BECOME THE
PROPERTY OF IBM
Machine
Type
Special
Feature
Additions
3032
7850
3033
7850
3145
Model Conversions
From
To
'U4,6,8; or
'M4,6,8; or U12,16; M12,16; A12,16
'A4,6,8
GE
GFO
H
HG
I
3155
H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2
H2. HG2. 12, IH2, J2
H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2
12, IH2, J2
IH2, J2
2151
7220
3158-8
2151
7220
3165
7220
3168-3
7220
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
8101
A10
A11
A11. A13
A13
8130
A21
A22
A23
A22, A23, A24
A23, A24
A24
8140
A31
A32
A33
A41
A42
A43
A51
A52
A53
A32,
A33,
A34
A42,
A43,
A44
A52,
A53,
A54
A33, A34
A34
A43, A44
A44
A53, A54
A54
A31 thru A38
A32 thru A38
A33 thru A38
A34 thru A38
A35 thru A38
A36 thru A38
A37, A38
A38
M31 thru M38
M32 thru M38
M33 thru M38
M34 thru M38
M35 thru M38
M36 thru M38
M37, M38
M38
3344
B2
B2F
3350
A2
B2
C2
A2F
B2F
C2F
3601
2A
2B
3A
2B, 3A, 3B
3B
3B
1B
3602
1A
3631
1A
1B
3632
1A
1B
3651
A25
B25
A50
A60
A50
B50
A60
B60
A75
C75
B25, A75, B75
B75
B50
B60
A75, B75
B75
A75, B75
B75
B75
075
3653
1P
3661
2
3880
1
3
3684
1P
3P
2
3776
1
2
3
2, 3, 4
4
4
3777
1
2
2, 3
3
3220
3221
1A
1B
2151
2
3803
3830-1, 2
Model Conversions
From
To
Conversion to 1 65 II
3168
3791
Special
Feature
Additions
Conversion to 1 55 II
3158
3663
Machine
Type
2
3
• Single dense storage technology models (U4, U6, U8; M4, M6, M8; A4, A6, A8).
NOTE: This list does not include standard machine types below 3000, RPQ machine types, special feature or model conversion RPQs, or
GSO "Exclusive" machines.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ---- --------
- - - --___
0- - -----
M 10
Jul 79
DP Machines
LIST OF NON-FIELD INSTALLABLE SPECIAL FEATURES/MODEL CONVERSIONS
SPECIAL FEATURES
SPECIAL FEATURES
MODEL CONVERSIONS
Not Recommended
for Field
Installation
Not RecAt Time of
om mended
Manufacture lor Field
Only
Installation
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
Machine
TypeModel
357
1450
All
3066-3
372
7578
7127
7128
7129
3067-1
4520
7117
7118
7119
3067-2
4525
7127
7128
7129
3067-3
4525
7127
7128
7129
3067-5
4525
Machine
TypeModel
Not Recommended
for Field
Installation
729
803
1001
1031
1222
All
All
1032
1033
9509
1201
1231
All
1255
1287
1288
5370
5370
1401
1403
5381
1419
1442
1443
All
3115-2
3610
3791
3795
3145
4650
3145-2 to
3145-0
3145-3
4650
5567
5568
5569
3158-3
3145-3 to
3145-2
3158-3 to
3158
All
All
2305
2401
2402
3168
2403
2415
3168-3
2420
2501
All
2740
4151
1575
3210
7695
7696
3401
3402
3271-11,12
All
All
2803
2804
8100
2821
7945
8100
All
All
2835
All
2860
All
2880
All
4525
4520
7117
7118
7119
3066-2
4525
7127
7128
7129
3168-3 to
3168
4525
7127
7128
'1129
3274
3275-2
1 to 2
2 to 1
1200
8801
3440
3275-3
2791
2792
3066-1
4520
7117
7118
7119
4525
7127
7128
7129
3203
2560
2701
3062
3165
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
3115-2 to
3115-0
3135-3 to
3135
3135-3
2250
2520
2540
MODEL CONVERSIONS
Not ReeAt Time of
ommended
Manufacture lor Field
Only
Installation
3275-12
3276
All
1200
1068
3277
3278-2A
All
4631
4632
4633
4634
2A
3284
3286
3289
3310
3330
3340
All
3345
3350
3360
All
"
"
• See applicable machine page for model conversion/feature restrictions.
NOTE: This list does not include GSD "Exclusive" machines or RPQ machines,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ------------ -------
M 11
Jul79
DP Machines
LIST OF NON-FIELD INSTALLABLE SPECIAL FEATURES/MODEL CONVERSIONS
SPECIAL FEATURES
Machine
TypeMOdel
NotRecommended
for Field
Installation
3370
3420-3,5,7
3504
3505
3525
3601
3602
MODEL CONVERSIONS
Not RacAt Time of
ommended
Manufacture for Field
Only
Instsllatlon
SPECIAL FEATURES
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
Machine
TypeModel
All
3762
3767
3771
3773
1010
1011
3603
6352
3604-1
4661
4663
3604-2,3,4 4771
4772
4773
4774
3604-5,6
3774
3604-7
3606
3608
3610-1,2,3
3632
3641
All, except
5 to 6
All
All
All
6900
6901
6903
6904
6900
6901
6903
6904
3776
3777
3782
3791
3803
3830
3845
3846
3872
3881
5424
5496
All
All
All
3602
6510
3666
All
7801
7850
All
All
8701
3550
3860
6301"
6302"
7820"
7950
1010
1011
5781
5801
5802
All
4652
4653
All
All
4772
4774
1501
3850
All
4990
All
3425
3451
5330
6660
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
1201
1201
1201
4660
1201
4660
1201
3551
4660
1201
1201
All
3647
3741
3760
5 to 6
All
3642
3643
3651
3653
3659
3663
All
5454
6900
6901
6903
6904
3612
3775
All
All
3610-4
3611
3624
All
MODEL CONVERSIONS
Not RecAt Time of
ommended
Manufacture for Field
Only
Installation
1310
3805
4660
5100
3550
6407
3921
3921
1421
3614
3615
3616
3618
Not Racommended
for Field
Installation
All
" See applicable machine page for model conversion/feature restrictions.
NOTE: This list does not include GSD "Exclusive" machines or RPQ machines.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
[rever~e
side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ------ -=
-= - =
----':' =
M 357 - 361
May 79
DP Machines
358 INPUT CONTROL UNIT
357 INPUT STATION
[The 357 Models 4, 5 and 6 are no longer
available]
Purpose: Badge and/or serial card reader input unit for a 357
Data Collection System.
Model 4 -- a badge reader which operates as an independent
input station. Reads identification badges (size of a 22-column
stub card) p'repunched in IBM code with a maximum of ten
numeric digits. Badges, which are punched on a 13 Badge
Punch, are inserted and removed manually. Badge read-out is
automatic with insertion of badge. See Manual GA21-9028 for
badge specifications. Badges can be purchased from outside
vendors or produced with commercially available laminating
equipment.
Model 5 -- a serial -card reader. Standard unscored 80-column
cards are inserted and removed manually, one at a time. Reads
numbers, letters, IBM special characters, and instruction codes.
Blank columns are not recognized and are automatically
skipped over. Provision is made for 'attaching a 372 Manual
Entry or 374 Cartridge Reader.
Model 6 -- a combination serial card reader and badge reader.
Information pertaining to mdls 4 and 5 applies to mdl 6. This
model, in conjunction with a 372 Or 374, provides a means of
loading the station with variable source data as well as fixed
employee and job data prior to transmission to the output unit.
An instruction code in the card shifts transmission of data from
card to badge. A separate column must be used in the card
being read for each column of the badge which is to be read
out, unless Badge Read-out (#1450), a special feature, is
installed. See Manual GA21-9028 for badge specifications.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
PREREQUISITE: A 358 Input Control Unit ... each 358 controls up
to twenty 357s, in any combination of models.
Badge Gau~e: Available at no charge for use with mdls 4 and 6
to check width and thickness of badges ...
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
[The 358 Modell
is no longer available]
Purpose: Links up to twenty 357 Input Stations with one 24/26'
Card Punch in a 357 Data Collection System.
Highlights: Analyzes instruction codes in input cards and controls
card reading. Instruction codes are wired through a transaction
selector in the 358 to format control. Data, in the form of DC
pulses, is transmitted over multi-conductor cable and punched at
the rate of approximately 18 characters/second on the 26, or 20
characters/second on the 24.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
SPECIFY: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz):
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES:
Mdl
358
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Index,"
#9880 for
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 86
$2,450
$ 25
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
360 CLOCK READ-OUT CONTROL
[The 360 Modell
is no longer available]
Purpose: Controls read-out of time from a 361 Read-out Clock to
up to thirty-five card punches in a 357 Data Collection System ...
see "Limitation" below.
Highlights: Has connections for two 361s ... a toggle switch
permits switching from one clock to the other.
Limitation: Time can be provided for simultaneous output to up to
ten 24/26's ... for applications such as attendance recording, a
360 and 361 are required for each group of ten 24/26's which
may simultaneously call for time.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PREREQUISITE:
Punch.
Clock Read-in (#1945) on the 24/26' Card
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
PRICES:
357
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
4
$ 39
$ 884
5
6
46
63
1,155
1,505
$ 4.00
13.00
18.00
[2] Cable: #9081 for direct connection to a single output punch,
or #9082 for connection to multiple punches via a common line
... see Physical Planning Manual GA24-1032.
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: C
Per Call:l
SPECIAL FEATURES
PRICES:
Mdl
360
BADGE READ-OUT (#1450). [Model 6 only] [Plant installation
only] Enables the mdl 6 to read a badge only. When both a card
and a badge are to be read, a single instruction code in the card
shifts transmission to the badge reader for automatic read-out of
the badge. Patch panel wiring in the mdl 6 controls read-out. A
"Badge" position on the mode switch provides automatic badge
read-out upon insertion of a badge.
CONTROLLED RESET (#2287). [Model 5, 6 only] Manually
operated switch in non-reset position permits retention for
re-~eading of any fixed combination of the badge, 372 Manual
Entry setting, or the data cartridge. Operator set-up time at a
terminal is reduced when entering a .series of transactions with
common data in the manual entry, data cartridge and/or badge.
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 54
$1,675
$3.50
Purchase Option: 60%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
361 READ-OUT CLOCK
[The 361
Modell
is no longer available]
Purpose: Provides a means of punching time in output cards In a
357 Data Collection System.
Highlights: Time is read out as four digits ... hours (0-23) and
nearest hundreths of hours.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Badge Read-out
Controlled Reset
#1450
2287
$ 5 $ 238
295
FIC
$2.00 PO
NC$32
PREREQUISITE: A 360 Clock Read-out Control and Clock Read-in
(#1945) on the 24/26' Card Punch.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
PRICES:
361
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1
$ 41
$1,345
$ 3
Plan Offering: Plan 6
Warranty: B
• The 24 and 26 are GSD Machines.
Not to be re.produced without wriUenpermission.
Purchase Option: 60%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
----------==-- =.:
-----== ';' ==
M 372 - 374
May 79
DP Machines
373 PUNCH SWITCH
372 MANUAL ENTRY
[The 372 Models 1, 2 and 3 are no longer
available]
Purpose: For manual entry of data for transmission in a 357 Data
Collection System.
Model 1
Has six slides.
Model 2
Has nine slides.
Model 3
Has twelve slides.
Model Changes; If Supervisor Key (#7578) is not installed,
changes can be made from mdl 1 to 2 or 3, or mdl 2 to 3.
Highlights: Has up to twelve numeric slides, each with eleven
character positions (0-9 and blank), which can be individually
labeled. Slides may be locked in any desired position, or may
restore to blank after each transmission. CE can wire any or all of
the slides to read out zero from the blank position ... to change all
positions to read out zero from the blllnk position, no additional
parts are required ... to change any other number of positions,
Part No. 765993, Jumper Assembly, must be ordered
a
no-charge
Slides are coded for individual read-out under card read control.
The high order code position is on the left. Model 1 has six
lefi-hand positions blanked out and the six right hand slides are
coded 6 thru 1 ... model 2 is similar with the three left hand
positions blanked out and the slide positions coded 9 thru 1
model 3 is coded 1 2 thru 1.
[The 373 Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose: For automatic switching to a second output punch in a
357 Data Collection System.
Highlights: Provides automatic switching to a second back-up
punch if the first fails to duplicate, jams, or runs out of cards.
Either or both punches may be placed on offline mode for use as
a regular card punch by placing the "Auto" switch to
"Keypunch."'
PREREQUISITES: Two output punches per system ... 24/26 mdls
7 or 8, each with Punch Switch Control (#5930) ... see 26.
Manuals:
See
G320-1621
'·IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: If old-style Elco (rectangular) connector on 358, order
Adapter Cable Assembly, 765183,
no-charge
.
. . . . if old-style Elco (rectangular)
connector on punch cable and an adapter cable which provides
a round Cannon connector is not available, order Adapter CablA
no-charge
Assembly, 765181,
PRICES:
Mdl
373
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$30
$ 859
$ .75
Purchase Option: 65%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
Limitation; Either a 372 or a 374 Cartridge Reader can be
attached to a 357 mdl 5 or 6, not both.
PREREQUISITE: Each 372 requires a 357 mdl 5 or 6.
Manuals:
See"IBM
G320-1621.
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: Colo": #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for
blue, or #9045 for gray.
PRICES:
Mdl
372
1
2
3
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
$ 15
18
21
Purchase
$
MMMC
520
$1.00
607
694
1.50
1.50
Purchase Option: 60%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
SUPERVISOR KEY (#7578). Replaces left hand slide on mdl 1, ·2
or 3 with a key-operated switch which provides a controlled ability
to insert a specific authorizing digit in the output card for a
transaction. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Supervisor Key
#7578
NC
NC
NC
374 CARTRIDGE READER
[The 374 Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose:
System.
Data cartridge input. unit for a 357 Data Collection
Highlights: The IBM Data Cartridge permits the user to pre-set up
to 12 positions of variable numeric data at his regular work station
... use is applicable primarily where variable numeric data must be
entered into the system at a peak period. Throughput and
accuracy in the 357 Input Station are increased and employee
waiting time is reduced.
The cartridge is manually inserted and removed from the reader,
which is cable-connected (3-1/2 feet) to and wall mounted to the
right of the 357.
For use with 357 mdl 5 or 6, the cartridge is read out by the card
in the same manner as the 372.
One data cartridge is supplied with each 374 ...
FIC
PREREQUISITE: Each 374 requires a 357 mdl 5 or 6,
PO
Limitation: Either a 374 or a 372 Manual Entry can be attached
to a 357 mdl 5 or 6, but not both ... however, 3725 and 3745 can
be interchanged on a terminal without requiring changes in the
output card of the output program.
Manuals:
See
G320-1621.
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for
blue, or #9045 for gray.
PRICES:
Mdl
374
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 21
$
637
$ 1.50
Purchase Option: 60%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
M 729
May 79
DP Machin..
729 II/IV/V/VI MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
[No longer available]
Charac:ten a Second
Recording Denllty (CPI)
Model
72911
15,000/41,700
200/556
729 IV
22,500/62,500
200/556
15,000/41,700/60,000 200/556/800
729 V
22,500/62,500/90,000 200/556/800
729 VI
Modll Chang..: 729 118 can be changed to 729 V8, or 729 IV8 to
729 V18.
The following speclflcatlon8 can be changed In the field:
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz): #1103 for 208 V, or #1805 for
230 V (mu8t be con818tent with 8Y8tem voltage). '
[2] Color: #1041 for red, #1042 for yellow, #1043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following 8peclal feature 18 on an " .. available" basl8 for field
In8tallatlon.
TAPE SWITCHING FEATURE (#7830). Modlfle8 the tape unit so
that It can be logically 8w1tched between any two tape channel8 to
which It 18 normally attached. Switching can be between two
channel8 In the ssme 8Y8tem, channel8 of any two 8Y8tem8 which
use 729 II/IV/V/Vls, or a system channel and an offline auxiliary
unit. [Caution: Care should be exercised In connection with den81ty
compatibility between channel8, or the 8Y8tem channel and the
offline unit.] Two add'i signal cable connectors, 8wltchlng relays, a
control cable connector and 50' of control cable are provided for
attachment to the 7155. Advantage8 are:
Less tape unit set-up
time ... [2] Less tape reel handling time •.• 3] Permits scheduling
of peak load use of tape units ... [4] Possible reduction of tape
units required In an Installation. See Manual GG22-6587 for details. Prerequillte: A 7155 Switch Control Console or 7711 Oats
Communication Unit.
- FI'p ••
MAC/MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 1 yr. 2 yn Purc:hue MMMC FIC
[ll
Tape Switch Feature
#7830 $ 91
$ 84
$ 76 54,070
$9.00
$106
• FI'P - 12·23 months.
[reverse ..de 18 blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without wriHen permission.
--------- ------------------
M 803
May 79
DP Machines
803 PROOF MACHINE
Note: The 802 Proof Machine is no longer available ... for
models changes and special features, see below.
Purpose: The 803 Proof Machine is used to simultaneously list,
sort and prove business documents.
Model 1
Endorsing ... 32 compartments and keys.
Model 2
No endorsing ... 32 compartments and keys.
Model 3
Endorsing ... 24 compartments and keys.
Model 4
No endorsing ... 24 compartments and keys.
Note: Models 3 and 4 are capacity reduced from models
and 2 by rendering compartments 25 thru 32 inoperative.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field ... except from a 24
compartment machine to a 32 compartment machine.
Note: 802 models changes may be made in the field.
Highlights: Each sorting receptacle can hold approximately 150
documents (5/8" to 21/32"). Documents within the following
dimensions can be fed: Width -- 2-1/4" to 4-1/4" ... length -4" to 9-1/2" ... Thickness - cannot exceed 3/32". The cycling
speed, fully-electric adding keyboard, repeat key, and other
operating features permit continuous high-speed operation.
Amounts are simultaneously listed on both the control tape and
one of the compartment tapes and accumulated in the grand,
group and compartment total counters. All items, together with
their identifying distribution numbers, are listed on a control tape.
Up to 9-digit amounts can be entered through the adding keyboard
for listing.
Each total counter has a printing capacity of 10 digits.
Progressive totals (sub-totals) can be obtained on all counters and
For subtraction, the
printed with an identifying symbol.
complement of the amount to be subtracted is entered on the
adding keyboard and the "Subtract" key is depressed. 9s are
then automatically printed to the left of the amount. . On total
accumulation and printing, the tenth position is not lost even
though subtraction is by complementary addition.
Standard Features -- Control Panel with Non-feed Lock
Suppression, Multiple Entry, Endorse Suppression (mdls " 3),
Group Balancing, Group Balance Compartment Add ... Amount
Clearance Lever ... Repeat, Multiple Entry, Auxiliary Credit, Adding
Machine, Non-add C, Non-add C and C, Key Release, Subtraction,
Grand Total, Group Total, Compartment Total, and Progressive
Total Keys ... Ready, Add Key Depression, Near Depletion of
Listing Tape, Non-endorse (mdls " 3), Non-feed, Full Pocket,
Improper Feeding, and Non-balance Condition when Group
Balancing Signals ... Switches -- for control of credit feeding and
by-passing of automatic group balance totals for single machine
cycle ." Paper Clip Receptacle ... Selected Compartment Indicator
... Ticket Tray... two 5-position Transaction Counters ...
Upholstered Arm Rest ... Work Tray.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC I
MRC
Purchase
803
1
2
3t
4t
$205
193
167
156
$9,000
8,480
7,345
6,805
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Manuals -- see
G320-1621.
SPECIAL FEATURES
NOTE: The following 803 feature can also be ordered for field
installation on installed 802 Proof Machines.
MULTIPLE CREDIT (#5245). To simplify processing of multiple
credit transactions under control of automatic group processing ..
can also be used where single item deposits are processed in
batches. A total can be obtained for a group of debits and
balanced against a group total of the related credits. A "Multiple
Credit" key replaces the standard" Auxiliary Credit" key. Prior to
taking a group total of debit items, the "Group Balance By-pass"
switch and "Multiple Credit" key are depressed, in that order.
Any number of credit items can then be distibuted without
depressing the by-pass switch before recording each transaction.
The multiple credit key remains depressed until the by-passed
debit total is entered on the keyboard and a group balance
operation is performed. Limitation: Cannot be installed if Disabling
Clamp (#9122) for Auxiliary Credit Key is installed.
Special Feature Prices: (803)
Multiple Credit
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
MAC/
MRC
#5245 $ 4
Purchase MMMC
FIC
$ 257
$19
$ 2.50
Accessories -- The following items are available on a purchase
only basis for the 803. For shipment with machine, order the
desired Feature # indicated below at the price listed in M 10000
pages.
Endorser Plate (#3792) -- 803 mdls 1 and 3 only.
Blank Endorser Plate (#3793) -- 803 mdls 1 and 3 only.
illuminating Lamp (#4610) -- 803, all mdls.
Note: When ordering #3792, it is recommended that at least
one spare plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately
replaced.
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering instuctions and field
installation.
For the 802, #3792 is available for field installation on mdl 1 ...
#4610 is available for field installation on all mdls.
endorsing ink roll, paper and
"IBM
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
t Prices for 802 mdl 1 are Rental -- $120, Purchase - $7,785
and MMMC --$73.50 ... prices for 802 mdl 2 are Rental $110, Purchase - $7,215 and MMMC - $66.00.
Endorsln9 -- mdls 1 and 3 can endorse documents with date,
identification numbers, and bank's legal endorsement. The
Endorser Plate is made to the customer's speCifications. See
"Accessories" below. A Blank Endorser Plate is also available if
only partial endorsements are required. When ordering #3792
attach Endorser Plate Specification
... not required
for #3793.
Supplies
ribbon supplies.
Purchase Option: 35%
MMMC
$108.00
99.50
89.50
80.50
Index,"
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug - #9880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V.
[2] Endorsing (mdls 1, 3 only): See "Endorsing" above.
[3] Disabling Clamps: If required to prevent depression of the
following key(s) - #9120 for Subtract Key, #9121 for Repeat
Key, #9122 for Auxiliary Credit Key. Limitation: #9122
cannot be installed with Multiple Credit (#5245).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -------== =-=:: ';' ==
M 1001 - 1026
May 79
DP Machines
1001 DATA TRANSMISSION TERMINAL
Purpose: Combination punched card and keyboard unit for direct
transmission to a 26' Card Punch mdl 5 or 6, or to a 7770 Audio
Response Unit.
'
Highlights: Has a 10-digit keyboard and a card carriage with a
fixed 80, 51 or 22-column feed. First 22 columns of prepunched
data can be read from each card. To transmit data from a card,
operator inserts card in carriage, face down, column 80 first,
moves carriage to the left until it strikes carriage stop and releases it. As carriage returns to right hand position, first 22 columns
of card are read serially from column 1 to 22. Limitations: Field
skipping is not possible ... columns 23 and 24 must be unpunched.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ALPHABETIC TRANSMIT (#1222). [Plant installation only] To
transmit 26 alphabetic characters and three special characters
("12", "II" and "0-1"), as well as the standard 10 digits, from
first 36 columns of each prepunched card. In transmitting to a 26,
if a "space" is preferred to the "0-1" punch at the 26, order
Space Code Generation (#7244) for the 26. Limitations: Operates only with an 80 or 51-column feed ... 22-column stub cards
cannot be processed ... columns 37 and 38 in cards to be transmitted must be left unpunched (in lieu of columns 23 and 24 left
blank when this feature is not installed) .,. field skipping is not
possible.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
Alphabetic Transmit
#1222 $ 8
Purchase MMMC
FIC
# 281
PO
$ .75
Variable numeric data is entered via the keyboard ... additional
function keys control the receiving unit. The 80-column card in a
26 mdl 5 or 6 can accept up to 80 columns of transmitted data.
When equipped with Alphabetic Transmit (#1222), the 1001 can
transmit alphameric data to a 26 equipped with Alphabetic Receive
(#1221) ... see "Special Features" below and under 26. When
# 1221 is installed on a 26, numeric 1001 s can be used only if
they use alphabetic transmitting data sets, or if the 26 is equipped
with Intermix (#4702).
The unit weights only 21 pounds. It is cable-connected to the
telephone hand set, from which it obtains its power. Its size, 181/2" x 8" x 5", makes it a convenient desk or table top unit.
Communication Facilities: The 1001 transmits at a rate of 12
characters/second over common carrier leased private line telephone service, common carrier switched telephone networks, or
privately owned voice grade facilities. Connection from the 1001
to the output unit is set up by normal telephone dialing.
Port-A-Punch@ Cards: Column 80 of card cannot be part of a
Port-A-Punch field ... a maximum of 11 Port-A-Punch columns can
be read on a numeric 1001; a maximum of 18 if Alphabetic Transmit (#1222) is installed ... no punching is allowed in the columns
adjacent to the Port-A-Punch columns ... the columns to be read
can vary in number within the maximums, but must be adjacent ...
on a numeric 1001, column 24 cannot be punched; with #1222,
column 38 cannot be punched. Care should be exercised in handling and inserting Port-A-Punch cards so that chads will not be
loosened.
Limitations: The standard machine feeds only standard punched
card stock ... Aqua Cards or other special cards (except Port-APunch) cannot be fed by either feed.
Environment: The unit should be located in an area free of significant abrasive, corrosive and vibration producing elements. It
should not be subjected to temperatures beyond the range of 40 0
to 120 0 F, or relative humidities of 20% to 85% ... where no cards
are used, humidities to 95% are allowable. For best transmitting
results, it is recommended that the unit be located in an area free
of background noise.
Manuals: See "18M Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
SPECIFY: [1] Feed: #9181 for 80-column, #9183 for 51-column,
or #9184 for 22-column. #9181 can be changed to #9183,
or vice versa, in the field.
[2J Ouptut Unit: #9470 if transmission is to a 26, or #9471 if
transmission is to a 7770.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
1001
1
$ 16
$ 455
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
MMMC
$ 4
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
1026 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
[No longer available]
The following specifications can be changed in the field:
[1] Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
The following special features are on an "as available" basis for
field installation:
ADDITIONAL LINE FEATURE (#1058). Required on each 1026
attached to a system after the first 1026. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Expanded Line Feature (#3937) on the
first 1026 attached to the system.
AUTOMATIC ANSWERING (#1286). Provides the 1026 with the
ability to automatically answer incoming calls initiated by remote
1050s over common carrier switched (dial-up) facilities ... the line
must be equipped with an appropriate data set. Maximum: One.
AUTOMATIC CALLING (#1304). Provides the 1026 with the
ability to automatically initiate outgoing calls to remote 1050s over
common carrier switched telephone and 150 baud TWX facilities
... the line must be equipped with an appropriate data set and
Maximum: One.
automatic calling unit.
Prerequisite: Automatic Answering (#1286).
EXPANDED LINE FEATURE (#3837). Provides controls on the
first 1026 attached to the system for attachment of up to three
additional 1026s and/or a 1032 Digital Time Unit. Maximum:
One, on first 1026 only.
FIXED TIME-OUT (#4415). Provides for a transmission delay of
approximately 1 second following the transmission of either a
Horizontal Tab, or a New Line and Line Feed. Maximum: One.
Specify: One or both of the following -- #9340 for
Horizontal Tab .... #9485 for New Line and Line Feed.
LINE ADAPTER (#4790). For attachment of a communication line
that can be used for on-site 1030, 1050, 1060 or 1 07() terminals
for a distance up to 8 wire-miles. No common carrier data sets
are required. Line lengths for this feature will vary, depending
upon type of cable and configuration of system. Use of common
carrier channels also requires special considerations. For assistance with line configuration problems, consult Regional Physical
Planning Representatives. Maximum: One.
Specify: One of the following -- #9420 for use with 1030s,
#9421 for 1060s, #9422 for 1050s or 1071 mdl 1s, or #9423
for 1071 mdl2s.
Special Feature Prices:
Additional Line Fea
#1058
Automatic AnSWering
1286
Automatic Calling
1304
Expanded Line Feature 3837
Fixed Time-out
4415
Line Adapter
4790
MAC/
MRC
$5
10
41
5
5
10
• The 26 is a GSO machine.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$ 252
506
1,945
252
252
506
$.50
.50
.75
.50
.50
.50
FIC
$30
14
32
32
15
29
--- ----------==-= ':' =
--
M 1031
May 79
DP Machines
1031
UMITATIONS:
INPUT STATION
1031 mdt A.
Purpoee: Input station for a 1030 Data Collection System. Used to
transmit data at 60 cps from cards, badges, data cartridges or
manual entry to a 1026/1448 Transmlsalon Control Unit, 1034
Card Punch, 2025 Procesaing Unit with Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580), 3115 or 3125 Procesalng Unit with
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640), 2701 Data Adapter
Unit, 2702/2703 Transmlsalon Control, or 3704/3705 Communications Controller.
Model.:
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
card Input
card Input and manual entry
card and data cartridge input
card and badge input and manual entry
card, badge, and data cartridge Input
badge input
card and badge Input
Control
Station
Satellite
Station
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A8
A1
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
B8
B7
Model Chang. .: Cannot be made In the field.
Highlights: A compact industrial unit. Offers station set-up checking prior to communication line acknowledgement, ease of operation, installation and relocation. NOTE: Can be mounted on a wall
or a free standing pedestal. Wall brackets or pedestal are not
included In the unit's price. Pedestals are available from IBM
or outside vendors. See SRL GA24-3021 for
pedestal specifications.
1031 mdl As provide data transmisalon via 2-wire communication
lines and control 1031 mdl Bs and 1033 Printers attached to them
by multiwire cables. As far as the user is concerned, operation of
comparable A and B models are Identical. Depending upon the
model, the 1031 has one or more of the following means of Input
and standard features:
Card Raader - standard or Port-A-Punche prepunched 8Q-column
cards can be individually Inserted and removed manually. An
upper left corner cut Cl Is required. ~3, M4 and M5 scores can
be used. Numbers, letters and IBM special characters (see SRL
GA24-3018) are read. Blank card colum,ns are not recognized and
are automatically skipped.
Badge Reader - reads identification badges (22-column stub card
size) prepunched In IBM code with a maximum of ten digits. The
badges, which are punched on a 13 Badge Punch, are Inserted
and removed manually. Badges with or without a pocket clip can
be read. They can be purchased from outside vendors, or produced by commercially available equipment. See SRL GA21-9028
for badge specifications. NOTE: A badge gauge is provided at no
charge with each badge punch ... see 13 Badge Punch.
[11 Dislance - the maximum length of a customer-provided 2-wire
communication line is a function of the number of input stations,
line characteristics and network configuration. Approximate
limitations are up to 8 miles. A Common Carrier Adapter
(#2088), operating with external data sets, or an IBM Line
Adapter (#4647) permits transmission over greater distances
via a 4-wlre full duplex common carrier leased voice grade
channel. Detailed information on communication lines is contained in SRL GA24-3021. See the M 2700 pages for Information on communication facilities.
[21 The maximum number of 1031 As per 2-wire line Is ten.
[31 A maximum of eight 1031 Bs can be connected to a 1031 A.
[41 A maximum of twenty-four 1031s, mdl As and Bs combined,
can be attached to a 2-wlre line.
[51 Up to nine 1033s can be attached to a 1031 A equipped with
a 1033 Printer Attachment (# 1279) ... up to twenty-four 1033s
can be attached to one 2-wlre line. NOTE: Up to twenty-four
1033s, plus twenty-four 1031s can be attached to one Hne.
[81 When the line terminates in a 1034 Card Punch, 1033s cannot
be attached to the line.
[71 Either a 1033 Printer Attachment (#1279) or a Common Carrier Adapter (#2088) can be Installed on a 1031 A, not both.
1031 mell B.
[11 Maximum cable length (1031 B to 1031 A) Is 3,000 feet.
[21 A maximum of eight 1031 Bs can be attached to a 1031 A.
Environment: See 1030 in "Systems.. "
Manual.: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201821.
SPECIFY: [11 Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wlre, 80 Hz): #9880 for
115 V, locking plug, or #9881 for 115 V, non-lock plug.
[21 Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[31 Method of Installation: #9410 if junction box, or #9411 if
junction ,.poi!:,t. Cables or connectors will be shipped automatically
prior to SCheduled delivery. A 20",
2-wire main line signal cable Is shipped for a 1031 A. See
Physical Planning Manual GA24-3021.
PRICES:
MdI
1031
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A8
A7
Bl
B2
Manual Entry - a means of entering variable numeric source data
in addition to the fixed data entered by card and badge. Each of
the 12 slides has 11 character positions (0-9, and blank), and can
be Individually labeled. The slides restore to blank after each
correct transmission, or may be restored by depresalng the clear
button for operator or retransmlsaion error. Panel wiring provides
detection of columns set to blank for selected groups of slides.
B3
B4
B5
B8
Cartridge RNder - reads the data cartridge, a device which
provides for off-station entry of up to 12 positions of variable
numeric data. The cartridge Is Inserted and removed manually.
Cartridge slides retain their setting and are not restored by action
of the reader. Panel wiring provides detection of columns set to
blank for selected groups of slides.
B7
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
$108
135
120
151
135
108
125
54
81
Purcha..
MMMC
$4,540
5,585
4,870
8,220
5,510
4,540
$13.00
15.50
19.50
30.50
32.00
9.50
27.50
7;00
11,00
14.00
15.00
19.50
5.50
14.00
es
98
81
54
70
5,040
2,270
3,315
2,800
3,955
3,230
2,270
2,855
Purchase Option: 45%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
One data s;artrldge is furnished with each 1031 mdl A3, A5, B3,
B5 ... pocket size - 7-3/8" long, 3-1/4" deep, and 1/2" thick ...
used for setting up variable information away from the 1031,
reducing station set-up time and making the 1031 available to
more users In a given period.
additional cartridges,
.
ATTACHMENT, 1033 PRINTER (#1279). [Models A1 thru A7
only1 To control up to nine 1033 Printers bv one 1031 A. Includes
4' junction box cable or connector
•
as specified In "Method of Installation"
under "Specify" above.
Umltatlon: Cannot be
installed with Common Carrier Adapter (#2088).
Ught. - all models have appropriate Card, Badge, Manual Control, Repeat, and In-procesa Indicator lights.
Claar Button - on all models, ejects all cards, badges and data
cartridges and restores the manual entry and cartridge reader.
tcOMMON CARRIER ADAPTER (#2088). [Models Al thru A7 only1
Provides for long distance data transmlsaion via external data sets
over 4-wlre full duplex communication lines provided by common
carriers. Nota: Where multiple 1031 mdl As are to operate over a
4-wlre full duplex line, only one 1031 mdl A Is directly connected
to the external data set ... additional 1031 mdl As are connected
to the first 1031 mdl A, which Is Interfaced to the external data
set, via a 2-wlre communication line ... specifications for the
2-wlre line are contained In SRL GA24-3021. Limitation: Cannot
be Installed with 1033 Printer Attachment (#1279) or IBM Line
Adapter (#4647).
Specify: For cable assembly
from 1031 mdl A to common carrier data set - #9021 and quantity (length In feet ... maximum. 40).
Mode Switch - on mdls A2 thru A5, A7, B2 thru B5, B7, places
the 1031 in card, badge or manual control mode.
Set-up Instruction Reference - on mdls A2, A4, B2, B4, a thumb
knob and scroll which gives rapid reference to set-up Instructions.
Cu.tomer Responsibilities - see 1030 in "Systems."
PREREQUISITE:
line terminators will be
shipped from the plant
Line
terminators are provided to the customer at no charge. For guidance in determining the number of line terminators required, see
Physical Planning Manual, GA24-3021.
CONTROLLED RESET (#2290). [Models A2 thru A5, A7, B2 thru
B5, 87 only1 For operator switch control of badge, manu..1 entry,
or data cartridge retention for subsequent records.
t
For f'UrtIler iDformalioa on IBM Line AclaplCrl, '" M 2700 poaeo.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ---!
:=:.=-==
=_ = ':' =
-~-
M 1031 - H)32
DP Machines
1031 Input Station
(cont'd)
tlBM LINE ADAPTER (#4&47). [Models A1 thru A7 only] A modem
to allow the 1031 mdl A terminal to communicate over unlimited
distances with a 2702/2703 Transmission Control. 3704/3705
CommunicatiOns Controller, a 2025 with ICA (#4580) via a 2711
Line Adapter Unit, a 3115 or 3125 with ICA (#4640), or a 1034
Card Punch. This adapter uses 4-wire leased common carrier
private lines, or equivalent privately owned communication facilities. When Installed, the standard 2-wlre, 8 mile modem cannot be
used. For line specifications, see SRL GA24-3435··. Up to
twenty-four 1031 mdl As, each equipped with this feature, can be
multl-dropped on a line. Common carrier conSiderations, however,
will limit the size of the network. If a system with more than ten
points Is proposed, a service Inquiry to the common carrier must
be Initiated by the customar. LlmltaUon: Cannot be Installed with
Common Carrier Adapter (#2068).
Prerequillte:
An IBM line Adapter (#4647) on the 1034 or 2711.
INDIVIDUAL SLIDE LOCK (#4652). [Models A2, A4, B2, B4
only] A group of three slide controls ... for operator control of
individual manual entry slide reset. Maximum: Four groups.
INPUT EDIT LEVELS, ADD'L (#4854). [Models A2 thru A5, B2
thru B5 only] A group of four additional Input levels (E, F, G, H).
Input edit levels are used to select the proper Input device for a
given transaction, edit the Input before transmission, and select
the proper point for end-of-block code. LlmltaUon:· Cannot be
Installed with 1035 Attachment (#7961).
INQUIRY KEY (#4884). [Models A2 thru A7, B2 thru B7 only]
Permits authorized Inquiry to a system processor ... output Is via a
1033 Printer. One key Is provided .. ,
additional keys,
MONITOR KEY (#5140). [Models A2 thru A7, B2 thru 87 only]
Used where a supervisor's approval Is required before a record
additional keys,
can be transmitted. One key Is provided ...
1035 ATTACHMENT (#7881). To attach from one to four 1035
8adge Readers. Provides a means of scanning up to 30 columns
of I5adge punching and assigning badge reader Identification
characters. Includes a 4' cable for junction box connection to
1035s, shipped automatically
.
LlmltaUon.: Plant Installation only
on 1031 A models ... cannot be Installed with Add'i Input Edit
Levels (#4654) ... Installation of this feature Is Incompatible with
soma 1031 RPQs.
Prerequillt..: For 1031 A mdls - 10~5 Control (#7962) ... for
1031 B mdls - #7962 on the controlling 1031 mdl A.
1035 CONTROL (#7882). [Models A1 thru A7 only] Required on
a 1031 mdl A to Install a 1035 Attachment (#7961) on the 1031
mdl A Itself, or on any 1031 mdl Bs controlled by the 1031 mdl A.
The feature detects any blanks and Invalid data transmitted from
badge readers and controls operation- of Repeat lights for the
1035s.
Special Future Prices:
#1279
Attach, 1033 PrInter
Common Carrier Adapt 2Oe8
Controlled Reset
2290
IBM Line Adapter
4&47
IndYl Slide Lock,gp of 3 4852
Input Edit Level., Add'i
4854
SIP of 4
Inquiry Kay
4884
5140
Monitor Ke~
1035 Abc ment
7881
1035 Control
7882
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
FIC
$18
28
2
10
2
$ 715
1,155
95
347
95
$1.150
1.00
1.00
3.50
1.00
$ 21
34
17
132
8
4
2
2
18
5
1ee
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.50
1.00
18
17
g
138
47
43
30
eso
225
1032 DIGITAL TIME UNIT
fJurpoa4I: Used to associate time of day with output records of a
data collection system.
1IocIeI 1
Model 2
May 79
Warning Is provided upon the return of Interrupted power, or
failure of the timing source (synchronous motor or master time
system) tolnltlstean advance cycle once each minute. Clocking
periods for 24/268 or 1034s can be activated on anymmtite
automatically or by manual operation. Synchronous standby Is
provided with the 1032 mdl 2.
PREREQUISITES:
For 24/28a (357.) - Clock Read-In (#1945) on each 24/26 ...
Digital Time Read-out Control, 24/26/1034 (#3267) on the
1032 Itself ... see "Special Features" below and GSD sales
manual for 24/26 description.
For 1034a (10308) - Digital Time Read-ln (#3266) on each
1034 ... Digital Time Read-out Control, 24/26/1034 (#3267) on
the 1032 itself... see "Special Features."
For 14488 - Common Carrier Adapter Set - 1050/1060 (#2070)
on each 1448 ... Digital Time Read-out Control, 1448 (#3268)
on the 1032 itself ... see "Special Features."
For 1028a - Expanded line Feature (#3837) on the first 1026
... Digital Time Read-out Control, 1026 (#3269) on the 1032
itself... see "Special Features."
For 2702. - 1032 Attachment (#7918), IBM Terminal Control Type II (#4616) and Speed Extension (#7387) on each 2702,
plus either IBM Line Adapter (#4613) or Data Set Line Adapter
• (#3233) on line No. 1 of each 2702 ... Digital Time Read-out
Control, 2702 (#3273) on the 1032 itself ... .1188 "Special Features."
Environment: See 1030 in "Systems."
Manuall: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
SPECIFY: Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug - #9880
for 115 V, #8884 for 208 V, or #9888 for 230 V. Non-iock
plug - #8881 for 115 V, #H85 for 208 V, or #8887 for 230
V ... must be consistent with voltage of 1026, 1448 or 2702.
MACI
MRC
Purcha..
MMMC
$ 108
$3,785
$3
125
4,830
3
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
CLOCKING PERIOD ON-OFF CONTROL, ADD'L (#1840). For
packed card punch operation ... a group of four periods In addition to those supplied with feature #3267 '" see below.
Maximum: One.
DAY-OF-WEEK READ-OUT, 24/28/1034 (#3218); Numbers the
days of the week 1 thru 7 for punching Into cards on 24/26/1034
card punches In 357 or 1030 Data Collection Systems. Upon
reaching day 7, the next advance returns the device to day t.
Advancement from one day to the next may be wired (pluggable)
to cause a day change at any minute during the 24-hour period.
Read-out to 1034s conSists of 5 digits (tens of hours, units of
hours, tenths of hours, hundredths of hours, and day-of-week).
Read-out to 24/26. is limited to 4 digits (tens of hours, units of
hours, tenths of hours, and day-of-week) ... hundredths of hours
cannot be punched in output records when used with a 24/26.
Prerequilitee: Digital Time Read-out Control,
24/26/1034 (#3267) ... Day-of-Week Read-In (#3200) on each
1034.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 24/28/1034(#3287).
Provides compatibility with 24/26/1034 card punches used for
output from 357 and 1030 Data Collection Systems ... can read
time to any combination of up to twenty card punches. Specify:
#gC)18, for 4' cable assembly from 1032 to junction boK for multiple 24/26s (cable Is shipped 30 days prior to scheduled deHvery),
or #9018, for 15' cable assembly from 1032 to a Single 24 or 26.
Note: Cable assembly for 1034 attachment to 1032 is included
with Digital Time Read-in (#3266) on 1034 ... see 1034.
Mdl
1032
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Warranty: B
PRICES:
Has a synchronous motor drive.
Is minute Impulse self-regulating ... for attachment to
user's master clock system.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlight.: Can furnish time d~ta to any comblnetlon of up to
twenty 24/26 Card Punches arid 1034 ··Card Punches, and, in
addition, to one 1026 Transmission Control Unit, or two 1448
Transmission Control Units, or two 2702 Transmission Controls.
Time advances once each minute and Is reed out as 4 diglta .. ,
hours (0-23) and nearest hundreths of hours. Can be used for
357 and '030 Data Collection Systems, either on or off-line.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUTCONTROL, 1448 (#32ee). Provides
compatibility with a 1448 Transmission Control Unit. A maximum
of two 1448s can be attached to a 1032 for tlma read-out.Ons
#3268 Is required on the 1032 for each 1448. A 20' cable (1032
to 1448) Is provided with each feature. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #3269 or #3273. Maximum: Two.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 1028 (.,3288). Provides
compatibility with a 1026 Transmission Control' Unit. A 15' cable
.(1032 to 1026) Is provided. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with
#3268 .or 3273. Maximum: One.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 2702 (#3273).
NoUobe reprOduced without wtitten permission.
Provides
--- -----------
M 1032 - 1034
May 79
--
===~=
DP Machines
1032 Digital Time Unit (cont'd)
compatibility with a 2702 Transmission Control. A maximum of two
2702s can be attached to a 1032 for time read-out. One #3273
is required on the 1032 for each 2702. A 20' cable (1032 to
2702) is provided with each feature. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with #3268 or #3269. Maximum: Two.
Special Faature Prlcaa:
Clocking Period On-OH
Control, Add'i
#1940
Day-o.-Week Raad-out,
3218
24/28/1034
DIgital Time Raad-out Control
3287
24/28/1034
3288
1448
1028
32"
3273
2702
MAC/
MRC Pureha.. MMMC
FlC
•"
• . 50
'15
434
3.50
54
488
1,815
1,815
1,700
.50
.75
.75
1.25
28
28
• 5
Installation - to order add'i platens. or to order one for field Installation
1034 CARD PUNCH
Purpo..: Output card punch for data transmission from 1031
Input Stations and 1035 Badge Readers In a 1030 Data Collection
System.
78
Highlight.: The 1034 receives data from up to twenty-four 1031s
over a single communication line. Two lines can be attached to a
1034. The second line is normally used for emergency back-up
for another 1034. or, where the application does not require emergency back-up. as provision for attaching up to forty~lght 1031s
to one 1034.
Purpose: Output page printer for 1030 Data Collection Systems
used online with a data processing system via a 1026/1448
Transmission Control Unit, 2701 Data Adapter Unit. or 2702/2703
Transmission Control.
Transmitted data Is punched at 60 characters/second ... nontransmitted data, time and common data Is punched at 80
characters/second. Eight rotary dials controlled by the 1034
operator each permit entry of "12", "11" and "0-9" punches as
common data Into the output record. Time can be punched Into
output records when a 1032 Digital Time Unit Is attached to a
1034 equipped with Digital Time Read-In (#3266) ... see "Special
Features."
10
10
37
37
48
21
1033 PRINTER
Highlight.: A compact Industrial unit which can be mounted on a
wall or on a free standing pedestal. Note: Wall brackets or pedestals are not Included with the unit. Pedestals are available from
... see SRL
outside vendors or from IBM
GA24-3021 for pedestal specifications.
The printer Is controlled by the data processing system through
the 1033 Printer Attachment (# 1279) on a 1031 Input Station A
model. Addressing Is performed by programming In the processor.
Remote Inquiries for prlnt-out Initiate from a card reader. badge
reader. or manual entry of an associated 1031 A or B model. Data
Is transmitted to the printer at 14.8 cps. The printer operates In
downshift mode ... prints 26 letters, 10 digits and 8 special characters ... uses a removable Processor Printing Element - see
"Type Catalog" .. , horizontal spacing Is 10 characters/Inch ... roll
paper Is fed by a 15" friction feed solid platen with a 13" print
line .. , ribbons are available through the OP division or outside
vendors. Note: For unattended operation or multi-part (up to 5)
form paper. a Pin Feed Platen Is required ... see "Special Features."
Syatam Checking - each character received by the printer must
contain an odd number of bits. A 6-blt BCD code plus a parity bit
and a start and stop bit (total of nine bits) Is used. Parity checkIng of each character Is performed by the receiving 1031 mdl A.
PREREQUISITES: A 1033 Printer Attachment (# 1279) on the
associated 1031 mdl A ... Attachment Feature - 1030 (#1274)
and Attachment Feature - 1033 (#1277) on a 1448 ... for requirements for use with a 1026 or 2701. see those units.
Llmltatlona: 1033s cannot be used In 1030 systems attached to a
1034 Card Punch ... 1033s cannot be attached to a 1031 with a
Common Carrier Adapter (#2068) Installed ... a maximum of nine
1033s can be attached to a 1031 mdl A ... maximum cable length
(1033 to 1031 mdl A) Is 3.000' .. , see SRL GA24-3021 for detailed Information.
Environment: See 1030 in "Systems."
Manuala: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index." G3201621.
The unit has a 1,2OQ-card capacity hopper and a 1.3OQ-card
capacity stacker. Interlocks stop machine operation when the
hopper becomes empty. If the stacker Is full, a card jams, or
transmiSSion Is Interrupted, an audible alarm signals the operator.
Syatema Checking - provides odd parity on all characters received. plus a record length, blank column and punch compare
check. Five consecutive records In error stop the punch and
activate an audible alarm.
Control Capabllltl.. - each 1034 can poll up to twenty-four
1031s on each of two lines, with a maximum of two lines possible.
A mixture of 1031 mdl As and Bs can be attached to each line.
However, only 1031 mdl As can be connected directly to the
2-wlre communication line leading to the 1034. See 1031 for
allowable ratios of 1031 mdl As and Bs and SRL GA24-3021 for
communication line specifications.
U.. with 10358 - 1035 Receive Control (#7963) Is required
when 1035 Badge Readers are used In the system. Also review
Variable Record Length (#8695) and Packed Card Column Counter (#5491) under "Special Features."
Limitation: 1033 Printers cannot be attached to 1031 mdl As
which transmit to a 1034.
Environment: See 1030 In "Systems."
Manuala: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index." G3201621.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. I-phase, 3-wlre, 60 Hz): #8880 for
115 V, locking plug, or #9881 for 115 V, non-lock plug.
NOTE: Two 20', 2-wlre main line signal cables are shipped
automatically
prior to scheduled delivery
of the 1034 ... see SRL.GA24-3021.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue. or
#9045 for gray.
MAC/
PRICES:
1034
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wlre, 60 Hz): #8880 for
115 V,locklng plug, or #9881 for 115 V, non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Method of Installation: #8410 If junction box, or #8411 If
junction point. Cables or connectors will be shipped automatically
prior to scheduled delivery date. See SRL GA243021.
[4] Printing Element: #8575 for Processor - Standard, or #8578
for Processor - "H" Option ... see "Type Catalog."
MAC/
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC
Pureha..
1
14,125
'117
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
ACCESSORY FEATURE
1033
MMMC
• 8.50
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
PfN FEED PLATEN (#8509). [Purchase Only] For Plant Installation - specify #9509. Maximum one, In lieu of standard friction
feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages for available options, feature #s to be specified and price. For Field
Mdl
MAC
Pureha..
MMMC
• 37.00
'18,580
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
• 404
SPECIAL FEATURES
tCOMMON CARRIER ADAPTER (#2088). Provides for long distance data transmlssloll' via external data sets over 4-wlre full
duplex communication lines provided by a common carrier. Transmission rate Is 60 cps/600 bps. Local 2-wlre capabilities of standard maohlne are not affected by Installation of this feature.
Specify: For cable assembly from 1034 to external data set.
#8021 and quantity (length In feet) ... maximum length with Line
Transfer (#4835) Installed Is 20' ... without #4835. maximum
length Is 40'. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with IBM Line Adapter (#4647). DAy-oF-WEEK READ-IN (#3200).
Required If Day-of-Week
Read-out (#3219) Is Installed on a 1032 '" see 1032.
Prerequlelte: Digital Time Read-ln (#3266).
DIGITAL TIME READ-IN (#32").
Required to attach a 1032
Digital Time Unit for time read-In to the 1034 ... a 15' cable (1034
to 1032 or adjacent 1034) Is furnished.
t
For further inCormatioD 011 IBM Line Adapten,
•• SIlL OAl4-343S-2, or luboequent reviJioDl.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
leO
M 2700 papa.
------ ------ ---
--- = = =-: =
M 1034 - 1035
May 79
DP Machines
1034 Card Punch
(cont'd)
tlBM LINE ADAPTER (#4647). A modem for unlimited distance use
with a 4-wlre leased common carrier private line or equivalent
privately owned communication facilities. For line specifications,
refer to SRL OA24-3435··. When this feature Is Installed, the
standard 2-wire, 8 mile modem can also be used. LlmltaUon.:
Cannot be lnstalied with Common Carrier Adapter (#2068) ... all
1031 s connected through this feature must have their polling
addresses in sequence at the beginning of the polling list (B, C, D,
etc.) '" a 1034 used for backup of another 1034 equipped with
Ihis feature must also have this feature.
lINf TRANSFER (#4835). Provides the ability to transfer automatically the communication line or lines from the normal channel
of a 1034 to the backup channel of an adjacent operating 1034.
If the card punch requires the Common Carrier Adapter (#2068)
for normal operation. the card punch assigned to back up this unit
must also have #2068 installed. Limitation.: Up to three 1034s
in a given installation can be connected in a backup configuration.
HO'.Never, only a single punch can be assigned to back up anyone
other punch ... for systems using common carrier data sets, the
length of the cable from the data set to the 1034 must not exceed
20'. A IS' inter-machine cable is provided. Prerequlalte: All
1034s connected In an automatic backup configuration must be
equipped with #4835.
attachment cable to the junction box ... see "Specify." See Physical Planning Manual, GA24-3021 for details.
Functionally, 1035s can be thought of as additional columns of
badge reading which are located remotely from the 1031 with
which they are associated. When the 1031 Is polled, all badge
readers (Including the one in the 1031 if It Is 80 equipped and the
mode switch is set to badge) are scanned sequentially and transmit as one block of data. Empty badge readers are scanned
tlmewise, but no data is transmitted. Thus, a transmlHed block of
data will vary In length, depending upon the number of badge
readers ready when the 1031 Is polled. If no badge readers are
ready when the 1031 Is polled, no data Is transmitted. Each
badge record in a transmitted block (up to a total of five) Is automatically preceded by a character identifying the badge reader.
From a user point of view, the 1035 operates in a manner Identical to a 1031 mdl A6 or B6. An inserted badge is locked In position, read, and automatically released.
For 2790 System. - up to three 1035s can be connected to any
2791 mdl 1 via a common multi-wire cable nol exceeding 1,000
feet. Cable connections are made via customer-provided lunctlon
boxes and cables, except for the IBM-provided 4 foot cable to the
junction box ... see "Specify." See Physical Planning Manual
OA27-3017 for details.
PACKED CARD (#5490). For punching more than one record
into a single card during specified time periods under control of a
1032 Digital Time Unit. Prerequl.lte: Digital Time Read-in
(#3266).
Operator Control.: A Repeat light Indicates a detected transmission error. A Clear button Is provided to turn off the Repeat light
and to release the badge.
PACKED CARD COLUMN COUNTER (#5491).
Provides better
packing of records punched In output card when 1035 Badge
Readers are used In the system and the 1034 Is operating In
packed card mode. Also provides the ability to punch two record
types (two transaction codes) In the packed card mode. The
feature effectively counts card columns punched in the output card
and feeds a new card when Insufficient columns remain to punch a
maximum len~th record. Transaction codes and counter column
count are wired at installation as specified by the customer.
PrerequlaltH: 1035 Receive Control (#7963), Packed Card
(#5490), and Digital Time Read-In (#3266).
PREREQUISITES:
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6408),
An additional stacker which
may be used to select cards containing a specific transaction error
or error indication~
1035 RECEIVe CONTROL (#7963). Required when 1035 Badge
Readers are used in a 1030 system. Provides Immediate repolling
01 an address wh&n an error Is detected by the 1034.
VARIA,BLE RECORD LENGTH (#8895). Provides record length
checking for variable length records received under the same
transaction code. Required when data is received from 1035
Badge Readers and the record length varies in increments of
either 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 or 11 characters. Wired at Installation
lor a single transactlor, code and increment specified by customer.
Note: Increment used is equal to number of columns read from a
single badge, plus 1 ... for ~n in.,crement of 8 (7-column badge),
the standard modulus 8 feature Is used. Prerequlalte: 1035 Receive Control (#7963).
Special Feature PrIces:
MACI
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
Common Carrier Adept #2068 • 28
Day-of-Weok Read-ln
3200
4
Digital Time Read-ln
3288
18
IBM line Ad;aptfll'
4647
42
line Tranlilfer
4835
13
Packed Card
5490
32
Packed Card Col enlf
5491
5
Selective Stacker
6408
21
1035 Rece/ve Control
7963
5
Vrbl Record Length
8895
5
'1,155
173
715
1,875
418
828
203
918
203
217
$3.50
.50
3.00
4.00
.50
.50
.50
.75
.50
.50
FIC
'40
9
31
371
54
29
29
79
29
29
1035 BADGE READER
Purpoae: An input station for a 1030 Data Collection System or a
2790 Data Communication System. Used to transmit numeric data
read from badges via a 1031 Input Station or a 2791 Area Station
mdl 1 to II central collection point.
Highlights: A small industrial unit which can be wall or shelfmounteq. Simple in operation, the 1035 reads identification
badges (22-column stub card size) prepunched In IBM card code
with a maximum of ten numeric digits. See SRL GA21-9028 for
badge specifications.
Customer R. .ponalbIlIU. .: See M 2700 pages.
For 1030 - [1] 1035 Attachment (#7961) on the sasociated
1031 ... (2) 1035 Control (#7962) on a 1031 mdl A equipped
with #7961 and lor which controls 1031 mdl Bs equipped with
#7961 ... (3) 1035 Receive Control (#7963) on the 1034 Card
Punch (for offline systems) ... (4) Variable Record Length
(#8695) on the 1034 If the number of columns read per badge is
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10. For 7 digits of badge (plus 1 for station
number), the standard modulus 8 checking in the 1034 suffices.
For 2790 (#8030).
a 2791 mdl 1 equipped with 1035 Attachment
Limitation.:
For 1030 - (1) The maximum cable distance from the farthest
1035 to its associated 1031 is 1,000 feet; total aggregate cable
length connecting 1035s to their associated 1031 cannot exceed
2,000 feet; the total cable distance from the farthest 1035 via Its
aSSOCiated 1031 to the controlling 1031 mdl A cannot exceed
3,000 feet. For details refer to SRL GA24-3021 ... (2) The number of 1035s attached to a 1031 cannot exceed four '" (3) The
number of badge columns read from each 1035 (and associated
1031 if equipped with a badge reader and operating in badge
mode) must be equal ... (4) The number of badge columns read
In any badge reader cannot exceed ten ." (5) The total number
of badge columns transmitted in one block cannot exceed 30.
Thus, with five badge readers (one 1031 and four 1035s) the
maximum number of columns read from each badge is six; with
four badge readers - seven; with three badge readers or less ten.
For 2790 - (1) The maximum cable distance from the farthest
1035 to Its aSSOCiated 2791 mdl 1 is 1,000 feet ... (2) The number of 1035s attached to a 2791 mdl 1 cannot exceed three.
Environment: See 1030 or 2790 In "Systems."
Manuel.: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," 03201621.
SPECIFY: (1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wlre, 60 Hz); #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Coior: #tMM1 for red, #tMM2 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
(3) Cable to Junction Box: #$410, if required. A 4-fdot cable
from the 1035 to a custoner-provlded Junction box ... see PhysIcal Planning Manual GA24-3021 or GA27-3017 for requirement. Note: If #9410 Is specified, provide complete person's
name and address for shipment ... cables will be shipped automatically, approximately 30 days prior to scheduled delivery.
PRICES:
Mdl
1035
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
Purch...
• 32
• 944
Purchase Option: 45%
For 1030 SY.tem. - up to four 1035s can be connected to any A
or B model 1031 via a common multi-wire cable not exceeding
1,000 feet. Cable connections are made via customer-provlded
Junclion boxes and cables, except for the IBM-provided 4 foot
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MMMC
•
4
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
M 1071 - 1072
May 79
DP Machines
1071 TERMINAL CONTROL
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Control unit for a 1070 Process Communication System.
Model 1
Used for 14.8 cps transmission.
Model 2
Used for 66.6 cps transmission.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: A 1071 is required in each system ... it controls selection and conversion of process signals in either random or sequential mode ... speed of selection and conversion depends upon the
1071 model.
Supplies the line control governing data transmission and checks all
transmitted and received data for validity. NOTE: For communications facilities and attachment to communications lines, see 1070 in
"Systems."
The basic 1071 contains logic for addressing 50 input/output
points. This capacity can be expanded to 300 points, in modules of
50 ... see "Special Features." Performs contact sense, decimal and
BCD input, and contact operate functions. Process alert logic informs the associated processor of interrupt requests ... see
"Special Features" for extended input/ output functions.
quired for 1078s.
PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#5561). To attach one or more 1053
mdl 2s to a 1071.
Prerequisite: Display Attachment
(#3345).
RANGE SELECT (#5960).
For ADC conversion of analog signal,
full scale ranges -10 to +50, -20 to + 100, and -100 to +500 millivolts. to their equivalent 3-digit values. Note: Only one analog
input range may be terminated per I/O Switching Module (#4663)
on a 1072.
Prerequisite: Analog-to-Digital Converter
(#1262).
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
Add'i Address Module #1048
Analog-to-Digit Convert 1262
ADC Extend Resolution 1263
DC Power Supply Adapter
3217
for +24 V
for +12 V
3218
Display Attachment
3345
line Adapter
4792
Multi-character Input
5185
Printer Attachment
5561
Range Select
5960
$ 3
79.
10
Purchase MMMC
$
FIC
131
2,565
232
$ .25
5.00
.25
$26
55
12
423
423
848
476
423
848
848
1.50
1.50
1.50
.50
.50
1.50
1.50
55
55
55
12
36
40
12
10
10
24
10
10
24
24
A compact unit designed for industrial environments, it can be
mounted in standard 19" relay racks ... racks are available from
outside vendors.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, locking plug): #9880 for
115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V, unless DC. Power
(#3217, 3218) is ordered.
[2] Data Set Attachment: One of the following, depending upon the
data set to be used -- #9110 or #9111 for facility Dl, #9110 for
facility 02, #9112 for the IBM Line Adapter (#4792). See the
01 M and D2M facilities in the M 2700 pages for applicability of
these codes.
[3) Cables: Use 1070 Cable Order Form -- (a) length of cable to
data set ... (b) length of Digital Input Channel cable, Display
Attachment cable and Printer Attachment cable, when purchased
from IBM. NOT£: The three cables after (b) are special cables,
purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed by the customer.
Completed cable order form must be received at least 90 days
prior to installation date.
[4] When 1070 terminals are controlled by a 1050 system as a
master station, consult
for special
requirements.
PRICES:
Mdl
1071
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
Purchase
MRC
$ 199
212
$6,775
7,190
MMMC
$
23
23
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: B
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADD'L ADDRESSING MODULE (#1048). Adds 50 addresses to
the 1071's addressing range. One feature is required for each 1072
Terminal Multiplexer added after the first one. Maximum: Five.
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (#1262).
Converts analog
input signals, full scale range -1 to +5 V, to their equivalent 3-digit
values. Conversion rate is approximately 5/ second for 1071 mdl 1,
20/ second for mdl 2.
ADC EXTENDED RESOLUTION (#1263).
Increases Analog-toDigital Converter (#1262) resolution from 0.1 % to 0.025% of full
scale range ... for improved analog conversion accuracy.
Prerequisite: Analog-to Digital Conversion (#1262).
DC POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER (#3217, 3218). For operation of
the 1071 from + 12 to +24 V DC power to permit use with back-up
battery power. #3217 -- for +24 V ... #3218 -- for +12 V.
DISPLAY ATTACHMENT 1#3345).
Converts output data into
decimal "one-out-of-ten" code for attachment of 1074 Binary
Display, 1075 Decimal Displays, and customer's decimal output
devices to the 1071 ... also required for 1073 mdls 1 and 3.
t LINE ADAPTER (#4792). For attachment to customer-owned or
leased telephone cable facilities for in-plant operation ... not exceeding 8 wire-miles.
MULTI-CHARACTER INPUT (#5185). Extends basic 1071 digital
input capability to include extended BCD code (B, A, 8, 4, 2. 1, C)
and externally synchronized multi-character input devices ... ret For further inrorlllf.ltion on IBM Line Adapters. sec M 2700 pages.
1072 TERMINAL MULTIPLEXER
[No longer available ... ME@ orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for addressing and
input/ output points ... analog inputs,
inputs, BCD and extended BCD inputs,
digital output/contact operate points in a
terminating up to 50
decimal "one-out-of-ten"
contact sense inputs, or
1070 system.
Highlights: Every 1070 system has at least one 1072 ... up to six
can be connected to the 1071 Terminal Control for a total of 300
input/ output points ... I/O points are installed in groups of ten (see
"Special Features"). Each 1072 is cabled separately to the 1071 for
maximum installation flexibility... the unit is designed for mounting
in a standard 19" relay rack.
PREREQUISITES: A 1071 mdl 1 or 2, plus one Add'i Addressing
Module (#1048) on the 1071 for each 1072 attached after the first
one.
Maximum: Six per system.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: [1] I/O Switching Module(s) (#4663)
see" Special
Features." NOT£: No function is provided unless one or more
I/O Switching Modules (#4463) is specified.
[2] Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable Order
Form -- (a) lenght of address cable (1072-1071) for each 1072
ordered ... (b) length of Analog Signal cable (1072-1071). required for each 1072 terminating analog input signals. NOTE:
Address cable is a special cable, purchased at $1.90 per foot
and installed by the customer ... Analog Signal cable is a special
cable, purchased at $.25 per foot and installed by the customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1072
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 10
$ 476
$ .50
Purchase Option: 55 % Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
I/O SWITCHING MODULE (#4663).
A multiplexer card for
selection and termination of up to ten customer input or output
points ... each module is assigned to anyone of the following
functions at time of installation:
Analog Input -- for selection of up to ten analog input points in
anyone of the following four ranges ... -1 to +5 V, -10 to +50
millivolts, -20 to + 100 millivolts, or -100 to +500 millivolts. Note:
ADC calibration requires two addresses of lowest analog input
range and one address of each additional analog input range.
Digital Input -- for selection of up to ten contact sense, decimal
or BCD inputs in any combination.
Digital Output -- for selection of up to ten contact operate
points, display devices, or output printers in any combination.
Maximum: Five per 1072.
THERMOCOUPLE BLOCK (#7940). Provides an isothermal block
and resistance bulb thermometer to measure "cold junction" thermocouple termination temperature. Each 1072 having thermocouple
inputs must have a #7940. Note: Two analog input addresses, -10
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
M 1072 - 1073
May 79
1072 Terminal Multiplexer (cont'd
to +50 millivolt range, are required to read the thermocouple block
temperature. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites:
Analog-to-Digital Converter (#1262) and Range Select (#5960) on
the 1071, plus at least one I/O Switching Module (#4663) on the
1072.
MACI
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
1/0 Switching Module #4663
Thermocouple Block
Purchase MMMC
$ 6
$ 211
10
423
7940
$ .50
.50
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
one or more I/O Switching Modules (#4663) on one or more 1072s
... each latching contact operate point uses one address assigned
to Digital Output in an I/O Switching Module.
Maximum: Depends upon number of available addresses in I/O
Switching Modules (#4663) on 1072s.
1073
INPUT TERMINATIONS, VOLTAGE (#4682).
A group of ten
points for addressing and terminating inputs from customer voltage
sources. Any pulse must have a minimum duration of 16 milliseconds, a minimum interval between pulses of 16 milliseconds, an
off-level (nominal voltage level) of -30 V to + 1 V DC, and an onlevel of + 12 V to +48 V DC. Maximum: Sixty points per 1073 mdl
2. This maximum is reduced by ten points for each Input Terminations, Contact (#4681) also ordered for the 1073 mdl 2. Limitation:
5 i.nputs assigned to Pulse Duration Telemetry require a complete
group of ten points. Prerequisite: Installation of Input Terminations
31 to 60 require a Terminal Extension (#7936).
TERMINAL EXTENSION (#7936).
Required for installation of
Input Terminations 31-60. Maximum: One per 1073 mdl 2.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 16
$1.50
$ 635
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
LATCHING CONTACT OPERATE POINTS (#4781). A group of
two points for terminating outputs to customer devices. Output is
one relay contact per point. rated at 100 Volt Amps, with a l-amp
non-inductive maximum current. Maximum: Twenty per 1073 (40
points).
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Latching Contact Operate
Points (group of 2)
#4781
$ 5
$ 184
$ .75
$ 704
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1073-1072). a second
Address cable is required if more than 20 L.C.O. points are installed in the 1073 mdl 1, and (b) length of Data cable (1073junction with Display Attachment cable) for each 1073 mdl 1 ordered. NOTE: Address cable and Data cable are special cables,
purchased at $1.90 and $1.15 per foot respectively and installed by
the customer.
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MMMC
$ 16
SPECIAL FEATURES
Highlights: Each latching contact operate point is individually
addressable and provides control of contact status (operating
customer's devices) for any desired time period as determined by
the processor program ... latching contact operate points are ordered in groups of two (see "Special Features"). Designed for
mounting in standard 19" relay racks.
Mdl
2
INPUT TERMINATIONS, CONTACT (#4681).
A group of ten
points for addressing and terminating inputs from customer contact
sources. Contact closures, sensed by an IBM supplied voltage of
+48 V DC, must have a minimum duration of 16 milliseconds, and
an interval between consecutive closures of at least 16 milliseconds. Maximum: Sixty points per 1073 mdl 2. This maximum is
reduced by ten points for each Input Terminations, Voltage (#4682)
also ordered for the 1072 mdl 2.
Limitation: 5 inputs
assigned to Pulse Duration Telemetry require a complete group of
ten points. Prerequisite: Installation of Input Terminations 31 to
60 require a Terminal Extension (#7936).
Purpose: Unit for control and termination of up to 40 latching
contact operate points in a 1070 Process Communication System.
PRICES:
1073
MACI
MRC "Purchase
FIC
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
Mdl
$12
12
1073 LATCHING CONTACT OPERATE - Model 1
[No longer available ....
PRICES:
$ .50
FIC
$ 6
MACI
MRC
Input Terminations
Contact (group of 10) #4681 $ 3
Voltage (group of 10) 4682
2
Terminal Extension
7936
5
Purchase MMMC
$
$ .25
.25
.50
89
52
211
FIC
$ 4
4
2
1073 DIGITAL-PULSE CONVERTER - Model 3
[No longer available .. '
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for buffered pulse or pulse duration output in a 1070
Process Communication System.
Highlights: Accepts a three digit value (000-999) from the 1071 ...
when the "execute circuit" is activated, the digital value is converted into an equal number of contact closures of proportional contact
closure duration ... optional read back check before "execute"
command ... interlock during "execute" prevents readdressing
before conversion is complete ... pulse ouput rate of 90 pulses per
second .. output multiplexing via L.C.O. points in a 1073 mdl 1.
Designed for mounting in standard 19" relay racks ... the standard
unit operates from a 12 V DC power source to facilitate use with
backup battery power.
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071. plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each 1073 mdl 3 uses four 1072 addresses assigned to Digital
Output.
Maximum: Depends upon number of available addresses in I/O
Switching Modules (#46631 on 1072s.
1073 COUNTER TERMINAL - Model 2
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for terminating pulse input points and/or pulse
duration input points in a 1078 Pulse Counter ... each unit has a
maximum capacity of 60 points.
Highlights: Input points may be
source ... input points are ordered
Features"). Designed for mounting
connected to 1078 via special cable
customer contact or voltage
in groups of ten (see "Special
in standard 19" relay rack ...
(up to 10') furnished by IBM.
PREREQUISITES: A 1078, plus one Counters, Group of Ten
(#2410) for each group of ten input terminations.
Maximum: Three per 1078.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: Cable: Use 1070 Cable Order Form -- length of cable
between 1073 mdl 2 and 1078.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1073-10721. (bl length
of Data cable (1073-junction with Display Attachment cable), and, if
required, (c) length of Data cable (1073-junction with Digital Input
Channel cable) for each 1073 mdl 3 ordered. NOTE: Address cable
is a special cable, purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the
customer. Data cables are special cables, purchased at $1.90 per
foot and installed by the customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1073
3
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 58*
$6.50*
$2,200
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
AC POWER SUPPLY (#8680, 8684, 8686).
For operation from
one of the following l-phase. 60 Hz power sources -- #8680 for
115 V, #8684 for 208 V, or #8686 for 230 V. (Locking plugs).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
1073 Digital-Pulse Converter - Model 3
(conrd)
EXTERNAL OUTPUT CONTROL (#3864). Enables the 1073 mdl
3 to control the duration of an externally synchronized operation ...
i.e., proportional blending systems, fluid delivery systems, etc.
External contact closures decrement the 1073 mdl 3 output register
to zero ... 1073 Latching Contact Operate Points (#4781) provide
program control of External Output Control use.
VARIABLE OUTPUT SPEED (#8675).
Provides program controlled selection of one of the following output rates -- 96, 48, 24,
12, 6, 3, 1.5 or 0.75 pulses per second. Note: Requires one additional 1072 address assigned to Digital Output.
MACI
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
AC Power Supply
115 V
#8680
208 V
8684
230 V
8686
External Output Control3864
Variable Output Speed 8675
$ 16
16
16
5
10
$ 689
689
689
211
423
$1.50
1.50
1.50
.50
.50
FIC
$ 40
40
40
4
12
M 1073 - 1076
May 79
An error lamp indicates improper data received by the 1071 ... each
display position may be labeled by the customer ... the stant:1ard
unit operates from a 12 V DC powel source to facilitate use with
backup battery power.
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each display position uses one address assigned to Digital Output
in an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1075-1072) and (b)
length of Data cable (1075-junction with Display Attachment cable)
for each 1075 ordered. Note: Address cable is a special cable.
purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the customer. Data
cable is a special cable, purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed
by customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1075
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
1074 BINARY DISPLAY
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for display of process on-off conditions and other
on-off information received from the data processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication System.
Highlights: Has ten pairs of lamps for display of on-off conditions
... each pair of lamps (one green, one amber) is individually addressable ... can be set -- green on. amber on, or both on ... error
lamp lights when 1071 detects improper data transmission ... each
pair of lamps may be labeled by the customer (lamp test feature
provides simple visual check for faulty lamps) ... standard unit
operates from a 12 V DC power source to facilitate use with backup battery power.
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each pair of lamps uses one address assigned to Digital Output in
an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC
bibliography.
Index G320- 1621
Mdl
1074
1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$
$1,275
$3.00
33
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
AC POWER SUPPLY (#8680, 8684, 8686).
For operation from
one of the following 1-phase, 60 Hz power sources -- #8680 for
115 V, #8684 for 208 V, or #8686 for 230 V AC. (Locking plugs)
MACI
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
AC Power Supply
115 V
208 V
230 V
#8680
8684
8686
$ 16
15
15
Purchase
MMMC
$ 68
$2,615
$6.00
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
AC POWER SUPPLY (#8680, 8684, 8686).
For operation from
one of the following 1-phase, 60 Hz power sources -- #8680 for
115 V, #8684 for 208 V, or #8686 for 230 V AC. (Locking plugs)
ADDITIONAL DISPLAY MODULE (#3348).
Four additional
display positions. Note: Requires four additional addresses assigned to Digital Output in an I/O Switching Module.
MACI
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
AC Power Supply
115 V
208 V
230 V
Add'i Display Module
#8680
8684
8686
3348
$ 16
15
15
38
Purchase MMMC
$ 689
689
689
1,485
$1.50
1.50
1.50
3.00
FIC
$ 40
38
38
26
Purchase MMMC
$ 689
689
689
$1.50
1.50
1.50
FIC
$40
38
38
1076 MANUAL BINARY INPUT
[No longer available.
Highlights: Has ten 2-position switches for entry of on-off data
each switch is individually addressable ... position of switch remains as last set
each switch position may be labeled by the
customer ... an execute button requests associated processor
attention ... an execute lamp informs the operator that a transaction
has been completed.
PREREQUISITE: Available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ... each switch position and the execute button uses
one address assigned to Digital Input in an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
orders are on an "as available" basis]
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1076-1072) and (b)
length of Data cable (1076-junction with Digital Input Channel
cable) for each 1076 ordered. Note: Address cable is a special
cable. purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the customer.
Data cable is a special cable, purchased at $1.90 per foot and
installed by the customer.
Mdl
1076
1075 DECIMAL DISPLAY
orders are on an "as available" basis)
Purpose: Unit for operator entry of on-off conditions to a data
processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication
System.
PRICES:
[No longer available ...
MACI
MRC
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1074-1072) and (b)
lenght of Data cable (1074-junction with Display Attachment cable)
for each 1074 ordered. NOTE: Address cable is a special cable,
purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the customer. Data
cable is a special cable, purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed
by the customer.
PRICES:
or specific system
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purpose: Unit for display of decimal information received from a
data processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication System.
Highlights: Displays four decimal digits as determined by the data
processing system ... each digit is individually addressable '" four
additional digits can be added (see "Special Features").
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 29
$ 3.50
$1,120
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
M 1077 - 1078
Mav 79
DP Machines
1077 MANUAL DeCIMAL INPUT
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for operator entry of decimal data to a data processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication System.
Highlights: Has six switches for entry of six decimal digits of
information ... each switch is individually addressable ... position of
switch remains as last set .,' each switch position may be labeled
by the customer ... an execute button requests associated processor attention ... an execute lamp informs the operator that a
transaction has been completed.
PREREQUISITE: Available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ... each switch position and the execute button uses
one address assigned to Digital Input in an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify: Cables (when ordered from IBM): U\le 1070 Cable Order
Form -- (a) length of Address cable (lP77-1072) and (b) length of
Data cable (1077-junction with Digital Input Channel cable) for each
1077 ordered. Note: Address cable is a special cable. purchased at
$1.15 per foot and installed by the customer. Data cable is a
special cable. purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed by the
customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1077
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 31
$ 3.50
$1.185
Pl,lrchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
1078 PULSE COUNTER
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for counting events or rates represented by pulses
or switch closures for up to 180 customer input devices in a 1070
Process Communication System.
Highlights: Provides for up to 180 five-position pulse counters ...
pulse rates of up to 30 per second ... continuous parity checking of
each counter position ... up to 18 (6 standard) scan groups provide
variable length read-out control ... pulse duration and telemetered
pulse duration options with selectable resolution ... counters are
ordered in groups of ten ... counters may be read by the system in
predetermined groups, or Read and / or Reset using programmable
addressing for greater flexibility ... see "Special Features."
PREREQUISITES: Multi-character Input (#5185) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each 1078 uses one 1072 address assigned to Digital Input and at
least one 1072/1073 in which Input Terminations are ordered as
special features.
Maximum: Depends upon number of available addresses in I/O
Switching Modules (#4663) on 1072s.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. l-phase. 60 Hz): Locking plug -- #9880
for 115 V. #9884 for 208 V. or #9886 for 230 V, unless DC
Power Supply Adapter (#3217. 3218) is ordered ... see "Special
Features."
[2] Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable Order
Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1078-1072) ... (b) length of
Data cable (1078-junction with Digital Input Channel cable) ... (c)
lenght of second Data cable if Selective Read/Reset (#6050)
and/ or Consecutive Read /Reset (#6051) are ordered (1078junction with Display Attachment Features cable) for each 1078.
Note: Address cable and Data cable are special cables. purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed by customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1078
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$249
$10.00
$8.220
Pulse Duration -- accumulates duration of input pulses or switch
closures at a resolution of 107 or 10.7 pulses per second.
Note: Pulse Duration 1#5868) is required to use this mode.
Resolution is assigned at time of installation.
Pulse Duration Telemetry -- alternately accumulates the duration
or each pulse or switch closure in two counters ... thus the
last complete pulse duration value is preserved ... resolution of
107 or 10.7 pulses per second. Note: Pulse Duration (#5868)
and Pulse Duration Telemetry (#5869) are required to use this
mode .. Resolution is assigned at time of installation ... each
pulse duration telemetry input uses two 5-position pulse
counters.
Maximum: 18 per 1078, counter groups may be assigned to the
three input modes in any combination.
DC POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER 1#3217. 3218). For operation of
the 1078 from + 12 or +24 V DC power to permit use with backup
battery power. #3217 -- for +24 V ... #3218 -- for +12 V. FIT: 1
hr.
PULSE DURATION 1#5868). Causes all counter groups assigned
to the pulse duration mode to accumulate 107 or 10.7 counts per
second during the time corresponding customer inputs are actuated. Either counting rate (107 or 10.7 counts/second) is selected for
all pulse duration counters at time of installation.
PULSE DURATION TELEMETRY 1#5869).
Causes all counter
groups assigned to the pulse duration telemetry mode to accumulate. alternately in two consecutive counters. 107 or 10.7 counts
per second during the time corresponding customer inputs are
actuated. Counting rate depends upon Pulse Duration (#5868)
setting. Each counter is limited to 4 digits with this feature, the
fifth position is used as a flag. Prerequisite: Pulse Duration
(#5868).
READ/RESET. SELECTIVE 1#6050). For selecting a single pulse
counter to request either a readout or a reset operation. Provides
access to the 3-digit counter address register (000 to 179) and a
l-digit function control register in the 1078. A control digit "2" sent
to the function control register will reset the counter specified in
the counter address register. No control digit is required for a
readout operation. The possible 4-digit output control messages
require four 1072 addresses assigned to Digital Output mode and
the Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071. Input data from the
1078 is accepted via a 1072 address assigned to Digital Input
mode. Prerequisites: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071 and
five 1072 addresses. four assigned to Digital Output and one to
Digital Input.
READ/RESET. CONSECUTIVE 1#6051).
Used in conjunction
with Selective Read / Reset (#6050) to permit program addressable
groups of pulse counters to be read or reset. Provides access to
the 3-digit "Stop" address register to receive an ending pulse
counter address which stops the operation after its initiation at the
Selective Read / Reset start address. Two additional functions are
added to the function control register ... a "1" digit establishes the
consecutive readout mode for the next read operation only ... a "4"
digit resets those counters specified. from the start address
through the stop address. Prerequisites: Selective Read / Reset
(#6050) and three 1072 addresses aSSigned to Digital Output.
SCAN GROUPS 1#6370). A module of six groups which provide
variable length readout of 1078 counters. Each scan group defines
a start and stop address selected at time of installation ... basic
1078 includes six Scan Groups. Maximum: Two ... 12 additional
Scan Groups. Prerequisite: One 1072 address assigned to Digital
Input for each Scan Group.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Counters. group of 10 #2410
DC Power Supply Adapter
3217
for +24 volts
for + 12 volts
3218
Pulse Duration
5868
Pulse Duration. Tlmty 5869
Read/Reset. Selective 6050
6051
Read/Reset. Con sec
Scan Grps. module of 6 6370
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
COUNTERS 1#2410). A group of ten 5-position counters ... each
group of ten counters is assigned to anyone of the following input
modes at time of installation:
Pulse Count -- accumulates number of input pulses or switch
closures.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 5
10
10
10
10
31
11
5
Purchase MMMC
$
FIC
169
$ .25
$ 4
423
423
423
343
1.025
465
204
1.50
1.50
1.00
.25
1.50
.25
.25
55
55
26
18
3
3
9
--- ---------
== =-=:5 ';' ==
M 1201
May 79
DP Machines
1201 PROOF INSCRIBER
PRICES:
Mdl
[No longer available ... features, model conversions, RPQs and
accessories are not affected.]
1201
1
A1
81
2
A2
82
3
83
4
Purpoee: Performs all functions, except subtraction, of an 803
Proof Machine '" plus document Inscribing.
ModeIa: Models with or without endorsing and variuos pocket
capacities are available, as follows:
Number or Pocket.
!noperet.". Selector
EndoraIlIII Operetlve
1
A1
81
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-32
1-24
1-16
None
25-32
17-32
2
No
No
No
1-32
1-24
1-18
None
25-32
17-32
Ye8
Yes
No
No
1-24
1-16
1-24
1-16
None
17-24
None
17-24
A2
82
3
B3
4
B4
K.,
Arrangement
4 rows 018
4 rows 01 6, or 3 ·rOW8 01 8
2 rows 01 8, or 2 rows 01 6,
plU8 1 row 01 4
4 row8018
4 rows 01 6, or 3 rOW8 01 8
2 rows 01 8, or 2 rows 01 6,
plus 1 row 01 4
4 rowe 01 6
2 rows 01 8, plus 1 row 014
4 rowe 01 8
2 ro_ 01 8, plus 1 row 01 4
Model Chang..: Changes from endorsing to non-endorslng models, and vice versa, can be made between the following modela: 1
and 2 ... A1 and A2 ... B1 and B2 •.. 3 and 4 ... B3 and B4. For
other changes, see Branch Manager Letter 348.
Highlight.: List, distribute, prove, Inscribe, and (mdls 1 and 3)
endorse checks, deposit slips, batch control sllpa and slmillar
documents In one operation. Each pocket holds about 150 documents. See 803 for proof machine functions. Intermixed card and
paper documents within the following specifications can be Inscribed: Length - 6" to 8-3/4" (paper) or 4.852" to 8-3/4"
(card)
Width - 2-3/4" to 3-2/3"
Thickness - .003" to
.007".
00'
00.
Inecrlblng - recommendations of the American Bankers Association are used. Two fields can be Inscribed In magnetic Ink on face
of documents in a 1 /4" band parallel to and 3/16" up from
bottom edge. Spaced 8 characters/Inch, starting approximately
5/16" from right edge. Type font Is E13B. Fields are, from right
to left: Amount - set up on adding keyboard and Inscribed as ten
digits bracketed by amount symbol
Process Control - established by setting levers mounted In top cover of machine and
inscribed adjacent to amount. Used to Identify types of transactions or batches of work. Distribution pocket totals, as well as
process control codes, can be Inscribed on control slips during
compartment total printing operations. NOTE: If desired, up to four
see
process control positions are supplied at no charge
"Specify."
MAC!
MRC
• 419
385
347
410
372
333
385
347
372
333
84
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Warranty: B
Purcha..
MMMC
'11,880
11,880
11,880
11,340
11,340
11,340
10,280
10,280
9,720
8.720
'".50
".50
".50
ea.5O
93.50
ea.5O
85.50
85.50
80.00
80.00
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
PROCESS CONTROL, ADD'L (#5701, 5702). Up to four digits
see "Specify" above. Up to two add'i digits can
are standard
be installed. #5701 - for fifth digit
#5702 - for sixth.
Prerequlalte: For #5701 - #9193
for #5702 - #5701.
00.
00.
00.
Special Feature PrIeM:
MACI
MRC Purch... MMMC
Procau Control, Add'i
fifth digit
#5701
alxth digit
5702
• 5
5
• 20e
20e
'1.00
1.00
FIC
'77
5
Accauorlea: The following Items are available on a purchase only
basis for mdls 1, A1, B1, 3 and 83 only. For shipment with machine, order the desired Feature # Indicated below at the price
listed In M 10000 pages.
Endoraar Plata (#3792).
81ank Encloraer Plate (#37ea).
Note: When ordering #3792, It Is recommended that at least
one spare plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately
replaced .
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering Instructions and field
Installation.
00.
00.
EndOflllng - endorsing models can endorse documents with date,
Identlficatlon numbers and bank's legal endorsement. The Endorser Plate Is made to the customer's specifications, See
"Accessories" below. A Blank Endorser Plate Is alao available If
only partial endorsements are required. When ordering #3792
attach Endorser Plate Specification 4i! 12e-18"~ ... not required
for #3793.
Control Panel - has hubs for Inscribe Suppress and Process
Control Suppress, plus hubs for all 803 functions.
Suppll. .:
Magnetic Transfer Ribbon and
Endorsing Roll. Each magnetic transfer ribbon provides about
13,300 line Impressions.
Manuela: See "18M Marketing Publications KWIC Index," 63201621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, locking plug): #8880
for 115 V, ..a4 for 208 V, or #9888 for 230 V.
[2] Process Control: If deBired, #9180 for 1 position, #9181 for
2, #9192 for 3, or #9183 for 4
number of positions can be
changed or eliminated
00.
[3] Endorsing (mdls 1, A1, 81, 3, 83 only): See "Endorsing"
under "Highlights."
[4] Selector Key Arrangement: Mdls A1, A2 - #9771 for 4 rows
of 6 keys, or #9772 for 3 rows of eight keys. Mdls 81, 82 #8773 for 2 rows of 8 keys, or #9774 for 2 rows of 6 keys
plus 1 row of 4 keys.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ----- ------_.-
--
M 1203
May 79
DP Machines
1203 UNIT INSCRIBER
[No longer available ... features, RPQs and accessories are not
affected.]
Purpoee: Key-operated machine for printing numerals and special
symbols on checks and other documents in magnetic ink ... combined with functions of an adding machine.
Highlights: Continuous high-speed proving possible with a 10-key
electric adding machine which prints individual amounts and totals
on a paper tape. At the same· time, document can be Inscribed
with an amount field, a process control field, and be fully or partially
endorsed
and
sarial
numbered
see
Serial
Numbering/Endorsing (#3791) under "Special Features."
Speed depends upon operator and type of work processed. Has
one stacker and one 10-position net balance accumulator which
accumulates ll-position totals. Storage space provided for documents which cannot be processad. Intermixed card and paper
documents within the following specifications can be inscribed:
Length - 6" to 8-3/4" (paper) or 4.852" to 8-3/4" (card) ...
Width - 2-3/4" to 3-2/3" '" Thlcknesa - .003" to .007".
Inscribing - recommendations of American Bankers Association
are used. Two fields can be inscribed in magnetic ink on face of
documents in a 1/4" band parallel to and 3/16" up from bottom
edge. Spaced 8 characters/inch, starting approximately 5/16"
from right edge. Type font is E13B. Fields are, from right to left:
Amount - set up on adding keyboard and inscribed as ten digits
bracketed by amount symbol ... Process Control - established by
setting knobs in top cover of machine, inscribed adjacent to
amount field as one to four digits. Used to identify types of transactions or batches of work. Machine total and process control
codes can also be inscribed on control slips during total printing
operations. NOTE: If desired, up to four process control poSitions
are supplied at no charge ... see "Specify."
Document Counter - a six position counter ... reset manually.
Suppll..:
MagnetiC Transfer Ribbon,
Disposable Ink Roll, Adding Machine Unit Ribbon and Adding
Machine Paper Roll. Each Magnetic Transfer Ribbon provides
about 13,300 impressions.
attach Endorser Plate SpeCification
for #3793.
NON-ZERO BALANCE TEST (#5350). Depression of Sub-total
Key automatically locks keyboard If accumulated total is not zero.
PROCESS CONTROL, ADD'L (#5701, 5702). Up to four digits
are standard ... see "Specify" above. Up to two add'i digits can
be installed. .5701 - for fifth digit ... #5702 for sixth digit.
Prerequillt..: For
#5701 - #9193 ... for #5702 - #5701.
TRANSIT NUMBER FIELD INSCRIBER (#8020).
Inscribes
Transit-Routing numbers. dash and transit symbols.
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC FlC
$2.00 $278t
Acct No. Field Inscribe #1012 $20 $ 505
Serial Number /EndorM 3791
20
413
8.50
108
Non-zero Balance T..t 5350
180
2.00
39
5
Proc... Control, Add'i
1.00
52
fifth digit
5701
5
174
1.00
IIxth digit
5702
5
174
52
Tranllt Number Field
3.00
8020
20
505
Inscriber
318tt
Special Feature Prlc..:
Accesaorl..: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the desired Feature #
Indicated below at the price listed In M 10000 pages.
Endoraer Plete (.3792).
Blenk Endoreer Plete (#3793).
NOTE: When orderin& #3792, it is recommended that at least one spare
plate be stocked, u they cannot be immediately replaced.
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering Instructions, and
field Installation.
Manual.: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug - #8880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V.
[2] Process Control: If desired, #11190 for 1 digit, #11191 for 2,
#9192 for 3, or #11193 for 4 '" number of positions can be
changed or eliminated
PRICES:
Mdl
1203
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purcha..
$ 189
$4,140
Purchase Option: 50%
MMMC
$ 70
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
ACCOUNT NUMBER FIELD INSCRIBER (#1012).
Inscribes a
fixed-length account number and "On-Us" symbols. Field can be
anyone length from 5 to 10 digits, as specified by customer.
.
Specify: #11210 for 5 digits, #11211 for 6,
#9212 for 7, #9213 for 8, #11214 for 9, or #11215 for 10.
SERIAL NUMBERING/ENDORSER (#3791). Imprints full or partial endorsement and serial number. Endorsement prints fixed
distance (about 1-1/4") from bottom of document. Operator can
select left or right horizontal printing position. Serial number
consists of 4 automatic advancing positions separated from 2
manually-set positions by a selectable blank or dash. Serial number advance available in anyone of the following options: [1]
Advance one digit on credit feed (subtract key depression) ... [2]
Advance one digit on zero balance test (sub-total key depression)
... [3] Advance one digit on each document feed ... [4] Advance
one digit on manual key control. Advancing method will be set by
CE at installation or as required subsequently by customer. With
this feature, documents can be endorsed with date, Identification
number and bank's legal endorsement. The etched Endorser Plate
is made to the customer's specifications. See "Accessories"
below. A Blank Endorser Plate is also available if only partial
.
Note: The old Endorendorsements are required.
ser on 1203s shipped prior to July 1, 1964 may be changed to
the new feature by ordering #3791. A new Endorser Plate must
also be ordered. On purchased machines, the new feature may be
substituted for the old one at no charge except for the Field Installation Charge .and price of the new Endorser Plate ... see
"Accessories" below and M 10000 pages. When ordering #3792
not required
t
$13S if #8020 is already inatalled.
tt $174 if #1012 is already installed.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -
------- ----
== ===~=
M 1230 -1231
Mav 79
DP Machines
1230 OPTICAL MARK SCORING READER
Purpo..: Used to score objective tests or questlonalres.
Hlghllghta: Positionally marked test forms, questlonares, surveys,
etc., are automatically scored at a rated speed of 1,200
documents/hour. Scores are digitally accumulated for number of
right, wrong or omitted answers. Scores are printed on right
margin of answer sheets in one of two operator selected poSitions.
The unit has solid state circuits. It optically reads ordinary #2
pencil marks and marks made by a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer
mdl 1 or 2 with a 52- or 63-character type bar with arrangements
A, H or K, a 1443 mdl N1 or 2203 mdl A1 with a 52- or 63character type bar, or a 5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain
or train or the 1443/2203 type bar must be equipped with an
enlarged dash which replaces the standard dash. See "Type
Catalog:' Double threshold recognition distinguishes between
marks and erasures.
A correctly marked answer sheet is used to store correct responses and program controls internally. Answer sheets are fed from a
pneumatically controlled hopper with a 600-sheet capacity,
through the scoring area, and directed to one of two stackers. The
main stacker has a capacity of 600 answer sheets. Sheets with
detected errors are directed to a separate stacker with a 50-sheet
capacity. Answer sheets are stacked in reverse sequence in both
stackers.
Anawer Sh. .ta - 8-1/2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 response positions
printed on a side ... 2.000 positions when printed on both sides.
Preprinted response positions are printed in rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided into two 10-position groups. Each 10-position
group is called a word for the purpose of defining an answer area.
The maximum of 100 words per answer sheet can be divided into
various combinations of scorable parts. The answer sheet can
accommodate a maximum of 400 two-part questions ... 200 three-,
four- or five-part questions ... or 100 six- to ten-part questions.
Successive words can be designated for identification number as
necessery to accommodate customer requirements. When an
identification number is used on a two-.,sided answer sheet, it must
be marked on both sides.
SUDDII..: An electric typewriter ribbon (1136238)
or its equivalent, is used for printing scores.
For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 11 36430 or 1136940 on the
1403 (all mdls), 422536 on the 1443/2203, 1136990· on the
5203, or equivalent ribbons capable of producing acceptable
marks.
Acceaaory: A Hand Punch (171787) is available for punching
scoring keys to manually score mutilated answer sheets ... see
IRD sales manual.
Manuala: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
Specl!l: [11 Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking prug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Kickstrips: #9431 ... field installable. When kickstrips are
installed, the open area under the machine Is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer if the power outlet is located
under the machine.
MAC/
Mdl
PRICES:
MRC
Purcha..
MMMC
1230
1
$12,080
$46.50
$ 238
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
Warranty: B
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD PUNCH AnACHMENT (#1620). To cable-connect a 534
Card Punch mdl 3 for punching identification number, part scores,
and item responses into a standard 8O-column card. All information to be punched is stored as bits in a sonic delay line storage
unit until transferred to the card pum:h. The duplicating. feature of
the punch can be used to duplicate common data such as date,
school number, test number, etc. into all the cards. Up to 42
columns of data may be punched while maintaining a throughput
of 1,200 sheets/hour. Throughput decreases progressively as the
number of columns ·punched increases. Throughput Is approximately 750 sheets/hour when punching 80 columns of data.
When not used with the 1230, the 534 can be used as an independent card punch ... see 534 for details.
COUNTER, FORMULA (#2398). An additional counter which can
be controlled to add. subtract and transfer its contents to the
standard counter. Can be programmed to accumulate Rights,
Wrongs, or Rights minus (N) Wrongs, where N can be equal to 1,
1/4, 1/3 or 1/2. Also provides lor counting as right answers as
many responses (up to five) to a test item as have been program• Available via price request
med as possible right answers to the item. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Counter, RWO (#2399).
COUNTER, RWO (#2398). An additional counter which can be
controlled to count the number of Rights, or Wrongs, or Omits,
and transfer its contents to the standard counter. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Counter, Formula (#2398).
10 FIELD CHECKING (#4609). Provides the capability of checking words in the identification field for one of the following conditions: blank, multi-marks. or other than one mark. 10 field is defined as all words programmed to read prior to first end of field
mark. No scoring of test answers can take place in the 10 field.
, Prerequlalte: Card Punch Attacl)ment (#1620).
STORAGE (#7467). Used' as intermediate buffering device which
allows the counter to be cleared immediately after completion of a
part score ... permits the counter to be reused for additional
scoring without sacrificing answer sheet space. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prlc..:
#1620
Card Punch Attach
Counter, Formula
2398
Counter, RWO
2399
10 Field Checking
4609
Storage
7467
MAC/
MRC Purohase MMMC
$129 $6,185
$3.00
42
2,485
4.00
21
1,240
4.00
7
321
1.00
21
1,240
2.50
FIC
$ 52
66
52
29
52
1231 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
PurpoH: Reads marked data from 8-1/2" x 11" data sheets
directly into a 1401 (except A or H mdls), 1440 (except with 1441
mdl A2), 1460 or S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40 or 50.
NOTE: For use with the 1130 system, see GSD
manual.
Model 1 For use with 1401, 1440 or 1460.
Model N1 For use with S/360 mdl 22. 25. 30, 40 or 50.
Model Chang..: Cannot be made in the field.
Hlghllghta: Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically controlled
hopper with a 600-sheet capacity, through the reading area. and
directed to one of two stackers. The main stacker has a capacity
of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected errors are directed to a
separate stacker with a 50-sheet capacity. Documents are stacked
in reverse sequence in both stackers.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencils, or by a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer mdl 1 or 2 with a
52- or 63-character type bar with arrangement A, H or K, a 1443
mdl 1 or 2203 mdl A1 with a 52- or 63-character type bar, or a
5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain or train or the
1443/2203 type bar must be equipped with an enlarged dash
which replaces the stan~ard dash. See "Type Catalog."
1401, 1440, 1460 - documents are read at varying speeds,
dependent upon the mode switch setting. When set to
"Continuous," feeding Is at a constant speed of 2,000
documents/hour. When set to "Demand." feeding is controlled by
computer program, with speeds varying up to 1,600
documents/hour. The feeding mode selected depends upon the
computer program control method used. The 1231 mdl 1 can be
located up to 25 feet from the processor.
S/360 - documents can be read at a maximum constant rate of
2.000 documents/hour. Actual throughput depends upon computer
programming. Sheets are fed upon command from the computer.
Data is transferred to the processor by operation of the channel to
which the 1231 Is attached.
Data Tranamlaalon:
1401, 1440, 1460 - all marks read from a data sheet are stored
as bits in a sonic delay line storage unit until transferred to the
proce..sor b:;t execution of a read Instruction. Less than 10 milliseconds are required to transfer data from the delay line to
processor storage.
S/360 - marks read from the data sheei are stored In the 1231
mdl N1 by word and are transferred to the processor by operation of the channel to which the 1231 is attached.
Data Sh. .ta - 8-1/2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 mark positions printed on a side ... 2,000 positions when printed on both sides.
Preprinted mark positions are printed In rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided Into two 1O-posltlon groups. Each 10-posltion
group is called a word for the purpose of defining a marking area.
Each word can be divided Into two 5-posltion segments. Data
words and segments can be grouped In various combinations to
form fields for recording the source data.
PREREQUISITES:
For 1401, 1440, 1460 - a Serial I/O Adapter (#7080) on the
1401 or 1441 Processing Unit ... In a 1401, diagnostic programs
require at least 4,000 positions of core storage.
For S/360 - up to four 1231 mdl N1s can be attached to a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----==.:..::rn:
M 1231 - 1232
DP Machines
1231 Optical Mark Peg, Reader (cont'd)
system ... each requires a channel control unit position.
S/380 mdl 25 - special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/380 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - standard multiplexer channel, or
Selector Channels (special features. except on 20?2. one sel~-.
tor channel Is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050:
[NOTE: H the 1231 Is attached to a multiplexer channel. special
consideration must be given to priority.]
Limitation.:
S/380 mdl 25, 30 - operetton of 1231s Is not Included under
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility Featur.es.
S/380 mdl 40 - operation of 1231s Is not Included under the
1401/1460 Compatibility Feature (#4457).
SuDDlI..: For printing marks use IBM ribbon 1136430 or
1138940 on the 1403 (all mOdels), 422536 on the 1443/2203,
1136990 0 on the 5203, or equivalent ribbons capable" of producing acceptable marks.
Bibliography: 1401/1480 - GA24-1495, 1440 - GA24-3005.
S/380 - GC20-0360.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9804 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color (mdl N1 only): #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow, #9043
for blue. #9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] Kickstrips: #9431 ... field installable. When klckstrips are
Installed, the open area under the machine Is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customar if the power outlet Is located
under the machine.
[4] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29. 1967 ... see "Special Features."
MAC/
Purcha..
MRC
MMMC
Mdl
1
• 485
'20,520
N1
549
23,780
54
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
Metering: I/O Unit (online)
SPECIAL FEATURES
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation only
on units shipped prior to Decem~r 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 1231 without
generating spurious signals. "Thus, a CPU program. If it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off.
can continue operating. Prerequl8lte:
in all cases there are
CQmpatib,e EC level requirements.
PRICES:
1231
• 4'
MASTER MARK (#5045). A master data sheet, containing up to!
10 words of marked data. can be read by the 1231. The master
data sheet Is identified by a special preprinted mark and contains
data that is to be associated with all subsequent data sheets until
a new master sheet is read. Thus, data common to a series of
data sheets need be recorded and read only onca. When used
with a 1401, 1440 or 1460, the 1231 mdl 1 stores master mark
data on the sonic delay line and transfers the data with the data
for each subsequent detail sheet ... when used with a S/360. the
1231 mdl N1 transfers master mark ~ata only one time, as it is
being read from the mallter mark sheet:
MAC/
Special Feature Prica:
MRC Purcha.. MMMC FlC
18OIatlon, Control Unit #4700
NC
NC
NC
NC
Muter Mark
5045 • 54
'2,225 '1.50 • 77
1232 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
Pur~: Reads marked data from 8-1/2" x 11" data sheets Into
a 534 Card Punch mdl 3 for punched ~rd output.
PREREOUISITE: A 534 Card Punch mdl 3.
Highlights: Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically controlled
hopper with a 600-sheet capacity. through the reading area. and
directed to one of two stackers. The main s,acker has a capacity
of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected errOrs are directed· to a
separate stacker with a 5O-sheet capacity. Documents are stacked
In reverse sequence in both stackers.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencil. or by a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer mdl1 or 2 with a 52or 63-character type bar with arrangement A, H or K, a 1443 mdl
Nt or 2203 mdl A1 with a 52- or 63-character type bar, or a 5203
Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain or train, or 1443/2203 type
bar must be equipped with an enlarged dash which replaces the
standard dash. See "Type Catalog."
"May 79
A 534 Card Punch mdl 3 is cable-connected to the 1232 to p'unch
data read from the data sheets. All marks read trom a document
are stored as bits In a sonic delay line storage unit until transferred to the card punch. The duplicating feature of the card punch
can be used to duplicate common Information Into a group of
cards. When not used with the 1232. the 534 can be used as an
independent card punch ... see 534 for details.
Documents are read at varying rates of speed, depending upon
how many card columns ·are punched Into a card. Throughput
ranges from approximately 850 to 2,000 documents/hour.
Data Sheet. - 8-1/2" x 11" .. , up to 1,000 mark positions printed on a side ... 2,000 poSitions when printed on both sides. Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows of 20 positions. Each
row is divided Into two 10-posltlon groups. Each 10-positlon group
is called a word for the purpose of defining a marking area. If
Segmented Word (#6405) is installed, each word can ba divided
into two 5-positlon segments. Data words and segments can be
grouped into various combinations to form fields for recording the
source data.
SuWlle.: For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 1136430 or
1136940 on the 1403 (all models),·422536 on the 1443/2203,
1136990· on the 5203, or equivalent ribbons capable of producing acceptable marks.
Manua'.: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Klckstrips: #9431 ... field Instailable. When klckstrips are
Installed, the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer If the power outlet Is located
under the machine.
MAC/
Purcha..
MMMC
PRICES:
Mdt
MRC
$14,400
sea.50
1232
'353
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance! C
Warranty: B
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
MASTER MARK (#5045). A master data sheet. containing up to
10 words of marked data. can be read and stored on the delay
line for punching into output cards. The Information read from the
master sheet is retained on the delay line until a new master data
sheet is read. The master data sheet is identified by a special
preprinted mark and contains data that is to be associated with all
subsequent data sheets until a new master sheet Is read. Thus,
data common to a series of data sheets need be recorded and
read only once.
MULTIPLE SPREAD CARD (#5262). For punching up to four
cards for each data sheet read. Each card will be numbered sequentially by a punch In column 1. Any or all of the following can
be punched Into each card: master sheet data [if Master Mark
(#5045) is installed] ... page or identification data ... and a portion of the detail data from the data sheet in spread card form.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Unit Record
Card (#8560).
SEGMENTED WORD (#6405). For punching data from a word or
segment Into a single card column. A two-position mode switch
marked "Segment" and "Word" Controls mode of operation. When
set to "Segment." marks in postions 0 thru 4 are punched in one
card column and marks in postion 5 thru .Q are punched in the
next card column. When set to "Word," m&fki in positions 0 thru
9 are punched in one card. column.
UNIT RECORD CARD (#8580). For punching a separate card. for
each field on the data sheet. Cards will be punched only for those
fields containing marks. Each card can contain: master sheet data
Pf Master Mark (#5045) is Installed] ... Identification data (page
number, order number. salesman'B number, etc.) ... field number
(to identify Item) ... -and marked detail data (quantity, etc.).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Multiple Spreaa
Card (#5262).
MAC/
Special Future Prlcea:
MRC Purcha.. MMMC FtC
Meet., Mark
$2,225
$2.00
#5045 '54
'77
2.00
Multiple Spread Card
5282
32
1,330
44
1,330
1.00
21
SaglMJ'led Word
8405
32
Unit Record Card
42
1,775
2.00
44
8580
Document Inepectlon Gauge: One is furnished with each 1230.
1231 or 1232 as a Customer Engineering tool. Used for checking
printing alignment on data sheets.
addltionel gauges
(628848),
o Available via price request
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- ---- ----
- -=
--=- =':" =
M 1255.1
May 79
DP Machines
1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
Purpose: Sorts documents, used in banking and other applications, meeting specifications under "Highlights" below. Available
as a stand alone sorter, or with an appropriate attachment feature,
reads magnetic character data into a 2770 system in home or line
mode, into a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, a S/370 mdl 115
thru 158, 3031 Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor.
For use with System/3, System/32, System/34 and S/360 mdl
20, see GSD
manual.
Model 1
Reads and/or sorts up to 500 six-inch documents
per minute into six stackers.
Model 2
Reads and/or sorts up to 750 six-inch documents
per minute into six stackers.
Model 3
Reads and/or sorts up to 750 six-inch documents
per minute into twelve stackers.
Model Changes: Field install able only between mdl 1 and mdl 2.
Highlights: Actual sorting and processing speeds depend upon
length of document, paper quality, atmospheric conditions, and/or
2772 terminal and transmission limitations, or host system limitations. Reads all fields and sorts on any field.
Uses a new, lower cost, single gap MICR reading technique,
providing MICR capabilities for smaller volume operations. Reading
performances may differ from other reader sorters. Pre-installation
runs of actual documents are strongly recommended to determine
expected performance. The input hopper holds 5-1/2" of documents in a\gravity feed permitting non-stop feeding. Models 1 and
2 each have six horizontal stackers in one vertical bay, while
model 3 has twelve horizontal stackers arranged in two vertical
bays of six stackers each. Individual stackers have a document
capacity of 2-1/2". The transport mechanism opens for access to
the document path. An operator-resettable total document counter
is provided.
Designed for ease of operation and operator training. The operator panel, feed hopper and stackers are in a compact area for
operator convenience and minimum space requirements.
In addition to performing the basic modulus 10 or 11 checking
function, the self-checking number/improved recognition feature,
when installed and operative, is integrated with the MICR reading
circuitry to reduce account number rejects and substitutions. This
field is especially subject to folds, banding, and print specification
deviations. Rejects and character substitutions will be reduced in
proportion to the severity of document degradations, thus reducing
customer reconciliation expense.
Sorting -- for mdls 1 and 2, offline sorting uses five sort stackers
and one reject stacker for a two-phase digital sort. Phase 1 sorts
even digits, rejecting odd digits which are sorted in phase 2. This
conforms to the sort pattern of other six-stacker sorters and permits the start of phase 2 sorting without removing phase 1 documents from the stacker. If Alternate Sort Pattern (#9301) is specified, digits 0-4 sort in phase 1 and digits 5-9 sort in phase 2.
For mdl 3, one-phase sorting on digits 0-9 with rejects directed to
stacker "R" at top of first bay. Stacker "A" at top of second bay
is used to select items when the High Order Zero and Blank Column Selection feature is installed.
Online 2770 systems operation suspends sorting, automatically
alternating between two stackers on a stacker full condition, with
the rejecting of invalid documents.
Stacker selection is under program control when operating online
to a computer system.
Field Lengths -- the amount field and transit-routing field are fixed
length ... the process control field and serial number field are
variable length ... the account number field may be fixed or variable length. See "Specify" below.
Checking -- readability of each magnetic character and special
symbol, and the field length check on fixed-length fields, are
checked on all fields designated by the operator for reading into
the system or terminal in the online mode, or on all fields designated for checking in the offline mode. When attached to the
2770 system, error documents are automatically rejected by the
1255 and data is not transferred to the 2772 buffer.
MICR E13B Printing -- the type font, print quality, and code line
arrangement on the documents must meet the specifications recommended by the American Bankers Association Technical Committee on Check Handling. The specifications and related data are
available in booklets 147R3 and the Supplement to 147R3, both
of which are available at a nominal charge from the American
Bankers Association, 1120 Connecticut Avenue NW, Washington,
D.C. 20036.
Documents - intermixed paper and card documents (including
travelers checks) within the following specifications can be processed:
Width -- 2.5" to 4.25"
Length -- 5.75" to 8.875"
Thickness -- .003" to .007"
Paper Stock -- 20 lb. to 44 lb. (card stock)
Carrier documents, enclosing a non-proccessable item, up to
.013" in thickness may be processed.
Document Evaluation -- documents must be evaluated at least six
months prior to installation to determine whether the level of print
quality is acceptable to the customer, with time for corrective
action if necessary. Sub-standard E13B quality may cause excessive rejects and character substitutions.
Transmission -- when used with the 2770 system, the 1255 reads
into the two 2772 buffers, automatically stopping and alternating
between buffers on a specified number of documents. Buffer
Expansion (#1490) is required on the 2772. The number of records (documents) held by the buffer is determined by the maximum record length for the fields selected for reading. The
records/buffer is set at 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12. The records/buffer may
be chnaged by the CE, but is not subject to customer control. In
online transmission and pretransmission verification operations,
reading characters in excess of the maximum record length specified causes an error condition. The following options are available:
Maximum Record Length
(including special symbols)
Records/buffer
53
41
30
24
20
4
6
8
10
12
Balance-List (#14 70) facilitates pretransmission balancing to
batch total tickets of stacked batches .. In Mode A, operating under
1255 speed limitations, the feature totals the Amount Field on
good items and prints the good item total, batch ticket total, and
derived difference on the 2770 system printer. In Mode B. under
2770 system printer speed limitations. good items are detail listed
with the same total cycles as Mode A. Documents are listed with
limited print editing and limited columnar formatting.
PREREQUISITES:
For 1255 -- all documents must be mechanically joggered prior to
each pass through the machine ... joggers are available from
commercial sources. A sorting tray is recommended.
For 2770 -- one 1255 can be attached to a 2770 system. 1255
Attachment (#9755) and Buffer Expansion (#1490) are required
on the 2772 ... 2772 Adapter (#7850) is required on the 1255
itself. See "Special Features." For audit. maintenance. error
recovery and application procedures. the 2770 system must include a printer.
For S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50, a S/370 mdl 115 thru 158, 3031
Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor -- one 1255 can be attached to a system ... requires a channel control unit position ... a
byte multiplexer channel is recommended. The 1255 should normally be the highest priority device on the channel.
System/360/370 Adapter (#6360) is required on the 1255 ... see
"Special Features." Direct Control (#3274) or External Interrupt
(#3895) is required on the processing unit. There are no special
features required on the 4341 Processor to attach the 1255. External
Signal (#3898) is required on the 3115. 3125. and the 4331
Processor.
5/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on the 2025: Multiplexer Channel. or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard).
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
cheannel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030. 2040, 2050.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature). External Signal (#3898) '" see 3115. 3125. On a 3115-0.
#9336 is required.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard). Selector Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (special feature) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard). selector channels ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multi-lexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard). 2nri Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature). block multiplexer chE..,nels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155. 3158.
3031 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is standard).
block multiplexer channels{ five are standard) ... see 3031 .
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- -- -- --------== = ':' =
M 1255.2
May 79
DP Machines
1255 Magnetic Character Reader
(cont'd)
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexe,
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte mUltiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (2 are standard).
Limitations: For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors -- the 1255 is
not supported by any 1400 or 7000 series compatibility features.
The 1255 is not supported by the Model 20 Compatibility Feature
(#7520) on the 3115, 3125.
Bibliography: 2770 -- GA24-3089, S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370
-- GC20-0001 .
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): For· stand alone and
use with 2770 system; Locking plug -- #9880 for 115 V,
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V ... Non-lock plug -#9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V. For
use with S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors; #9902 for 208 V,
or #9904 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage ...
specify code consistent with system/voltage for pre-system
installation.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Alternate Sort Pattern: #9301, if desired. Replaces the standard even/odd pattern with the 0-4/5-9 pattern. See "Sorting"
under "Highlights." May be changed in the field
[4] Account Number Field Length: Specify one # from the table
below. A fixed field length assures maximum processing accuracy. However, a variable field length may be specified in lieu
of a fixed length. Lenqth of the account field length may be
changed in the field
FIXED FIELD
LENGTH (positions)
ACCOUNT NUMBER
5
7
6
8
9
10
#9210 #9211 #9212 #9213 #9214 #9215
VARIABLE
LENGTH
FIELD
#9219
[5] Superior Reading Performance: Self-checking Number/ Improved Recognition (#7060) is recommended
see
"Highlights" above and "Special Features" below.
[6] Use with 2770: Transmission Code -- #976t~ for EBCDIC, or
#9762 for ASCII ... must be consistent with 2772 code. May be
changed in the field
PREREQUISITE: 2772 Adapter
(#7850) ... see "Special Features" below.
[7] Use with S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50 or S/370 mdls 115
thru 158, a 3031 Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor -System/360/370 Adapter (#6360) is required ... see "Special
Features" below.
[8] Kickstrips: #9431, if desired. Field installable. NOTE. When
installed, the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer if the power outlet is located
under the machine.
PRICES:
1255
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
$
904
1,100
1,450
Purchase
MMMC
$35,460
40,590
55,260
$251
400
527
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online/Offline)
Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Per Call: 2
Useful Life Category: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
BALANCE-LIST (#1470).
[For use on 2770 system only] For
pre-transmission balancing of stacked document batches. Accumulates the total of good items, with or without detail listing ... a
batch total ticket initiates terminal printing of the good item total,
batch ticket total, and net difference. Invalid items are rejected. In
totaling mode, documents are checked for the maximum characters per document specified for transmission. In listing mode, a
different number of characters per document may be specified on
installation. In listing mode, selected fields are printed in document
order with limited print editing ... the amount field is right justified
with decimal insertion and high order zero sur,>pression ... other
fields are left justified in columns tabulated on fhe terminal printer
... speCial symbols, except dashes and the right amount field
symbol, are indicated with substitute printer symbols. Selected
fieldS, other than the process control field, missing from the document causes fields to print in alternate columns. Limitation: The
feature is not operative during line transmission or fine sorting
operations. Prerequisites: 2772 Adapter (#7850) ... the 2770
system must include a printer or display unit. Field Installation:
Yes.
DASH SYMBOL TRANSMISSION (#3215).
dash symbol from transit field to storage. With symbol in storage,
the program can distinguish between duplicate foreign and U. S.
transit numbers. Field Installation: Yes.
51-COLUMN CARD SORTING (#4380).
Model 1 -- for reading
and sorting 51-column card documents. When installed, machine
speed is reduced to approximately 405 dpm for six-inch documents. For 51-column cards, speed is approximately 500 dpm.
Models 2 and 3 -- when installed, machine speed. is reduced to
approximately 605 dpm for six-inch documents. For 51-column
cards, speed is approximately 750 dpm. Note: For optimum performance on all models, card documents should be separated out
from standard size ABA documents on first pass operations. Field
Installation: Yes.
HIGH ORDER ZERO & BLANK SELECTION (#4520).
This permits selection to pocket A of documents during a digit sort having
only blanks or zeros in the sort pOSition and in all higher order
positions of the field. Limitation: Available on the mdl 3 only ...
operates offline only. Field Installation; Yes.
S/360/370 ADAPTER (#6360).
To attach the 1255 to the
Multiplexer Channel (#5248) on the 2025, 3115, 3125 or 4331, or
the standard multiplexer channel on the 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050,
3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3, 3148, 3155, 3158, 3031 or
4341. Field Installation: Yes.
t
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER/IMPROVED RECOGNITION (#7060).
For reducing rejects and substitutions caused by defects in the
account number field and for checking Modulus 10 or 11 selfcheck digit account numbers up to 10 positions long, including the
self-check digit and dashes. SL T pluggable card wiring determines
the modulus calculated and weighting factor for each digit. SLT
card is removed and inserted by the CE for customer wiring. An
operator panel on/off switch is the only customer control of the
feature. The self-check digit may be in any position, always using
a weighting factor of 1. Modulus 10 will check any weighting
factor 0 thru 9, summing the product digits, and checking for an
even multiple of 10. Modulus 11 will check any weighting factor,
summing the products and checking for either an even multiple of
11, or for a constant remainder of 4.
This feature, when installed and operative, replaces the basic
character substitution checking circuitry with the more accurate
modulus 10 or 11 checking circuitry while the account number
field is being read. Documents with marginal printing that might
normally be'· rejected as potential substitutions will be processed if
all characters pass the self-checking digit test, thus reducing the
chances of a reject. All account numbers that fail the selfchecking digit test will cause the document to reject, thus reducing the chances of a substitution. Since the account number field
is frequently subject to folds, banding, multilation and print specification deviations, rejects and substitutions will be reduced in
proportion to the severity of documnet degradation. Field
Installation: yes.
2712 ADAPTER (#7850). To attach the 125!do a 2772 Control
Unit. A switch (adjacent to the self-checking number switch) is
provided which permits listing documents previously rejected to
determine which field and which character caused the reject. Field
Instaliation:Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
#1470 $ 75
$2,990 $ 7.00
Balance-List
Dash Symbol Transmis 3215
56SUC
35
NC
51-Column Card Sorting 4380
16
661
NC
High Order Zero &
1,315
5.00
Blank Selection
4520
33
5/360/370 Adapter
6360 506
19,800 37.00
Self Checking Number /
Improved Recognition 7060
54
2.50
2,135
2772 Adapter
7850
1,915
48
3.00
Transmits the E13B
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
FIC
$ 343
21
93
157
1,255
173
323
--------- --===
---------':" =
M 1260.1
May 79
DP Machines
1260 ELECTRONIC
INSCRIBER
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Automatic Float AnalYSis
(#1294, 1296).
Purpose: A key operated unit for proving deposits, sorting and
listing of checks into eight individual stackers, and MICR inscribing of checks and deposits in the ABA recommended E13B format.
Highlights: The ten-key keyboard permits fast, accurate, touch
amount entry for sorting, listing, proving, inscribing and, with
Endorsing and Serial Numbering (#3791), endorsing checks in a
single operation. Has eight machine distribution stackers and
detail tapes. Three or five external stackers are provided for nonprocessable documents ... see "Specify" below.
Intermixed card and paper documents within the following specifications can be inscribed: Length - 5.750" to 9.000", plus 51column cards ... Width - 2.750" to 3.750" ... Thickness -- .003"
to .007".
All arithmetic functions are accomplished by a single electronic
accumulator which has a ten-digit addition, subtraction and accumulation capability. Electronic storage is provided to store the
following data and totals: Thirteen distribution totals, nine of which
develop item count (maximum, 9999) [see Additional Totals
(#1071) under "Special Features"] ... group debit total ... group
net total ... grand total ... second field storage and/or adding
machine total ... serial number (control tape - maximum 99999) ...
deposit item count (maximum, 9999) ... grand total item count
(maximum, 10 digits).
Inscribing -- as standard, two fields can be inscribed in E13B font
on the face of documents in the clear band field. The fields are,
from right to left: Amount -- set up in the amount keyboard and
inscribed as ten digits bracketed by the amount symbol ... Process
Control -- emitted under program and selector key control and
inscribed adjacent to the amount for identification of transaction or
batch. Deposit item count total also inscribes in the process control field on deposit tickets. Distribution totals with automatic
process control codes identifying the stacker and item count totals
are inscribed on control documents. Six positions of process
control inscribing and printing are standard. For Routing and
Transit, and Account Number, see "Special Features" below.
One cycle automatic group balance with efficient multiple credit
ability provides printout of total debits and net debit/credit difference on non-balance.
Automatic high dollar selection may be accomplished through
program wiring to override normal selector key operation and sort,
add and list checks of $1,000.00 and over into pocket number 8.
Programs - three programs may be stored in the machine and are
selected by a dial program switch. One set of program cards is
shipped with each machine. A second set will be provided, if
specified ... see "Specify" below. A third set is also available ...
see "Special Features."
Supplies Magnetic Transfer Ribbon,
Endorsing Ink Roll, and paper and ribbon supplies ... each Magnetic Transfer Ribbon provides approximately 33,000 line impressions.
Manuals -- see "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, locking plug): #9880
for 11 5 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] External Stackers: #9686 for three, or #9687 for five.
[4] Up-ending Kit: #9840, if require-:J ... loan basis, remains property of IBM.
{5] Program Cards, Second Set: #9552, if required
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1260
1
$ 308
$11,700
$119
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEARURES
Permits inscribing of the
ACCOUNT NUMBER FIELD (#1010).
amount, process control, and account number in one pass of the
document. Operation is sililiar to that of the Routing and Transit
Field (#6300), in that the account number may be transferred to
storage and inscribed in the same pass as the amount and process control field. A repeat key and a means of clearing the storage are provided. Includes an additional setup key adjacent to the
ten-key keyboard which allows the operator to set a blank or dash
in either the account number or routing and transit field.
AUTOMATIC FLOAT ANALYSIS (#1294,1296).
#1294 -- designed to be used with the Routing and Transit Field
if the deposit ticket has not been pre-printed. A 4-digit serial
number is printed in the field on the deposit ticket and is
repeated in the four high-order positions of the field on each
float document.
#1296 - designed to be used when the Routing and Transit
Field on the deposit ticket has been pre-printed with the bank
number. No printing will occur in the field on the deposit
ticket, but 5555 is printed in the four high-order positions of
the field on each float document.
Either #1294 or #1296 permit from one to six float amounts in
dollars and cents (10 digits) and corresponding item counts (4
digits) to be classified and accumulated under program control
wiring and selector key control as the debit items are processed
for proof of deposit. The activity of programmed float classes is
detected, so that when the balance status of the deposit is established as the deposit ticket is processed, the developed float data
can be inscribed. Operator feeding of one float ticket is required
for each two classes of float developed. No documents or machine
cycles are required for inactive float accumulators. When this
feature is installed, the total number of assignable counters is 20,
each with an associated 4-digit item count. When the "Float"
switch is "OFF," these may be used as normal distribution counters ... when the switch is "ON," only 14 of these are available as
distribution counters.
Maximum: One, #1294 or #1296.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Additional Totals (#1071).
CHECKER SIGNAL (#1935). A light signal under switch control
that provides the operator with a means of signalling a supervisor.
ENDORSING AND SERIAL NUMBERING (#3791). The endorsement prints at random in an area approximately 3" wide. In addition to printing the bank's endorsement stamp, a date, a 5-digit
machine, batch or branch identification, and a 5-digit serial number is provided. The serial number may be programmed in advance for each document fed, or to advance for each deposit. The
serial number printed on the check is also printed on the control
tape to provide a complete audit trail. With this feature, documents
can be endorsed with date, identification number and bank's legal
endorsement. The etched Endorser Plate is made to the
customer's specifications. See "Accessories" below. A Blank
Endorser Plate is also available if only partial endorsements are
required. When ordering #3792 attach Endorser Plate Specification
... not required for #3793.
HIGH VOLUME TOTAL (#4603). To print one quick kill total in
the Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket. The quick kill
total will print in the normal Routing and Transit format with a dash
symbol separating the four high-order and four low-order digits.
This feature assumes only one float level of quick kill items.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Transit Analysis (#8016).
PROCESS CONTROL KEYBOARD (#5705). Consists of two rows
of keys, numbered blank thru 9, located to the right of the ten-key
keyboard. Used either to key in a special transaction code, or to
override any two digits of the emitted process control code.
ROUTING AND TRANSIT FIELD (#6300). Per~its printing of the
Routing and Transit Field as well as the Amount Field and Process
Control Field in one pa!ls of the document. The field is keyed in
the ten-key keyboard and transferred into a storage area. The
amount is then keyed and the document dropped into the check
chute. The document will be pOSitioned at the inscribing station,
the amount will be inscribed and process control if programmed.
The document will advance to the Routing and Transit Field and
the field will be inscribed. A "Routing and Transit" key and means
of clearing the routing and transit storage are provided.
SHIFT IDENTIFICATION SWITCH (#7138). A dial switch, labelled
OFF-1-2-3, that provides the operator with a means of identifying
a shift roumber in anyone of the five positions of the Distribution
Total Identification number. The switch is located adjacent to the
program switch.
THIRD PROGRAM (#7948).
Provides program cards, wires and
overlays for a third program. Prerequisite: Program Cards, Second Set (#9552) ... see "Specify" above.
TRANSIT ANALYSIS (#8016).
To print two float figures in the
Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket. The four high-order
digits of the field will inscribe one class of float in hundreds of
dollars ... the last four (or low-order) digits of the field will inscribe
a second class of float in hundreds of dollars. The feature uses
two of the standard distribution amount accumulators. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with High Volume Total (#4603).
Adds sufficient counters to
ADDITIONAL TOTALS (#1071).
provide a total of 20 distribution totals, each with a 4-digit item
count. These counters are used and controlled in the same manner as the normal distribution counters in the basic machine.
Not to be reproduced without .written permiSSion.
------------....- --_.------ -- ----
M 1260.2
May 79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
FIC
Account Number Field #1010 $ 17
$ 551
1071
17
551
Additional Totals
1294
34
1,060
Auto Float Analysis
1,060
Auto Float Analysis
1296
34
1935
25SUC
25
Checker Signal
689
Endorse & Serial Num 3791
17
10
321
High Volume Total
4603
Process Control Keybd 5705
17
551
Routing & Transit Field 6300
17
551
Shift Identification Sw 7138
2
73
7948
3
123
Third Program
Transit Analysis
8016
13
482
$ 91
23
32
32
92
100
23
66
91
27
15
23
1260 Electronic Inscriber
$4.00
5.50
5.50
5.50
NC
6.00
1.50
1.50
4.00
NC
NC
3.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the desired Feature
# indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages.
Endorser Plate (#3792)
Blank Endorser Plate (#3793)
NOTE: When ordering #3792, it is recommended that at least one spare
plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately replaced.
See M10000 pages for descriPtion, ordering instructions, and field
installation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- ----.:.::::::;: == ';' ==
1282
M 1282.1
May 79
DP Machines
OPTICAL
READER
CARD
PUNCH
PRICES:
Mdl
1282
Purpose: Optically reads numeric data and three special characters from printed 51- or 80-column cards and punches the data
read into the same card at a maximum rate of 200 cards/minute.
Highlights: The digits 0-9 and three special characters, plus (+),
dash (-) and a solid vertical Line #7080).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --------
=:-::S';'5:
M 1441.2
May 79
DP Machines
1441 Processing Unit (cont'd)
EXPANDED SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT AI)APTER (#3845). [mdls
A3-A6 only] To attach the 1441 (1440) directly to a 1411 or
7114 Processing Unit (1410 or 7010). This feature can also be
used in lieu of a Serial I/O Adapt!!r (#7080) for any of the attacliments possible via #7080 ... #3845 and #7080 cannot both be
inatalled. See SRL Reference Manual for details. Specify: Length
of cable. to a maximum of 100 feet.
Prerequisites:
Bit Test (#1470) and Indexing and Store Address Register
(#4631) ... Control Adapter (#1067, 1068) on 1411 or 7114 ...
Priority Feature (#5620) and Processing Overlap (#5730) on
1411.
INTERRUPT (#4708). Allows processor to perform shared time
operations. More time can be spent on processing and less on
1026 Transmission Control Unit operations.> Programmed Instructions which continuously test for line service will not be required.
Prerequisite: Transmission Control Unit Attacnment - 1026 (#8024).
TIME EMITTER (#7958). Causes a process interrupt every 3.6
seconds for program simulation of a real time clock and/or interval timers.
Prerequisite: Interrupt (#4708).
TRANSLATE FEATURE (#8023).
[Not available for mdl A2]
Provides a fast and flexible code translation capability for nonstandard IBM codes.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ATTACHMENT - 1026 (#8024).
[Not available for mdl A2] To attach up to four 1026 Transmission Control Units and the 1447 Console mdl 1, and, if desired, a
1447 mdl 2. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Transmission
Control Unit Attachment - 1448 (#80:15) or Console Attachment
(#2:160). Prerequisite: In a 1440, Indexing. and Store Address
Register (#4631).
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ATTACHMENT - 1448 (#8025).
[Not available for mdl A2 or C mdls] To attach a 1448 Transmission Control Unit. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Transmission Control Unit Attachment - 1026 (#8024).
Prarequlslte: Indexing and Store Address Register (#4631).
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
FIC
• General Purpose Features
Bit Test
#1470 $ 20 $ 848 $ 1.00
Index & Store Address
Register
4631
91
5,080
1.50
Multiply-Divide
5275
333
11,950
12.50
$ 11
28
309
• Card I/O Feature
5881
10
529
1.00
35
3281
3321
3832
6396
6399
6011
50
255
50
35
NC
40
2,460
12,260
2,565
1,720
NC
1,960
4.00
11.00
5.50
1.00
NC
1.00
29
106
267
9
NC
9
• Printer Features
Expanded Print Edit
3835
Printer Attach (for 1440) 5561
20
25
795
1,410
1.00
1.00
14
26
7802
118
7,295
2.50
162
• Serial Input/Output Feature
Serial I/O Adapter
7080
101
3,845
2.00
60
2,250
NC
12,470
4;625
476
3,075
1.00
NC
2.50
1.50
3.00
31
NC
60
21
44
88
2;670
6,920
1.00
2.50
71
101
Punch Col Skip Control
• Disk Storage Features
Direct Seek
Disk Storage Control
Exp Disk Storage Cntrl
Scan Disk
Seek Overlap Adapter
Track Record
• Magnetic Tape Feature
Tape Adapter
• Data Transmission Features
Console Attachment
2260
40
Direct Data Channel
3271
NC
Expnd Serial I/O Adptr 3845
333
Interrupt
4708
101
Time Emitter
10
7951'
Trenslate Feature
6023
81
Transmission Control Unit Attachment
for 1026(s)
6024
50
for 1448
152
8025
1.00
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'-------- ------.= =-----=--":' =
M 1442.1
May 79
DP Machines
1442 CARD READ PUNCH - Models 1, 2 and Nl
Purpose: A combination punched card I/O unit for a 1240, 1440,
1450, S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 and 195, any S/370 Processor or
any 4300 Processor.
Modell
Model 2
[No longer available] For 1240, 1440 or 1450 ...
reads at rated speed of 300 cards/minute
punches at rated speed of 80 columns/second ...
has one stacker.
[No longer available] For 1240, 1440 or 1450 ...
reads at rated speed of 400 cards/minute
punches at rated speed of 160 columns/second ...
has two stackers.
Model Nl For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor ... reads at
rated speed of 400 cards/minute ... punches at rated speed of 160 columns/second ... has two stackers.
Model Changes: Can be made between mdl 1 and 2 ... a mdl 1 or
2 can also be changed to a 1442 Card Reader mdl 4, but not vice
versa ... no changes can be made to or from a mdl Nl
Highlights: Format control and analysis are controlled by the
system's processing unit. Model Nl reads and punches the 256
codes of the Extended BCD Code. Hopper capacity is 1,200
cards ... stacker capacity is 1,300 cards. In mdl Nl, cards go to
stacker 1 unless program directed to stacker 2. Model Nl contains its own control unit.
Input Section - invalid codes and mispositioned cards are detected. The light-sensing mechanism is checked for proper functioning
in every read cycle.
Output Section -- cards are punched serially after passing through
the light-sensing station. Cards can be either blank or prepunched. Actual punching speed depends upon the number of
columns punched, including interspersed blank columns. Rated
speed for punching columns 1-10 is 265 cards/minute for mdl Nl
... for punching columns 1-80 is 91 cards/minute for mdl Nl.
Punching is checked.
Card Limitations - generally, scored cards require careful handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- S-l, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
External Scores (after separation) -- for reading and punching:
On column 80 end -- M-3, M-7, M-ll (with round corners) or
CF-ll (with round corners); On column 1 end - an M-7, M-ll
(with round corners) or CF-ll (with round corners) score may be
used on a md! Nl with serial no. 40044 or above, or a machine
having punch unit serial no. 2638 or above stamped on the back
of the tie bar. For reading without punching: On column 80 end,
and for a maximum of three passes, M-5, OM-2 and CF-4.
All other scores may result in unstisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Maximum: S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor -- the 1442 mdl Nl
includes its own control unit. The number attachable depel)ds
upon the total complement of I/O control units in the system.
There is a natural limit of eight control units on each channel ... in
a S/360 mdl 44, up to two control units can be attached to each
High Speed Multiplexer Channel subchannel.
PREREQUISITES: For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor -- a control
unit position on a system channel.
5/360 mdl 25 - special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'l High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195 or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 - selector
channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870, or shared subchannel of
a 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
5/310 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector or
Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 - multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), or block multiplexer channel (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard)
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte mUltiplexer channel (optional). block multiplexer
channel (opt/onal).
4341 Proeessor - byte mUltiplexer channel (standard). block mUltiplexer
channels (two are standard).
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360. S/370 -- GC20-0001
The following specifications can be changed in the field (also
applies to mdls 1 and 2).
Specify: [1] Voltage: Models 1 and 2 (AC. 3-phase. 4-wire. 60 Hz)
- #9903 for 208 V. or #9905 for 230 V ... Model Nl (AC.
l-phase, 3-wire. 60 Hz) -- #9902 for 208 V. or #9904 for 230
V.
[21 Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or (mdl Nl only), #9046 for white .
[3] 1442 Nl Compatibility Attachment (mdl Nl only):
required ... see ··Special Features."
May be
[4] Isolation Control Unit (mdl Nl only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
1442
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
It
$ 352
2t
N1
498
661
Purchase
$14,280
15,130
19,990
MMMC
$68.00
83.00
152.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
NOTE: On a 1442 mdl 1 or 2, the following features, as appropriate, are on an "as available" basis for field installation.
CARD IMAGE (#1531, 1532). In any system - permits processing of cards with multiple punching in a single card column. In
1 240, 1440 or 1450 - converts binary coded cards into BCD
codes, and vice versa ... approved scored cards can be read
without suspending validity checking on other than scored columns
... cards with interspersed conventional codes and binary coded
data can be read.
#1531 - for mdl 1 or 2 ... #1532 -- for mdl Nl.
When reading in card image mode, the validity check is suspended because all characters are considered valid. When installed on
the first 1442 attached to a 1240, 1440 or 1450. this feature also
functions on a second 1442. Prerequisite: For mdl 1 or 2 - Card
Image (#9035) on the 1241 or 1441 ... see "Specify" under
1 241 or 1441.
1442 N1 COMPATIBILITY ATTACHMENT (#4445).
[Mdl N1
only] Required if the 1442 mdl Nl is to be used with 1440 Compatibility (#4442) on a 2025, or with 1442/1443 Attachment
(#4464) or 1620 Compatibility (#7190) on a 2030. Required only
for operation in compatibility mode, not required for normal S/360
operation of the 1442 mdl Nl. limitation: Cannot be installed on
a unit with serial no. under 40100.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Mdl Nl only ... for field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the
1442 mdl Nl without generating spurious signals. Thus, a Processor program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system
before power is turned off, can continue operating. Limitation:
Cannot be installed on a unit with serial no. under 40068.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC i~vel
t
No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - ------- - --=-- ==
':' =
M 1442.2
MaV 79
OP Machines
1442 Card Read Punch - Models 1, 2 and N1
requirements,
(cont'd)
1442 CARD READER - Models 3
[No longer available]
PUNCH COLUMN SKIP· (#5880).
[Mdls 1, 2 only] Increases
system throughput by allowing the punch to space over card
columns without interlocking the system .. , a "Punch Column
Skip" instruction specifies the number of card columns to be
spaced through by the punch. If two 1442s, mdls 1 and 2 in any
combination, are installed, each may be equipped with this feature.
Prerequisite: Punch Column Skip Control (#5881) on the 1241 or
1441 ... only one #5881 is required if #5880 is installed on two
1442s.
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6406). [Mdl 1 only] Provides a second stacker ... cards can be selected into this stacker under
program control.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
Card Image#1531
for mdl 1, 2
1532
for mdl Nl
1442 Nl Compat Attach 4445
4700
Isolation, Control Unit
6406
Selective Stacker
$ 35
36
NC
NC
25
$ 41
42
NC
NC
73
$1,260
1,260
NC
NC
831
$1.00
1.00
NC
NC
1.00
Model 4
and
4
For 1 240 or 1440 ... has two stackers.
Model Changes: A 1 442 Card Read Punch mdl 1 or 2 can be field
changed to a 1442 Card Reader mdl 4, but not vice versa.
Highlights: Provides high-speed, low-cost punched card input.
Cards are read by a light-sensing unit at speeds up to 400
cards/minute. The 64 codes of the BCD Code can be read. Invalid
codes and mispositioned cards are detected. The Light-sensing
mechanism is checked for proper functioning in every read cycle.
Has a l,200-card capacity hopper and two 1,300-card capacity
radial stackers.
Card limitations; Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has been
approved.
Internal Scores· (before separation) - S-l, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
External Scores (after separation) - column 1 end:
M-4, M-5, M-7, M-11 (with round corners), CF-4 and
round corners) ... column 80 end: M-3, M-6, M-7,
round corners), CF-11 (with round corners), and for
of three passes, M-5, OM-2, CF-4.
OM-2, M-3,
CF-11 (with
M-11 (with
a maximum
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Maximum: Up to two 1442 mdl 4s can be attached to a 1 240 or
1440 system.
Limitations: On a 1240 or 1440, if a 1442 Card Read Punch mdl
1 or 2 or a 1 444 Card Punch is used, only one 1 442 mdl 4 can
be installed ... if two 1442 nidi 1 sand 2s in any combination or
both a 1442 mdl 1 or 2 and a 1444 are used, a 1442 mdl 4
cannot be installed.
Prerequisite: For 1240 or 1440 - the first 1442 (mdl 1, 2 or 4)
attached to the system must have a Card Read Punch Adapter
(# 1 632) ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: GA22-3005
The fol/owing specifications can be changed in the field.
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1442
4t
$ 249
$8,720
$77.50
Relltal Plan: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: 8
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following features, as appropriate, are on an "as available"
basis for field installation on a 1442 mdl 3 or 4.
'CARD IMAGE (#1531). [Mdl 4 only] To convert binary coded
cards into BCD codes ... also permits processing of cards with
multiple punching in a single card column, Approved scored cards
dan be read without suspending validity checking in other than the
scored columns. When reading in card image mode, the validity
check is suspended because all characters are considered valid.
Cards with interspersed conventional punching codes and binary
coded data can be read. When installed on the first 1442 attached
to a system, this feature also functions on a second 1442 in the
system. Prerequisite: Card Image (#9035) on the 1241 or 1441
... see "Specify" under 1 241 or 1441.
CARD PUNCH ADAPTER (#1632). [Mdl 4 only] Required on the
first 1442 attached to a system ,.. the second 1442 does not
require this feature. When a 1442 mdl 1 or 2 and a 1442 mdl 4
are both attached to a system, the 1442 mdl 1 or 2 must be the
first unit attaGhed and must be equipped with this feature.
INPUT /OUTPUT ADAPTER (#4661). [Mdl 3 only] To attach a
1414 I/O Synchronizer mdl 5 or 8 with the teleprocessing .Jnits or
printer it controls to the 1442 mdl 3.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Card Image
#1531 $ 35
Card Read Punch Adptr 1632
25
Input/Output Adapter
4661
64
t
No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$1,260
1,260
2,095
$1.00
1.00
1.25
FIC
$ 35
70
58
._---- --------
- - - --===
':' =
M 1442.3
May 79
DP Machines
1442 CARD PUNCH - Models 5 and N2
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a S/360 mdl 20 thru 75.
any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor ... punches cards at a
rated speed of 160 columns/second.
For use of the 1442 mdl 5 with an 1130 system. see GSD
manual.
Model 5
For a S/360 mdl 20.
Model N2 For S/360 mdl 22 thru 75 any S/370 Processor and
any 4300 Processor ... includes its own controls.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block multiplexer
channels (two are standard).
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has been
approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4. M-5. S-1, 10-1.
External Scores (after separation) -- M-7. M-11 (with round
corners). CF-11 (with round corners) on either end. M-3 on column 80 end only.
Model Changes: Changes between mdls 5 and N2 are not possible. nor are changes to any other 1442 model.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Highlights: Format control and analysis are performed by the
system's processing unit. Blank or prepunched cards are punched
serially. Actual speed depends upon the number of columns
punched. including interspersed blank columns. Rated speed in
cards/minute: Columns 1 thru 10 is 265 ... columns 1 thru 80 is
91. Punching is checked. The unit has a 1.200-card capacity
hopper and a 1.300-card capacity stacker. The Extended BCD
Interchange Code (256 codes) is punched. The model N2 requires
Card Image (#1531) to punch binary codes. See "Special Features."
cannot be used.
Maximum:
[3] Cable Adapter (mdl 5 only): #9099. Required if the 1442 is to
be attached to an installed 2020 which has serial no. under
20000. Plant installation only, but can be removed in the field.
S/360 mdl 20 -- one 1442 mdl 5 can be attached to the 2020
Processing Unit ... see S/360 mdl 20 in GSD sales manual for
allowable I/O unit configurations.
S/360 mdl 22 thru 75, any S/370 Processor and any 4300
ProceslIOr - the number of 1442 mdl N2s that can be attached
depends upon the number of available system channel control
unit positions.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
Bibliography: S/360 mdl 20 -- GA26-3565. S/360 mdl 22 thru
75 - GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (must be consistent with system voltage): Mdl
5 -- with S/360 mdl 20, #9903 for 208 V. or #9905 for 230 V.
Mdl N2 - #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[4] Isolation. Control Unit (mdl N2 only): May be required on units
shipped prior to Decmeber 29. 1967 ... see "Special Features."
[5] If the 1442 mdl 5 is to be used as an emulating unit in a
S/360 mdl 20 with 1401/1440 Compatibility (#3901) see
#3901 under 2020 (GSD
manual).
PREREQUISITES:
S/360 mdl 20 -- a 2020 Processing Unit submodel 1, 2. 5 or 6
equipped with a 1442 Model 5 Attachment (#4460) ... if the
installed 2020 has a serial no. under 20000, a Cable Adapter
(#9099) is required on the 1442. See "Specify" below.
S/360 mdl 22 thru 75, any S/370 Processor and 1liiy 4300
Processor -- an available control unit position on a system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer or Selector
Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022. 2030, 2040, 2050.
8/360 mdl 44 - special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, or Add'i High Speed Multiplexer Subchannels.
S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860. basic multiplexer channel of 2870, or Selector Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860. 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115. 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard). Selector Channels or Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see
3135.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1442
5
$ 330
472
$ 9,720
14,280
$98.00
134.00
N2
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD IMAGE (#1531).
[Mdl N2 only] Permits punching of
cards with multiple punching in a single column.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Mdl N2 only] For field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29. 1967 ... standard on unit shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the
1442 mdl N2 without generating spurious signals. Thus. a Processor program. if it can be logically disconnected from the system
before power is turned off, can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all case there are compatible EC level requirements.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Card Image
#1531 $ 35
Isolation, Control Unit
4700
NC
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 - multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 3145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155. 3158.
S/370 mdl 165, 168 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
of 2870, or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860. 2870,
2880.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard). block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard).
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$1,260
NC
$1.00
NC
FIC
$145
NC
-------- --=--- =------ --=--':' =
M 1443.1
May 79
DP Machines
1443 PRINTER
Channels (special features), or Block Multiplexer Channels
(special features) ... see 3135.
Purpose: Printed output unit for a 1450, S/360 mdl 22 thru 85,
195, any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
Model 3
[No longer available] For 1 450
speed with 52-character set.
140 Ipm rated
5/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
Model4
[No longer available] For 1450
speed with 52-character set.
230 Ipm rated
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector
channels ... see 3145.
Model N1 For S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor ... 240 Ipm rated speed
with 52-character set.
5/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
NOTE: For speeds with other character sets, see Selective
Character Set (#6402) under "Special Features."
Model Changes: Can be made in the field between mdls 3 and 4
only ... see "limitations."
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplex.er channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158, 3158-3.
Highlights: Models 3 and 4 have 144 print positions ... standard
on all other models are 1 20 print positions. On all models the
52-character set is standard. Actual speed depends upon the
operation ... see Selective Character Set (#6402) under "Special
Features." The system's processing unit performs all format and
analysis control. A line of printing is presented to the printer in the
arrangement in which it is to be printed.
5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic
multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) of 2870, or shared subchannel of 2880 .... see 2860,
2870,2880.
Each print position can print any of 52 characters ... alphabetic,
numeric and 16 special characters. Characters are spaced
10/inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch, under operator control. Marginally punched continuous forms from 4" to 16-3/4" in
overall width are fed by an automatic carriage. Maximum form
depth is 22" at 6 lines/inch ... 16-1/2" at 8 lineS/inch. Forms
spacing and skipping are controlled by a 1 2-channel tape in the
carriage. Skipping is at approximately 15" /second.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
An enlarged dash (character no. 830704) is available for printing
on documents to be read by 1230, 1231 and 1232 optical mark
readers. Depending upon the system, see appropriate section of
"Type Catalog" for ordering instructions: The ribbon used on the
1443 must be capable of producing printEld characters suitable for
recognition by the optical reader used.
Limitations: When a model change is made between a mdl 3 and
4, serial no. 10330 and below, type bars (less segments) must be
replaced ... replacement bars will be furnished at no charge on a
one-for-one basis. Previously installed segments will be installed
in the new type bares) without charge. Submit MES, indicating:
(a) Model change from 3 to 4, or vice versa.
(b) Feature #(s) and quantity of each character set requiring a
new type bar.
(c) Feature # for type size, #9731 for .079", or #9733 for
.095".
A 1 20 print-position bar cannot be used in a machine equipped
with Print Positions, 24 Add'i (#5558) unless one additional segment is added and all segments are rearranged in the required
sequence ... conversely, a 144 print-position bar cannot be ysed
In a 120 print-position machine unless one segment is removed
arid the remaining segments are rearranged in the required sequence ... see "Type Catalog."
Neither segments nor type bars are interchangeable between any
model 1443 and 2203 Printers.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: 1450 - GA24-3005, S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370
- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage: For 1450 (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz) #9903 for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V. For S/360 or S/370
(AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz) -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for
230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Print Arrangement for standard 52-character set unless Selective Character Set (#6402) is ordered and the 63-character set
is desired Instead ... see appropriate section of "Type Catalog"
(page 41 or 81) depending upon the system involved. Character
substitutions are also covered in the "Type Catalog."
[4] Type Size: #9731 for .079", or #9733 for .095" .
[5] Order Tape Punch, Part No. 120910,
if 1443 is for New Account Name ... one is furnished at no charge per installation.
[6] Isolation, Control Unit (mdl N1 only); May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features"
below.
PRICES: Mdl
1443
PREREQUISITES:
For 1450 - attachment features are standard on the 1441 and
the 1443. Limitation: Only one printer, a 1443, can be attached
to a 1450 system.
For S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors - the 1443 mdl N1 includes its own control. It requires a control unit position on a
system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special features on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 44 - special features on 2044; Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'l High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/360 mdl 85, 195 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870, or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860,
2870,2880.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
3tt
4tt
N1
- FTP/MAC/ MLC
MLC
MRC
1 yr· 2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$465
741
954
$23,360
37,030
41,000
878
801
$107.00
156.00
149.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45% Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHARACTER SETS #1890-1893, #1895-1896 for mdl 3 or 4 ...
#1901-1904 for mdl N1. See "Type Catalog" for graphics and
ordering instructions. Prerequisites: On mdl N1, Selective Character Set (#6402) is required for any character set other than
#1903.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700).
[Mdl N1 only ... field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 only ...
standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on
the 1443 mdl N1 without generating spurious signals. Thus, a
Processor program, if it can be logically disconnected from the
system before power is turned off, can continue operating.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements,
PRINT POSITIONS, 24 AOO'L (#5558). [Standard on mdls 3, 4]
#5558 - for mdl N1. Increases print span from 120 positions to
144 positions. Operation of printer remains unchanged. When this
feature is field installed, all character sets must be modified. This
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - ---- -=
---':'--=
--=- =
M 1443.2
May 79
DP Machines
1443 Printer (cont'd)
modification will be made at no charge, provided that only a standard segment is to be furnished .. , see "Character Sets" in appropriate section of "Type Catalog."
ordering
#5558 should include the following: [1] Quantity and feature #(s)
of all installed character sets that require an additional segment '"
[2] Feature # for type size, #9731 for .079", or #9733 for .095"
... [3] 1443 Type Specifications Sheet (120-0658), if non-standard
segments are involved. See "Substitute Characters" in "Type
Catalog" for charges that apply.
SELECTIVE CHARACTER SET (#6402).
#6402 for mdl N1 ...
standard on mdls 3 and 4. Required if any type bar other than the
standard 52-character bar is to be used. Provides controls which
permit the 1443 to use all available character sets. When ordered
for plant installation, the 63-character set may be specified at no
charge in lieu of the standard 52-character set for use with this
feature. See "Type Catalog" for characters in each set. The various character sets print at the following speeds:
Character Set
13
39
52
63
Special Feature Prices:
Mdl3
385
175
140
110
----LPM---Mdl4
Mdl N1
565
285
230
190
600
300
240
200
--- FTP/ --MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC I yr> 2 yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Character Sets '" see "Type Catalog," pg 42 for mdls 3 and 4 ...
PS 81.1 for mdl NI
Isolation, Control Unit #4700 NC NC NC
NC
NC
Print Positions, 24 add'i
5558 $ 48 $ 44 $ 40
$ 2,290 $ 3.00
for mdl NI
Selective Character Set
24
22
for mdl N I
6402
26
1,265
3.00
NC
$189
26
• FTP is 12-23 months.
tt No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----.:. ::..: == ";'-==
------ - ---
M 1445
Mav 79
DP Machines
42-character set (alphameric) - 240 Ipm.
56-character set (alphameric with E13S symbols) - 190 Ipm.
1445 PRINTER -- Model Nl
Purpose: Conventional or MICA printed output fqr a S/360 mdl 25
or 30.
Highlights: Has 11 3 print positions. With standard alphameric
56-character set, which includes fourteen E13S symbols, rated
speed is 190 Ipm. Aated speed can be increased to 240 Ipm with
a 42-character alphameric set, or 525 Ipm with a 14-character
numeric set ... see Character Set and Selective Character Set
under "Special Features." Actual speed depends upon the operation. The system's processing unit performs all analysis and format control. A line of printing is presented to the 1445 in the
arrangement in which it is to be printed.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
NOTE: The fourteen E13S symbols are furnished only in the
standard 56-character set.
Depending upon the character set used, each print position can
print anyone of 56 characters ... alphabetic, numeric, six special
characters, and the fourteen E13S symbols. Characters are
spaced 8/inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch under operator
control. Marginally punched continuous paper forms from 4" to
16-3/4" in overall' width are fed by an automatic carriage. Maximum forms depth is 22" at 6 lines/inch ... 16-1/2" at 8
lines/inch. Forms spacing and skipping are controlled by a 12channel tape in the carriage. Skipping is approximately 15" a
second. When using the E13S symbols, it is recommended that
24# paper (safety paper, if required by the customer) with a MICA
finish, or equivalent, be used ... see TNL N24-0342 for 1445
MICA Print Quality Considerations.
Two separate ribbon feeds -- one controls a MICA ribbon, the
other a conventional ribbon. Only one ribbon feed can be used on
the machine at a time. They can be mounted by the operator,
depending upon printing requirements.
PREREQUISITE: For S/360 -- a control unit pOSition on a system
channel.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025; Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 30 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or Selector
Channel (special feature) ... see 2030.
Bibliography: GC20-0360
"Voltage" and "Color" can be changed in the field.
Specify: [1] Voltage (must be consistent with system voltage): For
mdl Nl (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz) -- #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Type Size: #9733 for .095" .. , all characters except E13S
symbols.
[4] 56-character Set: #9570.
[5] Order Tape Punch, part no. 120910,
. the 1445 is for a New Name Account ... one
per installation is furnished at no charge.
[6] Isolation, Control Unit (mdl Nl only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
Mdl
1445
N1
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 1 ,540
$67,570
$179
Purchase MMMC FIC
Character Sets - see "Type Catalog," page 91.1
Isolation, Control Unit #4700
NC
NC
NC
Selective Character Set
for mdl N1
6402 $ 28
$1,495 $2.50
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Aate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHARACTER SETS (#1898, 1899, 1906). See "Type Catalog,"
page 91.1 for graphics and ordering instructions. Prerequisite: For
#1898 or #1899, Selective Character Set (#6402) is required.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700).
[Mdl Nl only ... field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the
1445 without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program,
if it can be logically disconnected from the system before power is
turned off, can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all
cases there are EC level requirements,
SELECTIVE CHARACTER SET (#6402).
#6402 for mdl Nl.
Aequired if any type bar ,other than the standard 56-character bar
is used. Provides controls which permit the 1445 to use aU available character sets. See "Type Catalog," page 91.1, for characters in each set. The various character sets print at the following
speeds:
14-character set (numeric) -- 525 Ipm.
Not 10 be reproduced without, written permiSSion.
NC
$ 28
._-------- --------- ---=
==-=":'
M 2152 - 2250
May 79
DP Machines
Add'l High Speed Multiplexer Channels ... see 2.044.
2152 PRINTER-KEYBOARD
For description and use with S/360 mdl 20, see GSD.
al.
manu-
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- Multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 - selector channel of 286.0, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 287.0 ... see 2860, 287.0.
5/360 mdl 85, 195, or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector
channel of 2860, Selector Subchannel (special feature) on 2870,
or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
2250 DISPLAY UNIT - Models 1, 2, 3
5/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125. Note: No DOS support.
Purpose: A cathode ray tube unit for displaying output in alphameric and graphic form from a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85 and 195,
any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor. Input features provide
broad man-machine communication ability.
5/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138 -- multiplexer channel (standard) .. '
see 3135,3135-3,3138.
.
Model 1
Includes its own control unit ... used for a single
display unit configuration.
Model 2
[No longer available} Requires a 2840 Display Control mdl 1 .. , applicable special features listed below
can be ordered for field installation on installed
units.
Model 3
Requires a 2840 Display Control mdl 2 ... used in
multiple display unit configurations for computeraided design and scientific analysis applications. Up
to four 2250 mdl 3s can be attached to each 2840
mdl 2. Each 2250 mdl 3 can be located 2,0.00 cable
feet from the 2840 mdl 2.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: An I/O unit. offering both pictorial (line drawing) and
alphameric input and output for analysis, design and file maintenance applications. It features:
Large Display Area - images are drawn anywhere within a 12" x
12" area on the face of the display tube.
Large Capacity Display -- up to 3,848 character positions ... 52
lines with 74 characters to the line.
Vector Graphics -- straight lines of any length, at any angular
orientation and at any position on the scree,n. Note: For this
function, Absolute Vectors and Control (#1002) is required on
a modell, or Absolute Vectors (#1001) on a model 2.
Dynamic Display -- buffer areas are addressable ... individual
characters or lines can be changed rapidly without timeconsuming re-write of complete buffer area.
Additional Data Modes -- incremental vectors permit improved
buffer utilization and programming flexibility. Note: This function is standard on a model 3 ... on model t, Graphic Design
Feature (#4485) is requirec.
Format Flexibility - character~, point plots, and vector end
points can be positioned in any combination at any of the
1,048,576 program addressable positions on the 1,.024 x
1,024 grid.
Large Capacity Display (model 3 only) -- up to 2,100 characters
or 2,8.00 incremental vectors may be displayed at 40 cps
regeneration rate without noticeable flicker ... up to 2,800
characters or 3,70.0 incremental vectors at 30 cps regeneration rate with commonly accepted flicker. Note: Vector and
character times vary depending upon cable length.
Fast Turnaround (model 3 'only) -- a complete buffer (32K) can
be rewritten in less than a tenth of a second ... manual inputs
are 'presented to the CPU as fast as they are presented to
display unit.
Graphic Input -- program controllable light pen provides for a
variety of input techniques, including pen search and tracking.
Note: For this function, Graphic Design Feature (#4485) is
required on model 1.
Light Pen Detection Processing (model 3 only) -- extensive order
set reduces CPU attention handling requirements ... see 2840
mdl2.
Application Flexibility -- optional alphameric and programmed
function keyboards for operator input ... see "Special Features."
Prerequisites:
For either model
in any S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor, a
minimum of 64K of storage is required for use of graphic support
under OS/360. A minimum of 16K is required for diagnostic
support only.
5/370 mdl 145, 145-3, 148 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
selector channels ... see 3145,3145-3,3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ." see 3155, 3158 and 3158-3.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3.032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
For Model 3 - a 2840 Display Control mdl 2.
Bibliography: S/36C -GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 23.0 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Buffer (mdl 1 only): Buffer (# 1498 or 1499) is required ... see
"Special Features."
[4] Isolation, Control Unit (mdl 1 only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29,1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
Mdl
2250
1
3
MAC/
MRC
$1,185
1,740
Purchase
MMMC
$57,530
34,830
$198
223
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ABSOLUTE VECTORS (#1001). [Model 2 only] Provides the
ability to "draw" a continuous straight line between any two points
of the 1,024 x 1,024 reference grid. Prerequisite: Absolute Vectors and Control (# 1003) on the 2840 mdl 1.
ABSOLUTE VECTORS AND CONTROL (#1002). [Modell only}
Provides controls and ability to "draw" a continuous straight line
between any two points of the 1,024 x 1,024 reference grid.
ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#1245). [Any model] A keyboard
similar to that on a 1052 Printer-i,eyboard ... for alphameric data
entry.
BUFFER (#1498, 1499). [Modell only] #1498 - 4,096 bytes of
core stc~alle 'or display regeneration. #1499 -- 8,192 bytes.
Maximum: One, #1498 or #1499. Note: One of these features
is required on each 2250 mdl 1 ... if #1498 is installed, it must
be removed to install #1499.
CHARACTER GENERATOR (#1880). [Model 1 only] A digital
decoder which speeds character generation and conserves buffer
space. Special circuits draw characters from stored EBCDIC
codes rather than from sequences of programmed vectors. Note:
This feature is required when using a 225.0 mdl 1 as an operator's
console under DIDOCS programming support.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) .•. see 2022, 2030, 2.040, 2.050.
GRAPHIC DESIGN (#4485). [Model 1 only} Provides two additional data modes ... 2-byte increment vectors and point plotting, four
light pen control orders to enable CPU program-directed pen
tracking, and a fiber optic light pen with a tip switch. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Light Pen (#4785). Prerequisite; Absolute Vectors and Control (# 1002). Note: CPU interaction for light
pen tracking will generally be great enough to limit such interaction to one 2250 mdl 1 at a time.
5/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT {#47oo). [Modell only ... for field
For Model 1 -- a Buffer (#1498 or 1499) on the 2250 mdl 1
itself. See "Special Features:" A control unit position on a system
channel.
Not to be reproduced without W.ritten permission,
---E :;:~-;-~
M 2250 - 2305
May 79
DP Machines;
2250 Display Unit
(cont'd)
installation on units shipped prior to December 29. 1967 ... standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the
2250 mdl 1 without generating spurious signals. Thus a CPU
program. if it can be logically disconnected from the system before
power is turned off. can continue operating. F'rerequlslte:
in all cases there are compatible EC level requirements.
LIGHT PEN (#4785). [Model 1 or 2 only] A hand-held el.ectronic
pointer. activated by a foot switch. that allows program detection
of lines. characters. and symbols that are displayed on the face of
the tube. Limitation: On mdl 1. cannot be installed with Graphic
Design (#4485). Note: A fiber optic light pen with a tip switch is
provided with Graphic Design (#4485) on a mdl 1 and with the
basic 2250 mdl 3.
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL, FIRST (#5475). [Model 1 only]
Provides a duplicate of the on/off and program load facilities
(OCP) of a processing unit ... mounted on the 2250 mdl 1. For a
remote panel of a 2050. 2065. 2075. 2085. 3165. 3168. 3168-3
or 3195. Maximum: One. Specify: #9175 if #5475 is to be
installed on a 2085. 3165. 3168. 3168-3 or 3195 equipped with
Extended Channels ... see .: Special Features" under those units.
Prerequisites:
Remote Operator Control Panel Attachment
(#9560) on the 2050. 2065. 2085 or 3195 .,. see "Specify"
under those units.
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL, SECOND (#5476). [Model 1 only]
Provides a duplicate of the on/off and program load facilities
(OCP) of a second processing unit ... mounted on the 2250 mdl 1.
For a remote panel f<;lr a 2050. 2065. 2075. 2085. 3165. 3168.
3168-3 or 3195. Maximum: One. Specify: #9176 if ##5476 is
to be installed on a 2250 attached to a 2085. 3165. 3168. 31683 or 3195 equipped with Extended Channels ... see "Special
Features" under those units. Prerequisites: #5476 requires
Operator Control Panel. 1st (#5875) ... Remote Operator Control
Panel Attachment (#9560) on 2950. 2065. 2085 or 3195 ... see
"Specify" under those unit&.
PROGRAMMED FUNCTION KEYBOARD (#5855), [Any model] A
32-key keyboard that allows the operator to indicate program
interpretive functions to the system by a Single key depression.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
FIC
On Model 1, 2 or 3
Alphameric Keyboard
Programmed Fctn Kybd
#1245 $81
5855 162
$3,910
7,840
$4.50
9.50
$306
318
On Model 1 only
Absolute Vectors & Cntrl
Buffer - 4,096
Buffer - 8,192
Character Generator
Graphic Design
Isolation, Control Unit
Operator Control Panel
First
Second
1002
1498
1499
1880
4485
4700
437
381
544
409
353
NC
17,410
18,290
26,110
19,610
16,960
NC
13.00
8.50
12.00
18.50
16.00
NC
388
179
179
275
1,030
NC
5475
5476
48
37
2,170
1,680
NC
NC
231
115
4785 108
5,220
13.00
161
1001 381
15,210
12.00
509
On Model 1 or 2 only
L19ht Pen
On Model 2 only
Absolute Vectors
lengths to be variable on an individual record basis. Thus. it
provides efficient capacity utilization and record addressing flexibility.
Model 1 - data is transferred two bits at a time between the 2305
mdl 1 and its 2835 Storage Controi mdl 1 ... the 2835 then transfers data to the channel at a rate of 3.0 million 8-bit bytes per
second. Any record location on the module can be accessed in an
average of 2.5 milliseconds or within a maximum of 5.1 milliseconds.
Model 2 -- data is transferred one bit at a time bet~een the 2305
mdl 2 and its 2385 Storage Control mdl 2 ... the 2385 then transfers data to the channel at a rate of 1.5 million 8-bit bytes per
second. Any record location on the module can "-.e accessed in an
avefl~ge of 5.0 milliseconds or within a maximum of 10.2 milliseconds.
Prerequisites: For Model 1 -- up to two 2305 mdl 1s can be
attached to a 2835 Storage Control mdl 1 ... For Model 2 - up to
two 2305 mdl 2s can be attached to a 2835 Storage Control rhdl
2. Word Buffer (#8810) is required on a 3145.
The 2305 is designed for interconnected operation as part of a
2305/2385 facility. Customers who wish to order a 2305 for
stand-alone or individual use should submit an RPQ to provide the
necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors. etc.) to
complete the unit for a non-standard (I.e., not interconnected with
a 2835) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard 2305/2835 configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided the
unit will be offered on a purchase only basis. See item [2] under
··Specify."
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2305 in any nonstandard environment must be reviewed
Limitation: The 2305 mdl 1 cannot be attached to a S/370 mdl
145,145-3.148,155,158.3031 or 4300 Processor.
Bibliography: S/360 -~ GC20-0360
[2] Non-standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if the
2305 is not to be installed as part of a 2305/2835 combination.
When ordering #9485, do not specify item [3] or [4] below.
[3] Initial Machine Order: If only one 2305 is being ordered, specify #9430 ... if two 2305s are being ordered for concurrent
installation, specify #9431 for first one and #9432 for second
one (separate orders are required) ... if one 2305 is on order
and a second one is desired for concurrent installation. Alteration lAC is required for on-order 2305 (delete #9430 and add
#9431) and, order for second 2305 must specify #9432. For
field installation of second module, see item [4] below.
[4]
(a)
If the 2305 is being ordered for shipment from the plant of
control, specify #9433 and submit
specifying #9431
and deleting #9430 against the serial number of the existing
(first) 2305 on the customer's fac~ity ... refer to 2835 for additional
instructions.
(b)
To field c;onvert a 2305 from the first position
second positionl order RPQ
. and submit
above. to change position of the existing (first) 2305
customer's facility... refer to 2835 for additional
tions.
PRICES:
Mdl
2305 FIXED
HEAD
STORAGE
Purpose: High performance direct access storage for a S/360
mdl 85 or 195. or a S/370 mdl 145, 145-3. 148. 155. 158. 165,
168.195, a 3031.3032 or 3033 Processor, or a 4300 Processor.
Model 1
Up to 5.4 million bytes can be stored in the 384
addressable tracks ... each track has a maximum data
capacity of 14.136 bytes.
Model 2
Up to 11.2 million bytes can be stored in the 768
addressable tracks ... each track has a maximum data
capacity of 14.660 bytes.
2305
1
2
MAC/
MRC
to the
per (a)
on the
instruc-
- FTP/MLC
1 Yr·
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$5,495 $5,055 $4,616
4,375 4,025 3,675
$125,350
99,540
$480
457
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Features a high data rate and low access time ...
designed .lor applications such as processor storage extension,
programm.lng. sys~em residence. and table or index storage. Data
set organization IS under program control. allowing data and key
S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase. 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
• FTP is 12·23 month•.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
·_--------- ---- ---
- - - --===
':' =
M 2314
May 79
DP Machines
S/360 mdl 40 -- the 2314 may be attached to either the first or
second selector channel. However, 2314s may not be attached
to both selector channels.
2314 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
FACILITY - MDL 1
[No longer available]
S/360 mdl 50 -- if the 2314 is to be used with a 2050 having
1410/7010 Compatibility (#4478), consult
Purpose: Large capacity high speed direct access storage and
control for a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 75, 85, 195, or any
S/370 Processor except 3115 or 3125.
Highlights: Has eight independent modules, each storing up to
29.17 million 8-bit bytes or 58.35 million packed decimal digits in
a 2316 Disk Pack.
The eight removable and interchangeable 2316s provide a total of
233.4 million bytes of online storage and virtually unlimited offline
storage. Minimum access is 25 milliseconds; average is 75 milliseconds; maximum is 135 milliseconds. Standard features include:
File 5can -- for performing a comparison on selected bytes of file
organization. Record Overflow -- for greater utilization of storage.
Enhanced system reliability and performance is achieved by provision of a ninth "spare" module for customer use should one of
the eight normally addressed modules become inoperable.
Cylinder Concept -- retained in the 2314. One cylinder has 20
tracks. Up to 7,294 bytes (or 14,588 packed decimal digits) on
each track, prov.ide 145,880 bytes (or 291,760 packed decimal
digits) per cylinder, available under each of the eight access
mechanisms.
Data transmission is at a rate of 312,000 bytes/second ... with
packed decimal, the rate is 624,000 digits/second.
An advanced method of utilizing disk storage. Self-formatting
tracks allow variable lenQth identifiers and records to be easily
handled. Command chaining -- multiple records within a cylinder
can be read/written by a sequence of channel commands without
rotational delays between records ... permits index and directory
searches without processor intervention. The command structure
is optimized to yield efficient random or sequential processing with
either randomly or sequentially organized data files. The ability to
protect "logical" files is provided by the combination of commands
In the 2314 and checks within the control programs servicing the
file system. Cyclic code and bit count checking is used to assure
the integrity of stored data. The controls necessary to attach the
unit to a system channel are included in the 2314.
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a system channel.
5/360 mdl 30 40... 50 -- a special feature, Selector Channel ...
see 2030, 204 b, 2u50.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360 S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Each 2314 DASF mdl 1 is to be specified on AAS as
follows: a) One 2314 mdl 001,
b) One 231 2 mdl 001, and
c) Two 231 3 mdl 001 s ... on one of the 231 3s also specify
#9140 (to indicate the 2313 at the end of the 2314
DASF).
Note: The 2312 and 2313 type numbers and their associated
feature codes are to be specified at no charge and are to be
used only for internal IBM ordering and control purposes. List
each type and model (2314,2312,2313) separately with all its
associated feature codes. The 2312 and 2313 type numbers
should never appear on any agreement.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz): Specify the same code for the
2314, the 2312 and each 2313 ... #9903 for 208 V, or #9905
for 230 V.
[3] Color: For 2314 only ... #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray.
[4) Additional Codes: On the 2312 and 2313s additional codes
are required depending upon special features on the 2314 and
2844 Auxiliary Storage Control... see "Special Features"
below.
[5] 2316 Disk Packs: 2316s are required and must be ordered
separately ... see 2316.
[6] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
-FTPMAC/ MLC
MLC
2 Yr Purchase
MRC 1 Yr·
Mdl
2314
$5,890 $5,419 $4,948 $199,450
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30% of 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU: 10%
S/360 mdl 65, 75 - a selector channel of 2860 ... see 2860.
SPECIAL FEATURES
S/360 mdl 85, 195 or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- a selector
see
channel of 2860, or a shared subchannel of a 2880
2860,2880.
5/370 mdl 135 -- Selector Channel (special feature)
3135.
MMMC
$856
see
5/370 mdl 135-3 - Block Multiplexer Channels (special fea·
tures) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- block multiplexer channels (standard) ... see
3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- selector channel (standard) ... see 3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- block multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- block multiplexer channels (standard) ... see
3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- block multiplexer channel ... see 3155,
3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- block multiplexer channels (five are
standard) ... see 3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- block multiplexer channels (ten are standard)
... see 3033.
Each disk storage module requires a 2316 Disk Pack ... these
must be ordered separately
Limitations:
5/360 mdl 30 - the 2314 requires a 1.5-microsecond 2030 and
can be attached only to the first selector channel. Further, when
the 2314 is attached, the second selector channel is restricted as
to devices that may be attached ... see "Channel Control
Capabilities" under 2030. When a 2841 Control Unit and a 2314
are both attached to a 2030, both must be attached to the first
selector channel. Because of the high data rate of the 2314 and
the cycle stealing concept of the selector channel, available
program processing time is reduced during 2314 operations.
This is of particular concern when handling time dependent I/O
devices, i.e., 1412, 1418, 1419, 1428. To determine the 2314
loading effect, refer to SRL GA24-3411, "S/360 Model 30 Channel Characteristics and Functional Evaluations."
The fol/owing special features are on an "as available" basis for
field instal/ation.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2314 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, if the 2314 can be logically
disconnected from the system, the CPU program can continue
operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible
EC level requirements,
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). To attach the Two
Channel Switch (#8170) to a 2167 Configuration Control Unit in a
5/360 mdl 67-2, or to a S/360 mdl 65 MP which has the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) installed, or to a S/370 mdl
158 MP or 168 MP. Prerequisite: Specify #9500 on the 2312 ...
#9500 can be field installed.
2844 ATTACHMENT (#7949). To attach a 2844 Auxiliary Storage
Control. Note: Order this feature only when a 2844 is to be
attached. Installation of the feature without concurrent installation
of the 2844 renders the 2314 inoperative. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites: Specify #9750 on the 2312 and each 2313 ... if
the 2844 has a Two Channel Switch (#8171), also specify #9765
on the 2312 ... if the 2844 has a Remote Switch Attachment
(#6150) also specify #9510 on the 2312. #9750, 9765 and
9510 can be field installed.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). To attach the 2314 to a second channel. Switching is under program control. Includes partitioning. Prerequisites: Specify #9760 on the 2312 ... #9760 can
be field installed. If the two channel switch is routed through the
Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing 5/360
mdl 65, Remote Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. Also in a
5/360 mdl 67-2, a 5/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP, #6148 is
required. See #6148 above.
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-.... ----- --
- -=----=- =':' =
DP Machines
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility - Mdl 1
M 2314-2316
May 79
(cont'd)
-- FTP/-MAC/MLC MLC
MRC I Yr" 2 YrPurchase MMMC
Isolation, Control Unit
Remote Switch Attach
2844 Attachment
Two Channel Switch
#4700 NC
6148 NC
7949 NC
8170 $156
NC
NC NC
NC NC NC
NC NC NC
$144 $\31 $5,340
NC
NC
NC
$3.50
FIC
NC
NC
NC
$767
2315 DISK CARTRIDGE
Purpose: High-speed removable disk storage unit for a drive in an
1810 or 2310 Disk Storage, the drive in an 1131 Central Processing Unit mdl 2, 3 or 4 or the standard single disk storage drive or
Second Single Disk Storage Drive (#6415) of a 2044 Processing
Unit.
The 2315 is marketed by IRD ...
2316 DISK PACK
Purpose: High-speed, removable, interchangeable disk storage
unit for the 2314 DASF, the 2319 Disk Storage, or the 5445 Disk
Storage Drive.
The 2316 is marketed by IRD
•
FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
-------- ----:5:::::5';'E:
-- ------
~401
M
May i9
DP Machines
2401
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
Quick Release Latch -- facilitates mounting and removal of tape
reels.
Characteristics:
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit for S/360 mdls 22 thru 85 and 195,
any S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), any 4300 Processor,
or an 1800 system.
For use with a 360 mdl 20, see GSD
Manual.
Models: Operate at the following 8-bit bytes per second data
rates:
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
Model 5
Model 6
Model 8
30,000 at 800 bpi
60,000 at 800 bpi
90,000 at 800 bpi
60,000 at 160(1 bpi
120,000 at 1600 bpi
180,000 at 1600 bpi
Operates only in the seven-track format
at 200, 556, or 800 bpi with data rates
of 15, 41.7, or 60 KB.
Model Changes: Model 2 can be field changed to model 3 ...
model 5 to model 6 ... no other changes are possible.
Systems:
S/360 mdl 25 -- only models 1, 2, 4 or 8 attached via 2803
Tape Controls can be used ... they must be attached to the
selector channel.
S/360 mdls 22, 30 thru 85 and 195, any S/370 Processor
(except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300 Processor -- all models can be
attached except model 6 on the S/360 mdl 22 ... in a S/360 mdl
44, mdl 6s cannot be attached to the Multiplexer Channel
(#5248).
1800 -- only mdls 1, 2 and 3 can be attached.
Highlights: Single tape unit which reads or writes the following
half-inch magnetic tapes: IBM Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, IBM
Series 500, or competitive formulations which meet the specifications described in SRL GA32-0006. IBM Mylart is suitable for use
at 200, 556 or 800 bpi, but it should not be used at 1600 bpi.
On models 1, 2 and 3, a 9-Track Read/Write Head (#9558) or a
7-Track Read/Write Head (#9557) may be specified. See
"Specify" below. On models 4, 5 and 6, use of Dual Density
800-1600 BPI (#3471) permits operation at 800 bpi density as
well as at 1600 bpi. See "Special Features."
Nine Track Operation -- in 9-track format, data is recorded
parallel by bit, serial by byte, in 9 tracks across the width of the
tape ... tape data format uses eight of the nine bits for data, the
ninth bit serving as a parity bit. The eight data bits can represent
an alphameric or special character, two digits, a signed digit, or
eight binary bits. For this operation on a mdl 1, 2 or 3, #9558 is
required ... see "Specify" below.
Seven Track Operation -- on mdls 1, 2, 3 or 8 only ... tape is
written in 7-track format compatible with tape written by
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units and by
2401/2415s (or 2402s), or 3420s equipped with 7-track
Read/Write Heads. For this operation, #9557 is required, except on 2401 mdl 8. See "Specify." Seven Track compatibility
(#7125, 7126, 7127) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI
Compatibility (#7135, 7136) is also required on the 2803/2804
(or 2403/2404) tape control unit, except on .2803/2804 mdl 3s.
See "Special Features" under those units.
Checking - read-back-check-whlle-write on al.! models ... vertical
parity recording on models 4, 5 and 6 ... vertical, longitudinal and
diagonal parity recording on models 1, 2, 3 and 8.
Error Correction -- automatic in-flight single track error correction
is provided for 1 600 bpi 9-track format ... automatic single track
error correction for 800 bpi 9-track format during the reread of a
record containing one or more errors confined ,to a single track '"
all other errors are detected and conventional error recovery
routines apply.
Read Backwards -- all tapes (9 or 7 -track) written on a
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE
only)/3420
can
be
read
by
any
2401/2402/2403/
2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 B I PE only)/3420 in a forward
or backward direction ... Data Conversion (#~228,3236) cannot
be used on the tape control unit when reading 7-track tape backwards
tape
written
by
727/729/7330/7335/
7701/7702/7765s cannot be read backwards.
Power Window -- on machines shipped atter April 1,1966, a
powered access window, raised or lowered under push-button
control and always lowered upon completion of the programInitiated rewind unload command, is standard ... for units shipped
prior to April 1, 1966, see Power Window (#5519) under "Special
Features."
t My~r is a trademark of E. I. Dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc. "IBM Mylar" is a brand
of magnetic tape which includes a Mylar polyester substrate and which was previously
marketed by IBM.
800 BPI
Mdll
Mdl2
Mdl3
Bytes/second
Density (bytes/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/sec)
Nominal Interrecord Gap
NominallRG (milliseconds)
Rewind Time (incldg reload)
Rewind & Unload (minutes)
30,000
800
37.5
.6
16.0
3.0
2.2
60,000
800
75.0
.6
8.00
1.4
1.5
90,000
800
112.5
.6
5.3
1.0
1.1
Mdl8
Byles/second
Density (bytes/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/sec)
Nominallnterrecord Gap
NominallRG (milliseconds)
Rewind Time (incldg reload)
Rewind & Unload (minutes)
15,000/41,700/60,000
200/556/800
75.0
.75
10.0
1.4
1.5
1600 BPI
Mdl4
Mdl5
Bytes/second
Density (bytes/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/sec)
Nominallnterrecord Gap
NominallRG (milliseconds)
Rewind Time(incldg reload)
Rewind & Unload (minutes)
60,000
1,600
37.5
.6
16.0
3.0
2.2
120,000
1,600
75.0
.6
8.0
1.4
1.5
Mdl6
180,000
1.600
112.5
.6
5.3
1.0
1.1
Prerequisites:
For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors
2401 mdls 1, 2, 3 -- a 2803 or 2804 Tape Control mdl 1 or 2
(or 2403 mdl 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 2404 mdl 1, 2 or 3) ... with a
2803 or 2804 mdl 2 (or 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6), Mode Compatibility
(#5121) is required on each 2401 __ . with a 2804 (or 2404),
Simultaneous Read-while-write (#7160) is also required on each
2401. See "Special Features" below.
2401 mdls 4, 5 or 6 -- a 2803 or 2804 Tape Control mdl 2 (or
2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6) __ . with a 2804, Simultaneous Read-whileWrite (#7160) is also required. See "Special Features" below.
2401 mdl 8 - requires a 2803 or 2804 Tape Control mdl 3 __ .
with a 2804 mdl 3, each tape unit attached must be equipped
with Simulataneous Read-while-Writ~ (#7160).
The 2803 (or 2403) requires a control unit position on a system
channel __ . the 2804 (or 2404) requires one control unit position
on each of two system channels. For applicable channels, see
2803/2804.
For 1800
#3222) is required on the 1802 for one or two 2401 mdls 1, 2
or 3 (or ene 2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3). See 1802.
Maximums:
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors - any combination of 2401 (or
2402) mdls 1, 2 and 3 which does not exceed 8 tape drives can
be attached to a 2803/2804 ' __ any combination of 2401 (or
2402) mdls 1, 2 or 3 which does not exceed seven tape drives
can be attached to a 2403/2404 mdl I, 2 or 3 __ . any combination of 2401 (or 2402) mdls 1, 2 and 3, 4, 5 or 6 which does not
exceed eight tape drives can be attached to a 2803/2804 mdl 2
__ . any combination of 2401 (or 2402) mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
which does not exceed seven tape drives can be attached to a
2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6. A maximum of eight 2401 mdl 8s can be
attached to a 2803 mdl 3 or 2804 mdl 3.
1800 -- two 2401 s, mdls I, 2 and 3 in any combination, (or one
2402 mdl I, 2 or 3) can be attached to an 1802.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360 S/370 -- GC20-0001
-- GA26-5921
1800
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color; #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray,
[3] Read/Write Head: [for mdl I, 2 or 3 only (800 bpi NRZI)]
#9557 for 7-track, or #9558 for 9-track. Prerequisite: For
#9557, Seven Track Compatibility or Seven and Nine Track
Compatibility feature on the tape control __ . see " Special
Features" under 1802, (2403/2404), or 2803/2804. Note:
#9557 can be changed in the field to #9558, or vice versa, at no charge to the rental customer. On purchased
machines, the changes can be made on an RPQ basis __ .
wher, ordering specify #9557 or #9558, machine type and
model.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- "- ----- ---- ---
M 2401-2404
May 79
==-==~= DP Machines
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit
(cont'd)
[4] Tape reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
[5]
Use with 2804 (or 2404): Simultaneous-Read-while-Write
(#7160) is required on each 2401 .. , see "Special Features"
below.
[6] Use with 2803/2804 mdl 2 (or 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6): Mode
Compatibility (#5121) is required on each 2401 mdl 1, 2 or 3
see "Special Features" below.
PRICES:
2401
Mdl
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
-FTPMAC/ MLC
MLC
MRC 1Yr' 2 Yr Purchase
$375
544
881
432
600
937
447
$345
500
811
397
552
862
411
MMMC
$14,440
20,940
33,950
16,530
23,140
36,150
15,210
$315
457
740
363
504
787
375
$113
128
156
136
149
180
156
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: I/O Unit
Purchase Option: 45%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
MODE COMPATIBILITY (#5121). [2401 mdl 1, 2, 3 only] Required to attach these units to a 2803/2804 mdl 2 (or 2403 mdl
4, 5 or 6).
POWER WINDOW, (#5519). [For field installation on units shipped
before April 1. 1966 .,. all units shipped after April 1, 1966 are
equipped with a power window as standard]. This feature may be
ordered for field installation on units installed without the feature.
Specify: Serial number of 2401.
SIMULTANEOUS READ-WHILE-WRITE (#7160). Required on any
2401 attached to a two-channel, simultaneous read-while-write
tape control. 2401 mdls 1, 2, 3 or 8 require this feature when
attached to a 2804 Tape Control mdl 1, 2 or 3 (or 2404 mdl 1, 2
or 3). 2401 mdls 4, 5 or 6 require it when attached to a 2804 mdl
2. Limitation: When equipped with this feature, 2401 s will not
operate with a 2803 (or 2403) control unit.
..·FTP/--MAC/MLC MLC
MRC I Yr' 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Dual Density 800-1600 BPI#347I $26 $24 $22
Mode Compatibility
5121 \0
9
8
Power Window
5519 308SUC Simultaneous Rd-w-Write 7160 \0
9
Note: These units have been withdrawn and new orders cannot be
accepted ... the special features listed below are available for field
installation.
2402 - two independently operating drives in a single unit.
2403 -- a single channel, read or write tape control and one tape
drive.
2404 -- a two channel, simultaneous read-while-write tape control
and one tape drive.
Models: Models of all units denote the tape data rate in 8-bit
bytes/second ... 2404s were available only in models 1, 2 and 3.
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
30,000 at 800 bpi Model 4
60,000 at 800 bpi Model 5
90,000 at 800 bpi Model 6
Model Changes: 2402 -model 3, or a model 5 to
field converted to a model
a model 2 can be field
changes are possible.
60,000 at 1600 bpi
120,000 at 1600 bpi
180,000 at 1600 bpi
a model 2 can be field converted to a
a model 6 ... 2403 -- a model 2 can be
3, or a model 5 to a model 6 ... 2404 -converted to a model 3 ... no other
Limitations: In 1800 -- only a 2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3 can be used.
In S/360 mdl 44 -- a 2402 mdl 6 or 2403 mdl 6 cannot be
attached to a Multiplexer Channel (#5248).
Highlights: See "Highlights" under 2401.
DUAL DENSITY - 1600 BPI (#3471), [2401 mdl 4, 5, 6 only]
Permits these drives to operate at 800 bpi in addition to 1600 bpi.
Prerequisite: Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320,
5321) or Seven and Nine Track Compatibility (#7135, 7136) on
the 2803/2804 mdl 2 (or 2403 mdl 4, 5, 6) controlling the 2401.
Special Feature Prices:
2402 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
2403 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
2404 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
$1,100
426
308
426
$2.50
NC
NC
NC
Prerequisites; See "Prerequisites" under 2401.
Maximums: See "Maximums" under 2401.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Read/Write Heads: [For mdls 1, 2 or 3 only (800 bpi NRZIl]
#9557 for 7-track, or #9558 for 9-track. Prerequisite: For
#9557, Seven Track Compatibility or Seven and Nine Track
Compatibility feature on the tape control... see "Special
Features" below or under 1802 or 2403 or 2404. Note:
#9557 can be changed in the field to #9558, or vice versa,
by MES for the rental customer. On purchased machines, the
changes can be made on an RPQ basis ... when ordering,
specify #9557 or #9558, machine type and model.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
9045 for gray.
[4] Tape Reels: If any color other tan gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
[5] Use with 2804 (or 2404): On 2402s, Simultaneous Read-whileWrite (#7161) is required ... see "Special Features."
FIC
$78
27
NC
50
[6] Use with 2803/2804 mdl 2 (or 2403 Mdl 4,5 or 6): On 2403
mdls 1, 2 or 3, Mode Compatibility (#5122) is required see
"Special Features."
[7] Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on 2403s or 2404s
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features.
-FTP/MAC/ MLC
MLC
MRC 1 Yr' 2 Yr Purchase
Prices:
Mdl
2402
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
$696 $640 $585
1,030
948
865
1,705 1,569 1,432
808
743
679
1,140 1,049
958
1,815 1,670 1,525
$26,670
39,790
65,800
30,970
44,090
70,110
$221
253
313
268
297
359
2403
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
$998
1,165
1,495
1,210
1,375
1,715
$38,910
45,740
58,970
47,830
54,670
67,900
$133
147
174
162
178
190
2404
t1
t2
t3
$1,305
1,475
1,815
$60,290
68,220
83,890
$157
173
203
$918 $838
1,072
979
1,375 1,256
1,113 1,016
1,265 1,155
1,578 1,441
MMMC
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Metering: 2402 -- I/O Unit (Online)
2403/2404 -- Assignable Unit
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
, FTP is 12-23 months.
t
Orders for these machines will not be accepted .. , orders for
special features and RPQs for on-order or installed units
will be accepted.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2402-2404
May 79
DP Machines
2402-2404
(cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following features are on an "as available" basis for field
installation.
DATA CONVERSION (#3228, 3236). Program controlled feature
for processing data with maximum packing efficiency. On a write
operation, three 8-bit bytes are written as four 6-bit tape characters ... on a read operation, four 6-bit tape characters are converted to three 8-bit bytes. #3228 -- on 2403 ... #3236 -- on 2404.
Limitation: Cannot be used when reading 7-track tapes backward.
Prerequisite: Seven Track Compatibility (#7125, 7126, 7127) or
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135).
DUAL DENSITY 800-1600 BPI (#3471, 3472). [2402/2403 mdl
4, 5, 6 only] Permits these drives to operate at 800 bpi as well as
16000 bpi. #3471 -- for 2403 mdl 4. 5 or 6 ... #3472 -- for
2402 mdl 4, 5 or 6. Prerequisite: For 2402 -- Nine Track (800
BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320, 5321) or Seven and Nine Track
(800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135, 7136) on the controlling
2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6 or 2803/2804 mdl 2 ... for 2403 -- #5320 or
#7135 on the 2403 itself.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4701-4704). [2403 or 2404 only
... for field installation on units shipped prior to December 29,
1967 ... standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or
off on the tape control without generating spurious signals. Thus a
CPU program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system
before power is turned off, can continue operating. #4701 - for
basic 2403 mdl 1, 2 or 3.
#4702 -- for a 2403 mdl 1, 2 or 3 with Two Channel Switch
(#8100).
#4703 -- for a 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6.
#4704 - for a 2404 mdl 1, 2 or 3.
Prerequisites:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements and technical limitations,
#4702 requires Two Channel Switch (#8100) on the 2403 mdl 1,
2 or 3.
MODE COMPATIBILITY (#5122). [2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3 only] Required to attach the 2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3 to a 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6
or a 2804/2804 mdl 2.
NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY (#5320). [2403
mdl 4, 5 or 6 only] Require"cl if any drive of an attached
2401 /2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3 has a 9-track Read/Write Head
(#9558), or if any attached 2402 mdl 4, 5 or 6 orthe 2403 itself
has. Dual Density 800-1600 BPI (#3471, 3472) ... provides the
ability to read and write 800 bpi, 9-track NRZI as well as 1600 bpi
on such drives. limitation: Cannot be installed with Seven Track
Compatibility (#7127) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#7135).
SIMULTANEOUS READ-WHILE-WRITE (#7161). [2402 mdl 1, 2
3, 4, 5, 6 only] Required on any 2402 attached to a two channel'
simultaneous read-while-write tape control ... 2402 mdls 1, 2 or
require this feature when attached to a 2404 mdl 1, 2 or 3 or a
2804 mdl 1 or 2 ... 2402 mdls 4, 5 or 6 require it when attached
to a 2404 mdl 2. limitation: When equipped with this featur;;.
2402s will not operate with a 2403 or 2803 control unit.
.
:3
SIXTEEN DRIVE ADDRESSING (#7185). [2403 mdl 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
or 6 only] Required where the pool of drives attached through
2318 Switching Units exceeds eight ... permits the 2403 to address up to sixteen tape drives ... see 2816.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100), [2403 mdl 1, 2, 3 only ... for
use in a S/360 mdl 67 or multiprocessing S/360 mdl 65 only] To
attach the 2403 to a second channel ... switching is under program control ... includes partitioning.
Special Feature Prices:
Data Conversion
#3228 $49 $45
on 2403
on 2404
3236 17
Dual Density 800-1600 BPI
on 2403 mdl 4,5,6
3471 26
24
on 2402 mdl 4,5,6
3472 54
50
Isolation Control Unit
on basic 2403 mdl
1,2,3
4701 NC NC
on 2403 mdl 1,2,3
4702 NC NC
with #8100
on 2403 mdl 4,5,6
4703 NC NC
4704 NC NC
on 2404 mdl 1,2,3
Mode Compatibility
5122 21
19
9 Track Compatibility
5320 256 236
Power Window
5519308 SUC -Remote Switch Attach
6148 NC NC
7 Tracl1 Compatibility
7125 54
50
on 2403 mdl 1,2,3
on 2404 mdl 1,2,3
7126 84
on 2403 mdl 4,5,6
7127 195 179
7 & 9 Track Compatibility7l35 420 386
7161 21
Simultaneous R-w- W
19
16 Drive Addressing
7185 26
24
Two Channel Switch
8100 110 101
tt
To be announced.
POWER WINDOW (#5519). [Only for field installation on units
shipped prior to April 1, 1966 ... power window(s) are standard on
units shipped after that] If ordered, two #5519s are required for
each 2402. Specify: Machine type and serial number.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [2403 mdl 1, 2 or 3
only ... for use in a S/360 mdl 67 or a multiprocessing S/360 mdl
65 only] To attach the Two Channel Switch (#8100) to a 216t
Configuration Control or route it thru the Configuration Control
Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing S/360 mdl 65 system.
Prerequisites: Two Channel Switch (#8100) and a 2167 or the
# 1505 of a mult,iprocessing S/360 mdl 65.
SEVEN TRACK COMPATIBILITY (#7125 - 7127), Required if any
2401 or 2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3 attached to the 2403 or 2404 has a
7-track Read/Write Head (#9557). Permits such drives to read or
write in 7-track format compatible with tape generated by
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units and other
2401/2402/2403/2404 or 2415 tape dl'ives equipped with 7track Heads. #7125 -- for 2403 mdl 1, 2 or 3 ... #7126 -- for
2404 mdl 1, 2 or 3 ... #7127 -- for 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#5320) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#7135) on a 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6. Specify: The
number od tape drives associated with this feature that will be
equipped with 7-track Read/Write Heads (#9557).
SEVEN AND NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY
(#7135). [2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6 only] Satisfies the requirements of
both the Seven Track Compatibility (#7127) and Nine Track (800
BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320) features ... permits reading and
writing of both 7-track and 9-track 800 bpi NRZI tapes on suitably
equipped tape drives attached to the 2403 mdl 4, 5 or 6.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#5320) or Seven Track Cbmpatlbility (#7127).
Specify: The number of tape drives associated with this feature
that will be equipped with 7-track Read/Write Heads (#9557).
PrereqUisites: 7-track Read/Write Head(s) on 2401/2402 mdls 1,
2 or 3 attached to this 2403 and/o Dual Density (#3471, 3472)
on the 2403 or attached 2402(s).
---FTP/--MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC I Yr' 2 Yr Purchase
• FTP is 12·23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MMMC
FIC
$41
$1,935
3,610
SI.50
2.00
$88
179
22
45
1,100
2,145
2.50
4.50
78
157
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
18
215
NC
NC
NC
864
9,925
308
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
47.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
55
946
NC
NC
2,145
3,855
7,545
16,000
864
1,100
3,765
2.00
3.00
31.00
80.50
NC
1.50
5.50
131
179
869
1,245
102
66
NC
45
164
353
18
22
92
tt
-----_.
--- ---- ------= = = ':' =
M 2415.1
May 79
DP Machines
2415 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND
CONTROL
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit and control for a S/360 mdl 22, 25,
30,40,50,65.67 or 75 ... or a S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, 145,
145-3, 148, 155, 158, or a 3031 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
Note: For use with S/360 mdl 20, see GSD
manual.
Models: Each model has one single-channel tape control and
multiple independently operating tape drives.
15,000 bytes/sec. (800 bpi) 30,000 bytes/sec. (1600 bpi)·
Model 1 - 2 drives
Model 2 - 4 drives
Model 3 - 6 drives
Model 4 - 2 drives
Model 5 - 4 drives
Model 6 - 6 drives
, When equipped with an appropriate compatibility feature,
drives on these models can operate at 15,000 bytes/second
(800 bpi) ... see "Special Features."
tor channel of a 2860, or Selector Subchannel (special feature)
on a 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
For S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector
channel (special feature, or block multiplexer channel (special
feature) ... see 3135. not supported on byte multiplexer channel
for concurrent operation with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated
Communications Adapter, or a Selector Channel.
For S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard),
block multiplexer channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
Not supported by byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications
Adapter, or block multiplexer channel.
For S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard),
block multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138. Not supported by byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation with
Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or
block multiplexer channel.
For S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or selector channels ... see 3145.
Model Changes: A model 1, 2 or 3 can be field converted to
another model within that group ... a model 4, 5 or 6 to another
model in that group ... no other changes are possible. See item
[1] under "Specify."
For S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard),
block multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
Highlights: Tape drives read and write the following half-inch
magnetic tapes: IBM Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, IBM Series 500,
or competitive formulations which meet the specifications described in SRL GA32-0006. IBM Mylar" is suitable for use at
200, 556 or 800 bpi, but should not be used at 1600 bpi.
For S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
The standard drives read or write 9-track tapes. Special features
permit reading and writing of 7-track tapes ... see "Special Features."
Nine Track Operation -- in 9-track format, data is recorded
prallel by bit, serial by byte, in 9 tracks across the width of the
tape ... tape data format uses 8 of the 9 bits for data, the 9th
bit serving as a parity bit. The 8 data digits can represent an
alphameric or special character, two digits, a signed digit, or 8
binary bits.
Seven Track Operation -- tape is written in 7 -track format
compatible
with
tape
written
by
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units and by
2401/2415 (or 2402/2403/ 2404) and 3420s equipped with
7-track Read/Write Heads. For this operation, a compatibility
feature #7125, #7127 or #7135 is required ... see "Special
Features."
Checking: Read-back-check-while-write on all drives vertical,
longitudinal and diagonal parity recording on 800 bpi drives.
For S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard),
block multiplexer channels ... see 3148.
3031 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is standard),
block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031 .
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional) ... see 4331 byte
multiplexer channel for restrictions ... blo~k multiplexer channel
(optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see
4341.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] All 2415 models are to be ordered as follows:
2415 Model
1
2
3
4
5
Error Correction: Automatic in-flight single track error correction
is provided for 1600 bpi 9-track format ... all other errors are
detected and conventional error recovery routines apply. The
cyclic redundancy check character is recorded on 800 bpi 9-track
format to maintain 2400 series compatibility ... drives are not
capable of error correction during read operations ... all errors are
detected and conventional error recovery routines apply.
All tapes (9 or 7 -track) written on a
Read Backward:
2401/2402/2403/2404/ 2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE
only)/3420
can
be
read
by
any
2401/2402/
2403/2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE only)/3420 in a
forward or backward direction ... Data Conversion (#3228) cannot
be used when reading 7 -track tape backwards ... tapes written by
727/729/7330/7701 /7702/7765s cannot be read backward.
Quick Release Latches: Each drive has quick release latches to
facilitate mounting and removing of tape reels.
Characteristics:
Bytes/second
Density. (bytes/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/second)
Nominal Interrecord Gap (inches)
Nominal IRG Time (milliseconds)
Rewind Time, induding reload (minutes)
Rewind and Unload (minutes)
Mdll, 2, 3
Md14, 5, 6
15,000
800
18.75
.6
32.00
4.0
4.0
30,000/15,000
1600/800
18.75
.6
32.00
4.0
4.0
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): For 2415 only -- #9903
for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[3] Read /Write Heads: A 9-track head is furnished as standard for
each of the two drives in each 2415
unless Seven
Track Compatibility (#7125, #7127) or Seven and Nine Track
Compatibility (#7135) is ordered for the 2415 and 7-track
Read/Write Heads are specified as indicated under those
features ... see "Special Features."
[4] Color: For 2415
listed in [1] above, specify
one of the following -- #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray. The same color must be
specified for all units comprising the 2415.
[5] Empty Tape Reels: If other than the standard gray reels are
desired, for 2415
listed in [1] above, specify
two of the following in any combination -- #9051 for red,
#9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
[6J Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped prior
to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
Prerequisites:
For S/360 mdl 25 -- a control unit position on the Selector
Channel (#6960) on the 2025 ... see 2025.
For S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- a control unit position on a
multiplexer channel (standard), or Selector Channel (special
feature, except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) ...
see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
For S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- a control unit position on a selec•• Mylar is a trademark of E.!. Dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc. "IBM Mylar"
is a brand of magnetic tape which includes a Mylar polyester substrate and
which was previously marketed by IBM.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- - - --.:..:.:
- ==--';' ==
M 2415.2
May 79
DP Machines
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
(cont'd)
--FTP/-PRICES:
Mdl
2415
1
MAC/ MLC
MRC 1 Yrt
$841
1,345
1,845
1 ,015
1,630
2,240
2
3
4
5
6
MLC
2 Yr Purchase
$774 $706
1,237 1,130
1,697 1,550
934
853
1,500 1,369
2,061 1,882
$32,950
52,690
72,420
40,010
64,260
88,510
MMMC
$187
334
486
214
382
553
Plan Offering: ~Ian A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 45%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Removal of #9680 and #9683 in effect causes these drive positions to
revert to standard 9-track heads ar.d installation of #9681 and #96R2
changes these other positions to 7-track heads. Parts (and instructions)
supplied
will enable all drives to function in the desired
manner when installed.
SEVEN AND NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY
(#7135). [Models 4, 5, 6 only] Satisfies the requirements of both
Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320) and Seven
Track Compatibility (#7127). Permits reading and writing of both
7 and 9-track 800 bpi NRZI tape. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #5320 or #7127. Specify: #7135 for 2415 only ... do not
specify on 2416(s) since only the unit containing control circuits is
affected. Either or both drives in the 2415
may
be equipped with a 7-trach Read/Write Head. From the following
table order only for the specific position(s) on each unit which is
to read /write 7 -track tape:'
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA CONVERSION (#3228). Program-controlled feature for
processing data with maximum packing efficiency. On a write
operation, three 8-bit bytes are written as four 6-bit tape characters ... on a read operation, four 6-bit tape characters are converted to three 8-bit bytes. Limitation: Cannot be used when reading
7 -track tapes backwards.
Note:
Specify on 2415
Prerequisite: Seven Track Compatibility (#7125 or #7127) or
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135).
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4701, #4703). [For field installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on
units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2415
without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it
can be logically disconnected from the system before power is
turned off, can continue operating. #4701 -- for a 2415 mdl 1, or
3 ... #4703 --- for a 2415 mdl 4, 5 or 6. Note: Specify on 2415
only. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC
level requirements,
NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY (#5320). [Models
4, 5, 6 only] Required if any of the 2415
drives is to
read or write 800 bpi 9-track NRZI in addition to 1600 bpi.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Seven Track Compatibility
(#7127) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI ~RZI) Compatibility
(#7135). Note: Specify on 2415 only.
SEVEN TRACK COMPATIBILITY (#7125, 7127). Required if any
of the 2415
drives is to read or write 7-track tape.
Note: Each 2415 and 2416 has two drives. Permits them to read
or write tape in 7-track format compatible with tape generated by
727/729/ 7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape drives and by
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/3420 tape drives with 7-track
Read/Write Heads. #7125 -- for mdl 1, 2 or 3 ... #7127 -- for
mdl 4, 5 or 6. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track
(800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320) or Seven and Nine Track
(800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135). Specify: Depending on
2415 model, #7125 or #7127 for 2415 only ... do not specify on
2416(s) since only the unit containing control circuits is affected.
Either or both drives in the 2415
. may be equipped with a 7-track Read/Write Head ... from the following table,
order only for the specific position(s) on each unit which is to
read/write 7-track tape:
Type
Model
2415
4
#9680
#9681
2415
5
#9680
#9681
2415
6
#9680
#9681
Note: For any drive where a 7-track head is not specified, a
9-track head will be furnished.
In the field, a 7-track head can be replaced by a 9-track head,
and vice versa, by MES for a rental customer. On purchased
machines, the charge will be made on an RPQ basis.
must show specific 9XXX feature numbers (from above list) to
designate which 7-track head is to be removed and which is to
be installed. A typical example of such a change is described
under Seven Track Compatibility (#7125, 7127) above.
Special Feature Prices:
Data Conversion
#3228
Isolation, Control Unit
for mdl 1,2,3
4701
for mdl 4,5,6
4703
9 Track Compatibility
5320
7 Track Compatibility
for mdl 1,2,3
7125
for mdl 4,5,6
7127
7 & 9 Track Compatibility7135
7-track Read/Write Heads
Left Drive (A)
Right Drive (B)
Type
Model
2415
1 or 4
#9680
#9681
2415
2 or 5
#9680
#9681
2415
3 or 6
#9680
#9681
Note: For any drive where a 7-track head is not specified, a
9-track head will be furnished.
In the field, a 7-track head can be replaced by a 9-track head,
and vice versa, by
for a rental customer. On purchased
machines, the change will be made on an RPQ basis.
must show specific 9XXX feature numbers (from above list) to
designate which 7-track head is to be removed and which is to
be installed. For example, on a 2415 model 2, the following are
installed:
7-track Heads
2415 mdl 2 #9680 (left drive)
9-track Heads
Standard on right drive
It is desired to switch 7 and 9-track heads on the 2415
Hence, the following MES is required:
On 2415 -- Remove #9680 and install #9681
t
7-track Read/Write Heads
Left Drive (A)
Right Drive (Bl
PTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---PTPj--MACjMLC MLC
MRC I Yrt2 Yr PurchaseMMMC FIC
$49
$45
$41
NC
NC
150
NC
NC
138
NC
NC
126
NC
NC
5,825
NC
NC
15.00
NC
NC
480
54
105
172
50
97
158
45
88
144
2,145 2.00
4,085 4.50
6,675 21.00
527
527
665
$1,935 $1.50
$88
----== =-= == ';' ==
-..-------- -----
M 2420
May 79
DP Machines
2420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit for use with 8/360, 8/370 or 4300
Processors.
Model 5
160,000 bytes/second. For use with 8/360 mdls
30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, 85, 91, 195, any 8/370
Processor (except 3115 or 3125},or 4341 Processor.
Model 7
320,000. bytes/second. For use with 8/360 mdls
50, 65, 67, 75, 85, 91, 195, any 8/370 Processor
(except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300 Processor.
. 2420 mdl 7s must be attached to a selector channel, or on a
8/360 mdl 85, 195 and S/370 mdl 165, 195 to a shared subchannel of a 2880. On a S/370 mdl 155, 158 or 3031, 3032 or
3033 Processor only a block multiplexer channel can be used. On
a 8/370 mdl 135, only a 8elector Channel (special feature) with
or without the block multiplexer channel may be used. On a
8/370 mdl 135-3 or 138 only a block multiplexer channel may be
used. 2420 mdl 7s must be attached to the block multiplexer channel
on 4331 (special feature) or 4341 Processors.
Supplies: One standard 10-1/2" reel of magnetic tape enclosed
in an Easyload Cartridge is supplied with the unit
.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Bibliography: 8/360 -- GC20-0360,
Highlights: Has one tape drive which reads or writes IBM
Series/500, Dynexcel, or Heavy Duty half-inch magnetic tape on
10-1/2", 8-1/2" or Minireels. A completely new tape transport
minimizes mechanical delay. Tape wear is minimized ". the only
contact of the recording surface is the Read/Write Head and the
tape cleaner. Minimum exposure to tape damage from operator
handling. In-column rewind at approximately 500" /second for any
amount of tape (last 100' rewinds at machine read/write speed).
Limitations: The following half-inch tapes can be used: IBM
Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, IBM 8eries 500, or competitive formualtions which meet the specifications decribed in 8RL GA320006. IBM Mylar and IBM Acetate tapes should not be used with
2420 tape units.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 208 V.
Automatic Threading -- threading is automatic with or without the
new wraparound cartridge ... reduced set-up and tear-down time
... with the wraparound cartridge, tape is protected at all times.
Note: For shortened or stripped tape reel considerations, see SRL
GA22-6918.
Recording Format -- 9-track phase encoded. Data is recorded
parallel by bit, serial by byte, in 9 tracks across the width of the
tape. Tape data format uses 8 of the 9 bits for data ... the 9th bit
serving as a parity bit. The eight bits of one character can represent an alphabetic, numeric or special character, two digits, a
signed digit, or eight binary bits. The recording format is compatible with the 1600 bpi phase encoded recording on drives of
2401/2402/2403/2415 mdls 4, 5 and 6.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3] Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
PRICES:
Mdl
2420
5
7
-FTPMAC/ MLC
MLC
MRC 1 Yr· 2 Yr Purchase
$ 634 $ 583 $ 533
1.140 1,049
958
Checking -- when writing, vertical parity is recorded and each
track is read and checked for parity ... when reading, each byte is
parity checked. If a check occurs, an error condition is either
signalled or corrected, depending upon monitored signal levels,
Error Correction -- automatic inflight single track error correction
for tape defect errors (lack of recorded signal).
Power Window -- a standard feature ... operates electrically ...
lowers automatically on rewind-unload command.
Quick Release Hatch - facilitates mounting and removal of tape
reel.
Model 1
Model 2
Bytes/second
160,000
Density (bytes/inch)
1,600
Tape Speed (inches/second)
100
Nominal Interblock Gap (inches)
0.6
Nominal IBG/IRG Time (milliseconds)
6.0
Rewind Time (minutes)
1.2
Rewind and Unload (minutes)
1.3
•• Autothreading Operation (seconds)
10.0
Read/Write Access Time (milliseconds) 3.9/3.4
320,000
1,600
200
0.6
3.0
1.0
1.1
7.0
2.5
•• From initiation (using mounted supply real) to "tape drive
ready."
Prerequisite: A 2803 Tape Control mdl 2, serial no. above 14,000
and below 30,000, equipped with a 2420 Model 5/7 Attachment
(#7900). Note: Before ordering, see #7900 under "Special
Features" for 2803.
Limitations: 2420 mdl 7s can be attached only to S/360 mdl 50,
65, 67, 75, 85, 91, 195, any S/370 Processor (except 3115 or
3125), or any 4300 Processor. 2420 mdl 55 can be attached only to
8/360 mdls 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, 75, 85, 91, 195, any S/370
Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300 Processor. On a
S/360 mdl 30, diagnostic support requires a 2030 mdl 0 or larger.
2420 mdl 5s must be attached to a selector channel or 8elector
Subchannel (special feature) of 2870, or on a S/360 mdl 85, 195
or S/370 mdl 165, 195 to a shared subchannel of a 2880. On a
S/370 mdl 155, 158, or a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, only a
block multiplexer channel may be used. On a 8/370 mdl 135 only
a 8elector Channel (special feature) may be used. On a S/370
mdl 135-3 or 138 only a block multiplexer channel may be used.
2420 mdl 5s must be attached to the block multiplexer channel on 4331
(special feature) or 4341 Processors.
$27,880
50,590
MMMC
$181
198
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Metering: I/O Unit (online)
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Jlead Backwards -- all 1600 bpi tapes can be read in a forward or
backward direction.
•
Characteristics
8/370 -- GC20-0001.
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -------=- =- - =
----':' =
M 2501
May 79
DP Machines
2501
CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input unit for a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85
and 195, any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
For description and use of the 2501 mdl A 1 or A2 with the 1130,
System/3 or S/360 mdl 20, see the GSD
Manual.
Model
Rated 80-column Card 5peed
Bl
B2
600/minute
1,000/minute
Model Changes: Can be made only between mdls Al and A2, or
between mdls Bl and B2.
Highlights: The system's processing unit performs all format
control and analysis. the unit provides high-speed, low-cost card
input. Cards are read serially by a light sensing mechanism which
is checked for proper functioning in every card cycle. The Extended BCD Interchange Code (256 codes) can be read ... invalid
codes, off-punching and mispositioned cards are detected. Models
61 and 62 include their own control unit.
Binary Codes:: A model 61 or B2 must be equipped with Card
Image (#1531) to read binary codes ... see "Special Features."
All models have a 1,200-card capacity hopper and a 1,300-card
capacity stacker.
Maximum:
5/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any 5/370 Processor, or any 4300
Processor -- the number of 2501 mdls 61 and/or 62 that can be
attached depends upon the number of system channel control
unit positions available. Caution: When attaching to S/370 mdl
115, 125, 135, 135-3 or 138, see performance limitations.
Performance Limitations:
1.The 2501 is an unbuffered time-dependent machine. If the CPU
does not reissue a new card read command within 19.4 ms for
the 2501 mdl 61, or 3.5 ms for the 2501 mdl 62, the card
reader performance will be reduced to one half the rated
speed; or less if the processing time exceeds 100 ms. or 60
ms. respectively.
2. For S/370 mdl 115 operating under DOS/VS, special precautions must be taken in order to operate the 2501 mdl 62 near
rated speed. Some methods for achieving this are to use either
the Power /VS option or to use programs employing chained
card read commands.
3.
For S/370 mdl 125, 135, 135-3 or 138 operating under
DOS/VS, special precautions must be taken in order to operate
the 2501 mdl 62 at or near rated speed. Some methods for
achieving this are to use either the Power /VS option or to use
pr09rams employing chained card read commands.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved:
Internal 5cores(before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3, Sl
and 10-3 (2" x 3-1/4" or 2-3/16" x 3-3/4" sizes only). Note:
When using OM-2 or OM-3, reading must be terminated prior to
the column that is scored.
External 5cores (after separation) -- M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-ll, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-ll. OM-3 may be used if the score is
on the column 1 end. Note: Upper left corner cut required when
the M-ll or C-l1 is used on column 1 end.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Prerequisites:
5/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any 5/370 Processor, or any 4300
Processor -- an available control unit position on a system channel.
5/360 mdl 25 -- special features on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except 2022, one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel, High Speed Multiplexer Channel, Add'l High Speed Multiplexer Subchannels ... see 2044.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195 or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector
channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870, or shared subchannel
of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature)
see 3115, 3125.
5/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features), or Block Multiplexer Channel
(special feature) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ." see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ". see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector
channels ". see 3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ". see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ". see 3148.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360 S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC; l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped prior
to December 29, 1967 ". see "Special Features" below.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
2501
Bl
B2
$336
413
$16,310
16,570
$84.00
91.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: 6
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Purchase Option: 40%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD IMAGE (#1531). [Model 61 or 62 only] Permits reading of
cards with multiple punches in a single card column. When reading in card image mode (Data Mode 2), the validity check is suspended because all characters are considered valid.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Model 61 or B2 only".
for field installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967
" standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on
the 2501 without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system before
power is turned off, can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC level requirements,
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Card Image
Isolation, Control Unit
5/370 mdl 155, 158 --- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ." see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ". see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard).
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
#1531
4700
$36
NC
$1,740
NC
$1.00
NC
FIC
$70
NC
------- ---- ------==- =":' =
M 2502
May 79
DP Machines
2502
CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input unit for a 2770 or 3770 Data Communication System, a System/7 (5024), or an 8100 Information
System via 3289 Printer mdl 3.
Model
Rated 80-column Card Speed
A1
A2
A3
150/minute (not with System/7)
300/minute (not with 8100)
400/minute (3776-3,3776-4,3777 only)
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: On the 2772, 3289-3, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777
used for automatic entry of punched card data to the transmission
line or to offline operation units. The 2772 Multi-purpose Control
Unit or 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 Communication Terminal or
3289-3 printer performs all format control and analyis.
Cards are read serially by a sensing mechanism which is checked
for proper functioning in every card cycle. EBCDIC (256 characters) or ASCII (128 characters) code can be read, depending upon
the transmission code specified for the 2772, 3774, 3775, 3776
or 3777. EBCDIC (256 charActers) can be read and transmitted
by the 3289-3. ASCII is not applicable to the 3777-2. Invalid
codes, off-punching and mispositioned cards are checked.
INTERCHANGEABLE FEED, 66/80 Column (#46511. Permits
reading of 66 or 80-column cards. Operator can readily set up
machine to read 66-column cards and reconvert it to read 80column cards. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Interchangeable Feed, 51/80 Column (#4650).
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5450). [not with 3289 mdl 3, 3776 mdl
3 or 4 or 3777] For reading of up to 40 columns of marked data.
Either marked and/or punched hole data can be read from the
same card. Cards on which a mark was unacceptable are offset
stacked and the reader continues operation when in line mode.
Prerequisite: Optical Mark Read (#5450) on the 2772, or Optical
Mark Read (#5455) on a 3782 mdl 2 attached to a 3774, 3775
or 3776 mdl 1 or 2.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Interchangeable Feed
51/80 Column
66/80 Column
Optical Mark Read
#4650
4651
5450
$31
31
141
On the System/7, used for automatic entry of punched card data
to the system. The 5024 I/O Attachment Enclosure (mdls 2 or 3)
performs all format control and analysis.
Hopper capacity is 700 cards ... stacker capacity is 600 cards.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following has been approved.
External Scores: Column 1 end -- M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-ll, OM-2, OM-3, CF-4 and CF-ll. Column 80 End -- M-5,
M-7, M-ll, CF-4, CF-11.
Internal Scores: M-4, M-5, S-l, S-2, 10-1, 10-2 and 10-3.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
C-4 corner cut cards cannot be used.
Prerequisites:
For Model A1
2502 Model Al Attachment (#8020) on the
2772 ... 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149) on the
3289-3, 3774, 3775 or 3776 and a 3782 Card Attachment Unit
mdl 2 ... 2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8002) on the 3777.
For Model A2: -- 2502 Mdl A2 Attachment (#8021) on the
2772 ... 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149) on the
3774, 3775 or 3776 and a 3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 ...
2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8002) on the 3777 ... 5024
mdl 2 or 3 with System/7.
For Model A3 -- 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149)
on the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 and a 3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2
... 2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8002) on the 3777.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): For use with
2772 -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage. For use with 3289-3, 3774, 3775,
3776, 3777 or System/7 -- #9901 for 115 V.
[21 Color: #9045 for gray when used with 2772 ... #9046 for
white when used with 3289-3, 3774, 3775, 3776, 3777 or
System/7.
.
[3] Documentation: One must be specified -- #9100 for use with a
2772, #9101 for use with a 3289-3, 3774, 3775 or 3776,
#9102 for use with a 3777, or #9103 for Lise with a System/7.
[4] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard.
Mdl
2502
A1
A2
A3
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Purchase Option: 30%
MACI
MRC
$143
Purchase MMMC
$6,160
179 6,680
213
6,880
$50.50
50.50
65.00
Warranty: 8
Useful life Category: 2
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES (not with System/7 -- 5024)
INTERCHANGEABLE FEED, 51/80 COLUMN (#4650). Permits
reading of 51 or 80-column cards. Operator can readily set up
machine to read 51-column cards and reconvert it to read 80column cards. limitation: Cannot be installed with Interchangeable Feed, 66/80 Column (#4651).
.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
$1,330
1,330
5,830
$16
16
29
FIC
$106
106
266
-------- -----=- =-- --=----':' =
M 2320.1
May 79
DP Machines
2520 CARD READ PUNCH
multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) on 2870, shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860,
2870,2880.
Purpose: Combination punched card I/O unit for a S/360 mdl 22
thru 85 and 195, any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Proce.~sor.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
For description and use of the model A1 with S/360 mdl 20, see
GSD
manual.
Model
B1
Rated 80-col
Card Speed
For use with
500/minute
read & punch
S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 & 195
Any S/370 Processor
Model Changes: Can be made between mdl Aland the 2520
Card Punch mdl A2 or A3, or between mdl B1 and the 2520 Card
Punch mdl B2 or B3.
Highlights: All reading and punching format control and analysis
are performed by the system's processing unit. The unit has a
1 ~200 card capacity hopper and two 1,300 card capacity stackers.
The Extended BCD Interchange ,Code (256 codes) can be read or
punched.
Binary Codes: A model B1 must be equipped with Card Image
(#1531) to read or punch binary codes. See "Special Features,"
Input Section: Reads serially while the preceding card is passing
the punching station. The light sensing mechanism is checked for
proper functioning in every card cycle. Invalid codes and mispositioned cards are detected.
Output Section: Punches parallel, row by row, while the following
card is passing the read station, Blank or prepunched cards can
be punched. Cards go to stacker 1 unless directed to stacker 2
by the processing unit. Punching is checked. Cards in which
punch errors are detected are automatically selected into stacker
1 on model B1.
Maximum:
S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any S/370 PrQJ;:essor or an)' 4300
Processor -- the number of 2520 mdl B 1s that can be attached
depends upon the number of system channel control unit positions available.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 PrOCf!.•.•or -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are .~tandard) ... see 4341.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following has been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, either OM-2 or OM-3
without round corner cut on score, 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, S-l ... OM-2
and OM-3 with round corner cut may be used if the score is in
column 27 ... M-5 may be used if the operator limits the stacker
to 1,000 cards ... cards folded at the crease (Card Fold Crease
S-2) must be properly flattened. Note: When using OM-2 or
OM-3, reading must be terminated prior to the column that is
scored.
External Scores (after separation) -- M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-11, CT -4 and CF-11 ... OM-2 may be used if the score is on
the column 1 end.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Bibliography: S/360, -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz) ... #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PREREQUISITES:
S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, or any S/370 Processor -- the mdl
B1 includes its own control and requires an available control unit
position on a system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 - special features on 2025: Multiplexer Channel
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except 2022 one selector
<:,hannel is standard) '" .see 2022, 2930, 2040, :1050.
S/360 mdl 44 - special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'l High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/360 mdl 85, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Block Multiplexer Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channels
(special features) ... see 3135.
PRICES:
2520
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
B1
$1,180
$44,420
$286
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Purchase Option: 40%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD IMAGE (#1531). Permits reading and punching cards with
multiple punches in a single column. When reading in card image
mode (Data Mode 2), validity checking is suspended because all
characters are considered valid.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2520 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off, can
continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements,
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase
Card Image
#1531 $37
Isolation, Control Unit 4700 NC
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels .. , see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$1,740
NC
MMMC
FIC
$1.00
NC
$118
NC
M 2520.2
May 79
DP Machines
2520 CARD PUNCH Models 82, 83
Purpose: High-speed punched card output unit for a S/360 mdl
22 thru 85 and 195, any S/370 Processor, orallY 4300 Processor.
For description and use of the model A2 or A3 with 8/360 mdl
20, see GSD
manual.
Model
Rated 80-col
Card Speed
For use with
B2
500/minute
S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 or 195
B3
300/minute
Any S/370 Processor
Model Changes: Can be made between mdl A2 and A3, or between A2 or A3 and a 2520 Card Read Punch mdl A 1 ... or between mdl B2 and B3, or between B2 or B3 and a 2520 Card
Read Punch mdl B1.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional). block multiplex.
er channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multi·
plexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Card Limitations: Generally scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) - M-4, either OM-2 or
OM-3 without round corner cut on score, 10-1, 1D-2, 10-3, S-1 ...
OM-2 and OM-3 with round corner cut may be used if the score
is in column 27 ... M-5 may be used if the operator limits the
stacker to 1,000 cards ... cards folded at the crease (Card Fold
Crease S-2) must be properly flattened.
External Scores (after separation) -- M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-11, CF-4, CF=ll, OM-3 ... OM-2 may be used if the score is
on the column 80 end.
Highlights: The system's processing unit performs all format
control and analysis. The unit has a l,200-card capacity hopper
and two l,300-card capacity stackers. The Extended BCD Interchange Code (256 codes) can be punched.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Punches parallel, row by row. Blank or prepunched cards can be
punched. Cards go to stacker 1 unless directed to stacker 2 by
the processing unit. Punching is checked. Cards in which punching errors are detected are automatically selected into stacker 1
on mdls B2 and B3.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Binary Codes: A model B2 or B3 can punch binary codes when
equipped with Card Image (#1531) ... see "Special Features."
Maximum: S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any S/370 Processor or
any 4300 Processor -- the number of 2520 mdls B2 and B3 that can
be attached depends upon the number of system channel control
unit positions available.
Prerequisites:
5/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any 5/370 Processor or any 4300
Processor -- a mdl B2 or B3 includes its own controls and requires an available control unit position on a system channel.
5/360 mdl 25 -- special features on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features), except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: ~Multiplexer Channels, High Speed Multiplexer Channel, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer Subchanllels ... see 2044.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870, shared subchannel of 2880 '" see 2860, 2870, 2880.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
5/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channel (special
feature) ... see 135.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Isolation Feature (mdl B2 or B3 only): May be required on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special
Features."
PRICES:
2520
Mdl
B2
B3
MAC/
MRC
$1,050
810
Purchase
$39,340
39,010
MMMC
$268
215
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD IMAGE (#1531). [Model B2, B3 only] Permits punching
cards with multiple punches in a sin~le column.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700), [Model B2, B3 only ... for
field installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ...
standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on
the 2520 mdl B2 or B3 without generating spurious signals. Thus,
a CPU program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off, can continue operating.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements,
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase
MMMC
FIC
Card Image
Isolation, Cntrl Unit
$37
NC
$1.00
NC
$70
NC
#1531
4700
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 ~ mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector
channels ... see 3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) .,. see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channel (first two are standard) .,. see 3155, 3158.
5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic
multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) on 2870, shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860,
2870.2880.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard). block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$1,740
NC
-------- - --=
- --=--- =----':' =
M 2540
May 79
DP Machines
2540 CARD READ PUNCH
Purpose: Combination punched card I/O unit for a S/360 mdl 22
thru 85, 195, any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
Highlights: When used in conjunction with a 2821, fully buffered
card reading and punching is provided. When attached to a 2025
via the Integrated 2540 Attachment (#4591), card reading and
punching is buffered directly into core memory.
The system's processing unit performs all format control and
analysis. The unit has five 1 ,350-card capacity stackers located
between the read and punch feeds. The center stacker can be fed
from either feed, but should be reserved to only one side during a
machine run. The Extended BCD Interchange Code (256 codes)
can be read or punched.
Input Section -- cards are fed from a 3,1 OO-card capacity file
feed at a rated speed of 1,000 cards/minute ... limited to 800
cards/minute when 51-column Interchangeable Read Feed
(#4151) is installed. Actual speed depends upon the operation.
Cards go to the normal (R1) stacker unless program-directed to
stacker R2 or R3 (center stacker). Has two sets of reading
brushes ... first for "hole-count" ... second for reading and
"hole-count" proving. Invalid codes set an error indicator.
Output Section -- cards are fed from a 1 ,350-card capacity
hopper at a rated speed of 300 cards/minute. Actual speed
depends upon the operation. Cards go to normal (P1) stacker
unless program-directed to stacker P2 or RP3. Reading brushes
check "hole-counts" and cannot read data into the system. Only
blank cards can be fed through the punch feed. Prepunched
cards cause incorrect "hole-counts" which set error indicator
and direct error cards to stacker P1 .
Prerequisites:
SPECIAL FEATURES
51-COLUMN INTERCHANGEABLE READ FEED (#4151). [plant
installation only] For 80 or 51-column cards ... read feed only.
The 51 columns correspond to columns 15 through 65 of an
80-column card. A card weight, adapter tray, and removable side
plates are provided for the standard file feed. Two card stackers,
R1 and R2, are modified so that the operator can adjust for 80 or
51-column operation. When the stackers are set for 51-column
mode, the system reads only the 51 columns of data in read
positions 15 through 65 and the capacity of stackers R1 and R2 is
reduced to 800 cards. limitation: When this feature is installed,
reading speed is permanently reduced from 1,000 cpm to 800
cpm.
PUNCH FEED READ (#5890). For punching output data into the
same card from which input data was read. Adds a special set of
80 reading brushes one station ahead of the punch station.
limitations: Column binary cards cannot be read in the punch
feed ... refer to SRL GA21-9033 for limitations on use of prepunched cards. Prerequisite: When attached to a 2821, Punch
Feed Control (#5895) on the 2821 ... when attached to a 2025
via Integrated 2540 Attachment (#4595), Punch Feed Read Control (#5895) on the 2025.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH ADAPTER (#8102). Required If the
2540 is to be used with a 2821 equipped with a Two Channel
Switch (#8100) '" permits the read and punch feeds of the 2540
to be reset independently. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch
(#8100) on 2821.
Special Feature Prices:
51-col Inter Read Feed
Punch Feed Read
Two Chnl Switch Adptr
S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85, '195, any S/370 Processor or any
4300 Processor -- a 2821 Control Unit mdl 1, 4, 5 or 6. Note: 2540
Compatibility Attachment (#8065) is required on the 2821 if the
2540 is to be used in compatibility mode with a 2030 equipped
with 1401/1440/1460 Basic Compatibility and 1402/1403
Attachment (#4463), with a 2030 equipped with 1620 Compatibility (#7190), or with a 2040 equipped with 1401/1460 Compatibility (#4457).
S/360 mdl 25 -- a 2540 can be attached via the Integrated
2540 Attachment (#4595) on the 2025, or via a 2821 Control
Unit mdl 1, 4, 5 or 6 attached to a Multiplexer Channel (#5249)
or Selector Channel (#6960) on the 2025. When attached via
#4595 on the 2025, a S/360 Model 25 Adapter (#9725) is
required on the 2540 ... see "Specify."
Card Limitations: Prepunched cards can be processed through
the punch feed only if Punch Feed Read (#5890) is installed ...
see "Special Features."
When attached to a 2821, binary cards and cards with multiple
significant digit punching in a single column can be processed
only if Column Binary (#1990) is installed on the 2821 ... column
binary is standard on the Integrated 2540 Attachment (#4595) on
the 2025.
Because cards are stacked on end, internally scored cards (M-3,
OM-3) or cards that have been folded at the crease (S-2) are not
recommended for use ... only the following have been approved
for use: Before separation -- M-4, 8-1; after separation -- M-3,
M-4, M-5, M-7, M-11, CF-4, CF-11.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
8/370 -- GC20-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60Hz); #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] S/360 Model 25 Adapter: #9725. Required if the 2540 is to
be attached via the Integrated 2540 Attachment (#4595) on a
2025. Can be field installed.
PRICES:
2540
Mdl
MACI
MRC
Purchase
$920
$36,920
MMMC
$196
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Purchase Option: 45%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MACI
MRC
#4151
5890
8102
$80
33
NC
Purchase MMMC
$4,030
1,045
NC
$53.50
5.50
NC
FIC
PO
$241
NC
------- --- ------= =- =": =
M 2560
May 79
DP Machines
2560 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD MACHINE
Purpose: A multi-function card input/output unit for a S/360 mdl
25, or a S/370 mdl 115 or 125.
For use with System/3 model 15 or S/360 mdl 20, see GSD
manual.
Model A1
For native attachment to a 2025, 3115 or 3125,
or for a 5415.
Model A2
For a S/370 mdl 1·15, or for a 5415.
of five passes, M-4 ... M-5 may be used if the operator limits the
stackers to 1,000 cards and the number of passes does not
exceed five ... cards folded at the crease (card fold crease S-2)
must be properly flattened.
External Scores (after separation) -- for reading, punching and
printing: On the column 1 end -- M-7, M-ll and CF-ll; On the
column 80 end -- M-3, M-6', M-7, OM-2' and CF-4' (maximum
of five passes for C-4). For reading only: On column 80 end
M-4, M-5, M-ll and CF-ll.
'Punching not recommended if card has O.K. verify notch.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field only from mdl A2 to Al
(without Card Print feature).
Highlights:
Provides the combined functions of a card
reader/punch, collator, and, with Card Print (# 1575 - 1577) on a
mdl A 1, card interpreter/document printer in one unit. Permits
collating, gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching, punching of calculgted results, printing and classifying of cards in a
single pass of the cards. The Extended BCD Interchange Code
(256 codes) can be read and punched ... with a 2025, binary
codes may also be read
with 3115 or 3125, binary codes may
be both read and punched.
Input Section -- separate primary and secondary card hoppers,
each with a 1,200-card capacity, feed cards independently in
separate paths through pre-read, read and pre-punch stations.
Rated serial reading is at 500 cards/minute from either hopper
with mdl Al, or 310 cards/minute with mdl A2. The common
reading unit, a light sensing mechanism, is checked for proper
functioning on each read cycle. Invalid codes, off-punching, and
mispositioned cards are detected.
Output Section -- from the separate primary and secondary
pre-punch stations, cards merge into a common path past the
punch, pre-print and print stations, and on into anyone of the
radial stackers, each with a 1,300-card capacity. Mdl Al has
five stackers and Mdl A2 has four stackers. Blank or prepunched cards can be punched.
Rated serial punching speeds
Some rated throughputs,
cards/minute, are:
First 10 columns only
First 40 columns only
First 60 columns only
80 columns
Model A1
Model A2
160 cols/sec
120 cols/sec
260
145
112
91
173
100
79
65
Actual speed depends upon the last column punched. Interspersed columns between fields to be punched are counted at
the rated serial punching speed.
Multi-function -- with the ability to move cards from either hopper
under independent control to the punching station and with complete stacker selection flexibility, the common card functions of
collating, reproducing, gangpunching. summary punching. and
selective stacking can be accomplished ... singly or in combination.
Limitation: When operating in S/360 mode on a S/360 mdl 25.
the 2560 performs only the read/punch functions of the 2540
Card Read Punch ... for operation in S/360 mode. 2540 Emulation Control (#7800) is required on the 2025 in addition to the
Integrated 2560 Attachment (#4596).
Note: If #7800 is installed on the 2025. emulation of a 2501,
2520 or 1442 mdl 5 in S/360 mode is not possible on the
2025 since #7800 and the Integrated 2540 Attachment
(#4595) cannot both be installed. See #4595, #4596 and
#7800 under "Special Features" for the 2025.
Maximum: One 2560 can be attached to a S/360 mdl 25, a
S/370 mdl 115 or 125.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner
cut cards cannot be used.
Bibliography: S/360 mdl 25 -- GC20-0360, S/370 mdl 115, 125
-- GC20-0001
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 60 Hz. power provided by system):
#9903 for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3) S/360 Model 25 Adapter (mdl A 1 only): #9725. Required if
the 2560 is to be attached to a 2025 ... can be field installed.
[4) S/370 mdl 115 Adapter: #9727. Required if the 2560 is to be
attached to a 3115 ... can be field installed.
[5) S/370 Mdl 125 Adapter (Mdl Al only): #9726 ... can be field
installed.
PRICES:
Mdl
2560
A1
A2
MAC/
MRC
$799
621
Purchase MMMC
$21,230
15,590
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Purchase Option: 40%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD PRINT (#1575, 1576, 1577). [Model Al only) [#1575 -plant installation only) Each provides a print unit with two print
heads for printing two lines. Printing is on the face-down side of
cards passing through the print unit. Each head prints a maximum
horizontal line of 64 printing positions. spaced 10 characters/inch,
extending approximately between card columns 2 and 75. Printing
can be operator-adjusted to any of the 25 line positions from
above the "12-punch" row to below the "9-punch" row ... see
"Limitation" below. Each head prints any of the characters from
the standard 63-character set printed by a 1443 mdl Nl or 2203
Printer. Rated speed is 140 print positions/second, regardless of
the number of heads per print position simultaneously activated ...
interspersed blank print positions between fields to be printed
count at the 2~0 position/second rate. Actual speed depends
upon the location of the last position, on any line, printed on a
card. #1575 -- for first two lines ... #1576 -- for second two lines
... #1577 -- for third two lines. Limitation: In punched fields,
printing on any of the twelve even numbered lines will probably
result in parts of characters being lost because of printing on
holes. and should normally be avoided ... printing on line position
5 should be avoided because of possible smearing. Prerequisites:
Card Print Control (#1580) on the 3115 or 3125 ... #1576 requires #1575 ... #1577 requires #1576.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Card Print [mdl A 1 only]
#1575 $172 $4,625
first two lines
second two lines
1576 172 4,625
third two lines
1577 172 4,625
Prerequisites:
For S /360 mdl 25 -- the 2560 mdl A 1 requires Integrated 2560
Attachment (#4596) and S/360 Model 20 Mode (#7600) on the
2025 ... the 2560 itself requires a S/360 Model 25 Adapter
(#9725). See "Specify." If the 2560 is to emulate a 2540 when
operating in S/360 mode, 2540 Emulation Control (#7800) is
required on the 2025 in addition to #4596 and #7600.
For S/370
Attachment
requires a
Model 125
$182
182
mdl 115, 125 -- the 2560 requires Integrated 2560
(#4670) on the 3115/3125 and the 2560 itself
S/370 Model 115 Adapter (#9727), or a S/370
Adapter (#9726) ... see "Specify."
Card Limitations: Generally. scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- S-l, and for a maximum
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$24.50
24.50
24.50
FIC
PO
$388
388
---------=-- =------=----=
~
M 2671
May 79
DP Machines
2671
PAPER TAPE READER
Purpose: Paper tape input unit for a 5/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40,
44, 50, 67 or 5/370 mdl 115 thru 158, a 3031 or 3032 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
with the addition of special features, also reads reels or rolls of
tape. See "Special Features."
Tape can be 11/16" (5-track telegraphic code), 1" (8-track
code), or 7/8" (6 and 7-track codes) ... any of the three tape
widths can be selected by the operator by a switch setting. Tape
is chad type.
Reads at up to 1,000 characters/second. Addition of special
features for reel or roll input and takeup provide for center roll or
reel feeding and reel rewinding at a minimum of 500
characters/second. With these special features installed, strip
accomplished
at
up
to
1 ,000
reading
can
still
be
characters/ second.
Buttons and switches are used to set particular end-of-record
codes, tape codes and widths, parity, and delete recognition.
Lights signal status conditions.
Supplies: The following tapes. or their eQuivalents, are used -190216 or 304469
Prerequisite: Each 2671 reQuires a 2822 Paper Tape Reader
Control ... the 2671 is placed on top of the 2822 as a table-top
reader.
Limitation: Unlike the 1011 Paper Tape Reader, the standard
2671 does not have the ability to read feed holes.
Bibliography: 5/360 -- GC20-0360, 5/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V,
or #9904 for 230 V.
PRICES:
2671
Mdl
MAC I
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1
$156ttt
$5,785ttt
$35.50
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online ... meters 2822)
SPECIAL FEATURES
CENTER ROLL FEEDING (#1842).
For feeding 10-1/2" rolls
from the center. Prerequisite: Supply Option (#7580).
SUPPLY OPTION (#7580).
outside.
For feeding 10-1/2" rolls from the
TAKE-UP OPTION (#7812). Provides 10-1/2" reels for rewinding
tape. Prerequisite: Supply Option (#7580).
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Center Roll Feedin9
Supply Option
Take-up Option
•
#1842
7580
7812
$28 $1,060
38 1,205
38 1,205
FIC
$5.50 $100'
8.50
500
7.00
399
If #1842 and #7580 are installed at the same time. the Fie for #1580 covers
both.
ttt Manufactured in France. Shipping charges from point of shipment in U. S.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- -----== =':' =
M 2700.1
Jul79
DP Machines
The customer must be advised in writing, that:
TERMINOLOGY
In these pages, the term "Data Terminal Equipment" and its abbreviation "DTE" will mean any business machine which has a
telecommunications capability, be it a terminal, a multiplexer or a
CPU with an integrated communications adapter.
Also, the term "Data Communications Equipment" and its abbreviation "DCE" will mean any equipment whose function it is to
convert DTE signals into a form suitable for transmisssion over a
communications facility, and to convert signals received from a
communications facility into a form suitable for transler to a DTE.
This DCE may be a modem (MOdulator/DEModulator), a telegraph
line adapter or another type of signal converter equipment.
Finally, the term "Automatic Calling Equipment" and its abbreviation "ACE" will mean that equipment which will accept dial digits
from the DTE and present them to the telephone central office for
the purpose of effecting a switched network connection.
ORGANIZATION
These pages are organized into three communications capability
charts, which are:
-
#1, IBM Start/Stop DTE Intercommunication Capability Table
#2, IBM Synchronous DTE Intercommunication Capability
Table
#3, IBM Parallel Tone DTE Intercommunication Table
and seven communication facility charts which are:
-
#A, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Telegraph
Channels
#C, Common Carrier Public Switched Networks
#D, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Voice Grade
Channels
#E, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Wide band
Channels
#G, Customer Owned & Maintained Limited Distance Facilities
#H, Common Carrier Parallel Transmission Channels
#X, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Digital Data
Communications Services
- He is responsible for making arrangements for price quotations,
installation and cost (initial and recurring) of the common carrier supplied facilities/services.
- He is responsible for all toll charges incurred in the installation
and maintenance of the IBM equipment.
- He must be prepared to relinquish the system for service in
those cases in which service aids or available error message
printouts do not permit localization of a malfunction to the
communications facility or terminal location.
- He is responsible for the DTE/DCE and DTE/ACE interface
compatibility when he, or the common carrier, provides the
DCE or ACE.
- He is responsible to perform the set up procedures for customer set-up terminal products.
- He is responsible for using and following problem determination
procedures and using recovery routines as furnished by IBM
for the 3767 and 3770 terminals prio, to calling IBM for service.
Due to the nature of the teleprocessing environment, it is possible
that the throughput anticipated on the specified network configuration with recommended channel conditioning will not be achieved.
The probability of this is slight, though it is more likely at the
higher data signalling rates or when using an acoustic coupler.
Some actions that can be taken if antiCipated throughput is not
achieved are:
- re-dialing the connection if operating on the Public Switched
Telephone Network
- adjusting the block size, where posssible, to optimize throughput based on the error characteristics of the communications
facility being used
- requesting the Common Carrier, if appropriate, to provide
alternate routing or facility improvements. This is normally
provided at extra cost. The Common Carrier's representative
should be contacted for further details.
However, it is possible that, at a particular location, only lower
speed operation will be possible.
In addition, the customer should be advised that his local IBM
representative is available to assist him in analyzing and planning
for his responsibilities in installing or operating teleprocessing
configurations.
UTILIZATION
To utilize these pages:
- First, refer to the appropriate intercommunications chart, finding the desired DTEs, and determining if they are capable of
intercommunications.
- At the intersection of the row and column associated with the
desired DTEs, read the alphabetic designations for the facilities
over which they may communicate.
- Refer to the charts for the facilities so designated to find the
particular facility and the required feature codes for the DTEs
which will allow their communication.
- Refer to the individual "Machines" sales manual pages for the
DTEs to determine prerequisites, restrictions, etc.
For example, assume that communications between a 2740 mdl 2
and a 3705 is desired. Since this would obviously be in
Start/Stop mode, the first reference would be to Chart 1 .
- In Chart 1, at the intersection of the 2740 mdl 2 row and the
3705 column, the entry reads "ADG". This entry points to
Facility Charts A, D and G.
- Reference to these Charts show that, since feature codes are
entered for both the 2740 mdl 2 and the 3705, communications between them is possible over Facilities A4, D1, D1 M,
D2, D2M, G1 and G2.
- Further, the A, D and G Facility Charts show, for both the
2740 mdl 2 and the 3705, the feature codes required on each
to allow this intercommunications.
- Finally, reference should be made to the M 2740 and M 3705
pages to assure that any restrictions or prerequisites to the
installation of the indicated features are satisfied.
MULTIPLE SUPPLIER SYSTEMS POLICY
Non-IBM modems are attached to IBM DTEs under the provision of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
Such attachments are delineated in the "M" suffix facilities
in these pages, and information on the DCEs so attached is available. See "Reference Material" following.
When using IBM Modems, IBM Integrated Modems or IBM Line
Adapters, it is recommended that the customer investigate the
economics of providing alternate voice service to facilitate installation and maintenance.
MULTIPOINT OPERATION
Duplex communications facilities are required for multipoint systems in which:
- the DCE at the control station is a 1200 bps Integrated Modem,
or
- it is desired that a continuous carrier be maintained on the line
from the control station thereby eliminating the control staion
"Ready for Sending" delays.
The use of duplex facilities and the operation in the continuous
carrier mode is strongly recommended since operation in a noncontinuous carrier mode (by the control station) will subject the
system to inordinate delays, particularly in the polling and addressing sequences.
CHART
2701
OG
3115
3125
3704
3792
3138 3705
3135
3845
3846
4331
OG
0
OG
1034
0
0
0
0
0
1071
OG
OG
OG
2740 mdl1
COG
COG
COG
CD
CO
COG
COG
CD
2740 mdl 2
OG
AOG
AOG
AD
0
AOG
OG
0
2741
COG
COG
COG
CD
CD
CD
0
CD
CD
COG
C[)(8
COG
3767
CO
CO
5010
COG
COG
CD
1031A
OG
2702 2703
COG
COG
5100 5110
CD
CD
COG
CD
CD
CD
C
C
CMCST
C
C
C
C
TTY 1
A
A
A
A
lWX 33 / 35
C
C
C
C
38453846
8130
4955 8140
8101
OG
0
OG
CD
CD
CD
0
CD
C
C
A
C
TWX 37
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
1
Start/Stop Data Terminal Equipment Intercommunication Capability Chart
C
C
CDG
COG
COG
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
CD
CD
COG
CD
0
------- - --- -----
- =---- =----=':' =
M 2700.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
CHART 2
Synchronous Data Terminal Equipment Intercommunication Capability Chart
2701
2703
2715
3115
3125
3135 3271
3271 13274
3275
3275 1
3138
11.12
2
12
1.2
2701
COEX CO
CO
COEX COEX COX
ox
2703
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
D
CD
CD
CD
CD
lC
CDX
DX
~601 !
I
3276~
1-4
11-14 ~602 3603 ~ 3604
361413631 13651
3624
3632
M25
3651 13651
M50 M75
--'--l
3659
3661
DX
CD
2715
CD
3115
CDex CD
CD
coe)( CDex CDX
DX
DX
CDX
DX
C
3125
CDex CD
CD
CDex COEX cox
DX
DX
CDX
DX
C
3135,3138
CDX
CD
CD
cox
CDX
CDX
DX
DX
CDX
DX
C
3271-1,2
ox
D
DX
DX
DX
DX
ox
DX
CDX
CDX
CDX
DX
DX
DX
3271-11 ,12
3274-1C
DX
3275-2
cox
CD
3275-12
3276,1-4
DX
,
I
3276.11-14
D(4)
D(4)
3603
D(4)
D(4)
D(4)
D(4)
3604
D(4)
D(4)
D(4)
D(4)
3614,3624
DX(4) D(4)
D(4)
DX(4)
3601,3602
DX(4)
3631,3632
3651-25
3651-50
0
cox
3651-75
3659
0
3661
C
C
C
C
C
C
0
D
3669
3684
C
3704
CDEX CD
CD
CDEX CDex CDX
ox
DX(4) DX(4) CDX
DX(4
DX(4) CDX(4 DX(4) D(4)
0(4)
OX(4) CDX
CDX
CO(4) CDX
C
3705
CDEX CD
CD
CD EX CDex CDX
DX
DX(4) DX(4) CDX
DX(4
DX(4) CDX(4 DX(4) 0(4)
D(4)
DX(4) CDX
CDX
CD(4) CDX
C
3735
CDX
CD
CDX
cox
3741 ••
CDX
CD
CDX
CDX
CDX
3747 ••
cox
CD
cox
CDX
CDX
CDX
CD
C
C
CDX
I
3767
3771
cox
CDX
CDX
3773
cox
cox
CDX
cox
3774
CDX
CDX
CDX
CDX
3775
CDX
CDX
CDX
CDX
3776
cox
CDX
CDX
cox
3777
CDX
CDX
CDX
CDX
3780
CDX
cox
CDX
cox
CD
I
DX(9)
3791
D
3842
3845,3846
CDX
CD
CD
4331
4953,4955'
5010 ••
CDex
cox
CDX
CDX
ox
DX
DX
CDX
DX
DX
CDX
ox
DX
CDX
cox
CDX
ox
DX
DX
cox
ox
CDX
CDX
cox
ox
CDX
CDX
cox
C
CDex CDEX
CDex CD
coex CDex cox
5110 ••
CDX
cox
CDX
CDX
CDX
CDX
CDX
CDX
cox
CDX
I
~-
5231-2 ••
cox
5320··
CD
5340··
CDX
CD
cox
CDX
5404··
iCDX
CD
cox
cox
cox
5406 ••
CDX
CD
CDX
CDX
CDX
5408 ••
CDEX CD
COEX CDex cox
D
5410 ••
CDex CD
COEX CDex cox
C
DX
CDX
DX
5412 ••
CDex CD
CD ex coex CDX
C
DX
cox
DX
5415··
CDex CD
COEX CDex CDX
C
DX
CDX
DX
CD
CD
-~
5381 ••
CDX
DX
DX
1
Icox
D
I
I
8101
DX
ox
ox
ox
ox
DX
8130,8140
DX
ox
DX
DX
ox
DX
8775-11,12
cox
,
•• Refer to the M 2700 pages in the GSD
manual for the applicable
facilities and their associated feature/specify #s.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- ----------
M 2700.3
=- =- - =--':' =
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART 2
(conl'd)
,
3669 3684
3845
3704
3705
i
3735
!COEX
2701
C
COEX
2703
C
co
cox
co
cox
3115
C
COEX
COEX
3125
C
COEX
COEX
3135,3138
C
cox
ox
cox
ox
2715
3271-1,2
3271-11.12
OX(4)
OX(4)
3274·1 C
OX(4)
OX(4)
3275-2
cox
cox
3275-12
OX(4)
OX(4)
3276,1-4
OX(4)
OX(4)
3276,11-14
COX(4) COX(4)
3601,3602
OX(4)
3603
0(4)
0(4)
3604
0(4)
0(4)
3767
3771
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780 3791
cox
co
~ox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
co
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
3842
OX(9)
OX(4)
8130! 8775]
3846
4331
8101
8140
cox
co
co
cox
cox
cox
ox
ox
ox
cox
ox
ox
cox
ox
cox
cox
cox
ox
ox
ox
cox
ox
cox
cox
cox
ox
ox
ox
OX
ox
ox
ox
ox
ox
3614,3624
OX(4)
OX(4)
3631,3632
3651-25
cox
cox
cox
cox
3651-50
CO(4)
CO(4)
3651-75
cox
cox
3661
C
C
C
3669
C
C
C
0
CD
ox
cox ox
cox
cox
cox
11,12
ox
ox
ox
._.,.-
3659
3684
CD
CD
3704
C
co
COEX
COEX
3705
C
CD
COEX
COEX
3747··
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
3767
COX(4) COX(4)
3771
COX(4) COX(4)
3773
COX(4) COX(4)
3774
COX(4) COX(4)
3775
COX(4) COX(4)
3735
3741 ••
3776
COEX(4 COEX(4)
i
cox
cox
rox
cox
cox
cox
4331
COEX
COEX
4953,4955"
5010 ••
COEX
COEX
COEX
COEX
3780
3791
3842
,
3845,3846
,
5231-2 ••
5320··
5340··
5381 "'.
5404··
5406··
I
i
cox
cox
cox
, cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
co
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
COEX
COEX
cox cox
cox cox
CD
cox
cox
cox ox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
cox
co
cox
cox cox
co cox
COEX
COEX
5410··
COEX
COEX
5412··
5415··
COEX
COEX
COEX
COEX
8101
cox
cox
cox
cox
ox
0
cox cox
cox cox
COEX
cox
cox
cox
cox
'cox
cox
cox
5408··
8130,8140
COX(4 COX(4) COX(4) COX(4) COX(4 COEX(4) COEX(4).
0
C
5110·-
COX(4 COX(4) COX(4) COX(4) COX(4 COEX(4) COEX(4)
COEX(4 COEX(4)
,
3777
cox
cox
C
cox
cox
cox
cox
,
ox
ox
8775-11,12
•• Refer to the M 2700 pages in the aSD
manual for the applicable
facilities and their associated feature/specify #s.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
0
0
cox cox
cox
cox
cox cox
cox
cox
cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox cox
cox cox ox
cox cox ox
ox
ox
ox
ox
ox
ox
------- ----
-=-= ==
:5:
M 2700.4
Jul79
~ 5:: DP Machines
Notes for CHART "
CHART 3
Parallel Tone Data Terminal Equipment Intercommunication capability
Chart
026
026
1001
7770
1001
7770
H
H
H
H
2 and 3
[1] The TTY terminals referred to are Telephone
8382/8383 or Western Union Plan 115A terminals.
Company
[2] The 2715 mdl 2, 3271 mdl " 2, 3275 mdl 2, 3735, 3780,
System/3, System/32, System/34, S/360 mdl 20 or SSC
equipped 3771s, 3773s, 3774S, 37755, 37765 or 3777 mdl 1s
can be intermixed as tributary stations on a multipoint nonswitched line. The control station must be one of the following:
- a S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135 or 138 with an Integrated Communications Adapter and the appropriate SSC features.
- a S/370 with an attached, appropriately configured, 2701,
2703, 3704 or 3705 ... see the M 2701, 2703, 3704 and
3705 pages for the CPU models to which these multiplexers
may be attached.
See SRL GA27-3004 for information on which SSC terminals
may communicate with each other over point-to-point nonswitched lines.
See SALs GC30-1005, GC30-2004 and GC30-5001 for the
limitations and restrictions on these types of operations.
[3] Appropriately configured 2701 s, 2703s, 2715 mdl 2s, 3684s,
3704s, 3705s, 3735s, 3741s, 3747s, 3771s, 3773s, 37745,
3775s, 3776s, 3777s, 3780s, System/3s, System/32s,
System/34s, and S/370 mdl 1155, 125s, 135s and 1385 may
communicate over the public telephone network to the same
SSC line appearance on a S/370 mdl 115, 125 or 135 or a
S/370 with an attached, appropriately configured 2701, 2703,
3704 or 3705.
See SALs GC30-1005, GC30-2004 and GC30-5001 for the
limitations and restrictions on this type of operation.
[4] The 3271 mdls 11 and 12, 3274, 3275 mdl 12, 3276, 3601,
3602, 3614, 3624" 3631, 3632, 3651 mdl 50. 3684, 3767,
3771, 3773, 3774, 3775, 3776, 3777 (except 3777-2), 3791,
System/32 and System/34 may communicate over a nonswitched voice grade line with a 3704 or 3705 using Synchronous Data Link Control. This communications uses the Synchronous Data Link Control, in which the control station may be
receiving from one tributary station while it is transmitting to a
second tributary station. For this mode of operation, a duplex
communications facility and a duplex line set at the 3704/3705
is required. Normal half-duplex or duplex communications
facilities is also supported.
The 3604 and 3614 can be featured with a loop integrated
modem (#8001) for attachment to the 3600 System Controller
via communication facilities. The 3604 and 3614 can provide a
remote subloop for 3600 System terminals. The 3603 also
provides a remote subloop and the interface to communication
facilities.
[5] See the SCP Programming pages for information on which
intercommunications capability is supported by the 3704/3705
Emulation and Network Control Programs.
[6] Appropriately configured 3271 mdl 11 sand 12s, 3275 mdl
12s, 3601 s, 3602s, 3631 s, 3632s" 3651 mdl 50s, 3767s,
3771s, 3773s, 3774s, 3775s, 37765, 3777 mdl 1s, 3791s,
System/32s and System/34s may be intermixed as tributary
stations on a multipoint non-switched line. All such intermixed
stations and the control station must be operating with the
same clocking source (either modem or business machine) and
at the same transmission speed. The control station must be a
S/370 with an attached 3704 or 3705.
[7] Appropriately configured 3601s; 3602s, 3631S, 3632s, 3651
mdl 50s, 3684s, 3767s, 3771s, 3773s, 3774s, 3775s, 3776s,
3777s, 3791s, System/32s and System/34s may communicate
over the public switched telephone network to the same SDLC
line appearance on a 3704 or 3705 attached to a S/370. All
DTEs 50 communicating must be operating with the same
clocking source (either modem or business machine) and at the
same transmission speed.
[8] Communications between a 3767 (Start/Stop Mode) and 3704
or 3705 utilizing 1200 bps Integrated Modems is supported in
VS using the appropriate level of EP and/or NCP. The same
3767 Start/Stop configurations are also supported in non VS
systems except 2741 on two-wire facilities.
[9] The 3276 mdl 12 may be attached as tributary stations on a
multipoint or point-to-point non-switched line where the control
station is a 3791 equipped with a Data Link Adapter (#3210
and/or #3211). All stations on such a line must operate at the
same speed and use the same type clocking source, I.e., either
modem or business machine clock.
\
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - - -----------------_.-
M 2700.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
CHART A
COMMON CARRIER PRIVATE LINE (NON-SWITCHED) TELEGRAPH CHANNELS
FACILITY A 1 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 45.5 bps on a Type 1002 Channel (or equivalent). (1)
IBM Machine Type
Telegraph Line
Adapter
3115 3704
2701 2702 2703 3125 3705
7860 7911 7911 7881 4721
9680 4873 9733 9601
7895 7876 (2)
7897
(3)
FACILITY A2 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 56.9 bps on a Type 1002 Channel (or equivalent). (1)
IBM Machine Type
Telegraph Line
Adapter
3115 3704
2701 2702 2703 3125 3705
7861 7911 7911 7881 4721
9681 4874 9734 9602
7895 7876 (2)
7897
(3)
FACILITY A3 - Point-to-poi.,t or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 74.2 bps on a Type 1002 Channel (or equivalent). (1)
IBM Machine Type
Tele9raph Line
Adapter
3115 3704
2701 2702 2703 3125 3705
7862 7911 7911 7881 4721
9682 4875 9735 9603
7895 7876 (2)
7897
(3)
FACILITY A4 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 75 bps on a Type 1005 Channel (or equivalent).
2740 3115 3704
M2 3125 3705
IBM Machine Type
2702 2703
Telegraph Line
Adapter
4615 4696 7807 7881 4721
9736 9604
9683 4876
(2)
7895 7876
7897
(3)
NOTES FOR CHART A
1. The terminals on the A1 through A3 Facilities are Telephone Company Type 83B2 or 83B3 or Western Union Plan 115A terminals.
2. The 3115 and 3125 feature codes are for the attachment of the first communications line. See the M 3115 and M 3125 pages for
additional line attachment feature codes.
3. The 2703 Line Set feature code (#7897) is for the attachment of up to eight communications lines. See the M 2703 pages for
additional line attachment feature codes. When two 2703s are operated in series on the same telegraph channel, RPQ
(no
charge) must be installed on one 2703 and RPQ
(no charge) must be installed on the other 2703. These RPQs are not
required to operate two telegraph line appearances on the same 2703 in series on the same telegraph channel.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ------ -- ------===
':' =
M 2700.6
Jul19
DP Machines
CHART C
PUBLIC SWITCHED NETWORKS (see Note 13)
FACILITY C1 - Start-stop Operation @ 300 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
3704
3705 3767
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem
4782 7111
9612 or
7113,
9540
5502
1200 bps Integrated
Modem with
Interrupt
4786 7113
9612 9540
5506
FACILITY C1 M - Start .. stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 300 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Stand-alone DCEs
attached under the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
2740
M1 2741
3115
3704
3125 3135 3138 3705 3767
3845
3792 3846 4331 CMCST
IBM Machine Type
2701 2702 2703
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
4640 4615 4696 3255 3255
9581 9684 4878 9114 9114
3233 3205
(3)
1231 4640 4640 4711 7111 3701
9739 9625 9721
or
or
(2) 4714,7113,
or
9721
(2)
1241
9606 9540
9738
or
3719
(2,
9612 (15)
15)
(15)
Interface to
Stand-alone ACE
(5)
1302 1290 1340
(3)
1291 1290 4715
(2) 9777
(2)
(16)
1601
4696
3701
968X
(19)
(4)
FACILITY C2 - Start-stop Operation @ 110 bps, 134.5 bps or 150 bps on the TWX Network.
2740
Ml
2741
3115 3135 3704 3845
3125 3138 3705 3846 CMCST
IBM Machine Type
2701 2702 2703
Interface to CPTTWX Service @ 110
bps ( 6)
7885 7912 7912
3233 4877
3205
(3)
1241 4640 4711 (16)
9737 9785 or
(2)
(2) 4714,
9605
Interface to CETWX Service @
134.5 bps ( 6)
4640 4615 4696 3255 3255
9581 9684 4878 9114 9114
3233 3205
(3)
1241
9738
(2)
Interface to CPTTWX Service @ 1 50
bps ( 6)
Interface to Standalone ACE on the
CE-TWX or CPT-TWX
Services (5)
4711 (16)
or
4714,
9606
(4)
4711 (16)
or
4714,
9611
1302 1290 1340
(3)
1291
(2)
4715
FACILITY C3 - Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem
3704
3705 3767 4331
4782 9531 4782
9607 5502 or
4783,
(9)
967X
or
969X,
1601
4696
(19)
FACILITY C3M -Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Stand-alone DCEs attached under
the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
3115
3275
3125 3135 3138 M2
3704
3845
3705 3767 3846 4331
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7141
(2)
4714 3719 (16,
9607 9531
17)
9619
or
9615
(9)
Interface to
Stand-alone ACE
(5)
1295 1290 1290
(2) 9777 9777
(2)
(2)
4640 4640 3440 4714
9601 9649
9607
(9)
9625 (2)
9649
(2)
1601
4696
3701
967X
or
969X
(19)
4715
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ----- - -----_.-
- ------------
M 2700.7
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART C
(cont'd)
FACILITY C4 - Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
3276
3115 3275 Mll2701 3125 M2
14 3661
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem
4782 4782 5500 5502 5501
or
9490
5501
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem with ACO
Feature (7)
4782 4791
4791
3684 3704 3705 3735 3767
5530 4782 4782 5501
(9)
(9)
5502
9532
8101
3771 3774 3791 8130
3773 3775 Ml,2 8140
5501 5501 5501
6301
or
or
5502 5502 (12)
1601.
5501
4709 4791
FACILITY C4M - Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Stand-alone DCEs attached under
the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
2715
2701 2703 M2 3115 3125
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7698 7705 7705 7141
(2)
7692 7710
(8)
(3)
Interface to
Stand-alone ACE
(5)
1314 1340
(3)
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7141
(2)
1295 1295
(2)
(2)
3771 3774
3791
3767 3773 3775 3760 Ml,2
3719 1482 1482 7705 3701
9532 3701 3701 9123 6301
9619
9402 (12)
3276
3275 Mll- 3601 3631
3135 M2
14 3602 3632
4640 3440 3701
9625
6301
9649
(2)
3701 3701
6301 6301
9490
3661 3684 3704 3705 3735
(cont'd
below)
3701 3701 4714 4714 7705
9608 9608
(9)
or
9615
(9)
1290
9777
(2)
4715 4715
8101
3845 8130
3846 8140
(16,
17)
1601.
3701
Interface to Standalone ACE (5)
FACILITY C5 - Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
2715
2701 2703 M2 3115 3125
3276
Ml1- 3601 3631
3135 3138 14 3602 3632
3651 3651 3651
M25 M50 M75 3669 3684
2400 bps Integrated
Modem
(11 )
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem or
IBM 3863 Modem
7698 7710
(3)
(8)
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3872 (7)
1314 1340
(2)
IBM Machine Type
(4)
7151 7131
(2) 9758
or
7151
(2)
4640 4640 3701 4502 4502 9120 9120 9120
9609 9609 6302 or
or
or
9625 9649 9490 6302. 6302,
6185
9649 (2) 9822 3701 3701
(2)
1295 1295
(2)
(2)
1290 1290
9777 9777
(2)
(2)
3774,
3775,
3771 3776
3705 3735 3767 3773 Ml,2
2400 bps Integrated
Modem
4761 5610
or
4707
(9,10)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem or
IBM 3863 Modem
4714
(9)
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3872 (7)
4715
(4)
3718 1481
9533 3701
9619
1481
3701
8101
6130
4331 6140
5610
3701
4761
or
4771
(9,10)
3701
4714
(9)
4715
3776
M3,4
3777 3777
3791 3845
M3 Ml,2 3780 Ml,2 3846
5610
3704
1481 9120 3701 (16,
17)
3701 9402 6302
or
6303
(12)
1601 1602,
4695 3701
3701
967X
or
969X
(19)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(cont'd
below)
----- ------ ---
- ---- =':' =
==
M 2700.8
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART C
(cont'd)
FACILITY C5M - Synchronous Operation @ 2000 or 2400 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Stand-alone DCEs attached
under the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
tBM Machine Type
2715
2701 2703 M2 3115 3125
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7698 7710
Interface to
Stand-alone ACE
(5)
1314 1340
(3)
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
(8)
(4)
(3)
7151
(2)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
3276
M11- 3601 3631
3135 3138 12 3602 3632
3704
(cont'd
3684 3705 3735 below)
4640 4640 9821 4502 4502 3701 4714
(18)
(9)
or
or
9609 9609 or
9625 9649 9822, 6302, 6302,
9649 (2) 3701 3701 3701
(2)
6302
9490
4715
1295 1295 1290 1290
(2)
(2)
9777 9777
(2)
(2)
3774,
3775,
3776
M1,2
3771 3777
3767 3773 M1,2
3776
M3,4
3777
3780
M3
3718 1481 1481 3701
9533 3701 3701
9619
9120
9402
(4)
8101
3791 3845
8130
M1,2 3848 4331 8140
3701 (16,
6302 17)
or
6303
(12)
1601 1602,
4695 3701
3701
967X
or
969X
(19)
Interface to
Stand-alone ACE (5)
FACILITY C6 - Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
2701 2703
2715 3115
M2 3125 3135
3651
3276
M25,
M11- 3801 3631 M50,
3138 14 3802 3632 M75
3771,
3776
3773
M3,4
3704
3774,3776 3777 3777 (conl'd
M3 Ml,2 below)
3684 3705 3735 3775 M1,2
5710
(14)
4800 bps Integrated
Modem
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem or
IBM 3864 Modem
7698 7710
(8)
(3)
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3874
1314 1340
(3)
IBM Machine Type
(4)
7151 4640
(2) 9609
9625
9649
(2)
4640
9609
9649
(2)
3701 4502 4502 9126
6302 or
or
9490 6302, 6302,
9823 3701 3701
3701
4714
(9)
(4)
1481 1481
3701 3701
3701
1481
3701
4715
1295 1290 1290
(2) 9777 9777
(2)
(2)
8101
8130
3845
3780 3791 3846 4331 8140
4800 bps Integrated
Modem
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem or
IBM 3864 Modem
9128 3701 (16,
9402 6303 17)
(12)
1601 1602,
4695 3701
3701
967X
or
969X
(19)
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3874
FACILITY C6M - Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Stand-alone DCEs attached under
the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
tBM Machine Type
2715 3115
2701 2703 M2 3125 3135
Interface to
Stand-alone OCE
7698 7710
(8)
(3)
Interface to
Stand-alone ACE
(5)
1314 1340
(3)
(4)
7151
(2)
3276
M11- 3601 3631
3138 14 3602 3632 3684
4640 4640 3701 4502 4502 3701
or
9609 9609 6302 or
9625 9649 9490 6302,6302,
(2) 9823 3701 3701
9649
(2)
1295 1290 1290
(2) 9777 9777
(2)
(2)
3771, 3776 3776
3773, Ml,2 M3,4
3704
3774,3777 3777
3705 3735 3775 M1,2 M3
4714
(9)
(4)
1481 1481 3701
3701 3701
3780 3791
(cont'd
below)
9128 3701
9402 6303
(12)
4715
/
\,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ --- ----==-=--':' =
-----
M 2700.9
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART C cont'd
IBM Mechine Type
8101
3845
8130
3846 4331 8140
interlace to
Stand-aione DCE
(16,
17)
1601 1602,
4695 3701
3701
967X
or
969X
(19)
interlace to
Stand-aione ACE (5)
FACILITY C7 - Synchronous Operation @ 50 Kbps on the Switched Wide band Service.
IBM Mechine Type
3704 3705
interlace to Standalone DCE
4717 4717
(9)
or
4725
(9)
NOTES FOR CHART C
2. The 3115,3125,3135 and 3138 feature codes listed are for the attachment of the first communications line. See the M 3115, M
3125 and M 3135 pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
3. The 2703 Line Set feature codes (#3205, #7710) and Autocall feature code (#1340) are for the attachment of up to eight start-stop
communications lines, up to four synchronous communications lines or up to eight stand-alone ACEs. See the M 2703 pages for
additional line attachment and additional ACE attachment feature codes.
4. No special feature is required to attach this DTE to this facility.
5. "ACE", Automatic Calling Equipment, refers to the unit which accepts dial digits from the DTE and presents them to the telphone
central office.
6. CE-TWX (Customer Equipment - TWX) is a Service on which IBM DTEs may communicate with each other over the TWX network.
CPT-TWX (Customer Provided Terminal - TWX) is a Service in which IBM multiplexers or CPU integrated communications adapters may
communicate with common carrier provided TWX 33/35 or TWX 37 terminals over the TWX network.
7. "ACO", Automatic Call Originate, refers to the feature on the IBM 3872 and 3874 Modems and on the 1200 bps and 2400 bps
Integrated Modems which permits automatic dialing (under program control) of a remote terminal. When this feature is installed,
stand-alone ACEs are not required.
8. The 2701 feature code listed is for the attachment of a single synchronous communications line. See the description of the Dual
Communication Interface feature in the M 2701 pages for the conditions under which a second synchronous communications line may
be attached.
9. When a 3704 or 3705 is equipped with the Remote Program Loader feature (#6260), it may serve as a "Remote" and communicate
with a "Local" 3704/3705. The primary communications link between them must be a non-switched facility. A secondary (alternate
path) link may be employed, and may be either switched or non-switched. Therefore, communications between a 3704/3705
"Remote" and a 3704/3705 "Local" over this Facility is allowed only as a secondary (alternate path) link.
10. Feature code #4761 on the 3704 and 3705 provides one 2400 bps Integrated Modem for use on the Public Switched Telephone
Network. Feature code #4771 on the 3704 and #4707 on the 3705 provide one 2400 bps Integrated Modem with an Automatic Call
Originate feature for automatic dialing and communications over the Public Switched Telephone network.
11. The 2400 bps Integrated Modem is included as part of the basic 3669.
12. 3791 switched network operation is supported- at the 3704/3705 by non-switched programming. Special procedures are required to
establish and disconnect the links. Refer to the VTAM and 3790 operation instructions for the appropriate procedures.
13. Satisfactory data transmission cannot be achieved with all switched network voice services, specifically with those on which proper
conditioning of the local loop is not available. For example, off-premise PBX extensions, tandem tie line networks, foreign exchange
lines and WATS lines may present characteristics which are not suitable for data transmission. It is recommended that the installation
of such a communications system be carefully planned with the common carrier.
14. The 4800 bps Integrated Modem (#5710) is line compatible and suitable for communications over this Facility with an IBM 3874
Modem equipped with feature code #7941, #7951 or #7952.
15. The 3767 terminal will communicate at 300 bps over this Facility with a 3115, 3125, 3704 or 3705. The speed specifies for this type
operation are:
- #9739 on the 3115 and 3125
- #9612 on the 3704 and 3705
- #9540 on the 3767.
16. No special feature is required to attach to this facility. Modems must satiSfy EIA-RS-232C recommendations. The 3845 and 3846 will
operate with DTEs operating at speeds of 110 bps or greater.
17. Feature #9110 required for BSC operation. Feature #9155 required for BSC with Business Machine Clock. The 3845 and 3846 will
not operate with NRZI coded facilities.
18. The 3684 does not support 2000 bps operation.
19. Specify Codes #967X, #968X and #969X on the 4331 stipulate which protocol the 4331 is to communicate in, and which line
position on the 4331 that protocol is to be applied to, with the "X" in each case being the line position.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =---- --=----':' =
M 2700.10
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART 0
COMMON CARRIER PRIVATE LINE (NON-SWITCHED) SUB-VOICE OR VOICE GRADE CHANNELS
FACILITY 01 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 300 bps on a Half-duplex Type 3002 (or equivalent)
Channel.
3845
3792 3846
IBM Machine Type
3115 3704
2740 2741 3125 3705 3767
Shared Line Adapter
TV 1 A (Half-duplex)
(1)
4641 4641
thru
thru
4644 4644
(27)
Shared Line Adapter
Ty 1 B (Duplex)
(1)
4691 4691
thru thru
4694 4694
(27)
Leased Line Adapter
TV 1 A (Half-duplex)
4639 4639 4743 4742
(2) 9606
(18)
5400
9652
(27)
4647 4647 4743 4743
(2) 9606
(18)
5400
9651
(27)
(1)
Leased Line Adapter
TV 1 B (Duplex)
(1)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem (@ 300 bps)
(1)
4781 4781 7111
1231 9612 or
9739
7113,
(2)
9540
5500
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem w Interrupt
4785 7113
9612 9540
5505
(@ 300 bps) (1)
FACILITY 01 M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 300 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the
provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
1071 2701 2702 2703 2740
Interface to Telephone Co. Type 1006
Sub-voice Grade
Service (3)
3704
3115
2741 3125 3135 3138 3705
8101
3845
8130
3767 3792 3846 4331 8140
4640 4615 4696 9120
9581 9684 4878
3233 3205
(5)
9120 1241
(4) 9738
(2)
4711
or
4714,
9606
(27)
1603,
3701
4640 4615 4696 9116
9581 9684 4878
3233 3205
(5)
9116 1241
(4) 9738
(2)
4711
or
4714,
9606
(27)
1603,
3701
(27)
1601 1603,
4696 3701
3701
968X
(31)
Interface to Western Union Type 1006
Sub-voice Grade
Service (3)
9111
Interface to a
Stand-alone DCE
on a Voice Grade
Channel
9110 4640 4615 4696 9115
9581 9684 4878 or
3233 3205 9120
(4)
(5)
9115 1231 4640 4640 4711 7111 3701
or
or
or
9739 9721 9721
(2,
(2,
4714, 7113,
9120 or
(4) 1241
20)
20) 9606 9540
or
9738
3719
(2,
9612 (20)
(20)
20)
FACILITY 02 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps on a Half-duplex or Duplex Type 3002 (or
equivalent) Channel.
IBM Machine Type
1031 2740 3115 3704
1034 M2 3125 3705 3767
8101
3845
8130
3846 4331 8140
Leased Line Adapter
Ty 1A, Start-stop
(Half-duplex) (1)
4639 4743 4742
(2) 9607
(18)
(27,
28)
Leased Line Adapter
Ty 1 B, Start-stop
(Duplex) (1)
4647 4647 4743 4743
(2) 9607
(18)
(27,
28)
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem, Start-stop
(1)
1 200 bps Integrated
Modem, Synchronous
(1)
4781 4781 7112
1231 9607 9541
9739
5500
(2)
4781 9531
or
5500
4784, (16)
9607
(10,16)
1601
4696
4781
968X
(31)
1601
or
1603,
5500
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -
--- -----==-= ':" =
M 2700.11
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART D cont'd
FACILITY 02M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the
provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DeE
for Start-stop
Operation ( 8)
1031
1034 1071 2701 2702 2703
2740 3115
M2 3125 3135 3138 3704
8101
8130
3845
3705 3767 3846 4331 8140
2068 9110 4640 4616 4696 7106 9739 4640 4640 4711 4711 7112
9121
or
9601 9721
or
or
9541
9582 or
or
(2) 4714, 4714,3719
or
4615 4697,
9740,9721
(2)
4648 9685, 4879
1231
9607 9607
(2)
7387 3205
3233 (5)
Interface to
Stand-alone DeE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
4714
or
4718,
9607
(10,
16)
(27) 1601 1603,
4696 3701
3701
968X
(31)
4714 9531 (27,
3719 28)
or
4718, (16)
9607
or
9615
(10,16)
1601 1601
4696 or
3701 1603,
968X 3701
(31)
FACILITY 03 - Polnt-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on a Half-duplex or Duplex Type 3002 (or
equivalent) Channel.
IBM Machine Type
1200 bps Integrat~d
Modem, Start-stop
(1)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem, Synchronous
(1)
IBM Machine Type
3601
3276 3602
3115 3275 3275 M1-4, 3614
3704
2701 3125 M2
M12 11-14 3624 3603 3604 3684 3705
7112
9542
5500
4781
9608
4781
1231
9739
(2)
4781 4781 5500 5500 5500
7141 7820 7820 9491
(2)
(16) 9651
or
9652
(16)
3771 3774 3791
3735 3767 3773 3775 Ml,2
5500 (15,
21)
or
8001
(15,
16)
8001 5530 4781 5500 9532 5500 5500 5500
or
5500 (16) (16) 6301
or
(16)
(16)
8002
4784,
(15)
(10,
or
16)
3210
4781
(26)
4331
(cont'd
betow)
1601
4696
4781
968X
(31)
1601
4696
4781
967X
or
969X
(31)
8101 8775
8130 M11,
8140 12
1200 bps Integrated
Modem, Start-stop
(1)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem, Synchronous
(1)
1601 1488
or
5500
1603,
5500
FACILITY 03M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
2715 3115
M2 3125 3135
3271
3276
3271 M11, 3275 3275 M1-4, 3601 3614 3631
M12 11-143802 3624 3632 3684
3138 Ml,2 12 M2
IBM Machine Type
2701 2703
Interface to
Stand-alone DeE
for Synchronous
Operation
7698 7705 7705 7141 4640
(2) 9649
7692 7710 (7)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(7)
4640 7820 7820 7820 7820
(16)
(16)
9849
(2)
3771
3704 3705 3735 3767 3773
3774
3791 3845
3775 3780 M1,2 3846 4331
4714 4714 7705 9532 1482
or
or
5010 3719 3701
(16) (16)
4718,4718,
9608 9608
(10,
or
16) 9615
(10,16)
1482 7705 3701 (27, 1601 1801 1488
28) 4696
or
3701
3701 9122 6301
(16)
(16)
3701 1603,
967X 3701
or
3210
or
968X
3703
(26)
or
969X
(31)
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DeE
for Synchronous
Operation
3701 4501 3701 3701 3701
6301 6301
6301
or
9491 6301, (16) (16)
(16, 3701
26) (16)
8101 8775
8130 M11,
8140 12
Not to be reproduced w!thout written permission.
(cont'd
below
-------- --=-- =---- --=----':' =
M 2700.12
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART 0 (cont'd)
FACILITY 03SB - Point-to-point or Multipoint Sysnchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on a Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channel with
Back-up on the Public Swilched Telephone Network @ 1200 bps or 600 bps.
IBM Machine Type
1200 bps Integrated
Modem (1)
3276
Ml-4,
11-14 4331
5507
9651
or
9652
(16)
1601
4696
4787
or
4788,
967X
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY 04 - Point-Io-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps on a Half-duplex or Duplex Type 3002 (or equivalent)
channel.
IBM Machine Type
2701 2703
2715
M2 3115 3125
3271
3271 Mll, 3274 3275
3135 Ml,2 12 M1C M2
3276
3275, Ml-4, 3601 3614 3631
M12 11-14 3602 3624 3632
3651 (cont'd
M25 below
2400 bps Integrated
Modem. Pt-to-pt (11)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem, Multipoint (11)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem. Multipoint (16)
Interface to IBM
3872 or 3863 Modem
for Synchronous
Operation (9)
IBM Machine Type
7698 7710
(5)
(7)
(6)
(II,
2400 bps Integrated
Modem, Multipt (11)
(II,
17)
17)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem. Multipt (16)
IBM Machine Type
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
3651 3651
3704
M50 M75 3659 3684 3705
2400 bps Integrated
Modem. Pt-to-pt
(11 )
Interface to IBM
3872 or 3863 Modem
for Synchronous
Operation (9)
7151
(2)
(6)
(6,
16)
3701
6302
9822
(16)
(6)
(6,
16)
3701 4502 3701 4502 9121
or
6302 or
6302 or
9491 6302, (16) 6302, 9122
9822 3701
3701
(16)
(16)
(16,
26)
or
3211
3703
3774,3776
3775, M3,4
3771 3776 3777 3777
3791
3845
3735 3767 3773 Ml,2 M3
Ml,2 3760 Ml,2 3842 3846
4751 5600
()r
5010
4754 (24)
(10.23)
5600
5600
(25)
(6)
4752
5602
5602
(25)
(6)
4755
9121 9121
or
or
9122 9122
or
or
6111 6185
(16.
17)
4640
9609
9649
(2)
3701 4714
or
4718
(10,
16,
32)
5602
5010
(24)
5602
5010 9533 1481 1481 3701
3718 3701 3701 (16,
(16) (16) (16)
32)
1481 9121 3701
3701 9402 6302
(16,
or
22)
6303
(16)
or
3211
3703
(26)
8101 8775
8130 Mll,
4331 6140 12
2400 bps Integrated
Mode, Pt-to-pt
(11 )
2400 bps Integrated
Modem, Multlpt (11)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem. Multipt (16)
Interface to IBM
3872 or 3863 Modem
for Synchronous
Operation (9)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(27,
28)
(cont'd
below)
--- ------
-- --------- ------
M 2700.13
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART
D (cont'd)
FACILITY D4M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2000 or 2400 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the
provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation
2715
2701 2703 M2 3115 3125
7698 7710
(7)
(5)
(6)
7151
(2)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
3631
3704
3632 3684 3705 3735 3767
4502 3701 4714 5010 9533
(30)
or
or
3718
(16)
6302,
4718
(10,
3701
16,
32)
3271
3271 M11, 3274 3275
3135 M1,2 12 M1C M2
4640
9609
9649
(2)
(6)
(6,
16)
9821 (6)
or
9822,
3701
6302
(16)
3774,3776
3775, M3,4
3771 3776 3777 3777
3773 Ml,2 M3
M1,2 3760
1481 1481 3701 1481 9120
3701 3701 (32) 3701
or
(16) (16)
(16, 9121
22)
3276
3275 M1-4,3601 3603 3614
M12 11-143602 M2
3624
(6,
16)
9821
or
9822,
3701
6302
9491
(18,
26)
(cont'd
below)
4502 6352 3701
(21) 6302
or
(16)
6302,
3701
(16)
8101 8775
3791 3845
8130 M11,
Ml,2 3848 4331 8140 12
3701 (27,
6302 28)
or
6303
(16)
or
3211
3703
(26)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY D4SB - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps on a Type 3002 Channel (or equivalent) with Back-up
@ 2400 bps or 1200 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
3271
2701 2703 31153125 Ml,2
3271
3276
3704
Mll, 3274 3275 3275 Ml-4, 3631 3651
12 M1C M2
M12 11-14 3632 MSO 3684 3705 3735
2400 bps Integrated
Modem (11)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem (9, 12)
or IBM 3863 Modem
(33)
IBM Machine Type
5600
or
5602,
7951
(24)
7698 7710 7151 7131
(2) 9758
(7)
(5)
or
7151
(2)
(6)
3774, 3776
3775, M3,4
3771 3776 3777 3777
3773 Ml,2 M3
Ml,2 3760
2400 bps Integrated
Modem (11)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem (9, 12)
or IBM 3863 Modem
(33)
(cont'd
below)
5600
1461
or
5602
1462,
7951
1461
or
1462,
1481
3701
(6,
16)
(6)
(6,
3701
16) 6302
9491
9822
(16,
26)
4502 9121 3701 4714 5010
or
or
6302,9122
3701
(16)
8101
3791
3845
8130
Ml,2 3842 3848 4331 8140
7951
5600
or
5602,
7951
(25)
1461 3701 1461 9125
'9402
or
or
1462,
1462,
1481
1481
3701
3701
(22)
3701
6302
9822
(16)
3211
3703
(26)
(27,
28)
1601 1602
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY 05 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 Channel (or equivalent) (e1
conditioning required for the IBM 3874 Modem).
IBM Machine Type
2715
2701 2703 M2 3115 3125
3271
3276
3271 M11, 3274 3275 3275 Ml-4, (cont'd
3135 3138 M1,2 12 NllC M2
M12 11-14 below)
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (19)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9) or
IBM 3864 Modem
7698 7710
(7)
(5)
(6)
7151
(2)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
4640 4640 7821 (6,
3701
16) 6302
9609 9649
9649 (2)
9823
(2)
(16)
7821 (6,
16)
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
3701
6302
9491
9823
(16,
26)
--------- - - -------== =
':' =
M 2700.14
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM Machine Type
CHART 0 (cont'd)
3651
M25,
3601 3614 3631 MOO,
3602 3624 3632 M75 3684
3771,
3773,
3704
3774, 3776
3705 3735 3775 Ml,2
3845
3777
Ml,2 3780 3791 3846 4331
8101 8775
8130 Mll,
8140 12
5700
or
5702
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (19)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9) or
IBM 3864 Modem
3776
M3,4
3777
M3
4502 3701 4502 9124 3701
or
6302 or
or
6302, (16) 6302, 9125
3701
3701
(16)
(16)
4714 5010 1481 1481
3701 3701
or
(16) (16)
4718
(10,
16,
32)
3701
(32)
1481 9124 3701 (27,
3701 9402 6303 28)
(16)
(16,
22)
or
3211
3703
(26)
1601
4695
3701
967X
or
969X
(31)
1602 3701
or
1604,
3701
FACILITY D5M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
2715
2703 M2 3115 3125
IBM Machine Type
2701
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7698 7710
(7)
(5)
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
(6)
7151
(2)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
3601 3614 3631 3704
3602 3624 3632 3705 3735
4502 3701 4502 4714 5010
3602 or
or
or
6302, (16) 6302, 4718
3701
3701 (10,
(16)
(16) 16,
32)
3271
3271 Ml1, 3274 3275
12 M1C M2
3135 Ml,2
3276
3275 Ml-4, (cont'd
M12 11-14 below)
4640 7821 (6,
16)
9609
9649
(2)
(6
16)
3701 7821
6302
9823
(16)
3774,3776
3775, M3,4
3771 3776 3777 3777
3773 Ml,2 M3
M1,2 3780
1481 1481 3701 1481 9124
3701 3701 (32) 3701
(16) (16)
(16,
22)
3701
6302
9491
9823
(16,
26)
8101 8775
3845
8130 Mll,
3791 3846 4331 8140 12
3701 (27,
6303 28)
(16)
or
3211
3703
(26)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY D5SB - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 Channel (or equivalent) (C1
conditioning required for the IBM 3874 Modem) with Back-up @ 4800 bps or 2400 bps on the Public Switched
Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
3271
2701 2703 3115 3125 M1,2
3271 3274
3276
Mll, mdl
3275 3275 Ml-4, 3631 3651
3704
12
lC
M2
M12 11-14 3632 M50 3684 3705 3735
3771 3774 (cont'd
3773 3775 below)
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (26)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9, 12)
or IBM 3864 Modem
(33)
IBM Machine Type
7698 7710 7151
(7)
(5)
(2)
7131 7821
9758
or
7151
(2)
3776
M3,4
3791
3776 3777 3777
Ml,2 M3
Ml,2 3780 M1,2
4800 Integrated
Modem (26)
5700
1461
or
5702
1462,
7951
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9, 12)
or IBM 3864 Modem
(33)
1461 3701
or
1462,
1481
3701
1461 9129 3211
or
9402 3703
(26)
1462,
1481
3701
(22)
(6)
3701 7821
6302
9823
(16)
(6)
3701
6302
9491
9823
(16,
26)
4502 9124 3701
or
or
6302, 9125
3701
(16)
4714 5010
8101
3845
8130
3846 4331 8140
(27,
28)
1601 1602
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
1461
or
1462,
1481
3701
1461
or
1462,
1481
3701
------- ----------=--=--= ':' =
M 2700.15
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART D
(cont'd)
FACILITY 06 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 7200 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 with C2 Conditioning (or
equivalent) Channel.
IBM Machine Type
Interface to IBM
3875 Modem (9)
IBM Machine Type
Interface to IBM
3875 Modem (9)
2701 3115 3125
7698 7151 7131
(2) 9759
(7)
or
7151
(2)
3135 3138
4640 4640
9609 9649
9649 (2)
(2)
3271
3271 M11, 3274 3275 3275
M1,2 12 M1C M2
M12
(6) 3701 7821
(6)
7821
6302
9824
(16)
3276
M1-4, 3601 3631
11·143602 3632
3701 3701 3701
6302 4502 4502
9491 (16) (16)
9824
(16,
29)
3704
3705
4714
or
4718
(10,
16,
32)
3778
M3,4
3777
M3
3701
(16,
32)
3777
(cont'd
M1,2 3760 below)
1481 9126
3701 9402
(16,
22)
8101 8775
8130 M11,
3845
3791 3846 4331 8140 12
3701 (27,
6303 28)
or
3703
3211
(16,
29)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY 06M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 7200 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand·alone DCE
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand·alone DeE
2701 3115 3125
7698 7151 7131
(7)
(2) 9759
or
7151
(2)
3135 3138
4640 4640
9609 9649
9649 (2)
(2)
3271
3271 M11, 3274 3275 3275
M1,2 12 M1C M2
M12
(6) 3701 7821
(6)
7821
6302
9824
(16)
3276
M1-4, 3601
11·143602
3701 3701
6302 4502
9491 (16)
9824
(16,
29)
3631
3632
3701
4502
(16)
3704
3705
4714
or
4718
(10,
16,
32)
3776
M3,4
3777
M3
3701
(16.
32)
3777
(cont'd
M1,2 3760 below)
1481 9126
3701 9402
(16,
22)
8101 8775
3845
8130 M11,
3791 3846 4331 8140 12
3701 (27,
6303 28)
or
3703
3211
(16,
29)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY 06SB - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 7200 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 with C2 Conditioning (or
equivalent) Channel with Back-up @ 3600 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
Interface to IBM
3875 Modem
(9,12)
3271
3271 MH,
2701 3115 3125 M1,2 12
7698 7151
(2)
(7)
7131 7821
9759
or
7151
(2)
(6)
3276
3274 3275 3275 M1-4, 3631
M1C M2
M12 11·14 3632
3701 7821
6302
9824
(16)
(6)
3701 3701
6302 4502
9491 (16)
9824
(16)
3776
8101
M3,4
3704 3777 3777
8130
3845
3705 M3
M1,2 3760 3846 4331 8140
4714 3701
1461 9127 (27,
or
9402 28)
1462,
1481
3701
(22)
1601 1602
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(31)
FACILITY 07 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous operation @ 9600 bps on a duplex Type 3002 Channel (or equivalent).
IBM Machine Type
3271
3275
3276
M11, 3274 M11, 3276 M11·
12 M1C
12 M1-4 14
Interface to IBM
3865 Modem ( 34)
(6,
16)
6302 (6,
or
16)
6303,
3701
9825
(16)
3701
6302
6315
9491
9825
(16,
27)
3701
6302
9491
9825
(16)
3778
M3,4
3601 3631 3704 3777 3777
3602 3632 3705 M3 M1,2
3701 3701 4714 3701 1481
(16) 3701
4502 4502 or
(16) (16) 4718
(16)
(10,
16)
8101
3845 8130
3791 3846 8140
3701 (28)
6303
or
3703
3211,
(16,
27)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
1602
or
1604,
3701
(16)
- --- -
--------- - ----- -----------,-
M 2700.16
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART D (cont'd)
FACILITY D7M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 9600 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
3776
3271
3276
M3,4
Mll, 3274 3275 3276 Ml1, 3601 3631 3704 3777 3777
3602 3632 3705 M3
Ml,2
12 M1C M12 Ml-4 14
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
(6,
16)
6302 (6,
16)
or
6303,
3701
9825
(16)
3701
6302
6315
9491
9825
(16)
3701
6302
9491
9825
(16.
29)
3701 3701 4714 3701 1481
(32) 3701
4502 4502 or
(16) (16) 4718
(16,
(10,
22)
16,
32)
8101 8775
8130 Ml1,
3845
3791 3846 4331 8140 12
3701 (27,
6303 28)
or
3703
3211
(16,
29)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
Or
969X
(31)
FACILITY D7se - Point-to-point or Multipoint synchronous operation @ 9600 bps on a duplex Type 3002 Channel (or equivalent) with
Back-up on the Public Switched Telephone Network.
IBM Machine Type
3271
3275
3276
Ml1, 3274 Ml1, 3276 Mll,
12 M1C
12 Ml-4 14
Interface to IBM
3865 Modem (33, 34)
(6,
16)
6302 (6,
16)
or
6303,
3701
9825
(16)
3701 3701
6302 6302
6315 9491
9491 9825
9825 (16)
(16,27)
3776
M3,4
3704 3777 3777
3845
3705 M3 Ml,2 3791 3846
4714 3701 1481 3701
(16) 3701 6303
or
(16) (16)
4718
(10.
16)
(28)
8101
8130
8140
1602
or
1604,
3701
(16)
NOTES FOR CHART D
1. IBM Line Adapters and Integrated modems perform the modulation/demodulation function on a communications facility at speeds up to
4800 bps. When they are used, stand-alone DCEs are not required. SRL GA24-3435 is your best source of information on the IBM
Line Adapters and Integrated Modems.
2. The 3115, 3125 and 3135 feature codes listed are for the attachment of the first communications line. See the M 3115, M 3125,
3135 and pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
4. When used on a Voice Grade Channel, #9120 on the 2740 will operate in a point-to-point mode only. The 2741 terminal will operate
in a point-to-point mode only on any facility.
5. The 2703 Line Set feature codes (#3205, #7710) are for the attachment of up to eight start-stop or up to four synchronous
communications lines. See the M 2703 pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
6. No special feature code is required to attach this DTE to this Facility.
7. The listed feature codes are for the attachment of a single synchronous communications line. See the description of the Dual
Communication Interface feature in the M 2701 and M 2715 pages for the condition under which a second synchronous communications line may be attached.
9. Refer to the M 3872, 3874 and 3875 pages for the DTE attachment feature codes required for each attaching DTE.
10. 3704/3705 "Remotes" may communicate with 3704/3705 "Locals", point-to-point only, over this facility as their primary
communications link. Feature codes #4714, #4751 and #4781 will support data-half-duplex operation over half-duplex or duplex
communications facilities. Feature codes #4718, #4754 and #4784 will support data-full-duplex operation (i.e., simultaneous data
transmission in both directions) oller duplex facilities only.
11. The 2400 bps Integrated Modem and the IBM 3659 Remote Communications Unit are line compatible and suitable for communications with the IBM 3872 Modem, properly equipped. #4751 or #5700 Integrated Modems require that the 3872 be equipped with
#6101 or #6102. #4752 Integrated Modems require that the 3872 be equipped with #5101 or #5102. #5602 Integrated Modems
are compatible with the basic (control station) 3872. The 3659 mdl 1 requires that the 3872 be equipped with #6101 or #6102. The
3659 mdl 2 requires that the 3872 be a basic control station (no special features) or equipped with #6302.
12. The IBM 3872, 3874 and 3875 Modems must be equipped with #7951 or #7952 to operate on a switched network back-up link,
except that the control station may operate over this type of link Ilia separate ports, each of which is equipped with a 3872, 3874 or
3875 Modem.
15. The 3604 (when equipped with #8001 or #8002), 3614 and 3624 (when equipped with #8001) and the 3603 will communicate with
a 3601 or 3602 equipped with #8001 over a normal 3600 System "loop." When more than one 3603, 3604, 3614 or 3624 is on the
loop, half-duplex, point-to-point, 2-wire terminated lines are required from the 3601 or 3602 to the first station on the loop, between
successive stations on the loop and from the last station on the loop back to the 3601 or 3602. When only one station is on the loop,
a duplex, point-to-point, 4-wire terminated line is required between it and the 3601 or 3602. The 3601, 3602, 3614 and 3624, when
equipped with #5500, will communicate with a 3704 or 3705 oller non-switched voice grade lines either point-to-point or multipoint.
See Note 16 following.
16. The 3271 mdls 11 and 12, 3274 mdl 1C, 3275 mdl 12, 3276, 3601, 3602, 3614, 3624, 3631, 3632, 3651 mdl 50, 3767, 3771,
3773, 3774, 3775, 3776, 3777, 3791, 5320, 5340 and Series/1 will communicate as tributary stations in a multipoint network with a
control station 3704 or 3705 using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). SDLC allows the control station to receive from one
tributary station while it is transmitting to another tributary station. Operation in this mode requires that the 3704/3705 be equipped
with one of the following:
- #4784 for communications with a tributary station equipped with a 1200 bps Integrated Modem, or
- #4755 for communications with a tributary station equipped with a 2400 bps Integrated Modem or attaching an IBM 3872 modem,
or
- #4718 for communications with a tributary station via stand-alone DCEs.
Duplex communications facilities are required for this mode of operation. SDLC also supports the normal data-half-duplex mode of
operation over half-duplex or duplex communications facilities.
17. The 3651 Model 50 will communiCate over this Facility with a
store site. Communications with the 3704/3705 requires #9121
at the remote store site includes a 2400 bps Integrated Modem
requires the 3659 mdl 1. Multipoint remote communications loop
3704 or 3705 at the host System/370, or with a 3659 at a remote
or #9122. Communications with the 3659 requires #6111. The 3659
as part of the basic unit. Point-Io-point remote communications loOp
requires the 3659 mdl 2.
18. Leased Line Adapters are available as features on the 3704 or 3705 as noted. However, additional Leased Une Adapters may be
attached via the 2711 Line Adapter Unit. The 3704/3705 feature code for each pair of lines so attached is either #4711 or #4714.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
-----------= == ':" =
--
M 2700.17
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART D (cont'd)
19. The 4800 bps Integrated Modem, Point-to-point (#5700), is line compatible and suitable for communications with an IBM 3874
Modem equipped with the Point-to-point feature (#6101). The 4800 bps Integrated Modem, Multipoint (#5702), is line compatible and
suitable for communications with an IBM 3874 Modem equipped with the Multipoint Control feature (#5100).
20. The 3767 terminal will communicate over this Facility at 300 bps with a 3115, 3125, 3135 .. 3138 3704 or 3705. The speed specifies
for this operation are:
- #9739 on the 3115 and 3125
- #9593 on the 3135
- #9612 on the 3704 and 3705
- #9540 on the 3767.
- None on the 3138 where the speed is customer selectable.
21. The 3603 mdl 1 includes a 1200 bps Integrated Modem which is line compatible and suitable for communications with the 3601 's or
3602's 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). The 3603 mdl 2 can provide an EIA/CCITT interface between a mode:n and a
subloop of terminals or between a modem and a 3600 system controller. Special feature #6352 provides transmit signal element
timing to a synchronous modem.
22. The 3777 mdl 2 operates in point-to-point mode only.
23. Features #4751 and #4754 on the 3705 require an RPO.
24. Features #5600 and #5602 on the 3735 require an RPO.
25. Features #5600 and #5602 on the 3780 require an RPO.
26. Communication over this facility is between a 3276 operating as a multipoint or point-to-point tributary station and the 3791 (with
#3210 and/or #3211 and/or #3703 and/or #4781) operating as a multipoint control station.
27. No special feature is required to attach to this facility. Modems must satisfy EIA-RS-232C recommendations. The 3845 and 3846
will operate with DTEs operating at speeds of 110 bps or greater.
28. Feature #9110 required for BSC operation. Feature #9115 required for BSC with Business Machine Clock. The 3845 and 3846
will not operate with NRZI coded facilities.
29. The 3276 may be attached as a tributary station on a multipoint non-switched line where the control station is a 3791 equipped with
a Data Link Adapter (#3210 or #3211). All stations on such a line must operate at the same speed and use the same type clocking
source, i.e., either modem or business machine clocking.
30. The 3684 does not support 2,000 bps operation.
31. Specify Codes #967X, #968X and #969X on the 4331 stipulate which protocol the 4331 is to communicate in, and which line
position on the 4331 that protocol is to be applied to, with the "X" in each case being the line pOSition.
32. The 3705 using #4718 can communicate in duplex data communication mode (i.e., data transmission in both directions simultaneously) with the 3776-3,-4, 3777-3 over duplex communications facilities.
33. To operate on these switched network back-up facilities, the IBM 3863, 3864 and 3865 Modems must be equipped with feature
#7953.
34. The IBM 3865 Modem will generally operate satisfactorily on a common carrier supplied unconditioned type 3002 non-switched voice
band channel (or equivalent). However, in some cases the 3865 mdl 1 modem may require D1 conditioning on the channel and the
3865 mdl 2 modem may require either C1 or D2 conditioning on the channel. gee M 3865 pages for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
- -- -----------===':'=
M 2700.18
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART E
COMMON CARRIER PRIVATE LINE (NON-SWITCHED) WIDE BAND CHANNELS
FACILITY E1 - Polnt-to-polnt Synchronous Operation.@ 19.2 Kbps on a Wideband Channel.
IBM Machine Type
3776
M3,4
3115
3777
2701 3125 3704 3705 M3
3777
M1,2
Interface to Type
5703 Service
7697 7121 4717 4717 4501
(4)
(2)
(3)
or
4725
(4,5)
1481
4501
(5)
Interface to Type
8803 Service
7697 7121
(2)
(3)
1481
4501
(5)
4717 4717 4501
(4)
or
4725
(4,5)
FACILITY E2 - Polnt-to-point Synchronous Operation @ 40.8 Kbps on a Wideband Channel.
IBM Machine Type
3115
2701 3125 3704 3705
Interface to Type
5701 Service
7697 7121 4717 4717
(2)
(3)
(4)
or
4725
(4)
Interface to Type
8801 Service
7697 7121
(2)
(3)
4717 4717
(4)
or
4725
(4)
FACILITY E3 - Point-to-point Synchronous Operation @ 50 Kbps on a Wide band Channel.
IBM Machine Type
3115
2701 3125 3704 3705
Interface to Type
5701 Service
7697 7121 4717 4717
(2)
(3)
(4)
or
4725
(4)
Interface to Type
8801 Service
7697 7121
(2)
(3)
4717 4717
(4)
or
4725
(4)
FACILITY E4 - Point-to-point Synchronous Operation @ 230.4 Kbps on a Wideband Channel.
IBM Machine Type
2701 3705
Interface to Type
5751 Service
7697 4722
(2)
or
4723
(4)
NOTES FOR CHART E
2. This feature code is for the attachment of a single synchronous communications line. See the Dual Communications Interface feature
description in the M 2701 pages for the conditions under which a second synchronous communications line may be attached.
3. A communications line attached to the ICA via this feature will present a 100% load factor to the ICA, and must not be operated
simultaneously with any other line on the ICA.
4. 3704/3705 "Remotes" may communicate over this facility with 3704/3705 "Locals" point-to-point only as their primary communications link. #4717 or #4722 will support data half-duplex operation over half-duplex facilities, while #4725 or #4723 will support
data full-duplex (i.e., simultaneous data transmission in both directions) over duplex facilities.
5. The 3705 using #4725 can communicate in duplex data communication mode (i.e., data transmission in both directions simultaneous·
Iy) with the 3776-3,-4, 3777-3 over duplex communications facilities.
\
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------=-- =--- --------=':' =
M 2700.19
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART G
CUSTOMER OWNED AND MAINTAINED (COAM) LIMITED DISTANCE FACILITIES
FACILITY G1 - POint-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps on a Customer Owned and Maintained Line up to 4.75 wire
miles in length.
3704
2702 2703 2740 2141 3705
3845
3846
Limited Distance
Line Adapter, Ty
1A, Half-duplex
4634 4686 4634 4634 4731
(5) 9606
9684 4878
(7)
Limited Distance
Line Adapter, Ty
1 B, Duplex
4635 4687 4635 4635 4732
(5) 9606
9684 4878
(7)
IBM Machine Type
FACILITY G2 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 600 bps on a Customer Owned and Maintained Line up
to 8 wire miles in length.
IBM Machlna Type
1031A 1071 2701 2702 2703
Limited Distance
Line Adapter, Ty 2A
@ 134.5 bps
Li m ited Distance
Line Adapter, Ty 2A
@600 bps
(4)
3704 3845
2740 2741 3705 3846
4792 4636 4612 4688
9112
9684 4878
(3) (1,3)
4790 4790 4741
(5) 9606
(3)
(7)
4792 4637 4613 4688
9112
9685 4879
(3) (1,3)
4790
(6)
(7)
4741
9607
(3)
NOTES FOR CHART G
1.The 2703 feature codes listed are for the attachment of up to eight communications lines. See the M 2703 pages for additional line
attachment feature codes.
3. Type 2 Limited Distance Line Adapters are available as features on the 2702, 2703, 3704 and 3705. However, when the maximum
number of line adapters is reached on these machines, additional line adapters may be attached via the 2711 Line Adapter Unit. The
2702 feature code required for each line so attached is #3233. The 2703 feature code required for each group of up to eight lines
so attached is #3205 or #3206. The 3704 and 3705 feature code required for each pair of lines so attached is #4711 or #4714.
4. The Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2, is included as part of the basic 1031A, unless the IBM Line Adapter, #4647, is ordered.
5. This DTE will operate on this Facility in point-to-point mode only.
6. This entry applies to the 2740 Model 2 only.
7. No special feature is required to attach to this facility. Modems must satisfy EIA-RS-232C recommendations. The 3845 and 3846 will
operate with DTEs operating at speeds of 110 bps or greater.
CHART H
PARALLEL TRANSMISSION
FACILITY H1 - Parallel Transmission @13 cps on the Public Switched Telephone Network or on a Non-switched Voice Grade Line via
Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MaChine Type
Interface to
1001 7770
(2)
(2)
Stand-alone DeE
NOTES FOR CHART H
2. No special feature is required to attach this DTE to this Facility.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- --- -----------
----=- =- =':' =
M 2700.20
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART X
COMMON CARRIER PRIVATE LINE (NON-SWITCHED) DIGITAL DATA COMMUNICATION SERVICES
FACILITY X1 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps.
IBM Machine Type
Interface to AT&T
Dalaphone •
Digllal Data
Service
3276
Ml,4,
3274 11·
MIC
14
5650
or
5651
6302
9822
3776
8101 8775
M3,4
8130 M11,
3777
M3
4331 8140
12
3650 5650 1601 1602 5650
or
or
4695 or
or
5651 5651 5650 1604, 5651
6302 9822 967X 5660 9822
9822 (15)
or
(5)
969X
(13)
FACILITY X1M - POint-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
3271
3271 MIl, 3274 3275 3275
M12
Ml,2
12 MIC M2
IBM Machine Type
2701 3115 3125 3135 3138
Interface to
Stand·alone DCE
7698 7151
(4)
(2)
IBM Machine Type
3774
3775
3704
3771 3776
3735
3767
3773
Ml,2
3705
3776
M3,4
3777 3777
3791 3845
M3
Ml,2 3780 Ml,2 3846
4714 5010 9533 1481 1481
or
3718 3701 3701
(5)
(5)
(5)
4718
(5,6,
14)
3701 1481 9121 3701 (10,
(14) 3701
11)
6302
(5)
or
(8)
6303
(5)
or
3211
3703
(9)
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7131 4640 4640
9758 9609 9609
9649 9649
or
(4)
(4)
7151
(4)
(3)
(3,5)
3701
6302
9822
(5)
(3)
(3,5)
3276
MI-4, 3601 3614 3631 (cont'd
11·143602 3624 3632 below)
3701 4502 3701 4502
6302 or
6302 or
9491 6302, (5) 6302,
9822 3701
3701
(5)
(5)
(5)
8101 8775
8130 MIl,
4331 8140 12
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(13)
FACILITY X2 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps.
IBM Machine Type
Interface to AT&T
Dataphone·
Digital Data
Service
3276
Ml,4,
3274 11·
MIC
14
3776
8101 8775
M3,4
3777
8130 MIl,
M3
4331 8140
12
5650 5650 5650
or
or
or
5651 6302 5651
6302 9823 9823
(15)
9823 (5)
1601 1602 5650
4695 or
or
5650 1604, 5651
967X 5660 9823
or
969X
(13)
FACILITY X2M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provision of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
2701 3115 3125 3135 3138
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
7698 7151 7131 4640 4640
(2)
(4) 9758 9609 9609
9649 9649
or
(4)
(4)
7151
(4)
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
3774
3775
3704
3771 3776
3705 3735 3773 Ml,2
3776
M3,4
3777
M3
4714 5010 1481 1481 3701
or
3701 3701 (14)
(5)
4718
(5)
(5,6,
14)
3271
3271 MIl, 3274 3275 3275
Ml,2
12 MIC M2
M12
3276
Ml-4, 3801 3614 3631 (cont'd
11-143602 3624 3632 below)
7821
3701 4502 3701 4502
6302 or
6302 or
9491 6302, (5) 6302,
9823 3701
3701
(5)
(5)
(5)
(3,5)
3701 7821 (3,5)
6302
9823
(5)
3777
3845
Ml,2 3780 3791 3846 4331
1481
3701
(5,8)
9124 3701 (10,
11)
6303
(5)
or
3211
3703
(9)
8101 8775
8130 MIl,
8140 12
1601
4695
3701
1602 3701
or
1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(13)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =------ --=
--':' =
M 2700.21
Jul79
DP Machines
CHART X
(cont'd)
FACILITY X3 - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 9600 bps.
IBM Machine Type
Interface to AT&T
Dataphone·
Digital Data
Service
3776
3276 M3,4
8101 8775
8130 M11,
3274 M11- 3777
M1C
14 M3
4331 8140
12
5650
or
5651
6302
or
6303
9825
5650 5650 1601 1602 5650
or
or
4695 or
or
5651 5651 5650 1604, 5651
6302 9825 967X 5660 9825
9825 (15) or
(5)
969X
(13)
FACILITY X3M - Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 9600 bps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
tBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
3776
M3,4
8101 8775
3276
8130 MIl,
3274 3276 M11, 3601 3631 3704 3777 3777
3845
3791 3846 4331 8140 12
M1C M1-4 14 3602 3632 3705 M1,2 M3
6302
or
6303,
3701
9825
(5)
3701
6302
6315
9491
9825
(5)
3701 3701 3701
6302 4502 4502
(5)
9491 (5)
9B25
(5,
12)
4714 1481 3701 3701 (10,
or
3701 (14) 6303 11 )
or
4718 (5,B)
(5,6,
3703
14)
3211
(5,
12)
1601 1602 3701
4695 or
3701 1604,
967X 3701
or
969X
(13)
FACILITY X4 - Synchronous operation at 56,000 bps on public non-switched data network via integrated DCEs.
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DGE
8101
4331 8140
1601 1602
4695 5660
5650
9444
967X
or
969X
(13)
FACILITY X4M - Point-to-point Synchronous Operation @ 56 Kbps via Stand-alone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM Machine Type
Interface to
Stand-alone DCE
8101
3705 4331 8140
4720
or
4726
(6)
1601 1602,
4695 1550
4720
967X
or
969X
(13)
NOTES FOR CHART X
2, The listed feature codes are for the attachment of a Single synchronous communications line. See the desription of the Dual
Communication Interface feature in the M 2701 pages for the conditions under which a second synchronous communications line may
be attached.
3. No special feature is required to attach this DTE to this Facility.
4. The 3115, 3125. 3135 and 3138 feature codes listed are for the attachment of the first communications line. See the M 3115, M
3125 and M 3135 pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
5, The 3271 mdls 11 and 12, 3274 mdl 1 C, 3275 mdl 12, 3276. 3601. 3602. 3614, 3624, 3631, 3632, 3767, 3771, 3773. 3774,
3775. 3776, 3777. 3791, 5320, 5340 and Series/1 will communicate as tributary stations in a multipoint network with a control
station 3704 or 3705 using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). SDLC allows the control station to receive from one tributary
station while it is transmitting to another tributary station. Operation in this mode requires that the 3704/3705 be equipped with
feature #4718. SOLC also supports the normal data-half-duplex mode of operation.
6,' 3704/3705 "Remotes" may communicate over this Facility with 3704/3705 "Locals" point-to-point only as their primary communications link. Feature code #4714 will support data-half-duplex operation over half-duplex or duplex facilities, while feature code #4718
will support data-full-duplex (i.e., simultaneous data transmission in both directions) over duplex facilities.
8. The 3777 mdl 2 operates in point-to-point mode only.
9. Communication over this facility is between a 3276 operating as a multipoint or point-to-point tributary station and a 3791 (with #3211
and #3703) operating as a multipoint control station.
10. No special feature is required to attach to this facility. Modems must satisfy EIA-RS-232C recommendations. The 3845 and 3846
will operate with DTEs operating at speeds of 110 bps or greater.
11. Feature #9110 required for BSC operation. Feature #9115 required for BSC with Business Machine Clock. The 3845 and 3846 will
not operate with NRZI coded faciliites .
• Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
-- ---------------
----_.-
DP Machines
M 2700.22
Ju179
CHART X
(cont'd)
12. The 3276 may be attached as a tributary station on a multipoint non-switched line where the control station is a 3791 equipped with
a Data Link Adapter (#3211). All stations on such a line must operate at the same speed.
13. Specify Codes #967X. #968X and #969X on the 4331 stipulate which protocol the 4331 is to communicate in. and which line
position that protocol is to be applied to. with the "X" in each case being the line position.
14. The 3705 using #4718 can communicate in duplex data communication mode (i.e .• data transmission in both directions simultaneously) with the 3776-3.-4. 3777-3 over duplex communications facilities.
15. The 3776-3.-4. 3777-3 can communicate in duplex data communication mode (i.e., data transmission in both directions simultaneously) over duplex communications facilities.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------------=- =-- --=--=
~
M 2700.99
Jul 79
DP Machines
Note: The byte structure of the standard "Selectric" character set differs from that for PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character sets.
OPD COMMUNICATING MAG CARD
"SELECTRIC" TYPEWRITER
Purpose: A communicating version of the OPD Mag Card
"Selectric" to satisfy the need for incidental communications in
the power typing environment. May be used to communicate with
another like machine or as a terminal.
Highlights: The Mag Card "Selectric" uses a new I/O, a
read/write unit and a Mag Card console housing the electronics.
The mag card itself consists of 50 tracks of 100 characters each.
The line expansion feature permits recording of 30-35 characters
beyond the normal writing line of 65-70 characters. All functional
controls and code keys for local and communications mode are
provided on the keyboard of the "Selectric" I/O. The communications control includes a "Start" key for initiating transmission to a
like machine, "Attention" key, a "CPU" key for initiating transmission to a computer, and a "Line Hold" key for maintaining communications when not transmitting or receiving.
Includes character format checking, dual velocity printing, send
and receive indicator lights and a choice of a fabric or film ribbon.
Print quality is exactly equivalent to that of a Mag Card
"Selectric" Typewriter.
Magnetic cards prepared offline on any Mag Card "Selectric" may
be transmitted at 135 baud. Sending and receiving may also take
place directly from the keyboard.
The Standard Communicating Mag Card "Selectric" Typewriter is
functionally equivalent online to a 2741 Communications Terminal
equipped with the following features: Dial Up (#3255), Switched
Network Attachment (#9114), Receive Interrupt (#4708), Typamatic Keys (#8341) and Transmit Interrupt (#7900).
Code and systems compatibility provide for transmission to or from
a suitably equipped S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 and 195, or a S/370
mdl 125 thru 195. See Prerequisites below.
Communications Facilities: The unit operates in half-duplex data,
full duplex control mode over Common Carrier Public Switched
Facilities (C1) at 134.5 bps.
PREREQUISITES: Communicates with a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85
and 195, or any S/370 Processor except 3115. The data processing system requires a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or a 2702 or
2703 Transmission Control.
Via 2701
The 2701 requires an IBM Terminal Adapter Type I
(#4640) and Speed Selection (#9581). Limitation:
The Receive and Transmit Interrupt features on this
unit will not be recognized when communication is via
a 2701.
Via 2702
The 2702 requires IBM Terminal Control Base
(#9696), IBM Terminal Control-Type I (#4615), Selective Speed (#9684), and Data Set Line Adapter
(#3233), Note: Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200),
when installed on the 2702, will allow the Transmit
and Receive Interrupt features of this unit to be recognized. The 2741 Break (#8055) on the 2702 will
allow only the Transmit Interrupt feature of this unit to
be recognized.
Via 2703
The 2703 requires either Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506), IBM Terminal Control
Base (#4619), IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696),
Line Speed Option (#4878), and Data Line Set
(#3205). Note: Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) will
allow the Transmit and Receive Interrupt capability of
this unit to be recoJnized. 2741 Break (#8055) will
allow only the Transmit Interrupt feature of this unit to
be recognized.
[3]
Character
Spacing
10
characters/inch may be specified.
or
12
[4] Line Feeding ... 6 lines/inch, unless otherwise specified. Pin
feed platens are available on an SER (RPQ) basis only.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ACOUSTICAL FILTER HOOD.
[Plant or field installable] This
feature significantly reduces the amount of noise produced when
printing output.
PARAGRAPH INDENT. [Plant or field installable] Designed for a
maximum level of efficiency when preparing and revising indented
material in the local mode. This feature is inoperative when receiving from a computer.
AUTO TERMINAL 10. [Plant or field installable] The four character identification sequence is permanently assigned by IBM. The
plant will assi9n a different combination of characters to each Mag
Card "Selectric" Typewriter equipped with this feature. The first
character will specify terminal type and the last three will be assigned to that unit. If field installation of a new number or change
to an existing number is desired.
COMMUNICATE MODE KEYLOCK. [Plant or field installablej The
Keylock which inhibits the communicate mode will be furnished by
IBM. Two keys will be furnished with each lock and additional
keys may be purchased.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be advised that:
[1] He is responsible for making arrangements for price quotations,
installation and cost (initial and recurring) of common carrier
communications facilities/services ... [2} Toll charges, if required
for installation and maintenance of the IBM equipment, are to be
paid by the customer ... [3] The customer must be prepared to
relinquish the data processing system for service in those cases in
which servicing aids or available error message printouts do not
permit localization of a malfunction of the communications facility
or terminal location.
Manuals: Communicating Mag Card Reference Manual, G5430608 ... Communicating Mag Card Users Guide, G543-0609 ...
Communicating Mag Card Program Supplement Sheets, G5430610.
Specify: [1] Voltage ... 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 15 amps, 3-wire cord
only.
[2] Typing Element ... available only in standard correspondence
"Selectric" code. One OPD "Selectric" 72 element in correspondence keyboard configuration 101 is furnished with the unit.
See #9811 on page 23 in "Type Catalog." Additional elements
may be ordered
characters/ inch
[reverse 5::;e ;'. ~.i.:rkl
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ---- -------------- - -'---
M 2701.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
2701
are additional restrictions and limitations to the facility and operations ... for details,
DATA ADAPTER UNIT
see SRL GA27-3004.
(8) Transparency (#8029) is also required.
Purpose: Attaches to a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85. 195 or any S/370
or 4300 Processor for communications with remote and local I/O
devices operating via various customer or common carrier facilities.
Highlights: A modular unit which greatly expands the data communications and data acquisition I/O capabilities of S/360 and
S/370. Provides for attachment of up to four half-duplex
start/stop communications lines with speeds up to 600 bps '" or
up to four (maximum of two operating simultaneously) half-duplex
synchronous communications lines with line speeds up to 230,400
bpst
or up to four parallel data acquisition devices (word width
-- 16 to 48 bits). Various combinations of the terminal devices are
possible with any 2701.
Communications Facilities: The 2701 operates in half-duplex
mode ... for information concerning applicable communications
facilities. see M 2700 pages. this section. The alphameric communications facility references indicated below correspond to those
shown on the charts on those pages.
Terminal Devices: The 2701 can communicate with the following
terminals over the facilities and in the modes and speeds indicated
... for further information about the adapters required on the 2701.
see "Special Features" below.
START /STOP TERMINALS
Speed
(bps)
Facilities
(1) (2)
600.0
134.5
134.5
600.0
2740 mdl 1s. 2741s. or 134.5
(3)
5010 mdl As
134.5
2740 mdi 2s. or
134.5
5010 mdl As
600.0
2845/2265s.2848/2260s 1200
2400
3767 (as a 2740-2)
600
AT&T 8382/8383s
45.5
WU 115As
56.9
74.2
(3)
TWX - 33/358
110.0
D2.G2
D1.G2
D1.G2
D2.G2
D1.G1.G2
C1.C2
D1.G2
D2.G2
03
04
02
A1
A2
A3
C2
Terminals
1030 Systems
1060 Systems
1070 Systems
2701 Adapter
Required
4648
4640
4640
4640
4640
4640
4640
4640
4656
4657
4640
7860
7861
7862
7885
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
9581
9581
9582
9581
9581
9581
9582
w 9582
FIXED 4-out-of-8 CODE TERMINALS
Note: Orders for Synchronous Data Adapter Type
(#7695,7696) are on an "as available" basis '" customer
initiated deferrals of orders on 2701 s which include either
feature will subject the 2701 to an "as available" basis.
Speed
(bps)
Terminals
1009.10 Il.770 1.7702,
7710.7711,7740.7750,
S/360 mdl 20 w 2703,
IllO w 7690
1009. iO 13.7702.7710.
7711. 7740.S/(360 mdl
20 w 2013. 1130 w 1690
1009.1013,1102.7710.
7711.7740.S/360 mdl
20 w 2073. ! 130 w 1690
7110,7111
Facilities
(16)
1200
2701 Adptr
Req'd (IS)
Public Switched
Telephone Net·
7696
Second
Interface
3462
work at 1200 or
2000
bps, an Internal Clock may be required ... see #4703 under "Special Features."
(16) Autocall (#1303) can be used on the Public Switched Telephone Network
(17) Specify IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter.
BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
TERMINALS
Another S/360 or S/370
via a 2701 with #7698,
a 2703 with #7710, or
3704/3705 (12)
1200
2000
2400
4800
7200
2701 w #7697, or 3705 19.2K
w #4717 (except for
40.8K
230.4 Kbps which is not SO.OK
available on the 3705) 230.4K
2701
2400
4800
Series/I w #2094 or
1200
#2074
2000
2400
4800
7200
9600
19.2K
Series /1 w #2075
40.8K
50.0K
1200
System/3 w #2074
2000
2400
4800
4800
7200
19.2K
4O.8K
SO.OK
System/7 w #2074
1200
2000
2400
4800
7200
19.2K
4O.8K
50.0K
System/32 w #2074
600
1200
2000
2400
4800
7200
600
1200
3462
2000
2400
19.2K
4O.8K
7695
7695
3461
3461
4800
e2. Autocall
System/34 w #2500
7200
1200
2000
2400
4800
4800
7200
19.2K
4O.8K
SO.OK
S/360 mdl 2S w #4580
1200
and #7SS1 or #7SS2
2000
2400
4800
S/370 mdl liS, 12S w
1200
#4640 and appropriate 2000
BSC features
2400
4800
4800
7200
19.2K
4O.8K
SO.OK
S/370 mdl 13S, 13S-3,
~::.
138 w #4640
S/360 mdI 20 w #2074
(#1302) can be used
(5) Appropriate transmission code, (#9060) for EBCDIC, or (#9061) for ASCII. must be
:'\pecified.
(6) On facility C4. CS or C6. Autocall (#1314) can be used ..
(7) If #7698 is to operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps, a Synchronous Clock (#7692, 7693)
~ee
SPEED
(bps)
7696
(4) Appropriate transmission code, (#9060) for EBCDIC. (#9061) for ASCII. or {#9062)
for 6-bit Transcode. must be specified.
t
(IS) When #7695 or #7696 is to operate one or two lines at 1200 bps, 2000 bps or 2400
2400
(2) On appropriate facilities, an IBM Line Adapter (#4636, 4637) may be used in lieu of
a data s.et.
reqUired.
(14) Communications with the 3735 and 3275 at 1200 bps may utilize the IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapter ... see Chart 2 on M 2700 pages.
3462
n) Or equivalent privately owned facility.
~e
(l3)The half-speed (1200 bps) of the 3872 mdll cannot be used with #4657.
7696
band Service at
19.2 or 40.8 Kbps
For each data path a Parallel Data Adapter (#5500) is required.
may
(12) 7200 bps operation on the 2703 is by RPQ only.
2000 bps. W ide-
PARALLEL DATA SERVICES
(3) On facililY Cl or
(9) Specify 4-wire communications channeL
(10) EBCDIC (#9060) must be specif>ed on 2701.
Chart 3 on M 2700 pages. When operating at 2400 bps, there
The number and speeds of attachable lines is also a function of the attached
proce::,sor. the channels assigned. and the characteristics of other devices attached to
those channels.
Not to be reproduced w:thout written permission.
FACILITIES 2701 ADAPTERSECOND
(I)
REQUIRED (7) INTERFACE
C4, D3 (6)
CSM, D4M (6)
D4, D4SB
C6. D5, DSSB
D6. D6SB
E3
EI
E2
E4
XIM
X2M
C4M. D3M
CSM, D4M
C5M, D4M. XIM
C6M, DSM, X2M
D6M
D7M, X3M
E3
EI
E2
C4, D3 (6)
C5M, D4M (6)
D4. D4SB, XIM
C6. 05, O5SB
X2M
D6. D6SB
E3
EI
E2
C4, OJ (6)
CSM, D4M (6)
D4, XIM
C6, D5. X2M
D6
E3
EI
E2
C3
C4, D3 (6)
CSM, D4M (6)
D4, D4SB. XIM
C6, 05, O5SB
X2M
D6, D6SB
D,D2
C4, C4M. D3,
D3M
CSM, D4M
CS, D4, D4M.
D4SB.AIM
C6, C6M, D5.
O5M, X2M
D6, D6M
C4. D3 (6)
CSM, D4M (6)
D4, D4SB, XIM
C6. 05. O5SB
X2M
D6, D6SB
E3
EI
E2
C4, OJ (6)
CSM, D4M (6)
D4
C6, 05
C4. OJ (6)
C5M, D4M (6)
D4, D4SB, XIM
C6. DS, DSSB
X2M
D6, D6SB
E3
EI
E2
C4, D3
CSM
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7697
7697
7697
7697
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7697
7697
7697
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7697
7697
7697
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(S)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3463
3463
3463
3463
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3463
3463
3463
(5)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(S)
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3463
3463
3463
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3463
3463
(5)
(5)
(S)
3463
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
7698 (S)
7698 (S)
3464
3464
7698 (S)
3464
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7697
7697
7697
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7697
7691
7697
7698
7698
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(S)
(S)
(5)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(S)
(5)
(5)
(5)
3464
3464
3463
3463
3463
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3463
3463
3463
1464
3464
------- - --===
----- ----':' =
M 2701,2
Jul 79
OP Machines
2701 Data Adapter Unit (cont'd)
and #9649-9656
2400 04, XIM
4800 C6, OS, X2M
7200 06
1130 System w #7690
1200 C4, 03 (6)
2000 C5M, O4M (6)
2400 04
4800 C6,05
1131
2400 XIM
4800 X2M
1200 C4, 03 (6)
1800 System w #7550
2000 C5M, O4M (6)
2400 04
4800 C6,05
1826
2400 XIM
4800 X2M
2715 mdl2
1200 C4, 03 (6)
2000 C5M, O4M (6)
2400 ·04
4800 C6,05
2770 System
1200 C4, 03 (6)
2000 C5M, 04M (6)
2400 04, O4SB
4800 OS,OSSB
7200 06, O6SB
2772
2400 XIM
4800 X2M
2780
1200 C4, 03 (6)
2000 CSM, 04M (6)
2400 O4,XIM
4800 05,05SB,X2M
3271/3277
1200 D3
2000 04M
2400 04, O4SB
4800 OS, OSSB
7200 06, O6SB
3271 mdls I, 2
2400 XIM
4800 X2M
3275
600 C3
1200 C4, 03 (14)
2000 04M
2400 04, 04SB
4800 OS, OSSB
7200 06, O6SB
3275 Mdls I, 2
2400 XIM
4800 X2M
3704
2400 XIM
4300 X2M
3705
2400 XIM
4800 X2M
3735
1200 C4,03
2000 CSM, O4M
2400 04, XIM
4800 C6, OS, 05SB
4800 X2M
3741 mdl2
1200 C4, 03 (6)
3747
2000 C5M, 04M (6)
2400 C5, 04, XIM
3771.3773.3774.3775
1200 C4, 03 (6)
3771,Y/73.3774.377S
2000 C5M, O4M (6)
(w #1460, 1461 or 1462) 2400 04, O4SB, XIM
4800 C6, OS, 05SB
4800 X2M
3776
2000 C5M, 04M (6)
(w #1460, 1461 or 1462) 2400 04, O4SB, XIM
4800 C6, OS, OSSB
4800 X2M
3777 mdl 1
2400 XIM
(w #1460, 1461 or 1462) 4800 C6, OS, 05SB
4800 X2M
7200 06, O6SB
3m mdl 2
2400 XIM
4800 C6, 05, 05SB
4800 X2M
7200 06, O6SB
3780
1200 C4, 03 (6)
2000 C5M, 04M (6)
2400 04, 04SB, XIM
4800 OS, X2M
7200 06, O6SB
5231 mdl2
1200 C4, 03 (6)
2000 C5, O4M (6)
2400 C5, 05 (6)
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
7698
(5)
(5)
(5)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5) (8)
(5) (8)
(5) (8)
(5) (8)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)(14)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(10)
(10)
(10)
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
3464
MODEMS ... up to two of the following IBM Modems may be attached to the 2701.
MODEM
SPEED
(bps)
2701 ADAPTER
REQUIRED
3863 mdl J or 2
3872 mdl 1
2400
7698 (5)
7698 (5)
4657
7698 (5)
7698 (5)
7698 (5)
7698 (5)
3864 mdl J or 2
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
3865 mdl J or 2
2400
4800
4800
7200
9600
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages. The customer is
also responsible for furnishing signal levels and impedance matching in accordance with specifications outlined in OEMI Manual
GA22-6844 for the Parallel Oata Adapter (#5500) or any of the
synchronous or start/stop adapters if he provides the data sets,
telegraph terminations, or privately owned communications facilities.
PREREQUISITES: The 2701 requires a control unit position on a
system channel.
5/360 mdl 22 -- multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 2022.
5/360 mdl 25 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see
2025.
5/360 mdl 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or Selector Channels (special features) ... see 2030, 2040. 2050.
5/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, or Add'i High Speed Multiplexer Subchannels ... see 2044.
5/360 mdl 65, 75 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer
channel of 2870, or Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 67 -- selector channel of 2860, or basic multiplexer
channel of 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, or shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
5/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) -- see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer
(standard) ... see 3145.
channel,
selector
channels
5/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- by1e multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158. Limitations:
Each SO-II attached to a block multiplexer channel operating in
block multiplexing mode must be assigned to a unique shared
subchannel and if the 2701 is to be field installed, it must be at
EC level 309060 or above.
5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) of
2870, shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032. See "3031, 3032, 3033 Limitations" below.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (2 are standard),
block multiplexer channels (10 are standard) ... see 3033. See
"3031, 3032, 3033 Limitations" below.
3031, 3032, 3033 Limitations: Each SO-II attached to
a block multiplexer channel operating in block multiplexing mode must be assigned to a unique shared
subchannel and. if the 2701 is to be field installed, it
must be at EC level 309060 or above.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (special feature), block multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block multiplexer
channel (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, l-phase. 3-wire, 60Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3) Specification Sheet: A completed 2701 Specification Sheet.
must be submitted at time of order '"
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ---- -- ---------------,-
M 2701.3
Jul79
DP Machines
2701 Data Adapter Unit
(cont'd)
[4] Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped prior
to December 29, 1967 ... see #4700 under "Special Features, "
[5] A Cable Order must be submitted for: (1) Each new machine
order, (2) Each
order where the added feature requires
external cable ... see S/370 Installation Manual, Physical Planning, SRL GC22-7004, for cabling instructions.
PRICES:
2701
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$
$ 7,915
$ 23
234
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Machine Group: B
Per Call: 3
Metering: Assignable Unit
SPECIAL FEATURES
Before ordering special features, consult feature descriptions and
"Maximum Configuration" below. A completed, revised 2701
Specification :3heet,
and copy of the latest preceding
specifications sheet must be submitted with each
special
features.
AUTOCALL (#1302, 1303, 1314),
Provides automatic dialing
capabilities on Public Switched Networks. One of these features is
required for each line equipped to automatically originate calls on
switched networks. For the appropriate Automatic Calling Units,
see Chart 3B on M 2700 pages.
#1302 -- requires either an IBM Terminal Adapter Type I, Mod II
(#4640) with speed selection #9581, or Telegraph Adapter
Type II (# 7885). Note: When ordering # 1302 for field installation, a new #4640 with #9581 must be ordered to replace an
installed #4640/9851 [or the superseded IBM Terminal Adapter Type I (#4645)].
#1303 -- requires Synchronous Adapter Type I (#7696) and
Internal Clock (#4703).
#1314 -- requires Synchronous Adapter Type II (#7698).
Maximum: One per adapter ... two # 1302s or one # 1303 or
#1314 per 2701 without Expanded Capability (#3815) ... four
# 1 302s, two # 1303s or # 1 314s, or two # 1302s and one
#1303 or #1314 if #3815 is installed.
CHANNEL INTERFACE, SECOND (#1860),
Provides the ability
to attach the adapter(s) housed in the Expanded Capability
(#3815) gate to a channel interface other than the one provided
with the basic 2701. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: Expanded
Capability (#3815) and an Expansion Feature (#3855).
DUAL CODE (#3455).
Permits a second code type, optional
under program controlled selection, for the Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II (#7697, 7698). Specify: #9070 for EBCDIC,
#9071 for ASCII, or ##9072 for 6-bit Transcode. Prerequisite: A
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#7697, 7698) ... also see
Station Selection (#7477) and Transparency (#8029) for applicability.
DUAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE (#3461-3464).
Provides
the Synchronous Data Adapter Type I (#7695, 7696) or Type II
(#7697, 7698) with capability to interface with an additional
facility ... determination of which interface is operational is under
program control.
For #7695 or #7696
#3461 -- for operation on Common Carrier Type 5701, 5703,
8801 or 8803 Wideband Services.
#3462 -- for operation on the Public Switched Telephone Network or a Non-switched Voice Grade Line.
Limitation: Autocall (#1303) is not operational on the Dual
Communication Interface.
For #7697 or #7698
#3463 -- for operation with facility El, E2 or E3.
#3464 - for operation with facility C4, C5, C6, 03, 04, 05 or
06.
Limitation: Autocall (#1314) is not operable on the Dual Communication Interface.
Restriction: The 2701 does not permit simultaneous operation of
two lines attached to the same Synchronous Data Adapter.
Prerequisite: An appropriate Synchronous Data Adapter Type I
(#7695, 7696) or Type II (#7697, 7698) ... also see Internal
Clock (#4703) or Synchronous Clock (#7692, 7693) for applicability.
EXPANDED CAPABILITY (#3815).
Provides an additional gate
that allows additional combinations of adapters ... allows for one
additional adapter from Category II, or up to two adapters from
Category I ... see "Maximum Configuration" below. Specify this
featurE. if: [1] Channel Interface, Second (# 1860) is ordered ... [2]
Adapters from two different categories are required ... [3] More
than two adapters from Category I or more than one from Category II are required. Maximum: One.
EXPANSION FEATURE (#3855).
Provides the 2701 with the
capability of operating with an add'i adapter. The number required
per 2701 equals one less than the number of adapters specified
.. see "Maximum Configuration" below. Maximum: One per 2701
without Expanded Capability (#3815)
three per 2701 with
#3815.
tlBM LINE ADAPTER (#4636, 4637).
A modem for 2-wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles
see Limited Distance Line
Adapter Type 2 in SRL GA24-3435tt for specifications and restrictions.
For
operation
of
1030/1050/1060/1070/2740/2741/5010 over facilities which
conform to the specifications in the manual referenced above.
#4636 -- for operation at 134.5 bps over facility G2.
#4637 -- for operation at 600 bps over facility G2.
Prerequisites: Each #4636 requires an IBM Terminal Adapter
Type I, Mod II (#4640) with speed selection #9581 [or the replaced IBM Terminal Adapter Type I (#4645)] ... each #4637
requires a #4640 with speed selection #9582 [or the replaced
#4646], or an IBM Terminal Adapter Type II (#4648).
tlBM TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE I, MOD II (#4640).
Controls
data
transfers
between
S/360
or
S/370
and
1060/1070/2740/2741/5010 over facility Cl, C2, 01, 02 or G2.
Includes vertical and longitudinal redundancy checking for
1050/1060/1070 terminals and 2740s equipped with Record
Checking (#6114). Speed Selection: One of the following must be
specified
#9581,
for
operation
at
134.5
bps
to
1060/1070/2740/2741/5010 ... #9582, for operation at 600
bps to 1070/5010/2740 mdl 2s. #9581 can be changed in the
field to #9582, or vice versa. Note: A 2740 may be attached with
any combination of its Record Checking (#6114) and Station
Control (#7479) features, or with neither.
If the facility is G2 conforming to the line requirements for Limited
Distance Line Adapter Type 2 in SRL GA24-3435tt, #4640 may
be used with an appropriate IBM Line Adapter (#4636, 4637) in
lieu of a data set. Maximum: One per 2701 without Expansion
Feature (#3855) ... two with one #3855
three Witil two
#3855s and Expanded Capability (#3815)
four with three
#3855s and #3815. Limitation: See "Maximum Configuration"
below. Special Requirements: See Autocall (# 1302) tor applicability.
Note: #4640 with #9581 or #9582 replaces the withdrawn IBM
Terminal Adapter Type I (#4645, 4646)
tlBM TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE II (#4648).
Controls data
transfers between S/360 or S/370 and 1030 terminals operating
at 600 bps over facility G2, if the facility conforms to the line
requirements for Limited Distance Line Adapter Type 2 in SRL
GA24-3435tt, #4648 may be used with an IBM Line Adapter
(#4637) in lieu of a data set. Maximum: One per 2701 without
Expansion Feature (#3855) ... two with one #3855
three with
two #3855s and Expanded Capability (#3815) ... four with three
#3855s and #3815. Limitations: See "Maximum Configuration"
below.
tlBM TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III (#4656, 4657).
#4656 -- control data transfers between a S/360 or S/370 and
either remote 2845 Display Controls ann / or 2848 Display Controls operating at 1200 bps over facility 03.
#4657 -- permits operation with 2845s and/or 28485 at 2400
bps over facility 04, if the data set provides clock pulses.
Maximum: One per 2701 without Expanded Capability (#3815) ...
two with #3815 and an Expansion Feature (#3855). Limitations:
See "Maximum Configuration" below. Prerequisite: This feature
requires a CPU with 16K bytes of core storage or larger.
INTERNAL CLOCK (#4703),
Required for Synchronous Data
Adapter Type I (#7696) or Dual Communication Interface (#3462)
if at least one data set does not provide clock pulses. Provides
clocking, under program selection, for 1200 bps, 2000 bps or
2400 bps operation. Maximum: One per #7695 or #7696.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700).
[For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2701 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level reQuiraments.
IBM LINE ADAPTER BASE (#4708). Provides for mounting of up
to two IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and their associated Automatic Call Origination features. Limitation: Cannot be installed when
t
tt
For further information, see M 2700 pages.
SRL GA24-3435-2, or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced w!thout written permission.
------------ --- -------==-=
':' =
M 2701.4
Jul79
DP Machines
2701 Data Adapter Unit (cont'd)
anyone of the following features is installed: IBM Line Adapter
(#4636 or #4637), Telegraph Adapter, Type I (#7860, 7861 or
7862). Maximum: One per 2701. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Synchronous Data Adapter, Type II (#7698), with a
Synchronous Clock (#7692).
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER, LEASED (#4781). Provides one
IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter which is suitable for communications
over facility 03 with a similiar line adapter. Maximum: Two per
2701. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: IBM Line Adapter
Base (#4708).
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER, SWITCHED (#4782). Provides
one IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter which is suitable for communications over facility C4 with a similiar line adapter. Attachment of
this line adapter to the switched telephone network requires the
use of a Type CBS Data Access Arrangement. This line adapter
includes the automatic answering capability. Maximum: Two per
2701. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: IBM Line Adapter
Base (#4708).
AUTOMATIC CALL ORIGINATION (#4791). Provides the capability of automatically (under program control) dialing over the
switched telephone network to a remote terminal. Limitations: This
feature can be used on rotary dial systems only. Cannot be installed with Selectable Synchronous Clock (#7401). Maximum:
One per IBM 1200 BPS Line Adapter, Switched (#4782).
Prerequisites: IBM Line Adapter, Switched (#4782) and Autocall
(#1314).
PARALLEL DATA ADAPTER (#5500).
Provides a 16-bit wide
path to customer devices ... odd parity and redundancy checking
... can be expanded to 48 bits [see Parallel Data Expansion
(#5505) below] Mode of operation is half-duplex at speeds limited
only by channel and system configuration. A maximum of eight
customer devices can be connected to the interface. However,
there is but one data path shared by all devices. Maximum: One
per 2701 without Expansion Feature (#3855) ... two per 2701
with one #3855 [neither #5500 can have more than two Parallel
Data Expansions (#5505)] ... two per 2701 with one #3855 and
Expanded Capability (#3815) [either or both #5500s may have
more than two #5505s] ... three per 2701 with two #3855s and
#3815 [only one of the three #5500s may have more than two
#5505s] ... four per 2701 with three #3855s and #3815 [none
of the #5500s may have more than two #5505s]. Limitations:
See "Maximum Configuration" below.
Provides a 2-second
PARALLEL DATA TIMEOUT (#5501).
timeout of the external device responses to data transfer requests
from a Parallel Data Adapter (#5500). Maximum: One per
#5500.
PARALLEL DATA EXTENSION (#5505).
Provides an add'i 8
data bit extension to the parallel data customer interface.
Maximum: Four per Parallel Data Adapter (#5500). Limitations:
See #5500 above and "Maximum Configuration" below.
SECOND CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE SWITCH (#6301). Provides ability to disable 2701 functions to either CPU when the
Second Channel Interface (#1860) is being used with two CPUs
... for field installation on units with # 1860 installed prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on # 1860s shipped after that.
Prerequisites: Second Channel Interface (#1860) ... 2701 must
be at EC level 306675.
SELECTABLE SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7401).
Provides a
synchronous clock which is capable of operation at 600 bps or at
1 200 bps and provides a manual switch to allow the operator to
select one of these two speeds. Maximum: One per Synchronous
Data Adapter, Type II (#7698). Limitations: Cannot be installed
with any other synchronous clock or with Automatic Call Origination (#4791) ... when the Dual Communication Interface is installed, and this clock is to operate on both the basic and dual
interface, both interfaces must operate at the same speed.
Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter, Type II (#7698).
tttSYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE I (#7695, 7696).
[Plant Installation only] Provides control of data transfers between
S/360 or S/370 and 4-out-of-8 code synchronous terminals
[1009s, 1013s, 7701s, 7702s, 7710, 7711, 7740s, 7750s, S/360
mdl 20s with #2073s, 1130s with #7690s].
#7695 - permits operation on common carrier Type 5701, 5703,
8801 or 8803 Wide band Services.
#7696 - permits operation on the Public Switched Telephone
Network or a Non-switched Voice Grade Line.
Maximum: One per 2701 without Expanded Capability (#3815) ...
two with #3815 and one Expansion Feature (#3855). Limitations:
See "Maximum Configuration" below. Special Requirements: See
Autocall (#1303) and Internal Clock (#4703) for applicability.
tSYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE II (#7697, 7698).
Pro-
vides control of data transfers between S/360 or S/370 and
binary synchronous terminals ... see "Terminal Devices" above.
#7697 - permits operation with high speed digital facilities.
#7698 -- permits operation with voice grade facilities.
Specify: For each adapter one of the ..following is required
#9060 for EBCDIC code, #9061 for ASCII code, or #9062 for
6-bit Transcode. Limitations: #9062 cannot be used to communicate with a System/32 with #2074, a S/360 mdl 20 with #2074,
a S/360 mdl 25 with #4580, a 2703 with #7703 or #7706, an
1800 system with #7550, a 2770 system, a 3735,3741 mdl 2 or
4, 3747, 3780 or 2715 mdl 2 ,,' also see "Maximum
Configuration" below. Neither #9061 nor #9062 can be used to
communicate with a 3671 Shared Terminal Control Unit or a 5231
mdl 2. Maximum: One per 2701 without Expanded Capability
(#3815) ... two with #3815 and one Expansion Feature (#3855)
... for added line capability per adapter, see Dual Communication
Interface (#3463, 3464).
Special Requirements: See Autocall (#1314), Dual Code
(#3455), Station Selection (#7477), Synchronous Clock
(#7692, 7693) and Transparency (#8029) for applicability. Note:
When ordering #7697 or #7698 for field installation in adapter
position No.1, all features in position No. 1 and No. 2 must be
removed ". for field installation in position No.3, all adapter
features in position No. 3 and all features in position No. 4 must
be removed.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7692, 7693).
#7692 - required for a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
(#7698) or Dual Communication Interface (#3464) if at least
one data set attached requires external clocking at 1200 bps.
#7693 - required for the same combinations above if at least
one data set attached requires external clocking at 2400 bps.
Maximum: One per #7697 or #7698. Limitation: If #7692 or
#7693 is required for both lines when using Dual Communication
Interface (#3464), both lines must operate at the same speed.
STATION SELECTION (#7477).
Required when a Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II (#7697, 7698) and/or Dual Code (#3455)
is functioning on a leased communications line as a tributary
(terminal) station. Maximum: One per #7697 or #7698.
tTELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE I (#7860-7862).
Controls data
transfers between S/360 or S/370 and various teletypewriter
terminals ". line control must be identical to AT&T Selective Calling Terminals Type 83B2/83B3 or WU Plan 115A Terminals ... a
62.6 milliampere neutral DC Loop is required ". both types of
terminals cannot be mixed on the same line.
#7860 -- for operation at 45.5 bps with facility A 1 .
#7861 -- for operation at 56.9 bps with facility A2.
#7862 -- for operation at 74.2 bps with facility A3.
Maximum: One per 2701 without Expansion Feature (#3855) ...
two with one #3855 ... three with two #3855s and Expanded
Capability (#3815) ... four with three #3855s and #3815.
Limitations: See "Maximum Configuration" below.
tTELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE "(#7885). Controls data transfers between S/360 or S/370 and Mdl 33/35 TTY Terminals (8
level code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Maximum: One per
2701 without Expansion Feature (#3855) ... two with one #3855
... three with two #3855s and Expanded Capability (#3815) ...
four with three #3855s and #3815. Limitations: See "Maximum
Configuration" below. Special Requirements: See Autocall
(#1302) for applicability.
TRANSPARENCY (#8029). Provides a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#7697, 7698) and/or Dual Code (#3455) with the
ability to transmit and receive 8-bit binary data as well as EBCDIC
or ASCII codes ... or 6-bit binary data as well as 6-bit Transcode.
Transparency for ASCII modifies VRC/LRC checking to VRC/CRC
checking. Limitation: ASCII code transparency is not available on
the 2780 Data Transmission Terminal, 2770 Data Communication
System, 3780 Data Communications Terminal, 3735 Programmable
Buffered Terminal, or a System/3 or System/32. Therefore a
2780, 3735 or System/3 with ASCII code will not operate with a
2701 equipped with #8029 when the # 8029 is assigned to the
ASCII code. To communicate with a 2701 in transparent mode, the
2780 must be equipped with EBCDIC Transparency (#8030), the
2770 with EBCDIC Transparency (#3650), the 3780 with EBCDIC
Transparency (#3601), or the System/3 with Text Transparency
(#7850). The 3735 will operate in EBCDIC with a 2701 with or
without #8029 assigned to EBCDIC. On System/32, ASCII,
EBCDIC and EBCDIC Transparency are standard and one is selected by programming. The 5231 mdl 2 does not support transparent mode. Specify: Either or both of the following -- #9700 for
use with #9060, 9061 or 9062 on Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II (#7697, 7698) ... or #9701 for use with #9070, 9071 or
9072 on Dual Code (#3455). Maximum: One per #7697 or
#7698. Prerequisites: A Synct>ronous Data Adapter Type II
t
ttt
For further information, see M 2700 pages.
Orders for #7695 or, #7696 are on an "as av~ilable .• basis ... customer iriitiated
deferrals or orders for 270ls which include either feature will subject the 2701 orders to
an "as available" basis.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ------------------_.-
M 2701.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
2701 Data Adapter Unit
(cont'd)
(# 7697, 7698) ... when this feature is ordered there are additional
restrictions and limitations to the facility and operation. For details,
see SRL GA27-3004.
SPECIAL FEATURE PRICES: Before ordering, consult individual
feature desriptions and ··Maximum Configuration·· above.
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION
As an aid in determining allowable and maximum adapter configurations, the adapters have been categorized as belonging
to Category I or Category II.
If more than two adapters from Category I, more than one adapter from Category II, or at least one adapter from each of the
two Categories are to be installed, Expanded Capability (#3815)
is required.
Category I
IBM Terminal Adapter Type I, Mod II (#4640)
IBM Terminal Adapter Type II (#4648)
Telegraph Adapter Type I (#7860, 7861, 7862)
Telegraph Adapter Type II (#7885)
Parallel Data Adapter (#5500), with two or less Parallel Data
Extensions (#5505)
Category II
Parallel Data Adapter (# 5500), with more than two Parallel
Data Extensions (#5505)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type I (#7695, 7696)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#7697, 7698)
IBM Terminal Adapter Type III (#4656, 4657)
Maximum Basic 2701 (w/o Expanded Capability, #3815)
Two adapters from Category I ... or one from Category II.
Maximum 2701 w #3815
Four adapters from Category I ... or two from Category II ...
or two from Category I and one from Category II.
Notes: (1] An Expansion Feature (#3855) is required for each
adapter after the first.
[2] Channel Interface, Second (#1860) requires Expanded
Capability (#3815).
[3] Unless otherwise stated, an adapter as listed in the above
Categories includes the adapter and all its associated
features.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
#1302 $ 38 $ 1,325
1303
38
1,325
1314
54
1,675
Channel Interface, 2nd 1860
38
1,325
42
Dual Code
3455
1,090
Dual Commun Interface 3461
21
824
21
824
3462
3463
48
1.505
3464
48
1,505
Expanded Capability
3815
28
1,OOS
Expansion Feature
3855
89
3,060
IBM Line Adapter
134.5 bps
4636
10
434
4637
10
434
600 bps
IBM Terminal Adapter
4640
84
Type I
2,850
Type II
4648
84
2.850
Type 111-1200 bps
140
4,565
4656
Type 111-2400 bps
4657
140
4,565
Internal Clock
49
1,785
4703
Isolation, Control Unit
4700
NC
NC
49
IBM Line Adapter Base 4708
1,360
IBM 1200 BPS Line Adapter
4781
Leased
16
535
21
714
Switched
4782
Auto Call Origination
4791
72
1,970
Parallel Data Adapter
5500
145
4,235
10
260
Parallel Data Timeout
5501
10
260
Parallel Data Extension 5505
2nd Channel Enable/
Disable Switch
6301
NC
NC
1,555
Selectable Sync Clock 7401
50
7477
42
1,090
Station Selection
Synchronous Clock
7692
48
1,505
48
7693
·',50S
tttSync Data Adptr Ty 17695 336 11,730
7696 336 11.730
Sync Data Adptr Ty II
7697
336 11,730
7698
336 11,730
Telegraph Adapter Type I
45.5 bps
7860
84
2,850
7861
84
2,850
56.9 bps
74.2 bps
7862
84
2,850
84
Telegraph Adptr Ty II
7885
2,850
Transparency
81
2,840
8029
Autocall
FIC
$ 3.50
3.50
1.00
1.50
1.00
1.50
1.50
1.00
1.00
NC
9.00
$193
193
166
295
39
116
116
166
166
423
397
2.50
2.50
193
193
9.50
9.50
12.00
12.00
3.00
NC
1.50
270
270
321
321
142
NC
95
3.50
4.00
14.00
14.00
1.00
3.00
NC
NC
135
473
116
270
NC
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
28.50
28.50
28.50
28.50
NC
226
142
91
91
PO
PO
729'
729'
9.50
9.50
9.S0
9.S0
270
270
270
270
54
1.00
• The FIe for conversion from #7697 to #7698 or vice versa is $127
customer initiated
Orders for #7695 or #7696 are on an "as available" basis
deferrals or orders for 270ls which include either feature wJ!\ subje(:t the 2701 orders to
an "as available" basis.
ttt
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=--- =--':' =
----- =- - ---
M 2702
May 79
DP Machines
2702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
[no longer available]
Specify: Communication Cable Order. A Cable Order must be
submitted for each
order where the added feature requires
external cable. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
SRL GC22-7004, for cabling information.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special features are on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
Limitations:
[1] Up to three of the four available terminal controls #4615,
#4616, #7911, #7912 can be installed.
[2] Up to four selective speeds can be specified.
(a) With either #4615 or #7911, one selective speed must
be specified.
(b) With each Add'i Selective Speed (# 1065), another
selective speed other than that specified for #4615 or
#7911 must be specified.
[3] The combined total of terminal controls [maximum, three],
Add'i Selective Speeds (#1065) [maximum, two], 2741 Break
(#8055) [maximum, one], and Type I Terminal Interrupt
(#8200) [maximum, one] cannot exceed four.
[4] #4616 cannot be used when 2741 Break (#8055) is installed.
ADDITIONAL SELECTIVE SPEED (#1065). To add an additional
different selective speed with IBM Terminal Control-Type I
(#4615) or Telegraph Terminal Control-Type I (#7911). Permits
attachment of terminals/facilities of more than one speed to the
same terminal control. Maximum: Two ... one with #4615, the
other with #7911 ... also see "Limitations" above. Specify: With
#4615 -- #9683 for 75 bps, #9684 for 134.5 bps, or #9685 for
600 bps. With #7911 -- #9680 for 45.5 bps, #9681 for 56.9
bps, or #9682 for 74.2 bps. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal ControlType I (#4615) or Telegraph Terminal Control-Type I (#7911) ...
Selective Speed (#9685) requires Speed Extension (#7387).
AUTOCALL ADAPTER (#1290). For attachment to an automatic
calling unit. Maximum: Eight '" with Autocall Expansion (#1311),
sixteen. Prerequisites: Autocall Feature (#1310), and, for each
line, a Data Set Adapter (#3233).
AUTOCALL FEATURE (#1310). Provides automatic dialing capabilities on facilities C1 and C2 for up to eight lines. 'Maximum:
One.
AUTOCALL EXPANSION (#1311). Expands the automatic dialing
Maximum:
One.
capability
to
sixteen
line attachments.
Prerequisite: Autocall Feature (# 131 0).
AUTO POLL (#1319). Operates in conjunction with IBM Terminal
Control-Type I (#4615) and/or IBM Terminal Control-Type II
(#4616) to allow continuation of polling after negative responses
on all of the lines served by those terminal controls without having
program interruptions. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: IBM Terminal
Control-Type I (#4615) or Type II (#4616).
t DATA SET LINE ADAPTER (#3233). To attach an external data
set for operation -- at 110 bps over facility C2 -- at 134.5 bps
over facility C1, C2 or 01 -- at 600 bps over facility D2. Or to
attach a line to a 2711 Line Adapter Unit. Maximum: Fifteen ...
with 31 Line Expansion (#7955), thirth-one.
EXPANSION BASE (#3853).
Required if an IBM Line Adapter
(#4634, 4635) is to be installed. Maximum: One.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4612, 4613). A modem for 2-wire, limited
distance use up to 8 wire-miles. See "Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2" in SRL GA24-3435" for specifications and restrictions.
#4612 -- for use with 1060 or 1070 systems, or 2740/2741
terminals or 5010 operating at 134.5 bps over facility
G2.
#4613 - for use with 1030, 1070 systems, or 2740 mdl 2 terminals or 5010 operating at 600 bps over facility G2.
Maximum; #4612 and #4613 are assigned a weight of three (3)
each, where the total weight of IBM Line Adapters (#4612, 4613
4634 and 4635) may not exceed fifty (50). Limitations: #4612
and #4613 may not be installed if both 1032 Attachment (#7918)
and IBM Line Adapters (#4634 or #4635) are to be installed.
Only fifteen #4612s/4613s may be installed if #7918 is installed.
If maximums are exceeded, investigate possible use of a 2711
Line Adapter Unit. Prerequisites: For either -- IBM Terminal
Control-Type I or II (#4615, 4616) ... For #4613 -- Speed Extension (#7387) ... for more than fifteen #4612s -- 31 Line Expansion (#7955).
t IBM LINE
t
ADAPTER (#4634,4635).
For further information, see M 2700 pages.
•• SRL GA24-3435-2, or subsequent releases.
A modem for local use up to
4.75 wire-miles over facility G1. See "Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type I," in SRL manual GA22-3435" for specifications and
restrictions. Maximum: #4634 and #4635 are assigned a weight
of two (2) each, where the total weight of IBM Line Adapters
(#4612, 4634, 4635) may not exceed fifty (50). Limitations:
#4634 and #4635 may not be installed if both 1032 Attachment
(#7918) and IBM Line Adapters (#4612, 4613) are to be installed. Only twenty-one #4634/4635s may be installed if #7918
is installed. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control-Type I (#4615)
and Expansion Base (#3853) and, for more than fifteen, 31 Line
Expansion (#7955).
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE I (#4615). Controls for attachment of 1 060s/1 070s/27 40s/27 41 s/501 O. Includes vertical and
horizontal redundancy checking for 1060s/ 1070s/501 0 ... the
same checking is provided for 2740s if they are equipped with
Record Checking (#6114). 2740s can be attached when equipped
with any combination of their Record Checking (#6114) and
Station Control (#7479) features, or with neither. Maximum: One
. .. also see "Limitations" above. Specify: Selective Speed -#9683 for 75 bps operation, #9684 for 134.5 bps, or #9685 for
600 bps ... for more than one speed, see Add'i Selective Speed
(# 1065). Prerequisites: Terminal Control Base (#9696) ... see
"Specify". Selective Speed (#9685) also requires Speed Extension (#7387).
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE II (#4616). Controls for attachment of 1031 Input Station mdl As ... includes vertical redundancy
checking. Maximum: One ... also see "Limitations" above.
Limitation: Not available if 2741 Break (#8055) is installed.
Prerequisite: Speed Extension (#7387) ... Terminal Control Base
(#9696) [see "Specify"].
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (4700). [For field installation only
on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2702 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements,
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). Provides partitioning
and the ability to attach the Two Processor Switch (# 8110) to a
S/360 mdl 65 MP which has the Configuration Control Panel
(#1505) installed or to a 2167 Configuration Unit ... for use in a
multiprocessor S/360 mdl 65 or a S/360 mdl 67-2 only.
Increase line speed capability to
SPEED EXTENSION (#7387).
600 bps on all fifteen lines of the basic 2702. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with 31 Line Expansion (#7955). Maximum: One.
t
TELEGRAPH LINE ADAPTER (#7895). For attachment to the A1
facility at 45.5 bps, the A2 facility at 56.9 bps or the A3 facility at
74.2 bps. A 62.5ma neutral DC Loop is required. Maximum:
Fifteen ... with 31 Line Expansion (#7955), thirty-one.
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE I (#7911). Controls for
attachment of AT&T 83B2/83B3 or WU Plan 115A terminals.
Maximum: One ... also see "Limitations" above. Specify: Selective Speed -- #9680 for 45.5 bps operation, #9681 for 56.9 bps,
or #9682 for 74.2 bps ... for more than one speed, see Add'i
Selective Speed (#1065). Automatic Downshift on Space Character -- #9100. When specified, it governs for all lines using #7911
... used with this type terminal control only. Prerequisite: Terminal
Control Base (#9697) ... see "Specify."
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE II (#7912).
Controls
for attachment of TWX stations using 8. level code at 110 bps.
Maximum: One ... also see "Limitations" above. Prerequisite:
Terminal Control Base (#9697) ... see "Specify."
1032 ATTACHMENT (#7918).
To attach a 1032 Digital Time
Unit via a 20' cable supplied with the 1032. Limitations: Must go
on Line Address NO.1 ... unavailable if more than fifteen IBM Line
Adapters (#4634, 4635) are installed, or if both an IBM Line
Adapter (#4612, 4613) and an IBM Line Adapter (#4634, 4635)
are installed. Maximum: One. [Note: Other 1030 terminals may
operate remotely on the same line.] Prerequisites: IBM Terminal
Control-Type II (#4616) and Speed Extension (#7387) ... if not to
be attached to a line previously specified for Line Address No.1,
a Data Set Line Adapter (#3233) or IBM Line Adapter (#4613)
specified for Line Address No. 1 is also required. Digital Time
Read-out Control, 2702 (#3273) is required on the 1032.
TERMINAL CONTROL EXPANSION (#7935).
Required if both
IBM and telegraph terminals are to be attached to the same 2702.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: Terminal Control Base (#9696)
and (#9697) ... see "Specify."
31 LINE EXPANSION (#7955). Increase line attachment capability to thirty-one half-duplex communications lines operating at
speed up to 200 bps. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Speed
Extension (#7387). Maximum: One.
2741 BREAK (#8055).
Allows the IBM Terminal Control-Type I
(#4615) to operate with a 2741 with Receive Interrupt (#4708).
#4615 may be used independently of this feature even though
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------------=-- =- - =--':' =
M 2702 - 2703
May 79
DP Machines
2702 Communication Control (conl'd)
#8055 is installed. limitation: Not available if Terminal ControlType II (#4616) or Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) is installed.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control-Type I
(#4615) with Selective Speed (#9684) .. , If IBM Line Adapters
are used they must be 4-wire version ... if the #461 5 is to control
other, non-interrupt 134.5 bps terminals, two #9684s are required, one associated solely with the interrupt terminals, the other
solely with the non-interrupt terminals.
TWO PROCESSOR SWITCH (#8110).
For switching the 2702
between two S/360 or S/370 multiplexer channels. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: In a S/360 mdl 67-2, Remote Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. If the Two Processor Switch is routed
through the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing S/360 mdl 65 system, Remote Switch Attachment
(#6148) is required.
TYPE I TERMINAL INTERRUPT (#8200). Allows the IBM Terminal Control-Type I (#4615) to operate in a bi-directional interrupt
mode capability with a 2741 with Transmit Interrupt (#7900) and
Receive Interrupt (#4708 on 2741). #4615 may be used with
non-interrupt equipped terminals even though #8200 is installed.
Limitation: Not available if Terminal Control-Type II (#4616) or
2741 Break (#8055) is installed. Maximum: One. Prerequisites:
IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4615) with Selective Speed
(#9684) ... If the #4615 is to communicate with 2741 s with
Transmit Interrupt and any other 134.5 bps terminal, two #9684s
are required, one associated solely with the 27 41 s. and the other
solely with the other terminals.
verify compatibility when #8200 is to be
added to a 2702 with an installed RPQ.
Special Feature Prices:
Before ordering features, consult
"Limitations" and individual feature descriptions above. A completed, revised 2702 Specification Sheet,
and a copy of
the lastest preceeding specification sheet must be submitted with
each
order for soecial features.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Add'i Selective Speed #1065 $ 16 $ 786
786
Autocall Adapter
1290
16
67
Autocall Feature
1310
2,960
1311
16
786
Autocall Expansion
1319
56
2,535
Auto Poll
3233
21
1,065
Data Set Line Adapter
3853
NC
NC
Expansion Base
IBM Line Adapter
4612
134.5 bps
33
1,505
4613
1,505
600 bps
33
IBM Terminal Control 4615
38
1,715
Type I
4616
38
1,715
Type II
IBM Line Adapter 4634
1,175
2-wire
24
4-wire
4635
24
1,175
4700
NC
NC
Isolation, Control Unit
6148
NC
Remote Switch Attach
NC
7387
Speed Extension
84
3,795
1,010
Telegraph Line Adapter 7895
21
Telegraph Terminal Control 1,715
Type I
7911
38
7912
38
1,715
Type II
7918
43
1,750
1032 Attachment
21
Terminal Control Expans 7935
1,065
7955
112
4,965
31 Line Expansion
2741 Break
8055
10
506
Two Processor Switch
8110
84
3,795
Type I Terminal Interrupt 8200
33
1,345
FIC
$1.00
1.00
3.00
1.00
4.00
3.00
NC
$ 39
91
321
166
166
91
NC
1.00
1.00
116
116
1.00
1.00
142
142
1.00
1.00
NC
NC
4.00
4.00
116
116
NC
NC
270
193
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.25
4.00
1.00
3.50
NC
142
142
91
91
321
91
423
236
2703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
[No longer available]
Specify: A Cable Order must be submitted for each
order
where the added ieature requires external cable. See S/370
Installation Manual - Physical Planning. SRL GC22-7004 for cabling information.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special features are on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
• LINE BASE FEATURES
START-STOP BASE TYPE I (#7505). To attach up to 88 halfduplex line appearances (11 Line Set Features) operating up to
165 bps. May be intermixed with Start-Stop Base Type II (#7506)
and/or Synchronous Bases Type 1 A (#7703), Type 1 B (#7704).
or Type 2A (#7706). Maximum: three ... but total half-duplex line
appearances per 2703 cannot exceed 176. Prerequisite: The
second #7505 installed requires Base Expansion (#1440).
START-STOP BASE TYPE II (#7506). To attach up to 24 halfduplex line appearances (3 Line Set Features) operating up to 600
bps. May be intermixed with Slart-Stop Base Type Is (#7505)
and/or Synchronous Bases Type 1 A (#7703), Type 1 B (#7704),
or Type 2A (#7706). Maximum: Three. [Note: A #7506 may be
used to attach features normally attached via #7505, although the
limitations for #750f> remain unchanged.] Prerequisite: The second #7506 installed requires Base Expansion (# 1440).
SYNCHRONOUS ATTACHMENT (#7702). To attach any synchronous lines to a 2703. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Base Expansion (#1440).
SYNCHRONOUS BASE TYPE 1A (#7703), TYPE 1B (#7704),
TYPE 2A (7706).
#7703 -- to attach up to 24 half-duplex lines (6 Synchronous
Line Sets) at bit rates up to 2400 bps using Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715 for EBCDIC or #7716 for ASCII).
#7704 -- to attach up to 16 half-duplex lines (4 Synchronous
Line Sets) at bit rates up to 2400 bps using Synchronous Terminal Control (#7717 for 6-bit Transcode), either by itself, or in
combination with #7715 or #7716.
#7706 -- to attach up to 12 half-duplex lines (3 Synchronous
line Sets) at bit rates up to 4800 bps using Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715 for EBCDIC, or #7716 for ASCII).
May be intermixed with Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505) and/or
Type II (#7506). Maximum: Two. Limitation: No more than two
Synchronous Terminal Controls can be associated with one Synchronous Base. Prerequisite: Synchronous Attachment (#7702).
BASE EXPANSION (#1440). Required to attach a Synchronous
Attachment (#7702), or more than one Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506). Maximum: One.
• TERMINAL CONTROL FEATURES
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL BASE (#4619).
To attach an IBM
Terminal Control Type I (#4696) and/or Type II (#4697).
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: A Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505)
or Type II (#7506).
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE I (#4696).
To communicate
with 1060s, 1070s, 2?40, 2741 s, and 5010. Includes vertical and
longitudinal checking for 1060/1070/5010 ... the same checking
is provided for 2740s if they are equipped with Record Checking
(#6114). [Note: 2740s may be attached when equipped with any
combination of #6114 and Slation Control (#7479), or with neither.] Maximum: One. Prerequisite: IBM Terminal Control Base
(#4619).
2741 BREAK (#8055).
Allows the IBM Terminal Control Type I
(#4696) to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive Interrupt
(#4708). #4696 may be used independently of this feature even
though #8055 is installed. Note: All lines on any Line Set Expander to which this feature is applied must operate with this feature.
Maximum: One. limitation: Not available if Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) is installed. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control
Type i (#4696) ... If IBM Line Adapters are used, they must be
the 4-wire version.
Allows IBM Terminal
TYPE I TERMINAL INTERRUPT (#8200).
Control Type I (~4696) to operate in a bi··directional interrupt
mode capability with a 2741 equipped with Transmit Interrupt
(#7900) and Receive Interrupt (#4708 on 2741). #4696 may be
used with non-interrupt equipped terminals even though #8200 is
installed. Maximum: One. Limitation: Not available if 2741 Break
(#8055) is installed. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control Type I
(#4696) ... if IBM Line Adapters are used they mllst be the 4-wire
version.
verify
compatibility when #8200 is to be added to a 2703 with an installed or on-order RPQ.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
'------- - --.:..:::::
--- -==--';" ==
M 2703.1
May 79
DP Machines
2703 Transmission Control (conI' d)
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE II (#4697).
To communicate
with 1030 systems. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: IBM Terminal
Control Base (#4619).
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL BASE (#7905). To attach a
Telegraph Terminal Control, Type I (#7911) and/or Type II
(#7912). Maximum: One.
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE I (#7911). To communicate with AT&T 83B2/83B3 or WU 115A terminals. Maximum:
One. Specify: #9129 for downshift on space, if desired.
Prerequisite: Telegraph Terminal Control Base (#7905).
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE II (#7912). To communicate with TWX Model 33/35 terminals. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Telegraph Terminal Control Base (#7905).
TELEGRAPH ATTACHMENT (#7876). To attach Telegraph Line
Sets (#7897) ... required when one or more 83B2/83B3, 115A,
2740 mdl 2 lines are attached via Telegraph Line Sets (#7897) ...
NOT required when 83B2/83B3 and 115A lines are attached via
2712 Remote Multiplexer mdl 2s. Maximum: One.
SYNCHRONOUS TERMINAL CONTROL (#7715, 7716, 7717).
To communicate with synchronous terminals.
#7715 -- for terminals communicating in EBCDIC code.
#7717 -- for terminals communicating in 6-bit Transcode.
#7716 -- for terminals communicating in non-transparent ASCII
code.
#7716/9100 -- for terminals communicating in transparent ASCII
code.
Note: Transparency (#9100) modifies the VRC/LRC check to a
CRC check, making the #7716/9100 a fourth synchronous terminal control type. Transparency capability is included in the #7715
and #7717 Synchronous Terminal Controls. When transparency is
used with any of these codes, there are additional restrictions and
limitations which are covered in SRL GA27-3004. Maximum: One
of each ... three if no IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) or
Type II (#4697), Telegraph Terminal Control Type I (#7911) or
Type II (#7912) is installed ... otherwise, only two. Prerequisites:
For #7715 or #7716 -- Synchronous Base Type 1A (#7703),
Type 1 B (#7704) or Type 2A (#7706). For #7717 -- Synchronous Base Type 1B (#7704). Station Selection (#7473) may also
be required ... see below.
STATION SELECTION (#7473).
Required when one or more
lines are assigned to a Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715,
7716, 7717) which is functioning on a leased communications line
as a tributary (terminal) station. Maximum: One per #7715, 7716,
7717. Prerequisite: Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715, 7716,
7717).
• LINE SET FEATURES -- All lines in a given line set or line set expander
must operate at the same speed (unless clocking is supplied by
the data set) over the same type communications facilities with
terminals employing the same type of line control; with either
business machine or data set clocking, but not a combination.
t DATA LINE SET (#32<'5). For attachment of up to eight line
appearances of asynchronous terminals (1030, 1060, 1070, 2740,
2741, 5010 and TWX Model 33/35 type) over facilities C1, C2,
Dl or D2 ... or for attachment of up to eight line appearances to a
2711 Line Adapter Unit. Maximum: Twelve. Prerequisites: StartStop Base Type I (#7505) or Type II (#7506) ... Line Speed
Option (#4877, 4878 or 4879) as appropriate ... either IBM Terminal Control Base (#4619), or for TWX, Telegraph Terminal
Control Base (#7905) ... one of the following: IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) or Type II (#4697), or for TWX, Telegraph
Terminal Control Type II (#7912).
t DATA LINE SET EXPANDER (#3206). Permits attachment of up
to eight add'i lines to a Data Line Set (#3205). Maximum: One
per #3205 .. , ten per 2703. Prerequisite: One #3205 per
#3206.
t IBM LINE SET 1A (#4686). Eight limited distance IBM line adapters for 2-wire local use up to 4.75 wire-miles each over facility
G1. See Limited Distance Line Adapter Type I in SRL
GA24-3435tt for specifications and restrictions. To attach up to
eight half-duplex line appearances accommodating 2740/2741
terminals. Limitation: Cannot be installed if any IBM Line Set 2s
(#4688) are installed. Maximum: Total number of #4686s and
IBM Line Adapter 1 Bs (#4687) cannot exceed twelve.
Prerequisites: Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505) or Type II (#7506)
... Line Speed Option (#4878) for 134.5 bps ... IBM Terminal
Control Base (#4619) ... IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) ...
for more than nine #4686s, an add'i #7505 or #7506 and its
prerequisites.
t IBM LINE SET 1 B (#4687). Eight limited distance line adapters
for 4-wire local use (up to 4.75 wire-miles) over facility G1. See
Limited Distance Line Adapter Type I in SRL GA24-3435tt for
specifications and restrictions. To attach up to eight line appearan-
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
ces accommodating 2740/2741 terminals. Limitation: Cannot be
installed if any IBM Line Set 2s (#4688) are installed. Maximum:
Total number of #4687s and IBM Line Set 1 As (#4686) installed
cannot exceed twelve. Prerequisites: Same as for #4686.
tt IBM LINE SET 2 (#4688). Eight limited distance line adapters for
2-wire local use (up to 8 wire-miles each) over facility G2. See
Limited Distance Line Adapter Type 2 in SRL GA24-3435tt for
specifications and restrictions. To attach up to eight half-duplex
line
appearances
accommodating
1030/1060/1070/
2740/2741/5010 systems and terminals. Limitation: Cannot be
installed if any IBM Line Set 1 As (#4686) or 1 Bs (#4687) are
installed. Maximum: Four. Prerequisites: Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506) ... Line Speed Option (#4878 for
134.5 bps, or #4879 for 600 bps) ... IBM terminal Control Base
(#4619) ... IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) or Type II
(#4697).
t TELEGRAPH LINE SET (#7897). For attachment of up to eight
line appearances via facilities A 1, A2 or A3 ... interfaces AT&T
83B2/83B3 and WU Plan 115A terminals, or at 75 bps, 1050 or
2740 mdl 2 terminals. Maximum: Twelve. Caution: When operating TWO 2703s with #7897s in series on the same telegraph
current loop, RPQ must be applied to one
2703 and RPQ
must be applied to the other
2703. These RPQs are NOT required for a single 2703 operating
two telegraph line appearances on the same telegraph current
loop. Prerequisites: Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505) or Type II
(#7506) ... Line Speed Option (#4873, 4874, 4875 or 4876) as
appropriate ... Telegraph Terminal Control Base (#7905) ... Telegraph Terminal Control Type I (#7911) ... Telegraph Attachment
(#7876).
t TELEGRAPH LINE SET EXPANDER (#7898). For attachment of
up to eight add'i lines to a Telegraph Line Set (#7897).
Maximum: One #7898 per #7897 ... ten per 2703. Prerequisite:
A Telegraph Line Set (#7897) for each #7898.
t SYNCHRONOUS LINE SET (#7710). For attachment of up to four
synchronous line appearances via facilities C4, C5, C6, 03, 04,
D4SB, D5 or 05SB ... accommodates 2701 sand 2703s with
S/360/370s, System/3s with #2074, S/360 mdl 20s with
#2074, S/360 mdl 25s with #4580 and #7551 or #7552,
11305 with #7690, 2715 mdl 25, 27705, 18005 with #7550,
27805 and 37805. Maximum: Six per Synchronous Base Type 1 A
(#7703) ... four per Type 1 B (#7704) ... three per Type 2A
(#7706) ... twelve per 2703. Limitation: See Synchronous Clock
(#7705). Prerequisites: Base Expansion (#1440) ... Synchronous
Attachment (#7702) ... Synchronous Base Type 1 A (#7703),
Type 1 B (#7704) or Type 2A (#7706) ... Synchronous Terminal
Control (#7715, 7716 or 7717). Synchronous Clock (#7705) may
be required.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705).
Required for attachment of
facilities C4, D3 ... each #7705 permits attachment of up to four
such facilities. Limitation: The maximum number of Synchronous
Line Sets (#7710) is reduced when any #7705s are installed ...
see "General Limitation" below. Maximum: One per each #7710
... three per Synchronous Base Type 1 A (#7703), Type 1 B
(#7704) or Type 2A (#"1706) ... six per 2703. Prerequisites:
Synchronous Line Set (#7710) ... Synchronous Line Speed Option
(#7711).
'
• SPEED OPTIONS
ASYNCHRONOUS DEVICES
LINE SPEED OPTION (#4873-4879).
Defines the line speed
available for asynchronous features on the 2703. Maximum:
Seven, one of each of the following:
#4873 -- 45.5 bps for common carrier half-duplex
#4874 -- 56.9 bps
telegraph service
#4875 -- 74.2 bps
#4876 -- 75 bps
for 2740 mdl 2s connected via
telegraph channels
#4877 -- 11 0 bps
for TWX
#4878 -- 134.5 bps for 1060 systems, 2740/2741
terminals, 1070 systems or 5010 not
requiring 600 bps
#4879 -- 600 bps
for 1030 systems, and 2740 mdl 2s,
1070 systems or 5010 requiring 600 bps .
SYNCHRONOUS DEVICES
SYNCHRONOUS LINE SPEED OPTION (#7711).
Defines the
1200 bps synchronous line speed for Synchronous Clock(s)
(#7705). Note: This option may not be used with any Synchronous Line Set on which a data set clocked line appears.
Maximum: One per 2703
.AUTOCALLFEATURES
AUTOCALL (#1340 for first, #1341 for second).
tt SRL GA24·3435-2, or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Each provides
-------- - - ------:E:=-==';"5:
DP Machines
2703 Transmission Control (cont'd)
up to eight line appearances of a given Data Line Set (#3205) or
Data Line Set Expander (#3206), or two Synchronous Line Sets
(#7710), with automatic calling capability. For attachment to
.
facilities C4, C5 or C6.
When using #1340 or #1341 with a Synchronous
Line Set, a first or second autocall feature may be associated with
two Synchronous Line Sets (eight binary synchronous communications lines) if both #7710s are on the same Synchronous Base,
have consecutive addresses, and the first begins on a base address boundary which is a multiple of eight. Maximum: One of
each. Prerequisites: One Data Line Set (#3205) or Data Line Set
Expander (#3206) for each #1340 or #1341 ... or one or two
Synchronous Line Sets (#7710) for each #1340 or #1341 ...
#1341 requires #1340.
.TWOPROCESSORATTACHMENTFEATURE
TWO PROCESSOR SWITCH (#8110). For switching the 2703
channel interface between two S/360 or S/370 multiplexer channels. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Emergency Power-Off Control
on attached processing units.
.ISOLATION FEATURE
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that) To turn power on or off on the 2703 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
in all cases there are
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
compatible EC level requirements,
GENERAL LIMITATION
Combinations of the following features may not exceed a
total assigned weight of nine (9) per Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506) and six (6) per Synchronous
Base Type 1 A (#7703), Type 1B (#7704) or Type 2A
(#7706). Due to this limitation, it may be necessary to order
three Start-Stop Base Type Is (#7505) with some unusual
configurations.
Feature
Assigned Weight
Data Line Set (#3205)
Data Line Set Expander (#3206)
Telegraph Line Set (#7897)
Telegraph Line Set Expander (#7898)
IBM Line Set 1A (#4686)
IBM Line Set 1B (#4687)
IBM Line Set 2 (#4688)
Synchronous Line Set (#7710)
. Synchronous Clock (#7705)
1
o
1
o
1
1
2
1
1
• Special Feature Prices: Before ordering, consult individual feature
description and "General Limitation" above. A completed, revised
2703 Specification Sheet,·
(or later), and a copy of
the latest preceding specification sheet must be submitted with
each
order for special features.
M 2703.2
May 79
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
.LINE BASE FEATURES
Start-Stop Base Type I #7505 $ 81 $ 3,795 $ 4.50 $ 805
Start-Stop Base Type II 7506
81
3,795
4.50
805
Synchronous Attachment 7702 524 21,710 10.00 1,110
Synch Base Type 1 A
7703 156
6,530
4.50
789
Synch Base Type 1 B
7705 156
6,530
5.00
789
Synch Base Type 2A
7706 288 13,000
4.50
239
Base Expansion
1440
81
4.00
3,795
318
.TERMINAL CONTROL FEATURES
IBM Term Control Base 4619
IBM Term Control Type I 4696
2741 Break
8055
Ty~e I Terminal Interrupt 8200
IB Term Cntrl Type II
4697
Tele Term Cntrl Base
7905
Tele Term Cntrl Type I
7911
Tele Term Cntrl Type II 7912
Telegraph Attachment
7876
Synchronous Terminal Control
EBCDIC code
7715
ASCII code
7716
6-Bit Transcode
7717
Station Selection
7473
21
37
10
65
37
21
37
37
48
1,065
1,715
506
2,615
1,715
1,065
1,715
1,715
2,270
1.25
1.00
1.00
NC
1.00
1.25
1.00
1.00
4.50
348
87
44
159
80
278
95
87
111
104
104
104
52
4,345
4,345
4,345
1,680
3.00
3.00
3.00
.50
420
474**
420
106
81
59
101
101
156
3,510
2,475
4,275
4,275
7,280
3,940
2,905
17,410
2,605
12.00
8.50
4.00
4.00
5.50
16.50
13.50
4.50
2.50
589
143
425
441
640
455
148
445
280
533
533
533
533
533
533
533
674
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
.50
34
.LINE SET FEATURES
Data Line Set
Data Line Set Expander
IBM Line Set lA
IBM Line Set lB
IBM Line Set 2
Telegraph Line Set
Tele Line Set Expander
Synchronous Line Set
Synchronous Clock
3205
3206
4686
4687
4688
7897
7898
7710
7705
90
70
421
63
.SPEED OPTIONS
Line Speed Option (asynchronous)
45.5 bps
4873
56.9 bps
4874
74.2 bps
4875
75 bps
4876
110 bps
4877
134.5 bps
4878
600 bps
4879
Synch Line Speed Option 7711
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
34
34
34
34
34
34
30
.AUTOCALL FEATURES
Autocall -- first
Autocall - second
1340
1341
129
6,080
129
6,080
.TWO PROCESSOR ATTACHMENT FEATURE
7.00
7.00
511
425
Two Processor Switch
8110
81
3,795
3.50
830
4700
NC
NC
NC
NC
.ISOLATION FEATURE
Isolation, Control Unit
•• Add $189 when Full Transparency (#9100) is specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --=
---- =-----=
--':' =
M 2711
May 79
DP Machines
2711 LINE ADAPTER
UNIT
Purpose: Unit for attachment to 2025 Processing unit(s) equipped
with an Integrated Communications Attachment, 3135, 3135-3,
3138 Processing Unit(s) equipped with an Integrated Communications Adapter and/or 2702/2703 Transmission Control(s), and/or
3704/3705 Communications Controller. It provides for the addition
of IBM Line Adapters for a 2025 or 3135, 3135-3, 3138 using an
ICA feature and attachment of additional IBM Line Adapters for
2702s/2703s/3704s/3705s. The IBM Line Adapters serve as
modems for use on appropriate communications facilities, permitting communications with similiarly equipped IBM terminals.
Highlights: A modular unit ... provides for installation Qf up to
thirty-two IBM Line Adapters. See "Special Features" below.
These
adapters
are
for
use
by
the
attached
2702/2703/3704/3705(s). They provide for modulating and
demodulating signals over communications facilities in a manner
similiar to common carrier data sets that would otherwise be required for those functions. Thus, when IBM Line Adapters are
used, common carrier data sets are not required.
Three types of IBM Line Adapters can be installed to provide for:
limited distance (8 wire-miles) communications ... communications
over privately owned or leased common carrier facilities, and / or ...
the equivalent of up to four independent low speed channels from
a single voice grade channel (each low speed channel may be
operated pOint-to-point or multipoint).
The basic 2711 accommodates up to four IBM Line Adapters, in
any combination ... for more than four, Line Adapter Modules
(#4794) are required. Each #4794 permits attachment of up to
four additional IBM Line Adapters, in any combination. A maximum
of seven #4794s can be installed, for a total of thirty-two IBM
Line Adapters per 2711 ... see "Special Features" below.
Communications Facilities: The 2711, when equipped with appropriate IBM Line Adapter(s), can attach to common carrier leased
private line telephone channels or privately owned communications
facilities conforming to the specifications described in SRL GA243435' under: Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2 ... Leased
Line Adapter, or ... Shared Line Adapter.
Attachment to Communications Lines: Attachment to communications facilities conforming to the specifications above is via the
appropriate IBM Line Adapter(s) for the type(s) of communications
service being used ... see "Special Features" below.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
PREREQUISITES:
Attachment to 2025 -- attachment is made via the Integrated
Communications Attachment (#4580) on a per line basis to EIA
Start/Stop Data Adapters ... see 2025. NOTE: In a S/360 mdl
25, attachment can also be made via a 2702 or 2703 ... see
below.
Attachment to 3135, 3135-3, 3138 -- attachment is made via the
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on a per line basis,
to a Terminal Adapter Type I Model I (#9721-9728) ... see
3135, 3135-3, 3138. LIMITATION: Only IBM Line Adapter
(#4647) is supported ... see "Special Features". NOTE: In a
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, attachment can also be made via a
2702 or 2703 ... see below.
Attachment to 2702 -- attachment is made on a per line basis to
the Data Set Line Adapter (#3233) on the 2702 ... see 2702.
Attachment to 2703 -- attachment is made on a per line basis
for up to eight lines to each Data Line Set (#3205) or Data Line
Set Expander (#3206) ... see 2703.
Attachment to 3704/3705 -- attachment is made on a per line
basis to Line Set Type lA or lD (#4711 or #4714).
any combination, can be installed '" operation with 1030 or 2741
[with Interrupt (#4708)] is limited to the 4-wire versions of the
leased line adapter (#4647) or shared line adapters (#4691,
4692, 4693 or 4694).
SPECIAL FEATURES
t
IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4790). A modem for 2-wire limited distance use (up to 8 wire-miles). Line turnaround time is approximately 12 ms ... see Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2 in SRL
GA24-3435' for specifications and restrictions. For operation with
similiarly
equipped
1030/1050/1060/1070
systems
and
2740/2741 terminals at speeds up to 600 bps. Limitations: See
below. Prerequisite: An available position in the basic unit or in a
Line Adapter Module (#4794).
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire).
A
modem for leased common carrier or privately owned voice grade
facilities. Line turnaround time is approximately 200 ms for
#4639 anrl 20 ms for #4647, both plus line propagation time ...
see Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435' for specifications
and restrictions. For operation with similiarly equipped 1030/1060
systems and 2740/2741 terminals at speeds up to 600 bps, as
applicable. There is no limitation on the length of the communications line that can be served, if it conforms to the specifications in
SRL GA24-3435'. Limitations: See above. Prerequisite: An
available position in the basic unit or in a Line Adapter Module
(#4794).
t
IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire). A modem for shared use of a leased common carr ier or
privately owned voice grade facility. Line turnaround time is approximately 200 ms for #4641-4644 and 20 ms for #4691-4694,
both plus line propagation time ... see Shared Line Adapter in SRL
GA24-3435' for specifications and restrictions. For operation with
similiarly equipped 1060 systems and 2740/2741 terminals at
speeds up to 134.5 bps. When used, a single leased telephone
line can provide up to four independent 134.5 bps "subchannels"
... the equivalent of up to four low-speed lines from a single voice
grade channel. Each "subchannel" is obtained through use of one
of the four shared line adapters. Thus, to operate four
"subchannels" on a single telephone channel, four line adapters
(#4641 thru #4644) for a 2-wire channel, or (#4691 thru
#4694) for a 4-wire channel are required. Limitations: See above.
Prerequisite: Each line adapter requires an available position in
the basic unit or in a Line Adapter Module (#4794). Ordering:
The terminal with which each "subchannel" on the 2711 is to
communicate must be equipped with the same shared line adapter,
i.e., the same feature #. Line adapters for use with each different
leased telephone channel must be ordered in sequence, as follows:
For
For
For
For
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
1
2
3
4
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Line Assignments: Must be specified on 2711 Line Assignment
Form (120-1468).
[4] A Cable Order must be submitted for: (a) Each new machine
order ... (b) Each
order where the added feature requires
external cable. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for cabling information.
Prices:
Mdl
2711
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 145
$ 6,610
$24.00
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Limitations: Up to thirty-two of the IBM Line Adapters below, in
4-wire
#4641
4642"
4643"
4644' ,
#4691
469,2' ,
4693"
4694' ,
Subchannel 1 is prerequisite for installation of higher numbered subchannels, unless Shared Line Adapter 4/1 Terminator (#6350) is ordered.
LINE ADAPTER MODULE (#4794). For attachment of up to four
additional IBM Line Adapters ... any of those above, in any combination. Maximum: Seven.
SHARED LINE ADAPTER 4/1 TERMINATOR (#6350). A pluggable device for physically attaching up to four different 2-wire IBM
shared line adapters (#4641-4644) or up to four different 4-wire
IBM shared line adapters (#4691-4694) to a single 404B Telephone Co. line terminating jack ... see Shared Line Adapter installation practices in SRL GA24-3435'. Prerequisite: The appropriate IBM Line Adapters (#4641-4644) or (#4691-4694).
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
2-wire
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
IBM Line Adapter
Limited Distance
Leased Line, 2-wire
Leased Line, 4-wire
Shared Line, 2-wire
subchannel 1
subchannel 2
subchannel 3
subchannel 4
Shared Line, 4-wire
subchannel 1
subchannel 2
subchannel 3
subchannel 4
Line Adapter Module
Shared Line Adapter
4/1 Terminator
#4790 $ 10
4639
10
4647
10
$
506
448
448
$ .50
$ 39
1.00
1.00
39
39
4641
4642
4643
4644
21
21
21
21
899
899
899
899
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
39
39
39
39
4691
4692
4693
4694
4794
21
21
21
21
10
899
899
899
899
538
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
2.00
39
39
39
39
28
6350
5
168
.50
19
'" SRL GA24-3435-2, or subsequent revisions.
t
For further information on [BM Line Adapters, see M 2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
------- ----===":'
-- -------=
M 2715
May 79
DP Machines
2715 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
[no longer available]
The following specifications can be changed in the field.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz, locking plug):
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Model 2] For local attachment of a 2740 Commurllcanons Terminal mdl 1 ." 2740 must be located within 40 wire-feet of the
2715. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: the 2740 must be equipped
with 2715 Attachment (#9715), Dial Up (#3255), and Print Element (#9592) ... no other special features may be installed on the
2740. No data set is required.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705).
[Model 2 only] An internal
clock for use with data sets which do not provide clocks. See M
2700 pages for facilities that require this feature. Maximum: One.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
TWO PROCESSOR SWITCH (#8110). [Model 1 only] To switch
the 2715 mdl 1 between two S/360 or S/370 multiplexer channels. Maximum: One.
[4] When Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874,
3875) is ordered, #9486 must be specified for 2715s having
serial no. 10071 or below.
MODEMS -- one IBM Modem can be attached to a 2715 mdl 2
only. Two IBM Modems can be attached with Dual Communications Interface (#3460) installed.
[5] If any Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874,
3875) features are used in the 2790 system, #9548 (oscillator
change) must be specified on each 2791 mdl 1 or 2 or 2793 in
the system. See feature description under 2791 or 2793 for
prerequisites.
PRICES:
2715
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1
2
$1,740
1,740
$67,240
67,240
$221
221
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenence: B
Per Call: 2
Purchase Option: 50%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online/Offline)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
The fol/owing special features are on an "as available" basis for
field instal/ation.
Modem
3872 mdl 1
3874
Speed (bps)
2400
4800
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization
and special features, see M 2700, 3872 and 3874 pages.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Dual Commun Interface #3460 $ 37 $ 1,470
Expanded Capability
3801 325
12,580
Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive
3874
13
520
Send
14
520
3875
4750
16
Line Transfer Switch
650
Line Trans Sw - 3rd Unit 4751
16
650
Local 2740 Adapter
4850 102
3,995
Synchronous Clock
7705
42
1,675
Two Processor Switch
8110
91
3,570
DUAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (#3460). [Model 2 only]
Provides a switched interface which allows the BSC adapter to be
manually switched between two types of communications lines for
back-up purposes. Maximum: One. Limitation: This feature does
not provide the capability to operate two lines simultaneously.
EXPANDED CAPABILITY (#3801). Provides the system with an
additional 16K of control storage for a system total of 32K. Required for a maximum device configuration on a 2715, for control
of the External Alarm Contacts (#3690) feature on attached
2791/2793 Area Stations, 2798 Guidance Display Units, or 2792
Remote Communications Controllers, and for message routing
independent of host CPU intervention. Maximum: One.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, RECEIVE (#3874). Provides
for operation with a 2791 or 2793 Area Station equipped with
Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000
wire-feet away. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for
cable
specifications.
Maximum:
Four.
Limitations:
See
"Limitations" for Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875)
below. Prerequisites: Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875)
on the "up-line" 2791/2793. Also see "Specify" [4] and [5].
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, SEND (#3875). Provides for
operation with a 2791/2793 Area Station equipped with Extended
Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet
away. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for cable specifications. Maximum: Four. Limitations: [1] The use of two pairs of
Extended Distance Repeaters, Receive/Send (#3874, 3875) in
tandem is not recommended. If the Area Station having both
Receive and Send Repeater features should fail, the entire segment would be inactive. [2] Maximum of eight pairs per transmission line attached to the 2715. Maximum of two pairs may be
used on a secondary loop attached to a 2792. [31 In the 2715,
each of the four segments may include (a) EDR, Send (#3875)
only, or, (b) EDR, Send (#3875) and EDR, Receive (#3874);
EDR, Receive (#3874) only is not available. Prerequisites: Extended Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874) on the "down-line"
2791/2793. Also see "Specify" [4] and [5].
To manually switch the
LINE TRANSFER SWITCH (#4750).
2790 transmission lines between two adjacent 2715s acting as
back-up for each other. All terminals must be defined identically in
the user tables of both 2715s affected. Limitation: When switching from one system to another, the total number of terminals
allowed cannot exceed the maximum number allowable on one
2715. Maximum: One. Note: This feature is required on only one
of the two 2715s.
LINE TRANSFER SWITCH - THIRD UNIT (#4751). To use a third
2715 as back-up for either of two other 2715s. All terminals must
be defined identically in the user tables of both 2715s affected.
Limitation: When switching from one system to another, the total
number of terminals allowed cannot exceed the maximum number
allowable on one 2715. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: The two
primary 2715s must each be equipped with Line Transfer Switch
(#4750) ... the third (back-up) 2715 requires only #4751.
LOCAL 2740 ADAPTER (#4850).
[Model 1 only ... standard on
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
$ .50
12.50
$283
319
2.50
2.50
.50
.50
4.00
49
49
114
114
332
211
241
.50
8.50
._-------- --------- --= ==
':' =
M 2740.1
Mav 79
DP Machines
2740 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL
Purpose: A Selectric@ typewriter terminal (printer/keyboard) for
transmission of data or text to or from another terminal or data
processing system.
NOTE: For possible use with Series/1, see GSD
Modell
Model 2
manual.
Keyboard/printer terminal for transmission to or from
another 2740 mdl 1, or to or from a S/360 mdl 22
thru 85, 195, or any S/370 or 4300 Processor ...
see "Communications Facilities" and "Prerequisites"
below. Also attaches directly to a 2715 Transmission
Control for keyboard input or printed output ... see
"Prerequisites" below.
Bufferd keyboard/printer terminal for transmission to
or from a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, or any S/370
or 4300 Processor ... see "Communication Facilities"
and "Prerequisites" below.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: The unit's Selectric typewriter provides the optimum in
operator /machine relationship. Special features available permit
tailoring of terminals to the requirements of a specific work station.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 30 thru 195 (except mdl 44,
67 in TSS Mode, 85 or 91), or any S/370 Processor - via a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller. NOTE: See 3704 and
3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming pages for
possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
Commulficatiolf with a 4300 Processor -- via a 2701, 3704 or 3705 to all
4300 Processors and via the Communications Adapter feature on the
4331. See 2701, 3704, 3705, 4331 and 4341 pages for details and
prerequisites.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC 'Index G320-1621
or specific system
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug -#9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V. If a 2740 is to be installed on a raised floor, specify
Moisture Proof Plug -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[NOTE: Consideration of voltage must be made independp.ntly
of CPU voltage and should be specified only after checking
available voltage at terminal location.)
System control keys and indicator lights, located conveniently
alongside the keyboard, make it a compact console-like unit.
When not used for data transmission, the typewriter may be used
for office typing. [NOTE: There are basic design differences in the
2740 which will result in a different printing output than the Selectric typewriter. Customers with applications requiring critical printing must be directed to evaluate 2740 outout capability in light of
their own needs.
[2) Printing Element: One element is supplied .. see "Type
Catalog," page TC 21, etc., for available PTTC/BCD,
PTTC/EBCD and standard OPD Selectric elements available,
feature #s, and prices of additional elements. The element
specified determines the keyboard arrangement. [NOTE: The
byte structure of the standard OPD Selectric character set
differs from that for PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character sets.
The 2740 mdl 1 or 2 is not Type I programming supported on
S/360 with an~ standard OPD Selectric elements. Standard
OPD Selectric elements are not available for the 2740 mdl 2.)
Model 1 -- code and system capability permit transmission to or
from other 2740 mdl 1 s, or to or from a suitably equipped
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor ... see System Application. under
"Specify" below.
[3) Character Spacing: #9104 for 10 characters/inch, or #9105
for 12 characters/inch. [NOTE: #9105 is not recommended
unless a 12-pitch element is specified ... intermixing of character spacing or. terminals in anyone system should be avoided
... character spacing cannot be changed in the field.)
Model 2 - code and system application permit transmission to or
from a suitably equipped S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. The
basic unit has a 120-position magnetic core buffer. Data entered
from the keyboard can be stored and visually verified before
transmission to the S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. Data from
the S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor is received direclly by the
printer, except when the unit is equipped with Buffer Receive
(#1499) ... see "Special Features." This model also includes the
functions provided by Station Control (#7479) on the model 1.
Communication Facilities: Either model operates in half duplex
mode over the following facilities at the speeds indicated. For
information concerning the facilities, see the M 2700 pages.
Modell
At 134.5 bps via facility C1, C2, 01, G1 or G2.
Model 2
At 75 bps via facility A4.
At 134.5 bps via facility 01, G1 or G2.
At 600 bps via facility 02 or G2.
Note: For attachment to facility A4, the channels must be capable of 75 bps operation, use non-code sensitive regenerators
and a 9-bit character code, and be terminated in a 62.5 ma
neutral DC loop of the terminal.
Also see Data Set Attachment under "Specify" for required facility
specification code. On appropriate lines, IBM Line Adapters may
be used in lieu of data sets .,. see "Special Features." IBM Line
Adapters and line sets cannot be mixed on the same circuit.
PREREQUISITES:
Attachment to a 2715 Transmission Control Unit (mdl 1 only)-requires a 2715 mdl 2, or a 2715 mdl 1 equipped with a Local
2740 Adapter (#4850) ... 2715 Attachment (#9715) is also
required on the 2740 mdl 1 itself. See" Specify" below.
Communication with another 2740 (mdl 1 only) -- System Application (#9701) is required on each 2740 ... in addition, the same
Data Attachment is required on each 2740. See "Specify" below.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 25 -- via the Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580) with approriate features on the
2025 ... see " Special Features" under 2025. NOTE: Communication with a S/360 !Tidl 25 may also be via a 2701, 2702 or
2703.
Communication with a S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on the 3115,
3125,3135, 3135-3, 3138. Also, a 2701, 2702, 2703, 3704 or
3705 can be used ... see below.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195 or any
S/370 Processor - via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or 2702/2703
Transmission Control equipped with appropriate features ... see
2701, 2702, 2703.
[4) Line Feeding: #9435 for 6 lines/inch,
lines/inch. If a Pin Feed Platen is desired
dard friction feed platen, see "Special
#9435 or #9436 must be specified even
Platen is ordered.
or #9436 for 8
in lieu of the stanFeatures" below.
though a Pin Feed
[5) Data Set Attachment: Unless an IBM Line Adapter, Telegraph
Line Attachment (#7807), or 2715 Attachment (#9715) is
specified, one of the following must be specified, depending
upon the facility to be used.
#9114 -- [mdl 1 only] for facility C1 or C2. PREREQUISITE:
Dial Up (#3255) ... see" Special Features."
#9115, #9116 or #9120 for facility D1M. See this facility in
the M 2700 pages for applicability of these codes.
#9121 -- for facility 02. PREREQUISITE: Speed Base - 600
BPS (#7106) ... see "Special Features."
See M 2700 pages for information on these communication
facilities.
[6] System Application (mdl 1 only): #9700 for terminal-tomultiplexer system (except 2715), or #9701 for terminal-toterminal.
[7) 2715 Attachment (mdl 1 only): #9715 ... required for attachment to a 2715. PREREQUISITE: Dial Up (#3255) and Print
Element (#9592). Cable for the 2740 must be ordered on the
2715 Cable Order Form. LIMITATION: When attached to a
2715, Dial Up (#3255) is the only special feature that can be
installed on the 2740.
PRICES:
2740
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
$ 105
162
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase
MMMC
$3,400
5,210
$39.00
39.00
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
• For Either Model
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4634 for 2-wire, #4635 for 4-wire). A
modem for local use up to 4.75 wire-miles over facility G1. See
Limited Distance Line Adapter. Type 1 in SRL GA24-3435* * for
specifications and restrictions. Note: Operation with a 2712 Remote Multiplexer requires #4635.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire).
A
modem for leased or privately owned voice grade use (facility 01
or 02). See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435* * for speci.. or equivalent.
*. SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- -- -- ----==-=:E';'=
M 2740.2
May 79
DP Machines
2740 Communications Terminal (conI' d)
fications and restrictions. limitation: For point-to-point terminal-tomultiplexer operation, #4647 cannot be used on the 2740 m<:ll 1
when the multiplexer is operated in continuous carrier mode.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4641-4644 for 2-wlre, #4691-4694 for
4-wire). A modem for shared use of a type 3002 Private Line
Service' or privately owned voice grade facility (facility 01). See
Shared Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435" for specifications, use
and restrictions. When used, a single voice grade line can provide
up to four independent "subchannels" ... the equivalent of up to
four independent low-speed lines from a single voice grade line.
'Each "subchannel" operates on a separate frequency and simultaneous data flow is possible on all four "subchannels", either on a
point-to-point or multipoint basis.
2-wlre
#4641 -- for subchannel 1 #4643 -- for subchannel 3
#4642 - for subchannel 2 #4644 -- for subchannel 4
4-wlre
#4691 - for subchannel 1 #4693 - for subchannel 3
#4692 - for subchannel 2 #4694 -- for subchannel 4
Maximum: One per 2740. Prerequisite: All units expected to
communicate directly with each other must be on the same
"subchannel", i.e., must be equipped with the same shared line
adapter (same feature #) ... it is recommended that that if no
more than two "subchannels" are required on a line facility, that
#4641 and #4642, or #4691 and #4692 be used. Limitation:
For point-to-point terminal-to-multiplexer operation, #4691-#4694
cannot be used on the 2740 mdl 1 when the multiplexer is operated in continuous carrier mode.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4790). A modem for 2-wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles at speeds up to 600 bps over facility
G2. See Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2B, in SRL GA243435" for specifications and restrictions.
PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509). [Purchase only) For Plant Installation - specify #9509 ... maximum one, in lieu of standard friction
feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages for available options, feature #s to be specified and price. For Field
Installation -- to order add'i platens or order one for field installation,
' limitation: Cannot be used if Document Insertion (#3401 or #3402) is installed.
RECORD CHECKING (#6114).
Ilcters (parity) checking and
checking.
Provides a combination of charblock (longitudinal redundancy)
• For Model 1 Only
AUTOMATIC EOB (#1313). Provides an automatic EOB (End Of
Block) code following the carriage return code upon depression of
the carriage return key. Prerequisite: Record Checking (#6114).
DIAL UP (#3255). Required when a dial data set is used, i.e.,
when Data Set Attachment (#9114) is specified. Limitation:
Cannot be used with Station Control (#7479).
STATION CONTROL (#7479). Gives the terminals the ability to
react to a poll or address from a multiplexer. The polling scheme
employs a "character + space" poll or address. The addressing
sequence is identified by the "start of address" (comma) character. Limitation: Cannot be used with Dial Up (#3255) or 2760
Attachment (#8301). [Note: The functions provided by this feature
on a mdl 1 are standard on the mdl 2.)
Pin Feed Platen (#9509) cannot be used if this feature is installed.
#3401 -- accepts a ledger card 6" wide (maximum), with a
minus 1/32" tolerance, and length of at least 5". With a
1O-pitch printing element, 25 characters may be printed before
printing on the ledger begins ... with a 12-pitch element, 30
characters. The 26th character (10-pitch) and 31 st (12-pitch)
are not printable on the ledger card. The 27th (10-pitch) and
32nd (12-pitch) will be the first .printable character and the
85th (10-pitch) and 102nd (12-pitch) last printable character
on the ledger card.
#3402 -- accepts a ledger card 7-3/8" wide (maximum), with
minus 1/32" tolerance, and a length of at least 5". With a
1 O-pitch printing element, 55 characters may be printed before
printing on the ledger begins ... with a 12-pitch element, 66
characters. The 56th character (10-pitch) and 67th (12-pitch)
are not printable on the ledger card. The 57th (10-pitch) and
68th (12-pitch) will be the first printable character and the
129th (10-pitch) and 155th (12-pitch) the last printable character on the ledger card.
EDIT (#3600).
Helps in error correction of keyboard-entered
data. Provides two additional keys, Line Return and Line Type, for
operator use in making corrections.
Permits customer designation of
HEADER CONTROL (#4510).
the first 28 positions of the buffer (in groups of 4 positions) for
repetitive header information. Under switch control, keyed data
may be entered into the header area and played back for verification. Header is transmitted each time the buffer is read out of the
line, The header size (4, 8, 12, 16. 20. 24 or 28 positions) is
specified by the customer at installation time.
SPEED BASE - 600 BPS (#7106). To transmit and receive data
over common carrier leased or privately owned facilities at 600
bps ... transmission character rate is 66.7 characters/second.
Note: Buffer print will be at normal 14.8 cps rate. Limitations:
Cannot be used when 2740 is connected to a 2712 Remote Multiplexer ... cannot be used with Data Set Attachments (#9115,
#9116 or #9120) or with IBM Line Adapters (#4634, #4635.
#4641-4644 or #4691-4694). Prerequisite: Buffer Receive
(#1499).
SPLIT FRICTION FEED PLATEN (#9600). [Plant installation only)
One 2-section platen with the split located to provide a 5-1/2"
printing line on the left and 7-1/2" printing line on the right can
be purchased in lieu of the standard friction feed platen ... with
this platen and Document Insertion (#3401, 3402). two separate
forms, in addition to printing on a ledger card. can be inserted and
individually controlled. For purchase price, see "Split Friction Feed
Platen" on M 10000 pages. Maximum: One.
additonal platens,
'Prerequisites:
Document Insertion (#3401 or #3402) and Line Feeding (#9435)
(6 lines/inch).
tTELEGRAPH LINE ATTACHMENT (#7607). For operation with
75 baud common carrier I,eased private line telegraph service. or
privately owned equivalent, only. With this feature, transmission
rate is 8.33 characters/second. [Note: If Buffer Receive (#1499)
is also installed, buffer print will be at normal 14.8 cps.)
Limitation: Carinot be used when 2740 is connected to a 2712
Remote Multiplexer.
TRANSMIT CONTROL (#8028). Gives the terminal the ability to
respond to a 2-character control code sequence from a multiplexer
and to switch from a standby condition to a transmit condition.
Limitation: Cannot be used with a 2760 Attachment (#8301).
Prerequisite: Dial Up (#3255).
2760 ATTACHMENT (#8301). To attach a 2760 Optical Image
Unit. A PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD Data 1 or Data 2 type font
printing element must be specified with this feature. See ''Type
Catalog", page 23, for feature #s. Limitations: Can be field
installed only on units serial No. 15000 or above ... cannot be
installed with Station Control (#7479) or Transmit Control
(#8028). Prerequisite: Record Checking (#6114).
• For Model 2 Only
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1495, 1496). To increase the capacity
of the basic 1 20-position magnetic core buffer. # 1495 -- for
positions 121 to 248 ... #1496 -- for positions 249 to 440.
Prerequisite: #1496 requires #1495.
BUFFER RECEIVE (#1499).
Permits data to enter the buffer
from the communication line in lieu of going directly to the printer.
Incoming data is stored until an EOT is received ... terminal then
automatically goes to a receive buffer print state and prints out the
contents of the buffer.
DOCUMENT INSERTION (#3401, 3402). [Plant installation only)
For insertion of single part ledger cards in front of the typewriter
platen without using the platen knobs. See SRL GA24-3403 for
details on portions of ledger cards which cannot be used for
printing. Manual positioning is required for each new print line.
Includes controls and lights necessary for a Split Friction Feed
Platen (#9600). Maximum: One, #3401 or #3402. Limitation:
•• SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- -- --- -=-- =--=--':' =
M 2740 - 2741
May 79
DP Machines
2740 Communications Terminal
Special Feature Prices:
(cont'd)
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
• For Either Model
IBM Line Adapter (Limited Distance, Type 1)
2-wire
#4634 $ 3,00 $ 116
4-wire
4635
3.00
116
IBM Line Adapter (Leased Line)
2-wire
4639
10.00
347
4-wire
4647
10.00
347
IBM Line Adapter
(Shared Line) - 2-wire
4641
21.00
subchannel 1
694
21.00
subchannel 2
4642
694
subchannel 3
4643
694
21.00
4644
694
21.00
subchannel 4
(Shared Line) - 4-wire
subchannel 1
4691
21.00
694
694
subchannel 2
4692
21.00
subchannel 3
4693
21.00
694
subchannel 4
4694
21.00
694
IBM Line Adapter (limited Distance,
Type 2B)
4790
10.00
390
Record Checking
6114
17.00
645
NC
NC
$ 57
57
$1.50
1.50
96
96
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
96
96
96
96
2.00
2.00
2.00
2,00
96
96
96
96
1,00
NC
29
32
1313
3255
7479
8028
8301
3.50
3.00
16,00
5.00
10,00
139
116
585
195
390
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
29
40
37
48
35
1495
1496
1499
10.00
16,00
5.00
360
537
178
1.00
1.00
NC
29
29
21
3401
3402
3600
4510
7106
7807
6.00
6,00
10.00
5.00
10.00
3.00
217
217
360
178
360
112
2.00
2,00
NC
NC
NC
1.50
PO
PO
23
21
5
49
• For Model 2 Only
Buffer Expansion
positions 121-248
positions 249-440
Buffer Receive
Document Insertion
6" wide cards
7-3/8" wide cards
Edit
Header Control
Speed Base - 600 BPS
Telegraph Line Attach
COMMUNICATIONS
TERMINAL
Purpose: A Selectric·) typewriter terminal to satisfy special system applications that require one-terminal-per-line operation.
• For Model 1 Only
Automatic EOB
Dial Up
Station Control
Transmit Control
2760 Attachment
2741
Roll Paper Holder for 2740 or 2741
An accesory that provides for mounting rolls of paper or continuous forms. Includes
a tear bar and forms guide. Available for field installation only.
For details and prices, see M 10000 (Accessories) pages.
Highlights:
Looks
like
and
includes
the
optimum
operator /machine relationship of the standard Selectric typewriter.
The only terminal controls located in the keyboard area are the
"On/Off" switch and "Attention" key. Mounted on a stand similiar
to that of the 2740. The typewriter may be used for office typing
when not used for data transmission. [NOTE: There are basic
design differences in the 2741 which will result in different printing
output than the Selectric typewriter. Customers with applications
requiring critical printing must be directed to evaluate 2741 output
capability in light of their own needs.
Code and systems compatibility provide for transmission to and
from a suitably equipped S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, t 95, any S/370
Processor except the 3115, or any 4300 Processor. The 2741 can
attach to a 3790 system via a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit. The
2741 can attach to an 8100 Information System via the communications capability of
the
8101,
8130 or 8140.
See
"Prerequisites" below.
Communications Facilities: The 2741 operates in half-duplex
mode over the following facilities. For information concerning these
facilities, see M 2700 pages.
At 134.5 bps via facilities Cl, C2, 01, Gl or G2.
Also see Data Set Attachment under "Specify" for required facility
specification code. On appropriate lines, IBM Line Adapters may
be used in lieu of data sets ... see "Special Features." IBM Line
Adapters and data sets cannot be mixed on the same circuit.
PREREQUISITES:
Communication with a S/360 mdl 25 -- via the Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580) with appropriate features 01' the
2025. Communication with the S/360 mdl 25 may also be via a
2701, 2702 or 2703.
Communication with a S /370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138 -via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on the 3115,
3125,3135,3135-3 or 3138. Also a 2701,2702,2703,3704
or 3705 can be used ... see below.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 22 thru' 85, 195, or any
S/370 Processor -- via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, or 2702/2703
Transmission Control equipped with approriate features ... see
2701, 2702, 2703.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 30 thru 195 (except mdl 44,
67 in TSS Mode, 85 or 91), or any S/370 Processor -- via a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller. NOTE: See the 3704
and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for
attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming
pages for possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
Communication ",ith a 4300 Processor -- via a 2701, 3704 or 3705 to all
4300 Processors and via the Communications Adapter on the 4331. See
27t)J, 3704, 3705, 4331 and 4341 pages/or details and prerequisites.
Communication with a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit -- via an IBM
Leased Line Adapter (#5400) or EIA Interface (#3701) on the
3792.
Communication with an 8100 Information System -- via Communications Adapter with Clock - BSC/SS (#1603) and EIA
Interface (#3701) in the 8101,8130 or 8140.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: [1] Voltage tt (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
-- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V. If a 2741 is to be installed on a raised floor, specify
Moisture Proof Plug -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[NOTE: Consideration of voltage must be made independently
of CPU voltage and should be specified only after checking
available voltage at terminal location.]
[2] Printing Element: One element is supplied ... see "Type
Catalog" page TC 21
etc. for available PTTC/BCD,
PTTC/EBCD and standard OPD Selectric elements available,
feature #s, and prices of additional elements. The element
specified determines the keyboard arrangement. [NOTE: The
* or equivalent.
•• SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information. see M 2700 pages.
tt Only these specify codes and special features are supported by the 3790
system.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ------ --==-==';'=
M 2741
May 79
DP Machines
2741 Communications Terminal (cont'd)
byte structure of the standard OPD Selectric character set
differs from that for PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character sets.]
[3] Character Spacing: #9104tt for 10 characters/inch, or #9105
for 12 characters/inch. [NOTE: #9105 is not recommended
unless a 1 2-pitch element is specified ... intermixing of character spacing on terminals in anyone system should be avoided
... character spacing cannot be changed in the field.]
[4] Line Feeding: #9435tt for 6 lines/inch, or #9436 for 8
lines/inch. If a Pin Feed Platen is desired in lieu of the standard friction feed platen, see "Special Features" below.
#9435 or #9436 must be specified even though a Pin Feed
Platen is ordered.
[5] Data Set Attachmenttt: Unless an IBM Line Adapter is specified, one of the following #s must be specified, depending
upon the facility to be used.
#9114 -- for facility C1 or C2. PREREQUISITE: Dial Up
(#3255) ... see "Special Features."
#9115, #9116 or #9120 -- for facility D1M.
See the D1 M facility in the M 2700 pages for the applicability of these codes.
See M 2700 pages for information on these communication
facilities.
PRICES:
Mdl
2741
1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 105
$ 2,380
$42.00
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
tt DIAL UP (#3255). Required when a dial data set is used, I.e.,
when Data Set Attachment (#9114) is specified.
Either
INTERRUPT, RECEIVE (#4708)tt, TRANSMIT (#7900).
can be used with any of the communication facilities listed above.
Receive Interrupt (#4708) -- used to interrupt transmission
from the processor at the operator's convenience.
Transmit Interrupt (#7900) -- allows the processor to interrupt
transmission from the 2741.
Limitation: Cannot be used when 2741 is connected to a 2701, or
to a S/360 mdl 25 via the Integrated Communications Attachment
(#4580). Prerequisites: For #4708, either 2741 Break (#8055)
or Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) on a 2702 or 2703 or a
S/370 mdl 125 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) or a
S/370 mdl 135 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) with
Write Interrupt (#9745-9752) ". For #7900, Type I Terminal
Interrupt (#8200) on a 2702 or 2703 or a S/370 mdl 125 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) or a S/370 mdl 135
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) with Read Interrupt
(#9737-9744) ". if an IBM Line Adapter is used, it must be a
4-wire version. Both #4708 and #7900 are supported by the 4331
Communications Adapter without additional prerequisites.
tt PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509).
[Purchase only] For Plant Installation -- specify #9509 ... maximum, one, in lieu of standard friction
feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages for available options, feature #s to be specified and prices. For Field
Installation -- to order add'i platens or to order one for field installation,
tt PRINT INHIBIT (#5501). Allows the processing unit to inhibit the
2741 from printing transmitted or received data.
tt TYPAMATIC KEYS (#8341). Allows repeat action when key
level is depressed to a lower level... operations included are
Hyphen/Underscore/Space and Backspace.
Special Feature Prices:
Dial Up
#3255
4708
Receive Interrupt
IBM Line Adapter
Limited Distance, Type 1
4634
2-wire
4-wire
4635
Leased Line
2-wire
4639
4-wire
4647
Shared Line, 2-wire
subchannel 1
4641
4642
subchannel 2
subchannel 3
4643
subchannel 4
4644
Shared Line, 4-wire
4691
subchannel 1
subchannel 2
4692
subchannel 3
4693
subchannel 4
4694
Limited Distance, Type 24790
Print Inhibit
5501
Transmit Interrupt
7900
Typamatic Keys
8341
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
$ 3.00 $ 116
2.50
99
NC
NC
$ 34
27
3.00
3.00
116
116
NC
NC
57
57
10.00
10.00
347
347
$1.50
1.50
96
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
694
694
694
694
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
96
96
96
96
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
10.00
10.00
8.00
5.00
694
694
694
694
390
303
242
195
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
NC
NC
NC
96
96
96
96
96
29
87
132
89
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4634 for 2-wire, #4635 for 4-wire). A
modem for local use up to 4.75 wire-miles over facility G1. See
Limited Distance Adapter, Type 1 in SRL GA24-3435, , for specifications and restrictions. Note: Operation with a 2712 Remote
Multiplexer requires #4635.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER tt (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire). A
modem for leased or privately owned voice grade use (facility 01).
See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435" for specifications
and restrictions.
.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wlre).
A modem for shared use of a type 3002 Private Line
Service' or privately owned voice grade facility (facility 01). See
Shared Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435" for specifications, use
and restrictions. When used, a single voice grade line can provide
up to four independent "subchannels" .. , the equivalent of up to
four independent low-speed lines from a single voice grade line.
Each "subchannel" operates on a separate frequency and simultaneous data flow is possible on all four "subchannels."
2-wire
4-wire
#4641
#4642
#4691
#4692
--
for
for
for
for
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
1
2
1
2
#4643
#4644
#4693
#4694
-----
for
for
for
for
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
3
4
3
4
Maximum: One per 2741. Prerequisites: The multiplexer with
which the 2741 is to communicate must be equipped with the
same "subchannel", I.e., the same feature # ... it is recommended that if no more than two "subchannels" are required on a line
facility, that #4641 and #4642, or #4691 and #4692, be used.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4790). A modem for 2-wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles over facility G2. See Limited Distance
Line Adapter, Type 2 in SRL GA24-3435, , for specifications and
restrictions.
• or equivalent.
•• SRL GA24-343S-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
tt Only these specify codes and special features are supported by the 3790
system.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
,-------- - - - --
---- ---- - =--==
':' =
M 2791
May 79
DP Machines
2791
AREA STATION
Purpose: An input/output station and local device data controller
for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Model 1
Model 2
For card, identification badge and 12-key manual
entry ... available adapters provide for attachment of
up to three 1035 Badge Readers, up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units with a 2715, or
System/7, up to twelve 2798 Guidance Display Units
(2715 and System/7 only), and an OEM digital device. See "Special Features" and "2791/2793
Limitations" under 2793.
For card, identification badge, and 12-key manual
entry only.
Model Changes: Model 2 can be changed in the field to model 1,
but not vice versa.
Prerequisites: The 2790 system controller can be a 2715 Transmission Control Unit, or a properly equipped System/7.
With 2715
With System/7
See 2715 for details.
See 2790 Control (#8195) under 5012 or
5013.
Highlights: A solid state, industrially packaged unit. It features
data entry via pre-punched cards, identification badges, and 12key manual entry ... display of manually entered data for verification before transmission ... step-by-step display of operator instructions ... display of data in response to an inquiry ... time-ofday display... designed for attachment to a unique transmission
line capable of handling large volumes of short messages from
many stations.
Card Reader -- standard or Port-A-Punch@ prepunched 80-column
cards can be individually inserted and removed manually. An
upper left corner cut card, C1, is required. M-3, M-4 and M-5
scores can be used. Numbers , letters and certain special character card codes are read ... see SRL GA27 -3015. Blank card
columns are not recognized and are automatically skipped.
Badge Reader -- reads identification badges (22-column card size)
prepunched in IBM code with a maximum of ten digits. The
badges which are punched on a 13 Badge Punch, are individually
inserted and removed manually. Badges with or without a pocket
clip can be used. They can be purchased from vendors or produced by commercially available equipment. See SRL GA21-9028
for badge speCifications. Note: A badge gauge is shipped at no
charge with each badge punch ... see 13.
Manual Entry -- ten numeric and two special keys provide for
entry of variable numeric source data. As each key is depressed,
the number or special character is displayed to the operator for
verification. Up to six positions are displayed for anyone data
field. After verification, an enter key is depressed to transmit the
data to the system controller. The number of fields that may be
entered is specified by the system controller program.
Digital Display -- when not being used for display of manual entry,
time-of-day is displayed. Digital display may also be used for
display of six digits of data in response to an inquiry.
Operator Guidance - step-by-step instructions are provided to the
operator for each transaction. The thirty-one guidance indicators
are designed to permit the user's own terminology. The indicators
are activated under program control of the system controller.
Transaction Selection -- nine transaction and one release keys
are provided. The transactions may be expanded by subsequent
card, badge, or manual entry to provide a greater number of
transactions.
Monitor Key -- used where a supervisor's approval is required
before a record can be transmitted ... one key is supplied.
Indicators -- advise the operator that: [1] The station is online and
ready for use ... [2] The station is in process of transmitting a
record ... [3] The record is not valid and the "Repeat Clear"
button should be depressed ... [4] A card is in the card reader.
Control Keys -- the "Enter" key is used to transmit the manually
keyed data ... the "Clear" key is used to reset the station to
normal ready status ... the "Next Guidance" key is used to advance the operator guidance when required for unusual transactions.
Attachment Features -- on the mdl 1, available features permit
attachment of up to three 1035 Badge Readers, up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination), or up to
twelve 2798 Guidance Display Units and up to eight
2795/2796/2797s (2715 and System/7 only), and one OEM
digital device such as a scale, meter, or counter. See "Special
Features."
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" following 2793.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Cable t6 Junction Box: #9030, if required. If initial machine
order includes #3330, #7990, #8030 or #8295, or any combination of these features, #9030 must be specified. Any subsequent
to add any of these features must also specify
#9030. Note: Do not specify #9030 on mechanical replace
orders ... See Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for requirement. Note: If #9030 is specified, provide complete person's
name and address for shipment ... cables will be shipped automatically,
prior to scheduled delivery.
[4] For initial 2791 machine order having Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874, 3875), specify #9547 and
#9548 ... also specify #9548 (oscillator) for each 2791 ordered
for the 2790 system.
[5] If a 2792 Remote Communications Controller is used in the
2790 system, specify #9790 for each 2791 mdl 1 or 2 attached
to the 2792 mdl 2 on the second "loop."
PRICES:
2791
Mdl
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$205
151
$7,140
5,880
MMMC
$56.50
56.50
Purchase Option: 40% Maintenance: C
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
DIGITAL DEVICE READ-IN (#3330). [Mdl 1 only] For attachment
of an OEM digital device such as a scale, meter, or counter via a
customer-supplied junction box and cable ... reads up to ten
decimal digits. Electrical resistance of OEM device and cable is
limited to 10 ohms ... OEM device must comply with the 2791
interface ... see "Specify" [3] above. Maximum: One.
EXTERNAL ALARM CONTACTS (#3690). [Mdl 1 only] Provides
a pair of dry contacts which can be momentarily (35 milliseconds
nominal) closed to' allow operation of a customer's attached external alarm device (bell, whistle, light, etc.). Momentary closure of
the contacts is activated by receipt of an EBCDIC "Bell" character. The contacts are capable of switching 115 V AC or DC at no
more than 0.5 amperes. Maximum: One. Note: Includes a 4-foot,
2-wire cable for attachment of a customer-provided alarm or junction box. Limitation: Not available when System/? is the system
controller. Prerequisites: 1053 Attachment (#8050) on the 2791
and Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715 controller.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, RECEIVE (#3874). Provides
for operation with another 2791 or 2793 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See
Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: See Limitations for Extended Distance Repeater, Send below. Field installable on units shipped
prior to October 2, 1971 which also include B/M 5992893 and all
units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable only... when #3874 is added anywhere in the 2790
system an MES, #9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered for
each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite: Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) on the "up-line" 2791, 2793
or 2715.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, SEN.D (#3875). Provides for
operation with another 2791 or 2793 Area Station or 2715 Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] The use of two pairs of Extended
Distance Repeaters, Receive/Send (#3874, 3875) in tandem is
not recommended. If the Area Station having both Receive and
Send Repeater should fail, the entire segment would be inactive ...
[2] When an System/7 is the 2790 System controller, these repeaters cannot be used between the system controller and the first
Area Station or between the last Area Station and the system
controller. However, they can be used between all other Area
Stations attached to the system within the maximum limit ... [3]
Maximum of eight pairs per 2715, or System/? ... [4] Maximum of
two pairs of EDRs may be used on a secondary loop attached to a
2792. Field install able on units shipped prior to October 2, 1971
which also include B/M 5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable only... when
#3875 is added anywhere in the 2790 system, an MES, #9548
(oscillator change) must be ordered for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite: Extended Distance Repeater,
Re.ceive (#3874) on the "down-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- ------= = =':' =
M 2791-2792
May 79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
2791 Area Station
2798 ATTACHMENT, BASIC (#7990). [Mdl 1 only) For attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum: One.
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" under 2793. Field
installable on units shipped prior to October 2, 1971 which also
include B/M 5992893 and all units shipped after October 1,
1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable only. Prerequisite: Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715 ... see "Specify" [3)
above.
2798 ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#7991), [Mdl 1 only) Each
provides for attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display
Maximum:
Two.
Limitations:
See
"2791/2793
Units.
Limitations" under 2793. Prerequisite: 2798 Attachment, Basic
(#7990).
1035 ATTACHMENT (#8030). [Mdl 1 only) For attachment of up
to three 1035 Badge Readers via customer-supplied junction
boxes and cable ... see "Specify" [3) above. Maximum cable
length is 1,000 feet. Maximum: One.
more, or if the communication facilities round-trip delay is expected to approach 80 milliseconds, the customer should be advised
to consult the common carrier to determine the expected communication facilities delay.
The 2792 mdl 1 attaches to the 2715 or System/7 via the 2-wire
high speed communications line, in the "loop," similar to the
2791/2793 Area Stations.
2791/2793 Area Stations attach to the 2792 mdl 2 via a 2-wire
customer-provided high-speed communication line.
Distances between Area Stations and the 2792 depend upon the
characteristics of the line used (e.g., up to 1,000 wire-feet for
#22 AWG). The Extended Distance Repeater feature cannot be
installed on the 2792s. However, they can be installed in the
attached Area Stations. See Physical Planning Manual, GA273017.
2795/2796/2797 ATTACHMENT, BASIC (#8295). [Mdl 1 only)
For attachment of up to eight 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units
(any combination) ... see "Specify" [3) above. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites: [1) A 2715 Transmission Control Unit with Expanded Capability (#3801) or a System/7 with a 2790 Control (#8195
on 5012 or 5013) for the 2790 System Controller ... [2) Specify
#9790 on each 2791 Area Station mdl 1 or mdl 2 on the secondary "loop". See "Specify" under 2791.
2795/2796/2797 ATTACHMENT, ADD'L (#8296). Each provides
for attachment of up to eight additional 2795/2796/2797 Data
Entry Units (any combination) ... see "Specify" [3) above.
Maximum: Three. Limitations: See . '2791/2793 Limitations"
under 2793. Prerequisite: 2795/2796/2797 Attachment, Basic
(#8295).
IBM FE Service: To facilitate servicing of the 2790 terminals on
the secondary "loop" by the IBM CE, a minimum of one 1053
Printer is required proximate to each 2792 mdl 2. When System/7
is the 2790 System controller, IBM service requires the resident
On-Line Diagnostics program ... see System/7 Programming.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Digital Device Read-in
#3330 $ 10 $ 434
434
External Alarm Contacts
3690
10
Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive
3874
13
520
520
Send
3875
14
2798 Attachment
Basic
7990
56 2,075
Additional
7991
21
832
1035 Attachment
8030
16
650
2795/2796/2797 Attachment,
Basic
8295
28 1,045
Additional
8296
16
650
FIC
$ 1.00
1.00
$ 72
3.00
3.00
96
96
14.00
4.50
2.00
188
109
2.50
1.50
99
51
189
72
Maximum Configuration: Each 2792 mdl 1 is set in the field to
respond to its own address plus the address(es) of 1, 3, 7 or 15
of the Area Stations remotely attached or reserved for future
attachment. The maximum number of Area Stations that can be
locally attached to the 2790 System controller is reduced by the
set number of addresses. The number of 2791/2792 mdl
1 /2793s is limited by the number of addresses available to the
system controller; i.e., maximum of 100 addresses per 2715.
See 2790 Configurator, SRL GA27-3021. Maximum eight pairs of
2792 mdl 1sand 2s per 2715. Maximum of two pairs of Extended
Distance Repeater (EDR) features may be used on a secondary
"loop." When System/7 is the controller, the maximum number of
2792 mdl 1 s is two per "loop" or four per system.
Limitations: [1) The system configuration and the delays encountered in the common carrier facilities can affect the waiting time at
the remote 2790 terminals served by the 2792s. Graphs and
formulas to assist the user in determining thruput will be found in
SRL GA27-3015. Common carrier communication facilities roundtrip delay cannot exceed 80 milliseconds.
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems" and M 2700
pages.
2792 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
Purpose: For 2790 Data Communication System ... controls exchange of data between the 2790 System Controller and remote
2790 terminals via common carrier leased communication facilities.
Model 1
Model 2
Attaches to the 2790 System Controller (via the
"loop") and directly to the local termination of the
common carrier facilities.
Attaches directly to the remote termination of the
common carrier facilities and up to fifteen
2791/2793 Area Stations (via a secondary "loop").
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Specify: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES:
2792
Mdl
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$308
308
$10,710
10,710
$82.50
82.50
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Both a Model 1 and Model 2, operating point-to-point with one
another on the common carrier facilities are required to attach
each group of up to fifteen Area Stations.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: For 2790 Systems in which 2790 terminals are inaccessible to the System Controller via in-house wiring, viz., across
a thoroughfare, across the city, or in another city; the 2792s
enable exchange of data via common carrier leased communication facilities.
Terminal Devices: Each pair of 2792s establishes a secondary
communications loop at the remote location to which can be attached up to fifteen 2791/2793 Area Stations with their associated
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units, 2798 Guidance Display Units,
Production Monitoring Pulse Count (#5550), and other related
features ... see 2715 "Maximum Configurations."
Communication Facilities: Between the 2792 mdl 1 and 2792
mdl 2, the communications facilities must be a leased four-wire
duplex channel, Type 3002 with C1 conditioning (or better), or
privately owned equivalent. No data sets (modems) are required.
If the communication facilities round-trip delays exceed 80 milliseconds, the 2792 cannot be used. If the communications route
between the 2792s, mdl 1 and mdl 2, approximates 1,000 miles or
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------= =- - =----":' =
----- -
M 2793
May 79
DP Machines
2793 AREA STATION
Purpose: A local device data controller for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Prerequisites: The 2790 system controller can be a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or a properly equipped System/7.
With 2715
With System/1
See 2715 for details.
For details see 2790 Control (#8195)
under 5012.
Highlights: A solid state, industrially packaged unit. It controls
data transfer between locally attached I/O units and the system
controller. It is designed for attachment to a unique transmission
line capable of handling large volumes of short messages from
many stations.
The basic unit provides for attachment of up to eight
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination) ... available
special features provide for attachment of up to twenty-four additional 2795/2796/2797s, and up to sixteen 2798 Guidance Display Units (2715 and System/7 only). See "Special Features."
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" below.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Specify; [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Cable and Junction Box: #9030, if required. A four foot cable
and junction box from the 2793 for initial installation of
2795s/2796s/2797s, or #7990, or #5550 and #5552 ... see
Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for requirement. Note: If
#9030 is specified, provide complete person's name and address for shipment ... cables will be shipped automatically,
. prior to scheduled delivery.
[4] For initial 2793 machine order having Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874, 3875), specify #9547 and
#9548. Also specify #9548 (oscillator) for each 2793 ordered
for the 2790 system.
PRICES:
Mdl
2793
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$135
$5,255
$ 19
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXTERNAL ALARM CONTACTS (#3690). Provides a pair of dry
contacts which can be momentarily (35 milliseconds nominal)
closed to allow operation of a customer's attached external alarm
device (bell, whistle, light, etc.). Momentary closure of the contacts is activated by receipt of an EBCDIC "Bell" character. The
contacts are capable of switching 115 V AC or DC at not more
than 0.5 amperes. Maximum: One. Note: Includes a 4-foot,
2-wire cable for attachment of a customer-provided alarm or junction box. Limitation: External Alarm not available when System/7
is the system controller. Prerequisite: Expanded Capability
(#3801) on the 2715.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, RECEIVE (#3874). Provides
for operation with another 2793 or 2791 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See
Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: See Limitations for Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) below. Field installable on units
shipped prior to October 2, 1971 which also include 8/M
5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. The B/M is
plant installable only ... when #3874 is added anywhere in the
2790 system, an
#9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered
for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. PrerequiSite:
Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) on the "up-line"
2791, 2793 or 2715.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, SEND (#3875). Provides for
operation with another 2793 or 2791 Area Station or 2715 Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] The use of two pairs of EDRs,
Receive or Send in tandem is not recommended. If the Area
Station having both features should fail, the entire segment would
be inactive. [2] When a System/7 is the 2790 controller, these
repeaters cannot be used between the system controller and the
first Area Station, or between the last Area Station and the system
controller. However, they can be used between all other Area
Stations attached to the system within the maximum limit. [3]
Maximum of eight pairs per 2715, or System/7. [4] Maximum of
two pairs of EDRs may be used on a secondary loop attached to a
2792. Field installable on units shipped prior to October 2, 1971
which also include B/M 5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/M 5992893 is plant install able only... when
#3875 is added anywhere in the 2790 system, an
#9548
(oscillator change) must be ordered for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite: Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive (#3874) on the "down-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
PULSE COUNTERS, BASIC (#5550). Provide necessary control
circuits, an FE diagnostic counter for servicing all cO\lnters on the
Area Station, and the first 7 pulse counters for customer attachment to his production pulsing points. Each counter may be used
as an ACCUMULATOR or as a PRE-SET accumulator. Decimal
counts to 29,999 may be handled at Area Station level before
requiring overflow service from the system controller. Each counter has a unique address. Each counter has Overflow Interrupt and
Counter Advance Test indicators. Maximum: One. Additional
counters are provided via #5551 and #5552 below, to a maximum of 63 counters per Area Station. Note: In the event of a
power failure, all pulse counters so affected will reset to zero with
a resultant loss of count. There are commercially available backup
systems via which customers can elect to ensure power continuity,
if they so choose. Customers should be advised of the exposure
and assurance measures available to meet it. Also see Visual
Read-out (#8710) below. Specify: #9030 for shipment of a
four-foot cable and junction box for attachment of the counters.
See "Specify" [3] above. Limitations: Cannot be used if 2798
Attachment, Basic (#7990) is used. Prerequisites: [11 Customer's
production count pulsing contacts must meet the interface requirements for the pulse counter sensing circuits. They are designed to
operate with contacts specified as follows: 16 milliseconds minimum closed time; 16 milliseconds open time (equivalent to approximately 30 pulses per second); maximum contact bounce of 4
milliseconds on open or close; maximum contact resistance of 10
ohms ... [2] Wiring (single pair required) from the Area Station
pulse counter points to the customer's production pulse counting
contacts must be provided, installed and maintained by the customer. The series wire resistance of the wire from the contact to
the Area Station must be less than 40 ohms. This requirement can
be met by several types of wiring with maximum distance shown
such as: Twisted Pair, AWG #22 -- 1,000' ... AWG #18 -3,000' ... AWG #14 -- 7,500' ... [3] Expanded Capability (#3801)
on the 2715.
PULSE COUNTERS, ADDITIONAL (#5551). Provides a group of 8
counters. See #5550 above for description of counter functions.
Maximum: 6 groups. Prerequisites: #5550 for the first three
additional groups (total 31 counters); #5552 for additional groups
4,5 and 6.
PULSE COUNTER EXPANSION (#5552). Provides a group of 8
counters (nos 32-39) and their necessary circuits and controls.
See #5550 for description of counter functions. #5552 also
provides controls for adding #5551 groups 4, 5 and 6. Maximum:
One. Specify: #9030 for shipment of a 4-foot cable for attachment of the counters to a customer-supplied junction box. See
"Specify" [3] above. Prerequisites: #5550 and first three groups
of #5551.
2798 ATTACHMENT, BASIC (#7990). For attachment of up to
four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum: One. Limitations:
See "2791/2793 Limitations" below. Cannot be used if Pulse
Counters (#5550) is used. Field installable on units shipped prior
to October 2, 1971 which also include 8/M 5992893 and all units
shipped after October 1,1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable
only. Prerequisite: Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715.
See "Specify" [3] above.
2798 ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#7991). Each provides for
attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum:
Three.
Limitations:
See "2791/2793 Limitations" below.
PrerequiSite: 2798 Attachment, Basic (#7990).
2795/2796/2797 ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#8296). Each
provides for attachment of up to eight add'i 2795/2796/2797
Data Entry Units (any combination) ... cable provided by specify
#9030 accommodates #8296 also. Maximum: Three.
VISUAL READOUT (#8710). Provides a backup means for manual
readout (inside the Area Station cover via coded display lights) of
pulse counters if for some reason the Area Station is bypassed, or
the system controller is unable to provide service. This feature is
dependent upon continuous power being supplied to the counters.
Should power be lost, the counters reset to zero. See the "Note"
under Pulse Counters, 8asic (#5550) above. Maximum: One.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'--------- ----
--- -- - ----------_.-
M 2793 - 2796
May 79
DP Machines
2793 Area Station
(cont'd)
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
External Alarm Contacts #3690 $ 10 $ 434
Extended Distance Repeater,
3874
13
520
Receive
3875
14
520
Send
5550
99 3,900
Pulse Counters, Basic
5551
17
694
Pulse Counters, Add'i
41 1,640
Pulse Counter Expansion 5552
2798 Attachment,
7990
56 2,075
Basic
7991
21
832
Additional
2795/2796/2797 Attach8296
16
650
ment, Additional
8710
33 1,300
Visual Readout
FIC
For further information on loop delay, see Physical Planning
Manual, GA27-3017.
$ .50
$189
2.50
2.50
14.50
1.00
4.50
96
96
362
71
71
12.00
4.00
188
109
Purpose: A data entry unit for a 2790 Data Communication System.
1.00
1.00
51
77
Prerequisite: A 2791 Area Station mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station
equipped with an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 and
2793; or a 5013 equipped with RPQ #D 08249.
2791/2793 LIMITATIONS
[1) When using a 2715 -- the maximum number of 2791/2793
Area Stations (any combination) is 100 ... the maximum number
of 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination) is
1,024 ... the maximum number of 2798 Guidance Display Units
is 256 ... the maximum number of Pulse Counters is 1 ,008.
When using 2792 Remote Communications Controllers with the
2715, the number of Area Stations that can be attached is
reduced. Each 2792 mdl 1 is set in the field to respond to its
own address plus the addressees) of 1, 3, 7 or 15 of the Area
Stations remotely attached or reserved for future attachment.
The maximum number of Area Stations that can be locally
attached to the 2715 is reduced by the set number of addresses. The number of 2791 s/2792 mdl 1s/2793s is limited by the
number of addresses available to the 2715: i.e., maximum 100
addresses. Maximum, eight pairs of 2792 mdl 1sand 2s per
2715. Maximum of two pairs of Extended Distance Repeater
(EDR) features may be used on a secondary loop. See 2790
Configurator, SRL GA27-3021.
When using a System 7 -- the maximum number of 2791/2792
mdl 1 s/2793s combined is 64 ... the maximum number of
2795/2796/2797s combined is 512 ... the maximum number
of 2798 Guidance Display Units is 256 per 2790 control feature or 256 per System/7 ... External Alarm is not provided.
[2) One 2791 mdl 1 will accommodate: (a) Up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797s (any combination), or (b) Up to eight
2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to twelve 2798s.
In addition to the above combinations, up to three 1035s, and
one OEM digital device can be attached.
[3) One
2793
will
accommodate:
Up
to
thirty-two
2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to sixteen 2798s,
or (b) Up to thirty-two 2795/2796/2797s (any combination)
and up to 63 Pulse Counters.
In addition to the above combinations, one 1053 mdl 1 can be
attached.
[4) The permissable distance between Area Stations or between
the Area Stations and the system controller depends upon the
transmission line characteristics. For example: Without Extended Distance Repeater (#3874, 3875), using #22 AWG
outside-type telephone cable, these units may be separated up
to 1,000 wire-feet apart ... using #19 AWG cable, separation
may be up to 1,750 wire-feet. With Extended Distance Repeaters, available on the 2791, 2793 and 2715, units may be separated up to 6,000 wire-feet apart. For cable specifications and
other distances, see Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017.
See "Limitations" under Extended Distance Repeat, Send
(#3875).
2 79 6 0 A T A E N TRY U NIT
Highlights: A compact, industrially packaged reporting unit for use
by one or two prod uction workers at their stations. It features a
unique reader that accepts either end of a punched card or an
identification badge ... four ten-position code selection dials ...
4-position manual entry for quantitative data ... a monitor key ... a
telephone jack. It attaches to a 2791 mdl 1 or 2793 or 5013 via a
twisted pair cable. Transmission speed is 40 characters/second.
Card-Badge Reader -- reads up to ten numeric digits from either
end of a punched card (columns 1·10, or 71-80) or from an identification badge. Data is read interchangeably, from a card or
badge, into a given record. Cards and badges are inserted manually. For badge specifications, see SRL GA21-9028. Badges with
attached pocket clips cannot be accommodated.
Code Selection -- four 10-position (0-9) rotary dials are used to
identify various codes such as production status, services required, labor codes or operation, during execution of a production
order.
Manual Entry -- a group of four rocker thumbwheel switches for
entry of quantitative data.
Monitor Key -- a three position, key-operated switch permits
supervisory control of specific transactions ... one key is supplied.
Telephone Jack -- for supervisor's use in communicating by voice
with support groups ... requires a separate voice communication
network ... will accommodate a sound powered telephone handset.
Customer Responsibilities -- The DP Marketing Representative
must advise the customer that maintenance is provided as defined
in "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" following the 2797. The
customer is responsible for: [1) Providing a central maintenance
facility ... [2) Installation and removal of the unit from its operational location.
Limitations: See "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" following 2797.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Maintenance:
2797.
See
"2795/2796/2797 Maintenance"
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621, or specific system
bibliograph.
PRICES:
Mdl
2796
Rental Plan: B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$28
$986
$7.50
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
[5) Loop Delay -- System/7 - 2790 performance is affected by
delay on the local loop and must be considered when developing a configuration. Maximum loop configurations are determined by a formula for "Ioop delay" that will assist you in
quickly determining the viability of the configuration you are
considering. The following calculation should be used for each
5012/5013 module equipped with 2790 Control (#8195). The
resultant figure (total usec) must not exceed 316 usec per
5012/5013.
Quantity
Area Stations ..... 2791
2792 mdl 1
2793
Total Area Stations
x
17.6 usec =
Extended Distance Repeater
Pairs (send/receive)
1000' increments of cable
x
x
8.4 usec =
2.0 usec =
Total usec
following
=
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Per Call: 1
,---------------=- =-- =----":' =
M 2797 - 2798
May 79
DP Machines
2795/2796/2797 MAINTENANCE
2797 DATA ENTRY UNIT
Purpose: A data entry unit for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Prerequisite: A 2791 Area Station mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station
equipped with an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 and
2793, or a 5013 equipped with RPQ
Highlights: A compact, industrially packaged reporting unit for use
by production workers or other employees at their work stations.
It features a unique reader that accepts either end of a punched
card or an identification badge ... two 10-position code selection
dials ... 10 keys for manual entry ... 6-position visual display of
manual entry data for verification before transmission ... a monitor
key ... an "Enter" key to cause data transmission ... a telephone
jack. It attaches to the 2791 mdl 1, 2793 or 5013 via a twisted
pair cable. Transmission speed is 40 characters/second.
Card-Badge Reader -- reads up to ten numeric digits from either
end of a punched card (columns 1-10, or 71-80) or from a
punched identification badge. Data is read interchangeably, from a
card or a badge, into a given record. Cards and badges are
inserted manually. For badge specifications, see SRL GA21-9028.
Badges with attached pocket clips cannot be accommodated.
Code Selection - two 10-position (0-9) rotary dials are used to
input codes for things such as status, names or service required
during execution of of a production order.
Installation of 2795s, 2796s and 2797s in the immediate work
area precludes the acceptibility of online repair due to loss of
the terminal's use and interruption of the workers' production.
Maintenance of the Data Entry Units will be by hardware replacement as opposed to repair at the operational location. The customer will determine the failing unit and deliver the unit to the
central maintenance facility located at his central site. At this
facility, the customer engineer will repair and online test the Data
Entry Unit. Installation of the units at the operational location is
the cutomer's responsibility. To facilitate CE maintenance and
checkout, the customer must provide a dedicated line termination
in the central maintenance facility. This line would be wired to
address CO of an Area Station. A printer (5028, 1053,2741,
etc.) must be located in the proximity of the maintenance facility.
Although the Data Entry Units of anyone type are interchangeable, the customer may wish to replace the failing unit witha spare
for availability.
2798 GUIDANCE DISPLAY UNIT
Manual Entry - 1 O-key keyboard provides for entry of variable
numeric data. As each key is pressed, the number is displayed to
the operator for verification. Up to six positions are displayed per
data field.
Visual Display -- a 6-position visual display in which digits shift
from right to left as keyed. Each position can display any of ten
characters, 0-9, and blank.
Purpose: For the 2790 Data Communication System -- an alphameric keyboard, 16-position variable (lata display and 48 instruction
operator guidance panel for interactive transaction via a 2715
Transmission Control Unit with a S/360 or S/370 Data Base, or
with a System/7 as the 2790 system controller.
Monitor Key -- a 3-position, key-operated switch permits supervisory control over the validity of specific records ... one key is
supplied.
Highlights: A small, desk/bench mounted, self-contained, buffered, data entry and output unit for multi-step interactive transactions via a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or with a System/7 as
the 2790 system controller ... packaged for industrial environment
... featuring a typewriter-style 56-character alphameric keyboard ...
8 control keys .. , a 16-position visual display... a unique 48
instruction operator guidance panel which can be customized by
the user to suit his specific applications .,. 6 operational indicators
... a monitor key ... and an ON/OFF switch. Each unit is attached
to a 2791 mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station via a 4-wire user-provided
cable (up to 1,000 wire-feet).
Control Buttons - the "Enter" button activates an electric powered unit to transmit to the system controller data read by the
card-badge reader, codes selected by the rotary dials, data keyed
and visually displayed, and the monitor key digit ... "Reset" button
is used to reset the visual display when an error is seen during
operator verification.
Telephone Jack -- for supervisor's use in communicating by voice
with support groups ... requires a separate voice communication
network ... will accommodate a sound powered telephone handset.
Customer Responsibilities: The DP Marketing Representative
must advise the customer that maintenance is provided as defined
in "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" below. The customer is responsible for: [1] Providing a central maintenance facility... [2]
Installation and removal of the unit from its operational location.
Limitations: See "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" below.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Maintenance: See "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" below.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
$52
$1,990
$9.00
2797
Plan Offering: Plan B
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
2795/2796/2797 LIMITATIONS
[1] The 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units and 2798 Guidance
Display Units may be attached up to 1,000 wire-feet from the
2791 mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station or the 5013 Digital
Input/Output Module. For cable specifications and other distances, see Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017.
[2] See "2791/2793 Limitations" under 2793 or to D&PT for
RPQ
for maximum combinations of Data Entry Units
and other deviCes.
Prerequisite. A 2791 mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station equipped with
an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 and 2793.
Keyboard -- the 56 data keys include the 26 alphabetic, 10 numeric, 4 printer functions represented by symbols for tab, new
line, line feed and space, 8 special characters and 8 functional
keys (assignable by the user) ... the 8 control keys for functions
such as Enter, Clear, Cancel, Backspace, Transaction-Lock and
Unlock, Advance and Display-Inhibit.
Display - for visual verification, prior to transmission, of any
16-character combination of the 56 characters entered from the
keyboard ... response data or messages ... guidance expansion
messages ... time-of-day, when not used for data, from the system
controller.
Guidance Panel -- up to 16 customer defined instructions can be
actuated at a time on the guidance panel by the system controller
to direct the operator step=by-step through transactions or for
status information ... instructions are written on two removable
overlays provided by the customer to suit his specific applications
... overlays are similar to those used on the 2791 Area Station ...
three manual settings on each of the two panels provide for a total
of 48 instructions or lines of information.
Operational Indicators -- advise the customer that: [1] The unit is
"online" and ready for use ... [2] A transaction is 'in-process" ...
[3] The record is not valid, the "Clear" button should be depressed and data re-entered ... [4] The "transaction-selection"
code must be entered ... [5] The "transaction-lock" mode is in
effect '" [6] The "first step" of a multi-step transaction shpuld be
initiated.
Monitor Key -- a 2-position common key operated switch permits
supervisory control of specific transactions.
ON/OFF Switch -- a power on-off switch.
Customer Responsibilities .- see 2790 in "Systems."
Environment -- See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: [1] Using #22 AWG inside-type telephone cable,
2798s may be attached up io 1,000 wire-feet from the 2791 mdl 1
or 2793. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017 for cable
specifications and other distances ... [2] See "2791/2793
Limitations" under 2793 for maximum combinations of 2798s and
other devices ... [3] 2798 attachment is not available when an
1800 System is the system controller.
N,ot to be reproduced without written permission.
--- - ---
----
-----=
--=- =':' =
DP Machines
2798 Guidance Display Unit
(cont'd)
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography,
Specify: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES
2798
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
1
$96
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase MMMC
$3,740
Maintenance: B
$18.50
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2798
May 19
·_------- ---------===
- ----':' =
M 2803 - 2804·1
May 79
DP Machines
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
2803/2804 TAPE CONTROL
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Purpose: Control unit for 2401 (and/or 2402) Magnetic Tape
Units in a S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. With an appropriate
special feature, a 2803 mdl 2 can also control 2420 Magnetic
Tape Units ... see "Special Features."
Models
2803 Tape Control - a single channel, read or write control unit
to which up to eight tape drives can be attached.
Model 1 - controls up to eight 800 bpi drives (2401/2402 mdls
1,2 and 3).
Model 2 -- the basic unit controls up to eight 1600 bpi drives
(2401/2402 mdls 4, 5, 6). With an ·appropriate special feature,
it can also handle 800 bpi drives (2401 /2402 mdls 1, 2 an 3) ...
see "Special Features." Another special feature permits attachment of 2420 mdl 5s and 7s (1600 bpi). See #7900 under
"Special Features."
Model 3 - controls up to eight 2401 mdl 8s only. The data
conversion function is standard.
2804 Tape Control -- a two channel, simultaneous read-whilewrite control unit to which up to eight tape drives can be attached.
Model 1 -- controls up to eight 800 bpi drives (2401/2402
mdls 1, 2 and 3).
Model 2 -- the basic unit controls up to eight 1 600 bpi drives
(2401/2402 mdls 4, 5 and 6). With an appropriate special
feature, it can also handle 800 bpi drives (2401/2402 mdls 1,
2 and 3) ... see "Special Features."
Model 3 -- controls up to eight 2401 mdl 8s only.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights:
2803 -- can be used with a 2816 Switching Unit{s) for tape drive
switching ... see 2816 and 16 Drive Addressing (#7185) under
"Speci~1 Features" below.
2804 -- considering "Write," "Write Tape Mark" and "Erase" as
write operations, the 2804 can perform a read and a write operation simultaneously.
2803/2804 - each unit contains error detection and single track
error correction facilities.
Tape compatibility special features permit reading/writing of
tapes of varying formats and bit densities by a\tached drives
equipped with appropriate read/write heads .. see compatibility
features under "Special Features."
Prerequisites: For 2803 -- a control unit position on a system
channel... For 2804 -a control unit position on each of two
channels of the same system. For channel limitations, see
"S/360, S/370, 4300 Processors" below.
Simultaneous Read-while-Write (#7160, 7161) is required on
each 2401/2402 attached to a 2804 ... Mode Compatibility
(#5121, 5122) is required on each 2401/2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3
attached to a 2803/2804 mdl 2 .. see "Special Features" under
appropriate unit.
S/360, S/370, 4300 Processors:
2803 - can be attached to S/360 mdls 22 thru 91 and 195, any
S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300 Processor.
2804 -- can be attached to S/360 mdls 22, 30 thru 91 and 195,
all S/370 Processors (except 3115 and 3125), and the 4341
Processor. Limitations: For individual tape drive limitations on
specific S/360 and S/370 models or 4300 Processors, see 2401
(or 2402), or 2420.
[1] In a S/360 mdl 25, only 2803 mdl 1s, 2s or 3s can be
attached, and they must be attached to the selector channel. In addition, only 2401 s which do not exceed a 60KB
data rate can be attached ... see 2401.
[2] In a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 50, or S/370 mdl 135, 135-3
,138, 145, 145-3 or 148, if attached to a multiplexer channel, a 2803 or 2804 must be attached via a shared-path
channel
Mdl 135, 135-3, 1 38 -- not supported on byte multiplexer
channel for concurrent operation with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or selector channel.
[3] A 2803 mdl 2 can be attached to a S/360 mdl 67 only if
the the mdl 67 is operated in 65 mode.
[4] In a S/360 mdl 67-2, both channels required by a 2804
must be attached to the same 2846.
{5] See 4331 byte multiplexer channel for restrictions.
Nol 10
b~ r~Droduc~d
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. For 2803 only #9046 for white.
[3] 2420 Prospect (2803 mdl 2 only): #9701 ... must be specified
on AAS .if the 2803 mdl 2 is to be used for future attachment of
2420 mdl 5s/7s. See 2420 Model 5/7 Attachment (#7900)
under "Special Features."
[4] Control Unit Isolation: Field installation may be required on
certain units ... see #4701-4705 under "Special Features."
-FTP/PRICES:
Mdl
2803
1
2
3
2804
MAC/ MLC
MRC 1 Yr·
$729
898
503
1,040
957
1,210 1,113
701
645
1
2
3
$612 $29,200
754 36,040
423 17,190
874
1,016
589
41,880
48,710
23,810
MMMC
$30,50
40,00
48,50
56,50
65.50
74,00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA CONVERSION (#3228 on 2803, #3236 on 2804), A program controlled feature to process data with maximum packing
efficiency. On a write operation, three 8-bit bytes are written as
four 6-bit tape characters ... on a read operation, four 6-bit characters are converted to three 8-bt bytes. Not required on the
2803 mdl 3 or 2804 mdl 3. Limitation: Cannot be used when
reading 7-track tape backwards. Prerequisite. Seven Track Compatibility (#7125, 7126, 7127, 7128) or Seven and Nine Track
({800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135, 7136).
ISOLATION,CONTROL UNIT (#4701-4705). [for field installation
on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn DC power on or off on the tape control
without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating.
#4701 - for basic 2803 mell 1.
#4702 - for a 2803 mdl 1 with Two Channel Switch
{#81 00).
#4703 -- for a 2803 mdl 2.
#4704 - for 2804 mdl 1.
#4705 -- for 2804 mdl 2.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements and technical limitations,
#4702 requires #8100 on the 2803 mdl 1.
NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY (#5320 on 2803
mdl 2, #5321 on 2804 mdl 2). Required if any tape drive attached to the 2803/2804 mdl 2 has a g-track Read/Write Head
(#9558), or if any attached tape drive mdl 4, 5 or 6 has Dual
Density 800-1600 BPI (#3471, 3472). Allows the reading and
writing of 800 bpi, 9-track NRZI tape in addition to 1600 bpi.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Seven Track COmpatibility
(#7127, 7128) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135, 7136).
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [2803 mdl 1 only] To
attach the Two Channel Switch (#8100) to a 2167 Configuration
Unit in a S/360 mdl 67-2, to a S/360 mdl 158 MP or 158 MP.
SEVEN TRACK COMPATIBILITY (#7125-7128). [2803/2804 mdls
1, 2 only] Permits any attached tape drive equipped with a 7-track
Read/Write. Head (#9557) to read or write in 7-track format
by
compatible
with
tape
generated
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units. Specify: The
number of drives equipped with 7-track Read/Write Heads that are
to be associated with this feature. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320, 5321) or
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135.
7136).
#7125
#7126
#7127
#7128
---
for
for
for
for
2803
2804
2803
2804
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
1
1
2
2
SEVEN AND NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY
(#7135. 7136). [2803/2804 mdl 2 only] Provides the functions of
• FTP is 12M23 months.
without
$671
826
463
MLC
2 Yr Purchase
writt~n D~rmission.
----------=-- =--------=
--':' =
M 2803 - 2804.2
May 79
DP Machines
2803/2804 Tape Control (cont'd)
both Nine Track (800 NRZI) Compatibility (#5320, 5321) and
Seven Track Compatibility (#7127, 7128). Permits reading and
writing by attached mdl 1, 2 or 3 tape drives equipped with either
7-track or 9-track Read/Write Heads (#9557, 9558) or attached
mdl 4, 5 or 6 drives with Dual Density 800-1600 BPI (#3471,
3472). Specify: The number of drives equipped with 7-track
Read/Write Heads that are to be associated with this feature.
#7135 -- for 2803 mdl 2 ... #7136 -- for 2804 mdl 2.
limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#5320, 5321) or Seven Track Compatibility
(#7127, 7128).
16 DRIVE ADDRESSING (#7185). [2803 mdl 1 or 2 only] Required when the pool of drives attached through 2816 Switching
Unit mdl 1 s exceeds eight. Permits the 2803 to address up to
sixteen drives. Prerequisite: Two 2816 mdl 1s with appropriate
features ... see 281 6.
2420 MODEL 5/7 AnACHMENT (#7900). [2803 mdl 2 only] To
attach up to eight 2420 mdl 5s and 7s in any combination. With
this feature, the tape drive combination can include 2401 /2402
mdl 4s, 5s and 6s. If #5320, #7127 or #7135 is also installed
on the 2803 mdl 2, the eight tape drive combination can also
include 2401/2402 mdl 1s, 2s and 3s. Prerequisite: The 2803
must be serial no. above 14000 and below 30000 ... if this feature
is not specified
and 2420s will be attached to the 2803 at
a future date, see item [3] under "Specify."
Notes:
[1] A 2803 md 2 (serial no. 14001 through 15999) with
#7900 requires a 2420 Model 5 Modification (#9690) if 2420
mdl 5s are to be attached. Submit
specifying #9690).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [2803 mdl 1 only] [Plant
installation only] To attach the 2803 mdl 1 to a second channel.
Switching is under program control. Includes partitioning. For use
in a S/360 mdl 67, a S/360 mdl 65 MP, or a S/370 mdl 158 MP
or 168 MP only. Limitation: Only 2803 mdl 1s above serial no.
30000 can be modified at the plant with this feature. New production on 2803 mdl 1s above serial no. 30000 ceased in April,
1968. Prerequisites: If #8100 is routed through the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a S/360 mdl 65 MP, Remote
Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. #6148 is also required in
a S/360 mdl 67-2, or a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP.
---FTP/--MAC/MLC MLC
MRC I Yr· 2 YrPurchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
FIC
On 2803/2804 (any model)
Data Conversion
on 2803
on 2804
Isolation, Control Unit
on basic 2803 mdl I
on 2803 mdll w #8\00
on 2803 mdl 2
on 2804 mdl I
on 2804 mdl 2
7 Track Compatibility
on 2803 mdll
on 2804 mdl I
on 2803 mdl 2
on 2804 mdl 2
#3228
3236
$49
77
$45
71
$41 $1,935
65 3,070
$1.50
2.00
$88
179
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
7125
7126
7127
7128
54
83
195
223
50
76
179
205
45
70
164
187
2,145
3,270
7,545
8,625
2.00
3.00
29.50
34.00
131
179
869
1,070
5320
5321
256
311
236
286
215 9,925
261 12,000
45.00
35.00
946
1,140
7135
7136
420
503
386
463
35316,090
423 19,400
77.00
70.00
1,245
1,530
7185
26
24
22 1,100
1.50
66
Remote Switcb Attachment 6148
8100
Two Channel Switch
NC
110
NC
101
NC
NC
92 3,765
NC
5.50
NC
PO
14.50
251
On 2803/2804 model 2
9 Track Compatibility
on 2803 mdl 2
on 2804 mdl2
7 & 9 Track Compatibility
0112803 mdl2
on 2804 mdl 2
On 2803 mdl I or 2
16 Drive Addressing
On 2803 mdll
On 2803 mdl 2 ... serial no; above 14000 and. below 30000 only
2420 Md15/7 Attachment
7900
381
351
32015,2\0
• FTP is 12-23 months.
No.t to be. reproduced without written permission.
------- - --.::=-:=";"=
--- ----
M 2816
May 79
DP Machines
2816 SWITCHING UNIT
installed in a second 2816. If this feature is installed, it must be
connected to the second 2816 at all times. Prerequisite: Second
2816 Attachment - First Control (#6392).
Purpose: To switch drives between tape control units and a common group of magnetic tape drives in a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85
or 195, any S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300
Processor.
Highlights: For switching between 2803 Tape Controls and 2403
Magnetic Tape Unit and Controls and drives of all models of
2401 s, 2402s, 2403s, except for switching between 2803 mdl 3
and 2401 mdl 8, which cannot be attached via the 2826. Also
provides switching capability for 2420 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 5s
and 7s and all models of 2401 sand 2402s used with 2803 mdl
2s. Note: Phase Encoded tape control units (2803 mdl 2, 2403
mdl 4s,5s,6s) cannot be connected to NRZI control units (2803
mdl 1, 2403 mdl 1, 2, 3) via the same 2816 ... see SRL GA226866 for complete details.
Switching is on a per record basis under program control. The
2816 provides the ability to manually isolate any tape drive(s) from
the control of one or more tape controls. It reduces the number of
tape drives necessary for any given application by providing each
tape unit with an increased number of access paths.
TAPE DRIVE INTERMIX (#7803). Required on each 2816 when
2400 mdl 1s, 2s or 3s are to coexist with 2400 mdl 4s, 5s or 6s,
or with 2420 mdl 5s or 7s.
Special Feature Prices:
Additional Drives
Basic Switch
3rd Control
4th Control
Add'i Drive Adapter
Control for Base Drives
3rd
4th
4th Control Attachment
2nd 2816 Attachment
lst Control
2nd Control
Tape Drive Intermix
The basic 2816 provides for switching between two tape controls
and up ti four tape drives. This switching ability can be expanded
in increments of one tape control and/or four tape drives to a
maximum of four tape controls and eight tape drives. Two 2816s
can be coupled to provide switching between a maximum of four
tape controls and sixteen drives. See "Special Features" for
feature requirements. Note: The use of two 2816s to switch more
than eight tape drives requires 16 Drive Addressing (#7185) on
the tape control units ... see 2803 or 2403.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-O001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-Rhase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
PRICES:
2816
Mdl
-FTPMAC/ MLC
MLC
MRC 1 Yr' 2 Yr Purchase
$617
$568
$518 $23,810
MMMC
$4.50
Plan Offering: Plan B.
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADD'L DRIVES FOR B4SIC SWITCH (#1050). For switching
between four additional tape drives and the first and second tape
controls attached to the basic switch.
ADD'L DRIVES FOR THIRD CONTROL (#1051). Permits the third
tape control to access the four additional tape drives associated
with #1050. Prerequisites: Add'i Drives for Basic Switch
(#1050) and Add'i Drive Adapter (#1055).
ADD'L DRIVES FOR FOURTH CONTROL (#1052). Permits the
fourth tape control to access the four additional tape drives associated with #1050. Prerequisites: Add'i Drives for Basic Switch
(#1050), Add'i Dive Adapter (#1055), and Fourth Control Attachment (#4455).
ADD'L DRIVE ADAPTER (#1055). Provides for the installation of,
and is prerequisite for, feature #1051 and/or #1052.
Prerequisites: Add'i Drives for Basic Switch (#1050) and Control
for Base Drives, Third (#2285).
CONTROL FOR BASE DRIVES, THIRD (#2285), To attach a third
tape control to the basic switch with access to the four tape drives
included with the basic switch.
CONTROL FOR BASE DRIVES, FOURTH (#2286), To attach a
fourth tape control to the basic switch with access to the four tape
drives included with the basic switch.
FOURTH CONTROL ATTACHMENT (#4455). To attach a fourth
tape control... prerequisite to feature #2286 and/o #1052.
Prerequisite: Control for Base Drives,Thirr1 (#2285).
SECOND 2816 ATTACHMENT- FIRST CONTROL (#6392). Interconnects two 2816s. Connects the tape control occupying the
first position on a 2816 or to a feature installed in a second 2816.
If this feature is installed, it must be connected to the second
2816 at all times.
SECOND 2816 ATTACHMENT - SECOND CONTROL (#6393).
Interconnects two 2816s. Connects the tape control occupying the
second position on a 2816 to a second 2816 or to a feature
---FTP/--MAC/MLC MLC
MRC I Yr' 2 YrPurchase MMMC
'" FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
#1050
1051
1052
1055
$166
67
67
33
$153 $139 $6,455
56 2,595
62
62
56 2,595
30
28
842
2285
2286
4455
94
26
67
86
24
62
6392
6393
7803
10
10
10
9
9
9
79 3,675
22 1,100
56 2,595
8
8
8
448
448
460
FIC
$3.00
1.00
1.00
NC
$221
32
1.50
1.50
NC
88
NC
NC
NC
88
88
29
32
21
32
54
-------- - --- ------==::..: == ~ ==
M 2821.1
May 79
DP Machines
2821
CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Control and buffer storage unit for a card read punch
and/or one or more printers in a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 and 195,
any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158 and 3158-3. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic
multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) of 2870, shared or unshared subchannels of 2880
(non-shared are recommended) ... see 2860, 2870, 2880. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
Model 1
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch and one printer.
Model 2
Controls one printer.
Model 3
Controls two printers ... with Third Printer Control
(#7945) controls three printers.
Model 4
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch and one 1404
Printer.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
Model 5
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch and two printers
... with Third Printer Control (#7945) controls three
printers.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
Model 6
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331. NOTE: 2821 mdl4 cannot be attached.
Model Changes: Model 1 can be field converted to model 6
Highlights:
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) '" see 4341. NOTE: 2821 mdl4 cannot
be attached.
Models 1 and 2 - the printer may be a 1403 mdl 2, 3, 7 or Nl
... for attachment for a 1403 mdl 2 or 7, see "Specify" ... for
attachment of a 1403 mdl 3 or Nl, see 1100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) under "Special Features."
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360 S/370 -- GC20-0001
Models 3 and 5 -- two printers, or with Third Printer Control
(#7945), three printers can be attached. They may be in any
combination of 1403 mdls 2, 3, 7 and Nl ... for attachment of
1403 mdl 2s and 7s, see "Specify" ... for attachment of 1403
mdl 3s or Nl s, see 1100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) under
"Special Features." Program priority for multiple printers on
these models is:
[2) Color: . #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
1st Priority
2nd Priority
3rd Priority
Printer Control No. 1
Printer Control No. 2
Printer Control No. 3
. Model 4 - the printer must be a 1404.
limitations: 1403s -- for models available for each S/360, S/370
model, or any 4300 Processor, see "Models" under 1403 ... 1404s
- cannot be attached to a S/360 mdl 22, 44, 65, 67, 75, 85 or
195, S/370 or 4300 Processors.
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 - special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channels ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) '" see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 44 - special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/360 mdl 65, 75 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer
channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870 ... see 2860, 2870. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/360 mdl 67 - basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/360 mdl 85, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, shared or unshared subchannels of 2880 (non-shared is
recommended) ... see 2860, 2870, 2880. Note: 2821 mdl 4
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125. Note: 2821 mdl4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channel, Block Multiplexer Channel ... see 3135. Note: 2821 mdl 4
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138. Note: 2821 mdl 4
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot
be attached.
S/360 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138. Note: 2821 mdl 4
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[3) 1403 Model 2 Attachment -- for each 1403 mdl 2 to be attached to a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5, specify one of the following:
#9241 - to attach a 1403 mdl 2 to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to
Printer Control No. 1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9242 -- to
attach a 1403 mdl 2 to Printer Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3
or 5 ... #9243 - to attach a 1403 mdl 2 to Printer Control No.
3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5. Third Printer Control (#7945) also
required ... see "Special Features."
[4)1403 Model 7 Attachment -- for each 1403 mdl 7 to be attached to a 2821 mdl I, 2, 3 or 5, specify one of the following:
#9246 -- to attach a 1403 mdl 7 to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to
Printer Control No. 1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9247 -- to
attach a 1403 mdl 7 to Printer Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3
or 5 .. , #9248 -- to attach a 1403 mdl 7 to Printer Control No.
3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5. Third Printer Control (#7945) also
required '" see "Special Features."
[5) 1403 Model 3 or Nl Attachment: Each 1403 mdl 3 or Nl
requires the appropriate 1,100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) ...
see "Special Features."
[6) Compatibility Attachment: If the 2540 is to be used with
1401/1403 Attachment (#4463) with 1401/1440/1460 Basic
Compatibility (#4456) or 1620 Compatibility (#7190) on a
2030, or with 1401/1460 Compatibility (#4457) on a 2040,
then 2540 Compatibility Attachment (#8065) is required ... see
"Special Features."
[7) Compatibility Attachment: If the 2540 is to be used with
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) on a 3115, 3125,
3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3 or 3148, or with
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#4458) on a
3145, 3145-3 or 3148, or 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility (#3950) on a 3155, 3158 or 3158-3, then 2540
Compatibility Attachment (#8065) is required ... see "Special
Features."
[8) Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
f9]
Compatibility Attachment: If the 2540 is to be used with
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#3950) on a 4331 Processor, then
2540 Compatibility Attachment (#8065) is required ... see "Speciai
Features. "
PRICES:
Mdl
2821
1
2
3
4
5
6
-FTP/MLC
MAC/ MLC
MRC 1 Yr· 2 Yr
$1,085 $998 $911
674
620
566
1,345 1,237 1,130
1,175 1,081
987
1,750 1,610 1,470
493
454
414
Purchase
MMMC
$41,770
25,900
51,690
45,300
67,670
14,210
$75.50
57.50
118.00
80.00
133.00
166.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
l..Iodel/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------------.:..- =-=
- ==---==
~
M 2821.2
May 79
DP Machines
2821 Control Unit
(cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
COLUMN BINARY (#1990). [Models 1. 4. 5, 6 only] Cards with
multiple significant digit punching in a single card column can be
processed by the 2540 ... the Extended BCD Interchange Code
used by S/360 assemblers and compilers does not require this
feature on the 2821. Prerequisite: Column Binary (# 1990) on ,the
2030 Processing Unit if column binary cards are to be processed
on the 2540 when the S/360 mdl 30 is operating in
1401/1440/1460 compatibility mode.
1,100 LPM PRINTER ADAPTER (#3615). [Models 1, 2, 3, 5 only]
To attach a 1403 Printer mdl 3 or N1. One #3615 is required for
each 1,100 Ipm printer attached. Specify: With each #3615, one
of the following, depending upon the control position to which the
printer is to be attached: #9262 -- to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, ~r to
Printer Control No. 1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9263 -- to Printer
Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 '" #9264 -- to Printer Control
NO.3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5. Third Printer Control (#7945) is also
required.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4701-4705). [For field installation
on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2821 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating.
#4701 -- for a 2821 mdl 4.
#4702 -- for a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5 with neither Two Channel
Switch (#8100) nor Universal Character Set Adapter (#8637,
8638, 8369).
#4703 -- for a 2821 mdl 1 2, 3 or 5 with #8637, 8638 or
8639 but not #8100.
#4704 -- for a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5 with #8100 but not with
#8637, 8638 or 8639.
#4705 -- for a 2821 mdl 1. 2, 3 or 5 with both #8100 and
#8637,8638 or 8639.
Prerequisites:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements,
#4703 requires
#8637, 8638 or 8639 ... #4704 requires #8100 ... #4705
requires both #8100 and #8637, 8638 or 8639.
PUNCH FEED READ CONTROL (#5895). [Models 1, 4, 5, 6 only]
Required for Punch Feed Read (#5890) on a 2540.
READ-COMPARE ADAPTER (#5991). [model 4 only] Required for
Read-Compare (#5990) on a 1404.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [Models 1, 2, 3, 5
only] To attach the Two Channel Switch (#8100) to a 2167 Co. nfiguration Unit in a S/360 mdl 67-2, to a S/360 mdl 65 MP
which has the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) installed, or to
a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP.
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING CONTROL (#6412). Required for
Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6410,6411) on a 1403 mdl 2, 3
or N1. One #6412 is required for each printer equipped with
#6410 or 6411. Specify: With each #6412, one of the following,
depending upon the control position to which the printer with
#6410 or 6411 is to be attached:
#9761 -- to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to Printer Control No.1 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9762 -- to Printer Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9763 -- to Printer Control No. 3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ...
#7945 is also required.
Note: Orders for this feature for a 1403 mdl N1 equipped with
Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6410) are no longer accepted ...
for 1403 mdl N1 s equipped with the new Selective Tape Listing
Feature (#6420), see #6425 below.
required for normal S/360 operation of the 2540. Required if
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) is used on a 3115,
3125 3135,3135-3, 3145, 3145-3 or 3148 Processing Unit, or If
1~01/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#4458) is used on a
3145, 3145-3 or 3148 Processing Unit, or if 1401/1440/1460,
1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950) is used on a 3155, 3158 or
3158-3 Processing Unit ... not required for normal S/370 operation of the 2540. Required if 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#3950)
is used on a 4331 ... not required for normal 4300 Processor operation of
the 2540.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [Models 1, 2, 3, 5 only] [Plant
installation only] To attach the 2821 to a second channel. Switching is under program control. Includes partitioning. For use in a
S/360 mdl 67, a multiprocessor S/360 mdl 65, or a 5/370 mdl
158 MP or 168 MP only. Prerequisites: If the Two Channel
Switch is routed through the Configuration Control Panel (# 1505)
of a multiprocesding 5/360 mdl 65, Remote Switch Attachment
(#6148) is required. #6148 is also required in a 5/360 mdl
67-2, or a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. See above. For a
2821 mdl 1 or 5, a Two Channel Switch Adapter (#8~02) is
required on the attached 2540.
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637-8639). [Models
1, 2, 3, 5 only] Required for Universal Character Set Feature
(#8641 on 1403 mdl 2, #8640 on 1403 mdl 3 or N1) ... one
adapter is required for each printer so equipped. Note: A 1403
previously equipped with a Multiple Character Set Feature (#5110
on 1403 mdl 2, #5111 on N1) can be attached to the 2821. The
MCS Feature provides the same function as the UCS Feature on
the printer.
#8637 -- to attach such a printer to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to
Printer Control No.1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#8638 -- to attach such a printer to Printer Control No. 2 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#8639 -- to attach such a printer to Printer Control No. 3 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #7945 is also required.
Special Feature Prices:
#1990 $110 $101 $92 $3,225
Column Binary
1,100 LPM Printer Adptr 3615
63
76
70 2,665
Isolation, Control Unit
for mdl 4
4701
NC
NC NC
NC
for mdl 1,2,3,5
w neither #8100 nor
#8637-8639
4702
NC
NC NC
NC
w #8637-8639 only
4703
NC
NC
NC NC
w #8100 only
4704
NC
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
NC
w #8100 " #8637-86394705
Punch Feed Read Control 5895
60
55
50 1,835
Read-Compare Adapter 5991
83
76
70 3,810
Remote Switch Attach
6148
NC
NC
NC NC
Selective Tape Listing Control
for #6410 or #6411
6412
94
86
79 3,855
for #6420
6425
94
86
79 3,855
Third Printer Control
7945 562 517 47221,490
2540 Compatiblity Attach 8065
NC
NC NC
NC
Two Channel Switch
8100 223 205 187 9,425
Universal Character Set Adapter
for Printer Cntrl No. 1
8637
16
13
15
664
for Printer Cntrl No. 2 8638
13
16
15
664
for Printer Cntrl No. 3
8639
16
13
664
15
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING CONTROL (#6425). [Models 1, 2, 3,
5 only] [For use in S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50 only] Required
for the new Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6420) on a 1403 mdl
N1. One #6425 is required for each printer equipped with
#6420. Specify: With each #6425, one of the following, depending upon the control position to which the printer with #6420 is to
be attached:
#9765 -- to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to Printer Control No. 1 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9766 -- to Printer Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9767 - to Printer Control No. 3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ...
#7945 is also required.
THIRD PRINTER CONTROL (#7945). [Models 3, 5 only] [Plant
installation only] To attach a third printer. Any combination of
three 1403s, mdls 2, 3, 7, N1 can be used. An 1,100 LPM Printer
Adapter (#3615) is required for each 1403 mdl 3 or N1 attached.
2540 COMPATIBILITY ATTACHMENT (#8065). [Models 1, 4, 5, 6
only] Required if the 1402/1403 Attachment (#4463) with
1401/1440/1460 Basic Compatibility (#4456) or 1620 Compatibility (#7190) is used on a 2030 Processing Unit,. or 14<:J1/1460
Compatibility (#4457) is used on a 2040 Processmg Unit ... not
•
FTP is
12~23
months.
-FTP/MACI MLC MLC
MRC 1 Yr· 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
*
FTP is l2-23 months.
Not to be reDroduced without written permission.
FIC
$3.50
1.50
$56
106
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2.50
2.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
66
92
NC
NC
NC
10.00
NC
12.50
102
549
PO
NC
PO
4.50
4.50
4.50
401
267
267
----
---"- -'--=-.:!
=! _::::. =
':' =
M 2822
May 79
DP Machines
2822 PAPER TAPE READER CONTROL
Purpose: Control unit for a 2671 Paper Tape Reader in a S/360
mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 67, a S/370 mdl 115 thru 158, a
3031 or 3032 Processor, or a 4300 Processor.
Highlights: Provides status and data information from the 2671 to
the processing unit ... checks for parity ... signals end of record
and end of tape ... code translation, where required, is performed
by the processing unit.
Prerequisite: A control unit position on a system channel:
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
S360 mdl 67 -- basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) '" see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channel (one is standard), Block Multiplexer Channel (special feature)
... see 3145.
S370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels .. , see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels Sfive are standard) ... see
.
3031 or 3032.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3} Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped prior
to December 29, 1967 .. , see "Special Features" below.
PRICES:
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
2822
$235t
Purchase MMMC
$8,630
$ 11
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: I/O Unit (online, meter on 2671) Purchase Option: 55%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2822 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements,
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Pri,ces:
Isolation, Control Unit
t Manufactured in France.
#4700
NC
NC
NC
FIC
NC
Freight charges from point of shipment in U.S.A.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"------- -------= =----=----~=
M 2835
May 79
DP Machines
2835 STORAGE CONTROL
Purpose: Control unit for 2305 Fixed Head Storage(s) in a S/360
mdl 85, 195, S/370 mdl 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158, 165, 168,
195, a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
Modell
For attachment of 2305 mdl 1 s.
Model 2
For attachment of 2305 mdl 2s.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: Up to two 2305 mdl 1 s «an be attached to a 2835
mdl 1 ... a total data capacity of up to 10.8 million 8-bit bytes.
Data is transferred \0 and from a group of non-shared subchannels
of a 2880 or the block multiplexer channel of a 3031, 3032 or
30~3, at a rate of 3.0 million bytes/second.
Up to two 2305 mdl 2s can be attached to a 2835 mdl 2 ... a total
data capacity of up to 22.4 million bytes. Data is transferred to
and from a group of non-shared subchannels of a 2880 or the
block multiplexer channel of a 3031, 3032 or 3033 at a rate of
1.5 million bytes/second.
A pattern of correction code bytes is automatically recorded after
each count, key, and data area. Error detection and correction is
accomplished by decoding the bytes generated while reading and
comparing with the recorded bytes.
File organization and format are under program control, allowing
data and key fields to be variable in length on an individual record
basis.
Greater utilization of available storage is made by allowing a record to "overflow" from one track to another. Logical files are
protected by a combination of commands in the 2835 and checks
within the control program.
Multiple track operation allows search and read operations to
proceeed from track to track. Command chaining allows multiple
records to be read/written by a sequence of channel commands,
without rotational delays between records.
Rotational positional sensing allows the channel to "seek" to an
angular track position by using the "Set Sector" command. This
permits disconnection during most of the rotational latency period
and thus contributes to increased channel availability. The unit
attaches to the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel or integrated
block multiplexer channel of a 3145, 3145-3, 3148 or '3155 and
will accept and properly act upon the "Set Sector" and "Read
Sector" commands.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Non-standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if the
2835 is not to be installed as part of a 2305-2835 combination.
[4] Two Drive Facility: #9702 ... must be specified if two 2305s
are to be attached to the 2835. Note: If a second drive is to
be field installed, #9702 must be ordered
Refer to
2305 for further ordering instructions.
- FTP/-
PRICES:
Mdl
2835
1
2
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$3,245 $2,985 $2,726
2,705 2,489 2,272
Purchase
$76,860
63,630
MMMC
$286
244
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 1
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
SPECIAL FEATURES
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148, 6149). To attach the
Two Channel Switch (#8170, 8171) to the configuration control
panel of a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. #6148 -- for 2835 mdl
1 ... #6149 -- for 2835 mdl 2.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170, 8171). To attach the 2835 to a
second channel, allowing two S/360s, S/370s or 4341s, or two
channels of the same S/360, S/370 or 4341, access to a common
data capacity under program control. #8170 -- for 2835 mdl 1 ...
#8171 -- for 2835 mdl 2.
Special Feature Prices:
- FTP/MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1 Yr' 2 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Remote Switch Attachment
for Model 1
#6148
NC
NC
NC
for Model 2
6149
NC
Ne
NC
Two Channel Switch
for Model 1
8170 $215 $198 $181
for Model 2
8171
215 198 181
Multiple requesting is provided which allows for chain or command
queuing within the 2835. This is accomplished by allowing multiple (up to 16) channel command chains to be active in the facility.
For more information, see the 2305 Fixed Head Storage.
Limitations:
2305 mdl 1 and mdl 2 cannot be intermixed on the same 2835.
S/370 mdl 145 -- 2835 mdl 1 cannot be attached ... the 2835
mdl 2 must be attached to channel 2 on 3145 IFA systems ... the
Word Buffer (#8810) is required on the 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3, 148 - 2835 mdl 1 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 or 3031 Processor -- 2835 mdl 1 cannot be
attached ... 2835 mdl 2 can be attached only to the first and
second block multiplexer channels ... no more than two may be
attached to anyone channel.
4341 Processor -- 2835 mdl 1 cannot be attached.
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a block multiplexer channel of a 3145,3145-3,3148,3155,3158,3031,3032,3033 or
4341, or a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel... Word Buffer
(#8810) is required on the 3145 ... the 2835 mdl 1 also requires
Two Byte Interface (#7850, 7851) on the 2880 or on the 3032 or
3033 channel to which it is attached.
The 2835 is designed for interconnected operation as part of a
2835/2305 facility. Customers who wish to order a 2835 for
stand-alone or individual use should submit an RPQ to provide the
necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors, etc.) to
complete the unit for a non-standard (i.e., not interconnected with
a 2305) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard 2835/2305 configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided, the
unit will be offered on a purchase-only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2835 in any nonstandard environment must be reviewed
.. , see item [3] under
"Specify."
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
MLC
1 Yr"
S/370 -- GC20-0001
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
NC
NC
$5,125
5,125
NC
NC
NC
NC
$7.00 $359
7.00 694
7::-='::=
a---=::iT!:
M 2840
May 79
DP Machines
2840 DISPLAY CONTROL (Model
2840 DISPLAY CONTROL (Model
1)
The 2840 Display Control mdl 1, used for control of 2250 Display
Unit mdl 2s, is no longer available .,. the following special feature
is available for field installation on installed units.
ABSOLUTE VECTORS CONTROL (#1003). Controls which permit
attached 2250 mdl 2s equipped with Absolute Vectors (#1001) to
"draw" a continuous straight line between any two points of their
1,024 x 1,024 reference grids. Maximum: One.
Special F. .ture Price.:
Absolute VectOR Cntrl
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
#1003 $217 $8,715
$8.00
FIC
$203
2)
Purpose: Control unit that provides common circuits for multiple
2250 Display Unit mdl 3s in a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85, 195,
any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
limitation: Cannot be used for 2250 mdl 1 s.
Highlights: Provides controls and attachments for up to two 2250
mdl 3s. With Display Multiplexer (#3352), up to four 2250 mdl 3s
can be controlled. See "Special Features." Each 2250 mdl 3 can
be located 2,000 cable feet from the 2840. Includes 32,768·bytes
of core buffer, a character generator, absolute vectors control, the
2250 set of eleven orders, and an additional set of orders for
graphic design applications.
Prerequisites: A control unit on a system channel and a minimum
of 64K bytes of processor storage for use of graphic support
under OS ... a minimum of 16K for diagnostic support only.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one is
standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195, or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector
channel of 2860, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
5/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channel or Block Multiplexer Channel ... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexf;lr channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) '" see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte mUltiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360
5/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICE5:
2840
Mdl
2
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$4,345
$80,900
$183
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Maintenance: B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50%
SPECIAL FEATURE5
DISPLAY MULTIPLEXER (#3352). Provides two additional attachments for two 2250 mdl 3s. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
Display Multiplexer
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
#3352 $437 $8,990
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
$16.00 $407
._-------=- ==
---- - --':' =
M 2860
May 79
DP Machines
2860 SELECTOR CHANNEL
Purpose: Selector channel(s) for attachment and control of a wide
variety of I/O control units for a S/360 mdl 65 thru 195, or a
S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195.
Model 1
Has one selector channel.
Model 2
Has two selector channels.
Model 3
Has three selector channels.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Channels permit data rates up to 1.3 million
bytes/second. A full set of channel control and buffer registers
permit each channel to operate with minimal interference. Up to
eight I/O control units can be attached to each channel, permitting a wide variety of attached devices. I/O operations are overlapped with processing and, depending upon the data rate, all
channels can operate simultaneously.
Maximum:
S/360 mdl 65, 67-1 (2067 mdl 1), 75 - up to two 2860s in any
combination of models can be attached. Up to two 2870 Multiplexer Channels can also be attached. Total channels (both 2860
and 2870) cannot exceed seven per CPU.
Limitations: On either a 65 MP system with eight 2365 mdl 13
frames, or on a system with four 2361 mdl 2s, only three channel frames or seven logical channels, whichever occurs first,
can be attached. The 2860 may only use channel addresses 1
through 6. If no 2870s are attached, only up to six logical
channels can be attached per CPU.
S/360 mdl 67-2 (one or two 2067 mdl 2s) - up to two 2860s in
any combination can be attached to each 2846 Channel Controller. A 2870 Multiplexer Channel can also be attached to each
2846.
S/360 mdl 85, 195, or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- up to two
2860s in any combination of models can be attached. 2870
Multiplexer Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels can
also be attached. For combinations possible, see 3165, 3168 or
3195.
Prerequisites:
With 2065 or 2067 mdl 1 - Channel Attachment (#9065) is
required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4. Channel Attachment (#9066) is required in addition to #9065 to attach
channels addressed 5 and 6. See "Specify" under 2065 and
2067.
With 2067 mdl 2 - a 2846 Channel Controller is required.
With 2075 -- a 2075 Attachment (#9820) is required on each
2860 ... see "Specify:'
With 2085 - a 2085 Attachment (#9821) is required on each
2860 ... see "Specify." On the 2085, Channel Attachment
(#9065) is required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4.
Channel Attachment (#9066) is required in addition to #9065
to attach channels addressed 5 and 6. Consult Special Product
Marketing.
With 3195 -- a 3195 Attachment (#9828) is required on each
2860 ... see "Specify:'
With 3165, 3168, 3168-3 -- a 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on each 2860 '" see "Specify:' When
attaching this channel to a S/370 mdl 165, the 3165 must have
sufficient addressing capability ... see "Channel Attachment"
under "Specify" for the 3165. For S/370 mdl 165 systems,
the power distribution unit must be equipped for at least the
number of frames actually attached ... see "Channel Frames"
under "Specify" for the 3067 mdl 1. Channel Indirect Data
Addressing feature is required for a system operating in EC
mode ... see "Special Features:'
Isolation: Appropriate features are required on any 2860 shipped
prior to September 7, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Method of Installation: #9400, if 2860 will not be installed on
a raised floor.
[3] 2075 Attachment:
2075.
#9820
required for attachment to a
[4] 2085 Attachment:
2085.
#9821
required for attachment to a
[5] 3195 Attachment:
3195.
#9828
required for attachment to a
[6] 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment: #9830 ... required for attachment to a 3165, 3168, or 3168-3.
[7] Unit Position: Required on 2860s when more than one unit,
either 2860 or 2870, is attached to a 2065, 2067 mdl 1, 2075,
2085, 2846, or 3165. Specify #9501 on each 2860 that is not
attached last on the channel bus. If the 2860 is to be last (only
when there is no 2870) no code is required. When field installing an additional 2860 which will be last on the bus, order
#9501 for the installed 2860 that is currently last on the bus.
All
orders for #9501 must give the model, serial number
and special features on the installed 2860. On the 3168, 31683 or 3195, the bus is two cable strings to which the channels
are altached. Therefore, for each string specify #9501 for
each 2860 that is not attached last on that string. If the 2860
is last on either string, no code is required. When field installing an additional 2860 which is to be last on the string, order
#9501
for the installed 2860 that is currently last on
the string.
[8] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[9] Two-processor System: A 2860 that is to be used in a S/360
mdl 67-2 with two 2067 mdl 2s requires Address Prefixing
(#1095) ... see "Special Features:'
[10] 2301 Drum Storage: In a S/360 mdl 67-2, or a S/370 mdl
165, High Speed Direct Access Storage Priority (#4597) is
required on the selector channel to which the 2820 Storage
Control for the 2301 is to be attached ... see "Special Features."
[11] Isolation Features: Appropriate features must be ordered for
field installation on units shipped prior to September 7, 1967 ...
see "Special Features:'
PRICES:
2860
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
1
2
3
$2,400 $2,185
3,420 3,110
4,455 4,050
Purchase
$112,050
159,600
206,600
MMMC
$63.50
103.00
144.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Months: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDRESS PREFIXING (#1095). [For use in a S/360 mdl 67-2
only] One is required on each selector channel in a two-processor
system : .. provides prefixing to identify the processing unit that
has initiated an I/O operation. Specify: #9026 for first channel of
2860 ... #9047 for second ... #9048 for third. Maximum: One
per 2860 mdl 1, two per 2860 mdl 2, three per 2860 mdl· 3.
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850). To interconnect two
system channels '" only one of the two connected channels requires this feature. The feature uses one control unit position on
each of the channels. The plant must know on which of the three
possible 2860 channel gates the adapter is to be installed.
Specify. #9095 for installation on first gate ... #9096 for second
gate ... #9097 for third gate. Maximum: One per gate.
CHANNEL INDIRECT DATA ADDRESSING (#1861-1863). For use
on a S/370 mdl 165 II or 168 ... 3165/3168/3268-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on channel. One is required on each selector
channel to provide indirect access for data transfer. Required for
a system operating in EC mode. #1861 - for 2860 mdl 1 ...
#1862 for 2860 mdl 2 ... #1863 for 2860 mdl 3. Maximum: One
per 2860.
HIGH SPEED DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE PRIORITY (#4597).
[For use in a S/360 mdl 67-2 or 85, or S/370 mdl 165 only]
Gives storage priority to a 2301 Drum over all other devices in the
system. Required on a 2860 channel to which a 2301 is attached
in the above systems.. Specify: #9171 for installation on first
channel ... #9172 on second channel. Maximum: In a S/360 mdl
67-2, only one #4597 may be attached to a 2860, regardless of
model. Although two 2860s may be attached to a 2846, only one
may have this feature. In a S/360 mdl 85 or S/370 mdl 165, up
to two features may be used, but they must be located on the first
2860 in the system. Prerequisite: Storage Priority (#7516) on
the 2820 Storage Control associated with the 2301.
3803 MODEL 2 ATTACHMENT (#7850). One is required for each
2860 channel to which 3803 mdl 2s are attached. Specify.
#9181 for first channel of a 2860 ... #9182 for second channel ...
#9183 for third channel. Maximum: One for 2860 mdl 1 ... two
for 2860 mdl 2 ... three for 2860 mdl 3.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ----==-= ':' =
-- -
M 2860 - 2870
May 79
DP Machines
2860 Selector Channel (cont'd)
TLP/
Special Feature Prices:
2870 MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Address Prefixing
#1095 $44
Chnl-to-Chnl Adapter
1850 256
Channel Indirect Data Addressing
for 2860 mdl 1
1861
171
for 2860 mdl 2
1862 342
for 2860 mdl 3
1863 515
High Speed Direct
Access Strg Priority
4597
16
3603 Mdl 2 Attachment 7850
23
$40
233
$1,930 $2.00
10,820 4.00
156
311
469
7,995
15,940
23,910
15
21
772
1,140
$563
197
2.00 1,760
3.00 3,425
5.SO 5,080
2.00
1.00
340
299
ISOLATION FEATURES -- the following features, as appropriate,
must be ordered for field installation on each 2860 installed or
shipped prior to September 7. 1967.
ISOLATION, 2860 CHANNEL (#4611-4613). Permits power to be
turned on or off on the 2860 without introducing transient noise
signals on the I/O interface bus during the powering operation.
#4611 - for 2860 mdl 1 ... #4612 -- for 2860 mdl 2 ... #4613for 2860 mdl 3. Maximum: One per 2860.
ISOLATION,
ON
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL
ADAPTER
(#4621-4623). Permits power to be turned on or off on the 2860
without introducing transient noise signals on units attached via
Channel-to-Channel Adapter(s) (#1850) during the powering
operation. #4621 - if there is only one #1850 on the 2860
frame ... #4622 -- if there are two # 1 850s ... #4623 -- if there
are three #1850s. Maximum: One, #4621. #4622, or #4623.
Prerequisites: For #4621, one # 1850 ... For #4622, two
#1850s ... For #4623, three #1850s.
Special Feature Prices:
Isolation
2860 Channel
for model 1
#4611
for model 2
4612
for model 3
4613
On Chnl-to-Chnl Adapter
with one #1850
4621
with two #1850s
4622
with three #1850s
4623
Purpose: For attachment of a wide variety of low to medium
speed I/O control units and devices to a S/360 mdl 65, 67, 85,
195, or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195.
Highlights: Provides up to 196 subchannels ... including four
Selector Subchannels. See "Special Features." Aggregate data
rales range from 110KB to 670KB, depending upon the features
installed.
The basic channel can attach up to eight I/O control units and
can address up to 192 I/O devices. Up to four Selector Subchannels can be added, each of which can operate one device simultaneously with the basic channel. Up to eight I/O control units can
be attached to each Selector Subchannel. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit can be attached to that Selector Subchannel... see 2841. A maximum of sixteen devices can be
attached to each Selector Subchannel. The first 2870 attached to
a System must be assigned address zero (0). The second 2870
may be assigned any address 1 through 6, dependent upon the
total number of channels installed and the priority desired ... see
Functional Characteristics SRL for the using system.
Maximum aggregate data rates are shown in the following table.
These are machine rates for the 2870 ... for S/360 mdl 65, 67-1,
75 and 85, or S/370 mdl 165, 168 or 195, information on system
data rates may be found in the appropriate Functional Characteristics SRl.
SELECTOR SUBCHANNELS
TLP/
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Basic
Channel
2nd
3rd
4th
1st
#6990 #6991 #6992 #6993
110KB
88KB
66KB
44KB
30KB
180KB
180KB 180KB
180KB 180KB 180KB
180KB 180KB 180KB 100KB
• Not installed.
Maximum:
S/360 mdl 65, 67-1 (2067 mdl 1), 75 -- two 2870s can be
attached ... up to two 2860 Selector Channels in any combination of models can also be attached. The total number of channels (both 2870s and 28605) cannot exceed seven per CPU.
limitations: On either a 65 MP system with eight 2365 mdl 13
frames or on a system with four 2361 mdl 2s, only three channel
frames or seven logical channels, whichexer occurs first, can be
attached. If no 2870s are attached only up to six logical channels can be attached per CPU. The first 2870 address must be
zero and the second is assigned an available address from 1 to
6.
S/360 mdl 67-2 (one or two 2067 mdl 2s) -- one 2870 can be
attached to each 2846 Channel Controller ... up to two 2860
Selector Channels in any combination of models can also be
attached to each 2846.
5/360 mdl 85, 195 and 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- two 2870s
can be attached. 2860 Selector Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels can also be attached. For combinations possible, see 3165, 3168, 3168-3 or 3195.
Note: The 2870 may be connected to another system channel
for channel-to-channel interconnection of two system channels.
However, the Channel-to-channel Adapter required for this
interconnection must be installed on the other channel, not the
2870 ... unbuffered devices precede buffered devices. A 2821
Control Unit should normally be last in priority because of the
high instantaneous data rates.
Prerequisites:
With 2065 or 2067 mdl 1 -- Channel Attachment (#9065) is
required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4. Channel Attachment (#9066) is required for channels addressed 5 and 6. See
"Specify" under 2065 or 2067.
With 2067 mdl 2 -- a 2846 Channel Controller is required.
With 2075 - a 2705 Attachment (#9820) is required on each
2870 ... see "Specify."
With 2085 - a 2085 Attachment (#9821) is required on each
2870 ... see "Specify." On the 2085, Channel Attachment
(#9065) is required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4.
Channel Attachment (#9066) is required for channels addressed
5 and 6. Consult Special Product Marketing Support.
With 3195 - a 3195 Attachment (#9828) is required on each
2870 ... see "Specify."
With 3165, 3168, 3168-3 -- a 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
----==-----=
--":' =
--- ----
M 2870
May 79
DP Machines
2870 Multiplexer Channel (conl'd)
(#9830) is required on each 2870 ... see "Specify." When
attaching this channel to a S/370 mdl 165. the 3165 must have
sufficient channel addressing capability... see "Channel
Attachment" under "Specify" for the 3165. For S/370 mdl 165
systems. the power distribution unit must be equipped for at
least the number of frames actually attached ... see "Channel
Frames" under "Specify" for the 3067 mdl 1. Channel Indirect
Data Addressing (#1861) is required for a system operating in
EC mode ... see "Special Features." Isolation Feature: An
appropriate Isolation Feature is required on any 2870 shipped
prior to December 29. 1967 ... see "Special· Features."
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360
S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V. or
#9905 for 230 V.
[2] Method of Installation: #9400. if 2870 will not be installed on
a raised floor.
[3] 2075 Attachment:
2075.
#9820
required for attachment to a
[4] 2085 Attachment:
2085.
#9821
required for attachment to a
[5] 3195 Attachment: #9828
required for attachment to a
3195. Note: 2870s serial no. 70.000 to 79.999 must be used with
a 3195.
[6] 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment: #9830 ... required for attachment to a 3165. 3168 or 3168-3. Note: 2870 serial nos. 70.000
to 79.999 must be used with a 3165,3168 or 3168-3.
[7] Unit Position: The 2870 is normally last on the channel bus of
a 2065. 2067 mdl1, 2075. 2085. 2846 or 3165. If two 2870s are
installed. one should be last and the other next to last on the
channel bus. #9501 must be specified for the 2870 which is next
to last. The 2870 which is last does not require a code. All
orders to add #9501 to an installed 2870 must specify the serial
no. and special features on the installed unit. On the 3168. 31683 or 3195. the bus Is two cable strings to which the channels are
attached. Therefore. when one or two 2870s are installed. they
should be last on separate strings. If on the same string. one
should be last and the other next to last. #9501 must be specified for the 2870 which is next to last on the string. The 2870
which is last on either string does not require a code. Note:
28705 with serial nos. 60.002 through 69,999 must be installed as the first 2870 with channel address of zero on all
systems except the S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl 165.
channels also attached). On a 2065 MP. the maximums are: Four
on the first 2870 ... none on the second. Prerequisites: #6991
requires #6990 ... #6992 requires #6991 ... #6993 requires
#6992.
Address Prefixing
Chnl Ind Data Addsg
Selector Subchannel
first
second
third
fourth
"FIC:
Mdl
Purchase
458
285
285
285
417
260
260
260
19,870
12,010
12,010
12,010
22.00
13.50
13.50
13.50
400
200
200
200
ISOLATION, CHANNEL-CONTROL UNIT (#4600, 4601). To turn
power on or off on the 2870 without introdUCing noise signals on
the I/O interface bus. #4600 -- for a 2870 with no Selector
Subchannels ... #4601 -for a 2870 with one or more Selector
Subchannels
(#6990-6993).
Maximum:
One
per
2870.
Prerequisite: #4601 requires at least #6990.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Isolation, Channel-Control Unit
without #6990
#4600
with #6990
4601
[10] Isolation Feature: The appropriate Isolation Feature must be
ordered for field installation on units shipped prior to December
29. 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
6990
6991
6992
6993
$3.50
2.50$3,040
ISOLATION FEATURES - one of the following features, as appropriate. must be ordered for field installation on each 2870 shipped
prior to December 29. 1967 ...
[9] Two-processor System: A 2870 which is to be used in a
S/360 mdl 67-2 with two 2067 mdl 2s requires Address Prefixing
(#1095) ... see "Special Features."
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
#1095 $129 $118 $5,565
1861
228 208 10,790
2870 Serial Nos. 60,000 - 69,999 ... $864
2870 Serial Nos. 70.000 - 79,999 ... $119
[8] Coior: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
$9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Special Feature Prices:
MMMC
$2,500 $2,275
$117,900 $145
2870
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDRESS PREFIXING (#1095). [For use on a S/360 mdl 67-2
only] One required on each 2870 in a two-processor system ...
provides prefixing to identify the processing unit that has initiated
an I/O operation. Maximum: One per 2870.
CHANNEL INDIRECT DATA ADDRESSING (#1861), For use on a
S/370 mdl 165 II or 168 ... 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on channel. Provides indirect address for
data transfer. Required for a system operating In EC mode.
SELECTOR SUBCHANNEL (#6990-6993), Each Selector Subchannel permits attachment of up to eight I/O control units for
devices with a data rate not exceeding 180KB ... see aggregate
data rates possible under "Highlights." Each selector subchannel
operates simultaneously with devices on the basic 2870 channel.
Limitation: Regardless of the number of control units attached. a
maximum of sixteen I/O devices can be attached to a selector
subchannel. #6990 - for first selector subchannel ... #6991 -for second ... #6992 - for third ... #6993 ~. for fourth.
Maximum: Four on the first or only 2870 (channel address 0) ...
two (#6990 and #6991) on the second 2870 (channel address 1
through 6. depending on the number of 2860 and 2880 logical
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
------- -----------------_.-
M 2880
May 79
DP Machines
2880 BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL
[6] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
Purpose: Block multiplexer channel(s) for attachment and control
of a wide variety of I/O control units in a S/360 mdl 85. 195. or
S/370 mdl 165, 168. 195.
[7] Unit Position: #9505. For the mdl 165, #9505 must be specified on the 2880 which is last on the channel bus. For a mdl
168 or 195, where there are two cable strings, each 2880
which is last on a string must have #9505 specified. All
orders to add #9505 to an installed 2880 must specify the
serial number and special features on the installed unit.
Model 1
Has one block multiplexer channel.
Model 2
Has two block multiplexer channels.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Channels permit data rates up to 1.5 million
bytes/second. With Two Byte Interface (#7850. 7851), data rates
up to 3.0 million bytes/second are possible .. , see "Special Features."
Provides up to 56 non-shared (block multiplex mode operation)
subchannels per block multiplexer channel, allowing up to 56
block multiplex devices to operate concurrently in a burst interleaved mode on the single data path of the channel. Thus, although only one device may actually be transmitting data at any
given instant, multiple channel programs may be concurrently
active for up to 56 block multiplex devices at one time. Up to
eight control units, of which seven may be block multiplexed, can
be attached to each channel, permitting a wide variety of attached
devices. There will always be one shared (non-block multiplex
mode operation) subchannel having all addresses not assigned to
non-shared subchannels. Subsequently, the shared channel will
always have at least 200 unit addresses and may have up to 256
unit addresses, depending on the number of non-shared subchannels plugged during installation. With the Extended UCW feature
installed, the capability of the channel to operate non-shared
subchannels is extended from 56 to 256.
All block multiplex devices must be assigned to a non-shared
subchannel. [Exception: The 2821 and 3811 control units may be
attached to either type of subchannel, bt non-shared subchannel
attachment is recommended.]
Can be connected to a S/360 or S/370 selector channel via a
Channel-to-channel Adapter (# 1850) on the selector channel. Can
be connected to a 4341 Processor via a Channel to Channel Adapter of
the block multiplexer channel of the 4341 Processor.
I/O operations are overlapped with processing and, depending
upon system considerations and upon data rate, all channels can
operate simultaneously.
Maximum: Up to three 2880s (six channels). in any combination
of models, can be attached. With Extended Channels (#3850) on
the 2085, #3851 on the 3195, #3850 on the 3165, or #3855 on
the 3168, up to six 2880s (twelve channels) may be attached to a
2085. up to seven 2880s (thirteen channels) may be attached to a
3195, or up to six 2880s (eleven channels) may be attached to a
3165, 3168 or 3168-3. See 3195, 3165, 3168 or 3168-3 for
allowable channel combinations. For 2085, consult Special Product Marketing Support.
Limitation: A 2820 Storage Control equipped with Storage Priority
(#7516) cannot be attached to a 2880.
PRICES:
2880
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
1
2
$3,705 $3,370
5,310 4,830
$121,850
174,500
$288
382
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: ~5%
Useful life Category: 1
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHANNEL INDIRECT DATA ADDRESSING (#1861, 1862). For
use on a S/370 mdl 165 II or 168 ... 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment (#9830) is required on channel. One is required on each
channel to provide indirect address for data transfer. Required for
a system operating in EC mode. #1861 -- for 2880 mdl 1 ...
#1862 -- for 2880 mdl 2. Maximum: One per 2880.
EXTENDED UNIT CONTROL WORDS (#3851, 3852). Extends
channel storage to 256 control words. May be installed on either
or both channels of a 2880 mdl 2. #3851 -- for mdl 1 or first
channel of a mdl 2 .,. #3852 -- for second channel of a mdl 2.
Limitation: Cannot be installed on the same channel with #7850
or #7851, RPQ WE4259 channel-to-channel adapter and specify
feature 2085 Attachment (#9821). Field Installation: Yes.
TWO BYTE INTERFACE (#7850, 7851). One is required on each
channel attaching a 2835 Storage Control mdl 1 for 2305 Fixed
Head Storage(s). #7850 -for a 2880 mdl 1 or the first channel of
a 2880 mdl 2 ... #7851 -- for the second channel of a 2880 mdl
2. Limitation: Cannot be installed on the same channel with
#3851 or #3852. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Channel Indirect Data Addressing
for 2880 mdl 1
#1861 $171
for 2880 mdl 2
1862 342
Extended Unit Control Words
for mdl 1 or 1st
chnl of mdl 2
3851
415
for 2nd chnl of mdl 2 3852 415
Two Byte Interface
formdl 1 or 1st
chnl of mdl 2
7850 432
for 2nd chnl of mdl 2 7851
432
Prerequisites:
With 2085 -- 2085 Attachment (#9821) is required on each
2880 ... see Specify. On the 2085, an appropriate Channel
Attachment (#9065-9069) may be required. Consult Special
Product Marketing Support.
With 3195 -- 3195 Attachment (#9828) is required on each
2880 ... see "Specify."
With 3165, 3168, 3168-3 -- a 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on each 2880 ... see "Specify." When
attaching the channel to a S/370 mdl 165, the 3165 must have
sufficient channel addressing capability... see "Channel
Attachment" under "Specify" for the 3165. For S/370 mdl 165
systems, the power distribution unit must be equipped for at
least the number of frames actually attached ... see "Channel
Frames" under "Specify" for the 3067 mdl 1. Channel Indirect
Data Addressing feature is required for a system operating in EC
mode ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] 2085 Attachment:
2085.
#9821
required for attachment to a
[3] 3195 Attachment:
3195.
#9828
required for attachment to a
[4] 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment: #9830 ... required for attachment to a 3165, 3168 or 3168-3.
[5] Method of Installation: #9400, if 2880 will not be installed on
a raised floor.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$156
311
$5,650 $1.00$1,540
11,240 2.00 3,090
378
378
13,100 4.50
13,100 4.50
393
393
14,220
14,220
370
370
5.00 2,645
5.00 2,645
----
I:
------:;~i.
_.-
M 3017 - 3027
May 79
DP Machines
3027 POWER AND COOLANT
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
3017 POWER UNIT
Purpo..: Provides power for a 3031 Processor or Attached Processor Complex.
Highlight.: One 3017 Power Unit Is required with each 3031
Processor ... two 3017s are required In an ,Attached Processor
Complex.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60,Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #11905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #g()6() for willow green, #9081 for garnet rose, #9082
for sunrise yellow, #9083 for classic blue, #9084 for charcoal
brown, #9085 for pebble gray, or #908e for pearl white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on Ihe floor.
[4] Unll Emergency Power Off: See 5/370 Inlallallon Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for delalls.
Monthly
3017
Mdl
Highlights: One 3027 Is required with each 3032 Processor.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Blbllogr.phy: GC20-0001
PRICES:
Purpoee: Provides power and coolant distribution required by a
3032 Processor Complex.
[2] Color: #9080 for willow green, #9081 for garnet rose, #9082
for sunrise yellow, #9083 for classic blue, #9084 for charcoal
brown, #9085 for pebble gray, or #9086 for pearl white.
PRICES: Mdl
3027
Monthly L••••
R.ntal Charg.
Charg. 4 V.ar
Pure h...
MMMC
1462
$20,000
S30
1420
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #11903 for
208 V, or #11905 for 230 V.
Plan Offering: Plan A, Addilional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful life Category: 2
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Monthly
Monthly L....
R.nt.1
Ch.rg.
Ch.rg. 4 V••r
Pureh...
MMMC
$3,825
$HIO,OOO
$210
$3,480
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Warranty: B
Useful life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
[3] Unit Emergency Power Off: See s/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -- --=
---=--- =-----':' =
M 3031
May 79
DP Machines
IBM
3031
PROCESSOR
PRICES:
3031
A2
2,097,152
3
A3
3,145,728
4
A4
4,194,304
5
A5
5,242,880
6
A6
6,291,456
$23,450 $21,320
26,490 24,090
29,530 26,860
33,080 30,100
36,120 32,870
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Bytes of Processor Storage
2
Highlights: Depending on the model, contains up to 6,291,456
bytes of monolithic processor storage .,. processor cycle time of
115 nanoseconds ... eight-byte parallel data flow with four-way
interleaving ... 128 word instruction buffer ... processor functions
are controlled by reloadable control storage ... includes 32,768
bytes of buffer storage which is transparent 10 the programmer
and reduces the effective cycle time of processor storage ... sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are implemented in high speed internal circuits with a four-byte data flow to
the I/E function.
Standard Features: S/370 Universal Instruction Set ... extended
preciSion floating point ... interval timer ... store and fetch protect
... byte oriented operand feature ... main storage error checking
and correction ... instruction retry ... dynamic address translation
... extended control mode ... program event recording .,. one
microsecond time-of-day clock with clock comparator ... one
microsecond CPU timer ... buffer storage (32,768 bytes) ... reloadable control storage .,. physically integrated channels ... VMA &
OS/VS1 ECPS ... S/370 Extended Facility... . .. compare and
swap ... compare double and swap .. , insert PSW key ... set PSW
key from address ... storage configuration control ... clear I/O ...
Unit Emergency Power Off.
Channels: Six channels are standard: One byte multiplexer channel and five block multiplexer channels. The byte multiplexer
channel is capable of a data rate of 40 to 75 kilobytes per second. A block multiplexer channel is capable of a data rate of up
to 1.5 megabytes per second. 256 subchannels per channel, of
which up to eight subchannels per channel may be shared. Channel Indirect Addressing is standard. One optional channel-tochannel adapter.
MLC
4 Yr
MRC
2
3
4
5
6
Purpose: Performs arithmetic, logic, processor storage, channel,
and control functions for a 3031 Processor or Attached Processor
Complex. 3031 A models are used with a 3041 Attached Processor.
Model
Mdl
23,910
26,950
29,990
33,540
36,580
21,740
24,510
27,280
30,520
33,290
Purchase
MMMC
$830,000
905,000
960,000
1,070,000
1,145,000
$2,450
2,590
2,730
2,930
3,070
850,000
925,000
1,000,000
1,090,000
1,165,000
2,505
2,645
2,785
2,985
3,125
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Maintenance: D
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 3
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Useful life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
2
3
4
5
From To
A2
A3
A4
A5
4
3
5
6
$75,000
$75,000
$90,000
$75,000
A3
A4
A5
A6
$75,000
$75,000
$90,000
$75,000
MODEL CONVERSION PURCHASE PRICE - 3031 to 3031
Model (no change In memory size)
A
$20,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
To interconnect
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one of
the processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit position on each of the connected channels. Function can be expanded under program control so that the adapter will operate as a
standard control unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct", and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processors or a cable-connected
processor and external devices. The read and write instructions
must use real addresses only. Maximum: One. Cable Order:
Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: External devices
must meet the interface specifications outlined in S/370 Direct
Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
Unit Emergency Power Off: See S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
Special Feature Prices:
PREREQUISITES: Each 3031 requires one 3036 Console and one
3017 Power Unit. Two 3017 Power Units, a 3036 Console, a
3041 Attached Processor, and a 3031 Processor Model A are
required in an Attached Processor Complex. See S/370 Instal/ation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal browm, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl
white.
MRC
MLC
4 yr
Chnnl·to-chnnl Adapter #1850 $410 $375
Direct Control
3274
104
95
Cabling: Cables can be used above or below the floor ... no specify
required.
Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a 3031 Processor Complex.
RETAIN/370: The capability of using remote service/logout
analysis facility is standard. Customer must provide interface
for this facility to the telephone line if he desires the feature
to be used.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase
MMMC
$15,000
3,700
$10.00
1.50
M 3032
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3032 PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, processor storage, channels
and control functions for a 3032 Processor Complex.
Model 2
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
2
4
To
4
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage
Model 4
4,194,304 bytes of processor storage
Model 6
6,291,456 bytes of processor storage
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can ci;mtain up to 6,291,456 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... double-word storage
accesses are four-way interleaved ... eight-byte parallel data flow
... includes 32,768 bytes of buffer storage which is transparent to
the program and significantly reduces the effective access time of
storage ... buffer storage does not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond processor cycle ... overlapped operation of instruction preprocessing and execution functions
... extensive data checking is coupled with increased availability
and serviceability. Improved instruction execution rates over the
3158-3. Improved availability and serviceability through dual
console and main storage reconfiguration functions.
Standard Features: Universal Instruction Set ... extended precision floating point ... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with
clock comparator ... one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation ... channel indirect data addressing ... extended
control mode ... program event recording ... monitoring ... byteoriented operand feature ... buffer storage (32,768 bytes) ... fetch
and store protection ... direct control feature ... six channels ...
S/370 Extended Facility ... remote log analysis and remote support facilities ... storage configuration control ... reloadable control
storage ... interval timer ... processor storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... clear I/O.
6
$172,000
$156,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850). To interconnect two
channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one of the
processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit position on
each of the connected channels. Function can Ile expanded under
program control so that the adapter will operate as a standard
control unit. Limitation: Cannot be installed on extended channels. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes .
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3850). Provides an additional group of
five block multiplexer channels and one byte multiplexer channel.
Prenquisite: #9145 on the 3027 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit ...
see "Specify" under 3027. Specify; Color - #9160 for willow green,
#9161 for garnet red. #9162 for sunrise yellow, #9163 for classic blue.
#9164 for charcoal brown. #9165 for pebble gray, or #9166 for pearl
white. Maximum; One. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO-BYTE INTERFACE (#7850). One is required on each channel attaching a 3838 Array Processor in two-byte mode or a 2305
Fixed Head Storage mdl 1. Maximum: One per channel group on
the first block multiplexer channel of that group. Prerequisite:
Second #7850 requires Extended Channels (#3850). Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: #9201 for standard channel group,
#9202 for extended channel group (#3850).
Special Feature Prices:
Chnl-to-Chnl Adapter
Extended Channels
Two-Byte Interface
Channels: Six functionally independent channels in one group are
standard. A group consists of one byte multiplexer channel and
five block multiplexer channels. Single block multiplexer channel
speed of up to 1.5 million bytes/second is standard and up to 3
million bytes/second with the Two-Byte Interface (#7850). Each
byte multiplexer channel will generally operate in the range of
40-75 KB/second. Each channel has 256 subchannels, of which
up to 8 subchannels/channel may be shared. One optional
channel-to-channel adapter per processor is available ... see
"Special Features."
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3850), a group of five
additional block multiplexer channels and one byte multiplexer
channel may be added. Availability and serviceability are improved
with the addition of this second group through the independent
maintenance capability of each channel group.
Prerequisites: Each 3032 requires [1] One 3027 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit ... [2] One 3036 Console ... and [3] An
appropriate 415 Hz power input. Customer-supplied chilled water
is required for cooling the system. See S/370 Installation Manual
- Physical Planning. GC22-7004.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Motor Generator and Starter: If desired, see M 10000 pages
for ordering instructions and prices.
[3] Unit Emergency Power Off: See S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
[4] Color: #9060 for willow green, #90151 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise_ yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white .
. MLC
PRICES Mdl
MRC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$40,700 $37,000 $1,590,000 $5,700
2
4
47,550
43,240
1,762,000 6,020
6
53,840
48,970
1,918,000 6,310
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: 0
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 1 5%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
3032
Model Changes: Field installable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
#1850
3850
7850
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$410 $375
9,900 9,000
38
35
Purchase MMMC
$15,000
360,000
1,400
$10
525
1
------= =--- -=--':' =
----- -
M 3033
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3033 PROCESSOR
Mdl
MRC
3033
U4
'U6
U8
U12
U16
$70,020 $63,660
76,280 69,360
82,360
74,900
95,650
87,010
107,810
98,090
M4
'M6
M8
M12
M16
70,220
76,480
82,560
95,850
108,010
63,840
69,540
75,080
87,190
98,270
3,075,500 7,215
3,230,500 7,535
3,380,500 7,815
3,708,5008,430
4,008,500 8,990
A4
·A6
A8
A12
A16
70,220
76,480
82,560
95,850
108,010
63,840
69,540
75,080
87,190
98,270
3,075,500
3,230,500
3,380,500
3,708,500
4,008,500
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control functions, processor
storage and channels for a 3033 Processor Complex. A and M
models provide multiprocessing function.
Models
U4
U6t
U8
U12
U16
M4
M6t
M8
M12
M16
Bytes of Processor Storage
A4
A8
All
A16
4,194,304
6,291,456
8,388,608
12,582,192
16,777,216
t Models U6 and M6 are no longer available.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can contain up to
16,777,216 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... double-words
are eight-way interleaved .. eight byte parallel data flow... includes 65,536 bytes of 57 nanosecond cycle buffer storage which
is transparent to the program and -significantly reduces the effective access time of storage ... buffer storage does not increase the
amount of addressable storage ... 57 nanosecond processor cycle
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution functions ...
extensive data checking is coupled with increased availability and
serviceability.
The A-series is basically identical to the M-series ... A or M designates
whether the model is used in an AP or MP complex.
Improved instruction execution times over the 3168-3. Improved
interrupt execution times over the 3168-3. Improved availability
and serviceability through integrated channels.
Standard Features: Universal Instruction Set ... extended precision floating point ... one microsecond time-of-day clock with clock
comparator ... one microsecond processor timer ... dynamic address translation ... extended control mode .,. program event
recording ... byte-oriented operand feature ... buffer storage
(65,536 bytes) ... fetch and store protection ... direct control
feature ... integrated channels ... S/370 Extended Facility .. .
storage configuration control ... reload able control storage .. .
interval timer ... storage error checking and correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare double and swap ...
insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address ... clear I/O.
In addition to the above, A and M models provide channel-set
switching and four additional instructions: signal processor ... set
prefix ... store prefix ... store CPU address.
Channels: Twelve integrated channels in two groups are standard.
Each group consists of 1 byte multiplexer channel and 5 block
multiplexer channels. Single channel block transfer rate of up to
1.5 million bytes/second is standard and up to 3 million
bytes/second with the Two-Byte Interface (#7850) installed on
the block multiplexer channel. 256 subchannels per channel, of
which up to 8 subchannels/channel may be shared. Two optional
channel-to-channel adapters per processor.
Prerequisites: Each 3033 requires one 3037 Power and Coolant
Distribution Unit, one 3036 Console, and an appropriate 415 Hz
power input. Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
The 3033 Attached Processor Complex requires a 3033 mdl A processor,
. a 3042 Attached Processor, a 3038 Multiprocessor Communication Unit,
two (2) 3036 Consoles, and two (2) 3037 Power and Coolant Distribution
Units [each equipped with Multiprocessing (#5050)].
A 3033 Multiprocessor Complex requires two 3033 mdl M processors, a 3038 Multiprocessor Communication Unit, two (2) 3036
Consoles, and two (2) 3037 Power and Coolant Distribution Units
[each equipped with Multiprocessing (#5050).] A 3033 Processor
mdl M must be attached to a 3038 whether or not a second processor is in the complex.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
•
Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
•
Unit Emergency Power Off: See S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
•
RETAIN/370: The capability of using remote service/logout
analysis facility is standard. Customer must provide interface
for this facility to the telephone line if he desires the feature to
be utilized.
MLC
4 Yr
Prices:
Purchase
MMMC
$3,070,000 $7,200
3,225,000 7,520
3,375,000 7,800
3,703,000 8,415
4,003,000 8,975
7,215
7,535
7,815
8,430
8,990
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 6
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
• Models U6, M6 and A6 are not available.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
3033 TO 3033 MODEL CONVERSION PURCHASE PRICE
3033 Model U to 3033 Model A or M
(no change in storage size) ..... $5,500
3033 Model A to 3033 Model M
(no change in storage size) ..... No Charge
3033 Model M to 3033 Model A
(no change in storage size) ..... No Charge
3033 to 3033 MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES
From
To
U8
U12
U16
$305,000 $633,000 $933,000
150,000 478,000 778,300
328,000 628,000
300,000
U4
U6
U8
U12
From To
M4
M6
M8
M12
From To
A4
A6
A8
A12
M8
M12
M16
$305,000 $633,000 $933,000
150,000 478,000 778,000
328,000 628,000
300,000
A8
A12
AI6
$305,000
150,000
$633,000
478,000
328,000
$933,000
778,000
628,000
300,000
Notes:
[1] There are no additional installation charges over the
above model conversion and model upgrade prices.
[2] The above model conversions and model upgrades are
field installable.
[3] Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades:
When a customer requires model (storage) upgrades in
addition to a model conversion, the changes must not be
consolidated into a single
Also, model (storage)
upgrades should be ordered individually in one-model
increments.
[4J Parts removed in upgrades from single density models (A4,
A6, A8 ... U4, U6, U8 ... M4, M6, M8) to double density models
(A12, A16 ... U12, U16 ... MIl, M16) become the property of
IBM and must be returned.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850 for first, #1851 for
second). To interconnect two channels (either S/360, S/370, or
4341 Processor). Only one of the processors requires this feature.
Uses one control unit position on each of the connected channels.
Function can be expanded under program control so that the
adapter will operate as a standard control unit. Limitation: Cannot be installed on extended channels. Maximum: Two, one
#1850 and one #1851. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3850). Provides four additional block
multiplexer channels, or three block multiplexer and one byte
multiplexer channels. Specify: #9150 for four block multiplexer
channels, or #9151 for three block multiplexer. and one byte
multiplexer channels. Prerequisite: #9145 on the 3037 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit ... see "Specify" under 3037. Specify: Color --
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--- ---
- ----
.:. ==:5 ';' ==
M 3033 - 3038
May 79
DP Machines
3033 Processor (conrd)
#9160 for wiilow green, #9161 for garnet rose, #9162 for sunrise yellow,
#9163for classic blue, #9164 for charcoal brown, #9165 for pebble gray,
or #9(66 for pearl white. Maxllmum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO-BYTE INTERFACE (#7850). One is required on each channel attaching a 3838 Array Processor in two-byte mode or a 2305
Fixed Head Storage mdl 1. Prerequisite: Third #7850 requires
Extended Channels (#3850). Maximum: One per channel group.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: #9201 for first channel group,
#9202 for second channel group, #9203 for extended channel
group.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
Channel-to-channel Adapter
First
#1850
Second
1851
3850
Extended Channels
Two-Byte Interface
7850
IBM 3037 POWER AND COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution required by a
3033 Processor or 3042 Attached Processor.
Highlights: One 3037 is used with each 3033 Processor or 3042
Attached Processor ... two 3037s are used in a 3033 AP or MP Complex.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
MLC
4 Yr Purchase MMMC
$410 $375
410 375
8,800 8,000
38
35
$15,000
15,000
320,000
1,400
$10
10
500
1
SPECIFY
o
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
o
Exteruled CllamtelB: #9145. Required if Extended Channels (#3850)
is installed on the 3033.
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9081 for garnet rose, #9082
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
o
IBM 3036 CONSOLE
Unit Emergency Power Off: See 5/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7DD4 for details.
o
Purpose: Provides the switches, lights, displays and control function for a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, 3031 Attached Processor Complex, or a 3042 Attached Processor.
Highlights: One 3036 is used with each 3031, 3032 or 3033
Processor, or 3031 Attached Processor Complex. Two 3036s are
used in a 3033 AP or MP Complex. Data can be entered into processor storage or into internal registers by means of the keyboard.
Contents of storage or internal registers of the processor can be
displayed.
Basic diagnostic tests of the processor complex, including processor, storage, channels and console can be operated from the
console. Dual displays, individually addressable, with their associated input keyboards and control logic combine to provide a complete console I/O function. Either display may be used by the
customer as an operator console or by the customer engineer as a
service support console.
Also included are devices for loading the control store from a
diskette drive, and a modem for the remote service facility. A
systems activity monitor is provided for the 3032 and 3033 Processors and the 3042 Attached Processor.
PREREQUISITE: Requires two c.ontrol unit positions and four
device addresses on a channel, or preferably on two channels if a
second channel group is installed [not on 3031]. A fifth device
address is required if the remote service option is elected.
PRICES: Mdl
3037
MLC
MRC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,825
$3,480
$160,000
$210
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036) ... Assignable Unit when attached to a 3042.
SPECIAL FEATURES
MULTIPROCESSING (#5050). Provides functions for operation in
a 3033 AP or MP complex ... required on each 3037 In a 3033
AP or MP complex. The 3037 must be attached to a 3033 A or M
model, or a 3042. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Multiprocessing
#5050
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$365 $335
Purchase MMMC
$10,000
$15
IBM 3038 MULTIPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION UNIT
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
o
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
o
Cabling: [For use with 3031 Processor only] #9080 for below
floor, or #9081 for on floor.
Unit Emergency Power Off: see 5/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
o RETAIN/370: May be used with a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Complex: However , it is not required. Remote Support Facility
(RSF) is a customer option. When the option is selected, customer must provide the telephone lines required for the remote
service facility modem. The customer must also arrange for the
connection of the telephone interface cable provided by IBM to
the telephone network. .
o
PRICES: Mdl
3036
1
Purpose: Control unit used in configuring a 3033 Attached Processor or Multiprocessor Complex. One is required for each complex.
Highlights: Contains hardware for communications between two
processors. Permits either processor and any channel to address all
processor storage.
Prerequisites ... Multiprocessing (#5050) on each 3037 in the
complex, plus:
In a 3033 AP Complex .- a 3033 model A processor and a
3042 Attached Processor.
In a 3033 MP Complex -- one or two 3033 model M
processors.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
o
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,585
$3,260
$150,000
$590
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (meters other units in Processor Complex)
when attached to a 3042, the 3036 is an assignable unit and it meters the
3042 and its associated 3037.
o
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9082
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
PRICES: Mdl
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
3038
$13,530 $12,300
$369,000 $340
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (in a 3033 AP Complex -- meter on 3036
Console of 3033 mdl A ... in a 3033 MP Complex -- meter on 3036 of
first 3033 mdl M installed.)
Notto be reproduced without written permission.
._----- ------
==-==";'=
M 3041 - 3042
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3041
ATTACHED PROCESSOR
IBM 3042 ATTACHED PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides Instruction/Execution Function, Buffer Control
Function, and communication logic for a 3031 Attached Processor
Complex.
Highlights
Can access up to 6 megabytes of monolithic processor storage on
the host 3031 Processor A model ... 11 5 nanosecond processor
cycle ... includes 32K bytes of high speed buffer storage ...
Instruction/Execution Function similar to that of the 3031 Processor ... Buffer Control Function similar to that of the 3031 ...
controlled by reloadable control storage.
Standard features include: Universal Instruction Set ... interval
timer ... store and fetch protect ... byte oriented operand feature
... instruction retry ... dynamic address translation .. extended
control mode ... program event recording ... time-of-day clock with
clock comparator ... CPU timer ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... Extended Precision Floating Point ... Virtual Machine Assist
(VMA) and OS/VS1 Extended Control Program Support (ECPS)
when operating under VM/370 ... S/370 Extended Facility.
Prerequisites: The 3041 requires a 3031 Processor A model and
a second 3017 Power Unit.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
Prices: Mdl
3041
1
MRC
$12,820
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, and control functions in a
3033 Attached Processor Complex.
Highlights: Can access up to 16,777,216 bytes of processor
storage on the host 30.33 Model A processor ... double-words are
eight-way interleaved ... eight byte parallel data flow ... includes
65,536 bytes of 57 nanosecond cycle buffer storage which is
transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective
access time of storage ... buffer storage does not increase the
amount of addressable storage ... 57 nanosecond processor cycle
. .. overlapped operation of instruction and execution functions ...
extensive data checking.
Standard Features: Universal Instruction Set ... extended precision floating point ... one microsecond time-of-day clock with clock
comparator ... one microsecond processor timer ... dynamic address translation ... extended control mode ... program event
recording ... byte-oriented operand feature ... buffer storage
(65,536 bytes) ... fetch and store protection ... direct control
feature ... S/370 Extended Facility ... reloadable control storage
... interval timer ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ...
compare double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key
from address ... channel-set switching and four instructions: signal
processor ... set prefix ... store prefix ... store CPU address.
Prerequisites: The 3033 Attached Processor Complex requires a
3042 Attached Processor, a 3033 Model A processor, a 3038
Multiprocessor Communication Unit, two (2) 3036 Consoles, two
(2) 3037 Power and Coolant Distribution Units [each with Multiprocessing (#5050)], and an approximate 415 Hz power input.
Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system.
See 8/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
MMMC
$11,660 $335,000
$900
Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Unit Emergency Power Off: See 8/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose,
#9062 for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for
charcoal brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl
white.
SPECIAL FEATURES
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274). Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct", and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data and channel operations. The read
and write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single
byte between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. The read and
write instructions must use real addresses only. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
8/370 - Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
Direct Control
$104
$ 95
#3274
Purchase MMMC
$3,700
Not to be
$ 1.50
RETAIN/370: The capability of using remote support/logout
analysis facility is standard. Customer must provide interface
for this facility to the telephone line if he desires to utilize this
feature.
Prices:
3042
Mdl
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$39,4OO $35,820
Purchase
MMMC
$895,500
$2,750
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 50%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Metering: Assignable Unit (meter on attached 3036)
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
r~produc~d
without writrenptU'mission.
--- -------== ===~=
M 3046 - 3052
May 79
DP Machines
3052 ATTACHED
IBM 3046 POWER UNIT
Purpose: Provides power for a 3135,3135-3 or 3138 Processing
Unit, or for a 3345 Storage and Control mdl 1, 2, 4 or 5 with a
3145 Processing Unit mdl HG or I.
Bibliography:
GC2G-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor: #9081 for qn the floor.
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Vear
Purchase MMMC
$10,860 $ 30
$356 $324
3046
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3135, 3138 or 3145)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45%t
Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
PRICES:
Mdl
PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control and communication
function for an Attached Processor System.
Highlights: Can access up to 6,291,456 bytes of monolithic processor storage on the host 3158 or 3158-3 ... 11 5 nanosecond
processor cycle ... includes 16,384 bytes of buffer storage which
is transparent to the programmer and reduces the elfective cycle
time accessing the host storage. Sixteen general purpose and four
floating point registers are implemented in high speed internal
circuits with a four byte data flow. The APU functions are controlled by reloadable control storage.
Standard features include: Universal instruction set ... interval
timer ... store and fetch protect ... byte oriented operand feature
... instruction retry ... dynamic address translation '" extended
control mode ... program event recording ... time-ol-day clock with
clock comparator ... CPU timer ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address.
PREREQUISITES: The 3052 Attached Processor Unit mdl 1 requires (1) A 3158 or 3158-3 A series processing unit ... (2) A
3056 Remote System Console.
Bibliography: GC2G-0001
Specify: [11 Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] #9041 for red, #9042 lor yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045 for
gray, or #9046 for white.
IBM 3047 POWER UNIT
Purpose: Provides power for a 3145 Processing Unit mdl H2,
HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2, or 3145-3,3148 Processing Unit.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 lor on floor.
[4] If two processors are installed and the 3052 is additional and
. emerEency power off ability is required on the systems, then the expanded Emergency l'ower Off Control (#3622) should be ordered for
the host processor.
.
Bibliography: GC2G-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[4] Field Conversion of a 3145 mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I to a
mdl H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2, requires a 3047 mdl 2.
Conversion from a mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I to a mdl JI2
or K2 will be made via RPQ.
PRICES:
Mdl
3052
1
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Vear
Purchase
MMMC
$12,670 $11,520 $380,000
$2,200
Plan Offering: A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Machine Group: D
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
Prlc..:
3047
Mdl
1
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 V..r
$378$344
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274). Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct", and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write Instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected proceSSing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/370 - Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
Purchase MMMC
$1~,550
$ 29
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3145 or 3148) Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45%t
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
Provides
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadecimal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended pre.:lsion operands
may also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may
be rounded to short-precision format. Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1480, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILlTV (#3950).
Provides the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440/1460 and
1410/7010 instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations ... see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for OS. Field InswUatlon: Yes. LImitation: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
System/370Extended (#7730).
OS/DOS COMPATIBILlTV (#5450). Provides the system with the
ability to execute DOS programs under specific conditions ... see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with.System/370Extended (#7730).
PROCESSOR ATTACH (#5552).
Provides additional storage
protect capability required when the APU is attached to a model
A-Series processing unit whose storage size Is over one megabyte.
One feature is required for each megabyte of storage in the ASeries processor above one megabyte, e.g.
t
Purchase OptioD is SO'll> UDder Term Lease P1aD (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written.permission.
------===
- - --':' =
----- - ---
M 3052 - 3058
May 79
DP Machines
3052 Attached Processing Unit (cont'd)
No. of Processor
Processor Model
Attach Feature
AP3 or AP4, A33 or A34
AP5,A35
AP6, A36
AP7,A37
AP8, A38
IBM 3058 MULTISYSTEM UNIT
1
2
3
4
5
Purpose: Control unit used in configuring a S/370 mdl 158 Multiprocessor System. One is required for each system containing one
or two 3158/3158-3 multiprocessor models.
Maximum: Five. Field Installation: Yes.
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites:
System/370 Extended (#7730) and
System/370 Extended. Add'i (#7731) on the A-series processor.
Limitation: This function cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950),
OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), or 7070/7074 Compatibility
(#7117).
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages in " Programming." Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at
IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730).
Highlights: Permits two 3158/3158-3 multiprocessing units to be
interconnected to form a multiprocessing system. Contains configuration control facilities for mode of operation (MP /UP), storage address assignment. and attachment of I/O control units
having the remote switch attachment feature.
PREREQUISITES: One or two 3158 multiprocessing models ... I/O
control units which are to be connected to the I/O assignment
switches on the configuration control panel must have the two
channel switch feature and the remote switch .attachment feature.
Field Installation: Yes.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [11 Color: #9041 for red. #9042 foryellow, #9043 for
blue. #9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[21 Processor Models: Must be specified.
Symmetrical Processors
Feature
MP1 or M31
#9501
MP2 or M32
9502
MP3 or M33
9503
MP4 or M34
9504
MP5 or M35
9505
MP6 or M36
9506
Asymmetric Processors
Left Processor
Feature
Right Processor
M32
M32
#9181
M34
9183
M34
M35
9185
M35
M36
M36
9187
M37
M37
9189
M38
9191
M38
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. Field Installation: Yes.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr Purchase
#3274 $123 $112
Direct Control
3700
NC
NC
Extnd Prec Fltng Pt
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility
3950
NC
NC
NC
NC
OS/DOS Compatibility
5450
5552
90
82
Processor Attach
NC
NC
7070/7074 Compatibility 7117
System/370 Extended
7730
935 850
8740
NC
Virtual Machine Assist
NC
MMMC
$3,705
NC
$ 4
NC
NC
NC
2,700
NC
17,000
NC
NC
NC
15
NC
6
NC
PRICES:
Highlights: Permits remote system operation up to 200 feet from
the 3158 or 3158-3, including the ability to communicate with the
operating system via PROGRAM frame, IPL via MANUAL frame,
system debug via ALTER/DISPLAY frame, and display hardware
status via maintenance frames. The unit has no light pen. Also,
acts as a diagnostic console for a 3052 Attached Processing Unit
(APU). permitting most APU maintenance functions to be performed while the A-Series Processing Unit continues operation in
uniprocessor mode. A 3056 attached to a 3052 is required as
part of a S/370 mdl 158 Attached Processor System. When attached to a 3052, the 3056 may not be used as a remote console.
A 3056 attached to a 31 58 or 31 58-3 for remote system operation
may not be used as a diagnostic console for the 3052. If both
modes of operation are required for a S/370 mdl 158 AP System.
two 3056s should be ordered.
$46,990
SPECIAL FEATURES
TLP/
Special Feature Prices:
I/O Assign Sw Expan
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr
Bibliography: GC20-0001
3056
Mdl
$ 545 $ 496
Purchase MMMC
$20,800
$ 10
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3158, 3158-3 or 3052)
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
t
Purchase MMMC
#4800 $112 $102 $5,495
limitations: (1) One per 3158 or 3158-3 ... (2) One per 3052 ...
when attached to a 3052, the maximum distance between the
3056 and the 3052 is twenty feet.
PRICES:
$21.50
I/O ASSIGNMENT SWITCH EXPANSION (#4800).
Adds an
additional 14 assignment switches to the basic .14 on the configuration panel of the 3058. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Field Installation: Yes.
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
9192
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 1 st 3158 mdl MP or M3 installed)
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
PREREQUISITE: 3056 Remote Console Attachment (#7820) on
the 3158 or 3158-3. Not required when the 3056 is attached to a
3052.
MAC/
MRC
9190
Purchase MMMC
$1,370 $1,250
3058
IBM 3056 REMOTE SYSTEM CONSOLE
Purpose: Provides an additional keyboard and cathode ray tube
for remote operation of a S/370 mdl 158 or is used as a diagnostic console for the 3052 Attached Processing Unit.
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
TLP
MLC
4 Yr
Feature
#9182
9184
9186
9188
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 1
._----- -------
==-==';-E:
M 3060 - 3062
May 79
OP Machines
IBM 3060 SYSTEM CONSOLE
IBM 3062 ATT A-CHED PROC ESSI N G UNIT
[No Longer Available]
Purpoae: Provides the switches and lights necessary to operate
the S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl 195.
Highlights: One unit is used with each 3195 Processing Unit.
Data can be entered Into processor storage or into internal registers by keys and switches. Contents of storage or Internal registers of the mdl 195 can be displayed. Basic maintenance tests of
the processor, including storage, can be operated from the console. A display console is included which Is functionally equivalent
to a 2250 mdl 1 with the following features: Alphameric keyboard,
8K buffer (4K Is maintenance only), character generator, light pen,
and OCP-Flrst. The display console and Operator Console Panel
which are Included may be used as an operator's console.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a 2860, 2870 with
Selector Subchannel (special feature), or a non-shared subchannel
of a 2880.
Bibliography: GC2()"()001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special feature Is on an "as available" basis for field
installation.
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL - SECOND (#5476). Provides a
duplicate of the on/off and program load facilities (OCP) of a
second processing unit. Maximum: One.
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control, and communication
function for an Attached Processor System.
Highlights: Can access up to 8,388,608 bytes of monolithic processor storage on the host 31 68-3 ... eight byte parallel data flow
... includes up to 32,768 bytes of 80 nanosecond cycle buffer
storage which is transparent to the program and significantly
reduces the effective cycle time of storage ... buffer storage does
not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond
processor cycle ... double-words are four-way interleaved ... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units ... extensive
data checking is coupled with 3168-3 reliability, availability and
serviceability. Improved availability and serviceability through a
service processor.
Standard Features: Universal instruction set ... extended p"'cislon ... one-microsecond time-of-day clo.ck with clock comparator
... one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation ...
extended control mode ... program event recording ... additional
variable field length instructions ... control registers, expanding the
functions of PSWs ... byte oriented operand feature ... buffer
storage (32,768 bytes) ... fetch and store protection ... writeable
control storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... store CPU 10, additional instructions on the APU signal processor ... set prefix store prefix ... store CPU address.
PREREQUISITES: The 3062 APU mdl 1 requires: [1] A 3168
model A series processor ... [2] A 3066 System Console mdl 3
(shared with 3168-3) ... [3] A 3067 mdl 5 for the APU ... [4] A
3062 Mdl 1 Attached Processing Unit Support (#7901) on theCPU 3067 mdl 3 ... [5] An appropriate 415Hz power input.
Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system.
See S/370 Installation Manual - Phyical Planning, GC22-7004 ...
[6J SpeCial features on the 3062 must matcl! those on the 3168 for a
normal installation. When special features do not match, RPQ
must be ordered for the 3168.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Motor Generator Set and Starter if desired:
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
See M 10000
[4] If two processors are installed and the 3062 is added and emergency
power off ability is required on the systems, then the expanded Emergency Power Off Control (#3624) should be ordered for the host
processor.
.
PRICES:
Mdl
3062
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
$53,000 $48,190
Purchaae
MMMC
$1,078,000 $5,100
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Non-assignable (runs with Processor)
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPL Y (4525). Improves AU speed in both fixed
and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3066 System Console mdl 3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant
Distribution Unit mdl 5.
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. PrerequiSites: System/370 Extended (#7730) on the Aseries processor or on a 3168 with RPQs
(Performance
Improvements) and
(APU Attach).
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr
High Speed Multiply #4525 $3,035$2,760
System/370 Extended 7730 3,575 3,250
t
Purchue Option iJ SO'- uncler Term l.eue Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$145,950 $131
65,000
50
------- - - - ----- - ---
=:::::E';"5:
M 3066
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3066 SYSTEM CONSOLE - M.ODEL 1
[The 3066 model 1 is no longer available ... features and model
changes can be ordered on an "as available" basis.]
Purpose: Provides the switches, lights, display and control functions for a S/370 mdl 165.
Highlights: One 3066 mdl 1 is used with each 3165 Processing
Unit. Data can be entered into processor storage or into internal
registers by keys and switches. Contents of storage or internal
registers of the system can be displayed.
Basic maintenance tests of the processor, including storage, can
be operated from the console. A display console with a 4K buffer,
an input keyboard, and associated control. logic combine to provide a complete console I/O function. In normal mode, the CRT
and the alphameric keyboard are designed to be used as the
operator's console.
Also included is a microfiche projection display, a microfiche
document viewer, a main storage configuration plugboard, a systems activity monitor, and a device for inputting microcode from a
magnetic disk cartridge to the writable control storage.
A 3066 mdl 3 is used with each 3168-3 A series to support a
3062-1 APU.
Basic maintenance tests of the processor, including storage, can
be operated from the console. A display console with a 4K buffer,
an input keyboard, and associated control logic combine to provide a complete console I/O function. In normal mode, the CRT
and the alphameric keyboard are designed to be used as the
operator" s console.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a 2860 Selector Channel, 2870 Basic Multiplexer Channel, 2870 Selector Subchannel
(special feature), or a non-shared subchannel of a 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Also included is a microfiche projection display, a microfiche
document viewer, a main storage configuration plugboard, a systems activity monitor, and a device for inputting microcode from a
magnetic disk cartridge to the writable control storage.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a 2860 Selector Channel, 2870 Basic Multiplexer Channel, 2870 Selector Subchannel
(special feature), or a non-shared subchanne.I of a 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Mdl
3066
[2] 3168-3 Attachment: #9650 ... req·d to attach a 3168-3 Processing Unit.
PRICES:
3066
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
. PRICES:
Bibliography: GC20-0001
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$3,825
$128,150
$552
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meters 3165, 3067 mdl 1)Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Modell to Model 2 ..... $ 4,165
Modell to Model 3 .•... $ 8,715
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4520). Required if feature #4520 is
installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4520) on the
3165 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117).
Required if feature
#7117 is installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
Prerequisite:
7070/7074
Compatibility
(#7117) on the 3165 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7118).
Required if feature #7118 is
installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7118) on the
3165 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
709/7090/709417094 " COMPATIBILITY (#7119). Required if
feature #7119 is installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7119) on the 3165 and
on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
High Speed Multiply
7070/7074 Compatibility
7080 Compatlblllt~
709/709017094/ 094"
Compatibility
#4520
7117
7118
$ 10
5
5
7119
5
$
589
262
262
NC
NC
NC
262
NC
2
3
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,825
3,960
$3,480
3,600
$128,150
132,700
$552
562
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meters 3168[any mdl], 3067 mdl 2, 3)
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Machine Group: 0
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges.)
Model 2 to Model 3 ..... $4,550
Note: The 3066 mdl 1 can be field upgraded to a 3066 mdl 2 or
3.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges.)
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required if feature #4525 is
installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 2, 3 or 5.
MULTIPROCESSING (#5050).
Required if the 3066 mdl 2 is
used with a 3168 or 3168-3 multiprocessor model. Field
Installation: Yes.
POWER WARNING (#5760). Provides signal to the 3168/31683 system when power is outside specified limits. Prerequisites: All
models require customer supplied uninterruptible power supply
with line sensor. Multiprocessing models also require special cable
... consult physical planning representative. Field Installation: Yes.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127).
Required if feature
#7127 is installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit. Field
Installation: Not recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127) on the 3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2 or 3.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Required if feature #7128 is
installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on
the 3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 2 or 3.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129). Required if
feature #7129 is installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit.
Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094
II
Compatibility
(#7129)
on
the
3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 2 or 3.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
Purpose: Provides the switches, lights, display and control functions for a S/370 mdl 168.
High Speed Multiply
#4525 $ 10 $ 10 $ 589
4,475
Multiprocessing
5050
90
82
5,725
Power Warning
5760 142 130
5
5
262
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127
7080 Compatibility
7128
5
5
262
709/7090/7094/7094 II
262
Compatibility
7129
5
5
Highlights: One 3066 mdl 2 is used with each 3168/3168-3
Processing Unit. Data can be entered into processor storage or
internal registers by keys and switches. Contents of storage or
internal registers of the 3168/3168-3 can be displayed.
t
IBM 3066 SYSTEM CONSOLE - MODEL 2 AND
3
Purchase Option is SO% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without wriUen permission.
NC
$ 1
1
NC
NC
NC
._--- ---------
M3067
May 79
== .::= ';'E:
DP Machines
3067 POWER and COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL
1
[The 3067 model 1 Is no longer available .. features and model
changes can be ordered on an "as available" baslsJ
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a S/370 mdl 165.
3067 POWER and COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL
2
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a S/370 mdl 168.
Highlights: One 3067 mdl 2 is used with each 3168 Processing
Unit.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Highlights: One 3067 mdl 1 Is used with each 3165 Processing
Unit.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Bibliography:
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (Ae, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color:
#9042 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Channel Frames: The number of channel frames specified on
the power distribution unit must be equal or greater than the
channel frames actually attached. Required for channel frame
attachment are the following:
#9132 - for 2nd channel frame
#9133 - for 3rd channel frame ... #9132 required
#9134 - for 4th channel frame ... #9133 required
#9135 - for 5th channel frame ... #9134 required
#9138 - for 6th channel frame ... #9135 required
#9137 - for 7th channel frame ... #9136 required
NOTE: Customers who may elect to purchase and have present
or future requirements for seven channel frames should order
#9132 thru #9137.
PRICES:
Mdl
3087
1
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3087
2
$2,825
Purchase
MMMC
$ 2,825
$95,~30
$131
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 1)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase
MMMC
$2,570
$95,130
$131
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 2)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model 2 can be changed to Model 3 in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 2
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
to Model 3 .••••••• $1,230
SPECIAL FEATURES
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1435).
Required if feature #1435 Is
installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Buffer Expansion (#1435) on the 3168.
Note: The 3067 mdl 1 can be field upgraded to a 3067 mdl 2.
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required If feature #4525 Is
installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequlalte: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3168 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
Installation charges)
Multiprocessing (#5050). Required if the 3067 is used with a
3168 mdl MP. Field Installation: Yes.
From Model 1 to Model 2 ••••• $ 3,040
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Required If feature #7127
is Installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127) on
the 3168 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1432).
Required If feature #1432 Is
Installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequlalte: Buffer Expansion (#1432) on the 3165.
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4520). Required if feature #4520 is
installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4520) on the
3165 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 1.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117). Required if feature #7117
is' Installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117) on
the 3165 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 1.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7118).
Required if feature #7118 is
Installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7118) on the
3165 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 1.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7119). Required If
feature #7119 Is Installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II (#7119) on the 3165 and on the 3066
System Console mdl 1.
t
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129).
Required If
feature #7129 is installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3168 and
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
TI.P/
Special Feature Prices:
#1432
4520
7117
7118
7119
$114 $ 5,630
148
7,105
422 20,440
422 20,440
422
20,440
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr
Purchase MMMC
Buffer Expansion
#1435 $114 $104 $ 5,630
High Speed Multiply
4525 148 135
7,105
MultiprocesSing
5050 342 311
16,720
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127 422 384 20,440
7080 Compatibility
7128 422 384 20,440
709/7090/7094/709411
Compatibility
7129 422 384 20,440
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
SpecIal Feature Prices:
Buffer Expansion
High Speed Multiply
7070/7074 Compatibility
7080 Compatibility
709/7090/7094/7094 II
Compatibility
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Required if feature #7128 is
installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on the
3168 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
$ 5.00
5.00
35.50
35.50
35.50
Purcbaac Option is SO'll> wuIer Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 5.00
5.00
23.00
35.50
35.50
35.50
-------=== ':' =
---- ----
M 3067 - 3068
May 79
DP Machines
3067 POWER and COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL
3
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a 8/370 mdl 168.
Hlghllghta: One 3067 mdl 3 is used with each 3168-3 Processing
Unit.
Bibliography: GC2Q-OOOl
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
3067
MAC/
Mdl -M& MRC
3
ee&
$2,875
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$2,615
$96,360
$132
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate:l0%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 2)
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
3067
5
$2,825
$2,570
$95,130
$131
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 3)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required if feature #4525 is
installed on the 3062 Attached Processing Unit. Fletd Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on
the 3062 Attached Processing Unit and on the 3066 System
Console mdl 3.
High Speed Multiply
MULTIPROCESSING (#5050). Required if the 3067 is used with
a 3168-3 multiprocessing model. Field Installation: Yes.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Required if feature #7127
Is installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127) on
the 3168-3 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Required if feature #7128 is
installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on the
3168-3 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
#4525 $148 $135 $7,105
$5
3068 MULTISYSTEM COMMUNICATION UNIT
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required if feature #4525 is
Installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3168-3 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Purpose: Control unit used in configuring a S/370 mdl 168 Multiprocessor System. One is required for each system containing one
or two 3168/3168-3 multiprocessor models.
Highlights: Contains hardware for communications between two
S /370 mdl 168 multiprocessing processors together with configuration control facilities for mode of operation (MP /UP), storage
address assignment, and attachment of I/O control units having
the remote SWitch attachment feature.
PREREQUISITES: One or two 3168/3168-3 multiprocessor models
... I/O control units which are to be connected to the I/O assignment switches on the configuration control panel must have the
two channel switch feature and the remote switch attachment
feature. If the 3068 is to be installed with only one of the 3168/3168-3
multiprocessors models, order additional end cover via RPQ
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129).
Required If
feature #7129 is installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
PrereqUisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3168-3 and
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
Field Installation: Yes.
3062 ATTACHED PROCESSING UNIT MDL 1 SUPPORT (#7901).
Required if a 3062 APU mdl 1 is attached to the 3168. Field
Installation: Yes. Corequlslte: 3062 APU mdl 1.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
#4525 $148 $135 $ 7,105 $ 5.00
High Speed Multiply
5050 342 311 18,720 23.00
Multlproceaalng
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127 422 384 20,440 35.50
7080 Compatibility
7128 422 384 20,440 35.50
709/7090/7094/709411
Compatibility
7129 422 384 20,440 35.50
3062 APU Support
7901
50
48
2,500
5.00
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase. 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
PRICES:
3068
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
$14,590 $13,270
Purchase
MMMC
$500,800
$387
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Purchase Option: 55%t Warranty: A
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
3067 POWER AND COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL 5
EXTENDED STORAGE ATTACHMENT (#3850),
Provides for
attachment of Extended Storage Control (t4MB) if either processor
is a model MP5, MP6. MP7, MP8. M35, M36, M37 or M38.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a 3062 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
I/O ASSIGNMENT SWITCH EXPANSION (#4600).
Adds an
additional 14 assignment switches to the basic 14 on the configuration panel of the 3068. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Highlights: One 3067 mdl 5 is used with the 3062 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
PREREQUISITE: A 3062 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
Special Feature Prices:
Bibliography: GC2Q-0001
Extended Storage Attach #3850 $140 $128
I/O Assign Sw Expansn
4600 112 102
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
$6,875
5,495
NC
$ 1 ,
-------
-- ---------------
--_.-
M 3080 - 3086
May 79
DP Machines
3080 POWER UNIT
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: Provides power for the S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl
195.
Highlights: One unit of each model of the 3080 Is used with each
3195 Processing Unit. Model 1 provilles power for the Floating
Point Execution Element ... Model 2 provides power for the Fixed
Point and Variable Field Length Execution Element ... Model 3
provides power for the Instruction Processor and the Storage
Control Unit.
Bibliography: GC2~0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3085 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: Provides power control and distribution for a S/360 mdl
195 or S/370 mdl 195.
Highlights: One unit is used with each 3195 Processing Unit.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3086 COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: Provides distribution control for coolant required by the
S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl 195.
Highlights: One unit Is used with each 3195 Processing Unit.
PREREQUISITE: Customer-supplied chilled water is required for
the cooling system. See 8/360 'nstallatlon Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-6820.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- --------------_.-
M 3115.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3115 PROCESSING UNIT
conditions and provides control for the display, keyboard, console
file and optional console printer.
Purpose: Provides main and control storage, plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for a S/370 mdl 115 including a direct disk attachment.
The standard console file is the basic microprogram loading device
for the system. It contains a small file device, which reads and
writes on a removable magnetic IBM Diskette. The diskettes that
will be supplied with the system will contain the required microcode for the basic system, the optional features ordered for the
system, and CE diagnostics.
The 3115-0 and 3115-2 Processing Units are available in the
following model groups:
Models:
3115-0
3115-2
FE
FE2
98,304 bytes
G
G2
131,072 bytes
GE
GE2
1 63,840 bytes
GF
GF2
196,608 bytes
H2
262,1 44 bytes
HG2
Dynamic Address Translation (DAT) is a standard facility on the
model 115. Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the
amount of available real storage, program size may exceed real
storage size. This logical storage is referred to as "virtual
storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes on the model
115.
65,536 bytes
F2
For differences between
"Systems" pages.
~
Processor Storage Size
F
393,216 bytes ~
the two
model
The CE logout of machine and 1/0 related control checks and
errors are recorded on the diskette for CE diagnosis, to enhance
the reliability, availability, and serviceability of the S/370 mdl 115.
series refer to
the
NOTE: If 3411 Magnetic Tape and Control is attached see Magnetic
Tape Adapter special feature paragraph for RPQ requirement.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, 65,536 to 393,216 bytes
of processor storage are available. The basic main memory cycle
time is 480 nanoseconds for 2 bytes. Sixteen general, sixteen
control and four floating point registers are provided. The system
design provides distributed microcoded processors within the
Central Processing Unit for the independent handling of programs,
input/output processing and diagnostic/maintenance.
Direct
attachment of the 3340 DASF Subsystem or the 3340/3344 DAS
Subsystem (3115-2 only) is provided. Depending on model and
features up to eight drives can be attached. In a 3340 DASF
Subsystem, via the string switch capability (#9315), the 3340 mdl
A2 can be shared with another S/370, except 3115-0 and 3125O. For details and restrictions refer to the Direct Disk Attachment
paragraph.
The 2311 Mdl 1/3340 - Series and the 2314/3340 - Series
Compatibility features are available as options. They are mutually
exclusive. Emulation is under DOS and DOS/VS only. 2311 mdl 1
emulation under DOS/VS requires SYSRES on 3340.
Capability to attach the 3803/3420 or 3411/3410 magnetic tape
subsystem model 1, 2 or 3 via the optional Magnetic Tape Adapter.
Capability to natively attach one of the following card 1/0: 2560
mdl A1 or A2, or the 5425 mdl A1 or A2 (96 column card) via the
optional Integrated Card I/O Attachment features.
Capability to attach a wide variety of I/O devices via the optional
Byte Multiplexer Channel. NOTE: The Integrated Card I/O Attachment and the Byte Multiplexer Channel cannot be installed on the
same system unless RPQs
are installed.
Capability to natively attach the 5213 Printer mdl 1 (85 cps) is
provided with the optional integrated console printer attachment on
the 3115. This console printer provides hardcopy output of operator messages presented on the Display Operator Console (DOC).
The optional 1052 Compatibility feature is available to emulate the
1052 Printer keyboard in the S/370 mdl 115. 1052 Compatibility
(#8005) in combination with the 5213 Printer mdl 1 allows the
model 11 5 to be used as a remote workstation with HASPRMT /360. NOTE: The 1052 compatibility mode is not supported
under DOS/VS. With DOS/VS, the 5213 mdl 1 will act as a slave
unit to the DOC.
Capability to attach up to 5 synchronous lines, or up to 4 synchronous and up to 8 asynchronous lines is provided by the optional
Integrated Communications Adapter with appropriate features.
Capability to attach the 5203 Printer mdl 3 or 3203 Printer mdl 1
or 2 is provided with optional Integrated Printer Attachment features.
The optional S/360 Model 20 and 1401/144011460 Compatibility
features are available to allow execution of the instructions of
those programs.
Standard features include S/370 commercial instruction set,
Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Address Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program Event Recording (PER),
Monitor Call, interval timer, time-of-day clock, CPU-Timer and
Clock Comparator, store and fetch protect, byte oriented operand
feature, error checking and correction of single bit errors on main
storage, and Audible Alarm.
Control Storage: On the 3115-0, reloadable control storage for
the Service Processor (SVP), and Direct Disk Attachment and the
basic part of the Machine Instruction Processor (MIP) is provided
as standard on the 3115 Processor Unit. In addition, reloadable
control storage is provided with the optional Card 1/0 Attachment,
Printer Attachment, Integrated Communications Adapter' (lCA), Byte
Multiplexer Channel. The MIP contains as standard, 20K words of
22 bits of control storage and may be expanded either to 24K
words (4K Control Storage Extension, #4101) or to 28K words
(8K Control Storage Extension, #4104). #4101 and #4104 are
mutually exclusive. See Chart A below for possible feature combinations and control storage requirements.
NOTE: Customers who elect to purchase the 4K Control Storage
Extension and later upgrade to the 8K Control Storage Extension
should consider the purchase of the 8K Control Storage Extension
initially because this field upgrade requires replacement of the 4K
Control Storage Extension and installation of the 8K Control Storage Extension. This is, however, not recommended for customers
considering to eventually convert to a 3115-2.
On the 3115-2, the Instruction Processing Unit (lPU) contains as
standard, 12K words of control storage. Certain feature combinations can use up to two additional 4K words increments totaling
20K words of control storage. See Chart B for details.
Chart A: Listed below are the valid feature combinations and their
respective requirements for additional control storage on the
3115-0
Optional Features -- Model
3115-0
Ba sic
Control
Storage
Floating Point
*3900**
Floating Point
incldg Ext'd
PreCision
_*3910**
l'401/1440/1460
J:mPlbhy *4457
S/360 Mdl20
x
Cmptblty*7520
2311-1/3340
Series Cmptblty
*8060***
2314/3340
Series Cmptblty
*8070***
x
4K Control Storage
Extension '" *4101
Req uired*
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxx
x
x
x
xx
x
xx
II
8K Control Storage
Extension •.. *4104
Required *
xx
xxxxxx
Ix
x
x
• #4101 and #4104 are mutually exclusive.
** #3900 and #3910 are mutually exclusive.
• •• #8060 and #8070 are mutually exclusive. In addition,
#8060 and #8070 are mutually exclusive with specify #9190.
The Display Operator Console (DOC) is an integral part of the
S/370 mdl 115 and enhances operator-machine communications.
Data can be entered into main storage or into internal registers via
the keyboard. Contents of storage or internal registers of the
S/370 mdl 115 can be shown on the video screen with 16 lines of
56 characters/line. A portion of the screen is reserved to display
machine status. The Service Processor (SVP) continuously monitors system operation and logs errors on the magnetic IBM Diskette device. The SVP initiates recovery on detection of error
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
x
xx
x
xxxxx
X
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
M 3115.~
Jul79
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Chart B: Listed below are the valid feature combinations and their
respective requirements for additional control storage on the
115-2.
Second Control
Storage InereFirst Control Storage
Optional Feattfts Basic
ment -14101 &
Control
Increment - .4101
- Model 3115-2
.4102 Required
Storage Required
Floating Point in]I X X x
x x
x
X
xx
cluding Extended
Precision *3910
1401/1440/1460
x x
x x
x x x
Compatibility
x
#4457 *"
S/360 Mdl 20
x x
x
x
x
x x x
Compatibility
#7520*"
2311-1/3340
x
x
x
x
x x
Series Cmptblty
*8060*
2314/3340
x
x
x x
x
Series Cmptblty
i~
1#8070*
..
• #8060 and #8070 are mutually exclUSIve. In addItIOn, #8060 and
#8070 are mutually exclusive with Specify feature #9190 or 3344
Attachment specify feature #9317.
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) and S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520) are mutually exclusive (may not be ordered on the same
is installed on the 3115-2). NOTE: RPQ
system unless RPQ
cannot be installed if the 2311 Mdl 1/3340-Series Compatibility (#8060) or 2314/3340-Series Compatibility (#8070) is installed.
Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317).
Specify feature #9315 is mutually exclusive with #4102 and/or #4460.
Input/Output Attachments - Native: The following integrated I/O
attachments/adapters are provided for controlling the designated
1/0 devices. They are designed to interact with their respective
I/O devices and should be installed/removed with them since the
system is inoperative with only the attachment/adapter installed.
Direct Disk Attachment (standard) -- this attachment is provided
to attach the 3340 mdl A2 dual drive unit and control directly to
the S/370 mdl 115. The attachment is addressed as channell.
This attachment provides block multiplexing.
3340 DASF SUBSYSTEM. On the 3115-0 one 3340 mdl A2 and
one 3340 mdl B2/Bl can be attached to provide up to four
spindles. On the 3115 mdl 2 (w/o 3344 Attachment #9317) one
3340-A2 and up to three 3340 mdl Bl/B2s can be attached to
provide up to eight spindles.
3340/3344 DAS SUBSYSTEM. On the 3115-2 with 3344 Attachment #9317 installed: One 3340 mdl A2 and any combination of
up to three 3340 mdl Bl/B2s and 3344 mdl B2/B2Fs can be
attached. With the String Switch (#8150) installed, the 3340 mdl
A2 may be shared with another S/370 except 3115-0 and 3125O. Specify features, String Switch Capability (#9315) and 3344
Attachment (#9317) are mutually exclusive. String Switch capability is not supported on a 3344 configuration. 4K DASF Control
Storage Extension is required when either #9315 or #9317 is
installed. Specify Fixed Head Attachment (#9190) if Fixed Head
Feature is installed on 3340 Series drives. See Chart A for
control storage requirements.
Magnetic Tape Adapter (optional) -- this feature attaches one of
the following tape control units and is addressed as channel 2:
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 -- tape control
(20KB) housing one tape drive. Up to three 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1s may be attached to the 3411 mdl 1.
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 2 -- tape control
(40KB) housing one tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic
Tape Unit mdl 2s may be attached to the 3411 mdl 2.
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 3 -- tape control
(80KB) housing one tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic
Tape Unit mdl 3s may be attached to the 3411 mdl3.
3803 Tape Control mdl 3 -- up to eight 3420 mdl 3 (120KB) or
mdl 5 (200KB) may be attached to the 3803.
Integrated Card I/O Attachments (optional) -- these features
provide native attachment of one of the following: 2560 Multifunction Card Machine mdl A 1 or A2
5425 Multi-function Card Unit mdl A1 or A2
The Integrated Card I/O Attachment uses channel O.
address X'OOD' is reserved for the 2560 or 5425.
Device
on the 3203. On the 5203, UCS control may be specified on
Integrated 5203 Mdl 3 Attachment (#4690).
Integrated Console Printer Attachment (optional) -- attaches the
5213 Printer mdl 1 to the 3115 to provide hardcopy of operator
messages presented on the standard Display Operator Console.
It uses address X'Ol F' (same as the Display Operator Console)
on Channel O. When the 1052 Compatibility feature is installed,
the 5213 Printer mdl 1 is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) (optional) -- provides
the basic control storage and common circuits for direct attaChment of up to five synchronous (BSC) communications lines OR
up to eight asynchronous (start/stop) lines. See individual ICA
features for limitations. The Integrated Communications Adapter
Extension (I CAE) provides the capability to attach up to four
BSC AND up to eight start/stop lines. IBM line adapters are
provided within the model 115.
Input/Output Channel:
Byte Multiplexer Channel (Optional) -- provides for the attachment of a wide variety of low speed devices. The single channel
available on the S/370-115 is functionally equivalent to the Byte
Multiplexer Channel on S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30 and 40 and
provides for a maximum of up to 8 control unit positions. 32
subchannels are provided as standard and are divided into 8
shared and 24 unshared subchannels.
The Integrated Card I/O Attachments and the Byte Multiplexer
Channel cannot be installed together on the same system unless
RPQs
are installed.
Console Function - system control functions are provided by the
standard integrated Display Operator Console. It has the
switches, keyboard, and lights necessary to operate and control
the system. It uses address X'Ol F' on channel O. The 5213 mdl
1 console printer (85 cps) may be attached optionally.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Specify Fixed Head Attachment (#9190) !I if Fixed Head Feature is installed on 3340 Series drives .. NOTE: The Fixed Head
Attachment (#9190) cannot be installed with 2311-1/3340
Series Compatibility (#8060) or 2314/3340 Series Compatibility (#8070).
[4] Specify String Switch Capability (#9315)!I if String Switch
(#8150) is installed on the 3340 mdl A2. NOTE: 4K DASF
Control Storage Extension (#4210) is prerequisite. Cannot be
installed with #4102 or #4460 or 3344 Attachment (#931 7)S.
When String Switch is installed, an Emergency Power Off connection between the sharing systems is mandatory. RPQ DC
3621 (two system connection) or DC 3622 (multiple system
connection) must be ordered.
The 311 5-2 uses fixed addresses 1 60 to 167 for its attached
disk drives. In the case of string switch, to avoid confusion in
Job' Control and Operation, the same addresses should be
assigned to shared drives on the other system. In the case of
the 3135, 3135-3, 3138 IFA, this requires specify code #9821
on the 3135 providing addresses 160 thru 167 to comply with
the' fixed addresses of the 3115. If intermixing 3330s and
3340s on the 3135 (#9315), no string switching with the
311 5-2 is possible.
NOTE: The string switch of the DASD hardware function can be
operated with the present DOS/VS standard DASD support.
DOS/VS does not support the device reserve/release channel
commands for program controlled sharing of attached DASD
units. Therefore, it is the user's responsibility by appropriate
organization and programming procedures to resolve conflicting
references to shared files and insure data integrity. One method
for controlling potential conflicts involves the use of operator
commands DVC UP /DVC ON. For additional information, consult DOS/VS System Management Guide, GC33-5371.
[5] On the 3115-2 ... specify 3344 Attachment (#9317)~ when
3344 mdl B2/B2F are installed. 4K DASF Control Storage
Extension is required. Cannot be installed with any of the following: String Switch Capability (#9315), 231X/3340 Compatibility (#8060/#8070), S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520),
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457), or 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460).
The Integrated ClO'rd I/O Attachments and the optional Byte
Multiplexer Channel cannot be installed together on the same
are installed.
system unless RPQs
[6] Minimum configuration: See "Minimum Configuration" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required on a S/370 mdl
115.
Integrated Printer Attachment (optional) -- attachment features
for the 5203 Printer mdl 3 or the 3203 Printer mdl 1 or 2 are
provided. One printer unit may be natively attached. The printer
attachment is addressed as channel 0 and the device address is
X'OOE'. The Universal Character Set (UCS) control is standard
[7] 1255, 1259 or 1419 Attachment -
specify #9336 (3115-0
~ CPU diskette-only specify fea1ure. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
-chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on pur-chased machines 1.0 include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written pet:mission.
,
'"
M 3115.3
Jul79
OP Machines
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
only), External Signal (# 3898) is required to attach a 1255,
1259 or 1419,.
[8] Specify #9807 for attachment of 3803 mdl 3 on the Magnetic
Tape Adapter (#4675).
NOTE: RETAIN/370 , . CE access is by telephone.
PRICES:
3115
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 2,585
2,706
2,827
2,948
3,159
3,400
3,521
3,642
3,763
3,884
4,126
4,715
$ 2,355
2,465
2,575
2,685
2,880
3,090
3,200
3,310
3,420
3,530
3,750
4,285
$ 78,150
80,500
82,850
85,200
91,000
102,550
104,900
107,250
109,600
111,950
116,650
129,950
$309
314
319
326
337
362
368
373
378
383
394
420
F
FE
G
GE
GF
F2
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
HG2
NOTE: Models H2 and HG2 require special feature #3860 unless
RPQs
are installed.
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 1 0%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: A
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
T",rmination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field installable ... model downgrade from 31152 to 3115-0 is not recommended for field installation.
Planning lor Model Conversions: When a customer requires
feature changes and/or memory upgrades in addition to a model
upgrade, consolidating the several changes into a single
is
nol recommended.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES
installation charges)
From To
From To
F
FE
FE
$2.350
F
FE
G
GE
G
$4,700
2,350
GF
$12.850
10,500
8,150
5,800
F2
FE2
G2
GE2
$24,400
$20,750
24,400
$29,100
26,750
24,400
$31,450
29,100
26,750
24.400
2,)50
4,700
2.350
7.050
4.700
2,350
G
G£
GF
F2
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
GE
$7.050
4,700
2,)50
(there are no additional
GF2
H2
t33,BOO
$38,500
36,150
33,800
31,450
25,650
14.100
11,750
9,400
7,050
4,700
31,450
29,100
26,750
20,950
9,400
7,050
4,700
2,)50
HG2
$51,800
49,450
47,/00
44,750
38,950
27,400
25.050
22,700
20,)50
18.000
18,300
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXPANSION BASE (#3860). [3115-2 only] Provides additional
gate and blowers, etc" and is required if RPQs
are not installed:
- for all model H2s and HG2s
- for models F2, FE2, G2, GE2 or GF2 if a Line Adapter Base 2
(#4792) or Une Adapter Base 3 (#4793) is required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTERNAL SIGNALS (#3898).
Provides six distinct external
interrupt lines to request and identify an external interrupt' response from the processing unit. Maximum: One per 3115, Cable
Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: External
devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in S/360Direct Control Feature - OEM 1, SRL GA22-6845.
FLOATING POINT (#3900), [3115-0 only] Adds 44 floating point
arithmetic instructions ... these instructions with the standard set
make up the Scientific Instruction Set. Field installation: Yes,
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Floating Point Including Extended Precision (#3910).
FLOATING POINT INCLUDING EXTENDED PRECISION (#3910),
Adds 51 floating point arithmetic instructions. Provides for floating
point operation including extended precision to 28 hexadecimal
# CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskctte-on!y changes ordered on same diskette.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP) .
digits. Field installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with Floating Point (#3900), Prerequisite: See Chart A/B above
for control storage requirements,
4K CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4101),
Adds 4,096
words (22 bits wide) of control storage to the Machine Instruction
Processor (3115-0) or Instruction Processing Unit (3115-2). Required for certain feature combinations ... see Chart A/B above for
details. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 8K Control Storage
Extension (#4104), Field installation: Yes
see "Note" following "Field Installation" for 8K Control Storage Extension (#4104)
below.
4K CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - 2nd (#4102),
[3115-2
only) Expands the IPU control storage by 4,096 words (22 bits
wide). Required for certain feature combinations
see Chart B.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4210 or specify feature
#9315. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 4K
Control Storage Extension (#4101).
8K CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4104).
[31 1 5-0 only)
Adds 8,192 words (22 bits wide) of control storage to the Machine
Instruction Processor. Required for certain feature combinations.
see Chart A above for details. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 4K Control Storage Extension (#4101). Field Installation:
Yes ... Note: Customers who may elect to purchase the 4K Control Storage Extension and later upgrade to the 8K Control Storage Extension should consider the purchase of the 8K Control
Storage Extension initially because this field upgrade requires
replacement of the 4K Control Storage Extension and installation
of the 8K Control Storage Extension.
4K DASF CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4210).
[3115-2
only) Adds 4,096 words (22 bits wide) to the DDA control storage. Required for string switch capability specify feature (#9315)
or 3344 Attachment specify feature (#9317). Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #4102 or #4460. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with an emulator program
under DOS/VS, permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460
instructions. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See Chart A/B
above for control storage requirements. Note: On the 3115-2,
#4457 and S/370 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520) are mutually
exclusive (may not be ordered on the same system unless RPQ
is installed). Limitation: Cannot be Installed with 3344
Attachment (#9317).
1403/3203 CARRIAGE CONTROL FEATURE (#4460),
Allows
the 3203 Printer with its tapeless carriage control to emulate the
function of a tape controlled carriage and thus run programs
written for a 1403 Printer. Limitations: The 5203 Printer is not
supported by this feature. Cannot be installed with string switch
capability (#9315) or 3344 Attachment specify feature (#9317).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3203 Printer. Note: This
feature is not required with DOS/VS Release 31 and subsequent
releases.
INTEGRATED 3203 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#4650),
Control
for attaching the 3203 Printer mdl 1 or 2. The Universal Character
Set is standard. Specify: #9770 for mdl 1, or #9771 for mdl 2,
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Integrated 5203 Attachment
(#4690). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated 3203/5203 Printer Prerequisite (#4653).
INTEGRATED 3203/5203 PRINTER PREREQUISITE (#4653),
Provides a common control base for attaching either the 3203 or
5203 Printer. Required as a feature for installation of the Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650) or Integrated 5203 Printer
Attachment (#4690). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 2560 ATTACHMENT (#4670).
Control for attaching the 2560 Multi-function Card Machine mdl A 1 or A2. Specify:
#9800g; for mdl A1, or #9801ji for mdl A2. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695) or Basic Byte
Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... installation of RPQs
are required to install #4670 with Basic Byte Multiplexer
Channel (#5248).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: #9727 is required on the 2560 MFCM ... see
"Specify" under 2560.
2560 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#4674).
Provides control for
Card Print capability on the 2560 Multi-function Card Machine mdl
A 1. Specify: #9797:Ji for first two print lines, #9798# for second
two, #9799:Ji for third two, when corresponding Card Print features
(#1575,1576,1577) are installed on the 2560 mdl A1. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated 2560 Attachment
(#4670) on the 3115.
MAGNETIC TAPE ADAPTER (#4675).
Provides control for attachment of one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1, 2 or 3
or one 3803 Tape Control mdl 3. See 3420 and 3803 or 3411
and 3410 for additional ordering instructions. The Magnetic Tape
Adapter is addressed as channel 2. MaXimum: One. Specify:
#9807 for attachment of 3803 mdl 3. See 'Highlights" for additional information. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A 3803
and 3411 cannot coexist on the MagnetiC Tape Adapter.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
M 3115.4
Jul 79
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Prerequisites: S/370 mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361) on the
3411. except for 311 5 mdl HG2. When attached to 3115 mdl
HG2. RPQ
is required on the 3411.
INTEGRATED 5203 MDL 3 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#4690).
Control for attaching the 5203 Printer mdl 3. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated 3203/5203 Printer Prerequisite (#4653) and #9223 on the
5203 mdl 3. Specify: #9151; for 5203 with 120 print positions.
or #9152# for 5203 with 1 32 print positions. Specify Universal
Character Set Control (#9848); when Universal Character Set
Attachment (#8639) is specified on the 5203 mdl 3.
INTEGRATED 5213 PRINTER MDL 1 ATTACHMENT (#4692).
Attaches the 5213 Printer mdl 1. Includes a special cable to
support the printer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 5425 ATTACHMENT (#4695). Control for attaching the 5425 Multi-function Card Unit mdl Al or A2. Specify:
#9183# for mdl Al. or #9184# for mdl A2. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 2560 Attachment (#4670) or Basic
Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ". installation of RPQs
.
are required to install #4695 with Basic Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: If the 5425 is attached to the 3115 either a 3203
or 5203 Printer is required to provide the necessary power. If.
however. a separate power supply for the 5425 is desired. IBM
will provide it on an RPQ basis.
BASIC BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5248). To attach low
speed byte multiplex devices ". see "Byte Multiplexer Channel"
under "Input/Output ChanneL" Feature includes control storage
necessary for lOP operation. Limitations: The Basic Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248) and the Integrated Card I/O Attachments
(#4670 or #4695) cannot be installed together on the same
system unless RPQs
are installed. On the
3115-2. only the Extended Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5249 with
#5248 as a prerequisite) with a data rate up to 25 KB is available. Specify: On the 3115-0. specify #9336 when attaching a
1255. 1259 or 1419. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
[3115-2
EXTENDED BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5249).
only) Provides the additional circuitry to enable the Basic Byte
Multiplexer Channel to operate at an improved byte data rate up to
25KB. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Basic
Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248).
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520).
Microprogram
controlled feature which. in combination with special software.
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 instructions. Field
Installation:
Yes.
Note:
On
the
3115-2.
#7520
and
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) are mutually exclusive
(may not be ordered on the same system unless RPQ
is
installed). Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment
(#9317).
1052 COMPATIBILITY (#8005).
Operates on the 5213 Printer
mdl 1 and standard keyboard as an operator console in 5/3601052 mode only. In this emulation mode of operation the
Video/Display acts as a slave unit to the printer. The 1052 Compatibility feature in combination with the 5213 Printer mdl 1 allows
running of HASP /360 RMT 360 (stand alone program) on the
S/370 mdl 115. Note: The 1052 compatibility mode is not supported under DOS/VS. With DOS/VS the 5213 mdl 1 acts as a
slave unit to the DOC. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated 5213 Printer Mdl 1 Attachment (#4692) and the 5213
Printer mdl 1.
2311 MDL 1/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8060). Permits
the emulation of 2311 mdl 1 files on the 3340 disk storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2311 mdl 1 data as
well as the native data set. This provides a "mixed mode" operating environment. Limitation: #8060 cannot be installed with
#8070, #9190 or #9317. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
See Chart A/B above for control storage requirements. Note:
When running DOS ReI. 21 thru 26, 1052 Compatibility (#8005),
the 5213 mdl 1 console printer and, if a 3203 Printer is attached,
the 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) are prerequisites. The 5203 Printer is not supported by #4460. .Emulation
under DOS/VS requires SYSRES on the 3340 DASF.
2314/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314 files on the 3340 disk storage. The user pro ..
gram may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well as the
native data set. This provides a "mixed mode" operating environment. Limitation: #8070 cannot be installed with #8060, #9190
or #9317. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See Chart A/B
above for control storage requirements. Note: When running DOS
ReI. 21 thru 26, 1052 Compatibility (#8005), the 5213 mdl 1
console printer and, if a 3203 Printer is attached. the 1403/3203
Carriage Control Feature (#4460) are prerequisites. The 5203
Printer is not supported by #4460. Emulation under DOS/VS
requires SYSRES on the 3340 DASF.
~ CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (ICA) (#4640).
Provides the basic control storage and common circuits for direct
attachment of up to five synchronous (BSC) communication lines
or up to eight asynchronous (start/stop) communication lines
depending upon line speed. All combinations of BSC and
start/stop lines require the Integrated Communications Adapter
Extension (#4641). Additional features are required to create
appropriate line interfaces for the individual lines. Figures 1 A and
1 B schematically represent the feature build-up. Figure 1 A shows
the feature build-up for asynchronous lines or for combinations of
asynchronous and synchronous lines. Figure 1 B shows the feature
build-up when only synchronous lines are required. The ICA provides as standard:
-
Autopoll
Multipoint central station functions
Multipoint tributary station functions
EBCDIC transparent mode
EBCDiC or ASCII code
Start/Stop and BSC
Start/Stop and BSC
BSC only
BSt only
BSC only
Refer to Figures 2A and 2B for attachable terminals and for configuration requirements prior to ordering features below. The
normal procedure requires completion of ICA Specification Form
with each model 115 containing feature #4640.
Note:
(or refer to ICA Configura tor
Manual, GA33-1513).
Customer Responsibilities -- see M 2700 pages for customer
responsibilities regarding communications facilities and services.
Communications Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER EXTENSION (ICAE)
(#4641).
This feature is required for all combinations of BSC
and start/stop lines. Extends the communications capability to up
to four BSC and up to eight start/stop lines depending upon line
speed. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP (ALG) (#1201). Permits attachment of up to four Medium Speed Asynchronous Lines (AL)
(#1231) or up to four Low Speed Asynchronous Line Pairs (ALP)
(#1241) or up to four Telegraph Line Pairs (TLP) (#7881). The
lines within the ALG, positions AI thru A4, must be installed in
ascending order. Specify: One line control specify code from
Figure 2A. Limitation: All lines in the ALG must have the same
line speed and control. Different terminals can be attached, provided they use the same speed and line control. See Figure 2A.
ALG (#1201) and SLHS (#7121) are mutually exclusive.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA
(#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE. MEDIUM SPEED (AL) (#1231). Provides
for the attachment of one non-switched 600 bps start/stop communications line. The 3767 terminal can be attached to this feature (at EC 380427 plus EC 380628) via switched or non-switched
lines at 300 bps and via non-switched lines at 600 or 1200 bps.
Clocking speed is selected at installation time. Connects to the
line via a modem or IBM Line Adapter. The lines are installed in
ascending order, AI thru A4. Note: IBM Line Adapters are tied to
specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 4D. Limitations: See
Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #1231, #1241 and #7881
cannot be intermixed within the ALG. Maximum: Four. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ALG (#1201).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE PAIR. LOW SPEED (ALP) (#1241). Provides for the attachment of two switched 110.0 bps or two
switched or non-switched 134.5 bps start/stop communications
lines. Connects to the line via a modem or IBM Line Adapter. The
lines are installed in ascending order, Ai thru A4. Note: IBM Line
Adapters are tied to specific line positions ." see Figures 4C and
4D. Limitations: See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #1231,
#1241 and #7881 Gannot be intermixed within the ALG.
Maximum: Four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ALG
(#1201).
AUTO CALL ADAPTER (ACA) (#1291, 1292. 1295. 1296). Provides automatic dialing capabilities on switched facilities. One of
these features is required for each line equipped to automatically
originate calls on switched networks. See Figure 3 for the selection of correct feature code. Limitation: The use of Auto Call in a
line group precludes the last two lines/line pairs of that group ".
see Figure 3. Maximum: Two per line group ". maximum total,
four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: See Figure 3.
IBM LEASED LINE ADAPTER (#4743). A modem for start/stop
data transmission at 134.11 or 600 bps over non-switched facilities.
This line adapter operates with Leased Line Adapters on other IBM
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
M 3115.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
products. Selection between 2-wire and 4-wire operation is made
at installation time. See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435
for specifications and restrictions. Specify: See Figures 4C and
40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: AL (#1231) or ALP (#1241) and a Line Adapter
Base (#4792 or #4793) ... also see Figures 4C and 40.
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER (#4781, #4782, #4791).
A
modem for BSC data transmission at up to 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Also for start/stop transmission at 300, 600 or 1200 bps over non-switched facilities to
the 3767 terminal. Unclocked and must interface to a SLC
(#7141-7144) or AL (#1231).
The Line Adapter is available in three different versions:
# 4 781 -- non-switched
#4782 -- switched with autoanswer
#4791 -- switched with autocall and autoanswer
Attachment to non-switched facilities is via an IBM provided cable
directly to the line. Attachment to the switched network is via an
IBM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Customer Responsibilities ... see M 2700 pages.
Communications Facilities ... see M 2700 pages. Specify: See
Figures 4C and 40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SLC (#7141-7144) or AL
(#1231) and a Line Adapter Base (#4792 or #4793). Also see
Figures 4C and 40. ACA (#1295 or #1296) is required for
#4791.
SYNCHRONOUS LINE MEDIUM SPEED (SL) (#7151-7154).
#7151
#7152
#7153
#7154
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
position
position
position
position
Sl
S2
S3
S4
Line positions S 1 thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. Non-switched lines with switched network
back-up are supported. Maximum line speed on non-switched
lines is 7200 bps; on switched back-up network 3600 bps; on
switched network 4800 bps. See Figure 2B for detailed speed and
facility information. Connects to the line via a modem. The modem must provide clocking. Note: SL(#7151-7154) may be
intermixed with SLC (#7141-7144) within the SLG. Limitations:
See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #7151 is mutually exclusive with #7141, #7152 with #7142, #7153 with #7143, and
#7154 with #7144. Maximum: #7151 thru #7154, one each.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
TELEGRAPH LINE PAIR (TLP) (#7881), Provides for the attachment of two non-switched single current telegraph lines at 45.5,
56.9, 74.2 or 75 bps. Attachment to the lines is via an IBM
provided external cable. Lines A 1 thru A4 are installed in ascending order. Limitations: See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration.
#1231, #1241 and #7881 cannot be intermixed within the ALG.
Maximum:
Four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ALG
(#1201).
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (LAB 2) (#4792). Permits attachment of
up to two IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and up to four IBM Leased
Line Adapters. The Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions. See Figure 4C for configuration and possible line combinations. Note: LAB 2 is required for IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters
with autoanswer (#4782) or with autocall and autoanswer
(#4791). Limitation: LAB 2 (#4792) and LAB 3 (#4793) are
mutually exclusive. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: On 3115-2, LAB 2 requires Expansion Base (# 3860)
unless RPQs 7B0141 and 7B0132 are installed.
MODEMS
One of the following modems can be attached to each
of the BSC lines of the ICA (#4640). Prerequisite: SL (#71517154).
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (LAB 3) (#4793). Provides attachment
of up to four IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and up to eight IBM
Leased Line Adapters. The Line Adapters are tied to specific line
pOSitions. See Figure 40 for configuration and possible line combinations. Limitation: LAB 2 (#4792) and LAB 3 (#4793) are
mutually exclusive. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: On 3115-2, LAB 3 requires Expansion Base (# 3860)
unless RPQs
are installed.
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
Modem
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
SYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP (SLG) (#7100).
Permits attachment of up to four medium speed BSC lines, SLC (#7141-7144)
and/or SL (#7151-7154). Maximum line speed is 1200 and 7200
bps respectively. The lines in this group, positions Sl thru S4,
must be installed in ascending order. The lines can have different
line speeds within the maximum specified. Specify: Maximum line
speed in the group: #9751p for 1200 bps maximum ... #9753p
for 2400 bps max ... #9754p for 4800 bps max ... #9757~ for
7200 bps max.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: ICA (# 4640).
Provides
SYNCHRONOUS LINE HIGH SPEED (SLHS) (#7121).
for the attachment of one non-switched BSC line at speeds up to
50.0 kbps. See Figure 1 B. This is a digital current interface for
attachment to facility El, E2 or E3. Note: Only for non-switched
point-to-point lines. Limitations: This line has a load factor of
100% and must not be operated simultaneously with any other line
in the ICA ... see Figure lB. SLHS (#7121) and ALG (#1201)'are
mutually exclusive. Maximum: One Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
SYNCHRONOUS
(#7141-7144).
#7141
#7142
#7143
#7144
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
LINE
MEDIUM
position
position
position
position
SPEED
WITH
CLOCK
(SLC)
Sl
S2
S3
S4
Line positions Sl thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. The clock can be set by the user for a transmission rate of 600 bps or 1200 bps. Connects to the line via an
unclocked modem or IBM Line Adapter. Notes: IBM Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 40.
SL (#7151-7154) may be intermixed with SLC (#7141-7144)
within the SLG. Limitations: See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #7141 is mutually exclusive with #7151, #7142 with
#7152, #7143 with #7153, and #7144 with #7154. Maximum:
#7141
thru #7144, one each.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
# CPU diskette-only specify feature.
No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Speed (bps)
2400/1200
2400/1200
4800/2400
4800/2400
7200/3600/1800
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit
M 3115.6
Jul79
(cont'd)
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
4 yr Purch
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
FIGURE 1A
MMMC
INTEGRATED
COMM UNICATIONS
FEATURE BUILD-UP
ADAPTER
SCHEMATIC
3115-0 and 3115-2
External Signals
#3898Fltg Pt Incld Ext Precision
3910
4K Control Storage Extension 4101
1401/1440/1460 Com pat
4457
1403/3203 Carr Cntrl Fea
4460
Int 3203 Printer Attachment 4650'
Int 3203/5203 Ptr Prereq
4653
Int 2560 Attachment
46702560 Card Print Control
4674*
Magnetic Tape Adapter
4675*
Int 5203 Ptr Mdl 3 Attach
4690Int 5213 Ptr Mdl 1 Attach
4692 *
Int 5425 Attachment
4695*
Basic Byte Mplxr Channel
5248*
S/360 Mdt 20 Compatibility
7520
1052 Compatibility
8005
2311 mdl 1/3340-Series Cmpt 8060
2314/3340-Series Cmpt
8070
$110$100 $4,125 $1.00
NC NC
NC
1.50
55 50 1,335
-*
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
76 2,515
7.50
83
88
80 2,585
8.50
153 140 5,780 11.50
30 1,235
2.00
33
110 100 4,125
3.00
7.50
83
76 3,145
3.00
110 100 4,125
153 140 5,780 19.50
208 190 7,865 20.50
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
-*
NC NC
NC
ICAE
(#4641)
LINE
GROUP
1291*
1292*
12951296*
4743*
47814782*
47914792*
4793*
71007121-
225 205
76
83
43
40
43
40
60 55
21
21
21
21
15
20
20
20
20
14
16
15
21
20
71
65
28
26
28
26
43 40
110 100
8,460 25.50
3,105
1.50
1,660
3.00
1,660
2.50
2,255
3.50
808
808
808
808
417
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
2.50
525
2.50
700
3.00
1,935 11.50
2.00
1,020
2.00
1,020
1,660 3.00
8.50
4,125
7141*
7142*
7143*
7144*
60
60
60
60
55
55
55
55
2,255
2,255
2,255
2,255
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
7151*
7152715371547881-
49
49
49
49
60
45
45
45
45
55
1,870
1,870
1,870
1,870
2,255
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
9.00
Floating Point
3900
8K Control Storage Extension 4104
NC NC
110 100
2,670
NC
3.00
3860
4102
4210
5249
45
55
55
35
41
50
50
32
1,710
1,335
1,335
1,330
1.00
1.50
1.50
3.00
SI
SL (#7152), or SLC
(#7142)
S2
SL (#7153), or SLC
(#7143)
S3 (I)
SL (#7154). or SLC
[(#7144)
S4 (I)
LINE
GROUP
SLG
(#7100)
ICA
(#4640)
LINE INTERFACE
SYNC LINE POSITION
SL (#7151). or SLC
(#7141)
SI
S L (#7152), or SLC
(#7142)
S2
SL (#7153), or SLC
1(#7143)
S3
SL (#7154). or SLC
1(#7144)
S4
SLHS (#7121) (2)
S5
(2) ALG (#1201) and SLHS (#7121) are mutually exclusive. Note: SLHS
(#7121) cannot be operated concurrently with lines in position SI thru S4.
FIGURE 2A
ST ART /STOP TERMINALS
SPEEO
(bps)
FACILITIES
LINE
INTERFACE
FEATURE
LINE
CONTROL
SPECIFY
1030
600.0
02
1231
9740!li
1050
75.0
A4
7881
9736!1i
134.5
CI. C2, 01
1241
9738!1i
1060
2740 mdl I
134.5
01
1241
9738!1i
134.5
CI, C2, 01
1241
9738!1i
2740 mdI 2
75.0
A4
7881
9736!1i
134.5
01
1241
9738!1i
600.0
02
1231
9739#
2741
134.5
CI, C2, 01
1241
9738#
3767 mdl I, 2
w #711I or
#7113
300.0
CI,OI
1231
9739#
3767 mdl I, 2,
3 w #7112
600 or 1200 02
1231
9739#
5010 mdl Axx
134.5
CI, C2, 01
1241
9738#
600.0
D2
1231
9739#
134.5
BI, B2, CI,
C2,01
1241
9738#
300.0
CI, DI
1231
9739#
45.5
AI
7881
9733#
83B2(83B3
56.9
A2
7881
9734#
WU 115A
74.2
A3
7881
9735#
110.0
C3
1241
9737#
AT&T
*"
A4(I)
FIGURE 1B
5100/51I0
~ CPU diskctte~only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on the same diskette.
A3 (I)
line positions ... see Figure 3.
(2) ALG (#1201) and SLG (#7121) are mutually exclusive.
3115-2 Only
Expansion Base
4K Control Stor Incremnt-2nd
4K DASF Cntrl Storage Exten
Extended Byte Mplxr Channel
A2
(I) Auto Call Adapters (#1291, 1292, 1295 and 1296) restrict the use of these
TERMINALS
3115-0 Only
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
(#7881)
Synch Line
Position
SL #7151), or SLC
(#7141)
SLG
(#7100)
4640*
4641120112311241*
Al
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
(#7881)
ICA
(#4640)
Asynch Line
Position
AL (# I231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
(#7881)
ALG
(#1201) (2) AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
(#7881)
Communications Features
Int Communications Adapter
Ir.t Comm Adapter Extension
Asynchronous Line Group
Async Line, Medium Speed
Async Line Pair, Low Speed
Auto Call Adapter,
- line position A 1
- line position A2
- line position S 1
- line position S2
IBM Leased Line Adapter
IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter,
non-switched
switched w autoanswer
sw w autocall & autoans
Line Adapter Base 2
Line Adapter Base 3
Synchronous line Group
Sync Line High Speed
Sync Line Med Spd w Clock,
line position Sl
line position S2
line position S3
line position S4
Sync Line Med Speed,
line position Sl
line position S2
line position S3
line position S4
Telegraph Line Pair
LINE INTERFACE
TWX-33/35
Feature supplies CPU diskette.
CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $290 on purchased machines when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on
the same diskette,
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
DP Machines
M 3115.7
3115 Processing Unit
FIGURE 28
Jut 79
(cont'd)
BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
I .~ ~~502
'" '" "''''0
00
~
;=
~
~
~
0
....
!:?
III
a;
!t
~~
:t
;:
'"
'" '"
'6
~
oli
~
(bps)
LINE
INTERFACE
;;:
N
£! 0 0
;= III
N
'"....0 ~
0
........
N'"
X
X
X
X
~~ ;)l'"
X
X
X
X
X
'";=
'"-
....
'"
....
'"....
~
....0
'"
«
16
"
M
t;
iii
'"
III
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
>~
.'" '" '" '" '"
N
~
N
.... aJ0.... ;:::N
....
....
N
~
··
~~ is '"'"
'6
E
....0
....
~
N
;;:
'It'
~
!::: !:::
'"
~ !:?E ;: ;: '6E
'It
~
....
..
."
c
.~::
£! ;;:
'"....
;:
",'
!:? M....
'l'
!:?
III
:
.
;;: .... ....
'" ........ 0 ~ M ....'"
.... M.... M
I=; .... ::; iii N N
~
'"
'" '"
'" '"
....0
t:. £!
E ;:
21
N
'"
~ >
III III
;:
~I~ M
~ "
M
'It
FACILITIES
600
1200
1200
2400
2400
24001
1200
7141·7144
7141·7144
7141·7144
7151-7154
7151·7154
C3
03
C5
04 X1M-H
X
X
X
X
X
7151·7154
04sa
X X
4800
7151-7154or
713117132
05,X2Mttt
x X
48001
2400
48001
2400
72001
3600
72001
3600&
36001
1800
19,200
40,800
50000
~
;:
~
.c 0 0
l) .... .... C;
c
« ;)l iii ....
N
E
g
£!
0
C."
N
;;:
....
0
Ecno':
~~8
..; ;)l~~
M
SPEED
'"
£!
;=
C4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X
X X X X
X
X X X
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
k
X
X X X X
X X
X X X X "X X
X
X X X X X
X
X X X X X
X
X X
X
X X X X X X
X X
X X
X
X X X X X X
X
X X X
X
X X X X X
X
X X
X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
7151·7154
C6
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7151-7154
05sa
X X
7151·7152
D6
X X X X X X X
X
X X X X
X X
X X
X
7151·7152
06sa
X X
X X X X
X
X X X X
X X
X
X
7121
7121
7121
E1
E2
E3
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
•• 3115 ICA must use the IBM 1200 bps Modem (#4781 or #4782) .
••• Switched Network only.
tt XIM facility may not be used for communications with a 2703 or a S/36O mdl 25.
ttt X2M facility may not be used for communications with a 2703 or a 5/360 mdl 25.
FIGURE 3
AUTO CALL ADAPTERS
Auto Call
Adapter Feature
Code
Provides Auto
Call for Line
Position
Prerequisites
Precludes Line
Positions
1291
AI (I)
1241
A3 andA4
1292
A2 (I)
1241 and 1291
A3 and A4
1295
51
7141 and 7151
S3 and S4
1296
S2
7142 or 7152 and
1295
S3 and 54
( I) Provides Autocall in this line position for the first line of the synchronous
line pair (#1241).
FIGURE 4A
IBM LINE ADAPTERS
FACILITY
FIGURE 4C
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (#4792) ... Maximum. 6 IBM Line
Adapters
LINE
POSITION
START/STOP
up to 600 bps
START/STOP (I)
up to 1200 bps
IBM 1200 bps
LINE
ADAPTER
IBM LEASED
LINE
ADAPTER
IBM 1200 BPS
LINE ADAPTER
Non-switched pI-to-pt
4781
4743
4781
Non-switched
multiooint control
4781
4743
4781
Non-switched
multipoint tributary
4781
--
Switched with
autoanswer
4782
-
---
Switched with
autoanswer and
autocall
4791
--
--
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
PREREQ
AI 1st line
4743
9463~
1241
AI 2nd line
4743
9464~
9463
A2 1st line
4743
9465~
1241
A2 2nd line
4743
9466~
9465
4781
94711
7141
4782
9473~
7141
4791
9475~
7141
4781
9472~
7142
4782
9474~
7142
4791
94761_
7142
SI
BSC
LINE
ADAPTER
S2
NOTE
Select one line
adapter
Select one line
adapter
(I) Only with the 3767 terminal.
1 CPU diskette-only specify fealure. No fee when ordered al time of manufacture or wilh
chargeable feature thsl supplies diskette. 5290 on purchased machines \0 include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same disketle.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
UP Machines
3115 Processing Unit
M 3115.8
Jul79
(cont'd)
FIGURE 40
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (#4793) ... Maximum. 12 IBM Line
Adapters
LINE
POSITION
LINE
ADAPTER
AI 1st line
4743
AI 2nd line
4743
A2 1st line
4743
A2 2nd line
4743
A3 1st line
4743
A3 2nd line
4743
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
PREREQ
NOTE
1241
94851
94861
94871
94881
94891
949ijf
9485
1241
9487
1241
9489
A4 1st line
4743
94911
1241
A4 2nd line
4743
9492f
9491
SI
4781
4781
S3
4781
S4
4781
94931
94941
94951
9496f
7141
S2
7142
7143
7144
---- OR ---
AI (2)
4743 or 4781
9481.9501 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
position S4
(#9496)
A2 (2)
4743 or 4781
9482,9502 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
position S3
(#9495)
A3 (2)
4743 or 4781
9483.9503 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
P(~~~~4~2
4743 or 4781
9484,9504 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
position SI
(#9493)
SI
4781
94931
7141
Excludes line
adapter in
position A4
(#9484)
S2
4781
94941
7142
A4 (2)
S3
4781
94951
7143
S4
4781
94961
7144
Excludes line
adapter in
'(~~~~3~3
Excludes line
adapter in
position Z~2
(#9482
Excludes line
adapter in
'(~~~~I~I
(2) #4781 may be used only with the 3767 terminal.
FIGURE 5
MAXIMUM ICA CONFIGURATION
All lines/line pairs are assigned load factors.
The sum of all load factors must not exceed 100%.
LOAD FACTOR IN %
1-2 Line
ASYNCHRONOUS LINES Pairs (1-4
lines)
TLP at 45.5 & 56.9 bps
TLP at 74.2 & 75.0 bps
ALP at 110.0 & 134.5 bps
3-4 Line
Pairs (5-8
lines)
20%
20
20
20%
40
40
ALG. up to 4 lines
AL at 300/600/1200 bps
20
3-4 Lines
1-2 Lines
SYNCHRONOUS LINES
SLG
SLG
SLG
SLG
w
w
w
w
max
max
max
max
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
Autopoll
Not Used
Autopoll
Used
Autopoll
Not Used
Autopoll
Used
20
20
40
60
25
25
SO
75
20
40
80
25
SO
100
1 Line
Pt-to-Pt
SLHS at max. 50 kbps
100
, CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at lime of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. 5290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ------------------_.-
M 3125.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
magnetic IBM Diskettes. The diskettes that are supplied with the
system will contain the required microcode for the basic system,
the optional features ordered for the system, and CE diagnostics.
IBM 3125 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose; Provides main and control storage. plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for a S/370 mdl 125.
The 3125-0 and 3125-2 Processing Units are available in the
following model groups:
Models:
3125-0
3125-2
FE2
98.304 bytes
G
G2
131 ,072 bytes
GE
GE2
1 63.840 bytes
GF
GF2
196.608 bytes
H
H2
262,144 bytes
HG2
393,216 bytes
~
12
524,288 bytes
~
For differences between
"Systems" pages.
~
Processor Storage Size
FE
the two
model
series refer to
the
If 3411 Magnetic Tape and Control is attached see Magnetic Tape
Adapter special feature paragraph for RPQ requirement.
Highlights: 98,304 bytes up to 524,288 bytes of processor storage are available. The basic main memory cycle time is 480
nanoseconds for 2 bytes. Sixteen general purpose, sixteen control
and four floating point registers are provided. The system design
provides distributed microcoded subprocessors for the independent handling of programs -- Instruction Processing Unit (lPU),
Input/Output Processing (lOPs), and Diagnostic/Maintenance
(SVP).
Direct attachment of the 3333/3330 DASD Subsystem or the
3340 DASF Subsystem or the 3340/3344 DAS Subsystem (31252 only) is provided. Depending on model and features up to sixteen drives can be attached. In a 3340 Subsystem the 3340 mdl
A2 and its attached 3340 drives can be shared with another
S/370, except 3115-0 or 3125-0. via the String Switch cajJability
(#9315).
The 2311/3330 - Series, the 2311 Mdl 1/3340 - Series and the
2314/3340 - Series Compatibility features are available as options. They are mutually exclusive. Emulation is under DOS and
DOS/VS only. 2311 mdl 1 emulation under DOS/VS requires
SYSRES on 3340 or on 3330.
The CE logout of machine and I/O related control checks and
errors are recorded on the console file diskette for CE diagnosis,
to enhance the reliability, availability, and serviceability of the
model 125.
Extended Control (EC) Mode expands the structure of the Program
Status Word to accommodate the control of new S/370 features
and extends the number of permanently assigned main storage
locations. The model 125 can operate in either EC Mode or Basic
Control (BC) Mode as defined for the S/360.
Dynamic Address Translation (DAT) is a standard facility on the
model 125. When the model 125 is in EC Mode with Translation
Mode operable, programs are not required to be completely resident in main memory for execution. Under Supervisor Control,
portions of programs (Pages) may be stored on a direct access
device until needed, at which time they will be returned to main
storage and may be relocated to any available location. Program
addresses are treated as "logical addresses" and the translation
feature develops "real addresses." Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the amount of available real storage, program
size may exceed real storage size. This logical storage is referred
to as "virtual storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes
on the S/370 mdl 125.
Program Event Recording (PER), a standard feature, is a debugging aid which permits four types of events to be selectively moni(2) Instruction fetch address
tored: (1) Successful branches
compare ... (3) Main storage alteration address compare
(4)
General Register alteration address compare.
Standard features include a S/370 commercial instruction set,
Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Address Translation. Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program Event Recording, Monitor
Call, interval timer, time-of-day clock, CPU-Timer and Clock Comparator, store and fetch protect, byte-oriented operand feature,
error checking and correction on main storage, automalic instruction retry, and audible alarm.
Control Storage: Reloadable control storage for the Service
Processor (SVP), direct DASD attachment, and Instruction Processing Unit (IPU) are provided as standard on the 3125 Processing Unit. In addition, reloadable control storage is available for the
optional Card I/O Attachment, Printer Attachment, Integrated
Communications Adapter (lCA), byte Multiplexer Channel. and
Console Printer Attachment. Control storage is loaded from the
diskette housed in the Service Console Unit.
Capability to attach the 3803/3420 or 3411/3410 magnetic tape
subsystem mdls 1, 2 or 3 via the Magnetic Tape Adapter.
The IPU of the 3125-0 contains as standard 12K words of control
storage. Certain features/combinations require up to two 4K word
increments in addition. See Chart A for details.
Capability to natively attach the following card I/Os through appropriate Integrated Card I/O Attachments: 2560 mdl A 1; 3504 mdls
A 1, A2; 3525 mdls Pl, P2, P3; and the 5425 mdls A 1, A2 (96
column card).
The IPU of the 3125-2 contains as standard 16K words of control
storage. One 8K word increment may be ordered as an optional
feature for use with certain feature combinations. See Chart A for
details.
Capability to natively attach the 5213 mdl 1 console printer (85
cps) is provided with the Integrated 5213 Printer Mdl 1 Attachment. This console slave printer provides hardcopy output of
operator messages presented on the Video/Display (CRT) console. The 1052 Compatibility feature is available.
Chart A: Listed below are the valid feature combinations and their
respective requirements for additional control storage.
Capability to natively attach up to 6 synchronous and up to 16
asynchronous lines is provided by the Integrated Communications
Adapter with appropriate features.
Capability to natively attach the 3203 Printer is provided with the
Integrated 3203 Printer Attachmerl.
The 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature provides the capability
to load information contained in the 1403 Carriage Control Tape
into the 3203 Forms Control Buffer.
S/360 Model 20 Compatibility and 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
features are provided to allow execution of the instructions of
those systems.
The Operator Console is an integral part of the 3125. The standard on-line Video/Display-Keyboard enhances operator (human
factor) - machine communications. Data can be manually entered
into processor main storage or into internal registers via the keyboard, Contents of storage or internal registers of the 3125 can
be displayed on the Video/Display screen. The Video/Display with
16 lines of 56 characters/line and keyboard are designed for use
as an operator console. A portion of the screen is reserved to
display machine status. The Service Processor (SVP) continuously
monitors system operation and logs errors on the magnetic IBM
Diskette device. The SVP initiates recovery on detection of error
conditions and provides control for the Display, Keyboard, Magnetic Diskette and optional console printer.
The standard console file is the basic microprogram loading device
for the system. The console file contains a small read/write file
device that provides the microcode for the system on removable
Optiollal Features
Model 3125·2
Model 3125·0
1401/1440/1460
Compatibility
1#44571 •
S/360 mdl 20
Compatibility
1#7520) •
Floating Point In·
eluding Extended
Precision 1#39101
2311 Mdl 1/3330·
Series Compati-
bility 1#80401 **
2311 Mdl 1/3340-
1#41051 Control Storage
Basic Control Storage
Basic
First Control Storage
Control Increm ent ... 1#41011
Storage Req'd
x
X
X
*
~08~j~tlbll~y
*X
xl x
*
xx
x
X
x
x
X
.
x
X
Series Com pat i-
bilitv 1#80601 **
2314/3340·Series
Increment ... 1#41011
d (#41021 Re 'd
I
*1, *
X
Extension Req'd
~flcO!ld Control Storage
p<*
xx x
XP<
.
I
xix
;
X
X
i
IX x
X
I><
x
XP<
P<
• 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) and S/360 Model 20 Compatibility
(#7520) are mutually exclusive (may not be ordered on the same system
unless
is installed on the 3125.
Cannot be
installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317). NOTE RPQ
cannot be
installed if the 2311 Mdl 1/3340-Series Compatibility (#8060~ or
2314/3340-Series Compatibility (#8070) is installed.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -------==-=--':' =
-- -
M 3125.2
Ju17~
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
•• (#8040) and (#8060) and (#8070) are mutually exclusive. In addition,
#8060 or #8070 are mutually exclusive with specify feature #9190 or 3344
Attachment specify feature (#9317). #9190 docs not require additional
control storage.
NOTE: Specify feature #9315 is mutually exclusive with #4105 and/or #4460.
Input/Output Attachments - Native: The following integrated I/O
attachments/adapters are provided for controlling the designated
I/O devices. They are designed to interact with their respective
I/O devices and should be installed/removed with them since the
system is inoperative with only the attachment/adapter installed.
Direct Disk Attachment (standard) -- Attaches either the 3340
mdl A2 or the 3333 mdl 1 dual disk drive and control unit directly to the 3125. The attachment supports block multiplexing.
Channel address is 1, physical drive addresses are 160 to 167
on the first string and 168 to 16F on the second string. For
logical address assignment for 3344 refer to the Functional
Characteristics manual, GA33-1506.
3333/3330 DASD Subsystem ... one 3333 mdl 1 and one additional 3330 mdl 1 or 2 can be attached to provide up to four
spindles.
3340 DASF Subsystem ... on the 3125-0 one 3340 mdl A2 and
up to three 3340 mdl B1/B2s can be attached to provide up to
eight spindles. On the 3125-2 (with 16 Drive Expansion #9315)
one or two 3340 mdl A2s can be directly attached with up to
three 3340 mdl B1/B2s attached to each 3340 mdl A2 to provide up to sixteen spindles on the system.
3340/3344 DAS Subsystem ... On the 3125-2 with 3344 Attachment #9317 installed: One 3340 mdl A2 and any combination of
up to three 3340 mdl 61/62s and 3344 mdl B2/B2Fs can be
attached on the first string. In addition, on the 3125-2, one 3340
mdl A2 and up to three 3340 mdl B1/B2s can be attached on
the second string to provide up to 16 physical or the equivalent
of up to 34 logical spindles on the system.
Magnetic Tape Adapter (optional) -- This feature attaches one of
the following tape control units and is addressed as channel 2.
Byte Multiplexer Channel (optional) - A wide variety of I/O
devices may be attached to S/370 mdl 125 via the optional byte
Multiplexer Channel. One channel is available on the 3125 as a
special feature and is functionally equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30 and 40. Thirty-two
subchannels are provided as standard ... eight channels may be
shared and twenty-four are unshared. The byte Multiplexer Channel provides eight control unit pOSitions and permits I/O units to
operate normally in byte mode, giving the effect of several I/O
operations simultaneous with computing. In burst mode, the
channel handles one high speed unit with a maximum data rate
of 29 KB per second. It is capable of sustained data rates up to
25 KB per second in byte mode. It is addressed as channel O.
For OS exclusions, refer to SRL GC28-6554, "System/360
Operating Systems System Generation."
Console Function -- System control functions are provided by the
standard integrated Video/Display Keyboard. It has the switches
and lights necessary to operate and control the system. Optionally. the 5213 mdl 1 console printer (85 cps) may be attached via
special feature #4692. The optional 1052 Compatibility feature
(#8005) operates the 5213 Printer mdl 1 and standard system's
keyboard as an operator console in S/360-1052 mode only. In
this mode of operation the Video/Display-Keyboard acts as a slave
unit to the printer.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[4] CPU Configuration: #9091 for Configuration 1 (CPU located
behind console table), or #9092 for Configuration 2 (CPU
bolted to right side of console table). Configuration 2 excludes
a 5425 MFCU from being natively attached. See S/370 Installation Manual for details.
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 (20KB) housing
one magnetic tape drive. Up to three 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 1 s can be attached to the 3411 mdl 1.
[5]
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 2 (40KB) housing
one magnetic tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 2s can be attached to the 3411 mdl 2.
[6] DASD Attachment: Specify one -- #9313~ for 3333 Attachment, or #9314~ for 3340 Attachment or for 3340/3344 Attachment (3125-2 only).
Specify Fixed Head Attachment
(#9190)~ if Fixed Head Feature is installed on the 3340 Series
drives. NOTE: The Fixed Head Attachment Feature (#9190)
cannot be installed with 2311 Mdl 1/3340-Series Compatibility
(#8060) or 2314/3340-Series Compatibility (#8070).
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 3 (80K6) housing
one magnetic tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 3s can be attached to the 3411 mdl 3.
3803 Tape Control mdl 3. Up to eight 3420 mdl 3 (120KB) or
mdl 5 (200KB) may be attached to the 3803.
Integrated Card I/O Attachments (optional) -- These features
provide native attachment of one of the following:
3504
3525
2560
5425
3504
Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2
Card Punch mdl P1, P2 or P3
Multi-function Card Machine mdl A1
Multi-function Card Unit mdl A1 or A2
Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2 and 3525 Card Punch mdl
P1, P2 or P3
3504 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2 and 2560 MFCM mdl A1
3504 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2 and 5425 MFCU mdl A1 or
A2
The Integrated Card I/O Attachment uses channel O. Device
address X'OOC' is reserved for the 3504 Card Reader and device
address X'OOD' is reserved for the 2560, 3525 or 5425.
Integrated Printer Attachment (optional) -- Attachment features'
for the 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or N1 and for the 3203 Printer mdl
1 or 2 are available. Only one printer unit can be natively attached. The printer adapter is addressed as channel 0 and the
device address is X'OOE'. The Universal Character Set feature
can be optionally selected for the 1403 mdl 2 or N1 on the 3125
at no charge.
Integrated Console Printer Attachment (optional) -- attaches the
5213 Printer mdl 1 to the 3125 to provide hardcopy of operator
messages presented on the standard Display Operator Console.
It uses address X'01 F' (same as the Display Operator Console)
on channel O. When the 1052 Compatibility feature is installed,
the 5213 Printer mdl 1 is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) (optional) - Provides
the basic control storage and common circuits for direct attachment of up to six synchronous (BSC) communications lines OR
up to sixteen asynchronous (start/stop) lines. The Integrated
Communications- Adapter Extension (ICAE) (#4641) adds the
capability to attach up to six BSC AND up to sixteen start/stop
lines. IBM Une adapters are provided within the 31 25.
Input/Output Channel
Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configuration" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
125.
#9315~ (3125-2 only) for String Switch Capability /16Drive Expansion if String Switch (#8150) is installed on one or
both 3340 mdl A2s, or if a second 3340 mdl A2 is installed no
matter how many drives there are (16-Drive Expansion). Specify #9306 Second String if two 3340 mdl A2s are installed.
#9315 requires 4K DASF Control Storage Extension (#4210).
#9315 cannot be installed with #4105 or #4460 and is mutually exclusive with 3344 Attachment (#9317)S.
[7] Specify
When String Switch is installed, an Emergency Power Off connection between the sharing systems is mandatory. RPQ DC
3621 (two system connection) or DC 3622 (multiple system
connection) must be ordered.
The 3125-2 uses fixed addresses 160 to 16F for its attached
disk drives. In the case of string switch, to avoid confusion in
Job Control and Operation, the same addresses should be
assigned to shared drives on the other system. In the case of
3135, 3135-3, 3138 IFA this requires specify code #9821 on
the 3135 providing addresses 160 thru 16F to comply with the
fixed addresses of the 3125. If intermixing 3330 and 3340 on
the 3135,3135-3,3138 (#9315), no string switching is possible.
NOTE: The string switch of the DASD hardware function can be
operated with the present DOS/VS standard DASD support.
DOS/VS does not support the device reserve/release channel
commands for program controlled sharing of attached DASD
units. Therefore, it is the user's responsibility by appropriate
organization and programming procedures to resolve conflicting
references to shared files and insure data integrity. One method
for controlling potential conflicts involves the use of operator
commands DVC UP/DVC ON. For additional information consult
DOS/VS System Management Guide, GC33-5371.
[8] On the 3125-2 ... specify 3344 Attachment (#9317); when
3344 mdl B2/B2Fs .are installed. 4K DASF Control Storage
Extension is required. Cannot be installed with any of the following: String Switch Capability (#9315) ... 231 X/3340 Capability (#8060/#8070) ... S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520)
; CPU disketl-e-only sPecify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture .or with
chargeable feature. that supplies diskette. 5290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - ----
----- - --===
':' =
M 3125.3
Jui 79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
... 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457)
1403/3203
Carriage Control Feature (#4460). Specify #9306 Second
String if two 3340 mdl A2s are installed;
[9] Specify #9807 for attachment of the 3803 mdl 3 on the Magnetic Tape Adpter (#4675).
NOTE. RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by phone.
TLP/
MLC
4 yr
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3125
FE
G
GE
GF
H
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
HG2
12
$ 4,285
4,406
4,527
4,648
4,890
4,825
4,946
5,067
5,188
5,430
6,019
6,503
Purchase
$ 3,5 $129,050
4,005
131,400
4,115
133,750
4,225
136,100
4,445
140,800
4,390
145,300
4,500
147,650
4,610
150,000
4,720
152,350
4,940
157,050
5,475
170,350
5,915
179,750
MMMC
$382
387
394
399
411
429
435
440
446
457
484
506
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: A
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field installable.
Planning for Model Conversions: When a customer requires
feature changes and/or memory upgrades in addition to a model
upgrade, consolidating the several changes into a single
not recommended.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges)
From To
FE
G
GE
GF
From To
FE
G
GE
GF
H
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
HG2
G
$2,350
GE
GF
$4.700
2.350
H
$7,050
4.700
2,350
$11.750
9,400
7.050
4.700
FE2
G2
GEl
GF2
H2
$16,250
$18,600
16,250
$20,950
18,600
16,250
$23,300
20,950
18,600
16,250
$28.000
25.650
23,300
20,950
16,250
$41.300
38,950
36.600
34.250
29.550
$50.700
48.350
46.000
43,650
38.950
$4,700
2,350
$7.050
4.700
2.350
$11.750
9,400
7.050
4.700
$25.050
22,700
20.350
18.000
13.300
$34.450
32.100
29.750
27,400
22.70
9.400
$2,350
HG2
12
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXTERNAL SIGNALS (#3898).
Provides six distinct external
interrupt lines to request and identify an external interrupt response from the processing unit. Maximum: One. Cable Order:
Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: External devices
must meet the interface specifications outlined in S/360 - Direct
Control Feature - OEM I, SRL GA22-6845.
FLOATING POINT, INCLUDING EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3910). Adds 51 floating point arithmetic instructions. Extended precision floating point provides for the preCision
of up to 28 hexadecimal digits. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite:
See "Control Storage Requirements" under
. 'Highlights."
4K CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT (#4101, 4102). [3125-0
only] Each adds 4,096 words (22 bits wide) of control storage.
Required for some feature combinations ... see "Control Storage
Requirements" under "Highlights" for details. #4101 -- for first
4K increment ... #4102 - for second 4K increment. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #4102 requires #4101.
8K CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4105).
[3125-2 only]
Adds 8,192 words (22-bits wide) of control storage to the IPU.
Required for some feature combinations .. , see Chart A.
limitation: Cannot be installed with #4210 or specify feature
#9315. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
4K DASF CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4210).
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP) .
[3125-2
only] Adds 4,096 words (22-bits wide) to the DDA control storage
for use with either or both the String Switch Capability or 16-Drive
Expansion specify feature (#9315) or 3344 Attachment specify
feature (#9317). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4105 or
#4460. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317)
or with S/360 Model 20 Compatibility (#7520) unless RPQ No.
cannot be
is installed on the 3125 ... RPQ
installed if the 2311 Mdl 1/3340 or 2314/3340 Compatibility
Also
feature (#8060, #8070) is installed
note Control Storage requirements in Chart A. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: See "Control Storage Requirements" under
"Highlights" above.
1403/3203 CARRIAGE CONTROL FEATURE (#4460).
Allows
the 3203 Printer with its tape less carriage control to emulate the
function of a tape controlled carriage and thus run programs
written for a 1403 Printer. Limitations: The 5203 Printer is not
supported by this feature. Cannot be installed with String Switch
Capability /16-Drive Expansion specify feature (#9315) or 3344
Attachment specify feature (#9317). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: 3203 Printer. Note: #4460 is not required with
DOS/VS Release 31 and subsequent releases.
5425 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT POWER PREREQUISITE
(#4500). Provides the power supply for the 5425 Multi-function
Card Unit when no native printer (1403 or 3203) is attached.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 1403 Printer /5425 Card Unit
Power Prerequisite (#4505). Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
1403 PRINTER/5425 CARD UNIT POWER PREREQUISITE
(#4505).
Provides the power supply for the natively attached
1403 Printer with or without a 5425 MFCU. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with 5425 Multi-function Card Unit Power Prerequisite
(#4500). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Control
INTEGRATED 3203 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#4650).
for attaching the 3203 Printer mdl 1 or 2. Specify: #9770 for
3203 mdl 1, or #9771 for 3203 mdl 2. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Integrated 1403 Printer Attachment (#4662, 4667 or
4668). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 2 ATTACHMENT (#4662).
Provides control for attaching the 1403 Printer mdl 2. Specify:
#9847~ to support UCS (#8641) on the 1403 mdl 2. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment
(#4650). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated 1403 Printer Attachment (#4667) and its prerequisite
(#4505).
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER ATTTACHMENT (#4667). Control
for attaching the 1403 Printer mdl 7. Prerequisite feature required
for installation of the Integrated 1403 Printer Mdl 2 or Mdl N1
Attachment (#4662, #4668). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Ye's. Prerequisite: 1403 Printer /5425 Card
Unit Power Prerequisite (#4505).
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL N1 ATTACHMENT (#4668).
Control for attaching the 1403 Printer mdl N1. Specify: #9847~
to support UCS (#8640) on the 1403 mdl N1. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated
1403 Printer Mdl 2 Attachment (#4662) and its prerequisites
(#4667, #4505).
INTEGRATED 2560 MOL A1 ATTACHMENT (#4670). Control for
the 2560 Multi-function Card Machine mdl A1. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 3525 Card Punch Attachment (#4685)
or with Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9726 on the 2560 mdl
A1 ... see "Specify" under 2560.
2560 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#4674).
Provides control for
Card Print capability on the 2560 MFCM mdl A1. Specify:
#9797~ for first two print lines, #9798~ for second two print lines,
#9799~ for third two print lines, when corresponding Card Print
(#1575, 1576, 1577) features are installed on the 2560 mdl A1.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated 2560 Mdl A 1
Attachment (#4670).
MAGNETIC TAPE ADAPTER (#4675). Provides control for attachment of one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1, 2 or 3
or one 3803 Tape Control mdl 3. See 3420 and 3803 or 3411
and 3410 for additional ordering instructions. The MagnetiC Tape
Adapter is addressed as channel 2. See "Highlights" for additional information. Maximum: One. Specify: #9807 for attachment of
3803 mdl 3. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A 3803 and
; CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same dis-kette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ---- -- -----== == ':' ==
M 3125.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
3411
cannot
coexist
on
the
Magnetic
Tape
Adapter.
Prerequisites: S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361) on the
3411, except for 3125 mdls HG2 and 12. When attached to 3125
md! HG2 or 12. RPQ
is required on the 3411.
INTEGRATED 3504 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#4680).
Control for attaching the 3504 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2. Suppcrts Read Column Eliminate capability on the 3504 Card Reader.
Specify: #9781 for 3504 mdl A 1, or #9782 for 3504 mdl A2;
#9783 provides Optical Mark Read capability on the 3125 when
Optical Mark Read (#5450) is installed on the 3504 mdl A1 or
A2; #9784 provides the capability of using the Selective Stacker
(#6555) feature on the 3504 mdl A1 or A2. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 3525 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#4685).
Control for attaching the 3525 Card Punch mdl P1, P2 or P3.
Specify: #9791# for 3525 mdl P1, #9792# for 3525 mdl P2, or
#9793# for 3525 mdl P3. Specify #9794# when the Card Read
(:;: 1533) feature is installed on the 3525. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Integrated 2560 Mdl A 1 Attachment (#4670) or
integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695). Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 5213 PRINTER MOL 1 ATTACHMENT (#4692).
Attaches the 5213 Printer mdl 1. Includes a special table to support the Printer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3525 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#4693).
Provides control for
Card Print (#8339, #5273) capability on the 3525 Card Punch.
Specify: ""'9795p when Two-line Card Print (#8339) is installed
on ttl", 3525, or #9796# when Multiline Card Print (#5273) is
installed on the 3525. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated 3525 Card Punch Attachment (#4685).
INTEGRATED 5425 ATTACHMENT (#4695). Control for attaching the 5425 Muiti-function Card Unit mdl A1 or A2. Specify:
#9183;5 for 5425 mdl A 1 or #9184;5 for 5425 mdl A2.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Integrated 3525 Card Punch
Attachment (#4685) or with Integrated 2560 Mdl A1 Attachment
(#4670). Can only be installed with CPU Configuration 1 (#9091)
see "Specify" above. Maximum; One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite:
1403 Printer /5425 Card Unit Power Prerequisite
(#4505) required when 1403 is natively attached, or 5425 Multifunction Card Unit Power Prerequisite (#4500) if no native printer
(1403 or 3203) is configured. When 3203 Printer is attaohed,
:1+4500 or #4505 is not required.
BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5248). To attach low speed
byte mu!tiplex devices. See "Byte Multiplexer Channel" under
'l~pu!/OutPLIt Channel" in "Highlights" section. #5248 includes
eentrol storage necessary for lOP operation. Maximum: One.
Fic.ld Installation: Yes.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520).
Microprogram
controlled program which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 instructions.
limitations: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317) or
with 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) unless RPQ
is installed on the 3125 ... RPQ
cannot be installed
ii eitiler 2311 Mdl 1/3340 or 2314/3340 compatibility feature
(#8060. #8070) is installed.
Also note control
storage requirements in Chart A.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites:
See "Control Storage Requirements" under
'Highlights" above.
1052 COMPATIBILITY (#8005).
Operates the 5213 Printer mdl
! ar~d standard ~eyboard as an operator console in S/360-1052
mode only. In this emulation mode of operation the Video/Display
bets as a slave unit to the printer. Field Installation: Yes.
Prer<~quisites: Integrated 5213 Printer Mdl 1 Attachment (#4692)
~n::! the 5213 Printer mdl 1.
2311 MOL 1/3330 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8040). Permits
lne emu'ation of 2311 mdl 1 files on the 3333/3330 Disk Storage.
The user program may access both the emulated 2311 mdl 1 data
set as weil as the native data set. This provides a "mixed-mode"
ODmating environment. Prerequisites: Minimum of one 4K Increenent of Control Storage (#4101, #4102) ... see "Control Storage
RequI'0me"ts" under "Highlights" above. Note: When running
"OS R91ease 21-27, 1052 Compatibility (#8005) is a prerequisite.
r'le 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) is also required
i "
3203 Printer is attached. Emulation under DOS/VS requires
SYSP!OS en 3330 in native mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Lirl'it,ation: #8040, #8060 and #8070 are mutually exclusive.
231 t MOL 1/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8060). Permits
the emulation of 2311 mdl 1 files on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2311 mdl 1 data as
wei: as the native data set. This provides a "mixed-mode" operat"'g envirol-,~ent. Prerequisites: Minimum of one 4K Increment of
CO'llrol Storage (#4101, #4102)
see' 'Control Storage
§- ( ;'1: '-lisk<':te-on'y "pecify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
l
kature that supr!ies diskette $290 on purchased machines to include any
'!'i,,;her of (!!'.xote-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Requirements" under "Highlights" above. Note: When running
DOS Release 21-27, 1052 Compatibility (#8005) is a prerequisite.
The 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) is also required
if a 3203 Printer is attached. Emulation under DOS/VS requires
SYSRES on 3340. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317) ... #8040, #8060,
#8070 and #9190 are mutually exclusive.
2314/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314 files on the 3340 Disk Storage. The user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well as the
native data set. This provides a "mixed-mode" operating environment. Prerequisites: Minimum of one 4K Increment of Control
Storage (#4101, #4102)
also see "Control Storage
Requirements" under "Highlights" above. Note: When running
DOS Release 21-27, 1052 Compatibility (#8005) is a prerequisite.
The 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) is also required
if a 3203 Printer is attached. Emulation under DOS/VS requires
SYSRES on 3340 in native mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317) ...
#8040, #8060, #8070 and #9190 are mutually exclusive.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (ICA) (#4640).
Provides the basic control storage and common circuits for direct
attachment of up to six synchronous (BSC) communications lines
OR up to sixteen asynchronous (start/stop) communications lines
depending upon line speed. All combinations of BSC AND
start/stop require the Integrated Communications Adapter Extension (#4641). Additional features are required to create appropriate line interfaces for the individual lines. Figure 1 A schematically
represents the feature build-up. The ICA provides as standard:
-
Autopoll
Multipoint central station functions
Multipoint tributary station functions
EBCDIC transparent mode
EBCDIC or ASCII code
Start/Stop and BSC
Start/Stop and BSC
BSC only
BSC only
BSC only
Refer to Figures 2A and 2B for attachable terminals and for configuration requirements prior to ordering features below.
Note:
to assist in configurating the ICA
Manual, GA33-1508).
refer to ICA Configura lor
Customer Responsibilities -- see M 2700 pages for customer
responsibilities regarding communications facilities and services.
Communications Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER EXTENSION (ICAE)
(#4641).
This feature is required for all combinations of BSC
and start/stop lines. Extends the communications capability to up
to six BSC AND sixteen start/stop lines depending upon line
speed. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP 1 (ALG1) (#1201).
Permits
attachment of up to four medium speed asynchronous lines (AL)
(#1231) or up to four low speed asynchronous line pairs (ALP)
(#1241) or up to four telegraph line pairs (TLP) (#7881). ALG1
and ALG2 are identical in function and either one can be installed
as the first line group in the ICA. The lines within ALG1, positions
A 1 thru A4, must be installed in ascending order. Limitation: All
lines within ALG1 must have the same line speed and line control.
Different terminals using the same speed and line control can be
attached within one line group. See Figure 2A. Specify: One line
control specify code from Figure 2A. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP 2 (ALG2) (#1202).
Permits
attachment of up to four medium speed asynchronous lines (AL)
(#1232) or up to four low speed asynchronous line pairs (ALP)
(#1242) or up to four telegraph line pairs (TLP) (#7882). ALG1
and ALG2 are identical in function and either one can be installed
as the first line group in the ICA. The lines within ALG2, positions
A5 thru A8, must be installed in ascending order. Limitation: All
lines in ALG2 must have the same line speed and line control.
Different terminals using the same line speed and line control can
be attached within one line group. See Figure 2A. Specify: One
line control specify code from Figure 2A. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE, MEDIUM SPEED (AL) (#1231 in ALG1,
#1232 in ALG2).
Provides for the attachment of one nonswitched 600 bps start/stop communications line. The 3767 can
be attached to this feature (at EC 380427 plus EC 380627) via
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - ----===':'=
-- -------
M 3125.5
Jul79
OPMachines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
switched or non-switched lines at 300 bps and via non-switched
lines at 600 or 1200 bps. Clocking speed is selected at installation time. Connects to the line via a modem or IBM Line Adapter.
The lines are installed in ascending order, AI thru A4 in ALGI
and A5 thru A8 in ALG2. Note: IBM Line Adapters are tied to
specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 40. Maximum: Four
#1231
and
#1232.
Field Installation:
Yes.
each of
Prerequisites: ALGI (#1201) is prerequisite to #1231; ALG2
(# 1202) is prerequisite to #1232. limitations: See Figure 5,
Maximum ICA Configuration. #1231, #1241 and #7881 cannot
be intermixed within ALGI. #1232, #1242 and #7882 cannot be
intermixed within ALG2.
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE PAIR, LOW SPEED (ALP) (#1241 in
ALG1, #1242 In ALG2).
Provides for the attachment of two
switched 110.0 bps or two switched or non-switched 134.5 bps
start/stop communications lines. Connects to the line via a modem or IBM Line Adapter. The lines are installed in ascending
order, AI thru A4 in ALGI and A5 thru A8 in ALG2. Note: IBM
Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C
and 40. Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration.
#1231, #1241 and #7881 cannot be intermixed within ALGI.
# 1232, # 1242 and #7882 cannot be intermixed within ALG2.
Maximum: Four each of #1241 and #1242. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: ALGI (#1201) is prerequisite to #1241, and
ALG2 (#1202) is prerequisite to #1242.
AUTO CALL ADAPTER (ACA) (#1291-1296). Provides automatic
dialing capabilities on switched facilities. One of these features is
required for each line equipped to automatically originate calls on
switched networks. See Figure 3 for the selection of correct
feature code. Limitations: The use of Auto Call in a line group
precludes the last two lines/line pairs of that group ... see Figure
3. Maximum: Two per line group ... maximum total six. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: See Figure 3.
IBM LEASED LINE ADAPTER (#4743). A modem for start/stop
data transmission at 134.5 or 600 bps over non-switched facilities.
This line adapter operates with Leased Line Adapters on other IBM
products. Selection between 2-wire and 4-wire operation is made
at installation time. See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435
for specifications and restrictions. Specify: See Figures 4C and
40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Adapter Base, #4792 or #4793. Also see
Figures 4C and 40.
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER (#4781, #4782, #4791).
A
modem for BSC data transmission at up to 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Also for start/stop transmission at 300, 600 or 1200 bps over non-switched facilities to
the 3767 terminal. Unclocked and must interface to a SLC
(#7141-7144) or AL (#1231).
The IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter is available in three different
versions:
#4781 -- Non-switched
#4782 -- Switched with Autoanswer
#4791 -- Switched with Autocall and Autoanswer
Attachment to non-switched facilities is via an IBM provided cable
directly to the line. Attachment to the switched network is via an
IBM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Customer Responsibilities -- see M 2700 pages.
Communications Facilities -- see M 2700 pages. Specify: See
Figures 4C and 40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field
Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: SLC (#7141-7144) or AL
(#1231) and a Line Adapter Base (#4792 or #4793). Also see
Figures 4C and 40. ACA (#1295 or #1296) is prerequisite for
#4791.
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (LAB 2) (#4792). Permits attachment of
up to two IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters for BSC lines and up to
four IBM Leased Line Adapters. The line adapters are tied to
specific line positions. See Figure 4C for configuration and possible line combinations. Note: LAB 2 is required for IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapters with Autoanswer (#4782) or with Autocall and
Autoanswer (#4791). limitation: #4792 and #4793 are mutually
exclusive. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (LAB 3) (#4793). Permits attachment of
up to twelve IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and IBM Leased Line
Adapters. The line adapters are tied to specific line positions. See
Figure 40 for configuration and possible line combinations.
Limitation: #4792 and #4793 are mutually exclusive. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
SYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP (SLG) (#7100).
Permits attachment of up to four medium speed BSC lines -- SLC (#7141-7144)
and SL (#7151-7154). Maximum line speed is 7200 bps. The
lines in this group, positions SI thru S4, must be installed in
ascending order. The lines can have different line speeds within
the maximum specified. Specify: Maximum line speed in the
group:
Max. Line Speed
1200
2400
4800
7200
Maximum:
(#4640).
Specify Code
#9751~
#9753~
#9754~
#9757~
bps
bps
bps
bps
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite:
ICA
SYNCHRONOUS LINE, HIGH SPEED (SLHS) (#7121).
Provides
for the attachment of one non-switched BSC line at speeds up to
50.0 kbps. See Figure 1. This is a digital current interface for
attachment to an El, E2 or E3 facility. Note: Only for nonswitched point-to-point lines. limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum
ICA Configuration. #7121 and #7131 are mutually exclusive.
This line has a load factor of 100% and must not be operated
concurrently with any other line in the ICA. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
SYNCHRONOUS LINE, LOW LOAD (SLLL) (#7131 - First line,
#7132 - Second Line). Each provides for the attachment of one
switched or non-switched BSC line. Non-switched lines with
switched network backup are supported.
Maximum line speed on non-switched lines is 7200 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched backup network is 3600 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched network is 2400 bps. See Figure 28 for
detailed speed and facility information.
Requires external modem. This feature has a lower load factor
than #7151-7154 ... see Figure 5. The modem must provide
clocking.
Specify: The highest line speed used on #7131 and #7132:
#9758 if the highest line speed is from 1200 bps up to 4800
bps.
#9759 if the highest line speed is above 4800 bps and up to
7200 bps.
Note: 1200 bps is the LOWEST allowed line speed for these
SLG (#7100) not required as a prerequisite.
features.
limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration
#7131
and #7121 are mutually exclusive. Maximum: One each, #7131
and #7132. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: ICA (#4640)
... #7132 requires #7131 or #7121.
SYNCHRONOUS LINE,
(#7141-7144).
#7141
#7142
#7143
#7144
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
MEDIUM
position
position
position
position
SPEED
WITH
CLOCK (SLC)
SI
S2
S3
S4
Line positions SI thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. The clock can be set by the user for a transmission rate of 600 bps or 1200 bps. Connects to the line via an
unclocked modem or IBM Line Adapter. [Notes: IBM Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 40.
SL (#7151-7154) may be intermixed with SLC (#7141-7144)
within the SLG.] Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration. #7141 is mutually exclusive with #7151, #7142 with
#7152, #7143 with #7153, and #7144 with #7154. Maximum:
One. each, #7141 thru #7144.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
SYNCHRONOUS LINE, MEDIUM SPEED (SL) (#7151-7154).
#7151
#7152
#7153
# 7154
-----
Line
line
line
Line
position
position
position
position
S1
S2
S3
S4
Line positions S1 thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. Non-switched lines with switched network
backup are supported.
Maximum line speed on non-switched lines is 7200 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched backup network is 3600 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched network is 4800 bps. See Figure 2B for
detailed speed and facility information.
Connects to the line via a modem. The modem must provide
clocking. Note: SL (#7151-7154) may be intermixed with SLC
(#7141-7144) within the SLG. limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration. #7151 is mutually exclusive with #7141,
#7152 with #7142, #7153 with #7143, and #7154 with
#,7144.
Maximum: One each, #7151 thru #7154. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
TELEGRAPH LINE PAIR (TLP) (#7881 in ALGI, #7882 in ALG2).
~ CPU diskette~only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette~only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ------------==-=
':' =
M 3125.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Provides for the attachment of two non-switched single current
telegraph lines at 45.5, 56.9, 74.2 or 75 bps. Attachment to the
lines is via an IBM provided external cable. The lines, A 1 thru A4
in ALGl and A5 thru A8 in ALG2, are installed in ascending order.
Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration. #1231,
#1241 and #7881 cannot be intermixed within ALG1. #1232,
# 1242 and #7882 cannot be intermixed within ALG2. Maximum:
Four each, #7881 and #7882.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: ALG1 (#1201) is prerequisite to #7881; ALG2
(#1202) is prerequisite to #7882.
MODEMS One IBM modem can be attached to each of the BSC
lines of the ICA (#4640). Prerequisite: SL (#7151-7154) or
SLlL (#7131, #7132).
Modem
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
Speed (bps)
2400/1200
2400/1200
4800/2400
4800/2400
7200/3600/1800
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874. 3875 and M 2700
pages.
TlP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
MMMC
3125-0 and 3125-2
External Signals
#3898 * $112 $1 02$ 4,200 $ 1.00
Fltg Pt Incld Ext Precision
3910
NC NC
••
NC
1401/1440/1460 Compat
4457
NC NC
*.
NC
1403/3203 Carr Cntrl Feature 4460
NC NC
**
NC
5425 MFCU Power Prereq
4500
179 163 6,715 14.00
1403/5425 Cd Unit Pwr Prereq 4505 313 285 11,730 39.00
Int 3203 Prntr Attachment
4650* 173 158 5,205 16.50
Int 1403 Prntr Mdl 2 Attach
4662*
10 10
434
1.00
Int 1403 Prntr Attachment
4667- 145 132 5,455 12.00
Int 1403 Prntr Mdl N1 Attach 4668*
5
5
217
1.00
Int 2560 Mdl A1 Attachment
4670* 156 142 5,890 12.00
2560 Card Print Control
4674*
33 30 1,250
2.00
Magnetic Tape Adapter
4675* 112 102 4,200
3.50
Int 3504 Card Reader Attach
4680*
72 66 2,730
8.50
Int 3525 Card Punch Attach
4685*
89 81 3,375 11.00
Int 5213 Prntr Mdl 1 Attach
4692* 112 102 4,200
3.50
3525 Card Print Control
4693*
67 61 2,510
3.00
Int 5425 Attachment
4695* 156 142 5,890 21.00
Byte Multiplexer Channel
5248* 224 204 8,405 24.00
5/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility
7520
NC NC
*NC
1052 Compatibility
8005
NC NC
*NC
2311 Mdl 1/3330-Series Cmpt 8040
NC NC
**
NC
NC NC
NC
2311 Mdl 1/3340-5erles Cmpt 8060
2314/3340-5erles Cmpt
8070
NC NC
NC
Communications Features
Int Communications Adapter
Int Comm Adapter Extension
Asynchronous line Group 1
Asynchronous line Group 2
Async line, Med Spd - AlGl
Async line, Med 5pd - ALG2
Async Line Pr, Low 5pd-ALG1
Async line Pr, Low 5pd-AlG2
Auto Call Adapter line position A 1
line position A2
line position AS
line pOSition A6
line pOSition 51
line position 52
IBM Leased Line Adapter
IBM 1200 BPS line Adapter non-switched
switched w autoanswer
sw w aLitoans & autocall
Line Adapter Base 2
line Adapter Base 3
Synchronous line Group
Synchronous Line, High Speed
Synchronous line, low load first line
second line
Sync Line, Med Spd w Clock line position S1
line pOSition 52
line poSition 53
line position S4
Sync Line, Med Spd line position 51
line position 52
line position S3
line position 54
Telegraph line Pair - AlGl
Telegraph Line Pair - ALG2
4640* 230 210
4641*
84 77
43 40
1201*
1202*
43 40
123143 40
43 40
1232*
1241*
61
56
1242*
61
56
8,585 27.50
1.50
3,160
1,685
3.50
1,685
3.50
1,685
3.00
1,685' 3.00
2,295
4.00
2,295
4.00
20
20
20
20
20
20
14
824
824
824
824
824
824
424
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
3.00
4781*
4782*
4791*
4792*
4793*
7100*
7121 *
16 15
21
20
72 66
28 26
28 26
43 40
112 102
535
714
1,970
1,035
1,035
1,685
4,200
3.00
3.50
12.00
2.00
2.00
3.50
g.OO
71317132*
112 102
112 102
4,200
4,200
9.00
9.00
1291*
1292*
1293*
1294*
1295*
1296*
4743*
21
21
21
21
21
21
15
7141*
7142*
71437144-
61
61
61
61
56
56
56
56
2,295
2,295
2,295
2,295
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
715171527153*
71547681*
7682-
49
49
49
49
61
61
45
45
45
45
56
56
1,905
1,905
1,905
1,905
2,295
2,295
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
9.50
9.50
55
55
50
50
1,335
1,335
1.50
1.50
110 100
55 50
2,670
1,335
3.50
1.50
3125-0 Only
4K Control Storage Increment
first
4101
4102
second
3125-2 Only
8K Control Storage Extension
4K DASF Control Storage Ext
4105
4210
• Feature supplies CPU diskette.
•• CPU diskettc.only feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or
when field installed. S290 on purchased machines when combined with thanges subject
to a distribution fee to include any number of disk-ette-only cunges ordered on the
same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(
\..
---------- --------== =':" =
M 3125.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (conl'd)
FIGURE 1A
INTEGRATED
COMMUNICATIONS
FEATURE BUILD-UP
ICAE
(#4641)
LINE
GROUP
LINE INTERFACES
ALG I
(#1201)
Al
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
11#7881)
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#124g' or TLP
11#7881
AL (#1231), or ALP
ALG 2
(#1202)
TERMINAL
ALG2
ALG I
SPEED FACIL- LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
(hps)
IT/ES INTER- CNTRL
INTER- CNTRL
SPECIFY
SPECIFY FACE
FACE
1030
600.0
D2
1231
9740#
1232
97S0#
7S.0
A4
7881
9736#
7882
9746#
IOS0
134.5
CI, C2,
Dl
1241
9738#
1242
9748#
1060
134.5
Dl
1241
9738#
1242
9748#
2740 mdll
134.5
CI,C2,
Dl
1241
9738#
1242
9748#
7S.0
A4
7881
9736#
7882
9746#
2740 mdl2
134.5
Dl
1241
9738#
1242
9748#
600.0
D2
1231
9739#
1232
9749#
134.5
CI, C2,
Dl
1241
9738#
1242
9748#
CI, Dl
1231
9739#
1232
9749~
A2
A3 (I)
A4(I)
Ii:i~m or TLP
ICA
(#4640)
Sync Line
Position
Async Line
Position
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
11#7881)'
FIGURE 2A
START jSTOP TERMINALS
SCHEMATIC
ADAPTER
AL (#1232), or ALP
(#1242), or TLP
(#7882)
AS
AL (#1232), or ALP
(#1242), or TLP
1(#7882)
A6
3767 mdll, 2
300,0
w #7111 or
#7113
AL (#1232), or ALP
(#124~l' or TLP
A7 (I)
3767 mdl I, 2, 600 or
1200
3 w #7112
2741
D2
1231
9739~
1232
9749#
134.5
CI, C2,
DI
1241
9738#
1242
9748~
600,0
D2
1231
9739#
1232
9749~
134.5
BI, B2,
CI,C2,
Dl
1241
9738#
1242
9748~
300,0
11#7882
AL (#1232), or ALP
1~:i~m or TLP
SLG
(#7100)
SOlO mdl Axx
A8(1)
SL (#i~SI), or SLC
1(#7141
SI
SL (#~)IS2), or SLC
1(#7142
S2
S;7\~W3), or SLC
S3 (I)
SIOO/SIIO
SL (#7IS4), or SLC
#7144)
S4 (I)
TWX-33/3S
~t~~ ~:~ m~' or
SS
SLLL (#7132)
S6
,
CI, Dl
1231
9739#
1232
9749~
4S.5
AI
788i
9733~
7882
9743~
S6.9
A2
7881
9734#
7882
9744~
74.2
A3
7881
973S~
7882
974S#
110.0
C3
1241
9737~
1242
9747~
AT&T
83B2/83B3
WU liSA
; CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
,
(I) Auto Call Adapters (#1291-1296) restrict the use of these line pOSItIOns ."
see Figure 3.
-a
a
....
~
£!
J:;
15c
..:
r-
'"r-a
;;
'0 '0
E E
M
a a
M ~
<0
ar- ra M !:!
£l r-'" '"
M
en'"
en
'" '"
E., '"
1;;
~ '";::: r-r-'"
1::: '0
;: ;: E
~
M
>~
(J)
~
.....
'"'0..:
~
'"
N
a
~
'0
E
a
II)
a
r- en
- en
en
M
M
M ....
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
III
X
X X X
X X X
IlIllI
X
X X
X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X X X X X X
C6
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X X X X X X
X X
X X
7151·7154
05SB
X X
X
X X X X X
X
XX
7151-7152 or
7131/7132
06
X X X X X X X
X
X X X X
X X
X X X
X
7151·7152 or
7131/7132
D6SB
X X
X X X X
X
X X X X
X X
X
X
7121
7121
7121
El
E2
E3
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X X
X X
X X
•• 3125 leA must use the IBM 1200 bps Modem (#4781 or #4782),
X X
X
X
X
X
Ix
X'
t t XI M may not be used for communications with a 2703 or a S/360 mdl 25,
ttt X2M may not be used for communications with a 2703 or a 8/360 mdl 25.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------
-- ---- ---= == ':" =
M 3125.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
FIGURE 3
AUTO CALL ADAPTERS
AUTO CALL
ADAPTER
FEATURE
CODE
PROVIDES
AUTO CALL
FOR LINE
POSITION
AI (I)
1291
1292
1293
A2 (It
A5 (I)
1294
A6 (I)
1295
SI
1296
S2
FIGURE 40
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (#4793) ... Maximum, 12 IBM Line
Adapters.
PREREQUISITES
PRECLUDES
LINE
POSITIONS
1241
A3 and A4
1241 and 1291
A3 and A4
1242
A7 and A8
1242 and 1293
7141 or 7151
A7 and A8
S3 and S4
7142 or 7152 and
1295
S3 and S4
LINE
POSITION
LINE
ADAPTER
AI (3)
4743 or 4781
A2 (3)
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
PREREQ
NOTE
9481, 9501 ~
1231
Excludes line
adapter in po~;tion
S4 (#9496
4743 or 4781
9482, 9502 ~
1231
ada~~r(J:9g9~\tion
A3 (3)
4743 or 4781
9483, 9503 ~
1231
Excludes line
adapter in position
S2 (#9494)
A4 (3)
4743 or 4781
9484, 9504 ~
1231
Excludes line
adapter in position
SI (#9493)
Excludes line
(I) Provides Autocall in this line position for the first line of the Asynchronous
Line Pair (#1241 or #1242).
FIGURE 4A
IBM LINE ADAPTERS
BSC
FACILITY
IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapter
4743
9487~
1242
A62nd line
4743
9488~
IBM Leased
Line Adapter
IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapter
A7 lst line
9489~
A7 2nd line
4743
4743
9487
1242
949~
9489
A8 1st line
4743
9491~
1242
A82nd line
4743
9492~
9491
SI
4781
9493~
7141
Excludes line
adapter in position
A4 (#9484)
S2
4781
9494~
7142
adarr(~rsJ~tion
S3
4781
9495~
7143
ada~~r(~~~~\tion
S4
4781
9496~
7144
Excludes line
adapter in position
AI (#9481)
4781
Non-switched
multipoint control
4781
4743
4781
Non-switched
multipoint tributary
4781
---
4782
-----
4791
---
-----
(2) Only with 3767 terminal.
FIGURE 4C
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (#4792) ... Maximum, 6 IBM Line
Adapters.
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
PREREQ
A5 1st line
4743
94631
1242
A5 2nd line
4743
9464~
9463
A6 1st line
4743
9465~
1242
A6 2nd line
4743
9466~
9465
4781
9471~
7141
SI
S2
1242
9485
A6 lst line
4743
LINE
ADAPTER
9485~
9486~
Start/Stop (2) up
to 1200 bps
4781
LINE
POSITION
4743
4743
START/STOP
up to 600 bps
Non-switched pt-to-pt
Switched with
utoanswer
Switched with autocall
and autoanswer
A5 1st line
A5 2nd line
4782
4791
9473~
9475~
7141
7141
4781
9472~
7142
4782
9474~
7142
4791
9476~
7142
NOTE
Excludes line
Excludes line
(3) #4781 may be used only with the 3767 terminal.
FIGURE 5
MAXIMUM ICA CONFIGURATION
All lines/line pairs are assigned load factors.
The sum of all load factors must not exceed 100% if SLHS is not
installed.
The sum of all load factors must not exceed 200% if SLHS is
installed.
LOAD FACTOR IN %
Select one line
adapter
Select one line
adapter
ASYNCHRONOUS LINES
TLP at 45.5 and 56.9 bps
TLP at 74.2 and 75.0 bps
ALP at 110.0 and 134.5 bps
AL at 300/600/1200 bps
SYNCHRONOUS LINES
SL and SLC at max. 1200 bps
SL and SLC at max. 2400 bps
SL at max. 4800 bps
SL at max. 7200 bps
1-2 line
pairs
3-4 line
I pairs
20%
20%
20
40
20
40
First Line Group
(ALG)
Up to 4 lines
20
1-2 lines
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
20
20
40
60
25
25
50
75
I line
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
SLLL at max. 4800 bps
SLLL at max. 7200 bps
SLHS at max. 50 kbpS
20
20
100·
25
30
5-6 line
[pairs
7-8 line
pairs
40%
40%
80
60
60
80
Second Line Group
ALGI +ALG2
5 to 8 lines
40
3-4 lines
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
20
40
80
2 lines
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
20
40
• See "Limitations" in the Special Feature description of the feature.
, CPU diskette-only specify featuR. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-9nly changes ordered OD same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
25
50
100
30
60
M 3135.1
Jul79
DP Machines
TABLE OF CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS (cont'd) BYTES
IBM 3135 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Has main and control storage, plus arithmetic and logic
circuits for a S/370 mdl 135.
Model FE
98,304 bytes of processor storage.
Model GO
147,456 bytes of processor storage.
Model GF
196,608 bytes of processor storage.
Model H
262,1 44 bytes of processor storage.
Model HF
327,680 bytes of processor storage.
Model HG
393,216 bytes of processor storage.
Model I
524,288 bytes of processor storage.
For additional models of the 3135, see 3135-3 "Machines"
pages.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, up to 524,288 bytes of
processor storage are available. CPU cycle time varies from 275
to 1485 nanoseconds depending on the internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are provided.
Capability to natively attach a 231 9 Disk Storage mdl A 1 •• (and
additional 2319 mdl A3··, 2312·· or 2318·· Disk Storage).
Capability to natively attach one or two 3333 Disk Storage and
Control modules. Capability to natively attach one or two 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility mdl A2s. Capability to natively
attach a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or N1. See "Special Features."'
Virtual Storage capability to increase the effective utilization of
main storage.
Up to eight teleprocessing lines are attachable via the Integrated
Communications Adapter (#4640).
Standard features include a commercial instruction set, new
S/370 instructions, Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Address Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program
Event Recording, interval timer, time-of-day clock, store and fe!ch
protect, console file, byte-oriented operand feature, error checking
and correction on main and control storage, automatic instruction
retry, channel command retry, byte multiplexer channel, OS/DOS
Compatibility Feature, and audible alarm.
A standard console file is the basic microprogram loading device
for the system. The console file contains a small, low performance
read only file device that provides all the microcode for the system
on removable. magnetic disk cartridges. The disks that will be
supplied with the system will contain all of the required microcode
for the basic system, the optional features ordered for the system,
and FE diagnostics.
An optional Clock Comparator and Timer provides additional timing
facilities for the programmer.
Control Storage Requirements -- Reloadable Control Storage is
housed in the 3135, and is loaded from the console file. 24,576
bytes of control storage are standard ... two additional increments
of 12,288 bytes are available if required to support special features.
TABLE OF CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
Basic Systems Microcode
APL Assist (#1005)
Conditional Swapping (#1051)
Autocall (#1290) •
Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421)
Block Multiplexer Shared Subchannel (#1431)
Clock Comparator and CPU Timer (#2001)
Direct Control (#3274)
Extended Precision Floating Point (#3840)
Floating Point (#3900)
64 Multiplexer Subchannels (#3905)
128 Multiplexer Subchannels (#3906)
256 Multiplexor Subchannels (#3907)
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457)
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640)
IFA Con.ersion Feature (#4645)
2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650)
3333/3340 Series IF A (#4655) with:
String Switch Attachment (#9841) with:
Fixed Head Attachment (#9190) with:
#9313
#9314
#9315
#9316 ...
#9317 ++
#9313
#9314
#9315
#9316 ...
#9314
#9315
BYTES
15,482
13,800
300
440
1,568
14
1,400
50
676
1,200
1,024
2,048
4,096
3,492
2,100
2,048
.4,652
10,192
9,768
12,800
300
2,200
300
370
334
o
300
300
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670)
Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 2, mdl N I Attachment (#4672)
Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 7 Attachment (#4671)
First or First and Second Selector Channel (#6981.6982)
S/36O Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520)
3210 Model I Adapter (#7844)
3215 Adapter (#7855)
Virtual Machine Assist (#8740)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656) •
Adapter Base Type I +"
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#9721-9728) +.
Telegraph Adapter Type II (#9785·9792) +.
Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760) •
2314/3340 Series Compatibility (#8070)
1,300
o
o
1,584
876
1,494
1,930
2,000
3,700
1,200
500
200
2,100
6,400
For the basic system and applicable special features, total the
control storage requirements given in the table. If the total exceeds 24,576 bytes, First 12K Control Storage Increment (#7861)
is required. If the total exceeds 36,864 bytes, Second 12K Control
Storage Increment (#7862) is also required.
Limitations: The maximum configuration that can operate at any
one time is determined by the available control storage (maximum
49,152 bytes). Alternate feature configurations can be operated
by utilizing additional magnetic disk cartridges with another set of
31 35 features. Alternate cartridges for an installation will be
available by RPQ.
Virtual Storage: Extended Control (EC) Mode expands the structure of the Program Status Word to accommodate the control of
new S/370 features and extends the number of permanently
assigned main storage locations. The S/370 mdl 135 can operate
in either EC Mode or Basic Control (BC) Mode as defined for the
S/360. Dynamic Address Translatidn (OAT) is a standard feature
on the S/370 mdl 135. When the S/370 mdl 135 is in Extended
Control (EC) Mode with Translation Mode operable, program addresses are treated as "logical addresses" and the translation
feature develops "real addresses." Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the amount of available real storage, program
size may exceed real storage size. This logical storage is referred
to as "virtual storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes
on the S/370 mdl 135. For I/O operations, Channel Indirect Data
Addressing provides a means to transmit data that spans pages in
noncontiguous real storage.
Program Event Recording, a standard feature, is a deb';lgging. aid
which permits four types of events to be selectively mOnitored In a
virtual environment: [1] Successful branches ... [2] Instruction
fetch address compare ... [3] Main Storage alteration address
compare ... [4] General Purpose Register alteration address compare.
Input/Output Attachments -- a wide variety of I/O devices may
be attached to the S/370 mdl 135 via the standard byte multiplexer and optional selector channels. There are additionally, five
direct attachment features for the 3135. They are:
Console Printer-Keyboard (Required) -- this unit serves as the
on-line I/O device for operator/system communications. It provides a means of manually entering data into the system, altering
or displaying data already in storage, and for printing error logout
messages.
2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650) (Optional) -- this feature
enables native attachment of a 2319 Disk Storage mdl A1·· (and
a 2319 mdl A3··, 2312 mdl A1s·· or 2318 mdl AP') up to a
total of eight drives. The IFA is addressed as channel 1.
LlMITA TlON: Cannot be installed if 3333/3340 Intermix (#9315)
is specified when 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) is also ordered.
3330/3340 Series Integrated File Adapter (#4655) (Optional) -this feature allows the native attachment of one or two 3333
modules or 3340 mdl A2 units. Each 3333 module (either mdl 1
or mdl 11) can attach up to three 3330 modules (any combination of mdls 1 2 or 11). Each 3340 mdl A2 can attach 3340 mdl
132 or B1 unit~ and one 3340 mdl A2 can also attach 3344 units
to a maximum of eight drives. Maximum is sixteen drives per IFA.
If 2319 IFA (#4650) is also present, IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645) is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (Optional) - this feature
provides attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the
3135. These may be any combination of supported BSC and
Start/Stop lines and appear to the processor as if connected via
one or more 2701 s on the byte multiplexer channel.
Integrated Printer Adapter (Optional) -
this feature enables
'" The specified control storage is required once only for any number of lines of
one type.
+ For Telegraph Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, the contro.l
storage reqUIred is the Adapter Base Type I plus the control storage for the appropnate adapter. One copy of Adapter Base Type I is automatically included whenever
either or both ·of these adapters are ordered.
++ Requires #9314.
** No longer available.
*** Requires either #9313 or #9315.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- --===
- -- ----':' =
M 3135.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
native attachment of a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or N 1. The Universal Character Set Feature can be optionally specified on the
1403 mdl 2 or N1.
Input/Output Channels
3135
Byte Multiplexer Channel -- one is standard on the 3135 and is
functionally equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on S/360
mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50. Sixteen subchannels are provided as
standard with the option to extend to 64, 128 or 256 ... see
"Special Features." From the number of subchannels chosen,
one must be allocated to the Console Printer-Keyboard (see
"Specify"), and one for each ICA line installed. The byte multiplexer channel provides eight control unit positions and permits
I/O units to operate normally in byte mode, giving the effect of
several I/O operations simultaneous with computing. Burst mode
operation of unbuffered devices operating in excess of 10KB is
not allowed for concurrent operation with the Integrated File
Adapter, the Integrated Communications Adapter, or a Selector
Channel. For further clarification refer to IBM S/370 Model 135
Channel Characteristics Manual, GA33-3010. For OS exclusion,
refer to SRL GC28-6554, "System Generation."
Selector Channels - two are available as special features. Data
rates are 1.3 megabytes per second.
Direct access devices may be attached to selector channels
and/or to the Integrated File Adapters. If either or both the 2319
IFA and the 3330/3340 Series IFA is present, the following applies:
- Direct access devices should be attached to the higher priority
selector channel (normally the first).
- If the device on the higher priority selector channel is the 3330
or 3340 Disk Storage series, the lower priority selector channel should be limited to devices with data rates not exceeding
144KB per second.
- The selector channel priorities for command chaining may be
reversed by specifying Channel Priority (#1501).
If the 3330/3340 Series IFA, or both !FAs, are present without
additional direct access devices attached via a selector channel,
tape units on selector channels 2 and 3 are limited to an aggregate 950 KB.
If an IFA is not present, two channels of 3330 Series, 3340 Series, and/or 3350 Series DASD can be attached. For additional
information and limitations, see S/370 Model 135 Channel
Characteristics, GA33-30 1O.
Console Function -- a standard system control panel is located on
the 3135. It has switches and lights necessary to operate and
control the system. A system console I/O function is provided with
either of two alternatives. Feature #7844 attaches the 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) on the console table reading board. Optionally, the 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard (85 cps)
may be attached via feature #7855. A right reading board extension is standard on the 3135 ... a left extension is not available.
Either feature #7844 or #7855 is required in the system
see
"Special Features."
PREREQUISITES: Each 3135 requires a 3046 Power Unit
3046.
see
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] Console Printer-Keyboard Address: Recorded on console file
disk at the plant. #9101# for X'01F', or #9102# for X'009'.
[5J Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
135.
[6] Console Printer-Keyboard: A 3210 mdl 1 or 3215 is required in
every system ... see 3210, 3215 and "Special Features" below.
[7] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3135 Frame 01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9570. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60" long x 60" high.
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by telephone.
Mdl
MACI
MRC
FE
GO
GF
H
HF
HG
I
$6,355
7,370
8,385
9,740
10,440
11,140
12,540
TLP/
MLC
4 Year Purchase
$5,780
6,705
7,630
8,870
9,510
10,150
11,430
$252,800
284,950
317,100
350,550
372,450
394,350
438,150
MMMC
$497
529
560
658
712
766
874
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From To
FE
GO
GF
OH
H
HF
HG
GO
GF
$32,150
$64,300
32,150
OH
$96,450
64,300
32,150
H
HF
HG
$97,750 $119,650 $141,550 $185,350
65,600
87,500 109,400 153,200
33,450
55,350
77,250 121,050
55,350
77,250 121,050
33,450
21,900
43,800
87,600
21,900
65,700
43,800
SPECIAL FEATURES
APL ASSIST (#1005). Provides performance assist to APL programs when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: 12K control store increments (#7861 and
#7862) and Floating Point (#3900).
CONDITIONAL SWAPPING (#1051).
Provides two additional
instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and Swap.
This feature is a prerequisite for the execution of VTAM programming support and for TCAM/NCP. Field Installation: Yes.
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1421).
Increases the efficiency of the 3330/3340 Series IFA and selector channels when
using direct access storage devices equipped with rotational position sensing or other devices capable of disconnected command
chaining. The disconnected command chaining feature of the
channel allows multiple devices to perform non-data transfer operation concurrently with one data transfer operation. This permits
increased utilization of the channel(s) by performing operations of
other devices while the channel would normally have been waiting
on one device. The feature provides 16 non-shared selector and 1
shared subchannel. The shared selector subchannel may attach a
control unit having a maximum of 16 device addresses. Devices on
a block multiplexer channel which cannot utilize the block multiplexer feature will function as if attached to a conventional selector channel. Maximum: One. Applies to both Selector Channels
and the 3330/3340 Series IFA. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: First Selector Channel (#6981) or 3330/3340
Series IFA (#4655).
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SHARED SUBCHANNEL (#1431). Note:
This feature should only be installed if devices capable of "Block
Shared" operation are installed on the block multiplexer channel.
See I/O Configuration Form, GA22-7002. Allows anyone of the
following combinations of "Non-Shared", "Block Shared", or
selector subchannels to be attached to the Block Multiplexer
Channel (#1421): [1]16 non-shared and one shared selector (see
address restrictions) ... [2] 8 non-shared, 8 block shared, and 1
shared selector (see address restrictions) ... [3] 8 non-shared, 4
block shared, 1 shared selector (see address restrictions). If
option [2] is selected, then each block shared subchannel may
have attached to it a control unit having a maximum of 16 device
addresses. If option [3] is selected, the four block shared subchannels may each have attached a control unit having a maximum of 32 device addresses. If option [1] is selected, no block
shared subchannels are available, and addresses XOO through X7F
are not available. With any option, the selector subchannel may
have attached to it control units with a maximum of 16 device
addresses. This feature will apply to both selector channels if
installed. The options are selectable by the Customer Engineer
and may be defined differently on each channel. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel
(#1421). Address Restrictions with #1431:
,. CPU diskette-only feature. No fee when ordered al time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature thai supplies diskette.
$405 on purchased machines to indude any number of diskette-only
changes ordered on same diskette.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
\
--------- ---- -- -----=== =
~
M 3135.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cant' d)
a)
Addresses XOO through X7F are assigned as block shared
subchannels. With option [1], they may not be used. With
option [2], each control unit address position, i.e., XOO, X10,
X20, etc., through X70 is available. With oprion [3], "even"
control unit address positions only are available, i.e., 00, 20,
40, and 60.
b)
Selector and non-shared addresses are limited to addresses
X80 through XFF.
CHANNEL PRIORITY (#1501). When the IFA (#4650 or #4655)
and both selector channels are present, this feature changes the
higher priority for command chaining from the first selector channel (Channel 2) to the second selector channel (Channel 3).
# 1501 is required if any DASD devices are to be attached to
Channel 3. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated File
Adapter (#4650 or #4655) and both Selector Channels (#6981
and #6982).
CLOCK COMPARATOR AND CPU TIMER (#2001).
The Clock
Comparator provides a means of causing an interruption when the
time-ot-day clock has passed a program-specified value. The CPU
Timer is a binary counter which is decremented every microsecond
but has a readout resolution of 16 microseconds. It provides a
means of measuring elapsed CPU time by causing an interruption
when a prespecified amount of time has elapsed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Provides two instructions, Read
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Direct and Write Direct, and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/360 Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide a single emergency power-off switch in a "room" or "area."
see Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 mdl 135 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches
#3621 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3840). Extends the
precision of floating point instructions to. 28 hexadecimal digits.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Floating Point (#3900).
FLOATING POINT (#3900),
Adds 44 floating point arithmetic
instructions ... these, with the Standard Set, make up the Scientific Instruction Set. Field Installation: Yes.
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADD'L (#3905-3907).
To increase the number of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer channel,
the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of
the following: #3905 -- for 64 subchannels ... #3906 -- for 128
subchannels .. #3907 -- for 256 subchannels. The maximum
number of shared subchannels is eight. When 256 subchannels
are installed there are no shared subchannels. Note: The number
of subchannels ordered must be equal to or greater than the
device addresses. Also see "Byte Multiplexer Channel" under
"Input/Output Channels" above. Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogrammed
controlled feature, which, in conjunction with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Installation: Yes.
IFA CONVERSION FEATURE (#4645).
Permits co-residence of
both 2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650) and 3330/3340 Series
Integrated File Adapter (#4655). Both IFAs are addressed as
Channel 1. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed if
3333/3340 Intermix (#9315) or 3344 Attach (#9317) is specified
... cannot be installed with 2314/3340 Compatibility Feature
(#8070). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 2319 Integrated
File Adapter (#4650) and 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
2319 INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4650).
Permits native
attachment of a2319 mdl A1 (and a 2319 mdl A3, 2312 mdl A1s
or 2318 mdl A 1) up to a total of 8 drives ... see item [4] under
"Ordering Instructions" on the 2319. Standard features include
file scan and record overflow functions. The IFA is always addressed as Channel 1. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be
installed if 3333/3340 Intermix (#9315) is specified under
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) ... cannot be installed with
2314/3340 Compatibility Feature (#8070). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: IFA Conversion Feature (#4645) required if installed
with 3330/3340 Series !FA (#4655).
3330/3340 SERIES INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4655).
Permits native attachment 01 up to two 3333s or 3340 mdl A2s. A
maximum of sixteen 3330 or 3340 series drives can be attached
to the IFA. The IFA supports rotational position sensing, disconnected command chaining and multiple requesting if the Block
Multiplexer Channel (#1421) is installed. Record overflow is standard. For 3330, standard I/O addresses are (hex) 150 thru 15F.
For 3340, standard addresses are (hex) ICO thru ICF. For 3340
with 3344, standard addresses are (hex) 1 CO thru 1 E1 .
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: IFA Conversion Feature (#4645) is required if installed with 2319 IFA
(#4650).
Specify: [1] DASD Designation -- Specify ONE of the following -#9313, (DASD 3333/3330) to attach up to two 3333 mdl 1s,
each with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination ...
#9314, (DASD 3340 Only) to attach up to two 3340 mdl
A2s, each with up to three 3340 mdls B1 /B2 in any combination ... #9315, (3333/3340 Intermix) to attach one 3333 mdl
1 (with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination) plus
one 3340 mdl A2 (with up to three 3340 mdls B1/B2 in any
combination). #9315 cannot be installed with IFA Conversion
Feature (#4645).
[2] It any 3333 mdl 11 and lor 3330 mdl 11 is to be attached,
also specify #9316, (3333/3330 mdl 11) in addition to
#9313 or #9315.
With #9313 plus #9316, a mixture of one 3333 mdl 1 and
one 3333 mdl 11, each with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and
11 (in any combination) can be attached ... or two 3333 mdl
11 s, each with any mixture of up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2
and 11.
With #9315 plus #9316, one 3333 (either mdl 1 or mdl 11)
with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11 (in any combination)
can be attached in addition to one 3340 mdl A2 with up to
three associated mdls B1/B2. The standard addresses with
#9315 for 3330 are (HEX) 150 thru 157, for 3340 (HEX)
158 thru 15F.
[3] It any 3344 is to be attached, specify #9317# in addition to
#9314 (#9317 and #9315 are mutually exclusive). #9190g;
must also be specified if 3344 mdl B2Fs or the 3340 Fixed
Head Feature (#4301/4302) is ordered.
With #9314, #9317, and #9190 up to three 3344 mdl
B2/B2F and/or 3340 mdl B2, B1 units in any combination
can be attached to one 3340 mdl A2. The second 3340 mdl
A2 if present can attach up to three 3340 mdl B1/B2 units.
#9317 is mutually exclusive with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645) and with
2314/3340 Compatibility
Feature
(#8070).
[4] When #9314 is specified, also specify 3340 Address Designation: #9820g; for addresses (HEX) 1 CO thru 1 CF, or
#9821 g; for addresses (HEX) 160 thru 16F. The specifiication
of 160 allows the 3135 IFA addresses to coincide with those
of the 3115 and 3125 IFAs.
[5] When #9314 or #9315 is specified, also specify #9190g;
(Fixed
Head
Attachment)
if
Fixed
Head
Feature
(#4301 /4302) is ordered for any 3340 attached to the IFA.
[6] It String Switch (#8150) is ordered for any attached 3333 or
3340 mdl A2, specify String Switch Attachment (#9841!/i.
[7] When #9821, is specified in conjunction with #9313 the
addresses for the 3333/3330s are (HEX) 160 thru 16F.
[8] When #9821, is specified and both #9314 and #9317 are
specified the addresses for the 3340/3344s are as follows:
- - - - 3344 B2/B3Fs - - - -
3340 A2
String 0
Physical
Dnve
I
160
I 161
o
2
3340 A2
String 1
168
162
172
IE2
lF2
I 169
163
173
lE3
lF3
164
174
lE4
lF4
165
175
lE5
lF5
4
166
176
lE6
IF6
167
177
IE7
IF7
6
- - - - 3340 B2s - - - -
I 16A I 16B I I 16C I 160 I I 16E I
16F
Note: The DASD control combinations that can be attached to the
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) are shown in the left hand column of the table below. From Section A of the table select one
of the feature numbers shown (one and only one must be selected). From Section B select the feature number(s) required to
support your configuration (select none, one or more than one
from Section B). Section C of the table shows the adrlresses
available. The specification of the (HEX) 160 addresses allows
the 3135 IFA addresses to coincide with those of the 3115 and
3125 IFA. Select a number from Section C if required.
~ CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diSkette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- -- -------------- _.-
M 3135.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit
(cont"d)
SECTION A
DASD Control DASD DesigCombinations natIOn, one
on IFA (#4655) req'd
If any 3333
Mdlll
3344
and/or 3330
Mdlll
SECTION B
Fixed
Head Fea2314/3340
3344
ture
~ttl5t ~~itch CompatibiIiMdl B2F (#4301/
ty
Feature
4302) on 3333/ 3340
(see #8070)
3340
3330/3340 Supports
RPS Disconnected
2319
CMMD Chaining
[FA
Multiple Requestmg
(#4650)
if BLK MPX #1421
installed
3333 DIsk Starage Control
9313 ~
9316~
--
--
--
9841 ~
--
1421
4645
3333/3340 Intermix
9315 ~
9316 ;ji
--
--
9190 ;ji
9841 ;ji
--
1421
--
3340 Direct Ac-I
cess Storage
Facility
I
9314 ;ji
--
9317 ;ji
9317 ;ji +
9190 ;ji
9190 ;ji
9841 ;ji
,. 8070
1421
."
4645
i
SECTION C
ADDRESSES
Standard
Address 160
' HEX 150-15F 9821 ~ HEX
160-16F
'3330 HEX 1501573340 HEX
158-15F
9820 ;ji Not 3344 9821 ;ji Not
3344 HEX
HEX ICO-ICF
I60-16F
3344 HEX I CO- See Item 8
lEI
above
--
* No feature number required.
,. Mutually exclusive with String Switch #9841. 2319 IFA (#4650). IFA Conversion feature (#4645). 3344 Attachment (#9317) .
... Mutually exclusive with 3344 Attachment (#9317) and 2314/3340 Compatibility (#8070).
INTEGRATED PRINTER ADAPTER BASIC CONTROL (#4670).
Provides the power supply and basic control for a natively attached 1403 Printer. The standard address is "OOE". Specify:
#9485p if optional address of "OOF" is desired. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: If the optional address of "01 F" for
the Console Printer Keyboard (#3210 or #3215) and "OOF" for
the integrated 1403 are both used, Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
(#3905) must be specified.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 2, MOL N1 ATTACHMENT
(#4672).
Provides control for attaching 1403 mdl 2 or Nl.
Specify: #9182;ji to attach 1403 mdl 2, #9188 to attach 1403
mdl N1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670). On the 1403,
Voltage Adapter (#9709) and 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) are required on a mdl 2; 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) is required on a mdl Nl. See Specify under
1403.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 7 ATTACHMENT (#4677).
Provides control for attaching a 1403 mdl 7. Maximum: One. F.ield
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Printer Adapter Basic
Control (#4670). On the 1403, 600 LPM Voltage Conversion
Adapter (#9725) is required on a mdl 7. See Specify under 1403.
SELECTOR CHANNEL (#6981, 6982).
Each adds a high-speed
channel to the system. The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are provided on
each channel. If an Integrated File Adapter (#4650 or #4655) is
present, these channels are addressed as 2 and 3 respectively.
Otherwise, they are addressed as 1 and 2. #6981 -- for first
selector channel ... #6982 -- for second. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: #6982 requires #6981.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520).
Microprogrammed
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 or S/360 mdl 25 in
mdl 20 mode instructions. Field Installation: Yes.
3210 MOL 1 ADAPTER (#7844).
To attach a 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) for systems console I/O ...
includes an alter-display ability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3215 Adapter (#7855). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer channel, but does not use a control unit position. See
'·Specify." Can be field changed to 3215 Adapter (#7855) ... See
RPQ
3215 ADAPTER (#7855).
To attach a 3215 Console PrinterKeyboard (85 cps) for systems console I/O ... includes alterdisplay ability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter (#7844). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer
channel, but does not use a control unit position. See ·'Specify."
12K CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENTS (#7861, 7862).
Each
adds 12,288 bytes of control storage. Required for some feature
combinations ... see "Control Storage Requirements" under
"Highlights" for details. #7861 -- for first 12K increment ...
#7862 -- for second. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #7862
requires #7861.
2314/3340 COMPATIBILITY FEATURE (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314/2319 volumes on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well
as 3340 volumes. This provides a '·mixed-mode" operating environment. "Mixed-mode" is only possible with DOS releases which
:Ji
CPU dlskette-only <;pccify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
support 3340 on the mdl 135. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645),2319 IFA (#4650),3333/3340 Intermix (#9315),3344
Attach
(#9317),
or
String
Switch
Attachment
(#9841).
Prerequisite: #9314 on 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637).
Permits the
use of the Universal Character Set feature on a 1403 mdl 2 or Nl
attached via the Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment
(#4672). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670), Integrated 1403
Printer mdl 2, mdl N1 Attachment (#4672).
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Clock Comparator and CPU Timer (#2001) and Floating Point
(#3900).
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#4640).
Provides
the circuits and controls for direct attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the 3135. The controls for the first line adapter
are included in this feature. Lines can be any combination of
Start/Stop or BSC. Provides for the attachment of 1050, 2260 mdl
1,2260 mdl2, 2265 mdll, 2740 mdll, 2740 mdl2, 2741 mdl
1, 2760 mdl 1, 5010 Axx, or any IBM computer, multiplexer or
terminal conforming to the Binary Synchronous Communications
(BSC) standard. Note: In addition to the appropriate adapter, each
communications line attached to the system requires an external
modem.
Refer to Table 2 below to define customer configuration requirements prior to ordering features below. Customer Responsibilities
-- see M 2700 pages for customer responsibilities regarding communications facilities and servicing requirements. Communications
Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
AUTOCALL (#1290).
Provides automatic calling capabilities on
facilities Cl, C2, C4 or C5 to initiate (dial) through stored program
control, a data link to a remote station. For the appropriate automatic calling units, see M 2700 pages. Specify: Refer to Table
1-C for Terminal Adapter Type I Model II or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Table 1-F for Telegraph Adapter
Type II for appropriate feature code according to line positions
desired. Maximum: Four. Limitations: Each Autocall feature installed reduces the number of lines available on the ICA by one.
Autocall must be ordered once for each line where the function is
desired. Thus, the ICA can accommodate a maximum of four lines
if each of these lines also has the Autocall feature. A single Autocall feature can be associated with any of the lines from one to
Cable
Order:
Required.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
seven.
Prerequisites: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#9721-9728) or
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656) or Telegraph
Adapter Type II (#9785-9792) and Switched Network Facility
(#9625-9632).
ADDITIONAL LINES (#4722 - 4728). Each provides circuits and
controls for attachment of an additional line adapter ... for a total
of eight lines in a system. Specify: Order additional lines according to line position required ... see Table 1-A below. Each line
specified requires the next lower order line as a prerequisite.
Maximum: One of each (#4722 thru #4728). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER For each line (#4722-4728) attached to the ICA,
including the first line included in #4640, one of the following line
adapters must be specified: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
(#9721-9728), Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760), Tele-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ---- ------=== ':' =
M 3135.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
graph Adapter Type II (#9785-9792), or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656). Each line adapter and all associated
features must be specified according to the line position to which
they correspond. Refer to Table 2 below prior to ordering features
for the ICA.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE I MODEL II (#9721-9728). Controls
data transfers between the 3135 and
1050/2740 mdl
1/2741/5010 mdl Axx over facility Cl or 01, and between the
3135 and 2740 mdl 2 or 5010 mdl Axx over facility 01 or 02.
Includes vertical and longitudinal checking for 1050 terminals and
2740s equipped with Record Checking (#6114). Specify: Refer to
Table 1-B for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Special Requirements: See Table 1-C and
features below for additional specify requirements if Switched
Network Facility, Write Interrupt, Unit Exception Suppression,
Read Interrupt, or Autocall are required. Normal operation is at
134.5 bps. 600 Bits per Second feature must be specified for
operation at 600 bps to 2740s or 5010 mdi Axx. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640).
300 BITS PER SECOND (#9593-9600).,
Allows the
Adapter Type I Model II to operate at 300 bps. Specify:
Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Adapter Type I Model II.
Terminal
Refer to
to line
Terminal
Type I Model II or the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II to operate at 600 bps. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I
Model II, or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
Allows the
SWITCHED NETWORK FACILITY (#9625-9632).,
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data Adapter Type
II, or Telegraph Adapter Type II to operate over C type switched
lines. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for Terminal Adapter Type I
Model II, Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or
Table 1-F for Telegraph Adapter Type II for appropriate feature
code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II, or Telegraph Adapter Type II.
WRITE INTERRUPT (#9745-9752)., Allows the Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive
Interrupt (#4708). Not supported under BTAM, QTAM or TCAM.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Transmit Interrupt
(#7900). Not supported under BTAM, QTAM or TCAM. Specify:
Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type I Model II.
UNIT EXCEPTION SUPPRESSION (#9729-9736)., If this feature is
installed with Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Unit Exception will
not be set in response to a Circle C. Not supported under BT AM,
QTAM or TCAM. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYF-E III (#9753-9760).,
Controls data
transfers between the 3135 and either remote 2845 Display Controls or 2848 Display Controls operating at 1200 bps over facility
03. Permits operation at 2400 bps over facility 04 if Modem
Clocking is specified. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequiste: Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640).
MULTIPOINT (#9761-9768)., Specifies that a Terminal Adapter
Type III is to operate in multipoint mode. If #9761-9768 is not
ordered for a given Terminal Adapter Type III, point-to-point operation is presumed. Specify: Refer to Table 1-0 for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type III.
MODEM CLOCKING (#9609-9616).
Allows a Terminal Adapter
Type III to operate at 2400 bps or a Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II to operate at 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps or 7200 bps.
Requires the appropriate clocking to be in the attached modem.
Note: Certain modems such as the IBM 3863 mdl 1 or 3872 mdl 1
although basically 2400 bps modems, offer a 1200 bps half speed
facility. Since the requirements for the Modem Clocking feature
are defined by the type of modem, not the line speed, when such
modems are attached to the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
and are switched for 1200 bps operation, Modem Clocking is still
required as a prerequisite on the ICA. Specify: Refer to Table 1-0
for Terminal Adapter Type III or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type ill or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
NEW SYNC (#9808-9815)., Allows the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type III to be connected to modems which offer the New Sync feature option and have this
option installed. New Sync feature minimizes modem turnaround
and allows faster bit synchronization of the following data.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-0 for Terminal Adapter Type III, or
Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Modem Clocking (#9609-9616),
and a modem offering New Sync. Note: New Sync is NOT required if Half Duplex Facility (#9617-9624), Tributary Station
(#9665-9672), or Switched Network (#9625-9632) is installed for
the line position in question.
TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II (#9785-9792).,
Controls data
transfers between leA and Model 33/35 TTY terminals (8 level
code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) and Switched Network Facility (#9625-9632).
SYNCHRONOUS DATA ADPTER TYPE II (#9649-9656).,
Provides control of data transfers between the 3135 and binary synchronus terminals. See "Binary Synchronous Terminals" under
2701 Data Adapter Unit. Control Station is included with this
feature. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate feature code
according to line position(s) desired. Speed Selection: Provides
operation over C3, 02 and 03 facilities at 600 bps if 600 Bits Per
Second feature is specified ... see above. Provides operation over
C4 and 03 facilities at 1200 bps (no speed need be specified).
Provides operation over C5M facility at 2000 bps if Modem Clocking is specified ... see above. Provides operation over C5, 04 or
Xl M at 2400 bps, over C6, 05 or X2M at 4800 bps, or over 06
at 7200 bps ... see above. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
Special Requirements: See Table 1-E and features below for
additional specify requirements if Half Duplex Facility, Transparency, Tributary Station, Switched Network Facility, Autocall, EON, or
New Sync are required. See required. See Table 1-E and Modem
Clocking above if 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, or 7200 bps
operation is required. The appropriate Data Code feature must be
specified if other than EBCDIC is required as the primary data
code ... see Data Code Features below.
Limitations: For line speed limitations refer to Model 135 Channel
Characteristics Manual GA33-301O.
HALF DUPLEX FACILITY (#9617-9624)., Required if the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is attached to a two-wire facility.
Note: This feature is not required with Switched Network (#96259632) or Tributary Station (#9665-9672). Specify: Refer to Table
1-E for approriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II.
TRIBUTARY STATION (#9665-9672).ji Required when a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is installed and functioning on a
leased communications line as a tributary station and not functioning as a control station. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
DATA CODE FEATURES.
The primary data code for the SDA
Type II is EBCDIC. As an option to EBCDIC either ASCII or 6-bit
Transcode (2780 Data Transmission Terminal only) may be specified as the primary code. In addition to the primary code, an
alternate data code, selected under program control, may be
specified for the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II. EBCDIC,
ASCII or 6-bit Transcode may be selected as an alternate
to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
TRANSPARENCY (#9673-9680).ji
Provides the Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II with the ability to transmit and receive 8-bit
binary as well as EBCDIC or ASCII codes ... or 6-bit binary data
as well as 6-bit Transcode. This feature with ASCII modifies
VRC/LRC checking to VRC/CRC checking. Limitation: ASCII code
and Transparency cannot be installed together for the same line
position when attached to the 2770, 2780, 3735, 3780,
System/3, System/7, System/32 or System/34. Specify: Refer
to Table 1-E for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
EON (#9801-9807).,
Automatically generates an EON digit at
the end of the dial sequence. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for
approriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Specify for 3872 and 3874 Modem with EON option. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Autocall (#1290) ... Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II.
# CPU diskette-only specify
feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette+only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ------ - -----
- =':' =
=- ='
M 3135.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
MODEMS Up to eight modems can be attached to a 3135, any
Prerequisites: Integrated
Communications Adapter
model.
(#4640) and Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656)
2400 bps to 7200 bps, Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#97219728) 134.5 bps to 600 bps, or Terminal Adapter Type III
(#9753-9760) 1200 bps or 2400 bps. See feature descriptions
for limltations.
Speed (bps)
Modem
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
1400
2400
4800
4800
7200
Type I Model I! ;
Terminal Adapter
Type III ;
Synchronous Data
Adapter Type I! ;
Telegraph Adapter
Type I!;
TABLE I-C
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages_
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr Purch
MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
••
NC NC
NC
#1005
APL Assist
Conditional Swapping
1051
NC NC
NC
NC
Autocall
1290· $ 56$ 51 $2,180 $ 1.00
NC
NC
••
NC
Block Multlplaxer Channel
1421
NC NC
••
Block Mltpxr Shared Subchnl 1431
NC
NC NC
••
Channel Priority
1501
NC
NC NC
••
NC
Clk Comprtor " CPU Timer
2001
1.00
Direct Control
3274· 131 120 5,205
Emergency Power-Off Control for 2 switches
3621
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
NC
1.00
Extnd Precision Fltng Point
3840·
30 28 1,485
NC
Floating Point
3900
NC NC
Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
••
NC
64 8ubchannels
3905
NC NC
••
128 subchannels
3906
NC
NC NC
NC
••
256 subchannels
3907
NC
NC
NC
••
NC
1401/1440/1460 Cmptblty
4457
NC
Intgrd Comm Adapter
4640· 242 220 9,470 22.50
••
NC NC
NC
IFA Conversion Feature
4645
2319 Intgrd File Adapter
4650· 515 46822,740 13.00
3330/3340 Series IFA
4655· 708 644 19,820
3.00
Int Prntr Adptr Basic Cntrl
4670· 400 364 19,850 19.50
Int 1403 Prntr -2,-N1 Attach 4672·
10 10
415
.50
Int 1403 Prntr -7 Attach
4677·
10 10
415
.50
Lines, Additional
Second
4722·
47 43 1,900
4.50
9.00
Third
4723·
95 87 3,815
47 43 1,900
4.50
Fourth
4724·
Fifth
4725· 144 131 5,690 14.50
Sixth
4726·
47 43 1,900
4.50
47 43 1,900
4.50
Seventh
4727·
47 43 1,900
Eighth
4728·
4.50
4.00
Selector Channel - first
6981 • 211 192 10,480
4.00
Selector Channel - second
6982· 181 165 8,990
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility
7520
••
NC
NC NC
4.00
3210 Mdl 1 Adapter
7844· 121 110 5,990
3215 Adapter
7855· 204 186 10,160
4.50
12K Control Storage Increment
First
7861· 252 230 12,330 20.00
Second
7862· 252 230 12,330 20.00
2314/3340 Compatibility Fea 8070·
55 50 1,535
NC
7.50
Universal Char Set Adapter
8637·
40 37 1,630
••
Virtual Machine Assist
8740
NC NC
NC
..
300 bps ;
600 bps ;
Switched Network
Facility;
Read Interrupt;
Write Interrupt;
Unit Excptn Supprsn ;
Autocall
TABLE I-D
Ne
'TABLE I-B
9724
9725
9726
9727
9728
9753
9754
9755
9756
9757
9758
9759
9760
9649
9650
9651
9652
9653
9654
9655
9656
9785 9786 9787 9788 9789 9790 9791 9792
Any adapter added, removed, or relocated to another line
position requires reconfiguration of the entire line.
Select one terminal adapter for each line position specified in
TABLE I-A.
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER
TYPE I MODEL II
_. _. - - - ••.
~.
9593
9601
9594
9602
9595
9603
9596
9604
9597
9605
9598
9606
9599
9607
9600
9608
9625
9737
9745
9729
9777
9626
9738
9746
9730
9718
-627
9739
9747
9731
9779
9628
9740
9748
9732
9780
9629
9741
9749
9733
9781
9630
9742
9750
9734
9782
9631
9743
9751
9735
9783
9632
9744
9752
9736
_. - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.
4
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III
- - - - - - • - • - - - • - • - Line Position - - - - - - • - - - • - - - - -
FEATURE
Multipoint;
New Sync;
Modem Clocking
9761 9762 9763 9764 9765 9766 9767 9768
9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815
9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616
Select modem clocking feature for each line position for which
Terminal Adapter Type III is specified and operation at 2400
bps is desired.
TABLE I-E
OPTIONS FOR SYNCHRONOUS
DATA ADAPTER TYPE II
•-- --~
~
- - - • - • - •• Line Position - - •• - - - - - - - - - - - 4
FEATURE
Transparency ;
Switched Network
Facility;
Half Duplex Facility;
Tributary Station ;
Modem Clocking
New Sync;
Autocall
EON;
9673
9674
9675
9676
9677
9678
9679
9625 9626 9627 9628 9629 9630 9631
9617 9618 9619 9620 9621 9622 9623
9665 9666 9667 9668 9669 9670 9671
9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615
9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814
9777 9778 9779 9780 9781 9782 9783
9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 9806 9807
Select features required for each line position
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is specified.
9680
9632
9624
9672
9616
9815
for which
OPTIONAL PRIMARY DATA CODES
ASCII;
6-Bit Transcode (1) ;
9681 9682 9683 9684 9685 9686 9687 9688
9689 9690 9691 9692 9693 9694 9695 9696
Select one of the above data codes if required in lieu of
EBCDIC for each line position for whicla Synchronous Data
Adapter Type I! is specified.
OPTIONAL ALTERNATE DATA CODES
• ~ • - •• ~ - - • ~ - - - - • Line Position· - - .. - - - - - - - - - • - -
EBCDIC;
ASCI! ;
6-Bit Transcode (1);
9697
9705
9713
TABLE l-F
OM'IONS FOR TELEGRAPH ADAM'ER TYPE II
in 46404722
4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728
Specify additional lines according to line position.
TERMINAL ADAPTERS
- - - - - - - - - - - - • - - - Line Position - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
9723
ADDITIONAL LINE APPEARANCES
FEATURE
Additional Lines
9722
FEATURE
Before ordering, check Special Feature write-ups for Prerequisites and
Limitations.
TABLE I-A
9721
4
9698 9699 9700 9701 9702 9703 9704
9706 9707 9708 9709 9710 9711 9712
9714 9715 9716 9717 9718 9719 9720
Select one of the above Alternate Data Codes if required for
each line position for which Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
is specified.
- - - - - - - .-. __ • - - - Line Position -- _. - - - ~ _. - - - - --
Terminal Adapter
FEATURE
I
Telegraph Adapter
Type II ;
Autoca11
Swtchd Ntwk Facility;
CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when' ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only chanses ordered on same diskette.
• Feature supplies CPU diskette.
•• CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $405 on purcllased machines when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on
the same diskette.
9785
9777
9625
9786
9778
9626
9787
9779
9627
9788
9780
9628
9789
9781
9629
9790
9782
9630
9791
9783
9631
8792
9632
(1) 6--Bit Trmscode can be used only with a 2780 Data Transmission Terminal.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(
\
- - --- -==---=--~ =
----- ---- ---
M 3135.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
TABLE 2 -- Part I
Terminal
IBM
Modem
1050 Data Communication
System
Une Speed
(Bits7~ec)
134_5
Communication Line and
Features Required
Modem Facilities
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II: and Switched Network
Facility
Terminal AdllJller 1"y~e I Model II
Connects via 2848 Display Control Model 3 - see this table
Dl
22M Display Station Model I
22M Display Station Model 2
Connects .ia 2848 Display Control Model I or 2 - see this table
2265 Display Station Model I
Connects .ia the 2845 Display Control Model I - see this table
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
CI
Facility
Terminal Adajller Type I Model II
Dl
2740 Communication Terminal
Modell
134_5
2740 Communication Terminal
Model 2
134.5
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
flOG
D2
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and flOG Bits Per Second
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility
2741 Communication Terminal
Model I (witbout interrupt
feature)
134.5
2741 Communication Terminal
Modell (with Receive
Interrupt Feature)
134.5
Dl
CI
2741 Communication Terminal
Model I (witb Transmit
Interrupt feature)
134.5
2741 Communication Terminal
Model I (witb Receive
Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
134.5
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Read Interrupt; and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
required)
Dl
CI
Dl
27M 0rtical Image Unit
Modei
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit· Exception SlI)Ipression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Read Interruj>l; and Unit-Expansion Sup]>ression (if required)
Connects via 2740 Communication Terminal Model I - see this table
llOO
03
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
3872 Model
I
2400
D4
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint operation and New Sync (if required)
2848 Display Control Models I,
2 and 3 (point-tn-point or
3872 Model
multipoint)
I
1100
03
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
2400
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
mUltipoint operation and New Sync (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
2845 Display Control Model I
(point·tn-point or mUltipoint)
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 with (#7113) 2741 Line Control (without
interrupt feature)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 wltb (#7113) 2741 Line Control (witb
Recei.e Interrupt feature)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 wltb (#7113) •
2741 Line Control (with
Transmit Interrupt feature)
Dl
CI
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line
Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapt"r Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Une Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression
(If required)
300
3767 Communications Terlmnal
Model 1 or 2 wltb (#7113) 2741 Line Control (",lib
Recel.e Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 ",Itb (#7Itt)·
2740-1 Line Control
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 1 or 3 "'Itb (#7112)
- 1740-2 LlDe Control
600
CI
Dl
134.5
System/7
flOG
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and 300 Bits Per Second
Une Speed
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Switched Network Facility,
Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line
SJleed, and Unlt.Excep!ion Suppression (if r"quired)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model n, and Write Interrupt, and
Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Cl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model n, and Switched Network
Facility, and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model
Line Speed
n, and 300 Bits Per Second
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model
Une Speed
n, and flOG Bits Per Second
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
FacilitY
Dt
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and flOG Bits Per Second
Une Speed
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------===
------':' =
--------
M 3135.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
REATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switcbed Network
Facility, Read interrupt, Write Interrupt, and Unit-Exception
CI
SUDDression (if r""uired)
134.5
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
DI
Interrupt, and Unit-Exception SUDDression (if reouired)
TABLE 2 -- Part I (cont'd)
5100/51110 Computer Systems
CI
300
DI
TABLE 2 -- Part 2
Line Speed
(Bits/SeC}
C2
110
TTY 33/35
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second
Line SPeed, and Unit-ExceDtion SUDDression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception
SUDDression (if reouired)
Telegrapb Adapter Type II
FEATURES REQUIRED for BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
Manner of Line Operation
02 (four-wire)
C3
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
03 (two-wire)
Point-to-Point
600
Multipoint - 3135 as Control 02 (four-wire)
Station
Multipoint -- 3135 as Tributary 02 (four-wire)
Station
1200
Multipoint -- 3135 as Control
Station
Syncbronous Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second, and
Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Tributary Station, and Data Code Features
03 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Half Duplex Facility,
and Data Code Features
Synchronous Data AdaDter Tyoe II, and Data Code Features
C4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Data Code Features
D3 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
03 (two-wire)
Point-to-Point
Features Required
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Half DUDlex Facility, and Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary 03 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Tributary Station, and
Data Code Features
2400
JB6J
hillt-to-PoUIt
/H
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facilitv; and Data Code Features
2400
JB6J
Mllitipoilll - J Uj ... Control
SllIlian
/H
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; ~~ Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Svnc (i required)
2400
JB6J
Mllitipoilll - J Uj tIS Trilnlllll"J'
Stillion
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; lind
Tributarv Station; and Data Code Feature.•
2400
31172 Model
1
Polnt-to-Point
C5
D4 (two-wire)
Polnt-to-Point
l400
3872 Model
1
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New SYnc (if reouired)
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D4 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
XIM
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
4BOO
JB64
Poillt-to-PoiIIl
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; lind Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; lind Data Code Features
4800
JB64
Mllitipoilll - J U5 ... Control
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 11; lind Modem Clocking; lind
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
4800
3864
Mllitipoilll - JU5 tIS TriInIllII"J'
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; lind Modem Clocking; lind
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Polot-to-Point
C6
Synchronous Data Adafi~ Type II; and Modem Ciocking; and
Switched Network Facili ; and Data Code Features
4800
3874 Model
1
05
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New SYnc
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary 05
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
,
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
Point-to-Polat
7200
3875 Model
1
OS
X2M
D6 (witb C2 conditioning)
Multipoint - 3135 .s Control D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Station
Multipoint - 3135 as TrIbutary D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Station
Syncbronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ----- -- -------------- _.-
M 3135-3.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3135-3 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides a performance improvement for S/370 mdl 135
models H. HF. HG and I only.
Model
A1 *
262.144 Bytes of Processor Storage
A2*
327,680 Bytes of Processor Storage
A3*
393,216 Bytes of Processor Storage
A4*
524.288 Bytes of Processor Storage
NOTE: The 3135-3 is available as a non-removable, field install able upgrade to a S/370 model 135 mdl H, HF. HG and I
only.
• A complete systems assurance review / approval at the branch
office level required before ordering.
Highlights: Depending on the model, up to 524,288 bytes of
processor storage are available. CPU cycle time varies from 275
to 1485 nanoseconds depending upon the internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are provided.
Standard Features Include: APL Assist ... Audible Alarm ... Byte
Oriented Operand ... 1 Byte Multiplexer Channel ... 64 Byte Multiplexer Subchannels ... Channel Command Retry ... Channel Indirect Addressing ... Clock Comparator and CPU Timer ... Conditional Swapping ... Console File ... Control Registers ... Dynamic
Address Translation ... Error Checking and Correction (on Main
and Control Storage) ... Extended Control Mode ... Extended
Control-Program Support ... Instruction Retry ... Interval Timer ...
Machine Check Handling ... OS/DOS Compatibility... Program
Event Recording ... Storage Protection (Store and Fetch) ... S/370
Universal Instruction Set (Floating Point included) ... Time of Day
Clock ... PSW Key Handling.
Control Storage: 131,072 bytes of Reloadable Control Storage
are provided for each model in addition to the applicable main
storage. This feature permits emulator and control routines to
function. The Reloadable Control Storage is housed in the CPU
and is loaded from the Console File. Reloadable Control Storage
is not addressable by to the user.
Virtual Storage: Virtual Storage capability is provided to increase
the effective utilization of main stroage.
Console File (standard): This is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small file device
that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable
magnetic disks. The several disks that will be supplied with the
system will supply all of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems features. plus the optional features ordered for
the system.
Console Function: Operator communications with the system is via
a system control panel located on the 3135-3 and a 3210 mdl 1
or 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard as on other models of the
S/370 mdl 135. A right reading board extension is standard ... a
left extension is not available.
Input/Output Attachment:
Non-native -- a wide variety of I/O devices may be attached to
these models of the S/370 mdl 135 via the standard byte multiplexer channel, and/or the optional block multiplexer channel(s).
In particular, any I/O device which is attachable to a 3135 is
attachable to the 3135-3.
Native -- the following integrated I/O attachments/adapters are
provided for controlling the designated I/O devices.
Console Printer-Keyboard (Required) -- this unit serves as the
on-line I/O device for operator/system communications. It
provides a means of manually entering data into the system,
altering or displaying data already in storage, and for printing
error logout messages.
2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650) (Optional) -- this feature
enables native attachment of a 2319 Disk Storage mdl A 1 ••
(and a 2319 mdl A3", 2312 mdl Als" or 2318 mdl Al") up
to a total of eight drives. The IFA is addressed as channell.
LIMITATION: Cannot be installed if 3333/3340 Intermix
(#9315) is specified when 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) is
also ordered.
3330/3340 Series Integrated File Adapter (#4655) (Optional)
-- this feature allows the native attachment of one or two 3333
modules or 3340 mdl A2 units. Each 3333 module (either mdl
1 or mdl 11) can attach up to three 3330 modules (any combination of mdls 1, 2 or 11). Each 3340 mdl A2 can attach 3340
mdl B2 or Bl units and one 3340 mdl A2 can also attach 3344
units to a maximum of eight drives. Maximum is sixteen drives
per IFA. If 2319 IFA (#4650) is also present, IFA Conversion
Feature (#4645) is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (Optional) -- this feature
provides attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the
3135-3. These may be any combination of supported BSC and
Start /Stop lines and appear to the processor as if connected
via one or more 2701 s on the byte multiplexer channel.
Integrated Printer Adapter (Optional) -- this feature enables
native attachment of a 1403 Printer mdl 2. 7 or Nl. The Universal Character Set Feature can be optionally specified on the
1403 mdl 2 or N 1 .
Programming Features:
APL Assist (standard) -- this feature is an APL emulator. It replaces functions performed by the APL software interpreter. This
feature can provide a performance improvement for many APL
applications when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1.
Conditional Swapping (standard) -- provides two additional instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and Swap.
PSW Key Handling (standard) -- provides two additional instructions ... Insert PSW Key ... Set PSW Key from Address.
Extended Control Program Support (standard) -- the 3135-3
processor models of the S/370 mdl 135 include Extended
Control-Program Support. This is a hardware assist that reduces
the CPU time needed to execute certain frequently used supervisor functions in both VS-l and VM/370.
The functional areas for VM/370 include:
Input/Output Channels:
Byte Multiplexer Channel -- one is standard ... functionally
equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on the S/370 mdl 135
... provides eight control unit positions ... in byte mode, permits
simultaneous operation of many low-speed devices. Burst mode
operation of unbuffered devices operating in excess of 10KB is
not allowed for concurrent operation with the Integrated File
Adapter, the Integrated Commv1ications Adapter, or the Block
Multiplexer Channel -- see IBM S/370 Model 135 Channel Characteristics Manual, GA33-3010 for further clarification ... for OS
exclusion, refer to SRL GC28-6554, System Generation.
Block Multiplexer Channels -- two are available as special features ... data rates are 1.3 megabytes per second ... permit(s)
simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to "Block
Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency... devices on
these channels which cannot utilize block multiplexing will function as if attached to selector channels ... if the 3330/3340
Series Integrated File Adapter is present these channels are
addressed as 2 and 3 respectively. Otherwise they are addressed
as 1 and 2.
Subchannels -- on the byte multiplexer channel 64 subchannels
are provided as standard with the option of 128 or 256 (see
"Special Features") ... on each of the two available block multiplexer channels, 16 non-shared subchannels and 1 shared subchannel are provided as standard with the option of 8 non-shared
and 9 shared or 8 non-shared and 5 shared (see "Special
Features") ... on a block multiplexer channel a single shared
subchannel may attach a control unit having a maximum of 16
device addresses.
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
Page Management
SVC Handler
Privileged Instruction Interfaces
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
For VS-l the functional areas are:
Storage Management
lOS
SVC FLiH
System Trace
Page Management
PREREQUISITES: The following prerequisites apply to each 31353 processor model.
(1) 3046 Power Unit ... see 3046.
(2) Extended Precision Floating Point Feature (#3840) ... see
3135 Processing Unit Special Features.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Volt?ge (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 tion Sup.I'ression (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Read Interrupt: and Unit-Expansion Suppression (if required)
Connects via 2740 Communication Terminal Modell - see this table
3872 Model
I
2848 Display Control Models I,
2 and 3 (point-to-point or
3872 Model
multipoint)
I
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 with (#7113) 2741 Line Control (witbout
interrupt feature)
Facility: and Read
required)
1200
D3
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
2400
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint operation and New Sync (if required)
1200
03
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint operation and New Sync (if required)
Cl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II: and Switched Network
Facility; and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and 300 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit- Exception Suppression (if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt. and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
r"'luired)
Cl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II. and Switched Network
Facility, and Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line
Speed. and Unit-Exception Superession (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt. and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Switched Network Facility,
Read interrupt. Write Interrupt. 300 Bits Per Second Line
Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II. and Write Interrupt, and
Read interrupt. and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II. and Switched Network
Facility, and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II. and 300 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
02
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II. and Switched Network
Facility
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
02
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
2400
300
300
300
3767 Communications Terlmnal
Model I or 2 ",Itb (#71 \3) 2741 Line Control (witb
Receive Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 wltb (#7I1I)2740-1 Line Control
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 or 3 with (#7112)
- 2740-2 Line Control
600
134.5
System/7
600
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------=- =--------=':' =
M 3135-3.8
Jul 79
DP Machines
3135-3 Processing Unit (conI' d)
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
CI
Facility, Read interrupt, Write Interrupt, and Unit-Exception
{if required)
Suppression
134,5
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
D1
Interrupt, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
TABLE 2 -- Pan I (cont'd)
5100/5110 Computer Systems
CI
300
01
TTY 33/35
TABLE 2 -- Pan 2
Line Speed
(Bits/Sec)
110
C2
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second
Line SPeecl, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt. Write
Interrupt,3OO Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception
Suppression (if required)
TeleRraph Adapter Type II
FEATURES REQUIRED for BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
Manner of Line Operation
Point-to-Polnt
600
Multipoint -- 3135 as Control
Station
Features Required
03 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Half Duplex .'acility, and Data Code Features
02 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Data Code Features
C3
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Switched Network Facility, and Data Code Features
02 (four-wire)
Synchronous Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second, and
Data Code Features
Multipoint -- 3135 as Tributary 02 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Tributarv Station, and Data Code Features
03 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Half Duplex Facility,
and Data Code Features
03 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
C4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Data Code Features
D3 (four-wire)
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
llOO
Multipoint -- 3135 as Control
Station
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary 03 (four-wire)
Station
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II, and Tributary Station, and
Data Code Features
2400
J86J
Point-to-Point
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 1/; and Modem Clocking; and
HaJf Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
2400
J86J
Multipoint - J 115 as Control
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features: and New Sync (if required)
Muhipoint - JI15 as Tributary
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 1/; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributa,-v Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
C5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
D4 (two-wire)
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Control D4 (four-wire)
Station
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D4 (four-wire)
Station
XIM
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Mode~ Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Syncbronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
24ooJ86J
2400
3872 Model
I
Polnt-to-Polnt
2400
3872 Model
I
Polnt-to-Polnt, Multipoint
4800
J864
Point-to-Point
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 1/; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
4800
J864
Multipoint - JUS ... Control
Station
D5
Synchronoll' Data Adapter Type 1/; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Featur..; and New Sync (if required)
4800
J864
Multipoint - J 115 ... Tributary
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 1/; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Polnt-to-Polnt
C6
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switcbed Network Facility; and D.ta Code Features
Polnt-to-Polnt
05
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
05
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary 05
Station
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
4800
3874 Model
I
X2M
Syncbronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
D6 (witb C2 conditioning)
c:z conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Syncbronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Mnltipoint - 3135 as Trlbntary D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Polnt-to-Polnt, Multipoint
Point-to-Point
noo
3875 Model
I
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
D6 (with
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - ------= =
- --=--':' =
M 3138.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3138 PROCESSING UNIT
sole file.) A right reading board extension is standard ... a lett
extension is not available.
Input/Output Channels:
Purpose: Provides main and control storage plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for the S/370 mdl 138.
.
Model I
524,288 bytes of processor storage
Model J
1,048,576 bytes of processor storage.
Highlights: 524,288 bytes or 1,048,576 bytes of processor storage are provided. CPU cycle time ranges from 275 to 1485 nanoseconds depending on the internal operation being performed.
Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are
provided.
Standard Features Include: Conditional Swapping ... APL Assist
... Audible Alarm ... Byte Oriented Operand ... 1 Byte Multiplexer
Channel ... 64 Byte Multiplexer Subchannels ... 2 Block Multiplexer Channels ... 16 Non-Shared Block Multiplexer Subchannels ... 1
Shared Block Multiplexer Subchannel ... Channel Command Retry
... Channel Indirect Addressing ... Clock Comparator & CPU Timer
... Console File ... Control Registers ... Dynamic Address Translation ... Error Checking and Correction (on Main and Control Storage) ... Extended Control Mode ... Extended Control-Program
Support ... Extended Precision Floating Point ... Instruction Retry
... Floating Point ... Interval Timer ... Machine Check Handling ..
OS/DOS Compatibility... Program Event Recording ... Storage
Protection (Store and Fetch) ... S/370 Universal Instruction Set ...
Time of Day Clock ... PSW Key Handling.
Control Storage: 131,072 bytes of Reloadable Control Storage
are provided in addition to main storage. This permits emulator
and control routines to function. The Reloadable Control Storage
is housed in the CPU and is loaded from the Console File. Reloadable Control Storage is not available to the user.
Virtual Storage: Virtual Storage capability is provided to increase
the effective utilization of main storage.
Console File (Standard): This is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small file device
that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable
magnetic disks. The several disks that will be supplied with the
system will supply all of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems features, plus the optional features ordered for
the system.
Console Function: A display console is standard ... includes a
cathode ray tube, and a keyboard ... functions as an operator's
I/O console to communicate with the operating system ... standard
attachment for an optional 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer mdl
1 or 2 for hard copy output. CRT can accommodate twenty-four
80-character lines of information. A system control panel is also
located on the 3138 for additional operator communication with
the system. Three console modes are available: "KeyboardPrinter" Mode, "Display" Mode, "115/125 Console-DisplayEmulation" Mode.
In "Printer-Keyboard" mode, the display console uses the keyboard for input and the CRT and a recommended 3286 Printer mdl
2 or 3287 mdl 1 and 2 for output. The CRT, keyboard and printer
appear to the system as a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard.
"Printer-Keyboard" mode is supported by DOS, DOS/VS,
OS/360, OS/VS and VM/370.
In "Display" mode, the keyboard is used for input, the CRT with
24 lines by 80 characters/line for output, and DIDOCS or equivalent support ·is required. DOS/VS does not support Display Mode.
The 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 (optional) has
a separate address and requires MCS support or equivalent. When
present the printer appears to the system as a 3213 Console
Printer.
In "115/125 Console-Display-Emulation" mode, the keyboard is
used for input, the CRT is used for output, and the CRT displays
twelve, 56-character lines of information. The 3286 Printer mdl 2
or 3287 mdl 1 or 2 are optional. When present, the printer emulates a 5213 Printer mdl 1 and acts as a slave unit to the display
console. That is, the 3286 mdl 2 or 3287 mdl 1 or 2 are not
separately addressable in this mode. The "115/125 ConsoleDisplay-Emulation" mode is available in DOS/VS ReI. 28 and
above.
The display console provides the capability to select three aspects
of the system's environment at IMPL time:
Console mode - See above (Mode Descriptions)
CPU mode (3138 or 3135) - See Programming Features
Unit addresses of natively attached I/O
Integrated Communications Adapter Line Characteritics - See
Integrated Communications Adapter Features
These selections will be recorded on the console file for permanent reuse until such time as any new selection is made during a
subsequent IMPL. (Note: This is the only user access to the con-
Byte Multiplexer Channel: One is standard ... functionally
equivalent to t~e byte multiplexer channel on the S/370 mdl
135 ... provides eight control unit positions ... in byte mode,
permits simultaneous operation of many low-speed devices ...
burst mode operation of unbuffered devices operating in excess
of 10KB is not allowed for concurrent operation with the Integrated File Adapter, the Integrated Communications Adapter, or
a 810ck Multiplexer Channel - see IBM S/370 Model 138 Channel Characteristics Manual, GA24-3633 for further clarification
... for OS exclusion refer to SRL GC28-6554, "System
Generation. "
Block Multiplexer Channels: Two are standard ... data rates
are 1.3 megabytes per second ... permits simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to "Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency and increases the efficiency of
the 3330/3340 Series IFA when using direct access storage
devices equipped with rotational position sensing ... devices on
these channels which cannot utilize block multiplexing will
function as if attached to selector channels ... if the 3330/3340
Series Integrated File Adapter is present these channelS are
addressed as 2 and 3 respectively. Otherwise they are addressed as 1 and 2.
Subchannels: On the byte multiplexer channel 64 subchannels
are provided as standard with the option of 128 or 256 (see
"Special Features") ... for each of the two standard block
multiplexer channels 16 non-shared subchannels and 1 shared
selector subchannel are provided as standard with the option of
8 non-shared and 9 shared or 8 non-shared and 5 shared (see
"Special Features") ... each of the standard single shared
subchannels may attach a control unit having a maximum of 16
device addresses.
Non-Native: A wide variety of I/O devices may be attached to
the S/370 model 138 via the standard byte multiplexer channel
or any of the 2 standard block multiplexer channels.
Native: The following integrated I/O attachments/adapters are
provided for controlling the designated I/O devices.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, First Printer
(Optional) Provides the capability to natively attach the 3203
Printer mdl 4 as the first systems printer. The Universal
Character Set feature is standard on the 3203.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, Second Printer
(Optional) - Provides the capability to natively attach the
3203 Printer mdl 4 as the second systems printer. The Universal Character Set feature is standard on the 3203.
Integrated 1403 Printer Adapter (Optional) - This feature
allows native attachment of a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7, or N1 ...
the Universal Character Set Feature can be optionally specified on the 1403 mdl 2 or N1.
Integrated Console Printer Adapter (Standard) - Provides
the capability to natively attach the optional 3286 Printer mdl
2, 3287 mdl 1 and 2 as a hard copy console printer.
3330/3340 Series Integrated File Adapter (Optional) - This
feature allows the native attachment of one or two 3333
modules or 3340 mdl A2 units ... each 3333 module (either
mdl 1 or mdl 11) can attach up to three 3330 modules (any
combination of mdls 1, 2 or 11) ... each 3340 mdl A2 can
attach 3340 mdl B2 or B1 units, and one 3340 mdl A2 can
also attach 3344 units to a maximum of eight drives ... maximum is sixteen drives per IFA.
Integrated Communications Adapter (Optional) - This feature provides attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines
to the S/370 mdl 138 ... these may be any combination of
supported BSC and Starl/Stop lines and appear to the proces"or as if connected via one or more 2701 s on the byte
multiplexer channel.
Integrated Communications Adapter Features:
ordering of the ICA on the S/370 mdl 138 the
from the display-console-keyboard, the following
tics for each line installed (a maximum of 8 lines
the ICA):
To improve the
user may define,
line characterisare attachable to
[1] Leased Facility' or Switched Network Facility: Allows the
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II (SDM, or Telegraph Adapter Type II to operate over
leased or C type switched lines.
[2] Half Duplex Facility or Full Duplex Facility' - Allows the user
to make a business tradeoff between his TP applications and
turn-around requirements and available teleproc'essing facilities
• These options will comprise the standard microcode on the console file" as
shipped from the plant. They may be altered as explained from the displayconsole~keyboard at the operator's discretion.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - ------
l~if~
M 3138.2
Jut 79
OP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (conl'd)
and the cost of those facilities ... half-duplex is required if the
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is attached to a two-wire
facility or that facility is part of a switched network unless that
facility is a leased line and the Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II is installed and functioning as a tributary station and
not functioning as a control station on that leased line.
[3] Primary Code for the SDA Type II (EBCDIC'. ASCII. 6-Bit)
[4] Secondary or Alternate Code for the SDA Type II (EBCDIC'.
ASCII. 6-Bit)
[5) tributary Station Address - Allows the user to speqily a station
address A to R 01 any Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
which is installed and functioning on a leased communications
line as a tributary station and not functioning as a control
station on that leased line. (Station address 0829'). Only
addresses A to R are valid.
[6] Line Speed
(a) 134 bps'. 300 bps. or 600 bps for Terminal Adapter Type
1 Model II.
(b)600 bps or 1200 bps' for Synchronous Data Adapter Type
II.
(c)Not applicable for Terminal Adapter Type III or Telegraph
Adapter Type II.
[7) Transparency - Yes or No' - Provides the SDA Type II with the
ability to transmit and receive 8-bit binary as well as EBCDIC
or ASCII codes or 6-bit binary data as well as 6-bit Transcode
... Transparency with ASClI modifies VRC/LRC checking to
VRC/CRC Checking ... LIMITATION: ASCII code and Transparency cannot be installed together for the same line position
when attached to the 2770. 2780. 3735. 3780. System/3.
System/7. System/32 or System/34 ... PREREQUISITE: SDA
II.
[8] Write Interrupt - Yes or No' - Allows the Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive
Interrupt (#4708) ... LIMITATIONS: Not supported under
BTAM. OTAM. or TCAM ... PREREQUISITE: Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II.
[9] Read Interrupt - Yes or No'- Allows the terminal Adapter Type
I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Transmit
Interrupt (#7900) ... LIMITATIONS: Not supported under
BTAM. OTAM. or TCAM ... PREREQUISITE: Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II.
[10)New SYNC - Yes or No' - Allows the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type III to be connected to
modems which offer the New Sync feature option and have
this option installed ... New Sync minimizes modem turnaround
and allows faster bit synchronization of the following data ...
PREREQUISITES: Modem Clocking (#9606-9616). and a
modem offering New Sync. NOTE: New Sync is not required if
Half Duplex Facility. Tributary Station. or Switched Network is
selected for the line pOSition in question.
[11]Multipoint - Yes or No' - Specifies that a Terminal Adapter
Type III is to operate in multipoint mode. If multipoint is not
selected for a given Terminal Adapter Type III. point-to-point
operation is presumed. PREREQUISITE: Terminal Adapter
Type III.
[12)Unit Exception Supression - Yes or No' - If selected with
Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II. Unit Exception will not be
set in response to a Circle C ... LIMITATION: Not supported
under BTAM. OTAM. or TCAM ... PREREQUISITE: Terminal
Adapter Type 1 Model II.
Note: See "Special Features" lor optional "ICA features" on the
$/370 model 138.
Programming Features:
Conditional Swapping (Standard): Provides two additional
instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and
Swap.
PSW Key Handling (Standard): Provides two additional instructions ... Insert PSW Key ... Set PSW Key from Address.
APL Assist (Standard): This feature is an APL emulator. It
replaces functions performed by the APL software interpreter.
This feature can provide a performance improvement for many
APL applications when used with VS APL PP #5748 APi.
IMPL 3135 CPU Mode Selection: Provides the capability to
"run" on S/370 mdl 138 any SCP which will "run" today on a
S/370 mdl 135. No performance degradation or loss of S/370
mdl 135 recovery from error capabilities will be experienced in
this mode. That is. in 3135 CPU Mode the imptoved hardware
•
These options will 'comprise the standard microcode on the console liIe as
shipped from the plant. They may be altered as explained from the display·
console-keyboard at the operator's discretion.
performance of the S/370 mdl 138 will be available to the user.
Moreover the user will have the same recovery capabilities on
the S/370 mdl 138 as he has on a S/370 mdl 135 when 3135
CPU Mode is selected. NOTE: S/370 mdl 138 Extended
Logout/EREP is not supported in this mode.
Extended Control Program Support (Standard): The S/370
model 138 includes Extended ContrOl-Program Support. This is
a hardware assist that reduces the CPU time needed to execute
certain frequently used supervisor functions in both VS-1 and
VM/370.
The functional areas for VM/370 include:
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
Page Management
SVC Handler
Privileged Instruction Interfaces
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
For VS-1 the functional areas are:
Storage Management
lOS
SVC FLlH
System Trace
Page Management
Prerequisite: Each S/370 mdl 138 requires a 3046 power unit ...
see 3046.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify:
[1) Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 4-wire. 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V. or
#9905 for 230 V.
[2) Cablin9 #9080 for below the floor. or #9081 for on the floor.
[3) Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
t4) Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in S/370 mdl 138.
[5) Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified. shipping
dimensions of the 3138 Frame 01 (CPU) are 21-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2'·. If further reduction in length is required.
specify #9570. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2"
wide x 60" long x 60" high.
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by telephone.
Prices:
3138
Mdl
MRC
I
J
$ 9,600
11.120
MLC
4 Yr
$ 8,730
10,115
Purchase
MMMC
$222,900
260,400
$1,275
1,335
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: A
Termination Charge Months: 6Terminatfon Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
('J\{:LC
M
t~ 'l.,
.
'-,
2'3-1
'L
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model I to Model J ••... $37,500
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SHARED SUBCHANNEL (#1431). Note:
This feature should ,be installed only if devices capable of "Block
Shared" operation are installed on the block multiplexer channel.
See 370 I/O Configuration Form GA22-7002. Allows anyone of
the following combinations of "Non-Shared." "Block Shared" or
selector subchannels to be attached to the block multiplexer
channel: [1 J 16 Non-Shared and 1 Shared Selector (see address
restrictions) ... (2) 8 Non Shared. 8 Block Shared and 1 Shared
Selector (see address restrictions) ... [3) 8 Non-Shared. 4 Block
Shared and 1 Shared Selector (see address restrictions). "option
(2) is selected. then each block shared subchannel may have
attached to it a control unit having a maximum of 16 device addresses. If option [3) is selected. the four block shared subchannels may each have attached a control unit having a maximum of
'32 device addresses. If option [1] is selected. no block shared
subchannels are available. and addresses XOO through X7F are
not available. With any option. the selector subchannel may have
attached to it control units with a maximum of 1 6 device address-ea. This feature will apply to both selector channels if installed.
The options are selectable by the Customer Engineer and may be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
\
-------- - - - -- - =----=-- =--':" =
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (conI' d)
defined differently on each channel.
Installation: Yes.
M 3138.3
Jul79
Field
With #9314, #9317, and #9190 up to three 3344 mdl
B2/B2F and/or 3340 mdl B2, B1 units in any combination
can be attached to one 3340 mdl A2. The second 3340 mdl
A2 if present can attach up to three 3340 mdl B1/B2 units.
a)
Addresses XOO through X7F are arsigned as block shared
subchannels. With option [1] they may not be used. With
option [2] each control unit address position, I.e., XOO, X10,
X20, etc., through X70 is available. With option [3] "even"
address positions only are available, i.e., 00, 20, 40 and 60.
[4] When #9314 is specified, also specify 3340 Address Designation: #982Of for addresses (hex) 1CO thru 1 CF, or
#98211 for addresses (hex) 160 thru 16F. The specification
of 160 allows the 3138 IFA addresses to coincide with those
of the 3115 and 3125 IFAs.
b)
Selector and Non-Shared addresses are limited to addresses
X80 through XFF.
[5] When #9314 or #9315 is specified, also specify #919Of
(Fixed
Head
Attachment)
if
Fixed
Head
Feature
(#4301/4302) is ordered for any 3340 attached to the IFA.
Maximum:
One.
Address Restrictions with #1431
CHANNEL PRIORITY (#1502). When the IFA (#4655) is present,
this feature changes the higher priority for command chaining from
the first block multiplexer channel (Channel 2) to the second block
multiplexer channel (Channel 3). #1502 is required if any DASD
devices are to be attached to Channel 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Integrated File Adapter (#4655).
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, Read
Direct and Write Direct, and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/360 Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622). To provide
a single emergency power-off switch in a "room" or "area". See
Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency power-<>ff switches. Field
Installation: Yes.
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADD'L (#3906, 3907). To increase the number of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer channel,
the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of
the following: ... #3906 - for 128 subchannels ... #3907 - for
256 subchannels. The maximum number of shared subchannels is
eight. When 256 subchannels are installed there are no shared
subchannels. Note: The number of subchannels ordered must be
equal to or greater than the device addresses. Also see "Byte
Multiplexer Channel" under "Input/Output Channels" above. Field
Installation: Yes.
[6] If String Switch (#8150) is ordered for any attached 3333 or
3340 mdl A2, specify String Switch Attachment (#9841)~.
[7] When #98211 is specified in conjunction with #9313 the
addresses for the 3333/3330s are (HEX) 160 thru 16F.
[8] When #9821 ~ is specified and both #9314 and #9317 are
specified the addresses for the 3340/3344s are as follows:
3340 A2
String 0
Physical
Dnve
160
I
161
o
3340 A2
String I
I
162
172
IE2
IF:
2
- - - - 3344 B2/B2Fs - - - 165
166
164
176
175
174
IE6
IE4 IE5
IF6
IF4 IF5
163
173
IE3
IF3
4
6
167
177
IE7
IF7
7
- - - - 3340 B2s - - - -
I 168 I 169 I I 16A I 16B I I 16C I 16D I I 16E I
16F
Note: The DASD control combinations that can be attached to the
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) are shown in the left hand column
of the table below. From Section A of the table select one of the
feature numbers shown (one and only one must be selected). From
Section B select the feature number(s) required to support your
configuration (select none, one or more than one from Section B).
Section C of the table shows the addresses available. The specification of the (HEX) 160 addresses allows the 3138 IFA addresses
to coincide with those of the 3115 and 3125 IFA. Select a .number
from Section C if required.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457). Microprogrammed
controlled feature, which, in conjunction with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Installation: Yes.
3330/3340 SERIES INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4655).
Permits native attachment of up to two 3333s or 3340 mdl A2s. A
maximum of sixteen 3330 or 3340 series drives can be attached
to the IFA. The IFA supports rotational position sensing, disconnected command chaining and multiple requesting. Record overflow is standard. For 3330, standard I/O addresses are (hex) 150
thru 15F. For 3340, standard addresses are (hex) ICO thru ICF.
For 3340 with 3344, standard addresses are (hex) ICO thru 1 E1.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify:
[1) DASD Designation - Specify ONE of the following - #9313;
(DASD 3333/3330) to attach up to two 3333 mdl 1s, each
with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination ...
#9314; (DASD 3340 only) to attach up to two 3340 mdl
A2s, each with up to three 3340 mdls B1/B2 in any combination ... #9315; (3333/3340 Intermix) to attach one 3333
mdl 1 (with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination)
plus one 3340 mdl A2 (with up to three 3340 mdls B1/B2 in
any combination).
[2] If any 3333 mdl 11 and/or 3330 mdl 11 is to be attached,
also specify #9316~ (3333/3330 mdl 11) in addition to
#9313 or #9315.
With #9313 plus #9316, a
one 3333 mdl 11, each with
11 (in any combination) can
11 s, each with any mixture
and 11,
mixture of one 3333 mdl 1 and
up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2, and
be attached ... or two 3333 mdl
of up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2
With #9315 plus #9316, one 3333 (either mdl 1 or mdl 11)
with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11 (in any combination)
can be attached in addition to one 3340 mdl A2 with up to
three associated mdls B1/B2. The standard addresses with
#9315 for 3330 are (hex) 150 thru 157, for 3340 (hex) 158
thru 15F.
[3] if any 3344 is to be attached specify #9317~ in addition to
#9314 (#9317 and #9315 are mutually exclusive). #9190~
must also be specified if 3344 mdl B2Fs or the 3340 Fixed
Head Feature (#4301/4302) is ordered.
*
CPU diskette-only specify fOlure. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
cbarseable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- --- - =----=- =':' =
M 3138.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit
(cont'd)
3138, 3330/3340 IFA (#4655)
SECTION A
DASD Control DASD DesigCombinations
nation, one
on IFA (#4655) req'd
SECTION B
If any 3333
Mdlll
3344
and/or 3330
Mdlll
Fixed Head
Feature
3344
(#4301/
Mdl B2F 4302) on
3340
3333 Disk Stor:IKe Control
9313 ~
9316~
--
--
--
3333/3340 In-
9315
g;
9316 #
--
--
9190 #
termix
3340 Direct Access Storage
9314 #
Facility
--
9317 # 9317 # +
9190 ~
2314/
String
3340
Switch
Compati#8150 on
bility Fea3333/3340 ture (see
#8070\
9190 #
SECTION C
ADDRESSES
Standard
Address 160
9841 #
--
' HEX 130-15F
9821 g; HEX
160-16F
g;
--
'3330 HEX 1501573340 HEX
ISR-I5F
--
9841
9841
g;
.. 8070
9820 g; Not 3344 9821 g; Not
HEX ICO-ICF 3344 HEX
160-16F
3344 HEX ICO- See Item 8
lEI
above
* No feature number required .
.. Mutually exclusive with String Switch #9841,2319 IFA (#4650), IFA Conversion feature (#4645), 3344 Attachment (#9317).
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER ADAPTER BASIC CONTROL
(#4670),
Provides the power supply and basic control for a
natively attached 1403 Printer. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 2, MOL Nl ATTACHMENT
(#4672).
Provides control for attaching 1403 mdl 2 or Nl,
Specify: #9182# to attach 1403 mdl 2, #9188~ to . attach 1403
mdl Nl. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670). On the 1403,
Voltage Adapter (#9709) and 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) are required on a mdl 2; 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) is required on a mdl Nt. See Specify under
1403.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 7 ATTACHMENT (#4677).
Provides control for attaching a 1403 mdl 7. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prereq\lisites: Integrated Printer Adapter Basic
Control (#4670). On the 1403, 600 LPM Voltage Conversion
Adapter (#9725) is required on a mdl 7. See Specify under 1403.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520). Microprogrammed
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 or S/360 mdl 25 in
mdl 20 mode instructions. Field Installation: Yes.
2314/3340 COMPATIBILITY FEATURE (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314/2319 volumes on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well
as 3340 volumes. This provides a "mixed-mode" operating environment. "Mixed-mode" is only possible with DOS releases which
support 3340 on the mdl S/370 mdl 138. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3333/3340
Intermix (#9315), 3344 Attach (#9317). or String Switch Attachment (#9841). Prerequisite: #9314 (DASD 3340 only), on
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
INTEGRATED 3203-4 PRINTER ATTACHMENT, FIRST PRINTER
(#8075).
Provides the capability to natively attach the 3203
Printer mdl 4. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED
ER (#8076).
3203 Printer
Prerequisite:
(#8075).
3203-4 PRINTER ATTACHMENT, SECOND PRINTProvides the capability to natively attach a second
mdl 4. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, First Printer
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637). Permits the
use of the Universal Character Set feature on a 1403 mdl 2 or Nl
attached via the Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment
(#4672). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670), Integrated 1403
Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment (#4672).
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#4640).
Provides
the circuits and controls for direct attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the S/370 mdl 138. The controls for the first
line adapter are included in this feature. Lines can be any combination of Start/Stop or BSC. Provides for the attachment of 1050,
2260 mdl 1, 2260 mdl 2, 2265 mdl 1, 2740 mdl 1, 2740 mdl 2,
2741 mdl 1, 2760 mdl 1, 5010 Axx, or any IBM computer multiplexer or terminal conforming to the Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) standard. Note: In adition to the appropriate adapter, each communications line attached to the system requires an
external modem.
Refer to Table 2 below to define customer configuration require-
P CPU diskette-only specify feature.
No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
ments prior to ordering features below. Customer Responsibilities
-- see M 2700 pages for customer responsibilities regarding communications facilities and servicing requirements. Communications
Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
AUTOCALL (#1290).
Provides automatic calling cepabilities on
facilities Cl, C2, C4 or C5 to initiate (dial) through stored program
control, a data link to a remote station. For the appropriate automatic calling units, see M 2700 pages. Specify: Refer to Table 1 C
for Terminal Adapter Type I Model II or Table 1 E for Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II or Table 1F for Telegraph Adapter Type II for
appropriate feature code according ~o line positions desired.
Maximum: Four. Limitations: Each Autocall feature installed reduces the number of lines available on the ICA by one. Autocall
must be ordered once for each line where the function is desired.
Thus, the ICA can accommodate a maximum of four lines if each
of these lines also has the Autocall feature. A single Autocall
feature can be associated with any of the lines from one to seven.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II (#9721-9728) or Tele9raph
Adapter Type II (#9785-9792) and Switched Network Facility
selection from the display console.
.
ADDITIONAL LINES (#4722-4728).
Each provides circuits and
controls for attachment of an additional line adapter
for a total
of eight lines in a system. Specify: Order additional lines according to line position required ... see Table I-A below. Each line
specified requires the next lower order line as a prerequisite.
Maximum: One of each (#4722 thru #4728). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER.
For each line (#4722-4728) attached to the ICA,
including the first line included in the Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640), one of the following line adapters must be
specified: Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II (#9721-9728), Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760), Telegraph Adapter Type II
(#9785-9792), or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#96499656). Each line adapter and all associated features must be
specified according to the line position to which they correspond.
Refer to Table 2 below prior to ordering features for the ICA.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE 1 MODEL II (#9721-9728).g;
Controls data transfers between the 3138 and 1050/2740 mdl
1/2741/5010 mdl Axx over facility C1 or D1, and between the
3138 and 2740 mdl 2 or 5010 mdl Axx over iacility 01 or 02.
Includes vertical and longitudinal checking for 1050 terminals and
2740s equipped with Record Checking (#6114). Specify: Refer to
Table l-B for appropriate feature code according to line position(s)
desired. Special Requirements: See Table l-C for additional
specify requirements if Autocall is required. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III (#9753-9760).g; Controls data
transfers between the 138 and either remote 2845 Display Controls or 2848 Display Controls operating at 1200 bps over facility
D3. Permits operation at 2400 bps over facility D4 if Modern
Clocking is specified. Specify: Refer to Table 1-8 for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
MODEM CLOCKING (#9609-9616).
Allows a Terminal Adapter
Type III to operate at 2400 bps or a Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II to operate at 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps or 7200 bps.
Requires the appropriate clocking to be in the attached modem.
Note: Certain modems such as the IBM 3872 mdl 1 although
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------ ---- ---------------_.-
M 3138.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
basically 2400 bps modems, offer a 1200 bps ~Ialf speed facility.
Since the requirements for the Modem Clocking feature are defined by the type of modem, not the line speed, when such modems are attached to the Synchronous Data Adapter Type 11 and
are switched for 1200 bps operation, Modem Clocking is still
required as a prerequisite on the ICA. Specify: Refer to Table l-D
for Terminal Adapter Type 111 or Table l-E for Synchronous Data
Adapter Type 11 for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type 111 or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE 11 (#9785-9792).~
Controls data
transfers between ICA and Model 33/35 TTY terminals (8 level
code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Specify: Refer to Table l-B
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) and Switched Network Facility selection from the
display console.
SYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE II (#9649-9656).~ Provides control of data transfers between the 3138 and binary
synchronous terminals. See "Binary Synchronous Terminals"
under 2701 Data Adapter Unit. Control Station is included with this
feature. Specify: Refer to Table l-B for appropriate feature code
according to line position(s) desired. Speed Selection: Provides
operation over C3, D2 and D3 facilities at 600 bps if 600 Bits Per
Second is selected from the display console. Provides operation
over C4 and D3 facilities at 1200 bps (no speed need be specified). Provides operation over C5M facility at 2000 bps if modem
clocking is provided ... see above. Provides operation over C5, D4
or Xl M at 2400 bps. over C6. D5 or X2M at 4800 bps, or over
D6 at 7200 bps
see above. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: See Table l-E for additional specify
requirements if Autocall or EON are required. See Table l-E and
Modem Clocking above if 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, or 7200
bps operation is required. The appropriate Data Code must be
selected from the display console.
Special Feature Prices:
Autocall
#1290* $ 56 $ 51 $ 2,180
Blk Mlplxr Shrd Subchnnls
1431
NC
NC
•*
Channel Priority
1502
NC
NC
Direct Control
3274* 131 120
5,205
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
NC
for up to 1 2 switches
3622
NC
NC
NC
Mlplxr Subchannels, Add'i
128 subchannels
3906
NC
NC
256 subchannels
3907
NC
NC
1401/1440/1460 Compat
4457
NC
NC
Int Communications Adptr
4640* 242 220
9,470
3330/3340 Series IFA
4655' 708 644 19,820
Int 1403 Prt Adpt Basic Cnt 4670' 400 364 19,850
Int 1403 Prt-2,-Nl Attach
10
415
10
4672'
Int 1403 Prntr -7 Attach
4677*
10
415
10
Lines, Additional
Second
4722*
47
43
1,900
Third
4723'
95
87
3,815
Fourth
4724'
47
43
1,900
Fifth
4725* 144 131
5,690
Sixth
4726*
47
43
1,900
Seventh
4727'
47
43
1,900
Eighth
4728'
47
43
1,900
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility 7520
NC
NC
*'
2314/3340 Compat Feat
8070'
55
50
1,535
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment,
First Printer
8075 180 164
4,750
4,750
Second Printer
8076 1BO 164
1,630
Universal Char Set Adapter 8637'
40
37
MODEMS: Up to eight modems can be attached to a 3138.
Prerequisites: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 11 (#9649-9656) 2400 bps to
7200 bps, Terminal Adapter Type I Model 11 (#9721-9728) 134.5
bps to 600 bps, or Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760) 1200
bps or 2400 bps. See feature descriptions for limitations.
Speed (bps)
2400
3872
2400
3864
4800
3874
3875
4800
7200
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
25.00
3.00
21.50
.50
.50
5.00
10.00
5.00
16.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
NC
NC
30.00
30.00
8.00
CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed, $405 on purchased machine when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on
the same diskette.
'
EON (#9801-9807).~
Automatically generates an EON digit at
the end of the dial sequence. Specify: Refer to Table l-E for
appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Specify for 3872 and 3874 Modem with EON option. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Autocall (# 1290) '" Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II.
Modem
$ 1.00
NC
NC
1.00
* Feature supplies CPU diskette.
**
LIMITATIONS: For line speed limitations refer to Model 138 Channel Characteristics Manual GA33-3010.
3863
MLC
MRC 4 yr Purchase MMMC
Note: for communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
P CPU diskette~only specify
feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ------
-- ------===--':' =
M 3138.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Before ordering. check Special Feature write-ups for Prerequisites and Limitations.
ADDITIONAL LINE APPEARANCF;S
TABLE I·A
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4
FEATURE
Additional Lines
in 4()4()4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727
Specify additional lines according to line position.
TABLE I·B
TERMINAL ADAPTERS
4728
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FEATURE
Terminal Adapter
Type I Model I(
Terminal Adapter
Type III
Synchronous Dala
Adapter Type (( #
#
#
9721
9722
9723
9724
9725
9726
9727
9728
9753
9754
9755
9756
9757
9758
9759
9760
9649
9650
9651
9652
9653
9654
9655
9656
Any adapter added, removed. or relocated to another line
position requires reconfiguralion of the entire line.
Select one terminal adapter for each line position specified in
TABLE I-A.
TABLE I·C
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER
TYPE I MODEL II
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4
FEATURE
Autocall
9777
9778
9779
9780
9781
9782
9783
TABLE I·D
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4
FEATURE
Modem Clocking
9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616
Select modem clocking feature for each line position for which
Terminal Adapter Type III is specified and operation at 2400
bps is desired.
TABLE I·E
OPTIONS FOR SYNCHRONOUS
DATA ADAPTER TYPE II
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4
FEATURE
Modem Clocking
Aulocall
EON
9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616
9777 9778 9779 9780 9781 9782 9783
9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 9806 9807
Select features required for each line position for which
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is specified.
TABLE I·F
OPTIONS FOR TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II
#
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FEATURE
Telegraph Adapter
Type I(
Autocall
#
9785
9777
97&6
9778
9787
9779
9788
9780
9789
9781
9790
9782
9791
9783
9792
, CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced withol,Jt written permission.
--------- ---= =-------=--":' =
M 3138.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
TABLE 1- Part I
Terminal
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
1050 Data Communication
System
une=
IBlts see
134,5
ComlRunication Line and
Modem Facilities
CI
Features Required
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II: and Switched Network
Facility
Terminal Adapter Tvne I Model II
DI
Connects via 2848 Display Control Model 3 - see this table
2lCiO Display Station Model 1
2lCiO Display Station Model 1
2l6S Display Station Modell
Connects via 2848 Disnlav Control Modell or 2 - see this table
Connects via the 2845 Display Control Model I - see this table
2740 Communication Terminal
Modell
134.5
1740 Communication Terminal
Model 2
1741 Communication Terminal
Modell (without interrupt
feature)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility
01
Terminal Adapter Tvpe I Model II
134.5
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
600
02
Terminal AdaDter Tvne I Model II; and 600 Bits Per Second
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facilitv
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
134.5
CI
DI
1741 CommunicatioD TermiDal
Model I (with Receive
Interrupt Feature)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
134_5
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
CI
2741 Communication Terminal
Modell (witb Transmit
Interrupt feature)
134.5
1741 Communication Terminal
Modell (wltb Receive
Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
134.5
DI
CI
DI
2760 0rtical Image Unit
Model
Facility; and Read Interrupt; and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
reouired)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-ExceDtion SUDDression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Read InterruDt; and Unit-Exoansion Suppression (if required)
Connects via 1740 Communication Terminal Modell - see this table
1200
03
3871 Model
1
2400
D4
2848 Display Control Models I,
2 and 3 (point-tn-polnt or
3871 Model
multipoint)
1
1200
03
Terminal AdaDter Tvne III multipoint for multipoint operation
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multiooint ooeration and New Sync (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
2400
D4
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint ooeration and New Sync (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
2845 Display Control Model 1
(point-tn-polnt or multipoint)
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 1 with (#7113) 1741 Line Control (without
interrupt feature)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 wltb (#7113) 1741 Line Control (witb
Receive Interrupt feature)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 witb (#7113) 1741 Line Control (witb
Transmit Interrupt feature)
300
DI
CI
DI
CI
DI
3767 CommunicatioDS Terlmnal
Model 1 or 1 witb (#7113) 1741 Line Control (with
Receive Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
300
3767 Communleations Terminal
Modell or 1 with (#7111) 1740-1 Line Control
300
3767 Communieations Terminal
Model 1 or 1 or 3 with (#7111)
- 1740-1 Line Control
600
CI
01
134.5
System/7
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Une Speed and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
reouired)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line
Sneed, and Unit-Exception SUPDression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Une Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression
(If required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Switched Network Facility,
Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line
Sneed, and Unit-ExceDtion SUDDression (if required)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt, and
Read Interrupt, and 300 Bit. Per Second Line Speed, and
Unlt- ExceDtion SUDDression (if required)
Cl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
F.cilltv, and 300 Bits Per Second Lille Speed
Dl
Line S
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facilitv
DI
600
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and 300 Bits Per Second
Une Sneed
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Write Interrupt,300 Bits Per Second Une Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
02
Term~.:.!dapter
Type I Model II, and 300 Bits Per Second
Terminal AdaDter Tvne I Model II
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Sneed
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------===
-- ----------":' =
M 3138.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit
TABLE 2
- Part I
(cont'd)
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START /STOP TERMINALS
(coDt'd)
Cl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read interrupt, Write Interrupt, and Unit-Exception
Suppression (if required)
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Cl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second
Line Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception
Suppression (if required)
C2
Telellrll(lh Adaj>ler TypeH
134,5
5100/5110 Computer Systems
300
110
TIY33/35
TABLE 2 - Part 1
Line Sted
(Bits/ c)
FEATURES REQUIRED for BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
Manner of Line Operation
Point-to-Point
600
Multipoint -- 3138 as Control
Station
Features Required
03 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Half Duplex Facility, and Data Code Features
02 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Data Code Features
C3
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Switched Network Facility, and Data Code Features
D2 (four-wire)
Synchronous Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second, and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary 02 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Tributary Station, and Data Code Features
03 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Half Duplex Facility,
and Data Code Features
D3 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
C4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Switched Network
Facility, and Data Code Features
03 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
llOO
Multipoint -- 3138 as Control
Station
Multipoint -- 3138.s Tributary 03 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Tributary Station, and
Data Code Features
2400
3863
Point-to-Point
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
2400
3863
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
2400
3863
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Dala Code Features
2400
3872 Model
I
Point-to-Polnt
C5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
D4 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facililv; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary D4 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Polnt
2400
3872 Model
1
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
XIM
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
4800
3864
Point-to-Point
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type ll; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
4800
3864
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type ll; ':if~ Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (i required)
4800
3864
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type ll; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code ,Features
Point-to-Point
C6
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
05
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary 05
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
4800
3874 Model
1
X1M
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
Point-to-Point
D6 (with Cl conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
7200
3875 Model
1
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
\
,-------- --------===
----':' =
M 3145.1
May 79
OP Machines
IBM 3145 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Has program, control and auxiliary storage, plus arithmetic and logic circuits for a S/370 mdl 145.
Model GE
163,840 bytes of processor storage.
Model GFD
212,992 bytes of processor storage.
Model H
Model HG
262,144 bytes of processor storage.
393,216 bytes of processor storage when used
with a 3345 mdl 1 or 4.
Modell
524,288 bytes of processor storage when used
with a 3345 mdl 2 or 5.
Model H2
Model HG2
262,144 bytes of processor storage.
393,216 bytes of processor storage.
Model 12
524,288 bytes of processor storage.
ModellH2
786,432 bytes of processor storage.
Model J2
1,048,576 bytes of processor storage.
Model JI2
Model K2
1,572,864 bytes of processor storage.
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage.
For additional models of the 3135, see 3135-3 in "Machines"
pages.
Highlights: Depending upon the processing unit model, up to
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage are available. CPU cycle of
202.5 - 315 nanoseconds depending upon internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers.
Virtual storage capability to increase the effective utilization of
main storage.
On the 3145 mdls FED', GE, GFD, H, HG or I, the 2319 Disk
Storage mdl A1 (with 2312, 2313, 2318 or 2319 mdl A2 Disk
Storages) can be natively attached via the Integrated File Adapter
(#4650). 3333 Disk Storage and Control modules (with 3330
modules) and/or 3340 Disk Storage mdl A2s (with 3340 B mdls
and/or 3344s) and/or 3350 Disk Storage mdls A2/A2F (with
3350 B2/B2F, C2/C2F mdls) can be attached to 3145 mdls FED,
GE, GFD, H, HG or I via the Integrated Storage Control on 3345
mdls 3, 4 or 5. Attachment of 3330 series, 3340 series and 3344s
and/or 3350 series disk storage to 3145 mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2,
J2, JI2 or K2 is via ~he Integrated Storage Control (#4660).
In addition to main storage, 32,768 bytes of Reloadable Control
Storage are included in the CPU for all storage configurations:
This feature permits emulator and control routines to function. Any
expansion of control storage beyond 32,768 bytes (up to 65,536
bytes maximum) is provided in 2,048 byte increments at the expense of main memory ... see "Control Storage Requirements"
below for basic machine and selected feature requirements in
microcode.
An optional Clock Comparator and CPU Timer" provides additional
timing facilities for the programmer.
Virtual Storage: Extended Control (EC) Mode expands the structure of the Program Status Word to accommodate the control of
new S/370 features and ex~ends the number of permanently
assigned main storage locations. The S/370 mdl 145 can operate
In either EC Mode or Basic Control (BC) Mode as defined for
S/360. Dynamic Address Translation (OAT) is a standard feature
on the S/370 mdl 145. When the S/370 mdl 145 Is in EC Mode,
with Translation Mode operable, program addresses are treated as
"logical addresses" and the translation feature develops "real
addresses." Since logical storage addressing Is not limited by the
amount of available real storage, program size may exceed real
storage size. This logical storage is referred to as "virtual
storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes on the S/370
mdl 145. For I/O operations, Channel Indirect Addressing provides
a means to transmit data that spans pages of noncontiguous real
storage.
Program Event Recording, a standard feature, is a debugging aid
which permits four types of events to be selectively monitored In a
virtual environment: [1] Successful branuhes ... [2] Instruction
fetch address compare ... [3] Main Storage alteration address
compare ... [4] General Purpose Register alteration address compare.
Standard features include a commercial Instruction set, new
S/370 instructions, Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Addr>!lss Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program
Event Recording, interval timer, time-of-day clock, store and fetch
protect, console file, byte-oriented operand feature, error checking
and correction code on main storage, micro-Instruction retry,
channel retry Information, byte multiplexer channel, audibl~ alarm,
as/DOS Compatibility Feature, and one selector channel.
PREREQUISITES:
For 3145 mdl HG or I - 3345 Storage and Control Frame and
3046 Power Unit.
For 3145 mdl H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2 - 3047 Power
Unit.
Control Storage Requirements: The Reloadable Control Storage is
housed in the CPU and is loaded from the Console File, which is
located below the console reading board. This area of control
storage is not available to the user. Control Storage requirements
for the system are as follOWS:
Basic System Microcode - does not include 16 standard
26,000 bytes
subchannels on the byte multiplexer channel
Byte Multiplexer Channel UCWs - select one of the
1 . 16 MPX Channel Units
256
2. 32 MPX Channel Units
512
3. 64 MPX Channel Units
1024
4. 128 MPX Channel Units
2048
5. 256 MPX Channel Units
4096
Optlonsl System Features
1.Console Printer/Keyboard and Alternate Console
Facility (select one of the following):
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 3200
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1
3440
with remote 3210 mdl 2
3215 Console Printer-Keyboard
3800
3215 Console Printer-Keyboard
with remote 3210 mdl 2
4570
2.Selector Channel Block Multiplex Feature
(basic microcode which supports any and all
selector channels with block multplxr) 2500
3.UCWs for the Block Multiplexer Channel
come In multiples of 16 which are shared
among all Block Multiplexer Channels
8 bytes x UCWs NOTE: 512 UCWs are maximum.
9760
4.lntegrated File Adapter
5.Compatlbility Support - select one:
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
5200
1401/1440/1460,1410/7010
Compatibility
6000
2240
6.Floating Point
80
7.Direct Control Feature
1800
8.Clock Comparator and CPU Timer
9.Conditlonal Swapping
140
10.Advanced Control Program Support
860
11.Virtual Machine Assist
2400
12.APL Assist
19500
following:
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+ __bytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
+-tlytes
Control storage requirements In excess of 32,768 bytes will Illducs processor storage by the amount exceeding 32,768 bytes In
2,048-byte increments to a maximum of 65,536 bytes.
26,000 bytes
Example: Basic System
16 UCWs on byte multiplexer channel
256 bytes
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1
3,200 bytes
Integrated File Adapter
9,760 bytes
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
5,200 bvtes
44,416 bytes
The Movable Control Storage Boundary is set on 2,048 bytes.
Control Storage required Is 45,056 (32,768 + 6 x 2,048). The
impact on processor storage Is 12,288 bytes.
The address boundary between control and processor storage Is
assigned' at Initial Micro Program (IMPL) time. The boundary Is
established by the value loaded (during IMPL) according to the
requirements in the console file. The boundary established Is the
upper limit of main storage addresses. If an I/O operation or
program Instruction attempts to address a main storage location at
or above this boundary, an address check occura and no storage
location Is accessed. If a control storage access Is attempted
below the boundary, a machine check occurs. Control storage will
never be less than 32,768 bytes. Above this amount - to a maximum of 65,536 bytes - control storage Is alloc,ated from processor
storage in 2,048-byte Increments depending upon requirements
specified to the system. This allocation can be changed by utilizIng an alternate magnetic disk cartridge with another set of 3145
features. Alternate cartridges for an Installation will be available
via RPQ.
For S/360 Programming Systems (DOS and OS), the amount of
processor storage available after control storage requirements
have been met must be equal to or larger than the S/360, memory
• 3145 mdl FED is IlO toncer Ivoila1>le.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -
--- -------==-=:E-;r5:
M 3145.2
May 79
DP Machines
3145 PrQcesslng Unit (cont'd)
size that the version of the operating system requires. Any decrementing of processor storage for control storage requirements will
be made in increments of 2,048 bytes.
Input/Output Attachment - a wide variety of I/O devices may be
attached to the S/370 mdl 145 via the standard byte multiplexer
channel and the optional selector channels. There are, however,
four direct attachment features for the 3145. They are:
Console File (standard) - this is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small, lowperformance read-only file device that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable magnetic disk cartridges. The
several disks that will be supplied with the system will supply all
of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems
features, plus the optional features ordered for the system.
Console Printer-Keyboard (required) - this unit serves as the
on-tine input/output device for operator/system communications.
It provides a means of manually entering data Into the system,
altering data already In storage, and for printing error logout
messages.
Integrated File Adapter (optional on 3145 mdls FED, GE, GFD,
H, HG or I ... not available on mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or
K2) - this feature enables native attachment of 2319 Disk Storage mdl A1 (and additional 2312', 2313', 2318' or 2319 mdl
A2 * Disk Storages) through an integrated adapter. The adapter
is permanently assigned to the standard selector channel
(Channell), and requires space normally assigned to Selector
Channel 4. When the IFA is installed, Selector Channel 2 becomes standard, and only Selector Channel 3 can be ordered.
Integrated Storage Control (optional on mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2,
J2, JI2 or K2 ... not available on mdls FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I)
- this feature allows native attachment of 3333 Disk Storage and
Control modules (with 3330 modules) and/or 3340 Disk Storage
mdl A2s (with 3340 B mdls and/or 3344s) and/or 3350 Disk
Storage mdls A2/A2F (with 3350 B2/B2F, C2/C2F mdls). This
feature requires an available control unit pOSition on a system
channel. A Block Multiplexer Channel and one unshared subchannel per logical device are required for support of block
multiplexing and rotational position sensing. If this support is not
required, attachment to a system selector channel is permitted.
This attachment capability is provided for the 3145 mdls FED,
GE, GFD, H, HG or I via the 3345 mdls 3, 4 and 5 ... see 3345.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[5] Additional Multiplexer Subchannels: 16 are standard ... if more
are required, see "Special Features."
[6] Emergency Power-off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Manual, Installation Information
Physical Planning, for requirementa.
[7] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required on a S/370 mdl
145.
[8] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interface for FE DAU to the telephone line,
(9] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3145 Frame 01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high, Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9692. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60" long x 60" high.
[10] Console Printer-Keyboard Address: Recorded on the console
file disk at the plant. #9101' for "OlF," or #9102, for "009".
[11] Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard Address: #91051 ...
alternate address of "009" for the Second Console PrlnterKeyboard (3210 mdl 2). Address Is In lieu of the standard
Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard address of "01 E" when the
Primary Console Printer-Keyboard address is "01 p'. Recorded
on the console file disk at the plant. PREREQUISITE: #9101.
Primary Console Printer-Keyboard Address "01 F".
[12] When attaching a 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, specify #9851.
Input/Output Channels
Byte Multiplexer Channel - one is standard on the 3145 and Is
functionally equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on the
S/360 mdls 30, 40 and 50. Sixteen subchannels are provided as
standard with the option of 32, 64, 128 or 256 ... see "Special
Features." At system order time, the number of units on the
multiplexer channel must be specified in order that the correct
amount of control storage is reserved. The byte multiplexer channel provides eight control unit positions and permits several I/O
operations simultaneous with computing. In burst mode, the
channel handles one high speed unit. For Operating System/360
exclusion, refer to SRL GC28-6554, System/360 Operating
Systems System Generation.
Selector Channels - one Is standard and three additional are
available ... see "Special Features." NOTE: If the Integrated File
Adapter Is specified, see Selector Channel under "Special
Features" for limitations. With the optional Word Buffer Installed,
the selector channel data rate will approximate 1 .85
megabytes/second, while unbuffered, the data rate will be
820KB. The Block Multiplexer Channel Is also available for the
selector channels and the channel data rates apply with or without the feature. On channels without the Word Buffer (#8810),
the 3330/3830 or 3345 mdl 3, 4, 5 with 3330 drives must be
attached to channel 1 of non-IFA systems and to channel 2 of
IFA systems. On channels with #8810, the 2305/2835 mdl 2
must be attached to channell on non-IFA systems and to channel 2 on IFA systems, and the 3330/3830 or 3345 mdl 3, 4, 5
may be attached to any available channel. NOTE: If block multiplexing or rotational position sensing Is required, the Block Multiplexer Channel feature must be Installed. The Word Buffer
(#8810) is required to attach the 2305/2835 mdl 2 or 3340. If
the S/370 mdl 145 has 3 or 4 selector channels (IFA counts aa
a selector channel), the Word Buffer (#8810) la required to
attach a 3330 series facility.
Console Function - a standard system control panel Is located on
the 3145. It has switches and lights necessary to operate and
control the system. A systems control I/O function Is provided with
.either of two alternatives. Feature #7844 attaches the 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) on the console table readIng board. Optionally, the 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard (85 cps)
can be attached via feature #7855. Either #7844 or #7855 Is
required in the system. A remote 3210 mdl 2 may also be attached ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
PRICES:
3145
MAC/
MRC
MDL
GE
GFD
H
HG
I
$13,890
14,930
15,970
15,990
16,010
H2
HG2
12
IH2
J2
JI2
K2
15,880
17,570
18,980
21,750
24,540
30,830
36,210
TLP/
MLC
4 Yeer
$12,830
13,575
14,520
14,540
14,580
Purchase
$534,700
801,200
MMMC
$1,150
1,185
1,215
1,215
1,215
14,240
585,200
15,985
844,050
17,255
888,700
19,795
778,000
22,335
867,300
27,880 1,062,100
32,980 1,240,700
1,175
1,280
1,395
1,610
1,825
2,245
2,665
568,800
598,900
800,050
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 45%*' Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changee: Field Installable. When ordering field conversion
of a 3145 mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I to a mdl H2, HG2, 12,
IH2, J2, JI2 or K2, see "Specify" under 3047 for additonal requirements.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
Installation charges)
From To
OE
OFD
H
HO
OPD
H
HO'
I'
$32,100 $64,200 $6S,3S0 $66,SOO
32,100 33,2S0 34,400
I,ISO
2,300
I,ISO
• Applicable only when the 3145 mdl HO or 1 is used with the appropriate
334S Storage and Control Frame as described under "Models" above. Prices
do not include those of the required 334S •
, CPU dilkette-oDly IIIOCify f..lUre. No fee when ordered at time of ......ufacture or with
clwpable fealUre ihat IUppIioo cIiIkette. S405 on purchued macbiaes 10 include ..y
number of diIkette-oDly ........ orcIerecI on ...... diIkette.
•• Purclwe Option ;.. 50'1 under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
t
• No lonpr available.
~fl>~u~P 10 tbreo CPU, in tb....... physlcallocalion .... be ..rvicocI by a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Iinale
------':" -=
-==-=
-- -----------
M 3145.3
May 79
DP Machines
3145 Processing Unit (cont'd)
From To
GE
GFD
H
HG
[
H2
HG2
[2
[H2
J2
Jl2
H2
HG2
[2
$79,280 $138,150 $182,800
47,180 106,050 150,700
15,080 73,950 118,600
RPQ
RPQ 120,050
RPQ
58,850 103,500
44,650
[H2
$272,100
240,000
207,900
209,350
209,350
192,800
133,950
89,300
12
$361,400
329,300
297,200
298,650
298,650
282,100
223,250
178,600
89,300
][2
RPQ
RPQ
RPQ
RPQ
RPQ
476,900
418,050
373,400
284,100
194,800
K2
RPQ
RPQ
RPQ
RPQ
RPQ
655,500
596,650
552,000
462,700
373,400
178,600
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement
letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of model
changes to the '2' series from the non '2' series Involves the
removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADVANCED CONTROL PROGRAM SUPPORT (#1001). Provides
four additional Instructions and a new function ... Compare and
Swap ... Compare Double and Swap ... Insert PSW Key ... Set
PSW Key from ADDRESS ... Clear I/O Function. This feature Is a
prerequisite for the execution of MVS (OS/VS2 Release 2 and
above) and or VTAM and for TCAM/NCP. Limitation: Cannot be
installed if Conditional Swapping (#1051) Is installed. Field
Installation: Yes.
APL ASSIST (#1005). Provides performance assist to APL programs when used with the VS APL PP #5748 AP1. Field
Installation: Yes.
CONDITIONAL SWAPPING (#1051).
Provides two additional
instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and Swap.
This feature is a prerequisite for the execution of VTAM programming support and for TCAM/NCP. Limitation: Cannot be installed
if Advanced Control Program Support (#1001) is installed. Field
Installation: Yes.
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1421). Increases the efficiency of the selector channel when using direct access storage
devices equipped with rotational position sensing. The disconnected command chaining feature of the channel allows multiple devices to perform non-data transfer operation concurrently with one
data transfer operation. This permits increased utilization of the
channel by performing operations on other devices while the
channel would have normally been waiting on one device. This
feature provides Block Multiplexer capabilities for all system Selector Channels. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: The number of
UCWs (available in multiples of 16) for Block Multiplexer Channels
must be specified. Select one of the following numbers, which will
supply the specified number of UCWs to be shared by the Block
Multiplexer Channel(s) ... field installable.
Code UCWs
Code UCWs
Code UCWs
Code UCWs
#94911 16 #94991 144 #95071 272 #95151 400
95161 416
94921
32
9500f 160
95081 288
48
95011 176
95091 304
95171 432
94931
94941
64
95021 192
95101 320
95181 448
95191 464
94951
80
95031 208
95111 336
95201 480
96
95041 224
95121 352
94961
9497f 112
9505f 240
9513f 368
95211 496
94981 128
9506f 256
95141 384
95221 512
Note: The number of UCWs specified for the Block Multiplexer
Channel(s) does NOT affect the number of Multiplexer Subchannels. See Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i (#4951 4954).
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one
of the processors requires this feature. Uses two control unit
positions on each of the connected channels. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
CLOCK COMPARATOR AND CPU TIMER (#2001). The Clock
Comparator provides a means of causing an interruption when the
time-of-day clock has passed a program-specified value. The CPU
Timer is a decrementing binary counter with a resolution of one
microsecond. It provides a means for measuring elapsed CPU time
by causing an interruption when a pre-specified amount of time
has elapsed. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
J2, JI2, K2 only] Provides additional control storage for microprogram use on the ISC (#4660) ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine when required.
Limitation: Cannot be Installed with Control Store Extension
(#2150). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two Instructions, Read
Direct and Write Direct and six distinct external Interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write Instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the Interface speCifications outlined in
S/360 - Direct Control Feature - OEM, SRL GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-DFF CONTROL (#3821, 3822). To provide, In effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 mdl
145 in "Systems." #3621 - to Interconnect two emergency
power-off switches ... #3622 - to Interconnect up to twelve
emergency power-off switches.
FLOATING POINT (#3910). Adds floating point instructions to
the S/370 mdl 145 standard Instruction set. Provides for floating
point operations Including extended precision to 28 hexadecimal
digits. Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1480 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, In combination with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 Instructions.
Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1480, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#4458). Gives
1401/1440/1460 compatibility, plus 1410/7010 compatibility.
Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4850). [Mdls FED, GE, GFD, H,
HG, I only] Permits native attachement of the 2319 Disk Storage
mdl A1 (and additional 2312, 2313, 2318 or 2319 mdl A2 Disk
Storages ... up to eight drives total) through an integrated adapter.
Standard features Include file scan and record overflow functions.
Specify: One of the following additional power features - #9303
for three drives... #9304 for four ... #9305 for five ... #9306 for
six ... #9307 for seven ... #9308 for eight. See 2319 for additional ordering instructions. Limitation: Cannot be Installed on
mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2. Field Installation: Not
recommended '" but may be removed in the field.
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROL (#4880). [Mdls H2, HG2, 12,
IH2, J2, JI2, K2 only] Provides for the attachment of 3333s (mdls
1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/ A2Fs
... see DASD Configuration under Specify, below. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by
attaching 3340 mdl Bs and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2 or by
attaching 3350 mdl Bs and/or a mdl C to the 3350 mdl A2 or A2F
... see DASD Configuration table below and 3330, 3333, 3340,
3344, 3350 "Machines" pages. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed on mdls FED, GE, GFD, H,
HG or I. Prerequisites: Requires a control unit position on a system channel. A block multiplexer channel and one unshared subchannel per logical device are required for support of block multiplexing and rotational pOSition sensing. If this support is not required, attachment to a system selector channel Is permitted.
Word Buffer (#8810) is required to support the 3340, or if the
system .includes Selector Channel, 3rd (#6983). Specify: The
available combinations of storage devices which can be attached
are shown In the table below. One, two or three Xs in a vertical
column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD Specify
Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the Special
Features listed below being ordered for them, order the Required
DASD Specify Feature(s). [Note that #9190 is 3340 Fixed Head
Attachment for #9314 and #931 5 and is not specified for #9317
or #9318.]
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150).
[Mdls H2, HG2, 12,
IH2. J2, JI2, K2 onlyl Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4660) ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine when required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Expanded Control Store (#2152).
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2152).
[Mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2.
1 ~:~g~!~:t1;~~~ 'R:i~u~·;:u~red~k~l:' -=~ g~d;~~~~i'.:uf~ct~u~~ -:,~
number of diskette-only ch8ll&e. ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
=-==
Mri!
:i.=:..:
=,=
M 3145.4
May 79
==
OP Machines
"145 Proc;eaatng Unit (cont'd)
ISC (#4Q6Q) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#8100)
..
..
Required DASD Sp.cify Futur.'·
>
"E
0
..,..,...
...
>
"E
0
..
0
::l
....
..,...,
;Ii
~
DA$D Confiluretion
9314t 9315
~3p 9314
t 9190 t
t
One or two 33335 w,lh
associal~ 3330.
Up to fou, 3333, with
.ssoc,.ted 3330•
String Switch '81501 on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2~
with associ.,.,:! mdl 81182
Up to four 3340 mdl A2,
with ••,ociated mdl 81/82
String Switch 181501 on
any 3340 mdl A2
Fi .. ed Head Feature
:';301143021 on any 3340
l,Jp to lour 3340 rndl A2.
of which UP 10 two may
anae" 33440
String Switch 181501 on
a"y 3340 mdl A2 andlor
Fixed Head Feature on
any 3340 (4301143021
3333, and 3340 mdl A2s
•x
931St 9317 9318
t
9190 t t
I
I~xI
i
~I
x
.
x x
x
Ix
!
II
I
x
xix
xx
..
x
..
,"
II
II "
(any eombin-8tif'.., of two,
x
~
I
!r
t
•
••
+
++
I
!
" 11
I three. Dr fourl each with
is
1
!,
xxx
xx
I!
x
I!
I'
!
I
x
1\
,
'
I
x
I
x
:
I
I
I
i
t
I
j.
I
:
ISC diskette-only specify ~ture. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on same diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new confisuration indicates that a. different SpecifY and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Speci"
fy and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any
not listed as required for the new configuration.
Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With. #9315, the ISC
requires 32 contiguous device addre_ regardless of the number of drives
attached.
Control Store ~tension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. F or conf1&U~tions in this group the ISC uses 64 contiguous
device addJ:e_ irrespective of the number of drives attached. The 3340
!Ddl A2s on the fust. and third strings may attach up to three 3340 mdl
B I, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string !Day attach up to three 3340 mdl BI/B2s. The 3340mdl A2
on the fourth string lIl&y attach one 3340 mell B I or B2.
Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Register Expansion (#611J) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the ISC uoes 8. or 16 or 32
or 64 dovice addreases dependillg upon the DASD configuration installed
and whether any 3350 drive is in 3330-1 compatibilitY!Dode.
REGISTER EXPANSION (#8111),
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4880) to determIne when required. Field
Instellatlon: Yes Maximum: One.
SELECTOR CHANNEL (#8982-6984). Each adds a high-speed
channel to the system. The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are provided on
each channel. #6982 - for second selector channel ... #8983 for third .•. #6984 - for fourth. Limitation: If Integrated File
Adapter (#4650) Is Installed. Selector Channels 1 and 4 are
preempted. Channel 2 becomes standard and only Channel 3
(#6983) can be ordered. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prereqplaltea:
#8983 requires #8982 or #4650 ... #6984 requires #6983 '" if
3330 or 3333 drives are to be attached to the system. #6983
requires Word Buffer (#8810).
I
~ ~i associated driv..
::l String Switch (81501 on
... _ any 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
~ Fi • .,:! Head Feature
",14301143021 on anv 3340
~ JUP to four 3350 mdl A2s1
C5 A,2Fs w associat~ mdl
o IB2s/82FS. C2/C2F
ill ~tring Sw (81501 on any
... 33!,?0 mdl A2/A2F .C2/C2F
_ i 3333•• 3340 mdl A2s and
~ : 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs (any
.. .., combination of 2. 3 or 41
~ with associated drives
;:! .§. String Sill! 181501 on any
.., 0 3333, 3340 mdl A2. or
... ~ 3350 mdl A2/A2FJ:.'2./C2F
.., and/or Fix":! Head Faa
(4301/43021 on any 3340
-
.+
+
subchannels are installed there are NO shared subchannels. Note:
The number of Multiplexer Subchannels does not affect the number of UCWs specified for the Block Multiplexer Channel(s). See
Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421) specify. FIeld Inatellatlon:
Yes.
3210 MDL 1 ADAPTER (#7844).
To attach a 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) for system console I/O .. ,
Includes an alter-dlsplay ability. Position of the 3210 to the right
or left of the operator depends on Console Table Extension
(#9824 or #9825) ... see "SpeCify" above. L1mltetlon: Cannot be
installed with 3215 Adapter (#7855). Maximum: One. Field
Inatellatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte: Uses one address on the standard
byte multiplexer channel, but does not use a control unit position.
3210 MDL 2 ADAPTER (#7845). To attach a free-standing 3210
Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 2 for remote systems console I/O.
Llmltetlon: Maximum distance from the console Is 75 feet.
Maximum: One. Cable Order: Required. Field Inatellatlon: Yes.
Prerequlaltea: Either a #7844 or #7855 and a #4951, 4952,
4953 or 4954. Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer
channel, but does not use a control unit pOSition. The standard
address for the Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard Is "01 E" if the
Primary Console Printer-Keyboard address is "01 P'. If the Primary
Console Printer-Keyboard address is "009", the standard address
for the Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard is "008". Also see
"Specify" for alternate address.
3215 ADAPTER (#7855).
To attach a 3215 Console PrinterKeyboard (85 cps) for systems console I/O ... includes alterdisplay ability. Position of the 3215 to the right or left of the
operator depends upon Console Table Extension (#9824 or
#9825) ... see "SpeCify" above. Limitation: Cannot be Installed
with 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter (#7844). Maximum: One. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte: Uses one address on the standard
byte multiplexer channel, but does not use a control unit position.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [Mdls H2. HG2, 12. IH2, J2.
J12. K2 only] To attach the Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to
a second channel ... the two channels may be on the same or
different CPUs. Switching Is under program control. The ISC feature In the 3145 can be dedicated to a single channel by means of
an Enable/Disable switch. Limitation: Cannot be installed on a
mdl FED. GE. GFD, H, HG or I. Maximum: .One. Field Inatallatlon:
Yes. Prerequlaltea: See "Prerequisites" under ISC (#4860).
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. Field Inatellatlon: Yes. Pr.requlaltea:
Clock Comparator and CPU Timer (#2001) and Floating Point
(#3910).
WORD BUFFER (#8810). Increases the data rate capability of
the selector channels on the 3145 from a maximum aggregate
data rate of 1.55 megabytes per second to 5.3 megabytes, and
the maximum single channel rate from 0.82 megabytes to 1.85
megabytes. When installed, applies to all selector channels. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte: This feature Is required to operate
3330 series drives when the system configuration includes an
Integrated File Adapter and two Selector Channels, or three or
more Selector Channels. It is also required whenever 3340. 3344
or 3350 seri.. drives are attached.
NOTE: Customers who may elect to purchase Control Store
Extension (#2150) and later upgrade to Expanded Control Store
(#2152) shoulD consider the purchase of Expanded Control
Store (#2152) initially because this fielD upgrade requires replacement of Control Store Extension (#2150) and Installation of
Expanded Control Store (#2152). The prerequisite of Control
Store Extension (#2150) for #9315 or #9317 can be satisfied
by Expanded Control Store (#2152).
"'ULTIPLEXeR SUBCHANNELS, ADD'L (#4951-4964).
To Increne the number of I/O devices on the multiplexer channel, the
number of aubchannels can be inoreased by specifying one of. the
foUowlnt: #4951 ~ for 32 ml.lltiplexer subchannels ... #4952 for Q4 ..• #4953 - for 128 •.. 01' #4954 - for 258., The mlUllmum
number of s.hared, subchannela 18 eight. When 256 multiplexer
Not to be re:prodl:lce:d
withQ,utwritt~n
pe:rmission.
._---------- ------- ----------_.-
M 3145.5
May 79
DP Machines
3145 Proce881ng Unit
Special Feature Prices:
(cont'd)
MAC/
MRC
TLP
MLC
4 Yr
Purch
MMMC
#1001
HC
HC
HC
Advance Cntrl Prgm Supp
APL Assist
1005
HC
HC
HC
Conditional Swapping
1051
HC
HC
HC
Block Multiplexer Channel
for all Selector Channels
1421
HC
HC
HC
1850
Channel-to-channel Adapter
$ 328 $ 297 $12,510 $13.00
114
104
5,485
3.00
Clk Comprtr & CPU Timer
2001"
8,350 10.00
2150"" 282t 238t
Control Store Extension
Expanded Control Store
2152"" 421t 383t
13,420 20.50
Direct Control
3274"
148
133
5,640
4.00
Emergency Power-off Control
3821
for 2 8wltches
HC
HC
HC
HC
for up to 12 switches
3822
HC
HC
NC
NC
3910
NC
NC
NC
Floating Point
4457
NC
NC
NC
1401/1440/1460 Compet
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7710
Compatibility
4458
NC
NC
NC
Integrated File Adapter
607
4850"
552
25,860 45.00
Integrated Storage Control
40,460 91.00
4660"" l,007t 915t
Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
4951
NC
32 8ubchannela
NC
NC
4952
NC
NC
NC
64 8ubchannels
NC
4953
NC
NC
1288ubchannels
4954
NC
NC
NC
258 aubchannela
Reglater Expan810n
882
4.00
8111* "
24t
22t
Selector Channel - 2nd
8982"
277
252
13,240 16.00
6983"
277
252
13,240 16.00
Selector Channel - 3rd
Selector Channel - 4th
8964"
277
252
13,240 18.00
3210 Model 1 Adapter
153
140
7,410
4.00
7844"
123
112
5,925
8.50
3210 Model 2 Adapter
7645"
215
198
10,360
8.50
3215 Adapter
7855"
8100
7,075 10.00
Two Channel Switch
205t 188t
Virtual Machine a88lat
8740
HC
NC
NC
"""
Word Buffer
247
225
11,760
8810"
8.50
t
MAC/MRC. TLP/MLC prices etTe<:tive lune 1, 1979.
• Feature supplies CPU diskette.
F cature supplies ISC diskette.
• •• CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $405 on purchased machines when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on
the same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ---= - =
--":' =
- --=-----
M 3145-3.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3145-3 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides a performance improvement for today's S/370
mdl 145 models H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 and K2 only.
Model
Processor Storage
A1"
A2"
A3*
A4*
A5"
A6"
A7"
196,608 Bytes of Processor Storage
327,680 Bytes of Processor Storage
458,752 Bytes of Processor Storage
720,896 Bytes of Processor Storage
983,040 Bytes of Processor Storage
1,507,328 Bytes of Processor Storage
2,031,616 Bytes of Processor Storage
NOTE 1: The 3145-3 is available as a non-removable, field
installable upgrade to a S/370 mdl 145 models. H2, HG2, 12,
IH2, J2, JI2 and K2.
NOTE 2: Up to 64K of main memory is removed during the
conversion to a 3145-3 resulting in the memory sizes as specified.
A complete systems assurance review/approval at the
branch office level is required before ordering.
Highlights: Depending on the model, up to 2,031,616 bytes of
processor storage are available. CPU cycle time varies from 180
to 270 nanoseconds depending upon the internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are provided.
Standard Features Include: Advanced Control Program Support ...
APL Assist ... Audible Alarm ... Byte Oriented Operand ... 1 Byte
Multiplexer Channel ... 64 Byte Multiplexer Subchannels ... 1
Block Multiplexer Channel ... 64 Block Multiplexer Subchannels ...
Channel Command Retry ... Channel Indirect Addressing ... Console File ... Control Registers ... Dynamic Address Translation .. .
Error Checking and Correction (in Main and Control Storage) .. .
Extended Control Mode ... Extended Control-Program Support .. .
Extended Precision ... Interval Timer ... Machine Check Handling
... Microprogram Instruction Retry ... OS/DOS Compatibility ...
Program Event Recording ... Storage Protection (Store and Fetch)
... S/370 Universal Instruction Set ... Time of Day Clock.
Control Storage: 131,072 bytes of Reloadable Control Storage
are provided in addition to main storage. This permits emulator
and control routines to function. The Reloadable Control Storage
is housed in the CPU and is loaded from the Console File which is
located beneath the operator's console. Reloadable Control Storage is not accessible to the user.
Virtual Storage: Virtual Storage capability is provided to increase
the effective utilization of main storage.
Console File (standard): This is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small file device
that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable
magnetic disks. The several disks that will be supplied with the
system will supply all of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems features, plus the optional features ordered for
the system.
Console Function: Operator communications with the system is
via a system control panel located on the 3145-3 and a 3210 mdl
1 or a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard as on other models of the
S/370 mdl 145. A remote 3210 mdl 2 may also be attached ...
see "Special Features."
Input/Output Channels:
Byte Multiplexer Channel - one is standard ... functionally
equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel of the S/370 mdls 145
... provides eight control unit positions ... in byte mode, permits
simultaneous operation of many low-speed devices ... in burst
mode, handles one high-speed unit.
Block Multiplexer Channels - one is standard ... 3 are available
as special features ... the Word Buffer feature applies to any
block multiplexer channels which are attached to the system ...
as described, each Block Multiplexer Channel approximates 1.85
megabytes/second ... ability to "Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency when using direct access storage devices
equipped with rotational position sensing ... devices on these
channels which cannot use block multiplexing will function as if
attached to selector channels.
Subchannels - on the byte multiplexer channel 64 subchannels
are provided as standard with the option of 128 or 256 (see
"Special Features") ... 64 block multiplexer subchannels (UCWs)
are provided as standard with the option of 128, 256, or 512
(see "Special Features") ... the number of block multiplexer
subchannels (UCWs) choosen will be shared by the number of
Block Multiplexer Channel(s) attached to the system.
Input/Output Attachment:
Non-native - a wide variety of I/O devices may be attached to
these models of the S/370 mdl 145 via the standard byte multiplexer channel, the standard block multiplexer channel, and/or
the optional block multiplexer channels. In particular, any I/O
device which is attachable to a 3145 is attachable to a 3145-3.
Native - The following integrated I/O attachments/adapters are
provided for controlling the designated I/O devices:
Conlole Printer-Keyboard (required) - the unit serves as the
online input/output device for operator/system communications.
It provides a means of manually entering data into the system,
altering data already in storage, and for printing error logout
messages.
Integrated Storage Control - this feature allows native attachment of 3333 Disk Storage and Control modules (with 3330
modules) and/or 3340 Disk Storage mdl A2s (with 3340 B mdls
and/or 3344s) and/or 3350 Disk Storage mdls A2/A2F (with
3350 B2/B2F, C2/C2F mdls). This feature requires an available control unit pOSition on a system channel.
Programming Features:
Advanced Control Program Support (standard) - provides four
additional instructions and an additional function ... Compare and
Swap ... Compare Double and Swap ... Insert PSW Key... Set
PSW Key from Address ... Clear I/O Function.
APL Assist (standard) - this feature is an APL emulator. It replaces functions performed by the APL software interpreter. This
feature can provide a performance improvement for many APL
applications when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1.
Extended Contr'ol Program Support (standard) - the 3145-3
processor models of the 8/370 mdl 145 include Extended
Control-Program Support. This is a hardware assist that reduces
the CPU time needed to execute certain frequently used supervisor functions in both VS-1 and VM/370.
The functional areas for VM/370 include:
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
Page Management
SVC Handler
Privileged Instruction Interfaces
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
For VS-1 the functional areas are:
Storage Management
lOS
SVC FLIH
System Trace
Page Management
PREREQUISITES: The following prerequisites apply to each 31453 processor model.
(1) 3047 Power Unit ... see 3047.
(2) Clock Comparator and CPU Timer Feature (#2001) ... see
3145 Processing Unit (Special Features).
(3) Word Buffer Feature (#8810) ... see 31 45 Proc~ssing Unit
(Special Features).
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 80 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[5] Additional Multiplexer Subchannels: 64 are standard ... if more
are required, see "Special Features."
[6] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Manual, Installation Information
Physical Planning, for requirements.
[7] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configuration" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required on a S/370 mdl
145.
[8] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interface for FE DAU to the telephone line.
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical
location can be serviced by a single FE DAU.
[9] Shipping Instructions: Unless
dimensions of the 3145 Frame
70" long x 60" high. Removal
the width to 29-1/2". If further
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
otherwise specified, shipping
01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
of the side covers will reduce
reduction in length is required,
-- -=..........
=-=
==
:-:. =
=:=
=::=:':'
M 3145-3.2
May 79
~-
=
DP Machines
31.45-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
specify #9692. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60" long x 60" high.
[10] Console Printer-Keyboard Address: Recorded on the console
file disk at the plant. #91011 for "01F", or #9102# for "009".
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Requires a
control unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Block multiplexing and rotational position sensing require one unshared
subchannel on the block multiplexer channel per logical device.
Specify: The available combinations of storage devices which can
be attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in
a vertical column Indicate the type of machlne(s) listed under
DASD Configuration which can be attached when the "Required
DASD Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and
the special features listed below being ordered for them, order the
Required DASD. Specify Feature(s).
[11] Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard Address: #9105# '"
allernate address of "009" for the Second Console PrinterKeyboard (3210 mdl 2). Address Is In lieu of the standard
Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard address of "01 E" when the
Primary Printer-Keyboard address is "01 F" . Recorded on the'
console file disk at the plant. PREREQUISITE: #9101, Primary
Console Printer-Keyboard Address "01 F".
Prices:
3145
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP
MLC
4 Vear
Purcha88
MMMC
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
$21,260 $19,335
23,170 21,080
24,560 22,350
27,350 24,890
30,140
27,430
36,230 32,975
41,810 38,055
$ 775,200
834,050
878,700
968,000
1,057,300
1,252,100
1,430,700
$1,360
1,485
[Note that #9190 Is 3340 Fixed Head Attachment for #9314 and
#9315, and is not specified for #9317 or #9138.]
ISC (#4660) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#8100').
..
1,600
1,810
DASD Configuration
2,030
2,445
2,870
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45% ttt Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes: Field Install able.
Planning for Model Conversions: When a customer requires
feature changes (except for one or both of the prerequisite features - Word Buffer #8810, and Clock Comparator and CPU Timer
#2001) and/or memory upgrades in addition to a model upgrade
to a 3145-3, consolidating the several changes into a single
is not recommended.
One or two 3333. with
" x
associated 3330s
Up tn four 3333s with
.SSOClated 3330s
String Switch (8150) on
anv 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2.
with a.sociated mdl B11B2
Up to four 3340 mdl A2,
with .s.oci.ted mal B1/B2
String Switch (8150) on
any 3340 mdl A2
Filled Head Feature
(4301/43021 on any 3340
Up to four 3:;40 Indl A2.
of which up to two mav
attac" 3344s
String Switch (8150) on
any 3340 mdl A2 and/or
Fixed Head Feature on
any 3340 (4301/4302)
33330 and 3340 mdl A2s
(any combinatir.~ of two,
three, or four) each with
c>
0
..,
M
M
M
c:>
0
~
M
M
...
...
c
0
M
M
M
M
9314~
>
0
~I
I
I
x
x
i
~
Head Feature
I! Fixed
:~30:143021 on any 3340
x
Up to four 3340 ,ndl A2.
...
of wh:ch
'- IUD
C A2Fs Vol assoCiated mdl
!S2s!B2Fs, C2!C2F
0
"~ :String Sw 181501 on any
M
13350 mdl A2!A2F,C2/C2F
_13333" 3340 mdl A2s and
I
I I
I
E
IString Sw 181501 on any
~ 113333, 3340 mdl A2, or
~ 3350 mdl A2/A2F,C2/C2F
M
!
I
I
""
(3 ;;: 13350 mdl A2s!A2Fs lany
~ M CC..,.,blfi3tion of 2. 3 or 4~
~ ~ ",-.. itn asscci;:tred drives
xl'
I
I
xx
I
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
I! j
! "
_
~
iI
X
i
(anv combinatir .., o'f two,
~
I
x x
String Switch (8150) on
any 3340 mdl A2 and/or
I Fixed Head Feature on
aoy 3340 (43C1/43021
13333. and 3340 mdl A2,
INTEGRATED 3203-4 PRINTER ATTACHMENT, SECOND PRINTER (#8076). Provides the capability to natively attach a second
3203 Printer mdl 4. Maximum: One. Flela Installation: Yes.
Specify: #9424f to allow unit address definition of the second
natively attached 3203 Printer mdl 4 from the display console
keyboard. Prerequisite: Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment,
First Printer (#8075).
J
I
I
to two may
3344.
i!
xx
I
I
!
"I
"I
I
I 1x\":
!
I,
and/or Fixed Head Fea
(4301/4302) On any 3340
I
t ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of ma'lU-
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111).
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage C;ontrol (#4660) to determine when required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 3203-4 PRINTER ATTACHMENT, FIRST PRINTER
(#8075).
Provides the capability to natively attach the 3203
Printer mdl 4. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Specify:
#9423* to allow unit address definition of the natively attached
3203 Printer mdl 4 from the display console keyboard.
I
xl.
I
number of shared subchannels is eight. When 256 multiplexer
subchannels are installed there are NO shared subchannels. Note:
The number of Multiplexer Subchannels does not affect the number of UCWs specified for the Block Multiplexer Channel(s). See
Block Multiplexer Subcha!1nels; Add'i (#1450) specify. Field
Installation: Yes .
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100).
To attach the Integrated
Storage Control (#4660) to a second channel. ... the two channels may be on the same or different CPUs. SWitching is under
program control. The ISC feature in the 3148 can be dedicated to
a single channel by means of an Enable/Disable switch.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See
"Prerequisites" under ISC (#4660).
Special feature Prices:
MRC
Blk Mplx Subchan Add'i #1450
NC
Channel-to-Chan Adptr
1850
$326
Control Store Extension 2150** 26Z'
Expanded Control Store 2152** 421'
Direct Control
146
3274*
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3621
NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
Ne
1401/1440/1480 Compat4457
NC
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility
4458
NC
Int Storage Control
4660** 1,007'
Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
128 subchannels
4953
NC
256 subchannels
4954
NC
Register Expansion
6111** 24'
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment,
First Printer
8075
180
Second Printer
8076
180
Two Channel Switch
8100
205"
MLC
4 yr
...
Purchase MMMC
NC
NC
$297 $12,510 $14.00
238'
8,350 11.00
383"
13,420 22.50
5,640
4.00
133
NC
NC
NC
NC
915"
NC
NC
•••
•••
NC
NC
NC
NC
40,460 101.00
NC
NC
2Z'
NC
NC
662
NC
NC
4.00
164
164
188'
4,750
4,750
7,075
30.00
30.00
11.00
facture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on same diskette.
• Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONLY
if the new cocfiguration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previilusly installed ANDremovaJ of any not
listed as required for the new confi[;uration.
Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, the ISC
requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the number of drives
attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configllrations in this group the ISC uses 64 contiguous
device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The 3340
mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340 mdl
Bls, B2s and/or 33448 in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl BI/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl BI or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the ISC uses 8 or 16 or 32
or 64 device addresses depending upon the DASD configuration installed
and whether any 3350 drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
NOTE: Customers who may elect to purchase Control Store Extension
(#2150) and later upgrade to Expanded Control Store (#2152) should consider
the purchase of Expanded Control Store (#2152) initially because this field
upgrade requires replacement of Control Store Extension (#2150) and installation of Expanded Control Store (#2152). The prerequisite of Control Store
Extension (#2150) for #9315 or #9317 can be satisfied by Expanded Control
Store (#2152).
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADD'L (#4953, 4954). To increase the number of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer channel,
the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of
the following: #4953 for 128, or #4954 for 256. The maximum
[reverse side is blank]
o MRC and MLC prices effective June I, 1979.
; CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. 5405 on purchased machines to include any
***
number of diskette-only changes ordered. on same diskette.
Fe.ture supplies CPU diskette.
Fe.turesupplies ISC diskette.
• •• CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $405 on purchased machines when combined with changes
subject to distribution fee to include any number of diskette--only changes ordered on
the same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - - ----- - - ----===':'=
M 3155.1
May 79
DP Machines
3155
PROCESSING
Storage(s), each 3155 also requires a 3210 Console PrinterKeyboard mdl 1 or a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard.
UNIT
[The 3155 is no longer available ... features and model changes
can be ordered on an "as available" basis.]
Purpose: Performs arithmetic, logic and control functions for a
S/370 mdl 155.
Each model of the 3155 has been designed for interconnected
operation with a specified number of 3360 Processor Storage
Units. Customers who wish to order the 3155 for use without the
specified number of 3360s should submit an RPQ to provide the
necessary safety elements (covers, connectors, etc.) and the
changes required for quality testing and installing.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Model H
Used with one 3360 mdl 1 in a S/370 mdl H155
(262,144 bytes).
Model HG
Used with one 3360 mdl 2 in a S/370 mdl HG155
(393,216 bytes).
Model I
Used with one 3360 mdl 3 in a S/370 mdl 1155
(524,288 bytes).
ModellH
Used with one 3360 mdl 1 and one 3360 mdl 3 in
a S/370 mdl IH155 (786,432 bytes).
[4] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Model J
Used with two 3360 mdl 3s in a S/370 mdl J155
(1,048,576 bytes).
[5]
Model JI
Used with three 3360 mdl 3s in a S/370 mdl
JI155 (1,572,864 bytes).
ModelK
Used with four 3360 mdl 3s in a S/370 mdl K155
(2,097,152 bytes).
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can attach up to
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage with a 2.1 microsecond
cycle time ... 16 byte parallel data flow ... includes 8,192 bytes of
60 nanosecond cycle buffer storage which is transparent to the
programmer and reduces the effective cycle time of processor
storage. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers
are implemeted in high speed internal circuits with a four byte data
flow. The 115 nanosecond cycle CPU and I/O functions are controlled by a 69 nanosecond access read-only storage.
Standard features include: universal instruction set ... 14 new
instructions ... interval timer ... time-of-day clock .. , store and
fetch protect ... byte oriented operand feature ... error checking
and correction code on main storage ... instruction retry ... channei retry ... one byte multiplexer channel... block multiplexer
channels number one and two.
Byte Multiplexer Channel - permits simultaneous operation of
many low-speed devices .. , can be operated in "burst" mode for
attachment of high-speed devices. For OS exclusion, refer to SRL
GC28-6554, Systeml360 Operating Systems System Generdtion.
Eight control unit positions are provided on the channel. The
number of subchannels depends upon processor storage size ...
ranges from 1 28 to 256 ... can be expanded on larger size processors to 512 by adding Second Byte Multiplexer Channel
(#4990) in lieu of Block Multiplexer Channel number 4. See
"Special Features."
Block Multiplexer Channels -- up to five ... first two are standard
... up to three more can be attached. See "Special Features."
Permits simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to
"Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency when using
direct access storage devices equipped with rotational position
sensing or buffered devices ... provides block multiplexing compatible with with the same function on the 2880 Block Multiplexer
Channel... operates as a conventional selector channel otherwise.
Model
Processor
Storage (bytes)
Byte Multiplexer
Subchannels
262,144
393,216
524,288
186,432
1,04&,576
1,572,864
2,097,152
128
192
256
256"
256··
256"
256"
96
160
224
252
480
480
480
Shared
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
• Can be increased to 384 by adding 2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel
(#4990).
,. Can be increased to 512 by adding 2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel
(#499O).
Console Function - a standard system control panel is located
on the 31 55. It has switches and lights necessary to operate and
control the system. A systems console I/O function is provided
by adding either a 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5
cps) or a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard (85 cps) mounted on
the console table reading board. One of these is required. See
"Special Features" for attachment features.
A 3210 Mdl 2 Adapter (#7845) can also be used to attach a
remote 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 2.
PREREQUISITES:
[2] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required .... see
"Special Features" below and S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning for requirements.
[6] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
155.
[7] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU,
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interlace for FE DAU to telephone line.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3155
H
HG
I
IH
J
JI
K
$21,180
21,210
21,240
21,750
21,810
23,600
24,170
In addition to appropriate 3360 Processor
Purchase
MMMC
$1,017,300
1,018,500
1,019,700
1,044,600
1,047,000
1,134,900
1,162,200
$1,675
1,675
1,675
1,690
1,690
1,740
1,745
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 55% Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Metering: Base Unit
Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From To
H
HG
I
IH
J
JI
HG
$1,200
IH
$2,400
1,200
$27,300
26,100
24,900
J
JI
K
$29,700 $117,600 $144,900
28,500 116,400 143,700
27,300 115,200 142,500
2,400
90,300 117,600
87,900 115,200
27,300
The model conversion prices above are applicable only when
the 31 55 is used with the combinations of 3360 Processor
Storages as indicated under "Models" above. Prices do not
include those of the required 3360(s).
Block Multiplexer
Subchannels
Non-shared
H
HG
I
IH
J
JI
K
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Each adds a
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1433-1435),
channel for attachment of I/O devices ... for devices ihat can be
attached see 8/370 in "Systems." The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are
provided on each channel. #1433 - for third block multiplexer
channel ... #1434 - for fourth ... #1435 - for fifth. Limitation:
#1434 cannot be installed if Second Byte Multiplexer Channel
(#4990) is installed. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
#1434 requires #1433 ... #1435 requires #1434 or #4990.
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (either S/360 or S/370). Only one of the processors
requires this feature. Uses one control unit position on each of the
connected channels. Function can be expanded under program
control so that the adapter will operate as a standard control unit.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct," and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One,
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
t
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FEDAU.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
-------- --===
-- ---- ------':' =
M 3155.2
May 79
DP Machines
3155 Processin9 Unit (co nt' d)
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
8/360 - Direct Control Feature - OEMI, SRL GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622). To provide,
in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room" or
"area" ... see Emergency Power-Off under S/370 in "Systems."
#3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off switches ...
#3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency power-off
switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF PANEL EXPANSION (#3625).
The
basic S/370 mdl 155 provides for EPa control for up to 16 control units. When single mdl 155 configurations exceed this limit,
Emergency Power-Off Panel Expansion (#3625) should be ordered. Each #3625 attaches up to four additional EPa terminations. Maximum: Five. Where assistance is needed in determining
requirements, consult with Installation Planning Representatives.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
Provides
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadecimal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended precision operands
may also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may
be rounded to short-precision format. limitation: Cannot be installed with 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117). Field Installation:
Yes.
1401/40/60, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#3950).
Provides
the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440! 1460 and
1410/7010 instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations ... see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for as. Field Installation: Yes.
SECOND BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#4990). [Models IH,
J, JI, K) Provides the same function as the standard multiplexer
channel ... increases the number of subchannels to 384 on mdl IH,
and to 512 on mdls J, JI and K. Takes the place of block multiplexer channel number four. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Block Multiplexer Channel No.4 (#1434). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel No.3 (# 1433).
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Block Multiplexer Channel
third
#1433 $ 429 $14,970
fOurth
1434
400
13,930
fifth
1435
199
7,005
Channel-to-channel Adapter
1850
400 13,930
Direct Control
3274
114
3,425
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
NC
NC
Emergency Power-Off
Panel Expansion
3625
NC
NC
Extnd Precision Flt9 Point
9,615
3700
199
1401/40/60/1410/7010 Cmpt 3950
457
18,290
2nd Byte Multiplxr Channel
4990
429
14,970
OS/DOS Compatibility
5450
285 11,430
7070/7074 Compatibility
7117 1,025 49,390
3210 Mdl 1 Adapter
7844
171
8,240
3210 Mdt 2 Adapter
7845
193
9,315
3215 Adapter
7855
228
10,910
$12.00
9.00
4.50
8.00
4.00
NC
NC
NC
16.00
16.00
12.00
16,00
58.50
8.00
8.00
8.00
Dynamic Address Translation (Purchased Models H, HG, I, IH, J,
JI and K)
Purchased installed model 155s may be field converted to 155-11
through installation of the Dvnamic Address Translation Facility.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement
letters for purchase MESs must state: "Installation of model
change to the 'II' Model involves the removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
OS/DOS COMPATIBILITY (#5450). Provides the sytem with the
ability to execute DOS programs unde~. specific conditions ... see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Extended Precision Floating Point (#3700). Field Installation:
Yes.
3210 MOL 1 ADAPTER (#7844).
To attach a 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) for system con30le I/O ...
includes an alter-display ability. Position of the unit to the right or
left of the operator depends upon the Console Table Extension
(#9824 or #9825) ... see "Specify." Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3215 Adapter (#7855). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard
byte multiplexer channel but does not use a control unit position.
3210 MOL 2 ADAPTER (#7845). To attach a free-standing 3210
Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 2, for remote system console I/O.
Limitation: Maximum distance from the console is 75 feet.
Maximum: One. Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Either a 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter (#7844) or a 3215
Adapter (#7855) ... uses one control unit position on a byte or
block multiplexer channel.
3215 ADAPTER (#7855).
To attach a 3215 Console PrinterKeyboard (85 cps) for system console I/O ... includes alter-display
ability. Position of the unit to the right or left of the operator
depends upon the Console Table Extension (#9824 or #9825) ...
see "Specify." Limitation: Cannot be Installed with 3210 Mdl 1
Adapter (#7844).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer
channel but does not use a control unit position.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - - -- -------------_
- --.-
M 3158.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3158 PROCESSING UNIT
multiprocessor system. The 3058 Multisystem Unit is required for
each one or two processor MP system.
Purpose: Performs arithmetic, logic, processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 158.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Bytes of Processor Storage
Models
I
J
JI
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
AP1
AP2
AP3
AP4
AP5
AP6
AP7
AP8
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
524,288
1,048,576
1,572,864
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242,880
6,291,456
Highlights: Depending upon the model contains up to 6,291,456
bytes of monolithic processor storage with a cycle time of 1 ,035
nanoseconds for a 16-byte read, of 690 ns for an 8-byte write,
920 ns for a write of 1 to 7 bytes, and 920 ns for a write of 9 to
16 bytes ... 16 byte parallel data flow ... includes 8,192 bytes of
buffer storage which is transparent to the programmer and reduces the effective cycle time of processor storage. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are implemented in
high speed internal circuits with a four byte data flow. The 115
nanosecond cycle CPU and I/O functions are controlled by reloadable control storage. An optional integrated storage controls feature allows direct attachment of 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 direct
access storage devices. Attached processing is provided by attachment of a 3052 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
Standard features include: S/370 universal instruction set ...
interval timer ... store and fetch protect ... byte oriented operand
feature ... error checking and correction code on main storage ...
instruction retry ... channel retry ... one byte multiplexer channel
... block multiplexer channels number one and two ... dynamic
address translation ... extended control mode ... program event
recording ... time-of-day clock with clock comparator ... CPU timer
... channel indirect addressing function for channels ... compare
and swap ... compare double and swap ... insert PSW key... set
PSW key from address ... clear I/O. Four additional instructions
on MP models -- signal processor ... set prefix ... store prefix
store CPU address.
Byte Multiplexer Channel: Permits simultaneous operation of
many low-speed devices. Can be operated in "burst" mode for
attachment of high-speed devices. For as exclusion, refer to SRL
GC28-6554, OS System Generation, ... for OS/VS exclusion, refer
to SRL GC26-3791, OS/VSl System Generation, and SRL GC263792, OS/VS2 System Generation. Eight control unit positions are
provided on the channel.
[3] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[5]
Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-7004 for details. If two processors are installed and the 3052 is to be added and emergency power off
ability is required on the systems, then the expanded Emergency Power Off Control (#3622) should be ordered for the host
processor.
[6] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
158.
[7] RETAIN/370: Provided by integrated data adapter which is
standard on the console. Customers must orovide interface to
telephone line.
[8] CPU Position: #9441 for left CPU in MP configuration, or
#9442 for right.
[9] Processor Attach Feature: When one processor is combined
with another in a multiprocessor system, each processor must
contain sufficient Storage Protect capability for the total storage in the system. Therefore, each processor must add additional Storage Protect capability to reflect the storage in the
remote processor. The first megabyte of Storage Protect capability for the remote processor is included in the fv'IP1 and MP2
Processor. One Processor Attach feature is required in an MP
processor for each additional megabyte, beyond the first megabyte in the remote processor. See "Special Features."
PRICES: Mdl
3158
Block Multiplexer Channels: Up to five ... first two are standard
... up to three more can be attached. See "Special Features."
Permits simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to
"Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency when using
direct access storage devices equipped with rotational position
sensing or buffered devices ... provides block multiplexing compatible with the same function on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel
... operates as a conventional selector channel otherwise.
Subchannels: 256 non-shared subchannels or 120 non-shared
and 8 shared subchannels on 1st Byte Multiplexer Channel ... 256
unshared or 120 non-shared and 8 shared subchannels on 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel... 16 shared subchannels on Block
Multiplexer Channels ... 480 unshared subchannels on Block
Multiplexer Channels.
Console Function: A Display Console is standard ... includes light
pen, keyboard, cathode ray tube, two console files and control
store ... functions as a manual console for IPL, reset, etc., as an
operator's console to communicate with the operating system, an
indicator display console, and as a diagnostic console for maintenance ... optional attachment for a 3213 Printer (85 cps) for hard
copy output. CRT has twenty-five 80-character lines of infor"Tlation;
as a system console, the last line displays machine status. Optional attachment for a 3056 Remote System Console for console
operation from an additional keyboard and cathode ray tube up to
150 feet from the processor.
I
J
JI
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
APl
AP2
AP3
AP4
AP5
AP6
AP7
AP8
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
$38,120 $34,660
39,640
36,045
41,160
37,430
42,680
38,815
42,055
46,240
49,280
44,825
47,595
52,320
55,360
SO,365
39,750
36,140
41,270
37,525
42,790
38,910
44,310
40,295
47,870
43,535
50,910
46,305
49,075
53,950
56,990
51,845
41,740
37,9SO
43,260
39,335
44,780
40,720
46,300
42,105
49,860
45,345
52,900
48,115
$1,295,200
1.332,700
1,370,200
1,407,700
1,497,700
1,572,700
1,647,700
1,722,700
1,344,200
1,381,700
1,419,200
1,456,700
1,546,700
1,621,700
1,696,700
1,771,700
1,423,200
1,460,700
1,498,200
1,535,700
1,625,700
1,700,700
MMMC
The Display Console replaces the conventional indicators and
switches with displays, and diagnostics can be loaded under light
pen control from one of the console files.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
()•• e·
$2,315~~,~1
2,385
2,455
2,525
2,735
2,875
3,015 ') , \
3,155 ::-."
2,715
2,785
2,855
2,925
3,135
3,275
3,415
3,555
2,385
2,455
2,525
2,595
2,805
2,945
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
In "Printer-Keyboard" mode, the Display Console uses the keyboard for input and CRT and mandatory 3213 for output. It appears to the system as a 3215, and is supported by DOS,
DOS/VS, OS/360, OS/VS and VM/370. In "Display" mode, the
keyboard and light pen are used for input, the CRT for output, and
DIDOCS support or equivalent is required. The 3213 (optional) has
a separate address and requires MCS support or equivalent.
PREREQUISITES: Each AP system requires (1) a 3158 A series
processing unit, (2) a 3052 APU mdl 1, (3) a 3056 Remote System Console mdl 1. Identical MP CPU models are required for a
Purchase
--------- --- -- ------===
--=
M 3158.2
Jul79
~
DP Machines
3158 Processing Unit (conl'd)
Model Changes: Field Installable.
required. NOTE: When #7220 IS ordered. #2150 is prerequisite.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3158 to 3158 MODEL CONVERSION PURCHASE PRICES
3158 to 3158 MP
3158 to 3158AP
3158AP to 3158MP
$128,000
$ 49,000
$ 79,000
(no change in memory size)
(no change in memory size)
(no change in memory size)
3158 to 3158 MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES
From To
I
J
KJ
L
LJ
LK
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
From To
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
AP1
AP2
AP3
AP4
AP5
AP6
AP7
K
$37,500
J
JI
K
KJ
L
LJ
~rom
JI
$37,500
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
$37,500
$37,500
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
To
AP2
AP3
AP4
AP5
AP6
AP7
AP8
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify"
under Integrated StoragEl Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion
(#6111).
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152) Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the ICS (#4650).
Required if 3350 DASD is attached to an ISC/SA (#7220).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Register
Expansion (#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151) and Staging
Adapter for ISC (#7220).
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct," and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/370-Direct Control Feature-OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area"
see Emergency Power-Off under S/370 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
$37,500
$37,500
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
Notes:
1. There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2. The above model conversions and model upgrades are field
installable.
3. Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When a
customer requires storage upgrades in addition to a model
conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into a single
Also, storage upgrades for storage above two megabytes
should be ordered individually in one megabyte increments.
4. When
an MP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for the
remote processor should be ordered.
5. When
an AP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for the
3052 APU should be ordered.
6. When
an upgrade to an MP system is submitted,
the proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for
the remote processor must be ordered.
7. 3158 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are converted to an AP model. require System/370 Extended, Add'i
(#7731) on the AP model processing unit.
8. 3158 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are converted to an MP model require System/370 Extended (#7730)
and System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731) on both processing
units.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1433-1435).
Each adds a
channel for attachment of I/O devices ... for devices that can be
attached see S/370 in "Systems." The channel permits overlapped 1/0 operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are
provided on each channel. Channel Indirect Actdressing is included in each channel. #1433 -- for third block multiplexer channel
... #1434 -- for fourth ... #1435 -- for fifth. Limitation: #1434
cannot be installed if 2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (#4990) is
installed. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: #1434 requires
#1433 ... #1435 requires #1434 or #4990.
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one
of the processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit
position on each of the connected channels. Function can be
expanded under program control so that the adapter will operate
as a standard control unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF PANEL EXPANSION (#3625).
The
basic S/370 mdl 158 provides for EPO control for up to 16 control units. When single mdl 158 configurations exceed this limit,
#3625 should be ordered. Each #3625 attaches up to four additional EPO terminations. Maximum: Five. .
Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
Provides
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadecimal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended precision operands may
also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may be
rounded to short-precision format. This function is also included in
and enabled by the OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program
Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#3950).
Provides the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440/1460 and
1410/7010 instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations ... see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for OS. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'i
(#7731), or with OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOT ordered. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2 or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs
and/or a mdl c to the 3350 mdl A2/A2F ... see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 "Machines"
pages. The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths
with up to 16 drives per path ... up to 32 drives per path when
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a
control unit pOSition on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The
following applies only when Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is
NOT ordered:
The ·available combinations of storage devices which can be
attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
required DASD Specify Feature(s). Note: The selected "Required
DASD Specify Feature{s)" applies to both ISC paths. Within this
constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path may be dif"
ferent from that on the other ISC path.
ISC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) in NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
/
\,
-------- - - --==--- ---=--':' =
M 3158.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3158 Processing Unit (conI' d)
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
-
R-uired DASD SlIOtily F••t.....
DASD CONFIGURATION
On... two 3333. with
~ associated 3330.
c
o -U-p to to.. )))). with
~ associated 3330s
.... String Switch'8150 on
... 3333
9313 9314 .9314t
9190t
t
t
. ~~~ ~'~':i;t!:~~~~~"
0
.430114302 on any 3340
Up to 10.. 3340 mell A2.
::
....
....
.......~
....
xx
(any coniJination of two, three
..... '"
~!
"''"
.
5
0
",
x
x x
x
x
x
x
or four) each with associated
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). IMP models only] To
attach the Two Channel Switch for ISC (#7905) to the configuration control panel on the 3058 Multisystem Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370
Extended, Add'i (#7731), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with
OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
x
I:~~:s~:!~;~~,n;t~
0
",'"
..... 11
x~
as :'¥~~~f02H:.,act::;t;:o
3333, 3340 mdl A2, ...
3350 mdl A2/A2F; C21C2F
'"
t
•
+
++
1
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111).
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
x x
::: I~5& :li~~;::rC2';{F
3333s, 3340 mdl A2s ..d
... 3350
mdl A2s/A2F. e..y
conti_Ilion 01 2, 3 ... 41
'"S:. with
...ocilled drl.e.
~:; : String Switch .8150 on any
o
POWER WARNING (#5760). Provides signal to the 3158 system
when power is outside specified limits. Prerequisites: All models
require customer supplied uninterruptable power supply with line
sensor. MP models also require special cable -Field Installation: Yes.
attach 3344 •
String Switch '81 SI) on
.. y ~340 mell A2 and!...
Fixed Head F.ature
'430ii4302 on .. y 3340
13333 ...d 3340 mell A~.
drives
String Switch '81501 on
.. y 3333 ... 3340 mell A2
Fixed Head Fell....
'430ii4302 on "Y 3340
Up to "'.. 3350 mell A2./
1/2,1
1-1/2, 2
3
Quantity of Processor
Attach Features
(Required)
2
3
4
5
5
6
Field Installation: Yes. Corequisite: MP Model.
of which up to two may
0-
...",'"
......."
. ..
Remote Processor
Storage Size
(megabytes)
4
Up to lOUr 3340 mell A2.
with a••ociated mell B1Jii2.
... ~i3~~:t~;50 on
....
.... Fixed Head Feature
*
9315t 9317 9318
t
t
9190t
xx
....
e0
**
9315
t
PROCESSOR ATTACH (#5552).
IMP mdls only] One is reQuired for each megabyte of storage over one megabyte in the
remote processor of an MP system.
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on same
diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6\ II) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340
",dl 8 I, 82s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl 81/82s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl 8 I or 82.
Expanded Control Store (#2151) and Control Store Extension (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
upon the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
SECOND BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#4990). Provides the
same function as the standard multiplexer channel ... contains
Channel Indirect Data Addressing. Takes the place of Block Multiplexer Channel No.4. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Block
Multiplexer Channel No. 4 (#1434). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Bloc!c. Multiplexer Channel No.3 (#1433).
OS/OOS COMPATIBILITY (#5450). Provides the system with the
ability to execute DOS programs under specific conditions ... see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), or with OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control
Program Support) (#8750).
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
3333's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on each path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes .. ,
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190,9313,9314,9315,9317,9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls. (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(#2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequisites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: i;leQuired, together with System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), on each processor in· an MP system and on
the A-series processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended
(#7730) is also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in
an AP system. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL
time, concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with OS/VSl
ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED, ADO'L (#7731). Provides S/370
Extended facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended
(#7730), on each processor in an MP system, and on the A-series
processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended (#7730) is
also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in an AP
system. Limitation: This feature cannot be· loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility
(#3950), OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with OS/VS1
ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
3056 REMOTE CONSOLE ATTACHMENT (#7820).
Provides
attachment to the Display Console of an optional console up to
150 feet away. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ------= =- =
':' =
3158
3213
er to
Field
M 3158.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
Processing Unit
(cont'd)
PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#7840). To attach a 3213 Printthe Display Console for optional hard copy. Maximum: One.
Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905). To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/360 mdl 195 and
8/370 mdls 165, 168, 195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
For S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158,
3031, 3032 or 3033, see 3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3,
3148 3155, 3158, 3031, 3032, 3033 respectively. For 4300
Processors, see 4341.
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. This function is also included in and
enabled by the OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: This feature
cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/7074
Compatibility (#7117), System/370 Extended (#7730), or with
System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731).
OS/VS1 ECPS (EXTENDED CONTROL PROGRAM SUPPORT)
(#8750).
Provides assist to OS/VS1 by emulation of certain
supervisor functions. This feature also includes and enables Virtual
Machine Assist and Extended Precision Floating Point functions.
Prerequisite Feature must be selected at system generation on
OS/VS1 Release 6 or subsequent releases. Limitations: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), as/DOS
Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117), or in
Multiprocessing Mode. Field Installation: Yes.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
Block Multiplexer Channel
- 3rd
- 4th
- 5th'
Channel-lo-channel Adptr
ISC Control Store Extens
Expanded Control Store
ISC/SA Control Store Add'i
Direct Control
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
tor up to twelve switches
Emerg Power-Off Panel Exp
Extnd Precision Floatin9 PI
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility
Integrated Storage Controls
2nd Byte Multiplexr Channl
OS/DOS Compatibility
Processor Attach
Power Warning
Register Expansion
Remote Switch Attachment
7070/7074 Compatibility
Staging Adapter for ISC
System/370 Extended
System/370 Extd, Add'i
3055 Remote Consol Attch
3213 Printe, Attachment
Two Channel Sw for ISC
Vi,tual Machine Assist
OS/VS1 Extended Control
Program Support
#1433
1434
1435
1850
2150t
2151't
2152t
3274
3621
3622
3625
3700
3950
4650t
4990
5450
5552
5760
6111
6148
7117
7220't
7730
7731
7820
7840
7905
8740
8750
$ 463
432
215
432
526
318
318
123
MMMC
$ 421 $16,160 $14.00
393 15,040 11.00
7,565
5.00
196
393 15,040
9.00
478 21,060 23.00
289 12,720 23.00
289 12,720 23.00
112
3,705
4.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1,920
463
NC
gO
142
47
NC
NC
2,065
715
220
51
114
351
NC
NC
1,745
421
NC
82
130
43
NC
NC
1,875
650
200
47
104
319
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
77,600 258.00
16,160 14.00
NC
NC
2,700 15.00
1.00
5,725
8.50
1,330
NC
NC
NC
NC
83,200 245.00
13,000
4.00
4,000
2.00
2,545
4.00
5,545
1.00
14,220 23.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters tor purchase
~ust state: "Installation of thiS
feature involves removal of parts which become the property of
IBM."
t
Feature
~uprlh~'i
ISC diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- -- -------------_.-
M 3158-3.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3158-3 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Performs arithmetic. logic, processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 158.
Bytes of Processor Storage
Models
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U~7
U38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
524,288
1,048,576
1,572,864
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242.880
6,291,456
Highlights: Depending upon the model contains up to 6,291,456
bytes of monolithic processor storage with a cycle time of 1035
nanoseconds for a o6-byte read, of 690 ns for an 8-byte write,
920 ns for a write of 1 to 7 bytes, and 920 ns for a write of 9 to
16 bytes ... 16 byte parallel data flow ... includes 16,384 bytes of
buffer storage which is transparent to the programmer and reduces the effective cycle time of processor storage. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are implemented in
high speed internal circuits with a four byte data flow. The 115
nanosecond cy-:le CPU and I/O functions are controlled by reloadable control storage. An optional integrated storage control feature
allows direct attachment of 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 direct access
storage devices. 128 word instruction buffer, improved instruction
execution times over the 3158, increased block multiplexer subchannel pool over the 3158. Asymmetric multiprocessor storage.
Alternate CPU power down while all storage is left available to the
other processor (MP models only). Attached Processing is available by attachment of a 3052 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
Standard features include: S/370 universal instruction set ...
interval timer ... store and fetch protect ... byte oriented operand
feature ... error checking and correction code on main storage ...
instruction retry ... channel retry... one byte multiplexer channel
... block multiplexer channels number one and two ... dynamic
address translation ... extended control mode ... program event
recording ... time-of-day clock with clock comparator ... CPU timer
... channel indirect addressing function for channels '" compare
and swap ... compare double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set
PSW key from address ... clear I/O. Four additional instructions
on M models -- signal processor ... set prefix ... store prefix ...
store CPU address.
Byte Multiplexer Channel: Permits simultaneous operation of
many low-speed devices. Can be operated in "burst" mode for
attachment of high-speed devices. For OS exclusion, refer to SRL
GC28-6554, OS System Generation, ... for OS/VS exclusion, refer
to SRL GC26-3791, OS/VS1 System Generation, and SRL GC263792, OS/VS2 System Generation. Eight control unit positions are
provided on the channel.
Block M\lltiplexer Channels: Up to five ... first two are standard
... up to three more can be attached. Sec "Special Features."
Permits simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to
"Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency when using
direct access storage devices equipped with rotational position
sensing or buffered devices ... provides block multiplexing compatible with the same function on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel
... operates as a conventional selector channel otherwise.
Subchannels: In a 31 58-3, byte multiplexer channel 0 or 4 may
have 256 non-shared subchannels less 16 or 32 for each shared
subchannel. A 3158-3 block multiplexer channel may have 40
shared subchannels when the second byte multiplexer channel is
not installed. When the second byte multiplexer channel is installed, the block multiplexer channel may have 32 shared subchannels. The block multiplexer channel may have 736 nonshared
subchannels when the second byte multiplexer channel is not
installed on the 3158-3 and 480 nonshared subchannels when the
second byte multiplexer channel is installed.
Console Function: A Display Console is standard ... includes light
pen, keyboard, cathode ray tube, two console files and control
store ... functions as a manual console for IPL, reset, etc., as an
operator's console to communicate with the operating system, an
indicator display console, and as a diagnostic console for maintenance ... optional attachment for a 3213 Printer (85 cps) for hard
copy output. CRT has twenty-five 80-character lines of information;
as a system console, the last line displays machine status. Optional attachment for a 3056 Remote System Console for console
operation from an additional keyboard and cathode ray tube up to
150 feet from the processor.
The Display Console replaces the conventional indicators and
switches with displays, and diagnostics can be loaded under
lightpen control from one of the console files.
PREREQUISITES: Each AP system requires (1) a 3158-3 A series
processing unit ... (2) a 3052 APU mdl 1 ... (3) a 3056 Remote
System Console mdl 1. Identical MP CPU models are not required
for a multiprocessor system. 3158 and 3158-3 models may be
intermixed. However, when mixtures occur asymmetric MP storage
is not an option. In addition, alternate CPU power down does not
function. Asymmetric MP storage configuration options are available in the 3158-3 models with 1, 2, 3 or 4 megabytes of storage
in each processor. The 3058 Multisystem Unit is required for each
one or two processor MP system.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz):
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
#9903 for
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension
to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[5]
Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual Planning, If two processors are installed and the 3052
added and emergency power off ability is required on
tems, then the expanded Emergency Power Off
(#3622) should be ordered.
... see
Physical
is to be
the sysControl
[6] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
158.
[7] RETAIN/370: Provided by integrated data adapter which is
standard on the console. Customers must provide interface to
telephone line.
[8] CPU Position: #9441 tor left CPU in MP configuration. or
#9442 for right.
[9] Remote MP Processor: Asymmetric MP storage providesasymmetric multiprocessor storage on the 3158-3 with the use of
the appropriate optional specify feature to specify the model of
the remote processor. The 3158-3 multiprocessor may have
asymmetric model combinations of M32, M34, M35 and M36.
With this feature, symmetric model combinations are standard.
For asymmetric combinations specify: Remote Processor
#9001 for 1 megabyte '" #9002 for 2 megabytes ... #9003
for 3 megabytes ... #9004 for 4 megabytes ... #9005 for 5
megabytes ... #9006 for 6 megabytes. Field Installation: Yes.
[10] Processor Attach Feature: When one processor is combined
with another in a multiprocessor system. each processor must
contain sufficient Storage Protect capability for the total storage in the system. Therefore, each processor must add additional Storage Protect capability to reflect the storage in the
remote processor. The first megabyte of Storage Protect for
the remote processor is included in the M31 and M32 Processors. One Processor Attach feature is required in an MP
processor for each additional megabyte, beyond the first megabyte in the remote processor. See "Special Features."
MAC/
MRC
PRICES:
Mdl
3158
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
$42,280
43,800
45,320
46,840
50,400
53,440
56,480
59,520
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
43,910
45,430
46,950
48,47ll
52,030
55,070
58,110
61,150
In "Printer-Keyboard" mode. the Display Console uses the keyboard for input and CRT and mandatory 3213 for output. It appears to the system as a 3215, and is supported by DOS.
DOS/VS, OS/360, OS/VS and VM/370. In "Display" mode, the
keyboard and light pen are used for input, the CRT for output, and
DIDOCS support or equivalent is required. The 3213 (optional) has
a separate address and requires MCS support or equivalent.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
Purchase
MMMC
$38,440 $1,381,100$2,360
39,825
1,418,600 2,430
41,210
1,456,100 2,500
42,595
1,493,600 2,570
45,835
1,583,600 2,780
48,605
1,658,600 2,920
51,375
1,733,600 3,060
54,145
1,808,600 3,200
39,920
1,430,100 2,760
41,305
1,467,600 2,830
42,690
1,505,100 2,900
44,075
1,542,600 2,970
47,315
1,632,600 3,180
50,085
1,707,600 3,320
52,855
1,782,600 3,460
55,625
1,857,600 3,600
- -- ---------=- =-- --=----':' =
M 3158-3.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3158-3 Processing Unit (conl'd)
41,730
43,115
44,500
45,885
49,125
51,895
54,665
57,435
45,900
47,420
48,940
50,460
54,020
57,060
60,100
63,140
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
1,509,100
1,546,600
1,584,100
1,621,600
1,711,600
1,786,600
1,861,600
1,936,600
(#7730) and System/370 Extended, .Add'i (#7731) on both
processing units.
2,430
2,500
2,570
2,640
2,850
2,990
3,130
3,270
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1433-1435).
Each adds a
channel for attachment of I/O devices ... for devices that can be
attached see S/370 in "Systems." The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are
provided on each channel. Channel Indirect Addressing is included in each channel. # 1433 -- for third block multiplexer channel
.. , #1434 -- for fourth ... #1435 -- for fifth. Limitation: #1434
cannot be installed if 2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (#4990) is
installed. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: # 1434 requires
#1433 ... #1435 requires #1434 or #4990.
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one
of the processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit
position on each of the connected channels. Function can be
expanded under program control so that the adapter will operate
as a standard control unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
3158 to 3158-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3158 to 3158-U3
3158-AP to 3158-A3
3158-MP to 3158-M3
$85,900 (No change in storage size)
$85,900 (No change in storage size)
$85,900 (No change in storage size)
ISC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) in NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
required. NOTE: When #7220 IS ordered, #2150 is prerequisite.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3158-3 to 3158-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3158-U3 to 3158-M3
3158-U3 to 3158-A3
3158-A3 to 3158-M3
$128,000 (No change In storage size)
$ 49,000 (No change in storage size)
$ 79,000 (No change in storage size)
3158-3 to 3158-3 Model UPGRADE Purchase Prices
From To U32
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U35
U36
U37
U38
537,500
$37,500
590,000
575,000
575,000
575,000
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
537,500
537,500
537,500
590,000
575,000
575,000
$75,000
From To A32
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
U34
$37,500
From To M32
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
U33
A33
A34
A3S
A36
A37
A38
537,500
537,500
537,500
590,000
575,000
575,000
575,000
NOTES:
1.
There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2.
The above model conversion and model upgrades are field
installable.
3.
Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When
a customer requires storage upgrades in addition to a model
conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into a
Also, storage upgrades for storage above two
single
megabytes should be ordered in one megabyte increments.
4.
5.
When
an MP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) in the
remote processor should be ordered.
When
an AP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for the
,3052 APU should be ordered.
6.
Field change from 3158-3 to 3158 is not recommended.
7.
When
an upgrade to an MP System is submitted,
the proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for
the remote processor must be ordered.
8.
3158-3 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are
converted to an AP model require System/370 Extended,
Add'i (#7731) on the AP model processing unit.
9.
3158-3 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are
converted to an MP model require System/370 Extended
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion
(#6111).
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152). Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the I SC (#4650) ..
Required if 3350 DASD is attached to an ISC/SA (#7220).
Maximum: One Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Register
Expansion (#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151), and Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220).
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct," and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/370-Direct Control Feature-OEM/, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area"
see Emergency Power-Off under S/370 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF PANEL EXPANSION (#3625).
The
basic S /370 mdl 158 provides for EPO control for up to 16 control units. When single mdl 158 configurations exceed this limit,
#3625 should be ordered. Each #3625 attaches up to four additional EPO terminations. Maximum: Five. Where assistance is
needed in determining requirements, consult Installation Planning
Representatives. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
Provides
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadecimal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended precision operands may
also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may be
rounded to short-precision format. This function is also included in
and enabled by the OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program
Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#3950).
Provides the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440/1460 and
1410/7010 instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations ... see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for OS. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: This
feature cannot be. loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'i
(#7731), or with OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program Support)(#8750).
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOTordered .. Additional storage is provided byattaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2, or by attaching 3350 mdl. Bs
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Pian (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ------_.--- -----------------
M 3158-3.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3158-3 Processing Unit
(cont"d)
and/or a mdl C to the 3350 mdl A2/A2F ... see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 "Machines"
pages. The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths
with up to 16 drives per path ... up to 32 drives per path when
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a
control unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The
following applies only when Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is
NOT ordered:
The available combinations of storage devices which can be
attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
required DASD Specify Feature(s). Note: The selected "Required
DASD Specify Feature(s)" applies to both ISC paths. Within this
constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path may be different from that on the other ISC path.
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
.
One or two 33335 with
associated 3330s
Up to our, ~~~~s with
associated 33305
String Switch'8150 on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2s
with associated mdl B 11B2s
~ Up to four 3340 mdl A2.
0
with associated mdl B1Llt2s
c0
19313 9314 .9314\
91901
t
t
..
...
...
0
'"'"
..
.'"'"'"
!:~i3~~i:t:i50 on
Fixed Head Feature
.430114302 on any 3340
9315
9315\
91901
..
t
9317 9318
t
t
x
xx
'"'"
'"'"
X
x
xx
x
x
x
x x
of which up to two may
attach 3344s
x
'" :!~gt/~~ci2e~",:.y 3340
1 3333s and 3340 !"'II A2s
....
","
",,,,
,,,,
(any tormination of two, three
or four) each With associated
drives
"'-
String Switch .8150> on
",0
..,.5 any 3333 Of 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Feature
.4301 4302 on anl3340
~ Up to rour 3350 mdl A2./
'"
xx
x
x
x
x
~ 1:~~:S;;:~~~~~~2";'!
;m ~lit~~;:i~.Oco;;'iF
on
..
3333s, 33~0 mdl A2s and
3350 mdl A2./A2Fs (any
con'bination of 2, :3 or 4)
'"' with associated drives
"'SWitch .8.~~~ on any
"'" I String
3333, 3340 mdl A2, or
"''''
~"S
3350
mdl
A2/A2F; C2!C2F
~.s
and/or Fixed Head Feature
'"'" .430114302 on any 3340
x~
0.,
t
•
+
1/2, 1
1-1/2, 2
3
4
0
1
2
3
5
6
4
5
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117).
Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation:
Yes, Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370
Extended, Add'l (#7731), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with
OS/VS1 (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
~1
0
Quantity of Processor
Attach Features
(Required)
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [M models only) To
attach the Two Channel Switch for ISC (#7905) 10 the configuration control panel on the 3058 Multisystem Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
Strini) SWitch "8150 on
any 3340 mdl A2 and;",
o~
PROCESSOR ATTACH (#5552).
[MP mdls only)
One is required for each megabyte of storage over one megabyte in the
remote processor of an MP system.
Register Expansion (#6111).
Provides additional registers for
microprgram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated
Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One .
x
f Up to"our 3340 mdl A2s
C>
OS/DOS COMPATIBILITY (#5450). Provides the system with the
ability to execute DOS programs under specific conditions ... see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL lime, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), or with OSIVS1 ECPS (Extended Control
Program Support) (#8750).
POWER WARNING (#5760). Provides signal to the 3158/31583 system when power is outside specified limits. Prerequisites: All
models require customer supplied uninterruptable power supply
with line sensor. MP models also require speCial cable -- consult
Physical Planning Representative. Field Installation: Yes.
x
x
x
SECOND BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#4990). Provides the
same function as the standard multiplexer channel... contains
Channel Indirect Data Addressing. Takes the place of Block Multiplexer Channel No.4. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Block
Multiplexer Channel No. 4 (#1434). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel NO.3 (#1433).
Field Installation: Yes. Corequisite: MP Model.
x
x
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites, For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
upon the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
Remote Processor
Storage Size
(Megabytes)
Roouired OASO Soocily Feat .....
OASO CONFIGURATION
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150) and
~
ISC diSkette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on same
diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340
mdl B I, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl BI/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl B I or B2.
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/ A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for addilional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
3333's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on each path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes ...
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190, 9313, 9314, 9315, 9317, 9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(# 2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequisites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. PrereqUisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), on each processor in an MP system and on
the A-series processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended
(#7730) is also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in
an AP system. Limitatation: This feature cannot be loaded, at
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - - -- - =-----=
=- =---
M 3158-3.4
Jui 79
~
DP Machines
3158-3 Processing Unit (cant' d)
IMPL time, concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074
Compatibility (#7117), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with
OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program Support)(#8750).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED, ADD'L (#7731). Provides S/370
Extended facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended
(#7730), on each processor in an MP system, and on the A-series
processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended (#7730) is
also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in an AP
system. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with 1401 /1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility
(#3950), OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with OS/VSl
ECPS (Extended Control Program Support)(#8750).
3056 REMOTE CONSOLE ATTACHMENT (#7820).
Provides
attachment to the Display Console of an optional console up to
150 feet away. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3213 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#7840), To attach a 3213 Printer to the Display Console for optional hard copy. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905), To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/360 mdl 195 and
S/370 mdls 165, 168, 195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
For S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158,
and 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, see 3135, 3135-3, 3138,
3145,3145-3,31483155,3158,3031,3032,3033 respectively.
For 4300 Processors, see 4341.
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740),
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. This function is also included in and
enabled by the OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: This feature
cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/.7074
Compatibility (#7117), System/370 Extended (#7730), or with
System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731).
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Year Purch
MMMC
Block Multiplexer Channel
#1433
$ 463 $ 421 $16,160 $14.00
- 3rd
- 4th
1434
432
393 15,040 11.00
- 5th
1435
215
196
7,565
5.00
Channel-to-channel Adapter
1850
432
393 15,040
9.00
ISC Control Store Extens
478 21,060 23.00
2150t
526
Expanded Control Store
318
289 12,720 23.00
2151"t
289 12,720 23.00
ISC/SA Control Store Add'l
2152t
318
Direct Control
3,705
3274
123
112
4.00
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
NC
NC
for up to twelve switches
NC
NC
3622
NC
NC
Emerg Power-Off Panel Exp
3625
NC
NC
NC
NC
Extnd Precision Floating Pt
3700
NC
NC
NC
NC
1401/1440/1460,1410/7010
Compatibility
3950
NC
NC
NC
NC
Integrated Storage Controls
4650t 1,920 1,745 77,600 258.00
2nd Byte Multiplexr Channl
4990
463
421 16,160 14.00
OS/DOS Compatibility
5450
NC
NC
NC
NC
Processor Attach
90
2,700 15.00
5552
82
Power Warning
5760
142
5,725
130
1.00
Register Expansion
6111
47
43
1,330
8.50
Remote Switch Attachment
6148
NC
NC
NC
NC
7070/7074 Compatibility
NC
NC
7117
NC
NC
Staging Adapter for ISC
2,065
1,875
83,200
245.00
7220"t
System/370 Extended
7730
715
650 13,000
4.00
7731
220
System/370 Extd, Add'i
200
4,000
2.00
3056 Remote Cnsl Attach
7820
51
47
2,545
4.00
3213 Printer Attachment
7840
114
104
5,545
1.00
Two Channel Sw for ISC
7905
351
319 14,220 23.00
Virtual Machine Assist
8740
NC
NC
NC
NC
OS/VSl Extended Control
Program Support
8750
NC
NC
NC
NC
"
Customer price quotations and order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this feature involves removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
t Feature supplies ISC diskette.
OS/VS1 ECPS (EXTENDED CONTROL PROGRAM SUPPORT)
(#8750),
Provides assist to OS/VSl by emulation of certain
supervisor functions. This feature also includes and enables Virtual Machine Assist and Extended Precision Floating Point functions.
Prerequisite: Feature must be selected at system generation on
OS/VSl Release 6 or subsequent releases. Limitations: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), OS/DOS
Compatibility (#5450),
7070/7074
Compatibility (#7117),
System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'l
(#7731), or in Multiprocessing Mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
---- ---- =':' =
==
------ -- ---
M 3165.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3165 PROCESSING UNIT
necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors, etc.) and the
changes required for quality testing and installing.
[The 3165 ;s no longer available ... features and model changes
can be ordered on an "as available" basis.]
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Purp08e: Provides arithmetic, logic and control functions for a
S/370 mdl 165.
[2] Motor Generator Set and Starter: See M 10000 pages for
ordering instructions and prices.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
[3] Channel Attachment: The basic 31 65 has connection facilities
for channels addressed 0, 1 and 2. SPECIFY: #9065 for attachment of channels addressed 3 and 4 ... #9066 for channels
addressed 5 and 6. #9065 is a prerequisite for #9066. For
channels 7 - 11, see Extended Channels (#3850). Customers
who may elect to purchase and have present or future requirements for channels addressed 5 and 6 should specify #9066.
Model I
Used with two 3360 mdl 4s in a S/370 mdl 1165
(524,288 bytes).
Model J
Used with two 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl J165
(1,048,576 bytes).
Model JI
Used with two 3360 mdl 4s and two 3360 mdl 5s
in a S/370 mdl JI165 (1,572,864 bytes).
Model K
Used with four 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl K165
(2,097,152 bytes).
Model KJ
Used with six 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl KJ165
(3,145,728 bytes).
[5] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Hlghllght8: Depending upon the model, can attach up to
3,145,728 bytes of 2-microsecond processor storage ... eight byte
parallel data flow... includes up to 16,384 bytes of 80nanosecond cycle buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective cycle time of storage
... buffer storage does not increase the amount of addressable
storage ... 80-nanosecond processor cycle ... double words are
four-way interleaved ... overlapped operation of instruction and
execution units ... extensive data checking is coupled with increased reliability, availability and serviceability.
[6] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interface for FE DAU to the telephone line.
Standard Feature8 -- universal instruction set ... extended precision floating point feature ... one-microsecond time-of-day clock
... additional variable field length instructions ... control registers,
expanding the functions of PSWs ... byte-oriented operand feature ... buffer storage (8,1 92 bytes) ... fetch and store protection
... direct control feature ... attachment for 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer Channel(s) and 2880 Block Multiplexer
Channel(s) ... storage configuration control... writable control
storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and correction
... instruction retry.
Channel8 - separate channels facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds of 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface (#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up
to seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s
and 2880s ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 2860s
and 2880s ... (c) If no 2870 is attached, only up to six channels,
2860s and/or 2880s, can be attached per CPU. See 2860,
2870 and 2880.
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3850), up' to twelve
channels can be attached ... for valid combinations, see "'Special
Features."' Depending upon data rates, all channels, including the
Selector Subchannels and basic multiplexer channel of the 2870
can operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer
channel can control up to eight control units. The basic multiplexer channel and each Selector Subchannel of the 2870 controls
up to eight control units. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit can be attached to that Selector Subchannel ... see
2841.
limitations: High performance devices can be accommodated
by the 3165 only by adhering to the following requirements and
limitations:
Storage Control
2835 mdl 1
2835 mdl 2
2820
Channel Type
2880
2880
2880 or 2860
Channel Priority
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
When attaching 2835s and 2820s, the control units must be
attached to channels contained in the channel frames located in
the first or second position of the channel bus.
The maximum number of 3330 facilities is determined by the
total system configuration ... consult your SO and I Center.
PREREQUISITES: In addition to appropriate 3360 Processor Storages, each 3165 requires: [1] At least one selector channel
(2860), block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870 with at least
one Selector Subchannel ... [2] One 3066 System Console mdl 1
... [3] One 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1 ... [4]
A motor generator set.
Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system
... see S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Each model of the 3165 has been designed for interconnected
operation with a specified number of 3360 Processor Storage
Units. Customers who wish to order the 3165 for use without the
specified number of 3360s should submit an RPQ to provide the
[4] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"'Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
PRICES:
Mdl
3165
I
J
JI
K
KJ
MAC/
MRC
$ 37,790
37,900
38,370
38,680
39,820
Purchase
MMMC
$1,814,600
1,819,900
1,841,900
1,858,200
1,913,100
$2,790
2,800
2,835
2,885
2,980
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066)
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option:55%
Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From To
I
J
JI
J
$5,300
JI
K
$27,300
22,000
K
$43,600
38,300
16,300
KJ
$98,500
93,200
71,200
54,900
The model conversion prices above are applicable only when
the 3165 is used with the combinations of 3360 Processor
Storages as indicated under' 'Models" above.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1432).
Expands the basic 8,192-byte
buffer to 16,384 bytes. Field In8tallation: Yes. Prerequi8ite:
Buffer Expansion (#1432) on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide, in effect, a single Emergency Power-Off Switch in a "'room"'
or "'area"' ... see "'Emergency Power-Off" in "'Systems" and SRL
GC22-7004 for details. #3621 - to interconnect 2 emergency
power-off switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to 12 emergency power-off switches. Field In8tallatlon: Yes.
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3850). To attach up to twelve channels, in combinations of 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer
Channels, and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels. A maximum of
twelve channels or a total of seven channel frames, whichever
occurs first, can be attached. The feature includes the capability
of addressing channels 7 thru 11. Valid maximum channels attachable are:
2860s - maximum 6 channels
2870s - maximum 2 channels
2880s -- maximum 11 channels
llmltatlon8: The 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one
thru six. The first 2870 channel must be numbered zero ... the
second 2870 must be numbered one thru six. The 2880 channel
addresses may be any number one thru eleven. If the address of
the 2880 is seven thru eleven, only 2301 s, 2303s, 2305s, 2311 s,
2314s, 2321 s, 2420s, 3211 s, 3330s, 3420s or 3505s may be
attached. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9066 ... see
"'Specify"' above. The number of channel frames specified on the
power distribution unit must be equal to or greater than the channel frames actually attached. See 3067 mdl 1.
t
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FEDAU.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - =----=-- =--':' =
--- --
M 3165.2
Jui 79
DP Machines
3165 Processing Unit
(cont'd)
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4520). Improves processor speed in
both fixed and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4520) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117).
Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070 and 7074 instructions. This capability
is integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7070/7074 system features included are: Channels, 729 magnetic tape, 7501 Console
Card Reader, and Floating Decimal Arithmetic. NOT included are:
Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage, punched card I/O, printer, Hypertape, Interval Timer, and core storage addresses above
9989. For a detailed explanation of system requirements with this
feature, see "Compatibility Features" under S/370 in "Systems."
limitation: Cannot be installed with any other compatibility feature.
Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117) on the 3066 System Console
mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7118).
Provides the system with the
ability to execute 705 and 7080 instructions. This capability IS
integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7080 system features included
are: Channels, punched card input, typewriter, and 729 magnetic
tape. NOT included are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage,
Hypertape, and 705 units on-line with the 7080. Only the 7080 is
emulated, but 705 programs can be run because the "705 mode"
of the 7080 is emulated. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." limitation: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Field Installation: No! recommended.
Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7118) on the 3066 System
Console mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 1.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7119). Provides the
system with the ability to execute 709, 7090, 7094, 7094 II instructions. This capability is integrated under OS and emulated
programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT.
Included are the following features of those systems: Channels,
punched card I/O, printer and 729 magnetic tape. NOT included
are: Hypertape, teleprocessing equipment, direct couple, disk
storages, drum storages, 1401 adapter, direct data on 7094 special and custom features. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." limitation: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Prerequisite: 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#"1119) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
Buffer Expansion
#143~ $1,610 $ 77,160
Emergency Power-Off Control,
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
NC
NC
Extended Channels
3850
513
24,640
High Speed Multiply
4520 2,815 135,150
7070/7074 Compatibility
7111 2,930 140,350
7080 Compatibility
7118 2,930 140,350
709/7090/7094/7094 II Cmpt 7119 2,930 140,350
MMMC
$ 52.00
NC
NC
66.00
104.00
155.00
155.00
155.00
DYNAMIC ADDRESS TRANSLATION (Purchased Models J, K and
KJ)
Purchased installed model 165s may be field converted to 165-11
through installation of ttle Dynamic Address Translation Facility.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledg8ment
letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of model
change to the 'II' Model involves the removal of parts whictl become the property of IBM."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- -- --- ---= = =':' =
M 3168,1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3168 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 168.
Models
J
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
LKJ
M
Bytes of Processor Storage
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
1,048,576
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242,880
6,291,456
7,340,032
8,388,608
[4)
Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and 8/370 Installation Manual - ?hysical
Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
[5) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[6) RETAIN/370: Customer must provide interface for FE DAU to
the telephone line.
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3168
J
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
LKJ
M
MPl
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
$ 61,620 $ 56,020 $2,094,500
64,660
58,790
2,169,500
67,700
61,560
2,244,500
70,810
64,390
2,321,500
74,370
67,630
2,411,500
77,410
70,400
2,486,500
80,450
73,170
2,561,500
83,490
75,940
2,636,500
63,470
57,700
2,158,100
66,510
60,470
2,233,100
69,550
63,240
2,308,100
72,660
66,070
2,385,100
76,220
69,310
2,475,100
79,260
72,080
2,550,100
82,300
74,850
2,625,100
85,340
77,620
2,700,100
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can contain up to 8,388,608 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... eight byte parallel
data flow ... includes up to 16,384 bytes of 80 nanosecond cycle
buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective cycle time of storage ... buffer storage
does not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond processor cycle ... double-words are four-way interleaved
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units ...
extensive data checking is coupled with increased reliability,
availability and serviceability.
Standard Features: Universal instruction set ... extended precision
... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with clock comparator .. .
one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation .. .
extended control mode ... program event recording ... dual channel I/O bus ... additional variable field length instructions ... control registers, expanding the functions of PSWs ... byte-oriented
operand feature ... buffer storage (8,192 bytes) ... fetch and store
protection ... direct control feature ... attachment for 2860 Selector Channel(s), 2870 Multiplexer Channel(s), and 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel(s) ... storage configuration control ... writable
control storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry '" compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... clear I/O. Channel Reconfiguration Hardware and four additional instructions on the MP models: signal processor ... set prefix ...
store prefix ... store CPU address.
Channels: Separate channneis facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds of 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface
(#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up to
seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s and
2880s ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 2860s and
2880s ... (c) If no 2870 is attached, only up to six channels,
2860s and/or 2880s, can be attached per CPU. See 2860, 2870,
2880.
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3855), up to twelve
channels can be attached ... for valid combinations, see "Special
Features." Depending upon data rates, all channels, including the
Selector Subchannels and basic multiplexer channel of the 2870
can operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer
channel can control up to eight control units. The basic multiplexer
channel and each Selector Subchannel of the 2870 controls up to
eight control units, If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit
can be attached to that Selector Subchannel ... see 2841,
PREREQUISITES: Each 3168 requires [1] At least one selector
channel (2860), block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870 with
at least one Selector Subchannel ... [2] One 3066 System Console
mdl 2 .. , [3] One 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2
.. , [4] An appropriate 415Hz power input. Customer-supplied
chilled water is required for cooling the system. See 8/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
An MP system requires two MP CPU models of any size. Each MP
CPU model requires Multiprocessing (#5050) on both the 3066
mdl 2 and the 3067 mdl 2, The 3068 Multisystem Communication
Unit is required for each one or two processor MP system. If
either of the processors is a mdl MP5, MP6, MP7 or MP8, Extended Storage Attachment (#3850) is required on the 3068,
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V,
[2] Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
[3] Channel Attachrrent: The basic 3168 has connection facilities
for channels addressed 0;6, For channels 7-11, see Extended
Channels (#3855).
• Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
t
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FE DAU.
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
PRICES:
Purchase
MMMC
$5,070
5,210
5,350
5,500
5,710
5,850
5,990
6,130
5,080
5,220
5,360
5,510
5,720
5,860
6,000
6,140
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066-2)
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%'
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes:
Field Installable.
3168 to 3168 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3'i68 to 3168 MP
$63,600
(no change in storage size)
3168 to 3168 Model UPGRADE Purchase Prices
From To
K
KJ
L
LJ
K
LKJ
M
$75.000
$77.000
KJ
L
$90,000
$75,000
LJ
LK
LKJ
$75.000
$75.000
From To
MPI
MP2
MP3
MP4
MPS
MP6
MP7
LK
$75.000
J
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
$75,000
$75,000
$77,000
$90,000
$75.000
$75.000
$75,000
NOTES:
1 . There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices,
2, The above model conversion and model upgrades are field
installable.
3.
Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When a
customer requires model (storage) upgrades in addition to a
model conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into
a single
Also, model (storage) upgrades should be
ordered individually in one-model increments.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Expands the basic 8,192-byte
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1435),
buffer to 16,384 bytes. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Buffer Expansion (#1435) on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
ISC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
required. Note: When #7220 IS ordered, #2150 is prerequisite.
Maximum: One, Field Installation: Yes.
Provides additional
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151),
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC, See "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required, Maximum: One, Field Installation: Yes, Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion
(#6111) .
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152). Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650),
Required if 3350 DASD is attached with Staging Adapter for ISC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ------ =----=- =---':' =
M 3168.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3168 Processing Unit (conl'd)
(#7220). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Register Expansion (#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151),
and Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220).
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3623. 3624).
To provide, in effect. a single Emergency Power-Off Switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see "Emergency Power-Off" in "Systems" and SRL
GC22-7004 for details. #3623 -- to interconnect 2 Emergency
Power-Off Switches ... #3624 -- to interconnect up to 12 Emergency Power-Off Switches. Field Installation: Yes.
~
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3855). To attach up to twelve channels, in combinations of 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer
Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels. A maximum of
twelve channels, or a total of seven channel frames, whichever
occurs first, can be attached. The feature includes the capability
of addressing channels 7 thru 11. Valid maximum channels attachable are:
2860s -- maximum 6 channels
2870s -- maximum 2 channels
2880s -- maximum 11 channels.
Limitations: 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one thru
six. The first 2870 must be numbered zero. The second 2870
must be numbered one thru six. The 2880 channel addresses may
be any number one thru eleven. If the address of the 2880 is
seven thru eleven, only 2301 s, 2303s, 2305s, 2311 s, 2314s,
2321 s, 2420s, 3211 s, 3330s, 3340s, 33505, 34205, 3505s or
3705s may be attached. Field Installation: Yes.
<5
~
....
....
One or two 33335 with
associated 33305
Up to our 33335 with
~
C
o
~
~
19313 9314 .9314t
9190t
t
t
..
String Switch .8150 on
any 3333
with associated mdl BIA12s
Up to four 3340 mdl A2s
with associated mdl BIIB2s
String SWitch .~;50 00
any 3340 mdl
x
x x
of which up to two may
'"
.,.....'"a
attach 3344.
Suin9 SWitch .8150 on
any 3340mdl A2 and/or
Fixed Head Feature
.4301/430200 any 3340
3333. and 3340 mdl A2.
.,.'"
.......
",'"
0-
, ....
-
....
~!
....
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOT ordered. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2, or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs
and/or a mdl C to the 3350 mdl A2/ A2F ... see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330. 3340, 3350 "Machines" pages.
The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths with up
to 16 drives per path ... up to 32 drives per path when ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a control
unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The following applies only when Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is NOT
ordered:
~
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
our 3340 mdl A2s
::
....
t
xx
Ix
:~;~1~~a~ci2e::y 3340
I Up to
*Ii"
9315t 9317 9318
t
t
9190t
9315
xix
associated 33305
One or two 3340 mdl A2s
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Improves processor speed in
both fixed and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4525)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
The available combinations of storage devices that can be attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
Required DASD Specify Feature(s).
NOTE: The selected
"Required DASD Specify Feature(s)" applies to both ISC paths.
Within this constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path
may be different from that on the other ISC path.
..
R.... uir.d DASD Soecifv F.at".. *
DASD CONFIGURATION
(any corminatioo of two, ttlree
or four) each with associated
drives
String Switch *B150) on
any 3333 Of 3340 mdl A2
:~'3"~1H/~·~o';·::v 3340
x x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
Up to four 3350 mdl A2.;
~ I~~~:s;::.~;~t~,":~
~ ;~~6 ;~li~~;:N.~o;;'iF
:
3333., 3340 mdl A2s and
3350 mdl A2./A2F. (",y
0
on
....
cormination of 2, 3 or 4)
~~ with associated drives
0.,.
"",
........
3333, 3340 mdl A2, or
~o 3350 mdl A2!A2F; C2!C2F
- ~~~~~;eg2H~d;:~~:o
.... c
....
....
....
xix
I-~tring Switch *8150 on any
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on same diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is. required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or SpeCial Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340
mdl B I, B2s. and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl B I/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl B I or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
Upt)n the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
•
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111). Provides additional registers for
microprogram use on the ISC
see "Specify" under Integrated
Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
To attach the Two
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148).
Channel Switch for ISC (#7905) to the configuration control panel
on the 3068 Multisystem Communication Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7010 and 7074 instructions. This capability
is integrated under as and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT .and MVT. 7070/7074 system features included are: Channels, 729 magnetic tape, 7501 Console
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
~
--------- - ----- --- -----
M 3168.3
Jul79
===~=
DPMachines
3168 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Card Reader, and Floating Point Decimal Arithmetic. NOT included
are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage, punched card I/O,
printer, Hypertape, Interval Timer, and core storage addresses
above 9989. For a detailed explanation of system requirements
with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under S/370 in
"Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently
with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Provides the system with the
ability to execute 705 and 7080 instructions. This capability is
integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7080 system features included
are: Channels, punched card input, typewriter, and 729 magnetic
tape. NOT included are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage,
Hypertape, and 705 units on-line with the 7080. Only the 7080 is
emulated, but 705 programs can be run because the "705 mode"
of the 7080 is emulated. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems" limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation;
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129). Provides the
system with the ability to execute 709, 7090, 7094 and 7094 II
instructions. This capability is integrated under OS and emulated
programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT.
Included are the following features of those systems: Channels,
punched card I/O, printer, and 729 magnetic tape. NOT included
are: Hypertape, teleprocessing equipment, direct couple, disk
storages, drum storages, 1401 adapter, direct data on 7094 special and custom systems. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the
3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
see 3135,3135-3,3138,3145,3145-3,31483155,3158,3031,
3032 or 3033 respectively. For 4300 Processors, see 4341.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr
Purch
MMMC
Buffer Expansion
#1435
$1,740$1,585 $83,340 $65.50
ISC Control Store Extn
2150·
526
478 21,060 23.00
Expanded Control Store 2151·
318
289 12,720 23.00
ISC/SA Cntrl Store Add'i 2152·
318
289 12,720 23.00
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3623
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
for up to 12 switches
3624
NC
NC
NC
Extended Channels
3855
554
504 26,610 83.00
High Speed Multiply
4525
3,035 2,760 145,950 131.00
Integrated Storage .Cntrls 4650·
1,920 1,745 77,600 258.00
Register Expansion
6111
47
43
1,280
8.00
Remote Switch Attach
6148
NC
NC
NC
NC
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127
3,160 2,875151,600 197.00
3,160 2,875151,600 197.00
7080 Compatibility
7128
709/7090/7094/7094 II
Compatibility
7129
3,160 2,875151,600 197.00
Staging Adapter for ISC 7220t· 2,065 1,875 83,200 245.00
7730
3,575 3,250 65,000 50.00
System /370 Extended
Two Chnl Switch for ISC 7905
351
319 14,220 23.00
t
•
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for pur·
chase
must state: "[nstallation of this feature involves the removal of parts which
become the property of IBM.".
Feature supplies ISC diskette.
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/ A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
3333's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on ea.::h path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes ...
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190, 9313, 9314, 9315, 9317, 9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(#2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequisites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: RPQ
Performance Improvements.
RPQ
APU Attach, is also required if the 3168 is used
with a 3062. Required on each processor in an MP system and
on a 3168 with RPQs
System/370 Extended (#7730) is also required on the 3062 Attached Processing Unit
in an AP system. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at
IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127),
7080 Compatibility (#7128), or 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905). To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/370 mdls 165, 168,
195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. For S/370 mdls 135,
135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158, 3031, 3032 and 3033,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----- ---------_.---------
M 3168-3.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3168-3 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides arithmetic. logic. processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 168.
Bytes of Processor Storage
Models
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
1.048.576
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242,880
6,291,456
7,340,032
8.388.603
Highlights: Depending upon the model. can contain up to 8.388.608 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... eight byte parallel
data flow ... includes up to 32,768 bytes of 80 nanosecond cycle
buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective cycle time of storage
buffer storage
does not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond processor cycle ... double-words are four-way interleaved
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units ...
extensive data checking is coupled with increased reliability,
availability and serviceability. Improved instruction execution times
over the 3168. Improved interrupt execution times over the 3168.
Improved availability and serviceability through a service processor. Attached Processing by attachment of a 3062 Attached
Processing Unit mdl 1.
Standard Features: Universal instruction set ... extended precision
... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with clock comparator .. .
one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation .. .
extended control mode ... program event recording ... dual channel I/O bus ... additional variable field length instructions ... control registers. expanding the functions of PSWs ... byte-oriented
operand feature ... buffer storage (32,768 bytes) ... fetch and
store protection ... direct control feature ... attachment for 2860
Selector Channel(s), 2870 Multiplexer Channel(s), and 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel(s) ... storage configuration control ... writable
control storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... clear I/O. Channel Reconfiguration and four additional instructions on the M models: signal processor ... set prefix ... store
prefix ... store CPU address.
Channels: Separate channneis facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds of 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface
(#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up to
seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s and
28805 ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 28605 and
28805 ... (c) If no 2870 is attached, only up to six channels.
2860s and/or 2880s, can be attached per CPU. See 2860, 2870,
2880.
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3855), up to twelve
channels can be attached ... for valid combinations, see "Special
Features." Depending upon data rates, all channels, including the
Selector Subchannels and basic multiplexer channel of the 2870
can operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer
channel can control up to eight control units. The basic multiplexer
channel and each Selector Subchannel of the 2870 controls up to
eight control units. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit
can be attached to that Selector Subchannel ... see 2841.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3168-3 requires [1] At least one selector
channel (2860), block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870 with
at least one Selector Subchannel ... [2] One 3066 System Console
mdl 2 '" [3] One 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3
... [4] An appropriate 415Hz power input. Customer-supplied
chilled water is required for cooling the system. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Each AP system requires [1] a 3168-3 Model A series processor
... J2] a 3062 APU mdl 1 ... [3] a 3066 System Console mdl 3 ...
an [4] a 3067 PDU/CDU mdl 5.
An MP system requires two M CPU models of any size. Each M
CPU model requires Multiprocessing (#5050) on both the 3066
mdl 2 and the 3067 mdl 3. The 3068 Multisystem Communication
Unit is required for each one or two processor M system. If either
of the processors is a mdl MP5, MP6, MP7, MP8, M35, M36, M37
or M38, Extended Storage Attachment (#3850) is required on the
3068.
SPECIFY: [1]. Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz):
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
[3] Channel Attachment: The basic 3168-3 has connection facilities for channels addressed 0-6. For channels 7-11, see Extended Channels (#3855).
[4] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required
see
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-7004 for details. If two processors are install ad and the 3602 is to be added and emergency power off
ability is required on the systems, then the expanded Emergency Power Off Control (#3624) should be ordered.
[5] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[6] RETAIN/370: Customer must provide interface for FE DAU to
the telephone line.
t RETAIN may be
used with the 3168-3, however it is not required. Remote service is a customer option where it is available. When the option
is selected. the customer must provide the telephone lines
required for the service processor remote link capability. The
customer must also arrange the connection of the telephone
interface cable provided by IBM to the telephone network.
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3168
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
$ 70,920 $ 64,480 $2,311,700
73,960
67,250
2,386,700
77,000
2,461,700
70,020
80,110
72,850
2,538,700
83,670
76,090
2,628,700
86,710
78,860
2,703,700
89,750
81,630
2,778,709
92,790
84,400
2,853,700
72,770
66,160
2,375,300
75,810
68,930
2,450,300
78,850
71,700
2,525,300
81,960
74,530
2,602,300
85,520
77,770
2,692,300
88,560
80.540
2,767,300
91,600
83,310
2,842,300
94,640
86,080
2,917,300
72,910
66,290
2,357,200
75,950
69.060
2,432,200
71,830
78,990
2,507,200
82,100
74,660
2,584,200
85,660
77,900
2,674,200
88,700
80,670
2,749,200
91,740
83,440
2,824,200
94,780
86,210
2,899,200
Purchase
MMMC
$5,180
5,320
5,460
5,610
5,820
5,960
6,100
6,240
5,190
5,330
5,470
5,620
5,830
5,970
6,110
6,250
5,600
5,740
5,880
6,030
6,240
6,380
6,520
6,660
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066-2)
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%"
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 6
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes:
Field Installable.
3168 to 3168-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3168 to 3168 U3
3168 MP to 3168 M3
$217,200 (no change in storage size)
$217,200 (no change in storage size)
3168-3 to 3168-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3168 U3 to 3168 M3
3168 U3 to 3168 A3
3168 A3 to 3168 M3
$63,600
$45,500
$18,100
(no change in storage size)
(no change in storage size)
(no change in storage size)
3168-3 to 3168-3 Model UPGRADE Purchase Prices
From
To
U32
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
575,000
575.000
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
Bibliography: GC20-0001
• Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
t
#9903 for
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FEDAU.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$77,000
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
575,000
---------- ---- ---------------_.-
M 3168-3.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3168-3 Processing Unit
M32
M33
(conl'd)
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
$75.000
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
$75,000
577,000
590,000
$75.000
$75,000
$75,000
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
$75,000
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
$75,000
$77,000
$90,000
$75,000
$75,0005.15
$75,000
A37
NOTES:
1.
There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2.
The above model conversion and model upgrades are field
installable.
3.
Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When a
customer requires model (storage) upgrades in addition to a
model conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into
Also. model (storage) upgrades should be
a single
ordered individually in one-model increments.
4.
Field change from 3168-3 to a 3168 is not recommended.
5.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "All parts which
are removed from purchased processors to accomplish a
model change to and from the A series become the property
of IBM."
only] #9440 for #4525 on the 3062 APU, or #9441 for no
#4525 on the 3062 APU.
Provides
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s -
e0
~
~
~~~~s with
associated 33305
String Switch _8150 on
with associated mdl B11R?§
~
"'"
'"
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3623, 3624).
To provide, in effect, a single Emergency Power-Off Switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see "Emergency Power-Off" in "Systems" and SRL
GC22-7004 for details. #3623 - to interconnect 2 Emergency
Power-Off Switches ... #3624 -- to interconnect up to 12 Emergency Power-Off Switches. Field Installation: Yes.
,-'"
drives
'"
Fixed Head Feature
(any corroination of two, three
or four) each wit" associated
String SWitch .8150) on
"'Y 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
.4301/4302 on any 3340
>-
t
xx
x
x
x
x x
String Switch "8150 on
",'"
"'~$
..
931'8
t
x
Fixed Head Feature
.4301/4302 on '"'Y 3340
3333. and 3340 mdl A2s
o~
x
x
any 3340 mdl A2 and/or
.....
","
9317
x
x
:~;~1~~~;2·::Y
'"'"
;:,
*
x
x x
Up to four 3340 mdl A2s
any 3340 mdl A2
93151
91901
xx
with associated mdl BlLe2s
I StringSwitch.8150 on
**
**
9315
1
x~
3340
!UP t.rour 3340 mdl A2s
:- of which up to two may
attach 3344s
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152). Provides additional control store for microprogram use on ISC. Required if 3350
OASD is attached with Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Register Expansion
(#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151), and Staging Adapter
for ISC (#7220).
HIGH SPEED MUL TIPL Y (#4525), Improves processor speed in
both fixed and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4525)
on the· 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3 and/or mdl 5. Specify;[A mdls
associated 33305
Up to Out,
any 3333
On. or two 3340 mdl A2s
Provides additional
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150), and Register Expansion
(#6111).
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3855). To attach up to twelve channels, in combinations of 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer
Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels. A maximum of
twelve channels, or a total of seven channel frames, whichever
occurs first, can be attached. The feature includes the capability
of addressing channels 7 thru 11. Valid maximum channels attachable are:
2860s -- maximum 6 channels
2870s -- maximum 2 channels
2880s -- maximum 11 channels.
Limitations: 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one thru
six. The first 2870 must be numbered zero. The second 2870
must be numbered one thru six. The 2880 channel addresses may
be any number one thru eleven. If the address of the 2880 is
seven thru eleven, only 2301 s, 2303s, 2305s, 2311 s, 2314s,
2321 s, 2420s, 3211 s, 3330s, 3340s, 3350s, 3420s, 3505s or
3705s may be attached. Field Installation: Yes.
One or two 33335 with
313 9314 .93141
t
91901
t
xx
x
x
x
x
Up to four 3350 mdl A2s/
ao I:~~:a~;~sOciated
mdl
s
r.?,/C.,,,.
S,
~
'"
<>
on
'""'~
;:'''
I String
Switch *!l!-.?U on any
3350 ...1 A2/A2F· CZ/c2F
3333., 33~O mdl A2s and
3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs (any
contlination of 2.3 or 4)
with associated drives
~~ IString SWitch .8150 on any
",'" 3333, 3340 mdl A2, or
~g 3350 mdl A2/A2F; C2/C2F
",-
....'"
t
•
.,d/or Fixed Head Feature
.430114302 on '"" 3340
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
0[1 same diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as reqUlred for the new configuration.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._-------- ------ -- -----=== ':' =
M 3168-3.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3168·3 Processing Unit
(conI' d)
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may allach up to three 3340
mdl B 1, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may allach up to three 3340 mdl B I/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl B 1 or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
upon the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111),
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC '" see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148).
To attach the Two
Channel Switch for ISC (# 7905) to the configuration controi panel
on the 3068 Multisystem Communication Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127), Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070 and 7074 instructions. This capability
is integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7070/7074 system features included are: Channels, 729 magnetiC tape, 7501 Console
Card Reader, and Floating Point Decimal Arithmetic. NOT included
are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage, punched card I/O,
printer, Hypertape, Interval Timer, and core storage addresses
above 9989. For a detailed explanation of system requirements
with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under S/370 in
"Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently
with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Provides the system with the
ability to execute 705 and 7080 instructions. This capability is
integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7080 system features included
are: Channels, punched card input, typewriter, and 729 magnetic
tape. NOT included are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage,
Hypertape, and 705 units on-line with the 7080. Only the 7080 is
emulated, but 705 programs can be run because the "705 mode"
of the 7080 is emulated. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129), Provides the
system with the ability to execute 709, 7090, 7094 and 7094 II
instructions. This capability is integrated under as and emulated
programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT.
Included are the following features of those systems: Channels,
punched card I/O, printer, and 729 magnetic tape. NOT included
are: Hypertape, teleprocessing equipment, direct couple, disk
storages, drum storages, 1401 adapter, direct data on 7094 special and custom systems. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the
3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3.
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is Installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required 011 each processor in an MP system,
and on the A-series processor in an AP system. System/370
Extended (#7730) is also required on the 3062 Attached Processing Unit in an AP system. limitation: ThiS feature cannot be
loaded. at IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/7074 Compatibility
(#7127), 7080 Compatibility (#7128), or 709/7090/7094/l094
II Compatibility (#7129).
3213 INTEGRATED PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#7850). PrOVides
the interface needed to attach the optional 3213 Printer to the
service processor on the 3168-3. The 3213 can be used to print
error data captured and stored in the service processor. The
printer does not attach to the channel interface. Field Installation:
Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905).
To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight ullshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/370 mol 195 and
S/370 mdls 165, 168, 195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
For S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145.145-3, 148, 155, 158,
ard 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, see 3135. 3135-3, 3138,
3145,3145-3,31483155,3158 and 3031. 3032 or 3033 Processor respectively. For 4300 Processors. see 4341
Special Feature Prices:
ISC Control Store Extens #2150t
Expanded Control Store
2151 t
ISC/SA Cntrl Store Add'i 2152t
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3623
for up to 12 switches
3624
Extended Channels
3855
High Speed Multiply
4525
Integrated Storage Cntrls 4650t
Register Expansion
6111
Remote Switch Attach
6148
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127
7080 Compatibility
7128
709/7090/7094/7094 II
Compatibility
7129
Staging Adapter for ISC
7220*t
System/370 Extended
7730
3213 Int9rd Printer Adptr 7850
Two Channel Sw for ISC 7905
*
TLP/
MAC/ iIIILC
MRC 4 Yr Purch
MMMe
$ 526 $ 478$ 21,060 $23.00
318
289 12,720 23.00
318
289 12,720 23 . 00
tile
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
554
504 26,510 83.00
3,035 2,760 145,950 13'1,00
1,920 1,745 77,600 258.00
41
43
1,280
8.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
3,1602,875 151,600 197.00
3,160 2,875 151,600 197.00
3,160 2,875 151,600 19'7.00
2,065 1,875 83,200 245.00
3.575 3,250 65.000 50.00
72
66
2,425
2.00
351
319 14,220 23.00
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement !etterf:. for purchase
must slale: "Installation of thj~ fca!u1"c involves the reITh-val cd· part~ which
become the proper!\" \)f iBM."
Feature supplies ISC diskette.
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220),
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
:;333's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on each path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes ...
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190,9313,9314,9315,9317,9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(#2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequisites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --------===':'=
-- -----
M 3195.1
May 79
DP Machines
3195 PROCESSING UNIT
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control and processing storage for a S/360 or S/370 mdl 195.
Models:
For 5/360
Model J
Model K
Model KJ
Model L
For 5/370
Model J1
Model K1
Model KJ1
Model L1
1,048,576
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
1,048,576
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
Highlights: Depending upon the model, includes up to 4,194,304
bytes with a 756-nanosecond cycle time ... eight byte parallel data
flow... includes 32,768 bytes of 54-nanosecond cycle buffer
storage which is transparent to the programmer and reduces the
effective cycle time of processor storage ... buffer storage does
not increase the amount of addressable storage .. , 54-nanosecond
processor cycle ... double words are eight-way interleaved on mdl
J; sixteen-way on mdl K and L; sixteen-way on the first 2 million
bytes and eight-way on the third million bytes on mdl KJ ... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units, as well as
concurrent operations in multiple execution units and with the
instruction unit ... performance emphasis on floating point arithmetic.
Because of the high performance emphasis, there are operational
differences from other S/360 and S/370 models.
[1] The quotient of a floating point divide operation may differ in
the mdl 195 from that of other models by an amount equal to
one bit in the low order fraction position. For zero remainders,
however, the results will be identical.
[2] Several program interruptions that should, according to the
IBM 5/360 Principles of Operation, store a non-zero
Instruction-Length Code (ILC) are imprecise in the mdl 195
and store a zero ILC. This zero ILC indicates that the address
of the instruction causing the interruption has not been retained. When precise program interruptions occur, the interruption code portion of the current PSW is used in a special
way.
[3] The mdl 195 is capable of executing processor stores out of
sequence. Logical consistency is maintained among processor
fetches and stores -- including the beginning and ending I/O
operations. However, if a program is to modify a string of
CCWs while they are being used by the channel, then steps
must be taken to arrange the program so that the stores are
made in sequence. This is described in th Model 195 Functional Characteristics (GA22-6943).
[4] If a floating point underflow occurs, the result will be replaced
by all zeros. If an overflow occurs, the result will be replaced
by all ones with the correct sign. For those instructions that
change the condition code, the code is 1 or 2 for overflow,
and 0 for underflow.
With each 3195, a Basic Storage Module Analyzer and one additional basic storage module is provided, along with two carriers.
Each carrier provides for supporting and moving a basic storage
module from the processor to a service area. Use of these items
normally reduces the duration of system interruption when a failure
occurs in one of the basic storage modules in the system. IBM
maintenance agreements normally allow for off-line serviCing and
repair of a failing basic storage module.
Standard Features (All Models) - universal instruction set, extended r:;recision floating point arithmetic, fetch protection (read
and write), internal timer (9.6 khz -- about 104us interval), byteoriented operands, direct control, attachment for 2860 Selector
Channels, 2870 Multiplexer Channels, and 2880 Block Multiplexer
Channels.
Additional Standard Features (S/370 Models) -- in addition to
those features listed above, the S/370 models include a 250nanosecond time-of-day clock, additional variable field length
instructions, control registers (expanding the functions of the
PSWs).
Channels - separate channels facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds up to 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3.0 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface (#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up to
seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s
and/or 2880s ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 2860s
and/or 2880s ... (c) If no 2870 is attached only up to six channels, 2860s and/or 2880s, can be atttached per CPU. See 2860,
2870 and 2880. With the addition of Extended Channels (#3851),
up to fourteen channels can be attached ... for valid channel
combinations, see "Special Features." Depending upon data rates,
all channels, including the Selector Subchannels of the 2870s, can
operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer channel
can control up ·to eight control units. The basic multiplexer channel
of the 2870 and each Selector Subchannel controls up to eight
control units. The 2841 is restricted to one control unit per Selector Subchannel .. , see 2841.
Limitations: A 3195 can accommodate three 2880 channels
attaching either the 2835 Storage Control mdl 1 or 2, or the
2820 Storage Control. The channels attaching 2835s or 2820s
must be assigned the highest priorities in the system.
Console Function -- an operator control panel, a system control
panel and a display console are included with the 3060 mdl 1.
They have switches and lights necessary to operate and control
the system. The display console may be used as an operator's
console. The display console is functionally equivalent to a 2250
mdl 1 with the following features: alphameric keyboard, 8K buffer
(4K is maintenance only), character generator, light pen, and OCP,
First. The operator control section may be duplicated once to
provide a remote operator panel by ordering the appropriate feature on a 2150 Console or 2250 Display Unit mdl 1 ... see 2150
and 2250. An optional operator console function can be provided
by using a 2150 and a 1052 Printer-Keyboard mdl 7 in combination ... see 2150. Additional console functions can be provided
through use of other I/O units such as readers, displays, punches
and printers.
Emergency Power-Off Control, a standard feature on the 3060,
provides, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a
"room" or "area." To interconnect up to six Emergency PowerOff Switches, see "Emergency Power-Off" under S/360 in
"Systems" and 5/360 Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GC22-6820, for details.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3195 requires: [1] At least one selector
channel (2860), or block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870
with at least one Selector Subchannel ... [2] One 3060 System
Console ... [3] One 3080 Power Unit mdl 1, one 3080 mdl 2 and
one 3080 mdl 3 ... [4] One 3085 Power Distribution Unit ... [5]
One 3086 Coolant Distribution Unit ... [6] A Motor Generator Set
with Motor Starter. See "Specify."
Customer-supplied. chilled water is required for cooling the system
'" see 5/360 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-6820.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Motor Generator and Starter: See M 1 0000 pages for ordering
instructions and prices.
[3] Remote Operator Control Panel Attachment: #9560, required if
the operator control panel of the 3195 is to be duplicated by
use of an Operator Control Panel (#5475, 5476) on a 2150
Console or 2250 Display Unit mdl 1. Can be field installed.
[4] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[5] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interface for FE DAU to the telephone line.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special feature is on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3851), Provides for attachment of up
to fourteen channels, combinations of 2860 Selector channels,
2870 Multiplexer Channels, and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels.
A maximum of fourteen channels or a total of eight channel
frames, whichever occurs first, can be attached. Valid maximum
combinations of channels are:
2860s - maximum of 2 (6 channels)
2870s -- maximum of 2 (2 channels)
2880s -- maximum of 7 (13 channels)
Limitations: The 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one
thru six. The first 2870 channel must be number zero, the second
must be any number one thru six. The 2880 channel addresses
may be any number one thru thirteen. If the address of the 2880
is seven thru thirteen, only 2301 s, 2303s, 2305s, 23115, 2314s,
2321 s, 2420s, 3211 s, or 3330s may be attached. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: On 2150 -- #9175 if Operator
Control Panel, First (#5475) is to be installed on the 2150 ...
#9176 if Operator Control Panel, Second (#5476) is to be in-
t
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FEDAU.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- .....
_--==-=
.........
_- - ---'!'=
-
M 3195.2
May 79
OP Machines
3195 processing Unit
(cont'd)
stalled. On 2250 - #9175 if Operator Control Panel, First
(#5475) is to be installed on 2250 ... #9176 if Operator Control
Panel, Second (#5476) is to be installed.
Not tobe.repmduced without written permission..
------------ --------== =":' =
M 3203 -3210
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3203 PRINTER
Purpose: Printer output unit for all virtual storage S/370s, 3031,
3032, 3033, 4331 and 4341 Processors, and the 3777 Communication Terminal.
Model 1 -- 600 Ipm ... native attachment on S/370 mdls 115,
125 only.
Model 2 - 1200 Ipm ... native attachment on S/370 mdls 115,
125 only.
Model 3 -
1000 Ipm ... for use with a 3777 Communication
Terminal.
Model 4 - 1200 Ipm ... native attachment on S/370 mdls 138,
148 only.
Model 5 -- 1200 Ipm ... channel attachment to a virtual storage
5/370, a 3031, 3032, 3033, 4331 or 4341
Processor.
All rated speeds are based on a 48 character set.
Highlights; 132 print positions are standard. Horizontal spacing is
10 characters per inch. Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines per inch
under operator control.
Forms skipping and spacing are controlled by a forms control
buffer. The carriage is a dual speed unit for mdls 1, 2, 4 and 5
and single speed for mdl 3. Normal skipping for mdls 1, 2, 4 and
5 Is up to 24" per second with high speed skip of IJP to 55" per
second after 6 lines have passed. The carriage speed for mdl 3 is
up to 18" per second.
A Universal Character Set buffer of 240 positions is standard. Use
of graphics sets from 30 to 240. characters are allowed. Print
speeds vary depending upon frequency of character repetition on
the cartridge. One 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge is required for each 3203 Printer. The 3203 uses the proven train
printing principle of the 1403 mdl N1 and maintains comparable
high quality printing. Additionally, the 3203 has the capability of
producing better copies.
Continuous marginally punched forms are fed by a forms tractor.
Maximum forms dimensions are: Width -- 20 inches; Length - 24
inches. Minimum forms dimensions are: Width -- 3-1/2 inches;
Length - 3 inches. Models 1, 2, 4 and 5 of the 3203 have a
power assisted stacker.
For full flexibility of column location for margins, 17-25/32 inches
maximum width is recommended. If forms greater than 14" in
length are used, rear stacker enclosure must be opened. If forms
greater than 17 inches In length are used, forms compartment
front door must be opened. See SRL GA24-3488, Forms Design
Manual.
Limitations: [1] Only marginally punched, pin fed, continuous
forms can be used. For multiple part forms, it is preferred that
both sides be securely fastened, however, when only one side is
fastened it must be the right side. No staples are permitted in the
print train area .. [2] The 3203 may be used to generate input in
OCR applications ... see "Machines" sections 01] 1287, 1288,
3881 and 3886 for. information on acceptable characters and
printing devices ... [3] Multiple-part forms are not recommended
for OCR printing. The print quality of the top sheet is affected by
the underlying sheets. Under no circumstances should the copy
sheets be used for optical scanning. For best results, use singlepart forms for OCR printing ... [4] Print quality and forms feeding
varies with paper specifications, ribbon and number of copies.
Multiple copy forms of more than four parts and forms with a first
part heavier than 13-pounds' (49 grams/sq. meter) should be
tested under operating conditions to determine that results are
satisfactory for the user's application.
Maximum: Only one 3203 mdl 1 or 2 can be natively attached to
a 5/370 mdl 115 or 125. Only one 3203 mdl 3 can be attached
to a 3777. A maximum of two 3203 mdl 4s can be natively attached to a 5/370 mdl 138 or 148. 3203 mdl 5 is limited only by
the number of control unit positions available on a system channel.
Supplies:
Model 2
Model 3
A 3203-4 Printer Attachment (#8075) for the first
3203 mdl 4 and (#8076) for the second 3203 mdl
4 on the 3138 or 3148.
Model 5
An available control unit position on a system
channel.
Bibliography: S/370 -- GC20-0001, 5/3770 -- GA27-3097
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage for the model 1, 2 or 4.
[2] Color: Models 1, 2 and 4 - #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, #9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. Model 3
-- blue is supplied as standard. Model 5 - white is supplied as
standard on printers shipped from the plant only.
orders
will retain original color.
[3] Train Arrangement: See System/370 and 3777 -- 3203 Printer
in "Type Catalog" and 1416 In "Machines" section for arrangements and required feature numbers.
[4] System Attachment: Specify #9501 for 5/370 mdl 115 Adapter, or #9502 for 5/370 mdl 125 Adapter or #9503 for the
first 3203 mdl 4 on 5/370 mdl 138 or mdl 148 and #9504 for
the second 3203 mdl 4 on 5/370 mdl 138 or mdl 148.
[51 First 3203 Model 5 Installed: #9190 ... required on the first
rental 3203 mdl 5 to be installed at a customer installation.
This provides a tool kit required for CE maintenance. Additional tool kits are available if required for a multiple machine
installation. When installed rental 3203 mdl 5s are purchased,
a tool kit can be ordered
no-charge
·for each printer
requiring one.
[6] OCR: When OCR ribbons are used for either OCR printing or
other applications, specify #9488. FIELD INSTALLATION Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
3203
1
MAC/
MRC
$1,035
1;357
1,058
1,357
1,475
2
3
4
5
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$
881
1,155
900
1,155
1,255
Purchase
MMMC
$27,360
35,280
28,800
35,280
38,320
$238
310
252
310
340
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: B
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Metering: I/O Unit (onlin)
Purchase Option: 40%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Add\tloR,al Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Can be made in the field between models 1, 2, 4
and 5.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges.)
From Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $16,000
From Model 2 to Model 4 ..... $ 9,750
From Model 4 to Model 5 ..... $19,500
Model upgrades of mdls 1 to 4, 1 to 5, or 2 to 5 require multiple
orders. Prices are additive.
SPECIAL FEATURES
SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#6360). [Model 3 Only] Provides capability to operate the 3203 mdl 3 at 1200 Ipm. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Print Speed Enhancement (#5595) on the 3777.
Field Installation: Yes.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Speed Enhancement
#6360
$59
$50
$2,000
NC
IBM 3210 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARD
ribbons
Prerequisites: A 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge is required
for each 3203. In addition, the fOllowing are required, depending
upon the 3203 model.
Model 1
Model 4
An Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650) on
the 3115 or 3125. In addition, on the 3115 only,
Integrated 3203/5203 Printer Prerequisite (#4653)
is required. On the 3115 and 3125, specify #9770
for 3203 mdl 1.
#4650 on the 3115 or 3125. In addition, on the
3115 only, #4653 is required. On the 3115 and
3125, specify #9771 for 3203 mdl 2.
A 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 1, 2 or 3.
Purpose: Selectric@ console typewriter for "Use as an input
(keyboard) and output (printer) unit for a 5/370 mdl 135, 135-3.
145. 145-3 or 155.
Model 1
For mounting on the console table reading board.
Model 2
For remote use ... not available for the 5/370 mdl
135. 135-3. 138.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Both models consist of a Selectric keyboard printer.
Model 1 is to be mounted on the 3135. 3135-3. 3145. 3145-3 or
3155 reading board ... Model 2 Is supplied with a stand which can
be located up to 75 feet from the processor. For the mdl 1. a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- -- ----.:...::: == ==
M 3210-3211
May 79
~
DP Machines
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard (cont'd)
forms rack is supplied with the system. A forms rack is standard
with the mdl 2.
In both models, the keyboard and printer operate independently
under program control. The general facilities provided are: direct
data entry into the system, printed output from the system, and
switches and lights for system control.
The keyboard on both models is similiar to other Selectric typewriters. However, it provides only those functions useful and necessary in a system console. Functions such as tab, tab set and
clear, backspace, ribbon shift and end-of-line bell are not included. On model 1, keys and lights are provided so that the operator
can "display and alter" processor storage and system control
information.
The printer for both models has an 88-character data set and a
125-character print line. It operates at a rated speed of 15.5
characters/second, has a stationary carriage, and an interchangeable print element. A 15-inch carriage provides a 12-1/2" writing
line at 10 characters/inch. A 6 lines/inch pin feed platen (131/8" pin-to-pin) is standard. A maximum of an original and five
carbon copies can be prepared, depending upon paper, carbon
quality and thickness. A Data Font 1, dual case printing element is
provided ... see page TC 22 in "Type Catalog" section for character layout.
Limitation: One of each model can be attached to a system ...
Model 1 cannot be attached if a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard is
installed.
PREREQUISITES: Model 1 -- requires a 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter
(#7844) on the 3135, 3135-3, 3145, 3145-3 or 3155 Processing
Unit. Model 2 -- requires a 3210 Mdl 2 Adapter (#7845) on the
3145, 3145-3 or 3155 Processing Unit.
Bibliography: S/370 -- GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): [Mdl 2 only] #9901 for 115 V, #9902 for 208 V. or #9904 for 230 V.
PRICES:
Mdl
3210
1
2
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
$ 196
201
$ 179
183
$ 5,935
6,100
MMMC
$146
155
Plan Offering: Plan B or Term Lease Plan
Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 35% t
Per Call: 3
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
IBM 3211
PRINTER
affected by the underlying sheets. Under no circumstances should
the copy sheets be used for optical scanning. For best results. use
20-24 Ib Bond in single-part forms for OCR printing. OCR forms
utilizing other papers should be tested for satisfactory results with
user requirements. When reading 3211 documents on the 3886.
Reread On Reject capability and 3211/5211 Compatibility
(#9701) should be used on the 3886.
For preprinted forms having print position 1 more than 1.3"
(33.02mm) from the left edge. electronic indexing will be needed
... see GA24-3543. For layout dimensions. see GA24-3488. For
forms sets that vary in thickness in excess of 0.003" (0.0762mm)
across the width or length of the form. see GA24-3488.
The 3211 may be used to generate input in OCR applications ...
see "Type Catalog." 3216 Interchangeable Train Cartridge section
for printable OCR characters. The OCR Print Package (#5450) is
a prerequisite for OCR applications.
For 3211 Printer diagnostic support, OLTEP facilities are required
under DOS or OS. Stand alone diagnostics require 32K storage
and a disk or tape.
Arrays of less than 27 characters should not be used on the 3211
Printer.
Paper form crimp should be on the left side of the form ... see
Forms Design Consideration for System Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. 3-phase, 4-wire. 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V. or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3J Kickstrips: #9350. if desired ... also available
When
kickstrips are installed, the open area underneath the machine
is enclosed. They reduce the amount of "toe-room" and may
be inconvenient to the user if the power outlet is located beneath the machine.
[4] Required for use in OCR printing:
Features" below.
#5450 ... see "Special
[SJ Tool Kit: #9710 (standard) or #9711 (OCR). Required for CE
maintenance. For Rental Customer -- Specify #9710 on first
3211 without OCR Print Package (#5450) ordered for a customer; Specify #9711 on first 3211 with #5450 ordered for a
customer. If required for a multiple machine instal/ation, an
additional Tool Kit(s) is available
no-charge
For Purchase Customer -- Specify #9710 on each 3211 without
#5450 machine order: Specify #9711 on each 3211 with
#5450 machine order. When instal/ed rental 32115 are purchased, a Tool Kit is to be ordered on no-charge
for each
machine.
- FTP/Purpose: Printed output unit for a S/360 mdl 22. 30. 40, 50, 65,
67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85. 195. any S/370 Processor (except 3115
or 3125). or any 4300 Processor.
Highlights: 2.000 Ipm rated speed for nine equal and like arrays
of 48 character sets. Other speeds are obtained when using other
character arrays repeated with different frequencies. The Universal
Character Set capability is standard. Also, 3216 Interchangeable
Train Cartridge must be specified. This allows maximum flexibility
in train layout to obtain speed for varying character sets.
The 3211 Printer has 132 print positions as standard. 18 additional pOSitions are available as a special feature. Horizontal spacing
is 10 characters per inch. Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines per inch
under program control. Continuous marginally punched form spacing and skipping is controlled by a Forms Control Buffer. a standard feature of the 3811. This program controlled buffer allows
skipping at 30 inches per second with a high speed skip of 90
inches per second after 7 lines have passed. Maximum form
length is 22.5 inches at 8 lines per inch and 24 inches at 6 lines
per inch. Form width may vary from 3.5 inches to 18.75 inches.
Minimum form length is 3 inches. A pair of guides may be purchased for use with forms having a fanfold depth greater than 1 8"
... see M 10000 pages for ordering. The 3211 is used in Optical
Character Recognition applications when equipped with the OCR
Print Package feature. A powered stacker helps refold the forms
after they are printed.
PREREQUISITES: [1] One 3811 Printer Control Unit for each
3211 Printer ... see 3811 for attachment details. [2] One 3216
Interchangeable Train Cartridge for each 3211 Printer '" see 3216
for details.
PRICES:
Mdl
3211
MAC/
MRC
MLC
1 Yr'
Purchase MMMC
$2,000 $1,840 $1,680 $50,900
$533
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 40%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)(meters 3811)
Warranty: B
Useful Ufe Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in Lieu of AU Charge: 10%
SPECIAL FEATURES
OCR PRINT PACKAGE' (#5450),
Provides additional Manual
Operator Platen Controls - required for OCR applications. Field
Installation: Yes. on machines with serial number above 10081.
Available at time of manufacture only for machines with serial
numbers below 10082. Prerequisite: Tool Kit (#9711) ... see
"Specify . ..
PRINT POSITIONS, 18 ADDITIONAL (#5554),
positions from 1 32 to 1 50. Operation of the 3211
unchanged. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
18 Additional (#5553) on the 3811 Printer Control
Increases print
Printer remains
Print Positions.
Unit.
--- FTP/ --MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC I Yr- 2 Yr Purchase
Special Feature Prices:
OCR Print Package
Print Pos. 18 Add'l
#5450
5554
$856
63
limitations: Form sets of more than four parts should be tested
for density of the last copies. Multiple-part forms are not recommended for OCR printing. The print quality of the top sheet is
• FTP = 12-23 months.
t
MLC
2 Yr
Pnrcbase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
SUC
$58
$53
$ 816
2,050
MMMC
NC
$10.50
---- - =':" =
=- =
----- ------- ---
M 3213-3216
May 79
OP Machines
Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and
limitations.
IBM 3213 CONSOLE PRINTER
Purpose: Printer for use with display console on a S/370 mdl
158, or with the service processor on the 3168-3.
Highlights: Prints serially at a maximum rate of 85 cps. The maximum print line is 126 print positions at 10 characters/inch. Matrix
characters are formed by 7 vertical wires, each printing a dot in
up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. Prints the 88 graphics
of PTTC/EBCO.
The unit has a pin feed platen. One size should be specified, 120
positions, or 126 positions .. , see "Specify." Marginally punched
continuous forms paper can be fed. Maximum forms width is
13-1/8" (hole-to-hole). Up to six part forms can be printed with a
maximum thickness of .018". Forms length can be 3" to 14" in
increments of 1/6". Line spacing is 6 lines/inch. A Line Feed
Select lever allows manual selection of single or double spacing.
Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and
limitations.
Basic functions include fixed margins (dependent on platen size
ordered), space, carriage return, line feed, and new line.
An optional forms stand is available ... see "Special Features."'
PREREQUISITE: A 3213 Printer Adapter (#7840) on the 3158
Processing Unit, or a 3213 Integrated Printer Attachment (#7850)
on the 3168-3 Processing Unit.
The keyboard is typewriter style with the top row of keys used for
numerics and special characters. Functional keys and lights are
located to the right and left for easy operator usage. Keys and
lights are provided so that the operator can "display and alter"
processor storage and system control information.
Basic functions include fixed margins (dependent on platen size
ordered), space, carrier -return, line feed, and new line. A forms
stand is supplied with the system.
PREREQUISITE: A 3215 Adapter (#7855) on the 3135, 3135-3,
3145, 3145-3 or 3155 Processing Unit.
Limitation: Cannot be installed
Keyboard mdl 1 is installed.
[2] Pin Feed Platen: #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2"
hole-to-hole), or #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8" holeto-hole). NOTE: Do not order #9167 unless paper is available
in your area.
PRICES
Mdl
3213
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 235
$ 214
$7,635
$105
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2" holeto-hole). NOTE: Do not order #9167 unless paper is available
in your area.
SPECIAL FEATURES
FORMS STAND STACKER (#4450).
[Purchase only] Permits
placement of continuous forms (out of carton) on the stand above
floor level and provides for continuous forms stacking and printing.
Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Mdl
3215
MAC/
MRC
TLPI
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 224
$ 204
$ 8,990
$82.50
Plan Offering: Plan B or Term Lease Plan
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%t
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
IBM 3216 INTERCHANGEABLE TRAIN CARTRIDGE
Plan Offering: Plan B or Term Lease Plan
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%t
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Forms Stand Stacker
Printer-
Bibliography: GC20-0001
PRICES:
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Console
Supplies: Sefial No. 12000 and below a black ribbon, IBM Part
No. 1136906 or equivalent, is recommended
Serial No. 12001 and above a black ribbon, IBM Part No.
1136970 or equivalent. is recommended
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136970 or equivalent, is
recommended
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
if a 3210
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
#4450 NIA
$
54
NC
Purpose: A cartridge and print train which provides interchangeability of type font for the 3211 Printer.
Highlights: At least one 3216 is required when running a 3211
Printer. OCR type styles are available.
Interchangeability: When multiple 3216s are available, they can
be interchanged by the operator, providing flexibility for printing
different type fonts, type styles or character arrangements. Character sets up to 254 characters can be provided for unique reqUirements.
PREREQUISITE: The 3216 functions only when mounted in a 3211
Printer.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360. S/370 - GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Print Train Arrangement -- see "Type Catalog" for
characters in each standard arrangement and feature #s to be
specified.
[2] Storage Container: #9668, if needed for the 3216 ... recommended for storage use, when multiple 3216s are ordered for a
single 3211.
IBM 3215 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARD
Purpose: Printer-Keyboard for console I/O in a S/370 mdl 135,
135-3, 145, 145-3 or 155.
PRICES:
Mdl
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3216
1
$ 411
$10,530
268
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Maintenance: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 30%
Hl9hllghts: Prints serially at a maximum rate of 85 cps. The maximum print line is 126 print positions at 10 characters/inch spacing. Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires, each printing a dot in up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. Prints the
88 graphics of PTTC/EBCD similiar to the graphics shown on
page TC 22 for the 3210 mdl 1 and 2.
The unit has a pin feed platen, one size should be specified, 120
positions, or 126 positions ... see "Specify."' Marginally punched
continuous forms paper can be fed. Maximum forms width is
13-1/8" (hole-to-hole). Up to six part forms can be printed with a
maximum thickness of .018". Forms length can be 3" to 14" in
increments of 1/6". Line spacing Is 6 lines/inch. A Line Feed
Select lever allows manual selection of single or double spacing.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._-----==-=:5?,:
---- -------
M 3251
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3251 DISPLAY STATION
Purpo..: An int~ractive computer graphics display station for the
display of graphical and alphameric data generated within a S/370
or 4300 Procenor. The display station may have attachments for
operator interaction with the displayed picture, thereby providing
highly interactive man-machine communication.
The 3251 requires a 3255 Display Control and a 3258 Control
Unit. It may be used in multiple display station configurations for
Computer Aided Design, Computer Aided Manufacturing and scientific analysis applications. It is particularly suited to those applications requiring a high Interaction rate and the display of pictures
containing a high vector and character content.
Up to two 3251s can be attached to each 3255; the first 3251 must
be sited adjacent to the 3255, the second 3251 may be located up to
15.2 m (50 feet) from the 3255. Up to four 3255s may be attached to each channel attached 3258; each 3255 may be located
up to 1525 m (5000 feet) from the 3258.
Highlights:
- A free standing, tabletop mounted, Interactive computer graphics display station for the display of graphical and alphameric
data generated within a S/370 or 4300 Processor.
- A 534 mm (21 inch) diagonal, directed beam, display unit
having a 305 mm x 305 mm (12" x 12") viewing area.
- Vector graphics - straight lines may be displayed between any
of the 1024 x 1024 addressable positions on the screen. DIsplay buffer orders are provided which enable the expression of
vector endpoint coordinates in absolute form or incrementally,
relative to the current beam position.
- Graphical data can be displayed as a series of points (Point
Plot orders), or in one of four line types: - solid, dotted,
dashed, dot-dashed (Vector Plot orders).
- Improved quality character set comprising both upper and
lower case can be displayed either horizontally or vertically
(90 degrees counterclockwise) In any of four ~izes.
- Eight programmable intensities (Including blank) for points,
vectors or characters; the three brightest levels can be detected by the light pen.
- Audible and villible (blink) alerts which can be programmed to
notify the display station operator of exceptional conditions.
- Free standing Alphanumeric Keyboard ... see Special Features.
- Backlighted 32 key Program Function Keyboard ... see Special
Features.
- Light Pen ... see Special Features.
- The 3250 is generally upward compatible from the IBM 2250
Graphic Display model 3. Valid programs written for the 2250
can be used on the 3250 without change, with minor exceptions:
- 3250 supports one cursor per display station.
- Some previously undefined orders have a defined function in
the 3250.
- Lower case characters are displayed as lower case by the
3250.
- 3250 does nct have Program Function Keyboard overlay
sense switches.
- 3250 shares display buffers among a maximum of two display stations.
- Undefined characters in 3250 text strings are treated as
blanks or nulls.
- Software support via Graphic Programming Services (GPS),
(which Includes the Graphic Access Method (GAM), and Graphic Subroutine Package (GSP). These are SCP programs running under OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 operating systems.
Human Factors: The 3251 has an antiglare screen designed to
reduce reflection in office lighting. Brightness and focus controls
are provided for operator adjustment to best suit ambient lighting.
Program Function Keyboard angled for operator convenience ...
see Special Features Low profile Alphanumeric Keyboard has
separators to help prevent accidental striking of control keys. It
also has a palm rest on the keyboard ... see Special Features. The
keyboards are free standing to allow placement to suit the operator.
Input-output Flexibility:
- Alphanumeric Keyboard with upper and lower case input,
Cancel, Jump, Backspace, and Enter function keys,
continuous-type key ... see Special Features. Input assisted by
provision of visible cursor on the screen and display buffer
orders enabling. definition of fields either protected or unprotected from operator input.
- Program Function Keyboard with 32 backlighted keys. Lighting
of keys is under S/370 or 4300 Processor program control ...
see Special Features.
- Light Pen; hand held, pen-like device for interaction with the
displayed image ... see Special Features.
Performance: Basic performance characteristics:
• Vector draw speed of 8890 m (350,000 inches) per second,
I.e., 34 microseconds for 305 mm (12 inch) screen deflection.
- Vector move speed of 22 microseconds for 305 mm (12 Inch)
screen defiectlon.
• Character draw average speed of 4.2 microseconds for a
BASIC size character [height 4.1 mm (0.16 inches)].
The amount of data displayable depends on many factors, Including the mix of vectors and characters. With one 3251 attached to
a 3255, then at 40 cycles per second regeneration rate, at least
the following can be displayed:
Either - 9,500 Incremental vectors of 9.5 mm (0.375 inches),
or - 2,150 Absolute vectors of 76 mm (3 inches),
or - 5,250 BASIC size characters (average mix).
With two 3251s attached to a 3255 the performance is slightly
less than half that shown above.
When the 3251 displays images at a regeneration rate of 40
cycles per second the picture quality is superior to that of images
displayed by the IBM 2250 Display Unit model 3 at 40 cycles per
second. As the picture content is reduced the regeneration rate
increases up to a maximum of 46 cycles per second.
The High-Speed Link transfers data between the 3258 Control Unit
and the 3255 Display Control at a maximum rate of 1M bits per
second.
PREREQUISITES: A 3255 Display Control adjacent or up to 15.2m
(50 feet) away ... maximum of two 32518 per 3255 ... see 3255.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Power (AC, 1-phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, #9888 for 230 V. Nonlock plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, #9887 for
230 V. A 3251 must be connected to the same supply phase
as the 3255 to which It is attached.
[2] Power Cable Length: If standard 4.3 meter (14 feet) is not
desired, specify #9511 for 1.8 meter (6 feet) power cable.
[3] Cables: For cables between 3251 and 3255, specify #9071 for
the first head ... for the second head, if appropriate, specify #9071 for
4.6 meters (15 feet), #9072 for 9.1 meters (30 feet), or #9073
for 15.2 meters (50 feet).
PRICES:
Mdl
3251
Purcha.. -
MMMC
$14,650
$79.50
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Machine Group: D
SPECIAL FEATURES
ALPHANUMERIC KEYBOARD (#4621).
Typewriter-like layout,
movable, with data keys and control keys. Maximum: One per
3251. Field Installation: Yes.
LIGHT PEN (#4750). A hand· held, pen· like device which permits the
operator to interact with the displayed image. MIIXhtuun; One per 3251.
Fkld lrutallmiort: Yes.
PROGRAM FUNCTION KEYBOARD (#5555). 32 keys with program controlled Indicators. Maximum: One per 3251. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prlc..:
Purcha.. Alphanumeric Keybd #4621 $ 495
Ligllt Pc.
4750
935
Program Function Kybd 5555
1 ,380
• Pilot Test Plan applies.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MMMC
$3
41
2
M 3255 - 3258
May 79
DP Machi.,..
3258 CONTROL UNIT
IBM 3255 DISPLAY CONTROL
Purpoee: Control unit that provides common control8 and attachments for up to two 3251 Display Ststlon8.
Highlight.:
• Free standing floor mounted unit attached to a 3258 Control
Unit over a coaxial cable high-speed link up to 1525 m (5000
feet) In length. Supports one or two 32518 at dl8tances of up
to 15.2 m (50 feet). Nt*: At /M8I OM 01 tlw 325/" mu.rt be
adjaullt to tlw 3255.
• 32.768 byte uaer-programmable display buffer shared under
S/370 or 4300 Procu&Or software control among the attached
3251 Display Statlon8. Capability for dynamic a88lgnment of
refresh buffer. to 8peclflc 32518. under S/370 or 4300
ProcellOr software control - such a8 18 provided by the
OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 Graphic Acee88 Method (GAM) SCPo
• Eight light pen display buffer orders enabling the creation of
display buffer program8 which perform functlon8 such 88 light
pen track and drag. without recourse to the S/370 or 4300
ProcellOr ... 888 3251.
• Data tran8ferred acroaa 1M bit per second aerial link between
3258 and 3255 ... maximum effective data rate8 approximate
to 100K byte8 per second. depending on me888ge length8.
PREREQUISITES: Control Unit - a channel attached 3258 which
attaches to up to four 32558 via coaxial cable high-speed link up
to 1525 m (5000 feet) long.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SpecIfy: [1] Power CAC. 1-phase. 3 wire. 60 Hz): For locking plug
- #9880 for 11 ~.I_. . . . for 208 V. #Q88e for 230 V. For
non-lock plug - _ 1 for 115 V. #9885 for 208 V. #1887 for
230 V. A 3255 and Its attached 32518 mU8t all be connected
to the same supply phase.
[2] Po_r Cable Length: If 8tandard 4.3 meter (14 feet) 18 not
de8lred. specify . .11 for 1.8 meters (8 feet).
[3] Cable8: Refer to ISM 3250 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning. GA33-3038.
PRICES:
3255
Mdl
1
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Useful Ufe Category: 2
Purch...•
137,200
....Me
1315
Machine Group: A
Purpoee: A channel control unit which supports up to four 3255
Display Control units over high-speed IInk8 up to 1525 m (5000
feet) In length. Each high-speed link 18 a single CU8tomer supplied
coaxial cable of standard specification available from multiple
sources.
Hlghllghta:
• Free 8tandlng floor mounted unit capable of recalvlng data
from a S/370 or 4300 Proceuor channel at rate8 of up to 250K
bytes per second. transmitting data to 3255 Display Control
units over 1M bit per second aerial links ... maximum effective
data rates approximate to 100K bytes per second. depending
on me888ge lengths.
PREREQUISITE: Channel Attachment - a control unit po81t1on on
a 8ystem channel.
Proceuon
ChUM! Type
3115. 3125 .(no DOS/VS
support for 3250)
Byte Multiplexer In burst mode only
Selector
3135
3135-3. 3138, 3145-3, 3148
3145
3155-11,3158
3185-11, 3168
3031.3032.3033
4331.4341
Block
..ultlplexer
X
Selector
SubchanM!
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BIbliography: GC20-0001
Spoclty: [1] Power (AC, 1-phaae, 3 wire. 60 Hz): For locking
plug - #9880 for 115 V, . . . . for 208 V. . . . for 230 V.
For non-lock plug - #1881 for 115 V. #1885 for 208 V,
#1887 for 230 V.
[2] Power Cable Length: If 8tandard 4.3 meter (14 feet) 18 not
desired, specify . .11 for 1.8 meter (8 feet).
[3] Cables: Cables to S/370 or 4300 ProcellOr mU8t be ordered.
See ISM 3260 Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA333038.
[4] System Attachment:
proce880r(8) by specifying the following codes:
ProcetIIOI'
3115
3125
3135
3138
3145
3148
3155
PRICES:
....
Code
8588
8581
8585
8582
8588
8583
Proceeeor
Identify host
Code
3158
3185
3168
3031
ft587
8584
8588
8598
3032
9588
3033
4331
8517
4341
IIdI
3U1
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Useful Ufe Category: 2
• PiJot TOIl ..... appliea.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
~
9tilI7
Purch... •
..lIMe
138,750
S345
Machine Grou{): 0
---- == =-= == ';' 5:
----- -------
M 3262
Mav 7g
DP Machines
IBM 3262 LINE PRINTER
SPECIFY
•
Purpose: Printer output unit for- the 4331 Processor at 650 Ipm
nominal rated speed with a 48-character set. For use with S/38,
see GSD
Manual.
Highlights: A general purpose optimized 64 character print belt 15
available ... see "Specify." The 64-character optimized belt can
provide speeds up to 625 Ipm. Should specific application output
have unusual characteristics and not conform to the 64-character
set optimized print beit, uniform print belts will provide the following nominal rated speeds:
Nominal Rated Speed
48-character set
64-character set
96-character set
650lpm
4671pm
3641pm
132 print positions are standard. Horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch. Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines per inch under
system control. Forms skipping and spacing are program controlled. The carriage is a single speed unit allowing skipping up to
508mm (20") per second. Continuous forms are fed by a forms
tractor which accepts forms of up to a maximum of 406.4mm
(16") wide. See Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers,
GA24-34Ba for forms design considerations. A 288-character
Universal Character Set Buffer is standard.
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug.
Power Cord: If standard 2.8 meter (9 foot) power cord is not
desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cord, #9512 for
3.7 meter (12 foot) cord, or #9513 for 4.6 meter (15 foot)
cord.
Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
•
Print Belt Character Set: Specify one feature number for
character set size and specify one feature number for character set height. When printing at 8 Ipi, the 2.0mm (.079") character height is recommended. Two print belts (each with the
same feature numbers) will be shipped with thl! printer. The
second belt will be a spare for use by the customer as a backup. When the customer installs this back-up beit, a replacement should be ordered
, and the platen rotated as
described In the instructions. provided with the printer. The
customer will be billed at the current accessory belt price. If
the customer desires to have IBM Customer Engineering repiace or Install the print belt, the CE time Involved will be
billed to the customer. Field Installation: Available at time of
manufacture only. If additional print belts are required, see
"Accessories" below and "Print Belt, Additional" In the M
1 0000 pages.
Specify No,
#9520
#9522
#9523
#9526·
Limitations:
1.
Only pin fed, continuous forms can be used.
2.
Both edges of the forms must be fastened in the forms tractor.
3.
No staples are permitted in the areas exposed to the interchangeable print belt.
4.
5.
Printer operation and print quality vary with paper and number of copies. Forms sets of more than four parts should be
tested in operating conditions to verify that results are satisfactory.
Maximum forms thickness is .51 mm (.020").
Maximum: Up to two 3262 mdl 15 can be attached to a 4331
Processor ... see standard Display/Printer Adapter under 4331.
Prerequisite: A position on the standard Display/Printer Adapter
of the 4331.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily. understood
and used by the operator. See "Customer Responsibilities" below.
Customer Set-up (CSU): The 3262 mdl 1 is designated as
"Customer Set-up" thereby offerino the customer early availability
and relocation flexibility.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking and
placement of the 3262 mdl 1.
Physical set-up, connection of cables, SWitch settings and
checkout.
•
Notifying IBM of intent to relocate and following IBM instructions for relocation.
Usin9 and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service.
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping dock at time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions
will be provided by IBM.
Replacing a worn print belt with the spare provided and rotating the piaten per the instructions provided with the printer.
Supplies:
required.
A black ribbon. Part No. 7819690, or equivalent, is
Character Set Size
48-character
64-character
64-character
96-character
set
set
set
set
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
EBCDIC (optimized)
EBCDIC
'available only with 2.4mm character height (#9950)
Specify No.
Character Set Height
2.0mm (.079")
2.4mm (.095")
#9951
#9950
Cables: The customer 15 responsible for procurement, Installation and maintenance of the coaxial signal cable. See M
10000 pages for cable prices and ordering instructions.
Color: Background color is pearl white. One color accent
panel must be specified. #9080 for willow green, #9061 for
garnet rose, #9062 for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue,
#9064 for charcoai brown, or #9065 for pebble gray.
Mdl
MRC
$411
3262
MLC
2 Yr
$350
Purchase
MMMC/
AMMCR
$14,000
$150
Plan Offering: Plan D
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature Number
indicated below. See M 10000 pages for prices, additional information, and field installation.
Print Belt, Additional - permits the customer to obtain more than
one character set print belt. Installation and replacement of these
print belts is the customer's responsibility. If the customer desires
to have IBM Customer Engineering replace or install the print belt,
the CE time will be billed to the customer.
When ordering, indicate one feature number for character set
size and one feature number for character height.
Feature No. Character Set Size
#5940
48-character EBCDIC
64-character EBCDIC (optimized)
#5946
64-character EBCDIC
#5944
96-character EBCDIC
#5948 •
, Available only with 2.4mm character height (#5950).
Feature No. Character Set Height
#5951
#5950
2.0 mm (.079")
2.4 mm (.095")
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ------ ------_.-----3271
M 3271.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
CONTROL UNIT Model 1 and 2
Purpose: Provides control and multiplexing capabilities for a
cluster of 3277 Display Stations, 3284, 3286, 3287 Printers and
3288 Line Printers. The 3271 communicates with S/360 mdl 25,
30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85, 195 or any S/370
Processor via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, 2703 Transmission
Control or, except for S/360 mdls 25 or 85, a 3704 or 3705
Communications Controller on half-duplex communications facilities
using binary synchronous transmission. The 3271 communicates
with the 4300 Processors via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or a 3704
or 3705 Communications Controller, and with the 4331 Processor
via the Communications Adapter. NOTES: (1) See the 3704 and
3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for
attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming
pages for possible restrictions to any Of the above attachments.
(2) 3288 mdl 2 attaches only to a 3271 mdl 2.
NOTE: For possible use with System/3, S/360 mdl 20 or 1130,
see GSD
Manual.
Model 1 For attachment of 3277 Display Station mdl 1s (480
characters), 3284 Printer mdl 1 s, 3286 Printer mdl 1 s
and 3287 Printer mdl 1 sand 2s. The basic unit
provides attachment of up to four devices at
transmission speeds of 2000 or 2400 bps. NOTE: One
3277 mdl 1 must be installed with the basic 3271
the remaining three devices may be any combination of
3277 mdl 1 s, 3284 mdl 1 s, 3286 mdl 1 sand 3287
mdl 1 sand 2s.
Model 2 For attachment of 3277 Display Station mdl 2s (1,920
characters), 3277 mdl 1 s (480 characters), 3284
Printer mdl 1 sand 2s, 3286 Printer mdl 1 sand 2s,
3287 Printer mdl 1 sand 2s, and 3288 Line Printer mdl
2s. The basic unit provides attachment of up to four
devices at transmission speeds of 2000 or 2400 bps.
NOTE: One 3277 mdl 2 must be installed with the
basic 3271 '" the remaining three devices may be any
combination of 3277 mdl 1 sand 2s, 3284 mdl 1 sand
2s, 3286 mdl 1 sand 2s, 3287 mdl 1 sand 2s, and
3288 mdl 2s.
Highlights: Up to thirty-two devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s
and 3288s) may be attached in increments of four devices by
adding up to seven Device Adapters (# 3250)
see "Special
Features."
Efficient communications facility utilization by means of Compacted
Data (blank suppression and modified data transmission), program
tab, and character addressing.
The 3271 may be multidropped on the same facility with other
BSC devices (1800, 2715, 2770, 2780, 3271, 3275 or 3780) as
tributary stations on a multipoint line with a S/360 mdl 22-195
(except mdl 44) or any S/370 or 4300 Processor as a control
station.
Communications with a S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138 can
be made via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) or
(#1601) on the 4331
Processor and appropriate binary
synchronous features on the 3115, 3125, 3135 or (#1601) on the
4331 Processor as well as via a 2701, 2703, 3704 or 3705.
Display Exception Monitoring Facility (DEMF), a software tool for
network problem determination/ isolation enhances the availability
and serviceability of the 3271 in BSC mode. See DEMF in the
Programming/SCP sections for OS/VS1 and OS/VS2.
Communications Facilities: The 3271 operates in half-duplex
mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 1200,
2000 or 2400 bps on facilities 03, 04 or X1 M via the 2701, 2703,
3704,3705, or #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3~35, 3135-3 or 3138, or
(#1601) on the 4331 Processor. using binary synchronous
transmission. The 3271 operates in haif-duplex multipoint mode on
duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 1200, 2000, 2400 or
4800 bps on facilities D3, 04, 05, Xl M or X2M via the 2701,
2703, 3704, 3705, #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135, 3135-3 or
3138, or (#1601) on the 4331 Processor, using binary
synchronous transmission. Half-duplex multipoint operation on
duplex facilities at 7200 bps on facility 06 is also available on the
2701, 3704, 3705, or #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135, 3135-3 or
3138, or (#1601) on the 4331 Processor, using binary
synchronous transmission. See M 2700 pages for facilities.
Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to any model of a
3271. Prerequisite: Transmission Speed (#7821) required for
speeds over 2400 bps.
Modem
Speed (bps)
(non-switched)
Modem
Speed (bps)
(non_switched)
3872 mdl 1
2400
3874 mdl 1
4800/2400
3863 mdl1
2400/120()
3864 mdll
4S00/2400
3875 mdl 1
7200
Switched network backup operation is available on the 3872 mdl
1, 2374 and 3875. 4·wire switched network backup operation is
availahle "n the 38li3 mdl J and 3864 mdl 1. For communications
capabilities, product utilization and special features, see M 2700,
3Sli3, 38M, 3872. 3874, 3875 pages.
PREREQUISITES: Transmission via communications facility to a
2701, 2703, 3704, 3705, or #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135,
3135-3, 3138 or (#1601) on 4331 Processor. See M 2700
pages.
One 3277 with keyboard must be installed on each 3271 on a
model for model basis as a diagnostic aid. That is, 3277 mdl 1 on
3271 mdl 1. or 3277 mdl 2 on 3271 mdl 2.
Systems 360/370 or 4300 Processor availability will be restricted
unless the using system provides sufficient core to allow
diagnostic programs (OL Ts) to be executed. For details associated
with the required additional core sizes, see the appropriate SRL
(TCAM, BTAM, and VTAM).
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
-- #9880 for 115 V. #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V.
[2] Cables: Cable to attach modem must be ordered. See M
10000 pages for prices and ordering instructions for cables
from 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and 3288s. Also see 3270
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC27-2787.
[3] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) by specifYing the following codes;
Note: For System/3 Specify codes, see GSD
manual.
Host Processor
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S /360
S/370
S/370
S /370
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
Code
Host Processor
#9571
25
30
9572
9573
40
9575
50
9576
65
67
9577
9578
75
9579
85
9580
195
115
9589
9586
125
135, 135-3 9581
Code
S/370 mdl 138
#9595
S/370 mdl 145, 145-3 9582
S/370 mdl 148
9596
S/370 mdl 155
9583
S/370 mdl 158
9587
9584
S/370 mdl 165
9588
S/370 mdl 168
3031 Processor
9599
9598
3032 Processor
9597
3033 Processor
4331 Processor
9606
4341 Processor
9607
[4] Transmission Code: Specify one of the following; #9761 -- for
EBCDIC Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture
only) ... utilizes 8-bit EBCDIC code over the transmission
facilities used in conjunction with EBCDIC, APL and TN
characters, special feature #1066 on the 3277-2, 3284-2,
3286-2, 3287-1, 2 ... with EBCDIC Character Set (#9089) on
the 3277, 3284, 3286, 3288, or EBCDIC Character Set
(#9082) on the 3287-1, 2. #9762 -- for ASCII Transmission
Code (available at time of manufacture only) ... utilizes 8-bit
ASCII code over the transmission facilities ... used in
conjunction with the ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B)
(#9092) on the 3277, 3284, 3286 or 3288, or ASCII Character
Set (B) (#9084) on the 3287 mdl 1 or 2.
PRICES:
Mdl
3271
1
MAC/
MRC
$ 155
169
2
MLC
2 yr
$ 132
144
Purchase
MMMC
$4,735
5,240
$17.50
19.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60% Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field Install able.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
11
2
To
1
$
694
$2,505
2
12
$3,200
2,505
Notes: An RPO must be requested if the ASCII code is required
on the model 11 or 12. The Data Analysis-APL Feature is
precluded from ASCII controllers.
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA ANALYSiS-APL FEATURE (#1066),
[mdl 2 only]
Accommodates APL characters and TN train (see Type Catalog,
S/370 Printers) characters. These, in addition to EBCDIC (dual
case only) characters, may be transmitted between either S/370
or 4300 Processors and selected I/O units of the 3270 System.
Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- --- -- -----== =':' =
M 3271.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3271 Control Unit Mdl 1 and 2
(cont'd)
COpy (#1550),
Provides the ability to transfer the complete
contents of the storage buffer of one device into the storage buffer
of a second device .. , either display or printer. These devices must
share a common control unit. Field Installation: Yes.
Each permits the addition of four
DEVICE ADAPTER (#3250).
devices (3277s, 32845, 3286s. 3287s, 3288s in any combination).
Maximum: Seven ... for a maximum of 32 attached devices. Field
Installation: Yes.
#7820
for
TRANSMISSION SPEED (#7820, 7821).
transmitting over communications facilities at 1200 bps. #7821 -for transmitting at speeds of 4800 or 7200 bps. Clocking provided
by modem. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Data Analysis-APL Fea
Copy
Device Adapter
Transmission Speed
- 1200 bps
- 4800/7200 bps
3271
MACI
MRC
#1066 $ 42
1550 NC
3250 51
7820
7821
MLC
2yr
PurchaseMMMC
$ 36 $ 630$1.50
NC
NC NC
43
779 .50
NC
4
NC
3
NC
145
NC
.50
CONTROL UNIT Model 11 and 12
(Remote Attachment)
Purpose: Provides control and multiplexing capabilities for a
cluster of 3277 Display Stations, 3284, 3286, 3287 Printers, and
3288 Line Printers. The 3271 mdls 11 and 12 communicate with
any S/370 or 4300 Processor via a 3704 or 3705
Communications Controller (or via the Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331. NOTE: These units are not supported by
ACF/VTAME.) on half duplex or duplex communications facilities
using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) transmission.
NOTE: See the 3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming
sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to
Host System Programming pages for possible restrictions to
any of the above attachments.
Model 11
Model 12
For attachment of 3277 Display Station mdl 1 s (480
characters), 3284 Printer mdl 1 s, 3286 Printer mdl
1 sand 3287 Printer mdl 1 sand 2s. The basic unit
provides attachment of up to four devices and will
transmit EBCDIC transmission code at line speeds of
2000 to 9600 bps. NOTE: One 3277 mdl 1 must be
installed with the basic 3271 mdl 11. The remaining
three devices may be any combination of 3277 mdl
1 s, 3284 mdl 1 s, 3286 mdl 1 sand 3287 mdl 1 sand
2s.
For attachment of 3277 Display Station mdl 2s
(1,920 characters), 3277 mdl 1 s (480 characters),
3284 Printer mdl 1 sand 2s, 3286 Printer mdl 1 sand
2s, 3287 Printer mdl I sand 2s, and 3288 Line
Printer mdl 2s. The basic unit provides attachment of
up to four devices and will transmit EBCDIC code at
line speeds of 2000 to 9600 bps. NOTE: One 3277
mdl 2 must be installed with the basic 3271 mdl 12.
The remaining three devices may be any combination
of 3277 mdl 1 sand 2s, 3284 mdl 1 sand 2s, 3286
mdl 1 sand 2s, 3287 mdl 1 sand 2s, and 3288 mdl
2s.
Highlights: Up to thirty-two devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s,
32875, 3288s) may be attached in increments of four devices by
adding up to seven Device Adapters (#3250) ... see "Special
Features."
Efficient communications facility utilization by means of Compacted
Data (blank suppression and modified data transmission), program
tab, character addressing, and Copy Command (transfer of the
contents of the storage buffer of one device to another device).
The 3271 mdls 11 and 12 may be multidropped on the same
communications facility with other SDLC devices on a multipoint or
a duplex-multipoint line with any S/370 or 4300 Processor as a
control station.
Communications Facilities: The 3271 mdls 11 and 12 operate in
half-duplex multipoint mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission
speeds of 1200, 2000 or 2400 bps via the 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor using SDLC
transmission. The 3271 mdls 11 and 12 operate in half-duplex
multipoint or duplex multipoint mode on duplex facilities at
transmissions speeds of 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200 or 9600
bps via the 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331
Processor using SDLC transmission. See M 2700 and M
3704/3705 and 4331 pages.
Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to any model 3271.
Speed (bps)
(non-switched)
Modem
Speed (bps)
(non-switched)
3863 mdl1
3864 mdl1
2400/1200
4800/2400
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
4800
7200
3872 mdl 1
2400
3865 mdl1/2
9600/4800
Modem
Manual switched network backup is available on the 3872, 3874
and 3875. 4-wire switched network backup operation is available on
the 3863 mdl I. 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdls 1 and 2. For
communications capabilities, product utilization and special
features, see M 2700, 3863, 3864, 3865, 3872, 3874 and 3875
pages.
PREREQUISITES: (1) Transmission via communications facility to a
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor
requires a modem. Clocking for 1200 bps is provided by the
32'11. Clocking above 1200 bps is provided by the modem ... (2)
As a diagnostic aid, one 3277 mdl 1 with keyboard or one 3277
mdl 2 with keyboard must be installed on a 3271 mdl 11 or on a
3271 mdl 12 respectively.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC index, G320-1621 or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
-- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V.
[2] Cables: Cable to attach modem must be ordered. See M
10000 pages for prices and ordering instructions for cables
from 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and 3288s. Also see 3270
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
[3] System Attachment: For record purposes, identify the Host
Processor(s) specifying the following:
Host Processor
Code
Host Processor
S/370md1115
#9589
S/370 mdl 125
9586
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3
9581
S/370 mdl 138
9595
S/370 mdl 145, 145-3
9582
S/370 mdl 148
9596
S/370 mdl 155 II
9583
S/370 mdl 158, 158 MP 9587
Code
S/370md116511
#9584
S/370 mdl 168, 168MP 9588
3031 Processor
9599
3032 Processor
9598
3033 Processor
9597
4331 Processor
9606
4341 Processor
9607
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr
3271
11
12
$224
239
$191
203
Purchase
MMMC
$6,440
6,945
$46.50
49.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent; 5%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model 11 to Model 12 ..... $ 694
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA ANALYSIS-APL FEATURE (#1066).
[Mdl 12 only]
Accommodates APL characters and TN train (see Type Catalog',
S/370 Printers) characters. These, in addition to EBCDIC (dual
case only) characters, may be transmitted between S/370 or 4300
Processor and selected I/O units of the 3270 System. Field
Installation: Yes. Note: The Data Analysis-APL Feature is
precluded from ASCII controllers.
ASCII TRANSMISSION CODE (#1200). Utilizes 8-bit ASCII code
over transmission facilities. Used in conjunction with ASCII
Character Set (Al (#9091) or ASCII Charcater Set (B) (#9092) on
the 3277, 3284, 3286, 3288, or ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084)
on the 3287. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
DEVICE ADAPTER (#3250).
Each permits the addition of four
devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s, 3288s in any combiantion).
Maximum: Seven ... for a maximum of 32 attached devices. Field
Installation: Yes.
For transmitting
TRANSMISSION SPEED - 1200 BPS (#7820).
over communications facilities at 1200 bps. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Data Analysis-APL Fea
ASCII Transmission Code
Device Adapter
Trans Speed - 1200 bps
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purch
#1066 $ 42
1200
8
51
3250
7820 Ne
$ 36 $ 630
286
7
43
779
NC
NC
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
MMMC
$1.50
.50
.50
NC
-------- - --=- ==
----- - ---: =
M 3272
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM
3272 CONTROL UNIT
[Local Attachment)
Purpose: Provides the controls and multiplexing capabilities for a
cluster of 3277 Display Stations, 3284, 3286 and 3287 Printers,
and 3288 Line Printers. The 3272 attaches to a S/360 mdl 25,
30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85, 195; or any S/370
Processor via a multiplexer, selector, or block multiplexer channel;
or any 4300 Processor via a byte multiplexer or block multiplexer
channel. NOTES: (1) 3288 mal 2 attaches only to a 3272 mdl 2
... (2) Attachment to a non DCC subchannel of a block multiplexer
channel or to a selector channel is not recommended due to
performance considerations which may yield less than maximum
throughput.
Model 1 For attachment of 3277 Display Station mdl 1 s (480
characters), 3284 Printer malls, 3286 Printer mdl 1 s
and 3287 Printer mdl 1sand 2s. The basic unit
provides for attachment of up to four devices at a data
transfer rate of up to 650,000 characters/second.
NOTE: One 3277 mdl 1 must be installed with the
basic 3272 '" the remaining three devices may be any
combination of 3277 malls and 3284 mdl 1 s, 3286
mdl 1 sand 3287 mdl 1 sand 2s.
Model 2 For attachment of 3277 Display Station mdl 2s (1,920
characters), 3277 malls (480 characters), 3284 and
3286 Printer mdl 1 sana 2s, 3287 mdl 1 sand 2s, and
3288 Line Printer mdl 2s. The basic unit provides for
attachment of up to four devices at a data transfer rate
of up to 650,000 characters/second. NOTE: One 3277
mdl 2 must be installed with the basic 3272 ... the
remaining three aevices may be any combination of
3277 mdl 1 sand 2s, 3284 and 3286 mdl 1 sand 2s,
3287 mdl Is and 2s, and 3288 mdl 2s.
Highlights: Up to thirty-two devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s,
3287s, 3288s) may be attached in increments of four devices by
adding up to seven Device Adapters (#3250) ... see "Special
Features."
Basic features include Compacted Data (blank suppression and
modified data transmission), program tab, and character
addressing.
Display Exception Monitoring Facility (DEMF), a software tool for
network problem determination/isolation enhances the availability
and serviceability of the 3272 in BSC mode. See DEMF in the
Programming/SCP sections for OS/VSl and OS/VS2.
PREREQUISITES: One 3277 with keyboard must be installed on
each 3272 on a model for model basis, as a diagnostic aid. That
is, 3277 mdl 1 on 3272 mdl I, or 3277 mdl 2 on 3272 mdl 2.
Each 3272 requires a control unit position on a system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025; Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channel (special feature) ... see 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of a 2860, basic
multiplexer channel of a 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/360 mdl 85, 195 or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 - selector
channel of a 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector
Subchannels (special features) of 2870, block multiplexer
channel of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V. Must be consistent with
system voltage.
[2) Cables: Cables to S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors must be
ordered. See M 10000 pages for prices and ordering
instructions for cables from 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and
3288s. Also see 3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-2787.
[3)
System Attachment:
processor(s) by specifying the following codes;
Host Processor
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S /360
S/360
S/370
S/370
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
Code
identify
Host Processor
25 #9571
30
9572
40
9573
50
9575
65
9576
67
9577
75
9578
85
9579
195
9580
115
9589
125
9586
host
Code
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3 #9581
S/370 mdl 138
9595
S/370 mdl 145, 145-3 9582
S/370 mdl 148
9596
S/370 mdl 155
9583
S/370 mdl 158
9587
S/370 mdl 165
9584
S/370 mdl 168
9588
3031 Processor
9599
3032 Processor
9598
3033 Processor
9597
4331 Processor
9606
4341 Processor
9607
[4) Operator Console Use: [Mdl 2 only) For record purposes only
use. #9480 - if one 3277 mdl 2 is used as a system operator
console, or #9481 -- if no system operator console is required
for the 3272.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr
3272
1
2
$179
193
$152
164
Purchase
MMMC
$5,465
5,970
$17,50
39,00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 60%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $694
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA ANALYSIS-APL FEATURE (#1066).
[mdl 2 only)
Accommodates APL characters and TN train (see Type Catalog,
S/370 Printers) characters. These, in addition to EBCDIC (dual
case only) characters, may be transmitted between S/370 or 4300
Processor and selected I/O units of the 3270 System. Field
Installation: Yes.
DEVICE ADAPTER (#3250).
Each permits the addition of four
devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s, 3288s in any combination).
Maximum: Seven ... for a maximum of 32 attached devices. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purch
Data Analysis-APL Fea
Device Adapter
#1066 $ 42
3250
51
$ 36 $ 630
43
779
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158 -- byte
multiplexer channel, block multiplexer channel, selector channel
... see 3135,3135-3,3138,3145,3145-3,3148,3155,3158.
3031, 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channel (five are standard) ... see
3031,3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor -- Byte Multiplexer Channel (one is optional),
Block Multiplexer Channel (one is optional). See M 4331 pages.
4341 Processor - Byte Multiplexer Channel (one is standard),
Block Multiplexer Channel (two are standard). See M 4341
pages.
Systems 360/370 or 4300 Processor availability will be restricted
unless the using system provides sufficient core to allow
diagnostic programs (OLTs) to be executed. For details associated
with the required additional core sizes, see the appropriate SRL
(TCAM, BTAM and VTAM).
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
MMMC
$2.50
.50
-- -- --------===::5';'=
-
M 3274.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3274 CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Provides the capability of controlling up to a maximum
cluster of thirty-two terminals consisting of display stations, serial
matrix printers and/or line printers. Two categories of terminal
adapters are .used in attaching the desired displays or printers ...
see terminal attachment list below. The basic 3274 Control Unit
allows attachment of up to eight Category A terminals. The two
categories of terminal adapters can be featured in various combinations to provide the maximum terminal configuration of 32 terminals (a maximum of 16 of the 32 terminals can be Category B
units and at least one Category A Display Station with keyboard is
needed for diagnostic purposes). The 3274 has one model for
communicating in data half duplex mode via half duplex or duplex
communications facilities and three models for local channel attachment.
Note: For use with System/3, see GSD
Manual.
ATTACHABLE TERMINALS
Category A Terminals
3278 mdl 1, 2, 3, 4, 5·
3287 mdl 1, 2
3289 mdl 1, 2
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
1,
1,
1,
1,
2
2
2
2
2
The 3274 can communicate with a S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors by local channel attach or remotely via communicationS
facilities. The channel attached control unit is available in three
models: Model 1A for SNA operation with extended data stream
handling capabilities, model 1B for 3272 operation, and model 10
for 3272 operation with extended data stream handling capabilities. The model 1 C can operate with extended data stream handling capabilities as either a Binary Synchronous Communications
3271 or as an SNA/SDLC unit. One feature diskette and two
systems
diskettes
are
shipped
with
each
3274.
An
Encrypt /Decrypt feature diskette is also shipped with the
Encrypt/Decrypt (#3680) feature on a 3274 mdl lC.
The flexibility of 3274 Control Units enables the user to configure a
display sub-system for initial requirements, and later change hardware
and functions to meet future needs. Function configurability is attained
through a Configuration Support option via feature and system diskettes.
As part of the installation procedure, a customized system diskette
is generated. The generation process is accomplished by the
customer keying in system configuration parameters. A unique
configuration table is written on the system diskette along with the
necessary control code to accomplish the functions. For example,
during subsequent control unit loading or initialization of a Model
1 C, BSC or SNA/SDLC mode of operation is determined by the
configuration recorded on the system diskette used. It is possible
to create two different system diskettes; one to be used for BSC
(3271 compatible) operation and the other to be used when operating SNA/SDLC.
Display Station
Printer
Line Printer
Category B Terminals
3277
3284
3286
3287
3288
driven a maximum of 610 meters (2000 feet). Both catergories of
terminals attach to their respective Terminal Adapter by the same
type coaxial cable and connectors which are used between a
3271 or 3272 Control Unit and its display or printer terminals.
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Li ne Pri nter
, Model 5 cannot a/lach to a 3274 mdl lB.
Model 1 A -- for local (SNA version) attachment, via a byte multiplexer, selector or 'block multiplexer channel, to S/370 mdls 115
through 168 MP, 3031, 3032 and 3033 Processors, or any 4300
Processor via a byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel.
Model 1 B -- for local (3272 version) attachment, via a byte multiplexer, selector, or 'block multiplexer channel, to S/370 mdls
115 through 195, a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, S/360 mdls
30, 40, 50, 65, 75 and 195, or any 4300 Processor via a byte
multiplexer or block multiplexer channel.
Note: 'Attachment to a non DCC subchannel of a block multiplexer channel or to a selector channel is not recommended
due to performance considerations which may yield less than
maximum throughput.
Model 1C - for communicating in data half duplex mode over half
duplex or duplex communication facilities with the following:
S/370 mdls 115 through 168 MP and 3031, 3032, 3033 or
4300 Processors -- via 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller (or the Communications Adapter feature on the 4331. Note:
These units are not supported by ACF/VTAME.) using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC/SNA).
S/370 mdls 115 through 195 and 3031,3032,3033 or 4300
Processors -- via (where applicable) a 2701 Data Adapter Unit,
2703 Transmission Control, a 3704 or 3705 Communications
Controller, or a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331,
using Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC).
S/370 mdls 115, 125, 135 and 138 - via an Integrated Communications Adapter (lCA) using Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC).
S/360 mdls 30, 40, 50, 65, 75 and 195 - via a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit, 2703 Transmission Control, 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller using Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC).
Model 1 D -- for local (3272 version) attachment, via a byte multiplexer, selector or 'block multiplexer channel, to virtual storage
S/370 models 115 thru 168MP, 3031, 3032 and 3033 Processor,
or any 4300 Processor via a byte multiplexer or block multiplexer
channel.
, Note: Attachment to a non-DCC subchannel of a block multiplexer channel or to a selector channel is not recommended
due to performance considerations which may yield less than
maximum throughput.
Highlights: The 3274 Control Unit is a terminal control unit which
can attach up to thirty-two displays, serial matrix printers and/or
line printers. These terminals are grouped into two categories.
The Category A terminals are a display and printers which were
developed for allachment to the 3274 Control Unit, while the Category B terminals were designed for attachment to the 3271 and
3272 Control Units. The 3274 Control Unit was designed to attach
the Category B terminals with certain limitations. A maximum of
sixteen of the thirty-two attachable terminals can be Category B
terminals. Category A terminals can be driven up to a maximum of
1500 meters (4920 feet), while Category B terminals can only be
The control unit is initialized with control code and configuration
parameters as a result of Power On or by pressing the IML pushbutton. The load occurs from an integrated diskette drive using
the previously customized system diskette. The loading process
starts with the execution of extended tests contained on the diskette.
The character set to be used on attached terminals is specified on
the customized IML diskette during installation procedure. All
attached terminals must have the same character set. Either
EBCDIC or ASCII transmission code may be selected when customizing a diskette for a 3274 mdl 1C that will employ the BSC
mode of operation. ASCII support of the data bytes in Function
Management Data Request/Response Units may be selected when
customizing diskettes for 3274 mdl 1 C, for all 3270 data streams
(except SCS and APL/Text applications). ASCII support (BSC) is
provided to correspond with the transmission code that is used by
the central processing system.
Detailed information for initial customizing,for customizing made
necessary by changing configurations, and for optionally updating
the diskettes, is contained in the IBM 3270 Information Display
System, IBM 3274 Control Unit Planning, Setup. and Customizing
Guide, GA27-2827.
Communications: The 3274 mdl 1C communicates with a S/370
or 4300 Processor using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC)
over full or half duplex communications facilities to a 3704/3705
Communications Controller (or via the Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331. Note: These units are not supported by
ACF /VTAME); or by Binary Synchronous Communication to a
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors over duplex or half duplex
communications facilities via (where applicable) a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit, 2703 Transmission Control, or a 3704/3705 Communications Controller.
Communications with a S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135 or 138 can also
be via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and appropriate binary synchronous features on the 3115, 3125, 3135 or
3138. Communications with a 4331 Processor can be via the
Communications Adapter·· (#1601) using BSC or SDLC/SNA
protocols.
Communications Facilities: The 3274 mdl 1C operates in half
duplex point-to-point or multipoint mode on half duplex or duplex
facilities at transmission speeds of 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200 and
9600 bps on non-switched facilities 04, D4M. D4SB, 05, D5M,
D5Se, 06, D6M, D6SB, D7, D7M. D7SB, .X1, X1M, X2. X2M, X3
and X3M. See M 2700 pages for facilities.
Modems: Unless a DDS Adapter (#5650 or #5651) is installed in
a 3274 mdl 1C, an external modem with its own clocking must be
attached to a 3274 mdl 1C with the External Modem Interface
(#3701) and either Common Communications Adapter (#6302) or
High Performance Communications Adapter (#6303) installed.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(
\
---- - --------------_.
- --------
M 3274.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3274 Control Unit
IBM Modems
(conrd)
Speed (bps)
3863 mdll
3864 mdll
3865 mdll, 2
2400/1200
4800/2400
9600/4800
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
4 wire switched network backup is available on 3863. 3864 and 3865
modems with auto answer. Switched network backup operation with
Manual Call and Manual or Auto Answer is available on the 3872
mdl 1, 3874 mdl 1 and 3875 mdl 1. For communications capabilities, product utilization and features, see M 2700 and M 3863,
3864,3865,3872.3874 and 3875 pages.
Problem Determination Procedure: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See "Customer Responsibilities" below.
Display Exception Monitoring Facility (DEMF), a software tool for
network problem determination/isolation enhances the availability
and serviceability of the 3274 in BSC mode. See DEMF in the
Programming/SCP sections for OS/VS1 and OS/VS2.
Installation and Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3274 mdl 1 C is
designated as Customer Set-Up, thereby offering the customer
early availability and terminal relocation flexibility. The customer is
responsible for performing the required 3274 customization and
attaching CSU units to the 3274.
cable is not desired, specify #9511 for 1.8 meters (6 feet).
[3] Communication Cable: (Mdl 1 C only) If the standard 6.1 meter
(20 feet) communication cable is not desired, specify one of the
following: #9061 for 3.0 meters (10 feet), #9062 for 9.1 meters (30 feet), or #9063 for 12.2 meters (40 feet).
[4) Configuration Support: The Configuration Support required for the
3274 must be determined before ordering special feature, or attaching
certain terminals. Refer to the 3274 Control Storage Requirement
Tables under speCial feature Extended Function Store (EFS) for a
detailed listing of the functions supported by each option. Limitation;
Certain functions require host software support in order to be utilized
Refer to host programming support descriptions to determine the level,
of software required. Field Installation: Yes.
Configuration Support A: This Configuration Support is shipped with
all 3274s unless Configuration Support B (#9111) is specified It
prOVides support for all 3270 functions listed in Table I (see Extended
Function Store (EFS) under Special Features), plus support of solicitation of summary maintenance statistics from a 3274 mdl I C with
SNA/SDLC IML, through the use of Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA).
Configuration Support B (#9/11) [Mdls lA, IC and ID only] Provides support for all 3270 functir>ns included in Configuration Support
A plus the ability to attach 3278 mdl 5 displays, and support for the
following functions:
Pacing of inbound message traffic (mdls lA and lC/SNA).
Automatic session recovery in both single and multidomain net-
works (mdIIC/SNA).
Host notification of changes in the power on/off status at attached
terminals (mdls IA and IC/SNA).
Customer Responsibilities:
The customer is responsible for:
Specify #9111 for Configuration Support B.
Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
Physical setup, connection of cables to TP lines/modems and
IBM devices incorporating protected customer access areas,
switch settings, and checkout.
Contact IBM Field Engineering to make cable connections of IBM
CSU units to IBM non CSU units where customer access areas
are not provided.
Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation.
Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping
dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will
be provided by IBM.
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and placement of the 3274.
Contacting IBM Field Engineering to accomplish the channel
connection tasks ... for the 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 B or 1 D.
[5] Operational Mode: [Mdl 1 C only] Specify #9433 if the control unit
will use SNA/SDLC IML. (Record purposes only/order verification.)
[6] Alternate Mailing Address: #9011 ... for diskette only updates.
Order this optional feature to specify that diskette only updates
are to be mailed to an alternate site address
using a Teleprocessing Control number (TPC)
rather than to the address of the 3274 Control Unit installation
site. The alternate address selected is usually that of a central
site location. Redistribution of the diskettes containing the
diskette update is the responsibility of the customer. The user
may decide to replace the existing diskette himself with the
diskette containing the updates or, if requested, the IBM Customer Engineer will replace the diskette. The purpose of this
feature is to assist the customer with his network management.
Field Installation: Yes.
3274
Connection of communication cable to the communication facility
for the 3274 mdl 1C.
Performing 3274 Control Unit Customization in accordance with
IBM supplied procedures.
a. For initial installation.
b. When made necessary by changes in configuration.
c. Updating of the control unit diskettes (at the customer's
option).
Prerequisites: [1] One 3278 Display Station with keyboard is
nEleded on each 3274 as a diagnostic aid. It must be attached to
the first terminal address on the control unit (Port 0)
[2) For a
model 1 C, External Modem Interface (#3701) or DDS Adapter
(#5650 or #5651) must be ordered along with either Common
Communications Adapter (#6302) or High Performance Communications Adapter (#6303) ... see "Special Features." Either an IBM
or non-IBM external modem, with its own clocking, must be provided.
Bibliography: See applicable KWIC Index listed below, or specific
system bibliography.
3274
3274
3274
3274
3274
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
1A
1B
1B
1C
1D
------
G320-1621
GC20-0360 (S/360)
GC20-0001 (S/370)
GC20-0001
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase,3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug
-- #9890 for 120 V (Mdl 1 Conly), #9884 for 208 V, or #9894
for 240 V. Non-lock Plug -- #9891 for 120 V (Mdl 1 Conly),
#9885 for 208 V, or #9895 for 240 V. For Watertight Connector, see "Special Features."
[21 Power Cable Length: If standard 4.3 meter (14 feet) power
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$490
490
344
490
$417
417
293
417
PRICES: Mdl
1A
1B
1C
10
Purchase
$18,770
18,770
13,190
18,770
MMMC
$83
87
70
92
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Months: 5
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Useful life Category: 2
Model Changes: Any local channel interface - SNA (model 1 A), or
3272 compatible (model 1B), or 3272 version with expanded
character handling capability (model 1 D) can be converted to one
of the others. Model 1 C to model 1 A, 1 B or 1 D or vice versa is
not field installable ..
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
1A
18
1D
To
1A
$ 830
830
1B
1D
$1,310
$1,210
700
800
SPECIAL FEATURES
Note: Some combinations of functions and features may exceed
the capacity of the control storage in the basic machine. After the
Configuration Support and the desired special features have been
selected, the control storage requirement must be determined by
using the tables under Extended Function Store features.
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION (#1801).
[Mdls 1 A, 1 C, 1 D
only] Provides the ability to install storage above the basic level.
This feature must be installed with Extended Function Store Type
C1 (#3622). This combination is also a prerequisite to installing
the other Extended Function Store features [Type C3 (#3625),
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
-------==- =-=
------- ==--';' ==
M 3274.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3274 Control Unit (cont'd)
Type 01 (#3627)]. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Table 1 - Part 2
EXTENDED FUNCTION STORE (EFS) Type C1 (#3622), Type C3
(#3625), Type 01 (#3627).
Provides increments of control
storage to accommodate combinations of functional features which
exceed the storage capacity of the basic machine. Types C1, C3
and 01 (#3622, 3625, 3627) each provide Increments of 16.384
bytes. To determine which Extended Function Store features may
be required, refer to the 3274 Control Storage Requirement Tables
1 and 2 below.
Note: A decription of non-"Speclfy", non-"Feature" and non"Machine" Control Storage Requirement Functions is given later
in this section, with the exception of "Category A Terminals".
"Category B Terminals", EBCDIC and ASCII, which have been
described above.
3274 CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENT TABLES
Configuration flexibility is provided through two Configuration Support
options.
STEP #1: Determine which Configuration Support contains the functions desired.
3274 MODEL 1C/SNA
Configuration Support A
Confi2uration SUDnort B (#9111)
13,700
15,096
Configuration Support A
Confi~uration Support B (#9111)
Category B Terminals
41,446
46,518
15,496
4,900
4,600
APL/Text Control Function
1,700
1,200
Model 1C /SNA ASCII (including Copy)
3289 Text Print Control
512
High Performance Communications
Adapter (#6303)
600
-500
Host Loadable Printer
Authorization Matrix
500
0
800
1,600
100
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
SCS Printer Support (3287-#9660)
STEP #3: Total the Type C and Type D storage requirements determined in Step #2.
Encrypt/Decrypt (#3680)
3275 I 3277 Like 10-Character Set
Numeric & AIDhameric Character Sets
TYPE C
TYPE D
Model 1 A Base (including copy)
Con!/lf:::,~tion Support A (;
r)
Con I ation SUoDort B #9111
41,200
45,072
13,600
Cateaorv B Terminals
4,900
4,600
APL/Text Control Function
1,700
1,200
0
512
3289 Text Print Control
/4,484
Host Loadable Printer Authorization Matrix
500
0
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
800
100
1,600
100
SCS Printer Support (3287-#9660)
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
3275/3277 Like 10-Character Set
Numeric & AIDhameric Character Sets
600
60
316
3,200
900
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
Category B Terminals /31
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 12 category B terminals
1 3 to 1 6 cateaorv B terminals
2,048
4,096
6,144
Category B Terminals (3)
Type D
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 12 category B terminals
13 to 16 category B terminals
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
Table 1 - Part 3
3274 MODEL 1C/BSC
TYPE C
TYPE D
Model 1C/BSC EBCDIC
316
0
0
Model 1 C/BSC ASCII
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
Category B Terminals
4,700
700
APL/Text Control Function
2,200
4,700
Copy (Print Key Function)
2,700
0
0
512
550
0
600
1,120
60
316
Add'i Category A Terminals (8 Included In ba..)
9 to 1 6 total category A terminals
1 7 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 total cateaorv A terminals
Type D
9 to 16 total category A terminals
17 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 total category A terminals
600
1630
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
60
100
1,630
Add'i Category A Terminals (8 included in base)
3274 MODEL 1A
14,100
0
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
Table 1 - Part 1
TYPE D
41,030
46,102
STEP #2: After determining the desired Configuration Support, select
the applicable part of Table 1 (PIII1 I, 2. 3 or 4) to determine the Type C
and Type D storage requirements for the 3274 mdls lA, lC/SNA,
lC/BSC, or lD respectively.
STEP #4: With the total 3274 storage requirements found in Step #3,
lISe Table 2 to determine if the base 3274 storage is adequate or if additional storage must be ordered. If additional storage is required, Table 2
will show which Extended Function Store (EFS) type feature(s) must be
ordered.
TYPE C
Model 1 C ISNA EBCDIC (including Copy)
Type D
2,048
4,096
6,144
~eD
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
Configuration Support A
Conti'guration Support B (#9111)
Configuration Support A
Co;fi~uration Support B (#9111)
38,000
41,872
13,800
38,000
41,872
14,500
15,384
3289 Text Print Control
Host Loadable Printer
Authorization Matrix
14,684
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
3275/3277 Like 10-Character Set
Numeric & Alphameric Character Sets
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
Add'i Category A Terminals (8 Included in base)
9 to 16 total category A terminals
17 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 total category A terminals
Category B Terminals (3)
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 12 category B terminals
13 to 16 category B terminals
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
TYPE D
2,048
4,096
6,144
TYPE D
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
\
------------=-- =--- ---=--':' =
M 3274.4
Jul79
OP Machines
3274 Control Unit (cont'd)
Table 1 - Part 4
TYPE C
3274 MODEL 10
TYPE 0
Model 10
Configuration Support A
Configuration Support B (#9111)
34,500
17,000
38,372
17,884
Category B Terminals
4,300
2,700
APL/Text Control Function
1,700
4,600
COpy (Print Key Function)
2,700
0
0
512
550
0
600
1,120
316
3289 Text Print Control
Host Loadable Printer
Authorization Matrix
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
3275/3277 Like IO-Character Set
Numeric & Alphameric Character Sets
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
Add'l Category A Terminals (8 Included In base)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
TYPE 0
2,048
4,096
6,144
9 to 1 6 total category A terminals
1 7 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 ttotal category A terminals
Category B Terminals (3)
TYPE D
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 1 2 category B terminals
13 to 16 category B terminals
(I)
60
(Configuration Support A restriction only) Only two of the three key-
board types (Typewriter, Data Entry or Data Entry-Keypunch like) can be
supponed at anyone time on displays attached to a 3274 Control Unit.
Text and APL keyboards are not affected by this limitation and can be
installed with any of the other keyboards without restriction.
(2) If the total Type D requested for Category A and Category B terminals
exceeds 6,144, use 6,144.
(3) There is no customizing option nor additional control storage required
to support 10 Numeric only Character Set for Operator Identification
Card Reader (#4600) on 3277 Display Stations (Category B terminals) which are attached to a 3274.
Table 2
FACTORS
+
+
SIZE
Type D
~65,536
Type C
Type D
and Type C
and Type D
>65,536
Type C + Type D
and Type C
and Type D
>65,536
>49,152
Type C
~49,152
~32,768
~32,768
Type C + Type D
and Type C
and Type D
~49,152
Type C + Type D
and Type C
and Type D
>65,536
>49,152
>32,768
>65,536
>32,768
FEATURE CODES
None
#1801 and #3622
#1801, #3622 and
#3625
#1801, #3622 and
#3627
#1801, #3622, #3625
and #3627
EFS-Type C1 (#3622): [Mdls 1A, 1C, 1D only] Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion
(#1801) must be installed with this feature.
EF5-Type C3 (#3625): [Mdls 1A, 1C, 1D only] Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Control Storage Expansion
(#1801) and Extended Function Store Type C1 (#3622) must be
installed before this feature can be installed.
EFS-Type D1 (#3627): [Mdls 1A, 1C, 1D only] Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion
(#1801) and Extended Function Store Type C1 (#3622) must be
installed before this feature can be installed.
ENCRYPT/DECRYPT (#3680). [Mdl 1 C (SDLC) only] Provides
the Federal Data Encryption Standard algorithm to encrypt and
decrypt data messages under a 56-bit key variable. When used in
conjunction with the ACF/VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt feature (#6010,
Program 5735-RC2) and the IBM Programmed Cryptographic
Facility Program Product (Program 5740-XY5), data transmitted
over unprotected communications lines can be safeguarded
through cryptography. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: A mercury battery, IBM Part No. 1743456 or equivalent, is
needed. A battery is shipped with this feature. See M10000 pages
for additional or replacement battery. Replacement of the discharged battery is the customer's responsibility. The discharged
IBM battery should be returned to IBM.
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE (#3701). [Model 1C only] Provides the appropriate cable and interface logic necessary to attach
either an external IBM or non-IBM modem with its own clocking for
communication over analog facilities or to attach a data service unit for
communication over non-switched digital facilities such as the AT&T
Dataphone" digital data service network. See item [3] under "Specify"
for cable length. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Digital Data
Service (DDS) Adapter feature (#5650 or #5651). Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Either Common Communications Adapter
(#6302) or High Performance Communication Adapter (#6303).
Field Installation: Yes.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE (DDS) ADAPTER (#5650 for Point-topoint Operation ... #5651 for Multipoint Operation.)
[Mdl 1 C
only] An adapter for BSC or SOLC data transmission at speeds of
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps over the AT&T non-switched Dataphone'
Digital data service. The DDS Adapter interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer site termination of the DDS network.
See "Note" below for communication cable length. Specify:
#9822 for 2400 bps, #9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for 9600
bps. Maximum: One #5650 or #5651. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with External Modem Interface (EMI) (#3701) feature.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Either Common Communications Adapter (#6302) or High Performance Communications
Adapter (#6303).
Note: When ordering this feature
for field installation, use
one of the following Specify codes if it is desired to have the
length of the communications cable other than the standard 6.1
meters (20 feet) provided. Specify: #9061 for 3.0 meters (10
feet), #9062 for 9.1 meters (30 feet), or #9063 for 12.2 meters
(40 feet).
COMMON COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#6302). [Model 1 C
only] Required for attachment to communication lines at speeds
up to 9600 bps (SNA/SDLC or BSC transmission control protocols) through either an IBM or non-IBM Modem with its own clocking. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: [1]
High Performance Communications Adapter (#6303) must be
ordered/installed in lieu of this feature, if SNA/SDLC protocol is
required with a line speed greater than 7200 bps and a Category
B Terminal Adapter(s) (#7802 - 7805) is installed. [2] This feature
cannot be installed with the High Performance Communications
Adapter (#6303).
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#6303).
[Model 1C only] When SNA/SDLC protocol is required with a line
speed of 9600 bps and a Terminal Adapter Type B(s) is installed,
this feature is required for attachment to the communications lines
through either an IBM or non-IBM modem with its own clocking.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] With this feature installed, operation is restricted to SNA/SDLC protocol. IML load for BSC protocol is no longer possible. [2] This feature cannot be installed with
Common Communications Adapter (#6302). Field Installation:
Yes.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE A1 thru A3 (#69(11, 6902, 6903).
One each of these adapters can be installed. Each adapter provides for the attachment of an additional eight Category A terminals. The base control unit, which provides for attachment of eight
Category A termil:als, can be expanded with these three terminal
adapters to a maximum configuration of thirty-two Category A
terminals. These terminal adapters must be installed in sequence,
making it important to order the correct adapter feature code(s).
Terminal Adapter Type A 1 (terminals 9-16) -- #6901
Terminal Adapter Type A2 (terminals 17-24) -- #6902
Terminal Adapter Type A3 (terminals 25-32) -- #6903
Limitation: Terminal Adapter Type A3 (#6903) cannot be installed
with Terminal Adapter Types B3 (#7804) and B4 (#7805).
Maximum: One of each type terminal adapter. Prerequisite:
#6902 requires #6901
#6903 requires #6902. Field
Installation: Yes.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE B1 (#7802). Permits the attachment
of four Category B terminals and provides for the installation of
Terminal Adapters Types B2, B3 and B4 when additional Category
B terminals are desired. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: When installed on a 3274 mdl lA, or on a 3274 mdl 1C with
SNA IML (#9433), Extended Function Store feature(s) (#3622, #3625,
#3627) and Control Storage Expansion (#1801) are required. See 3274
Control Storage Requirement Tables under Extended Function Store
, Trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Co. (AT&T).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
..................
:::
='-..........=:='---"=
'
M 3274.5
Jul79
-=-~"::.
--..~-
OP Machines
a274 Control Unit (cont'd)
featutes M accurately determine what storage features ate required on
3274 mdts IA,lC and ID in speCific configuratiolls.
TERMINAL AOAPUR TVPE 82 THRU B4 (#78Oa thru #78(5).
each of these terminal adapters permits the attachment of four
additional Category B terminals. A maximum of one each of lhese
terminal adapters can be installed for a combined total of twelve
additional or sixteen Category B terminals attached to a control
unit. These terminal adapters must be installed in sequence,
making it important to order the correct adapter featurecode(s).
Field Installation: Yes.
Terminal Adapter Type B2 (terminals 5-8) - #7803
Terminal Adapter Type B3 (terminals 9-12) - #7804
Terminal Adapter Type B4 (terminals 13-16) -- #7805
limitation: Terminal Adapter Type B3 (#7804) and Terminal
Adapter Type B4 (#7805) cannot be installed with Terminal Adapter Type 1.3 (#6903). Maximum: One of each type terminal
adapter. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type B1 (#7802) must
be Installed before these adapters can be installed. ,Field
Installation: Yes.
WATERTIGHT POWER CONNECTOR (#8801). [Models 11., 1B
and 10 only] Provides a watertight connector on the power cable
to satisfy local ordinances requiring this type termination in specific locations. See "Specify" for cable length to be ordered.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended. limitation:
The only valid voltage specify codes are #9884 and #9894. One
of these two voltage codes must be specified when ordering this
feature.
Special Feature Prices:
Control Storage Expn
#1801
Extended Function Store
Type C1
3622
Type C3
3625
Type 01
3627
Encrypt/Decrypt
3680
Extnl Modem Interface
3701
DDS Adapter, Pt-to-pt
5650
DDS Adapter, Multlpt
5651
Common Cmnctns Adapt 6302
High Performance
Communications Adapter 6303
Terminal Adapter
Type A1
6901
Type A2
6902
Type A3
6903
Type B1
7802
Type B2
7803
Type B3
7804
Type B4
7805
Watertight Pwr Connector 8801
MRC
MlC
2 Vr
$31
$26
$1,055
$5.50
58
58
58
61
12
24
24
12
49
49
49
52
10
20
20
10
1,170
1,170
1,170
2,115
400
840
840
450
10.00
10.00
10.00
2.50
4.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
35
30
1,200
10.50
32
32
32
38
a2
32
32
NC
27
27
27
32
27
27
27
NC
1,215
1,215
1,215
1,300
1,100
1,100
1,100
NC
2.50
2.50
2.50
5.00
3;00
3.00
3.00
NC
Purch
MMMC
CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENT f'UNCTIONS
APL/Text Control Function: This function, selectable during the
customization of a 3274 mdl lA, 1C or 10, expands the character
handling capability of the 3274 to ac~ommodate the APl, Text,
and graphic plot character sets for the APL/Text Feature (#1120)
on 3278 Display Stations and 3287 Printers attached via Type A
Terminal Adapters (#6901, 6902,6903).
Note: The 3274 Control Unit, with or without this A.PL/Text control
function, does NOT support the 3270 Data Analysis/APl Feature
(#1066) on attached 3277 Display Stations or 3284, 3286 or
3287 Printers, NOR does it support the Text Print Feature
(#7880) on attached 3288 Line Printers.
3289 Text Print Control Function: This function, selectable during
the customization of a 3274 mdl 1A, 1 C or 10, extends the character handling capability of the 3274 to accommodate the Text
characters for the Text Print Feature (#1130) on attached 3289
Line Printers.
Copy FunctIon: This function, selectable during the customization
of a 3274 mdl lC (BSC) or to,enables the copying of the screen
contents of an attached 3278 Display· Station to an attached 3287
or 3289 printer through use of the Local Print Key on the display
keyboard. This function is provided as basic on the 3274 mdls
1 A, 1S and 1C (SNA). The ability to perform host initiated local
copies from a 3278 to a 3287 or 3289 attached to a 3274 mdl lA
or 1 C (SNA) is also provided as basic. In addition, the 3274 mdt
1 C (BSC) supports the 3270 host Copy command as basic.
Local Copy Summary
3274 Model
Print Key
Host InitIated
1A
1B
1C (BSC)
lC (SNA)
10
Basic
Basic
Cust.Option
Sasic
Cust. Option
Basic
Not Applicable
Basic
BasiC
Not Applicable
Host Loadable Authorization Matrix: This function, selectable
during the 3274 customization process, provides the capability for
the 3274, during subsequent IML procedures, to receive, from a
user-written application program at the host CPU, an updated
Printer Authorization Matrix to override the matrix created by the
customization operator or by system delault.
Between Bracket Sharing Function: This function, selectable
during the customization of a 3274 mdl 1A or 1C (SNA), enables
attached 3287 and 3289 printers to be used as Local Copy output
devices for the screen contents of attached 3278 Display Stations,
when the printers are Between Brackets with the host application
program. Printers are available for Local Copy operations only
when they are not in seSSion with an application programil this
option is not selected.
\
Not to be reproduced without written .permission.
-------- - ------_.------- -------
M 3275.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3275 DISPLAY STATION Model 2
Purpose: A single remote cathode ray tube display station. Provides controls and display of alphameric information from a S/360
mdl 25, 30, 40, 50, 65. 67 (in 65 mode), 75. 85. 195 or any
S/370 Processor via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, 2703 Transmission Control or, except for S/360 mdls 25 or 85. a 3704 or 3705
Communications Controller on half-duplex or duplex communications facilities using binary synchronous transmission. It also
provides controls and display of alphameric information from any
4300 Processor via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit. or 3704 and 3705
Communications Controller on a half-duplex or duplex communications facilities using binary synchronous transmission. Communication is also possible via a Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 Processor (Note: This is not supported by ACF /VTAME).
NOTE: See 3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales
manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System
Programming pages for possible restrictions to any of the above
attachments.
NOTE: For possible use with 1130. S/360 mdl 20 or System/3,
see GSD
Manual.
Model 2
Displays 1,920 characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters
each.
Highlights: Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot matrix characters ... 36
alphamerics, 27 special characters, including the space. Features
Data-Field Organization, which permits individual fields of data on
the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as
protected or unprotected, alphameric or numeric. normal intensity.
non-displayed, or brightened intensity, and selector light-pen
detection-allowed or disallowed.
Display Exception Monitoring Facility (DEMF) a software tool for
network problem determination/isolation enhances tho availability
and serviceability of the 3275 in BSC mode. See DEMF in the
Programming/SCP sections for OS/VS1 and OS/VS2.
Editing Features - typamatic, cursor. tab, protected-data, insert
and delete, and extended-erase (erase to end-of-field, erase all
keyboard input data, erase entire screen) are standard features
for displays equipped with a keyboard.
Input Flexibility -- a choice of keyboards, a selector light-pen,
and a set of program function keys provide unmatched input
flexibility ... see "Special Features" below.
Security Enhancement Features - a special Non-displayed
Keying Mode (standard) prov,ides for fields of data to be
program-defined so that they will accept data entered from the
keyboard without displaying the data on the screen. A Security
Keylock (optional) prevents modification of data on the display
unless the key is turned to the "On" position. An Operator Identification Card Reader (optional) is provided to enter system user
identification. This enhances the (programmed) control of his
access to data and audit of his actions. It may also be used to
enter any sequence of characters (pre-recorded on a card) for
other purposes such as transaction control, account control, and
billing.
Optional features allow the attachment of a 3284 mdl 3 dedicated
printer, EBCDIC or ASCII keyboard, selector light-pen, audible
alarm and other features ... see "Special Features" below.
Communications: The 3275 may be multidropped on the same
facility with other BSC devices (1800, 2715. 2770, 2780, 3271,
3275 and 3780) as tributary stations on a multipoint line with a
5/360 mdl 25-195 (except mdl 44), or any S/370 or 4300 Processor as the control station.
Communications with a 5/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 or 138
can be made via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640)
and appropriate binary synchronous features on the 3115, 3125.
3135, 3135-3 or 3138 (or via the Communications Adapter feature
on the 4331.
Note: These units are not supported by
ACF /VTAME.) as well as via the 2701, 2703, 3704 or 3705.
Communications Facilities: The 3275 operates in half-duplex
multipoint mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission speeds of
1200, 2000 or 2400 bps on facilities 03, 04 or X1 M via the 2701,
2703, 3704, 3705 or #4640 on the 3115, 3125, 3135, 3135-3,
3138 using binary synchronous transmission.
The 3275 operates in half-duplex multipOint mode on duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 1200, 2000. 2400 or 4800 bps on
facilities 03, 04, 05, X1 M or X2M via the 2701, 2703. 3704,
3705, or #4640 on the 3115,3125,3135,3135-3 or 3138, using
binary synchronous transmission. Half-duplex multipoint operation
at a speed of 7200 bps is available on facility 09 via the 2701,
3704, 3705, or #4640 on the 3115, 3125. 3135, 3135-3, 3138
using binary synchronous transmission. The 3275 operates on
switched network facilities at a transmission speed of 600/1200
bps when equipped with feature #3440 using binary synchronous
transmission. See M 2700 pages for facilities.
Modems:
One
IBM
modem
may
be
attached
to
a
PREREQUISITE: #7821 is required on the 3275 for speeds over
2400 bps on leased lines.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3R63 mdll
3864 mdll
1400/1200
4800/1400
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
2400
4800
7200
NOTES: 4 wire .•witched network backup is available on the 3863 and
3864 modems. Switched network backup operation is available on the
3872 mdl 1, 3874 and 3875. For communications capabilities,
product utilization and special features, see M 2700, 2701, 3705,
_i863, 3864, 3872. 3874 and 3875 pages.
PREREQUISITES: Transmission via common carrier facility to a
2701, 2703. 3704, 3705 or #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135, 31353, 3138, or a Communications Adapter (# 1601) feature on the
4331, requires a modem. See M 2700 puges.
A keyboard must be installed on each 3275 as a diagnostic aid.
System 360/370 or 4300 Processor availability will be restricted
unless the using system provides sufficient core to allow diagnostic programs (OLTs) to be executed. For details associated with
the required additional core sizes, see the appropriate SRL
(TCAM, BTAM and VTAM).
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug. or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Cables: Cable to attach modem should be ordered. Refer to
3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
[3] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following codes;
Note: See GSD
manual for codes for use with System/3.
Processor
S/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
5/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
S/360 mdl
S/370mdl
5/370 mdl
Code
Processor
25 #9571
30 9572
40 9573
50 9575
65 9576
67 9577
75 9578
85 9579
195 9580
115 9589
125 9586
Code
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3 #9581
S/370 mdl 138
9595
5/370 mdl 145, 145-3 9582
5/370 mdl 148
9596
S/370 mdl 155
9583
S/370 mdl 158
9587
S/370 mdl 165
9584
S/370 mdl 168
9588
3031 Processor
9599
3032 Processor
9598
3033 Processor
9597
4331 Processor
9606
4341 Processor
9607
[4] Transmission Code: Specify one; #9761 - for EBCDIC Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture only) ". utilizes
8-bit EBCDIC code over the transmission facilities ... used in
conjunction with EBCDIC Character Set (#9089). #9762 - for
ASCII Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture
only) ... utilizes 8-bit ASCII code over the transmission facilities
... used in conjunction with ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or
(B) (#9092).
(5) Character Set: Specify one of the following;
#9089 - for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. PREREQUISITE: EBCDIC
Transmission Code (#9761).
#9091 - for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of
manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but
substitutes the Logical OR -
"E
0
..
0
M
M
...;t;
..
M
is
M
M
x
(anv combinatit: .., of two,
j:j :;
~
any 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
Ej. 14301/43021
Fi'l(ed Head Feature
on any 3340
IIJP to four 3350 mdl A2s1
.?:
8
A2F5 w associated mdl
o !B2,/B2Fs, C2/C2F
l!l ~!ringSW (81501 on any
M
33~ mdl A2/A2F,C2/C2F
_ i 3333,. 3340 mdl A2s and
is ~ :3350 mdl A2s! A2Fs (any
.,.M cC"I'Ibinatian of 2, 3 or 41
~
with esscci~ted drives
~
;:! .E.IString Sw (81501 on any
~ 0 3333,3340 mdl A2, or
~ 3350 mdl A21A2F,C2/C2F
M iand/or Fixed Head Fea
(4301/43021 on any 3340
- c:
I
I
j
I
H
II!
i!I
I
x
i '
x x
/x
X
Ii
xx x
:
I
II I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
x x
/
!
iI
x
I
xi_
II
x
Ii
x
!
i
II
Ixlx
I
i
xx
'j !
I
,
I I
x
!
I
x
I
!
i
I
xi"I
I
!
I
IX
i
t ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufac-
ture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on same
diskette.
• Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Yif
the new conflguration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
•• Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, the ISC of the
3345 requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the number of
drives attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the ISC uses 64 contiguous
device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The 3340 mdl
A2s on the first and third strin!!S may atloch up to three 3340 mdl BI, B2s,
and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the second string
may attach up to three 3340 mdl BI/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2 on the fourth
string may attach one 3340 mdl BI or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the ISC uses 8 or 16 or 32 or
64 device addresses depending upon the DASD configuration installed and
whether any 3350 drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
Note: Customers who may elect to purchase Control Store Extension (#2150)
and later upgrade to Expanded Control Store (#2152) should consider the
purchase of Expanded Control Store (#2152) initially because this field ul?grade
requires replacement of Control Store Extension (#2150) and installahon of
Expanded Control Store (#2152). The prerequisite of Control Store Extension
(#2150) can be satisfied by Expanded Control Store (#2152).
3345
MAC/MRC price effective lune I, 1979.
x
lhr•• , or jourl each with
~ ~I String Switch (8150) on
I
x!x
I
~ ~ associated drives
PRICES:
o
9314~ 9;'~
One or two 3333, with
x x
associated 33305
Up to four 3333, with
,_
assotlClted 3330s
Stronq Switch 181501 on
any 3333
One or IWO 3340 mdl A2,
x x
with assocl.,ed mdl Bl1B2
Up 10 four 3340 mdl A2s
with 2ssoci2tc-d mol B 1 !B2
SIring SWllch 181501 on
x
any 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Fealure
,~30:/43021 on any 3340
Up to four 3340 mdl A2s
of which uo 10 two may
a1t.c~ 3344.
String Switch (81501 on
any 3340 mdl A2 and/or
Fixed Head Feature on
.~y 3340 (4301143021
33335 and 3340 mdl A2,
>
c
0
...
..
Required DASD SpocilV F .. ture.·
+
931St 9317 9318
9~13 9314
t 9190 t
t
t
9190 t t
Mdl
1
2
3
4
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$ 3,285
6,015
$104,950
189,650
MMMC
$ 96.50
178.00
1,090·
91.00
43,980
4,285·
189.00
143,100
6,995·
5
270.00
227,800
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: D
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3145)
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------':'::'::S';'=
---- ---- ---
M 3345 - 3348
May 79
DP Machines
3345 Storage and Control Frame (cont'd)
Model Change8: The following 3345 model upgrades are field
installable:
Modell to model 2, 4 or 5 ... model 2 to model 5 ... model 4
to model 5. Model changes involving model 3 are not recommended for field instailation.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
instailation charges)
From
To
11100...1 1
Model 2
Model 4
Model 5
$84,100
• ,"'''' ...n
........,0.1"
38,150
Model 2
Model 4
Removable -can be installed and removed from the 3340 by the
operator.
84,700
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). [Models 3, 4, 5 only]
Provides additional control store for microprogram use ... see
DASD Configuration under "Specify" to determine when required.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Expanded Control Store
(#2152). Maximum: One. Field In8tallatlon: Yes.
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2152). [Models 3, 4, 5 only]
Provides additional control storage for microprogram use on the
ISC ... see DASD Configuration under . 'Specify" to determine
when required. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Control Store
Extension (#2150). Maximum: One. Field In8tallatlon: Yes.
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111). [Mdls 3, 4, 5 only] Provides
additional registers for microprogram use on the ISC ... see DASD
configuration under "Specify" to determine when required. Field
In8tallatlon: Yes. Maximum: One.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [Models 3, 4, 5 only] To
attach the standard Integrated Storage Control to a second channel ... the two channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. An available control unit position is required on each channel. Switching is under program control. The ISC can be dedicated
to a single channel by means of an Enable/Disable switch. Field
In8tallatlon: Yes. Maximum: One. Prerequl8lte8: See item [2]
under "Prerequisites."
MAC/
MRC Purcha8e MMMC
Special Feature Prlce8:
Control Store Exten810n
Expanded Control Store
Regl8ter Expan810n
Two Channel Switch
#2150* $262·
2152* 421·
6111*
24·
8100
205
$8,350 $10.00
. 13,420
20.50
662
7,075
the read/write heads and the access arms. The access arms and
heads are not part of the drive as In previous disk pack/disk
drive interfaces. The sealed module design protects the disk
surfaces by reducing outside contamination. Multiple capacity
options on each drive become possible due to the modularity
provided by ·this unique design. In addition, the mdl 70F contains
fixed heads which provide low cost, fixed head capability for the
3340 user. The user may place selected components of IBM
software as well as his own programs In the fixed head area to
increase device performance. The 3348 mdl 70F requires that the
Fixetj Head Feature be !net~!!ed en !ha 3340 .
4.00
10.00
• Feature supplies ISC diskette.
Interchangeable - the mdl 35 or the mdl 70 may operate on any
drive and are interchangeable between drives, including those
with the Fixed Head Feature installed. The mdl 70F, however,
requires that #4301 or #4302 be Installed on the drive.
Auto-loading - Data Modules are automatically loaded after the
Data Module is placed in the drive, cover is closed and a switch
is turned on. Start-up time is less than 20 seconds.
Flag-Free - Data Modules are shipped from the plant flag-free. If
within 90 days after receipt the customer is required to assign an
alternate track (using DOS/VS System utilities), he may return
the Data Module to IBM and it will be repaired at no cost to the
customer.
Capacity Upgrade - (Plant only) - the customer-owned model 35
may be capacity upgraded to a model 70. Data modules must be
returned to the plant of manufacture for the upgrade service.
Downgrading is not available. Recorded data will not be recoverable. Upgrade of either the model 35 or 70 to the model 70F Is
not available.
Dlmen810n8
Model 35
Model 70
Model70F
8"
16"
18
23
8"
16"
18
24
Height
8"
16"
Width
Maximum Length
18
Shipping Weight (Ibs) 21
Covers are sealed at the plant and are unbreakable and nonflammable. A large handle is provided for ease of installation, removal
and transportation. The Data Module has an aperture that is
opened (or closed) automatically by the drive during loading (or
unloading). The Data Module is then connected to the drive for
power and communications.
A CE cylinder is assigned to facilitate maintenance of the 3340.
o MAC/MRC price etrective June I, 1979.
Data Recovery (Plant only) -- should data in the field, for any
reason, prove unrecoverable, a method for data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture will be provided.
Initialization - the Data Module will be initialized at the plant.
Home addresses and record zero will be written for each track.
3348 DATA MODULE
(IRD Product)
Purpo8e: A new generation, removable and interchangeable Data
Module for the 3340 Disk Drive family.
For use with System/3 or System17, see GSD
manual.
UPGRADE PRICE FOR PURCHASED DATA MODULES (Plant only)
Model 35 to model 70 ..... ••
3348 Data Module Repair Service (Plant only)
Mdl35 Mdl70 Mdl70F
Replace one or more damaged disks
(including servo disk) and heads,
clean and luricate, and retest to new
data module performance specifications. (Does not include covers.)
Replace one or more damaged heads
(including fixed head assembly on
the 70F), clean and lubricate, and
retest to new data module performance specifications.
Clean and lubricate and retest only.
(this price will be charged if no
disk/heads require replacement.)
Model8: Three are available in two differen.! capacitites:
3348 Model 35 - 34,944,768 bytes
3348 Model 70 - 69,889,536 bytes.
3348 Model 70F - 69,889,536 bytes of which 502,080 are
accessible by fixed heads.
Hlghllght8:
Data Module Concept ~ the 3348 Data Module utilizes a new
concept in removable direct access storage devices. The Data
Module, within a sealed cartridge, contains the disks, the spindle,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'------- --------
- ----- --==-=
':' =
M 3350
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3350 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
Read Only: A two pOSition switch is provided for each drive. When
the switch is in the "read only" position, the drive is protected
from being written upon or erased.
Purpose: High speed, large capacity, direct access storage for
attachment to any virtual storage S/370 Processor (except 3115
or 3125), or a 4341 Processor.
Data Recovery (Plant Only): Should data in the field prove unrecoverable, data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture
will be provided.
Model A2
Two-drive disk storage and associated control for
attachment to 3145 mdls GE, GFD, H, HG or I via
the 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, to the 3145 mdls H2, HG2,
12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2 via the ISC (#4660), to the
3145-3, and the 3148 via the ISC (#4660), to the
3158, 3158-3, 3168 or 3168-3 via the ISC
(#4650), to the 3830 mdl 2 or 3, and the 3880. It
provides logic and power for the attachment of up
to three 3350 mdl B2/B2F units or up to two mdl
B2/B2F units and one C2/C2F unit.
Model A2F Two-drlve disk· storage and associated control with
the same attachment capabilities as the model A2. It
features Fixed Heads which provide up to
1 ,144,140 bytes of zero seek time storage on each
drive in lieu of the same capacity under the moving
heads.
Model B2
Two-drive disk storage unit. Up to three 3350 mdl
B2/B2Fs can be attached to a 3350 mdl A2/A2F.
Model B2F Two-drive disk storage unit with the same attachment capabilities as the model B2. It features Fixed
Heads which provide up to 1,144,140 bytes of zero
seek time storage in each drive in lieu of the same
capacity under the moving heads.
Model C2
Two-drive disk IItorage. and associated control.
Provides an alternate controller function within a
3350 string. The model C2 functions as a mdl A2 or
B2 depending upon the setting of a manual switch
on the unit. A 3350 string containing a model C unit
requires a model A unit with Primary Controller
Adapter (#1320) and may include 0, 1 or 2 model
B2/B2F units.
Model C2F Two-drive disk storage and associated control with
the same attachment capabilities as the model C2. It
features Fixed Heads which provide up to
1,144,140 bytes of zero seek time storage in each
drive in lieu of the same capacity under the moving
heads.
Flag Free: The 3350 will be shipped flag free.
PREREQUISITES: A 3350 DAS requires - a 3350 mdl A2 or A2F;
any virtual storage S/370 Processor with appropriate attachment
and features (except 3115 or 3125), or a 4341 Processor via a 3830
Storage Control mdl 2 or 3, or a 3880 Storage Control. A 3145 requires
Word Buffer (#8810) to attach 3350s. Expanded Control Store
(#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150), and Register Expansion (#6111) are required on the 3830 mdl 2 or 3158, 3168 ISCs
to attach 3350. Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Register
Expansion (#6111) are required on the 3145, 3145-3, 3148 or
3345 ISCs, or 3830 mdl 3 to attach 3350s.
IMPORTANT: See the appropriate DASD storage control feature or
machine to determine any additional prerequisite specify and/or
special features to attach a 3350.
Maximum: See 3145, 3158, 3168, 3345 ISC, 3830 mdl 2 or 3, or
3880 "Machines"pages.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
{2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
First
Drive
[3] Format:
3330 mdl 1 Compatibility Mode
3330 mdl 11 Compatibility Mode
3350 Native Mode
#9731
9741
9751
Second
Drive
#9732
9742
9752
[4] Control Attachment: #9608 for attachment to a 3880, or #9609
for attachment to any of the follOWing ... 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5,
S/370 mdl144, 145-3 or 148ISC, S/370 md1158, 158-3, 168 or
168-3 ISC, 3830 mdl2 or 3.
MAC/
MRCt
ETP/
MLC
2 yr t
Purchase
MMMCt
$40,000
49,920
31,680
41,600
41,380
51,300
$170
PRICES:
Mdl
Highlights: The 3350 features high data rate, fast access, multiple
formats and low cost per byte. It employs ~ fixed storage medium.
3350
Selective Format: Drive format may be 3330 mdl 1 or 3330 mdl
11 compatibility mode or 3350 native mode. Format is specified by
individual drive. Format changes may be made by FE in the field.
In 3330 mdl 1 or mdl 11 compatibility mode the Fixed Head storage capacity on the models A2F, B2F and C2F is 742,710 bytes
per drive. In 3330 mdl 1 compatibility mode this Fixed Head storage capacity is associated with the first of the two logical 3330
mdl 1 volumes on each 3350 drive. In 3350 native mode Fixed
Head storage capacity on the models A2F, B2F and C2F is
1,144,140 bytes per drive.
A2
A2F
B2
B2F
C2
C2F
1,155
179
1,150
179
1,425
230
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Cylinder Concept:
3330 mdl1
Mode
13,030
Bytes per Track
Tracks per Logical Cylinder
19
Logical Cylinders per Drive 2 x 404
Approx capacity/drive (MB) 2 x 100
3350
3330 mdl11 Native
Mode
Mode
19,069
13,030
19
30
808
555
317.5
200
Data Rate: 1,198,000 bytes per second.
Access Time: Average seek time is 25 ms with a minimum of 10
ms and a maximum of 50 ms. Average rotational delay is 8.4 ms.
For 3350 mdls A2F, B2F C2F cylinders 1 and 2 (3350 Native
Mode), or cylinders 1 thru 3 (3330 mdl 11 compatibility mode), or
cylinders 1 thru 3 of the first of the two logical volumes on a drive
(3330 mdl 1 compatibility mode), have a seek time of zero ms. All
other cylinders retain the above seek timing.
1,304
1,627
1,034
1,357
1,351
1,674
$1,100
1,385
880
Model Changes: Model changes between 3350 mdl A and mdl B
units, or mdl C and mdl B units are available at time of manufacture only. Model changes between 3350 mdl A and mdl C units
are not recommended for field installation. Model changes between A2 and A2F units, or B2 and B2F units, or C2 and C2F
units are field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model A2 to Model A2F ••••• $12,610·
Model B2 to Model B2F ..... $12,610·
Model C2 to Model C2F •.••• $12,610·
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
Error Correction: Provides capability of correcting single data
error bursts of up to four bits span as well as detecting all single
error bursts of up to ten bits span.
Write Format Release: Frees the subsystem while the drive erases from the end of a formatted write record to the end of the
track.
Rotational POSition Sensing: Permits channel disconnect during
period of rotational latency, thereby providing greater channel
availability ... requires one unshared subchannel on a block multiplexer channel for each logical device.
Command Retry: Enables the storage control to recover from
certain subsystem errors without recourse to system error recovery procedures.
221
128
t
MAC/MRC. ETP/MLC and MMMC prices effective 6/1/79.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ------===
-- - ----':' =
M 3350 - 3360
May 79
DP Machines
3350 Direct Access Storage (cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 3360 PROCESSOR STORAGE
PRIMARY CONTROLLER ADAPTER (#1320). [Mdls A2 and A2F
only]
Permits selection/deselection of the controller of the
A2/A2F unit as the online controller via a manual switch on the
C2/C2F unit in the string. Maximum: One per A2/A2F unit. Field
Installation: Yes. Corequlslte: One C2 or C2F unit in the string.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [Mdls A2, A2F, C2
and C2F onlyJ
To attach the 8tring 8witch (#8150) to the configuration control panel Of a 8/370 mdl 158MP or 168MP. Field
Installation: Yes.
STRING SWITCH (#8150). [Mdls A2, A2F, C2 and C2F only]
To link the 3350 to a second attachment. The two attachments
may be on the same CPU or different CPUs and may be any two
of the following: 3830 8torage Control mdl 2 or 3, 3880 Storage
Control, the 3345 8torage and Control Frame mdl 3, 4 or 5, the
18C (#4660) on the 8/370 mdl 145, 145-3 or 148, or the 18C
(#4650) on the 8/370 mdl 158, 158-3, 168 or 168-3. 8ee appropriate machines for additional requirements. 8witching between
the two attachments is under program control. The 3350 may also
be dedicated to a single attachment with an enable/disable switch.
Specify: #9608 for attachment to a 3880, or #9609 for attachment to any
of the following ... 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, the ISC (#4660) on a S/370 mdl
145, 145-3 or 148, the ISC (#4650) on a S/370 mdl158, 158-3, 168,
168·3, or a 3830 mdl 2 or 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Primary Controller Adptr #1320
Remote Switch Attach
6148
String Switch
8150
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 9*
NC
$ 8*
NC
$ 275
NC
$1.50*
162*
138*
4,610
9.00*
NC
[No longer availableJ
Purpose: Processor storage for a S/370 mdl 155 or 165.
Model 1
262,144 bytes ... one used in a 8/370 mdl H155 ...
one used with a 3360 mdl 3 in a 8/370 mdl IH155.
Model 2
393,216 bvtes ... one used in a 8/370 mdl HG166.
Model 3
524,288 bytes ... one used in a 8/370 mdl 1155 ...
one used with a 3360 mdl 1 in a 8/370 mdl IH155
... two used in a 8/370 mdl J155 ... three used in a
8/370 mdl JI155 ... four in a 8/370 mdl K155.
Model 4
262,144 bytes ... two used in a 8/370 mdl 1165 ...
two used with two 3360 mdl 5s in a 8/370 mdl
J1165.
Model 5
524,288 bytes ... two used in a 8/370 mdl J165 ...
two used with two 3360 mdl 4s in a 8/370 mdl
JI165 ... four used in a 8/370 mdl K165 ... six
used in a 8/370 mdl KJ165.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Models 1, 2 and 3 have a 2.1-microsecond storage
cycle with a 18-byte parallel access.
Models 4 and 5 have a 2.0-microsecond storage cycle with a
16-byte parallel access. 8torage words are 4-way interleaved in
the 8/370 mdl 165 to improve sequential access.
On all models Error Checking and Correction as well as 8tore and
Fetch Protect are provided by the processing unit.
PREREQUISITE: An appropriate 3155 or 3165. When ordering
3360s to change the size of a 8/370 mdl 155 or 165, a companion order modifying the model of the 3155 or 3165 must also be
submitted.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1 J Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2J Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
3360
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 3,060
$139,300
4,590
6,120
209,000
$187
279
372
187
372
4
3,060
5
6,120
279,700
139,300
279,700
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 65%
Machine Gr\?up: 0
Metering: Mdls 1, 2, 3 - Base Unit (meter on 3155)
Per Call: 3
Mdls 4, 5 - Assignable Unit
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
• MAC/MRC, ETP/MLC and MMMC prices effective 6/1179.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------------ -===-:=
----------
M 3370
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9915 for 240V Note: 20 VAC is compatible with 230 VAC
systems.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, or #9065 for pebble gray.
Purpose: High speed, large capacity, fixed media, direct access
storage for attachment to a 4331 or 4341 Processor.
Model A1
Single drive disk storage with two actuators and
associated control for attachment to a 4331 or 4341
Processor. It provides logic for the attachment of up
to three 3370 model Bl s.
Model B1
Single drive disk storage with two actuators. Up to
three 3370 model Bls can be attached to a 3370
model Al.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights
The 3370 features a high data rate, fast access, fixed block
format, and low cost per byte. It employs a fixed, sealed
Head/Disk Assembly (HDA) as the storage medium. The HDA is
a field replaceable unit. Two access arms per spindle, each
separately addressable with overlapped operation ... locatelocate/read/write. Each arm accesses one-half the data. Reduced power and space requirements. Fixed block architecture
allows the specification of DASD space in groups of blocks,
making space definition independent of tracks and cylinders.
Fixed Block Format
512
558,000
285.6
571.3
Bytes per block
Blocks per actuator
Bytes per actuator (megabytes)
Bytes per spindle (megabytes)
Prices:
3370
Mdl
MRC
A1
B1
$1,058
705
MLC
2 Yr
$900
600
$35,100
23,400
$120
gO
SPECIAL FEATURES
STRING SWITCH (#8150). [Model Al only ... for use with 3880
Storage Control mdl 1 only] To attach the 3370 model Al to a
second Storage Director. The two Storage Directors may be on
the same processor or different processors. Switching between
the two Storage Directors is under program control. The 3370
may also be dedicated to a single attachment with an
enable/disable switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
String Switch
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
#8150 $118 $100 $3,900
Data Rate -- 1.859 ± 3% megabytes per second.
Access Time
5
20
40
10.1
MMMC/
AMMCR
Maintenance: D
P.er Call: 3
Plan Offering: Plan D
Purchase Option: 60%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Blocks are separately addressable and jointly form a contiguous
address space.
Seek (Arm Motion)
Minimum
Average
Maximum
Latency
Purchase
ms
ms
ms
ms
Error Correction: Provides the capability of correcting single
data error bursts of up to nine bits span as well as detecting all
single error bursts of up to sixteen bits span.
Automatic Position Sensing: Fixed Block Architecture provides
for relative block addressing ... each block separately addressable ... channel automatic disconnect during period of rotational
latency providing greater channel availability... requires one
unshared subchannel on a block multiplexer channel for each
logical address.
Command Retry: Enables the storage control to recover from
certain subsystem errors without recourse to system error recovery procedures.
Write Protect Function: A switch for each Drive Address provides the means to protect data from being rewritten or erased.
When the read/write switch is in the read-only position, any
write command is rejected. The switch state can be changed
only when the device is not selected,
HDA Data Recovery: [Plant only] Should data in the field prove
unrecoverable, data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture will be provided.
Prerequisites
For a 4331 Processor -- a 3370 mdl Al requires a DASD
Adapter (#3201) on the 4331.
For a 4341 Processor - a 3370 mdl Al requires a 3880
Storage Control mdl 1 connected to a 2.0 megabyte block
multiplexer channel on the 4341.
A 3370 mdl Bl requires a 3370 mdl Al.
Electrical power is required during non-operating periods
except when maintenance is being performed. !=ach 3370
contains internal environmental control circuitry which remains active when machine power is turned off. Continued
or repeated failure to provide power to this circuitry' could
cause machine malfunction and could result in possible loss
of data.
Maximum: See 3880 Storage Control or 4331 Processor.
Bibliography: GA26-1657
[reverse side is blank)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MMMC/
AMMCR
$1.50
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - ---- -==--.:.- =-=
';' ==
M 3410 - 3411
May 79
DP Machines
3410 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
Purpose: Magnetic tape units and controls for a 3790 Communication System, S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, S/370 mdls 115
thru 158, a 3031 Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor ... the
3410 mdl 1 can be used with a 3881 Optical Mark Reader mdl 2
or a 3886 Optical Character Reader mdl 2 .. , the 3411 and 3410
mdl 3s can be used with a 3800 Printing Subsystem '" the 3411
mdl 1 can be used with a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or
4, or a 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3.
NOTE: For possible use with System/3, see GSD
Manual.
Models: Data rates in 8-bit bytes per second (1600 bpi).
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
3410
3411
20,000
40,000
80,000
20,000
40,000
80,000
Highlights: The 3410 is a single tape unit controlled by a 3411.
The 3411 is a single channel control unit with one tape drive.
Efficient compact space saving design.
Dual Density feature ... allows processing of data recorded
at 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi NRZI.
Seven Track feature ... tape written in seven-track format
compatible with tapes written at 200, 556, 800 bpi by
729/7330/7335 and 2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/3420
tape drives equipped with 7-track read/write heads. Note:
7-track tapes cannot be used wit[J a 3776 mdl 3 or 4, or a
3777 mdl 3.
Radial attachment of tape units permits off-line maintenance.
Simplified tape threading path.
Checking -- during write operations, both parity and signal amplitude are checked. (When used with a 3881 Optical Mark Reader,
both are checked in 800 bpi NRZI ... signal amplitudes only in
1600 bpL) During read operations, parity is checke~.
Error
error
track
3881
Correction -- in 1600 bpi PE recording format single track
correction in flight takes place. For 9-track, 800 bpi NRZI,
in error (T.I.E.) is provided, (not applicable when used with a
Optical Mark Reader).
Functions: The following table indicates feature numbers for
corresponding functions:
Subsystem Function
1600 bpi 9-track
onl~
1600 bpi PE/8oo bpi
NRZI 9-track
Feature Name
3411 Control Unit
3410' Tape Unit
(includes tape unit
on 3411)
Single Density Standard
#3211
Dual Density
#3211 or #3221
#9150
1600 bpi PE/200-556-800
Seven Track
#9160
#3211 or #6550
bpi NRZI 7-track
• Tape Units must all be the same model as 3411.
Characteristics
Model 1 Model 2 Model 3
Data Rate (kb / sec)
at 1600 bpi (P.E.)
20
40
80
at 800 bpi (NRZI)
10
20
40
at 556 bpi
6.9
13.9
27.8
at 200 bpi
2.5
5.0
10.0
Recording Density (bpi)
1600/800/556/200 (all models)
12.5
25
50
Tape Speed (ips)
Nominal IBG (inch) -- 9-track
.6
.6
.6
Nominal IBG (inch) -- 7-track
.75
.75
.75
Nominal IBG Time (ms) -- 9-track 48
24
12
Nominal IBG Time (ms) -- 7 -track 60
30
15
Nominal Rd/Wr Access Time (ms) 15
12
6
Rewind Time Full Reel (min)
3
3
2
Maximums: Interconnected 3410s and 3411 s must be of the
same model... models cannot be intermixed. The maximum number of tape units (3410s) per 3411 are:
Model 1 - up to three 3410 mdl 1s ... a total of 4 drives.
Model 2 - up to five 34.10 mdl 2s ... a total of 6 drives.
Model 3 -- up to five 3410 mdl 3s ... a total of 6 drives.
LIMITATION: A maximum of one 3410 mdl 1 can be attached
to a 3881 or 3886.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3411 requires the following:
For 5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- a 3411 Magnetic Tape Adapter
(#4675) on the 3115 or 3125 and S/370 mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361) on the 3411 except with 3115 mdl HG2, 3125 mdl
HG2 and 12. When attached to 3115 mdl HG2, or 3125 mdl HG2
or 12, RPQ
Features. "
is required on the 3411
... see "Special
For 5/360 or 5/370 mdl 135 and up, and all 4300 Processors -- a
control unit position on a system channel, plus S/360/370 Attachment (#7360) on the 3411 ... see "Special Features."
5/360 mdl 25 -- Selector Channel (special feature) ... see
2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except one is standard on
2022) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector or
Block Multiplexer Channels'(special features) ... see 3135. NOT
supported on byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation
with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or Selector Channel.
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (special features) .. , see 3135-3. NOT
supported on byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation
of Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter,
or Block Multiplexer Channel.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138, NOT supported on
byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation of Integrated
File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or Block
Multiplexer Channel.
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (one is standard), or Block Multiplexer Channel
(special feature) , .. see 3145,
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
ml11tiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- block multiplexer channel (first two are
standard) ... see 3155, 3158,
3031 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is standard),
'block multiplexer channels (five are standard) , .. see 3031.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional) .. , see 4331 byte
multiplexer channel for restrictions, Block multiplexer channel
(optional) ... see 4331,
4341 Processor -- block multiplexer channels (2 are standard) '" see
4341,
3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or 4, or 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3 -- 3411 Model 1 Attachment (#7801) on the
terminal ... see "Special Features" under 3776 or 3777. The
3411 itself requires S/3-3770/3790 Communication System
Attachment (#7003) ... see "Special Features" below.
3790 Communication System -- a Magnetic Tape Attachment
feature (#7840) on the 3791 Controller. The 3411 requires a
3790 Attachment feature (#7003),
3800 Printing Subsystem -- Tape-to-Printing. Subsystem Feature
(#7810) on the 3800 .. , see "Special Features" under 3800,
Note: A control unit position is not required,
Each 3410 requires an appropriate model of the 3411, except
when a 3410 mdl 1 is attached to a 3881 or 3886.
Magnetic Tape: The following tapes and reels can be used -- IBM
Series 500, IBM Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, or competitive formulations which meet the tape and reel criteria in "Tape
Specifications", GA32-0006, NOTE: IBM tapes other than those
above do not provide adequate reliability and should not be used.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001, 3881
-- GA21-9127. Also IBM 3410/3411 Component Summary, GA320015,
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V, If used with a 3881 Optical Mark
Reader , a 3886 Optical Character Reader, or a 3800 Printing
Subsystem, voltage must be consistent.
[2] Dual Density, Control (3411 only): #9150, Permits attachment
of 3410s equipped with Dual Density, Tape Unit (#3221) and
installation of Dual Density, Tape Unit (#3221) on the 3411
itself. 3410s equipped with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211)
can also be attached. Limitation: Cannot be installed on same
3411 with Seven Track, Control (#9160). Field Installation:
Yes.
[3] Seven Track, Control (3411 only): #9160. Permits attachment
of 3410s equipped with Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550) and
installation of Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550) on the 3411
itself. 3410s equipped with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211)
can also be attached. #9160 includes the translator function
which, when used, causes 8-bit bytes from the I/O interface to
be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit charac-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ------ ---':'=-:=';'E:
DP Machines
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control (conrd)
ters read from tape to be translated into their EBCDIC equivalents. The Data Conversion function. also included. allows
reading and writing of 8-bit bytes on 7-track tape by converting
4 tape characters to 3 "iItorage bytes and vice versa.
limitations: Cannot be install.ed with Dual DensitY. Control
(#9150). Cannot be used with a 3776 mdl 3 or 4. or a 3777
mdl3. Field Installation: Yes.
[4] Additional Tape Units (3411 only): #9001 ... required if the
number of tape drives is to exceed four (one 3411 plus three
3410s). FIeld I:-;atallatloii: Yes.
[5] Color:#9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[6] Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired. specify
#9051 for red. #9053 for blue. or #9054 for white.
[7] Density Formats: The 3410/3411 subsystem can operate in
three densitY formats ... 1600 bpi PE. single density... or
1600/800 bpi. dual density ... or 200/556/800 bpi. seven
track. With the exception of single density. which is standard
on the control unit of the 3411. a feature number for the format
desired must be specified for each tape unit and the control
unit ... see "Special Features" for limitations. Dual Density.
Control (#9150) is required on the 3411 for Dual Density.
Tape Unit (#3221) on the 3411 and attached 3410s ... see
specify [2] above. Seven Track. Control (#9160) is required on
the 3411 for Seven Track. Tape Unit (#6550) on the 3411 and
attached 3410s ... see specify [3] above.
[8]
System Attachments: S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment
(#7361) is required for attachment to a S/370 mdl 115 or 125
except with 3115 mdl HG2. 3125 mdl HG2 and 12. When attais
ched to 3.115 mdl HG2. 3125 mdl HG2 or 12. RPQ .
required on the 3411 ... see "Special Features" ... S/360/370
Attachment (#7360) is required for attachment to a S/360 or
S/370 mdls 135. 135-3. 138. 145. 145-3. 148. 155. 158. a
3031 Processor. or any 4300 Processor. System/3-3770/3790
Communication System Attachment (#7003) Is required for
attachment to a 3790 system. System 3 - 3770/3790 Commu.nication System Attachment (#7003) is required for attachment
to a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or 4 or to a 3777
Communication Terminal mdl 3.
PRICES:
Mdl
3410
1
2
3
3411
1
2
3
- FTP/MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1 yr· 2 yr
$206
274
342
454
578
701
M 3410-3420
May 79
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 200.
556 or 800 bpi NRZI in the seven track format compatible with
729. 7330. 7335 and 2401. 2402. 2403. 2404. 2415. 3420 tape
units equipped with seven-track read/write heads. Tape units with
this feature will only read or write 7-track tape. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Single Density. Tape Unit (#3211). or Dual
Density. Tape Unit (#3221). Cannot be used with a 3776 mdl 3 or
4 or a 3777 mdl 3. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Seven
Track. Control (#9160) on the 3411.
SYSTEiVii3-3710i3790
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ATTACHMENT (#7003). [3411 mdl 1 only] To atta~h a 3411 mdl 1 with
up to three 3410 mdl 1 s to a 3791 Controller. or to attach one
3411 mdl 1 to a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or 4. or a
3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3. Prerequisites: Magnetic
Tape Attachment (#7804) on the 3791. or 3411 MagnetiC Tape
Unit and Control Mdl 1 Attachment (#7801) on the 3776 mdl 3 or
4. or 3777 mdl 3. Maximum: 1. Field Installation. Yes.
limitations: Cannot be. installed with S/360/370 Attachment
(#7360). or S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361). For use
with System 3. see GSD sales manual.
S/360/370 ATTACHMENT (#7360).
[3411 mdl 1. 2. 3] To
attach the 3411 to a S/360 mdl 22. 25. 30. 40. 50 or a S/370
mdl 135. 135-3. 138. 145. 145-3. 148. 155. 158. a 3031 Processor. or any 4300 Processor. [3411 mdl 3] To attach the 3411 mdl
3 to a 3800 Printing Subsystem. Up to eight control units may be
attached to the 3800 provided that power sequencing and control
connection for all other than one are provided by the system.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with System/3-3790 Communication System Attachment (#7003) or S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attach). Field Installation: Yes.
ment (#7361 or RPQ
S/370 Md1115/125 ATTACHMENT (#7361). [3411 mdll. 2. 3]
To attach the 3411 to a S/370 mdl 115 or 125. except to 3115
mdl HG2. 3125 mdl HG2 or 12. When attached to 3115 mdl HG2.
3125 mdl HG2 or 12. RPQ 870061 is required. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with System/3-3790 Communication System Attachment (#7003) or S/360/370 Attachment (#7360 or RPQ
870061). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3411 Magnetic
Tape Adapter (#4675) on the 3115 or 3125 Processing Unit.
Special Feature Prices:
Purchase
MMMC
$190
252
315
$173
230
287
$ 5,655
7,560
9,360
$ 61.50
68.00
75.00
418
532
645
381
486
589
12,460
15,770
19,220
95.00
102.00
109.00
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: C
Metering: 3410 (all mdls - I/O Unit Online) ... 3410 mdl 1 when
used with a 3881 mdl 2 - I/O Unit (Offline).
3411 - Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Single Density, Tape Unit
Dual Density. Tape Unit
Seven Track, Tape Unit
S/3-3770/3790
Communication Sys Attach
S/360/370 Attachment to mdls
135.145.155,158 or 3031
S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attach
3411 Mdll to Mdl 2 $4,140
Mdl 1 to Mdl 3
8,460
Mdl 2 to Mdl 3
8,460
SPECIAL FEATURES
SINGLE DENSITY, TAPE UI\IIT (#3211). [3410. 3411 any mdl]
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 1600
bpi PE only. limitation: Cannot be installed with Dual Density.
Tape Unit (#3221) or Seven Track. Tape Unit (#6550). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: If installed on the 3886 Optical
Character Reader. Single Density Tape· Adapter (#6490) on the
3886.
DUAL DENSITY, TAPE UNIT (#3221).
[3410. 3411 any mdl]
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 800
bpi as well as 1600 bpi. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Single Density. Tape Unit (#3211) or Seven Track. Tape Unit
(#6550). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Dual Density.
Control (#9150) on the 3411 ... see "Specify." or Dual Density
(#3550) on the 3881 Optical Mark Reader. or Dual Density. Tape
Adapter (#6485) on the 3886 Optical Character Reader.
SEVEN TRACK, TAPE UNIT (#6550).
[3410. 3411 any mdl]
#3211
3221
6550
$ 60 $ 55
88
81
88
81
$ 50
74
74
$1.835
2,645
2,645
$ 9.50
36.50
I7.oo
7003
83
76
70
2,315
3.50
7360
7361
166
110
153
101
139
92
4.625
3.080
20.00
5.00
3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT - Models 3, 5, 7
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit for S/360 and S/370.
Model3
120.000 eight-bit bytes/second ... for use with
S/360 mdls 22. 30. 40. 50. 65. 67 (In 65 mode).
75. 85. 91. 195 •• with all S/370 Processors. or
with a 3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 5
200.000 eight-bit bytes/second ... for use with
S/360 mdls 22. 30. 40. 50. 65. 67 (in 65 mode).
75. 85. 91. 195. • with all S/370 Processors. or
with a 3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 7
320.000 eight-bit bytes/second ... for use with
S/360 mdls 50. 65. 67 (in 65 mode). 75. 85. 91.
195. with all S/370 Processors except 3115 and
3125. or with a 3800 Printing Subsystem.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges)
3410 Mdl1 to Mdl 2 $2,385
Mdl 1 to Mdl 3 4,635
Mdl 2 to Mdl 3 4,635
.- FTP/ -MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC I yr· 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Highlights: Radial attachment of tape drives to the control unit via
a switch located in the control unit. permitting off-line service of
individual tape units without disturbing the subsystem. 24-line
multiplex interface provides advanced diagnostic capability.
MST circuitry reduces card count while increasing functions:
expanded sense data. better diagnostic capability. unique device identification. EC level and feature identification. Reads
and writes IBM Series/500. Dynexcel or Heavy Duty half-inch
magnetic tape on 10-1/.2". 8-1/2". or mini reels. limitations:
The following half-inch tapes can be used: IBM Heavy Duty.
IBM Dynexcel. IBM Series/500. or competitive formulations
which meet the specifications described in SRL GA32-Q006.
IBM Mylar""" and IBM Acetate tapes should not be used with
3420 tape units.
" FTP is 12-23 months.
• •• "'Mylar;" is a trademark of E. I. DuPont de Nemours &: Co.~ Inc. "'IBM
Mylar" is a brand of mapetic tape which includes a Mylar polyester substrate and
wliicb was previously marketed by IBM.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------=- =------ -=--':' =
~l
May 79
DP Machines
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit - Models 3,5,7 (conl'd)
Automatic threading and Cartridge Loading -- threading is
automatic with or without the wraparound cartridge; automatic
retry (with cartridge only) in case of load failure, stopping on
the leader to prevent damage to the recorded surface. With
the wraparound cartridge, tape is not exposed to contamination or damage.
Nine Track 1600 bpi Phase Encoding Operation -- data is recorded parallel by bit, serial by byte at 1600 bytes/inch,
phase encoded, in nine tracks across the width of the tape.
The data format uses eight of the nine bits for data; the ninth
bit is a parity bit. Data is recorded in odd parity. The eight
bits of one byte can represent an alphabetic character, zoned
decimal digit, two decimal digits (packed), a special character,
or eight binary bits. The recording format is compatible with
the 1600 bpi PE recording of tape units 2401, 2402, 2403,
2404, 2415 mdls 4, 5 and 6, and 2420 mdls 5 and 7. For
nine track 1600 bpi PE operation only, specify Single Density
(#6631) ... see "'Special Features" for limitations and prerequisites.
Nine Track 800 bpi NRZI Operation -- tape is written at 800 bpi
in the nine track NRZI format as well as in the 1600 bpi PE
format. Data representation is the same as for 1600 bpi PE
operation. For nine track 800 bpi NRZI capability, Dual Density
(#3550) is required on the tape unit ... see "'Special
Features" for limitations and prerequisites.
Seven Track Operation -- tape is written in the seven track
format compatible with tapes written at either 556 or 800 bps
by 729/7330/7335 and 2401/2402/2403/2404/2415 tape
drives equipped with seven-track read/write heads. For seven
track operation, Seven Track (#6407) is required on the tape
unit ... see "'Special Features" for limitations and prerequisites.
Checking - each byte is parity checked while tape is being read.
Data written on tape is read back instantly and checked as in
reading, with full parity check.
Error Correction - single track drop-out errors are corrected "'in
flight"' during 1600 bpi read operations.
Read Backwards -- all tapes (9- or 7-track) written on a
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/2420 can be read by the 3420
in a forward or backward direction. The Data Conversion function is inoperative during backward read of 7-track tapes.
limitations:
Model 3 cannot be attached to the multiplexer channel of the
S/360 mdl 22 or 30.
Model 5 cannot be attached to the multiplexer channel of the
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, or 50. Model 5 at 1600 bpi PE cannot
be attached to S/360 mdl 22. If the 3420 mdl 5 is ordered for
attachment to a selector subchannel feature of the 2870,
consult
Model 7 cannot be attached to S/360 mdl 22, 30 or 40, S/370
mdl 115 or 125, nor to the 2870.
OS does not support burst mode devices on multiplexer channels
on S/360 mdls 22, 30, 40 or 50, or on the basic 2870 multiplexer channel. Programming support for the extended diagnostic capabilities of the 3420 requires a minimum of 32K
core.
Supplies -- one standard 10-1/2" reel of magnetic tape. in an
easyload cartridge is shipped with each tape unit. For additional
reels of tape and cartridges, see IRD sales manual.
PREREQUISITE: A 3803 Tape Control.
Characteristics:
Model 3
ModelS
Model 7
Nominal Data Rate (kb/sec)
120
200
320
At 1 600 bpi PE
60
100
160
At 800 bpi NRZI
41.7
69.5
111.2
At 556 bpi (7 -track)
At 200 bpi (7 -track)
15
25
40
Recording Density (Bytes/inch) ---- 1600/800/556/200 ---75
125
200
Tape Speed (Inches/second)
Nominal IBG (Inches)
Nine-track
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.75
Seven-track
0.75
0.75
Nominal IBG Time (ms)
4.8
8.0
3.0
Nine-track
10.0
Seven-track
6.0
3.75
Rewind Time
(2400' Reel, Seconds)
60
60
45
Rewind-Unload Time
(2400' Reel, Seconds)
66
66
51
Auto Threading Time' (Seconds) 10
10
7
Nominal Read/Write Access
4.0
2.0
Time" (ms)
2.9
•• Access time is the interval from initiation of a write or forward read command until the first data byte is read or written when tape is brought up to
speed from stopped status.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] One AND ONL Y ONE of the following must
fied for each tape unit ... see "Special Features."
#6631 (Single Density) -- for 9-track 1600 bpi PE
only.
#3550 (Dual Density) -- for 9-track 800 bpi NRZI
as well as 1600 bpi PE.
#6407 (Seven Track) -- for 7-track 556 or 800
operation.
be specioperation
operation
bpi NRZI
NOTE: MES orders for these features to effect field changes
should consider that one of these three features MUST be
installed on the 3420 or it is incomplete.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
PRICES:
- FTP/ ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MLC MLC
MRC 1 yrt
2 yr 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Mdl
3
$436
586
694
5
7
$401 $366 $366 $13,660
539 492 492
18,320
638 583 583
20,520
$ 83
91
108
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Metering: I/O Unit (On-line)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
ETP/FTP/MLC ... all models of the 3420 may be under ETP/MLC
or FTP/MLC.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
Model 3
Model 5
ModelS
Model 7
$4,660
$8,560
8,580
NOTE: For upgrades to mdls 4, 6 or 8, see 3420 mdl 4, 6, 8.
SPECIAL FEATURES
DUAL DENSITY (#3550). Permits the tape unit to operate at 800
bpi NRZI nine track as well as at 1600 bpi PE. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with either Single Density (#6631) or Seven Track
(#6407). [Field installable except for machines with serial
#90XXX.] Prerequisite: Dual Density (#3551) on the 3803 Tape
Control.
SEVEN TRACK (#6407).
Permits the tape unit to operate at
either 556 or 800 bpi NRZI in the seven track format compatible
with 729, 7330, 7335 and 2401, 2402, 2403, 2404, 2415 tape
units equipped with seven track read/write heads. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with either Single Density (#6631) or Dual
Density (#3550). [Field Installable only to replace Dual Density
(#3550), otherwise available at time of manufacture only.]
Prerequisite: Seven Track (#6408) on the 3803 Tape Control.
SINGLE DENSITY (#6631).
Permits the tape drive to read or
write tapes at 1600 bpi PE. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
either Dual Density (#3550) or Seven Track (#6407). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: One of the following on the 3803
Tape Control - Single Density (#9570), Dual Density (#3551), or
Sel(en Track (#6408).
Special Feature Prices:
Dual Density
Seven Track
Single Density
• From initiation (using mounted supply reel) to "Tape Drive Ready."
t
FTP is 12·23 months,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- FTP/-- ETP/
MAC/MLC MLC MLC
MRC I yrt 2 yr 2 yr Purch
#3550 $\34
6407
103
6631
\03
$123 $ 113 $ 113
95
87
87
95
87
87
$4,245
3,290
3,290
MMMC
$41.00
41.00
24.50
----------- --- --- - =-----=
=- =~
M 3420.2
May 79
DP Machines
3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT - MODELS 4, 6, 8
Purpose: Magnetic Tape Unit for S/370.
Model 4
470,000 eight-bit bytes/second for use with any
S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or a
3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 6
780,000 eight-bit bytes/second for use with any
S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or a
3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 8
1,250,000 eight-bit bytes/second for use with any
8/370 Processor (except 3115 Oi 3125), Of a
3800 Printing Subsystem.
Highlights: Nominal recording density of 6250 user bytes per inch
with 'a .3 inch inter-block gap.
Redlel Attachment -- of tape drives to the control unit via a
switch located in the control unit, permitting off-line service of
individual tape units without disturbing the subsystem. 24-line
multiplex interface provides advanced diagnostic capability.
Cleaning Mechanism -- a new cleaning mechanism is engaged
during auto-threading, rewinding and unloading operations to
remove loose contaminants from the tape surface and to protect
the recording head. This new cleaning mechanism makes tape
cleaning a by-product of tape processing. The cleaning mechanism does not, however, replace drive cleaning by the operator,
nor does it replace the need for normal library maintenance.
Automatic Threading and Cartridge Loading -- threading is
automatic with or without the wraparound cartridge; automatic
retry (with cartridge only) in case of load failure, stopping on the
leader to prevent damage to the recorded surface. With the
wraparound cartridge, tape is not exposed to contamination or
damage.
Characteristics
Read Backward -- tapes written at 6250 bpi mode can be read
in a forward or backward direction. Tapes written at 1600 bpi
(Phase Encoded) mode can be read in a forward or backward
mode if the 3420 mdl 4, 6 or 8 is equipped with the 6250/1600
bpi optional feature ... see "Special Features."
6250/1600 BPI -- an optional feature allows the 3420 mdl 4, 6
or 8 to read and record at 1600 bpi (Phase Encoded) density as
'
well as at 6250 bpi density ... see "Special Features."
S/360 Attachment -- one channel of 3420 mdl 4s may be attached via a 3803 mdl 2 to S/360 mdl 50 by no-charge RPQ ...
3420 mdl 4, 6 or 8 may be attached via a 3803 mdl 2 to S/360
mdls 65 thru 195 (mdl 67 operating in 65 mode) by no-charge
RPQ. S/360 stand-alone emulators are not supported.
Tape Media -- most tape volumes which operate satisfactorily on
3420 mdls 3, 5 and 7 will operate with equal or better read-write
reliability for an equivalent number of bytes transferred on 3420
mdls 4, 6 or 8. Nevertheless, tapes must conform to the IBM
Tape Specifications, GA32-0006.
PRt:REQUISITE: A 3803 Tape Control mdl 2.
Limitations: 3420 mdls 4, 6 and 8 via a 3803 mdl 2 control unit
are not supported on byte multiplexer, multiplexer, or 2870 Selector Subchannels at either 6250 or 1600 bpi. 3420 mdls 6 or 8
cannot be attached to S/360 mdl 50. When contemplating the
attachment of 3420 mdls 6 or 8 to S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 145 or
145-3, consult System 370 Model 135 Channel Characteristics
(GA33-3010), System 370 Model 138 Channel Characteristics
(GA33-XXX), System 370 Model 145 Channel Characteristics
(GA24-3573) or System 370 Model 148 Channel Characteristics
(GA24-XXXX).
Supplies: One standard 10-1/2" reel of magnetic tape tested for
6250 bpi in an Easyload I cartridge is shipped with each tape unit.
additional reels of tape and cartridges,
Model 6
Model 8
125
6250/1600
200
6250/1600
780
200
1250
320
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.6
1.6/1.5
2.6/2.0
60
66
10
1.1/.95
..
1
.,
, .....
711
,/
45
51
7
, Access time is the time required to read or write the lirst byte of data in
a block after a read/write instruction has been initiated from a stopped
position (read/write head positioned in the !BG).
•• From initiation (using mounted supply reel) to "Tape Drive Ready."
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 fer red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
[4] Density: One and only one of the following, #6420 or #6425,
must be specified ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
- FTP ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MLC MLC
MRC 1 yrt
2 yr 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Mdl
4
Automatic Read Amplification -- automatically adjusts the amplifier gain in the tape drive to each individual reel of tape when
operating at 6250 bpi.
Checking -- data written on tape is read back instantly to ensure
later readability.
Model 4
Tape Speed (in/sec)
75
Recording Density
6250/1600
Nominal Data Rate (kb/sec)
at 6250
470
at 1600
120
Nominal IBG (in)
0.3
at 6250
at 1600
0.6
Nominal Read/Write Access (ms)'
at 6250
2.3/2.1
at 1600
4.0/3.0
Max Rewind Time (sec) 60
Max Rewind-Unload (sec) 66
Max Auto Thread (sec)" 10
$608
702
834
6
8
$559 $511
646 590
767 701
$511 $21,960
590 25,650
701 28,440
$ 83
91
133
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: A
Metering: I/O Unit (on-line)
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
ETP/FTP/MLC: Both an ETP/MLC and a FTP/MLC Plan are
optionally available. Customers can transfer to ETP/MLC when the
3803 mdl 1 is converted to a mdl 2 or when 3420s are model
changed or at any time thereafter. The early termination charge
does not apply but the two year ETP /MLC committment period
begins at the date of the ETP /MLC contract, not the FTP/MLC
contract.
3420s and 3803s shipped from the plant may be under ETP /MLC,
FTP/MLC or MAC/MRC at the customer's option.
Model Changes: Field installable ... any 3420 mdl 3, 5 or 7 can
be converted to a 3420 mdl 4, 6 or 8 in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
Model 4
Model 6
Model 8
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
3
5
7
4
6
$ 9,540
9,540
9,540
$13,230
10,150
10,150
3,690
$16,020
16,020
10,750
12,780
12,780
SPECIAL FEATURES
6250 DENSITY (#6420). Permits the tape unit to operate at nine
track 6250 bpi '" either this feature or #6425 must be specified,
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 6250/1600 Density (#6425).
6250/1600 DENSITY (#6425). Permits the tape unit to operate
at 6250 bpi density as well as 1600 bpi (Phase Encoded) density
... either this feature or #6420 must be specified. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with 6250 Density (#6420).
-- FTP/ -- ETP/
MAC/MLC MLC MLC
MRC I yrt 2 yr 2 yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
6250 Density
6250/1600 Density
t
#6420
6425
$61
87
see preceding page
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
$56
80
$51
73
$51
73
$2,295
3,160
MMMC
$41.00
49.50
-------
.:. =:: ~5:
M 3501
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3501 CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input unit for the 3770 Data Communication System. or 8100 Information System vis 3289 Printer model
3.
Highlights: Used for automatic entry of punched card data. The
3289 Printer mdl 3 or 3770 System performs all format control
and analysis.
Rated 80-column card speed is 50 cards per minute. Cards are
read serially by a sensing mechanism which is checked for proper
functioning in every card cycle. EBCDIC or ASCII (3770 System
only) code can be read. Hopper and stacker capacity is approximately 400 cards.
The 3501 is packaged as a table-top device.
Card Limitations: Generally. special feature cards require carefui
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following has
been approved:
Externel Scor.. (after separation) - Column 1 Edge: M-3. M-4.
M-5. Column 80 Edge: M-7. All Edges: CF-11.
Corner Cuts - Any corner: C5. Upper right and upper left
corners: C1. C2. C3.
Verified Cards - approved cards with verify notch between
rows 0 and 1. column 80 edge; or verify punch 2 and 3 in
column 81 area.
Card Stock - regular. edge coated. and heavy duty.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance.
PREREQUISITE: 3501 Card Reader Attachment (#8050) on the
3289-3. 3771. 3774. 3775 or 3776.
Limitation: Cannot be installed on a machine with a 2502 Card
Reader.
Bibliography:
GC20"()OO1
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC. 1-phase. 60 Hz): #9901.
[2] Documentation: One must be specified. #9101 for use with a
3771. #9102 for use with a 3289-3. 3774 or 3775. or #9103
for use with a 3776.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer to
Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-3006.
PRICES:
Mdl
MACI
MRC
3501
1
$114
ETPI
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 97
$3,400
$17.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----- -----==----=":' =
M 3504
May 79
DP Machines
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 3504 CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input unit for a S/370 mdl 125.
Model
Rated 80-column Card Speed
A1
A2
800/minute
1200/minute
Highlights: The 3504 is a high-speed, fully buffered card reader
that 8.tt~chas i1a.th;e~y tv a CPU via an ;ntegrtiiau 3504 Card Reaa ..
er Attachment on the 3125. The 3504 is a natively attachable
version of the 3505 Card Reader.
Both models have a 3,OOO-card capacity file feed and two 1,750card capacity non-programmable stackers which operate in an
alternating mode. Feeding from the file feed hopper is by means
of friction feed rolls with vacuum assist. Failure to feed a card
from the hopper is followed automatically by up to 3 retries before
the machine stops.
Both models have read column eliminate capability which provides
the user, under program control, the ability to suppress the reading of selected card columns. It is recommended for use to prevent reading in columns that could cause validity and read checks
due to invalid codes or open-punched card scores.
Holes in the card are read by a light sensing mechanism which is
checked for correct operation in every card cycle. Cards punched
in either Extended BCD Interchange Code (Data Mode 1) or Card
Image (Data Mode 2) can be read. Machine checks are made for
invalid codes (Data Mode 1 punching only), off-punching, and
mispositioned cards.
51/BO-COLUMN INTERCHANGEABLE READ FEED (#3921).
[Mdl A2 only] For feeding and reading 51-column cards. The 51
columns of data appear in positions 1 thru 51 of the 80-position
buffer. A special card weight, file feed and hopper liners and
stacker guide assemblies are provided so that the operator can
adjust for 80 or 51-column operations. Intermixed cards on the
same operation are not supported. Reading speed of the 3504 is
maintained. With this feature installed, the capacity of each stacker is permanently reduced to 1500 cards. Can be "sed wi!!'! a!!
olner 3504 features. Field Installation: Not recommended.
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5450). For reading up to 40 columns
of marked data. Marked and/or punched hole data can be read
from a card. Columns in which marks are unacceptable are transmitted as Hex "3F" characters. Same validity checking applies as
for holes. Can be used in Card Image mode, in which case the
validity check is suspended. Note: See SRL GA21-9124 for card
and format specifications. It is recommended that Selective Stacker (#6555) be installed for program selecting poorly marked
cards. Limitation: Cannot be used simultaneously with the read
column eliminate function. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
3504 Optical Mark Read Control (#9783) on the 3125.
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6555).
Provides a third stacker
(second logical stacker) which permits time-independent card
selection under program control. Card capacity is 1,750 cards.
When actually using this feature under DOS, the maximum speed
of model A2 on the 3125 is approximately 1,150 cards/minute.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3504 Selective Stacker
Control (#9784) on the 3125.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase
Maximum: One 3504 mdl A 1 or mdl A2 can be attached to a
3125.
Special Feature Prices:
PREREQUISITE: An Integrated 3504 Card Reader Attachment
(#4680) on the 3125.
51/80-Col Interchangeable
Read Feed
#3921 $157
Optical Mark Read
5450
234
Selective Stacker
6555
61
Card Limitations: Generally, special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following card
features has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2, 10-3 and S-1 NOTE: When using OM-2 or OM-3,
either reading must be terminated prior to the column that is
scored, or, reading of the scored column and the two adjacent
columns must be suppressed by means of program-controlled
Read Column Eliminate. S-2 may be used prior to folding, and
after folding if the card is properly flattened.
External Scores (after separation) -- column 1 and 80 end: M-3,
M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7, M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. Column 1
end only: OM-3. 12 and 9 edge:
Corner Cuts - any corner: C1, C2, C3 and C5.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Port-A-Punch - can be processed.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance and should be tested in an actual application prior to being
recommended.
Blllography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 60 Hz supplied by system): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] High Altitude Group: #9220 ... to be specified when Card
Reader is to be installed in an altitude exceeding 4,300 feet.
PRICES:
Mdl
3504
A1
A2
MAC/
MRC
$ 606
736
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 516 $21,210
626
22,250
$103
139
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Metering: I/O Unit (On-line)
Per Call: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Useful Life Category: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model A 1 to Model A2 ..... $1,040
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
$134
199
52
$5,300
8,420
2,375
MMMC
$ 51
48
9
--- --- ----
----- ~=-==~=
M 3505
May 79
DP Machines
3505 CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input for a S/360 mdl 195 or all S/370
or 4300 Processors.
Model
Bl
B2
Rated 8O-column Card Speed
800/minute
1200/minute
Highlights: The 3505 is a high-speed, fully buffered, card reader,
containing its own control unit. With appropriate adapter and
control features installed (see "Special Features"), the 3505
provides the power and logic to control one 3525 Card Punch.
All models have a 3,OOO-card capacity file feed and two 1,750card capacity non-Programmable stackers which operate in an
alternating mode. Feeding from the file feed hopper' is by means of
friction feed rolls with vacuum assist. Failure to feed a card from
the hopper is followed automatically by up to 3 retries before the
machine stops.
All models have read column eliminate capability which provides
the user, under program control, the ability to suppress the reading of selected card columns. It is recommended for use to prevent reading in columns that could cause validity and read checks
due to invalid or open-punched card scores.
Holes in the card are read by a light sensing mechanism which is
checked for correct operation in every card cycle. Cards punched
in either the Extended BCD Interchange Code (Data Mode 1) or
Card Image (Data Mode 2) can be read. Machine checks are made
for invalid codes (Data Mode 1 punching only), off-punching, and
mispositioned cards.
Maximum: S/360 mdl 195 and all S/370 or 4300 Processorsthe number of 3505 mdls Bl and/or B2 that can be attached
depends upon the number of system channel control unit positions
available.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3505 requires an available control unit
position on a channel.
S/360 mdl 195 and S/370 mdl 195 - selector channel of 2860,
basic multiplexer channel of 2870, or block multiplexer channel
of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channels (special
features) '" see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135 - 3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) '" see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (first one is standard), Block Multiplexer Channels
(special features) ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer
Channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
External Scores (after separation) - column 1 and 80 end: M-3,
M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7, M-ll, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-l1. Column 1
end only: OM-3. 12 and 9 edge:
Corner Cuts -- any corner: Cl, C2, C3 and C5.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Port-A-Punch -- can be processed.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance and should be tested in actual application prior to being
recommended.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20--0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3) High Altitude Group: #9220 ... to be specified when Card
Reader is to be installed in an altitude exceeding 4,300 feet.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3505
Bl
B2
$ 732
869
$29,940
30,980
$146
199
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: B
Purchase Option: 45% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model B1 to Model B2 ..... $1,040.
SPECIAL FEATURES
51/80-COLUMN INTERCHANGEABLE READ FEED (#3921).
[Mdl B2 only) For feeding and reading 51-column cards. The 51
columns of data appear in positions 1 thru 51 of the 80-position
buffer. A special card weight, file feed and hopper liners, and
stacker guide assemblies are provided so that the operator can
adjust for 80 or 51-column operations. Intermixed cards on the
same operation are not supported. Reading speed of the 3505 is
maintained. With this feature installed, the capacity of each stacker is permanently reduced to 1 500 cards. Can be used with all
other 3505 features. Field Installation: Not recommended.
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5450). For reading up to 40 columns
of marked data. Marked and/or punched hole data can be read
from a card. Columns in which marks are unacceptable are transmitted as Hex "3F" characters. Same validity checking applies as
for holes. Can be used in Card Image Mode, in which case the
validity check is suspended. Note: See SRL GA21-9124 for card
and format specifications. It is recommended that Selective Stacker (#6555) be installed for program selecting poorly marked
cards. Limitation: Cannot be used simultaneously with the read
column eliminate function. Field Installation: YI;lS.
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6555).
Provides a third stacker
(second logical stacker) which permits time-independent card
selection under program control. Card capacity is 1,750 cards.
When actually using this feature under ~OS, the maximum speed
of model B2 on the 3115 or 3125 is approximately 1,150
cards/minute. Field Installation: Yes.
S/370 mdl 165, 168 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
of- 2870, or block multiplexer channel of 2880 ... see 2860,
2870,2880.
3525 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#8100).
Provides control for
Basic Card Print (#1421) installed on a 3525 Card Punch. Specify
either #9791 for two-line, or #9792 for multi-line. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Either 3525 Punch Adapter
(#8103) or 3525 Read Punch Adapter (#8105).
3031, 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is standard), block multiplexer Channels (five are standard) ... see
3031,3032.
3525 PUNCH ADAPTER (#8103).
Permits attachment of the
3525 Card Punch, without Card Read (#1533). Limitation: Not
with #8105. Field Installation: Yes.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
3525 READ PUNCH ADAPTER (#8105). Permits attachment of
the 3525 Card Punch equipped with Card Read (#1533).
limitation: Not with #8103. Field Installation: Yes.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (special feature),
block multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Card Limitations: Generally, special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following card
features has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) - M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2, 10-3 and S-l. NOTE: When using OM-2 or OM-3,
either reading must be terminated prior to the column that is
scored, or, reading of the scored column and the two adjacent
columns must be suppressed by means of program-controlled
Read Column Eliminate. 5-2 may be used prior to folding, and
alter folding if the card is properly flattened.
SpeCial Feature Prices:
51/8O-Col Intchg Rd Fd
Optical Mark Read
Selective Stacker
3525 Card Print Control
3525 Punch Adapter
3525 Read Punch Adapter
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
MAC/
MRC Purchase
#3921 $161
5450 237
6555
63
8100
72
8103 128
8105 161
$5,300
8,420
2,375
3,175
5,300
5,830
MMMC
$63.50
590
11.50
5.50
4.50
5.50
--------- - - ---
----- -
M 3521 - 3525
May 79
=~=":=
DP Machines
IBM
3521
IBM
CARD PUNCH
Purpose: Punched card output unit for the 3770 Data Communication System or 8100 Information System.
Highlights: Used primarily for punched card output on the 3770
System or 8100 Information System via 3289 Printer mdl 3 but
can, when equipped with appropriate optional features, be used
alternately as a card reader and/or to print information on a card.
The 3289-3, 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 mdl 2 or 3 performs all format control and analysis.
Rated 80-column card speed is 50 cards per minute. Hopper and
stacker capacity is approximately 400 cards.
The 3521 is a table-top unit that is placed on top of the 3782
Card Attachment Unit mdl 1.
Card Limitations: Generally, special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following has
been approved:
External Scores (after separation) -- column 80 end only: M-4
and M-6.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2, 10-3, S-1. S-2 may be used prior to folding.
Note: Also see limitations that apply for Card Read/Punch
Check (#1521).
Corner Cuts -- any corner: C1, C2, C3 and C5.
Note: The use of corner cuts C1, C2, C3 in the lower left and
lower right corners of the card is not recommended since these
cards cannot be read by the 3501 Card Reader.
Card Stock -- regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Varlfled Cards -- approved cards with verify notch between rows
o and 1, column 80 edge; or verify punch 2 and 3 in column 81
area.
.
Colors - brown, red, blue, white, yellow, salmon, green and
natural. With Card Print (# 1501), print contrast will be reduced
on brown, red, blue, salmon' and green cards.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance.
PREREQUISITES: A 3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 for attachment to a 3289-3, 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 mdl 2 or 3
equipped with 3782/3521 Card Punch Attachment (#8150).
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901.
[2] Documentation: One must be specified. #9101 for use with a
3771, or #9102 for use with a 3289-3, 3774, 3775, 3776 or
3777 mdl 2 or 3.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer to
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
3521
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$236
$201
$7,000
$ 33
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option; 60% Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD PRINT (#1501). For printing up to 80 positions along the
top edge of the card. A 64 character set (including blank) is provided. Orders must specify #9491 for EBCDIC, or #9494 for
ASCII (3770 System only). Uses a blank ink roll replaceable by
the customer ..
Field Installation: Yes.
CARD READ/PUNCH CHECK (#1521).
Allows the 3521 to be
used alternately as either a card punch or card reader. Read
speed is the same as punch speed (50 cpm). This feature also
provides for detection of punching errors by comparing the data
read from the card with the punch data for each column. When an
error is detected, the machine stops and an error indicator is lit.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: (1) Punch checking must be
Inhibited using 3770 or 8100 job control when punching cards
with Internal scores or cards that have been prepunched. (2) This
feature is limited to the Punch Checking function only if the host
3289-3, 3774, 3775, 3776 mdl 1 or :2 is also equipped with a
2502 or 3501 Card Reader. (3) This feature is limited to the
Punch Checking function only when the 3521 is attached to a
3776 mdl 3 or 4, or a 3777 mdl 2 or 3.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Card Print
#1501 $69
61
Card Read/Punch Check 1521
$59
52
$2,120
1,S80
$ S.OO
3525 CARD
PUNCIi
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a S/360 mdl 195 or any
S/370 Processor or 4300 Processor.
Model
P1
P2
P3
Rated SO-column Card Speed
100/minute
200/minute
300/minute
Highlights: The 3525 is a full-function card punch which, when
equipped with the apprupriate speciai features. can read and/or
print as well as punch 80 column cards in a single pass through
the machine. The 3525 attaches natively to a S/370 mdl 125, or
via (and within 20 feet of) a channel-attached 3505 Card Reader
mdl B1 or B2 to a S/360 mdl 195, any S/370 Processor. or~any
4300 Processor ... see "Prerequisites" below.
The basic unit has a 1 ,200-card capacity hopper and two 1 ,200card capacity stackers. Either the Extended BCD Interchange
Code (256 codes) or Card Image (Data Mode 2) can be punched.
Punches parallel, row by row. Cards go to stacker 1 unless program directed to stacker 2.
Card punching is checked by monitoring the movement of all 80
punches. A card in which a punching error is detected is automatically directed to a dedicated, 200-card capacity error stacker and
followed by two automatic punching retries ... the first prepunched
card is directed to the error stacker for analysis purposes ... the
second prepunched card is directed to the stacker originally selected for the error card. Note: Because of automatic punch retry,
it is recommended that prepunched· or serially numbered preprinted cards not be used in a punch only mode. When operating in a
read/punch mode ... see Card Read in "Special Features" ...
detected punching errors do not result in an automatic punching
retry and prepunched or serially numbered preprinted cards can
be used. In a read/punch mode, a detected punching error causes
the machine to stop and manual error recovery procedures are
required.
Maximum: S/360 mdl 195, any S/370 Processor, or any 4300
Processor - one 3525 can be attached via each 3505 Card
Reader mdl B1 or B2 ... S/370 mdl 125 -- one 3525 can be
natively attached via the appropriate adapter on the 3125 .. , see
3125.
PREREQUISITES: S/360 mdl 195, any S/370 Processor, or any
4300 Processor-- a 3505 Card Reader mdl B1 or B2 with a 3525
Punch Adapter (#8103), or 3525 Read Punch Adapter (#8105) ...
S/370 mdl 125 -- native attachment via the Integrated 3525 Card
Punch Attachment (#4685) on the 3125.
Card Limitations: Generally special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following card
features has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2. OM-3,
10-1. 10-2. 10-3 and S-1. When reading cards with internal OM-2
or OM-3 scores (Card Read feature installed). either reading must
be terminated prior to the column that is scored. or reading of
the scored column and the two adjacent columns must be suppressed by means of the program-controlled read column eliminate feature function provided standard with Card Read. S-2 may
be used prior to folding. and after folding if the card is properly
flattened.
External Scores (after separation) - Column 1 and 80 end: M-3.
M-4. M-5. M-6, M-7. M-11. OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. Column 1
end only: OM-3. 12 and 9 edge: CF-1/9A.
Corner Cuts -- any corner. C1. C2. C3 and C5.
Card Stock - regular. edge coated. and heavy duty.
Port-A-PunchR -- can be punched in unscored fields of the card.
Scored columns of these cards cannot be read.
All other special feature cards may result in unstaisfactory performance and should be tested in an actual application prior to being
recommended.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. 60 Hz power provided by the 3125 for
native attachment or by the 3505 mdl B1 or B2 for channel
attachment): #9903 for 208 V. or #9905 for 230 V ... must be
consistent with 3505 or system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3] S/370 mdl 125 Adapter: #9690 ... required if the 3525 is to
be attached via an Integrated 3525 Punch Attachment (#4685)
on a 3125. Field Installation: Yes.
[4] Print Character Set: Required when Multiline Card Print
(#5273) or Two-line Card Print (#8339) is ordered. #9677 -for EBCDIC, or #9671 -- for ASCII. Field Installation: Yes.
23.00
Nolto be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ----- - --===
--- --':' =
M 3525
May 79
DP Machines
3525 Card Punch (cont'd)
Card
Code
\2-8-2
12-8-3
12-8-4
12-8-5
12-8-6
\2-8-7
12
ll-8-2
ll-8-3
1\-8-4
ll-8-5
11-8-6
1\-8-7
EBCD
Code
0100-1010
-101\
-1100
-1l01
-1\ 10
-1111
0101-000
-1010
-lOll
-1100
-1101
-1110
-1111
EBCDlC
¢ ,
[
<
<
(
(
+
+
I
I
Card
Code
ASCII
&
!
$
&
)
)
;
;
~
~
1\
0-1
12-11
0-8-3
0-8-4
0-8-5
0-8-6
0-8-7
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
. .
1
$
EBCD
Code
EBCD1C
0110-0000
-0001
'l
0110-1010 (blank)
OlIO-lOll
-lloo
%
-1101
-1110
>
-1111
?
Olll-IOIO
:
-1011
#
-1100
~
-1101
-1\ 10
=
-1111
"
ASCII
I
\
%
-
>
?
:
#
@
=
"
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3525
P1
P2
P3
$517
655
790
$21,210
22,040
22,870
$ 91.50
122.00
152.00
TWO-LINE CARD PRINT (#8339). Identical in function to Multiline Card Print (#5273) with the exception that printing is limited
to lines 1 and 3 (above the 12 punching row and between rows 12
and 11). Maximum speed in cards/minute, when printing, depends
upon the machine model only. Speeds are as follows:
P1
P2
P3
1 line
100 cpm 200 cpm 300 cpm
2 lines 100 cpm 200 cpm 300 cpm
Limitation: Not with #5273. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Basic Card Print (#1421) on the 3525. Also se'e "Specify" [4]
above for specifying the desired character set.
Special Feature Prices:
Basic Card Print
Card Read
Multiline Card Print
Two-Line Card Print
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 45%
Mainte'nance: B
Metering: I/O Unit (On line)
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model P1 to Model P2 ..... $ 830
Model P1 to Model P3 ..... 1 ,660
Model P2 to Model P3 .....
830
SPECIAL FEATURES
BASIC CARD PRINT (#1421). Provides a print station following
the punch station. Print mechanism consists of a print chain, 64
hammers, and a card stepping device. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: 3525 Card Print Control (#8100)
on 3505 Card Reader or 3525 Card Print Control (#4693) on the
3125. Also requires Two-line Card Print (#8339).or Multiline Card
Print (#5273) on 3525.
CARD READ (#1533).
Provides an optical hole-sensing station
ahead of the punch station. Permits cards to be read in EBCDIC
(Data Mode 1) or Card Image (Data Mode 2). Cards are read in
parallel fashion (row by row) while the previous card is being
punched. Data read .is fully buffered and can be used to control
later operations on the same card such as punching, printing, and
stacker selection.
Read column eliminate is standard with the feature, Provides the
ability, under program control, to l'uppress the reading of selected
card columns. May be used to prevent reading in columns that
could cause validity and read checks due to invalid codes or
open-punched card scores. See Port-A-Punch under "Card
Limitations" for restrictions. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
3525 Read Punch (#8105) on the 3505 mdl B1 or B2, or 3525
Card Read Control (#9794) on the 3125.
MULTILINE CARD PRINT (#5273). Provides the ability to print,
under program control, on any or all of 25 printing lines on the
card. Each print line is 64 characters long and print locations are
identical to that of the 2560 MFCM. Maximum speed, in
cards/minute, when printing is dependent upon the machine model, the average number of lines printed and the location of the
printed lines. Typical speeds are as follows:
P1
P2
P3
100 cpm 200 cpm 300 cpm
1 line
2 lines 100 cpm 200 cpm 240 cpm
3 lines
67 cpm 133 cpm 150 cpm
67 cpm 114 cpm 133 cpm
4 lines
57 cpm
89 cpm 100 cpm
6 lines
10 lines
44 cpm
62 cpm
67 cpm
25 lines
24 cpm
29 cpm
30 cpm
Limitation: Not with #8339. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Basic Card Print (#1421) on the 3525. Also see "Specify" [4]
above for specifying the desired character set.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
#1421
1533
5273
8339
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
$334
154
92
15
$13,930
6,360
1,140
727
$90.00
23.00
26.00
4.50
--- --- =--':'
--- -- ----=::;:::::=
M 3540
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3540 DISKETTE INPUT /OUTPUT
UNIT
plexer channel of 2870, shared or non-shared subchannel of
2880 (non-shared Is recommended) ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Purpose: Input/output device for use with any virtual storage
5/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor,
3031, 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel ( one Is standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031,
3032.
Model Bl
Has one drive.
Model B2
Has two drives.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
!:!!~,h!~\I~ts: .. T.t1EL~:?40 provid.~s_ )h~ ability to read o!.. write. IBM
u,,,,,elle" un "'/.:ltU, or any 4"UU f"rocessorsystems. Ine OISl<
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
o
0
0
o
o
0
0
0
0
000
o
0
000
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
0
0
o
0
o
0
0
0
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
o
*
• Does not have any transaction se1cct or "from Account" keys.
NOTE I. Two currency denominations must be specified.
[5] Logo Panel [Purchase Only]: #9401, If ordered with the' machine, or #9402 if ordered for shipment prior to machine ...
see M 10000 pages for price.
[6] Model 2/12 Accessory Group [Purchase Only]: #9571 ... see
M 10000 pages for price.
[7] 3614 Host Attachment Designation: 1 st and 2nd position designation Is required to control distribution of 3614 controller-data
media to host system location.
1st Position Designator - identifies first 3614 of each different
Controller Data Version attached to a host system ... used to
limit distribution of controller-data media to one copy of each
version per host system location.
2nd Position Designator - identifies additional 3614s of each
version ... controller -data media Is not distributed to host
system location for 2nd position designated 3614s.
The following matrix Identifies individual Controller Data Versions
and their corresponding 1st and 2nd position specify codes.
Limitations: Each 3614 must have either 1 st or 2nd position
specified ... one 1st position must be specified for each version
... only one 1st position may be specified for each version.
Specify either
1st or 2nd Pos
Code below:
1st
2nd
#9701 #9702
#9703 #9704
#9801 #9802
#98Q3 #9604
Host
Encryption
Attachment: Technique
Loop-3601 /2 DES (#9001)
Version
3
3
5
5
[8] Specify one of the following:
DES: #9001 - provides the data encryption technique (DES)
proposed as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Data
Processing Standard by the U.S. National Bureau of Standards. DES facilitates multi-institution usage by providing for
personal identification number (PIN) validation based on
individual issuer PIN encryption keys for 50 different card
issuer identifiers ... PIN offset value may be recorded on
magnetic stripe to be used to validate PINs in 3614 which
were not based originally on DES technique ... accepts 4 to
16 digit fixed or variable length PINs ... option to load PIN
encryption keys via communication line from host. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be specified if #9002
is specified.
AET: #9002 - provides the Alternate Encr~'ption Technique
(AET) which is the original 3614 encryption technique.
Limitation: May not be specified if #9001 is specified.
Prerequisite: DES and/or AET encryption capability required
on the 3601 or 3602 and in host system ... see 3601 and
3602 in "Machines." DES and AET are used to determine
3614 Host 1 st and 2nd Position Host Attachment designation ... see item [7] above.
Customer Responsibilities: Because the 3614 mdl 2 and 12
attach to a customer premise, installation of cables, mounting
stand and enclosure and bezel are a customer responsibility. The
customer is also responsible for site preparation, such as cutting a
hole in the wall for mounting of the 3614 mdl 2 or 12. Installation
of cables and site preparation is also a customer responsibility for
the 3614 mdl 1 and 11. IBM is not responsible for any loss of
money incurred through the use of the 3614.
Sub host operation under control of the 3601 or 3602 Finance
Communication Controller requires special customer systems
design and support. Maintenance of system integrity in the sub
host mode Is a customer responsibility.
IBM Is not responsible for Intentional damage to the 3614 mdls 1,
2, 11 or 12. Repair of such damage is not covered under the IBM
Rental Agreement or Maintenance Contract. Repair of such damage at coat of time and materials will be made to rental machines
and can be provided for purchases machines.
Customer Responalbllltiee - Currency Sorting: The general condition of used currency may vary. To 'achieve satisfactory operation,
the customer must ensure that only GOOD QUALITY used currency Is loaded into the 3614. Used or recirculated currency must be
Inspected to remove excessively worn, damaged or torn notes. The
3614 Operator's Guide, GA66-0001,contains procedures for preparation of new currencies and inspection of used currencies for
loading the 3614. For the 3614 mdl 11 and 12 the customer must
ensure that each hopper is loaded with the proper denomination
currency.
Direct-SDLC AET (#9002)
Loop
Direct
Loop
Direct
Alternate
Alternate
DES
DES
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - -----==-=
'-- ------':' =
M 3614.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility (conrd)
ETPI
MACI MLC
MRC
2 Yr
Prices:
Mdl
Purchase
3614
1
2
11
12
$ 629 $ 535
672
572
751
639
794
676
$15,710
16,750
18,750
19,790
MMMC
$ 95
136
100
141
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DEPOSITORY (#3322). Provides a controlled access slot in the
front of the 3614 leading to an internal deposit receptacle for the
collection of deposit documents. In addition to the controlled
access slot, the chute is designed to discourage tampering with
previously inserted deposits. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
One of the following keyboards - #9357, #9358, #9360,
#9457. #9458, or #9460.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides an interface for external
modems. limitation: Not available on Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature.
EXPANDED FUNCTION FEATURE (#3895). Provides the options
of transaction chaining. journal printing, and cash check transactions. Field Installation: Yes ... any of the individual functions
may be field installed. Prerequisite: DES (specify code #9001).
Limitat;ion: May not be ordered with specify code #9002). Equivalent capability is available via RPQ
for customers ordering 3614s with specify code #9002. Specify: Any combination of
the following functions may be specified with #3895. Specify at
least one:
(1) Transaction Chaining (#9721) - allows a series of multiple
transactions with single insertion of magnetic stripe card and
single keyed entry of PIN.
(2) Journal Printing (#9722) - print statement documents and
retain in 3614 ... can be used as an aid in machine balancing
and settlements. Prerequisite: Transaction Statement Printer
(#7900).
(3) Cash Check (#9723) - in single transaction. cash is issued
to user following deposit of check drawn on other institution.
Prerequisites: Depository (#3322) and one of the following
keyboards ... #9362, #9363, #9364, #9462, #9463, or
#9464.
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500).
Provides an
integrated 1200 bps modem for use with leased voice grade lines
.. see M 2700 pages. This modem is for a point-to-point or tributary SDLC station. No;e: This integrated modem must communicate
with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Specify: #9651 for
4-wlre strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: SOLC Communications Feature with Clocking
(#6301).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH CLOCKING (#6301).
Provides communications capability to communicate with the same
S/370 models listed below for #6302. Required for attachment to
communications lines through the IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500) or any external modem which does not have internai
clocking. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop
Feature (#7820) or SDLC Communications Feature without Clocking (#6302). Field Installation: Yes. Transmission: This feature
operates over common carrier provided or equivalent customer
owned communications facilities. For information concerning these
facilities, .see M 2700 pages.
the loop ... (2) Depending on the the configuration, the Additional
Storage Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the
3601/3602 . See M3601 or M3602 pages ... (3) Attachment to
remote 3601/3602 loop directly requires a 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Specify: If loop attachment is without
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001), specify one of the following loop
speeds: (1) For local loop attachment to 3601/3602, specify local
loop speed: #9062 for 1200 bps, #9063 for 2400 bps, or #9064
for 4800 bps ... (a) For remote loop attachment via a 3603, 3604
mdl 2, 3 or 4, or 3624, specify loop speed: #9062 for 1200 bps.
Limitations: (i) Cannot be ordered with SDLC Communications
with Clocking (#6301) or SDLC Communications without Clocking
(#3602) ... (2) Remote loop speed is 1200 bps. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
TRANSACTION STATEMENT PRINTER (#7900). Prints a statement showing the record of the transaction and passes the printed
statement to the customer through the cash issue slot. Data is
printed on 96-column card stock (2-5/8" by 3-1/4"). A 57 character set is provided consisting of 56 printable graphics and a
space (blank). Four lines, one character per line, are printed
simultaneously, for up to 34 characters per line ... a total of 136
characters on each statement. The data to be printed is determined by the host application program and by the data stored in
the 3614. Printing is overlapped with the cash issue cycle and the
user deposit cycle. Prerequisite: If a statement is to be issued for
any transaction on a given keyboard, then the Transaction Statement is required. Card Limitations: The 96-column card stock
used in the transaction statement printer must not have the optional 60 degree corner cuts. Detailed disclosure specifications describing the 96-column card stock are available from IBM Corporation, Commercial Development Office, Armonk, N.Y. Card configurations or card stocks which do not conform to these specifications may result in unsatisfactory performance. The configurations
available from IBM
Field
Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS LOOP INTEGRATED MODEM (#8001). Provides an
integrated 1 200 bps modem for use over normal quality voice
grade lines. Limitation: If a 3604 mdl 2\ 3 or 4 and a 3614 or
3624 are located at the same remote loop location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located on the 3614 or 3624
because the 3614 or 3624 will often be operating when the 3604
mdl 2, 3 or 4 is not; e.g., weekends. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Terminal Loop Feature (#7820).
Special Feature Prices:
ETPI
MAC I MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purch
#3322 $ 87 $ 74
Depository
EIA Interface
3701
12
10
IBM 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem
5500
19
16
Expd Function Feature 3895
32
27
SDLC Communications Feature
with Clocking
6301
36
31
without Clocking
6302
26
31
Terminal Loop Feature 7820
31
26
Transaction Statement
Printer
7900
119 101
1200 BPS Loop
Integrated Modem
8001
19
16
MMMC
$2,010
424
$11.50
4.00
668
1,000
5.00
NC
1,270
1,060
1,060
7.00
7.00
10.50
2,765
23.50
668
5.00
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT CLOCKING
(#6302).
Provides communications capability to communicate
with any virtual storage S/370 Processor (except 3115), or any
4300 Processor via a 3704/3705 ... see 3704, 3705. Attachment
is also possible via the Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 ... see 4331. Required for attachment to communications
lines through an external modem which does have internal clockIng. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820) or SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701).
Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier provided
or equivalent customer owned facilities. For information concerning
these facilities, see M 2700 pages. Modems: External modems
operating at up to 4800 bps may be attached ... IBM 3863 Modem
... IBM 3864 Modem ... IBM 3872 Modem ... IBM 3874 Modem.
TERMINAL LOOP FEATURE (#7820). Provides the capability to
attach either to a local or remote 3601/3602 Finance Communication Controller loop directly; or to a remote 3601/3602 loop via a
3603, 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, or a 3624 with 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Prerequisites: (1) Available positions on
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
\
--- -----------
-- =':' =
=_
M 3615
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3615 ADMINISTRATIVE TERMINAL
PRINTER
Purpose: A printer for use with the 3600 Finance Communication
System to provide a hard-copy output of banking transactions.
Model 1
Prints at 60 cps (local or remote loops)
Model 2
Prints at 1 20 cps (local loops only)
SPECIAL FEATURES
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
device for continuous edge-punched fan-fold forms. Overall forms
widths from 3 to 15 inches can be fed. This feature is required for
use of continuous forms. Friction fed cut forms may also be used
without removing the forms tractor. In this case, printing is limited
to 127 print positions. Field Installation: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Purchase MMMC
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Vrbl Wdth Forms Trctr
Highlights:
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase-only
basis.
The 3615 provides a hard copy output on a variety of cut forms
and fan-fold continuous forms to meet the customer's printing
requirement in banking applications. When combined with a 3604
Keyboard Display, the 3615 provides a bank teller or officer with a
workstation to use in performing banking administrative transactions. The 3615 can also be used alone for administrative printing
of required reports. The forms can be those usually used for
printing of one line or a number of lines. Speed ranges from 60
cps for the Model 1 to 120 cps for the Model 2. This microprocessor controlled printer is a bi-directional matrix printer with
high speed tabulation (Model 1 only) and indexing capatJility. The
printer's dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide by 8 high. The 3615 prints up
to 132 print positions with character spacing at 10 to the inch.
Line spacing is 6 lines to the inch. Up to 6-part forms (total thickness - 0.018") may be used. Five and six part forms should be
tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding registration and
print quality. For continuous fan-fold forms, the Variable Width
Forms Tractor (#8700) is required ... see "Special Features."
Maximum overall width for continuous forms is 381 mm (15"), and
355.6mm (14") for cut forms. Card stock forms are not recommended.
1) An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location needs either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614/3624 Consumer Transaction' Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or
a 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line
Feature Base (#4751 or 4752) and an appropriate modem. If
both a 3614/3624 and a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in
the same remote location, it' is recommended that the loop
modem be located with the 3614/3624 since the 3614/3624
will often be operating when the 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 is not.
Note: The 3615 mdl 1 will attach to local or remote loops ... the 3615 mdl 2 will attach to local
loops only.
2) Depending, upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1005 or 1006) may be required on the 3601, or the
Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on the
3602 ... see 3601 or 3602.
Forms Specifications: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for
Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
A black ribbon, Part No. 1136653, or eqvivalent is
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (115V AC, '1-phase, 60 Hz) : #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Cables:
See
GA27-2766.
PRICES:
Mdl
1
2
Installation
Manual
MLC
5 Yr
$160
186
Physical
Purchase
$3,485
3,825
$5
$160
1.00
FORMS STAND (#4450). Permits feeding of continuous forms
from the carton and provides for stacking after printing.
Prerequisites:
Supplies:
required.
#8700
Planning,
MMMC
$28
38
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5% Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
• Pilot" Test Plan applies: PTP Option Percent, ..70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- =----=---- -=--':' =
M 3616
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3616 PASSBOOK AND DOCUMENT
PRINTER
Purpose: A matrix printer used on the 3600 Finance Communication System to print on passbooks, journal, and a variety of forms
and documents.
Highlights
The 3616 printer provides the ability to print on a variety of forms
and passbooks to meet printing requirements of financial applications. This printer, when combined with a 3604 Keyboard Display,
provides a telier or other operator with a full function workstation
capable of handling a wide range of financial transactions. The
printer is a bi-directional matrix printer with a maximum print
speed of 120 cps. The printer dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide by 8 high.
The printer has two separate print stations serviced by one print
head. The passbook print station can print up to 100 characters
on passbooks or single or multipart cutforms requiring single or
multi-line printing. The basic machine accepts horizontal fold
passbooks of a variety of sizes. Print spacing and line indexing
are both program selectable, spacing at 10 or 12 characters per
inch, indexing at 5 or 6 lines per inch. Note: For the Vertical Fold
Passbook Feature (#8701) limitations, see Forms Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488.
The journal print station prints up to 57 characters on a one, part
journal, with a locked internal take-up roll. Journal entries are
visible after the entire line is printed, and remain visible for several
entries thereafter. The journal may be manually advanced, but not
reversed. Cutforms may be inserted in front of the journal for
validation type printing of one line of print in a fixed location on
the lower left-hand corner of the document. Print spacing is program selectable at 10 or 12 characters per inch. Journal indexing
is nominally 6 lines per inch.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug.
•
Cables: See M 10000 pages for pricing and ordering instructions. Also see Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-2766.
•
Journal Security Feature: #9351. Provides a change in the
covers so that a cutform cannot be inserted in front of the
journal.
MLC
Mdl
3616
5 Yr
Purchase'
$ 4,700
$185
SPECIAL FEATURES
VERTICAL FOLD PASSBOOK (#8701). Provides modifications to
the basic machine to enable it to accept a single size of vertical
fold passbook in the passbook station. The size is adjustable by
the CE at initial installation. For details and limitations, see Forms
Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MLC
5Yr
Vertical Fld Passbook
#8701
AMMC/
Purchase MMMC
$ 3
The printer has 8 operator status lights, including 3 user programmable. The machine has two separated '"Start'" pushbuttons which
may be used to identify individual tellers to the 3600 controller
when two tellers are sharing the printer.
The 3616 provides address sharing between like devices. That is,
two 3616s can share the same loop allocation on a contention
basis.
Prerequisites:
An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614/3624 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or
a 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line
Feature Base (#4751 or #4752) and an appropriate modem.
If both a 3614/3624 and a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in
the same remote location, it is recommended that the loop
modem be located with the 3614/3624 since the Consumer
Transaction Facility may be operating when the 3604 mdl 2, 3
or 4 is not.
2.
Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (# 1005 or # 1006) may be required on the 3601, or
the Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on
the 3602 ... see 3601 or 3602.
Forms Specifications: Refer to the
Guide for Printers, GA24-3488.
$ 40
Plan Offering: Plan D
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
In either station, wide bold characters may be printed at 6 characters per inch. The customer may define and use up to 16 special
characters, addressable separately from the basic character set,
by defining their matrix patterns at CPGEN.
1.
AMMC/
MMMC
Forms Design Reference
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 7034365, or equivalent, is
required
Bibliography: GC20-0370
•
Pilot Test Plan applies ... PTP Option Percent. 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$100
NC
------- - --==
----- --=---: =
M 3618
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3618 ADMINISTRATIVE LINE
PRINTER
Purpose: A medium-speed line printer for use in the 3600 Finance
Communication System.
Highlights: Provides the capability to print on continuous fanfold
paper up to 80 print positions on an 8 inch (200 mm) print line.
The unit has a pin feed mechanism. It accepts paper widths of 3.5
inches (89 mm) to 9 inches (229 mm) pin hole center-to-center.
Paper up to 14.875 inches (378 mm) can be handled with Expanded Print Line (#3860) ... see . 'Special Features." Paper up
to six parts plus carbon [maximum total thickness is .02 inches (5
mm)] can be accommodated. A form jam detection capability is
provided. Print speeds are dependent upon the number of characters printed per line, loop speed, and available slot position on the
loop.
Nominal Print Speeds
Character Set
48
64
96
1551pm
120lpm
80lpm
PREREQUISITES:
[1]An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit. a
3614/3624 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem. or
a 3604 mdl 2. 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614 or
3624 and 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location. it is recommended that the loop modem be located
with the 3614 or 3624 since the 3614 or 3624 will often be
operating when the 3604 mdl 2. 3 or 4 is not.
[2]Depending upon the configuration. the Additional Storage
Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601. or
the Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on
the 3602 ... see M 3601 or M 3602 pages.
Forms Specification: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for
Printers. GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC. 1-phase. 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug. or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
[2] Cables: See M 1 0000 pages for pricing and ordering instructions. Also see Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA272766.
[3] Character Set Size: #9071 for 48 characters. #9072 for 64.
or #9073 for 96. A space (blank) character is included in each
character set. resulting in 47, 63 or 95 printable graphics.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
Prices:
Mdl
3618
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
$ 293 $ 249 $10,600
MMMC
$53.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Per Call: 1
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DUAL INDEPENDENT FORMS FEED (#3550).
Provides two
independently indexed pin feed mechanisms. Different sizes of
forms can be handled in each paper feed. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
EXPANDED PRINT LINE (#3860). Expands the print line to 132
print positions on a 13.2 inch (33.5 cm) line. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purch
Dual Indpnt Forms Feed #3550 $ 19
Expanded Print Line
3860
31
$ 16
26
$ 636
1,060
~MMC
$6.50
3.00
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipm9nt with machine. order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450). permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
Not to be reDroduced without written Dermission.
--------- -------===
----- --':' =
M 3624.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3624 CONSUMER TRANSACTION
FACILITY
Purpose: An unattended self-service banking terminal that issues
variable amounts of money, accepts deposits, and performs other
financial transactions ... other documents such as traveler"s
checks may be dispensed if they complete a document issue
qualification test successfully... attac.hes to a 3601 .or 3602
Finance Communication Controller via loop, or to a virtual storage
9/310 or 4300 Processor through a 3104 or 3705 Communications Controller. Communication is also possible via the Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331 Processor (Note: This is not
supported by ACF/VTAME).
Model 1
Model 2
Model 11
Model 12
Lobby - Single Document Feed Mechanism. For
use inside a building in a secure attended location.
The basic model includes a single cartridge feed
station, card reader, user guidance keyboard and
display unit and is suitable for counter-top or freestanding mounting ... includes covers and front trim
paneling ... covers contain locking handle, with a
standard key, and provision for customer insertion
of an additional key lock cylinder. A backlighted
logo panel, required for installation of a lobby model, is available as a purchase accessory. A pedestal is available as a purchase accessory to mount
the basic lobby_ model. A pedestal base is included
as part of the depository special feature when the
despositorY is added to the basic' model.
Through the Wall - Single Document Feed Mechanism. For outdoor, vestibule, drive-up, and otherwise less secure, unattended locations to provide
availability on a 24-hour basis. The basic model
includes a single cartridge feed station, card reader, user guidance keyboard and display unit, and
has provision for mounting the currency dil!pensing
and depository mechanisms inside a heavy-duty
security enclosure. Covers· are provided for the
components not contained within the heavy-duty
enclosure. A heavy-duty enclosure, pedestal base
for mounting the enclosure, through-the-wall bezel,
front trim paneling, and logo panel, for through-thewall installation, are available as purchase accessories.
Same as the modell, but with dual document feed
mechanism. Provides capability to issue the same
or two different denominations in a Single transaction; to load the same denomination in both dispensers, effectively doubling the bill capacity of a single denomination 3624 model 1; or to issue currency and other documents as separate transactions
(e.g., cash and traveler'S checks).
Same as the model 2, but with dual document feed
mechanism. Provides capability to issue the same
or two different denominations in a single transaction; to load the same denomination in both dispensers, effectively doubling the bill capacity of a single denomination 3624 model 2; or to issue currency and other documents as separate transactions
(e.g., cash and traveler's checks).
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Depository Envelope Printer -- a special feature which prints unit
and sequence number on envelope as it is deposited.
Additional Transactions - provides account balance inquiry,
funds transfer transaction, and special transactions.
Keyboard/Guidance -- comprehensive set of function keys and
customized display messages step a user through a transaction
kAyboard and transaction functions can be modified through
programming. Option for either numeric or alphanumeric keypad.
Multiline Display - a special feature which provides 240character, 6-line display. Includes additional display-related
user-response capability for expanded interaction between user
and machine.
Transaction Chaining -- allows user to perform a series of transactions with a single insertion 'of the magnetic stripe card.
Transaction Statements - can print and issue individual statements or messages to user.
Journaling -- can print and retain documents within the 3624.
Backlighted Logo - backlighted logo panel that can be customized, extending across full width of the front panel.
Host/Subhost Attachil\ent - .allows attachment to the host processor either directly via SDLC or through subhost 3601/3602 via
loop cQmmunications .:. offhost operation at 3601/3602 is possible.
Encrypt/Decrypt -- encryption of sensitive data for communication line transmission ... uses the U.S. Federal Information Proc'
essing Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm.
Multi-institution Usage - provision to accept magnetic stripe
cards of many different card issuers. Base capacity of issuer
identifier table within the 3624 can be expanded by table overflow request message to host or with Additional Storage Feature
(#1301) .. , "Special Features."
Personal Identification - user account is identified through
reading magnetic stripe card. To validate the identity of the
person using the card, a personal identification number (PIN) is
used ... validation of "IN (up to 16 digits) may be performed in
the 3624 and/or host/subhost support system.
Installation Configurations -- can be installed inside a building,
for lobby use; or through-the-wall of a building, for walk-up or
drive-up use.
Multiple Languages -- capability to display different languages
based on identifier code recorded on magnetic stripe card.
Third Track -- a special feature provides reading and writing
third track data recorded on magnetic stripe card '" see "SpeCial
Features."
Additional Storage - special feature(s) provide additional memory for expanding the number of custom messages and Financial
Institution Table entries ... see "Special Features."
Modular Packaging - for model 2 or 1 2 through-the-wall installation, currency dispenser and depository mechanisms are contained in a heavy-duty enclosure independent of other functional
modules.
Compatibility - 3614 family compatibility, designed to minimize
transition requirements.
Highlights
Cartridge Loading -- currency cartridge provides for quick, easy
loading and convenient, tamper-resistent transportation of the
currency.
Issues Cash - issues one denomination (mdls 1 and 2), or two
denominations (mdls 11 and 12) up to a maximum of 20 bills
from a choice of accounts. Issues all bills at one time in a single
stack ... no prepackaging or packets are used.
Individual Document-Feed Control - allows each cartridge drive
station on the dual-feed models 11 and 1 2 to be associated with
a separate transaction select key (e.g., cash and traveler's
checks).
Accepts Deposits - allows user to make a deposit to choice of
accounts. Built-in depository envelope holder available as an
accessory on mdls 2 and 12. Envelope holder included with
depOSitory on mdls 1 and 11.
Cash-Check - a single transaction that allows cash to be issued
to user, following deposit of a check.
Accepts Payments - allows user to make various payments by
depositing cash or check or by having funds deducted from
user's account.
Depository Cartridge Locking System -
and locking mechanism prevents removal of cartridge from machine unless cartridge is closed and locked ... reduces need for
dual-custody depository servicing.
depository cartridge
Security -- models 2 and 12 installed with' heavy-duty enclosure
and through-the-wall installation accessories meet security requirements of UL291 and comply with the intent of U.S. Federal
Regulation P for unattended automated paying and receiving
machines used when banking offices are closed.
Installation Units and Accessories -- Heavy-duty enclosure,
through-the-wall bezel, optional pedestal base, front dress panel
and front trim border are required for installation of through-thewall models 2 and 1 2 ... these are available as purchase only
accessories, see .. Accessories."
Walk-up Configuration - recessed through-the-wall bezel,
designed to provide a shelf surface for the user, is recommended for walk-up use.
Drive-up Configuration -- non-recessed through-the-wall bezel,
designed to position the user area nearer the outer wall surface,
is recommended for drive-up use.
A pedestal for mounting lobby mOdels 1 and 11 is available as an
optional purchase only accessory ... see .. Accessories:'
A logo panel and cartridges are required for installation of all
models and are available as purchase accessories ... see
.. Accessories."
Not to be reDroduced without written permission.
------ =
- --------===":'
M 3624.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility
PREREQUISITES
(conl'd)
[1] Each 3624 must be either loop attached to a 3601/3602 or
direct attached to a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor
via SDLC communications through a 3704/3705 Communications Conlroller. Also attaci'les via a Communications Adapter
(#1601) on a 4331 Processor.
For Loop. Attachment to a 3601/3602: There must be an
available position on a local or remote loop of the 3601/3602.
The 3624 must have Terminal Loop Feature (#7820). If located remotely from the 3601/3602, the 3624 can be attached
to a remote loop via any of the following: [1] Directly, using
the 1200 BPS l.oop Integrated Modem (#8001) ... [2] Via a
subloop through a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit mdl 1 for
1200 bps or a 3603 mdl 2 for 1200 or 2400 bps ... [3] Via
subloop through a 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4
equipped with l.ine Feature Base (#4751 or #4752) and an
appropriate modem ... [4] Via a subloop through a 3614 equipped with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and 1200 BPS l.oop
Integrated Modem (#8001) ... [5] Via a subloop through another 3624 equipped with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and
1200 BPS l.oop Integrated Modem (#8001). Note: The 3624
does not require #8001 If it is attached to a remote loop via a
sub loop through a 3603, 3604, 3614, 3624, or if the 3624 is
attached to a local loop. It is recommended that the 3624 not
be attached through a 3604, as the 3624 might often be operating while the 3604 is not .. e.g., weekends and holidays.
For Direct Attachment to a Virtual Storage S/370 or 4300
PrOCHsor: The S/370 or 4300 Processor requires a
3704/3705 Communications.Controlier equipped with appropriate features to communicate with the 3624 via SDl.C or the
Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331 (Note: These
units are not supported by ACF/VTAME). See 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter (# 1601) on the 4331. The 3624
must have an SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or
#6302).
[2] Encryption modules BQKDES and BQKDPRS are required with
3600 Host Support Independent Release program ... see
Guide for Ordering Programs for feature numbers used to
order these modules on the 3600 Host Support IR. Source
listings are not orderable for, nor supplied with, these modules. Customers should be informed of this fact before the
3624 is ordered.
[3] Depending upon the configuration, Additional Storage Feature
(#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601, or Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3602 ...
see 3601 or 3602.
[4] For 3624 mdls 1 and 11: Pedestal, Lobby (#5510) is available as an option for free-standing lobby configuration without
a depository feature ... sell "Accessories." #5510 is purchase only. Note: A pedestal is included with the Depository,
Lobby feature (#3233, #3234).
[5] For 3624 mdls 2 and 12: The following units are required for
through-the-wall installation: (1) Heavy-duty Enclosure, Single
Function (#3901) or Dual Function (#3902). Note: Single
function enclosure cannot be field modified to a dual function
enclosure ... (2) Bezel, Through-the-Wall, Recessed or nonRecessed. Recessed Bezel (#1490) is recommended for
walk-up configuration. Non-Recessed Bezel (#1491) is recommended for drive-up configuration '" (3) Front Dress Panel
(#3851) ... (4) Front Trim Border, with Envelope Holder
(#3961) or without Envelope Holder (#3962) ... (5) Pedestal
for single function heavy duty enclosure (#4901) or dual
function heavy duty enclosure (#4902) is optional for mounting heavy duty enclosure at appropriate height for walk-up or
drive-up use. Storage Cabinet (#4903) is optional when
mounting dual function heavy-duty enclosure without pedestal.
Note: Storage cabinet is included with Pedestal (#4901 or
#4902). See "Accessories" and M 10000 pages for descriptions and ordering information. These accessories are for
purchase only.
[6] l.ogo Panel - required on all 3624 models. Shipment of the
logo panel is determined by the following specify codes: (1)
#9401 if panel is to be shipped with the 3624. (2) #9402 if
panel(s) are to be shipped prior to the 36-24. Note: Specify
feature #9402 can be used to order more than one panel if
the customer desires to have several panels delivered before
the 3624 (e.g., for customization at one time). (3) #9403 if
panel is not to be ordered with the 3624 as it will either be
.
or ordered
ordered separately by part number
under specify code #9402 on another 3624 ... see "Specify"
and "Accessories." Purchase only.
[7] Currency Cartridge - For 3624 mdls 1 and 2: One is required. For 3624 mdls 11 and 12: Two are required. Currency cartridges are not included with the basic 3624 and must
be ordered separately. Spare cartridges are recommended for
convenience of operation. A minimum of one spare cartridge
for mdls 1 and 2, and two spare cartridges for mc:Jls 11 and 12
must be made available by the customer to the CE for normal
3624 maintenance ... see "Accessories." Purchase only. See
"Customer Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge" 'in M
10000 pages for installation and maintenance requirements.
Customer Responsibilities
Installation Facilities - because the 3624 mdl 2 or 1 2 attaches
to customer premises, installation of cables, pedestal. heavyduty enclosure. through-the-wall bezel. front dress panel. front
trim border. and logo panel are customer responsibilities. The
customer is also responsible for site preparation. such as cutting a hole in the wall. For mdls 2 and 12. the customer is
responsible for placement of the document feed and depository
modules into the heavy-duty enclosure and attachment of the
I/O module to the heavy-duty enclosure. Installation of cabies
and site preparation are customer responsibilities also. for 3624
lobby mdls 1 and 11. The customer is responsible for installation of the Currency Area Lockoff accessory.
Machine Maintenance -- IBM will not provide warranty or maintenance service on a 3624 containing money. The customer will
be responsible for removing, controlling and reloading all money
in the 3624 so that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance
obligations.
Keylocke - covers included with lobby mdls 1 and 11 have a
locking handle. with a standard key, and provide for customer
insertion of an add!.tional keylock cylinder. Covers included with
through-the-wall mdls 2 and 12 have a keylock cylinder, with a
standard key. Cabinet doors. included in all pedestals, have a
keylock cylinder with a standard key. The Currency Area Lockoff accessory includes a keylock with a standard key. Currency
cartridges provide for customer insertion of a keylock. Depository cartridge used with depository cartridge locking feature
requires customer insertion of the depository keylock. Depository locking mechanism in the 3624 requires customer installation
of the depository cartridge locking key. If the customer desire!:
to change the locks and/or keys included with these units or to
install additional keylQck cylinders where provided for. he is
responsible for their procurement and installation.
Accessories Maintenance -- the customer is responsible for
maintenance and parts procurement on all accessories. Repair
of the currency issue and depository slot protective environmental gates in the heavy-duty enclosure can be provided by IBM
on a time and 'material basis.
Currency Cartridge -- the 3624 Currency Cartridge is a purchase only accessory and is not included with the -basic 3624.
One cartridge is necessary for mdls 1 and 2. and two for mdls
11 and 12 for installation checkout and operation of the 3624.
Models 2 and 12 may also be operated with a single cartridge.
Cartridges are not maintained by IBM under the normal lease
agreement or MMMC for a purchased machine. The customer is
responsible for determining if the cartridge is the failing unit; for
providing cartridge for CE 3624 maintenance and testing (a
minimum of one spare cartridge for mdls 1 and 2 and two for
mdls 11 and 12 must be made available by the customer to the
CE for normal 3624 maintenance); and for setting the keying
system on the cartridges and drive stations so that there is the
desired match of currency denomination to drive station ... see
"Customer Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge" in the M
10000 pages for intallation and maintenance requirements.
Currency Sorting - to achieve staisfactory operation. the customer must ensure that only new currency and good-quality
used currency are used in the 3624. The general condition of
used currency may vary. Used currency must be inspected to
remove excessively worn, damaged, or torn bills. The IBM 3624
Operator's Guide, GA66-0006 and IBM 3624 Cartridge Owner's
Manual, GA66-0005, contain procedures for preparation of new
currency and inspection of used currency for operation iii the
3624. For the 3624 mdls 11 and 12, the customer must ensure
that each feed mechanism is loaded with the proper denomination currency. The cartridges contain a keying mechanism
which can be set by the cust.omer to ensure a match between
specific cartridges and cartridge drive stations.
Printer !nk Rolls - the customer is responsible for procurement
and replacement of ink rolls in transaction statement and depository printers.
Logo l.amp - the customer is responsible for procurement and
replacement of the lamp in the logo panel light assembly.
Damage - IBM is not responsible for intentional damage to the
3624 or any 3624 accessories. Repair of such damage is not
covered under the IBM Maintenance Contract, Lease Agreement
or under the Pilot Test Plan. Repair of such damage at cost of
time and materials will be provided for leased machines, Pilot
Test machines, and purchase machines.
System Integrity -
Not to ,be reproduced without written permiSSion.
subhost operation, under control of the
._-------------------_
..
M 3624.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility (cont'd)
3600 Finance Communication Controller, requires customer
systems design and support. Maintenance of system integrity in
the subhost is a customer responsibility.
IBM is not responsible for any loss of money to the financial
institution or its customers through the use of the 3624.
From Account
To Account
Transaction Type
Specify Number
0
LO
.....
Third Track System Security Statement - customers ordering
the Third Track feature (#7950) must be advised that:
"IBM believes that the system security is optimized in an
online environment, where PIN validation and transaction
authorization can be performed in conjunction with positivefile data bases. The scope of security exposure expands
with the degree of offline implementation, for which the Third
Track might be used. The U.S. Federal Information Processing Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm is utilized to
provide cryptographic security in the 3624 and may be used
In conjunction with the third track application. IBM recommends that the customer consider using DES for this purpose. An optional security feature of the proposed ANSI/ISO
Third Track Data Content standard is a Crypto Check Digits
(CCD) field In the card, that may be used to relate the data
elements of track 3 to the magnetic stripe. This does not
imply, however, that its use is not subject to fraud techniques. ANSI/ISO has not prescribed using the optional CCD
field or any specific CCD implementation technique. IBM
recommends that the customer consider its value In his application, weighing possible enhancements in security with
economic and performance implications for his system. IBM
will continue to pursue a course of action with customers
and Industry to maintain a high level of system security.
IBM reserves the right to modify the parameters of the track
3 function if the parameters of the final ANSI/ISO standard
differ from those now in the process of standardization.
However, this reservation of rights is not intended nor should
it be construed as a commitment by IBM to support parameters different from those published by ISO/DIS 4909-June
1976."
~
~
Iii
~
c:
~
0
..:
0
:2
U
0
~
«
."
N'"
U
'"'"
!; >.
:
.-..:>0::
'"
iii
..,
''''
.-..'"
.-..Iii
0
"'..:
:!l
iii u
«
-0..:
o~
:!l
~
119351 119451
9352 9452
9353 9453
9354 9454
9355 9455
9356 9456
9357 9457
9358 9458
9359 9459
9360 9460
9361 9461
9362 9462
9363 9463
9364 9464
0
c:
iii
""
.E ..:U"'" c:'" '"
.;;;
"'c:" J1'"c:
~>. c..
'" ..:'" :¥..:" '~'"c:
8. iii'" ~
'"
III QJ F- a'"
'" (2) U'" UIIl
(2) (2){4) (2)
(3)
lJ.J
~
-!; iii
.;:;
-:5
~
~
c:
0
Co
~
Q.
Iii
U
~
'C
~
'"
2! -5
U
0
(1)
(l)
(1)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
..,
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 (1)
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
o
0
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
(1)
(1)
0
0
0
Notes
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (120V, AC, l-phase, 60Hz): #9911 ... usable on 115V.
•
Cabling: Refer to 'nslallalion Manua'-Physical Planning, GA272766 and AA26-1658. Also see M 1 0000 pages for pricing
and ordering instructions.
•
Keyboard Arrangement: #9301 for numeric-only keypad, or
#9302 for alphanumeric keypad ... alphanumeric arrangement
is the basic touch-pad telephone format with the Q and Z added over the numeric "0".
•
Currency Cartridge: See M 100('0 pages for ordering instructions and prices.
(1) Key position does not appear on the keyboard panel; single
function is selected automatically.
(2) Prerequisite: Depository #3233, 3234, 3243 or 3244.
(3) Prerequisite: Depository #3233, 3234, 3243 or 3244 if any
Special transactions are customized to require a deposit
step.
o
Logo Panel Group: Specify one of the following: #9401 if logo
panel is to be shipped with 3624 ... #9402 if logo panel(s) is
to be shipped prior to the 3624 ... #9403 if logo panel is not
to be ordered with 3624 and will either be ordered separately
by part number
or has been ordered through
#9402 on another 3624. Note: More than one panel may be
ordered on specify code #9402 if customer desires to have
several panels delivered before the 3624 (e.g., for customization at one time). Purchase only. See M 10000 pages for
prices and order information.
o
ContrOller-Data Designation: 1st and 2nd position designation
is required to control distribution and maintenance of
controller-data media necessary for 3624 load images. Specify
#9491 or #9492 as follows:
• Currency Denomination: #9091 for 5, 10, 20 dollar.
•
"''*"
'"
iii
..,
>.
'"
:>0::
Keyboard: Specify one of the following for standard keyboard
... an RPQ should be submitted for any keyboard not shown
below. All are field installable. The Change key allows the user
to request a change in the denomination mix to be issued on
mdls 11 and 12. The Change key Is used also, on all models,
to page displays with the Multiline Display feature (#4750).
1st Position DeSignator (#9491). Used to determine which
controller-data set is to be distributed to the host-system location. One 3624 attached to a host-system processor is specified #9491.
2nd Position Designator (#9492). Used to identify additional
36245 attached t6 host-system ... controller-data set media are
not distributed to host-system location for· any 2nd position
designated 3624s.
When 1st position (#9491) is specified, also specify one of the
following:
If magnetic tape is used at the host-system location:
#9412
#9413
#9414
9-track, 800 bpi
9-track, 1600 bpi
9-track, 6250 bpi
If magnetic tape is not used at the host-system location
(DOS/VS users only):
#9431
#9432
80 column cards
96 column cards
When 1st pOSition (#9491) is specified, additional information
is required to determine the shipping address of the controllerdata media.
\
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - --==-=
- -- - ----- ==
M .3624.4
Jul79
DF ~·.I!achinc::,
3624 Cons •.,,,,!!,,! Tr!lnS2ction Facility
(cont'd)
place the ink roll when required. Prerequisite: Depository, Lobby
(#3233) or Depository, Through-the-Wall (#3243). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
This is the address to which controller-data media
will be automatically shipped after first 3624 is ordered.
Changes to 1at Position Designators for On-order and
Installed 3624s: If a 1st position (#9491) 3624 is deferred, cancelled, or discontinued and 2nd position (#9492)
3624s have been specified, then one 2nd position 3624
must be altered from 2nd to 1 st position (from #9492 to
#9491) to ensure continued distribution of controller-data
media to the host system location. When altering a 3624
to 1 st position, include all items as required to be specified when #9491 is specified (items specified on previous
1st position 3624) ... if the host system location changes
the input medium (e.g., from 1600 bpi to 6250 bpi tape),
the media specify code must be changed on the 3624
with #9491 specified. In this case, the former media
specify code must be deleted and the new one added
PRICES:
MOL
MLC
(5 Yr)
3624
1
2
11
12
$499
587
582
648
Purchase
$12,150
13,400
14,150
15,400
MMMC
$95
136
100
141
Plan Offering: Plan B
Maintenance: 0
Per Call 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Pilot Test Plan Purchase Option: 60%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL STORAGE FEATURE (#1301). Provides an additional 2,048 bytes of storage. The user can utilize this to increase the
number of custom messages, entries in Financial Institution Table,
and as might be necessary for RPQs. To determine the number of
additional storage features required, see IBM 3624 Programmer's
Reference Manual and Component Description, GC66-0009.
Prerequisite: Storage Expansion Feature (#6501) is required for
either: 1) first Add'i Storage Feature (#1301) increment when
ordered with Multiline Display (#4750) and SDLC Communications
Feature (#6301 or #6302), or 2) third Additional Storage Feature
(#1301) increment when ordered with Multiline Display (#4750)
and Terminal Loop Feature(#7820). Maximum: Two if without
Multiline Display (#4750) .. , five if with #4750. Field Installation:
Yes.
DEPOSITORY, LOBBY (#3233). [Models 1 and 11 only] Provides
envelope transport mechanism leading from a controlled access
slot to deposit receptacle inside the 3624. The depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously inserted
deposits. Includes a pedestal stand, with lockable rear access
door and standard key, and a built-in depository envelope holder.
Deposit envelopes may vary in size from 3.5" x 6.0" (88.9mm x
152.4mm) to 4.5" x 9.75" (114.3mm x 247.7mm) and shall be
constructed of paper having basic weight of sub 20 through sub
28. Maximum thickness of a deposit envelope and its contents is
0.5" (12.7mm). limitation: Cannot be installed in Pedestal, Lobby (#5510). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DEPOSITORY, THROUGH-THE-WALL (#3243). [Models 2 and 12
only] Provides envelope transport mechanism leading from a controlled access slot in the security enclosure to deposit receptacle
inside the 3624. In addition to the controlled access slot in the
security enclosure, the depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously inserted deposits. Deposit envelopes may vary in size from 3.5" x 6.0" (88.9mm x 152.4mm) to
4.5" x 9.75" (114.3mm x 247.7mm) and shall be constructed of
paper having basis weight of sub 20 to sub 28. Maximum thickness of a deposit envelope and its contents is 0.5" (12.7mm).
Prerequisite: Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) ... see
"Accessories." Limitation: Cannot be installed with Heavy-Duty
Enclosure, Single Function (#3901). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Note: Field installation requires that Heavy-Duty
Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) has been initially ordered.
DEPOSITORY PRINTER (#3245). Prints sequence number on
envelope as it passes through the depository throat. Six numeric
digits are printed horizontally at repeated intervals along the envelope. Three digits are set by the customer engineer to identify the
unit, and three digits are automatically sequenced when envelope
passes print station. The depository ink roll is IBM Part No.
457149. It is the customer's responsibility to purchase and re-
DEPOSITORY CARTRIDGE LOCKING FEATURE (#3150). [Models
2 and 12 only] Provides locking mechanism in the depository that
prevents removal of the depository cartridge unless' it is closed
and locked. Operates with Depository Cartridge (#3155) ... see
"Accessories" and M 10000 pages for purchase of cartridges.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Depository, Through-the-Wall (#3243). Minimum of one Depository Cartridge (#3155) is required for operation.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides the appropriate cables and
interface logic necessary to attach an external modem for communications attachment to the S/370 or 4300 Processor via SDLC
through a 3704/3705 Communications Controller, or the Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331 Processor. Non-IBM modems may be attached subject to the Multiple Suppliers System
Policy. Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature (#6301 or
#6302). Limitation: Cannot be installed with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500), or Terminal Loop Feature (#7820).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
MULTILINE DISPLAY (#4750). Displays up to 240 characters ...
six lines of 40 characters each. Characters are presented in
predefined 7 x 9 and 7 x 7 dot matrices for upper case alphameric, special characters, and language-unique characters including
the Hebrew alphabet. Additional interactive functions are provided
for expanded communications between the user and the attached
host. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 1)
The Change key is required if display paging ... see Keyboard
under "Specify" or 2) Increased storage storage may be required
to support larger size of display and additional interaction function
... see Additional Storage Feature (#1301) and Storage Expansion
Feature (#6501).
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500). Provides an
internal modem for communications attachment to the S/370
processor via SOLC at 1200 bps over non-switched half-duplex or
duplex voice grade lines. Note: This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Specify: #9651
for 4-wire strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Prerequisite:
SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301). Limitation:
Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), SDLC Communications Feature Without Clocking (#6302), Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820), or 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH CLOCKING (#6301).
Provides capability to attach to a host system via SDLC, e.g.,
S/370 or 4300 Processor through a 3704, 3705, or the Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331. Required for attachment to
communication facilities through the IBM 1200 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5500), or through the EIA Interface (#3701) to any
1200 bps external modem which does not have internal clocking.
Prerequisite: IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500) if no
external modem, or EIA Interface (#3701) if external modem.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820), SDLC Communication Feature without Clocking (#6302),
or 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended for field installation if Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) is installed. SDLC Communications
Feature Without Clocking (#6302) can be changed to #6301 in
the field. Transmission: This feature operates over common
carrier communication facilities. For information concerning these
facilities, see M 2700 pages.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT CLOCKING
(#6302). Provides capability to attach to a host system via SDLC,
e.g., S/370 or 4300 Processor through a 3704, 3705, or the
Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331. Required for attachment to communication facilities through the EIA Interface (#3701)
to any external modem which provides internal clocking speeds up
to 4800 bps. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701). Limitations:
Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820), SDLC
Communications Feature With Clocking (#6301), IBM 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5500), or 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem
(#8001). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended
for field installation if Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) is installed.
SDLC Communications Feature With Clocking (#6301) can be
changed in the field to #6302. Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier communication facilities. For information
concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages. External Modems:
IBM external modems that may be attached are:
3863 Modem mdl1
3864 Modem mdl 1
2400/1200 bps (non-switched)
4800/2400 bps (non-switched)
3872 Modem mdl 1
3874 Modem mdl 1
2400/1200 bps (non-switched)
4800/2400 bps (non-switched)
Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl 1 and 3864 mdl i. For
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3624.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility
(cont'd)
communications capability, product utilization
and features see 3863, 3864 and M 2700 pages.
STORAGE EXPANSION FEATURE (#6501). Provides capability to
add increments of the Additional Storage Feature (# 1301) if
Multiline Display (#4750) is installed. Required for either: 1) the
first #1301 increment when ordered with #4750 and SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302), or 2) the third #1301
increment when ordered with #4750 and Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820). Prerequisite: Multiline Display (#4750). Maximum:
One. Fi@Id 'n@.tanation: Yes.
TERMINAL LOOP FEATURE (#7820). Provides capability to
attach to a 3601/3602 loop. Attachment to local loop is directly.
Attachment to remote loop can be either directly or via remote
3ubloop through a 3603, a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, a 3614, or another
3624. Prerequisites: [1] Available position on the loop. [2] Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature
(#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601/3602 ... see
3601 or 3602. [3] Attachment to a 3601/3602 local loop directly
does not require an additional feature. [4] Attachment to a
3601/3602 remote loop directly requires 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). [5] Attachment to a 3601/3602 remote loop
via remote subloop requires one of the following: 3603 Terminal
Attachment Unit mdl 1 or 2 for 1200 bps or mdl 2 for 2400 bps ...
3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 with Line Feature Base (#4751 or #4752)
and appropriate modem ... 3614 with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820) and 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) .. , or
another 3624 with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and 1200 BPS
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Specify: [1] For attachment to a
3601/3602 local loop specify one of the following loop speeds:
#9062 for 1200 bps, #9063 for 2400 bps, or #9064 for 4800
bps. [2] For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop
through a 3603 mdl 1 or 2 at 1200 bps, #9062 ... [3] For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop through 3603 mdl 2
at 2400 bps, #9063 ... [4] For attachment to 3601/3602 remote
loop via subloop through 3604, 3614 or another 3624, #9062 for
1200 bps. Limitations: [1] Cannot be installed with SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302), EIA Interface (#3701), or
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500) ... [2] Remote loop
speed is 1200 bps maximum when attached directly or via subloop
through 3603 mdl 1 or 2, 3604, 3614, or another 3624 ... is 2400
bps maximum via subloop through 3603 mdl 2 ... [3] Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) is not required if the 3624 is attached to
a local loop, or via subloop to remote loop through 3603, 3604,
3614 or another 3624. Maximum: One. Field Installation:' Not
recommended for field installation if SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302) is installed.
THIRD TRACK (#7950). Provides for reading data on track two
and/or both reading and writing data on track three of magnetic
stripe card. Presently conforms to ISO/3554/ AD1 Third Track
Standard, and proposed Data Content Standard ISO/DIS 4909.
Can read tracks two and three independently or in conjunction
with each other. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
TRANSACTION STATEMENT PRINTER (#8201). Prints document
showing record of transaction and issues to user through the
transaction statement slot. Prints documents for audit use that can
be retained in a journal stacker in the 3624. Print feed hopper
has a capacity of 2,000 documents. Journal stacker has a capacity of 400 documents. Data is printed on 96-column card stock
2-5/8" x 3-1/4" (66.7mm x 82.6mm) in size. Provides a 57
character set consisting of 56 printable graphics and space
(blank). Four lines can be printed with up to 34 characters per
line ... maximum of 136 characters on each document. The data
to be printed is determined by the host application program. Printing is overlapped with currency issue and user deposit cycles.
Card Limitations: The 96-column card stock used in the statement printer must not have corner cuts. Detailed disclosure specifications describing 96-column card stock are available from IBM
Corporation, Commercial Development Office, Armonk, N.Y. The
configurations available from IBM
Maximum: One. Field .Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS LOOP INTEGRATED MODEM (#8001). An internal
'modem for attachment to a 3601/3602 remote loop. Operates at
1200 bps over non-switched unconditioned voice-grade lines.
Prerequisite: Terminal Loop ,Feature (#7820). Limitation: Not
required if 3624 is attached to a 3601/3602 remote loop through
a 3603, 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, 3614, or another 3624 '" or if attached to a 3601/3602 local loop. If there are both a 3604 and a
3624 located at the same remote loop location that does not have
a 3603 or 3614, it is recommended that the loop modem (#8001)
be located on the 3624, because the 3624 might often be operating while the 3604 is not, e.g., weekends. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Add'i Storage Feature
Depository Cartridge
Locking Feature
DepOSitory, Lobby
Depository, Thru-the-Wall
Depository Printer
EIA Interface
U.d.iUnoO
.... I!CIou
•••
_........ __nia
0_,..."_,,-
IBM 1200 BPS Intgd Modem
SDLC Communictns Feature
with Clocking
without Clocking
Storage Expn Feature
Terminal Loop Feature
Third Track
1200 BPS Loop Intgd Modem
Transaction Stmt Printer
Purchase MMMC
#1301
$6
$142
$1.00
3150
3233
3243
3245
3701
24
80
67
37
17
45
23
840
2,615
2,140
500
424
"nn
_,&'VV
1.50
7.50
7.50
15
4.00
1
nQ.~V
""
668
4.00
44
1,270
1,060
420
1,160
2,000
334
2,280
7.00
7.00
.50
10.00
41.00
4.00
23.50
4750
5500
6301
6302
6501
7820
7950
8001
8201
41
12
46
117
15
141
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. See M 10000 pages for additional description, feature
codes, prices and order information.
HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURE, SINGLE FUNCTION (#3901). [Mdls
2 and 12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12 with
currency dispensing function only (Note: The dual function
heavy-duty enclosure may also be used wiih currency dispensing function only, if desired.) Provides a thick steel enclosure
for currency dispensing mechanism of through-the-wall models
that do not have depository. A single rear access door includes
a combination lock. The combination of the combination lock is
set by the customer. Dual Lock (#3375) is available as an
option, providing a second combination lock on rear access
door. Dial Keylock (#3310) is available as an option, providing
keylock that prevents turning the combination dial when locked;
used for dual control and/or where bank examiner type lock is
desired. Penetration-detection grid is provided across the inside
front face of enclosure.
HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURE, DUAL FUNCTION (#3902). [Mdls 2
and 12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12 with
currency dispensing and depository functions. Can also be used
to house currency dispensing function without depository, providing additional lockable storage area. Provides thick steel
enclosure for currency dispensing and depository mechanisms.
A single rear access door includes a combination lock. The
combination of the combination lock is set by the customer.
Dual Lock (#3375) is available as an option, providing a second
combination lock on the rear access door. Dial Keylock
(#3310) is available as an option, providing keylock that prevents turning the combination dial when locked; used for dual
control and/or where bank examiner type lock is desired.
Penetration-detection grid is provided across the inside front
face of enclosure.
BEZEL, THROUGH-THE-WALL (#1490 or #1491). [Mdls 2 and
12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides
bezel to interface outside wall surface with 3624 enclosure
through-the-wall of building or other structure. #1490 --- a
recessed bezel that provides a shelf surface. Recommended for
walk-up use ... #1491 -- a non-recessed bezel which positions
the user guidance area nearer outside wall surface. Recommended for drive-up use.
PEDESTAL, FOR HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURES (#4901 or
#4902). [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Available for installation of mdls
2 and 12. A mounting stand to locate the 3624 at a height most
convenient for user operation ... includes a lockable storage
cabinet ... available for single and dual function heavy-duty
enclosures in heights appropriate for walk-up or drive-up use.
Recommended nominal keyboard heights are 52" (1321 mm) for
walk-up. 42" (1067mm) for drive-up. #4901 - for 3624s that
use the single function enclosure (#3901) ... #4902 -- for
3624s that use the dual function enclosure (#3902). Specify:
For keyboard centerline height from mounting surface -- #9701
for 42" (1067mm) ... #9702 for 47" (1194mm) ... or #9703 for
52" (1321 mm).
STORAGE CABINET, FOR DUAL FUNCTION HEAVY-DUTY
ENCLOSURE (#4903). [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Available for installation of mdls 2 and 12. A lockable storage cabinet for installation of the dual function heavy-duty enclosure (#3902) directly
to a mounting surface where a pedestal is not required.
PEDESTAL, LOBBY (#5510). [Mdls 1 and 11 only] A mounting
stand for free-standing configuration of lobby model without the
depository feature. Note: #5510 is not required if customer
intends to install a 3624 mdl 1 or 11, without the depository
feature, on an alternative mounting surface or stand. #5510 is
not required if a 3624 mdl 1 or 11 is installed with a depository
feature (#3233) since a pedestal base is included in #3233.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
\
-------- --=-- =----- --=----":' =
M 3624.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility (cont'd)
FRONT DRESS PANEL (#3951). [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides user guidance
area panel covers and logo lamp assembly.
FRONT TRIM BORDER (#3961 or #3962). [Mdls 2 and 12
only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides trim
border panel around the bezel on the outside of building for
outer seal of through-the-wall installation. #3961 -- includes a
built-in depository envelope holder ... #3962 - has no envelope
holder.
LOGO PANEL (#9401, #9402, #9403). [All Models] Required
for installation on all models of the 3624. Provides a panel that
can be personalized by the customer (silk-screened, painted,
etc.). Can be shipped with the 3624 or prior to the 3624. See
"Specify Section" above for specification of appropriate specify
code.
CURRENCY CARTRIDGE (#9110). Required for installation of
any 3624. Portable container for loading, storing, transporting,
and issuing currency or other approved documents ... interchangeable between 3624s. See M 10000 pages for customer
responsibilities, recommended number of spare cartridges, and
maintenance.
DEPOSITORY CARTRIDGE (#3155). [Mdls 2 and 12 only]
Portable container for receiving and transporting deposits. Required for operation with Depository Cartridge Locking Feature
(#3150).
3624 CURRENCY AREA LOCK OFF (#3312). [Models 2 and 12
only] Provides a security panel to enclose the currency area.
Enables the document feed mechanism to be locked in the
machine. When used with the Depository Cartridge Locking
Feature (#3150), it restricts access to the currency area during
normal operational servicing of the depository and/or other
areas of the 3624. Includes keylock and standard key. Available only when installed with the Heavy Duty Enclosure, Dual
Function (#3902).
3624
MOL/Feature
1
2
11
12
#1301
3233
3234
3243
3244
3701
4750
5500
6501
6301
6302
7950
7820
8001
8201
PILOT TEST
6 MOS.
3 MOS.
$3,038
3,350
3,538
3,850
55
654
779
535
660
106
300
167
105
318
265
500
290
84
570
$1,519
1,675
1,769
1,925
28
327
390
268
330
53
150
84
53
159
133
250
145
42
285
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =----- --=----':' =
M 3631.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3631
PLANT COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLER
Purpose: A programmable controller for attachment of 3640
terminals to S/370 or 4300 processors using appropriate virtual
storage system control programs, or an 8100 System using the
Distributed Processing Program Executive (DPPX).
Communication with an 8100 System is via the 8130, 8140
and/or the 8101 data link using the SDLC protocol. The
EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701) on the 3631 is used on an
SDLC data link or direct connect facility provided by the 8100.
Each 3631 operates in half-duplex mode.
The fol/owing IBM external modems can be used:
3863 mdl
3864 mdl
3865 mdl
3872 mdl
3874 mdl
S/370 or 4300 Processor attachment is via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller using synchronous data link control (SDLC)
transmission protocols over various common carrier or user-owned
transmission factilities. Communication is also possible via a
Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor (Note:
This is not suppported by ACF /VTAME).
8100 System attachment is via the 8130, 8140 and/or the 8101
data link using SDLC transmission protocols over various common
carrier or user-owned transmission facilities.
Terminal attachment is via directly attached or data link attached
loops which utilize synchronous data link control (SDLe) transmission protocols. The loops are user-owned transmission facilities
wich are constructed from IBM accessories ... see "3630 Loop
Accessories" in M 10000 pages.
Model 1 A Includes an IBM diskette drive which accommodates
an IBM Diskette 1 diskette of 250K byte capacity.
Model 1 B Includes an IBM diskette drive which accommodates
an IBM Diskette 2 diskette of 500K byte capacity.
Highlights
Controls the functions of a 3630 Plant Communication System.
Customers, using SCP programs on virtual storage S/370 or 4300
Processor systems or 8,00 Systems, will prepare user-written
application programs which direct system operation. The controller
can be programmed to operate independently when the S/370 is
unavailable. It is capable of controlling terminal functions, executing arithmetic and logic functions, and capturing data from the
terminals for later transmission to the S/370. A keylock is provided for locking access to the diskette drive.
1
1
1 or 2
1
1
2400/1200 bps
4800/2400 bps
9600/4800 bps
2400/1200 bps
4800/1200 bps
-
non-switched
non-switched
non-switched
non-switched
non-switched
Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on
the 3863 mdl I, 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdl 1 or 2. For
communications capabilities, product utilization and
features, see 3863, 3864, 3865,.3872, 3874 and M 2700
pages.
Supplies: For customer-owned diskettes
PREREQUISITES
Communication with a virtual storage host S/370 or 4300 processor is via a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331
Processor equipped with appropriate features ... see 3704, 3705
or 4331 pages.
A 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 6 or its equivalent is required as a
control station and is directly attached to the controller. Two
10-foot cables will be supplied with the 3631. The magnetic stripe
features are not supported.
The 3631 Controller and 3604 control terminal have been designed for operation in physical environments characteristic of
office areas. See IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3675.
One host communication feature: #6301, #6302 or #4502 is
required ... see "Special Features."
A 3630 Test Loop #9445 is required for installation with the first
3631 at each site ... see "Specify."
The model 1 A accommodates IBM Diskette 1 of 250K byte capacity. The Model 1 B accommodates iBM Diskettes 1 or 2 having
250K and 500K byte capacities. The diskette provides permanent
storage for control code and application programs, plus permanent
and temporary storage for user data. Data required to be on the
diskette, exclusive of customer data, will often exceed 200K bytes.
During normal operation, performance characteristics of the diskette drive dictate that that device be used primarily for infrequent
data logging.
Two wrap type Loop Station Connectors are required for each
local adapter (#4780).
IBM and customer code is transmitted to the controller where it is
written on a diskette. The diskette may also be used to hold
application data in the space not required for control code. At
controller start-up, diagnostics, control code and application code
are read from the diskette into control and application storage.
During system operation, the diskette may be used to access data
and code.
Telephone communication should be available at the controller site
for communication with the host, remote loops and key locations
along loops.
Storage included in the controller is used for control code, and
application control data and instructions. The amount of storage
available for application programming depends on the attached
terminal configuration and user environment. Included in the basic
machine is 65,536 bytes of application storage. Both control and
application storage may be extended in 16,384 byte increments ...
see "Special Features."
All 3640 terminals are attached to customer-owned loops. A
variety of accessories and wire are available for the construction
of the loops ... see "3630 Accessories" in the M 10000 pages.
Up to two Loop Adapters may be installed to directly connect one
loop each. The Loop Adapters each provide two loop lobes. Each
lobe may extend up to 3.2 cable kilometers (2 cable miles). Loops
are operated at 9600 bps. A loop, consisting of one lobe, may be
connected to a 3842 Loop Control Unit. The 3842 can be connected multipoint or point-to-point on a common carrier or
customer-owned transmission facility to an IBM 3863 or 3872
Modem at the 3631 site for operation at 2400 bps. A loop can
accommodate a number of loop-terminal connections. See the IBM
3630 Plant Communication System Description for additional
information.
Communication with a virtual storage host S/370 or 4300 processor is via a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331
Processor using SDLC and SNA protocols. The EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701) and either an external modem or the Line Set
Type 1F (#4716) on the 3704/3705 (on 4331, the Local Attachment Interface (#4801) feature) are required for host communicatiion. See M 2700 and M 4331 pages for Communications Adapter features on 4331. Each 3631 operates in half-duplex mode.
Duplex communication line operations are possible with multiple
3631 sand 3632s attached to the line ... one 3631/3632 transmitting while the other receives.
3631/3632 programming support material must be ordered from
PID and installed on the host processor.
Loop Continuity and Relay Testers, Part No. 1657420, should be
purchased by the customer for testing his loop wiring. One tester
should be available at each physical location of controller(s) loops
or remote loop(s) that will require loop cable testing.
A 3643 Keyboard Display terminal should be located in close
physical proximity to 3842 Loop Control Units for remote loop and
connected terminal testing.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3675 '" IBM
3630 Plant Communicalion System - Loop Installation Manual Physical Planning,GA24-3676 ... IBM 3630 Plant Communication
System: Controller Operating Guide, GA24-3678.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 Hz, 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable;
#9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. These
are usable on 120 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Distribution of Microcode: One copy of the 3631 or 3632
System Microcode is required for each S/370 attaching a
3631 or 3632. The address for the initial shipment must be
supplied as a Supplementary Specification
Specify: #9491 for initial 3630 System ordered for attachment
to the S/370 or, #9492 for any additional 3630 system ordered for attachment to the S/370.
For distribution of microcode to the S/370 location specify the
media:
#9412
#9413
#9414
#9431
#9432
9/800 magnetic tape
9/1600 magnetic tape
9/6250 magnetic tape
80 column card
96 column card
Shipping address for the 3630 System microcode must
be supplied
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -
----- -
=-
-.EF5.
___
_ • _
M 3631.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3631 Plant Communication Contr_oller
(conl'd}
TERMINAL ATTACHMENT
This is the address to which the microcode will be automatically sent for the 3630 System (designated #9491). Whenever a 3630 is updated by an EC. the microcode will be sent
to the current TPC# address. The TPC# (Teleprocessing
Control Number)
•
Loop Accessories and Loop Cable: 10 Loop Accessory Keys
are shipped with the 3631. See M 10000' pages for descriptions. prices and ordering instructions for 3630 System Accessories.
•
3630 Test Loop: Specify #9445 on the first 3631 or 3632 to
be installed at each site. Field Installation: Yes.
3631
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
1A
1B
$993
1,058
$845
900
$26,300
28,300
$224
247
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination CharQe Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
The Data Link Adapter (#3211), Loop Adapter (#4780). and
EIA/CCITT Interface (#3703) features enable the 3631 Controller
to attach 3640 terminals. Data Link terminal attachment capability·
is provided by selection of the EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link
(#3703) with the Data Link Adapter (#3211). Direct terminal
attachment capability is provided by selection of the Loop Adapter
(#4780) and the Data Link Adapter (#3211). A maximum of two
directly attached loops and two data links for attachment of 3842s
may be installed.
The data links are used to provide point-to-point or multipoint
facilities for the connection of the 3842 Loop Control Units. The
3842 attaches at the remote ends of the data link where it establishes a remote loop. The 3872 Modem connects the EIA/CCITT
Interface - Data Link (#3703) and the data link at the controller.
The loop operates at the same speed as the data link.
Customer Responsibilities for Loops: The customer must purchase, install, and maintain loops for terminal attachment. See
IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Description for further
information. See IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Loop
Installation Manual - Physical Planning for further planning and
installation information on loop components. loop cable. loop
wiring configurations, Continuity and Relay Tester. and maintenance and test procedure. See M 10000 pages for bulk cable and
accessories.
Model Changes: Model 1 A can be changed to Model 1 B in the
field. Change from Model 1 A to 1 B requires replacement of the
diskette storage device. Adequate provision must be made for
retaining data contained on the diskette by having the customer
remove it prior to the start of any conversion.
DATA LINK ADAPTER (#3211). Provides the control logic to
establish
SDLC
communications
for
terminal
aUachment.
Maximum: Four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Required
once for each Loop Adapter (#4780) and once for each
EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link (#3703).
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE: All replaced parts become
the property of IBM .. , there are no additional installation charges.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - DATA LINK (#3703). Provides an
EIA/CCITT interface for attachment of a 3872 Modem for the
connection of the 3842. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter (#3211). Limitation: The sum of
the bps operating rates for all EIA/CCITT Interfaces (#3701 and
#3703) and the Loop Adapters (#4780) may not exceed 28.800
bps.
Model 1 A to Model 1 B ....... $2,000.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL ST(>RAGE FEATURE (#1006). Provides an additional 16.384 byte increment of storage for device attachment or
application storage. To determine the number and type of storage
features required see the configurator in the 3630 Plant Communication System Description. Specify: #9591 for Additional Device
Attachment Control Storage, or #9592 for Additional" Application
Storage. Maximum: Five ... one with specify #9591, up to four
with specify #9592. Field Installation: Yes. Note: The quantity
of feature #1006s must equal the combined quantities of specify
#9591 and #9592(s).
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
For communication with the host processor, each 3631 must be
equipped with EIA/CCITT - Host (#3701) and one of the following
SDLC features: #4502, #6301, #6302.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - HOST (#3701). Provides the appropriate cables and interface logic necessary to attach an external
modem for communication to the host processor through the
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor or for
local attachment to the 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on
Maximum:
One.
Field
4331
without requiring modems.
Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: A Communications Feature
(#4502, 6301 or 6302).
LOOP ADAPTER (#4780). Allows direct attachment of a loop with
one or two loops to the controller operating at a speed of 9600
bps. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Data
Link Adapter (#3211), and a wrap type Loop Station Connector. in
each connected lobe.
MRC
Add'i Storage Feature #1006
$58
Data Link Adapter
3211
35
EIA/CCITT Interface
Host
3701
12
Data Link
3703
12
Loop Adapter
4780
31
SDLC /Host Communications Feature
w /0 Clkg to 9600 bps 4502
35
w Clkg to 2400 bps
6301
19
w /0 Clkg to 4800 bps 6302
12
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#4502). Required for attachment to communication lines through an external modem which provides clocking at
speeds up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #6301 or #6302. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
i;WST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#6301). Required for attachment to communication
lines through any external modem which does not provide clocking
for speeds of 600, 1200 and 2400 bps, or for local attachment to
the 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor.
See Feature #4716 under "Special Features" for the 3704 or
3705, or 4331 pages. Maximum: One. Limitation:' Cannot be
installed with #6302 or #4502. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#6302). Required for attachment to communication lines through an external modem which provides clocking at
speeds up to 4800 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #6301 or #4502. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$49
30
$1,170 $10.00
1,200 10.50
10
10
26
424
424
940
4.00
4.00
17.50
30
16
10
1,200
710
477
10.50
3.00
2.50
-------- --=-- =---- --=----':' =
M 3632.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3632 PLANT COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLER
plex communication line operations are possible with multiple
3631 sand 3632s attached to the line ... one 3631/3632 transmitting while the other receives.
Purpose: A programmable controller for attachment of 3640
terminals to S/370 or 4300 processors using appropriate virtual
storage system control programs, or an 8100 System using the
Distributed Processing Program Executive (DPPX).
Communication with an 8100 System is via the 8130, 8140
and/or the 8101 data link using the SDLC protocol. The
EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701) on the 3632 is used on an
SDLC data link or the direct connect facility provided by the 8100.
Each 3631 operates in half-duplex mode.
S/370 or 4300 Processor attachment is via a 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor using Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC) transmission protocols over various
common carrier or user-owned transmission facilities. Communication is also possible via a Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 Processor (Note: This is not supported by ACF /VTAME).
Thefollowing IBM external modems can be used:
3863 mdl 1
3864 mdl 1
3865 mdl 1 or 2
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdl 1
8100 System attachment is via the 8130, 8140 and/or the 8101
data link using SDLC transmission protocols over various common
carrier or user-owned transmission facilities.
Terminal attachment is via directly attached or data link attached
loops. The loops are user-owned transmission facilities which are
constructed from IBM accessories
see "3630 Loop
Accessories" in M 10000 pages. The loops are connected via
common carrier or user-owned tranmission facilities.
Model1A
A programmable controller with a 5 megabyte
disk.
Model 1B
A programmable controller with a 9.2 megabyte
disk.
Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on
the 3863 mdl I, 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdl 1 or 2. For
communications capabilities, product utilization and
features, see 3863, 3864, 3865, 3872, 3874 and M 2700
pages.
Supplies:
Communications with a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor
is via a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor equipped with appropriate speCial features
see
3704/3705 or 4331 pages.
Communications with the 8100 System is via the 8130, 8140
and/or the 8101 data link using the appropriate features .... see
8130, 8140 and 8101. When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System, "Terminal Requirements" under 8130,
8140 and 8101 in "Machines" should be reviewed.
A 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 6, or its equivalent, is required as
a control station and is directly attached to the controller. Two
10 foot connecting cables will be supplied with the 3632. The
magnetic stripe optional features on the 3604 are not supported.
The 3632 Plant Communication Controller and 3604 Keyboard
Display mdl 6 have been designed for operation in physical
environments characteristic of office areas. See IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System - System Description Manual for further
information.
It houses a disk siorage device (5 or 9.2 Mb capacity) for storage
of user data. This storage device is not removable except by
service personnel. A fixed head feature is available which will
provide 8 additional heads with access to data on 8 tracks ... see
Additional Disk Heads (#1010, 1011) under "Special Features."
One host communication feature (#6301, 6302 or 4502) is
required ... see "Special Features."
Houses a direct access diskette drive which accepts both IBM
Diskette 1 and 2 having respectively 250K and 500K byte capacities. The diskette provides permanent storage for control code and
application programs, plus permanent and temporary storage for
user data. Data required to be on the diskette, exclusive of customer data, will often exceed 200K bytes. During normal operation
performance characteristics of the diskette drive dictate that the
device be used primarily for infrequent data logging.
Two wrap type Loop Station Connectors for each Loop Adapter
(#4780).
A 3630 Test Loop (#9445) for installation with the first 3632 at
each site ... see "Specify."
3631 /3632 programming support material must be ordered from
PID and installed on the host processor.
IBM and customer code is transmitted to the controller where it is
written on a diskette. The diskette may also be used to hold
application data in the space not required for the control code. At
controller start-up, diagnostics, control code and application code
are read from the diskette into control and application storage.
During system operation, both the disk and the diskette may be
used to access data and code.
All 3640 terminals are attached to customer-owned loops. A
variety of accessories and wire are available for the construction
of the loops ... see "3630 Accessories" in the M 10000 pages. Up
to two Loop Adapters may be installed to directly connect one
loop each. The Loop Adapters each provide two loop lobes. Each
lobe may extend up to 3.2 cable kilometers (2 cable miles). Directly attached loops are operated at 9600 bps. A loop, consisting of
one lobe, may be connected to the 3842 Loop Control Unit. The
3842 can be connected multipoint or point-to-point on a common
carrier or customer-owned transmission facility to a 3872 Modem
at the 3632 site for operation at 2400 bps. A loop can accommodate a number of loop-terminal connections ... see 3630 Plant
Communication System Description for additional information.
Communication with a host S/370 or 4300 processor is via a
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor using
SDLC and SNA protocols. The EIA/CCITT Interface - Host
(#3701), and either an external modem or the Line Set Type 1 F
(#4716) on the 3704/3705 (on 4331, the Local Attachment
Interface [#4801] feature) are required for host communication.
See M 2700 and M 4331 pages for Communications Adapter
features on 4331. Each 3632 operates in half-duplex mode. Du-
customer-usable diskettes
Prerequisites:
Highlights: Controls the functions of a 3630 Plant Communication
System. Customers, utilizing SCP programs on virtual storage
S/370, 4300 Processor or 8100 Systems, will prepare userwritten application programs which direct system operation. The
controller can be programmed to operate independently when the
processor is unavailable. It is capable of controlling terminal
functions, executing arithmetic and logic functions, and capturing
data from the terminals for later transmission to the processor.
Information may be stored on the disk for use in responding to
terminal inquiries.
Storage included in the controller is used for control code, and
application control data and instructions. the amount of storage
available for application programming depends on the attached
terminal configuration and user environment. Included in the basic
machine is 65,536 bytes of application storage. Both control and
application storage may be extended in 16 384 byte increments ...
see "Special Features."
2400/1200 bps - non-switched
4800/2400 bps - non-switched
9600/4800 bps - non-switched
2400/1200 bps - non-switched
4800/2400 bps - non-switched
Loop Continuity and Relay Testers, P /N 1657420, should be
purchased by the customer for testing his loop wiring. One
tester should be available at each physical location of
controller(s) loops or remote loop(s) that will require loop cable
testing.
Telephone communication should be available at the controller
site for communication with the host, remote loops and key
locations along loops.
A 3643 Keyboard Display terminal should be located in close
physical proximity to 3842 Loop Control Units for remote loop
and connected terminal testing.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 '" IBM 3630 Plant communication System
- Installation Manual - Physical Planning,GA24-3675 ... IBM 3630
Plant Communication System - Loop Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA24-3676 ... IBM 3630 Plant Communication System:
Controller Operating Guide, GA24-3678.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, I-phase, 60 Hz): 115 V (usable on 120 V) -#9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. 208 V #9884 for locking plug, or #9885 for non-lock plug. 230 V -#9886 for locking plug, or #9887 for non-lock plug. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
•
Distribution of Microcode; One copy of the 3631 or 3632
System Microcode is required for each S/370 attaching a
3631 or 3632. The address for the initial shipment must be
supplied as a Supplementary Specification via AAS as shown
below.
Specify #9491 for initial 3630 system ordered. for attachment
to the S/370, or #9492 for any additional 3630 system ordered for attachment to the S/370.
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
-------- - - ----------------_.-
M 3632.2
Jui 79
DP Machines
3632 Plant Communication Controller (cont'd)
For distribution of microcode to the S/370 location specify the
media;
#9412
#9413
#9414
#9431
#9432
9/800 magnetic tape
9/1600 magnetic tape
9/6250 magnetic tape
80 column card
96 column card
Shipping address for the 3630 system microcode must
be supplied
This is the address to which the microcode will be automatically sent for the 3630 System (designated #9491). Whenever a 3630 is updated by an EC, the microcode will. be sent
to· the current iPC# address. the TPC# (Teleprocessing
Control Number)
•
Loop Accessories and Loop Cable: 10 Loop Accessory Keys
are shipped with the 3632. See M 10000 pages for descriptions, prices. and ordering instructions for 3630 System Accessories.
3630 Test Loop: Specify #9445 on the first 3631 or 3632 to
be installed at each site. Field Installation: Yes.
PRICES Mdl
lA
lB
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$1,533 $1,305
1,622
1,380
Purchase
MMMC
$44,600
47,600
$273
281
Per Call:1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model 1 A can be changed in the field to Model
1 B ... requires replacement of the disk storage device. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining data contained on the disk
and for removal of any proprietary data prior to the start of the
conversion. Limitation: Field installation of the additional disk
heads for Model 1 B (# 1011) concurrently with a model change
from Model 1 A to Model 1 B requires submission of an RPQ.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges ... all replaced parts become. the property of
IBM.)
Model 1 A to Model 1 B ...... $3,000.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL STORAGE FEATURE (#1006). Provides an additional 16,384 byte increment of storage for device attachment or
application storage. To determine the number and type of storage
features required. see the Configurator in the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Description Manual. Specify: #9591 for
additional device attachment control storage, or #9592 for additional application storage. Maximum: #1006 with #9591 specified - 1 ... # 1006 with #9592 specified -- 4 ... a maximum of
five # 1006s. Note: The Quantity of # 1006s must equal the
combined Quantities of specify codes #9591 and #9592. Field
Installation: Yes.
ADDITIONAL DISK HEADS (#1010 for mdl lA, #1011 for mdl
1 B). Provides eight additional disk heads for the disk file, as
specified by model type selected. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
HOST COMMUNICATION FEATURES ... For communications with
the host processor, each 3632 must be equipped with EIA/CCITT
interface - Host (#3701) and one of the following Communications
features ... #4502, #6301 or #6302.
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#6301). Required for attachment to communication lines through any external modem which does not provide clocking for speeds of 600, 1200 and 2400 bps. or for
local attachment to the 3704/3705 ... see Line Set Type 1 F
(#4716) under "Special Features" for the 3704 or 3705.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6302 or #4502.
Maximum:
One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite:
EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
HOST COMMUNiCATiOiliS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS
MACHINE CLOCKING (#6302). Required for attachment to
communication lines through an external modem which provides
clocking at speeds up to 4800 bps. Maximum: One. limitation:
Cannot be installed with #6301 or #4502. Field Installation:
Yes. PrerequiSite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
TERMINAL ATTACHMENT: The Data Link Adapter (#3211), Loop
Adapter (#4780), and EIA/CCITT Interface (#3703) features
enable the 3632 Controller to attach 3640 terminals. Data link
terminal attachment capability is provided by selection of the
EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link (#3703) with the Data Link Adapter (#3211. Direct terminal attachment capability is provided by
selection of the Loop Adapter (#4780) and the Data Link Adapter
(#3211. A maximum of two directly attached loops and two data
links for attachment of 3842s may be installed.
The data links are used to provide point-to-point or multi-point
facilities for the connection of the 3842 Loop Control Units. The
3842 attaches at the remote ends of the data link where it establishes a remote loop. The 3872 Modem connects the EIA/CCITT
Interface - Data Link (#3703) and the data link at the controller.
The loop operates at the same speed as the data link.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES FOR LOOPS -- The customer
must purchase, install and maintain loops for terminal attachment
... see IBM 3036 Plant Communication System Description Manual
for further information. See IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Loop Installation Manual - Physical Planning for further planning and installation information on loop components, loop ·cable,
loop wiring configurations, Continuity and Relay Tester, and maintenance and test procedures. See M 10000 pages for bulk cable
and accessories.
DATA LINK ADAPTER (#3211). Provides the control logic to
establish SDLC communications for terminal attachment.
Prerequisite: Required once for each Loop Adapter (#4780)
and once for each EIA/CCIlT Interface - Data Link (#3703).
Maximum: Four. Field Installation: Yes.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - DATA LINK (#3703). Provides an
EIA/CCITT interface for attachment of a 3872 Modem for the
connection of the 3842. Field installation: Yes Maximum: Two.
PrerequiSite: Data Link Adapter (#3211). Limitation: The sum
of the bps operating rates for all EIA/CCITT Interfaces (#3701
and #3703) and the Loop Adapters (#4780) can not exceed
28.800 bps.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4780). Allows direct attachment of a loop
with one or two lobes to the controller operating at a speed of
9600
bps.
Maximum:
Two.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter (#3211), and a wrap type Loop
Station Connector in each connected lobe.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
Add'i Storage Feature #1006
Add'i Disk Heads
For Model lA
1010
For Model lB
1011
Data Link Adapter
3211
EIA/CCITT Interface
3701
Host
Data Link
3703
Loop Adapter .
4780
SDLC Communications Feature
w /0 clkg to 9600 bps 4502
with clkg to 2400 bps 6301
w /0 clkg to 4800 bps 6302
$58
$49
$1,170 $10.00
32
32
35
27
27
30
1,080
1,080
1,200
17.00
17.00
10.50
12
12
31
10
10
26
424
424
940
4.00
4.00
17.50
35
19
12
30
16
10
1,200
710
477
10.50
3.00
2.50
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - HOST (#3701). Provides the appropriate cables and interface logic necessary to attach an external
modem for communications to the host processor through the
3704/3705 or for local attachment to the 3704/3705 without
requiring modems. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequlslt.e: Communications Feature (#4502, 6301 or 6302).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS
MACHINE CLOCKING (#4502). Required for attachment to
communication lines through an external modem which provides
clocking at speeds up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation;
Cannot be installed with #6301 or #6302. Field Installation:
Yes. PrerequiSite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- ------= = = ':' =
IBM
M 3641.1
May 79
DP Machines
3641
REPORTING
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
TERMINAL
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
Purpose: The 3641 Reporting Terminal models 1 and 2 are interactive workstations with a wide range of options to meet individual
customer requirements for data entry and response.
Model 1
Model 2
Has a 22-character alphameric display. Either a
35-key numeric keyboard or 70-key alphameric
keyboard feature must be specified. Optional features include a Magnetic Reader Attachment and
a Digital Input/Digital Output with 32 input and 8
output points.
Has a 22-character alphameric display. Either a
35-key numeric keyboard or 70-key alphameric
keyboard feature must be specified. Optional features include a Magnetic Reader Attachment, a
Numeric Punched Hole Badge Reader, an 80column Punched Card Reader, and Digital
Input/Digital Output with 32 input and 8 output
points.
HIGHLIGHTS
applies to
the 3641 terminal.
Maintenance of the 3641 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed location.
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in prices.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments
The 3641, Models 1 and 2, and accessories may be used in the
industrialized work zones of a wide range of business, industrial
and commercial establishments.
They can resist:
The 3641 is an interactive workstation terminal that is designed to
be used on a table, counter, work bench or mounted via an accessory bracket on a wall or column. Its capability includes:
Concentrations of certain common, corrosive gases.
•
An easy-to-read display for input verification of keyed data and
alphameric operator messages of up to 22 characters.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
•
Display of alphameric and special characters.
•
Function keys for user-defined transactions.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
•
Special features for fixed data input include: A 10-column
numeric punched hole badge reader, an 80-column card reader, and a magnetic character reader adapter.
•
A Digital Input/ Output feature for exchange of data between
the 3641 and customer devices.
•
A removable keyboard overlay and function key mask which
can be customized by the customer.
Accumulations of dust, grit, and dirt.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping, operation,and relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY
Voltage (120 V AC,1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug.
Supplies; 80-column cards ... Punched Hole Badges ... Magnetic
Stripe Badges.
These supplies, if required, may be ordered through
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
IBM
Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable,
or #9976 for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
PREREQUISITES
1.
Either the 35-key Numeric Keyboard (#4652) or the 70-key
Alphameric Keyboard (#4653) must be specified on both
3641 Models 1 and 2.
2.
A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842 or 8100
System Loop.
3.
The Punched Card/Punched Badge Adapter (#5781) must be
specified if either Numeric Punched Hole Badge Reader
(#5810) or 80-column Punched Card Reader (#5802) is
specified. [Model 2 only]
4.
Magnetic Reader Attachment (#4910) must be specified if
either the Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or
Dual Entry Magnetic Slot Reader is ordered. See "Special
Features."
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System,
"Terminal Requirements" under the appropriate 8130, 8140 or
8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography: 3630 Plant Communication System - System Description, GA24-3652 ... 3641 Reporting Terminal Operating
Guide, GA24-3679, or Introduction to 8100 System.
Customer Setup: The 3641 is designated customer setup (CSU)
th~reby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, setup and checkout of the 3641 at
time of delivery or when relocating the 3641 .
Removing and packing of the 3641 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3641 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
Mdl
3641
1
2
MLC
5 Yr
$91
107
Purchase'
$2,955
3,530
MMMC
$13.50
15.00
Maintenance: A
Per Call:
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
SPECIAL FEATURES
DIGITAL INPUT/DIGITAL OUTPUT (#3251). Provides 32 bits of
TTL compatible digital input and 8 bits of TTL compatible digital
output on the 3641 model 1 and 2. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
35-KEY NUMERIC KEYBOARD (#4652). Provides 15 customerdefined function keys, 5 control keys, 10 numeric keys and 5
special character keys. Limitation: Canot be installed with
#4653. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time of
manufacture only.
70-KEY ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#4653).
Provides 20
customer-defined function keys, 5 control keys, 10 numeric keys,
A-Z, and 9 special character keys. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #4652. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time
of manufature only.
.
MAGNETIC READER ATTACHMENT (#4910). Used to attach a
Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or Dual Entry
Magnetic Slot Reader to the 3641 model 1 and 2. Note: The
three magnetic readers are plug compatible. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with both #5801 and #5802 on the model 2.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
PUNCHED CARD/PUNCHED BADGE ADAPTER (#5781). [Model
2 only] Required if either Numeric Punched Hole Badge Reader
(#5801) or 80-Column Punched Card Reader (#5802) is specified. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
...
Pilot Test Plan applies.
Whether terminal, controller, accessory or media is at fault.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- ------= = = ':" =
DP Machines
3641 Reporting Terminal (cont"d)
NUMERIC PUNCHED HOLE BADGE READER (#5801). [Model 2
only] Provides a badge reader which can read up to 10 digits of
numeric information. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
Punched Card/Punched Badge
Reader Adapter (#5781). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
both #4910 and #5802.
80-COLUMN PUNCHED CARD READER (#5802). [Model 2 only)
Allows the reading of 80-column tab cards. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with both #4901 and #5801. Maximum: One. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
Punched
Card/Punched Badge Adapter (#5781).
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Digital Inpt/Digital Outpt #3251
35-Key Keyboard
4652
70-Key Keyboard
4653
Magnetic Rdr Attachmt
4910
Pnchd Card/Pnchd Badge
Adapter
5781
Num Pchd Hole Bdg Rdr
5801
SO-Col Punched Card Rdr 5802
Purchase MMMC
$17
8
11
10
$510
163
288
318
$3.00
2.50
3.00
1.50
5
24
28
136
829
815
1.00
3.00
6.00
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature Number and
quantity as shown below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages.
See M 10000 for additional information and for ordering
Item
Feature Number
Maximum Qty
Magnetic Hand Scanner
#9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader
9442
Mounting Bracket
9450
Magnetic Reader Extension Cable ... for
use with Magnetic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader
6 meter
9106
*.
12 meter
9107
•
A maximum of one magnetic reader or scanner may be ordered .
•• A maximum of one extension cable may be ordered.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3641.2
May 79
M 3642
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3642 ENCODER PRINTER
Purpose: A work station printer and magnetic stripe encoder
which produces turn around documents. The magnetic stripe on
the documents encoded by the 3642 can be read by the Magnetic
Hand Scanner and the Magnetic Slot Reader.
Model 1
Model 2
Customer Setup: The 3642 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, setup and checkout of the 3642 at
time of delivery or wnen relocating the 3642.
Has ten print lines and allows hand feed operation.
Has ten print lines and allows the automatic
feeding of continuous forms as well as hand
feed operations.
Removing and packing of the 3642 at time of discontinuance.
•
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3642 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights
The 3642 is designed to produce magnetic stripe documents at a
workstation. Its capability includes:
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operation to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Prints and encodes magnetic striped cards and labels.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
Prints 10 lines of up to 70 alphameric characters each.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system aV!lilability.
Encodes alphameric data.
•
Hand feed or automatic feed documents.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
Large printed-character option.
applies to
the 3642.
Automatic Feeding and Bursting: The model 2 automatic feed
and burst capability permits unattended operation. It provides a
forms burster and a hopper which holds up to 400 continuous
forms.. A forms stacker which holds up te 400 cut forms is standard on both models. All continuous forms on the model 2 are
automatically burst prior to encoding and printing.
There is no regularlY scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
The automatic feed and burst capability .is designed 10 burst 99
pound card stock and adhesive backed labels. It is not designed
to burst 150 pound tag stock.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in prices.
Document Speed: The document speed depends upon the data
printed and the forms size and will have to be evaluated for each
application. The machine speed for a typical document is eight
documents per minute.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Document Description: The 3642 contains a printer and magnetic
stripe encoder that can print and encode on the following documents.
Document Sizes: Height -- 8.26cm (3.25 in) ... Length Min: 12.7cm (5.0 in) ... Length -- Max: 18.733cm (7.375
in).
Maintenance of the 3642 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed Incation. See
Physical Environments
The 3642 models 1 and 2 may be used in the industrialized work
zones of a wide range of business, industrial and commercial
establishments.
They can resist:
Concentrations of certain common, corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit, and dirt.
Document Types 99 pound card stock ... 150 pound
white tag stock ... pressure sensitive labels.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Document Thickness: Min. 0.018cm (0.007 in) ... Max:
0.030cm (0.011 in).
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
See Forms Design Reference Guide. GA24-3488 for more details
on the 3642 forms.
•
Character Sets: The 48 printed character set consists of 0-9.
A-Z. and special characters period (.). single quote (,), plus (+).
ampersand (&), dollar sign ($), asterisk (0), hyphen or minus (-),
slash (f), comma (,), percent (%), at sign (@) and number sign (#)
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
A special (Large Character) 48-character set available at time of
manufacture provides 0-9, A-Z, slash(f)~ minus (-) and decimal (.)
and 9 special characters for creating large printed characters ...
see . 'Specify. " Also see 3630 Plant Communications System
Description for details.
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz) #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is compatible
with existing 11 5 V systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
The large character set has two options ... see "Specify."
Large-character printing on the first 4 lines only - standard printing on the last 6 lines.
Large-character printing on' all 10 lines.
Supplies: Magnetic striped forms ... an ink roll (part No. 457380),
or equivalent.
These supplies may be ordered through
IBM
Prerequisite: A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842,
or 8100 System loop.
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System,
"Terminal Requirements:' under the appropriate 8130, 8140 or
8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography:
3630 Plant Communication System - System Description, GA24-3652
3642 Encoder Printer Operating Guide. GA24-3680
Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488
Introduction to 8100 System.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping, operation,
and relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
SPECIFY
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.27 meter (1 4 foot) cable.
Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1 .83 meter (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.27 meter (14 foot) cable.
Character Set Groups: Specify one -- #2956 for standard size
cha;acter set. #9401 for Large Character - Lines 1-4, or
#9402 for Large Character - Lines 1-10.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
Mdl
1
2
MLC
5 Yr
$191
226
Purchase"
$5,775
6,825
MMMC
$31.50
38.00
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination C~arge Percent: 20%
• Pilot Test Plan applies.
Not to be reDroduced without written permission.
---------=-- =----- --=--';' =
M 364~
May 79
DP Machines
Concentrations of certain common. corrosive gases.
IBM 3643 KEYBOARD DISPLAY
Concentrations of dust, grit and dirt.
Purpose: A combination keyboard and gas panel display terminal
for input and output in interactive 3630 Plant Communication
System applications, and when attached to an 8100 System.
Model 2
Displays 240 characters ... six rows of 40
characters. Keyboard consists of alphameric,
control, and function keys.
Model 3
Displays 480 characters ... twelve rows of 40
characters. Keyboard consists of alphameric,
control, and function keys.
Model 4
Displays 1024 characters ... sixteen rows of
64 characters. Keyboard consists of alphameric, control, and function keys.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
Vibration and shock associated with shipping, placement.
cperatioii and re:ocation of the terT.-lillGli for most types of
industries.
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual' - Physical Planning.
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY
•
Voltaga (120 V, AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is compatible
with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
•
Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
•
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
Highlights
Gas panel display with buffer.
Keyboard options to meet input requirements.
Operates with manufacturing application programs.
Accesses control functions.
Prerequisites
Either the Alphameric Keyboard (#4772) or the Expanded
Alphameric Keyboard (#4774) must be selected to complete
the order. See"Special Features."
A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842 loop, ot
8100 System loop.
Magnetic Attachment (#4910) must be ordered if the Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or Dual Entry
Magnetic Slot Reader is to be attached. See "Special Features. "
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System,
the section "Terminal Requirements" in the appropriate 8130,
8140 or 8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3643 Keyboard Display Operating
Guide, GA24-3631 ... Introduction to 8100 System.
Customer Setup: The 3643 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3643 at time
of delivery or when relocating the 3643.
Removing and packing of the 3643 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3643 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (PDPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
Proper terminal operator use of PDPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
applies to the 3643 terminals and accessories.
Maintenance of the 3643 terminals will normallv hp. oerformed at
the installed. location.
PRICES:
Mdl
3643
2
3
4
MLC
5 Yr
MMMC
Purchasett
$ 99
133
138
$2,455
3,400
3,590
$27.00
33.50
35.50
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 20
SPECIAL FEATURES
Keyboards -- all keyboards will have a combination of preengraved and non-engraved key tops. For the non-engraved function keys each 3643 will be provided with 3 sets of self-adhesive
keytop labels. One set will be pre-printed with commonly used
function nomenclature and will have a protective plastic coating
applied. Also, a set of blank labels will be provided so that the
user may create his own labels. A clear plastic overlay set will
provide a protective cover for the blank label set.
ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#4772). A 54-key alphameric section
pre-engraved as a typewriter keyboard to the left of a
function/transaction keypad. The function/transaction keypad
consists of 12 engraved and 8 non-engraved keys. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Expanded Numeric Keyboard (#4774).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
EXPANDED ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#4774). The same as
#4772. except that function/transaction keypad has 20 additional
non-engraved keys. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4772. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MAGNETIC ATTACHMENT (#4910). Permits attachment of a
Magnetic Hand Scanner. Magnetic Slot Reader. or Dual Entry
Magnetic Slot Reader. Note: The Magnetic Hand Scanner and
Magnetic Slot Readers are plug compatible .. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Alphameric Keyboard
#4772
Expnd Alphameric Kybd
4774
MagnetiC Attachment
4910
Purch
$21 $763
26
932
10
318
MMMC
$1.00
1.50
1.50
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment.with the machine order the Feature Number
and quantity as shown below at the price listed in th.e M 10000
pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information and for
ordering
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
Item
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Magnetic Hand Scanner
9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader
9442
Magnetic Reader Extension Cable .. for
use with Magnetic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader
6 meter
9106
12 meter
9107
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments: The 3643 mdls 2, 3 and 4 may be used
in industrialized work zones of a wide range of business, industrial
and commercial establishments. They can resist:
tt
Feature Number Maximum Qty
• A maximum of one magnetic reader or scanner may be or
dered .
•• A maximum of one extension cable may be ordered.
Pilot Test Plan applies.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----- ---== == ';" ==
- =-=
M 3644
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3644 AUTOMATIC DATA UNIT
Purpose: The 3644 attaches to the 3631 or 3632 controller, or
8100 system via its loop features to provide system connection to
a variety of distributed sensors, actuators, and production and
laboratory equipment.
Highlights:
The unit provides:
Power and housing for Sensor I/O cards.
Distributed attachment of user equipment.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated
with terminal operational sites.
Analog and digital attachments.
Bit serial asynchronous current loop.
User defined scan controls, data transmission and logic processing.
Limitations: The analog input function requires multiple Sensor
I/O cards. If analog input is installed, some card-socket usage
restrictions exist. See M 10000 pages for details.
Accessories: See M 10000 pages for descriptions of the Sensor
I/O cards.
Prerequisite: A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842
loop, or 8100 System loop.
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 system, the
"Terminal Requirements" listed in the appropriate 8130, 8140 or
8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography: IBM Plant Communication System - System Description GA24-3652 ... IBM 3644 Automatic Data Unit - Component
Description Manual, GA24-3653 ... IBM 3644 Automatic Data Unit
- Programming Guide, GA24-5178 ... IBM 3644 Automatic Data
Unit Operating Guide, GA24-3682.
Customer Setup: The 3644 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3644 at time
01 delivery or when relocating the 3644; this includes the Sensor I/O cards.
Removing and packing of the 3644 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures of
the 3644 and filling out the trouble report prior to calling for
service.
Executing the problem determination procedures for the Sensor
I/O cards, determining the failing card, and mailing it to the
honoring IBM location.
Maintenance of the process sensors, actuators, and wiring.
Determining and stocking spare Sensor I/O cards.
Creating the parameter tables that direct the operation of the
3644.
Installation and physical planning for the 3644. IBM assistance
in determining the suitability of the industrial environment for
the 3644 installation is available.
Relocation of the 3644 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (PDPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, sensor I/O cards, or media
is at fault.
Proper terminal operator use of PDPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
ap-
plies to the 3644 terminals.
Maintenance of the 3644 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed location.
Warranty service of the Sensor I/O cards will be performed at the
honoring IBM location. See M 10000 pagesJor details.
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventative maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
..._.L.L_ .... ____ . . _.....
Physical Environments: The 3644 and jts Sensor I/O cards have
been designed to operate in the industrialized work zones of many
types of establishments.
They can resist:
Concentrations of certain common corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common to
terminal operational sites for most industries.
.-tt.A ...
uJ'i ..... l'u.t
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping operation and
relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120 V AC. 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for
locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is
compatible with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
[2] Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meters (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meters (14 foot) cable.
[3] Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meters (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.3 meters (14 foot) cable.
[4] Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
[5] Distribution of 3644 Microcode: One copy of the 3644 microcode for machines with feature #4905 and/or one copy of the
3644 microcode for machines without feature #4905 is required at each S/370 or 8100 system location.
for the initial shiDment must be supplied as a Supplementary
Specify:
#9491 - for initial 3644 without MIO feature.
#9492 - for initial 3644 with MIO feature (#4905).
#9493 - for any additional 3644s.
For distribution of microcode to a S/370 location specify media:
#9412 - 9/800 magnetic tape
#9413 - 9/1600 magnetic tape.
#9414 - 9/6250 magnetic tape.
For distribution of microcode to an 810U system location specify
media:
#9415 - Diskette 1.
MLC
PRICES:
5 Yr
Purchase· MMMC
Mdl
3644
$174
$5,240
$34
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Percent: 20%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
SPECIAL FEATURES
MANUAL I/O (#4905). Provides a 22-character display and a
35-key numeric/function keypad. Allows inquiry into customer
data and status contained in 3644 storage when online to the
3630 system. When offline. additionally allo~'.!s modification of
customer data locations to effect operator control of 3644 operation.
MLC
Special Feature Prices:
5 Yr Purchase MMMC
Manual I/O
#4905 $45 $1,480 $6.50
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with the machine order the Feature Number
and quantity as shown below at the price listed in the M 10000
•
Pilot T..t Plan appli...
\&Iritt~n
np.rmi!;.~inn.
--- ---=
--= =----':' =
--- ----
M 3644 - 3645
May 79
DP Machines
3644 Automatic Data Unit (cont'd)
pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information and for
ordering by MES.
Item
Feature Number Maximum Qty
16 Point Isolated 01
#9142
16 Point Non-isolated 01
9143
16 Point Isolated DO
9151
16 Point Non-isolated DO
9144
8 Point Reed Relay Mltplxr 9145
Analog to Digital Converter
9146
Current Loop
9141
Process Termination BloCk
9147
Socket Cover
9146
• A maximum of 8 sensor I/O cards can be ordered. See IBM
3644 Component Description Manual - Appendix C, GA24-3653,
for configuration limitations.
•• A maximum of 8 process termination blocks and socket covers
can be ordered. See IBM 3644 Component Description Manual,
GA24-3653.
IBM 3645 PRINTER
Purpose: A receive-only printer for printed output in interactive
3630 Plant Communication Cystem applications.
The 3645 is a 120 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
Note: Actual printer throughput is dependent on system and application characteristics.
Highlights:
The 3645 provides a hard-copy output on a variety of fotms to
meet plant floor printing requirements. Th printer is a bi-directional
matrix printer with electronic tabulation and indexing. Line spacing
is 6 lines per inch. Up to 4 part cut forms can be used with standard friction feed. For continuous forms, the Forms Tractor
(#8700) or the Forms Tractor with Separator Bar (#8701) is
recommended. Card stock forms are not recommended.
Two printing feature options are provided:
Character Print - Standard (# 1501) provides basic character size
printing (approximately .072 inch wide by 0.117 inch high). The
printer character dot matrix is four of seven wide by eight high,
giving high legibility. The maximum print line is 132 positions.
Character spacing is ten to the inch.
Character Print - Large (#1502) provides four character size
printing options under program control.
Basic character size (approximately 0.072 inch wide by 0.117 Inch
high), and approximately two times standard, four times basic size,
and eight times standard size.
Intermix of printing sizes on a single line is not permitted.
The 3645 has been designed to operate In most Industrial and
commercial environments. It attaches to a 3631 or 3632 Plant
Communication Controller via a local 9600 bps loop. The 3645
also attaches to a 3842 Loop Control Unit via a 2400 bps loop, or
8100 System Loop.
Two variable width forms tractors are available
see "Special
Features."
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 1136653
or equivalent, is required.
Prerequisites:
A Loop Station Connector installed on a 3631/3632 or 3842
or 8100 System Loop.
Either Character Print - Standard (#1501) or Character Print
-Large (# 1502) must be specified ... see "Special Features."
When ordering this machine for use with an 8100 System, the
"Terminal Requirements" on the appropriate 8130, 8140 or 8101
machine page should be reviewed.
Forms Specification: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for
Printers, GA24-3588... use 3767 specifications.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652.
Customer Setup: the 3645 is designated customer aetup (CSU),
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibilitv.
Customer Responsibilities The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, setup, and checkout of the 3845 at
time of delivery, or when relocating the 3645.
Removal and packing of the 3645 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
and filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
•
Relocation of the 3645 (if required) to allow IBM service.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operation to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possibie
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
Proper Terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum
terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
applies to
the 3645 Printer.
Maintenance of the printer will normally be performed at the in"tailed location.
There is no regualrly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
Immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices."
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Envlronmenta: The 3645 may be used In industrialized
work zones of a wide range of business, Industrial, and commercial establishments.
It can resist:
Concentration of certain common, corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit, and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interfence associated
with terminal operation sites.
Vibration and shock associated with shipping, placement,
operation, and relocation of the terminal for most types of
industries.
For environmental requirements refer to IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3675.
SPECIFY
Voltage (120 V AC, l-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 VAC is compatible
with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Inltallatlon: Not recommended.
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (1 4 foot) cable.
Loop Cable: #9976 for 1.6 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9977
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
MLC
5 Yr
Purchasett MMMC
Mdl
$191
3645
1
$4,700
S44
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Months:6
Termination Chg Percent: 20%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHARACTER PRINT - STANDARD (#1501). Provides dot matrix
character size approximately 0.072 Inch wide by 0.117 inch high
at 10 characters per inch. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Character· Print-Large Feature (#1502). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
CHARACTER PRINT - LARGE (#1502). Provides four character
size printing options under program control. Standard - approximetely 0.072 inch wide by 0.117 inch high at 10 characters per
Inch, and approximately two times standard size, four times standard size, and eight eight times standard size. Intermix of printing
lizel on a single line is not permitted. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Character Print - Standard (#1501). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequlalte: Variable Width Forms
Tractor (#8700) or Variable Width Forms Tractor with Separator
(#8701).
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
ft
Pi10t Tell Plan applleo.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - - - ----- ---- - =--==
':' =
M 3645 - 3646
Mav 7q
OP Machines
3645 Printer (conl'd)
device for continuous edge-punched fan-fold forms. Up to 6 parts
(total thickness - 46mm (0.018 inch) may be used. Five and six
part continuous forms should be tried on an Indidual basis for
acceptable feeding, registration, and print quality. Overall forms
width from 76mm to 381 mm (3 to 15 inches can be fed. End of
forms detection is provided. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Note: If this feature is ordered
color must be specified: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR WITH SEPARATOR
(#8701). Forms feeding device for continuous edge punched
fan-fold forms. A separator bar permits tearing off continuous
forms at the perforation to within 40mm (1.5) inches) of the top
printing line without misalignment of subsequent forms. Forms
should have perforated carrier strips on both sides. Up to 4 part
continuous forms to a total thickness 0.3mm (0.012 inch) may be
used. Forms without perforated carrier strips and/or greater than
4 parts are not recommended. Form widths from 127mm to
378mm (5 to 14-7/8 inches) can be used. End of forms detection
is provided. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Note: If this
feature is ordered
color must be specified: #9063 for
classic blue. #9064 for charcoal brown, or #9065 for pebble
gray.
Special Feature Prices:
Character Print-Standard #1501
1502
Character Print-Large
Variable Wdth Forms Trctr 8700
Variable Wdth Forms Trctr
with Separator Bar
8701
MLC
5 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$15
30
$400
900
5
180
$3
4
1
6
170
1
IBM 3646 SCANNER CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: The 3646 allows attachment of Magnetic Hand Scanners
or Magnetic Slot Readers for rapid. accurate data collection.
The standard 3646 can attach up to two magnetic readers, Magnetic Hand Scanners or Magnetic Slot Readers. Two additional
magnetic readers can be attached via the optional Magnetic Reader Attachment (#6351). Each magnetic reader can be addressed
for independent operation.
Highlights: The 3646 is. a compact terminal designed to bring
magnetic scanning capability to the work station. Its capabilities
indude:
Free standing on a table, work be:lch, etc.
Wall or column mounted via accessory brackets.
Up to 4 magnetic readers.
Readers can be Magnetic Hand Scanners or Magnetic Slot
Readers in any combination.
Supplies: Magnetic Stripe Badges
IBM
may be ordered through
these supplies, if required,
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum termlnai and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement as described
in the General Information section of the sales manual applies to
the 3646 terminals.
Maintenance of the 3646 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed location.
~
For maintenance of 3646 accessories, refer to M 10000 pages.
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environment: The 3646 and accessories may be used in
the industrialized work zones of a wide range of business and
commercial establishments.
They can resist:
Concentrations of certain common corrosive gases.
Accumuiations of dust, grit and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common to
terminal operational sites for most Industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interfence associated
with terminal operational sites.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping, operation and
relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
For environmental specifications, refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120 V AC, l-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for
locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is
compatible with existing 115 V AC systems. Field InstaUatlon:
Not recommended.
[2] Power Cable: #9986 for 1 ~83 meter (6 foot) cable. or 9987 for
4.27 meter (4 foot) cable.
[3] Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1 .83 meter (6 foot) cable.
or #9977 for 4.27 meter (14 foot) cable.
[4] Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
MLC
5 Yr
$78
PRICES:
3646
Purchasett MMMC
$2,555
$11
Purchase Option: 55%
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 20%
SPECIAL FEATURES
Prerequisites: A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632, 3842
or 8100 loop ... a Magnetic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader ... see #6351 under "Special Features."
When ordering this machine for attachmellt to an 8100 system,
"Terminal Requirements" on the appropriate 8130, 8140 or 8101
pages in the "Machines" section should be reviewed.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description. GA24-3652 ... IBM 3646 Scanner Control Unit Operating Guide, GA24-3683.
Customer Setup The 3646 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early al'ailability and relocation
flexibility.
~
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up, and checkout of th~ 3646 at
time of delivery or when relocating the 3646. A Magnetic Hand
Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader is required for checkout.
Removing and packing of the 3646 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3646 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedur..: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operation to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
MAGNETIC READER ATTACHMENT (#6351). For attachment of
two additional MagnetiC Hand Scanners, MagnetiC Slot Readers, or
Dual Entry MagnetiC Slot Readers. Maximum: One. Field
In8tallatlon: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
MMMC
Purch
$2.50
Magnetic Reader Attach #6351
$19 $630
Accessorie8: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with the machine order the Feature Number
and quantity as shown below at the price listed in the M 10000
pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information and for
orderinQ
Item
Feature Number Maximum Oty
Special Feature Prices:
Magnetic Hand Scanner
#9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader 9442
Mounting Bracket
9450
MagnetiC Reader Extension Cable ... for
use with Magnetic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader
6 meter
9106"
12 meter
9107
• A maximum of 4 magnetic readers or scanners may be ordered.
A maximum of 4 extension cables may be ordered.
tt
Pilot Test Plan applies.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- ---- ---- -- ---= ==
':' =
M 3647
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3647 TIME AND ATTENDANCE
TERMINAL
Purpose: A data entry terminal designed for attendance and other
data entry labor reporting applications.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments
The 3647 may be used in industrialized work areas of a wide
range of business, industrial and commercial establishments.
It can resist:
Highlights
The 3647 is designed for attendance, labor reporting and other
data entry appiications. The basic 364 ( nas a magnetic scanner
adapter and a four digit display which can be used for time of day.
Two optional features are available:
Function Switch ... a six-position rotary switch that is customer
definable.
Control Feature ... provides control signals to allow door openings, audible alarms, etc.
An optional magnetic slot reader mounting bracket accessory
provides attachment for a slot reader. This mounting bracket is
firmly attached to the 3647 via a keylock. The slot reader cable is
coiled within the bracket. See "Accessories" below.
The 3647 can be table or wall mounted. An optional wall mounting bracket accessory is available. See "Accessories" below.
The 3647 provides:
Concentrations of certain common, corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
Vibration and shock associated with shipping, placement,
operation and relocation of the terminal for most types of
industries.
For environmental specifications, refer to the IBM 3630 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA24-3675.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System-System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3647 Time and Attendance Terminal - Operating Guide (SRL No. availabls March, 1980) ... Introduction to 8100 System, GA27-2875.
Time of Day Clock -- the initial time is set under program
conlrol and can be set for a 12 or 24 hour clock with time
displayed in hours and minutes, or hours and hundreths of
hours.
Supplies: Magnetic striped badges and documents. These supplies may be ordered through
IBM
Input Buffer -- an input buffer mode of operation can be selected to store multiple input messages. This provides a high
walk-by rate and allows input when the controller, loop, or
data link is inoperative. A no-buffer mode of operation can
also be selected to permit interactive processing on each input
message.
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is consistent
with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Invalid Document Code -- an invalid document code option can
be selected which allows input messages to be checked for
the presence of a non-numeric character. Input without this
character is rejected by the 3647.
Time Stamping -- a time stamping option can be selected
which sends the displayed time of day with each input message transmitted to the controller.
Prerequisites: A loop station connector installed on a 3631 or
3632 Plant Communication Controller or an 8100 Information
System loop. For magnetic stripe reading a Magnetic Slot Reader,
Dual Entry Magnetic Slot Reader, or a Magnetic Hand Scanner is
required ... see "Accessories" below.
Customer Set-up: The 3647 is designated Customer Set-up (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3647 at
time of delivery or when relocating the 3647.
Removing and packing of the 3647 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3647 (if :-equired) to allow IBM service
access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media Is at
fauit.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
SPECIFY
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Loop Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9977
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown,
#9065 for pebble gray.
3647
applies to
the 3647, however there is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive
maintenance.
Maintenance of the 3647 will normally be performed at the installed location.
II purchased, the terminals are eligible forMaintenance Agreement
service immediately follow'!1g expiration of the warranty period.
MMMC/
AMMCR
Purchasett
$84
$2,725
$12.50
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period Maint. Svc: 3 mos.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROL FEATURE (#1501). Provides one point of TTL compatible input, one point of TTL compatible output, and two TTL compatible control signals. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
FUNCTION SWITCH (#3950). Provides a 6 position rotary switch
which can be set by the operator. Five switch settings each transmit a unique function code when a magnetic stripe is scanned.
One switch setting is set to '·null'·. The meaning of the switch
position is left to the customer and space is provided for a customer printed definition label near the switch. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MLC
5 YR
Special Feature Prices
Control Feature
Function Switch
#1501
3950
$4
6
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
$100
225
$1.00
.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with the machine order the Feature
Number below and the quantity required at the prices listed in the
M 10000 pages. See M10000 pages for additional information
and for field installation.
Item
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
MLC
5 yr
Mdl
0
Feeture No.
Magnetic Hand Scanner
9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
#9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader9442
Mag Slot Rdr Mtg. Bracket 9445
Wall Mounting Bracket
9450
Magnetic Extension Cable
6 Meter
9106
12 Meter
9107
Maximum Qty
..
, A maxim:Jm of 1 magnetic slot reader or scanner may be ordered. " A maximum of 1 extension cable may be ordered.
tt
Pilot Test Plan applies. PTP Purchase Option Percent, 70%
Not to be
reDroduc~rl
withnllt writh>n norm;"";,,n
------- --------'====';'5:
M 3651.!
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3651 STORE CONTROLLER MODELS PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM
Purpose: The control units for a 3650 Programmable Store System; through standard retail functions tailored by the customer to
the customer's own requirements, and/or customer supplied supermarket application programming, the 3651 controls the operation of the 3650 Programmable Store System and its related terminals and provides for communications with an appropriate S/370
virtual storage processor.
Model A25 5 megabyte integral disk storage. Limited features
and processing capability.· Supported by Programmable Store System Host Support only. Attaches
3275 mdl 3, 3653 mdl 1 and lP, and 3663 mdl 1P,
2 and 3P terminals.
Model B25 Same as model A25 except has 9.2 megabyte
integral disk storage.
Model A75 5 megabyte integral disk storage. Many features,
full processing capability.· Supported by Programmable Store System Host Support only. Attaches
3275 mdl 3, 3653 mdl 1 and 1P, 3657 mdl 1,
3784 mdt 1, and 3663 mdl 1 P, 2 and 3P terminals.
Model B75 Same as model A75 except has 9.3 megabyte
integral disk storage.
Model C75 Same as model A75 except has 18.6 megabyte
integral disk storage. The model C75 is physically
larger than the model A75 or B75.
Model 075 Same as model A75 except has 27.9 megabyte
integral disk storage. The model 075 is the same
physical size as the model C75.
• NOTE: The 3651 mdl A25 and 825 Store Controllers provide
a lower entry system for those users who do not require the
capacity and internal processing capability of the 3651 mdl
A75, B75, C75, and 075. The effect of the different internal
processing capability upon overall system performance is dependent upon the total system configuration and workload. .
Host Communications Adapter - provides for transmission to and
from a properly equipped S/370. The basic transmission rate is
2400 bps over switched or non-switched networks with 4800 bps
as a specify option. This adapter interfaces to appropriate IBM
modems. With the appropriate features available on model 75 only
the Host Communications Adapter can communicate with. another
3650 Programmable Store System or locally attach a 3704 or
3705 ... see "Communications Facilities" below and M 2700
pages.
To communicate with another 3650 system or local attachment to
3704 or 3705, see Special Features below.
Audible Alarm - activated when predetermined events require
operator attention or intervention for system 0!leration. A conta?t
closure to which the customer can attach hiS remote alarm IS
available as an option with 3669 Attachment (see 3669 Attachment in Special Features below).
Controller Storage Save (Model 75 only) - critical areas of controller storage are automatically written on the integral disk unit
when power is turned off or a power failure is detected.
Terminal Devices: The terminals which are identified above under
the different models of the 3651 are attached to the 3651 via
Local/Remote Loop Adapter. A maximum of 191 terminals can be
addressed by the 3651. However, the number of terminals which
can be supported depends upon traffic volumes, desired response
times, applications to be performed, and the model of the 3651.
One 3784 Line Printer mdl 1 can be attached to the 3651 model
75 control unit.
Communications> Facilities: The Host Communications Adapter
(mdl 25 and 75), Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185 - mdl
75 only) and 3669 Attachment (#8069 - mdl 75 only) permit
operation at the speeds indicated, over the facilities shown below,
when using the appropriate modem. For information concerning
the facilities, see M 2700 pages. The alphameric communications
facility references below correspond to those shown on the charts
on those pages.
At 2400 bps ... on facility C5, C5M, 04, 04M, 04SB or X1 M
At 4800 bps ... on facility C6, C6M, 05, 05M, 05SB or X2M
NOTE: Neither the auxiliary communications adapter or the 3669
attachment can operate at 4800 bps.
PREREQUISITES: At the host location, a virtual storage S/370
Processor with properly equipped 3704 or 3705 (or ICA for BSC
communications) ... see M 2700, 3704, 3705 pages.
Highlights: The 3651 is a modular, programmable unit that provides the link between its attached terminals and the host data
processing center. The 3651 is normally used to collect data from
the various parts of the system, perform edit, logic, and arithmetic
operations on that data and then log and / or forward it to its ultimate destination within the overall system - terminal or data processing center. The 3651 mdl 75 can also communicate with another model 75. Application functions for retail operations via
3653 mdl 1 or 3653 mdl 1 P terminals functioning as 3653 mdl 1
terminals are provided as standard. All other applications are
performed by customer supplied application programming. In
models A25, B25, A75, 875, C75 and 075, customer supplied
supermarket and/or retail application programs may be used along
with or instead of the standard retail operations.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug #9884 for 208 V or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug - #9885
for 208 V or #9887 for 230 V.
[2] Modem Attachment Host Communications Adapter: One IBM
modem can be attached to this adapter on the 3651. The 3651
provides a cable and interface for connection of IBM mod~ms
at transmission rates of 2400 bps or 4800 bps for communications with the S/370. If switched network is selected, auto
answer capabilty is standard. If leased operation is selected,
dial back-up is provided on a manual dial basis using the IBM
3872 or 3874 Modem with appropriate special features. 4-wire
Switched Network Backup is available with the 3863 mdl 1 and 3864
mdll.
Specify Code
Standard features include the following:
Speed (bps)
3872
3872
3872
3874
3874
3874
3863
3863
3863
3864
3864
3864
#9120
#9121
#9122
#9124
#9125
#9126
Controller Storage: The basic 3651 contains storage optionally
expandable vie special leatures (see Special Features below).
System configuration as well as user programs determine if additional storage Increments are required.
Basic Storage Maximum Storage
Model 25
61,440 bytes
77,824 bytes
Model 75
61,440 bytes
126,976 bytes
NOTES:
For communications capabilities, product description and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874 and M 2700
pages.
(2) Point-to-point netwprk.
(3) Multipoint network.
Integral Disk Storage - the Integral Disk. Storage is used for
storage of selected controller functions, user written application
programs, system configuration data, data logging· and data sets
(files).
Model
Model
A25 (5MB) B25 (9,2MB) Model C75 Model 075
A75 (5MB) B75 (9.3MB) (18.6MB)
(27.9MB)
15,360
Bytes per Track
2
Tracks per Cylinder
Bytes per Cylinder 30,720
Cylinders per IDS
167
Storage Capacity:
Moveable Head 5,130,240
Fixed Hcad
(Mdl 75 only)
122,880
15,360
2
30,720
301
15,360
2
30,720
602
15,360
30,720
903
9,246,720
18,493,440
27,740,160
\22,880
245,760
368,640
2
2400
2400
2400
4800
4800
4800
IBM Modem
Loop Adapter:
Model 25 - Provides for attachment of one in-store local loop.
Model 75 - Provides for attachment of one in-store local loop
and one additional loop which may be specified as
local or remote (see Figure 1).
(2)
(3)
(2)
(3)
[3] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) for the 3650 Retail Store System by specifying the
following codes:
Processor
Code
Processor
Code
3115
#9589
9586
3125
3135,3135-3 9581
3138
9590
3145,3145-3 9582
9592
3033
3148
3155 II
3158
3165 II
3168
#9591
9583
9587
9584
9588
[4] Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 3651 mdl
25 or 75 to be used with a host system location requiring 3650
Programmable Store System Host Support. Specify #9492 on
each additional 3651 mdl 25 or 75 in the network. Specification
of #9491 will result in controller data (OTR) being sent to host
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- -----------
M 3651.2
Jul79
==-==~= DP Machines
3851 Store Controller Models - Programmable Store System (cont'd)
location. When #9491 is specified, additional information must
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
be specified as follows:
installation charges) Note 2.
1) Specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape density
(media) used at the host system location. The tape media is
available under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only.
#9412 - 9-track 800 bpi.
#9413 _ 9-track 1600 bpi.
#9414 _ 9-track 6250 bpI.
""t
If magnetic tapa Is
tJ@oM @t th@ host system, !pecity one of
the following media which are available under DOS/VS only.
#9421 - 2316 Disk Pack.
#9422 - 3336 Disk Pack Mdl 1
#9423 - 3336 Disk Pack Mdl II
#9424 - 3348 Data Module
The 3651 controller data will be sent via the specified media
to the IBM Programming Systems Representative at the host
system location for installation. If disk media is required, the
IBM disk will be returned to the plant location after installation
of the controller data.
[5] Specify the following: #9504 - for 3650 BSC or SDLC Programmable Store Systems host support under DOS/VS VTAM
or BTAM, OS/VS1 VTAM or BTAM, and OS/VS2 VTAM or
BTAM. NOTE: The corresponding release of 3650 PSS Host
Support must be ordered
See SCP pages of the sales
manual.
[6] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester
Part No. 1859559.
for
site of store loop wiring ... one Is furnished at each site at no
charge. NOTE: The customer must provide (purchase, install
and maintain) sil necessary 3650 communications lines within
the store. (Bulk Loop Cable Is available from IBM. See M10000
pages.)
[7] Second Loop Adapter (Model 75 only): Specify #9442 to
designate the second loop adapter as local or specify #9552 to
designate the second loop adapter as remote. (See Figure 1
below.) NOTE: #9552 is not allowed with 3669 Attachment
(#8069).
[8] Maintenance Documentation: Specify #9450 for 3653 maintenance documentation and/or #9451 for 3663 maintenance
documentation.
PRICES:
Mdl
3851
A25
B25
A75
B75
C75
075
MAC/
MRC
$ 748
864
872
959
1,469
1,880
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 635
735
742
816
1,250
1,600
Purchase
MMMC
$19,000
22,000
26,500
29,680
47,960
$205
215
225
235
335
454
58,340
Plan Offering: Plan B Purchase Option: 55% Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent· 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Chang..: The following model changes can be made in the
field:
From
To
From
To
A25
B25
A50
B50
B25', A75', B75'
B75'
A75, B75'
B75
A75
A60
B60
C75
B75'
A75. B75'
B75
075
On purchased model 50 to model 75 clumges either Local Loop Adapter,
AdditlolUll (#4882 with specify code #9442 or #9443) or Remote Loop
Adapter (#6111 with specify code #9552 or #9553) ira prerequisite on
the model50.
• These model changes require the replacement of the integral
disk storage. Adequate provision must be made for retaining data
contained on the replaced disk storage at the host location so it
can be transmitted to the new disk storage.
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
fiOin
From
From
From
From
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
~¥1od6;
Model
Model
Model
Model
A25
A25
A25
B25
A50
A50
B50
A75
A60
A60
B60
C75
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
tv
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Modei
Model
Model
Model
Model
B25
A75
B75
B75
A75
B75
B75
B75
A75
B75
B75
075
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
$ 3,000"
$ 7,500"
$10,680"
$ 7,680"
$ 2,585"
$ 6,285"
$ 2,585"
$ 3,160·"'
$ 4,100"
$ 7,800"
$ 4,100"
$10,380"
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
Note 1 Customers who elect to purchase the 3651 mdl A50 or
B50 with Storage Increment Type I (#1550) and/or second Additional Loop (#4882, #4890 or #6111) or the
3651 mdl A60 or B60 with Storage Increment (#7680)
should consider the model A75 or B75 initially as field
conversions to the model A75 or B75 require the replacement of these features.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROL STORAGE FEATURES - the amount ot be ordered is
dependent upon the number and type of terminals attached to the
system as well as system configuration and user programs.
For available
storage configurations. see Table A below.
STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE II (#1584). [Mdl A75, B75, C75,
075 only] Each #1564 provides the 3651 with an additional
16.384 pOSitions of storage. Maximum: Three (see Table A). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: The 3651 must be equipped with
Storage Expansion Feature (# 1 570) and First Storage Increment
(#1571).
STORAGE EXPANSION FEATURE (#1570). Provides the capability of expanding storage beyond 61,440 bytes: Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: First Storage Increment (#1571). or
First Storage Increment (#1571) and Storage Increment - Type II
(#1564) are required to provide the appropriate additional positions of storage (see Table A).
FIRST STORAGE INCREMENT (#1571). Provides the 3651 with
the first 16,384 additional positions of storage. See Table A.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Storage
Expansion Feature (#1570).
TABLE A
Storage Configuration
Total
Storage
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
61,440
77,824
94,208
110,592
126,976
Storage
Expansion
(#1570)
Feature Distribution
Firat
Storage
Storage
Increment
Increment
Type II
(#1571)
(#1584)
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
'1
1
1
0
0
1
2
3
IML-WRITE ADAPTER (#4833).
Provides the 3651 with the
ability to write an IML (Initial Machine Load) tape on a user provided tape cassette recorder to be read by a Point of Sale terminal
equipped with the IML-Read Adapter (#4632) feature. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
LOCAL LOOP ADAPTER, ADDITIONAL (#4882). [Mdl A75, B75,
C75, 075 only] Provides an additional Local Loop Adapter as the
third loop on the 3651. The actual number of terminals that can
be attached will depend upon the program capacity and time
requirements of the 3651 to service the loops as well as the
communications link to the S/370 ... see 'Terminal Devices"
above. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. limitation: Not available on the 3651 if 9600 bps Loop
Adapter (#4890) or Remote Loop Adapter (#6111) is installed.
9600 BPS LOOP ADAPTER (#4890). [Mdl A75. B75. C75, 075
only] Provides a 9600 bps Local Loop Adapter as the third loop.
The feature provides for the attachment of 3275 Display Station
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- =---':' =
==
- ----- - ------
M 3651.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models - Programmable Store System (cont'd)
mdl 3s with 9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825) feature infeet of the controller. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
stalled. The actual number of 3275 Display Station mdl 3s inPrerequisites: Specify feature #9716 must be specified on the
stalled will depend upon program capacity and time requirements
3784 mdl 1 for attachment of the 3784 to the 3651 mdl A75 and
of the 3651 to service the loops and the communications link to
B75 and #9717 for attachment to the 3651 mdl C75 or 075.
the S/370 ... see "Terminal Devices" above. Limitations: Not
ETP/
available if Local Loop Adapter, Add'i (#4882) or Remote Loop
MAC/ MLC
Adapter (#6111) Is installed. Only 3275 Display Station mdl 3s
Special Feature Prices:
2 yr Purchase MMMC
MRC
with 9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825) can be attached to
this Loop Adapter. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: One. Field
Stor Increment Type II #1564 $58 $49 $1,170 $10.00
Installation: Yes.
5,SO
Stor Expansion Feature 1570
39
33
1,100
1st Storage Increment
1571
10,00
58
49
1,170
REMOTE LOOP ADAPTER (#6111). [Mdl A75, B75, C75, 075
IML-Wrlte Adapter
4633
12
10
1.SO
450
only] Provides a Remote Loop Adapter as the third loop on the
Local Loop Adptr, Add'i 4882
2,00
43
37
1,515
3651 for online' service for up to twelve remote sites per Remote
4,00
9600 bps Loop Adapter 4890
87
74
3,020
Loop Adapter. The feature provides an interface to an IBM 3872
Remote Loop Adapter
6111
43
37
1,515
2.00
Modem on site which via leased line connects to a 3659 Remote
2.00
Aux,
Comm.
Adapter
6185
43
37
1,515
Communications Unit at each remote site. This allows for the
Aux, Comm, Adapter extension of the loop to up to (1) three remote locations, with a
Synchronous Clock
2.00
6188
43
37
1,515
3659 mdl 1 at each site, (2) twelve remote locations, with a 3659
,SO
Synch Clock-Host
15
7708
13
572
mdl 2 (mu!tipoint) at each site, (see "Terminal Devices" above).
3669
Attachment
8069
7
2SO
1.SO
6
The 3651 treats the remote loop as if it were a local loop.
8154
3784
Adapter
88
75
5.00
3,075
Limitations: Not available if Local Loop Adapter, Add'i (#4882) or
9600 BPS Loop Adapter (#4890) is installed. Specify: See Figure
1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: One IBM
3872 Modem with Point-to-point (#6101 or #6102) feature per
FIGURE 1
Remote Loup Adapter at 3651 site and a 3659 Remote Communications Unit at each remote site. When more than one remote site
Loop Adapter
Loop Adapter Special Feature
Specify
is attached using 3659 mdl 1, a half-duplex 2-wlre terminated,
Position"
non-switched voice grade line is required between the 3651 and
Add'i Local
#94~
the first remote site between successive remote sites, and from
2
the last remote site back to the 4-wlre terminated, non-switched
Remote
#9552
voice grade line is required. When using the 3659 mdl 2 for more
Add'i Local
#4882
than one remote site, 4-wire duplex multipoint service is required.
.The 3659 mdl 2 requires that the 3872 be a basic control station
3
Remote
#6111
(no special feature'll or equipped with Second Modem (#6302).
9600 bps
#4890
AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#6185),
[Mdl A75,
B75, C75, 075 only] Provides a separate 2400 bps communica• Loop Adapter position 1 is occupied by the standard Local Loop
tions interface which can operate independently of the Host ComAdapter. Loop Adapter position 2 is standard and must be specimunications Adapter. It can be used for either one of the following
fied as Local (#9442) or Remote (#9552). If Loop Adapter
but not both:
position 2 is specified as remote, see Remote Loop Adapter
a. 3651-75 to 3651-75 communications.
(#6111) for prerequisites which will apply. For Loop Adapler
b. Communications with another 3650 system via a 3669 Store
position 3, either an Add'! Local (#4882) or Remote (#6111) or
Communications Unit.
9600 bps (#4890) Loop Adapter may be ordered.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Only one
Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185 or #6188) allowed per
3651-75, not allowed with 3669 Attachment (#8069) with Specify
#9200 for Host Communications Adapter.
Prerequisites:
a. For 3651-75 to 3651 communications
1. A 3872.
2. Another 3651-75 similiarly equipped.
b. For backup with another 3650 system
,. 3669 Attachment (#8069) with specify #9210.
2. A 3669 Store Communications Unit.
COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER
SYNCHRONOUS
AUXILIARY
CLOCK (#6188), [Mdl A75, B75, C75, 075 only] Provides a
2400 bps communications interface which operates independently
from the Host Communications Adapter to allow direct communications with another 3651-75 with the same feature without the use
of modems. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. limitations:
Only one Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185 or #6188)
allowed per 3651-75, nol allowed with 3669 Attachment (#8069).
Prerequisite: Another 3651-75 with #6188.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK - HOST (#7708), [Mdl A75, 875, C75.
075 only] Provides clocking from the Host Communications
Adapter allowing the direct attachment to a local 3704 or 3705 at
2400 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
'The 3704 or 3705 must be equipped with Line Set, Type 1F
(#4716). Note: A 6 meter (20 foot) external cable is provided
which connects to the 3704/3705 cable.
3669 ATTACHMENT (#8069),
[Mdl A75. B75, C75, 075 only]
Provides the capability to attach one 3669 Store Communications
Unit, which allows communications over switched networks at
2400 bps with another 3650 system, and alternately with a S/370
host prooessor. This feature can be provided for use with either
the Host Communications Adapter or the Auxiliary Communications
Adapter (#6185), but not with both. Limitation: When used with
Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185). it cannot communicate with a host processor. Specify: (1) #9200 for use with Host
Communications Adapter, #9210 for use with Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185) ... (2) #9220 if local audible alarm is
desired, #9230 if contact closure is desired when operator attention is required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: (1) Local Loop Adapter, specify #9442 ... (2) a
3669 Store Communications Unit.
3784 ADAPTER (#8154), [Mdl A75, 875, C75, 075 only] Provides the capability to directly attach one 3784 line Printer mdl 1
to the 3651 controller. The 3784 mdl 1 must be located within 15
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- - --=-- ---
=:::: ': ::::
M 3651.4
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3651 STORE CONTROLLER MODELS A50 and BOO
Purpose: Through its standard functions, tailored by the customer
to the customer's own requirements, the 3651 controls the operation of the 3650 Retail Store System and its related terminals and
provides for communications with an appropriate S/370 or 4300
virtual storage processor.
Model A50
5 megabyte integral disk storage
Highlights: The 3651 is a modular, programmable unit that provides the link between point-at-sale (3653), receiving-marking
(3275 mdl 3 and 3657), management (via 3275 mdl 3), and the
host data processing center. The 3651 collects data from the
various parts of the retail system, pertorms edit, logic, and arithmetic operations on that data and then logs and/or forwards it to
its ultimate destination within the overall system-terminal or data
processing center. The 3651 also communicates with its attached
terminals on an interactive basis and processes inquiries against
its liles.
Standard features include the following:
Local Loop Adapter store loop.
provides for the attachement of one in-
Controller Storage -- the basic 3651 contains storage optionally
expandable via special features to 106,496 bytes (see Special
Features below). System configuration as well as user programs
determine it additional storage increments are required. Operation
with many user programs will require the additional storage increments.
Integral Disk Storage - the Integral Disk Storage is used for
storage of selected controiler functions, user written application
programs, system configuration data, data logging and data sets
(files).
Model A50 (5 MB)
Bytes per Track
Tracks per Cylinder
Bytes per Cylinder
Cylinders per IDS
Storage Capacity
Moveable Head
Fixed Head
15,360
[2] Modem Attachment Host Communications Adapter: One IBM
modem can be aUached to this adapter on the 3651. The 3651
provides a cable and intertace for connection of IBM modems
at transmission rates of 2400 or 4800 bps for communications
with the S/370 or 4300 Processor. If switched network is
selected, aulo-answer capability is standard. If leased point-topoint operation is selected, dial bacll-uP is provided on a manua! d!a! basis using the !BM 3863, 3864 OJ" 3872 rv10dam with
appropriate special features.
Specify Code
#9120
#9121
#9122
#9124
#9125
#9126
Speed (bps)
2400
2400 (::!)
2400 (3)
4800 (2)
4800 (3)
4800
IBM Modem
3872
3872
3872
3874
3874
3874
15,360
2
2
30,720
167
30,720
301
5,130,240
122,880
9,246,720
122,880
and from a properly equipped S/370 or 4300 Processor. The
basic transmission rate is 2400 bps over non-switched or
switched networks with 4800 bps as a specify option. This adapter
interfaces
to
appropriate
IBM
modems
see
"Communications Facilities·· below and M 2700 pages.
For local attachment to 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter
on 4331 Processor, see Special Features below.
Audible Alarm ..- activated when predetermined events require
operator attention or intervention for system operation.
Controller Storage Save -- critical areas of controller storage are
automatically written on two areas of the integral disk unit when
power is turned of! or a power failure is detected.
Terminal Devices: The following terminals are attached to the
3651 Store Controller via Local/Remote Loop Adapter -- 3653
Point of Sale Terminal, 3275 mdl 3 Display Station, and the 365'7
Ticket Unit. Local Loop adapter numbE,r one can address 63
terminals and the other two Loop adapters (local or remote) can
each address 64 terminals. However, the number of terminals
which can be supported on each loop deponds upon traffic volumes, desired respo'lse times, and applicatons to be performed.
l863
3863
3863
3864
3864
3864
Notes: (1) For communications capabilities, product description and special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872,
3874 and M 2700 pages.
(2) Point-la-point network.
(3) Multipoint network.
[3J System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) for the 3650 Retsil Store System by specifying the
following codes:
Code
Processor
Code
#9589
3115
3125
9586
3135, 3135-39581
3138
9590
3145,3145-39582
9592
3033
3148
3155 II
3158
3165 II
3168
4331
4341
#9591
9583
9587
9584
Processor
Model 850 (9.3 MB)
HOlt Communications Adapter -- provides for transmission to
O~'e
SPECIFY: [1 J Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug
#9884 for 208 Y, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug
#9885 for 208 Y, or #9887 for 230 V.
9588
9606
9607
[4] Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 3651 to be
used with a host system location requiring SSC RSS/Host
support and on the first 3651 requiring SNA RSS/Host support
and specify #9492 on each additional 3651 in the network..
NOTE: #9491 may be specified twice if both BSC and SNA
RSS/Host support is required in the network.
When #9491 is specified, additional information must be specified as follows:
1) Specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape
density (media) used at the host system location. The tape
media is available under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2
only.
#9412 -- 9-lrack 800 bpi
#9413 -- 9-track 1600 bpi
#9414 -- 9-track 6250 bpi
If magnetic tape is 110t used at the host system, specify
one of the foilowing media wt'"cn are available under
DOS/VS only.
#9421 -- 2316 Disk Pack
#9422 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdi I
#9423 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdl II
#9424 -- 3348 Data Module
The 3651 controller dala will be sent via the speCified
media to the IBM Programming Systems Representative at
the host system iocatio" for installation. If disk media is
required, the IBM disk will be returned to the plant location after installation of the controller data.
3784 Line Printer mdl 1 may be aHached to the 3651 coolrol-
h, unit.
Communicatlf..1ll1 Facilities: The communications adapter permits
:Jp"ralion at the speeds indicated, over the facilities shown below,
when using the appropriate modem. For information concerning
the facilities, see M 2700 pages. The alphameric communications
facility references below correspond to those shown on the charts
on those pages.
At 2400 bps ... on facility C5, C5M, 04, D4M, 04SB or X1 M
At 4800 bps ... on facility C6, C6M, 05, D5M or X2M
PREREQUISITES: A 3704 or 3705 in 2701, 2703 Emulatioi1 Mode
for
systems and in NCP /VS mode for SDLC systems (with
appropriate features ... see M 3704 and 3705 pages) attached to
any virtual storage 8/370 or 4300 Processor. Also attaches via a
Communications i,dapter feature on Ihe 4331 Processor ... see M
4331 pages for details.
esc
[5] Specify one 0\ the fol'l'>' ,ng:
#9501 _.. lor 3650 ElSC Retail Store System requiring Rele3se I RSi;/HOST Support. NOTE: Shipments of
3650 Sy;;tr,W1S requiring Release I Host Support
ur,der DC",IVS BTAM and OS/VSl BTAM terminate in December, 1975.
#9502 -- for 3650 SNA Retail Store System requiring Release 2:'>1 3 HSS/Hosl Support under DOS/VB
VTAM, OS/VS1 VTAM and OS/VS2 YTAM. Controliers specified with #9502 have a maximum of
57,344 positions of storage., Shipments of 3651
contfo'le's specified as #9502 will terminate in
March, 1976 to new customers and in July, 1976
to existing customers.
#9503 -- for 36'50 SNA Retail Store Systems requiring Re-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------===--':' =
--
M 3651.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models A50 and B50 (cont'd)
lease 3 RSS/Host Support under DOS/VS VTAM,
OS/VS1 VTAM and OS/VS2 VTAM. All controllers
shipped to new customers after March, 1976 will
require RSS/Host Release 3 and should be specified with #9503. NOTE: #9503 is a prerequisite
for feature codes #1559, #1560 and #1564.
Note: The corresponding release of 3650 RSS Host Support
must be ordered from PID. See SCP pages of the sales manual.
[6] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester,
for
Part No. 1859559,
site of store loop wiring ... one is furnished at each site at no
charge. NOTE: The customer must provide (purchase, install
and maintain) all necessary 3650 communications lines within
the store. (Bulk Loop Cable is available from IBM. See M
10000 pages.)
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3651
A50
B50
$ 872 $ 742
959
816
Purchase
MMMC
$29,500
32,680
$225
235
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: %
Model Changes: Model changes between the models A50 or B50
and the model A60 or B60 are not recommended for field installation. 3651 features cannot be interchanged between models A50
or B50 and model A60 or B60. Model changes between model
A50 and B50 can be made in the field. This change requires the
replacement of the integral disk storage. Adequate provision must
be made for retaining the data contained on the replaced disk
storage.
Model changes between the A50 or B50 and the A75 or B75 can
be made in the field. See the 3651 model A75 and B75 machine
pages. Customers who elect to purchase the 3651 mdl A50 or
B50 and Storage Increment Type 1 (#1559) should consider the
model A75 or B75 initially as field conversions to the model A75
or B75 require the replacement of this feature.
On purchased model 50 to model 75 changes either Local Loop Adapter,
Additional (#4882 with specify code #9442 or #9443) or Remote Loop
Adapter (#6111 with specify code #9552 or #9553) is a prerequisite on
the model 50.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model A50 to Model B50 ..... $3,180*
•
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: .. Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
Control Storage Features: The amount to be ordered is dependent upon the number and type of terminals attached to the system
as well as system configuration and user programs.
For available
storage configurations, see Table A below.
STORAGE EXPANSION (#1560). Contains 16,384 positions of
storage to provide the capability of expanding storage beyond
57,344 positions to a maximum of 106,496 positions. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. (See Table A) Prerequisite: Specify
Feature Code #9503.
STORAGE INCREMENT (#1561).
Each #1561 provides the
3651 with an additional 8,192 positions of storage. Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1559, #1560, #1564 or #9503. (#1561 not available after
July, 1976)
STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE I (#1559). #1559 provides the
3651 with an additional 8,192 positions of storage. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. (See Table A) Prerequisite: Specify
Feature Code #9503.
STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE II (#1564).
Each #1564 provides the 3651 with an additional 16,384 positions of storage.
Maximum: Three. Field Installation: Yes. (See Table A)
Prerequisite: Specify Feature Code #9503.
Nnt tn
h~ r~nrndll~~d
withnllt
TABLE A
Storage Configuration
Total
Storage
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
Storage
Increment
- Type I
(8,192 Pos.)
40,960
49,152
57,344
65,536
73,728
81,920
90,112
98,304
106,496
o
1
o
1
o
1
o
1
o
Feature Distribution
Storage
Increment
- Type II
(16,384 Pos.)
o
o
1
o
1
1
2
2
3
Storage
Expansion
{Including
16,384 Pos.)
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes: 1. Field installation of Storage Increment - Type I is
only recommended in changing from configurations
A, E and G. Storage Increment - Type II is not used
in configuration A, Band D.
Customers who elect to purchase Storage Increment
Type I and later order additional storage should consider purchase of Storage Increment Type II initially
because some field upgrades of storage may require
replacement of initial feature and installat;on of new
feature.
2. Field upgrade from A to Band B to C is allowed via
Storage Increment (#1561) through July 30, 1976;
However, purchase customers should be advised
that Storage Increment (#1561) cannot be used in
configurations above 57,344 positions.
IML-WRITE ADAPTER (#4633).
Provides the 36~1 with the
ability to write an IML (Initial Machine Load) tape on a user provided tape cassette recorder (refer to IBM 3650 Retail Store System
Introduction Manual, GA27-3075), to be read by a Point of Sale
terminal equipped with the IML-Read Adapter (#4632) feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
This feature
LOCAL LOOP ADAPTER, ADDITIONAL (#4882).
provides a second or third Local Loop Adapter on the 3651. Up to
a maximum of 64 terminals can be attached to each additional
Loop. The actual number of terminals will depend upon the program capacity and time requirements of the 3651 to service the
Loops as well as the communications link to the S/370 or 4300
Processor ... see "Terminal Devices" above. Limitation: Cannot
exceed a total of three Loop adapters (local or remote) per 3651.
Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
9600 BPS LOOP ADAPTER (#4890). Provides a 9600 bps local
Loop Adapter. Available in lieu of a second or third Local Loop
Adapter. The feature provides for the attachment of 3275 mdl 3
Display Stations with 9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825)
feature installed. The actual number of 3275 Display Station mdl
3s installed will depend upon program capacity and time requirements of the 3651 to service the Loops and the communications
link to the S/370 or 4300 Processor ... see "Terminal Devices"
above. Limitations: Cannot exceed a total of three Loop adapters
(local or remote) per 3651. Only 3275 Display Station mdl 3s with
9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825) can be attached to this
Loop adapter. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
REMOTE LOOP ADAPTER (#6111). Provides online service for
up to twelve remote sites per Remote Loop Adapter. Available in
lieu of a second or third Local Loop Adapter. The feature provides
an interface to an IBM 3872 Modem on site which via leased line
connects to a 3659 Remote Communications Unit at each remote
site. This allows for the extension of the Loop to up to (1) three
remote locations, with a 3659 mdl 1 at each site, (2) twelve remote locations, with a 3659 mdl 2 (multipoint) at each site, with a
total of 64 terminals per Loop (see "Terminal Devices" above).
The 3651 treats the remote Loop as if it were a local Loop.
Limitation: Cannot exceed a total of three Loop adapters (local or
remote) per 3651. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: One IBM 3872 Modem with Point- '
to-Point (#6101 or #6102) feature per Remote Loop Adapter at
3651 site and a 3659 Remote Communications Unit at each remote site. When more than one remote site is attached using 3659
mdl 1, a half-duplex 2-wire terminated, non-switched voice grade
line is required between the 3651 and the first remote site, between successive remote sites, and from the last remote site back
to the 3651. When only one remote site is to be attached, a
duplex, 4-wire terminated non-switched voice grade line is required. When using the 3659 mdl 2 for more than one remote
site, 4-wire duplex multipoint service is required. The 3659 mdl 2
requires that the 3872 be a basic control station (no special features) or equipped with Second Modem (#6302).
writt~n n~rmi~~inn_
'-------=- =----------=
---':' =
M 3651.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models A50 and 850 (cont'd)
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7708).
Provides clocking from the
Host Communications Adapter allowing for direct attachment to a
local 3704. 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor
at 2400 bps.
Maximum: One; Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: The 3704 or 3705 must be equipped with Line Set.
Type 1F (#4716); 4331 must be equipped with Local Attachment
Interface (#4801) and prerequisites. Note: A 20' (6 meters)
external cable is provided which connects to the 3704. 3705 or
4331 cable.
37&4 ADAPTER (#8154j.
Provides the capabiiiiy to directiy
attach one 3784 Line Printer mdl 1 to the 3651 controller. The
3784 mdl 1 must be located within 15 feet of the controller.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Specify
feature #9716 must be specified on the 3784 mdl 1 for attachment of the 3784 to the 3651. Minimum storage required on the
3651 is 48K. Note: For attachment of the 3784 line printer, the
controller must have EC 349850 applied and operating under
RSSIHost Support Release 3. New 3651 controllers must have
#9503 specified.
Special Feature Prices:
Storage Expansion
#1560
Storage Increment
1561
Storage Incrmnt-Type I 1559
Storage Incrmnt-Type II 1564
IML-Write Adapter
4633
Local Loop Adptr, Add'i 4882
9600 bps Loop Adapter 4890
Remote Loop Adapter
6111
Synchronous Clock
7708
3784 Adapter
8154
ETPI
MACI MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
MRC
$ 96
32
32
58
12
43
87
43
15
88
$ 82 $2,270
27
637
27
637
49 1,170
10
450
37 1,515
74 3,020
37 1,515
13
572
75 3,075
$15.50
5.00
5.00
10.00
1.50
2.00
4.00
2.00
.50
5.00
Figure 1
Loop Adapter
Position·
Loop Adapter
Add'i Loca)
Special Feature
Specify
#4882
#9441
#6111
#9551
2
Remote
9600 bos
#4890
#9661
Add'i Local
#4882
#9443
3
Remote
#6111
#9553
9600 bps
#4890
#9663
..
• Loop Adapter POSItIOn I IS occupIed by the standard Local Loop
Adapter. For Loop Adapter Position 2 and 3, either an Add') Local
(#4882) or Remote (#6111) or 9600 bps (#4890) Loop Adapter may be
ordered. For each one ordered, also specify the applicable #9XXX code
from the chart above. ,The 9600 bps Loop Adapter (#4890) may be
ordered only once.
IBM 3651 STORE CONTROLLER - SUPERMARKET
Purpose: The control unit for a 3660 Supermarket System. Controls all functions of the 3663 Supermarket Terminals. A 3669
adapter is included, which allows communications at 2400 bps
over appropriate communications facilities with a properly equipped S/370 or 4300 Processor. For backup purposes, the control
unit, through the 3669 Store Communications Unit, can also communicate with and control 3663 Suoermarket Terminals in one
other preassigned location. See ;'Communications Facilities" and
"Prerequisites.' :
Model A60
5 megabytes of integral disk storage
Model 860
9.3 megabytes of integral disk storage
Highlights: Up to twenty-four 3663 Supermarket Terminal stations
can be attached to a 3651 mdl A60 or B60 in one store. Each
3663 mdl 1 or each 3663 mdl 2 counts as lout of the 24. In
addition, for backup purposes, a 3651 mdl A60 or B60 can control all the 3663 Supermarket Terminals that are normally controlled by the other preassigned 3651 mdl A60 or B60 (normally at
another location).
The 3651 mdl A60 or B60 (using the 3663 Supermarket Terminal)
supports the following functions, in most combinations:
Customer Checkout
-
Automatic pricing through code lookup in a master price file.
Automatic handling of multiple priced items.
Automatic handling of mix and match group pricing.
Automatic distribution of net sales by department (up to 54).
Automatic application of transaction discounts.
Automatic computation of sales taxes with automatic handling
of taxable and non-taxable items.
Provision for tax exempt transactions.
Automatic control of maximum value of food stamps that
should be accepted.
Check authorization facilities (positive or negative) through
lookup against a check authorization record.
Computation of change and trading stamps due.
All functions can be controlled to inhibit initiation by unauthorized personnel.
Store Support
- Preparation of the following account reports
-- store summary.
-- individual cashier performance and tender reconciliation.
-- store office tender reconciliation.
-- sales by department (up to 54).
-- distribution of miscellaneous income and distributions by
account.
- Current inquiries for department sales, cashier performance
and cash position, and store cash position.
- Inquiries and changes to master price records and operator
authorization control records.
- Setting time and date for the internal clock.
- Customer checkout training mode.
- Printing miscellaneous messages received previously from the
host S/370 or 4300 Processor.
- Entry of miscellaneous messages for subsequent retrieval by
the host S/370 or 4300 Processor.
- Reporting of items returned by customers which are returned
to stock.
- Updating the system with data received from the host S/370
or 4300 Processor.
- Shelf Label Preparation
The above functions are compatible with variable length reconciliation periods, e.g., daily or weekly, and they are compatible with
24 hour store operation. All functions are individually controlled
to inhibit initiation by unauthorized personnel.
Data Accumulation
The 3651 mdl A60 or B60 accumulates the following by-product
data for subsequent retrieval by the host S/370 or 4300 Processor: item movement totals, all accounting and performance
totals used in store reports, totals of taxes and taxable sales,
productivity totals for each terminal station in 15 minute increments, check authorization data requested, and individual logged
entries 'covering coupons received, exception events, and security sensitive events.
Host S/370 or 4300 Processor Transmission
The 3651 mdl A6P or B60 can transmit to the host, upon recieving a request, all of the data shown under "Data Accumulation,"
and other data, or records in the 3651. The 3651 will clear out
data or records upon request by the host. The 3651 can receive
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- =':' =
=-=-
----- ---------
M 3651.7
Jul 79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller - Supermarket (cont'd)
records, record changes, commands or other pertinent data from
the host. See "Programming Support" section of sales manual
for description of host, programming support and requirements.
Communications Facilities: For in-store operation, two store
loops provide the communications linkage to the 3663 Supermarket Terminals. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning (GA273079) for the 3660 System and the 3660 Supermarket System
"Systems" pages for further information.
The communications adapter permits operation at 2400 bps over
communications common carrier facility type C5 for out-of-store
communications. For information concerning that facility, see M
2700 pages.
PREREQUISITES:
- A 3669 Store Communications Unit mdl 1 must be attached.
- A 3663 Supermarket Terminal mdl 1 must be attached.
- Any virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor ... (3158 or
31 68 VT AM only). For minimum configuration requirements,
refer to Host S/370 or 4300 Processor System Programming
pages. One of the following must be utilized - a 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor equipped with
appropriate features. For S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 or
138, this may be an ICA equipped with the proper BSC and
switched network features. The modem that is used by the
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor
must be either a 3872 or equivalent or an IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem with switched network features.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V.
[2] Communications: #9071 for Binary Synchronous Communications, or #9072 for Synchronous Data Link Control Communications.
[3] Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 3651 to be
used with a host system location and specify #9492 on each
additional 3651 in the network.
When #9491 is specified, additional information must be specified as follows:
MACI
MRC
PRICES: Mdl
3651
ETPI
MLC
2 yr
$ 841 $ 716
928
790
A60
860
Purchase
MMMC
$29,500
32,680
$178
188
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes -- between the A50 or B50 and the modei A60 or
B60 are not recommended for field installation. 3651 features
cannot be interchanged between model 60 and a model 50 or 75.
Model changes can be made in the field from model A60 to B60,
A75 and B75; from B60 to B75. Changes from A to B models
require the replacement of the integral disk storage. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining the data on the repiaced disk
storage. All replaced parts become the property of IBM.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
From
From
From
Model
Model
Model
Model
A60
A60
A60
860
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
860
A75
B75
875
...•.
...••
••••.
••.••
$3,180·
$4,100·
$7,800·
$4,100·
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: '·Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
STORAGE INCREMENT (#7680). Provides the 3651 with 8,192
bytes of additional control storage. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Storage Increment
MACI
MRC
#7680 $ 32
ETPI
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 27
$ 637
1)Specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape density
(media) used at the host system location. This tape media is
available under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only.
#9412 - 9-track 800 bpi.
#9413 - 9-track 1600 bpi.
#9414 - 9-track 6250 bpi.
If magnetic tape is not used at the host system specify one
of the following media which is available under DOS/VS only.
#9421 -- 2316 Disk Pack.
#9422 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdl I.
#9423 - 3336 Disk Pack Mdl II.
#9424 - 3348 Data Module.
The 3651 controller data will be sent via the specified media
If disk media is required, the
IBM disk will be returned to the plant location after installation of the controller data.
[4] Cable: A 10' cable to the 3669 is provided as standard. If a
longer cable is required, specify #9021, indicating length as a
quantity of 20, 30 or 40.
[5] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester,
Part No. 1859559,
Order Department. One is furnished at no charge to each 3660
site for testing store loop wiring.
[6] Additional DAA Cable: Specify #9101 if second DAA cable is
required in configuration (for using switched 3872 modem to
reload controller from host while system is being backed up
from another store).
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 5
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=--- =-----. --=
----':' =
M 3653.1
May 79
DP Machines
3653 POINT OF SALE TERMINAL
Purpose: An intelligent input/output ttlrminal for the 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System to provide retail point-of-sale
data collection, credit authorization, and inquiry functions. Selfcontained intelligence allows the 3653 to continue most sales
functions when disconnected from the 3650 system after a parameter initialization from either the Store Controller or magnetic wand
reader.
Modell
Not customer programmable. Attaches to 3651 mdl
A25, B25, A50, B50, A75, B75, C75 and 075.
Modell P Customer programmable. Optionally will function as
a model 1 (non-customer programmable). Attaches to
3651 mdl A25, B25, A50, B50, A75, B75, C75 and
075. When attached to model A50 or B50 it can
function as a model 1 only.
Basic storage is 36K bytes. This may be increased
to 60K bytes through installation of Storage Increment features.
Highlights: A solid state, unitized packaged unit. It features data
entry via the magnetic wand reader feature and a 10 numeric-key,
19 function-key keyboard ... step-by-step display of operator
instructions ... printing of data in response to an inquiry ... display
of numeric data as it is being key entered ... transmission of data
to a 3651 for logging, over a unique transmission line capable of
handling large volumes of short messages from many terminals ...
a cash drawer with removable till.
Keyboard -- a ten-key numeric pad and nineteen function keys
provide entry for variable source data. Types of transactions are
indicated through the numeric pad, as well as data fields. Once a
field has been entered, the depression of a function key causes
one or more of the following functions to happen: editing for
minimum and maximum field length, modulo check, price look-up,
credit authorization, printing, transmission to the 3651 Store
Controller, change in guidance or error feedback.
Printer -- a three station printer which produces a cash receipt or
salescheck as well as a journal for each transaction.
Display -- an eight-digit numeric display plus "$", ".", and "-"
with five backlit captions shows numeric data as it is being
keyed, extended prices, status codes for credit referrals, subtotals, totals, amount due, change, and refund amounts.
Operator Guidance -- step-by-step instructions are provided to
the operator for each transaction by twenty backlit messages.
Additional guidance is provided by the type of transactions shown
on the numeric keys.
Status Indicators -- advise the operator that the terminal is:
ready for use, waiting for a response to an inquiry or transmission to the 3651, off-line from its 3651, or that the journal roll
take-up spool is full.
PREREQUISITE: The 3650 system controller is a 3651 Store
Controller Model 25, 50 or 75 ... see 3651 model 25, 50 or 75 for
details.
Customer Responsibilities: [1] See 3650 in "Systems" for general description of customer responsibilities ... [2] The following
statement is to be included in proposals:
"It is agreed that IBM will have no responsibility to provide warranty or maintenance service on an IBM 3653 Point of Sale Terminal when cash is contained in the unit. It shall be the purchaser's
(customer's) responsibility to remove, control, and replace cash so
that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance obligations.
The exception to the above shall be when a failure occurs in the
cash drawer and it cannot be opened prior to CE maintenance. In
those cases the customer shall assign one of his personnel to
assume responsibility for removal of the cash once the drawer has
been opened."
Environment: See 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System in
"Systems."
Maintenance: Installation of 3653s in the immediate sales area
may preclude the acceptability of on-line repair due to the public
scrutiny and loss of the selling location for customer service. In
these cases, the customer should remove the failing terminal to a
repair facility located within tlte store for subsequent repair. At this
location the CE will repair and test the terminal on-line via a customer provided store loop termination.
Supplies: A black ribbon cartridge, IBM Part No. 1136970 or
equivalent, should be used for machines installed prior to June,
1975. Machines installed after this date and those machines previously installed that are changed to the new ribbon drive mechanism should use IBM Part No. 1136660 or equivalent.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Journal Lock: #9322 if lock is desired on access cover to
journal take-up roll, journal tape supply, and cash receipt tape
supply. For additional or replacement locks and keys, see M
10000 pages.
[3] Till Cover with Lock: #9770 if top cover for cash drawer till is
desired. For additional tills and covers and additional or replacement cash drawer locks and keys, see M 10000 pages.
[4] Till with Movable Bill Dividers: #9799 if movable bill dividers
are desired. Otherwise, a till with fixed bill dividers will be
supplied.
[5] Cash Drawer Lock: The 3653 is equipped with a cash drawer
lock. A group of 25 unique lock numbers has been reserved to
allow a customer to specify identical lock types on all terminals. This allows all cash drawers to be opened with the same
key. If this is desired, specify one of the following types on the
3653 order:
#9101
#9106
#9111
#9116
#9121
9102
9107
9112
9117
9122
9113
9103
9108
9118
9123
9119
9124
9104
9109
9114
9105
9110
9115
9125
9120
If none is specified, a lock will be seiected at random from a
larger group of lock types, tlach 3653 will be shipped with two
cash drawer keys. For additional or replacement keys, refer to
M 10000 pages.
[6] Fractional Quantity Key: #9188 if the Fractional Quantity
Selectable Function is chosen. Provides a key on the 3653
Keyboard with appropriate nomenclature.
PRICES:
3653
Mdl
1
1P
ATP/
MLC
5 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 124
137
$3,790"
4,090"
$ 17
20
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model changes from model 1 to model 1 P can
be made in the field. All replaced parts of the base model become
the property of IBM. The Functional Expansion Features (#4222,
4223 and 4224) cannot be interchanged between the 3653 mdl 1
and the 3653 mdl 1 P and would remain with the customer if a
model change is made.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From model 1 to model 1 P ..... $ 425
SPECIAL FEATURES
FUNCTIONAL EXPANSION (#4222). [Mdl 1 only] Provides the
3653 with the capability to support additional functions.
Limitations: Not available for shipment after 3/25/77.
#4222 is mutually exclusive with #4223 and #4224. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. (Feature prices are based on plant
installation.
field installation of
this feature requires the submission of an RPQ.)
FUNCTIONAL EXPANSION INCREMENT - TYPE I (#4223). [Mdl
1 only] Provides the 3653 with the capability to support additional functions. The capability provided by this feature is equal to that
provided by Functional Expansion (#4222) ... see Note 1 below.
Limitations: The third Type I Increment (#4223) cannot be installed on a 3653 with Functional Expansion Increment - Type II
(#4224). #4223 is mutually exclusive with #4222 ... see Note 2
below for allowable configurations. Maximum: Three. Field
Installation: Yes.
FUNCTIONAL EXPANSION INCREMENT - TYPE II (#4224). [Mdl
1 only] Provides the 3653 with the capability to support additional functions. The capability provided by this feature is twice that
provided by Functional Expansion .Increment - Type I (#4223) ...
see Note 1. Limitations: Cannot be installed on 3653 with third
Functional Expansion Increment - Type I (#4223). #4224 is
mutually exclusive with #4'222 ... see Note 2 below for allowable
configurations.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: The 3653 must have two Functional Expansion
Increment - Type I (#4223) installed.
STORAGE INCREMENT (#4225).
[Mdl 1P only] Provides an
additional 8,176 bytes of storage. Maximum: Three. Field
Installation: Yes.
IML-READ ADAPTER (#4632).
**
Provides a means to initialize
Pilot Test applies: PTP Option Percent: 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --- ---- ----
- - - --===
':' =
M 3653.2
May 79
OP Machines
3653 Point of Sale Terminal
(conI' d)
3653 terminals when a 3651 Store Controller mdl A25, B25, A50,
B50, A75, B75, C75 or 075 is unavailable or unable to provide
the IML (Initial Machine Load). An adapter is provided for attaching an external tape cassette recorder and reading data previously
recorded at a 3651 equipped with the IML-Write Adapter (#4633).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
A hand operated wand
MAGNETIC WAND READER (#4944).
used to read single track delta distance encoded magnetic merchandise tickets, credit cards, and employee badges. The small
light-weight wand attached via a four foot long, flexible cord,
allows encoded merchandise tickets to be read without removing
ihem irom ihe merChandise. See Notes 3 and 4. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Provides an alternate keyMODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (#4990).
board designed to aid in faster keying and in customizing to a
user's requirements. Provides up to 16 department motor keys.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Notes:
(1) Order Confirmation of allowable or maximum combination of
additional functions to be used with Functional Expansion Increments must be obtained
(2) The table below defines Plant Installable configurations and the
maximum allowable field upgrades of #4223 and #4224.
Number of Functional Expansion Increments
If Plant Installed Type I (#4223)
Configuration is: Type II (#4224)
Is Field Upgrade Possible?
Maximum Up-
Type I (#4223)
0
0
I
0
0
0
I
0
2
0
2
0
2
I
3
0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
,
.. 2'
0
2
I
3'
0
I'
0
~l~~~ I~~t~lfed
Type II (#4224)
I
0
I
0
0
I
0
I'
Configuration
Allowable is:
Customers who elect to purchase the third #4223 an-..:
"'"g
2020
...... ==
2"
00
2025
2701
u,...
'"
o..!..:
2'-=
..:""'
Communication
Scanner Type 2
I- .::
-2
~
~
(-1M2) without
::J~
...J
Comrrunicatlon
Scanner Expansion
E
oS
'"
(-9090)
"'
>-0
~
~
0
'"
u
...JS
..:
3125
3135/3138
c
'">-
~
E
E
2
w
u
"'
2703
2715 mdl2
2772
2780
3115
...J
~
2~
oS
u~
or
2068
9115 or 9120
9115 or 9120
9115 or 9120
7106 w 9121
9115 or 9120
9012
7111 or 7113 w 9540 and 3719
7112 w 9541 and 3719
7112 w 9542 and 3719
1610 w 2165
1610 w 2165
1525
1525
3704 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (SYNCHRONOUS)
The HONE Configurator is available to assist in configuring a 3704
to a specific TP network's requirements ... see "Specify."
'"
..:
600
134.5
134.5
134.5
600
134.5
1200
300
600
1200
134.5
600
134.5
300
Operation of the 3704 in Start/Stop mode at speeds greater than
600 bps is limited to common carrier leased facilities; For attachment to the 2711 Line Adapter Unit, use #4711 and/or #4714.
The terminals may also communicate with a 3704 wia Limited
Distance Line Adapters ... see Chart 1, M2700 pages.
The maximum number of communication lines attachable is a
function of the speed of the lines, whether a Channel Adapter or
Remote Program Loader is installed, the type of Communication
Scanner installed, and the mode of operation.
...J
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
600
1200
2000
2400
1200
2000
2400
1200
2400
1200
600
1200
2400
1200
1200
1200
1200
600
1200
600
1200
600
1200
4331
600
1200
2400
3271 mdl 1,2,11,12
3275 mdll,2,1I,12
3276
3601/3602
3614
3651 mdl 25/50/75
3704/3705
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
2400
600
1200
2000
2400
1200
1200
1200
0
Communication
u
Scanner Type 1
(-1641), or
>-
0
COlmnunicatiotl
Scanner fype 2
('" 16.12) with
Commllnjc~tion
SC..lnIIN ExpJllsion
(~909Q)
NOTES: I) Required for models A2, A3 and A4, or Communication Scanner
Type 2 (#1642) on model AI.
2) A minimum of one Business Machine Clock (#4650) is required.
See Special Features.
3735
3741
3747
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
7690
7690
7690
7690
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
2074 w 4703
2074 w 4703
7551 w7541
7698 w 7401
7698 w 7692
7698 w 7693
7705 w 7710
7705
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9110
7141
7141
7141
7141
4640 w 9649
4640 w 9649
See 4331 Communications
Adapter (# 1 601) for 'details
and prerequisites.
7820
7820
3701 w 9491 & 6301
4501 or 6301 w 3701
3701 w6301
7708
4650 w 9607
4650 w 9608
4650 w 9609
4650 w 9610
7705 w 5010
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9122
-------- - --= =--- --=----':' =
M 3704.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
Terminal
Speed (bps) Terminal F~ature #(s)
3767 (attaches
via Line Set 1F
(#4716) only]
3771/3773/
3774/3775
3780
3791
Series/l
5010 (S/7)
SilO (2772)
5231 mdl2
5320 (S/32)
5340 (S/34)
5404/6/8/10/
12/15
600
1200
9531 w 3719
9532 w 3719
1200
1200
2400
1200
600
1200
1200
2000
2400
1200
2400
1200
600
1200
600
1200
600
1200
2000
2400
1482 w
7705 w
7705 w
3701 w
2074**
2074**
2074 w
2074 w
2074 w
2074 w
Set positions depending on feature #s selected. The required
feature or features is based on the number of high speed lines
installed and their positions.
#9001 -- Blocks installation of a Line Set in Position 8 of LIB
Type 1 in LIB Position 2.
3701
9122 and 9702
9121 and 9704
6301
or 2094*'
or 2094**
4800 and 4703
4800 and 4703
4800 and 4703
3701
2074 w 4780 and 9334 and 9751
2074 w 3701 and 4703
2074 w 3701 and 4703
2500 w 3701 and 4703
2500 w 3701 and 4703
2074 w 4703 & 9750 & 9481 & 2838
2074 w 4703 & 9751 & 9481 & 2838
2074 w 4703 & 9752 & 9481 & 2839
2074 w 4703 & 9153 & 9481 & 2839
Series/1 communication feature must have internal clock
jumper installed.
Customer Responsibilities: See M2700 pages, this section. Also
see the 3704/3705 Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host Systems Programming pages for
possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
PREREQUISITES: The 3704 requires a control unit position on a
system
channel.
NOTE:
Attachment
to
S/360
is
in
2701,2702,2703 Emulation Mode only.
5/360 mdls 30 (submodels E & F), 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel
(standard) ... see 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdls 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 195 -- multiplexer channel
of 2870 ... see 2870.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
5/370 mdls 135 thru mdl 158 -- byte multiplexer channel
(standard) ... see appropriate unit.
5/370 mdls 165, 168, 195 -- multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see
2870.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard) .,. see 3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (2 are standard)
see 3033.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (special feature) ...
see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (1 is standard) ... see
4341.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify:
#9002 -- Blocks installation of a Line Set in Position 7 of LIB
Type 1 in LIB Position 2.
Maximum: One each of the above. Prerequisites: Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642) and Line Interface Base Type A 1
(#4700). Field Installation: Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
3704
Al
A2
A3
A4
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
MAC/
MRC
$
711 $
777
843
909
605
661
717
773
Purchase
MMMC
$22,100
23,275
24,450
25,625
$149
178
208
238
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Control Unit
Purchase Option: 60%
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
Al
Al
A2
A3
A4
A2
$1,175
A3
$2,350
1,175
A4
$3,525
2,350
1,175
• Model downgrade.
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXPANSION FEATURE (#3600).
Required for models A2, A3
and A4 or Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642) on model A 1 .
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
CHANNEL ATTACHMENT FEATURES
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 1 (#1541). For communication with
a S/360, S/370 or 4300 byte multiplexer channel. All such communications are accomplished by one, two, three or four byte
transfers, with deselection and reselection between each transfer.
Data transfer rates are primarily dependent upon the 3704's internal processing requirements. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Remote Program Loader
(#6260).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8002). To attach Channel Adapter,
Type 1 (#1541) to two S/360, S/370 or 4300 channels, which
may be on the same CPU or on two different CPUs. The Channel
Adapter so equipped will, however, be capable of operation on
only one channel at a time. Selection of which channel is to be
operable is by means of a manual switch on the control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Channel
Adapter, Type 1 (#1541).
COMMUNICATION SCANNER FEATURES
[1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V or
#9904 for 230 V.
[2] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] For model A2, A3 or A4, Expansion Feature (#3600) is required ... see Special Features.
[5] Communication Cable Order Form: A completed form
must be submitted for: (1) Each new machine order
order where the added feature requires external
(2) Each
cable. For cabling information, see appropriate Installation
Manual, Physical Planning: S/360 - GC22-6820 ... S/370 -GC22-7004 ... 4300 -- GA27-3006.
[7] Address Substitution (#9001, #9002). Required when lines at
speeds greater than 19.2K bps and Communication Scanner
Type 2 (# 1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion
(#9090) are ordered. Address Substitution allows multiple
scanning of one Line Set's address at the expense of NOT
scanning another Line Set's address and is invoked by the
software support. The feature blocks scanning of up to two Line
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 1 (#1641).
The interface
between the communication line attachment features and the
central control unit. # 1641 uses the 3704 interrupt facilities to
allow the program to perform character assembly and disassembly,
and allows for program control of line control, control character
recognition, code translation and recovery functions. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Communication Scanner, Type 2 (#1642). Prerequisite: At least
one Business Machine Clock (#4650).
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 2 (#1642).
The interface
between the communication line attachment features and the
central control unit. #1642 assembles and disassembles characters automatically, provides character buffering for each line, and
allows the program control of line control, control character recognition, code translation and recovery functions. The basic scanner
is operational with one Line Interface Base Type A1 (#4700) only.
Maximum: One. Specify: Communication Scanner Expansion
(#9090) to permit installation of two LlBs of any types except LIB
Type 1 (#4701). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Communication Scanner Type 1 (#1641). When
#9090 is specified, only one LIB Type 1 (#4701) can be installed
with #1642. Prerequisites: Expansion Feature (#3600) and at
least one Business Machine Clock (#4650).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -----
--- - - - -';"-==
==:::::::
M 3704.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
COMMUNICATION LINE ATTACHMENT FEATURES
Communication lines are attached to the 3704 through Line Interface Bases, of which there are several different types, to accommodate the various types of line terminations. Depending upon
type, these L1Bs will house from one to eight Line Sets each,
which will allow attachment of from one to sixteen communication
lines. The 3704 can house a maximum of two of these L1Bs,
allowing up to 32 lines to be attached. Note that the LIB positions
in the 3704 must be specified ... see "LIB Position Designators"
at end of this section.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 1 (#4701). For attachment of up
to eight of Line Sets Types 1 A, 1 B, 1C, 10, 1 E, 1 F or 1H, in any
combination. In lieu of one of these eight Line Sets, ONE of the
following can be attached to this LIB:
a) Modem Attachment Base (#5101) with up to two of Line Sets
1Lor 1M, or one of each.
b) Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer (#5102) with up to
two of Line Set 1 P.
c) One Line Set Type 1 X (#4754) or 1 Y (#4755) ... see Duplex
Data Attachment Base (#3500).
d) One Line Set 10 (#4771) ... Note: This Line Set is installed in
lieu of two of the eight Line Sets.
Maximum: Two with Communication Scanner, Type 1 (#1641) ...
one with Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642). Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type LIBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of L1Bs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Typ.e 1 (#1641), or
Type 2 (# 1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 1A (#4711). [Low speed External Line Interface] For attachment of two start/stop communication lines at
speeds up to 1200 bps, each of which has an EIA RS232C interface for attachment to an external modem. Maximum: Eight per
LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB Type A1 (#4700). Field
Installation: Yes. limitation: When installed in combination with
other type Line Sets, the above maximums apply to the TOTAL
number of Line Sets per LIB. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base
Type 1 (#4701) or Type Al (#4700), plus a Business Machine
Clock(s) (#4650), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 1B (#4712).
[Low Speed Duplex External
Modem] Provides for attachment of one start/stop duplex communication line which has an EIA RS232C interface at speeds up
to 1200 bps. This Line Set effectively combines two 3704 communication line ports into a true full-duplex data port. Maximum:
Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB Type A1 (#4700).
Limitations: Not program supported. When installed in conjunction
with other type Line Sets, the above maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1
(#4700), plus a Business Machine Clock (#4650) assigned by the
program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 1C (#4713),
[Low Speed Local Attachment]
For attachment of two half-duplex IBM start/stop terminals at
speeds up to 1200 bps via IBM provided cables. Modems are not
required. Note: The attached terminal must provide a Business
Machine Clock and external modem cable to which the 3704 Line
Set 1 C cable will connect. Total cable length must not exceed 200
feet. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB
Type Al (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: When
installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above
maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type Al
(#4700), plus a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), specified
for the same speed as the terminal's clock.
LINE SET, TYPE 10 (#4714).
[Medium Speed External Line
Interface] For attachment of two start/stop or synchronous communication lines at speeds up to 9600 bps, each of which has an
EIA RS232C interface for attachment to an external modem.
Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB Type Al
(#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in
combination with other type Line Sets, the above maximums apply
to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB. Prerequisite: Line
Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700). For speed in
excess of 4800 bps, see Address Substitution and Scan Limits
under "Specify."
LINE SET, TYPE 1E (#4715).
[Auto-Call Unit] Pro~ides two
RS366 interfaces for attachment of external automatic calling
units. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB
Type A1 (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When i~
stalled in combination with other type Line Sets, the above maxImums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type Al
(#4700).
LINE SET, TYPE 1F (#4716). [Medium Speed Local Attachment]
For local attachment of two half-duplex, synchronous IBM terminals at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided cables. Modems
Nnt tn
are not required. This Line Set requires different cable groups
depending upon terminal type. For cabling information see Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004; for Remote, see
Multiplexers, GA27-3006. Note: The attached terminal must be
equipped with a Business Machine Clock and must prOVide a
standard external cable to which the 3704 Line Set Type 1F
external cable will connect. Total cable length must not exceed
100 feet. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per
LIB Type Al (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When
installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above
maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type Al
(#4700), plus a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), specified
for the same speed as the terminal's Business Machine Clock.
LINE SET TYPE 1H (#4718). [Medium Speed Duplex External
Modem] For attachment of one duplex synchronous communication line at a speed up to 9600 bps which has an EIA RS232C
interface for attachment to an external modem. This Line Set
provides for the transmission of data simultaneously in a transmit
and receive mode. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or
four per LIB Type Al (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
When installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above
maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1
(#4700). For speed in excess of 4800 bps, see Address Substitution and Scan Limits under "Specify."
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE A1 (#4700), For attachment of
up to two synchronous Line Sets (Type 1G or 1J) and/or up to
four Line Sets 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, 10, 1 E, 1F or 1 H, in any combination.
In lieu of one of these four Line Sets, ONE of the following can be
attached to this LIB:
a) Modem Attachment Base (#5101) with up to two 01 Line Sets
1L or 1M, or one of each.
b) Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer (#5102) with up to
two of Line Set 1 P.
c) One Line Set Type 1 X (#4754) or 1 Y (#4755) ... see Duplex
Data Attachment Base (#3500).
d) Olle Line Set Type 10 (#4771) ... Note: This Line Set is
installed in lieu of two of the four Line Sets.
Maximum: Two it Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090) is
specifipd with Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642) ... without
#9090 maximum is one. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: See
Commu'nication Scanner Type 2 (#1642). When installed in combination with other type L1Bs, the maximum of two applies to the
TOTAL number of L1Bs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner
Type 2 (#1642).
LINE SET, TYPE 1G (#4717).
[High Speed External Modem]
For attachment of one synchronous communication line for operation at 19.2K, 40.8K or 50.0K bps. Has a digital interface for
attachment to a switched or leased "wideband" external modem.
Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type Al (#4700) and Communication Scanner Type 2
(#1642). If Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090) is ordered with #1642, see "Address Substitution" under "Specify."
LINE SET, TYPE 1J (#4719). [External Mil Std 188C Modem]
For attachment of one start/stop or synchronous communication
line at a speed of up to 50.0K bps via an external modem having
an interface that conforms to the requirements in Section 7.2.1 of
MIL STD 188C. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type Al (#4700) and Co,,-,munication Scanner Type 2 (#1642). If Communication Scanner
Expansion (#9090) is ordered with #1642, see "Address
Substitution" under "Specify."
MODEM ATTACHMENT BASE - 2400 BPS (#5101). Provides for
attachment of up to two of Line Set Type 1 L or 1 M (in any combination). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with any of the following: Duplex Data Attachment (#3500), Line Set Type 10 (#4771), Modem Attachment
Base with Auto-Answer - 2400 bps (#5102), or Remote Program
Loader (#6260). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1
(#4701) or Type Al (#4700).
LINE SET TYPE 1L (#4751). [IBM 2400 bps Leased Point-toPoint Integrated Modem]
For attachment of one synchronous
leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem equipped with Receive
Equalization which is suitable for communication over a leased
voice grade channel with an IBM 3872 or eqUivalent modem similiarIy equipped ... no external modem is required. Maximum: Two.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination
with Line Set Type 1 M, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL
number of Line Sets. Prerequisite: Modem Attachment Base 2400 bps (#5101).
LINE SET, TYPE 1M (#47:>2). [IBM 2400 bps Leased Multi-point
Control Integrated Modem] For attachment of one synchronous
leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem which is suitable for commu-
he reoroduced without written permission.
--------- --- - - ---- --._--_.------
M 3704.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
nication over a leased voice grade channel with a simi liar IBM
3872 or equivalent modem equipped with both transmit and receive
equalization ... no external modem is required. Maximum: Two.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination
with Line Set Type 1 L, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL
number of Line Sets. Prerequisite: Modem Attachment Base 2400 bps (#5101).
MODEM ATTACHMENT BASE WITH AUTO ANSWER - 2400 BPS
(#5102).
For attachment of up to two of Line Set Type 1 P.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with any of the following: Duplex Data Attachment Base
(#3500), Line Set Type 10 (#4771), Modem Attachment Base 2400 bps (#5101). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1
(#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
LINE SET, TYPE 1P (#4761). [IBM 2400 bps Switched Network,
Integrated Modem] For attachment of one synchronous switched
line at speed of 2400 or 1200 bps. Used for operation over the
Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler Type
CBS (or equivalent). Automatic answering of incoming calls will be
performed by the modem. Automatic equalization is effected at the
beginning of each call. This modem communicates with either an
IBM 2400/1200 bps Integrated Modem or the 3872 Modem equipped with a Switched Network feature ... no external modem is
required. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer - 2400 bps (#5102).
LINE SET, TYPE 10 (#4771). [IBM 2400 bps Switched Network
Integrated Modem with Automatic Call Originate] For attachment
of one synchronous switched line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps.
This Line Set includes one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem
equipped with Auto-Answer and Automatic Call Originate functions.
It is suitable for automatically dialing a remote terminal, the automatic answering of an incoming call, and is capable of communicating over the Public Switched Network with either an IBM
2400/1200 bps Integrated Modem or 3872 Modem equipped with
either the Switched Network feature or Automatic Call Originate
feature ... (the answering modem must be equipped with an autoanswer capability). This modem provides control to the Common
Carrier Data Coupler Type CBS (or equivalent) to dial telephone
numbers and to provide on-hook/off-hook control. No external
modem is required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
limitations: Can only be used with a Rotary Dial System. Cannot
be installed with Modem Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#5101),
Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer - 2400 bps (#5102) or
Duplex Data Attachment Base (#3500). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
DUPLEX DATA ATTACHMENT BASE - 2400 BPS (#3500). For
attachment of up to two of Line Set Type 1 X or 1 Y (in any combination). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with any of the following:· Line Set Type 10
(#4771), Modem Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#5101), Modem
Attachment Base with Auto Answer - 2400 bps (#5102), or Remote Program Loader (#6260). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base
Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
LINE SET, TYPE 1X (#4754). [IBM 2400 bps Leased Point-toPoint Duplex Data Integrated Modem] For attachment of one
Duplex synchronous leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps.
This Line Set includes one IBM 2400/1200 bps Leased Line
Integrated Duplex Modem with Receive Equalization suitable for
leased duplex point-to-point operation... no external modem is
required. This integrated modem must talk to a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or
equivalent IBM modem. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set Type 1 Y,
the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of Line Sets.
Prerequisite: Duplex Data Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#3500).
LINE SET, TYPE 1Y (#4755). [IBM 2400 bps Multi-Point Master
Duplex Data Integrated Modem] For attachment of one duplex
synchronous leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one IBM 2400/1200 bps Leased Line Integrated
Duplex Modem without equalization suitable for leased duplex
multi-point master operation ... no external modem is required.
This integrated modem must talk to a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent
IBM modem. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
When installed in combination with Line Set Type 1 X, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of Line Sets.
Prerequisite: Duplex Data Attachment Base (#3500).
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 2 (#4702). For attachment of up
to four Line Sets Type 2A (#4721). Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Type 1 (#1641), or
Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 2A (#4721). [Telegraph Single Current] For
attachment of two single current telegraph lines, each of which
may be wired for 20 rna, 40 rna or 62.5 rna single current termination. Maximum: Four per LIB Type 2. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 2 (#4702) and a Busi-
ness Machine Clock(s), (#4650), assigned by the program to this
Line Set.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 3 (#4703). For attachment of up
to three Line Sets Type 3A or 3B in any combination. Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the
TOTAL number of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner
Type 1 (#1641), or Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner
Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 3A (#4731).
[Limited Distance Type 1 Line
Adapter, 2-wire] For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop
lines at speeds up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (2-wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are
required. Note: Total wire length of each line may not exceed 4.75
wire-miles ... see SRL GA24-3435' for more information on this
Line Adapter. Maximum: Three per LIB Type 3. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set(s)
Type 3B, the maximum of three applies to the TOTAL number of
Line Sets per LIB. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 3
(#4703) and a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), assigned by
the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 3B (#4732).
[Limited Distance Type 1 Line
Adapter, 4-wire] For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds
up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (4wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note:
Total wire length of each line may not exceed 4.75 wire-miles ...
see SRL GA24-3435' for more information on this Line Adapter.
Maximum: Three per LIB Type 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set(s) Type
3A, the maximum of three applies to the TOTAL number of Line
Sets per LIB. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 3 (#4703)
and a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 4 (#4704).
For attachment of
one Line Set, Type 4A, 4B or 4C. Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of
LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Type 1 (# 1641), or
Type 2 (# 1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 4A (#4741).
[Limited Distance Type 2 Line
Adapter] For attachment of two half-duplex start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 2
Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note: Total
wire length of each line may not exceed 8.25 wire-miles ... see
SRL GA24-3435, for more information on this Line Adapter.
Maximum: One per Lib Type 4. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 4 (#4704). and a Business Machine Clock(s), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 4B (#4742).
[Leased Line, Line Adapter, 2wire]
For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps. Includes two IBM Leased Line, 2-wire, Line
Adapters and no external modems are required ... see SRL GA243435' for more information on this Line Adapter. Maximum: One
per LIB Type 4. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 4 (#4704) and a Business Machine Clock(s),
(#4650), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
[Leased Line, Line Adapter, 4LINE SET, TYPE 4C (#4743).
wire] For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds up to 600
bps. Includes two IBM Leased Line, 4-wire, Line Adapters and no
external modems are required ... see SRL GA24-3435' for more
information on this Line Adapter. Maximum: One per LIB Type 4.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 4
(#4704). and a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), assigned by
the program to this Line Set.
LINE INTERFACE BASE TYPE 8 (#4708). For attachment of up
to two Modem Attachment Bases - 1200 bps (#5103). Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the
TOTAL number of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner
Type 1 (# 1641), or Type 2 (# 1642) with Communication Scanner
Expansion (#9090).
MODEM ATTACHMENT BASE· 1200 BPS (#5103). For attachment of up to two of Line Set 8A, 8B, 8C or 8D (in any combination). Maximum: Two per LIB Type 8 (#4708). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 8 (#4708).
LINE SET, TYPE 8A (#4781). [iBM 1200 bps Leased Integrated
Modem] For attachment of one start/stop or synchronous nonswitched line at speeds up to 600 bps or at 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem ... no external
modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with
another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. Maximum: Two per Modem
Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set Type 8B,
the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of lines per
*
SRL
GA24~3435-2 or
later revision.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - --- -== - =--":' =
-------- ----
M 3704.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
Modem Attachment Base (#5103). Prerequisites: Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and a Business Machine Clock
(#4650) assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 8B (#4782). [IBM 1200 bps Switched Integrated Modem] For attachment of one start/stop switched line at
speeds up to 600 bps or one synchronous switched line at speeds
of 600 bps or 1200 bps. This feature is to be used in conjunction
with the Public Switched Network via the Common Carrier Data
Coupler CBS (or equivalent). This Line Set includes one IBM 1200
bps Switched Line Modem with Automatic Answer capability". no
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communi·
cate with another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. Maximum: Two
per Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
Line Set Type 8A, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL
number of lines per Modem Attachment Base (#5103).
Prerequisites: Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and
a Business Machine Clock (#4650) assigned by the program to
this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 8C (#4785). [IBM 1200 bps Leased Integrated
Modem with a Bi-directional Interrupt Signal] This Line Set provides for communicating with an IBM 3767 Terminal operating in
2741 Line Control at a line speed of 300 bps using two wire
common carrier facilities. The customer must specify the "No
Echo Suppression" option from the common carrier. In addition to
the above capability, this Line Set has the same functional capabilities as Line Set Type BA (#47B1) except that Line Set Type 8C
is restricted to common carrier two-wire facilities. This Line Set
includes one IBM 1200 bps Leased Integrated Modem ". no
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communi·
cate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Maximum: Two per
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: When installed in conjunction with Line Set Type
BA, 8B or BD, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of Line Sets per Modem Attachment Base (#5103). Prerequisites:
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and a Business
Machine Clock (#4650) for each speed of operation by the program.
LINE SET, TYPE 80 (#4786). [IBM 1200 bps Switched Integrated Modem with a Bi-directional Interrupt Signal] This Line Set
provides for communicating with an IBM 3767 Terminal operating
in 2741 Line Control at a speed of 300 bps using common carrier
switched facilities. In addition to the above capability, this Line Set
has the same capabilities as Line Set Type BB (#4782). This Line
Set includes one IBM 1 200 bps Switched Integrated Modem ". no
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communi·
cate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Maximum: Two per
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: When installed in conjunction with Line Set Type
BA, 8B or BC, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of Line Sets per Modem Attachment Base (#5103). Prerequisites:
Modem Attachment Base - 1 200 bps (# 5103) and a Business
Machine Clock (#4650) for each operational speed for this Line
Set. The operational speed is selected by the program. Note: This
Line Set only has Half Duplex data transmission capability.
LINE INTERFACE BASE TYPE 9 (#4709).
[IBM 1200 bps
Switched Integrated Modem] For attachment of one synchronous
switched line at speeds up to 1200 bps. This Line Interface Base
includes a Line Set and one IBM 1200 bps Switched Integrated
Modem equipped with Automatic Answering and Automatic Call
Originate functions ". no external modem is required. This feature
is to be used in conjunction with the Public Switched Network via
the Common Carrier Data Coupler CBS (or equivalent). This inte·
grated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated
modem. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: When
installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two
applies to the TOTAL number of LIBs. Prerequisites: Communication Scanner Type 1 (#1641), or Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090), plus a Business Machine
Clock (#4650) assigned by the program to the Line Set of this
LIB.
LINE INTERFACE BASE TYPE 10 (#5000) •. For attachment of up
to three of Line Set Type 10A (#4784). Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Type 1 (# 1 641), or
Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
the attached external modem or internal IBM Line Adapter does
NOT provide this clocking. Maximum: Four per Communication
Scanner Type 1 (#1641) or Type 2 (#1642). Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Required only when modem does not provide
clocking, except that each Communication Scanner requires at
least one clock which must be at a speed less than one-half that
of the lowest speed modem clocked line. Note: Each Business
Machine Clock may be assigned by the program to one or more
communication lines. Prerequsite: Communication Scanner Type 1
(#1641) or Type 2 (#1642).
The speed of clocking must be specified for each #4650 as
follows: These can be changed in the field.
Speed (bps)
45.5
50.0
56.9
74.2
75.0
110.0
134.5
Specify
#9601
9613
9602
9603
9604
9605
9606
150.0
300.0
600.0
950.0'
1200.0
2000.0
2400.0
Specify
#9611
9612
9607
9614
9608
9609
9610
• Supported for 2740 mdl 2 type line control only.
UNIT PROTECTION (#8510). Provides a lock on the 3704 which
deactivates all switches (except power off and power on) when
key is removed. Two keys are included. For additional or replacement keys, see "Locks and Keys" on M 10000 pages. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE OPERATION
EXTENDED ENVIRONMENT (#3620). [Mdl A3 or A4 only] Provides cooling such that a 3704 with Remote Program Loader
(#6260) can operate in a Class C Environment with a temperature
range of 50 0 F to 100 0 F. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Remote Program Loader (#6260).
REMOTE POWER OFF (#6250). [Mdl A3 or A4 only] Provides
the capability of turning. the 3704's power off with a command
over a communications line. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
REMOTE PROGRAM LOADER (#6260).
[Mdl A3 or A4 only]
Provides the means of loading the NCP Program into the 3704
when there is no Channel Adapter on the machine. This feature
also provides for diagnosing the communications controller without
the aid of the CPU. Maximum: One, Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with any of the following: Channel
Adapter Type 1 (#1541), Duplex Data Attachment Base - 1200
bps (#3500), Modem Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#5101).
LIB POSITION DESIGNATORS
The position of the Line Interface Bases within the 3704 must be
specified in accordance with the following table.
Communication Scanner Communication Scanner
Type 1 (#1641)
Type 2 (#1642)
Position 1
Position 2
Position 1
Position 2
LIB Type
Al
1
2
3
4
8
9
10
#9311
9321
9331
9341
9381
9391
9401
#9312
9322
9332
9342
9382
9392
9402
#9501
9511
9521
9531
9541
9581
9591
9701
#9502
9512
9522
9532
9542
9582
9592
9702
The LlBs must be assigned to position in numerical order, that is,
LIB Type A 1s must be assigned to the lowest numbered pOSitions,
LIB Type 1s next lowest, etc., so that the highest type-numbered
LIB is in the highest numbered position. Each order submitted
must indicate the Feature #. for each LIB desired plus a location
specify code (position number, from above table) based on the LIB
Type.
The positions of the Line Sets within the LlBs will be automatically
assigned.
LINE SET, TYPE lOA (#4784). [IBM 1200 bps Leased Duplex
Integrated Modem] For attachment of one Duplex synchronous
leased line at speeds up to 1200 bps. This Line Set includes one
IBM 1 200 bps Duplex Integrated Modem ". no external modem is
required. This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM
1200 bps integrated modem. Maximum: Three per Line Interface Base
Type 1 0 (#5000). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line
Interface Base Type 10 (#5000) and a Business Machine Clock
(#4850) assigned by the program to this Line Set.
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#4650).
Speed bps)
Provides clOcking when
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
-- --------------
M 3704.6
Jul79
OP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
SPECIAL FEATURE PRICES:
Business Machine Clk #4650
Channel Adapter Typ 1 1541
Comm Scanner Type 1 1641
Comm Scanner Type 2 1642
Expansion Feature
3600
Extended Environment 3620
LIne Inter Base Typ 1 4701
Line Set Type 1 A
4711t
Line Set Type 1B
4712t
Line Set Type 1C
4713t
Line Set Type 10
4714t
Line Set Type 1 E
4715t
LIne Set Type 1F
4716t
Line Set Type 1H
4718t
Modem Att Base
·2400 bps
5101
Line Set Type 1 L
4751t
Line Set Type 1 M
4752t
Modem Att Base AA
·2400 bps
5102
Line Set Type 1P
4761t
Line Set Type 1Q
4771t
Duplex Data AU Base
·2400 bps
3500
LIne Set Type 1 X
4754t
Line Set Type 1Y
4755t
Line Inter Base Typ A1 4700
Line Set Type 1G
4717
Line Set Type 1J
4719
Line Inter Base Typ 2 4702
Line Set Type 2A
4721
Line Inter Base Typ 3 4703
Line Set Type 3A
4731
Line Set Type 3B
4732
LIne Inter Base Typ 4 4704
Line Set Type 4A
4741
LIne Set Type 4B
4742
Line Set Type 4C
4743
Line Inter Base Typ 8 4708
Modem Att Base
·1200 bps
5103
Line Set Type 8A
4781
Line Set Type 8B
4782
Line Set Type 8C
4785
Line Set Type 80
4786
Line Inter Base Typ 9 4709
LIne Inter Base Typ 10 5000
Line Set Type 10A
4784
Remote Power Off
6250
Remote Program Lder 6280
Two Channel Switch
6002
Unit Protection
8510
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 12 $ 10
142 121
25
21
129 110
12
10
25
21
25
21
36
31
36
31
31
36
103
88
63
54
103
88
109
93
$
406
4,505
816
4,060
406
816
816
1,235
1,235
1,235
3,275
2,040
3,275
3,485
$ 1.00
23.00
1.50
5.50
.50
NC
1.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
8.50
3.00
8.50
15.50
109
63
58
93
54
49
3,465
2,040
1,630
3.50
12.00
11.00
129
69
303
110
59
258
4,060
2,255
9,350
3.50
17.50
25.50
63
103
96
25
63
89
25
63
78
49
49
49
89
89
89
78
71
88
82
21
71
76
21
54
66
42
42
42
76
76
76
66
2,635
3,275
3,060
816
2,635
2,850
816
2,040
2,465
1,660
1,660
1,660
2,850
2,850
2,850
2,465
3.00
16.50
14.00
1.50
9.50
3.50
1.00
5.50
3.50
2.00
2.00
4.50
5.00
7.50
7.50
2.00
1,660
630
2.00
4.00
6.00
17.50
18.50
10.50
3.50
9.00
.50
38.50
4.00
NC
49
42
19
16
25
21
46
54
60
51
180 153
49
42
115
98
10
12
194 185
63
54
35SUC t Also available with Line Interface Base Type A1
840
1,005
1,120
5,695
1,660
3,655
406
6,120
2,040
35
(#4700).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ----------== =
':' =
--
M 3705.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3705 COMMUNICATIONS
CONTROLLER
Purpose: The 3705-1 and 3705-11 attach to all S/370 or 4300
Processors, or in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode only, to a
S/360mdl 30 (submodels E or F) (3705-1 only), 40, 50, 65, 67 (in
65 mode), 75 and 195 for communication with local or remote I/O
devices over various common carrier provided or customer owned
communication facilities. NOTE: See "Programming" and "SCP"
sales manual pages for attachment capability.
Highlights: A modular, programmable unit which expands the
communications capabilities of S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors.
By virtue of its modularity and programmability, the 3705 boasts a
high degree of flexibility in tailoring to a teleprocessing system's
requirements. Also it can relieve the CPU of many TP functions,
including, but not limited to, line control, polling, addressing, code
translation and error recovery. The maximum number of communication lines which can be physically attached to a 3705 is 352
lines; but, the maximum number of communication lines capable of
concurrent operation Is a function of the speed of the lines, the
type of Channel Adapter, memory size, and Communication Scanner installed and the programming mode of operation. The maximum number of lines which can be physically installed can exceed
the operational capability, see "Specify" for "special scheduled"
systems. The 3705-1 has a 1.2 microsecond storage cycle time ...
the 3705-11 models E, F, G and H have a 1.0 microsecond storage
time ... the 3705-11 models J, K and L have a 900 nanosecond
storage time.
Communications Facilities: The 3705 operates over common
carrier provided or equivalent customer owned communications
facilities. For information concerning these facilities, see the M
2700 pages, this section.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages, this section. Also
see 3704/3705 "Programming" sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host Systems Programming pages for
possible restrictions to the above attachments.
3705 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (START /STOP)
In addition to terminals being attached to the 3705 through common carrier facilities, they may also be connected directly to the
3705 units using #4713. Below are the attachable terminals and
the respective feature #s. Cable groups may be traced via this
feature # listing and the feature #s listed in the respective Physical Planning Manuals. Ensure that the cable groups selected from
the Physical Planning Manuals have the 25 pin data set interface.
#4713 allows only two terminals to be attached, one per 3705 25
pin data set interface. There must be corresponding Business
Machine Clocks in both the terminal and the 3705.
Terminal
1031A/l034
1061
2740 mdl 1
2740mdl2
2741
2845/2848
3767 [attaches via
Line Set IF
5010 (S/7)
5100/5110
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
600
134.5
134.5
134.5
600
134.5
1200
300
600
1200
134.5
600
134.5
300
2068
9115
9115
9115
7106
9115
9012
7111
7112
7112
1610
1610
1525
1525
or 9120
or 9120
or 9120
w 9121
or 9120
or 7113 w 9540 and 3719
w 9541 and 3719
w 9542 and 3710
w 2165
w 2165
Terminal
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
1131
600
1200
2000
2400
1826
1200
2000
2400
2020
1200
2400
2025
1200
2701
600
1200
2400
1200
2703
2715 mdl 2
1200
2772
1200
1200
2780
3115
600
1200
600
3125
1200
600
3135/3138
1200
4331
600
1200
2400
1200
3271 mdl 1,2,11,12
3275 mdll,2,11,12
1200
1200
3276
1200
3601/3602
3614
1200
3651 mdl 25/50/75 2400
3704/3705
600
1200
2000
2400
3735
1200
3741
1200
3747
1200
3767 [attaches via Line 600
Set 1F (#4716) only] 1200
3771/3773/3774/
1200
3775
1200
3780
2400
1200
3791
600
Series/l
1200
1200
5010 (S/7)
2000
2400
5110 (2772)
1200
2400
1200
5231 mdl 2
5320 (S/32)
600
1200
5340 (S/34)
600
1200
5404/6/8/10/12/15 600
1200
2000
2400
7690
7690
7690
7690
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
2074 w 4703
2704 w 4703
7551 w 7541
7698 w 7401
7698 w 7692
7698 w 7693
7705 w 7710
7705
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9110
7141
7141
7141
7141
4640 w 9649
4640 w 9649
See Communications Adapter
(#1601) on 4331 for
for details and prerequisites.
7820
7820
3701 w 9491 and 6301
4501 or 6301 w 3701
3701 w 6301
7708
4714 and 4650 w 9607
4714 and 4650 w 9608
4714 and 4650 w 9609
4714 and 4650 w 9610
7705 w 5010
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9122
9531 w 3719
9532 w 3719
1482 w
7705 w
7705 w
3701 w
2074"
2074"
2074 w
2074 w
2074 w
2074 w
3701
9122 and 9702
9121 and 9704
6301
or 2094"
or 2094"
4800 and 4703
4800 and 4703
4800 and 4703
3701
2074 w 4780
2074 w 3701
2074 w 3701
2500 w 3701
2500 w 3701
2074 w 4703
and 2838
2074 w 4703
and 2838
2074 w 4703
and 2838
2074 w 4703
and 2838
and
and
and
and
and
and
9334 and 9751
4703
4703
4703
4703
9750 and 9481
and 9751 and 9481
and 9752 and 9481
and 9753 and 9481
•• Series/l communication feature must have internal clock
jumper installed.
3705 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (SYNCHRONOUS)
3705 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (V35)
In additon to the synchronous terminals being attached to the
3705 through common carrier facilities, they may also be connected directly to the 3705 using #4716. Below are the attachable
terminals and the respective feature #s. Cable groups may be
traced via the feature #s given below and the feature #s listed in
the respective Physical Planning Manuals. Ensure that the cable
groups selected from the Physical Planning Manuals have the 25
pin data set interface. #4716 allows only two terminals to be
attached, one per 3705 25 pin data set interface. There must be
corresponding Business Machine Clocks in both the terminal and
3705.
The following terminals may be attached locally to the 3705 using
Line Set lW (#4727) (Half Duplex) or Line Set lZ (#4728) (Full
Duplex) V35 interfaces. Cable groups may be traced via the feature numbers given below and the feature numbers listed in the
respective Physical Planning manuals. No business machine clock
is required in the attached device since clockin9 si9nals are provided by Business Machine Clock (#4651) in combination with
#4727 and #4728.
.
#4727 Half Duplex
Terminal
3705
Speed (bps)
14,400
57,600
3776-3,3776-4
14,400
3777-1, 3777-2, 3777-3 14,400
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Terminal Feature #
4720
4720
4720
4720
=~==
:: ==F..s
==? ==
:i: if::::
M 3705.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
#4728 Full Duplex
Terminal
Speed (bps)
3705
14,400
57,600
14,400
14,400
3776-3,4
3777-3
(cont'd)
Terminal Feature #
5/360 mdl 65, 67 (In 65 mode), 75, 195 - multiplexer channel of
2870 ... see 2870.
4726
4726
4720
4720
5/370 mdl 115. 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
Machine Organization: The basic machine consists of the Central
Control Unit (CCU) with storage (16K in the 3705-1 and 32K in the
3705-11) and an operator's control panel. A minimum machine
configuration must have, in addition to the base unit, the following
features:
[1] Either a Channel Adapter (CA) feature or the Remote Program
Loader feature. The Channel Adapters have different levels of
design providing various degrees of programming overhead in
channel operation.
[2] A Communication Scanner (CS) feature to provide for the
connection between the Attachment Base feature and the Line
Interface Base(s) features. Like the Channel Adapters the
various Communication Scanners have varying degrees of
performance.
[3] An Attachment Base which provides a common connection
between the Communication ScannerCs) and the Central Control Unit (CCU).
[4] A Line Interface Base (LIB) which provides the connection
between the CS and the various Line Sets. The LIB provides
the hardware for the mounting of the individual Line Sets.
Each LIB is designed for a certain set of functions in conjunction with the various Line Sets.
[5] A Line Set (LS) which provides the electronics and external
cables to interface to a communication facility. NOTE: Both the
external cables and the Line Sets are individually ordered
through the AAS system. The number of Line Sets that can be
contained in a LIB is contingent upon the electronic hardware
of a Line Set required to perform the functions supporting the
communications facilities.
[6] A Business Machine Clock which provides clocking of data in
and out of the Communication Scanner.
Models: The 3705 consists of two versions, with various models
based on either the number of frames and/or the storage capacity.
3705-1 consists of core storage with a cycle time of 1.2 microseconds.
3705-11 consists of monolithic storage with a cycle time of 1.0
microseconds (models E, F, G and H) or 900 nanoseconds
(models J, K and L).
The model numbering of the 3705 is "x", "y". "x" is an alpha
code designating the number of frames in a 3705; A represents
o.ne frame, B two, C three and 0 four frames for a 3705-1 ... E
represents one frame, F or J two, G or K three and H or L four
frames for a 3705-11. "y" is a numeric code designating the storage size.
In the 3705-1, the storage is housed in each frame in quantities of
one or two increments of core storage. In the 3705-11 (models E,
F, G and H), the storage is housed only in the first frame, which
has up to nine increments of monolithic storage. The 3705-11,
models J, K and L have 256K of storage in the first frame and
64K in the second frame. Additional storage in 64K increments
may be installed in the second frame for a maximum of 512K
bytes.
3705-1
Model
A2,B2, C2, 02
B3,C3,03
84,C4, D4
C5,05
C6, 06
D7
08
5/370 mdl 135 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector or
Block Multiplexer Channel (special features) ... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 - byte multiplexer channel or selector channel
(standard), or Block Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see
3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channeis ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdls 155. 155 II. 158 and 158 MP - byte multiplexer
channel or block multiplexer channeis (standard) ... see 3155.
3158.
5/370 mdls 165. 165 II. 168. 168 MP and 195 - selector channel of 2860, multil:llexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannel
(special feature) of 2870, or block multiplexer channel of 2880 ...
see 2860,2870, 2880.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031
or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Proceaaor - byte multiplexer channel (special feature) ...
see 4331.
4341 Processor 4341.
byte multiplexer channel (standard) ... see
NOTE: The 3705-11 attaches to a 5/360 with a minimum of 128K
bytes of storage.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
[1] All 3705-15 are to be ordered as follows:
"A" models
"B" models
"C" models
"0" models
3705-11
Core Storage
(bytes)
A1 - D8
Al, Bl, Cl, 01
(standard) ... see 2030, 2040, 2050. NOTE: 5/360 mdl 30. connects to 3705-1 only.
Model
Monolithic Storage
(bytes)
El - L4
16K
48K
80K
112K
144K
176K
208K
240K
AU 3705-115 are to be ordered as follows:
"E" models-
El, Fl, Gl, Hl
E2, F2, G2, H2
E3, F3,G3,H3
E4,F4,G4,H4
E5, F5, G5,H&
E6, F6, G6, H6
E7, F7, G7, H7
E8,F8,G8,H8
Jl, Kl, Ll
J2, K2, L2
J3, K3. L3
J4, K4, L4
32K
64K
96K
128K
160K
192K
224K
256K
320K
384K
448K
5121<
"F" or "J" models -
"G'" or "K" models --
"H" or "L" models -
PREREQUISITES: The 3705-1 and 3705-0 require a control unit
position on a system channel unless only the Remote Program
Loader (RPL) featu.re is installed. Note: Attachment. to S.(36O is in
270:1, 2702, 2703 Emulation Mode only.
S/360 m.dl 30 (aubmodele E and. F), 40, 50 - multic>l.exer channel
Not t.o. be reproduced without wdtten.permisstoo.
- -- ---- --===
':' =
-------- - ---
M 3705.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
(cont'd)
which of the eight following features is to be ordered should be
based on the number of high speed lines used and their relative
positions within a LIB position. On special 'scheduled systems
where a high speed line is used only a portion of the time, then
the position does not have to be blocked if the Line Set positions (which would have been blocked) are not used simultaneously with the high speed line. Examples of this could be lines
used for backup or load sharing purposes. For those positions
within a LIB where High Speed Select is invoked, only the even
addresses are scanned.
#9011 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 1 of the
module. Only the
additional L1Bs within a 3705
3705
module containing the high speed line is affected.
#9012 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 2.
#9013 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 3.
#9014 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 4.
#9015 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 5.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V, Field Installation: Yes.
#9016 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 6.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. Field Installation: Yes.
#9018 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 8.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor. Field
Installation: Yes.
Maximum: One each of the above per Communication Scanner,
Type 3 (#1643).
[5] Address Substitution/Upper Limit Scan: For 3705s with a
Communication Scanner, Type 2, there are two methods of
address modification: Upper Scan Limits and Address Substitution, which allow the T,ype 2 Scanner to operate a Line Set at
speeds greater than 4800 bps. For information on USL, see the
IBM 3704 and 3705 Principles of Operation, GC30-3004. Address Substitution (#9001, 9002, 9003, 9004): May be required when lines at speeds greater.,than 4800 bps are to be
installed. Associated with the inlicrcation by software, the Address Substitution capability allows multiple scanning of a Line
Set's address at the expense of NOT scanning other Line Set
addresses. The specify feature blocks the installation of a Line
Set in those address positions that are not scanned by address
substitution. The choice of which of the four following specify
features is to be ordered should be based on the number of
high speed lines to be installed and their relative line set positions within the first LIB position. The lowest position (#9001)
should always be specified first, followed by each succeeding
number. For those positions within a LIB where Address Substitution is invoked, only the even addresses are scanned.
Prerequisite: Communication Scanner, Type 3 (# 1643).
#9001 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 8 (both
3705
) on all Type 1 and Type 2 L1Bs. Specify
#9001 when the FIRST Line Set of the first LIB is to contain
the high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
#9002 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 7 (3705
) on all Type 1 and Type 2 L1Bs. Specify #9002
when the SECOND Line Set of the first LIB is to contain the
high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
#9003 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 6 (3705
) on all Type 1, Type 2, Type 3 and Type 10 L1Bs.
Specify #9003 when the THIRD Line Set of the first LIB is to
contain the high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
#9017 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 7.
Note: When High Speed Select is specified, it will restrict Line
Set installation in all L1Bs (except LIB Position 1) of the 3705
which has the scanner modification implemented. See
IBM 3704/3705 Communications Controllers, Principles of
Operation, GC30-3004.
[6] A Communication Cable Order must be submitted for: Each
new 3705
machine order ... each
order where the
added feature requires external cable. For cabling information,
see appropriate Installation Manual - Physical Planning: S/360
- GC22-6820 ... S/370 -- GC22-7004 ... 4300 Processors GA27-3006. Also see Channel Adapters and Line Sets. For
remote 3705"1 or remote 3705-11, see Multiplexers, GA27-3006.
[8] 3705 Specification Sheet: A completed sheet,
MAY be required. See "Line Attachment Configurator" at the
end of "Special Features" section.
[9] Specify #9566 when two or more CA-4s are in the 3705-11
configuration and the NCP /VS program product is installed or
for EP /VS if PRPQ P85021 is installed with greater than one
CA-4. Must be specified in every module in which CA-4 appears.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3705-1
A1
A2
B1
82
83
84
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
$1,287
1,845
1,698
2,262
2,826
3,384
2,133
2,691
3,249
3,813
4,365
4,923
2,550
3,108
3,672
4,236
4,794
5,352
5,916
6,474
1,204
1,333
1,462
1,591
1,720
1,849
1,978
2,107
1,616
#9004 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 5 (3705
) on all Type 1, Type 2, Type 3 and Type 10 L1Bs.
Specify #9004 when the FOURTH Line Set of the first LIB is
to contain the high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
Maximum: One each of the above per 3705
Field Installation: Yes.
Note: When Address Substitution is specified, it will block Line
Set installation in ALL L1Bs in the 3705
and therefore, will reduce the physical line handling
capability of the 3705. See IBM 3704/3705 Communications
Controllers, Principles of Operations, GC30-3004, for further
details. Address Substitution should not be used on a 3705
containing a Communication Scanner, Type 1 or Type 3.
High Speed Select: For the 3705 with a Communication Scanner, Type 3, there are two methods of address modification:
Upper Scan Limits and High Speed Select, which allow the
Type 3 Scanner to operate with Line Set speeds greater than
4800 bps. For information on USL, see the IBM 3704 and 3705
Principles of Operation, GC30-3004. High Speed Select
(#9011,9012,9013,9014,9015,9016,9017,9018) may be
required when lines at speeds greater than 4800 bps are to be
installed. The specify feature blocks the installation of a Line
Set in a position whose address is not scanned. The choice of
3705-11
Nnt tn h~ r~nrnrlllr~rI withnllt writtAn nArrnic:.c:.inn
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$1,095
1,570
1,445
1,925
2,405
2,880
1,815
2,290
2,765
3,245
3,715
4,190
2,170
2,645
3,125
3,605
4,080
4,555
5,035
5,510
1,025
1,135
1,245
1,355
1,465
1,575
1,685
1,795
1,375
$ 40,800
58,550
54,100
71,850
89,600
107,350
67,400
85,150
102,900
120,650
138,400
156,150
80,700
98,450
116,200
133,950
151,700
169,450
187,200
204,950
38,230
40,580
42,930
45,280
47,630
49,980
52,330
54,680
51,530
$197
239
220
261
304
345
241
285
326
369
410
452
284
306
350
391
433
475
517
560
250
276
302
328
354
380
406
432
271
------- --- ----- ------===
':' =
M 3705.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
F2
1,745
1,485
F3
1,874
1,595
F4
2,003
1,705
F5
2,132
1,815
F6
2,261
1,925
2,390
2,035
F7
F8
2,519
2,145
G1
2,027
1,725
1,835
G2
2,156
G3
2,285
1,945
G4
2,414
2,055
G5
2,543
2,165
G6
2,;672
2,275
G7
2,801
2,385
G8
2,930
2,495
H1
2,438
2,075
H2
2,567
2,185
2,295
H3
2,696
H4
2,825
2,405
H5
2,954
2,515
2,625
H6
3,083
2,735
H7
3,212
H8
3,341
2,845
2,815
3,306
J1
J2
3,564
3,035
J3
3,822
3,255
J4
4,080
3,475
K1
3,717
3,165
K2
3,975
3,385
K3
4,233
3,605
K4
4,491
3,825
L1
4,128
3,515
L2
4,386
3,735
L3
4,644
3,955
L4
4,902
4,175
53,880
56,230
58,580
60,930
63,280
65,630
67,980
64,830
67,180
69,530
71,880
74,230
76,580
78,930
81,280
78,130
80,480
82,830
85,180
87,530
89,880
92,230
94,580
93,040
97,740
102,440
107,140
106,340
111,040
115,740
120,440
119,640
124,340
129,040
133,740
297
323
349
375
401
427
453
292
318
344
370
396
422
448
474
313
339
365
391
417
443
469
495
535
587
639
691
556
608
660
712
577
629
6&.1
733
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Control Unit
Purchase Option: 60%
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Useful'Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
Installation charges)
3705-1 to 3705-1
Additional
Module
$13,300
Additional Storage per 32K bytes 17,750
ATTACHMENT BASE, TYPE 1 (#1301). Provides interface logic
for Channel Adapter Type 1 and/or the Communication Scanner,
Type 1. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: # 1301 is only placed
in a 3705-11 when used in conjunction with Channel Adapter, Type
1.
ATTACHMENT BASE, TYPE 2 (#1302), Provides interface logic
for Communication Scanner, Types 2, 3 or 3 HS. Field
Installation: Yes. #1302 is required for Communication Scanner,
Types 2, 3 or 3 HS.
Notes: No more than one #1301 or #1302 is allowed per
3705.
Channel Adapter, Types 2, 3 and 4 contain the Attachment
Base logic within the logic of their respective features.
CHANNEL ADAPTER: The Channel Adapter provides the logical
interface between a 3705 and a S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. Every 3705 must have at least one Channel Adapter in the
first module (except those units having the Remote Program Loader (#6260». Channel Adapter, Type 1 can be placed in the first
frame of a 3705. When a second Channel Adapter is a Type 2 or
Type 3, then "ROS Substitution" must be specified on the first
module (3705) ... specify #9754. When there are two or more
Channel Adapters, Type 4, and the NCP /VS program product or
EP /VS with PRPa P85021 is installed, then "N ROS Substitution"
must be specified on every module in which a CA-4 appears.
Specify #9566. When ordering a Channel Adapter, use the specify
to indicate total number of CAs in the 3705 and 3706 combined
and place this specify on the first two frames (3705 and first
3706). If 1 CA, specify #9201 ... if 2 CAs, specify #9202 ... if 3
CAs, specify #9203 ... if 4 CAs, specify #9204.
External Cables: All Channel Adapters need external cables which
must be ordered separately from the Channel Adapter features.
Limitations and Prerequisites:
1) 3705-1 (first module) can contain one Channel Adapter, Type
1, 2, 3 or 4. The
(second module) can contain one
Channel Adapter, Type 2, 3 or 4.
2) When operating with ACF /NCP /VS the 3705-11 (first module)
can contain two channal adapters. The 3706 (second module)
can contain two channel adapters. If two channel adapters are
in one module (3705-11), at least one of the adapters must be
CA-4. When operating with greater than one CA-4 and EP /VS
with PRPa P85021, two CA-4s can be in the same module.
Note EP 3.0 standalone only supports one CA-4 in each module.
3) No Channel Adapters are allowed in the third or fourth module.
3705-11 models E, F, G to models F, G, H
The Channel Adapters can be mixed with the following exceptions:
Additional
Module
$13,300
Additional Storage per 32K bytes 2,350
4) CA 1 cannot be in a machine with either CA 4 or a Communication Scanner, Type 3, or a Communication Scanner, Type 3
3705-11 models F, G, H to models J, K, L
High Speed.
3705-11 model F8 to J1 ..... $25,060
3705-11 model G8 to K1 ..... $25,060
3705-11 model H8 to L 1 ..... $25,060
5) When either a CA 2 or CA 3 is in the 3705 '!fith a CA 4, the
CA 4 must be In the first module.
Additional storage per 64K
6) Channel Adapters, Type 1 and Type 4 must be used with
Emulation Mode of Operation and may be used with Network
Control Mode of Operation.
$4,700
From 3705-1 models to 3705-11 models
To 3705 -II
Mdls
7) Channel Adapters, Type 2 and Type 3 are used only with
Network Control Mode of the Network Control Program.
From 3705-1 Mdls
"A" Models
"E" Models $16,680 + (s)
"F" Models $29,980 + (s)
"0" Models $43,280 + (s)
"H" Models $56,580 + (s)
"B" Models
"e" Models
+ (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$29,980 + (s)
$43,280 + (s)
+ (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$IM80 + (s)
$29,980 + (s)
$16,680
$16,680
"D" Models
+ (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$16,680
(s) Plus $2,350 per additional 32K storage increment above
E1, F1, G1 or H1.
Examples:
A1 to E4 = 3 increments (E1 to E4) or $7,050 + the above
price of $16,680 for a total of $23,730.
C4 to H6 = 5 increments (H1 to H6) or $11,750 + the above
price of $29,980 for a total of $41,730.
8) Channel Adapter, Type 1 requires the Attachment Base, Type
1 as a prerequisite. Channel Adapters, Type 2, ·3 and 4 contain the attachment base function within their respective features.
9) For the 3705-11, if greater than two CAs are installed, the CAs
must all be CA-4s. Up to four CA-4s are allowed.
10) For the 3705-11, up to four I/O Channel Attachments are allowed (2 per frame).
11) For the 3705-11, Remote Program Load-II (#6261) can co-exist
with a Channel Adapter.
12) For the 3705-11, if two CAs are in the same frame, then no
Two Channel Switch (#8002) is allowed.
13) 3705-11 models J, K or L can not have a CA 1.
14) The Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (CS-3 HS) can
only be installed in a 3705-11.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ATTACHMENT BASES: The Attachment Base provides the physical and logical connection between the Channel Adapter Type 1
and the Central Control Unit and between the Central Control Unit
and the various Communication Scanners. There are two Attachment Bases. A 3705 must have at least one Attachment Base and
in some instances will have both Attachment Bases.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3705.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
The placement of various RPL/CA'and CA configurations is as
follows:
Allowable hardware Channel Adapter combinations with RPL/CA
installed:
3705-11
3705-11 Only
3705
LIB POI. 3
RPL
CA-4
IBI)
UB Pos. 2
I(AI)
UB POI. 4
CS-3
UB POI. 3
UB POI. I
UB POI. 4
CS-3
CS-3HS
B2)
UB POS. 2
(AI)
I(BI)
UB Pos. I
CCU
UB POI. 5
I(A3)
ccu
i(Al)
I(B3)
I(A4)
CA-2
CA-3
CA-4
CA-4
UB Pos. 6
I(B4)
I (A4)
Note: CS-3 and CS-3 HS take two positions.
Allowable Hardware Channel Adapter Combinations:
1st
2nd 3rd
4th
CA
CA
CA
CA
Type Type Type Type
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
CS-3HS
CA-I
CA-2
CA-3
CA-4
4
4
1
1
1
CS-2
CS-3
CS-3HS
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
Type
(Al)
I(B2)
CS-2
CS-3
(B4)
CA
RPL
CS-3HS
I(Al)
IB3)
1st
4
ROS
Type
Module LocaUon
4th
2nd 3rd
CA
CA
CA
CA
let
3705
1
Dual 3705
Dual 3705
2
3705
Dual 3705
Dual 3705
3705
2
Dual 3705
Dual 3705
1
3705
Dual··3705
3705
Dual 3705
l;N "3705
3705
N ··3705
··3705
N ··3705
ROS
Specify
Code #
9754
9754
9754
9754
9754
9754
3705 -
9754
3705 -
9754
9566
3705
3706
3705
9566
9566
•• - Available only on 3705-11.
Definition of the different ROS types:
(1) 1 - used to IPL over one channel-either a CAlor CA4. It may
be used to IPL over one or two CA4s if support programs for
ACF/NCP/VS are not installed. No specification code is required for the type 1 ROS.
(2) 2 - used to IPL over one channel-either a CA2 or CA3. No
specification code is required for the type 2 ROS.
(3) DUAL C'ROS Substitution") - used to IPL over one or two
channels-using any appropriate combination shown above.
Specification #9754 Is required for Dual ROS.
(4) N C'N p~s Substitution") - used to IPL over one of 2, 3 or 4
channels (all channels must be CA4s and the support programs
for ACF/NCP/VS Program Product or EP/VS with PRPQ
P8502l must be Installed). Specification #9566 is required for
N ROS.
(5) RPL - used to IPL remotely. There is a separate ROS for the
3705-1 remote and the 3705-11 remote. (Although remote is not
mentioned on this page, it is listed here for convenience). No
specification code is required for RPL ROS.
1
2nd
CA
Type
CA
Type
ROS
Type
4
RPL/l
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/2
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/2
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/l
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/N 3705
RPL/N 3705
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
4
Module Location
1st
2nd
3rd
RPL
CA
CA
3rd
CA
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 1 (#1541), For communication with
a S/360, S/370, or 4300 Processor byte multiplexer channel. All
such communications are accomplished via one, two, three or four
byte transfers, with deselection and 'reselection between each
transfer. Data transfer rates are primarily dependent upon the
3705's internal processing requirements. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See general description
above.
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 2 (#1542).
A high performance
adapter which supports communication with a S/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer or selector channel, or a 4300 byte
multiplexer or block multiplexer channel at data transfer rates of
up to 276 kilobytes/second (limited by system channel capability).
Transfer is always accomplished in "burst" mode, with a two-byte
"burst" standard on the byte multiplexer channel, and full "burst"
standard on the block multiplexer and selector channels. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
general description above.
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 3 (#1543). An adapter of the same
performance characteristics as the Type 2 (#1542) with the additional capability of an automatic two processor switch. It communicates with a virtual storage 5/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer, or selector channel (models 115 and 125 excepted), or a
4300 byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel. The switch,
part of the basic adapter, is primarily designed to furnish symmetric support for two tightly-coupled processors; i.e., each side of
the switch is connected to one of the two MP CPUs. Additionally,
this adapter can be attached to two channels from one CPU to
provide alternate path capability. For either tightly-coupled multiprocessor or single CPU attachments, data transfer occurs on only
one path at a time. Included as standard is a remote switch attachment capability to remotely control the switch from the configuration control panel of a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP, as well
as from the 2925 Remote Switching Console Model 10. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
general description above.
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 4 (#1544). A channel adapter which
provides attachment to 5/360 byte multiplexer channel (EP) or
5/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer or selector channel, or
4300 byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel. It supports
either a high performance Emulator Pro\lram running with a Type 3
Communication Scanner or Type 2 Communication Scanner or a
high performance Network Control Program running the same
scanners and Type 3HS Communication Scanner.
When attached to a byte multiplexer channel, the Type 4 transfers
bytes in "bursts" of up to 32 bytes prior to interrupting the control program when running in EP mode. In ACF /NCP /VS mode,
the Type 4 transfers in "bursts" up to 16 bytes and can transfer
up to 248 bytes prior to interrupting the control program.
In ACF /NCP /VS mode, when attached to a 5/370 block multiplexer or selector channel or 4300 block mlJltiplexer channel, the
Type 4 "bursts" up to 248 bytes and can transfer up to 248 bytes
prior to interrupting the control program.
When the Type 4 is supported using the ACF /NCP /VS Program
Product, the channel adapter operates in a cycle steal mode (data
is directly moved to or from storage, and after this is accomplished, the control program resumes its operation at the completion of this stolen cycle unless another "cycle steal" request is
pending). The cycle steal operation improves the 3705 throughput
when compared with NCP /VS support of CA4 by reducing the
number and complexity of control program interrupts.
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
---- ------ ---=
= =-:;;
--
M 3705.6
JUl79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (coni'd)
When attached to a byte multiplexer channel and supported by
NCP /VS, the Type 4 transfers in bursts of 4 bytes per control
program interrupt.
'
"!"
This channel adapter is necessary when using the Communications
Scanner, Type 3 in Emulation Mode.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8002).
To attach either Channel
Adapter, Type 1 (#1541) or Type 2 (#1542) or Type 4 (#1544)
to two S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor channels. which may be
on the same CPU or on two different CPUs. The Channel Adapter
so equipped will, however, be enabled for operation on one channel at a time. Selection of which channel is to be operable is by a
manual switch on the control panel. Prerequisite: Channel Adapter, Type 1 (#1541), Type 2 (#1542) or Type 4 (#1544).
Limitation: If two CAs in the same frame, then no #8002 is allowed; otherwise, one #8002 per Channel Adapter.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER FEATURES:
The Communication
Scanner Features provide the common logical connection between
the various Line Interface Bases with their respective Line Sets
and the Central Control Unit. Each module of a 3705 must have a
communication scanner if line sets are placed within the module.
There are three communication scanners, each with a different
merit of performance.
Field Installation: All communication scanners can be field installed.
Limitations:
1) One Communications Scanner per module. The communication
scanners Type 2 and 3 can be placed within a 3705 in any
combination.
2) A Communication Scanner, Type 1 (#1641) can only be
placed in the first module of a 3705-1, cannot be placed in a
3705-11.
3) A Communication Scanner, Type 1 cannot be in a 3705 with a
Communication Scanner, Type 2, or Type 3.
4) Each scanner must have at least one Business Machine Clock,
but not more than four Business Machine Clocks.
5) The Communication Scanner, Type 3 only supports attachment
of L1Bs 1, 8, 9 and 10.
6) Communication Scanner, Type 3 cannot be in the 3705 (first
module) of a 3705-1.
7) A Communication Scanner must be in a module containing
Line Interface Base(s).
8) A Communication Scanner, Type 1 (#1641) cannot be installed with the NCP /VS Program Product.
9) Communication Scanner, Type 3, must have Business Machine
Clock, specify #9615, and may have one other clock (specify
#9609 or #9610).
10) Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed, must have Business
Machine Clock (#4650), Specify #9615; no other clock is allowed.
11) Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed allows for the attachment of only Line Sets IGA (#4722) or ITA (#4723).
12) Address Substitution is not allowed in a 3705 with a Communication
Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (#1644). High Speed Select is not
allowed in configuration with line set IGA andfor line set ITA.
Prerequisites: Communication Scanner. Type 1 must have an
Attachment Base, Type 1 in the 3705. Communication Scanner,
Type 2, Type 3, and Type 3HS'must have an Attachment Base,
Type 2 in the 3705. A Communication Scanner located in a particular module requires a Communication Scanner in each preceding
module.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 1 (#1641). This feature has
a lower performance capability than the other scanners due to a
higher processing overhead requirement of data between storage
and the line sets on a bit by bit basis. The scanner interrupts the
control program each bit time so that the control program can
perform character assembly and disassembly and also allows for
program control of line control, control character recognition" code
translation and error recovery functions. No line speed over 7200
bps is allowed. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum: One scanner
per module. Limitations and Prerequisites: See general'description above.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 2 (#1642).
This feature
provides for medium performance operation. It provides for the
transfer of data between storage and the line sets on a byte-bybyte basis. The scanner assembles and disassembles characters.
This scanner interrupts the control program on a byte-by-byte
basis. The control program provides for the line control, control
character recognition, code translation and error recovery functions. Field Installation:, Yes. Maximum: One scanner per module.
Limitations and Prerequisites: See general description above.
basis. Data transfers between storage and the Communication
Scanner, Type 3 is accomplished on a storage cycle steal basis
(the CS-3 stops the control program for a machine cycle, moves
data to or from storage. At the conclusion of the data movement,
the control program resumes its operation at the point of the
interrupt, unless another "cycle steal" request is pending). This
feature supports only synchronous lines and' provides control
character recognition for BSC and SDLC line controls. It provides
ASCII to EBCDIC and vice versa code translation when operating
with BSC line control. The Communication Scanner, Type 3 interrupts the control program on either (up to 254 character) buffer
boundaries, or by unique control characters, or at certain error
conditions. It also provides for an auto-dial operation. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One scanner per module. Limitations
and Prerequisites: See general description above.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 3 HIGH SPEED (#1644).
The Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (#1644) is a modified
CS-3 (#1643) which allows line speeds up to 230.4K bps. Only two half
duplex data or one full duplex data line can be attached to this scanner.
Field Installation: Yes. Maximum: One scanner per frame. Limitations
and Prerequisites: See general description above.
LINE INTERFACE BASES (L1Bs). L1BS are used to provide the
physical attachment of Line Sets in the 3705. LIB, Type 1 should
be placed in LIB position 1, if Address Substitution or High Speed
Select is to be required in the 3705. The L1Bs with the highest
speed lines should be placed in the lowest LIB positions (position
'
1 is the lowest).
, FIGURE 1 - Maximum LIB Attachment Capability per Module:
L1BS
3705-1
Module
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
CS1
CS2
CS3
4
4
N/A
N/A
6
4
N/A
6
4
N/A
6
4
Module
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
4
3
1
6
4
1
6
4
1
6
4
1
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
3705-11
CS2
CS3
CS3 H.S.
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
(Note 6)
Note 1: L1Bs 1 through 1 2 can be attached to the Communication
Scanner, Type 1 and 2 on the 3705-1.
Note 2: L1Bs 1, 8, 9 and 10 will attach to the Communication
Scanner, Type 3 on the 3705-1 or 3705-11 (excluding Line
Sets 1A, 1B and 1C).
Note 3: LIBs 1 through 12 will attach to the Communication Scanner, Type 2 on the 3705-11.
Note 4: L1Bs 5 and 11 can only be placed in the 3705 (first module).
'
Note 5: Line Sets operating over 10,000 bps must be in LIB position 1.
Note 6: The Line Set addresses for CS3 H.S. are 0 and 2, only one LIB
1 can operate with a CS3 H.S.
Limitations: When installed with other L1Bs of the same or different type, the maximum cannot be exceeded. There are no restric-'
tions on intermixing L1Bs.
Prerequisite: A Communication Scanner is required in each module containing L1B(s).
FIGURE 2 - Line Attachment Conflgurator
The positions of the Line Interface Bases within the 37.05 and
3706(s) must be specified in accordance with the following table:
Positions
2
LIB Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
#9311
9321
9331
9341
9351
9361
9371
9381
9391
9401
9411
9421
3
4
5
6
#9312 #9313 #9314 #9315 #9316
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9335
9332
9333
9334
9336
9343
9345
9346
9344
9342
9352
9353
9354
9363
9364
9365
9366
9362
9372
9373
9374
9375
9376
9385
9386
9383
9384
9382
9392
9293
9394
9395
9396
9402
9403
9404
9405
9406
9412
9413
9414
9422
9423
9424
9425
9426
Important: Positions 1, 2. 3 and 4 apply to 3705
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 3 (#1643).
This feature
provides a high performance operation. It provides for data transfer between storage and the line sets on a multi-byte (buffer)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._--------- --------- ------------_.-
M 3705.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
The positions of the Line Sets within the LIB will, in most cases,
be automatically assigned. To determine if this automatic assignment is applicable, use the following flow chart:
FIGURE 3 - LIB-Line Set Configuration Chart
(Normally, the Specification Sheet
should be used only
if required by the flow chart below. If however, specific positions
for line sets are desired even when the Automatic Line Set Configuration is suggested, fill out the Specification Sheet and submit
it.)
Yes
Communication Scanner
Type 1 (#1641) Installed?
No
I
Line Set Type 10 (114 714),
1H (#4718) above 4800
bps or Line Set Type lG
(#4717), 1S (114720), IT
(;,4725), lU (#472&)
installed?
No
Yes
Special Type
Scheduled
System (see
"Note")
I-
Yes
Specification
Sheet
required
with order
Note: A "Special Type Scheduled System" is one in which the
3705 is effectively servicing two different TP networks on a scheduled basis. That is, one set of communication lines is serviced in
one time period and a second set of lines in a second time period
AND THERE IS NO OVERLAP OF THE TWO SYSTEMS IN TIME.
• If the line speed is over 10,000 bps, the line set must reside in line address
position 0, 2, 4 or 6 when attached to Communications Scanner, Type 2, or
reside in line address positions 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C or E when attached to
Communications Scanner, Type 3. Over 10,000 bps, the line sets must
reside in the first LIB, when attached to Communications Scanner, Type 2
or Type 3. NOTE: See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High Speed
Select under "Specify."
LIB
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 2 (#4702). Provides for attaching Line Sets which interface to TELEGRAPH circuits. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 3 (#4703) and TYPE 4 (#4704).
Provides for attaching IBM Limited Distance and leased line Line
Adapters. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 5 (#4705). Provides for attaching 2400 bps Leased Line Integrated Modems. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 6 (#4706). Provides for attaching 2400 bps Switched Network Integrated Modem. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1.
LIB
Type 3
Type
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 1 (#4701). Provides for attaching Line Sets which interface to EXTERNAL MODEMS, AUTO
CALL UNITS, or DIRECTLY ATTACHED TERMINALS. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1.
2
LIB
LIB
Ty~4
Type 5
line
Partition
Interface Within
LIB
I 2
3
.
I 4
I 5
b
7
8
9
A
B
I E
I F
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
LIB
Type 8
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I ~I ~I
~I ~I ~I
x
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 11 (#5001), Provides for attaching 2400 bps Integrated Modems with Duplex Data transmission
capability. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 12 (#5002). Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems with a bi-directional Interrupt
Signal. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE SETS: Line Sets provide the electronic logic to meet the
individual requirements of the communication facility. (See Figure
2 for attachment capability of Line Sets with respect to LlBs).
Note: All Line Sets except #4719 require external cables to be
ordered in addition to ordering the Line Set feature(s).
Line
Partition
Interface
Within
Address
on Lib
LIB
~
;
I :
C
o
I
LIB
LIB
Type
9
Type
LIB
10
Type 11
3
~I
~:
~I
4
:::
~I
:
:
:
:
b
.:.
~I
:
.
7
Legend
x I Denotes a pair of addresses used for a two line
X I interface line set if installed.
A I Denotes a pair of addresses used for a two autocall
A I interface line ~t if installed.
Denotes an unused address if this type of LIB is installed.
X
I Denotes a pair of addresses required for this line set
I if installed "." is an unused address.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
x
x
x
x
:-
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 8 (#4708). Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 10 (#5000). Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems with Duplex Data transmission
capability. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
LIB
Type
7
Address
on lib
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 7 (#4707). Provides for attaching 2400 bps Switched Network Integrated Modem and Auto Call
Unit -- no Line Sets required with this LIB. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 9 (#4709). Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems and Auto Call Units. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1.
LIB
Type
b
LIB
T pe12
-------- --- -------------_.-------
M 3705.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont"d)
T I Denotes a pair of addresses used for a single duplex data
R I line set if installed. Low order addresses are transmit
addresses. High order addresses are receive addresses.
X Denotes an address used for single line interface set if installed.
X! Denotes a pair of addresses used for a single line interface
A I line set with ACO if installed. A is the auto call
interface address for ACO.
LINE SET, TYPE 1A (#4711).
(Low Speed Start-Stop External
Modem) For attachment of two start/stop communication lines at
speeds up to 1200 bps. each of which has an EIA RS 232C interface for attachment to an external modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1B (#4712). (Low Speed Duplex Data External
Modem) Provides for the attachment of one start/stop duplex
communication line which has an EIA RS 232C interface at speeds
up to 1200 bps. This Line Set effectively combines two 3705
communication line ports into a true full-duplex data port. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1C (#4713).
(Low Speed Local Attachment)
For attachment of two half-duplex IBM start/stop terminals at
speeds up to 1200 bps via IBM-provided cables. Modems are not
required. Note: The attached terminal must provide a Business
Machine Clock and external modem cable to which the
3705/3706 Line Set, Type 1 C cable connects. Total cable length
must not exceed 200 feet. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 10 (#4714). (Medium Speed Terminal Interface
- via External Modems) This Line Set provides for the attachment
of external modem(s). One of the following attachments is permissable:
a) Two start/stop communication lines (up to 1200 bps over
non-switched facilities or 600 bps over switched facilities)
transmitting half duplex data using external modems with EIA
RS 232C interfaces.
b) Two synchronous communication lines (up to 9600 bps over
non-switched or switched facilities) transmitting half duplex
data using external modems with EIA RS 232C interfaces.
c) A Combination of one of each of the above.
Note: When operating this line set over 4800 bps refer to Address
Substitution and High Speed Select under "Specify." Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1E (#4715). (Auto Call Unit) Provides two RS
366 interfaces for attachment of external automatic calling units.
Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, limitations and Prerequisites:
See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1F (#4716). (Medium Speed Local Attachment)
For local attachment of two half-duplex. synchronous IBM terminals or 3767 at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided cables.
Modems are not required. This line set requires different cable
groups depending upon terminal type. For cabling information, see
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004; for Remote
see Multiplexers, GA27-3006. Note: The attached terminals must
be equipped with a Business Machine Clock and must provide a
standard external cable to which the 3705/3706 Line Set, Type
1F external cable connects. Total cable length must not exceed
100 feet. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1G (#4717).
(High Speed External Modem)
For attachment of one synchronous communication line for operation at 19.2K bps, or 50.0K bps. Has a digital interface for attachment to a switched or leased "wideband" external modem. See
Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High Speed Select under
"Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1 H (#4718). (Medium Speed Duplex External
Modem) For attachment of one duplex synchronous communication line at a speed up to 9600 bps which has an EIA RS 232C
interface for attachment to an external modem. This Line Set
provides for the transmission of data simultaneously in a transmit
and receive mode. Note: For speeds in excess of 4800 bps. see
Scan Limits. Address Substitution and High Speed Select under
··Specify·' are not allowed with this line set. Field Installation:
Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and
3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1S (#4720).
(Common Carrier 56,000 bps
Attachment)
Provides for the attachment of a single synchronous
CCITT V35 type interface to be used on a communication facility
at 56,000 bps. The 1 S Line Set may be operated at 14.400 bps
or 57,600 bps in conjunction with a 1W Line Set (#4727) in
another 3705. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High
Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: see Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1T (#4725).
(High Speed Duplex External
Modem) 50K bps. This line set will only run with the NCP Program ProdllCt. This line set provides for the attachment of one
duplex synchronous line which has a digital interface for attachment to an external data set for up to 50,000 bps leased or
switched wideband facilities (not program supported for switched
facilities). The control program must condition this line interface
for external clock control. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution
and High Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1U (#4726).
(High Speed Duplex External
Modem) 56K bps. This line set will only run with the NCP Program Product. This line set provides for the attachment of one
duplex synchronous line which has a CCITT V35 type interface for
attachment to a common carrier communication facility with line
speeds up to 56,000 bps. The control program must condition this
line interface for external clock control. The 1 U Line Set may be
operated at 14.400 bps or 57,600 bps in conjunction with a 1Z
Line Set (#4728) in another 3705. See Scan Limits, Address
Substitution and High Speed Select under "Specify." Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET TYPE IGA (#4711). (High Speed External Modem) For
attachment oj-one synchronous, half duplex data communication line for
operation up to 230.4K bps, has a digital interface for attachment to a
leased "wideband" external modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum:
Two per L.I.B., Type 1 (#4701). Prerequisites: Communication Scanner,
Type 3HS (#1644). Limitations: Up to two line sets of this type allowed
in the same 3705/06frame.
LINE SET TYPE ITA (#4723). (High Speed External Modem) For
attachment of one synchronous, full duplex data communication line for
operation up to 230.4K bps. Has a digital interface for attachment to a
leased "wideband" external modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum:
One per L.I.B., Type 1 (#4701). Prerequisites: Communication Scanner,
Type 3HS (#1644). Limitations: Only one line set per 3705/06frame.
LINE SET TYPE 1W (#4727). (High Speed Local Attach) 14.4K
or 57.6K bps half duplex data. This line set provides for local
attachment of a single half duplex synchronous device which has a
CCITT V35 type interface (similiar to Line Set Type 1 S). Clocking
is provided by #4651 such that the attached device must be set
for external clock control. The total cable length must not exceed
200 feet (60 meters). This is a combination of 150 feet (45 meters) of 3705 Line Set Cable and 50 feet (15 meters) of attached
device cable. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High
Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET TYPE 1Z (#4728). (High Speed Local Attach Duplex)
14.4K or 57.6K bps duplex data. This line set provides for local
attachment of one duplex synchronous device which has a CCITT
V35 type interface (similiar to Line Set Type 1 U). Clocking is
provided by #4651 such that the attached device must be set for
external clock control. The total cable length must not exceed
200 feet (60 meters). This is a combination of 150 feet (45 meters) of 3705 Line Set Cable and 50 feet (15 meters) of attached
device cable. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High
Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 2A (#4721). (Telegraph Single Current) For
the attachment of two single current telegraph lines. each of which
may be wired for 20 mA, 40 mA, or 62.5 mA single current termination. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
(Limited Distance Type 1 Line
LINE SET, TYPE 3A (#4731).
Adapter, 2-wire) For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop
lines at speeds up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (2-wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are
required. Note: Total wire length may not exceed 4.75 wire-miles
'.. see SRL GA24-3435' for further details. Field Installation:
Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and
3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1J (#4719).
(External Mil Std 188 Interface)
Provides for the attachment of one start/stop or synchronous
communication line at a speed up to 50.0K bps via an external
modem having an interface that conforms to the requirements in
Section 7.2.1 of Mil SId 188C. Note: No external cable is provided
with this Line Set. For speeds greater than 7200 bps, Communication Scanner, Type 2 (#1642) or Communication Scanner, Type 3
(#1643) is required. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limita. tlons and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 3B (#4732).
(Limited Distance Type 1 Line
Adapter. 4-wire) For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds
up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (4wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note:
Total wire length may not exceed 4.75 wire-miles ... see SRL
GA24-3435' for further details. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
* SRL GA24-3435-2
or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- =
------ ----=== ':"
M 3705.9
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
LINE SET, TYPE 4A (#4741). (Limited Distance Type 2 Line
Adapter) For attachment of two half-duplex start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps, Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 2
Line Adapters and no external modems are required, Note: Total
wire length of each line may not exceed 8,25 wire-miles ... see
SRL GA24-343S' for further details. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3,
LINE SET, TYPE 4B (#4742). (Leased line, Line Adapter, 2-wire)
For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop lines at speed up to
600 bps, Includes two IBM Leased Line, 2-wire, Line Adapters
and no external modems are required, Note: See SRL GA243435' for further details. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3,
LINE SET, TYPE 4C (#4743), (Leased Line, Line Adapter, 4wire) For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds up to 600
bps, Includes two IBM Leased Line, 4-wire, Line Adapters and no
external modems are' required, Note: See SRL GA24-343S' for
further details, Field Installation: Yes. ·Maxlmum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3,
LINE SET, TYPE 5A (#4751). (2400 bps Leased Point-to-point
Integrated Modem) Ff'lr attachment of one synchronous line at a
speed of 2400 or 1200 bps. The Line Set includes one 2400 bps
Integrated Modem equipped with Receive Equalization which is
suitable for communication over a leased voice grade channel with
an IBM modem similiarly equipped. No external modem is required,
This integrated modem must communicate with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or
equivalent IBM modem. Field Installation: Yes, Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 5B (#4752).
(2400 bps Leased Multi-point,
Control, Integrated Modem) For attachment of one synchronous
line at a speed of 2400 bps or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
one 2400 bps Integrated Modem which is suitable for communication over a leased voice grade channel with a similiar modem
equipped with both Transmit and Receive Equalization. No external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate
with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent IBM modem. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 6A (#4761).
(2400 bps Switched Network,
Integrated Modem) For attachment of one synchronous line at a
speed of 2400 bps or 1 200 bps. Used for operation over the
Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler Type
CBS (or equivalent). Automatic Answering of incoming calls will be
performed by the modem. Automatic Equalization is effected at the
beginning of each call. This modem communicates with either a
2400/1200 bps Integrated Modem or the 3872 Modem equipped
with a Switched Network feature. No external modem Is required.
Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites:
See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 8A (#4781). (1200 bps Leased Line Adapter)
Provides for the attachment of two start/stop or synchronous lines
at speeds up to 600 bps or at 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
two 1 200 bps Line Adapters suitable for communication over a
leased voice grade channel with similiar Line Adapters. No external modems are required. This integrated modem must communicate
with another 1200 bps IBM integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 8B (#4782). (1200 bps Switched Network Line
Adapter) Provides for the attachment of two start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps or two synchronous lines at speeds of 600
bps or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes two 1200 bps Line Adapters equipped with Auto Answer suitable for communication over
the Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler
CBS (or equivalent) with similiar Line Adapters. No external modems are required. This integrated modem must communicate with
another 1200 bps IBM integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 9A (#4791). (1200 bps Switched Network Line
Adapter with Automatic Call Originate) Provides for the attachment of one synchronous line at a speed of 1200 bps or 600 bps.
This Line Set includes one 1200 bps Line Adapter equipped with
the Automatic Answering and Automatic Call Originate functions
suitable for the automatic dialing of a remote terminal, the automatic answering of an incoming call and for communication over
the Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler
CBS (or equivalent) with a similiar Line Adapter (which need not
be equipped with the Auto Answer and Auto Call Originate features). No external modems or automatic call units are required.
This integrated modem must communicate with another 1200 bps IBM
integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations
and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 10A (#4784). (1200 bps Leased Duplex Data
Integrated Modem) For attachment of one duplex synchronous
line at speeds up to 1 200 bps. This Line Set includes one 1200
bps Duplex Data Integrated Modem. No external modem is re-
qui red. This integrated modem must communicate with another 1200
bps IBM integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 11 A (#4754). (2400 bps Leased Point-to-Point
Duplex Data Integrated Modem) For attachment of one duplex
synchronous line at speeds of 2400 bps or 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one 2400 bps Duplex Data Integrated Modem with
equalization suitable for leased duplex pOint-to-point operation. No
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent IBM modem, Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 11B (#4755). (2400 bps Leased Multi-point
Master Duplex Data Integrated Modem) For attachment of one
duplex synchronous line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one 2400 bps Duplex Data Integrated Modem without
equalization suitable for leased duplex multi-point master operation. No external modem is required. This integrated modem must
communicate with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent IBM modem.
Field Jnstallation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites:
See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 12A (#4785).
(1200 bps Leased Integrated
Modem with a Bi-directional Interrupt Signal) This Line Set provides for two modems communicating with IBM 3767 Terminals
operating in 2741 Line Control at a line speed of 300 bps using
two wire common carrier facilities. The customer must specify the
"No Echo Suppresgioii"' option from the common carrier. In addition to the above capability, the Line Set has the same functional
capabilities as Line Set, Type 8A two-wire facilities. This Line Set
includes two 1200 bps Leased Integrated Modems. No external
modem is required. This integrated modem"must communicate with
another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 12B (#4786). (1200 bps Switched Integrated
Modem with a Bi-directional Signal) This Line Set provides for
two modems communicating with 3767 Terminals operating in
2741 Line Control at the above capability. This Line Set has the
same functional capabilities as Line Set, Type 8B (#4732) and
includes two 1 200 bps Switched Integrated Modems. No external
modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with
another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
GENERAL FEATURES
UNIT PROTECTION (#8510). Provides"a lock on the 3705 that
deactivates all switches on the control panel (except power off and
power on) when the key is removed from the lock. Two keys are
included with this feature. For additional or replacement keys, see
"Locks and Keys" on M 10000 pages. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum: One per 3705.
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#4650). Within each communication channel there must be a clocking mechanism to time the data
rate. When this clocking mechanism is not provided by either the
communication facility or the "modem," then the 3705 must provide the clocking through the use of a Business Machine Clock.
The clock speed should match the data rate (in bits per second '"
bps). The Business Machine Clocks are contained within the Communications Scanner. A clock in a Communication Scanner cannot
be used by communication lines attached to a different Communication Scanner.
Each Communication Scanner, Type 1 or 2 must have at least one
Business Machine Clock, with each scanner limited to a maximum
of four clocks. If a Communication Scanner has at least one communication line attached where either the modem or the communication facility provides the clocking, then one of the possible four
clocks in the scanner must be less than one-half the speed of the
lowest externally clocked line attachment. All direct attached
terminals must have a Business Machine Clock in the 3705 which
matches the transmission rate (bps) of the terminal. Notes: [1] The
Business Machine Clock is assigned to a given communication line
interface under the control of the program operating in the 3705
... [2] For purposes of determining Business Machine Clock requirements, Line Set SA, SB, 6A and 11 A, and Line Interface
Base, Type 7 provide "modem clocking" ... [3] Communication
Scanner, Type 3 must have Business Machine Clock, specify
#9615 and may have one other clock (either specify #9609 or
#9610).
The following Line Sets must have a Business Machine Clock:
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
1A (#4711)
1B (#4712)
lC (#4713)
lF (#4716)
2A (#4721)
3A (#4731)
3B (#4732)
4A (#4741)
• SRL G A24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
4B (#4742)
4C (#4743)
8A (#4781)
8B (#4782)
9A (#4791)
lOA (#4784)
12A (#4785)
12B (#4786)
--- ----------= =- =~ =
M 3705.10
--
Jul79
OP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
The following Line Sets may require a Business Machine Clock if
the clocking is not supplied by the modem:
Line Set. Type 10 (#4714)
Line Set, Type 1H (#4718)
Line Set, Type 1J (#4719)
A Business Machine Clock is required for each speed; specify one
of the following speeds for each Business Machine Clock.
Speed (bpa) Specify
45.5
50.0
56.9
74.2
75.0
110.0
134.5
Speed (bps)
#9601
9613
9602
9803
9604
9605
150.0
300.0
600.0
950.0
1200.0
2000.0
2400.0
150. 600, 1200
9608
installed with any of the following: Channel Adapter, Type 1, 2, 3
or 4 (#1541-1544), Communication Scanner, Type 3 (#1643),
LIB Type 5 (#4705), or LIB Type 11 (#5001). Also see Extended
Environment (#3620) and Internal Air Circulation 1 and 2 (#4670
and #4671). Specify: For plant or field Installation, one of the
following must be specified, depending on the 3705 model Involved.
For "A" model - Specify #9591 (RPL Model A) on 3705.
For "B" model - Specify #9592 (RPL Model B) on 3705
Specify
#9611
9612
9607
9614
9608
9609
9610
9615·
For "C" model - Specify #9593 (RPL Model C) on 3705
For "0" model -Specify #9594 (RPL Model 0) on 3705
• Specify #9615 is only available with Communication Scanner, Type 3 (#1643) and is mandatory on Communication Scanner. Type 3 High Speed (#1644).
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#4651). when either Line Set Type
1W (#4727) or Line Set Type 1Z (#4728) Is located In a U.B.
Type 1 (#4701) then a Business Machine Clock must be added to
the L.I.B. Specify: #9621 for 14.4K bps, #9622 for 57.6K bps.
Prerequlaltea:1.1 #4727 or #4728 In L.I.B. position one.
Maximum: One per 3705/3706 module. Limitations: Must be
applied to L.I.B. 1 in position one of a 3705
,module.
3705-1 Model Change In the Field: If an Installed machine Is
already equipped with Remote Program Loader (#6260), specify
#9590 (RPL Already Installed) on
being ordered to
effect the model change to B, C or 0 as follows:
For model BFor model CFor model D•• These codes are described under Item 1 of "Specify".
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER (3705-1)
EXTENDED ENVIRONMENT (#3620). Applies to the 3705 in A
model, but to the last
in B, C, 0 models. Provides cooling
such that a 3705-1 with Remote Program Load (#6260) can operate In a Class B Extended Environment with a temperate range of
10° C to 37.8° C (50· F to 100· F). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Remote Program Loader (#6260) on the associated
3705-1 frame.
INTERNAL AIR CIRCULATION 1 and 2 (#4670, 4671). Internal
Air Circulation 1 (#4670) and Internal Air Circulation 2 (#4671)
provide for dissapation of the internal heat for the first and second
blocks of core storage respectively, in each module (3705/3706)
of the 3705-1. The following table Indicates which Air Circulation
features (#4670 and #4671) must be ordered for each module
depending on the 3705-1 model involved.
w #9751
3705
w #9752
w #9753
Cor. Storage Cor. Storage Core Storage Core Storage
Model
18K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
#4670 #4871 #4870 #4871 #4870 #4871 #4870 #4871
A2
B2
B3
B4
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER (3705-11)
REMOTE POWER OFF (#6250). This feature applies to both the
3705-1 and 3705-11, but the following detail reflects the requlr~
ments of this section (Remote 3705-11) only. Provides the capability of turning the 3705-11 power off with a command over a communication line. This feature is applicable to the 3705-11 when
then the 3705-11 is utilized only as a remote stand-alone.
Maximum: One per 3705-11. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Remote Program Loader - II (#6261).
REMOTE PROGRAM LOADER-II (#6261). For the 3705-11. Provides the means of remotely loading the NCP with or without a
Channel Adapter on the machine. Maximum: One per 3705-11.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: For the 3705-11, cannot be
installed with four Channel Adapter Type 4s (#1544), but any
other proper CA combination (see CA section) Is acceptable; also,
the RPL-II feature on the 3705-11 cannot be Installed with LIB Type
5 (#4705) or LIB Type 11 (#5001) unless there Is a Channel
Adapter also installed.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Maximum: Depending on the 3705 model, one #4670 and one
#4671 per 3705
as indicated in the above chart. Field
Installation: Yes.
REMOTE POWER OFF (#6250). This feature applies to both the
3705-1 and 3705-11, but the following detail reflects the requirements of this section (Remote 3705-1) only. Provides the capability
of turning the 3706-1 power off with a command over a communication line. Maximum: One per 3705-1. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Remote Program Loader (#6260).
REMOTE PROGRAM LOADER (#6260). For the 3705-1. Provides
the means of remotely loading the NCP Program when there is no
Channel Adapter on the machine. Maximum: One per 3705-1.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: For the 3705-1, cannot be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ----
---- ---_.- --------
M 3705.11
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
(cont'd)
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC
2 yr Purchase
Special Feature Prices:
Attach Base Type 1
#1301 $ 19 $ 16
Attach Base Type 2
1302
19
16
Channel Adapter Typ 1 1541
110
94
Channel Adapter Typ 2 1542
202 172
Channel Adapter Typ 3 1543
407 346
Channel Adapter Typ 4 1544
176 150
Comm Scanner, Type 1 1641
58
49
Comm Scanner, Type 2 1642
196 167
Comm Scanner, Type 3 1643
687 585
Comm Scanner, Type 3HS 1644
922
785
Extended Environment
3620
25
21
Business Machine Clk
4650
12
10
Business Machine Clk
4651
26
22
Internal Air Clrc 1
4670
12
10
Internal Air Circ 2
4671
6
5
Line Inter Base Type 1 4701
43
37
Line Set Type 1 A
4711
19
16
Line Set Type 1 B
4712
20
17
Line Set Type 1 C
4713
19
16
Line Set Type 10
4714
41
35
Line Set Type 1 E
4715
32
27
Line Set Type 1 F
4716
65
55
Line Set Type 1G
4717
83
71
Line Set Type 1 H
4718
71
60
Line Set Type 1J
4719
43
37
Line Set Type 1 S
4720
92
78
Line Set Type 1 T
4725
149 127
Line Set Type 1 U
4726
166 141
Line Set Type IGA
4722
83
71
Line Set Type ITA
Line Set Type 1 W
Line Set Type 1 Z
Line Inter Base Type 2
Line Set Type 2A
Line Inter Base Type 3
Line Set Type 3A
Line Set Type 3B
Line Inter Base Type 4
Line Set Type 4A
Line Set Type 4B
Line Set Type 4C
Line Inter Base Type 5
Line Set Type 5A
Line Set Type 5B
Line Inter Base Type 6
Line Set Type 6A
Line Inter Base Type 7
Line Inter Base Type 8
Line Set Type 8A
Line Set Type 8B
Line InterBase Type 9
Line Set Type 9A
Line Inter Base Typ 10
Line Set Type 10A
Line Inter Base Typ 11
Line Set Type 11 A
Line Set Type 11 B
Line Inter Base Typ 1 2
Line Set Type 12A
Line Set Type 12B
Remote Power Off
Remote Program Ldr
Remote Progrm Ldr-II
Two Channel Switch
Unit Protection
4723
4727
4728
4702
4721
4703
4731
4732
4704
4741
4742
4743
4705
4751
4752
4706
4761
4707
4708
4781
4782
4709
4791
5000
4784
5001
4754
4755
5002
4785
4786
6250
6260
6261
8002
8510
149
127
139 118
254 216
43
37
32
27
79
67
25
21
25
21
49
42
43
37
43
37
43
37
110
94
65
55
58
49
110
94
71
60
209 178
43
37
46
39
59
50
43
37
65
55
49
42
83
71
98
83
98
83
90
77
42
36
116
99
129 110
12
10
262 223
294 250
65
55
35SUC -
$
641
641
3,555
6,470
12,910
5,800
1,880
6,250
22,640
25,120
832
424
880
416
207
1,455
641
676
641
1,355
1,030
2.090
2,695
2,295
1,455
3,020
4,850
5,440
2,695
4,850
4,720
8,640
1,455
1,030
2,515
850
850
1,665
1,455
1,455
1,455
3,555
2,075
1,860
3,555
2,295
6.675
1,455
1,490
1,920
1,455
1,785
1,685
2,685
3,120
3,120
2,900
1,190
3,265
3,605
416
8,320
9,335
2,090
35
MMMC
.50
.50
15.50
15.50
18.50
13.50
10.00
15.50
52.00
62.00
HC
1.00
2.00
HC
HC
4.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
4;50
3.00
8.50
9.50
15.50
3.50
9.50
15.00
17.00
9.50
15.00
9.50
17.00
4.00
5.50
3.50
2.00
2.00
4.50
5.00
7.50
7.50
8.50
12.00
11.00
8.50
15.50
28.50
5.50
7.50
9.50
4.00
15.50
3.50
9.00
4.50
16.50
14.00
4.50
24.00
27.00
.50
45.00
41.00
4.00
HC
$
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
/
\(
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
M 3713
Jul79
DP Machines
3713 PRINTER
Purpose: Printer for all models of the 3741 (GSD product).
Highlights: Prints serially at a maximum rate of 40 cps, using the
EBCDIC character set. The maximum print line is 128 print
positions at 10 characters per Inch spacing. Line spacing is 6
lines per inch.
The unit has a pin feed platen which permits the feeding of
marginally punched continuous paper. A choice of 12-1/2,
13-1/8 or 13-7/8 inch hole-to-hole pin feed platen widths may be
specified for the basic printer ... see ."Specify." Smaller platens
(to 5-1/4 inches hole-to-hole width) and platen interchangeability
can be accommodated in conjunction with the adjustable margin
special feature ... see "Special Features."
Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires printing dots in
up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. Refer to SRL
GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and limitations. Up to
six-part forms can be printed with a maximum thickness of .018"
(for optimum feeding and stacking, no more than three parts are
recommended).
Card stock continuous
forms are not
recommended.
PREREQUISITES:
3713 Printer Attachment (#8111) and
appropriate Expansion Feature (#3891, 3892) on the 3741 Data
Station or 3741 Programmable Work Station. See GSD sales
manual.
Supplies: A black ribbon,
equivalent, is required.
IBM
part
number
1136970 or
Bibliography:
IBM 3741 Data Station Reference Manual,
GA21-9183, and IBM 3741 Data Station Operator Guide,
GA21-9131.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901 for 115 V,
#9902 for 208V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent
with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. FIELD INSTALLATION: Not recommended.
[3] Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2"
hole-to-hole), or #9168 for 128 print positions (13-7/8"
hole-to-hole).
Smaller pin feed platen widths can be specified in conjunction with
the Adjustable Margin Feature (#1115) ... see "Special Features."
NOTE: Do not order #9168 unless paper is available in your
area.
PRICES:
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
3713
Purchase MMMC
$ 174
$ 148
Warranty: B
$5,610
$72.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 35%
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADJUSTABLE MARGIN FEATURE (#1115).
Provides operator
adjustable right and left margin stops and accommodates
additional platen widths and platen interchangeability. For
available platen widths and feature numbers to be specified
(#9151 thru #9168), see M 10000 pages. To obtain additional
platens, see RPO
.. .
Field
Installation: Yes. Note: Do not select #9168 unless paper is
available in your area.
SpeCial Feature Prices:
Adj Margin Feature
MAC/
MRC
#1115 $
5
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 4
$ 218
$ 1
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature # indicated
below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking
after printing.
-------- ..----.
-'===':'=
---
-
M 3732
Jul79
DP Machines
3732 TEXT DISPLAY STATION
Purpoee: Provides a text entry and editing keyboard and display
for the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System.
Highlights: The 3732 consists of a display and keyboard (special
feature) that have been designed specifically to provide text entry
and editing facilities for the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System. The 3732 displays all the text characters that can be
entered at the keyboard and that can be printed by the system
printers (with the exception of certain compound characters printed by overstrlking). In addition, special graphic characters are
displayed to denote certain text control functions.
The display is a 15 Inch (diagonal) cathode ray tube display providing 24 lines of 80 characters each, to give a total of 1920
characters. For text entry and editing, lines 1 and 24 are reserved
for system use, leaving 22 lines for text entry (line 1 displays a
scale to indicate character position, and is used to display formatting Information such as margin settings and tab stops, and to
track cursor position: line 24 is used to display status information).
When, with user programming, the 3732 is used for full-screen
processing, the user has control over all 24 lines (except for minor
restrictions on the use of lines 1 and 24). The display includes an
anti-glare screen.
One of three keyboards may be ordered (as special features): a
77-key typewriter keyboard (#4621), a 77-key ASCII typewriter
keyboard (#4622), or a 75-key typewriter keyboard (#4623). The
keyboards contain a central text entry section that is similiar in
layout to typewriter keyboards. Both upper and lower case characters may be entered. In addition, the keyboards contain 29
function and control keys concerned with document creation,
editing, formatting, and printing. The 3732 must be Installed with
a keyboard.
Text functions: The following text entry and editing functions are
provided by the 3732:
- Automatic new line and word spill (allowing an operator to enter
text without being concerned about line endings)
- Temporary left margin (providing automatic indentation)
- Adjustable right margin
- Adjust and no-adjust entry mode
- Insert mode
- Tabulation (providing normal, decimal, and centering tab stops)
- Column tabulation (allowing an operator to enter tabular material, column-by-column)
- Required characters (new line, space, backspace, hyphen)
- Special characters (such as superscripts, subscripts, temporary
left margin)
- Delete character, word
- Backspace deletion
- Underscore character, word, or group of words (separated by
required spaces)
The following system functions are invoked using function keys on
the 3732 keyboard:
- Block Insert, copy, move, return, delete
- Delete line, sentence
- Screen advance, return
- Page advance, return
- (Go to) End, (Go to) Top of document
Additional 3732 functions include:
- Cursor-positioning keys to move the display cursor to any
position within the display area (up, down, left, right, and
"home" - the first available text character position)
- An audible alarm tone that, rather like the belt on a typewriter,
warns an operator that a line or a screen is nearly full (e.g., in
no-adjust mode the alarm tone sounds when a character is
entered or moved into a position five characters from the right
margin)
- a HELP key to aid users who have problems when operating
the 3732
- A PRINT key to send the currently displayed document to a
preaSSigned print queue, for printing as soon as the assigned
printer is available
- An Adjust key to adjust the line length of the currently displayed document and to divide the document into pages
• A Display key to allow or inhibit the display of certain special
characters (such as space, and tabs)
Security and Integrity Features: A Security Keylock (#6340)
helps prevent unauthorized use of the 3732. Text cannot normally
be displayed or modified unless the key is in the ON position.
Problem Determination Procedures: To minimize machine downtime, users are encouraged to determine the cause of 3732 malfunctions using IBM-provided Problem Determination Procedures.
Data obtained from these procedures is used to correct customer
operating or programming errors, or is passed to a customer
engineer to aid in isolating a machine malfunction. The Problem
Detemination Procedures are presented in an easy-to-follow graphic form and are contained in the 3732 Problem Determination
Guide, GA33-3024 (stored in the keyboard).
Publications: Refer to the latest level of IBM System/370 Bibliography of Industry Systems and Application Programs, GC20-0370,
for details of 3732 publications and 3730 system publications.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non lock plug. If standard 2.8
meter (g foot) power cable is not required, specify #9511 for
1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable,
or #9513 for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
[2] Cables: See M 10000 pages for cable prices and ordering
instructions. For cable specifications, see 3790 Communication
System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769.
[3] Character Set: Specify one of the following:
#9082 - for EBCDIC Character Set (word processing). Used
with 77-key Typewriter Keyboard (#4621) and 75-key
Typewriter Keyboard (#4623).
#9084 - for ASCII Character Set (B). Used with 77-key ASCII
Typewriter Keyboard (#4622).
PRICES
Mdl
3732
MRC
MLC
2 yrs
Purchase
MMMC
$98
$83
$2,905
$ 24
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up: No
SPECIAL FEATURES
KEYBOARDS (#4621, 4622, 4623).
#4621 - 77-key Typewriter Keyboard. movable. typewriter-like
layout, with 48 text entry keys and 29 function and control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4622 - 77-key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, movable, ASCII
typewriter-like layout, with 48 text entry keys and 29 function
and control keys. Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4623 -75-key Typewriter Keyboard, movable, typewriter-like
layout, with 46 text entry keys and 29 function and control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340).
A lock and key that normally
prevents modification or display of the data in the display when
the key is in the OFF position. For additional or replacement keys,
see M10000 pages. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
MLC,
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 2 yrs Purchase MMMC
Keyboards 77-key Typewriter
77-key ASCII
75-key Typewriter
Security Keylock
#4621 $ 14 $ 12
4622
14
12
4623
14
12
6340
35SUC -
$ 420
420
420
35
$ 2.50
2.50
2.50
N/C
Attachment to Controller: The 3732 attaches to a 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B, via a coaxial cable at a distance of up
to 609 meters (2,000 feet).
PREREQUISITES: 3791 Controller mdl 11 C. 12A or 12B, with
Configuration Support #9171 installed. Refer to 3791 in
"Machines" for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
\
------- --=-_. =---- --=----":' =
M 3735.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3735 PROGRAMMABLE BUFFERED
TERMINAL
Purpose: A programmable terminal capable of buffered source
document creation, concurrent data capture, and subsequent
batch transmissions via an integral binary synchronous communications adapter.
For possible use with the System/3, see GSD
manual
Highlights: The 3735 consists of a control unit and an associated
keyboard printer. The programmable control unit houses a fixed
disk facility, logic circuits, and a binary synchronous communications adapter.
Keyboard - an IBM Selectric" Keyboard with operator guidance
lights and switches.
Printer -- a Selectric II 15.5 cps printer with friction feed platen
(standard) or a pin feed platen (optional). Vertical forms movement, and automatic print element positioning can be provided by
the control unit.
Control Unit -- contains a non-removable disk with approximately
62.8K bytes of customer usable storage, plus the IBM written
terminal control program. Additional user storage is available in
two increments of 41.8K bytes each and a third increment of
167.5K bytes, for a total of 314.1K bytes. Installation of some
special features will reduce customer usable storage as shown in
the "Customer Storage/Feature Table." A binary synchronous
communications adapter for transmission rates to 4800 bps is
standard. The control unit provides the focal point for application
interaction with customer Form Description Programs, the IBM
written subroutines, and the operator guidance lights and switches
on the keyboard.
Customer Storage/Feature Table -- the addition of special features singly or in combination with other features will decrease
customer usable storage as follows:
Feature
1.
2.
3.
4.
Total Storage Reduction
#7880 and/or #4600
#4001
#4001 and 1 above
#1450 alone or with 1, 2 & 3 above
1904
3808
5712
7616
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
Output Printer - the 3286 Printer mdl 3 can be attached for 66
cps output printing.
Security Enhancement Features - the Print Suppress capability
(standard) allows selected data fields to be entered without being
printed. The Keylock (special feature) is a key-operated switch
which is located on the terminal control unit. When the switch is
in the "off" pOSition, no keyboard/printer operations are possible.
Previously recorded data may be sent to the computer and data
may be received from the computer provided the terminal was set
up for this operation prior to the Keylock being set to the "off"
position.
The Operator Identification Card Reader (special feature) is provided to enter terminal operator identification. This enhances the
programmed control of the operator's access to data and allows
an audit of his actions. The reader may also be used to enter any
sequence of numeric characters pre-recorded on a card for other
purposes such as transaction control, account control, and billing.
The Operator Identification Card Reader also reads the Magnetic
Credit Card announced for the 2730 Transaction Validation Terminal.
Transmission - the 3735 operates in half-duplex mode over
facilities C4, C5, 03, 04, D4SB, 05, D5SB, X1 M or X2M ... for
details concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages.
Binary Syachronous Transmission - allows for transmission
rates of 1200, 2000, 2400 or 4800 bps.
The 3735 can communicate over multi-point or dial facilities to
5/360 mdls 22 thru 195, or any 5/370 or.4300 Processor. See
"Programming" section for information on programming support.
Transmission Code - one of two codes can be selected ... see
"Specify" for EBCDIC or ASCII options.
Modems used.
one Integrated Modem or External Modem can be
The standard 3735 provides a cable and standard EIA interface
for connection of IBM Modems or non-IBM Data Sets at transmission rates of 1200, 2000, 2400 or 4800 bps. See "Special
Features" for Integrated Modems that may be used instead of an
external modem/data set. Switched network operation and Auto
Answer are standard on the 3735. Multipoint Data Link Control
(#5010) is required for leased point-to-point or multipoint operation. Synchronous Clock (#7705) is required for 1200 bps operation.
Speed
(bps)
Facility
(1)
Integrated
Modem (1)
1200
1200
2000
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
C4
03
C5M/D4M
#5501
5500 (2)
2400
4800
4800
4800
X1M
4800
4800'
IBM External 37.35 Prereq
Modem (1)
Feature
#7705
5010 & 7705
None/501O
D4 (mullipl or pl-t-pl)
3863-1
5010
C5
04 (multipt)
04 (pt-to-pt)
D4SB
3872-1
3872-1
3872-1
None
5010
5010
5610
5602
5600
5602 or 5600
and 7951
3872-1
5010
5010
D5 (mullipl or pl-I-pl)
3864-1
5010
C6
05, D5SB
(pt-to-pt)
05, D5SB
(multipt)
X2M
3874-1
None
3874-1
5010
3874-1
5010
5010
NOTES: (1) For communication:. capabilities, modem utilization,
and special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874 and
M 2700 pages.
(2) C1 conditioning not required.
Customer Responsibilities - it is recommended that a telephone
handset, which may be used to originate a call over common
carrier Public Switched Facilities, be provided within 15 feet of the
3735 to facilitate maintenance. For additional responsibilities also
see M 2700 pages. In addition, since the 3735 is designed for
sequential processing of customer applications, proper forms
design is a customer responsibility.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 VAC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug - #9880, or non-lock plug - #9881.
[2] Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC, or #9762 for ASCII.
The 3735 keyboard and print element support the mono case
64-character ASCII and is supplied when #9762 is specified.
LIMITATION: Not recommended for field installation.
[3] Print Element: If EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is specified, Print Element (Part No. 1167043) is supplied and need
not be specified. If ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is specified, Print Element (Part No. 1167167) is supplied and need
not be specified. With #9762, if a Dual Case element (Part
No. 1167168) is desired, see pages TC 21 and TC 23 in
"Type Catalog."
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3735
1
$ 369
$11,390
$98.00
Purchase Option: 50%Machine Group: A
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
SPECIAL FEATURES
AOO'L CUSTOMER STORAGE, 1st INCREMENT (#1001). Provides an additional 41.8K bytes of user storage. Together with the
standard customer area of 62.8K, total user storage becomes
104.7K bytes. Field Installation: Yes.
AOO'L CUSTOMER STORAGE, 2nd INCREMENT (#1002). Provides a second increment of 41.8K bytes of user storage. Together with the standard area, plus # 1001, the total user storage
becomes 146.6K bytes. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Add'i Customer Storage, 1st Increment (#1001).
AOO'L CUSTOMER STORAGE, 3rd INCREMENT (#1003), Provides an additional 167.5K bytes of user storage. Together with
the standard area, plus #1001 and #1002, the total user storage
becomes 314.1 K bytes. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Add'i Customer Storage, 1st Increment (#1001)
and 2nd Increment (#1002). Limitation: Only 3735s serial No.
12001 and later· can have this feature field installed.
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1450),
Adds three 480-byte dynamic
buffers that provide fast access local storage for user buffers and
counters. Two index counters are supplied with this feature or
with File Storage Capability (#4001). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Customer storage is reduced by
7,616 bytes total when this feature is installed singly or in combination with any other special features.
See "Customer
Storage/Feature Table" under "Highlights."
. 5496 ATTACHMENT (#3950). To attach a 5496 Data Recorder
mdl 1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
3735 Attachment (#7801) on the 5496.
FILE STORAGE CAPABILITY (#4001).
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
Permits user access to a
-------- ----
- ----- --===
':' =
DP Machines
3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal (cont'd)
portion of the 3735 disk storage for storage and retrieval of records that are coded with a simple identification key. The maximum record size, including an identification key and two data
delimiters, is 236 bytes. The identification key can range from 1
to 15 bytes. Two index counters are supplied with this feature or
with Buffer Expansion (# 1450).
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations and Restrictions: There is no
additional reduction of customer storage of 7,616 bytes when this
feature is installed in combination with Buffer Expansion (#1450).
On machines without #1450, this feature reduces customer storage by 3,808 bytes. See "Customer Storage/Feature Table"
under "Highlights."
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION CARD READER (#46(0). A small
(approximately 3" x 4" x 6") self-enclosed device for reading
information from a Magnetically Striped and Encoded 1.0. Card
and a Magnetic Credit Card (2-1/8" x 3-3/8"). An 8-foot cable is
provided to accommodate table-top use. Power Is supplied by th.e
3735. .
Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
Storage/Feature Table" under "Highlights."
See
"Customer
KEYLOCK (#4695). A key operated switch located on the control unit. When the switch is in the "off" position, no I/O is possible from the printer/keyboard. The control unit may be used for
transmission provided it was set up to do so prior to keylock being
set to the "off" position. This feature supplies two keys. For
additional or replacement keys, see "Locks and Keys" in M
10000 pages. Field Installation: Yes.
MULTIPOINT DATA LINK CONTROL {#501 0).
Required for
leased line attachment (point-to-polnt and multipoint). Allows
multiple 3735s to be used on the same communications line with a
CPU. Terminal can be polled or selected when acting as a tributary station in a multipoint system. All 3735s installed on the same
line facility require this feature, and they must use the same transmission code and modem ... see Modems and M 2700 pages.
Field Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500). A modem for operation at 1200 bps over leased 2-wire or 4-wire voice-grade channel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Synchronous Clock (#7705) ... Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010) is
required for leased point-to-point and for multipoint operation.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 2400 BPS Integrated Modems (#5600, #5602, #5610). The communicating transmission
control unit, ICA or Communications Adapter on a 4331 must be
equipped with a 1 200 BPS Integrated Modem, or the IBM 1200
BPS Line Adapter.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO ANA modem with auto answer for operation at
SWER (#5501).
1200 bps over a switched telecommunications network via a
Telephone Co. supplied Data Access Arrangement Type CBS, or
equivalent. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Synchronous Clock (#7705). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
2400 BPS Integrated Modems (#5600, #5602, #5610). The
communicating transmission control unit, ICA or Communications
Adapter on a 4331 must be equipped with 1200 BPS Integrated
Modem, or the IBM 1200 BPS Line Adapter.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, POINT-TO-POINT (#56(0).
An Integrated self-clocked modem for 2400 bps operation on
polnt-to-polnt communications facilities ... 2- or 4-wire connection.
Half speed capability is standard. Compensation for line distortion
is via operator adjustment on the 3735 operator panel. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Submit an RPQ for
operation on a basic 3002 channel. Multipoint Data Link Control
(#5010). Limitation: Cannot be installed with Synchronous Clock
(#7705), 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501), or
2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5602 or #5610). This modem will
operate with the IBM 3872 Modem equipped with Point-to-point
Feature (#6101 or #6102).
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, MULTIPOINT (#5602).
An
Integrated self-clocked modem for 2400 bps operation as a tributary station in a centralized multipoint network ... 4-wire. Half
speed capability is standard. Compensation for line distortion
between the control and the tributary station Is via operator adjustment on the 3735 operator panel. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prereql.lsites: Submit an RPQ for operation on
a basic 3002 channel. Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Synchronous Clock (#7705),
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501), or 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5600 or #5610). All tributary stations in the
multipoint centralized network must be equipped with 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem, Multipoint or the IBM 3872 Modem with Multipoint Tributary (#5101 or #5102). The master station may be
equipped with the IBM 3872 Modem-Basic.
M 3735.2
Jul79
matic equalization is effected at the begjnning of each call. Attachment to the network is via common carrier Data Access Arrangement Type CBS, or equivalent. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Synchronous Clock (#7705), MultipOint Data Link Control (#5010), 1200
BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501), 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5600 or #5602), or Switched Network Backup
(#7951). This modem is compatible with the IBM 3872 Modem
equipped with Swltc~d Network-Basic (#7941) or Switched
Network-Second (#7S42). In addition, this modem may communicate with a 3872 modem equipped with Switched Network Backup (#7951 or #7952). The control station may be equipped with
Automatic Call Originate (#1091).
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705). A synchronous clock for use
with 1200 BPS Integrated Modems or data sets which do not have
an internal clock. The device with which the 3735 is to communicate with must also have an internal clock operating at the same
bps rate. Field Installation: Yes.
3286 PRINTER MOL 3 ATTACHMENT (#788O).
To attach a
3286 Printer mdl 3 (66 cps). A 3735 with EBCDIC Transmission
Code (#9761) requires a 3286 mdl 3 with EBCDIC Character Set
(#9089). A 3735 with ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) requires
a 3286 mdl 3 with ASCII Character Set (B) (#9092). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. See "Customer Storage/Feature
Table" under "Highlights."
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capability of attaching the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, Multipoint
(#5602) or the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, Point-to-Point
(#5600) to the switched telephone network as a back-up to the
prime leased facility. A fixed compromise equalizer is provided for
back-up operation. Attachment to the switched telephone network, is made via the common carrier Data Access Arrangement
Type COT, or equivalent. Calls on the switched network must be
established and answered manually. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem
(#5600 or #5602). Limitations: Cannot be installed with 2400
BPS Integrated Modem, Switched (#5610) or with 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501). For OS/DOS BTAM programming considerations at the CPU, refer to Switched Network
Back-up under 3872 and Appendix "C" of IBM 3872 User's
Guide, GA27-3058.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Additional Customer Storage
1st Increment
#1001 $ 33 $1,035
2nd Increment
1002
33
1,035
3rd Increment
1003
77
2,425
Buffer Expansion
1450
28
867
5496 Attachment
3950
28
867
File Storage Capability
4001
13
416
Operator Identification
Card Reader
4600
16
520
Keylock
4695
35SUC
35
Multlpt Data Link Control
5010
16
520
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
16
5500
535
1200 BPS Integrated Modem,
Switched w Auto Answer
5501
21
714
2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Point-to-Point
70
1,905
5600
Multipoint
77
5602
2,115
Switched
5610
78
2,170
Synchronous Clock
7705
16
520
3286 Printer Mdl 3 Attach
7880
16
520
Switched Network Back-up
7951
10
303
$1.00
1.00
3.00
3.00
1.00
1.50
4.00
NC
1.00
3.50
4.00
13.50
16.00
16.00
1.00
1.00
4.00
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below, or Part No. shown in M 10000 pages, at the price listed in
M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages for additional Information
and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509) - In lieu of standard friction feed
platen. Maximum: One. See M 10000 pages for available options and additional #s to be specified. Limitations: Only 6
lines/inch spacing is available. Maximum width pin feed platen
which can be used is 13-1/8" hole-to-hole.
Forms Guide/Roil Paper Holder - an accessory that provides
guide for continuous forms or for mounting rolls of paper. Includes a tear bar. Interchangeable with the vertical form guide
which is standard on the 3735. Available for field installation
only.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED {#561 0).
An
Integrated self-clocked modem for 2400 bps operation over the
switched telephone network facilities. Automatic answer and
manual half-speed capability are standard with this feature. Auto-
Nnt tn hI' rpnrnr!III'Pr! withnnt writtpn n<>rmi .... inn
-------- --------------- -- ------
M 3736
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3736 PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hard copy output for the 3730 Distributed
Office Communication System.
Highlights: The 3736 Printer is a bidirectional, serial impact
printer used with the 3730 Distributed Office Communication
System. The printer is mounted in a desk-high work station that
contains the printer control electronics and power supplies. The
work station has a knee hole to allow the user to sit at the printer
while performing operations such as changing the paper or the
print ribbon. To reduce noise, the printer has an acoustic hood.
The 3736 prints on single sheets (cut forms) or on continuous
stationery, using a maximum of one original plus five carbon copies. An end-of-form sensor indicates when the printer is out of
continuous stationery.
Friction paper feed is standard for single sheets. For feeding
continuous stationery, a variable-width forms tractor (#8750) is
available as a special feature. In addition, a paper stacker/tray
(#5545) and a paper carrier (#5540) are available as accessories
for use with continuous stationery. The variable-width forms tractor and the two accessories 'are necessary for optimum feeding of
a wide range of continuous stationery. The variable-width forms
tractor alone permits satisfactory feeding of only a limited range of
continuous stationery.
Printer Characteristics:
Uses interchangeable 96-character print wheels in the following type styles:
Courier 10
10-pitch
Prestige Pica
10-pitch
1 2-pitch
Prestige Elite
Letter Gothic
12-pitch
- Prints at up to 55 characters per second.
- Prints at six line per inch (single line spacing).
- Uses 3736 film ribbon. An end-of-rlbbon sensor indicates
when the print ribbon needs replacing.
Paper Characteristics:
- The maximum paper width is 381 mm (15 inches), with a maximum writing line of 330mm (13 inches). The maximum paper
thickness is 0.6mm (0.025 inches).
- For specifications of forms that can be used on the 3736, see
Form Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488.
Attachment to Controller: The 3736 attaches to a 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B via a coaxial cable at a distance of up to
609 meters (2,000 feet).
PREREQUISITES: 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B with
Configuration Support #9171 installed. Refer to 3791 in
"Machines" for details.
IBM will replace worn or damaged IBM print wheels at no
charge to the customer on IBM 3736 machines covered by an
IBM Lease, Rental, or Maintenance agreement provided that
the wear or damage is due to normal machine usage. Replacement will only be made with an IBM print wheel of the same
specifications.
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yrs
Purchase
MMMC
3736
1
$250
$213
$7,455
$ 82
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up: No
SPECIAL FEATURES
Feeds continuVARIABLE-WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8750),
ous forms up to a maximum width of 368mm (14.5 inches).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Variable-Width Forms
Tractor
#8750
MLC
2 yrs
$250SUC
Purchase MMMC
$ 250
N/C
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature number
indicated below at the price listed in the M10000 pages. For all
other orders, see M10000 pages.
PAPER STACKER/TRAY (#5545) -- Holds fan-fold continuous
form paper and stacks the paper as it leaves the printer.
PAPER CARRIER (#5540) -- Guides the paper onto the paper
stacker /tray as the paper leaves the printer. The paper carrier
also has a tear-off blade and rod to hold continuous roll paper.
ADDITIONAL PRINT WHEELS - Additional print wheels for typestyles required other than the two specified with the 3736 order
should be ordered as accessories.
SUPPLIES:
PRINT RIBBON - Use IBM 3736 film ribbon, IBM Part No.
1 299060 or equivalent
NOTE: It is the customer's responsibility to purchase print ribbons,
and to ensure that they are available in time for machine installation.
Attended Operation: The 3736 is designed for attended operation: that is, operator intervention may be required from time to
time while the 3736 is in use. The 3736 must not therefore be left
unattended for long periods at a time, and should not be left
running unattended overnight.
Problem Determination Procedures: To minimize machine downtime, users are encouraged to determine the cause of 3736 malfunctions using IBM-provided Problem Determination Procedures.
Data obtained from these procedures is used to correct customer
operating or programming errors, or is passed to a customer
engineer to aid in isolating a machine malfunction. The Problem
Determination Procedures are presented in an easy-to-follow
graphic form and are contained in the 3736 Operating Instructions
(GA33-3027), and also in the Problem Determination Guide for the
3732 Text Display Station (GA33-3024) (stored in the 3732 keyboard).
Publications: Refer to the latest level of IBM System/370 Bibliography of Industry Systems and Application Programs, GC20-0370,
for details of 3736 publications and 3730 system publications.
Specify: [1] Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9891
for non lock plug.
[2] Cables: See M10000 pages for cable prices and ordering
instructions. For cable specifications, see 3790 Communication.
System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769.
[3] Print Wheel Character Set: Specify one of the following: #9082 for EBCDIC character set (word processing), or #9084
for ASCII character set (B).
[4] Print Wheel Typestyle: Specify
Prestige Pica
10-pitch
Courier - 10
10-pitch
Prestige Elite
12-pitch
Letter Gothic
12-pitch
MRC
two of the following:
#9471
#9472
#9474
#9475
NOTE: Two print wheels of each selected typestyle will be
shipped with the 3736 printer.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3760
Jul79
DP Machines
specify #9393 for ASCII.
3760 DUAL KEY ENTRY STATION (Models 1 and 2)
3760 KEY ENTRY STATION (Model 3)
Proof versions have the alphameric keyboard with a numeric
key arrangement similar to that of an adding machine.
Purpose: Used to key data onto the 3791 Controller disk. The
disk in the 3791 is used as a data storage medium prior to transmission of batched data by channel or SDLC communications
facilities to any virtual storage 5/370 or 4300 Processor. Data
extraction can be done by diskettes.
All 3760 model 2s will have the same arrangement as the attached 3760 mdl 1. If required, specify:
#9425 for proof keyboard, ASCII
#9426 for proof keyboard, EBCDIC
Prerequisite: Storage Extension (#7115) (mdl 1 only) and
Configuration Support #9175 or #9195 on the 3791.
Model 1
A Dual Key Entry Station ... Display Panel ... attaches to the 3791 with Device Attachment Type I
(#7900) or Device Attachment Type I, Additional
(#7922).
Model 2
Same external appelilrance as Model 1. The first
Model 2 is attached to Model 1 via 3760 Model 2
Attachment (#7920). The second Model 2 is attached to Model 1 via a second 3760 Model 2 Attachment (#7920).
[5] Command Keys: #9079. Provides, through the command key
at the left side of the space bar, the ability to issue commands
- HELP ... COPY ... FLAG ... ACCEPT ... RETURN ... CONTINUE SEARCH ... SAVE ... FORMAT DISPLAY ... by pressing the
command key ·first and then the appropriate top row key of the
keyboard. A sticker on the keyboard cover, just above the top
row, identifies· the command functions of the keys. MAXIMUM:
Two per 3760 mdls 1 and 2 ... one per mdl 3. FIELD
INSTALLATION: Yes.
PREREQUISITE: Storage Extension
(#7115) on the 3760 mdl 1.
Model 3
A single Key Entry Station ... Display Panel. Has
same functional characteristics as model 1. Attaches
to the 3791 with Device Attachment Type I (#7900)
or Device Attachment Type I, Additional (#7922).
Can be optionally attached to up to four 3791 Controllers simultaneously with the capability to switch
between them. 3760 mdl 25 cannot be attached.
[6} Conditional Display: #9220. This option may be specified to
prevent keyboard overrun in some situations.
The function works on all
operator positions attached to the model 1 with this feature.
Maximum: One per 3760 mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Storage Extension (#7115) (mdl 1 only) and
Configuration Support #9175 or #9195 on the 3791.
Model Changes: Model conversions cannot be made.
Highlights: Model 1 and Model 2 - each physical station provides
two keyboard operator positions each with keyboard and display
panel area. Model 3 - provides one operator position with keyboard and display panel area.
Has buffered storage area into which data is keyed prior to recording on the 3791 disk storage thus allowing for correction of
detected errors before record is stored. Formats control the automatic functions of skipping, duplicating, editing, etc. Modes of
operation are under keyboard control.
For systems capabilities, see 3790 Communication System/Data
Entry Configuration in 3790 ·'Systems" pages.
Keyboard -- has a standard 66 character alphameric combination
keyboard with "EL" character set for key entry and verifying. In
addition to standard keys, the keyboard has: Record-FieldCharacter Backspace
Field-Character Advance ... Auto
Sklp/Dup and Auto Enter Key Switch ... Display Record ... Next
Format ... Record Position .. Insert and Delete ... Cursor Up and
Down ... Cursor Placement at Command Line ... Mark Record and
Scan Next Record Keys. Command Keys (#9079) are provided as
a Specify feature. Optionally available are ASCII Keyboard and
proof arrangements of both the EBCDIC and the ASCII keyboards.
Display Panel - up to 236 characters can be displayed to each
operator ... six rows of 40 positions each ... first row is the Command Line on which messages, commands, error types, and mode
of operation are displayed ... rows two thru six display keyed data
as it is entered ... a fill-In-the-blanks format may be displayed and
as data. is entered the cursor will automatically skip over the indicative format data ... Status Indicators ... on the left and right side
of the panel... left side indicators are; Operator Attention, Auto
Sklp/Dup, Display Record, Auto Enter, and Verify Mismatch ...
right side indicators are; Operator Attention, Station Available,
Enter, Ve~lfy, Insert Mode and Dup Not Allowed.
PREREQUISITES:
For 3760 Model 1 and Model 3 - 3791 Controller with Device
Attachment Type I (#7900) or Device Attachment Type
I Additional (#7922), Additional Disk Heads (#3220,
3221), Control Storage Extension (#1590), and one or
more Control Storage Increments (#1602, 1612) .
PRICES: Mdl
3760
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 259
141
188
$ 220
120
160
MMMC
$9,240
$49.50
35.00
43.50
5,040
6,770
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). [Mdl 1, 3 only] A key operated
switch. When the switch is in the "locked" pOSition, entry of data
into the 3760'mdl 1s, mdl 3s, and all mdl 2s attached to mdl 1s is
prevented. Field Installation: Yes. Note: For additional and/or
replacement keys, see M 10000 pages.
SELECTOR SWITCH (#6660).
[Mdl 3 only] Provides a four
position rotary switch, allowing a 3760 mdl 3 to be switched
between up to four 3791 Controllers. Maximum: One per 3760
mdl 3. Field Installation: Time of manufacture only. Prerequisite:
Security Keylock (#6350).
STORAGE EXTENSION (#7115). [Mdl 1 only] Provides additional storage in 3760 mdl 1, permitting installation of Command
Keys (#9079), Proof Keyboard #9425 or #9426 on the 3760
mdl 1 and 2, and Conditional Display #9220 on the 3760 mdl 1.
Maximum: One per 3760 mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes.
3760 MODEL 2 ATTACHMENT (#7920). [Mdl 1 only] To attach
one 3760 mdl 2 to a 3760 mdl 1. Maximum: Two (#7920) per
3760 mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Security Keylock
#6350 $35SUC Selector Switch
24
$ 20
6660
Storage Extension
7115
16
14
3760 Mdl 2 Attachment 7920
12
10
. For 3760 Model 2 - 3760 Model 1 with 3760 Model 2 Attachment (#7920).
For details, see M 3791 pages.
Bibliography:
Purchase
GC20-0370
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug
- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock Plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or
#9887 for 230 V. NOTE: Model 1 and the tWo attached Model
2s require the same power specifies.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. NOTE: Color accent is provided on the knee
panel only and may be any of the above colors ... Top and
Side panels will always be white.
[3} Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3760 cable prices and orderIng Instructions. For cable specifications see SRL Physical
Planning Manual for 3790 System, GA27-2769.
[4} Keyboard Arrangements: EBCDIC is standard. If required,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$
35
864
329
420
NC
$7.50
2.50
.50
--------- ------.:. =-= == ';' ==
M 3762.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
performed intermixed with payment transaction processing. For
system capabilities, see "3790 Communication System/Data Entry
Configuration" in "3?90 Communication System" pages. GA334570 gives the Introduction and GA33-4571 gives the Functional
Description of the IBM 3790 Communication System using the
3762.
?~o)
_)
i
I
IBM 3762 PAYMENT TRANSACTION
PROCESSOR
Purpose: To process payment transactions by scanning OCR-A
encoded data from turn-around documents (stubs), validating
keyed-in payment amounts and storing selected payment information onto the disk in the 3791 Controller, to which the 3762 attaches. One-step processing is achieved with the appropriate
special features, producing proper batches of inscribed and endorsed checks for deposit in the bank with user-specified audit
trail information, complete with deposit ticket and journal tape
listing. A storage extension feature allows handling of agent transactions, user programmable subroutines, OCR-B, 1428 and .095"
Standard 1403 fonts.
Highlights: A 3762 provides two operator positions, each equipped with a keyboard, a 240 character display, a document transport and a scanner to read one line of up to 60 machine printed
numeric digits in either OCR-A, OCR-B, .095" Standard 1403 or
1428 font (OCR-A is standard, other fonts require the Storage
Extension feature). The appropriate recognition logic is loaded
into the 3762 automatically; different OCR fonts can be used by
different 3762s in one 3790 Communication System/Data Entry
Configuration simultaneollsly but the two operator positions on one
3762 must use the same font. Documents are entered by hand
into the document entry slot in front of the operator. They are
transported under machine control past the OCR read station
which incorporates a solid state scanning device to collect character images. These images are analyzed and recognized within the
3762 recognition and control processor.
The "Table of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices" below
shows the characters which are acceptable from typewriters,
highspeed printers and offset printing using the designated font.
Non-recognized OCR data as well as the payment amount can be
entered by the operator via the keyboard. After (user-specified)
editing and checking of the data entered, the amount paid is
checked for acceptability (according to user-specified criteria).
The output record is subsequently prepared and transferred to the
attached 3791 Controller for intermediate storage on the 3791
disk. Special features include audit trail printing on stubs, checks
and deposit tickets, E13B inscribing of checks and deposit tickets,
endorsing of checks, and journal tape printing of the amounts
processed. Printing is under program control.
Table of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices
OCR-A
OCR-B
(6)
.00S" Stand
ard 1403
1428
(6)
(1,6)
Digits
Delimiters
Printers
/400k
0-9
<
0-9
0-9
Fork
Chair
LVM(2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (i~\
Margins S
+
-
LVM(2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margin. (S)
LVM(2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margins (S)
LVM(2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margins (S)
Selectric"
1403
3203
3211
3800
Offset
Se'f~~c"
3203
3211
3800
Offset
1403
3203
3211
1403
3203
3211
Offset
Offset
>
NOTES:
(I) Also called 407-1 font. Train arrangements must have suffix 2, e.g., HN2.
(2) The LVM is a pre-printed vertical line, 3.70 mm (0.14S") minimum height,
centered in the print lSand, having the normal character stroke width and
occupying a full character space.
(3) A Double Blank is a blank space of at least 4.3 mm (0.170"). Single and
double blanks may not be specified intermixed in one code line.
(4) A Single Blank is a blank space of at least 2.3 mm (0.090") and less than 4.3
mm (0.170").
.
(S) The Right and Left Margin are each 6.3S mm (0.2S0") wide.
(6) The OCR-B, .00S" Standard 1403 and 1428 fonts can only be recognized
when the Storage Extension feature in installed.
The 3762 can process single-stub, multi-stub and agent transactions. Agent transactions require the Storage Extension special
feature. A transaction may contain one or more checks. All data
entry operating modes available for the 3760 Dual Key Entry
stations are also available on the 3762 Payment Transaction
Processor. For details, see 3760 Machines pages. Moreover,
3760 operations such as updating of a customer's address can be
Keyboard - has a standard 66 character alphameric combination
keyboard with EL character set for key entry (and verifying in
3760 mode). In addition to standard keys, the keyboard has:
Record-, Field-, and Character-Backspace ... Field-CharacterAdvance ... Auto Skip/Dup and Auto Enter Key Switch ... Display
Record ... Next Format ... Record Position '" Insert and Delete ...
Cursor Up and Down ... Command Line and Command ... Mark
Record ... Hex/Alternate ... Scan Next Record ... and PF keys ...
Use of the top row of keys as command keys for the following
twelve commands is standard: HELP. COPY, FLAG, ACCEPT,
RETURN, CONTINUE SEARCH, SAVE, FORMAT DISPLAY, TOTAL,
CHECK, NOTICE· and PURGE.
• Only active with Agent Processing.
Optionally available are ASCII keyboard, and Proof arrangements
of both the EBCDIC and the ASCII keyboards. The Proof keyboard
modifies the standard keyboard to provide a numeric key arrangement similiar to that of an adding machine. See Specify below for
details.
Display Panel - up to 236 characters can be displayed to each
operator on six rows of 40 positions each ... first row is the Command Line on which entered commands, messages, error types,
and mode of operation are displayed ... data entered may be
displayed on rows two through six ... a fill-in-the-blanks format
may be displayed and the cursor will automatically skip over the
prompting information as data is entered ... Status Indicators ...
on the left and right side of the panel ... left side indicators are:
Operator Attention, Auto Skip/Dup, Display Record, Auto Enter,
and Verify Mismatch ... right side indicators are: Operator Attention, Station Available, Enter, Verify, Insert Mode and DUP Not
Allowed ... as on the 3760. A special format screen is displayed
for payment transaction processing.
Transport - contains an entry slot, a document transport mechanism, a pocket selector and two pockets ... documents are handfed. Documents move from the entry slot past the scanner to the
pockets. The transport accepts stubs ranging from 76.2 to 152.4
mm (3.0 to 6.0") high and 69.85 to 222.25 mm (2.75 to 8.75")
long, provided the height/length ratio is 1.4: 1 or less, and checks
with standard ABA check sizes. Allowable weight ranges from 16
to 32 Ibs and card stock. For details, see 3762 Paper and Printing
Requirements, GA33-4576.
Scanner - consists of four lamps, a lens, and a linear array of 64
photodiodes and is located in the transport. Its vertical position is
operator settable to the approriate position of the codeline of
printing to be scanned on the document. For details on permissible codeline locations see 3762 Paper and Printing Requirements,
GA33-4576.
Pockets - provided are two document pockets with a depth of
44.4 mm (1.75") each. Stubs and checks are automatically selected to the two pockets.
Documents and Printing - the input documents and printing must
conform to the specifications described in 3762 Paper and Printing Requirements, GA33-4576. Ribbons and background inks
meeting the outlined criteria will give good performance. For Film
Ribbon Selectric -- Part No. 1136310 or 1136391 ... for Fabric
Ribbon Selectric -- 1136138 ... for 1403 (mdl 2 and N 1) -1136430, 414486 and 424325 ... for 3211 ribbon 1136626 or
1136627 ... for 3203 (mdls 1, 2 and 3) - 1136430. Ribbons not
having similiar characteristics may result in reduced recognition
performance. The IBM 3762 Document Gauge can be ordered as
GX33-8505.
Document Tray - two document trays are provided with every
3762, one for each operator position. The document tray can be
used by an operator to hold the stack of stubs and checks to be
entered. For additional or replacement document trays, see M
10000 pages.
PREREQUISITES: In 3791 - Controller Device Attachment Type I
(#7900) and Device Attachemnt Type I, Add'i (#7922) depending
upon the number of units attached, Add'l Disk Heads (#3221),
Control Storage Expansion (#1590), and Control Storage Increments (#1603, #1613) as required. For details, see M 3791
pages. Configuration guidelines are given in GA33-4572.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. NOTE: Color accent is provided on the knee
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -----------==-= ':' =
M 3762.2
Jul 79
-
DP Machines
3762 Payment Transaction Processor (conI' d)
panel only and may be anyone of the above colors ... top and
side panels will always be white.
[3] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3762 cable prices and ordering Instructions. For cable specifications, see SRL Physical
Planning Manual for 3790 Systems, GA27-2769.
[4] Keyboard/language Arrangements: Proof versions have the
alphameric keyboard with a numeric key arrangement similiar to
that of an adding machine.
#9420 for ASCII
#9421 for EBCDIC
#9423 for Proof Keyboard (ASCII)
#9424 for Proof Keyboard (EBCDIC)
NOTE: All 3762 stations attached to the same 3791 Controller
must have the same keyboard/language arrangement. The
Proof version may be intermixed with the Non-Proof version in a
3790 system but not in the 3762 unit.
PRICES:
3762
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MlC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$1,410
$1,200
$50,400
$220
and/or replacement keys. see M 10000 pages.
STORAGE EXTENSION (#7500).
This feature provides a 8K
byte storage extension in the 3762. It must be installed when
processing agent transactions .. , applying user programmable
subroutines ... 1428, OCR-B .095" Standard or 1403 numeric font
recognition is required. Only one type font can be recognized in
the 3762 at anyone time, but different 3762s may recognize
different fonts. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MlC
2 yr Purchase
$140
Audit Trail Printers
#1310 $165
41
Endorsers
3805
35
Journal Tape Printers 4660
157
134
241
MICR Inscribers
5100
205
Security Keylock
6350
35SUC 7500
81
Storage Extension
69
$5,880
1,470
3,990
8,610
35
2,337
MMMC
$26.50
3.50
47.00
13.00
NC
10.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 50%
Useful life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
AUDIT TRAil PRINTERS (#1310). This feature consists of two
matrix print devices, one in each transport. It prints 7 x 7 dot
characters with a pitch of 8.5 characters per· inch ... a maximum
of 40 print positions on 'one line. Printing is on the back of the
documents starting at 3.0 mm (.12") from the leading edge, on
stubs, checks and deposit tickets, centered 66.5 mm (2.62") from
the bottom edge. Fields to be printed on stubs and checks are
selected by the user during format definition (not for Deposit
Tickets). The character set consists of 10 digits, 26 letters, 7
symbols and blank. Supplies: Cartridge ribbon Part No. 1136970
or equivalent. FIeld Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
ENDORSERS (#3805).
This feature consists of two endorsing
stations, one in each transport. It prints a user designed endorsement legend on the reverse side of the checks. The maximum size
of the legend is 28 x 33 mm (1.1 x 1.3"). The user can specify
the horizontal endorsement position close to the leading or the
trailing edge during format definition. Supplies: Endorse Plates -for ordering,
Specify: Endorser ink roll - #9145 for black, #9146 for green,
#9147 for purple, and #9148 for red. Field Installation: Available
at time of manufacture only.
JOURNAL TAPE PRINTERS (#4660).
This feature consists of
two journal tape print devices, one for each operator. It lists the
check amounts processed within a deposit and the deposit total as
well as the appropriate deposit identification. When processing
agent transactions the individual stub amounts are printed. With
the individual amounts, a three digit item identification number is
printed in italics in the three leftmost character positions. The two
rightmost positions are reserved for a code that identifies the
printed line. In total 15 character positions are available. The
printed tape is within reach of the operator for tear off at completion of the deposit. Supplies: Ink ribbon -- recommended material
Nylon or Vinylon fiber (FF40). Spool diameter 35.1 mm (1.38").
Spool type - standard only, ribbon width 12.7 mm (.5"), length
6096 mm (240"), Part No. 1299087 (black) or equivalent. Journal
Tape - single or two-ply width 57.2 mm (2.25"), roll diameter
81.0 mm (3 and 3/16") mex. Single-ply - recommended paper
weight 16 Ibs @ 5% (approx. 60 gr/m'), tape has to be colored
through the last 1.8 m (6 feet) approx., Part No. 457297 or equivalent. Two-ply - recommended paper weight 16 Ibs @ 5%
(approx. 60 grIm') per ply, tape has to be colored through the last
1.8 m (6 feet) approx., Part No. 457298 or equivalent. Field
histallation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MICR INSCRIBERS (#5100). This feature consists of two MICR
(E13B) Inscribing units, one in each transport. It encodes the
amount on checks of acceptable transactions. At the users option
It encodes in the same pass, amount, process control, account
number and transit routing fields on deposit tickets. All fields are
encoded in accordance with the Bank Check Specifications for
MICR, ANSI X3.3-1970. Supplies: MICR ribbon Part No. 431555
or equivalent. A MICR gauge is available for checking inscriber
output registration. Order part number 4511 28
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
A key operated switch ... one
SECURITY KEYlOCK (#6350).
per 3762. When the key is in the "locked" pOSition, entry of data
via a scanner or a keyboard is prevented. Automatic Re-IMI occurs
when unlocking. Field Installation: Yes. Note: For additional
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
\~
---- - --==-=
':' =
-- --------
.M 3767.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3767 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Purpose: A keyboard/print~r terminal for transmission of data or
text to or from a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor via a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller, to a 4331 via its Communications Adapter feature, or to the 8100 Information System
via the 8130, 8140 and/or 8101. The 3767 uses Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC) line discipline.
Mode' 1
. 40 cps average bi-directional printer.
Model 2
80 cps maximum bi-directional printer; includes
dual 256 byte line buffers and full buffer editing
capability.
Mode' 3
120 cps maximum bi-directional printer; includes
dual 256 byte line buffers and full buffer edit capability.
NOTE: Throughput on all models is dependent upon output
format, line control, buffering, and transmission speed.
Highlights: The 3767 consists of control functions, printer, keyboard, control keys and indicator lights in one integrally designed
desk-top unit. This configuration allows an operator/machine
relationship that is favorable for both interactive and batch operations. Special features are available which permit tailoring of the
terminal to the user's requirements.
Control Functions: Provides the control for all on-line and off-line
operations; facilitates communications at speeds up to 2400 bps
in SDLC line discipline and controls single line data editing on the
base model 1. It also controls, on all models, basic functions such
as Automatic Terminal I. D., Station Control, Internal Communications Clocking, Transmit and Receive Interrupt, End of Line Alarm,
Buffer Full Alarm and Auto (EOB/EOM) switch.
Printer: [Model 1 and 2] Maximum printer throughput is obtained
with bi-directional serial matrix printing and indexing without unnecessary print head movement. Electronic tabbing over the full
132 printable positions is provided. The printer dot matrix is 4 of
7.w.'-d~ by 8 high giving high legibility with character spacing at 10
to the inch. Line spacing is 6 lines to the inch. Up to 6 part forms
(total thickness -- 0.018") may be used. For any multi-part or
pre-printed continuous forms the Variable Width Forms Tractor
(#8700) is recommended. Five and six part continuous forms
should be tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding,
registration, and print quality. Single part continuous or up to four
part cut forms can be used with the standard friction feed platen.
The Paper Roll Holder and Forms Guide with paper bail (#9180)
is available for use with roll paper and is recommended for use
with single part fan-fold paper when the Variable Width Forms
Tractor (#8700) is not used. Maximum overall forms width is 15";
'card stock forms are not recommended. (See GA24-3488 for form
specifications and limitations.)
- unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3767 at
time of delivery, or when relocating the 3767.
- removal and packing of the 3767 at time of discontinuance.
- relocation of the 3767 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
- to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and
fill out the Trouble Report prior to calling for service.
See M 2700 pages for additional responsibilities.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653 or equivalent, is
required.
For details and prices, see M 10000 pages.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Keyboard Arrangement: #9381 for Correspondence, or #9391
for EBCDIC.
[3] SDLC Speed Selection: #9533 for C5/D4 (2400 bps); #9532
for C4/D3 (1200 bps); #9531 for C3, 02 (600 bps). See
"Special Features" for modems and modem attachments.
[4] Integrated/External modem cable: A 20 foot cable is provided
as standard. If a longer cable is required, specify #9021,
indicating length in feet as a quantity of 25, 30, 35 or 40.
[5] 6 Foot Power Cord.: Specify #9986, otherwise a 10 foot power
cord will be provided.
[6] Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers: Specify #9850 if Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is ordered.
[7] For Model 1 and 2 Only: Paper Roll Holder and Forms Guide
with Paper Bail (#9180) must be ordered on all machines without Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers (#9850). A customer
using the Variable Width Forms Tractor has the option of ordering specify feature #9180 at no additional charge, once per
machine, for friction feeding of single part continuous roll and
fan fold paper. Specify feature #9180 is used interchangeably
with the Variable Width Forms Tractor and is attached and
removed by the customer. The Paper Roll Holder and Forms
Guide with Bail is not available for the 3767 mdl 3.
[8] SNA Terminal Address: #9587 must be specified on all orders
-- supplemental specs available for giving one EBCDIC byte
address. Any two "Hex" characters, excluding ''~O'' and "FF"
may be used.
[9] Blower: #9030. Must be specified for 3767 (mdl 1 or 2 only)
expected to operate in an environment above 90 0 F ambient
temperature (specification limits up to 105 0 F).
Printer: [Model 3] Same as model 1 and 2 with the exception that
forms tractor is required for all continuous forms.
[10] Paper Tear Bar: [Model 1 or 2 only] #9422. A device for
tearing continuous forms. Prerequisite: Paper Roll Holder and
Forms Guide with Paper Bail (#9180).
Keyboard: Provides several keyboard arrangements and includes
typamatic on hyphen, underscore, backspace and space keys. In
addition to the standard 44 alpha/numeric data keys, are function
keys, indicator lights, operating mode switches, and a 3-position
numeric "print position indicator" display to aid the operator.
PRICES:
Mdl
3767
1
Security Enhancement Features: Print Suppress all'Jws selected
data fields to be entered without being printed. The Security
Keylock (optional) with the power switch "ON" allows the 3767 to
be operational.
The Magnetic Stripe Reader (optional) is provided to allow operator identification to be transmitted.
Communications Facilities: The 3767 operates in half-duplex
mode over facilities C3, C4, C5, 02, 03, 04 or X1 M ... for details
concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages.
Synchronous Data Link Control: Allows for transmission rates of
600, 1200 or 2400 bps.
The 3767 can communicate on a switched or non-switched pointto-point facility or as a secondary station on a multipoint or duplex
multipoint facility to a virtual storage S/370, a 4300 Processor, or
non-switched point-to-point or multipoint on the 8100 Information
System.
Modems: One Integrated Modem or External Modem can be used.
See "Special Features" for options. Synchronous clock is a
standard feature.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See 'BM 3767 Operator's Guide, SRL
GA18-2000, and Customer Responsibility below.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
2
3
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 year
Purchase
MMMC
$ 176
223
276
$ 150
190
235
$ 5,800
6,650
8,225
$45.50
51.50
74.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $850.
From Model 1 to Model 3 ..... $3,150.
From Model 2 to Model 3 ..... $2,300.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following Special Features apply to the 3767 mdls 1, 2, 3.
Note: Customers who elect to purchase one of the features'
listed in Group #1 or Group #2 and later order additional features within that group should consider purchase of all features
initially because these field upgrades require replacement of the
initial feature and installation of the new combination.
• Except when Vertical Forms Control (#8731) has previously
been installed and the Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4930) is the
additional feature being ordered.
Group #1
Vertical Forms Control (#8731), Magnetic Stripe
Reader (#4Q30), Calculate-Scientific (#1572).
Group #2
Start/Stop Feature -- 2740-1 (#7111), -- 2740-2
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - -------------_.--- -----
M 3767.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3767 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
(#7112). -- 2741 (#7113). Alternate Character Set
(# 1291). Buffer with Edit - 512 (# 1481). Buffer with
Edit - 1.024 (#1482).
ACOUSTIC COUPLER - 600 BPS (#1110). Provides an acoustic
coupler for communications through a telephone handset at
speeds up to 600 bps. Requires a 1200 bps Integrated Modem on
host end of communications facility. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Customer will set up at time of 3767 delivery -FE will install if ordered .
Prerequisites: 1200 bps Inte~rated Modem (#5502 or #5506); 600 bps (#9531), in addition,
If Start/Stop Feature (#7111 or #7113) is ordered, 300 bps
(#9540). Note: For limitations on Public Switched Network, consult M 2700.1 page and "Notes for Chart COo note [14] in M 2700
pages.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). Provides ASCII Keyboard (48 Key) and
graphics in lieu of those normally provided by Keyboard Specify
Codes. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended for
field installation. limitations: Cannot be installed with Start/Stop
Features (#7111, 7112, 7113), Alternate Character Set. (#1291),
or Keyboard Arrangement #9381 (Correspondence) or #9391
(EBCDIC).
ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET (#1291).
Provides a switch
control lor alternate printed graphics, to those selected by the
keyboard specification. Compatible with Start/Stop Feature
#7113 (2741) and #7111 (2740-1). Only specify codes #9394
and #9395 (EBCDIC-Mono) are compatible with #7112 (2740-2).
Keytop engraving remains the same. Key front decals will be
provided for easy operator reference in using this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with ASCII Feature (# 1201).
3767 Chart A
SOlC
Keybd
All.
Char.
Set
C E
0 B
M
R C
0
R 0 A N
E I P 0
S C l 121
X
Corres.
EBCDIC
APl
X
X
EBCDIC
X
Corres.
APl
Mono 131
Mono 141
X
X
X
X
E
B
C
0
I
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
line
Code
Graphics
P
T
T
C C
C
0
R
R
E
S
E
M
B
0
C A N
0 P 0
121 l 121
X
0
R
R
E
S
/
E
B
C
0
X
X
Keybd
Prereq
Specify
Code
X
X
X
X
X
X
III
#9382
#9383
X
X
Select
Only
One
#9381
X
X
X
X
X
#9391
#9392
#9393
#9394
#9395
(I) Alternate Character Set (#1291) is a prerequisite.
(2) Sub-set of EBCDIC.
(3) Upper case alpha printed from keyboard - upper/lower case may be printed
from the communications line.
(4) Upper case alpha printed from keyboard or the communications line
regardless of key shift or line code shift.
~UFFER WITH EDIT (#1481, 1482).
#1481 [Mdl 1 only] provides two 256 byte buffers for receiving data. # 1482 [Mdl 1, 2 or
3] provides two additional 256 byte buffers for receiving data. On
key entry these two features provide full buffer (up to 512 or
1,024 bytes) edit capability under key control. With the Edit
switch "off", a single data line may be transmitted. When used
with 2740 mdl 2 Start/Stop Feature (#7112) single buffer (120248-440 byte) operation is provided. The Buffer Full Alarm warns
the operator 10 positions before full capacity. Maximum: One
each. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: This feature not active
if Start/Stop Feature (#7111 or #7113) is active. A 512 buffer
(equivalent to #1481) is standard on 3767 mdl 2 and mdl 3.
Prerequisite: On modell, #1482 requires # 1481.
CALCULATE - SCIENTIFIC (#1572). In off-line mode this feature, under switch control, using the same keyboard (with supplied
keyfront label) allows the following type calculations to take place:
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, inverse calculation
squll:re root, statistical. value (mean and standard deviation), expo~
n~nttal, common logarIthm, natural logarithm, exponential constant.
clrc~lar constant and trigonometrical functions (sin, cos, tan,
arcSin, arccos, arctan). Two memories are provided for temporary
storage of totals. Sixteen digit input/output is allowed. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
EIA INTERFACE - NO CLOCK (#3718).
EIA INTERFACE - WITH CLOCK (#3719).
Provides one EIA
interface for the attachment of an external modem with business
machine (3767) clocking. Note: This feature may be used for
local attachment to 3704 or 3705 equipped with Line Set Type 1 F
for operation at 300, 600 or 1200 bps. If this feature is to be
used with a 1 F line set, specify #9404. Specify: #9402 for half
duplex facility, or #9404 for full duplex facility ... #9619 for
switched facility. On the mdls 1 and 2 only, #9539 must also be
specified when operating at 300 bps on the Public Switched Network with "Originate Only" service when the modem to be used
does not provide the "received line signal detector" interchange
CirCUit, as for example the Western Electric 113 A or equivalent.
Maximum: One. Field Installation:. Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500. #5502,
#5505 or #5506), or EIA Interface - No Clock (#3718).
Prerequisites: #9532 for C4/03 (1200 bps) or #9531 for C3 or
02 (600 bps). I! Start/Stop Feature is installed, that feature's line
speed specify.
MAGNETIC STRIPE READER (#4930).
A small self enclosed
device for reading information from a Magnetically Striped and
Encoded 1.0. Card and a Magnetic Credit Card (2-1/8" x 3-3/8").
Reads up to 40 ABA standard numeric characters, including control characters. See IRO Sales Manual for information on cards.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Customer will set up at
time of 3767 delivery -- CE will install if ordered
Limitation: Not functional when operating in Start/Stop (#7111,
7112.7113) mode.
START/STOP
Oata
Code
Graphics
face for the attachment of an IBM 3863, 3872 or other external
modem, with modem clocking (3767 clock disabled). Specify:
#9402 for hal! duplex facility (combined modem and line), or
#9404 for full duplex facility (combined modem and line) ...
#9707 for attaching IBM 3872 Modem ... #9619 for switched
facility. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
5502, 5505 or 5506), Start/Stop Feature (#7111 or 7113) or EIA
Interface - With Clock (#3719). Note: When installed with
Start/Stop Feature (#7112), the communication facilities must be
f~1I duplex. Full Duplex (#9404), SIS Line Speed (#9542), SDLC
Line Speed (#9533) and Attach IBM 3863 or 3872 Modem (#9707)
must be specified. Start/Stop operation is supported only at 1200
bps.
Provides one EIA inter-
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500),
Non-switched. A
modem for operation at 300, 600 or 1200 bps over two or four
wire non-switched voice grade channels. Specify: #9402 for
2-wire communications facilities, #9404 for 4-wire facilities.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5502, #5505 or #5506). Prerequisites: #9532
for 03 (1200 bps) or #9531 for 02 (600 bps) facilities. I!
Start/Stop Feature is installed, that feature's line speed specify.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5502). Switched. A manual
answer modem for operation at 300, 600 or 1200 bps over Public
Switched
Telephone
Networks.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500,
#5505 or #5506). Prerequisites: #9532 for C4 (1200 bps) or
#9531 for C3 (600 bps) facilities. I! Start/Stop Feature is installed, that feature's line speed specify. Note: This feature requires either Acoustic Coupler - 600 bps (#1110) or a COT type
Data Access Arrangement or equivalent ..
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM/INTERRUPT (#5505). [Mdl 1
and 2 only] Non-switched. A modem for operation at 300
(Start/Stop), 600 or 1200 (SDLC) bps over 2-wire non-switched
voice grade channels. This modem includes a bi-directional reverse channel capability. This interrupt signal is transmitted when
the ATTN key on the 3767 keyboard is depressed. Note: This
featured modem is required to transmit or receive an interrupt only
With Start/Stop 2741 (#7113) operating at 300 bps in Start/Stop
mode on a half-duplex non-switched channel and the EIA Interface
(#3719) is not used. Line Set Type 8C on 3704 or Line Set Type
12A on the 3705 is required to support this feature. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated
Modem (#5500, #5502 or #5506). Prerequisite: #9532 for 03
(1200 bps) or #9531 for 02 (600 bps) and #9540 for 01 (300
bps) facilities.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM/INTERRUPT (#5506), [Mdl 1
and 2 only] SWitched. A manual answer modem for operation at
300 (Start/Stop), 600 or 1200 (SDLC) bps over Public Switched
Telephone Networks. This modem includes a bi-directional reverse channel capability. This interrupt signal is transmitted when
the ATTN key on the 3767 keyboard is depressed. Note: This
featured modem is required to transmit or receive an interrupt only
With Start/Stop 2741 (#7113) operating at 300 bps in Start/Stop
mode on a half-duplex switched channel and EIA Interface
(#3719) is not used. Line Set Type 80 on the 3704 or Line Set
Type 12B on the 3705 is required to support this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
._--- ----===
--------':' =
DP Machines
3767 Communication Terminal
(conl'd)
installed with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500, #5502, or #5505). Prerequisite: #9532
for C4 (1200 bps) or #9531 for C3 (600 bps) and #9540 for C1
(300 bps) facilities. Note: This feature requires either Acoustic
Coupler - 600 bps (# 1110) or a COT type Data Access Arrangement or equivalent.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6660). Provides a key operated switch.
When in the "locked" position, machine operations cannot be
performed. Two keys are provided. For additional or replacement
keys, see "Locks and Keys" in M 10000 pages. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
START/STOP FEATURE (#7111, 7112, 7113). These features
provide a Type I Start/Stop line control migration aid on the 3767
to allow operation with existing program support (see Programming
Section). This feature allows data transmission to or from a Virtual
Storage S/370 mdl 115 thru 168MP or a 3031 or 4300 Processor
via a 3704 or 3705 at 300 bps (2740-1 or 2741 Line Control) or
at 600 or 1200 bps (2740-2 Line Control) or via a 2701 at 600
bps (2740-2 Line Control). It also allows transmission, via communications facility to or from a 3115 ICA, 3125 ICA, 3135 ICA,
3135-3 ICA or 3138 ICA at 300 bps (2740-1 or 2741 Line Control) or at 600 bps (2740-2 Line Control). 1200 bps (2740-2 Line
Control) also supported by 311 5 ICA and 3125 ICA. It allows
communications via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller
attached to a channel of a 5/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65
mode), 75 and 195 at 300 bps (2740-1 or 2741 Line Control) or
at 600 bps or 1200 bps (2740-2 Line Control); via a 2701 attached to a channel of a 5/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67
(in 65 mode), 75 and 195; or a S/370 mdl 155, 165, 195, or any
4300 Processor, at 600 bps (2740-2 Line Control); or via an
Integrated Communications Attachment on S/360 mdl 25 at 600
bps (2740-2 Line Control). Attachment is also possible via the
Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 ... see 4331 for
details. An SDLC/Start-Stop switch is provided to allow operation
in either mode. Communications facility must be specified for this
feature. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with ASCII Feature (#1201).
Select One:
#7111 - 2740-1 Line Control [Mdl 1 or 2 only] Specify: #9540
for C1/D1 (300 bps). Note: For multipoint - specify #9560
(Station Control) and see "Terminal and Group Addresses"
(below) for additional'information to be specified. Note: On a
given non-switched line, one terminal within each group and one
terminal for the entire line (All Call) must provide the necessary
checking and addressing responses for that group and/or for
the entire line. Specify #9197 for a group responding and/or
#9035 for an All Call responding terminal. Limitations: Group
or All Call addressing requires duplex communications facilities.
Non-switched facility required for SDLC if Station Control
(#9560) is specified. Cannot be installed with 2400 bps
(#9533) or EIA Interface - No Clock (#3718).
#7112 - 2740-2 Line Control [Mdl 1, 2 or 3] Buffer Receive
mode is standard operation. Limitations: Group or All Call
addressing requires duplex communications facilities. If multidropped on the same communications line with 2740-2s the
3767 must not be designated as the Group or All Call Responding terminal. Non-switched facility required for SDLC with this
feature installed. Cannot be installed with Correspondence
Keyboard (#9381). Specify: See "Terminal and Group
Addresses" (below) for additional information to be specified.
Note: On a given non-switched line, one terminal within each
group and one terminal for the entire line (All Call) must provide
the necessary checking and addressing responses for that
group and/or for the entire line. Specify #9197 for a group
responding and/or #9035 for an All Call responding terminal.
Specify Line Speed - #9541 for 02 (600 bps) or #9542 for 03
(1200 bps). Buffer Positions -#9015 for 120, #9016 for 248,
or #9017 for 440. Note: This specified feature has no effect
on buffer size under SDLC line discipline. Prerequisite: On
model 1, Buffer with Edit (#1481 or #1482).
M 3767.3
Jul79
1200 b s Intg'd Modem
Sw'd
Non-Switched
External Modem
Switched
Non-Switched
2-wirc
2-wire
4 wire
2-wire (\)
2-wire (I)
4-wire
3115
leA
---
---
#1231
4781
#1231
#1231
#1231
3125
leA
-------
1231
4781
1231
1231 or
1232
1231 or
1232
---
9593-9600
9721.9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
9625-9632
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
3135
leA
-----
---
-----
M
3704
#4786
#4785
4781
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
3705
4786
4785
4781
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
3767
5506
5505
5500
3719
3719
3719
8130
---
5500
3701
3701
3701
8140
-----
-------
5500
3701
3701
3701
5500
3701
3701
3701
8101
(1) Modem must be full duplex.
Terminal and Group Addresses
Terminal and group addresses must be selected when one of the
following Start/Stop Features is ordered:
#7111 for 2740 mdl 1 Line Control with Station Control
(#9560) specified.
#7112 for 2740 mdl 2 Line Control.
For Terminal Address and Group Address, a two-character code
must be selected as described below. The first character must
be the Terminal Address, and the second character must be the
Group Address. (The same character may be ordered for both
addresses. However, in this case, the terminal will be wired at
the factory as a Group Responding #9197 terminaL)
Depending on the Keyboard Arrangement specified for the base
machine, the following characters may be selected for Terminal
and Group Addresses:
With EBCDIC Keyboard Arrangement (#9391), select characters from:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters @ (at sign) ... $
(dollar sign) ... & (ampersand) ... - (hyphen) .... (period).
t With Correspondence Keyboard Arrangement (#9381), select
characters from:
A thru Z (except B and X), 0 thru 8, and special characters (equal) ... / (slash) ... ; (semi-colon) ... , (comma) ... . (period)
... ' (apostrophe) ... - (hyphen).
t Not available with #7112.
If Alternate Character Set (#1291) is installed on the terminal,
the Terminal and Group Address line code bit configuration remains the same for either switch setting.
Specify: #9644 (Terminal and Group Addresses) and enter the
two-character code as Supplemental Specs
based on the permissible characters listed above.
Tarmlnal Identification
If Terminal Identification is used in the customers application
(provided by RPQ
Auto Address Answer-back on the
2741), a four-character Terminal Identification must be selected
when Start/Stop Feature - 2741 Line Control (#7113) and one
of the fOllowing are ordered: #5502, #5506, or #3719 with
#9619 (switched line operation) specified.
#7113 -- 2741 Line Control [Mdl 1 or 2 only] Specify: #9540
for C1/D1 (300 bps). Limitations: Cannot be Installed with
2400 bps (#9533) or EIA Interface - No Clock (#3718). Note:
See "Terminal Identification" (below) for additional information
to be specified.
Depending on the Keyboard Arrangement specified on the base
machine, the following characters may be selected for the Terminal Identification code.
The 2741 Transmit and Receive Interrupt function on the 3767
with #7113 (2741 Line Control) is supported via the following:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters # (number sign) ...
/ (slash) ... $ (dollar sign) ... & (ampersand) ... @ (at sign) ...
, (comma) .... (period) '" - (hyphen) ... C/R (carriage return)
... space.
With EBCDIC Keyboard Arrangement (#9391), select characters from:
With Correspondence Keyboard Arrangement (#9381), select
characters from:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters - (equal) ... /
(slash) ... ' (apostrophe) ... - (hyphen) ... ; (semi-colon)
(period) ... , (comma) ... C/R (carriage return) ... space.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
----
- ---------===':'=
----
M 3767.4
Jul79
OP Machines
3787 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
The same character may be selected for all four positions except
C/R may only be used In the fourth position.
If Alternate Character Set (#1291) is Installed on the terminal,
the Terminal 10 line code bit configuration remains the same for
either switch setting.
Specify: #9645 (Terminal Identification) and enter the fourcharacter code
based on the above permissible characters. NOTE: For "space"
character, enter 'HI. For C/R character, enter • (available in
fourth position only).
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms width
from 3 to 15 Inches can be fed. Prerequisite: Variable Width
Forms Tractor Covers (#9850).
VERTICAL FORMS CONTROL (#8731).
Allows vertical forms
skipping to a pre-set page header location or a pre-set vertical tab
position. Page size, header location and vertical tab stops are
entered from the keyboard or received from the host under SDLC
line control.
Maximum:
One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequlsttes: Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers (#9850) and
Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700). Limitation: This feature
(#8731) Is non-functional In Start/Stop (#7111, #7112, #7113)
mode.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MAC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
For Model 1 Only
Buffer with Edtt - 512
#1481 $ 24
$ 20
$
700
$1.00
175
175
.50
.50
1,185
1,185
10.00
10.00
For Model 1 and 2 Only
Start/Stop Feature 2740-1 Line Control
7111
5
8
2741 Line Control
7113
5
8
1200 bps Integrated Modem w Interrupt Non-swHched
5505
31
28
28
Switched
5508
31
For Model 1, 2 and 3
Acoustic Couplr-600 bps 1110
ASCII Feature
1201
Alt Character Set
1291
Buffer w Edit - 1,024
1482
Calculate - Scientific
1572
EIA Interface-No Clock 3718
EIA Interf_w Clock
3719
Magnetic Stripe Reader 4930
1200 bps Integrated Modem Non-swltched
5500
Sw w Manual Ans
5502
Security Keylock
8880
Start/Stop Feature2740-2 Line Control
7112
Var Width Forms Tractor 8700
Vertical Forms Control 8731
14
12
7
24
19
13
13
19
12
10
'8
20
18
11
11
16
420
350
210
700
580
385
385
580
.50
.50
.50
.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.50
19
19
16
16
888
688
4.00
4.00
35
NC
175
180
385
.50
.50
.50
35SUC -
8
8
13
5
5
11
Accessories: The following Item Is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed In M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional Information and field Installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of contlnuolltr
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
(
Not to be reproduced with'out iNritten permission.
M 3771.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3771 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Purpose: This desk-style console-keyboard-printer is a member of
the 3770 Data Communication System. Communication features
permit operation over switched or non-switched facilities at speeds
liP to 4800 bps, using SDLC or BSC transmission techniques.
Special features permit the attachment of one card reader or card
punch operating at 50 cpm. The card punch can optionally be
equipped with a special feature for Card Read to permit single
path card reading or card punching.
Model 1
40 cps average print rate - bi-clirectional
Model 2
80 cps maximum - bl-clirectlonal
Model 3
120 cps maximum - bl-cllrectional
Highlight.:
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space, and
"Print Character" keys have typamatic operation. Associated
with the keyboard are Indicator lights, function keys, operating
mode switches, and a 3-posltion numeric display.
Printer - prints serial by character while the wire-matrix print
head Is moving in eith"tr direction - bi-directlonal printing. Print
span is 132 positions at 10 characters per inch. Line spacing is
6 lines per inch. Single part continuous forms or up to three part
cut forms can be handled with the standard friction feed platen.
A variable width forms tractor, available as a special feature, is
required for feeding multipart or preprinted continuous forms of
up to six parts maximum (total thickness not greater than
0.018"). Five and six part continuous forms should be tried on
an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration and print
quality. Overall forms widths from 3" to 15" can be accommodated. To facilitate handling of continuous forms, the Forms
Stand (special feature) Is recommended. Card stock continuous
forms are not recommended. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations. A 94 character set is standard.
Dual 256-Byte Buffers - transfer data between the input and
output devices. The buffers alternate in providing input and
output service to permit overlapped operation.
Buffer Edit -- aJlows corrections to be made on the contents of a
buffer during key entry jobs. Corrections can be made by character, by line, or by entire buffer (up to 256 bytes).
Extend Buffer - combines the dual 256-byte buffers into a
single 512-byte buffer under operator control for keyboard to
line jobs. Buffer edit capability applies to the full 51 2 bytes.
Buffer transfers to line are in 256-byte increments and cannot be
overlapped.
Printer Format Controls - facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing. Format controls can be entered
from keyboard, or from an attached card reader, cr can be
system defined.
Compression/Expansion - provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from cards. A two-byte sequence is substituted
for each occurrence of three or more consecutive blank card
columns (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 63 consecutive
blank columns are read. The terminal monitors received nontransparent data that is destined for printer or attached card
punch and automatically expands this two-byte sequence to the
correct number of blanks. A similar capability is provided when
USing SDLC procedures.
Input/Output Selection - is under control of keyboard setup
with an option for entering one set of printer format controls from
the keyboard or the card reader. A fully configured 3771 will
allow the following:
Input
Output
Keyboard
Card Reader
Keyboard'
Printer
Printer
Card Punch
Online Batch Jobs
Line' ,
Printer
Card Punch"
Online Interactive Jobs
Keyboard'
Line
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See IBM 3771 /3773 Operating Procedures Guide, GA27-31 00.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication
facility. Refer to 3770 Data Communication System in "Systems"
for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700 pages for
information on communication facilities, and other attachment
information. Also refer to 3863, 3864, 3872 and 3874 in
"Machines."
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653, or equivalent, is
required
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to M
2700 pages.
Limitations: The input/output capabilities under "Highlights" are
dependent on appropriate configurations of the terminal. Keyboard
and console printer are standard. For other configurations, refer
to "Special Features" below.
Prerequisites:
For SDLC Communications with 5/370 or 4300 Processors a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under
Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2, or these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not supported on 4300 Processors.
SDLC communication is also available via the Communications
Adapter feature on the 4331 ... see "Programming" for software
support available.
For BSC Communications with 5/360, 5/370 or 4300
Processors - a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or these operating
systems running under VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not supported
on the 4300 Processors. The 3770 Communication Terminals
use 2770 BSC programming support when operating In BSC
mode. Operation with S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors using
2770 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL GA27-3097
for esc compatibility considerations. The customer may have to
modify existing 2770 application programs for operation with
3770. BSC attachment can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller or a 2701 Data Adapter Unit attached to a
channel of any S/370 or 4300 Processor, via an Integrated
Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115, 125 or 135 or via
the Communications Adapter feature on a 4331. esc attachment
can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65
mode) 75 and 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a
S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 and
195; or via an Integrated Communications Allachment on S/360
md125.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
Specify: [1 ]Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[21 Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture only.
[31 Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
Offline Jobs
Card Reader
Line
Line
• Output to printer is automatic.
• 'Monitor Print is an output option in addition to line or card
punch.
Line
Printer
3771
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
$229
259
306
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$195
220
• 260
Purchase
MMMC
$8,400
$ 59.50
8,800
68.00
78.50
10,400
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $ 700
Model 1 to Model 3 ..... 2,500
Model 2 to Model 3 ..... 2,300.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-_._- -- - --------
M 3771.2
Jul79
====~=
DP Machines
3771 Communication Terminal (cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed, except # 1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.]
For Communication Capability - select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) ... and one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501, or
5502) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is required in addition to
#1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation using SSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460), Provides communication procedure using SDLC or SSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. SSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for SSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point
SSC operation over switched or non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One. LImitation: Cannot be installed with #1460 or
#1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #1460 or #1461. For record purposes also identify
CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the following:
#9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM, #9989
for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations of operating systems and access methods.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation over nonswitched facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for SSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1461). Provides
communication driver without clocking.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Feature #1460, 1461 or 1470.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1462).
Provides communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature #1460,
1461 or 1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM modem. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonswitched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901)
on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3874
Modem. This feature in combination with #1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with Local Attachment (#4716) for operation at 1200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481 or
1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides for point-to-point or multipoint operation over nonswitched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver with Clocking (#1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). Provides for point-to-point operation over switched
network facilities using manual originate/auto answer for estabHshlng 'connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
CBS or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701,
or with another Integrated Modem.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm to alert the operator
of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have Its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with this feature.
Refer to M 10000' pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetiC
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read.
With BSC,
a read operation can be initiated during a keyboard to line job
only. Data read from the magnetic stripe card cannot be printed.
Maximum: One. Limitations: (1) The operator must position and
slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5"
and 40" per second for a read operation. (2) SSC programming
for 2770 does not support this feature.
3501 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8050). To attach a 3501
Card Reader. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #8150.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #8050.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). Provides a forms
feeding device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms
width from 3" to 15" can be fed. Refer to Forms Design Refer·
ence Guide for Printers. GA24-3488. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
Communication Feature
SDLC /SSC, Swch Cntrl #1460
BSC, Polnt-to-Polnt
1461
SDLC
1470
BSC MultipOint
1462
Communication Driver
w /0 Bus Mch Clocking
1481
w 1200 BPS Business
Machine Clocking
1462
EIA Interface
3701
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Switched
5500
Switched, Auto Answer
5501
SWitched, Mnl Answer
5502
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Keylock
4650
Operator 10 Reader
5450
3501 Card Reader Attach 8050
3782/3521 Card Reader
Attachment
8150
Variable Wdth Fms Trctr 8700
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$25
15
13
13
$21
13
11
11
$840
520
440
440
$5.50
3.00
3.00
1.00
13
11
440
2.00
15
13
13
11
520
440
3.00
1.00
19
16
25
21
19
16
18
15
40SUC 35SUC 13
11
13
11
668
840
668
19
6
640
16
5
600
40
35
440
440
160
4.00
4.00
4.00
.50
.50
NC
1.50
.50
3.50
.50
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine. order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
Forms Stand (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL AN·
SWER (#5502). Provides for point-to-point operation over
switched networks USing manual originate/manual answer for
establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler
type COT or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) Is provided In place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with SSC fea·
tures #1460, #1461 or #1462, or with SDLC features #1460 or
#1470. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended for
field Installation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --=-- =-------- =--':' =
M 3773.1
Jul 79
OP Machines
IBM 3773 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: This desk style console-keyboard printer includes as
standard a diskette storage device with removable, reusable diskette. It is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System.
Communication features permit operation over switched or nonswitched facilities at speeds up to 4800 bps. It uses the SOLC or
BSC transmission technique.
Modell, P1
Model 2, P2
Model 3, P3
The prefix "P"
programmable.
40 cps average print rate -- bi-directional
80 cps maximum -- bi-directional
120 cps maximum -- bi-directional
on
the
model
number
designates
user-
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
9045 for gray.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... specify this feature for capability
to power down terminal from the host CPU using a controlled
data sequence over communication facilities.
[4] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
[5] Alternate Address: #9011 ... for EC record purposes only.
Order this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing
terminal control code engineering changes are to be mailed to
an alternate address
using a
Teleprocessing Control number. The alternate address selected is usually the central site location. Limitation: For models
Pl, P2, P3 only. Field installable.
PRICES:
Mdl
3773
1t
2t
3t
P1t
P2t
P3t
MAC/
MRC
$311
341
388
370
380
419
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
$265
290
330
315
323
357
$11,200
11,600
13,200
13,200
13,600
14,280
Model Changes: Field Installable on an "As Available" basis.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
1 to Model 2
1 to Model 3
1 to Model PI
1 to Model P2
1 to Model P3
2 to Model 3
2 to Model P2
2 to Model P3
3 to Model PI
Pl to Model P2
PI to Model P3
P2 to Model P3
$700
2,500
4,400
5,100
6,700
2,300
4,400
6,000
4,400
700
2,300
1,360
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 and
#4660 for which field installation is not recommended. Special
features are on an "As Available" basis for field installation.
For Communication Capability -- select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) ... and one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501,
5502) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is required in addition to
$1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SOLC or BSC under operator switch control. SOLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operarion. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461): Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with # 1460 or # 1470.
t
No longer available.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1481). Provides
a communication driver without clocking. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Feature # 1460, # 1461 or # 1470.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1482).
Provides a communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature # 1460,
#1461 or #1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM...
ed.
one can be select-
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM modem. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonswitched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fanout (#3901) on
an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3874
Modem. This feature in conjunction with #1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with Local Attachment (#4716) for operation at 1200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481 or
1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
MMMC
$74.50
78.50
102.00
113.00
117.00
132.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Useful Life Category: 2
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SOLC
procedures. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #1460 or #1461. For record purposes also identify the
primary CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the
following: #9977 for OOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM,
#9989 for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations
of operating systems and access methods.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides for point-to-point or multipoint operation over nonswitched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver with Clock (# 1482). Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #3701 or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). Provides for point-to-point operation over switched
network faCilities using manual originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler Type
CBS or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701
or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL ANSWER (#5502. Provides for point-to-point operation over
switched network facilities using manual originate/manual answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data
Coupler Type CDT or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701 or with another Integrated Modem.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. The feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage and with BSC features #1460, #1461 or #1462, or with
SDLC features #1460 or #1470. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm to alert the operator
of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local key makers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with this feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacemnt keys. Maximum: One.
KEYPAD, NUMERIC (#4660). Provides a keypad in adding machine arrangement to facilitate rapid entry of numeric only data.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Model P1, P2 or P3. Limitation:
Not available for mdls 1, 2 or 3. Field Installation: Not recommended.
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read.
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
T~¥:.';
==.::: == ';' ==
OP Machines
3773 Communication Terminal
M 3773.2
J"I79
(cont'd)
With a esc
non-programmable terminal, a read operation can be Initiated
during a keyboard to line job only. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed •. For a programmable terminal the
Operator 10 Reader (#5450) is under control of the 3770 application program. Maximum: One. Limitation: (1) The operator must
position and slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate
between 5" and 40" per second for a read operation ... (2) esc
programming for 2770 does not support this feature.
STORAGE INCREMENT,4K (#8800). Provides an additional 4096
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl, P2 or P3. Limitation: Not available for mdls 1, 2 or 3,
or with #6601.
STORAGE INCREMENT, 8K (#8801). Provides an additional 8192
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl, P2 or P3. Limitation: Not available for mdls 1, 2 or 3,
or with #6800.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). Provides a forms
feeding device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms
widths from 3" to 15" can be feed. Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prlcea:
Communication Feature
SDLCIBSC,Swch Cntrl #1460
BSC,Polnt-to-Polnt
1481
SDLC
1470
BSC Multipoint
1482
Communication Driver
wlo Bus Machine Clklng 1481
w 1200 BPS Busln...
Machine Clocking
1482
EIA Intarface
3701
Keypad, Numeric
4880
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Swltched
5500
SWitched, Auto Answer 5501
Swltched,Mnl Answer
5502
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Keylock
4850
Operator ID Reader
5450
Storage Increment, 4K
6800
Storage Increment, 8K
6801
8700
Vbl Wdth Forms Trctr
MAC
MAC
$25
15
13
13
ETPI
MLC
2 Yr Purcha.. MMMC
$21
13
11
11
S840
13
11
440
2.00
15
13
12
13
11
10
520
3.00
1.00
2.00
19
16
21
25
19
16
18
15
40SUC 15SUC 35SUC 13
11
18
15
27
32
6
5
520
440
440
440
400
868
8.40
868
600
40
15
35
440
351"
637
160
$5.50
3.00
3.00
1.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
.50
.50
NC
NC
1.50
4.50
6.50
.50
'Customers who elect to purchase this feature and anticipate
later ordering additional storage, should consider purchase of
the larger storage initially because a field upgrade requires
replacement of the Initial feature.
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature #
indicated below at the price listed on M 10000 pages. See M
10000 for additional information and field Installation.
Forms Stand (#4450). - Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
\
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'-------- - --- ----
- -- -- -----------
M 3174.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3774 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
[Models 1 and 2 are no longer available]
Purpose: This desk-style console-printer-keyboard is a member of
the 3770 Data Communication System. The basic printer operates
at a maximum speed of 80 or 120 characters per second and
prints bi-directional, serial by character, using a wire-matrix print
head. Special features permit one or two diskette storage devices
and provide for the addition of an additional printer, the 3784 Line
Printer, and 'one card reader and one card punch. One of three
card readers can be selected for operation at speeds of 50, 150
or 300 cards per minute. The card punch operates at 50 cpm.
Communication features allow for operation over switched or
non-switched facilities at speeds up to 4800 bps using SDLC or
BSC transmission techniques and an appropriate modem.
Modell, P1
Model 2, P2
The prefix "P"
programmable.
80 cps maximum -- bi-directional printer
120 cps maximum -- bi-directional printer
on
the
model
number
designates
user-
Highlights:
All Models
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space and
"Print Character" ("Character" on programmable models) keys
have typamatic operation. Associated with the keyboard are
indicator lights, function keys, operating mode switches, and a
3-position numeric display.
Printer -- prints serial by character at a maximum rate of 80 or
120 characters per second while the wire-matrix print head is
moving in either direction -- bi-directional printing. Print span is
132 positions at 10 characters per inch. Line spacing is 6 lines
per inch. The 3774 mdls Pl and P2 (without Emulator) provide
for line spacing of 6 or 8 lines per inch. Single part continuous
forms or up to three part cut forms can be handled with the
standard friction feed platen. A variable width forms tractor (a
special feature) , is required for feeding multipart or preprinted
continuous forms of up to six parts maximum (total thickness not
greater than 0.018". Five and six part continuous forms should
be tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration and print quality. Overall form widths from 3" to 15" can be
accommodated. To facilitate handling of continuous forms, the
Forms Stand (an accessory) is recommended. Card stock continuous forms are not recommended. Refer to GA24-3488 for
forms design considerations. A 94 character set is standard.
Performance Considerations - actual terminal device throughput
is dependent upon operational and systems programming charact~ristics. Factors such as the communications facilities, transmission block length, compressing characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must
all be considered in determining actual throughput. See IBM
3770 Data Communication System, GA27-3097, for additional
information.
Problem Determination Procedures -- significant function has
been designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification and recovery routines and procedures that are easily
understood and used by the operator. See IBM 3774/3775
Operating Procedures Guide, GA27-3094, or IBM 3773, 3774
and 3775 Programmable Communication Terminals Operator's
Guide, GA27-3114.
Communications see "Special Features." Transmission
speeds up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities
are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Refer to 3770 Data Communications System in
"Systems" for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700
pages for information on communications facilities and other
attachment facilities.
Also refer to 3782 and 3784 in
"Machines." The 2400 BPS Integrated Modem and IBM 3872
Modem when appropriately configured can be intermixed on the
same communication facility.
For BSC Communications with 5/360, 5/370 or 4300
Processors -- a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VSl or OS/VS2; or under RSCS (nonprogrammable terminals only) and VM/370; or any of these
operating systems running under VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not
supported by the 4300 Processors. The 3776 Communication
Terminals use 2770/3780 BSC programming support when
operating in BSC mode. Operation with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processors using 2770/3780 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
The customer may have to modify existing 2770/3780 application programs for operation with 3774. The customer will have to
modify existing application programs for operation with programmable models of the 3774. BSC attachment can be via a
3704/3705 Communications Controller, or a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit attached to a channel of any S/370 or 4300 Processor; or
via an Integrated Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115,
125, 135, 135-3 or 138; or via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor. BSC attachment can be made via a
3704/3705 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50,
65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode),
75 or 195; or via an Integrated Communications Attachment on
S/360 mdl 25.
Non-programmable Models
Emulator Specify Feature
and
Programmable
Models
with
Dual 256-Byte Buffers -- transfer data between the input and
output devices. The buffers alternate in providing input and
output service to permit overlapped operation.
Buffer Edit -- allows corrections to be made on the contents of a
buffer during key entry jobs. A 256-byte diskette record, if the
diskette feature is present, can also be retrieved into the buffer
using Update Mode and be corrected using buffer edit functions.
Corrections can be made by character, by line or by entire buffer
(up to 256 bytes).
Extend Buffer -- combines the dual 256-byte buffers into
single 512-byte buffer under operator control for keyboard
line or keyboard to diskette jobs. Buffer edit capability applies
the full 512 bytes. Buffer transfers to line or diskette are
256-byte increments and cannot be overlapped. '
a
to
to
in
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing. Format controls for up to 5 jobs
can be entered from keyboard, or from diskette or card if either
one of these devices is attached.
Compression/Expansion -- provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from cards. A two-byte sequence is substituted
for each occurrence of three or more consecutive blank card
columns (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 64 consecutive
blank columns are read. The terminal monitors received nontransparent data that is destined for printer or attached card
punch and automatically expands this two-byte sequence to the
correct number of blanks. A similar capability is provided when
using SDLC procedures.
Auto Interrupt -- allows the terminal to automatically interrupt an
offline job for an online job initiated by the host CPU. The terminal stops the offline job, executes the online job for receiving
line data, automatically restarts the offline job without operator
intervention. A manual switch on the keyboard enables/disables
this mode of operation. See "Operating Characteristics - Automatic Interrupt" in 3770 Systems Components Manual,
GA27-3097.
Input/Output Job Definitions -- can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined jobs can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the special features, otherwise
they can be entered from keyboard under control of a prompting
sequence and executed from temporary storage. Printer format
controls can be part of the job definition. An appropriately configured 3774 will permit input/output job designationa as follows:
Supplies -- a black ribbon, IBM Part No. 2236653, or equivalent, is required
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
Customer Responsibilities - it will be a customer's responsibility to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and
fill out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also
refer to M 2700 pages.
Keyboard'
(2) Keyboard &
Diskette
(2) Keyboard &
Card Reader
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Console Printer and either Diskette or
Card Punch
Console Printer and either Diskette or
Card Punch
Online Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or
Card Reader
Line
Prerequisites:
For SDLC Communications with 5/370 or 4300 Processors -a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under
Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VSl or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note; OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors.
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
--- -------==
---- - =':' =
M 3774.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3774 Communication Terminal
(conl'd)
(1) Line
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
for input data. Output data can be directed to a diskette dataset, card punch, console printer or 3784 Printer. Support is
provided for printer horizontal and vertical format control. The
programmable Communications capability allows for transmission of data with any I/O device under control of a user written
program.
Online Interactive Job
Line
Console Printer
" One input device and one output device per job. Output to
console printer is automatic when input is keyboard.
Keyboard"
Line
(1) O,:,e input d.e.vice and one o~tput device per job. Monitor print
IS an additional output option when diskette, card punch or
line is the output device.
(2) Record Format Feature (#6010) is required in addition to I/O
devices to allow multiple input and output devices for a job.
Limitations: The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal. Keyboard and console printer are standard. For other
configurations refer to "Special Features" below.
Programmable Models Without Emulator Specify Feature
Offline Operations - are controlled by a user written program.
The 3774 interprets the user written program after it is loaded to
program storage from diskette storage. The 3774 has 6K bytes
of program storage as standard. Additional 4K, 8K, 12K or 16K
bytes of program storage are available by special feature to a
maximum of 16K add!tional bytes of program storage. A program
can be selected and Invoked by the operator, by a prior program
call, or by an auto execute command from the host CPU. Valid
data source~ for offline operations are the Operator 10 Reader,
key~oard, diskette storage and card reader. Valid data output
devices are the console printer, diskette storage card punch
3784 Line Printer and display.
"
3774P system utilities provide additional capabilities for the
following operations:
Card reader to console printer, diskette, card punch, or 3784
Printer.
Card print (Read Interpret).
Keyboard to card punch.
Create, copy, list diskette.
Data set support for bypass, create, delete, erase, rename and
write protect data set.
Data set update for create, read, write and dump data set.
Copy data set.
Program library support.
Print error log.
Set date.
Set configuration.
Diskette Storage Device -- with 99,840 bytes of storage is
standard on a non-removable diskette. Characteristics of the
non-removable diskette are one read/write surface, 30 data
tracks, 26 sectors per track and 128 bytes per sector. Up to
390 256-byte records or up to 780 128-byte records can be
stored on the non-removable diskette. Programmable communication (SDLC) reduces the amount of storage for user data from
30 to 28 tracks.
Two additional Diskette Storage Devices providing 242,944 bytes
of storage each on removable reusable diskettes are provided by
special feature.
The diskettes can be used for storage of 3770 application programs and for application data. The maximum number of user
written data sets that can reside on the non-removable diskette
and removable diskette is 18. A maximum of seven data sets
can be opened for anyone program. A program library data set
can contain a maximum of 99 user written programs. Program
identification can be numbered from 01 to 99.
CPU Interrupt - can automatically occur during offline programs
in order to r.eceive an unsolicited CPU message. The message is
stored on diskette storage (or, uncfer certain conditions, printed
on the console printer) and the offline program is automatically
resumed. A manual switch on the keyboard enables/disables
this mode of operation.
Address Stop Function - is provided to facilitate debugging of
3770 application programs at the terminal site. The status of
program resources at the stop-address can be outputted to
printer or display.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color:. 9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue or
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture oniy.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 '" specify this feature for capability
to power down terminal from the host CPU using a controlled
data sequence sent over communication facilities.
[4] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
Storage ConSiderations - storage is used for executing a 3770
~pplication program that is loaded from diskette, for Communications Mode, for data buffers, and for execution of device-related
functions that are specified by the opening statement in the
application program. Storage may also be allocated for devices
and functions at power on time through options available in the
Terminal Configuration Utility. The amount of storage required
for devices or functions is:
[5] E'!lulator: #9141 ... specify this feature to equip the terminal
With the non-programmable function in lieu of the standard
programmable function. Non-programmable notation on the
keyboard and operator panel is provided by this feature. Field
Installation: Not recommended. It can be field removed to
change the terminal from non-programmable to programmable
function.
Supervisor Control Code Resident
Programmable Communications - BSC
Programmable Communications - SDLC
Communications Mode
Basic (diskette and console printer I/O)
Additional Storage for Card I/O & 3784 Printer
Using BSC Communications
Using SDLC Communications
Additional Storage Using SDLC
Multiple SYS.INTR Function
Format Image Buffer (Power on Allocation only)
3501 Card Reader
2502 Card Reader
Display Feature
3521 Card Punch
Read-Next Buffers
(optional for diskette operation)
[6] Alternate Address: #9011 ...
Ord~r this optional feature to ~pecifY that diskettes containing
terminal control code englneenng changes are to be mailed to
an alternate address
using a
Teleprocessing Control number. The alternate address selected is usually the central site location. Limitations: [1] For
models PI, P2 only ... [2] Not with Emulator (#9141) ... [3]
Each EC control diskette has been manufactured for use on
the specific machine type/serial shown on the diskette label.
EC diskettes for the 3774 terminal are unconfigured when they
are mailed from IBM and have 23 tracks of storage available
for user data. After the diskette is configured on the machine
type/serial on which it is to be used, the amount of storage
for user data is as follows: 30 tracks - configured to not use
programmable communications SDLC ... 28 tracks - configured
to use programmable communications SDLC. For additional
information, see "Data Set Support" in the Operator's Guide
GA27-3114.
'
3.0K bytes
2.0K bytes
7.0K bytes
6.0K bytes
4.0K bytes
5.75K bytes
.75K bytes
256 bytes
1.75K bytes
2.5K bytes
2.5K bytes
3.0K bytes
0.25K bytes
for each data
set to a max.
of 5.
The amount of storage required is also dependent
upon the following variables:
PRICES:
3774
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Size of 3770 application program
XK bytes
Working storage for tables, storage to storage
operations, buffers, etc., including 0.75K bytes
for basic three buffers
XK bytes
Online Communications Operation - terminals equipped with
the appropriate I/O and Communications features can operate as
follows:
Purchase MMMC
$310
$264
$10,560 $71.50
1t
350
298
11,920
81.00
2t
P1
310
264
10,560 117.00
P2
350
11,920 125.00
298
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Transmission is controlled by the Communications Mode function or by a user written program using the Programmable
Communications function. Communicate Mode provides for
selection of diskette datasets, card reader or keyboard (Logon)
Model Changes: Field Installable ... for 3774 Models 1 and 2 on
an "As Available" basis Limitation: Model downgrades from
programmable models to non-programmable models are not permitted.
t
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._--_.---- ---------------_.- -- -----
DP Machines
3774 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges).
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
1 to Model 2
1 to Model P1
1 to Model P2
2 to Model P2
P1 to Model P2
$2,300
4,900
6,260
4,900
1,360
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 and
#4660 for which field installation is not recommended. Special
features for 3774 mdls 1 and 2 are on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
FOR COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY -- select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) ... and one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501,
5502, 5600, 5602 or 5610) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is
required in addition to #1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation
using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462. multipoint with
# 1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POtNT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1470.
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #1460 or #1461. For record purposes also identify the
primary CPU/Program Environment Code. Specify one of the
following: #9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM,
#9989 for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations
of operating systems and access methods.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or·#1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1481). Provides
communication driver without clocking.
Maximum:
One.
Prerequisite:
Communication Feature #1460, #1461, or
#1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1482).
Provides communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature #1460,
#1461 or #1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701), Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM data set. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonsWitched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901)
on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3784
Modem. This feature in combination with #1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with Local Attachment (#4716) for operation at 1200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481 or
# 1482). limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated
Modem feature.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Pr"10 or more consecutive
duplicate characters. The terminal automatically expands the
compression sequences to the correct number of blanks or duplicate characters for compressed transparent or non-transparent
data received.
Transmission Reversal - permits keyboard initiation of interrupt
of host data transmission for terminal data transmission and for
resumption of the host transmission upon completion of the terminal transmission. The function is dependent upon associated host
programming.
Record Compress - using two special feature diskette storage
devices permits offline compression of Basic Exchange diskette
records onto a single 3776 diskette for subsequent batch transmission. The compressed records are written on the 3776 diskette in 3770 mode. Record Compress using one diskette storage
device permits the compression of Basic Exchange diskette
records into blocks of 256 bytes or 512 bytes for transmission.
Dual Data Path - provides for concurrent operation of a line-to-
printer job and a card reader-to-diskette, or diskette-to-card
punch, or dlskette-to-diskette job. The line-to-printer job uses
either the dual 256-byte or dual 51 2-byte alternating buffers to
accept data from the line and transfer it to the printer. A single
256-byte or single 51 2-byte buffer is used for data buffering
between card I/O and diskette or diskette and diskette. Throughput for both online and offline jobs is degraded when run concurrently using dual data path.
Automatic Card to Line Job -- when an online job is completed
and the 3776 goes into Standby Status, a reader-to-line job is
automatically started. The Start-Job procedure is not required
provided the terminal has a 2502 Card Reader and it is in ready
status.
Input/Output Form Definitions - can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined forms can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the special features, otherwise
they can be entered from keyboard. Printer format controls can
be a part of the job definition. An appropriately configured 3776
will permit input/output job designation as follows:
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Online Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or Card Reader
(1) Line
Line
Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Dual Data Path Jobs
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Line
Card Reader
Diskette
Diskette
Printer
Diskette
Card Punch
Diskette
(1) One input device and one output device per job.
(2) Line to printer occurs concurrently with card reader to
diskette or diskette to card punch or diskette to diskette.
Performance Considerations -- actual terminal device throughput
is dependent upon operational and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must all
be considered in determining actual throughput. See IBM 3770
Data Communication System, GA27-3097, for additional information.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to help provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification routines and procedures that are easily understood and
used by the operator. See IBM 3776 Operating Procedures Guide,
GA27-31 07.
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fili out
the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to M
2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication
facility. Refer to 3770 Data Communication System in "Systems"
for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700 pages for
information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities,
and other attachment information. Also refer to 3863, 3864, 3872
and 3874 in "Machines." The 2400 BPS Integrated Modem and
IBM 3872 Modem when appropriately configured can be intermixed on the same communication facility. The 4800 BPS Integrated
Modem and IBM 3874 Modem when appropriately configured can
be intermixed on the same communication facility.
Supplies: For mdl 1 or 2, a black ribbon, Part No. 1136670, or
equivalent, is required. Alternate Part No. 1299160, or equivalent,
incorporates a twist in the ribbon which may improve ribbon life if
the major portion of printing is in the first 60 print positions.
Limitations:
The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal. Keyboard and printer are standard. For other configurations refer to "Special Features" below.
Prerequisites:
For SDLC Comm",nications with 5/370 or 4300 Processor -- a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370 (OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors).
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------------- ----_
- ---------.-
M 3776.2
Jut 79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 1 and 2
(cont'd)
For BSC Communications with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processors - a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processoroperating under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or under RSCS and
VM/370, or any of these operating systems running under
VM/370 (OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors).
The 3776 Communications Terminals use 2770/3780 BSC programming support when operating in BSC mode. Operation with
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors using 2770/3780 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations. The customer may have to modify existing 2770/3780 application programs for operation with 3776.
BSC attachment can be via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller, or a 2701 Data Adapter Unit attached to a channel of any
S/370 or 4300 Processor; or via an Integrated Communications
Adapter on S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 or 138; or via a
Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor. BSC
attachment can be 'Vade via a 3704/3705 attached to a channel
of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; via
a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40,
44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; or via an Integrated
Communications Attachment on S/360 mdl 25.
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 2-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture only.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... this specify feature can be used
to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host CPU application program to initiate power down at
the terminal by sending a controlled data sequence over communication facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the
appropriate communication special features. This capability is in
addition to the standard power down switch which can be manually operated.
[4] Print Belt Character Set: Specify one for shipment with the
3776 (available at time of manufacture only). See Print Belts in
M 10000 pages for print belts available in addition to belt specified on order entry.
- 48 Character Set EBCDIC (HN Character Set)"
-- 48 Character Set EBCDIC (Standard Character
----
64.
94
48
64
94
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Model
Model
Model
Model
1
1
1
2
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
2 ". $ 3,000'
3 ". $11,000'
4 ". $14,000'
4 ". $11,000'
, Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation
of this model change involves removal of parts which become
the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.
For Communication Capability - select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470); a Communication Driver
(#1481); one Integrated Modem (#5600, 5602, 5610, 5700,
5702, 5710) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is required in
addition to #1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ". one can be selected.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
#9489
#9490
Set)' ,
#9491
#9492
#9493'
#9494
#9495
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII'
ASCII'
ASCII'
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with $1460 or #1470.
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. For record purposes, also identify the primary
CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the following:
#9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM, #9989
for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations of operating systems and access methods. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1461.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462), Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27 -3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
, ASCII Feature (#1201) is required.
COMMUNICATION D.RIVER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#1481). Provides communication driver without clocking. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature
(#1460, 1461 or 1470).
" These belts are identical except for the following special
character differences:
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
#9489 has) ( =
#9490 has % # @
Print belts are interchangeable by the operator. The internal
code structure adapts to the belt installed as follows:
Data Stream
Character
Printed
Character
EIA INTERFACE (#3701), Provides an EIA RS-322C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment of an IBM or other modem.
Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or non-switched operation
are permitted. This feature in combination with # 1481 can be
used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901) on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3874 Modem. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation:
Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
#9489 (HN) Specified
HN Belt Installed
HN Belt Installed
Standard Belt Installed
Standard Belt Installed
)( =
%#@
)(=
)(=
%#@
%#@
%#@
)(=
#9490 (Standard) Specified
Standard Belt Installed
Standard Belt Installed
HN Belt Installed
HN Belt Installed
% # @
) ( =
% # @
) ( =
%#@
)(=
(5] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
3776
Mdl
1
2
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$588
676
$500
575
Purchase
MMMC
$20,000
23,000
$180
199
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, POINT-TOPOINT (#5600). This self-clocked modem provides for point-topoint operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operator controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting
receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, MULTIPOINT (#5602). This self-clocked modem provides for multipoint
operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting transmit and receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701 or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO
ANSWER (#5610). This self-clocked modem provides for pointto-point operation over switched network facilities using manual
originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). The user must
provide a Data Coupler type CBS or equivalent. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated
Modem.
SUB-FEATURES FOR 2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEMS
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capabil-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --- --=----=- =--':' =
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 1 and 2 (conl'd)
Ity of attaching 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600 or 5602) to
the switched netork facility as a back-up to the primary nonswitched facility. Operation over the switched network is in
manual originate/manual answer moae to establish the connection. It can communicate at 2400/1200 bps with an IBM 3872
Modem equipped for operation over the public switched network
(#7941, 7951 or 7952) attached to a 3704, 3705 or ICA of a
3115 or 3125. Note: To use this feature, operator intervention
at the terminal is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both, may be required at the using system. This
feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS/VS, OS/VS1
and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional customer
program routines will be required in existing BTAM programming
to fully utilize the capabilities of this feature. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites:: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600 or 5602).
The user must provide a Data Coupler type COT or equivalent.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701.
MODEM FAN-OUT (#3901). Equips the 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem, Non-Switched,Multipoint (#5602) with the capability to
be shared by up to two other terminals in addition to the host.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: #5602. Limitation: This feature
can be used at a tributary station in a centralized multipoint
network. In this configuration, BSC multipoint programming
discipline or SDLC non-switched programming discipline will
provide the selection/control of the terminal without any additional user involvement.
4800 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, POINT-TOPOINT (#5700). This self-clocked modem provides for point-topoint operation over 4-wire non-switched communication facilities. This modem features automatic equalization and manual
half-speed select. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701), or with another Integrated Modem.
4800 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, MULTIPOINT (#5702). This self-clocked modem provides for multipoint
operation over 4-wire non-switched communication facilities. This
modem features automatic equalization and manual half-speed
select. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver
(#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, or with
another Integrated Modem.
4800 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, WITH AUTO
ANSWER (#5710). This self-clocked modem provides for pointto-point operation over switched network facilities using manual
originate/auto answer for establishing connection. This modem
features automatic equalization and manual half=speed select.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481.
The user must provide a Data Coupler type CBS or equivalent.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another
Integrated Modem.
SUB-FEATURES FOR 4800 BPS MODEMS
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7952). Provides the capability of attaching 4800 BPS Integrated Modem (#5700 or 5702)
to the switched network facilit:y as a back-up to the primary
non-switched facility. Operation over the switched network is in
manual originate/manual answer mode to establish the connection. It can communicate at 4800/2400 bps with an IBM 3874
Modem equipped for operation over the public switched network
(#7941, 7951 or 7952) attached to a 3704, 3705 or ICA of a
3115 or 3125. Note: To use this feature, operator intervention
at the terminal is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both, may be required on'the using system. Additional customer program routines will be required in existing programming to fully utilize the capabilities of this feature.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: 4800 BPS Integrated Modem
(#5700 or 5702). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
COT or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701.
MODEM FAN-OUT (#3902). Equips the 4800 BPS Integrated
Modem, Non-Switched, Multipoint (#5702) with the capability to
be shared by up to two other terminals in addition to the terminal
containing the integrated modem. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#5702. Limitation: This feature can be used at a tributary
station in a centralized multipoint network. In this configuration,
BSC multipoint programming discipline or SDLC non-switched
programming discipline will provide the selection/control of the
terminal without any additional user involvement.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
Keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette) and with BSC
features #1460, 1461 or 1462 or with SDLC features #1460 or
1470. Orders for #1201 must also specify one print belt, #9493
for 48 character ASCII, #9494 for 64 character ASCII, or #9495
for 94 character ASCII. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not
recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
M 3776.3
Jul79
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys. for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
FRONT FEED (#3951). Enables the operator to insert paper forms
in the front or rear of the machine. A forms entry chute is provided under the keyboard for front loading. The paper supply is
placed on the floor either under the keyboard in the front of the
machine for front loading, or underneath the forms enclosure for
rear loading.
FORMS STAND ... integrated into the machine covers for the 3776
mdl1 and 2.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output or
control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. AdditiolJal diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read/write
head; one read/write surtace; 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 949 256-byte records; or 474
512-byte records can be stored on the diskette (one 256-byte
data record is reserved for forms control information). Each 256byte record is stored in two consecutive numbered sectors in
interchange mode, or in two non-consecutive sectors in 3770
mode. Each 512-byte record is stored in four consecutive sectors
in interchange mode, or four non-consecutive sectors in 3770
mode. Diskette data is code insensitive in SDLC mode, nontransparent only in BSC mode. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the 1 st. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy - data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2 (single
data set or all active data sets - 3770 mode only).
Concatenate (pool) - the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Continue - allows a read or write operation to automatically
continue to diskette 2, if it has been placed in ready condition.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1 st (#4901).
Orders for Field Installation: Must specify color - #9081 for red,
#9082 for yellow, #9083 for blue, or #9085 for gray. Color must
be the same as that specified for the base machine.
OPERATOR 10 FEATURE (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parit:y. Card size 3-3/8"' x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007"' to 0.045"' thick may be read. With BSC, a read operation
can be initiated during a keyboard to line job only. Data read from
the magnetic stripe card cannot be printed. Maximum: One.
Limitations: [1] The operator must position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation '" [2] BSC programming for 2770
and 3780 does not support this feature.
3501 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8050). To attach a 3501
Card Reader. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149). If a 3521 is
also attached (#8150), the Card Read/ Punch Check special
feature on the 3521 is limited to the punch checking function only.
3782/2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502 Card Reader mdl
A1 or A2. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
3501 Card Reader Attachment (#8050). If a 3521 is also attached (#8150), the Card Read/Punch Check special feature on the
3521 is limited to the punch checking function only.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: If a 2502
or 3501 Card Reader is also attached (#8149 or 8050), the Card
Read/Punch Check special feature on the 35~1 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- - =':' =
==-
--------- ------
M 3776.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 1 and 2 (cont'd)
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Communication Feature
SDLC/BSC,Swtch Cntrl #1460
BSC, Pt-ta-Pt
1461
SDLC
1470
BSC Multipoint
1462
Communication Driver
w/o Bus Mche Clocking 1461
3701·
EIA Interlace
2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Switched, Pl-t-Pt
5600
Non-Switched, Multipt
5602
Switched w Auto Answr 5610
4600 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Switched, Pt-ta-Pl
5700
Non-Switched, Multipt
5702
Switched w Auto Answer 5710
Swtch Ntwk Backup
7951
Swtch Ntwk Backup
7952
Modem Fan-out
3901
Modem Fan-out
3902
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
Keylock
4650
Diskette Storage, 1 st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Front Feed
3951
3501 Card Reader Attach 8050
3782/2502 Cd Rdr Attach 8149
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
$25
15
13
13
$21
13
11
11
$840
520
440
440
$5.50
3.00
3.00
1.00
13
13
11
11
440
440
2.00
1.00
68
74
74
56
63
63
2,320
2,520
2,520
5.00
5.00
6.00
141
120
141
120
159
135
11
9
24
20
18
21
29
25
18
15
40SUC 15SUC 30SUC 35SUC 69
59
69
59
13
11
10
.12
11
13
19
16
19
16
3,600
3,600
4,050
360
600
720
750
600
40
15
30
35
2,360
2,360
440
400
440
640
640
45.50
45.50
48.00
.50
3.00
1.00
1.00
.50
.50
NC
NC
NC
16.50
7.00
1.50
NC
.50
4.00
3.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages, see M 10000
for additional information and field installation.
Print Belt, Add'i (#5811, #5812, #5613, #5820, #5821,
#5622, #5823 - Permits the customer to obtain more than one
character set print belt for various applications.
48-character
64-character
94-character
48-character
48-character
64-character
94-character
ASCII (#5811)'
ASCII (#5812)"
ASCII (#5813)"
EBCDIC [HN Character Set] (#5820)
EBCDIC (Standard Character Set) (#5821)
EBCDIC (#5822)
EBCDIC (#5823)
, ASCII Feature (#1201) is prerequisite.
(
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -----.:. ==: == ';' ::
- ----
M 3776.5
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3776 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Models 3 and 4
Purpose: The 3776 is a medium speed remote job entry terminal
and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System. The
3776 model 3 and 4 are SNA Multiple Logical Unit (MLU) terminals. A keyboard and a console display are used for terminal
control and for operator communication with the host CPU. Terminal operation may be controlled by the storage of operating procedures terminal setups and local utility programs in terminal storage f~r use by the terminal operator. The 3776 is not designed as
an interactive terminal. The printer contains an engraved character
font belt (48, 64 or 94 character set) which can be interchanged
by the operator. A special feature provides for paper insertion
from either the front or rear of the machine. Special features
permit on.e .or. two diskette. storage devices, Qne magnetic tape.
unit, one card reader and one card punch.. One of three card
readers can be selected for operation at speeds of 150, 300 or
400 cards per minute. The card punch operates at 50 cpm.
Maximum Lines
per Minute
Character
Set
Model 3
300
230
160
48
64
94
Model 4
400
300
230
48
64
94
Highlights:
Communications - transmission speeds from 2400 bps to 9600
bps and at 19.2K bps are provided using the appropriate modems and communications facilities. Duplex -- simultaneous
inbound/outbound - data transmission is provided on nonswitched full duplex communication facilities only when communicating with an appropriately equipped 3705 Communications
Controller with the supporting ACF /NCP /VS level. May also be
locally attached in either a duplex or half duplex mode to a 3705
at 14.4K bps.
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys. The keyboard in conjunction with a standard console display, indicator
lights, function keys, operating mode switches and .a 3.-position
numeric display provides operator control. Host application commands, System Services Control Point (SSCP) commands and
local functions are entered from the keyboard. Data entered on
the keyboard is displayed. If a keying error is made, Character
Backspace and Character Advance may be used for editing.
Character Backspace and Advance are non-destructive. Character Advance is typamatic. Reset returns to the position from
which the Character Backspace began.
Console Display - contains 16 lines of 64 characters each for a
total of 1024 characters. The 3776 mdl 3 and 4 reserve the
bottom three lines of the display for operator keying, display of
system information and prompting for information required for the
execution of functions. The remaining 13 lines of the display are
used to display messages between the terminal and the host
application or the SSCP and to display information regarding
terminal operations such as host input.
Lower case alphabetics are converted to upper case before
displaying. When the cursor is beneath a character, any new
data keystroke will cause the new character to replace the old.
Overstrikes are not permitted.
Each message is displayed as it is received except as described
below. Each message is also written in terminal storage. At
power-on time, the operator is prompted to specify date and time.
As messages are received they are time-stamped prior to display
and storage. Messages longer than a display line will wrap
around to the next line with an indent to aid readability. The
display fills from top to bottom. Subsequent new message lines
replace the oldest message lines. The most recent message
received is identified by the Greater Than sign > in the first
position. The following line is blanked to assist the operator with
message identification.
Function keys on the keyboard allow the operator to control the
display function. The display can be held while incoming messages are sent to terminal storage and not displayed. If messages arrive during the 'hold' state, a message alert light notifies
the operator. The operator may subsequently display the desired
message group. A terminal utility program is available for listing
or copying the message contents of terminal storage for external
message retention and reference.
Printer - line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving
belt. Included as standard is one interchangeable print belt
(either 48, 64 or 94 character set) ... see "Specify." Also standard are a variable width forms tractor for feeding continuous
forms up to 15" wide ... paper jam detection ... and 132 print
positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch, line spacing is 6 or
8 lines per inch. Maximum print lines 15 127 lines per page.
Refer to GA24-3844 for forms design considerations.
Terminal Storage -- is standard for message spooling, terminal
control, utility programs and user generated procedures.
Diskette Storage -- there are two diskette storage devices available as special features. While the devices are physically identical to those on the 3776 mdl 1 and 2, additional operational
facilities such as data set concatenation enhance the use of the
special feature diskette storage devices. Also, each special
feature diskette storage device may be assigned individually to an
independent host SNA session or used locally for input or output.
Diskette operation is concurrent with other terminal functions.
Magnetic Tape -- may be used as either an input or as an output
device. One 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 attachment is available as a special feature. The 3411 mdl 1 provides
9-track tape with recording densities of 1600 bpi Phase Encoded
or 800 bpi NRZI. 7-track tape operation is not provided. The
3411 mdl 1 may be aSSigned to an independent host SNA session or used locally for input and output. Labeled and unlabeled
tapes are supported. Records are fixed or variable length and
may be unblocked or blocked to a maximum block size of 4000
bytes. Maximum record size is 255 bytes. A block size of up to
2000 bytes automatically provides dual buffering. Magnetic tape
operation is concurrent with other terminal functions. Refer to
G232-0004 for detailed information on operation of the 3411 mdl
1. Feature #7003 is required on the 3411 mdl 1.
Buffers -- transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. SDLC communications uses a customer
defined Request/Response Unit (RU) of up to 512 bytes. The
actual transmission is dependent on session pacing values, data
length, buffer availability and data availability. Buffers also transfer data between input and output devices during local operation.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical control characters in data initiate vertical tabbing.
Carriage control definition provides for specification of a variable
number of line numbers per carriage stop with a maximum of 60
lines per carriage control definition. Carriage control definition
may be defined at the terminal or may be sent dynamically by the
host application. Extended Forms Definition is standard and uses
terminal storage.
Compression/Expansion -- implementation provides a compression option at the terminal for a job that reads data from cards,
magnetic tape, or diskette to the line. An identifying sequence is
substituted for each occurrence of two or more consecutive
duplicate characters. Trailing blank truncation is standard. The
terminal automatically expands the compression sequence to the
correct number of blanks or duplicate characters for compressed
transparent or non-transparent data received.
Decompaction -- provides the decompaction function associated
with the receipt of a compacted data stream whereby a pair of
consecutive alphameric characters is represented by a single
transmission byte. Function depends upon transmission by the
host of a decompaction table corresponding to ·the compaction
table used by host programming in creating the compacted job
data stream. Decompaction occurs for data directed to the printer, card punch, magnetic tape and diskette (except 3770 format).
Compaction by the terminal of data inbound to the host 15 not
provided.
Automatic Card Reading - capability is under control of the
operator. The "hot reader" function may be enabled/disabled at
any appropriate operational time.
Job Control -- initiated by the operator, pertains to online jobs
with the host and local utility jobs run concurrently with the
online jobs. Online job submission may be initiated at any time
there is an SNA session available for data transmission. The
terminal may have up to six concurrent sessions that are controlled by the operator. Online job input may consist of card,
diskette or magnetic tape data. Data from different devices or
data sets may be concatenated into a single input data stream as
one job execution. Online job output may consist of printer, card,
diskette or magnetic tape data.
Local utility jobs may be defined by the operator and stored in
terminal storage to provide the following functions:
Input
Output
Card
Magnetic Tape
Diskette
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Record Formats - consist of card image, print image and 3770
format. Card image and print image, in addition to being applicable to card reader, card punch, printer and magnetic tape datasets, are also applicable to diskette as a function of Basic Exchange datasets (128 byte maximum).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------------ --= =-- --=-----=
~
M 3776.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 3 and 4 (conl'd)
Basic Exchange diskettes may be read by the terminal. Basic
Exchange diskettes may also be written by the terminal, thereby
creating a diskette for further Basic Exchange mode processing.
3770 Format is applicable to diskette data recording which is to
be subsequently printed or punched. 3770 format recording
results in more efficient diskette utilization than does card or
print image. Basic Exchange (card or print image) or 3770 Format is a user specification in job control.
Input record size from both magnetic tape and diskette may be
limited to 80 or 128 bytes, because of host programming considerations. In addition, the ability to concatenate multiple data sets,
with different record lengths, into a single input job stream requires host programming support of a CDS-FM Header type 1
(Continue Destination Select).
Remote Power Off -- see #9501 under "Specify" below.
1136670, or equivalent, is required. Alternate Part No. 1299160,
or equivalent, incorporates a twist in the ribbon which may improve ribbon life if the ,major portion of printing is in the first 60
print positions
Limitations:
The
input/output capabilities outlined
under
"Highlights" are dependent upon appropriate configurations of the
terminal. Keyboard, console display, terminal storage and printer
are standard. One communications feature (#3701, 4501, 5650
or 5651) is required. For other configurations, refer to "Special
Features" below. The duplex data communications capability of
the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 is operational on non-switched full duplex
communications facilities only.
Communications Adapter: An integrated communications adapter
without business machine clocking is standard ... provides SDLC
communications over switched or non-switched facilities.
Encrypt/Decrypt Feature -- see #3680 under "Special Features." Available to provide secure data transmission in conjunction with ACF VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt Feature (Program Number
5735-RC2) (Feature Number 6010) and Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product (Program Number 5740-XY5).
Prerequisites for SDLC Communications with S/370 or 4300
Processors: A 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating
under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any
virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under VS1,
MVS or DOS/VS using RES, JES2, JES 3, POWER/VS or VTAM.
Note: MVS and JES3 are not supported on 4300 Processors.
Performance Considerations - the line-to-printer performance of
the 3776 mdl 3 is up to 300 Ipm with a 48-character set print
belt. The line-to-printer performance of the 3776 mdl 4 is up to
400 Ipm with a 48-character set print belt.
An appropriately featured 3705 operating under the appropriate
level of Network Control Program (ACF /NCP /VS) is required for
duplex data stream operation.
The 3776 mdl 3 and 4 MLU terminals will operate, however, with
concurrent input-output processing in either a half-duplex or
duplex communications mode as a function of the base Multiple
Logical Unit capability. The card reader, punch, diskette storage
devices, magnetic tape unit and display console may have a
degrading effect on printer performance during concurrent operations. The degree of degradation which may occur will tend to be
greater when half-duplex communications are employed as opposed to duplex communications and system facilities in support
of the concurrent inbound-outbound data stream capability of the
terminal.
Actual terminal device throughput is dependent upon operational
and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the
communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression
characteristics, characters read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, SNA pacing, cryptographic processing, etc.,
must all be considered in determining actual throughput.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3411 mdl 1 for magnetic tape unit voltage requirements.
•
Remote Power Off: #9501 ... this specify feature can be used
to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host CPU application program to initiate power
down at the terminal by sending a controlled data sequence
over communication facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the appropriate communication special features. This
capability is in addition to the standard power down switch
which can be manually operated.
•
Print Belt Character Set: Specify one. Available at time of
manufacture only... specify for print belt to be shipped with
machine. See Print Belts in M 10000 pages for print belts
available in addition to belt specified on order entry. Print belts
are interchangeable by the operator.
In general, duplex data communications operation will tend to
provide
greater
terminal
throughput
under
concurrent
input/output functions than a half-duplex communications mode.
The 3776 mdl 3 or 4 operating duplex at 19.2K bps on a terrestrial link may, however, present a variance of from greater to
degraded overall terminal throughput when compared to comparable operation in a half-duplex mode.
#9489 - 48 Character Set EBCDIC (HN Character Set) •
#9490 - 48 Character Set EBCDIC (Standard Character Set)
.
#9491
#9492
#9493
#9494
#9495
Problem Determination Procedures: Function has been designed
into this unit to help provide availability to the customer. See IBM
3770 Multiple Logical Unit Operator's Guide for 3776-3, 3776-4,
3777-3, GA27-3125.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 may use either the EIA Interface or the High Speed Digital Interface special feature to communicate through an appropriate' modem and communication facility
with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with a
Line Set Type 1 G (#4717) at the central processing unit. This
type of communication requires modems which are line c.ompatible
(suitable for inter-connection) and which provide optional EIA
RS232C or High Speed Digital Interface DTE interfaces. Also
attaches via the Communications Adapter feature on a 4331 Processor ... see 4331 for details.
IBM Modems: The following IBM modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4·wire Switched Net·
work Backup is available on the 3863 mdl 1, 3864 mdl 1 or 3865 mdl 1 or
2. For communications capability, product utilization and features, see
3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies:
For a 3776 mdl 3 or 4, a black ribbon, Part No.
64
94
48
64
94
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII
ASCII ••
ASCII ••
• These belts are identical except for the following special character differences:
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and to fill
out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to
the M2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps. Point-to-point and
multipoint transmission capability over switched or non-switched
facilities is allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Speeds above 4800 bps are on non-switched
facilities. Direct local attachment to 3705-11 at 14.4K. bps.
EBCDIC is the standard transmission code. ASCII is available as a
special feature. Refer to M 2700 pages for information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities and other attachment
information.
----
#9489 has ) ( =
#9490 has % # @
•• ASCI Feature (# 1201) is required.
•
Cables ... fixed length cables except for the 3411 Magnetic
Tape Unit and Control are provided as standard. See
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006. 3411
cables must be ordered separately.
•
EIA RS232C 19.2 Kbps Line Speed: #9481 ... provides support of 19.2 Kbps. Used for record purposes.
•
Alternate Address: #9011 ...
Order
this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing terminal control code updates are to be mailed to an alternate address
using a Teleprocessing
Control number (TPC). The alternate address selected is usually the central site location.
•
Color: Blue is supplied as standard except for field model
conversions where installed color groups will be matched (do
not specify).
PRICES:
3776
Mdl
3
4
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$881
969
$750
825
Purchase
MMMC
$30,000
33,000
$265
281
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
\.
------- ----=-- =---- --=
--':' =
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 3 and 4 (conl'd)
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
3
4
4
4
...
...
.,.
.•.
$
$
$
$
11,000'
14,000'
11,000'
3,000'
, Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state:
"Installation of this model change involves removal of parts
which become the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette). Orders for
# 1201 must also specify one print belt, #9493 for 48 character
ASCII, #9494 for 64 character ASCII, or #9495 for 94 character
ASCII. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEY LOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
ENCRYPT /DECRYPT (#3680). Provides cryptographic data transmission in conjunction with program support in the host. Includes
a security key lock. Each machine will have its own unique key.
Two identical keys are supplied with the feature. Maximum: One.
Note: A mercury battery, IBM Part No. 1743456 or equivalent, is
required. A battery is shipped with this feature. See M 10000
pages for additional or replacement batteries. Replacement of the
discharged battery is the customer's responsibility.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS 232C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment to a modem. Speeds from
2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps are permitted.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with DDS Adapter, Point-to-Point (#5650), DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651),
High Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
Prerequisite: For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9841 is required ... see
item [6] under "Specify."
FRONT FEED (#3951). Enables the operator to insert paper forms
in the front or rear of the machine. A forms entry chute is provided under the keyboard for front loading. The paper supply is
placed on the floor either under the keyboard in the front of the
machine for front loading, or underneath the forms enclosure for
rear loading.
FORMS STAND ... integrated into the machine covers for the 3776
mdl 3 and 4.
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point and multipoint synchronous operation at 19.2 Kbps on a
Type 5703 or 8803 wideband channel. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), DDS
Adapter, Point-to-point (#5650), DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651)
or V35 Interface (# 4 720).
M 3776.7
Jul 79
Concatenate (pool) -- the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Multivolume -- allows a read or write operation to automatically
continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in ready condition,
or it may continue on the current drive.
Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the first. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy -- data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1 st (#4901).
OPERATOR 10 FEATURE (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed or displayed. Maximum: One.
Limitations: The operator must position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation.
DDS ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5650 - For Point-to-Point Operation .. ,
#5651 - For Multipoint Operation). Provides an adapter for SDLC
data transmission at speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps over the
AT&T non-switched Dataphone' Digital Service network. The
DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer site
termination of the DDS network. Specify: #9822 for 2400 bps,
#9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for 9600 bps. Maximum: One,
#5650 or #5651. Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), High Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MOL 1 A TT ACHMENT (#7801). To attach one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: "eature #7003 on
the 3411 mdl 1.
3782/2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502 Card Reader mdl
A 1, A2 or A3. Maximum: One. Limitation: Optical Mark Read on
the 2502 is not supported.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: The Card
Read/Punch Check special feature on the 3521 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
Special Feature Prices:
ASCII Feature
#1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
Encrypt /Decrypt
3680
EIA Interface
3701
Front Feed
3951
HI Spd Digital Intfce
4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Diskette Storage, 1st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
DDS Adapter, Pt-te-Pt
5650
DDS Adapter, Multlpt
5651
3411 Mdl 1 Attachment
7801
3782/2502 Cd Rdr Attach 8149
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to keyboard control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own unique
key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature. Refer to M
10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys.
Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
Attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4Kbps with a maximum cable distance of 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701,
#4501, #5650 or #5651. Field Installation: Yes.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removeable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one moveable read/write
head, one read/write surface, 73 data tracks, 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 1898 128-byte records. Data
may be stored in either a Basic Exchange dataset, or in a 3770
format dataset. Diskette capabilities allow for:
,.. Registered Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$18
$15
40SUC 15 SUC30SUC 47
40
13
11
12
10
41
35
35SUC 15
13
59
69
69
59
13
11
24
20
24
20
118
100
16
19
19
16
Purchase MMMC
$600
40
15
30
1,600
440
400
1,400
35
510
2,360
2,360
440
840
840
4,000
640
640
$.50
.50
NC
NC
2.00
1.00
NC
1.00
NC
2.00
16.50
7.00
1.50
2.00
2.00
14.00
4.00
3.50
-------- --------===
--- ---':' =
M 3776.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 3 and 4 (cont'd)
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature No. or
Part No. indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages ...
see M 10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
Print Belt, Add'i (#5811, #5812, #5813, #5820, #5821,
#5822, #5823) - permits Ihe customer to obtain more than
one character set print belt for various applications.
48-character
64-character
94-character
48-character
48-character
64-character
94-character
ASCII (#5811)* *
ASCII (#5812)* *
ASCII (#5813)* *
EBCDIC [HN Character Set] (#5820)
EBCDIC (Standard Character Set) (#5821)
EBCDIC (#5822)
EBCDIC (#5823)
*. ASCII Feature (#1201) is prerequisite.
Mercury Battery (Part No. 1743456). Provides power to sustain
the master key of the Encypt/Decrypt feature (#3680) when
normal power is not present. This accessory is a 4 volt nonrechargeable mercury battery. This battery has a shelf life of 1
year under normal conditions, and can be expected to provide
3.5 years of normal operation. Note: Discharged battery should
be returned to IBM.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -------= =- ---
- =':' =
M 3777.1
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Model 1
Purpose: The 3777 mdl 1 is a high speed remote job entry terminal and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System. A
keyboard is used for terminal control and may be used for operator communication with the host CPU. A printer is used for output.
The 3777 mdl 1 is· 'not designed as an interactive terminal. The
printer is not integrated into the 3777 mdl 1 but is a stand-alone
3203 Printer mdl 3 which is cable attached to the 3777 mdl 1.
The 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge
which can be interchanged by the operator. Special features
permit one or two diskette storage devices and provide for attachment of one card reader. One of three card readers can be selected for operation at 150, 300 or 400 cards per minute. A
minimum configuration includes a 3777 Communication Terminal
mdl 1 and a 3203 Printer mdl 3.
Communication features permit operation at speeds from 2400 bps
to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps using BSC or SDLC transmission
techniques and an appropriate modem. Direct local attachment to
a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps via appropriate features.
Maximum Linea Per Minute
Std 3203 mdl 3
1000
870
Featured 3203 mdl 3 Character Set
1200
1020
48AN, HN
60 PN
See "Type Catalog" for additional character sets and speeds ...
see 3203 for 1200 LPM Speed Enhancement feature information.
Highlights:
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space and
Character Advance keys have typamatic action. Associated with
the keyboard are indicator lights, function keys, operating mode
switches, and a 3-position numeric display.
Printer - a stand-alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 cable attached to the
3777. 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge. The 3771 mdl 1 supports fifteen Print Train Arrangements (AN, HN, OAA, ODA, ONA, OAB, GN, PCS-AN, PCS-HN,
PN, ONC, ON, RN, SN, TN) as standard. When a substitute
character is ordered to displace a character in one of the standard arrangements, the substituted character assumes the card
and bit codes of the character it replaces. See "Type Catalog."
If the International Print Support specify feature (#9351) is
installed, the 3777 mdl 1 will support Print Train Arrangements
corresponding to the 48, 64 and 94-character EBCDIC sets
available for print belts for the 3776 Communication Terminal.
Support is also provided for the ON, HN, AN, PN, RN and PCSHN arrangements. The 3203 mdl 3 permits feeding continuous
forms up to 20 inches wide and 1 32 print pOSitions. Character
spacing is 10 per inch, line spacing is 6 or 8 per inch under
operator control. Maximum print lines is 127 per page when
attached to the 3777 mdl 1. Refer to the M 3203 writeup for
further description of the 3203 mdl 3. Refer to . ·Type Catalog"
for further description of the 1416 print train arrangements supported and for print speeds. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations.
Buffers - transfer data between the input and output devices
and the communication line. The buffers also transfer data between input and output devices during offline operation. The
buffers alternate in providing input and output services to permit
overlapped operation. Dual 256-byte or dual 512-byte bl'ffers
are used for BSC or SDLC operation and are under q.' ator
control.
Printer Format Controls - facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing.
Compression/Expansion - provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be inVOked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from card and diskette. A two-byte sequence is
substituted for each occurence of three or more consecutive
blank bytes (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 63 consecutive
blanks are read. The terminal monitors received non-transparent
data that is destined for the printer and automatically expands
the two-byte sequence to the correct number of blanks.
SNA/SDLC implementation provides a compression option that
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads data from
cards or diskette. An identifying sequence is substituted for
each occurrence of two or more consecutive duplicate characters. The terminal automatically expands the compression sequence to the correct number of blanks or duplicate characters
for compressed transparent or non-transparent data received.
Decompactlon - provides the decompaction function associated
Not to
with the receipt of a compacted data stream whereby a pair Of
consecutive alphameric characters is represented by a single
transmission byte. Function is dependent upon transmission
receipt, and subsequent 3777 mdl 1 storage, of a decompaction
table corresponding to the compaction table used by host programming in creating the compacted data stream. Decompaction
function is available only under SDLC operation. Decompaction
occurs only for data directed to the printer. Compaction by the
3777 mdl 1 of data inbound to the host is not provided.
Transmission Reversal -- permits keyboard initiation of interrupt
of host data transmission for terminal data transmission and for
resumption of the host transmission upon completion of the
terminal transmission. The function is dependent upon associated host programming.
Record Compress - using two special feature diskette storage
devices permits offline compress of Basic Exchange diskette
records onto a single 3777 mdl 1 diskette for subsequent batch
transmission. The compressed records are written on the 3777
mdl 1 diskette in 3770 mode. Record Compress using one
diskette storage device permits the compression of basic exchange diskette records into blocks of up to 256 bytes or 512
bytes for transmission.
Dual Data Path - provides for concurrent operation of a line-toprinter primary job and a card reader-to-diskette ordiskette-todiskette secondary job. The line-to-printer job uses either the
256-byte or dual 512-byte alternating buffers to accept data from
the line for printing. A single 256-byte or single 512-byte buffer
is used for data buffering between c·ard and diskette or diskette
and diskette. The primary line-to-printer job will not normally
degrade during dual data path operation. The secondary job will
degrade during periods of concurrent operation.
Automatic Card-to-Llne Job -- when an online job is completed
and the 3777 goes into Standby Status, a reader-to-line job is
automatically started. The Start-Job procedure is not required
provided the terminal has a 2502 Card Reader and it is in Ready
Status.
Remote Power Off -- this feature can be used to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host
CPU application program to initiate power down at the terminal
by sending a controlled data sequence over communication
facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the appropriate communication special features. This capability is in addition
to the standard power down switch which can be manually operated.
Input/Output Form Definitions -- can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined forms can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the spacial features, otherwise
they can be entered from keyboard. Printer format controls can
be part of the job definition. An appropriately configured 3777
mdl 1 will permit input/output job designation as follows:
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
Printer or Diskette
Plinter or Diskette
Online Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or Card Reader
(1) Line
Line
Printer or Diskette
Dual Data Path Jobs
(2) Line
(2) Card Reader
(2) Diskette
Printer
Diskette
Diskette
(1) One input device and one output device per job.
(2) Line to printer occurs concurrently with card reader
to diskette or diskette to diskette.
Performance Considerations -- actual terminal device throughput
is dependent upon operational and systems programming charactersitics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must all
be considered in determining actual throughput. See IBM 3770
Data Communication System, GA27-309, for additional information.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
deSigned into this unit to help provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification routines and procedures that are easily understood and
used by the operator. See IBM 3777-1 Operating Procedures
Guide, GA27-3124.
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer"s responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to M
2700 pages.
Communications: See ··Special Features.·· Transmission speeds
be reDroduced without written permission.
--------- ---- - --- ---== =":' =
M 3777.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal Model 1 (cont'd)
of up· to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps are allowed by selecting the
appropriate modem and communication facility. Direct local attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps. Speeds above 4800 bps are on
non-switched facilities. Refer to 3770 Data Communication System
in "Systems" for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700
pages for information on customer responsibilities, communication
facilities, and other attachment information.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3777 mdl 1 may use either the EIA or the High
Speed Digital Interface to communicate through an appropriate
modem and communication facility with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with a Line Set 1G (#4717) at the central processing unit. This type of communication requires modems
which are line compatible (suitable for interconnection) and which
provide optional EIA or RS 232C or High Speed Digital Interface
DTE interfaces. Also attaches via a Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331 Processor ... see M 4331 pages for details.
IBM MtHkms: The following IBM Modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdll, 3864 mdll and 3865 mdls 1
and 2. For communications capability, product utilization, and features,
see 3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies:
3203 mdl 3 ribbons
For SDLC Communications with S/370 or 4300 Processor -- a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
05/VS1 or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note: 05IVS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors.
For BSC Communications with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processor - a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under D05/VS, OS/VS1 or 05/VS2; or under RSCS and
VM/370, or any of these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors.
The 3777 mdl 1 Communication Terminals use
2770/3780 BSC programming support when operating in BSC
mode. Operation with S/360, 5/370 or 4300 Processors using
2770/3780 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL
GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations. The customer
may have to modify existing 2770/3780 application programs for
operation with 3777 mdl 1. BSC attachment can be made via a
3704/3705 Communications Controller, or a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit attached to a channel of any S/370 Processor; or via an
Integrated Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115, 125,
135, 135-3 or 138; or via a Communications Adapter feature on
the 4331 Processor. BSC attachment can be made via a
3704/3705 attached to a channel of a 5/360 mdl 30, 40, 50,
65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode),
75 or 195; or via an Integrated Communications Attachment on
S/360 mdl 25.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3203 mdl 3 for
3-phase power requirments
[2] Color: Blue is supplied as standard.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-3006 and to
Customer Site Preparation Planning Guide, GA27-31 03.
[4] International Print Support: #9351 ... provides support for
modified AN, PN and SN print train arrangements for the 141 6
Interchangeable Train Cartridge corresponding to the 48, 64 and
94-character EBCDIC sets available for print belts for the 3776
Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for the ON, HN,
AN, PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. See "Type Catalog."
Note: Not recommended for field installation ... replaces the standard print support.
[5] EIA RS232C 19.2 Kbps Line Speed: #9481 ... provides support of 19.2 Kbps. Provides diagnostics and used for record
purposes.
Mdl
Model 1 to Model 2 .. , $ 4,600'
Model 1 to Model 3 ... $11,240'
Model 2 to Model 3 ... $ 6,440' t
'Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state:
"Installation of this model change involves removal of
parts which become the property of IBM."
tModel Upgrade Price assumes Special Features
#1601 and #1602 are installed on the Model 2. If
they are not, an RPO must be submitted.
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.]
For Communication Capability -- select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470); a Communication Driver
(#1481), and EIA Interface (#3701), or High Speed Digital Interface (#4501). #1462 is required in addition to #1460 or #1461
for multipoint operation using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... select one.
Prerequisites:
PRICES
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$370
$315
Purchase
MMMC
$12,600
$68
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC,POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1470.
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. For record purposes, also identify the primary
CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the following:
#9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM, #9989
for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations of operating systems and access methods. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with # 1460 or # 1461 .
BSC MULTIPOINT ($1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#1481). Provides communication driver without clocking. Maximum: One. PrerequiSite: Communication Feature
(#1460,1461 or 1470).
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS-232C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment to a modem. Speeds from
2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps are permitted.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481).
For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9481 is required ... see item [5] under
"Specify." Limitation: Cannot be installed with High Speed Digital
Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette) and with BSC
features #1460, 1461 or 1462 or with SDLC features #1460 or
#1470. A 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge containing an
ASCII GN print train is required for the 3203 Printer mdl 3 if
#1201 is ordered for the 3777. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two key locks and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. MaXimum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point synchronous operation at 19.2K bps on a Type 5703 or
8803 wideband channel. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation; Cannot be installed with EIA
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- ---- -- -----= = =':' =
M 3777.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal Model 1 (cont'd)
Interface (#3701) or V35 Interface (#4720).
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical key lock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps with a maximum cable distance of 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701 or
#4501. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication
Driver (#1481).
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read/write
head; one read/write surface; 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 949 256-bytes records, or 474
512-byte records can be stored on the diskette (one 256-byte
record is reserved for forms control information). Each 256-byte
record is stored in two consecutive numbered sectors in exchange
mode, or in two non-consecutive sectors in 3770 mode. Each
512-byte record is stored in four consecutive sectors in exchange
mode, or four non-consecutive sectors in 3770 mode. Diskette
data is code insensitive in SDLC mode, non-transparent only in
BSC mode. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the first. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy -- data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2
(single data set or all active data sets. -- 3770 mode only).
Concatenate (pool) -- the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Continue -- allows a read or write program to automatically
continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in ready condition.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1st (#4901).
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read.
With BSC,
a read operation can be initiated during a keyboard to line job
only. Data read from the magnetic stripe card cannot be printed.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] The operator must position and
slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5
and 40 inches per second for a read operation ", [2] BSC programming for 2770 and 3780 does not support this feature.
PRINT SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#5595). Provides support for a
3203 Printer mdl 3 operating with 1200 LPM Speed Enhancement
feature (#6360). Maximum: One.
2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8002). Provides for attachment of a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2 or A3. Maximum:
One
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Communication Feature
SDLC/BSC,Swtch Cntrl #1460
BSC, Pt-to-Pt
1461
SDLC
1470
BSC Multipoint
1462
Communication Driver
w/o Bus Machine Clkg
1481
EIA Interface
3701
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
HI9h Spd Digital Inface
4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Diskette Storage, 1st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Print Speed Enhancement 5595
2502 Cd Rdr Attachment 8002
$32
19
16
13
$27
16
14
11
$1,080
640
560
440
$6.00
3.00
3.00
1.00
13
11
13
11
18
15
40SUC 15SUC 30SUC 41
35
35 SUC15
13
69
59
69
59
13
11
18
15
29
25
440
440
600
40
15
30
1,400
35
510
2,360
2,360
440
600
1,000
2.00
1.00
.50
.50
NC
NC
1.00
NC
2.00
15.00
6.50
1.50
NC
4.50
3777 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Model 2
Purpose: The 3777 mdl 2 is a high speed remote job entry terminal which operates as a S/360 Model 20 - Submodel 5 BSC
MULTI-LEAVING Workstation. A keyboard is used for terminal
control and may be used for operator communication with the host
CPU. A 3203 Printer mdl 3 may be used for output. The 3203
mdl 3 uses the 1416 Intercha"geable Train Cartridge which can
be interchanged by the operator. Special features provide for the
attachment of one 1024-character console display, one diskette
storage device for logging of console display messages, one
diskette storage device for reading of card image Basic Exchange
data sets (processed as 80 column card images), one card reader
and one card punch. One of three 2502 Card Reader models can
be selected for operation at 150, 300 or 400 cards per minute.
The 352.1 Card Punch operates at 50 cpm. A minimum configuration includes a 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 2, a 3203
Printer mdl 3 and a 2502 Card Reader or a Diskette Input Device
(#3201). If a Diskette Input Device is attached and a 2502 Card
Reader is not present, a Console Display (#1601) is required. A
console display is also required if the keyboard is to be used for
operator console communication with the host CPU.
Communication features permit operation at speeds from 2400 bps
to to 9600 bps and at 19.2 K bps using BSC transmission techniques and an appropriate modem. Direct local attachment to a
3705-11 at 14.4K bps via appropriate features.
Maximum Lines Per Minute
Std 3203 mdl 3
1000
870
Featured 3203 mdl 3 Character Set
1200
1020
48 AN, HN
60 PN
See "Type Catalog" for additional character sets and speeds ...
see 3203 for 1200 LPM Speed Enhancement feature (#6360)
information.
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces 88
characters). Space and Character Advance keys have typamatic
action. Associated with the keyboard are indicator lights, function
keys, operation mode switches, and a 3-position numeric display.
The keyboard, in conjunction with the optional console display,
provides a console function for the 3777 mdl 2.
Printer -- a stand-alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 cable attached to the
3777 mdl 2. The 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable Train
Cartridge. The 3777 mdl 2 supports fifteen Print Train Arrangements (AN, HN, OAA, ODA, ONA, OAB, GN, PCS-AN, PCS-HN,
PN, ONC, ON, RN, SN, TN) as standard. When a subsitute character is ordered to displace a character in one of the standard
arrangements, the substitute character assumes the card and bit
codes of the character it replaces. See "Type Catalog." If the
International Print Support specify feature is installed, the 3777
mdl 2 will support Print Train Arrangements corresponding to the
48, 64 and 94-character EBCDIC sets available for print belts on
the 3776 Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for
the ON, HN, AN, PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. The 3203
mdl 3 permits feeding continuous forms up to 20 inches wide and
132 print positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch, line spacing
is 6 or 8 per inch under operator control. Maximum form length is
24 inches when attached to the 3777 mdl 2. Refer to the 3203
writeup for further description of the 3203 mdl 3. Refer to "Type
Catalog" for further description of the 1416 print train arrangements upported and for print speeds. Refer to GA24-3488 for
further design considerations.
Console Display -- contains up to 1 ,024 characters of information
formatted into 16 lines of 64 character positions each. Operator
messages are displayed in the top 14 lines of the display. Operator originated keyboard data is displayed in the bottom 2 lines of
the display and will be displayed as keyed.
Operator messages larger than 64 characters overflow to subsequent lines. Subsequent lines of the message are indented. The
latest message displayed is identified with a special character. If
the display becomes full, the oldest message is overlayed, retaining the most recent messages on the display. The operator may
defer subsequent messages in order to complete reference to a
particular message.
Console Display Spooling -- a diskette storage device may be
attached to the 3777 mdl 2 by special feature to provide storage
for operator console messages. Two options are available to the
operator when the diskette becomes filled. First, automatic rewrite
occurs. New messages are overlaid upon older messages commencing with the initial message written upon the diskette. Second, an end of diskette signal is provided to the operator and
messages are suspended pending replacement of the used diskette by a new diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----- ---------------_.-
M 3777.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal - Model 2
(conI' d)
Operator access to the diskette is via the keyboard. The diskette
may be paged backward a defined number of messages and
displayed for reference. In addition, the diskette may be written to
the printer.
Diskette Input Device -- a diskette storage device may be attached to the 3777 mdl 2 by special feature for reading of card
image Basic Exchange datasets. Basic Exchange datasets will be
processed by the 3777 mdl 2 as 80 column card images. The
datasets may be multivolume. Individual data sets or all active
datasets may be printed. Initial Program Load of the workstation
program may take place from the Diskette Input Device if the
Console Spool Device is not present. Diskette IPL must take place
from the Console Spool Device if both diskette devices are present. IPL is available from the 2502 Card Reader if that device is
attached.
If the 3777 mdl 2 configuration includes both a 2502 Card Reader
and the Diskette Input Device, diskette output may be alternated
with cards; however both devices will not operate simultaneously.
If the 3777 mdl 2 configuration includes a Diskette Input Device
instead of a 2502 Card Reader, and IPL is executed from the
Diskette Input Device or the Console Spool Device, the IPL diskette containing the workstation program must have been written on
a 3777 mdl 2 configuration containing a 2502 Card Reader and a
diskette device.
Buffers -- transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. The buffers alternate in providing input
and output services to permit overlapped operation. Storage is
provided in the 3777 model 2 for dual buffers for each input and
output device attached. The buffer size is variable, depending
upon the workstation program. The recommended buffer size is
512 bytes.
Communications Adapter -- integrated to provide BSC point-topoint operation over switched or non-switched facilities.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed data.
Vertical forms definition provides forms set-up for the printer by
means of the keyboard or card reader. The definition may be
displayed on the console display, if present, or printed for verification.
Extended forms definition may be used in conjunction with the
Diskette Input Device (#3201). Standard forms definition provides
for the definition of five printer forms. Extended forms definition
provides for greater than five printer forms. The Diskette Input
Device (#3201) is a prerequisite to the use of extended forms
definition.
Compression/Expansion -- provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. Provides options of (dependent
upon the workstation program) trailing blank truncation, blank or
data compression/expansion.
Performance Considerations -- the line-to-printer performance of
the 3777 mdl 2 and attached 3203 Printer mdl 3 is up to 1,000
Ipm (up to 1200 Ipm with 3203 mdl 3 Speed Enhancement feature) with 48 character AN or HN set, and up to 870 Ipm (up to
1020 Ipm with 3203 mdl 3 Speed Enhancement feature) with a 60
character PN set. The 3777 mdl 2 may operate, however, with
concurrent input/output processing as a function of the MUL TILEAVING capability. The card reader, punch and display console
may have a degrading effect on printer performance while transferring data to and from the 3777 mdl 2 buffers and the host as
communications line time is shared by all 3777 mdl 2 I/O units.
information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities,
and other attachment information.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3777 mdl 2 may use either the EIA or the High
Speed Digital Interface to communicate through an appropriate
modem and communication facility with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with Line Set Type 1 G (#4717) at the
central processing unit. This type of communication requires
modems which are line compatible (suitable for interconnection)
and which provide optional EIA RS232C or High Speed Digital
Interface DTE interfaces. Also attaches via a Communications
Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor ... see M 4331 pages for
details.
IBM Modems: The following IBM modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl I, 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdls 1
or i. For communications capabilily,product utilization and features, see
3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies -- for 3203 Printer mdl 3 ribbons
Limitations -- the input/output capabilities outlined unaer
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal. The keyboard is standard on the 3777 mdl 2, while the
3203 Printer mdl 3 is a stand-alone unit. A minimum configuration
includes a 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 2, a 3203 Printer
mdl 3 and a 2502 Card Reader or a Diskette Input Device
(#3201). If a Diskette Input Device is attached and a 2502 Card
Reader is not present, a Console Display (#1601) is required.
Prerequisites: For BSC communications with S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processor -- the 3777 mdl 2 will interface to current host
MULTI-LEAVING programming systems as a S/360 mdl 20 - Submodel 5. BSC attachment can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller, a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, or a 2703 Transmission Control attached to a channel of any S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processor supporting BSC MULTI-LEAVING Workstations.
Also attaches via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331
Processor.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3203 mdl 3 for 3-phase power
requirements.
[2] Color: Blue is supplied as standard.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard ... refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006 and to
Customer Site Preparation Planning Guide, GA27-3103.
[4] International Print Support: #9351 ... provides support for
modified AN, PN and SN Print Train Arrangements for the 1416
Interchangeable Train Cartridge corresponding to the 48, 64
and 94 character EBCDIC sets available for print belts for the
3776 Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for
the ON, HN, AN, PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. See
"Type Catalog." Note: Not recommended for field installation
... replaces the standard print support.
[5] EIA RS232C 19.2K BPS Line Speed: #9481 ... provides support of 19.2K bps. Provides diagnostics and is used for record
purposes.
PRICES:
3777
Actual terminal device throughput is dependent upon operational
and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the
communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression
characteristics, characters read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must all be considered in determining actual
throughput. See 2770 Data Communication System, GA27-3097,
for additional information.
Problem Determination Procedures - significant function has
been designed into this unit to help provide greater availability to
the customer. This has been done through the use of problem
identification routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See IBM 3777-2 Operating Procedures
Guide,GA27-3129.
Customer Responsibilities -- it will be a customer's responsibility
to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill
out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to
M 2700 pages.
Communications -- see "Special Features." Transmission speeds
from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps. Point-to-point
transmission capability over switched or non-switched facilities is
allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication
facility. Speeds above 4800 bps are on non-switched facilities.
Direct local attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps. EBCDIC is the
only supported transmission code. Refer to M 2700 pages for
Mdl
2
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$422
$359
Purchase
MMMC
$14,360
$79
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 2 to Model 3 •.. $6,440'
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state:
"Installation:. of this model change involves removal of
parts which become the property of IBM" ... This Model Upgrade Price assumes Special Features # 1601 and
#1602 are installed on the Model 2. If they are not, an
RPO must be submitted.
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed.]
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
Not to be reproduced without written oermission.
,
\
--------===
-----':' =
M 3777.5
Jul79
--
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal - Model 2
(cont'd)
COMMUNICATION DRIVER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#1481). Required. Provides commu.nication driver
without clocking. Maximum: One.
CONSOLE DISPLAY (#1601). Provides a 1024 character (16 lines
of 65 characters each) console information display. Maximum:
One.
CONSOLE DISPLAY SPOOLING (#1602). Diskette storage device
for spooling of console display messages. One device with a
customer removable diskette placed in the left cabinet. Additional
diskettes are available from IBM
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Console Display (#1601).
DISKETTE INPUT DEVICE (#3201). Diskette storage device for
reading of card Image Basic Exchange datasets. One device with
a customer removable diskette placed in the right cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401), Provides one key lock and two keys for
the desk console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Special Feature Prices:
Audible Alarm
#1390
Communication Driver
w/o Bus Mach Clking
1481
Console Display
1601
Console Display Spooling 1602
Diskette Input Device
3201
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
EIA Interface
3701
High Speed Digital Intfce 4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Print Speed Enhancement 5595
2502 Card Reader Attach 8002
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
Identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Input Device (#3201). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Required. Provides an EIA RS-232C
compatible interface and a cable for attachment of a modem.
Speeds from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps are permitted.
Maximum:
One.
Prerequisite: Communication Driver
(#1481). For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9481 is required. See item
[5]' under "Specify." Limitation: Cannot be installed with High
Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point synchronous operation at 19.2K bps on a Type 5703 or
8803 wide band channel. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701) or V35 Interface (#4720).
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 1 0000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
Attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps with a maximum cable
distance of up to 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701 or #4501. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1481).
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discetionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. See IRD Sales Manual for
magnetically striped and encoded identification cards. A read
operation can be initiated during an orerator inquiry (SYS REO
function). Data read from the magnetic stripe card cannot be
printed, displayed or written on the Console Display Spooling
diskette. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Console Display (#1601).
Limitations: [1] The operator mu~t position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation ... [2] BSC programming does not
support this feature.
PRINT SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#5595). Provides support for a
3203 Printer mdl 3 operating with Speed Enhancement (#6360) at
1200 Ipm. Maximum: One.
2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8002). Provides for attachment of a 2502 Card Reader mdl A1, A2 or A3. Maximum:
One.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3251 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/ Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: The Card
Read/Punch Check special feature on the 3521 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$40 SUC -
$40
$.50
2.00
33.00
15.00
15.50
NC
NC
1.00
1.00
NC
2.00
1.50
NC
4.50
3.00
13
11
440
106
90
3,600
60
68
94
60
15SUC 30SUC 13
11
41
35
35SUC 15
13
13
11
18
15
29
25
19
16
2,720
3,200
15
30
440
1,400
35
510
440
600
1,000
640
-- -- ----=---------
- =':' =
=- ---
M 3777.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3777 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Model 3
Purpose: The 3777 mdl 3 is a high speed remote job entry terminal and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System.
The 3777 mdl 3 is an SNA Multiple Logical Unit (MLU) terminal. A
keyboard and a console display are used for terminal control and
for operator communication with the host CPU. Terminal operation
may be controlled by the storage of operating procedures, terminal
setups and local utility programs in terminal storage for use by the
terminal operator. The 3777 is not designed as an interactive
terminal. The printer is not integrated into the 3777 mdl 3 but is a
stand-alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 which is cable attached to the
3777 mdl 3. Special features permit one or two diskette storage
devices, one magnetic tape unit, one card reader and one card
punch. One of three card readers can be selected for operation at
speeds of 150, 300 or 400 cards per minute. The card punch
operates at 50 cpm. A minimum configuration includes a 3777
mdl 3 and a 3203 mdl 3.
Maximum Lines Per Minute
Std 3203 mdl 3
1000
998
870
Featured 3203 mdl 3 Character Set
1200
1195
1020
48 AN, HN
52 RN
60 PN
Highlights:
Communications -- transmission speeds from 2400 bps to 9600
bps and at 19.2K bps are provided using the appropriate modems and communications facilities. Duplex -- simultaneous
inbound/outbound - data transmission is provided on nonswitched full duplex communication facilities only when communicating with an appropriately equipped 3705 Communications
Controller with the supporting ACF /NCP /VS level. May also be
locally attached in either a duplex or half-duplex mode to a 3705
at 14.4K bps.
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys. The keyboard in conjunction with a standard console display, indicator
lights, function keys, operating mode switches and a 3-position
numeric display provides operator control. Host application commands, System Services Control Point (SSCP) commands and
local functions are entered from the keyboard. Data entered on
the keyboard is displayed. If a keying error is made, Character
Backspace and Character Advance may be used for editing.
Character Backspace and Character Advance are nondestructive. Character Advance is typamatic. Reset returns to
the pOSition from which the Character Backspace began.
Console Display -- contains 16 lines of 64 characters each for a
total of 1024 characters. The 3777 mdl 3 reserves the bottom
three lines of the display for operator keying, display of system
information and prompting for information required for the execution of functions. The remaining 13 lines of the display are used
to display messages between the terminal and the host application or the SSCP and to display information regarding terminal
operations such as host input.
Lower case alphabetics are converted to upper case before
displaying. When the cursor is beneath a character any new data
keystroke will cause the new character to replace the old. Overstrikes are not permitted.
Each message is displayed as it is received, except as described
below. Each message is also written in terminal storage. At
power on time the operator is prompted to specify date and time.
As messages are received they are time-stamped prior to display
and storage. Messages longer than a display line will wrap
around to the next line with an indent to aid readability. The
display fills from top to bottom. Subsequent new message lines
replace the oldest message lines. The most recent message
received is identified by the Greater Than sign > in the first
position. The following line is blanked to assist the operator with
message identification.
Function keys on the keyboard allow the operator to control the
display function. The display can be held while incoming messages are sent to terminal storage and not displayed. If messages arrive during the "hold" state a message alert light notifies
the operator. The operator may subsequently display the desired
message group. A terminal utility program is available for listing
or copying the message contents of terminal storage for external
message retention and reference.
Printer -- a stand alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 cable attached to the
3777 mdl 3. The 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable
Train Cartridge. The 3777 mdl 3 supports fifteen Print Train
Arrangements (AN, HN, OAA, ODA, ONA, OAB, GN, PCS-AN,
PCS-HN, PN, ONC, ON, RN, SN, TN) as standard. When a substitute character is ordered to displace a character in one of the
standard arrangements, the substitute character assumes the
card and bit codes of the character it replaces. See "Type Cata-
log." International Print Support is provided supporting Print
Train Arrangements corresponding to the 48, 64 and 94 character EBCDIC sets available for print belts for the 3776 Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for the ON, HN, AN,
PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. The 3203 mdl 3 permits
feeding continuous forms up to 20 inches wide and 132 print
positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch; line spacing is 6 or
8 per inch under operator control. Maximum forms length is 24
inches when attached to the 3777 mdl 3. Refer to 3203 for
further description of the 3203 mdl 3. Refer to "Type Catalog"
for further description of the 1416 print train arrangements supported and for print speeds. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations.
Terminal Storage -- is standard for message spooling, terminal
control, utility programs and user generated procedures.
Diskette Storage -- there are two diskette storage devices available as special features. While the devices are physically identical to those on the 3777 mdl 1, additional operational facilities
such as data set concatenation enhance the use of the special
feature diskette storage devices. Also, each special feature
diskette storage device may be assigned individually to an independent host SNA session or used locally for input or output.
Diskette operation is concurrent with other terminal functions.
Magnetic Tape -- may be used as either an input or as an output
device. One 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 attachment is available as a special feature. The 3411 mdl 1 provides
9-track tape with recording densities of 1600 bpi Phase Encoded
or 800 bpi NRZI. 7-track tape operation is not provided. The
3411 mdl 1 may be assigned to an independent host SNA session or be used locally for input or output. Labeled and unlabeled tapes are supported. Records are fixed or variable length
and may be unblocked or blocked to a maximum block size of
4000 bytes. Maximum record size is 255 bytes. A block size of
up to 2000 bytes automatically provides dual buffering. Magnetic
tape operation is concurrent with other terminal functions. Refer
to G232-0004 for detailed information on operation of the 3411
mdl 1. Refer to 3411 in "Machines" for ordering instructions.
Note: Feature #7003 is required on the 3411 mdl 1.
Buffers -- transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. SDLC communications uses a customer
defined Request/Response Unit (RU) of up to 512 bytes. The
actual transmission depends on session pacing values, data
length, buffer availability and data availability. Buffers also transfer data between input and output devices during local operation.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical control characters in data initiate vertical tabbing.
Carriage control definition provides for specification of a variable
number of line numbers per carriage stop with a maximum of 60
lines per carriage control definition. Carriage control definition
may be defined at the terminal or may be sent dynamically by the
host application. Extended Forms Definition is standard and
utilizes terminal storage.
Compression/Expansion -- implementation provides a compression option at the terminal for a job that reads data from cards,
magnetic tape, or diskette to the line. An identifying sequence is
substituted for each occurence of two or more consecutive duplicate characters. Trailing blank truncation is standard. The terminal automatically expands the compression sequence to the
correct number of blanks or duplicate characters for compressed
transparent or non-transparent data received.
Decompaction -- provides the decompaction function associated
with the receipt of a compacted data stream whereby a pair of
consecutive alphameric characters is represented by a single
transmission byte. Function is dependent upon transmission by
the host of a decompaction table corresponding to the compaction table used by host programming in creating the compacted
job data stream. Decompaction occurs for data directed to the
printer, card punch, magnetic tape and diskette (except 3770
format). Compaction by the terminal of data inbound to the host
is not provided.
Automatic Card Reading -- capability is under control of the
operator. The "hot reader" function may be enabled/disabled at
any appropriate operational time.
Job Control -- initiated by the operator, pertains to online jobs
with the host and local utility jobs run concurrently with the
online jobs. Online job submission may be initiated at any time
there is a SNA session available for data transmission. The
terminal may have up to six concurrent sessions that are controlled by the operator. Online job input may consist of card,
diskette or magnetic tape data. Data from different devices or
data sets may be concatenated into a single input data stream as
one job execution. Online job output may consist of printer, card,
diskette or magnetic tape data.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ---
---- ------.:;.
==::
';" ==
M 3777.7
Jul.79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Unit Model 3 (cont'd)
Local utility jobs may be defined by the operator and stored in
terminal storage to provide the following functions:
Input
Output
Card
Magnetic Tape
Diskette
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Record Formats -- consist of card image, print image and 3770
format. Card image and print image, in addition to being applicable to card reader, card punch, printer and magnetic tape datasets, are also applicable to diskette as a function of Basic Exchange datasets (128 byte maximum),
Basic Exchange diskettes may be read by the terminal. Basic
Exchange diskettes may also be written by the terminal, thereby
creating a diskette for further Basic Exchange mode processing.
3770 format is applicable to diskette data recording which is to
be subsequently printed or punched. 3770 format recording
results in more efficient diskette utilization than does card or
print image. Basic Exchange (card or print image) or 3770 format is a user specification in job control.
Input record size from both magnetic tape and diskette may be
limited to 80 or 128 bytes, because of host programming considerations. In addition, the ability to concatenate multiple data sets,
with different record lengths, into a single input job stream requires host programming support of a CDS-FM Header type 1
(Continue Destination Select).
Remote Power Off - this feature can be used to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host
CPU application program to initiate power down at the terminal
by sending a controlled data sequence over communication
facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the appropriate communication special features. This capability is in addition
to the standard power down switch which can be manually operated.
Encrypt/Decrypt Feature -- available to provide secure data
transmission in conjunction with ACF VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt
Feature (Program Number 5735-RC2) (Feature Number 6010)
and Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product
(Program Number 5740-XY5).
Performance Considerations - the line-to-line printer performance of the 3777 mdl 3 and attached 3203 mdl 3 is up to 1000
Ipm [up to 1200 Ipm with Speed Enhancement (#6360) on the
3203 mdl 3 and Print Speed Enhancement (#5595) on the 3777
mdl 3 itself with 48 character AN or HN set, and up to 870 Ipm
[up to 1020 Ipm with #6360 on the 3203 and #5595 on the
3777] with a 60 character PN set.
The 3777 mdl 3 MLU terminal will operate, however, with concurrent input-output processing in either a duplex or half-duplex data
communications mode as a function of the base Multiple Logical
Unit capability. The card reader, punch, diskette storage devices,
magnetic tape unit and display console may have a degrading
effect on printer performance during concurrent operations.
The degree of degradation which may occur will tend to be greater when half-duplex communications are employed as opposed to
duplex communications and system facilities in support of the
concurrent Inbound-outbound data stream capability of the terminal.
Actual terminal device throughput depends upon operational and
systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression
characteristics. characters read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, SNA pacing, cryptographic processing, etc.,
must all be considered in determining actual throughput.
In general, duplex data communications operation will tend to
provide
greater
terminal
throughput
under
concurrent
input/output functions than a half-duplex communications mode.
The 3777 mdl 3 operating duplex at 19.2K bps on a terrestrial
link may, however, present a variance of from greater to degraded overall terminal throughput when compared to comparable
operation in a half-duplex mode.
Problem Determination Procedures - Function has been designed into this unit to help provide availability to the customer.
See ISM 3770 Multiple Logic Unit Operator's Guide for 3776-3,
3776-4, 3777-3.
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and to fill
out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to
M 2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps. Point-to-point and
multipoint transmission capability over switched or non-switched
facilities allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Speeds above 4800 bps are on non-switched
facilities. Direct local attachment .to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps.
EBCDIC is the standard transmission code. ASCII is available as a
special feature. Refer to M 2700 pages for information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities, and other attachment
information.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3777 mdl 3 may use either the EIA Interface
or the High Speed Digital Interface to communicate through an
appropriate modem and communication facility with a 3704/3705
Communications Controller equipped with Line Set Type 1G
(#4717) at the central processing unit. This type of communication requires modems which are line compatible (suitable for interconnection) and which provide optional EIA RS232C or High
Speed Digital Interface DTE interfaces.
Also attaches via a Communications Adapter special feature on a
4331 Processor. The 4331 must be equipped with a Local Attachment Interface (#4801) and its prerequisites ... see "Special
Features" under 4331.
IBM Modems: The following IBM modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl 1, 3864 mdl 1 or 3865 mdls 1
or 2. For communications capability, product utilization and features, see
3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies:
3203 mdl 3 ribbons,
Limitations:
The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" depend on appropriate configurations of the terminal.
Keyboard, console display, and terminal storage are standard. The
3203 Printer mdl 3 is a standalone unit. A minimum configuration
includes a 3777 mdl 3 and a 3203 mdl 3. One communications
feature (#3701, 4501, 5650 or 5651) is required. For other
configurations, refer to "Special Features" below.
The duplex data communications capability of the 3777 mdl 3 is
operational on non-switched full duplex communications facilities
only.
Communications Adapter: An integrated communications adapter
without business machine clocking is standard ... provides SDLC
communications over switched or non-switched facilities.
Prerequisites for SOLC Communications with S/370 or a 4300
Processor: A 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating
under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any
virtual storage S/370 Processor or 4300 Processor operating
under VS1, MVS or DOS/VS using RES, JES2, JES3, POWER/VS
and VTAM. Note: MVS and JES3 are not supported by the 4300
Processors.
An appropriately featured 3705 operating under the appropriate
level of Network Control Program (ACF /NCP /VS) is required for
duplex data stream operation.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3411 mdl 1 for
magnetic tape unit voltage requirements ... see 3203 mdl 3
for 3-phase power requirements.
Color: Blue is supplied as standard.
Cables: Fixed length cables are provided as standard, except
for the 3411. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-3006. 3411 cables must be ordered separately.
EIA RS232C 19.2 Kbps Line Speed: #9481 ...
support of 19.2 Kbps ... used for record purposes.
provides
Alternate Addrees: #9011 ... for record purposes only. Order
this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing terminal code updates are to be mailed to an alternate address
using a Teleprocessing Control
number (TPC). The alternate address selected is usually the
central site location.
PRICES:
3777
Mdl
MRC
3
$611
MLC
2 Yr
$520
Purchase
MMMC
$20,800
$163
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 3 ... $11,240t
Model 2 to Model 3 ... $ 6,440' t
• Model Upgrade Price assumes Special Features #1601
and #1602 are installed on the Model 2. If they are not,
an RPQ must be submitted.
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
----- -~-----
---- - ':' =
===
M 3777.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Unit Model 3 (cont'd)
t Customer price quotations and customer acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of
this model change involves removal of parts which become
the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.]
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette). Orders for
# 1201 must also specify one print belt, #9493 for 48 character
ASCII, #9494 for 64 character ASCII, or #9495 for 94 character
ASCII. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keyloc)(s,·and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
the keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8 ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed or displayed. Maximum: One.
Limitations: The operator must position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rste between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation.
PRINT SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#5595). Provides support for a
3203 Printer mdl 3 operating with Speed Enhancement (#6360).
Maximum: One.
DDS ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5650 - For Polnt-ta-Polnt Operation ...
#5651 - For Multipoint Operation). Provides an adapter for
SDLC data transmisSion at speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps
over the AT&T non-switched Dataphone" Digital Service network.
The DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer
site termination of the DDS network. Specify: #9822 for 2400
bps, #9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for 9600 bps. Maximum:
One, #5650 or #5651. Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701), High Speed Digital Interface (#4501), or V35
Interface (#4720).
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MDL 1 ATTACHMENT (#7801). To attach one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Feature #7003 on
the 3411 mdl 1.
2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8002). Provides for attachment of a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2 or A3. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Optical Mark Read on the 2502 is not supported.
ENCRYPT/DECRYPT (#3680). Provides cryptographic data transmission in conjunction with program support in the host. Includes
a security keylock. Each machine will have its own unique key.
Two identical keys are supplied with the feature. Maximum: One.
Note: A mercury battery, IBM Part No. 1743456, or equivalent, is
required. A battery is shipped with this feature. See M 10000
pages for additional or replacement batteries. Replacement of the
discharged battery is the customer's responsibility.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: The card
read/punch check special feature on the 3521 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS232C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment to a modem. Speeds from
2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps are permitted.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with High Speed
Digital Interface (#4501), DDS Adapter, Point-to-Point (#5650),
DDS Adapter, Muitipoint (#5651) or V35 Interface (#4720).
Prerequisite: For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9481 is required ... see
item 5 under "SpeCify."
ASCII Feature
#1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
Encrypt/Decrypt
3680
EIA Interface
3701
Hi Spd Digital Interface
4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Diskette Storage, 1 st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator ID Reader
5450
Print Speed Enhancement 5595
DDS Adapter, Pt-ta-Pt
5650
DDS Adapter, Multlpt
5651
7801
3411 Mdll Attachment
2502 Cd Rdr Attachment 8002
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point and multipoint synchronous operation at 19.2K bps on a
Type 5703 or 8803 wideband channel. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), DDS
Adapter, Point-ta-Point (#5650), DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651)
or V35 Interface (#4720).
KEY LOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to keyboard or
control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
Attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps with a maximum cable
distance of 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701), High Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or DDS
Adapter (#5650 or 5651). Field Installation: Yes.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read/write
head; one read/write surface, 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per
track and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 1898 128-byte records.
Data may be stored in either a Basic Exchange dataset or in a
3770 format dataset. Diskette capabilities allow for:
Concatenate (pool) ... the ability to concatenate on a dataset
basis.
Multivolume ... allows a read or write operation to automatically
continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in ready condition,
or it may continue on the current drive.
Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
$18
$15
40 SUC 15SUC 30SUC 47
40
13
11
41
35
35SUC 15
13
69
59
69
59
13
11
18
15
24
20
24
20
118
100
29
25
19
16
Purchase MMMC
$600 $.50
40.50
15
NC
30
NC
1,600 2.00
440 1.00
1,400 1.00
35
NC
510 2.00
2,360 15.00
2,360 6.50
440 1.50
600
NC
840 2.00
840 2.00
4,000 14.00
1,000 4.50
640 3.00
ACCESSORIES: The following Item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the part number indicated
below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages, see M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
Mercury Battery (Part No. 1743456). Provides power to
sustain the master key of the Encrypt/Decrypt feature
(#3680) when normal power is not present. This accessory
is a 4 volt non-rechargeable mercury battery. This battery
has a shelf life of 1 year under normal conditions, and can
be expected to provide 3.5 years of normal operation. Note:
Discharged battery should be returned to IBM.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the 1st. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy ... data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1st (#4901).
OPERATOR ID FEATURE (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
MLC
2 Yr
" Resistered Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--- -------==::: == ~ 5:
M 3780.1
Jll179
DP Machines
IBM 3780 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL
Purpose: A data transmission terminal using the BSC technique. It
can communicate over appropriate communications facilities to
another 3780, a 5/360 mdl 22 - 1.95, any S/370 or 4300 Processor, a 2770 Data Communication System, or a 2780 Data Transmission Terminal. May be locally attached to a 3704/3705 Communications Controller. For requirements, see "Prerequisites."
NOTE: For possible use with S/360 mdl 20, System/3 and 1131,
see GSO
Manual.
Highlights: Provides medium speed, batch-oriented, buffered card
raadlng and printing via appropriate communications facilities ...
see "Communications Facilities." Punched card output provided
via attachment of a 3781 Card Punch ... see 3781.
Card Reader - reads at a rated speed of 600 cards/minute.
Provides hopper capacity of 1200 cards and stacker capacity of
1300 cards. Only 80 column cards can be read.
Printing - prints at a rated speed of 350 lines/minute utilizing the
basic 52-character set. Interchangeable type bars of 39 and 63
character sets are available with rated speeds of 425 Ipm and 300
Ipm respectively. Only the 63 character set may be employed
when using ASCII transmission code. The printer provides 120
print positions standard with feature expansion to 144 positions ...
see "Special Features." Horizontal and Vertical Format control
are provided as standard functions of the printer.
Buffers - provides two 512-character buffers which service the
transmission line and the I/O units alternately to provide overlap
operation for efficiency.
Buffer Checking - all characters are checked on the data path
when sent to or received from the buffer.
Variable Record Length - end-to-end characters are used to
define the end of a record, allowing for complete variable length.
Full buffer blocks with variable length records can be transmitted
or received. On card transmission, blank positions are removed
from the end of the card record to increase the transmission
efficiency.
Space Compression/Expansion - operable under switch control,
this capability provides for the removal of consecutive spaces in
transmitted data and their re-insertion in received data. A two
character sequence is substituted for from two to sixty-three consecutive spaces. If more than sixty-three consecutive spaces are
to be transmitted, a second two character sequence will be substituted for the number of consecutive spaces greater than sixtythree. If only one space is to be transmitted, it will be transmitted
as a normal space. This feature is inoperable when transmitting in
transparency or operating in home mode.
Home Mode - provides card reader to buffer to printer operation
in off-line non-communications mode.
Integrated 2400/1200 BPS Modem - provides 2400 bps transmission with half speed backup on leased and switched facilities
... compatible with IBM 3872 Modem.
Conyersation Mode -- allows a CPU to turn the communications
line around after receiving text and return text without additional
selection.
Audible Alarm - alerts the operator when manual intervention is
required in line mode ... unattended operation is not provided.
Communications Facilities: The 3780 operates in half duplex
mode over facility C4, C5, C6, 03, 04, 04SB, 05, 05SB, 06,
06SB, X1 M or X2M ... for information concerning these facilities,
. see M 2700 pages. The alphameric facility designations above
correspond to those shown on the charts on those pages.
Binary Synchronous Transmission: Allows for transmission rates
of 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200/3600 bps ... see "Modems"
below and Data Set Attachment under "Specify."
Communications can be with another 3780, 2772, 2780 mdl 1, 2
or 4, a S/360 mdi 22 thru 195 (except mdl 44 or mdl 67 in TSS
mode), or any S/370 or 4300 Procedsor ... for requirements, see
"Prerequisites. "
In addition, the 3780 may be multi-dropped on the same line
facility with other BSC devices (1826, 2715, 2772, 2780, 3271,
3272, 3735) as tributary stations on a multi-point line with a
S/360 mdl 22-195 (except mdl 44 or mdl 67 in TSS mode), or
any S/370 or 4300 ProcessOr as the control station. In a
switched control network, it may use the same termination (phone
number) at the computer that is used for the other BSC devices.
Transmission Code: One of two codes can be selected ... see
"Specify." For printable graphics, see "Type Catalog."
EBCDIC Code - 256 character set which is the basic code of
S/360, S/370 and 4300 systems.
ASCII Code - Industry standard code with a 128 character
set.
Transmission Checking: A redundancy check is performed on all
data. EBCDIC uses a 1 6-bit cyclic check transmitted as two 8-bit.
bytes ... ASCII uses an odd-parity VRC on each character, including the LRC character and an LRC check transmitted as a single
8-bit odd parity byte. Format check plus an odd/even block
check is provided on both code sets.
Modems: One Integrated 2400/1200 bps Modem feature, IBM
3863 Modem (2400/1200 bps), IBM 3872 Modem (2400/1200 bps),
IBM 3864 Modem (4800/2400 bps), IBM 3874 Modem (4800/2400
bps), IBM 3875 Modem (7200/3600 bps), or IBM 4872 Modem
(4800 bps) can be attached to the 3780. For communications
capabilities, product utilization, and special features, see 3863,
3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700 pages, and Integrated Modem under "Special Features" below.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) - M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
S-1 and 10-3 (2" x 3-1/4" or 2-3/16" x 3-3/4" sizes oniy).
NOTE: When using OM-2 or OM-3, reading must be terminated
prior to the scored column.
External Scorea (after separation) -- M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. OM-3 may be used if the score is
on the coiumn 1 end. NOTE: Upper left corner cut required
when the M-11 or CF-11 is used on the column 1 end.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages. In addition, the
customer must be advised that when non-IBM data sets or privately owned communications facilities are used, he is responsible for
insuring that signal levels and impedances are compatible with the
IBM communications interface.
PREREQUISITES:
S/360 mdl 25 -- communications can be via the Integrated
Communications Attachment (#4580) with appropriate binary
synchronous features on the 2025, or via a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit or 2703 Transmission Control ... see below.
S/360 mdl 22-195 (except mdl 44 or 67 in TSS mode), or any
S/370 Processor -communications can be via a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit or 2703 Transmission Control equipped with approriate binary synchronous features ... see 2701, 2703. NOTES:
[1) To utilize OLT support, the host processor requires a minimum of 32K bytes of storage ... [2) The 3780 communicates only
in EBCDIC or ASCII codes ... [3) Only EBCDIC Transparency
(#3601) is available on the 3780. Therefore, a 2701 or 2703
must be configured with 3780 restrictions and limitations for
compatibility ... [4) All 37805 on a multi-point line must have the
same code, EBCDIC or ASCII.
5/360 (except mdls 22, 25, 44, 67 in TSS mode or 85), or any
S/370 Processor -communications can be via a 3704/3705
Communications Controller ... see 3704, 3705. NOTE: See the
3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages
for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming
pages for possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
S/370 mdl115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138 - communications can be
via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and appropriate binary synchronous features on the 3115, 3125, 3135,
3135-3,3138 as well as via a 2701,2703 or 3704/3705.
4300 Processors - communications via a 2701, 3704 or 3705
to all 4300 Processors, and via the Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331. See 2701, 3704/3705, 4331 and 4341 for
details and prerequisites.
3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment -- attachment
without modem at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided
cables. Requires Synchronous Clock ... see "Specify."
2770 Data Communication System -- communications require
Terminal Use (#9711) and the same Transp1ission Code (#9761
or #9762) on both units. The 2772 must have Buffer Expansion,
Add'i (#1491), or both the 3780 and the 2772 must have
EBCDIC Transparency.
Another 3780 - communications require Terminal Use (#9711)
and the same Transmission Code (#9761 or #9762) on both
units ... see "Specify."
2780 Data Transmission Terminal (mdls 1, 2, 4 only) -- communications require that both terminals have EBCDiC Code (#9761
on 3780, #9762 on 2780) and EBCDIC Transparency (#3601
on 3780, #8030 on 2780). Communications can be in EBCDIC
Transparency mode only. The 3780 may not have multiple records in Transparent roode.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -
-- -----------=
===":'
M 3780.2
Jul79
--
DP Machines
3780 Communications Terminal (cont'd)
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. 1-phase. 3-wire. 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 208 V or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug -#9881 for 115 V. #9885 for 208 V. or #9887 for 230 V.
[2] Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC or #9762 for ASCII ...
can be field installed.
[3] Character Set: ONE of the available character sets and the
type size MUST be specified at no charge on the initial order
... see "Type Catalog" for specified characters in each set and
price for additional sets.
[4] Printer Tape Punch: Order under Part No. 120910
... ONE punch is furnished PER
INSTALLATION at no charge.
[5] Identification: #9350 ... provides an identification function by
which a CPU under stored program control and operating on a
switched public network. can identify a legitimate 3780.
PREREQUISITE: Switched Network Control (#7651).
[6] Terminal Use (polnt-to-point): #9711 ... for communications
with another 3780. 2772 or 2780. Provides . 'Bell"' key and
light Indicator to signal remote terminal that voice mode is
desired. Receipt of "Bell" code sounds alarm. Can be installed In the field. When communications is alternately with a
CPU and another 3780. 2772 or 2780. via switched network.
specify #9711.
[1] 3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment: Specify Modem
or Data Set Attachment ... see item [8] below. #9121 (2400
bps) or #9122 (1200 bps). Also Communications Facilities ...
see item [9] below. #9402 for half-duplex.
[8] Modem or Data Set Attachment: One of the following, depending upon facility to be used must be specified: #9120 for C5
(2000 or 2400 bps) or D4M (2000 bps). #9121 for 04 or X1M
(2400 bps). #9122 for 03 (1200 bps). #9123 for C4 (1200
bps). #9124 for 05 or X2M (4800 bps). #9125 for D4SB
(2400/1200 bps). #9126 for 06 (7200 bps). #9127 for D6SB
(7200/3600). #9128 for C6 (4800/2400 bps). or #9129 for
D5SB (4800/2400 bps). Can be installed in the field. NOTE:
#9120 required with #5610. #9121 with #5600/5602 without #7951. #9125 with #5600/5602 wilh #7951 '" if Public
Switched Network Facility C5 is used at data rate above 2400
bps. specify #9128 in lieu of #9120. PREREQUISITE: #9122
or #9123 may require Synchronous Clock (#7705) ... see
"Special Features."
[9] Communications Facilities: #9402 for half-duplex, or #9404
for duplex. Can be changed in the field. NOTE: Features
specify 3780 control of the data set and do not necessarily
correspond to the communications facility. Specify as indicated
below:
Switched Network Operation -- #9402.
Leased Private Line (or equivalent privately owned). Multipoint - #9402 (half-duplex). although the communications
facility may be 2-wire or 4-wire.
Point-to-point - #9402 for 2-wire (half-duplex) communications facilities ... #9404 for 4-wire (full duplex facilities).
NOTE: If 3780 Integrated Modem. IBM 3872. 3874 or 3875
Modem is used. specify #9402.
[10] Extended Retry Transmission: #9150 - extends the maximum retry count from three (12 seconds) to a maximum of
fifteen (48 seconds) in an effort to recognize a valid response
to the last block of data transmitted. prior to sending an EOT
code and timing out with an error condition. Can be change~
in the field.
[11] Data Set Cable: A 20' data set cable is provided as standard.
If a longer cable is required. specify #9021. indicating length
as a quantity of 25. 30. 35 or 40.
[12] WACK Response (Wait before transmit-positive acknowledge):
#9936 ... if initial WACK is to be transmitted immediately. All
subsequent WACK responses are transmitted after a 2-second
delay. Can be changed in the field.
[13] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
3780
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$1,054
$
$21,680
$341
897
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50%Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
.
• If Data Set Cable 10_ than 20 ft. is required, specify #9021 plus I.ngth ... ...
Specify [II).
SPECIAL FEATURES
Communications Special Features - use of the following special
features depends upon the communications application(s) for
which the specific 3780 is to be used.
COMPONENT SELECTION (#1601).
Provides the capability of
specific 3780 I/O device selection. In addition to component
selection. it provides priority output selection and multi-point Data
Link Control Component Selection capability. It is a prerequisite
for attachment of a 3781 Card Punch. Field Installatlqn;~:Ves.
EBCDIC TRANSPARENCY (#3601): Allows the 3780 to receive
and transmit all 256 EBCDIC bit combinations as data characters .
Variable length records cannot be transmitted if card I/O or printer is selected. Either normal or transparent text can be RECEIVED
without the "Transparency" switch being in the transparency
position. The switch must be ON for TRANSMITTING in transparency. If a terminal on a multi-point line requires this feature. all
terminals on that line must also have this feature. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Transmission Code
(#9761).
KEYLOCK (#4650):
A key-operated Power-On switch for the
3780. The key must be inserted and turned to the "On", position
before the control unit Power-On switch is operative. When the
key is turned off. power is removed from the control unit. For
additional or replacement keys. see M 10000 pages. Field
Installation: Yes.
MULTI-POINT DATA LINK CONTROL (#5010).
Allows multiple
3780s to be used on the same communicatiohs line with a CPU.
Terminal can be polled or selected when operating as a tributary
station on a multi-point system. All 3780s installed on the same
line facility require this feature and must use the same transmission code and data set attachment. Other BSC devices (2772.
2780. S/360. S/370 or 4300 Processors) as tributary stations.
can be on a multi-point line with a processor control station.
Limitation: If Terminal Use (#9711) is installed. it must be removed prior to installation of this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 2400/1200 BPS MODEM (#5600, 5602, 5610).
Provides an integrated 2400 bps modem with half speed backup
capability. Equivalent to and compatible with similiarly featured
IBM 3872 Modems. Three versions cover different communications requirements. as described below. Operator controls are
integrated with the 3780 operator panel. Built-in diagnostic functions are provided for local and remote testing. See M 2700,. M
3782 pages and "Prerequisites" above for additional information
on allowable machine/system combinations and required features.
Maximum: One #5600. #5602. or #5610.
Leased Line Polnt-to-Polnt Modem (#5600) -- operates over 04
or (with Switched Network Backup, #7951) D4SB facilities with
a similiarly equipped 3780 or a 2770. 2780. 3780. S/360.
S/370 or 4300 Processors equipped with appropriate features
and an equivalent featured IBM 3872 Modem. Includes manual
equalization control. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Submit an RPQ for operation on a basic 3002 channel. Modem
or Data Set Attachment #9121 (#9125 with Switched Network
Backup. #7951). Half Duplex (#9402) Communications Facilities
Control. Terminal Use (#9711) may be required, depending
upon application.'
Leased Line Multipoint Tributary Modem (#5602) - operates on
a multipoint network with a controlling CPU. Other 3780s on the
same line facility must have either this feature or an IBM 3872
Modem with Multipoint Tributary (#5101 or #5102); other BSC
tributary devices on the same line facility must have an IBM 3872
Modem with #5101 or #5102. Utilizes 04 or (with Switched
Network Backup. #7951) D4SB Facilities. Includes manual
equalization control. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Terminal Use (#9711) cannot be installed. Prerequisites: Submit an
RPQ for operation on a basic 3002 channel. Modem or Data Set
Attachment #9121 (#9125 with Switched Network Backup.
#7951). Half Duplex (#9402) Communications Facilities Control.
Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010).'
Switched Network Modem (#5610) -- operates over' the
Switched Network facility C5 with a similiarly equipped 3780 or a
2770. 2780. 3780. S/360. S/370 or 4300 Processors equipped
with appropriate features and an equivalent featured IBM 3872
Modem with Switched Network (#7941 or #7942). Provides
automatic
line
equalization.
Provides
automatic
answering/disconnect capability when used in conjunction with
Switched Network Control (#7651). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Half Duplex operation (#9402). Modem Attachment (#9120).'
PRINT POSITIONS, ADDITIONAL (#5701). Provides an additional 24 print positions for the 3780 printer. Field Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK CONTROL (#7651).
To attach to a
switched network. provides automatic answering of incoming calls
initiated by another terminal or central computer over common
carrier switched (dial-up) facilities. T,he line must be equipped with
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(
'~
OP Machines
M 3780 - 3781
Jul 79
3780 Communications Terminal
(cont'd)
an appropriate data set with auto answer capability and the terminal must be in a "ready" status. Provides automatic disconnect
when disconnect sequence is received or when no data is
transmitted/received for 20 seconds. Disconnect causes audible
alarm to sound. Specify: #9850 for use with the IBM 3874 Modem. Field Installation: Yes.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705). A synchronous clock for use
with modems which do not have an internal clock, or for use with
3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment Line Set, Type IF.
Will operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps. The device with which the
3780 will communicate must also have an internal clock operating
at the same bps rate. Specify: #9702 for 1200 bps, or #9704
for 2400 bps. Field Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP (#7951).
Provides alternate
operation on facility D4SB for Leased Line Point-to-Point (#5600)
or Multipoint Tributary (#5602) feature. Auto answer is not provided. Half duplex mode of modem operation is forced when this
feature is selected by the operator panel "Mode" switch; a
"Talk/Data" switch is provided. This feature can be used with
OS/DOS BTAM in certain configurations. Additional use program
routines will be required to fully utilize the capabilities of this
feature. For additional information see IBM Modem Marketing
Guide. Note: 4-wlre Switched Network Backup is available on the
3863 mdl 1 and 3864 mdl 2. For product utilization and jeature, see 3863
or 3864. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr
Purchase MMMC
Component Selection #1601 $ 19 $16.00 $ 407
EBCDIC Transparency
~601
12
10.00
260
Keylock
4650
35 SUC 35
Multl-Pt Data Link Cntrl 5010
19
16.00
390
Int. 2400/1200 bps Modem
Leased Line PI-ta-PI
5600
90
77.00 2,115
Leased Line Mltlpt Trlb 5602
83.00 2,295
98
Sw Network Modem
5610 105
89.00 2,425
Print POSitions, Add'i
5701
58
49.00 1,165
Sw Network Control
7651
19
16.00
390
Synchronous Clock
7705
32
27.00
650
Sw Network Backup
7951
8.50
10
260
$ 1.00
1 .00
NC
1.00
14.00
15.50
17.50
3.00
1.00
1.00
3.00
3781
CARD
PUNCH
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a 3780 Data Communications Terminal.
Highlights: Provides 80 column card output at a rated speed of
160 columns per second. Punches serially with actual throughput
dependent upon number of columns punched, commuincations
facility, and 3780 features employed. Refer to the 3780 Component Information manual for throughput calculations.
A free standing unit, cable attached within seventeen feet of the
supporting 3780. It has a 1200-card capacity hopper and a 1300card capacity prime stacker. Echo pulse check of punched data is
provided by the 3781 in addition to conventional transmission
checking provided by the 3780. Error cards are laced in card
column 82 and stacked in secondary stacker.
The unit may be used in home mode in conjunction with the 3780
card reader to create punched card output media.
Only one 3781 can be attached to a 3780 Data Communications
Terminal.
PREREQUISITES: A 3780 equipped with Component Selection
(#1601) ... see 3780.
Card Limitations: Heavy duty cards, aqua cards, and C-4 corner
cut cards cannot be used. Scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Recommended use of scored cards
is limited to the following:
Internal Scores (before separation) - S-l, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
External Scores (after separation) -- M-7, M-ll (with round
corners), CF-ll (with round corners) on either end of the card,
and M-3 on column 80 end only.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V. or #9887 for 230 V.
Must be consistent with that specified for the 3780.
[2] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3] Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC. or #9762 for ASCII.
Specify the same as that for the 3780. Can be field installed.
PRICES:
Mdl
3781
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 401
$ 341
$ 8,500
$ 69
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50% Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'--- ------=- =-- --=----':' =
IBM
M 3782 - 3784
Juf.79
DP Machines
3782
CARD
ATTACHMENT
Purpose: Used to attach the 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2 to
a 3774, 3775 or 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 1 or 2, or
3289 Printer mdl 3 (2502 mdl A1 only), or to attach a 3521 Card
Punch to a 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 Communication
Terminal mdl 2 or 3, or 3289 Printer mdl 3. Used to attach the
2502 Card Reader mdl A3 to a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl
3 or 4.
Model 1
Attaches a 3521 Card Punch.
Model 2
Attaches a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2, or A3.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: The unit supplies power and attachment circuits and
serves as a stand for mounting the card machine.
PREREQUISITES:
Model 1 - requires 3782/3521 Card Punch Attachment (#8150)
on the 3289 mdl 3, 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 mdl 2 or 3
and a 3521 Card Punch.
Model 2 - requires 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment
(#8149) on the 3289 mdl 3, 3774, 3775 or 3776 mdl 1 or 2
and a 2502 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2. Requires 3782/2502
Card Reader Attachment (#8149) on the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 and a
2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2 or A3. The following specify
features are required on the 2502: #9901 for 115 V AC, and
#9046 for white color.
Bibliography:
IBM 3784
UNIT
GC20-0001
LINE
PRINTER
Purpose: A line printer for attachment to a 3774 Communication
Terminal for use as a second printer or attachment to a 3651
Model 50 Retail Store Controller or 3651 Model 75 Programmable
Store Controller.
Highlights: Maximum print speed of 155 Ipm with 48 character
set, 120 Ipm with 64 character set, or 80 Ipm with 94 character
set. Line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving metal
print belt.
Included as standard is one interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or
94 character set) ... see "Specify." A variable width forms tractor
for feeding continuous forms up to 15" overall width, paper jam
detection, compress/expand, printer forms control, dual buffers,
and 1 32 print positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch. line
spacing is 6 or 8 per inch.
Limitations: Refer to GA24-3488 for forms design considerations.
Printed output is not supported for optical character reading.
PREREQUISITE:
3784 Attachment (#8155) on the 3774
Communication Terminal or 3784 Attachment (#8154) on the
3651 Model 50 Retail Store Controller or 3651 Model 75
Programmable Store Controller.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent. is
required
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz):
#9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. NOTE: Available at time of manufacture only.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... specify this feature for capability
to power down the 3774 and 3784 from the host CPU using a
controlled data sequence sent over communications facilities.
The 3774 must also be equipped with #9501. Not available
with 3651 mdl A50, B50, A75 or B75 Attachment (#9716) or
the 3651 mdl C75 or 075 Attachment (#9717).
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
3782
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
1
$ 41
$ 35
$ 1,400
2
59
50
2,000
$ 2.00
1.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5455). [Model 2'only] Required when
the attached 2502 is equipped with Optical Mark Read (#5450).
Maximum: One. Limitations: Refer to 2502 writeup for feature
description and card limitations. Not permitted if the 2502 is
attached to a 3776 mdl 3 or 4 or a 3777. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Optical Mark Read
MAC/
MRC
#5455 $ 25
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 21 $ 840
[4] Print Belt Character Set: Specify one. Available at time of
manufacture only. See Print Belt in M 10000 pages if more
than one print belt is required.
#9490
#9491
#9492
#9493
#9494
#9495
-------
48
64
94
48
64
94
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII
#1201 req'd on 3774
ASCII
#1201 req'd on 3774
ASCII
#1201 req'd on 3774
[5] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard.
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
Refer
[6] 3651 Retail or Programmable Controller Attachment: Specify
#9716 for aUachment of a 3784 mdl 1 to a 3651 mdl A50,
B50, A75 or B75. Specify #9717 for attachment of a 3784 mdl
1 to a 3651 mdl C75 or 075. Prerequisites: The 3651 mdl 50
or mdl 75 must be equipped with #8154 and have a minimum
of 48K of storage. Note: Remote Power Off (#9501) not
available with attachment to 3651 mdl 50 or mdl 75.
ETP/
$1.50
PR1CES:
3784
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$358
$305
$12,200
$83.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 40%Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) -- Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
PRINT BELT, ADDITIONAL (#5811, #5812, #5813, #5821,
#5822, #5823) -- Permits the customer to obtain more than
one character print belt for various applications.
48-char ASCII (#5811)*
48-char EBCDIC (#5821)
64-char ASCII (#5812)*
64-char EBCDIC (#5822)
94-char ASCII (#5813)*
94-char EBCDIC (#5823)
* ASCII Feature (#1201) on the 3774 is prerequisite.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - - -----------_.--- ----
M 3791.1
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 CONTROLLER Models 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, 2A, 2B
Purpose: The IBM 3791 Controller serves as an intelligent base
for clusters of operator stations attached to the 3790 Communica~ion System. The 3791 communicates with the Host System (any
virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor' ') by local channel
attachment to the byte or block multiplexer channel or the
3704/3705 Communications Controller over switched or nonswitched lines utilizing Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC).
Also attaches via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331
Processor.
Model1A
[No longer available] Provides 5 million bytes' of
disk storage.
Model1B
[No longer available]
of disk storage.
Model 1C
Provides 10 million bytes' of disk storage.
Provides 10 million bytes'
Model2A
Provides 20 million bytes' of disk storage.
Model 2B
Provides 30 million bytes' of disk storage.
Note: Models 1 A and 1B are no longer available.
Maximum: One 3791 per 3790 system.
Highlights:
3790 Communication System #9431, #9165, #9169
When used in the 3790 Communication System, the 3791 is a
programmable controller providing users with remote processing
capability, disk storage data files and control of terminal clusters.
Flexibility of the 3791 enables the user to efficiently configure a
3790 System for initial requirements with the ability to change
system hardware and functions to meet future needs. This configuration flexibility is attained by the selection of Special Feature and
Specify Feature codes.
Configuration Support #9431
When used with Configuration Support #9431, the 3791 provides
for attachment of 3277 Display Station mdls 1 and 2,
3284/3286/3287 Printers and/or 3288 Line Printer mdl 2s. The
3791 Controller will permit up to a maximum of thirty-one 3277.
3284/3286/3287 and/or 3288 devices to be attached in any
combination. In addition, up to a maximum of four 3793 KeyboardPrinters can be attached to the 3791 control unit giving a maximum possible total of 35 devices attached to the 3791 Controller.
Up to three 3792 Auxiliary Control Units may also be attached.
Higher speed print capability of up to 410 Ipm is provided by the
3791 printer feature.
In addition to the Host Link attachment, the 3791 has the capability to operate independently of the host via the Batch Data Exchange feature (#9037). The 3791 Controller performs all the
logic and arithmetic functions to support concurrent operation of
16 user tasks. one host communications task and two system
printers. Removable diskette storage and up to 26.9' million bytes
of disk storage are provided.
All 3790 programs are compiled and can be tested at the host
computer prior to use at the remote locations, minimizing program
development costs and helping assure uniformity of operations
through the system. User-oriented application programs allow
byte-by-byte and field editing, host file update, file organization
option and operator sharing of 3791 programs and data sets.
Reliability. Availability and Serviceability (RAS) capabilities ensure
efficient system operation by minimizing the loss of system data.
The 3790 has several features that assist in preventing unauthorized use of the system. Optional security and power-on keylocks
prevent units from being made operational unless a key switch is
operated. Operator-identification codes and password checking
help prevent unauthorized personnel from using the system.
Configuration Support #9165
When used with this Configuration Support, the 3791 supports the
functions and terminals offered by Configuration Support #9431
and provides expanded 3790 system capabilities. The additional
capabilities of this Configuration Support consist of 3270 compatibility, full screen processing. RJE function, host link line speeds of
up to 9600 bps subject to carrier availability, up to 31 concurrent
tasks, Including the System printer tasks. ASCII support, and
expanded 3790 DB/DC VTAM and TCAM host support.
• Disk. storage available for user program and data stora,e is configuration dependent.
Minimum storage based on a maximum 3791 configuration is 3.9 to 26.5 million bytes
for Configuration Support #9431. 3.4 to 26.0 million byte, for Configuration Support
~16S, and #9431 with Expanded Index #9142. 2.4 to 2S.1 million byte, for Configuration Support #9169 and Configuration Support #9165 with Configuration Conversion
#9S30, and #9431 with #9142 and #93S0. 3.7 to 7.4 million byte, for Configuration
Support #91SS, 7.2 to 25.7 million byte, for Configuration Support #9175, 7.2 to 25.7
million bytes for Configuration Support #9195 .
•• See CICS pages in Programming for restrictions.
Configuration Support #9169
The 3790 Communication System now provides a data link adapter
feature which allows communications with geographically dispersed displays and printers. When used with this Configuration
Support, the 3791 supports the functions and terminals offered by
Configuration Support #9431 and #91 65 and provides additional
3790 system capabilities. The additional capabilities of this Configuration Support include attachment to the 3791 Controller via
the Data Link Adapter of the 3276 Control Unit Display Station,
3278 Display and 3287, 3289 printers (see 3791 Data Link Adapter for models) and attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
and Control mdl 1 and 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1. Additional
storage is also provided.
3791 Test Site Designation (#9595) for all configurations.
The purpose of #9595 is to provide the 3790 customer with the
ability to designate a test site location at which he wants to install
a mandatory Control Code Engineering Change. Receipt of
changes at this location will occur before a new production unit
can reach the customer network and before the change is distributed to other installed locations requiring the change.
#3791 Alternate Mailing Address (#9596) for Control Code
Engineering Changes
The purpose of #9596 is to provide the 3790 customer with the
option to have Mandatory Control Code Engineering Changes
shipped to a single address, generally central site, for greater
Network Management Control. The alternate address is controlled
through assignment of a Teleprocessing
Control Number (TPC #) or Microcode Control Number (MC #).
Redistribution of the control code EC is the responsibility of the
customer.
3790 Communication System/Data Entry Confl9uratlon #9155,
#9175, #9195
When used in the 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration, the 3791 will provide Data Entry users with editing and
checking capability that results in improved data accuracy and
productivity. Flexibility in configuration is attained by the selection
of Configuration Support, Special Feature and Specify codes.
Configuration Support #9155
When used with Configuration Support #9155, the 3791 provides
for the attachment of 3760 Dual Key Entry Station mdl 1 and mdl
2, and 3760 Key Entry Station mdl 3. The 3791 Controller will
permit up to a maximum of eight 3760 mdl 1s and/or mdl 3s to
be attached in any combination. Up to two 3760 mdl 2s can be
attached to a 3760 mdl 1. A maximum of twelve stations equal to
a maximum of twenty-four operator positions is supported if not
combined with 3760 mdl 3s. For each attached 3760 mdl 3 the
maximum number of operator positions is reduced by one. For
combinations and limitations refer to Configuration Guidelines,
GA33-4552. Supports 3791 mdls 1A, 1 Band 1 C. Printing at the
3791 is provided by the Line Printer (#4710) feature. Data Extraction can be done by diskette.
Configuration Support #9175
When used with Configuration Support #9175, the 3791 supports
the functions and stations offered by Configuration Support #9155
and provides in addition user programmable subroutines and
expanded concurrency support and the attachment of the 3411
Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1. Supports 3791 mdls 1 B,
1C, 2A and 2B. For combinations and limitations see Configuration
Guidelines, GA33-4562.
Configuration Support #91 95 (3762 and 3760)
With Configuration Support #9195, the 3791 supports 3762
Payment Transaction Processing in addition to the functions,
stations and output facilities offered by Configuration Support
#9175 and the attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1. The 3791 Controller will permit up to a maximum
of eight 3762 Payment Transaction Processors and/or 3760 mdl 1
or 3 stations to be attached in any combination. A maximum of
sixteen operator positions is supported if only 3762s are attached.
If 3762s are mixed with 3760s a maximum of twenty-four operator
positions may be supported. For combinations and limitations, see
Configuration Guidelines, GA33-4572. Supports 3791 mdls 1 B,
1 C, 2A and 2B.
The maximum number of specific terminals attached to the 3791
with Configuration Support #9431, #9165. #9169, #9155.
#9175 or #9195 is dependent upon the 3790 System. In addition. the number of attached terminals that may be operational will
depend on the number of task and task mixes. The following
manuals will provide additional details for system configuration.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
_._-
-- =':' =
--------= =-
M 3791,2
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models lA, lB, lC, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
••• For Configuration Support #9431, #9165, #9169
An Introduction to the IBM 3790 Communication System, GA272807-2
IBM 3790 Communication System Configurator, GA27-2768-7
IBM 3790 Communication System Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA27-2769-6
For Configuration Support #9155
IBM 3790 Communication System Data Entry Configuration Introduction, GA33-4550
IBM 3790 Communication System Data Entry Configuration Guideline, GA33-4552
IBM 3790 Communication System Installation Manual Physical
Planning, GA27-2769-6
IBM 3790 Communication System Data Entry Configuration Functional Description, GA33-4551,
For Configuration Support #9175
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
IBM 3760 Key Entry Station
Introduction, GA33-4560
Configuration Guidelines, GA33-4562
Functional Description, GA33-4561
IBM 3790 Communication System
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
User Programmability Planning Guide, GC33-5903.
For Configuration Support #9195
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
IBM 3762 Payment Transaction Processor
Introduction, GA33-4570
Configuration Guideleines, GA33-4572
Functional Description, GA33-4571
IBM 3790 Communication System
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769
IBM 3762 Payment Transaction Processor
Paper and Printing Requirements, GA33-4576
Document Gauge, GX33-8505
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
User Programmability Planning Guide, GC33-5903
Communications Facilities: SDLC using switched poi nt-to-poi nt
lines at speeds of up to 4800 bps, or non-switched point-to-point,
or non-switched multipoint lines at speeds of up to 9600 bps via
the 3704 or 3705. Also attaches via a Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331 Processor. See M 2700 pages.
Hostj3791 Communications:
Byte and/or Block Multiplexer Channel
1200 BPS Integrated Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3863 Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3864 Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3865 Modem, Non-switched
IBM 3872 Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3874 Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3875 Modem, Non-switched
PREREQUISITE: Direct attachment to a S/370 or 4300 Processor
byte and/or block multiplexer channel with Local Channel Attachment (#1515) or remote attachment utilizing one SDLC Communications feature (#6301, #6302 or #6303) for Host system communications.
Communications with a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on
4331 Processor is via a 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
#5501), or an external modem attached via the EIA Interface
(#3701) feature. See M 2700 pages.
To operate a Configuration Support System (#9431, #9165 or
#9169) at least one 3793 Keyboard-Printer or 3277 Display
Station with Keyboard is necessary.
To operate a 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration (#9155 or #9175) at least one 3760 key entry station mdl 1
or 3 is necessary. For Configuration Support #9195 at least one
3762 Payment Transaction Processor or 3760 Key Entry Station
mdl 1 or 3 is necessary.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY: For details pertaining to specify codes, refer to Configuration Support (#9431, #9165 or #9169) Configurator, GA272768-7, or to 3790 Communication System/Data Entry (#9155)
Configurator, GA33-4552, (#9175) Configuration Guidelines,
GA33-4562, or (#9195) Configuration Guidelines, GA33-4572.
[1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Moisture proof plug • ... See complete publications list in the IBM 3790 Communication System Library
Reference Summary, GX23-0205.
#9902 for 208 V or #9904 for 230 V. Locking plug -- #9880
for 115 V (mdl 1A, 1 B only), #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for
230 V. Field conversion is possible between #9880 and
#9884 or #9880 and #9886. No other conversions are possible.
[2] Color: Available at time of manufacture only. Specify #9041
for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray.
[3] Upending Kit (in the event the 3791 must be placed on end to
enter installation area): #9840 is required for models 1C, 2A
and 2B only.
[4] Cables: See M 10000 pages for price and ordering instructions.
[5] ASCII Support: Specify #9022 for ASCII support. ASCII support is provided for the Host Link, Diskette, 3276, 3277, 3278,
3284, 3286, 3287, 3288, 3289, 3791 Line Printers (#4710,
#4711 or #4715), and Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7840).
Only ASCII support type B is provided for the 3276, 3278,
3287 and 3289. Not available with Configuration Support
#9431. ASCII support for #9155, #9175 and #9195 is limited
to Keyboard and Displays.
[6] Print Belt Character Set: Specify for 3791 Line Printer one of
the following. (These specify codes are available at time of
manufacture only). The 48 character print belt is used for both
EBCDIC and ASCII.
For feature codes #4710, #4711 or #4715.
#9431 #9155 #9175 #9195 #9165 #9169
X
X
X
X
X
#9071 .. 48 Char Set, EBCDIC
X
X
X
X
X
X
#9072 .. 64 Char Set, EBCDIC
X
X
X
#9073 .. 96 Char Set, EBCDIC
#9071 .. 48 Char Set, ASCII
X
X
#9074 .. 64 Char Set, ASCII
X
X
X
X
#907S .. 96 Char Set, ASCII
If additional print belts are required, see "Print Belts" in M
10000 pages -- Accessories.
[7] Configuration Support: The 3791 System Configuration Support
must be determined before specifying the functions required
and ordering special features. Field Instal/ation: Yes. Specify
one of the following:
#9431 - for up to 16 concurrent device operations. Must be
ordered for all 3791s without #9155, #9165, #9169,
#9175 or #9195. Limitations: Not available with #9155,
#9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
#9165 - for up to 31 concurrent device operations and expanded 3790 System capabilities. Prerequisite: Additional
Disk Heads (#3220 or #3221), one Control Storage Expansion (#1590) and the following Control Storage Increments:
Three Type lAs (#1603), and one Type IIA (#1613),
Limitation: Not available with Configuration Support #9431,
#9155, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
#9169 -- for support of Data Link Adapter, 3276 Control Unit
Display Station, 3278 Display Station, 3287 and 3289 printers (see 3790 Systems pages for models), Additional Storage, and attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1 and 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1.
Prerequisites: One Additional Disk Heads (#3220 or
#3221), one Control Storage Expansion Type I (#1591), six
Control Storage Increment Type IA (#1603) and one Control
Storage Increment Type IIA (#1613). Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Not available with Configuration Support
#9431, #9165, #9155, #9175 or #9195. Available only
with machines at EC level 744565 shipped after July 1,
1976.
#9155 - for 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion (# 1590),
Device Attachment Type I (#7900), Additional Disk Heads
(#3220 for mdl lA, #3221 for lB or lC only). Limitations:
Only available with a 3791 mdl 1A, 1B or 1C. Not available
with Configuration Support #9431, #9165, #9169, #9175
or #9195.
#9175 - for 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration, and the attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
and Control mdl 1. Prerequisites: Device Attachment Type I
(#7900), Additional Disk Heads (#3221 for mdls lB, lC, 2A
and 2B), one Control Storage Expansion (#1590), and the
following Control Increments: One Type IA (# 1603), and
three Type liAs (#1613). Limitations: Not available with
3791 mdl 1 A and with Configuration Support #9431,
#9165, #9169, #9155 or #9195.
#9195 - for 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration using the 3762 Payment Transaction Processor, and
the attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
mdl 1. Prerequisite: Device Attachment Type I (#7900),
Additional Disk Heads (#3221 for mdls 1 B, 1C, 2A and 2B),
Control Storage Expansion (#1590), and the following Con-
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
\
.
'------ -------
M 3791.3
Jul79
--
- --==-=
':' =
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (conrd)
trol Storage Increments: one Type IA (#1603) and three
Type liAs (#1613). Limitations: Not available with 3791 mdl
1A and with Configuration Support #9431, #9155, #9165,
#9169 or #9175.
[8] Configuration: For each 3790 System Configuration Support
(#9431, #9155, #9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195), the 3791
must be conditioned to support the function being provided and
the terminals attached. Future modifications to a 3790 System
must be specified by changes to the configuration features for
the 3791.
IBM 3790 Communication System (#9431, #9165 or #9189)
The selection of the following function and attachment specify
codes is required to complete the 3791 Configuration order. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Not available with Configuration Support #9155, #9175 and #9195. Purchase customers must submit
an RPQ for field conversion from #9431 or #9165 to #9169.
Device/Facility
3791 Controller
3792 Attachment
9110
9120
9130
First 3792
Second 3792
Third 3792
Prerequisite: #9431, #9165 or
#9169.
3793 Attachment
9011
Specify total number of 3793s
attached by ordering quantity.
Maximum 4 with #9431 ... 3
with #9165 or #9169. Prerequisite: #9431, #9165 or #9169
Batch Data
Exchange via
Diskette
9037 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisite: One #9431 or #9165
and #6301, #6302, #6303
or #1515.
Configuration
Conversion
9350 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisites: #9431 and #9142,
#9430, #9424 and #9774 or
#9165 and #9424 and #9774.
See Note 2.
Note 1: Machines shipped prior to July 1, 1976 and not at
Factory EC level 744209 or higher cannot take advantage of the installation assist function of Specify Feature #9142. Configuration Support #9165 can be
field installed on these machines but requires reinstall
of the data base. See Field Installation of Special Features #3220 and #3221.
Note 2: Machines shipped prior to July 1, 1976 and not at
Factory EC level 744565 or higher cannot install
Specify Feature #9350 on Configuration Support
#9169. Models 2A and 28 with serial numbers 2011 3
through 20196, excluding numbers 20165, 20190 and
20194, must have Field EC 746445 installed with
Configuration conversion #9350 on second and third
position disk storage files to avoid reinstall later for
feature #3221 on these files.
User Data Set
9501 For first add'i 16 user Data Sets.
Maximum: 1. Prerequisite:
#9431 or #9165.
9502 For second add·1 16 user Data Sets.
Maximum: 1. Prerequisite:
#9431 or #9165.
User Sessions
9344 Optional number of 31 available.
When specified, Minimum: 1.
Maximum: 16 with #9431 ...
31 with #9165. Prerequisite:
#9431 or #9165.
System Activity
9149 Specify to define concurrent
device activity. Minimum: 1.
Maximum: 31. Prerequisite:
#9165.
9150 Specify #9150 once for each device
that is operational when host Is
active. Prerequisite: #9431.
9151 Specify #9151 once for each
additional device that is
operational when host is inactive.
Prerequisite: 9431.
RJE Function
9581 132 print positions.
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
9582 96 character print belt.
Prerequisite: #9431.
9541 Specify only if required.
Prerequisite: #9165.
9542 RJE Console. One required.
Prerequisite: #9541 .
9543 Specify if RJE Reader is required.
Prerequisite: #9541. Maximum: 1.
9544 Specify if RJE Writer is required.
Maximum: 1. Prerequisite: #9541.
9545 Line Printer. Maximum: 2.
Prerequisite: #9541 .
9548 RJE Logical Unit. Minimum; 1
Maximum: 5. Prerequisite: #9541.
Test Site
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for Mandatory Control
Code Engineering Changes.
9421
9422
9423
9424
Alternate
Mailing
Address
9598 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
Is available for control
code engineering changes.
3277, 3284, 3286, 9200
3287, 3288
Attachment
Specify total number of devices
attached by ordering quantity.
Maximum: 31. Prerequisite:
#9431, #9165 or #9169.
Specify for any attached model 2
device. Maximum: 1
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
9250
3792 Auxiliary Control Unit
Prerequisite: #9431, #9165 or #9169.
First 3792
Maximum
Per 3792
Two
Four
One
Second 3792
Third 3792
Line
2741 3793 Prt.
Line
2741 3793 Pr!.
2741 3793 Prt.
9115
9125
9135
9111
9121
9119
Line
9131
9129
9139
Specify the above codes by ordering quantity. Order once for
each unit attached .. NOTE: Only one 3792 line printer feature
may be attached to a 3790 System. The one printer can be
attached to anyone of the 3792 Auxiliary Controllers. See
"Limitations" in 3792 Machines pages for details.
Support Functions - #9431 and #9185
Configuration Support #9165 provides all the functions of Configuration Support #9431. Some of the functions may not require ordering for Configuration Support #9165. Prerequisites
will determine requirements for #9431 or #9165.
Functions
Speclfy# Comment
Line Printer
Print Data Set
(specify one)
1024 Records
2048 Records
4096 Records
8192 Records
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
Transaction Data 9771 1024 Records
Set (specify one) 9772 2048 Records
9773 4096 Records
9774 8192 Records
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
Control Storage
Configuration
9531 Control Storage Configuration 1
9532 Control Storage Configuration 2
9533 Control Storage Configuration 3
Prerequisite: #9431.
Additional 3790
Functions
9430 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisite: #9431.
Expanded Program 9142 Optional, order only if required.
Index
Prerequisite: #9431 and #9430.
See NOte 1.
Support Functions - #9189
Configuration Support #9169 provides all the functions of Configuration Support #9431 and #9165. Only the following functions require ordering for Configuration Support #9169.
Function
Speclfy# Comment
Line Printer
9581 132 print positions.
Prerequisite: #9169.
System Activity
9149 Specify to define concurrent
device activity.
Minimum: 1 Maximum: 31
Prerequisite: #9169.
Batch Data
Exchange via
Diskette /Tape
9037 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisites: #9169 and #6301,
#6302, #6303 or #1515.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
...
------ ----------
M 3791.4
Jul79
==-= ':' =
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
RJE Function
9541 Specify only if required.
Prerequisite: #9169.
Field conversion charge for Model 1C to Model 2A is $6,100 ...
from Model 1 C to Model 2B is $12,200.
Test Site
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for mandatory control
code engineering changes.
Alternate
Mailing
Address
9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for control
code engineering changes.
Additional User
Sessions
9345 Optional, order only if required.
Provides 15 additional user sessions
Basic system provides 1 6 user
sessions. Prerequisite: #9169.
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
(#9155, #9175 or #9195)
The selection of the following function and attachment specify
codes is required to complete the 3791 configuration. The prerequisite for each specify code will indicate the availability of that
capability with the selected Configuration Support (#9155,
#9175, #9195). Field Installation: Yes. limitation: Not available
#9165 or
#9169.
with Configuration Support #9431,
Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9155, #9175 or #9195.
Function
Speclfy# Comment
Concurrency
9060 Specify if 1 thru 9, 3760 Stations
are active during data transmission
to or from the host. Concurrency is
not supported with 10 to 1 2 3760s
active during data transmission to
or from the host. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: #9155.
1 thru 6 stations
9156 Specify if 6 is maximum number of
stations planned for attachment.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#9155, #9175 or #9195.
1 thru 9 stations
9157 Specify if 9 is maximum number of
stations planned for attachment.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#9155, #9175 or #9195.
1 thru 12 stations 9158 Specify if 12 is maximum number of
stations planned for attachment.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#9155, #9175 or #9195.
User programmable subroutines
9850 Specify only if required. Prerequisite:
#9175 or #9195 and #7500.
Line Printer
9561 132 print positions.
Prerequisite: #9175 or #9195.
Test Site
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for mandatory control
code engineering changes.
Alternate
Mailing
Address
9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for control
code engineering changes.
PRICES:
3791
Mdl
lA
lB
lC
2A
2B
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 541
$ 460
541
541
717
893
460
460
610
760
• •• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgemust state: Installation of the
ment letters for purchase
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM.
Purchase
MMMC
$18,700
18,700
18,700
24,800
30,900
$167
178
204
194
248
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Note: Models 1A and 1B are no longer available.
Model Changes: Model 1A can be changed to Model 1B. This
upgrade requires replacement of disk storage. Adequate provision
must be made for retaining data contained on disk storage and
elimination of user proprietary information. Limitation: A model
change from mdl 1A to mdl 1 B for purchase customers requires
Model 2A can be changed to
submission of an RPQ·
model 2B. Model 1 C can be changed to model 2A or 2B. No
other changes are possible.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Field conversion charge for Model 1 A to Model 1 B is by RPQ
LOCAL CHANNEL ATTACHMENT (#1515).
Provides for direct
attachment to S/370 mdls 115··, 125, 135, 135-3, 138, 145,
145-3, 148, 155 II, 158, 158MP, 158AP, 3031, 3032, 3033 or
4300 Processor via an integrated byte and/or block multiplexer
channel and mdls 165 II, 168, 168MP, 168AP via 2870 byte
multiplexer channel and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Maximum distance from the channel is 200 feet. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with SDLC
Communications feature (#6301, #6302 or #6303). Not available
on the Block Multiplexer Channel with Configuration Support
#9431.
ADDITIONAL DISK HEADS (#3220, 3221). [#3220 for Mdl lA
... #3221 for Mdls 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B] Provides additional disk
heads necessary for use with Configuration Support #91 55,
#9165. #9169, #9175 or #9195. Maximum: One for #9155
and #9165 ... three for #9169, #9175 and #9195. Field
Installation: Yes ... machines shipped prior to July 1, 1976 and
not at EC level 744209 require the removal of disk storage. Mdls
2A and 2B with serial numbers 20113 thru 20196, excluding
numbers 20165, 20190 and 20194, at factory EC level 744209
require removal of disk storage in the second and third positions
to field install #3221. See chart below to verify replacement
requirement of each disk storage (enclosure).
Mdl lB, lC,
Mdl1A 2A,2B
·Label color on each disk storage
White
Orange
(enclosure) indicates replacement
necessary for additional heads.
Label color on each disk storage
Pink
Blue
(enclosure) indicates additional heads
installable without replacement of enclosure.
• Adequate provision must be made for retaining data contained on all disk storage in machine and elimination of user
propriatary information. All replaced parts become the property
of IBM.
Limitations: One is required on a mdl 1 A, 1B or 1 C for Configuration Support #9155. One is required on a mdl 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A or
2B for Configuration Support #9165 or #9169. With Configuration Support #9175 and #9195 one is required on a mdl 1B or
1C, two are required on a mdl 2A, and three are required on a
mdl 2B. Not available with #9431. Prerequisite: Configuration
Support #9155, #9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
LINE PRINTER - 80 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM (#4710). Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 120 LPM with 64 character set and 80 LPM with 96
character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set). ASCII or EBCDIC character set must be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan
fold paper up to 80 print positions on an 8-inch (20 cm) print line
with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.54 em). Paper up to six
parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or .50
mm) can be accomodated. Maximum paper width is 15" overall.
Refer to form design reference guide for printers (GA24-3488) for
form design considerations. Card stock is not recommended. A
form jam detection capability is provided. Order IBM Part No.
1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Line printers on the 3791 and 3792 must have the
same number print positions. The 48, 96 and ASCII character sets
are not available with Configuration Support #9155. The 96 and
ASCII character sets are not available with Configuration Support
#9175 or #9195. With Configuration Support #9155 the Line
Printer (#4710) can be used during data transmission between the
3791 and the host when the system is configured' for concurrency.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt C!1aracter Set"
, under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or 96 character sets.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM (#4711). Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 1 20 LPM with 64 character set and 80 LPM with 96
character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set). ASCII or EBCDIC character set must be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan
fold paper up to 132 print positions on a 13.2-inch (33.5 cm) print
line with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up to
six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or
.50 mm) can be accomodated. Refer to form design reference
guide for printers (GA24-3488) for form design considerations.
Field conversion charge for Model 2A to Model 2B is $6,100.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
--- ----------===
':" =
M 3791.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (conrd)
Card stock is not recommended. A form jam detection capability is
provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Specify:
See "Print Belt Character Set" under Specify for ordering 48, 64
or 96 character sets. Limitations: Line printers on the 3791 and
3792 must have the same number print positions. Not available
with Configuration Support #9155. The 96 and ASCII character
sets are not available with Configuration Support #9175 or
#9195.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS 410 LPM (#4715), Provides a higher speed line printer with maximum speeds of 410
LPM with 48 character set, 300 LPM with 64 character set, and
230 LPM with 96 character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set) and a
forms stand which is an integral part of this feature. ASCII or
EBCDIC character set must be specified. Capability to print on
continuous fan fold paper up to 132 print positions on a 13.2-inch
(33.5 cm) print line. Line density is 6 lines per inch with #9431.
With Configuration Support #9165 or #9169, 6 or 8 lines per
inch density is available and is program selected. Paper up to six
parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or .50
mm) can be accomodated. Refer to form design reference guide
for printers (GA24-3488) for forms design considerations. Card
stock Is not recommended. A form jam detection capability is
provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136670 or equivalent, or special
application ribbon, Part No. 1299610, or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum, One. Limitations: Line printer on the
3792 must have 132 print positions (#4713). Not available with
Configuration Support #9155. The 96 and ASCII character sets
are not available with Configuration Support #9175 or #9195.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set"
under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or 96 character sets.
MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#7840).
Provides for the
attachment of the 3411 MagnetiC Tape Unit and Control mdl 1.
Additional tape capacity is provided by attachment of the 3410
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 via the 3411. The total number of tape
units (3411 and 3410) on a 3791 Controller is four. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 3790 System Attachment (#7003), Single Density (#3211) or Dual Density (#3221)
on the 3411 and 3791 Configuration Support #9169, #9175 or
#9195 on the 3791. Restrictions: Not available with Configuration
Support #9155, #9165 or #9431. Limitations: Configuration
Support #9175 and #9195 do not support attachment of the
3410 mdl 1 tape unit. Only the 3411 Single Density feature
(#3211) and Dual Density feature (#3221) are supported by the
3791 Controller.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE I (#7900),
Allows attachment of
up to three 3792 Auxiliary Control Units or four 3760 Dual Key
Entry Station mdl 1 s or four 3760 Key Entry Station mdl 3s or four
3762 Payment Transaction Processors or any combination of four
of these stations at a distance of 2000 feet. Each 3760 mdl 1 can
attach up to two 3760 mdl 2s. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations: All attached units must be the same machine
type except for #9195 which allows mixing of 3760 and 3762
units. Prerequisite: Configuration Support (#9155, #9175 or
#9195) for 3760 attachment or (#9195) for 3760 and 3762
attachment or (#9431, #9165 or #9169) for 3792 attachment.
(#1613) is installed.
Prerequisite: 3793 Attachment (#7901).
3793 ATTACHMENT, ADD'L (#7903). [Mdl 1A or lB only] To
attach a third or fourth 3793 to a 3791 mdl 1 A or 1 B. Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3793 Attachment Second (#7902). Limitations: If Control Storage Increment Type
II (#1612), or Type IIA (#1613) is installed, only three 3793s can
be attached with Configuration Support #9431. For #9165 or
#9169, the maximum is three 3793s. Not available with Magnetic
Tape Attachment (#7840).
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE II (#7911).
Allows attachment of
up to any combination of four 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s
and lor 3288s to the 3791. For Display and Printer features
supported by the 3790 System, see 3790 Communication
Configura tor, GA27-2768 and Introduction to the 3790 System for
details. Maximum: One per 3791. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Not available with Configuration Support #9155,
#9175 or #9195.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE II, ADD'L (#7912).
Each feature
allows attachment of up to any combination of four additional
3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and/or 3288s to the 3791.
Maximum: Seven, but restricted to a maximum of 31 devices.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: If printer feature #4710,
#4711 or #4715 is attached, maximum number of 3277, 3284,
3286, 3287 and/or 3288 devices is restricted to thirty. If a 3792
is attached, maximum is six, with a maximum of 28 devices. The
attachment of a line printer feature does not reduce the maximum
of 28 devices. Prerequisite: Device Attachment Type II (#7911).
CONTROL STORAGE FEATURES
The amount of control storage to be ordered for the "3790 Communication System" (#9431 or #9169) depends on both the
quantity and type of attachments in the system configuration. See
"3790 Communication System Configurator" GA27-2768-6 to
determine the correct ordering quantities of control storage.
The amount of control storage for the "3790 Communication
System/Data Entry Configuration" (#9155) is dependent upon the
number of 3760 Stations attached to the 3791 and whether they
are inactive or active during data transmission to or from the host.
Non-concurrency is the condition when all 3760s are inactive
during data transmission. Concurrency is the condition when up to
nine 3760s are active during data transmission. Select from Table
I or II below, the required Control Storage Increments.
Table I - No Concurrency
Max. Attached 37608
Type I Type IA
Type II Type IIA
1
1
1
6
9
12
Table II - Concurrency
Max. Attached 37608
6
9
12·· •
Type I Type IA
Type II Type IIA
1
1
1
1
A maximum of nine 3760s can be active.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE I, ADDITIONAL (#7922). Attaches
up to four 3760 Dual Key Entry Station mdl 1S or four 3760 Key
Entry Station mdl 3s or four 3762 Payment Transaction Processors or any combination of four of these stations at a distance
of 2000 feet. Each 3760 mdl 1 can attach up to two 3760 mdl
2s. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A maximum of twenty-four operator pOSitions is supported for attachment
to a 3791 Controller. Prerequisites: Configuration Support
(#9155, #9175 or #9195) and Device Attachment Type I
(#7900). Not available with Configuration Support #9431, #9165
or #9169.
The amount of control storage to be ordered for the "3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration" (#9175 or #9195)
is defined by the prerequisite for Configuration Support #9175 or
#9195.
3793 ATTACHMENT (#7901).
To attach one 3793 KeyboardPrinter to the 3791 ... see 3793 for details. Maximum: Four per
3791 mdls 1C, 2A and 2B ... one per 3791 mdls 1 A and 1 B.
Models 1 A and 1 B require 3793 Attachment - Second (#7902) for
a second 3793 and 3793 Attachment, Add'i (#7903) for a third or
fourth ... maximum of two with Magnetic Tape Attachment
(#7840). Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with Configuration Support #9155, #9175 or #9195. For Configuration Support #9165 the maximum is three. For Configuration Support #9431 the maximum is three when Control Storage
Increment Type II (#1612) or Type IIA (#1613) is installed. For
Configuration Support #9169 the maximum is three, however, if
Control Storage Increment Type II (#1612) or more than one Type
IIA (#1613) is installed the maximum is one.
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION - TYPE I (#1591).
Provides
the capability of expanding control storage. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Limited to those machines shipped after July 1, 1976
and at Factory EC Level 744565 or higher. Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9169. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Control Storage Expansion (# 1 590). Purchase customers must
submit an RPQ for a field change from Control Storage Expansion
(#1590).
3793 ATTACHMENT - SECOND (#7902). [Mdl 1 A or 1 B only]
To attach a second 3793 to a 3791 mdl 1 A or 1 B. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Not available with Configuration Support #9169 when Control Storage Increment Type
II (#1612) or more than one Control Storage Increment Type IIA
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION (#1590). Provides capability
of expanding control storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9431, #9155, #9165,
#9175 or #9195. Limitation: #1590 required for Configuration
Support #9155, #9165, #9175 or #9195. Not available with
#9169.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE I (#1602).
Provides
8,192 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One for
#9431, #9155 and #9169. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Control Storage Expansion #1590 for Configuration Support
#9431 or #9155. Control Storage ExpanSIon Type I (#1591) for
Configuration Support #9169. Limitations: Not available with
Configuration Support #9,165, #9175 or #9195. See Note below.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE IA (#1603). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: Three
for #9431 or #9165: one for #9155, #9175 or #9195, seven
for #9169. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
-- -----
M 3791.6
........
Jul79
.5.":::
............. .:~:.
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
Expansion (#1590) for Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9165, #9175 or #9195. Or Control Storage Expansion Type I
(#1591) for Configuration Support #9169. Limitation: Three
#1603s are required for Configuration Support #9165, six
(#1603s) are required for Configuration Support #9169 and one
is required for #9175 or #9195.
require the character mode fo be 1920 characters. The 3791
Controller Communication Link is provided by selection of the
EIA/CCITl Interface (#3703) with the Data Link Adapter (#3210
or #3211) at speeds of up to 9600 bps or the Integrated Modem
(#4781) with the Data Link Adapter (#3210) at speeds of 1200
bps. See M 2700 pages for available communications facilities.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE II (#1612). Provides
8,192 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One for
#9431, #9155 and #9169. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Control Storage Expansion (#1590) for Configuration Support
#9431 or #9155. Control Storage Expansion Type I (#1591) for
Configuration Support #9169. Limitation: Not available with
Configuration Support #9165, #9175 or #9195. See Note below.
The maximum number of Data Link Adapter features (#3210
and/or #3211) attached to a 3791 Controller is five. The maximum number of 3276 control units that can be attached to each
Data Link Adapter Is five to a 3791 Controller. The 3790 will allow
the attachment of a total of 80 units and devices in any combination on the five Data Link Adapters. See 3270 pages for restriCtions.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE IIA (#1613). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One for
#9155, #9165 and #9431, five for #9169, three for #9175 and
#9195. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage
Expansion (#1590) for Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9165, #9175 or #9195. Or Control Storage Expansion Type I
(#1591) for Configuration Support #9169. Limitation: One
# 1613 is required for Configuration Support #9165 and #9169.
Three are required for #9175 or #9195. See 3793 Attachment
features (#7901, #7902, #7903) for additional restrictions.
3791 TERMINAL COMMUNICATIONS
,
NOTE: Customers who elect to purchase Storage Increment Type
I or Type II and plan to order additional storage at a later date,
should consider purchase of Storage Increment Type IA or Type
IIA Initially because some field upgrades of storage may require
replacement of initial feature and installation of new feature.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides EIA interface for attachment
of an IBM or other external modem. Maximum: One. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #5500 or
#5501. Prerequlalte: SDLC Communications Feature with or
without Business Machine Clock (#6301, #6302 or #6303).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides an integrated modem for communications with the host
system over non-switched lines. No external modem is required.
Specify: #9651 for 4-wire strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #3701, #5501, #6302 or #6303. Prerequlalte:
SDLC Communications Feature with Business Machine Clock
(#6301).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - SWITCHED (#5501). Provides an integrated modem with answering capability for communications from the host system over switched lines via a Telephone
Company supplied Data Access Arrangement Type CBS, DAA or
FCC, or equivalent. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, #5500, #6302 or
#6303. Prerequlalte: SDLC Communications Feature with Business Machine Clock (#6301).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE
Required for attachment to communications
CLOCK (#6301).
lines through the 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, #5501)
or, via an EIA Interface (#3701) at 1200 bps, to any external
modem which does not provide its own clocking. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1515, #6302 or #6303.
Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
1200 bps Integrated Modem - Non-switched'
IBM 3863 Modem
IBM 3864 Modem
IBM 3865 Modem
IBM 3872 Modem"
IBM 3874 Modem"
• Half speed or 600 bps is not attainable.
•• If Switched Network Back-up, switching Is done manually.
DATA LINK ADAPTER WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#3210). Required for attachment to data link through the 1200
bps Integrated Modem (#4781) or via an EIA/CCITT Interface
(#3703) at 1200 bps, to any external modem which does not
provide its own clocking. Half speed or 600 bps is not attainable
with this feature. Maximum: Five. The maximum is reduced by one
for each #3211 attached. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Llmltatlona: All
3276s and 3278s must have keyboards. Cannot be installed with
Configuration Support #9155, #9165, #9431, #9175 or #9195.
Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9169.
DATA LINt( ADAPTER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#3211). Required for attachment to data link via an EIA/CCITT
Interface (#3703) and external modem which provides its own
clocking of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: Five. The maximum Is
reduced by one for each #3210 attached. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Configuration Support #9155,
#9165, #9431, #9175 or #9195. Prerequlalte: Configuration
Support #9169.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE (#3703).
Provides EIA/CITT interface
for attachment of an IBM or other external modem. Maximum:
Five. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter
#3210 or #3211.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - NON-SWITCHED (#4781).
Provides an integrated modem for communications from the Data
Link Adapter over non-switched lines. No external modem is required. Specify: Unless otherwise specified, 4-wire strapping will
be· provided. Specify #9654 for 2-wire strapping. Maximum: Five.
Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte: Data Link Adapter (#3210).
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). Allows the 3791 to be poweredon only with key. Removing the key does not turn power off. For
additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages. Maximum:
One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6302). Required for attachment to communications lines via al) EIA Interface (#3701) and external modem
which provides Its own clocking up to 2400 bps with #9431 or
#9165, and up to 4800 bps with #9155, #9175 or #9195.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1515,
#5500, #5501, #6301 or #6303. With Configuration Support
#9155, #9175 and #9195, up to six stations may be active
concurrently with communications between 3791 and the host.
Field Installation: Yes.
SOLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6303). Required for attachment to communications lines via an EIA Interface (#3701) and external modem
which provides its own clocking of up to· 9600 bps. Maximum:
One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with #1515, =/1:5500,
#5501, #6301, #6302 or Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9175 or #9195. Field Installation: Yes.
DATA LINK ADAPTER
The Data Link Adapter provides the capability for the 3791 Controller to attach via non-switched communication lines the 3276
Control.Unlt Display Station mdls 2, 3, 4, 1i!, 13 and 14, with the
appropriate 3278 Display Station mdl 2, 3 or 4, 3287 mdl 1 or 2
printers or 3289 mdl 10r 2 line printers. The 3791 Controller
supports only SDLC communication and the 1920 character format
on the Data Link Adapter. 3276 mdls 2, 3 and 4 attached to a
3791 require the SDLC/BSC Switch (#6315) to be in the SOLe
position. 3276 mdls 3, 4; 13 and 14 and 3278 mdls 3 and 4
Not to be reproduced without
wtit~en
permission.
----
- --------------
M 3791,7
Jul 79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Local Channel Attach
$ 75 $3,000
#1515 $ 88
$4.00
Control Storage Expan
1590
31
26
1,055
5.50
Cntrl Storage Exp Type I 1591
31
26
1,055
5.50
Control Storage Increment
Type I
1602
32
27
637
5.00
TypelA
1603
58
49
1,170
10.00
Type II
637
1612
32
27
5.00
Type IIA
1613
58
1,170 10.00
49
Data Link Adapter
w Bus Mach Clock
3210
41
35
1,400
11.00
w/o Bus Mach Clock
3211
35
30
1,200
10.50
Add'i Disk Heads
27
1,080·· 17.00
- mdl1A
3220tt 32
- mdls 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B
27
1,080·· 17.00
3221tt 32
EIA Interface
3701
12
10
4.00
400
EIA/CCITT Interface
Data Link
4.00
3703
12
10
400
Line Printer 155 LPM
60 Print Positions
4710 177
151
6,175t 56.00
132 Print Positions
4711 199
169 6,825t 59.50
Line Printer 410 LPM
132 Print Positions
4715 351
299 11,960 114.00
1200 bps Integrated Modem 21
7.00
Non-switch (Data Link) 4781
25
840
Non-switched
19
16
630
5.00
5500
Switched
.5501
25
21
860
7.00
SDLC Communications Feature
w Bus Machines Clock 6301
19
16
670
3.00
w/o Bus Mach Clock
6302
10
2.50
12
450
w/o Bus Mach Clock
1,200 10.50
6303
35
30
Security Keylock
6350
35 SUC 35
NC
Magnetic Tape Attach
7840 182
155
6,200
8.00
Device Attach Type I
7900
36
31
1,300
4.00
Dev Attach Type I, Add'i 7922
24
.50
20
800
3793 Attachment
7901
31
36
1,300
3.00
3793 Attachment - 2nd
7902
1,300
36
31
3.00
3793 Attachment, Add'i 7903
31
1,300
3.00
36
Device Attach Type II
7911
38
32
1,300
5.00
Dev Attach, Add'i Type II 7912
32
27
1,100
3.00
• • Feature prices are based on plant installation. Purchase customers
should be advised that field installation of these features requires the submission of an RPQ for model lAs or IBs shipped prior to 1/16 and model 2As or
2Bs shipped prior to 10/16.
t Customers who may elect to purchase #4110/#4111 and later upgrade to
#4115 should consider the purchase of #4115 initially rather than
#4110/#4111.
tt Customer price quotations and customer acknowledgement letters for
purchase
for model lAs or IBs shipped prior to 1/16 and model 2As or
2Bs shipped prior to 10/16 must state: "Installation of this feature involves
removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
basis only. For shipment with machine, order the Feature #
indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M
10000 for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - [For feature codes #4710 and
#4711 only] Permits placement of continuous forms (out of
carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after
printing. The forms stand for feature code #4715 is an integral
part of the feature.
PRINT BELT, ADD'L - Permits the customer to obtain more than
one character set print belt for various applications.
155 LPM Max
48-character
64-character
94-character
64-character
94-character
410 LPM Max
48-character
64-character
94-character
64-character
94-character
EBCDIC/ASCII (#5821)
EBCDIC (#5822)
EBCDIC (#5823)
ASCII (#5812)
ASCII (#5813)
EBCDIC/ASCII (#5825)
EBCDIC (#5825)
EBCDIC (#5827)
ASCII (#5816)
ASCII (#5817)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----
- - ------------- --
--.---
M 3791.8
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3791 CONTROLLER Models 11 C, 12A,
12B
Purpose: The 3791 Controller, models 11 C, 12A or 12B, serves
as an intelligent base for clusters of operator stations attached to
the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System.
Model 11 C Provides 10 million bytes' of disk storage
Model 12A Provides 20 million bytes' of disk storage
Model 12B Provides 30 million bytes· of disk storage
• The minimum disk storage available fOI data storage and user
programs (based on a maximum 3791 configuration) is: Model 11 C - 5.5 million bytes ... Model 12A - 14.8 million bytes
... Model 12B - 24.1 million bytes.
Maximum: One 3791 per 3730 system.
Highlights: The 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B, with Configuration Support #9171 installed, serves as the controller for
the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System to support the
3730 functions of document creation, editing, storage, retrieval,
formatting, printing, archiving, and (with #9275) automated text.
Additional controller features and facilities include:
- Non-removable disk storage for customer use
- Line printer feature
- Host system attachment (with #9285) through an SDLC communications feature, or through a local channel attachment
feature.
Communication Facilities: Direct attachment to S/370, 4300, or
3031, 3032 , or 3033 processor byte and/or block multiplexer
channel using Local Channel Attachment (#1515).
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) using switched point-topoint lines at speeds of up to 2400 bps, or non-switched point-topoint, or non-switched multipOint lines at speeds of up to 9600
bps subject to carrier availability via the 3704 or 3705. See M
2700 pages.
For the 3791-to-3704/3705 SDLC link, IBM offers a 1200 bps
integrated modem or an EIA feature for the attachment of external
modems.
Note: For communication capabilities and modem attachment data,
see 3863. 3864. 3865, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700 pages.
Host/3791 Communication
raphy of Industry Systems and Application Programs, GC20-0370,
for details of 3791 and 3730 system publications.
SPECIFY: For details of specify codes, refer to 3790 Communication System Configurator, GA27-2768.
[1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): Moisture proof plug #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V. For Locking plug #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Color: Available at time of manufacture only. #9041 for Red,
#9042 for yellow, #9043 for Blue, or #9045 for gray.
[3] Up-ending Kit: In the event the 3791 must be placed on end to
enter installation area, specify #9840.
[4] Cables; See M10000 pages for prices and ordering instructions.
[5] ASCII Support: Specify #9022. ASCII support is provided for
the host link, diskette, 3277, 3284, 3286, 3287, 3288. 3732,
3736, and 3791 Line Printer (#4710, 4711 or 4715). Only
ASCII support type B is provided for the 3287, 3732 and 3736.
Prerequisite: #9171 with #9275.
[6] Print Belt Character Set: Specify for 3791 Line Printer (feature
codes #4710, 4711 or 4715) one of the following. These specify codes are avllable at time of manufacture only. If additional
print belts are required, see "Print Belts" in M10000 pagesAccessories. The 48-character and 1 28-character print belts
can be used for ASCII or EBCDIC.
#9071 48-character set, ASCII
#9074 64-character set, ASCII
#9075 96-character set, ASCII
#9076 1 28-character set, DP /WP EBCDIC (1)
#9077 96-character set, WP EBCDIC - Courier (2)
#9078 96-character set, WP EBCDIC - Artisan (2)
(1) Allows text and data to be printed in 3730-3790 systems
without the need to change print belts.
(2) Cannot be installed with Feature Code #4715.
[7] Configuration Support: Specify #9171 for 3730 Distribute\!
Office Communication System, including support for ~732 Text
pil!play Statjorand 3736 Pril)te,r. Prerequisite: Norie.·' ....'ct
installation: Yes. Limitations: Not available with model 1A, 1B,
1 C, 2A or 2B, or with Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
[8] Configuration: The following function and attachment specify
codes must be selected to support the terminals to be attached
to a 3791 model 11 C, 12A or 12B.
Attachment
Byte and/or block multiplexer channel
1200 bps Integrated Modem, Non-switched
1200 bps Integrated Modem, Switched
3863 Modem. Non-switched (2400 bps)
3863 Modem. Switched (2400 bps)
3872 Modem, Non-switched (2400 bps)
3872 Modem, Switched (2400 bps)
3864 Modem. Non-switched (4800 bps)
3864 Modem. Switched (4800 bps)
3874 Modem, Switched (4800 bps)
3875 Modem, Non-switched (7200 bps)
3865 Modem. Non-switched (9600 bps)
3793 Attachment
Specify Comment
#9011 Specify that a 3793 is to be
attached by ordering quantity.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: #9275.
3277, 3284, 3286, 9200 Specify total number of deVices
3287, 3288
attached by ordering quantity.
Attachment
Maximum: 29.
Prerequisite: #9275.
3732, 3736
Attachment
PREREQUISITES: Local Channel Attachment feature (#1515), or
one SDLC Communication Feature (#6301, 6302 or 6303) is
required for CE maintenance purposes.
To operate on 3730 system, at least one 3732 Text Display Station with keyboard, and either a 3736 Printer or a 3791 Line
Printer feature is required.
Test Site Designation (#9595) The purpose of #9595 is to provide the 3730 customer with the ability to designate a test site
location at which to install a Mandatory Microcode Engineering
Change. Receipt of changes at this location will occur before a
new production unit can reach the customer network and before
the change is distributed to other installed locations requiring the
change. This feature should be limited to one per network.
3791 Alternate Mailing Address (#9596) for Microcode Updates
#9596 provides the 3730 customer with the option of having
Mandatory Microcode updates shipped to a single address, generally a central site, for better network management control. The
through asalternate address is controlled
signment of a Teleprocessing Control Number (TPC#) or Microcode Control Number (MC#). Redistribution of the microcode is
the responsibility of the customer.
Publications: Refer to the latest level of IBM System/3TO Bibliog-
9016 Specify combined total of
3732s and 3736s by ordering
quantity. Maximum: 30 if
#9275 is specified ... 16
if #9275 is not specified.
Prerequisite: None.
Support Functions
Function
Line Printer
Test Site
Alternate
Mailing
Address
Specify Comment
#9561 132 print positions.
Prerequisite: None.
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for Mandatory Control
Code Engineering Changes.
Prerequisite: #9285.
Limitation: One per network.
#9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for microcode
updates. Prerequisites: None.
RJE Function
9541 Specify only if required. Cannot
be installed if Magnetic Tape
Attachment (#7840) is Installed.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#9285 with #9011 or #9200.
Additional User
Sessions
9345 Optional - order only if required.
Provides 15 add'i user sessions.
(basic system provides 16 user
sessions). Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: #9275.
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
-------- - - - ------=- =- - =--':' =
M 3791.9
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 11C, 12A, 128 (cont'd)
System Activity
9149 Specify to define concurrent
device activity.
Minimum: One. Maximum: 31.
Prerequisite: #9275.
Batch Data
Exchange via
Diskette
9037 Optional - order only if required.
Required for support of user
programming when #9285 is not
specified. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: #9275.
Host Communication 9285 Optional. Required for applicaSupport
tions involving host system
communications. Required for
support of user programming
when #9037 is not specified.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#9275 with #1515; or #6301 or
#6302, or #6303.
Extended Function
9275 Optional. Required for support of
automated text, user application
programming, and 3730-3790
concurrent operations.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: None.
Mdl
MRC
3791
11C
12A
128
$1,159
1,334
1,510
3793 ATTACHMENT (#7901). Allows one 3793 Keyboard Printer to be attached to the 3791. (See M 3793 pages.) Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9011.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE II, ADDITIONAL (#7912).
Each
feature allows attachment of any combination of up to four additional 3277s and/or 3284, 3286, 3287, 3288, 3732, 3736s to be
attached to the 3791. (The first four devices can be attached with
#9171 only specified.) Maximum: Seven, but restricted to a maximum of 31 devices. Field Installation: Yes. limitations: All
3277s and 3732s must have a keyboard. If printer feature
#4710, #4711 or #4715 is attached, maximum number of devices is restricted to 30. Prerequisites: #9016 to attach additional 3732s and 3736s, or #9016 with #9200 to attach additional
3732s, 3736s, 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and 3288s.
CONTROL STORAGE FEATURES
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
The amount of control storage to be ordered for the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System (#9171) depends on both the
quantity and type of attachments in the system configuration. See
3790 Communication System Configurator, GA27-2768, to determine the correct quanities of control storage.
$ 986
1,135
1,285
$32,660
38,760
44,860
$321
311
365
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT, TYPE IA (#1603). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
MLC
PRICES:
with the RJE Function (#9541).
Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisites: System/3-3790 Communication
System Attachment (#7003) on 3411; Single Density (#3211) or
Dual Density (#3221) on 3411; and 3791 Configuration Support
#9171 with #9275 on 3791.
Rental Plan: Plan 8
Purchase Option: 55% Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
FIELD CONVERSION CHARGES
Model 1 C to Model 11 C .... .
Model 1 C to Model 12A .... .
Model 1 C to Model 1 2B .... .
Model 2A to Model 1 2A .... .
Model 2A to Model 12B .... .
Model 2B to Model 12B .... .
ModelllC to Model12A ..... $ 6,100
Model 11 C to Model 12B ..... $12,200
Model 12A to Model 12B ..... $ 6,100
•• For field conversions of purchase 3791 mdls 1C, 2A or 2B to
3791 mdls 11 C, 12A or 12B, call the 3790 Marketing Center
Manager for assistance in planning the model conversion.
Model upgrade requires replacement of disk storage. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining data contained on disk storage unit and elimination of user-proprietary information.
SPECIAL FEATURES
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). Allows the 3791 to be "powered
on" only with key. Removing the key does not turn power off. For
additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT FEATURES
LOCAL CHANNEL ATTACHMENT (#1515).
Provides for direct
attachment to any S/370 processor', 4300 processor, or 3031,
3032 or 3033 processor, via an integrated byte and / or block
multiplexer channel or via a 2870 byte multiplexer or 2880 block
multiplexer channel. Maximum distance from the channel is 200
feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with SDLC Communication
Feature (#6301, 6302 or 6303).
Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
• This feature attaches to only one channel of a multiprocessing system.
ADDITIONAL DISK HEADS (#3221).
Provides additional disk
heads to improve performance in certain configurations and for
certain applications. Limitation: Cannot be installed on 3791 mdl
11 C. Maximum: One additional head on mdl 12A '" two additional
heads on mdl 12B. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9275,
#9285.
MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#7840).
Provides for the
attachment of the 3411 MagnetiC Tape Unit and Control mdl 1.
Additional tape capacity is provided by attachment of the 3410
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 via the 3411. The maximum number of
tape units (3410 and 3411) on a 3791 is four. Limitations: Only
the 3411 Single Density (#3211) and the Dual Density (#3221)
are supported by the 3791. Feature #7840 cannot be installed
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT, TYPE IIA (#1613). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: Two.
Field Installation: Yes.
COMMUNICATION FEATURES
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides EIA interface for the attachment of an IBM or other external modem. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with the 1200 bps modems (#5500 or #5501).
Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature with or without Business Machine Clock
(#6301, 6302, 6303).
MODEM, 1200 BPS INTEGRATED,. NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides an integrated modem for communication with the host
system over non-switched lines. No external modem is required.
limitation: Cannot be installed with communications feature
#3701, #5501, #6302 or #6303. Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature
with Business Machine Clock (#6301). Specify: #9651 for 4-wire
strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping.
MODEM, 1200 BPS INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501).
Provides an integrated modem with an answering capability for communication from the host system over switched lines via a telephone company supplied Data Access Arrangement Type CBS,
DAA or FCC, or equivalent. The coupling device determines
whether the answering capability is manual or auto. limitation:
Cannot be installed with Communications Features #3701,
#5500, #6302 or #6303. Maximum: One. Field installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with Business
Machine Clock (#6301).
SDLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE
Required for attachment to communication
CLOCK (#6301).
lines through the 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501)
or, via an EIA Interface (#3701) to any external modem which
does not provide its own clocking. Half speed or 600 bps is
available with this feature. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
SDLC features #6302 or 6303 or Local Channel Attachment
(#1515). Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6302). Required for attachment to communication lines via an EIA Interface (#3701) and an external modem
which provides its own clocking up to 2400 bps. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with SDLC Features (#6301, 6303), 1200 bps
Modem Features (#5500, #5501), or Local Channel Attachment
(#1515). Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6303). Required for attachment to communication lines via an EIA Interface (#3701) and an external modem
which provides its own clocking of up to 9600 bps. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Communication Features #1515, #5500,
#5501, #6301 or #6302. Maximum: One. Field installation:
Yes.
LINE PRINTERS
LINE PRINTER 80 PRINT POSITIONS (#4710).
[155 Ipm - 6
lines per inch (2.54 cm)] Provides a line printer with maximum
speed of 155 Ipm with 48-character set, 120 Ipm with 64character set, 80 Ipm with 96-character set, and 40 Ipm with
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------------=-- =----=
--':' =
M 3791.10
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models HC, 12A, 12B (cont'd)
128-character set. Included as standard is one operatorinterchangeable print belt (48-, 64-, 96-, or 128-character \let).
ASCII or EBCDIC must be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan fold paper up to 80 print positions on an 8 inch (20 cm)
print line with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.5 cm). Paper up
to six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is 0.50 mm
(.020 inches) can be accommodated. Maximum paper width is 15
inches overall. Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for Printers
(GA24-3488) for form design considerations. Card stock is not
recommended. A form-jam detection capability is provided. Order
IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons.
Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt
Character Set" under "Specify" for ordering 48-, 64-, 96- or
128-character sets.
LINE PRINTER, 132 PRINT POSITIONS (#4711). [155 Ipm - 6
lines per inch (2.54 cm)] Provides a line printer with maximum
speeds of 1 55 Ipm with 48-character set, 1 20 Ipm with 64character set, 80 Ipm with 96-character set, and 40 Ipm with
128-character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48-, 64-, 96- or 128-character set). Capability to print on continuous fan fold paper up to 132 print positions.
ASCII or EBCDIC character set must be specified on a 33.5 cm
(13.2 inch) print line with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.5 cm).
Paper of up to six plus carbons (maximum total thickness is .020
inches or 0.50 mm) can be accommodated. Refer to Form Design
Reference Guide for Printers (GA24-3488) for form design considerations. Card stock is not recommended. A form-jam detection
capability is provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent
for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set" under "Specify" for
ordering 48-, 64-, 96- or 128-character sets.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS (#4715).
[410 Ipm]
Provides a higher speed line printer with maximum speeds of 410
Ipm with 48-character set, 300 Ipm with 64-character set, 230 Ipm
with 96-character set, and 160 Ipm with 128-character set. Included as standard is one operator-interchangeable print belt (48-,
64-, 96- or 1 28-character set) and a forms stand which is an
Integral part of this feature. ASCII or EBCDIC character set must
be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan fold paper up
to 132 print positions on a 13.2 inch (33.5 cm) print line with line
spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.5 cm). Paper of up to six parts plus
carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or 0.50 mm) can
be accommodated. Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide for
Printers (GA24-3488) for form design considerations. Card stock
is not recommended. A form-jam detection capability is provided.
Order IBM Part No. 1136670 or equivalent for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print
Belt Character Set" under "Specify" for ordering 48-, 64-, 96- or
128-character sets.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
#1515 $ 88
$ 75 $3,000 $ 4.00
Local Channel Attach
Control Storage Increment
10.00
Type IA
1603
58
49
1,170
Type IIA
1613
58
49
1,170
10.00
27
Add'i Disk Heads
3221
32
1,080 17.00
10
4.00
EIA Interface
3701
12
400
Line Printer 155 Ipm
80 Print Positions
4710 177
151
6,175" 56.00
4711 199
6,825" 59.50
132 Print Positions
169
Line Printer 410 Ipm
132 Print Positions
4715 351
299 11,960 114.00
1200 bps Integrated Modem
16
5.00
Non-switched
5500
19
630
21
7.00
Switched
5501
25
860
SDLC Communication Feature
6301
19
16
670
3.00
w Bus Mach Clock
2.50
6302
12
10
450
w/o Bus Mach Clock
10.50
6303
35
30
1,200
w/o Bus Mach Clock
35
NC
Security Keylock
6350
35 SUC Magnetic Tape Attach
7840 182
155
6,200
8.00
3.00
3793 Attachment
7901
36
31
1,300
27
3.00
Dev Attach, Add" Type" 7912
32
1,100
" Customers who may elect to purchase #4710/4711 and later
upgrade to #4715 should consider the purchase of #4715
initially rather than #4710 or #4711.
ACCESSORY: For shipment with machine, order the feature number indicated below at the price listed in the M10000 pages. See
M10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450). [For 155 Ipm Line Printer features
#4710 and #4711 only] Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking
after printing. A forms stand is an integral part of the 410-lpm
Line Printer feature (#4715).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - --- -------_.- ----------
M 3792
May 79
DP Machines
3792 AUXILIARY CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Provides for the attachment of up
Keyboard-Printers, up to two communications lines
munication Terminals. and as a feature, a line
"Special Features." The 3792 can be attached to
distance up to 2,000 feel.
to four 3793
for 2741 Comprinter ... see
the 3791 at a
Maximum: Three per 3791 Controller.
Highlights: Up to four 3793 Keyboard-Printers and up to two
communications lines can be attached to the 3792 as a subcluster
to the 3791. The 3792 attaches to the 3791 via Device Attachment Type I (~7900) on the 3791 at a distance of up to 2,000
feet. Buffering, controlling, and checking of input and output data
are provided.
Limitations:
~4 713) can
ture may be
to the 3791
stalled, then
exceed four.
Only one 3792 Line Printer feature (#4712 or
be attached to a 3790 system. The one printer feaon anyone of the three 3792 control units attachable
controller. If Line Printer (#4712 or #4713) is inthe combined total of 2741 lines and 3793s cannot
PREREQUISITE: A 3791 Controller equipped with Device Attachment Type I (#7900).
Communications Facilities: See M 2700 pages.
Modem: (3792/2741 Communications)
IBM Leased Line Adapter (#5400) on the 3792.
Bibliography:
GC20-0370
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Available at
time of manufacture only. Locking plug -- #9880 for 115 V,
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug -#9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V.
[2] Color: Available at time of manufacture only. Specify #9041
for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray.
[3] Print Belt Character Set: Specify for 3792 Line Printer (#4712
or #4713). These specify codes are available at time of manufacture only. See "Print Belt" in M 10000 pages if more than
one print belt is required.
#9071 -- 48 Character Set, EBCDIC
#9072 -- 64 Character Set, EBCDIC
#9073 -- 96 Character Set, EBCDIC
[4] Attachment position on the 3791: Specify #9110 for first
3792, #9120 for second 3792, and #9130 for third 3792.
PRICES:
3792
Mdl
MACI
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 200
$ 170
$ 6,900
$34.tiO
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DEVICE ATTACHMENT FEATURES
LINE PRINTER - 80 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM MAX (#4712).
Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 120 LPM with 64 character set, and 80 LPM with
96 character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64, or 96 character set). Capability to
print on continuous fan fold paper up to 80 print positions on an
8-inch (20 cm) print line. 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up to
six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or
.50 mm) can be accomodated. Maximum paper width is 15" overall. Card stock is not recommended. A form jam detection capability is provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, for
replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Limitations: Line printers on
the 3791 and 3792 must have the same number print positions.
Field Instaliation:Ves. Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set"
under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or 96 character sets.
"Print Belt Character Set" under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or
96 character sets.
3793 Attachment (#7901).
To attach one 3793 KeyboardPrinter to the 3792 ... see 3793 for details. Maximum: Four.
Limitation: If a Line Printer (#4712, #4713 on the 3792) is
installed, then the combined total of 2741 sand 3793s cannot
exceed four. Field Installation: Yes.
Control Storage Features: Whether additional control storage is
to be ordered is dependent on both the Quantities and types of
attachments in the 3790 system configuration. See "IBM 3790
Communication System Configuration," GA27 -2768-6, for details.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENTS (#1622). Provides an 8,192
byte increment of control storage. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES:
ADAPTER BASE (#1021). Provides for the installation of up to
two Asynchronous Communications Controls (~1 081). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL (#1081). Provides for the installation of an EIA Interface (# 3701) for external
modems, or an IBM Leased Line Adapter (#5400) for communications with a 2741. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Adapter Base (#1021).
EIA INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides an EIA interface for the
attachment of an IBM or other external modem. Maximum: Two.
Specify: #9003 for first #3701 feature; #'9004 for second feature.· Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Asynchronous Communications Control (# 1081). The 3792 Communications Support
required on the 3791 should specify whether External Modem
attached to the 3792 will or will not have auto-answer. See "3792
Communications Support" under "Specify" on 3791 page.
IBM LEASED LINE ADAPTER (#5400).
Provides a modem for
communications with 2741 terminals via point-to-point nonswitched communications lines. Specify: #9651 for 4-wire strapping (if receive interrupt feature is used by the 2741, 4-wire strapping is reQ·d.); or #9652 for 2-wire strapping ". #9001 for first
#5400 feature, #9002 for second #5400 feature.' Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: Two. Prerequisite: Asynchronous
Communications Control (#1081).
• NOTE: Specify codes #9001 (1 st #5400) and #9004 (2nd
#3701) are mutually exclusive. Specify codes #9002 (2nd
#5400) and #9003 (1 st #3701) are mutually exclusive.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). Allows the 3792 to operate only
when the key is in place ... removing the key causes operation to
stop. For additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr Purchase
$ 42
Adapter Base
#1021 $ 49
19
16
Asynch Comm Cntrl
1081
32
27
Control Storage Incre
1622
12
10
EIA Interface
3701
Line Printer - 155 LPM Max
233
80 Print POSitions
4712 274
260
132 Print Positions
4713 306
19
16
IBM Leased Line Adptr 5400
Security Keylock
6350
35 SUC 36
31
3793 Attachment
7901
MMMC
$ 1,700 $ 1.00
650
3.00
637
5.00
400
4.00
9,500
10,500
650
35
1,300
56.00
59.50
5.00
NC
3.00
Accessories: The following item is available on a purchase only
baSis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) -- Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM MAX (#4713).
Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 120 LPM with 64 character set, and 80 LPM with
96 character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set). Capability to
print on continuous fan fold paper up to 132 print pOSitions on a
15-inch (38.1 cm) print line. 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up
to six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches
or .50 mm) can be accomodated. Card stock is not recommended.
A form jam detection capability is provided. Order IBM Part No.
1136634 or equivalent, for repiacement ribbons. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Line printers on the 3791 and 3792 must have the
same number print positions. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: See
Not to be reproduced without written permission;
---- =-- =--':' =
---'- --= - - ---
M 3793
May 79
DP Machines
3793 KEYBOARD-PRINTER
Purpose: Printed hard-copy and key data-entry facilities for attachment to a 3791 Controller or a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit.
Highlights: A modified Selectric@ II typewriter terminal oriented to
the functions of the 3790 system.
- Keyboard: Includes an EBCDIC keyboard with operator guidance lights and switches.
- Printer: A 15.5 cps printer (6 lines/inch) with friction-feed
platen or, optionally, pin-feed platen. A Courier 72 print element (Part No. 1167043) is supplied. 3790 programs can
provide vertical forms movement and automatic print element
positioning.
The 3793 can be located up to 48 feet from the 3791 or 3792,
with the customer responsible for the connecting cable. See the
installation planning manual for details.
PREREQUISITE: One 3793 Attachment (#7901, 7902 or 7903)
on a 3791 or 3792 per 3793.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY: Voltage (115 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9881 for nonlock plug.
PRICES:
Mdl
3793
MACI
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 119
$ 101
$ 3,450
$ 28
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: D
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
POWER LINE KEYLOCK (#5560). A key-operated switch in the
power cord. When switch is in the off position, no action is possible at the 3793. Two keys are supplied with the feature. See M
10000 pages for additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Power Line' Keylock
MACI
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
#5560 $ 75SUC-
$
75
NC
Accessories: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10QOO pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509) -- In lieu of standard friction feed
platen. Maximum: One. See M 10000 pages for available options and additional #s to be specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------.:.- =-=
------- ==--~ 5:
M 3800.1
May 19
DP Machines
IBM 3800 PRINTING SUBSYSTEM
Purpose: Printer output unit for S/370 mdls 145, 145-3, 148,
155 II, 158, 165 II, 168 and a 3031, 3032, 3033, 4331 or 4341
Processor. A special feature allows data Input from magnetic tape
without printer output unit attachment to a system.
Highlights: Prints on single part continuous forms providing 50
discrete paper sizes ... printing Is repeated for multiple copies ...
every copy is "original" quality.
Print Speed Range:
Form.
Length
10,520
12,024
12,624
12,900
13,360
7,890
526
3-1/2
9,018
334
5-1/2
9,468
7
263
9,675
215
8-1/2
10,020
167
11
• Single copy speeds.
15,780
18,036
18,936
19,350
20,040
Printer job throughput can vary depending on form length, number
of copies needed, and functions exercised.
52K byte storage standard for page buffering and control of printer operations ... 42K when operated without system attachment.
Pltche. - 10, 12 and 15 character per Inch (CPI) standard ...
Print Line - maximum of 136 positions at 10 CPI, 163 positions
at 12 CPI, and 204 positions at 15 CPl ... 10, 12 and 15 CPI can
be Intermixed within page or line ... vertical line spacing of 6, 8
and 12 lines per inch ... intermixed line spacing within page.
Character Sets Standard
Character
Style
Pitch (CPI)
10 12 15
Special
Underscored
Gothic
Gothic 15
Condensed
Text 1
(Upper Case)
Text 2
(Lower Case)
OCR A
OCR B
Format
Katakana
X
X
Yes
X
Yes
X
X
Yes
X
X
X
X
X
Yes
X
X
Text Character Set - upper and lower case charactere, serltted
design ... special graphice ... no reduction in throughput.
Format 10, 12 and 15 Pitch -- merge format and data ... program
controlled for online operation, for offline operation with Feature
(#7810) format character sets require Utility Program Product,
5748 UT2.
Copy Modification Function -- identify copies with legends, phrases, or names (e.g., Customer COpy, For Accounting Purposes
Only, etc.) ... address each report copy to speed distribution ...
spot carbon or field blockout functions ... identification and deletion program controlled. Customized forms with the identification,
deletion and formatting functions. When operating under controi of
Feature (#7810), Copy Modification Function requires use of
Utility Program Product, 5748 UT2.
Lines Per Minute·
8 LPI
12 LPI
8 LPI
Up To:
Up To:
Up To:
Forms
Per Min
Up To:
-1966" for OCR-A font (also referred to as ANSC~ UI,;H) and the
"European Computer Manufacturers Association's Standard
ECMA-11 for Alphanumeric Character Set OCR-B for Optical
Recognition 2nd Edition, October 1971" for OCR-B font.
Format Overlay -- optical image system ... prints high quality
document and report formats, designs or other constant data ...
merge format and data ... program controlled. When operating
under control of Feature (#7810), overlay is Invoked from the
operators panel or by the Utility Program Product, 5748 UT2.
Single Part Contlnuoua Form Output -- including custom printed
forms ... no deleaving ... no carbon disposal ... faster turnaround
... program control of copy quality... up to 255 copies ... job
separation marking use Mark Form function.
Optional
Burster-Trlmmer-Stacker
Output
eliminates
burster /deleaver bottlenecks ... offset separation between data set
copies ... remove output while printing ... first-in, first-out job
sequence ... trimmed edges.
Optional Channel Switching. - manual switches provide system
configuration flexibility through the use of the 2914 Manual
Switch, Model 1 (RPQ
or the Two Channel Switch
(#8170) ... automatic switching Is provided by the Dynamic Two
Channel Switch (#8171) for two processors in a tightly coupled
multiprocessing configuration, and two channels on a single CPU
providing alternate path capability.
Laser Safety - the 3800 contains a laser assembly. The 3800,
Including the laser assembly, is designed to comply with the safety
standards proposed by the United States DePllrtment of Health,
Education and Welfare (Proposed Performance Standard for Laser
Products, September 4, 1974 - Class I, 21 CFR 1040).
X
X
NOTE: Includes World Trade National Use Graphics.
Character sets are organized In blocks of up to 64 characters and
are held In subsystem read only storage.
Electronic character generation using Writable Character Generation Storage - 128 Writable Character Generation Storage positions are standard and organized in two 64 character Writable
Character Generation Modules (WCGM) ... character sets are
program selected without operator intervention and dynamically
loaded Into hardware WCGMs ... when operating offline under
control of Tape-to-Printlng Subsystem (#7810), character sets are
loaded Into read only storage (WCGMs) by the operator through
the operator panel, or by the 3800 control file tape which Is an
output of the Utility Program Product, 5748 UT2. Customerdesigned characters require use of the Utility Program ... an additional Increment of 127 Writable Character Generation Storage
Positions Is optional, providing dynamic storage for printing 4
character styles and/or pitches within one data set - this represents up to 255 graphics online with no throughput loss ... dynamIc storage allows character substitution under program control ... a
customer may design his own characters. When operating under
control of Feature #7810, customer-deslgned characters require
use of Utility Program Product 5748 UT2.
Llmltatlona: Prints on discrete form sizes. Utilizes five form
depths: 3-1/2", 5-1/2", 7", 8-1/2" and 11" ... ten forms widths
measured edge to edge: 6-1/2", 8-1/2", 9-1/2", 9-7/8", 105/8", 11", 12", 13-5/8", 14.3", 14-7/8" which permutes to 50
discrete sizes. Forms are refolded In 7" (2 x 3-1/2), 8-1/2" and
11" (2 x 5-1/2) In lengths.
Character and forms overlay printing restricted from first and last
1 /2" of forms length. A printed line can begin a minimum of 0.5
Inches from the left paper edge and cannot exceed a length to
position a character nearer than 0.5 Inches from the right paper
edge for all widths except 14-7/8" where the stated dimension Is
0.675 Inches from the right.
Paper must be from 15 Ib to 24 Ib basis weight. See GA26-1633
for details of weight and other forms considerations. Left-hand
side of form Is a fixed location in the machine, print line adjustment is by electronically moving the line. First print position can
move to the right 5.7 Inches but will caUS6 an equivalent number
of positions at the right end to be moved beyond the above defined print line boundaries.
It Is recommended that printing not occur within 0.100 inches of
any binder holes or corner cuts within the form.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a system channel
and/or Tape-to-Printlng Subsystem Feature (#7810).
Gothic 15 (15 characters/Inch at 8 lines/Inch) - 11" x 14-7/8"
reports can be reduced to 8-1/2" x 11" ... convenlent size ...
Increased throughput, reduced forms cost, reduced filing space by
using reduction or exploiting new maximum print span of 204
positions. The application of 12 Ipl vertical spacing with the GothIc 15 Condensed character set can result In a further reduction In
paper volume of up to about 30% beyond the savings projected In
reducing page sizes by applying the 15 pitch character set at 8
Ipl.
S/370 mdl 145 (excluding 3145-3) - byte multiplexer channel
(standard), Selector Channels (first one Is standard), Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3145. Attachment to
the byte multiplexer channel is not recommended. Selector channel attachment Is not recommended unless· dedicated.
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Printing) - alphameric OCR
A and the Ieee etyllzed OCR B fonts can be Intermixed with nonOCR fonte with no reduction In printing throughput .. , documents
may be proceesed by. the 1287, 1288, 3762 and 3886 Optical
Character Readers. Refer to the appropriate ealee manual pages
for specific capabllitlee.
Note: The OCR characters are designed to be repreeentative of
(but not always Identical to) the meim character (shape) centerline deecrlbed In the "United States of America Standard Character Set for Optical Character Recognition, Size A, USAS X3.17
S/370mdl 155 II, 158 - byte multiplexer channel (standard),
2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer
C.hannels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158, 3158-3.
Nnt In hl=ll·' r4=llnrntft't'AI"I
lAtithnl11
S/370 mdl 145-3, 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard),
block multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3, 3148. Attachment to
the byte multiplexer channel is not recommended.
S/370 mdl 185 II, 188 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannel (special feature) of
2870, shared or non-shared subchannel of 2880 ... sej! 2860,
2870, 2880. Selector channel attachment Is not .recommended
unless dedicated.
UJ' ..... tJl!!oft
ftft. ...... iM!Oai __
---- -
---- ------==-==~=
M 3800.2
May 79
DP Machines
3800 Printing Subsystem (cont'd)
3031 or 3032 Proce88or -- byte multiplexer channel (one Is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Proce88or -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor .- byte mUltiplexer channel (special feature), block
multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331. Note: Attachment to
the byte multiplexer channel is IlOt recommended.
4341 Processor -. byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channel (two are standard) ... see 4341. Note: Attachment to the byte
multiplexer channel is not recommended.
Tape-to-Prlntlng Subsystem (#7810) - In lieu of or In addition
to system channel attachments above ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: GC20-0001, GA26-1653, GA26-1654
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: Machine color is white, specify end cover color -#9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or #9045
for gray.
[3] Tool Kit: #9330 -- required for CE maintenance.
For rental customer .- specify #9;J;J0 for the first 3800 ordered
for a customer. If required for a multiple machine installation,
because of physical machine locations, an additional tool kitts)
Is available
For purchase customer -- specify #9330 on each 3800 machine order. When Installed 3800s are purchased, a tool kit Is
to be ordered on a no-charge
for each machine. Note: A
Tool Kit (#9220) Is required with Burster-Trlmmer-Stacker
(#1490) ... see #1490 below.
Mdl
Purchase Price
Basic
Monthly
Charge/
MRC
BETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Monthly
Use Charge
Rate
$7,708
$6,560
2.5 mills/foot
Basic Monthly
Maintenance Charge
$325,500 $
Burroughs: B7000/B6000 Print Backup Tapes. For further details
refer the customer to:
B7000/B6000 Series System Software Operational Guide,
Volume 1 (Form #5001563), Section 1 (Backup).
Tape FUes must be 7 or 9 track, EBCDIC coding, and
ANSI (USASI) standard tape lables and data formats. For
further details refer the customer to 87000/B6000 series
I/O System Reference Manual (Form #5001779).
For definition of the line printer control words, refer the
customer
to
Burroughs
B6700
Handbook
(Form
#5000276).
Honeywell: Series 60 (level 66/6000) Bulk'Medla Conversion
program formats and Standard System formats that have the
follOWing characteristics:
- Variable length records
- Binary or BCD mode
- 7 or 9 track
- Standard labeled or non-labeled
- Low or high density
- Standard printer commands with or without edit characters
For further details refer the customer to the following Honeywell publications:
0011 Bulk Media Conversion
0007 File and Record Control
DB82A I/O Programming
Sperry Univac: 1100 series systems System Data Format (SDF)
Symbiont print tape. For further details refer the customer to:
Sperry Univac 11 00 Series Executive System Volume 3
System Processors (Form #4144.3).
PRICES: 3800 Printing Plan
Rental
feature will accept the non-IBM system print tape formats described below.
489
Additional Monthly
Maintenance
Charge Rate
2.5 mills/foot
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Warranty: 8
Purchase Option: 50% (not applicable to Monthly Use Charges)
Maintenance: Available 24 hours per day, 7 days a week.
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2 Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Educational Allowance: 10% (Does not apply to Monthly Use
Charge Rate)
Tape flies may be 7 or 9 track, Field Data or ASCII.
For description of tape labels and file format and definition
of line printer control functions refer the customer to:
Sperry Univac 110 Series Executive System Volume 2
EXEC (Form #4144.2). Limitations: Selection of the
non-IBM system tape format to be used must be made by the
operator before printing.
Where more than one print character Is represented by one 8-blt
byte (data packing) on the non-IBM system print tape, applications
using character densities above 8160 characters per 11 Inch page
may Impact 3800 overall throughput and must be evaluated.
When using non-IBM system print tape formats, control tapes
produced by IBM 3800 Tape-to-Prlntlng Subsystem Feature Utility
(Program Product 5748-UT2) are supported only with an IBM
record format of VBM (variable length block machine language)
with standard IBM labels or no labels.
Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BURSTER-TRIMMER-STACKER (#1490). Provides an additional
output stacking mode. Bursts the five forms lengths to Individual
sheets and stacks sheets sequentially. Also trims left and right 0.5
Inches carrier strip from output sheet. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: One tool kit #9220 Is required for
CE maintenance. Contact the account Field Manager for requirements. For rental customer -- specify #9220 for first BursterTrimmer-Stacker feature ordered for a customer. If required for a
multiple machine Installation because of physical machine locations, an additional tool kitts) Is available on a no-charge MES. For
purchase customer -- specify #9220 on each Burster-TrlmmerStacker feature order. When installed Burster-Trlmmer-Stackers
are purchased, a tool kit Is to be ordered on a no-charge
for
each. feature.
127 WRITABLE CHARACTER GENERATION STORAGE POSITIONS, ADD'L (#5401). Additional Increment of 127 positions
allows up to 255 graphics to be printed within a data set.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). To attach the Two
Channel Switch (#8170) to a configuration control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch (#8170).
TAPE-TO-PRINTING SUBSYSTEM FEATURE (#7810). Allows the
3800 to be operated from magnetic tape data. Either 3411/3410
or 3803/3420 tape systems can be used. May be operated either
offline under operator control or online. Up to eight tape control
units may be attached provided that power sequencing and control
connection for all other than one are provided by a system; and
provided that all 3803 control units have at least one path, which
may be swltchable, to a S/360, S/370, or 4300 Processor. This
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). To attach the 3800 to two
S/370 or 4300 Processor channels which may be on the same
CPU or on two different CPUs. Both Interfaces must have the
same device address. The two channel switch will allow operation
on only one channel at a time. Selection of the channel which Is to
be operable Is by means of manual switches on the control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DYNAMIC TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8171).
Provides the
additional capability of an automatic two channel switch. The
switch Is designed to furnish symmetric two processor support for
tightly coupled multiprocessor systems and to attach to two channels from a single CPU to provide alternate path capability. For
either tightly coupled multiprocessors or single CPU attachments,
data transfer occurs only one channel path at a time. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch
(#8170).
Special Feature Prices:
BMC/
MRC
BETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase BMMC
Burster-Trlmmer-Stkr #1490 $1,163 $ 990
127 Writable Char Gen
Storage Pos., Add'i
5401
85
72
Remote Switch Attach 6148
NC
NC
Tape-ta-Ptg Subsys Fea 7810
308
262
Two Channel Switch
8170
223
190
Dynamic Two Chan ,Sw 8171
NC
NC
Nnt to be reoroduced without written oermission.
$49,100 $132.00
3,905
NC
10,500
8,545
NC
14.50
NC
24.50
11.50
NC
--- -----------===':'=
--
M 3803.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3803 TAPE CONTROL - MODEL 1
Purpoee: Control unit for 3420 Magnetic Tape Units mdls 3, 5
and 7.
Highlights: Single channel control for up to eight 3420 tape units.
Through special switching features, up to sixteen tape drives can
be addressed through any of four 3803 control units. Features are
offered to provide performance at 556 and 800 bpi in the seven
track NRZI format or at 800 bpi in the nine track NRZI format or
at 1600 bpi phase encoded.
The following table indicates feature numbers for corresponding
functions:
Subsystem Function
Feature Name
3420 Tape
Unit
#6631
1600 bpi PE 9-track only
Sill&le Density
1600 bpi PE/800 bpi
Dual Density
#3550
NRZI 9-track
1600 bpi PE/556-800 bpi
Seven Track
#6407*
NRZI7-track
* Tape unll wJlI only read or write 7-track tape.
3803 Control
Unit
#9570
#3551
#6408
PREREQUISITES: A control unit position on a S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processor system channel, or Tape-ta-Printing Subsystem
Feature (#7810) on a 3800 Printing Subsystem. When used with
a 3800 with feature #7810, at least one path, which may be
switchable, must be provided to a S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processor. When multiple control units (up to 8 are allowable) are
connected to a 3800, all other than one must have power sequencing and control connection provided by a system.
For S/360 mdl 30 - if the 3803 is attached to the 2030 selector
channel via the 1400 Magnetic Tape Compatibility Feature
(#4468), then 3420/1400 Compatibility (#9750) is required on
the 2030 ... see "Specify" under 2030.
Limitations: Attachable to all S/360 and S/370 systems except
S/360 mdls 20, 25 and 44, and S/370 mdls 115 and 125. Mdl
135: NOT supported on byte multiplexer channel for concurrent
operation with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications
Adapter, or Selector Channel. Attachable to 4331. and 4341
Processors. For considerations see "4331 Channel Characterics.
GA33-1527." Note: A 3803 cannot be attached to the byte multiplexer chtJnnel on a 4341 Processor.
3420 mdls 4. 6 or 8 cannot be addressed through a 3803 mdl 1.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Either Dual Density (#3551) or Seven Track (#6408)
must be ordered unless Single Density (#9570) is specified.
Only one of the three features can be installed.
control unit with either Single Density (#9570) or Seven Track
(#6408).
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). Provides for remote
operation of the Two Channel Switch (#8100) on the 3803 mdl 1,
from a remote console such as the configuration control panel
(3058 or 3068) for a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. Operation of
the switch on the remote console will result in the same function
as operation of the 3803 switch. The 3803 switches will be functionally inoperative when this feature is installed. The cable to the
remote console is not provided by this feature. The cable used
must contain three wires for each Enable/Disable switch to be
installed. Each line must have a total loop resistance of less than
75 ohms when the remote switch completes the path. For operation with the 2925 mdl 10, 3058 or 3068, cable PIN 5351178 is
required and should be ordered
separate .
SEVEN TRACK (#6408).
Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Seven Track (#6407) to read and write tapes
at either 556 or 800 bpi in the 7-track format compatible with
tapes written by 729, 7330, 7335 and 2400 series tape units
equipped with 7-track read/write heads. Includes the translator
function, which, when used, causes 8-bit bytes from the I/O inter•.
face to be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit BCD
characters read from tape to be translated into their EBCDIC
equivalents. The Data Conversion Function, also included, allows
reading and writing of 8-bit bytes on 7-track tape by converting
four tape characters into three storage bytes and vice versa. Tape
units equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Cannot be installed in the same control unit with either
Single Density (#9570) or Dual Density (#3551).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100).
Permits connection of the
3803 Tape Control to a second channel. Alternate path switching
between two channels on the same system is under program
control. Partitioning of attached tape units between channels on
two different systems can be done using current procedures for
logical device partitioning. These procedures involve the proper
use of the operator commands VARY ON/VARY OFF (OS) or
DVCDN/DVCUP (DOS)..
Note: When installed on the S/360
mdl 30, the 3803 with #8100 is not supported under 1400 Magnetic Tape Compatibility (#4468), but is supported with the Programmed Mode Switch (#5856) when the tapes are operated in
360 mode under CS1400 program support.
TAPE SWITCHING: Switching configurations, via two, three or
four control units, are available to provide access to:
(a) Up to eight tape units attached to a single control unit.
(b) Up to sixteen tape units, with eight attached to each of two
control units.
[2] Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
All swltchable tape units must be attached to the control units
equipped with· the switching features (2-Control Switch, 3-Control
Switch or 4-Control Switch). Each control unit must be equipped
with the appropriate Single Density, Dual Density or Seven Track
feature for any drive in the pool to which it has access.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
The table below indicates features required for the available
switching options.
[4] If a tape switching configuration is being ordered. the 3803
must be equipped with a Communicator (#9071 or #9073) ...
see table under "Tape SWitching" below. If a Communicator
feature is ordered for a 3803 without a switching feature. no
tape units can be attached to that control unit.
PRICES Mdl
3803
MAC/
MRC
FTP/
MLC MLC
lyr*2yr
ETP/
MLC
2yr Purchase MMMC
$757
$696 $636 $636 $23,670
$109
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Switching
Options
2x8
3x8
4x8
2 x l6
3 x 16
• FTP is 1 2-23 months.
ETP/FTP/MLC ... all models of the 3803 may be under ETP/MLC
or ETP/MLC.
Model Changes: A 3803 mdl 1 may be converted to a 3803 mdl
2 in the field ... for Model Upgrade Price. see 3803 Tape Control
mdl2.
4 x 16
Features Required
Communicator 1-2
2-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
3-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
4-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
2-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
Communicator 3-4
3-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
Communicator 3-4
4-Contro1 Switch
SPECIAL FEATURES
Note: All special features for the 3803 are field installable.
DUAL DENSITY (#3551). Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Dual Density (#3550) to read and write tapes
at either 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi NRZI nine track. Tape units
equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Dual Density (#3551) cannot be installed in the same
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
On lst
3803
9071
1792
9071
1793
9071
1794
9071
1792
9071
Feature Numbers
On 2nd On 3rd
3803
3803
9071
--
---
9071
9071
On 4th
3803
--
--
-----
9071
9071
9071
--
--
9071
1792
9071
--
--
--
9073
1793
9071
1793
9071
---
--
--
--------
9073
9073
1794
1794
--
--
---
---- -,---
- --!.::::§,;,1:
M 3803 ..2·
May 79
DP Machines
3803 Tape Control - Model 1
(cont'd)
FTP/
ETP/
MAC/ MLC MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices: MRC 1 yr· 2 yr 2 yr Purchase
The 3803 mdl 2 may attach to S/360 mdls 50 thru 195 (67 in 65
mode only) by no-charge RPQ. RPQs must indicate the desired
channel position and if the system operates under emulation.
MMMC
Tape Switching
2-Cntrl Switch #1792$223 $205 $187 $187 $ 7,020 $11.00
1793 286 263 240 240
8,955 17.50
:H;ntrl Switch
1794 335 308 281 281 10,530 17.50
4-Cntrl Switch
3551
83
76
70
70
2,630
3.00
Dual Density
30
28
28
1,045
NC
Remote Sw Attac 6148 33
6408 83 76 70 70 2,630
3.00
Seven Track
5,265
5.50
Two Channel Sw 8100 166 153 139 139
• FTP is 12-23 months.
IB!\II 3803 TAPE CONTROL - MODEL 2
Purpose: Control unit for 3420 Magnetic Tape Units mdls 3
through 8.
Hl9hll9hts:
- Standard control unit provides 6250 and 1600 bpi densities.
- 6250 Encoding/Checking Logic allows error correction on the
fly for any single track or combinations of two tracks simultaneously. Errors may be corrected in all nine tracks of a single
data block providing they occur in combinations of no more
than two tracks at a time. Long tape blocks are subdivided by
resync bursts which are inserted within the block to allow
error tracks to return to fun. operation when reading forward,
thereby restoring maximum error correction capability.
- Optional features provide 9-track (800 bpi) NRZI, or 9-track
(800 bpi) NRZI with 7-track (800, 556, 200 bpi) NRZI formats.
- 9-track NRZI with 7-track NRZI features permit mixing 9 and
7-track tape units on the same 3803 mdl 2.
The following table indicates features for corresponding functions:
3803 Tape
Model 2
Feat Name
Subsystem Density
9T - 6250
9T - 6250+1600
9T - 6250+1600+800 9 Tr NRZI
9T - 6250+1600+800
with
7 Tr NRZI
7T - 800-556-200
Control
3420 Tape Unit
Mdl-3,5,7 Mdl-4,6,8
Feat #
Feat #
Feat #
Standard
N/A
#6420
Standard #6631
#6425
#5310
#3550
N/A
#6320·
#6407
N/A
• Requires· #5310.
- A pool of up to 16 tape units may be switched between 2, 3 or
4 control units.
- A 3803, via a two-channel switch feature, connects to two
channels of the same system or two channels of different
systems.
- Properly featured, a 3803 mdl 2 provides signal and power
attachment for up to eight 3420 mdls 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. Model 8s
may be attached as described under "Limitations."
PREREQUISITES: Control unit position on S/370 or 4300
Processor channel, or Tape-to-Printing Subsystem Feature
(#7810) on a 3800 Printing Subsystem. When used with a 3800
with feature #7810, at least one path, which may be switchable,
must be provided to a S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. When
multiple control units (up to 8 are allowable) are connected to a
3800, all other than one must have power sequencing and control
connection provided by a system. If attached to a 2860, a 3803
Mdl 2 Attachment (#7850) is required on each channel to which
3803 mdl 2s are attached. For the #7850, specify #9181 for the
first channel of a 2860 ... #9182 for the second channel
#9183 for the third channel. See 2860.
Systems Attachment: The 3803 mdl 2 attaches to a S/370 or
4300 Processor via the indicated channels:
System
3420 mdl4
3420 mdl6
3420 mdl8
135
135-3 - 138
145
145-3 - 148
155 - 158
165 - 168 - 195
3031
3032
3033
4331
4341
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
2860/2880
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Blk MultplxT
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
2860/2880
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
2860/2880
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
B/k Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Limitations: [1] 3803 mdl 2 attachment to S/370 mdls 135, 1353, 138, 145, 145-3 and 148 is configuration sensitive because of
potential system overrun. Consult System 370 Model 135 Channel
Characteristics (GA33-3010) or System 370 Model 145 Channel
Characteristics (GA24-3573) ... [2) The 3803 mdl 2 is not supported for attachment to byte multiplexer, multiplexer or 2870 Selector
Subchannels ... [3] The 3803 mdl 2 operating with 3420 mdl 8s is
limited to a maximum channel to control unit (total x dimension)
cable length of 119 feet to the 2880 or selector channel of a
S/370 mdl 145, 119 feet to the block multiplexer channel of a
S/370 mdl 145-3 or 148, 103 feet to the block multiplexer channel of a S/370 mdl 155, 3032 or 3033, and 72 feet to a 2860 : ..
[4] The 3803 mdl 2 provides power and signal connections for
3420 tape drives. Up to eight drives of any model can be. signal
connected to a 3803 mdl 2. Note that 3420 mdls 4, 6 and 8 must
signal connect to a 3803 mdl 2. [51 For al/ 4331 considerations,
see 4331 Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527.
One 3803, either mdl 1 or mdl 2, provides power for up to eight
3420 mdls 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. When the tape subsystem includes
3420 mdl 8s, one 3803, mdl 1 or mdl 2, may power a maximum of
six 3420 mdl 8s or combinations of drives as listed in the table
below.
Maximum number of drives which may be powered from one 3803.
No. of 3420
Model8s
6
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
and
No. of 3420
Model7s
0
I
0
2
I
0
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
I
0
2
2
2
2
I
and
No. of 3420
Models 3-6
0
0
2
I
2
3
0
1
2
4
5
0
2
3
4
5
6
••• If only one 3420 mdl 8, then any combination of seven additional tape
units is permissable.
When the system includes more than one 3803 mdl. 2 and the
number of tape drives which must be signal connected to a control
unit exceeds the maximum number of drives which may be powered from one 3803 (see table above). obtain power from another
control unit using separate power cable (Group 144). Separate
signal cable (Group 143) is also available.
A power supply feature (#9001) is available which allows eight
3420s of any model to be powered from one 3803 mdl 2 ... see
"Specify." This feature is necessary only if:
[1] The subsystem includes only one 3803 mdl 2 and the
drives to be powered from it exceed the maximum specified in
the table above, or
[2] The power load still exceeds the table limitations for a
3803 when distribution by re-cabling with separate power and
signal cables has been considered.
Blbll09raphy:
GC20-o00~
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
.
[3] Density: 6250 and 1600 bpi are standard and need not be
specified. In addition. specify 9 Track NRZI (#5310) or 7
Track NRZI (#6320) if required ... see "Special Features."
[4] If a tape switching configuration is being ordered, the 3803
must be equipped with a Communicator (#9071 or #9073) ...
see table under "Tape Switching" below. If a Communicator
feature is ordered for a 3803 without a switching feature, no
tape units can be signal attached to that control unit.
[5] Auxiliary AC Power Supply: #9001. Required to power more
than six 3420 mdl 8s from one 3803 mdl 2. Also. may be required to power 3420 mdl 8s in combination with other drives
... see "Limitations" above. Requires a 100amp PClwer source.
t With or without Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421).
Not to be reproduced. without written permission ..
--------- --- - - ---= =- =--':' =
M 3803.3
May 79
DP Machines
3803 Tape Control Model 2
(conl'd)
FTP/
MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC
1 yr" 2 yr
PRICES:Mdl
3803
2
$1,101 $1,013$925
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$925$39,420
Switching
Options
$150
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
2x8
3x8
4x8
• FTP is 12-23 months.
ETP/FTP/MLC: ETP, FTP and MLC are optionally available.
Customers can transfer to ETP /MLC when the 3803 mdl 1 is
converted to a mdl 2 or when 3420s are model changed or at any
time thereafter. The early termination charge does not apply but
the two year ETP /MLC committment period begins at the date of
the ETP /MLC contract, not the FTP/MLC contract.
3420s and 3803s shipped from the plant may be under ETP /MLC,
FTP/MLC or MAC/MRC at the customer's option.
Model Changes: A 3803 mdl 1 can be converted to a 3803 mdl 2
in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Modell to Model 2 - $15,750 ""
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for Purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
9 TRACK NRZI (#5310). Required for attachment of 3420 mdls
3, 5 or 7 equipped with Dual Density (#3550). Allows attached
tape drives to read and write data in 9-track - 800 bpi format as
well as 1600 bpi (Phase Encoded) format. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). Provides for remote
operation of the Two Channel Switch (#8100) on the 3803 mdl 2,
from a remote console such as the configuration control panel
(3058 or 3068) for a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. Operation of
the switch on the remote console will result in the same function
as operation of the 3803 switch. The 3803 switches will be functionally inoperative when this feature is installed. The cable to the
remote console is not provided by this feature. The cable used
must contain three wires for each Enable/Disable switch to be
installed. Each line must have a total loop resistance of less than
75 ohms when the remote switch completes the path. For operation with the 2925 mdl 10, 3058 or 3068, cable P /N 5351178 is
Field
required and should be ordered
separate
Installation: Yes.
7 TRACK NRZI (#6320). Required for attachment of 3420 mdls
3, 5 or 7 equipped with Seven Track (#6407). Allows attached
tape drives to read and write data in 7-track/200, 556 or 800 bpi
format. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 9 Track NRZI
(#5310).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100),
Permits connection of the
3803 to a second channel. Alternate path switching between two
channels on the same system is under program control. Partitioning of attached tape units between channels on two different
systems can be done using current procedures for logical device
partitioning. The procedures involve the proper use of the operator
commands VARY ONLINE/VARY OFFLINE (OS) or DVCDN/DVCUP
(DOS).
TAPE SWITCHING (#1792 - 1794). Switching configurations, via
two, three or four control units, are available to provide access to:
(a) Up to eight tape units attached to a single control unit.
(b) Up to sixteen tape units, with eight attached to each of two
control units.
All switchable tape units must be signal attached to the control
units equipped with the switching features (2-Control Switch,
3-Control Switch, or 4-Control Switch). Each control unit must be
equipped with appropriate density feature for any drive in the pool
to which it has access. Field Installation: Yes.
The table below indicates features required for the available
switching options.
2 x 16
3 x 16
4 x 16
Feature Numbers
Features Required
On 1st
3803
On 2nd
3803
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
2-Control Switch
1792
--
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
On 3rd
3803
On 4th
3803
--
--
--
---
9071
3-Control Switch
1793
--
--
--
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
9071
9071
---
4-Control Switch
1794
--
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
2-Control Switch
1792
1792
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
-----
--
--
--
9073
3-Control Switch
1793
1793
--
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
--
-----
Communicator 3-4
--
--
9073
9073
1794
1794
--
---
Communicator 3-4
4-Control Switch
FTP/
ETP/
MAC/ MLC MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices: MRC 1 yr" 2 yr 2 yr Purchase
Tape Switching
2-Cntrl Switch #1792$223 $205
1793 286 263
3-Cntrl Switch
4-Cntrl Switch
1794 335 308
5310 110 101
9 Track NRZI
Remote Sw Attac 6148
33
30
7 Track NRZI
6320
54
50
Two Chnl Switch 8100 166 153
MMMC
$187 $187 $ 7,020 $11.00
240 240
8,955 17.50
281 281 10,530 17.50
92
92
3,530
1.50
28
28
1,045
NC
45
45
1,735
1.50
139 139
5,265
5.50
• FTP is 12-23 months.
IBM 3803 TAPE CONTROL - MODEL 3
Purpose: Control unit for attaching 3420 Magnetic Tape Units
mdls 3 and 5 to S/370 mdls 115 and 125.
Highlights: Single channel control for up to eight 3420 tape units.
Features are offered to provide performance at 556 and 800 bpi in
the seven track NRZI format or at 800 bpi in the nine track NRZI
format or at 1600 bpi phase encoded.
The following table indicates feature numbers for corresponding
functions:
Subsystem Function
Feature Name
3420 Tape
Unit
3803 Control
Unit
1600 bpi PE 9-track only
Sinde Density
#6631
#9570
1600 bpi PE/8oo bpi
NRZI 9-track
1600 bpi PE/556-8oo bpi
NRZI7-track
Dual Density
#3550
#3551
Seven Track
#6407'
#6408
, Tape umt will only read or write 7-track tape.
PREREQUISITES: The MagnetiC Tape Adapter feature (#4675)
and Specify feature (#9807) on S/370 mdl 115 or 125.
Limitations: Attachable to S/370 mdl 115 and 125 only. 3420
mdls 4, 6, 7 or 8 cannot be addressed through a 3803 mdl 3.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
SPECIFY: [1] Either Dual Density (#3551) or Seven Track
(#6408) must be ordered unless Single Density (#9570) is
specified. Only one of the three features can be installed.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:Mdl
3803
3
ETP/
MAC/
MRC
FTP/
MLC MLC
1 yr"2 yr
$817
$752$686 $686
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$24,600
$137
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- ---- - =-----':' =
==
M 3803-3811
May 79
DP Machines
3803 Tape Control Model 3 (cont'd)
ETP IFTPIMLC '" all models of the 3803 may be under ETP IMlC
or FTP/MlC.
Model Changes: A 3803 mdl 1 may be converted to a 3803 mdl
3 in the field. Field conversion of a 3803 mdl 2 to a 3803 mdl 3
or a 3803 mdl 3 to a 3803 mdl 2 is not available. On field converting a purchased 3803 mdl 1 to a 3803 mdl 3, features
#9071, #9073, #1792, #1793, #1794, #6148 and #8100 if
installed on the 3803 mdl 1 must be removed at customer's expense.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 3 ..... $8,900
DUAL DENSITY (#3551).
Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Dual Density (#3550) to read and write tapes
at either 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi NRZI nine track. Tape units
equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
limitation: Dual Density (#3551) cannot be installed in the same
control unit with either Single Density (#9570) or Seven Track
(#6408). Field Installation: Yes.
SEVEN TRACK (#6408).
Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Seven Track (#6407) to read and write tapes
at either 556 or 800 bpi in the 7 -track format compatible with
tapes written by 729, 7330, 7335 and 2400 series tape units
equipped with 7-track readlwrite heads. Includes the translator
function, which, when used, causes 8-bit bytes from the I/O interface to be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit BCD
characters read from tape to be translated into their EBCDIC
equivalents. The Data Conversion function, also included, allows
reading and writing of 8-bit bytes on 7 -track tape by converting
four tape characters into three storage bytes and vice versa, Tape
units equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Cannot be installed in the same control unit with either
Single Density (#9570) or Dual Density (#3551). Field
Installation: Yes.
FTPI
ETPI
MACI MlC MlC MlC
Special Feature Prices: MRC 1 yr· 2 yr 2 yr Purchase
Dual Density
Seven Track
#3551 $ 83 $ 76 $ 70 $ 70 $2,630
6408 83
76
70
70 2,630
MMMC
$3.00
3.00
multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard) Selector
Channels, Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see
3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard) block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
'
5/370 mdl 148 -
byte multiplexer channel (standard) block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
'
5/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard), Second
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031, 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031
3032.
'
3033 - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard) block
multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
'
4331 - byte multiplexer channel (special feature), block multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331.
.
4341 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
Mdl
3811
1
FTP/
MACI MLC
MLC
MRC 1 yr· 2 yr
Purchase
$883
$22,460
$812
$742
MMMC
$180
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: 1/0 Unit (Online) (meter on 3211)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45% Warranty: B
UsefUl life Category: 2
Upper limit Percent: 0%
Model/Rlature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
• FTP is 12-23 months.
SPECIAL FEATURES
1.8 M 3 8 1 1 P R I N T E R 'C 0 N T R 0 L U NIT
Purpose: Control unit for the 3211 Printer in a S/360 mdl 22, 30,
40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85, 195 or any S/370 Processor
(except 3115 or 3125, or any 4300 Processor.
Highlights: The 3811 provides the necessary controls for attaching the 3211 Printer to the I/O channels provided by the processing system. It contains all the necessary electronic controls and
buffering to adapt the mechanical printer to the channel. The
control unit (3811) and the mechanical printer (3211) are physically attached to each other.
PRINT POSITIONS. 18 ADDITIONAL (#5553). Controls for Print
Positions, 18 Additional (#5554) on the 3211 Printer. Field
Installation: Yes.
FTP/
MACI MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
1 yr· 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Print Pos, 18 Add'i #5553 $22
$20 $18 $752
$6.50
• FTP is 12-23 months.
The logic, buffers and controls of the Universal Character Set and
Forms Control Buffer are located in the 3811,
PREREQUISITES: The 3811 requires a control unit position on a
system channel.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 65, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer
channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870 '" see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 67 -- basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195, 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) of 2870, the shared subchannels or
non-shared subchannels (non-shared attachment is recommended) of a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel ... see 2860, 2870,
2880.
5/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features), block multiplexer channel (special feature)
... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ---
- ------===
- - --':' =
M 3830.1
Mav 79
DP Machines
IBM 3830 STORAGE CONTROL
Purpose: Control unit for 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344 or 3350 disk
storage.
*
Modell
Model 2
[4] DASD Configuration (3830 mdl 2 only): The available combinations of storage devices which can be attached are shown in
the tables below. One, two or three Xs In a vertical column
Indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD Configuration
which can be attached when the "Required DASD Specify
Features" are installed.
Provides for attachment of up to four 3330 modules in any
combination of mdls 1 and/or 2. Attaches to S/360
mdl 195 or S/370 mdls 165, 168 or 195 via a 2880
Block Multiplexer Channel. Attachment to the S/370
mdls 135 or 145 is made via the system block multiplexer channel or selector channel and to the 1353, 138, 145-3 and 148 via the block multiplexer
channel. Attachment to S/370 mdls 155 or 158 is
made via the system's block multiplexer channel.
Attachment to a 3031, 3032, 3033 or 4341 Proc·
essor is made via a block multiplexer channel.
Based on the DASD, and the Special Features listed below
being ordered for them,order the Required DASD Specify
Feature(s) from the appropriate table.
3830 MODEL 2 WITH OR WITHOUT TWO CHANNEL SWITCH
(#8170)
..
DASD Conligu'llion
Provides for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1
and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl A2s and/or 3350 mdl
A2s/ A2Fs
see DASD Configuration under
"Specify." Additionai storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340
mdl Bs and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2 or by
attaching 3350 mdl Bs and/or a mdl C to the 3350
mdl A2/A2F ... see DASD Configuration under
"Specify" and 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350
"Machines" pages.
>
c:
0
to)
to)
to)
M
>
C
0
...
0
Attaches to S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdls 165,
168 or 195 via a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
Attachment to S/370 mdl 135 (see "Limitations") or
145 is made via the system's block multiplexer
channel or selector channel and to the 135-3, 138,
145-3 and 148 via the block multiplexer channel.
Attachment to S/370 mdl 155 or 158 is made via
the system's block multiplexer channel. Attachment
to a 3031, 3032, 3033 or 4341 Processor is made
via a block multiplexer channel.
Highlights: File organization and format are under program control
... command structure permits flexible and efficient processing of
either randomly or sequentially organized flies. Data Integrity is
provided through extensive error detection and correction capabilities.
Stendard Features .,. include the following:
Command Chaining - allows sequential records within a cylinder
to be read /written by a sequence of channel commands without
rotational delays between records.
Record Over1low - storage efficiency is obtained by allowing
.records to span track boundaries within a cylinder.
PREREQUISITES: [1] The 3830 mdl 1 is designed for interconnected operation with 3330 Disk Storages. Customers who wish to
order a 3830 mdl 1 for stand-alone or Individual use should submit
an RPQ to provide the necessary safety elements (covers, cable
connectors, etc.) to complete the unit for a non-standard (I.e., not
interconnected as part of a 3330 facility) environment. In lieu of
the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to
the standard 3830 mdl 1/3330 configuration or that provided by
the RPQ. If not provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase
only basis. See item [3] under "Specify." Agreement for IBM to
install and maintain the 3830 mdl 1 in any non-standard environment must' be reviewed
[2] An available control unit position on a channel. One unshared
subchannel for each drive attached on a system block multiplexer
channel or a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. For S/370 mdls
135 and 145, a' system block multiplexer channel is required for
support of block multiplexing and rotational position sensing ...
see 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344 and 3350. If this support is not
required, attachment to a system selector channel is permitted.
Limitation.: [1] See 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344 and 3350 for system support limitations ... [2] In S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, when
a 3830 mdl 2 is attached to a block multiplexer channel, only 16
logical devices will operate in this mode even if more than 16
logical devices are attached.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with 3330,
3333 or 3340 voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
M
M
One or two 3333, With
x x
associated 3330,
Up tn lour 3333, with
J'HOcldted 3330s
Strlnq Switch (8150) on
x
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2,
x x
with associated mdl 81 :82
I
Up to iour 3340 mdl A2,
with essocieted mol 81/82
String Switch (8150) on
x
any 3340 mdl A2
I
Fixed Head Feature
M
M
..,.0
M
M
Up to four 3340 mdl A2,
II
I
~xl
i
~I
I!
I! I
1.1.
x x
Ix
X
I
I
~ ~ String Sill/itch (8150) en
M _ any 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
I
.
!
~ .5.1 Fixed Head Feature
14301/4302) on any 3340
8
o
-
i
,
I xxx
II
I
i associated drives
I-
i
i
I
I
xx
*
No IODseravailable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Il
I! ,!
i!
xx
j
I
Notes:
t ISC diskette-only specifY feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies cUskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on the
same diskette.
• Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Yif
the new confl8llration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition oC any new SpecifY
and/or Special Features not previously installed. AND removal of any not
IiBted as required for the new configuration.
•• Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, the 3830 mdl2
requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the number of drives
attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this .Iroup the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous
device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The 3340 mdt
A2s on the lint and third strinJl may attach up to three 3340 mdl BI, B2s,
and/or 33441 in any combination. The 3340 mdt A2 on the second strin&
may attach up to three 3340 mdt B1/821. The 3340 mdt A2 on the fourth
string may attach one 3340 mdt BI or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Expansion (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For conftguratlons in this
grou'p the 3830-2 uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending upon
the DASD conftguration installed and whether any 3350 drive is in 1330-1
compatibility mode.
[3] Non-standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified If the
3830 mdl 1 is not to be installed as part of a 3330 facility.
Also see "Prerequisites" above.
II
x
I
I
I
I
x x
I
xx
!
I
x
I three. or lourl each with
2:: IUD to four 3350 mdl A2s1
A2F, w associated mdl
o !S2s/B2Fs. C2/C2F
;!i G~ringSW (8150) on any
M
.3350 mdl A2!A2F .C2IC2F
_I 3333'.,3340 mdl A2s and
~ 13350 mdl A2s1 A2Fs (any
.,. M combination 01 2. 3 or 41
~ ~ Itiith asscciMed drives
~
~ E String Sw (81501 on any
mdl A2, or
~ffi 3333,3340
M 3350 mdl A2IA2F.C2/C2F
M andlor Fixed Head Fe.
(4301/43021 on any 3340
I
•
I
of which up tP two may
attac" 3344.
String Sill/itch (8150) on
any 3340 mdl A2 andlor
Fixed Head Feature on
any 3340 (4301/4302)
3333s and 3340 mdl A2,
(any combinatir."1 of two,
~ ~
x
x
;4301/43021 on any 3340
..,.
..,.
..
...
Required DASO Sp.cily F .. tures •
+
9315 t 9317 9318
~3p 9314 9314t 9315
t
t 9190 t
9lgOt t
t
I
.
II
,
I
i
I
i
I
XiX
I
/.
,I
------- ------==---=-=
== ==
M.3830.2
May 79
~
DP Machines
3830 StOrage Control (cont'd)
3830 MODEL 2 WITH TWO CHANNEL SWITCH, ADD'L (#8171)
AND ITS PREREQUISITE TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170)
..
Required DASD Specify Feelure.·
++
9311
9315
t
t
9313 9313t
t 9841t
DASD Co,t,figuralion
. "
One or twO 3333s with
[~ssociated 3330s
Up to four 3333s with
associated 3330s
Strin!: Switch 181501 on
any 333
One. or twO 3340 mdl A2s
wIth associated mell 81/82
Up to four 3340 mdl A2s
with associated mdl 81/82
~
0
a...
>'!
0
I
..
~3V
,
"I"
"
LX
I
I
:
~:;Jn~~(;i:;~1 ':~SOlon
" x
" ..
. ..
.. ..
..
Up to four 3340 mdl A2.
of which up to twO may
attach 3344s
Strin:f: Switch 181501 on
any 340 mdl A2 and/or
Fixed Head Feature on .
any .3340 (4301143021
33330 and 3340 mdl A2.
i
i...
~-
:n41 :,;~~~~o;.:c't~
drives
x •
"'2 ~~~n~3~3i~~h3~h5~dr~2
1\:1-
Ie
. .!
,'"
...
-
>'i!
Up to four ;s3SO mdl A201
A2F5 w aSlOCiated mdl
. 0
B20/B2Fs. C2/C2F
String Sw (81501 on any
3350 mdlA2/A2F C2LC2F
33335, 3340 mdl A2. and
3350 mdl A'}s/A2Fs (an~
,
combination of 2, 3 or 4
~... with associated drives
2~!rong :'JI'.!..Hl~' on any
i:i - 3333. 3340 mdl A2 or
a~ ,3350 mdl A2/A2F. C2/C2F
landlor Fixed Head F~
, iA .,n, I:lO.,\ nn An"
ETP!
MAC! MLC,
MRC, 2 yr Purcha.. MMMC
I
Ie Ie
I.
Ie
'"I .
"
II
I
i
!
;
Ie
NOTE: For explanation of ., •• , +, ++ and t, see Notes foUowin& tho
Table "3830 Model 2 with or Without Two Channel Switch (#8170)"
PRICES:
3830
Mdl
MAC/
MRC,
ETP/
MLC
2 yr'
Purcha..
MMMC
t
1
'2,055
N/ A (a) '56.270
'159
126
2
1.740 '1.482 (b)
47.580
Plan Offertng: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Chang..: Model 1 can be field changed to Model 2. An
additional 15 amp AC power outlet is required. The 3830 mdl 2 to
mdl 1 is not recommended for field Installation.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 2 ...........7.140
SPECIAL FEATURES
tttcONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). [Model 2 only] Provides additional control store for microprogram use ... see DASD
Configuration under "Specify" to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
tttEXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151). [Model 2 only] Provides additional control storage for microprogram use ... see DASD
Configuration under "SpeCify" to determine when required.
Maximum: pne. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control
Store Extension (#2150).
,
tttREGISTER EXPANSION (#6111j. [Mollel 2 only] Provides
additional registers for microprogram use ... see DASD configuration under "Specify" to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [Model 2 only] To
attach the Two Channel Switch (#8170) to a configuration control
panel. Flald Installation: Yes.
t
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT. ADD'L (#6149). [Model 2
only] To attach the Two Channel SWitch, Add'l (#8171) to a
configuration control panel. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). To attach the 3830 to a
second channel ... the two channell may be on the same Processor or different Processors. An available control unit position is
required on each channel... see Item [2] under "Prerequisites."
Switching is under program control. The 3830 can be dedicated to
a single channel by means of an Enable/Disable switch. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH. ADD'L (#8171). Adds switching for
two additional channels to a 3830 with Two Channel Switch
(#8170), providing four channel switch capability. Limitation: Only
two channels of the four available can be attached to the same
Processor.
Cannot be installed if Fixed Head Feature
(#4301/4302) Is Installed on any 3340. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum: One. Prerequlslt..: Two Channel Switch (#8170).
Expanded Control Store (#2151) and/or Control Store Extension
(#2150) are also required In certain 3830 mdl 2 configurations ...
see DASD Configuration under "SpeCify."
No IoIIpr available.
ttt When orcleriq thiJ feature
for field iDIIaIIatioll, a Specify Feature mUll olio be
Conftauralioa Charts above to cIetermiJIe which ia
ordeted ••. _ "Notes" UDcIor DASD
""IuUed.
Special Feature Prlc..:
Control Store Extn
#2150· S402S338 (c)'11.000 '10.50
Expd Cntrl Store
12151·
247 207 (a) 8.730
10.50
Register Expansion
6111·
24
20 (f)
840
4.00
Remote Switch Attach
8148
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
NC
NC
Rem Sw Attach. AcId'i
8149
171 144 (d) 4.690
10.50
Two Channel Switch
8170
Two Channel Sw. Add'i 8171
171 144 (d) 4.890
10.50
• Feature supplies ISC diskette.
1 Cus; ,mer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement
letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
feature Involves the removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
(s) ETP not available for mdl 1. FTP /MLC available for mdl 1 12-23 months - $1,891' ... 24 months - $1,7261.
(b) FTP/MLC also ayallable - 12-23 months - $1,601, ... 24
months - $1,462,.
(c) FTP/MLC also available if 3830 on FTP /MLC. 12~23 months
- $3701 ... 24 months - $338,.
(d) ETP available for model 2 only. FTP/MLC available for both
models - FTP/MLC for #8170 or #8171 - 12-23 months $157, ... 24 months - $144,.
(e) FTP /MLC also available - 12-23 mos. - $227, ... 24 mos. $207,.
(f) FTP /MLC also ayallable - 12-23 mos. - $ 221 ... 24 mos. $ 201.
, MAC/MIlC.ETP/MLCandFTP/MLCpriceleffaclive6/ln9.
IBM 3830 STORAGE CONTROL - Model 3
Purpo..: Provides for the attachment of 3333/3330/3350 DASD
In a 3850 Mass Storage System.
Hlghllghta:
Virtual Disk Storege - provides up to 64 unique addresses for
each channel interface.
Channel Intertac.. - up to three Processor channel interfaces
are available, providing up to 192 unique addresses on each
3830 mdl3.
Drlv.. - up to 32 DASD spindles of 3333/3330 Models 1, 2 and
11 and 3350 mdls A2/ A2F, B2/B2F and C2/C2F can be attached. A 3830 mdl 3 with feature #9320 can operate any combination of up to four 3333 mdls 1 and 11 with associated 3330
mdls 1, 2 and 11 snd/or native 3350 mdls A2/A2F with associated native 3350 mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F. A 3830 mdl 3 with
feature #6250 can operate up to four 3350 mdls A2/A2F with
associated 3350 mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F In either native or
3330-11 mode. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional Information.
Staging Drlv.. - up to alxteen 3333 mdl 1/3330 mdl 1 or 2
storage devices can be deSignated as staging drives. 3333/3330
mdl 11 or 3350 In 3330 mdl 11 mode may also be used for
staging drtves, however each 3333/3330 mdl 11 or 3350 In mdl
11 mode drive deSignated as a staging drive Is equivalent to two
mdl 1 or mdl 2 drtves. These staging drtves will be used by the
3850 Mass Storage System to provide virtual storage. See note
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --------
==-==~= DP Machines
3830 Storage Control (cont'd)
on M3333 pages for feature changes required when 3333's are
retained for use with a 3851.
Staging Patha - the 3830 mdl 3 contains control storage for
data buffering and microcode. This accomplishes data staging
without utilizing S/370 or 4341 Processor channels or memory.
Real Drlvea - up to a maximum of 32 attached drives may be
designated as real. Each real drive uses one of the 192 unique
3830 addresses. All 3350 drives attached to a 3830 Mdl 3 with
feature #9320 must be designated as reai In 3350 native mode
only. 3350 drives attached to a 3830 mdl 3 with feature #6250
may be designated as real In 3350 native or 3330 mdl 11 mode.
Virtual Storage - all data stored In the 3850 Mass Storage
System appears to the system as residing on a 3333/3330
storage device with all the data handling capabilities of the 3330
available ..'
PREREQUISITES: The 3830 mdl 3 must have the Two Channel
Switch (#8170) and Control Store Extension (#2150). One channel interface attaches to the 3851 MSF and one channel interface
attaches to the host Processor.
Llmltatlona:
[1] A maximum of four 3830 mdl 3s may be attached to a S/370
or 4341 block multiplexer channel. If 3830 mdl 1s or 2s and/or
Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) are attached to the same
block multiplexer channel, the maximum number of 3830 mdl
3s will be reduced. Consult IBM 3850 Mass Storage (MSS)
Installation Planning and Table Create, GC35-OO28 for total
system limitations.
[2] String Switch (#8150) may be installed on the 3333/3350 In a
3850 MSS for additional availability. Installation Is not recommended In a mixed MSS/Non-MSS environment. See
3333/3350 for additional limitations.
[3] 3340 DASD cannot be Installed on the 3830 Mdl 3.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be c9nsistent with
3333/3330 voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] DASD Designation: #93136 for 3333/3330 DASD, or #9320§
for 3333/3330/3350 DAS[J'.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETPI
MLC.
2 yr
Purchaae
MMMC
$3,3701$2,831I(a) $92,180
$235
3
3830
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
M 3830.3
May 79
trol store for microprogram use. Required if 3350 DASD is attached. Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prarequlalte: Control Store Extension (#2150).
CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152) Provides additional
control store for microprogram use. Required If 3350 DASD is
attached. Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte:
Control Store Extension (#2150), Register Expansion (#6111),
and Expanded Control Store (#2151).
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111) Provides additional registers for
microprogram use. Required If 3350 DASD Is attached. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes. Maximum: One.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). To attach the Two
Channel Switch (#8170) to a configuration panel. Maximum: One.
Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT, ADD'I (#6149). To attach the
Two Channel Switch, Add'l (#8171) to a configuration panel.
Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: yes. Prerequlalte: Remote
Switch Attachment (#6148).
3350 STAGING (#6250). Provides for staging to 3350 drives in
3330 mdl 11 mode and access to Real 3350 In either native or
3330 mdl 11 mode. Limitation: Attachment of 3333 mdls 1/11,
3330 mdls 1, 2 or 11 Is mutually exclusive' with this feature.
Maximum: One Field Inatallatlon: Yes Prerequlalt..: Control
Store Additional (#2152) and Register Expansion (#6111).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). [req'd on mdl 3] Provides
system channel attachment capability for the 3830 mdl 3. One
channel Interface attaches to the 3851 MSF and one channel
Interface attaches to the host Processor. An available control unit
position Is required. See "Prerequisites" and "limitations." Field
Inatallatlon: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH, ADD'L (#8171). Provides attachment
for two additional channels to a 3830 mdl 3, providing three Processor channel switch capability. Limitation: Only two of the three
channel interfaces available can be attached to channels on the
same Processor. Maximum: One, see "Prerequisites" and
"Limitations." Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte: Two Channel
Switch (#8170).
Special Feature Prlcea:
Control Store Extenalon #2150·$402 $338 $11,000 $10.50
Expanded Control Store 2151· 247 207
6,730 10.50
Control Store Additional 2152· 247 207
8,730
10.50
Reglater Expansion
8111 • 24
20
840
4.00
Remote Switch Attach
8148
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Remote Sw Attach, Add'i 8149
3350 Staging
8250· NC
NC
NC
NC
Two Channal Switch
8170 171 144
4,890 10.50
Two Channal Sw, Add'i
8171 171 144
4,890 10.50
(b) FTP /MLC also available If 3830 on FTP/MLC
#2150 - 12-23 months - $3701 ... 24 months #2151 - 12-23 months - $2271 ... 24 months #2152 - 12-23 months - $2271 ... 24 months #6111 - 12-23 months - $ 221 ... 24 months #8170 - 12-23 months - $1571 ... 24 months #8171 - 12-23 months - $157' ... 24 months -
(a) FTP/MLC also available - 12-23 months - $3,1001 ...
24 months - $2,8311.
Model Chang. .: 3830 mdl 2 can be field changed to a mdl 3.
MES order for model change must include correct serial number
and all installed and on order features and RPQs on the 3830 mdl
2 to be changed. It must also Include removal of any of the following which are installed: #9190, #9314, #9315, #9317,
#9318, #9841. Prior to ordering the model change, installed and
on-order RPQs should be resubmitted
Control Store Extension (#2150) and Two Channel Switch
(#8170) must be previously installed or installed concurrently with
the model upgrade. For customers who wish to have an installed
3830 mdl 1 converted directly to a 3830 mdl 3, submit an RPQ.
• Feature supplies ISC diskette.
l
MAC/MRC,ETP/MLC,andFTP/MLCpri....lfeclive6/1/79.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
Installation charges)
Model 2 to Model 3 ....... 144,510.
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model upgrade involves the removal of parts which become the
property ob IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
[Req'd on mdl 3]
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150).
Provides addltlonai control store for microprogram use. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes.
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151). Provides additional con-
§ ISC diJtette.oaly specify feal\lle. No Ceo wIleD onIered a' time of manuliclure or with
cbarpabIo feal\lle thai oupplica diskette. $290 on purclwecI
Dumber of diJtellc-oIIly cbaops onIered OD ....... diskette.
~
ETP/
MAC/MLCI
MRCI 2 yr (b) Purchaae MMMC
10 ilIcIudo auy
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$3381.
$2071.
$2071.
$ 201.
$1441.
$144'.
-------- - --..:..::..:
--- -==--';'"::
M 3838.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3838 ARRAY PROCESSOR
Purpose: An auxiliary processing unit for S/370 mdl 145, 148,
158, 168 and a 3031, 3032, 3033 or 4341 Processor which
attaches on a block multiplexer channel. Processes single precision floating point vector operations found in seismic trace processing and other applications.
Model 1
Contains 256K bytes of bulk storage.
Model 2
Contains 512K bytes of bulk storage.
Model 3
Contains 1 ,024K bytes of bulk storage.
Highlights: Permits systems with a high content of vector processing operations to execute the vector work in parallel with CPU
host processing thereby releasing the CPU for other multi programmed system tasks. User programmable by coding available instructions to define complete processing sequences. Contains five
functional components each capable of overlapped or concurrent
~peration to sustain processing performance.
'Channel Interface -- allows data and control information to transfer in block multiplexer mode at data rates up to 1.5 MB, or
when attached to a S/370 mdl 168 or a 3032 or 3033 Proc. essor, at data rates up to 3.0 MB with the two-byte interface
feature in conjunction with the 2880 equipped with a similiar
feature (#7850 or #7851) or on the 3032 or 3033, when the
channel to which it is attached is equipped with a similar feature
(#7850).
Bulk Storage -- provides independent data storage for up to
seven concurrent 3838 users ... seven is the upper limit on 3838
user partitions but is not restrictive of the number of host regions
executing 3838 destined jobs. The user partitions may be shared
or exclusive .. , receives input data from the host and buffers for
processing ... during processing of algorithm sequences, provides
initial, intermediate, and final result data storage. Final results
are subsequently transmitted to the host under control of a pending CCW on the block multiplexer channel.
Data Transfer Controller -- provides multiplexing of the internal
data busses for concurrent transfers of data between the furf'ctional elements.
Arithmetic Processor -- controls algorithm execution for processing vectors through the 100ns/stage pipelined arithmetic unit ...
algorithms can be utilized in the application program of individual
users to provide comprehensive processing techniques unique to
each user. Algorithm control store may he expanded from the
basic 16,384 bytes for all models with the control store additional
feature (#1551) which provides an additional 16,384 bytes of
control storage.
Control Processor -- manages the total 3838 subsystem functional operation, synchronizing all data transfers and arithmetic
operations, performing logical decisions in algorithm chains, and
sequencing multiple users problems through the array processor.
The Instruction Set includes the following vector processing algorithm and logic operations:
Algorithm/Mnemonic
a) ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS (standard)
Vector Move (VMV)
Vector Move Convert (VMC)
Scalar Move (SMV)
Zero Move (ZMV)
Vector Floating Point to Fixed Point Conversion (VFX)
Convolving Multiply (CVM)
Quadratic Interpolation (INT)
Vector Element-by-Element Sum (VES)
Scalar Element-by-Element Sum (SSUM)
Vector Element-by-Element Multiply (VEM)
Scalar Multiply (SMY)
Sum of Squares (SSQ)
Fast Fourier Transform, (Forward Real) (FTFR)
Fast Fourier Transform (Forward Complex) (FTFC)
Fast Fourier Transform (Inverse Real) (IFTR)
Fast Fourier Transform (Inverse Complex) (lFTC)
,.(
Complex Multiply (CEM)
Scalar Complex Multiply (SCEM)
Complex Multiply (Complex Conjugate) (CMCC)
Complex Multiply (Conjugate Output) (CMCO)
Scalar' Complex Multiply (Conjugate Output) (SCMO)
Signed Square Array (SSA)
Sum of Vector Elements (SVE)
Array Scan for Maximum (MAX)
Vector Inner Product (VIP)
Vector Element Limit (LIM)
Divide (DIV)
Scalar Divide (SDIV)
Square Root (SQRT)
Nth Zero Crossing (NZCP /NZCN)
Wiener-Levinson (WLEV)
ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS (optional)
Polynomial Expansion (POLY) (#9301)
Logarithm (LOG) (#9302)
Exponential (EXP) (#9303)
Tangent (TAN) (#9304)
Arctangent (ATAN/ATN2) (#9305)
Recursive Filter (REC) (#9307)
Vector Reverse (REV) (#9308)
b) LOGIC/INDEX INSTRUCTIONS
Move Index to Index (XMV)
Move Bulk Storage to Index (XMVS)
Move Index to Bulk Storage (XMVX)
Move Immediate to Index (XMVI)
Add Index to Index (XAD)
Add Immediate to Index (XADI)
Subtract Index from Index (XXSB)
Subtract Immediate From Index (XSBI)
Multiply Index times Index (XML)
Multiply Immediate times Index (XMLI)
Divide Index into Index (XDV)
Divide Immediate into Index (SDVI)
Divide Index into Immediate (XDIR)
Compare Index : Index (SC)
Decrement and Compare Index : Index (XDC)
Compare Floating Point Index: Index (XCF)
Compare Floating Point Index: Immediate (XCFI)
Compare Index : Immediate (XCI)
Decrement and Compare Index : Immediate (XDCI)
Branch on Count Loop (XBCT)
Unconditional Branch (XGO)
c) VPSS INSTRUCTIONS
Label Definition (XID)
Move Data to/from S/370 or 4341 Processor and
3838 Bulk Storage (VPUT /VGET)
Move Data to/from S/370 or 4341 Processor and
3838 Index (VPUTX/VGETX)
A brief description of the vector processing algorithm follows:
Vector Element Sum (VES) The YES operation provides a reSUltant vector Y, the elements of which are a sum of the corresponding elements in vector X and vector or scalar U.
Vector Element Multiply (VEM), Scalar Multiply (SMY), or Signed
Square Array (SSA) The VEM operation provides a resultant
vector Y, the elements of which are a product of the corresponding elements in vectors X and U. The SMY operation is a special
case of VEM for which U is a scalar quantity. The SSA operation
uses the VEM algorithm with two specifications of the X array as
the inputs. A sign control option exercised on the first call of the X
array allows the sign of the X array to be retained.
Vector Move Convert (VMC) The VMC operation has four subforms, each of which load the Y vector from the X vector. One
form (VMV) moves veclors in bulk storage, the second form (VMC)
converts the X vector from fixed point integer to floating point, the
third form (SMV) is used to load a single value (Scalar) into all
locations of the Y vector, and the fourth form (ZMV) is a Scalar
load where zero is specified as the Scalar value of X.
Sum of Squares (SSa) or Vector Inner Product (VIP) The SSQ
operation takes a vector X and multiplies it on an element by
element basis with a replica of itself. It then performs an algebraic
sum of these squared elements and returns the single element
result to a single element Y. The VIP operation multiplies on an
element by element basis, a vector U by a vector X. It then pertorms an algebraic sum of the resultant products and generates a
single element result, Y.
Vector Floating Point to Fixed Point Conversion (VFX) The VFX
operation converts a copy of the floating point vector X into a
fixed point format, and stores it in Y.
Sum of Vector Elements (SVE) The SVE operation performs an
algebraic sum of the elements of an X vector and places the sum
in a single element., Y.
Array Scan for Maximum (MAX) The MAX operation scans the
input vector X and returns in the two element Y vector the maximl!m value (after application of sign control) and the count of
which element in X had that value.
Vector Element Limit (LIM) The LIM operation replaces the elements of the input vector X with specified minimum and/or maximum values if the input values exceed specified minimum or maximum limit values.
Convolving Multiply (CVM) Resultant vector Y with elements that
are a discrete model correlation of the elements in vectors X and
U or, by appropriate transposition and translation of the elements
in U or X, convolution may be performed.
Divide (DIV) The DIV operation divides input vector U (or Scalar
(SOl V» by a second input vector X and places the result in output
vector Y.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------- ---- -----------
M 3838.2
May 79
== =":' =
DP Machines
3838 Array Processor (cont'd)
Nth Zero Crossing (NZCP /NZCN) The NZCP /NZCN operation
scans an input vector X and returns in the Y vector (1) the count
of the element X that represents the Nth time the data transitioned
between positive and negative, and (2) the total number of zero
crossings. The scan may be in order of increasing index (NZCP)
or decreasing index (NZCN).
Quadratic Interpolation (lNT) The INT operation performs a table
lookup and interpolation function on a table of given data, and a
set of indicators into this table. The interpolation calculation is
along a parabola drawn two points to the left and one point to the
right of the chosen location, except where the chosen location is
within the first input interval in which case the interpolation is
based on one point to the left and two points to the right of the
chosen point.
Complex Multiply (CEM) The CEM operation provides a resultant
vector Y with complex elements from input vectors X and U each
of which have complex elements. The operation may be specified
to perform Complex Multiply (CEM), Scalar Complex Multiply
(SCEM), Complex Multiply (Complex Conjugate) (CMCC), Complex
Multiply (Conjugate Output) (CMCO) or Scalar Complex Multiply
(Conjugate OutPut) (SCM C).
Square Root (SQRT) The SQRT operation takes the square root
of the magnitude of an input vector or scalar X and places the
result in output vector or scalar Y.
Wiener-Levinson Filter (WLEV) The WLEV operation accepts as
its input a characterization of a signal and the type of noise encountered when reading that signal, and produces as an output
the coefficients for a digital filter to remove the noise. These
coefficients are chosen to minimize the RMS error in the output of
a filter when the input consists of the expected signal, plus noise
of the expected type.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) The FFT operation performs the
forward or inverse Fast Fourier Transform in either of two modes:
one where the time domain data is known to be complex (FFTC
and IFTC) and one where it is real data (FFTR and IFTR).
Polynomial Expansion (POLY) (#9301) The POLY operation
applies up to a 24th order polynomial expansion to the input
vector X using coefficients provided in the U vector.
PREREQUISITE: If Recursive Filter (REC) (#9307) or certain
Algorithm Design and Development Service additions have been
selected in the standard machine, then Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Additional (#1551) is required.
Logarithm (LOG) (#9302) The LOG operation determines the
logarithm to the base e of an input vector X. PREREQUISITES:
POLY (#9301) and Arithmetic Element Storage Additional
(#1551).
Exponential (EXP) (#9303) The EXP operation provides the
antilog to the base e of an input vector X. PREREQUISITES: POLY
(#9301) and Arithmetic Element Control Storage Additional
(#1551).
Tangent (TAN) (#9304) The TAN operation provides the tangent
Y of an input vector X. PREREQUISITES: POLY (#9301) and
Arithmetic Element Control Storage Additional (#1551).
Arctangent (ATAN), Arctangent 2 (ATN2) (#9305) The ATAN
operation provides the arctangent Y of an input vector X. The
range of Y is 0 to " (PI) radians. The alternate version of Arctangent, ATN2, provides the arctangent, Y, of two input vectors, X (X
axis) and U (Y axis). The range of Y is 0 to 2" radians.
PREREQUISITES: POLY (#9301) and Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Additional (# 1551 ).
Recursive Filter (REC) (#9307) The REC algorithm implements a
first order recursion equation where the elements of Yare a function of: previous values of Y, a Y coefficient vector U, an input
vector X, and a scalar coefficient which is the first element of the
U vector. PREREQUISITE: If Polynomial Expansion (POLY)
(#9301) or certain Alogorithm Design and Development Service
additions have been selected in the standard machine, then Arithmetic Element Control Storage Additional (#1551) is required.
Vector Reverse (REV) (#9308) The REV operation reverses the
ordering of real data for an input vector X.
CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS - the instruction set available on the 3838 consists of logic operations which are excuted in
the control processor and vector operations which are executed
by the arithmetic processor. The arithmetic processor contains a
16,384 byte reloadable control store which contains the algorithms
necessary to accomplish the vector operations. These are loaded
when the 3838 is IPL/IMPLed from the host system. Selected
arithmetic algorithms from the optional arithmetic instructions may
be added to the standard arithmetic instructions or, additional
algorithms may be added to the product via the Algorithm Design
and Development Service capability. When the capacity of the
16,384 bytes of control store is exceeded it is necessary to add
feature #1551 (Control Storage Additional) ... see Special Features.
Algorithm Prerequisites: Prerequisite machine or specify features
for optional algorithms are as follows:
1) Vector Reverse (REV) (#9308) and either POLY (#9301) or
REC (#9307) can be added to the standard machine.
2) Polynomial Expansion (POLY) (#9301) is a prerequisite for
LOG (#9302), EXP (#9303), TAN (#9304) and ATAN/ATN2
(#9305).
3) Any or all of the remaining optional logarithms (POLY)
(#9301) or REC (#9307), LOG (#9302), EXP (#9303), TAN
(#9304) and ATAN/ATN2 (#9305) require Arithmetic Element
Control Storage Additional (# 1 551 ).
4) Algorithms provided by the Algorithm Design and Development
Service mayor may not require Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Additional (#1551) depending upon complexity or
optional algorithm selections.
•
PREREQUISITES: (1) A control unit position on a system block
multiplexer channel... (2) For S/370 mdl 168 configuration, if
Two Byte Interface (#7850) is specified the 2880 must also have
the appropriate Two Byte Interface (#7850 or #7851) ... (3) For
S/370 mdl 145, Word Buffer Feature (#8810) is required on the
3145 to achieve maximum rated block multiplexer transfer rate ...
(4) For a 3032 or 3033 Processor configuration if Two Byte Interface (#7850) is specified, the 3032 or 3033 channel to which the
3838 is to be attached must also have the appropriate Two Byte
Interface (#7850).
limitations: Multiple 3838s and/or other devices on the same
channel may degrade performance. The 3838 is supported on
S/370 mdls 145, 148, 158, 168 and a 4341 Processor with
OS/VS1 and mdls 158 and 168 with OS/VS2 MVS. Multiple 3838
Array Processors attached to a single S/370 or 4341 host, should
each have identical algorithm sets because VPSS allocates ports
based only on bulk store partition size and shared versus exclusive usage.
Minimum System Requirements:
1. S/370 mdl 145, 148, 158, 168 or 3031, 3032, 3033, or 4341
Processor with block multiplexer channel.
2. Nine track, 1600 BPI P.E. magnetic tape (factory order note
specifying type and density, if other).
3. OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.7 and Selectable Units for Scheduler
(SU4), Supervisor 1 (SU5), Supervisor 2 (SU7), Scheduler/lOS
Support (SU16), EREP (SU27), 3838 Vector Processing Subsystem Support (SU29) plus Vector Processing Subsystem
(VPSS) Independent Release (IR) and Job Entry Subsystem 2
(SU3) or Job Entry Subsystem 3 (SU12) and Job Entry Subsystem 3 MSS Support (SU18) or OS/VS1 Release 6 with Selectable Unit for Subsystem Attachment Support (SU6), and EREP
(SU1).
FE maintenance and service capability is affected if any of the.
above are NOT part of the system configuration.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V... must be consistent with system
voltage. FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. FIELD INSTALLATION:
Yes.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
[4] Configuration: #9092 for additional 3838s in configuration
(excludes first unit).
[5] Specify: #9301
#9302
#9303
#9304
#9305
#9307
#9308
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
PRICES: Mdl
3838
1
2
3
Polynomial Expansion
Logarithm
Exponential
Tangent
Arctangent, Arctangent 2
Recursive Filter
Vector Reverse
MAC/
MRC
$17,875
21,725
29,425
TLP/
MLC
4 yr
$16,250
19,750
26,750
Purchase
MMMC
$ 780,000 $1,725
864,000 2,080
1,032,000 2,790
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: A
Maintenance: 0
Purchase Option: 60%* Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
----------=- =---- --=--':' =
M 3838.3
May 79
DP Machines
3838 Array Processor (cont'd)
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
to
Model 1
Model 2
Model 2
Model 3
$84,000
$252,000
168,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
ARITHMETIC ELEMENT CONTROL STORAGE ADDITIONAL
(#1551). An additional 16,384 bytes of control store for additional algorithm capabilities. Custom algorithms are requested by
Algorithm Design and Development Service. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
TWO BYTE INTERFACE (#7850).
Provides two byte parallel
transfer on the 2880 block multiplexer channel to achieve data
transfer rates up to 3.0 MB. Maximum:. One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Requires Two Byte Interface (#7850 or
#7851) on the 2880, 3032 or 3033.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
TLPI
MLC
4 yr Purchase MMMC
Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Add'i
#1551 $2,420 $2,200 $105,600 $86
Two Byte Interface
7850
220
200
9,600
8
• Purchase option is SO% under Term Lease Plan (TLP).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ---- -==--.:.- =-=
';" ==
M 3842.1
May 79
DP Machines
3842 LOOP CONTROL UNIT
Data Access Arrangement COT (WE 1OOOA) or FCC certified
equivalent.
Purpose: Used to provide terminal loop capability at locations
connected via telecommunications lines to a 3631 or 3632 Plant
Communication Controller, or an 8100 System via the data link.
Related Equipment: The 3842 communicates with an appropriately configured 3872 Modem attached to a 3631 or 3632 with
EIA/CCITT Interface Data Link (#3703) and Terminal Communication Adapter (#3211), or to an 8100 System via the Data
Link with EIA Interface Adapter (#3701) and Communications
Adapter without Clock - SDLC (#/602).
The 3842 controls the operation of a single lobe loop and provides an interface to a common carrier provided voice grade
private line (non-switched) channel that is terminated at a 3631,
3632 or 8100 System via an IBM 3872 Modem. Loop and common carrier channel data speed is 2400 bps. The 3842 attaches a
loop via a standard loop connector cable furnished with the unit.
This cable plugs into a wrap type Loop Station Connector not
provided with ~he 3842.
Highlights:
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 pages and in the
3842 Section of the IBM 3630 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA24-3675, and the IBM System 3630 Plant Communication System Loop Installation-Physical Planning Manual, or
the 8100 System Installation Manual - Physical Planning Manual. The customer is responsible for:
1.
Private Line (non-switched) Channel - arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to provide a Type
3002 voicegrade ~ta channel (or equivalent) as described under "Communications Channel Specification"
in the IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Description and the 2700 pages.
2.
Can operate in point-to-point or multipoint mode. Operates in a
controlled carrier mode on half duplex or duplex point-to-point,
or on 4-wire multipoint facilities.
Switched Telecommunication Network -- arranging for
the telecommunication service supplier to install the
appropriate communication service equipped with the
required data access arrangement as described in
"Attachment to Facilities."
3.
Switched Network Backup - Manual Answer is offered as an
optional feature ... see "Special Features."'
Using the problem determination procedures and filling
out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
4.
Can execute "On Line" diagnostic commands to perform self
tests and to assist in. locating loop wiring, terminal, or communication line failures at the remote site.
Providing voice communications between the 3842 and
the processor/controller location to coordinate tests or
re-equalization. The voice facility must be located such
that an operator can use it while operating the controls
on the front of the 3842 Alternate Voice Feature. See
"Special Features."
5.
Can be "Line Tested"
with the 3872 Modem at the
controller / processor and telecommunication channel independently of the controller/processor.
Purchase, installation, testing, and maintenance of the
loop Cabling System. Purchase Loop Continuity and
Relay Tester, or equivalent, to test the loop wiring.
6.
When installed on a 3630 Plant Communication System,
~he 3842 must be installed near a 3643. When installed on an 8100 System, the 3842 must be installed
near a 3276 Control Unit Display Station, a 3278 Display Station, or an 8775 Display Terminal. These devices are required for remote loop installation, problem
recovery procedures, and maintenance.
A 3842 Loop may be up to 3.2 cable kilometers (2 cable miles)
in length
All terminals that can attach to a 3631 or 3632 Controller Attached Loop or 8100 System Direct Attached Loop may also
attach to a 3842 Data Link Attached Loop.
Controlb polling and, with one poll command addressed to it,
can provide responses from· all loop attached terminals.
Data Rates: 2400 bps with back-up half speed of 1200 bps on
both the loop and communication facility.
Problem Determination Aids:
A Speed Select switch is provided as standard equipment. This
allows the 3842 to operate the loop and communications line at
half speed.
Offline tests are provided to perform self tests of the 3842 with
or without involving loop ~iring and/or loop terminals.
Physical Environments: The 3842 loop Control Unit has been
designed for operation in physical environments characteristic of
office area. See IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Description Manual, GA24-3652, or Introduction to the 8100 System
Manual.
Communication Facilities:
Nonswitched Lines: Communication common carrier provided
voice band Private line (noll-switched) channel, Type 3002 (or
equivalent) as described in the Bell System Technical Reference
PUB 41004, dated October, 1973. Duplex (4-wire) required for
multi-point and also recommended for point-to-point.
Privately Owned Communication Facilities: Equivalent to the
above.
Public Switched Telecommunication Networks:
see
"Special Features." The customer must be advised that satisfactory data transmission depends upon the characteristics of
the particular switched network connection being used. See M
2700 pages for further details.
International Facilities: Transmission of data between the United
States and Canada on non-switched facilities is sup;:lorted ... for
non-switched operation, the channel in Canada must be a
Schedule 4, Type 4.
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (nonswitched) channel is by a cable, supplied with the 3842 which
is terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B, or equivalent).
The plug mates with a receptacle (WE 4048 or 549A surface
mount or 493A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected
to the channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communication equipment and is, upon customer request ordinarily
furnished by the telecommunication service supplier). Note: A
pigtail cable (Part No. 1853134) will be provided with each
3842 to allow a 3842 to be connected when a WE 404B or
549A receptacle is not available from the local telecommunication service supplier.
If the 3842 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up
(#7951), another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable
is also terminated with a four prong plug and requires the
aforementioned type of receptacle which is connected to the
Prerequisites: An appropriately configured 3872 Modem installed at the controller/processor end of the telecommunication
service. Note: Because the 3842 operates on a basic 3002
channel, the 3872 may require an RPQ. See "Communication
Facilities" section of 3872 writeup in "Machines" for further
information.
One of the following special features must be installed on the
3842: Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Point-to-Point (#6101)
... see "Special Features."
A wrap type Loop Station Conector for connecting the 3842 to
the Loop.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 HZ): Locking
plug -- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for
230 V. Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V,
or #9887 for 230 V. Note: 115 V is usable on 120V systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
[2] Loop Station Connector Cable; A 2.1 meter (7 foot) cable
will be furnished as standard. If a 4.2 meter (14 foot) cable
is desired, specify #9410.
[3] Telecommunication Cable (modem to telecommunication
facility): Specify one of the following for each telecommunication channel or network connection -- #9750 ... to connect
a 3832 equipped with Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Pointto-Point (#6101) feature. to private line (nonswitched) channel ... #9754 to connect a 3872 equipped with Switched
Network Backup (#7951) to a switched telecommunication
network.
A 3.0 meter (10 foot) cable will be supplied. If a longer cable is
required, indicate 4.5, 6.0 or 7.5 meters (15, 20 or 25 feet)
as the quantity of the cable specified (#9750, 9754). Note:
MES orders to add the Switched Network Backup Feature
(#7951) must include the telecommunication cord specify
number (#9754) for the Switched Network Backup cord.
[4] 3630 Test Loop: Specify #9445 on the first 3842 to be
used with a 3631 or 3632 and located in a different· servicing branch office from the 3631 or 3632.
Not to be reproduced without .written permission.
-------- --- ------===
-- ----':' =
M 3842.2
May 79
DP Machines
3842 Loop Control Unit (cont'd)
MLC
PRICES:
Mdl
5 Yr
3842
Purchase· MMMC
$5,725
$215
$42.50
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Maintenance: D
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ALTERNATE VOICE (#1051). Provides signalling capability and a
socket on the operator panel into which a customer provided
handset may be plugged permitting voice. communication with the
distant 3872 Modem. Data cannot be simultaneously transmitted
with voice. A handset is not provided. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be used when the 3842 or the 3872 Modem at
the controller/processor end is in switched back-up operation.
Field Installation: Yes.
MULTIPOINT TRIBUTARY (#5101). Used on each 3842 attached
as a tributary station in a centralized multipoint network. Note:
The 3872 Modem at the controller/processor end and must always serve as the control station. This feature provides an operator adjustment on the front panel of the 3842 to compensate for
line distortion. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with Point-to-Point (#6101). See "Prerequisites" above. Field
Installation: Yes.
POINT-TO-POINT (#6101). Used on the 3842 and on a 3872
Modem at the controller/processor end of a point-to-point private
line (non-switched) channel. This feature provides an operator
adjustment on the 3842 front panel to compensate for line distortion. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Multipoint Tributary (#5101). See "Prerequisites" above. Field
Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP MANUAL ANSWER (#7951).
Provides the capability of attaching the 3842 to the public
switched network as back-up to the private line (non-switched)
channel. In back-up mode it can communicate point-to-point with
a 3872 Modem at the controller/processor that is equipped with
Switched Network Back-up (#7951). A fixed compromise equalizer . is provided for the back-up operaiion. A front panel switch
permits operator selection of either the prime or the back-up
facility. Both facilities cannot be used simultaneously.
Attachment to the switched network is made via the common
carrier Data Access Arrangement Type CDT (or FCC certified
equivalent). Calls must be established and answered manually.
Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the 3872 Modem is required. Loop attached terminals will not be required to
make any modification. Conditioning of the telecommunication
service local loop for transmission of data greater than 300 bps is
required. Maximum: One. Limitations: Customer must be cautioned not to use this feature as a prime mode of operation but in
back-up mode only. Specify: Telecommunication Cord -- #9754.
Field Installation: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Alternate Voice
Multipoint Tributary
Point-to-Point
Switched Network
Back-up, Manual
•
#1051
5101
6101
7951
Purchase MMMC
$ 15 $455
17
424
212
9
24
500
$2
4
2
7
Pilot Test Plan applies.
Nnt tn hp rpnrnnucpd without written oermission.
--------- ------==- --=--':' =
M 3845
May 79
OP Machines
3845 DATA ENCRYPTION DEVICE
Purpose: A table top or shelf mounted encryption/decryption
device for data transmitted over a communication line. The 3845
is positioned between a data terminal equipment (OTE) and a data
communications equipment (OCE), one at each end of a half duplex or duplex communication line. The 3845 will operate with
Start-Stop, Bisynchronous, or Synchronous Data Link Control
(SOLC) protocol at speeds ranginQ from 110 bps to 19,200 bps.
See "Limitations" under "Communications:'
Attachable devices: The 3845 is transparent to the OCE and the
OTE. Control signals used by the 3845 are redriven in compliance
with the EIA-CCITT specification. All other signals are cable fed
through the 3845. The 3845 will attach wherever EIA-RS232C/CCITT-V.24 interface requirements are met.
Models 1-3 -- for use with Start-Stop or SOLC line protocol (S/S
or SOLC).
.
Model 1
A single half duplex unit operating on a 2 or 4 wire
half duplex communication line.
Model 2
A dual half duplex unit, with each half duplex device
completely independent of the other, operating over
2 or 4 wire half duplex communication lines.
Model 3
A full duplex unit operating over a full duplex communication line.
Models 11-13 -- for use with Bisynchronous, Bisynchronous with
Business Machine Clocking (BMC), or Synchronous Data Link
Control (BSC/SOLC or BSC with BMC/SOLC).
Model 11 A single half duplex unit, operating on a 2 or 4 wire
half duplex communication line in BSC/SOLC or
BSC with BMC/SOLC ... see Specify Features.
Model 12 A dual half duplex unit, with each half duplex device
completely independent of the other, operating over
2 or 4 wire half duplex lines in BSC/SOLC or BSC
with BMC/SOLC ... see Specify Features. Limitation:
A model 1 2 must have both outputs either
BSC/SOLC or both BSC with BMC/SOLC.
Model 13 A full duplex unit operating over a full duplex communication line in BSC/SOLC or BSC with
BMC/SOLC ... see Specify Features.
Highlights: A communication security device that provides
encryption/decryption of digital data transmitted over a communication line. The 3845 implementation of the Data Encryption
Standard (DES) conforms to the National Bureau of Standards DES
algorithm published as FIPS #46, January 15, 1977.
Two or more data encryption devices (3845 or 3846) are needed,
one at each termination of a communication line (point-to-point or
multi-point). Limitation: A 3845 or 3846 is required at each node
in order to have message header information in the clear through
that node.
The 3845 is cabled to the OTE via the cable that is provided by
the OTE manufacturer for attachment to the OCE. Attachment from
the 3845 to the OCE is by a cable provided with the 3845. One
cable is provided per line function. Limitation: The cable provided
with the 3845 is 1.5 metres long (5 ft.). This adds load capacitance to the OTE/OCE. See the General Information Manual,
GA27-2865, for specific information on the additional capacitance.
An accessory, the Personalization/Key Entry Unit (P/KEU), must
be available at each site location having a 3845. This accessory is
used to enter the key variable, the seed, and to personalize the
3845 to the customer's communication line. The key variable is a
56 bit plus parity code, entered by the customer at a frequency
consistent with his security requirements. The customer defines
his own keys, selects them in a random manner, and enters them
manually. The seed is 1 to 16 hexadecimal random characters
used to initiate the synchronization message. The personalization
consists of 4 hexadecimal characters of information that personalizes the 3845 to the communication facilities, such as line disci!lline, line speed, method of clocking, and synchronization message length.
The 3845 has a by-pass switch that allows messages to be sent in
the clear and is also used by the customer in fault isolation. A
battery is provided that maintains power to the storage registers
containing the key variabie, seed, and personalization data when
the 3845 AC power is removed.
Security is provided by use of interlocks that remove power, including battery power, from the storage registers whenever the
service cover is removed. The seed, key variable and personalization must be re-entered when all (battery and AC) power is removed.
Communications: The 3845 models 1, 2 and 3 encrypt/decrypt
data if (a) the OTE/OCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or
CCITI-V.24, (b) uses SIS or SOLC protocol, (c) operates on a half
duplex or duplex facility, (d) is within the speed of 110-9600 bps
for asynchronous operation or the speed of up to 19,200 bps for
synchronous operation, and (e) uses a 7 or 8 bit code (exclusive
of the required start and stop bits) for asynchronous operation or
uses an 8 bit SOLC flag for SOLC operation.
The 3845 models 11, 12 and 13 encrppt/decrypt data if (a) the
OTE/OCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24, (b)
uses BSC or SOLC protocol, (c) operates on a half duplex or
duplex facility, (d) is within the speed of up to 19,200 bps, and (e)
uses an EBCDIC or ASCII code for BSC or uses an 8 bit SOLC
flag for SOLC operation.
Limitations: (1) SOLC will not operate with Non-Return to Zero
Inverted (NRZI) transmission mode. NRZI describes the way information bits are presented at the E.I.A. interface. NRZI is required in some SOLC networks when using IBM 3872 modems to
ensure modem synchronization. (2) Operation at 19,200 bps may
require the user to optimize cable length and ~uality. For additional information, refer to the General Information Manual, GA272865.
Data Communications Equipment: Data Communications Equipment operating in non-NRZI is needed with the 3845 when operating in SOLC protocol. IBM external modems may be attached to
the 3845, i.e.:
Speed (bps)
Modem
3872
3874
3875
1200/2400 (BSC only)
4800
7200
Problem Determination Procedures: A by-pass switch is provided
that allows transmission in the clear to permit determining whether
a problem exists in the 3845 or In other equipment. See
"Customer Responsibility" below.
Problem determination is a customer responsibility that does not
involve the customer engineer.
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3845 is designated as a customer
set-up device thereby offering the customer relocation flexibility.
CSU is a customer responsibility that does not involve the customer engineer.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible to:
-
Provide an adequate site and other preparation.
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking and set
up of the 3845.
- Connect cables to the OTE and OCE.
- Personalize to the communication facility.
- Enter the seed.
- Enter the key variable.
- Use and follow the problem determination procedures and to
follow instructions for service of the 3845.
Note: Appropriate procedures are provided by IBM for personalization and entering the seed and key variable.
Maintenance:
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3845 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase spares for such use. The
number of spare devices recommended is dependent upon the
number of devices the customer has installed, his application
requirements, physical locations, and layouts.
IBM Repair Center Service: Maintenance of the 3845 will normally be at a designated IBM Repair Center. All maintenance,
parts replacement, adjustments, and repair shall normally be
performed at the designated IBM Repair Center. It shall be the
customer's responsibility to set up the equipment and to determine when remedial maintenance is required. When remedial
maintenance is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility
to determine the failing device, pack the device in the designated
shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM
Repair Center.
IBM will pre-pay the transportation charges for return of the
repaired device. There is no regularly scheduled preventive
maintenance recommended by IBM on these devices.
The repair service is available under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement
to the IBM Maintenance Agreement or on a Time and Material basis.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Maintenance Agreement have the option to ship the machines to the designated IBM
Repair Center for repair under the IBM Repair Center Machine
Repair Authorization Form GX27-2981, in which case repair will
be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternately, upon request,
the IBM Repair Center will provide, for a minimum charge, an
estimate of repair charges. This charge covers handling, inspection, adjustments, testing, return shipping charges and estimating
of repair charges.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -
--- ---:l: ~ :S~S:
M 3845 - 3846
May 79
DP Machines
3845 Data Encryption Device (cont'd)
The 3645 is, eligible for maintenance agreement service immediately following expiration of the service and parts warranty at- the
monthly charge shown under MMMC -In "PRICES" below.
If maintenance agreement service is nol contracted for immediately following expiration of the service and parts warranty and
the customer wants agreement service, the customer may ship
the machine(s) to the designated IBM Repair Center for an inspection. If, on the basis cif an inspection, the repair center
concludes that a machine is not repairable, no further work will
be performed and the machine will be returned to the customer
with a minimum charge to cover handling, inspection, testing, and
a return shipping charge.
In all other cases, the IBM Repair Center will charge a minimum
fee per machine to cover handling, inspection, adjustments,
testing, and return shipping. In addition all parts needed will be
billed at IBM's prevailing parts prices and the additional time
required for repairs will be billed at IBM's applicable service
rates, if so authorized by the customer. The machine will then be
eligible for maintenance agreement service.
PREREQUISITES: (1) A SIS, BSC or SDLC communication line ...
(2) Compliance with EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24 ... (3) External
modems, IBM or non-IBM ... (4) Personalization/Key Entry Unit
(Accessory) available at site location. See M10000 pages.
Bibliography:
[2J Line Cord Length: If the standard 2.8 m (9 ft.) power cable is
not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8 m (6 ft.) line cord, #9512
for 3.7 m (12 ft.) line cord, #9513 for 4.5 m (15 ft.) line cord.
PRICES:
3845
models 11, 1'2 and 13: Specify one ... installation
time of manufacture only.
BSC/SDLC, or
BSC with BMC/SDLC
Mdl
Purchase MMMC
1
2
3
11
12
13
$2,125
3,465
3,180
2,195
3,600
3,315
Warranty: B
Purpose: A rack, mounted encryption/decryption device for data
transmitted over a communication line. The 3846 is positioned
between a data communications equipment (DCE) and a data
terminal equipment (DTE), one at each end of a half duplex or
duplex communication line. The 3846 will operate with a
Start/Stop, Bisynchronous, or Synchronous Data link Control
(SDLC) protocol at speeds from 110 bps to 19,200 bps. See
"Limitations" under "Communications."
Attachable Devices: The 3846 is transparent to the DCEand
DTE. Control signals used by the 3846 are redriven in compliance
with the EIA-RS-232C/CCITT-V.24 specification. All other signals
are cable fed through the 3846. The 3846 will attach wherever
EIA-RS-232C/CCITT-V.24 interface requirements are met.
Model 1 A power unit capable of providing power to 1 to 4
line function units.
Models 2 and 3 for use with Start-Stop or Synchronous Data Link
Control (SDLC) line protocol meeting EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24
interface. Requires a 3846 mdl 1 for power.
Model 2
A dual half duplex line function unit, with each half
duplex device completely independent of the other,
operating over 2 or 4 wire half duplex communication lines.
Model 3
A full duplex line function unit operating over a full
duplex communication line.
GA27-2865 General Information Manual
XXXX-XXXX Principles of Operation •
Specify: [1 J Line Voltage Plug (115/120 V Power and Line Cord,
1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug ... #9891 for nonlock plug.
[3] For 3845
available at
#9110 #9115 -
3846 DATA ENCRYPTION DEVICE
$6.50
8,50
8.50
6.50
8.50
8.50
Useful Life: 2
Model Changes: At time of manufacture only.
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. Order the Part No. indicated below at the price listed
in the M10000 pages. See M10000 pages for additional information.
Personalization/Key Entry Unit (Part No. 4407908) to enter key
variable, seed, and personalization data. One must be available at
each site.
A Battery (Part No. 1743456), is needed to replace the installed
battery. The replacement schedule is defined in the Principles of
Operation manual. Discharged batteries should be returned to IBM.
Models 1 2 and 13 for use with Bisynchronous:,. Bisynchronous with
Business Machine Clocking (BSC, BSC with tsMC), or SDLC with
EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24. Requires a 3846 mdl 1 for power.
Model 12 A dual half duplex line function unit with each half
duplex device completely independent of the other,
operating over 2 or 4 wire half duplex communication lines in BSC, BMC, SDLC line protocol ... see
Specify Features. Limitation: A model 12 must have
both outputs either BSC/SDLC or both BSC with
BMC/SDLC.
Model 13 A full duplex line function unit operating over a full
duplex facility in BSC, BMC, SDLC line protocol ...
see Specify Features.
Highlights: A communication security device that provides
encryption/decryption of digital data, transmitted over a communication line. The 3846 implementation of Data Encryption Standard
(DES) conforms to the National Bureau of Standards DES algorithm published as FIPS 46, January 15, 1977.
Two or more data encryption devices (3845 or 3846) are needed,
one at each termination of a communication line (point-to-point or
multipoint). Limitation: A 3845 or 3846 is required at each node
in order to have message header information in the clear through
that node.
The 3846 is cabled to the DTE via the cable that is provided by
the DTE manufacturer for attachment to the DCE. Attachment from
the 3846 to the DCE is by a cable provided with the 3846. One
cable is provided per line function. Limitation: The cable provided
with the 3846 is 1.5 metres (5 ft.) long. This adds load capacitance to the DTE/DCE. See the General Information Manual,
GA27-2865 for specific information on the additional capacitance.
An accessory, the Personalization/Key Entry Unit (P/KEU), must
be available at each site location having a 3846. This accessory is
used to enter the key variable, the seed, and to personalize the
3846 to the customer's communication line. The key variable is a
56 bit plus p'arity code, entered by the customer at a frequency
consistent With their security requirements. The customer defines
the keys, selects them in a random manner, and enters them
manually. The seed is 1 to 16 hexadecimal random characters,
used to initiate the synchronization message. The personalization
consists of 4 hexadecimal characters of information that personalizes the 3846 to the specific communication line characteristics
such as line discipline, line speed, method of clocking; and synchronization message length.
The 3846 depends on the customer providing a method of switching to enable the user to send messages in the clear and for fault
isolation. A battery is provided that maintains power to the storage
registers containing the key variable, seed, and personalization
data when the 3846 AC power is turned off.
Security is provided by the use of interlocks that remove power,
including battery power, from the storage registers whenever a line
function unit is removed from the rack. The seed, key variable and
personalization must be re-entered when all power (battery and
AC) is removed.
Communications: The 3846 models 2 and 3 encrypt/decrypt data
* SRL No. to be announced in future PRL.
Not to be reproduced without. written permission.
M 3846
May 79
DP Machines
3846 Data Encryption Device (cont'd)
if (a) the DTE/DCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or CCITTV.24, (b) uses a SIS or SDLC protocol ... (c) operates on a half
duplex or duplex facility, (d) is within the lIpeed of 110-19,200
bps, and (e) uses 7 or 8 bit transmission code exclusive of the
required start and stop bits for asynchronous· operation or uses an
8 bit SDLC flag for SDLC operation.
The 3846 models 12 and 13 encrypt/decrypt data if (a) the
DTE/DCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24, (b)
uses a BSC or SDLC protocol, (c) operates on a half duplex or
duplex facility, (d) is within the speed of up to 19,200 bps, and (e)
uses an EBCDIC or ASCII code for BSC or uses an 8 bit SDLC
flag for SDLC operation.
Limitations: (1) SDLC will not operate with Non-Return to Zero
Inverted (NRZI) transmission mode. NRZI describes the way information bits are presented at the E.LA. interface. NRZI is required in some SDLC networks when using IBM 3872 modems to
ensure modem synchronization. (2) Operation at 19,200 bps may
require the user to optimize cable length and quality. For additional information, refer to the General Information Manual GA272865.
Data Communications Equipment: Data Communications Equipment operating in non-NRZI is needed with the 3846 when operating in SDLC protocol. IBM external modems may be attached to
the 3846.
Speed (bps)
Modem
3872
3874
3875
1200/2400 (BSC only)
4800
7200
Problem Determination Procedures: A customer installed switch
panel must be used to permit determining whether a problem
exists in the 3846 or in the other equipment. See "Customer
Responsibility" below.
Problem determination is a customer responsibility that does not
involve the customer engineer.
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3846 is designated as a customer
set-up device, thereby offering the customer relocation flexibility.
CSU is a customer responsibility that does not involve the customer engineer.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible to:
-
Provide an adequate site and other preparation.
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking and set
up of the 3846.
- Make the interconnection between the 3846 mdl 1 and the
3846 line function devices
- Personalize to the communication facility.
- Enter the seed.
- Enter the key variable.
- Use and follow the problem determination procedures and to
follow instructions for service of the 3846.
Note: Appropriate procedures are provided by IBM for personalization and entering the seed and key variable.
Maintenance:
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3846 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient spare devices
for such use. The number of spare devices recommended is
dependent upon the number of devices the customer has installed, his application requirements, physical locations, and
layouts.
IBM Repair Center Service: Maintenance of the 3846 will normally be at a designated IBM Repair Center. All maintenance,
parts replacement, adjustments, and repair shall normally be
performed at the deSignated IBM Repair Center. It shall be the
customer's responsibility to set up the equipment and to detemine when remedial maintenance is required. When remedial
maintenance is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility
to determine the failing device, pack the device in the deSignated
shipping container and ship it prepaid to the desi9nated IBM
Repair Center. IBM will pre-pay the transportation charges for
return of the repaired device. There is no regularly scheduled
preventative maintenance recommended by IBM for these units.
This charge covers handling, inspection, adjustment, testing,
estimating of repair charges and return shipping charges.
The 3846 is eligible for maintenance agreement service immediately following expiration of the service and parts warranty at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "PRICES" below.
If maintenance agreement service is not contracted for immediately following expiration of service and parts warranty and the
customer now wants maintenance agreement service, the customer may ship the machine(s) to the designated IBM Repair Center
for an inspection. If on the basis of an inspection, the repair
center concludes that a machine is not repairable, no further
work will be performed and the machine will be returned to the
customer with a minimum charge to cover handling, inspection,
testing and return shipping charges.
In all other cases, the IBM Repair Center will charge a minimum
fee per machine to cover handling, inspectio'n, adjustments,
testing and a return shipping charge. In addition all parts needed
will be billed at IBM's prevailing parts prices and the additional
time required for repairs will be billed at IBM's applicable service
rates if so authorized by the customer. The machine will then be
eligible for maintenance coverage.
PREREQUISITES: (1) A SIS, BSC or SDLC communication line ...
(2) Compliance with EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24 ... (3) External
modems, IBM or non-IBM ... (4) Accessory Personalization/Key
Entry Unit available at site location ... (5) Accessory mounting
panel .. (6) Accessory blank panel may be ordered if desired. See
Ml0000 pages.
GA27-2865 General Information Manual
XXXX-XXXX Principles of Operation •
Bibliography:
Specify: [1] Line Voltage Plug (115/120 V Power and Line Cord,
l-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug, #9891 for non-lock
plug.
[2] Line Cord Length -- if the standard 2.8M (9 ft.) power cable is
not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8M (6 ft.) line cord, #9512
for 3.7M (12 ft.) line cord, #9513 for 4.5M (15 ft.) line cord.
[3] For models 12 and 13: Specify one ... installation available at
time of manufacture only.
#9110 - BSC/SDLC, or
#9115 - BSC with BMC/SDLC
PRICES:
Mdl
3846
1
2
3
12
13
Warranty: B
Purchase
MMMC
$
2,680
$1.00
4.50
2,445
2,815
2,580
4.50
4.50
4.50
910
Useful Life: 2
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. Order the Part No. indicated below at the price listed
in the Ml0000 pages. See M10000 pages for additional information.
Personalization/Key Entry Unit, Part No. 4407908, to enter key
variable, seed, and personalization data. One must be available at
each site.
Mounting Plate, Part No. 6813128, to attach 4 type 3846 units to
a rack. One required for each 4 units.
Blank Panel, Part No. 4409058, to close any unused opening in a
mounting panel. One may be ordered for each unused opening.
A Battery, Part No. 1743456, is needed to replace the installed
battery. The replacement schedule is defined in the Principles of
Operation Manual. Discharged batteries should be returned to
IBM.
The repair service is available under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement
to the IBM Maintenance Agreement or on a Time and Material basis.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement to the IBM Maintenance Agreement, have
the option to ship the machines to the designated IBM Repair
Center for repair under the IBM Repair Authorization Form GX272981, in which case repair will be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternatively, upon request, the IBM Repair Center will
provide, for a minimum charge, an estimate of repair charges.
• SRL No. to be announced in future PRL.
Not to be reoroduced without written Dermission.
------- ----=-- ==
- - ----':' =
M 3851
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3851
MASS STORAGE FACILITY
Purpose: Large capacity storage and control facility for the 3850
Mass Storage System (MSS) for attaching to S/370 mdls 145,
145-3, 148, 155 II, 158, 165 II and 168, or a 3031, 3032 , 3033,
or 4341 Processor.
Highlights: Included ar.e the storage facility for data cartridges,
Data Recording Devices (ORO) and their associated Data Recording Controls (DRC) for the transfer of data between the data cartridges and the 3350/3333/3330 Disk Storage devices, a Cartridge Access Station for the manual entry and removal of data
cartridges, two accessors and their associated controls for the
movement of data cartridges within the 3851, and a Mass Storage
Control (MSC) for control of the 3850 MSS.
Models:
A-Series
B-Series
One Mass Storage Control
Two Mass Storage Controls ... one MSC is
the active control ... the second is an alternate control.
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3851
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
$12,937 $11,010
19,047 16,210
25,157 21,410
31,267 26,810
16,979 14,450
23,089 19,650
29,199 24,850
35,309 30,050
Model
Model
Model
Model
A1/B1
A2/B2
A3/B3
M/B4
706
2044
3382
4720
35.3
102.2
169.1
236.0
Data
Recording
Devices
Data
Recording
Control
2
4
6
8
1
2
3
4
Limitations: In a 3850 MSS configuration with one 3851 MSF
(B-series) or two 3851 MSFs (A-series), both MSCs must be featured identicaUy if complete backup is required. NOTE: On a 2880
Block Multiplexer Channel, Extended Unit Control Words (#3851,
3852) may be required to expand DASD device address capability
... The 155 II SYSGEN configuration is restricted by the maximum
number of non-shared block multiplexer subchannels (in groups of
eight). See the Channel SeCtion of the "Guide to IBM System/370
Model 155", GC20-1729 for description of assignment and number available. The total device addresses (real, virtual, nonexistent, or non-Mass Storage System) SYSGENed may not exhaust the pool of non-shared UCWs.
PREREQUISITES:
A control unit position on a S/370 or 4341 Processor byte or
block multiplexer channel for each MSC - one for each A-Series
MSF, two for a B-Series MSF.
A minimum of one 3830 Storage Control mdl 3 on S/370 mdls
145, 145-3, 148, 155 II, 158, 165 II and 168, or a 3031, 3032,
3033 or 4341 Processor, or one Infegrated Storage Controls
(#4650) with the Staging Adapter (#7220) on S/370 mdls 158
and 168.
A minimum of either two 3333 Disk Storage and Controls or two
3350 mdl A2/ A2Fs. See Note on M 3333 pages for feature
changes required when 3333's are retained for use with a 3851.
Data Cartridges (IBM Part No. 2496971, Purchase Only) must be
ordered separately
Maximums:
Attaches to a maximum of four S/370s (any combination of UPs,
MPs, APs) or 3031, 3032, 3033 Processor Complexes.
A maximum of two 3851 MSFs from the A-series of models or one
3851 MSF from the B-series of models can be included in the
3850 Mass Storage System (MSS).
In a 3850 Mass Storage System (MSS) there is one active Mass
Storage Control. It can address a total of eight 3850 MSS components: 3851 MSF control function, 3830 Storage Control mdl 3s,
and Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) with the Staging Adapter
(#72?0) on S/370 mdls 158 and 168. (Each ISC counts as two
components). The number of 3850 MSS components addressed
can be increased to sixteen with installation of the MSC Twin Port
Feature (#4901, 4902). A .second Mass Storage Control (either a
B-series or the second A-series) may be designated as an alternate control.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Purchase MMMC
$ 496,050
730,050
964,050
1,198,050
651,000
885,000
1,119,000
1,353,000
$1,540
2,145
2,750
3,355
1,705
2,310
2,915
3,520
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55% Maintenance: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additonal
installation charges)
From To
Capacity
Max bytes
Number of
Cartridges
(Billions)
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
PRICES:
AI
A2
A3
A4
A2
A3
A4
81
82
83
B4
$234.000
$468,000
234,000
5702.000
468,000
234,000
$154,950
5388,850
154,950
5622.950
388,950
154.950
234.000
468.000
234.000
5856,950
622,950
388.950
154,950
702.000
468.000
234.000
Bl
82
83
SPECIAL FEATURES
Note: In a 3850 MSS configuration with one 3851 MSF (B-series)
or two 3851 MSFs (A-series) both MSCs must be configured
identically if complete backup is required.
MASS STORAGE CONTROL TWIN PORT (#4901, 4902).
{#4901 for A and B mdls ... #4902 for B mdls only] #4901
applies to the A-series MSC and the first MSC in a B-series.
#4902 applies to the second MSC in a B-series. and requires
#4901 as a prerequisite. Permits the MSC to address 8 additional, for a total of 16, 3850 MSS components: 3851 MSF control
functions', 3830 Storage Control mdl 3s on S/370 mdls 145,
.145-3, 148, 155 II, 158, 165 II and 168, and 3031, 3032, 3033
or 4341 Processor, aM the ISC(#4650) with the Staging Adapter
(#7220) on S/370 mdls 158 aM 188. Each ISC has two paths
and counts as two components.
• In a 3850 MSS configuration with two A-series models there
are two 3851 MSF control function components.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [For A and B mdls]
To control the two-channel Interfaces on the basic 3851 MSF from
a remote configuration control panel. Also controls the Two Channel Switch, Add'i (#8171) If installed. For B models, this feature
is associated with the primary MSC and must be installed in addition to #61-50 below, which Is associated with the alternate MSC.
Field Instanatlon: Yes.
.
[For B mdls only]
REMOTJ! SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6150).
To confrol the two-channel interfaces on the basic 3851 (alternate
MSC) from a remote configuration control panel. Also controls the
Two Channel Switch, Add'l (#8172) if installed. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Remote Switch Attachment (#6148).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH, ADD'L (#8171). [For A and B mdls]
Permits attachment to two additional S/370 or 4341 Processor
channels, providing a total of four S/370 or 4341 channel attachments. The channneis can be on the same or different CPUs, to a
maximum of four CPUs with no more than two channels to a single
CPU. For B mdls, the fetaure is aSSOCiated with the active MSC
and must be installed in addition to #8172 below, which is associated with the alternate MSC. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH, ADD'L (#8172).
[For B mdls only]
Permits attachment to two additional S/370 or 4341 Processor
channels, providing a total of four S/370 or 4341 channel attachments. The channels may be on the same or different CPUs, to a
maximum of four CPUs with no more than two channels to a single
CPU. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch,
Add'i (#8171).
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
Special Feature Price.:
[2] Color: The accent panels above and below the cartridge access station are white. The two end covers on. the 3851 MSF
are gray. The remainder of the 3851 is available In #9041 for
red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045 for gray, or
#9046 for white. FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
Mass Stor Cntrl Twin Port #4901 $159 $135 $ 6,235
Mass Stor Cntrl Twin Port 4902 159 135 8,235
Remote Sw Attach
6148
NC
NC
NC
Remote Sw Attach
6150
NC
NC
NC
Two Chan Sw, Add'i
8171 402 342 15,590
Two Chan sw, Add'i
8172 402
342 15,590
[3] In a 3850 MSS configuration with two A-series MSFs, specify
#9120 for the designated primary 3851 MSF and #9121 for
the secondary 3851 MSF.
Not to be reDroduced without written permission,
$2.00
2.00
NC
NC
6.00'
6.00'
--- -------== =..: == ~ 5:
M 3863.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3863 MODEM
Purpose: A 2400 bps modem used to provide communication
products with a means for transmitting data over telecommunication channels (normally telephone lines).
This advanced microprocessor-based modem significantly enhances communication network management and network problem
determination.
The modem diagnostic functions operate with Network Problem
Determination Application (NPDA) Release 2 providing:
Probable cause of network errors.
Alert messages on error threshold
Formatted modem test results
Model.
Model 1
Operates in half-duplex or duplex mode over 4-wire
non-switched duplex facilities. Operates in point-topoint, multipoint control, or multipoint tributary mode.
Model 2
Operates in half-duplex mode over 2-wire switched
telecommunication networks. Operating mode is
point-ta-point.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights - Standard Features
• A microprocessor for signal processing.
• Auta-answer - automatic answering of switched network calls
... model 2, or model 1 with SNBU special feature.
• Automatic Remote Speed Selection - the transmission speed of
the remote modem follows the transmission speed (2400/1200
bps) of the local modem.
• Anti-Streaming - a multipoint tributary modem can automatically cut off transmission if a terminal holds "Request to Send"
up longer than 40 seconds (an abnormal condition in IBM
communication protocol). Customer switch option.
• Automatic and Adaptive Equalization - equalization is automatically performed by the modem and continues to adapt in data
mode.
• Line conditioning is not required.
• The protective circuits required for FCC registration in the U.S.
are built into the 3863 modems to allow direct attachment to
Public Switched Network (conditional upon FCC registration).
• Operator panel with operational status indicators and data
quality (Good, Poor) indications.
• The modem diagnostic functions referred to as Link Problem
Determination Aid (LPDA), operate with System Network Architecture (SNA) and associated program products. Under control
of these programs the modem accepts commands and initiates
tests that help isolate problems to the line, local or remote
modem, or elsewhere in the network and provide the network
operator with the most probable cause of network problems.
These program products are:
1. Network Communication Control Facility (NCCF) Release 1
- (PP 5735-XX6)
2. Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) Release 2 - (PP 5735-XX8)
3. ACF/NCP Release 2.1 - (PP 5735-XX1)
• Provides Its own clocking or will accept DTE (external) clockIng.
Highlights - Optional F. .ture. ...
"Accessories. "
see "Special Features" and
• 4-wlre Switched Network Backup (SNBU), special feature
available on model 1, provides backup for polnt-ta-polnt or
multipoint non-switched telecommunication facilities.
• Fan Out - this special feature available on model 1 allows
attachment of up to three teleproceasing machines to one
3863 model 1.
• Rack Mount Adapters (Accessories) are available.
• Tall Circuit Attachment - this accessory allows a 3863 model 1
to attach to a 3865 Modem equipped with Data Multiplexer
(#3260).
• Extended Diagnostic Card - this special feature available on
model 1 indicates remote modem power loss. When used with
NPDA, it expands the problem determination capability. See
IBM Program Product 5735-XX8.
Data Rate: 2400 bps with back-up of 1200 bps (half speed).
Link Problem Determination Aid Diagnostic Tests: All modems
will respond to diagnostic commands from the system that help
provide the status of any modem In the link, its attached terminal,
and the quality of the received signal over the communication
facility. Test requests and responses utilize the same data path
and controls that are used by the S/370 or 4300 processor for
data transmission. Thus diagnostic status/test requests can be
interspersed with data requests without interrupting terminal sessions.
The Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) program
product provides functions for the collection, storage, and retrieval
of network error/management data. NPDA implemented under the
Network Communication Control Facility (NCCF) program product
has both summary and detailed level information for determining
probable cause of network errors. Probable cause differentiates
between errors in the communications controller, line, modem,
modem interface, or terminals. NPDA will also utilize the new
modem facilities to provide alert messages on error threshold and
display formatted modem test results.
In addition, tests can also be executed from the modem operator
panel. These manual tests include:
Modem Self-Test - this includes an extensive test of modem
microcode, plus a data wrap with reduced thresholds for received data.
Modem/Line Transmit and Receive Tests - allows testing of
modem and line for switched network.
Local Loop-back Test - provides a "wrap" or loop-back at the
line interface to allow terminal wrap tests through the modem.
Remote Loop-Back Test - provides a "wrap" or loop-back at
the remote modem to allow a DTE wrap test back through the
local modem for non-switched modems. This test does not
require remote operator assistance.
Loop Test - allows an end-to-end test to any modem on the link
without remote operator assistance. This test is only available
when operating over 4-wire telecommunication facilities.
Lamp Test - tests all indicator lights on the operator panel.
Customer Setup: The 3863 is deSignated for Customer Setup
(CSU). This provides the customer with early availablity and allows
relocation of the unit without requiring IBM service personnel
assistance. All switches will be set at the plant from customer
order information. Switched network transmit level switches will
not be accessible to customers.
Customer accessible "Setup Switches" are provided on the rear
panel to allow reconfiguration of the modem where application
needs change. For example, 3863 model 1s may be set for point
to point, multipoint control, or multipoint tributary operation via the
setup switches. NOTE: Some of these changes may require SYSGEN changes in the program support.
Communication. Facilities
Common Carrier Provided Facilities: Voiceband private line (nonswitched) channel, type 3002 (or equivalent) as described in the
Bell System Technical Reference PUB 41004, dated October
1973.
Privately Owned Communication Facilities: Equivalent to above.
International Facilities: Request your TP' coordinator to contact
TP coordinators of the other countries involved to determine the
availability of such facilities. Transmission of data between the
United States and Canada on non-switched or switched facilities
Is supported. (For non-switched operation, the channel in Canada
must be schedule 4, type 4.)
Attachment to Facilities
Attachment to a private line (non-switched) channel is by a cable,
supplied with the 3863, which is terminated with a four prong
plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The plug mates with a receptacle
(WE 404B or 549A surface mount or 493A flush mount, or equ';;"
alent) which is connected to the channel. (The receptacle is a
conventional item of communications equipment and is, upon
customer request, ordinarily furnished by the telecommunication
service supplier.)
If the 3863 mdl 1 is equipped with 4-wire Switched Network
Backup (#7953), two of the following switched cables are also
provided with the 3863. Attachment to a switched line channel is
by a cable supplied with the 3863, which is .terminated with an 8
pin mini plug (USOC 45S or 41 S) for insertion into the programmed data jack provided by the telecommunication service supplier.
.
In the case of either Switched Network or Switched Network
Back-up, the modem includes a protective coupler (conditional
upon FCC Registration) which permits direct attachment to the U.
S. Public Switched Network.
Related' Equipment: The 3863 operates with IBM communication
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---
- --- ------- ==
------':' =
M 3863.2
Jul79
=
DP Machines
3863 Modem (cont'd)
products capable of 2400 bps operation. See related equipment
under "Specify." The 3863 must communicate with another appropriately configured 3863. The Interconnecting cable between the
machine and the modem must be supplied by the using machine.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his/her responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 sales manual
pages, and in the site preparation section of the Introduction and
Site Preparation Guide (GA27-3200).
The customer Is also responsible for:
1) Arrangements for price quotations, installation, and ail costs of
common carrier equipment and services.
2) Private Line (non-switched) Channel - arranging for the telecommunication .servlce supplier to provide a voice grade data
channel. Also arranging for the instailation of the appropriate
receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities" above.
3) Switched Telephone Network - arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to install the approriate communication
service equipped with the required connecting device as described in "Attachment to Facilities" above and for attaching
the IBM provided cable to the connecting device.
4) If the 3863 is to be attached to a non-IBM product, the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business machine.
5) Unpacking, and packing of the 3863, physical setup, and
connection of cables at set-up time.
mode of the modem. It also determines how the automatic
data rate control feature in the modem will function. The two
designations for automatic data rate control are:
Local Speed Control - signifies that modem data rate can only
be changed by the "Fuil Speed/Half Speed" switch on the
operator panel, or at the rate selected by its attached DTE
through its control of the "Data Rate Select" interface lead to
the modem.
Aemote Speed Control - signifies that the modem will Ignore
its operator panel or interface data rate control setting and will
automatically adjust its data rate to the rate It is receiving data
over the telecommunication line.
The two operational modes available are point to point and multipoint.
Point to point - this configuration has two modems connected
at each end of a telecommunication link. One must be specified as LOCAL, the other as REMOTE.
Multipoint - this configuration has several modems connected
together. One modem is cailed the "Control Station" and
broadcasts data to ail other modems called "Tributary
Stations" through "Polling" techniques. The system must
control transmission requests to tributary modems to ensure
that only one tributary transmits at a time.
Operational Mode Select Option Codes for 3863 Modem mdl 1s
(must select one):
6) Notifying IBM of intent to relocate the unit, and following IBM
Instructions for relocation.
- Multipoint Control - specify #9320. Selects modem for
operation as control station in a multipoint network. Modem
is also set to "Local Speed Control."
7) Disconnecting, packing, and movement to the customer's
shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will be furnished by IBM.
- Multipoint Tributary - specify #9321. Selects modem for
operation as tributary station in a multipoint network. Modem is also set to "Remote Speed Control."
8) All three of the foilowing Program Products must be instailed
for LPDA to function.
1. NCCF Release 1 (PP 5735-XX6)
2. NPDA Release 2 (PP 5735-XX8)
3. ACF /NCP Release 2.1 (PP 5735-XX1)
- Point to Point, Local - specify #9322. Selects modem for
point to point operation and "Local Speed Control." This
specify should be used for point to point modems located at
the "System Host Location" end of the telecommunication
line.
Blbllo9raphy~
See KWIC Index G32Q-1621 or specific systems
bibliography.
Note: The operational mode can be changed by switch control.
Publications:
• IBM 3863, 3864 and 3865 Introduction and Site Preparation
Guide, GA27-3200.
• IBM 3863 User's Guide - available with shipment.
SPECIFY:
• Voltage: (120 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890 for lockIng plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 10ft. (3.0
meter) power cable Is not required, specify #9986 for 6 ft (1.8
meter) cable.
• Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication line)
10 feet (3 meters), specify #9710
25 feet (7.5 meters), specify #9713
• Related Equipment:
one 3863 Attachment Feature Code from the table below must be specified for
each 3863, depending upon the unit to be attached.
Machine
Feature #
Machine Feature #
2701
9505
3115
9527
3125
9525
3135
9512
3138
9550
3271
9513
3274
9558
9514
3275
9557
3276
3601
9532
9532
3602
9532
3614
3624
9578
3631
9560
3632
9581
3684
9572
3704
9516
3705
9515
3735
9517
3741
9526
3747
9526
Non-IBM
9520
RPQ Machine9524
- Point to Point, Remote - specify #9323. Selects modem for
point to point operation and "Remote Speed Control."
3767
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
3791
4331
6240
6640
6/420
6/430
6/440
6/442
6/450
6/452
6670
8101
8130
8140
MCII
9537
9540
9542
9543
9544
9528
9521
9535
9571
9582
9556
9575
9552
9553
9576
9554
9577
9563
9569
9587
9568
9555
• Operational Mode - required for 3863 model 1s so that the
modem can be shipped from the plant ready to instail. Selection of one of these codes determines the network operational
PRICES
3863
Mdl
1
2
MRC
$71
76
MLC
2 Vear Purchase MMMC
$60
65
$2,135
2,335
$11.50
14.00
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Percent: 25% Termination Charge Months: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service Availability: 3 mos.
SPECIAL FEATURES
FAN-OUT (#3901).
[Mdl 1 only] Ailows attachment of up to
three teleprocessing machines to one 3863 model 1 . See
"Related Equipment" under "Specify" for applicable machines.
Only one of the attached machines may transmit at a time. This
feature may be used at a tributary station in a centralized multipoint network. In this configuration, multipoint programming discipline will provide the selection/control of the specified IBM terminals without any additional user involvement.
This feature may also be used to allow up to three of the specified
.IBM Multiplexers, or Communications Controllers, at a central site
to share the same 3863 model 1 for backup purposes. In this
case, although all of the machines attached to the 3863 will receive the incoming data Simultaneously, the user switchover proce.dure must ensure that only one machine is sending. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with DTE (external) clocking.
Field
Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED DIAGNOSTIC CARD (#7930). [Mdl 1 only] Used to
give a remote modem power loss indication, which Is reported to
NPDA in a S/370 or 4300 processor. The feature must be installed in the local and remote modems. The feature card in the
remote modem detects the loss of DC power and signals via an
"out-of-band" tone to the local feature card. Prerequisites:
#7930 must be installed in both the local and remote modems ...
also see LPDA in "Highlights" for required Program Product support. Field Installation: Yes.
4-WIRE SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP (4W-SNBU) (#7953).
[Mdl 1 only] Available for all 3863 mdl 1 (non~switched line)
modems. Provides backup for the non-switched telecommunication
facility. Data rate in 4W-SNBU mode is the same as in normal
non-switched line mode. 4W-SNBU allows restoration of the 4-wire
service between two point to point or multipoint 3863s. For point
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion,
M 3863.3
Jul79
'5 ::;-_-;
===':'=
DPMachines
3883 Modem (cont'd)
to point configurations, except for the requirement to establish the
switched connections, 4W-SNBU allows continuation of service
with no operational or programming Impact.
For multipoint configurations, operational (and possibly programming) modifications are required. 4W-SNBU can be configured in
two ways:
- The 4W-SNBU feature is Installed on the normal multipoint
control station modem and on any tributary modems that require backup. To establish a backup path to any tributary, the
control station modem must go to SNBU mode. In doing so,
communication is broken to all other tributaries.
- A spare control station modem equipped with the 4W-SNBU
feature Is Installed on a spare port at the control station location. The spare control station can then establish a 4W-SNBU
connection to any 3863 tributary modem equipped with the
4W-SNBU feature. This tributary Is deactivated from Its normal
polling list and assigned to the spare port. The normal control
station continues to provide service to other tributaries stili
reachable over the non-switched line.
This feature requires two 2-wlre ·'swltched" telephone lines, and
two telephones at the host site. Attachment to the switched lines
Is made as described In the "Attachment to Facilities" section
above. This feature is designed to automatically answer when a
call Is received. Calls must be placed manually. When one call Is
placed and the connection is completed a four minute timer is
started. The second line must be established within the time-out,
otherwise the first line Is automatically dropped. Field Installation:
Yes.
Special Feature Prlc..:
Fan Out
Ext Diagnostic Card
4-Wlre SNBU
MRC
#3901 $24
7930
9
7953
38
MLCI
2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$20
$ 750
8
275
1,110
32
$2.00
1.50
9.00
ACCESSORIES
The following Items are available on a purchase only basis. Order
the Feature # indicated below.
RACK MOUNT ADAPTER (#6240). A rack adapter that fastens
inside a standard 19 inch EIA rack. The adapter is a shelf with an
inside width of 17-3/8 inches (441.3 mm) which will allow two
standalone modems to be placed side by side. The adapter will fit
racks with depths of 23-5/8 to 30 inches (600 to 760 mm). Field
Installation: Yes.
TAIL CIRCUIT ATTACHMENT (TCA)(#7875). [Mdl 1 only] Allows
the 3863 model 1 to attach to a 3865 Modem model 1 (9600 bps)
equipped with Data Multiplexer (#3260). Permits an extension of
a network via a separate set of modems and a separate communications channel. Limitations: No LPDA support available on tailed
attachments ... 3863 model 1s in point to point or multipoint control mode only. Field Installation: Yes.
Rack Mount Adapter
Tall Circuit Attachment
#6240
7875
$70
45
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-= =';'....-=
......
- ...............
=
=-:. =:::
==-
~~--
M 3864.1
Jul79
~-~-
DP Machines
IBM 3864 MODEM
Purpose: A 4800 bps modem used to provide communication
products with a means for transmitting data over telecommunication channels (normally telephone lines).
An advanced microprocessor-based modem which significantly
enhances communication network management and network problem determination.
The modem diagnostic functions operate with Network Problem
Determination Application (NPDA) Release 2, providing:
•
•
•
Probable cause of network errors.
Alert messages on error threshold.
Formatted modem test results ..
Models
Model 1
Operates in half-duplex or duplex mode over 4-wire
non-switched duplex facilities. Operates in point-topoint, multipoint control, or multipoint tributary mode.
Model 2
Operates in half-duplex mode over 2-wlre switched
telecommunication networks. Operating mode is
point-to-Polnt.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
The Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) program
product provides functions for the collection, storage and retrieval
of network error/management data. NPDA implemented under the
Network Communication Control Facility (NCCF) program product
has both summary and detailed level information for determining
probable cause of network errors. Probable cause differentiates
between errors In the communications controller, line, modem,
modem Interface or terminals.
NPOA will also utilize the new modem facilities to provide alert
messages on error threshold and display formatted modem test
results. In addition, tests can also be executed from the modem
operator panel. These manual tests include:
Modem Self Test - Includes an extensive test of modem microcode, plus a data wrap with reduced thresholds for received
data.
Modem/Line Transmit and Receive Tests - Allow testing of
modem and line for a switched network.
Local Loop-back Test - Provides a "wrap" or loop-back at the
line Interface to allow terminal wrap tests through the modem.
Highlights - Standard Features
• A microprocessor for signal processing.
• Auto Answer - automatic answering of switched network calls model 2, or a model 1 equipped with SNBU special feature.
• Automatic Remote Speed Select - the transmission speed of
the remote modem follows the transmission speed (4800/2400
bps) of the local modem.
• Antl-Streaming - a multipoint tributary modem can automatically cut off transmission if a terminal holds "Request to Send"
up longer than 40 seconds (an abnormal condition in IBM
communication protocol). Customer switch option.
• Automatic and/ Adaptive Equalization - equalization Is automatically performed by the modem and continues to adapt in data
mode.
• Operator panel with operational status indicators and data
quality (Good/Poor) indications.
• The modem diagnostic functions iefeiied to as Link Pioblem
Determination Aid (LPDA), operate with System Network Architecture (SNA) and associated program products. Under control
of these programs the modem accepts commands and Initiates
tests that help isolate problems to the line, local or remote
modem, or elsewhere in the network and provide the network
operator with the most probable cause of network problems.
These program products are:
1. Network Communication Control Facility (NCCF) Release 2
- (PP 5735-XX6)
2. Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) Release 2 - (PP 5735-XX8)
3. ACF /NCP Release 2.1 - (PP 5735-XX1)
• Provides its own clocking or will accept DTE (external) clockIng.
• Line conditioning is not required.
• The protective circuits required for FCC registration in U. S.
are built into the 3864 modems to allow direct attachment to
Public Switched Network (conditional upon FCC Registration).
Highlights
Optional
"Accessories.' .
will respond to diagnostic commands from the system which help
provide status of any modem in the link, Its attached terminal, and
the quality of the received signal over the communication faCility.
Test requests and "asponses use the same data path and controls
that are used by the S/370 or 4300 Processor for data transmission. Thus diagnostic status/test requests can be interspersed
with data requests without interrupting terminal sessions.
see
"Special
Features"
and
• 4-wlre Switched Network Backup (SNBU), special feature on
modell, provides backup for point to point, or multipoint
non-switched telecommunication facilities.
• Fan Out - this special feature on model 1 allows attachment of
up to three IBM teleprocessing machines to one 3864 model
1.
• Rack Mount Adapters (Accessories) are available.
• Tall Circuit Attachment - this accessory allows a 3864 model 1
to attach to a 3865 Modem equipped with Data Multiplexer
(#3260).
• Extended Diagnostic Card - this special feature, available on
3864 modell, indicates remote modem power loss. When
used with NPDA expands the problem determination capability.
See IBM Program Product 5735-XX8.
Remote Loop-back Test - Provides a "wrap" or loop-back at
the remote modem to allow a DTE wrap test back through the
local modem for non-switched modems. This test does not
require remote operator assistance.
Loop Test - Allows an end-to-end test to any modem on the link
without remote operator assistance. This test Is only available
when operating over 4-wlre telecommunication facilities.
Lamp Test - Tests all the indicator lights on the operator panel.
Customer Setup: The 3864 is designated for Customer Setup
(CSU). This provides the customer with early availability and
allows relocation of the unit without requiring IBM service personnel assistance .. All switches will be set at the plant from customer
order information. Switched network transmit level switches will
not be accessible to customers.
Customer accessible "Setup Switches" are provided on the rear
pane! to aUow reconfiguration of the modem where application
needs change. For example, 3864 model 1s may be set for point
to point, multipoint control, or multipoint tributary operation via the
setup switches. NOTE: Some of these changes may require SYSGEN changes in the program support.
Communication Facilities
Common Carrier Provided Facilities: Voiceband private line (nonswitched) channel, type 3002 (or equivalent) as described in the
Bell System Technical Reference PUB 41004, dated October
1973.
Privately Owned Communication Facilities: Equivalent to above.
International Facilities: Request your TP coordinator to contact TP
coordinators of the other countries Involved to determine the
availability of such facilities. Transmission of data between the
United States and Canada on non-switched or switched facilities is
supported. (For non-switched operation, the channel in Canada
must be schedule 4, type 4.)
Attachment to Facllltl..
Attachment to a private line (non-switched) channel is by a cable,
supplied with the 3864, which is terminated with a four prong plug
(WE 283B or equivalent). The plug mates with a receptacle (WE
404B or 549A surface mount or 493A flush mount, or equivalent)
which is connected to the channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communications equipment and is, upon customer
request, ordinarily furnished by the telecommunication service
supplier.)
If the 3864 model 1 is equipped with 4-Wire Switched Network
Backup (#7953), two additional switched cables are also provided
with that modem. Attachment to a switched line channel is by a
cable supplied with the 3864, which is terminated with an 8 pin
mini plug (USOC 45S or 41 S) for insertion into the programmed
data jack provided by the telecommunication service supplier.
In the case of either Switched Network or Switched Network
Backup, the ",odem Includes a protective coupler (ebnditional
upon FCC Registration) which permits direct attachment to the US
Public Switched Network.
Data Rate: 4800 bps with back-up of 2400 bps (half speed).
Link Problem Determination Aid Diagnostic Testa: All modems
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -----===":'=
- ----.-
M 3864.2
Jul79
DPMachines
3864 Modem (cont'd)
Related Equipment: The 3864 operates with IBM communication
products capable of 4800 bps operation. See "Related
Equipment" under "Specify." The 3864 must communicate with
another appropriately configured 3864. The interconnecting cable
between the machine and the modem must be supplied by the
using machine.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his/her responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 sales manual
pages, and in the site preparation section of the Introduction and
Site Preparation Guide, GA27-3200.
The customer is also responsible for:
1) Arrangement for price quotations, installation, and all costs of
common carrier equipment and services.
2) Private line (non-switched) channel - arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to provide a voice grade data
channel. Also arranging for installation of the appropriate
receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities" above.
3) Switched Telecommunication Network - arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting
device as described in "Attachment to Facilities" above, and
for attaching the IBM provided cable to the connecting device.
Local Speed Control - signifies that modem data rate can only
be changed by the "Full Speed/Half Speed" switch on the
operator panel, or at the rate selected by its attached DTE
through its control of the "Data Rate Select" interface lead to
the modem.
Remote Speed Control - signifies that the modem will ignore its
operator panel or interface data rate control setting and will
automatically adjust its data rate to the rate it is receiving data
over the telecommunication line.
The two operational modes available are point to point and multipoint.
Point to Point - this configuration has two modems connected at
each end of a telecommunication link: one modem must be
specified as LOCAL and the other as REMOTE.
Multipoint - this configuration has several modems connected
together. One modem is called the "Control Station" and
broadcasts data to all other modems called "Tributary Stations." Through "Polling" techniques, the system must control
transmission requests to tributary modems to ensure that only
one tributary transmits at a time.
Operational Mode Select Option Codes for 3864 Modem mdl 1 s
(must select one):
4) If the 3864 is to be attached to a non-IBM product, the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business machine.
-
Multipoint Control - Specify #9320. Selects modem for
operation as a control station in a multipoint network. Modem is also set to "Local Speed Control."
5) Unpacking and placing of the 3864.
connection of cables at setup time.
Physical setup, and
-
6) Notifying IBM of intent to relocate the unit, and for following
IBM instructions for relocation.
Multipoint Tributary -- Specify #9321. Selects modem for
operation as a tributary station in a multipoint network.
Modem is also set to "Remote Speed Control."
-
Point to Point, Local -- Specify #9322. Selects modem for
point to point operation and "Local Speed Control." This
specify should be used for point to point modems located at
the "System Host Location" end of the telecommunication
line.
-
Point to Point, Remote - Specify #9323. Selects modem
for point to point operation and "Remote Speed Control."
7) Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's ship-
ping dock at time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions
will be supplied by IBM.
8) All three of the following Program Products must be installed
for LPDA to function.
1.
2.
3.
NCCF Release 1 (PP 5735-XX6)
NPDA Release 2 (PP 5735-XX8)
ACF /NCP Release 2.1 (PP 5735-XX1)
Note: The operational mode can be changed by switch selection.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific systems
bibliography.
Publications:
• IBM 3863, 3864 and 3865 Introduction and Site Preparation
Guide, GA27-3200
• IBM 3864 Users Guide - available with shipment.
Specify:
• Voltage (120 VAC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Specify #9890 for
locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 10ft (3
meter) power cable is not required, specify #9986 for 6 ft (1.8
meter) cable.
• Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication line)
10 feet (3 meters), specify #9710
25 feet (7.5 meters), sp3cify #9713
• Related Equipment:
one 3864 Attachment
Feature Code from the table below must be specified for each
3864, depending upon the unit to which it is attached.
Machine
Feature #
Machine
Feature #
2701
3115
3125
3135
3138
3271
3274
3275
3276
3601
3602
3614
3624
3631
3632
3684
9505
9527
9525
9512
9550
9513
9558
9514
9557
9532
9532
9532
9578
9560
9561
9572
3704
3705
3735
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
3791
4331
8101
8130
8140
6670
Non-IBM
RPQ Machine
9516
9515
9517
9540
9542
9543
9544
9528
9521
9535
9571
9569
9567
9568
9563
9520
9524
• Operational Mode: [3864 model 1 only] Required so that the
modem can be shipped from the plant ready to install. Selection of one of these codes determines the network operational
mode of the modem. It also determines how the automatic data
rate control feature in the modem will function. The two designations for automatic data rate control are:
PRICES
3864
Mdl
MRC
MLC/
2 Vr
Purchase MMMC
1
2
$123
129
$105
110
$3,500
3,700
$20
21
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Percent: 25% Termination Charge Months: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service Availability: 3 mos.
SPECIAL FEATURES
FAN-OUT (#3901).
[Mdl 1 only] Allows attachment of up to
three teleprocessing machines to one 3864 mdl 1. See "Related
Equipment" under "Specify" for applicable machines. Only one of
the attached machines may transmit at a time. This feature may
be used at a tributary station in a centralized multipoint network.
In this configuration, multipoint programming discipline will provide
the selection/control of the specified IBM terminals without any
additional user involvement.
This feature may also be used to allow up to three of the specified
IBM Multiplexers', or Communications Controllers, at a central site
to share the same 3864 mdl 1 for backup purposes. In this case,
although all of the machines attached to the 3864 will receive the
Incoming data simultaneously, the user switchover procedure must
ensure that only one machine is sending. Limitation: Cannot be
Installed with DTE (external) clocking. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED DIAGNOSTIC CARD (#7930). [Mdl 1 only] Used to
give a remo.te modem power loss indication, which is reported to a
NPDA In a S/370 or 4300 processor. The feature must be installed on the local and remote modems. The feature card in the
remote modem detects the loss of DC power and signals It with an
"out-of-band" tone to the local feature card. Prerequisites:
#7930 must be installed in both the local and remote modems ...
also see LPDA in "Highlights" for required Program Product support. Field Installation: Ves.
4-WIRE SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP (4W-SNBU) (#7953).
[Mdl 1 only]
Available for all 3864 mdl 1 (non-switched line)
modems. Provides backup for the non-switched telecommunication
facility. Data rate in 4W-SNBU mode is the same as in normal
non-switched line mode. 4W-SNBU allows restoration of the 4-wire
service between two point to point or multipoint 3864s. For point
to point configurations, except for the requirement to establish the
switched connections, 4W-SNBU allows continuation of service
with no operational or programming' impact.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
- ----------=== ':' =
M 3864.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3864 Modem (cont'd)
For multipoint configurations, operational (and possibly programming) modifications are required. 4W-SNBU can be configured in
two ways:
- The 4W-SNBU feature is installed on the normal multipoint
control station modem and on any tributary modems that require backup. To establish a backup path to any tributary, the
control station modem must go to SNBU mode. In doing so,
communication is broken to all other tributaries.
- A spare control station modem equipped with the 4W-SNBU
feature Is Installed on a spare port at the control station location. The spare control station can then establish a 4W-SNBU
connection to any 3864 tributary modem equipped with the
4W-SNBU feature. This tributary is deactivated from its normal
polling list and assigned to the spare port. The normal control
station continues to provide service to other tributaries still
reachable over the non-switched line.
This ·feature requires two 2-wire "switched" telephone lines, and
two telephones at the host site. Attachment to the switched lines
Is made as described in the "Attachment to Facilities" section
above. The feature Is designed to automatically answer when a
call Is received. Calls must be placed manually. When one call is
placed and the connection completed, a four minute timer is started. The second line must be established within the timeout, otherwise the first line is automatically dropped. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Fan Out
Ext Diagnostic Card
4-Wlre SNBU
MRC
#3901 $24
7930
9
7953
38.
MLC/
2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$20
8
32
$ 750
275
1,110
$2.00
1.50
9.00
ACCESSORIES
The following Items are available on a purchase only basis. Order
the Feature # Indicated below.
RACK MOUNT ADAPTER (#6240), A rack adapter that fastens
Inside a standard 19 Inch EIA rack. The adapter is a shelf with an
Inside width of 17-3/8 Inches (441.3 mm) which will allow two
standalone modems to be placed side by side. The adapter will fit
racks with depths of 23-5/8 to 30 inches (600 to 760 mm). Field
Installation: Yes.
TAIL CIRCUIT ATTACHMENT (TCA) (#7875).
[Mdl 1 only]
Allows the 3864 mal 1 to attach to a 3865 Modem mdl 1 (9600
bps) eqllipped with Data Multiplexing (#3260). Permits an extension of a network via a separate set of modems and a separate
communications channel. Limitations: No LPDA support on tailed
circuit attachments ... 3864 mdl 1s in point to point or multipoint
control mode only. Field Installation: Yes.
Rack Mount Adapter
Tall Circuit Attachment
#6240
7875
$70
45
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
--------- --- - - -.:.
==--';" ==
~
M 3865.1
Jul79
DP Machines
Data Rate: 9600 bps with back-up of 4800 bps (half speed).
IBM 3865 MODEM
Purpose: A 9600 bps modem used to provide communication
products with a means for transmitting data over telecommunication channels (normally telephone lines).
An advanced microprocessor-based modem which significantly
enhances communication network management and network problem determination.
The modem diagnostic functions operate with Network Problem
Determination Application (NPDA) Release 2, providing:
Probable cause of network errors.
Alert messages on error threshold.
Formatted modem test results.
Operation: The 3865 operates in half-duplex or duplex mode over
4-wire non-switched duplex facilities.
Model 1
Operates in point-to-point mode.
Model 2
Operates in multipoint mode and can be configured
as a multipoint control or as a multipoint tributary
station.
• A microprocessor for signal processing.
• Automatic Remote Speed Selection - the transmission speed of
the remote modem follows the transmission speed (9600/4800
bps) of the local modem (primary status). The network configuration of the remote modem must be secondary.
• Anti-Streaming - a multipoint tributary 3865 mdl 2 can automatically cut off transmission if a terminal holds "Request to
Send" up longer than 40 seconds (an abnormal condition in
IBM communication protocol). Customer switch option.
• Automatic and Adaptive Equalization - equalization is automatically performed by the modem and continues to adapt in data
mode.
• Operator Panel with operational status and data quality (Good,
Poor) indications.
• The modem diagnostics referred to as Link Problem Determination Aid (LPDA) operate with Systems Network Architecture
(SNA) and associated program products. Under control of
these programs, the modems accept commands and initiate
tests that can help isolate problems to the line, local or remote
modem, or elsewhere in the network and provide the network
operator with the most probable cause of network problems.
These program products are:
1. Network Communication Control Facility (NCCF) Release 1
- (PP 5735-XX6)
2. Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) Release 2 - (PP 5735-XX8)
3. ACF /NCP Release 2.1 - (PP 5735-XX1)
• Modem provides its own clocking or will accept DTE (external)
clocking.
• Fast RFS - 24 millisecond Ready For Sending (RFS) Delay
available for 3865 multipoint tributary modems. Customer
switch option (24 msec or 60 msec).
• Both point to point and multipoint can operate over 3002
Basic (unconditioned) channels.
• Protective circuits required for FCC Registration in U.S. when
4-Wire SNBU (#7953) is installed are built into the 3865
modem (conditional upon FCC Registration).
Optional
see
"Special
Features"
The Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA) program
product provides functions for the collection, storage, and retrieval
of network error/management data. NPDA implemented under the
Network Communication Control Facility (NCCF) program product
has both summary and detailed level information for determining
probable cause of network errors. Probable cause differentiates
between errors in the communications controller, line. modem.
modem interface. or terminals.
NPDA will also utilize the new modem facilities to provide aiert
messages on error threshold and display formatted modem test
results.
In addition. tests can be executed from the modem operator panel.
These manual tests include:
Modem Self Test - this includes an extensive test of modem
microcode. plus a data wrap with reduced thresholds for received data.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights • Standard Features
Highlights
" Accessories."
Link Problem Determination Aid Diagnostic Tests: All modems
will respond to diagnostic commands from the system that help
provide status of any modem in the link. its attached terminal. and
the quality of the received signal over the communication facility.
Test requests and responses utilize the same data path and controls that are used by the S/370 or 4300 processor for data
transmission. Thus diagnostic status/test requests can be interspersed with data requests without interrupting terminal sessions.
and
• 4-wire Switched Network Backup (SNBU) a special feature
which provides for non-switched telecommunications facility.
• Fan Out - this special feature allows attachment of up to three
teleprocessing machines to one modem.
• Rack Mount Adapters (Accessories) are available.
• Extended Diagnostic Card - a special feature which indicates
remote modem power loss. Used with NPDA, it expands the
problem determination capability. See IBM Program Product
5735-XX8.
Modem/Line Transmit and Receive Tests - allow testing of
modem and line for switched network.
Local Loop-back Test - provides a "wrap" or loop-back at the
line interface to allow terminal wrap tests through the modem.
Remote Loop-back Test - provides a "wrap" or loop-back at
the remote modem to allow a DTE wrap test through the local
modem for non-switched modems. This test does not require
remote operator assistance.
Loop Test - allows an end-to-end test to any modem on the link
without remote operator assistance. This test is only available
when operating over 4-wire telecommunication facilities.
Lamp Test - tests all the indicator lights on the operator panel.
Link Problem Determination Aid (LPDA) Diagnostic Tests - all 3865
modems will respond to diagnostic commands from the system to
provide the status of any modem in the link. its attac~ed. termin~!,
or the quality of the received signal over the communication faCIlity. Test requests and responses utilize the same data path and
controls that are used by S/370 and 4300 processors for data
transmission. Thus diagnostic status/test requests can be interspersed with data requests without interrupting terminal sessions.
See LPDA in "Highlights" for required S/370 Program Product
support.
Customer Setup: The 3865 is designated for Customer Setup
(CSU). This provides the customer with early availability and also
allows relocation of the unit without requiring IBM service personnel assistance. All switches will be set at the plant from customer
order information. Switched network transmit level switches will
not be accessible to customers.
"Setup Switches" are provided on the rear panel to allow reconfi9uration of the modem where application needs change. For
example, 3865 mdl 2s may be set for multipoint control, or multipoint tributary operation via the setup switches. NOTE: Some of
these changes may require SYSGEN changes in the program
support.
Communications Facilities
Common Carrier Facilities: Voiceband private line (non-switched)
channel, type 3002 (or equivalent), as described in the Bell
System Technical Reference PUB 41004, dated October 1973.
Model 1 (point to point) and model 2 (multipoint) use basic channels. The 3865 will operate on most unconditioned lines and
provide satisfactory error rates. However, due to the wide range
of line impairments allowed for unconditioned lines, it may be
necessary to add to some lines the following line conditioning to
achieve satisfactory performance at 9600 bps:
- Model 1 (point to point) may require D1 conditioning.
- Model 2 (multipoint) may require C1 and/or, in extreme cases, D2 conditioning. An alternate that is effective il"! most
cases is to activate a longer (60 ms) RFS delay on tributary
modems with a switch on the back panel. NOTE: Model 2
modems can operate on links with a mix of 24 ms and 60 ms
RFS delays. In exceptional cases, even with 60 ms RFS it
may require D2 conditioning to achieve acceptable performance at 9600 bps.
• Data Multiplexing - a special feature available on the model 1
which allows selection of 4800 and 2400 bps subchannels.
The modem multiplexes subchannel data into a single aggregate data stream on 3865 mdl 1s.
Privately Owned Communication Facilities: Equivalent to above.
• Auto Answer - automatic answering of switched network calls
with SNBU.
International Facilities: Request your TP coordinator to contact
the TP coordinators of the other countries involved to determine
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----- ---
- ----==
=':' =
M 3865.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3865 Modem (cont'd)
the availability of such facilities. Transmission of data between
the United States and Canada on non-switched facilities is supported. (For non-switched operation, the channel in Canada must
be a schedule 4, type 4.)
AHachment to Facilities
Attachment to a private line (non-switched) channel is by a cable,
supplied with the 3865; which is terminated with a four prong
plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The plug mates with a receptacle
(WE 404B or 5~9A surface mount or 493A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected to the channel. (The receptacle is a
conventional item of communications equipment and is, upon
customer request, ordinarily furnished by the telecommunication
service supplier.)
If the 3865 is equipped with 4-wlre Switched Network Backup
(#7953) two additional switched cables are also provided with
that modem. Attachment to a switched line channel is by a cable
supplied with the 3865, which is terminated with an 8 pin mini
plug (USOC 45S or 41 S) for insertion into the programmed data
jack provided by the telecommunication service supplier.
When equipped with the 4-wire SNBU feature (#7953) the modem Includes a protectice coupler (conditional upon FCC Registration) which permits direct attachment to the U.S. Public
Switched Network.
Related Equipment: The 3865 operates with IBM communication
products capable of 9600 bps operation. See .. Related
Equipment" under "Specify." The 3865 must communicate with
another appropriately configured 3865 unless multiplexing is used.
The interconnecting cable between the machine and the modem
must be supplied by the using machine.
• Telecommunications Cord (modem to communication line):
10 ft (3 meters) specify #9710
25 ft (7.5 meters) specify #9713
• Related Equipment:
one 3865 Attachment Feature Code from the table below must be specified for
each 3865. depending upon the unit to which it is attached.
Remote Speed Selection ... specify #9331 - allows
modem to automatically adjust its data rate to the rate it is
receiving data over the line. The modem will ignore the
setting of its "Full Speed/Half Speed" switch.
- Model 2 (multipOint) - selection of one of these codes
determines the operating mode of the modem. and how data
rate will be controlled:
Multipoint Control... specify #9332 - modem will operate
as a multipoint control station in the multipoint network.
The modem is automatically set to local data rate control.
Multipoint Tributary ... specify #9333 - selects modem
for operation as a tributary station in the multipoint network. Tributary stations are automatically designated for
remote speed selection.
Note: The operational mode can be changed by switch
setting.
4) If the 3865 Is to be attached to a non-IBM product, the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business machine.
6) Notifying IBM of intent to relocate the unit, and for following
IBM instructions for relocation.
7) Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's ship-
ping dock at time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions
will be supplied by IBM.
8) All three of the following Program Products must be installed
for LPDA to function.
Feature #
Local Data Rate Control ... specify #9330 - allows modem data rate to be changed by the "Full Speed/Half
Speed" switch on the operator panel, or to the rate selected by its attached DTE through control of the "Data
Rate Select" interface lead to the modem. This specify
code should be used for modems located at the "System
Host Location" end of this telephone line.
3) Switched Telecommunication Network - arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting
device as described in "Attachment to Facilities" above and
for attaching the IBM provided cable to the connecting device.
5) Unpacking and placing of the 3865. Physical setup and connection of cables at setup time.
3776
9544
3777
9528
3791
9535
4331
9571
8101
9569
8130
9567
8140
9568
Non-IBM
9520
RPQ Machine9524
9505
9513
9558
9514
9557
9532
9561
9561
9516
9515
- Model 1 (point to point) - one modem must be specified as
LOCAL. and the other as REMOTE. Selection of one of
these codes determines how the Automatic Remote Speed
Selection feature in the modem will function:
The customer is also responsible for:
2) Private Line (non-switched) Channel - arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to provide a voice grade data
channel. Also arranging for the installation of the appropriate
receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities" above.
Machine
2701
3271
3274
3275
3276
3601
3602
3632
3704
3705
• Operational Mode (one must be selected so that the modem
can be shipped from the plant ready to install).
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his/her responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 sales manual
pages, and in the site preparation section of the Introduction and
Site Preparation Guide, GA27-3200.
1) Arrangements for price quotations, installation, and all costs of
common carrier equipment and services.
Machine Feature #
PRICES
3865
Mdl
MRC
MLC/
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
1
2
$194
194
$165
165
$5,300
5,300
$29.50
29.50
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Percent: 25% Termination Charge Months: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service Availability: 3 mos.
1. NCCF Release 1 (PP 5735-XX6)
2. NPDA Release 2 (PP 5735-XX8)
3. ACF /NCP Release 2.1 (PP 5735-XX1)
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific systems
bibliography.
Publications:
• IBM 3863, 3864 and 3865 Introduction and Site Preparation
Guide, GA 27-3200
• IBM 3865 User's Guide - available with shipment.
SPECIFY:
• Voltage (120 V AC. l-phase. 3-wlre, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 10 ft (3
meter) power cable is not required. specify #9986 for 6 ft (1.8
meter) cable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - ------_.------- ------3865 Modem
M 3865.3
Jul79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA MULTIPLEXER (#3260). [Mdl 1 only] Allows selection of
a 4800 bps and 2400 bps subchannel. The modem multiplexes
subchannel data into a single aggregate data stream. This feature
offers four channel configurations. When the 3865 is placed in
half speed mode, the aggregate data stream is transmitted at half
spead and as a result the channel configurations will be automatically altered because of lower speed. Channel configurations are:
Channels
ABC
9600
4800
4800
2400
4800
2400
2400
2400
2400
Half Speed Operation
DAB
C
D
2400
4800
4800
4800
2400
may be necessary to re-dial or change to half speed to maintain
acceptable performance in SNBU mode. See customer responsibilities section of M 2700 pages for details. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Data Multiplexer
Fan Out
Ext Diagnostic Card
4-Wlre SNBU
MRC
#3260 $35
3901
24
7930
9
7953
38
MLC/
2 Vr Purchase MMMC
$30 $1,010
20
750
8
275
32
1,110
$4.00
2.00
1.50
9.00
ACCESSORIES
2400
All data sources are connected to the 3865 mdl 1 by separate
EIA/CCITT .interfaces. Multiplexer channels will permit attachment
to co-located terminals or tailed circuit extensions for network
flexibility and cost savings. Tail circuit extensions allow co-located
modems (3863 or 3864) to be attached to a 3865 channel. Modems so attached can extend the channel data path by its attached communications line and a second (remotely attached) modem. Each multiplexer channel is equipped with buffers to compensate for timing variations between tailed modems and the 3865
clocks. The tailing accessory (#7875) is required on the 3863 or
3864 modems when attached. Limitations: If 3863 and 8364
"tailed" modems are attached they must be mdl 1s operating in
point to point or multipoint control mode only. No LPDA support is
available. Field Installation: Yes.
The following item is available on a purchase only basis. Order
:he feature number indicated below.
RACK MOUNT ADAPTER (#6240). A rack adapter that fastens
inside a standard 19 inch EIA rack. The adapter is a shelf with an
inside width of 17-3/8 inches (441.3 mm) which will allow two
standalone modems to be placed siele by side. The adapter will fit
racks with depths of 23-5/8 to 30 inches (600 to 760 mm). Field
Installation: Yes.
Rack Mount Adapter
#6240
$70
FAN OUT (#3901).
Allows attachment of up to three teleprocessing machines to one 3865 ... see "Related Equipment" under
"Specify" for applicable machines. Only one of the attached
machines may transmit at a time. This feature may be used at a
tributary station in a centralized multipoint network. In this configuration, multipoint programming discipline will provide the
selection/control of the specified IBM terminals without any additional user involvement.
This feature may also be used to allow up to three of the specified
IBM Multiplexers or Communications Controllers at a central site to
share the same 3865 modem for backup purposes. In this case.
although all of the machines attached to the 3865 will receive the
incoming data simultaneously, the user switchover procedure must
ensure that only one machine is sending. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with DTE (external) clock. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED DIAGNOSTIC CARD (#7930). Used to give a remote
modem power loss indication. The feature must be installed on the
local and remote modems. The feature card in the remote modem
detects the loss of DC power and signals it with an "out-of-band"
tone to the local feature card. Prerequisites: #7930 must be
installed in both the local and remote modems ... also see LPDA in
"Highlights" for required Program Product support. Field
Instsllatlon: Yes.
4-WIRE SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP (4W·SNBU) (#7953).
Provides backup for the non-switched telecommunication facility.
Data rate in 4W-SNBU mode is the same as in normal nonswitched line mode. 4W-SNBU allows restoration of the 4-wire
service between two point to point or multipoint 3865s. For point
to point configurations, except for the requirement to establish the
switched connections, 4W-SNBU allows continuation of service
with no operational or programming impact.
For multipoint configurations, operational (and possibly programming) modifications are required. 4W-SNBU can be configured in
two ways:
- The 4W-SNBU feature is installed on the normal multipoint
control station modem and on any tributary modems that reQuire backup. To establish a backup path to any tributary, the
control station modem must go to SNBU mode. In doing so,
communication is broken to all other tributaries.
- A spare control station modem equipped with the 4W-SNBU
feature is installed on a spare port at the control station location. The spare control station can then establish a 4W-SNBU
connection to any 3865 tributary modem equipped with the
4W-SNBU feature. This tributary is deactivated from its normal
polling list and assigned to the spare port. The normal control
station continues to provide service to other tributaries still
reachable over the non-switched line.
This feature requires two 2-wire "switche.d" telephone lines, and
two telephones at the host site. Attachment to the switched lines
Is made as described in the "Attachment to Facilities" section
above. The feature is designed to automatically answer when a
call is received. 'Calls must be placed manually. When one call is
placed and the connection completed, a four minute timer is started. The second line must be established within the time-out,
otherwise the first line is automatically dropped. Limitations: It
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------------=-- =-------=--':' =
M 3872.1
May 79
DP Machines
"Communications Channel Specifications" in the 3872 User's
Guide. Also arranging for the installation of the appropriate
receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities."
IBM 3872 MODEM
Purpose: A 2400 bps modem. with half-speed capability. used to
provide communications products with the means for transmitting
data over common carrier provided voiceband private line (nonswitched) channels. equivalent privately owned channels or
switched telecommunication networks.
(2) Switched Telecommunication Network -- arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting
deVice as described in "Attachment to Facilities" and for attaching the IBM provided cable to the connecting device.
Highlights: Modem operation is possible in half-duplex mode over
2- or 4-wire half-duplex facilities. half-duplex or duplex mode over
duplex facilities. or half-duplex mode over switched telecommunication networks.
Also inform the telecommunication service supplier that the
speed of data transmission will be 2400 bps and that appropriate conditioning of the local loop is required. The customer
must be made aware that the use of local loops not properly
conditioned for the speed of data transmission or the use of
special switched facilities may result in unsatisfactory data
transmission.
Data Rates -- 2400 bps with back-up half-speed.
Equalization -- manually adjustable by operator on private line
(non-switched) channels and automatic on switched networks.
Operation -- switched network or multipoint control. multipoint
tributary. point-to-point on a private line (non-switched) channel.
See "Special Features."
Built-in Diagnostics -- included in each modem are the following
diagnostic features accessible to the operator: (1) The modem
may be WRAP TESTED independently of the using machine and
telecommunication channel ... (2) It may be LINE TESTED with a
remote modem and telecommunication channel. independently of
the .attached business machine. The test may be one way or remotely wrapped to the local modem.
Communications Facilities: Communication common carrier provided voiceband private line (non-switched) channel. type 3002 (or
equivalent) as described in the Bell System Technical Reference
PUB 41004. dated Oct.. 1973. NOTE: Machines with a serial
number prior to 13100 and a suffix prior to HZ with Multipoint
Tributary (#5101.5102) or POint-to-point (#6101.6102) feature
require the installation of an RPQ to operate on a basic (not conditioned) 3002 channel. Machines shipped from the plant after
June 1. 1976. do not require the RPQ. Conditioned lines may be
used but are not required.
Privately Owned
above.
Communications Facilities -- equivalent
to
Public Switched Networks
The customer must be advised that satisfactory data transmission
depends upon the characteristics of the particular switched network connection being used. Refer to M 2700 pages for further
details.
International Facilities: Transmission of data between the United
States and Canada on non-switched or switched facilities is supported. (For non-switched operation. the channel in Canada must
be a schedule 4. type 4.)
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (nonswitched) channel is by a cable. supplied with the 3872. which is
terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The
plug mates with a receptacle (WE 404B or 549A surface mount or
493A flush mount. or equivalent) which is connected to the channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communications
equipment and is. upon customer request. ordinarily furnished by
the telecommunication service supplier.)
If the 3872 is equipped with Switched Band Network Back-up
(#7951). another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable is
also terminated with a four prong plug and requires the aforementioned type of receptacle which is connected to the Data Access
Arrangement COT (WE 1000A or equivalent).
If the 3872 is equipped with Switched Network (#7941. #7942)
or Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952) a
cable is supplied with the feature which is terminated with spade
lugs for connection to the Data Coupler CBS (WE 1001 A. series 5
or later. or WE 1001F. or equivalent).
Related Equipment: The 3872 operates with IBM communications
products capable of 2400 bps operation ... see "Related
Equipment" under "Specify." Modem clocking must be used. The
IBM 3872 Modem must communicate with another appropriately
equipped 3872. or with an appropriately equipped IBM 2400 bps
Integrated Modem. The interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business
machine. If the 3872 is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate
(# 1091) feature. the interconnecting Auto-Call cable between the
business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business machine.
(3) Providing voice communications between modems to coordinate tests or re-equalization. The voice facility can be provided
by the 3872 Alternate Voice feature. Information concerning
the handset for the Alternate Voice feature is described in the
3872 Modem User's Guide. The voice facility must be located
such that an operator can use it while operating the controls
on the front of the modem.
(4) If the 3872 is to be attached to a non-IBM product. the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business machine.
(5) If the 3872 is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate
feature (#1091). the interconnecting Auto-Call cable between
the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the
business machine.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific System
Publication: IBM 3872 User's Guide. GA27-3058
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. 1-phase. 3-wire. 60 Hz): locking plug -#9880 for 115 V. #9884 for 208 V. #9886 for 230 V ... Nonlock plug -- #9881 for 11 5 V. #9885 for 208 V. #9887 for
230 V.
[2] Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication facility):
Specify one of the following for each telecommunication channel or network connection:
#9750 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a basic (control
station) 3872 modem. or one equipped with Multipoint Tributary (#5101). or Point-to-Point (#6101) feature. to a private
line (non-switched) channel.
#9751 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a basic (control
station) 3872 Second Modem (#6302) or second modem
equipped with Multipoint Tributary (#5102). or Point-to-Point
(#6102) feature. to a private line (non-switched) channel.
#9752 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a 3872 modem
equipped with Switched Network (#7941) to a switched telecommunication network.
#9753 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a 3872 Second
Modem (#6302) equipped with Switched Network (#7942) to
a switched telecommunication network.
#9754 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a 3872 modem
equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951) or
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952) to
a switched telecommunication network.
A 10-foot cable will be supplied. If a longer cable is required.
indicate 15. 20 or 25 feet as the quantity of the feature #
specified. NOTE:
orders to add the Switched Network
Back-up feature(s) (#7951 or #7952). to convert a private line
(non-switched) channel modem to Switched Network. or to
convert a Switched Network modem to private line (nonswitched) channel must include the telecommunication cord
specify number(s) compatible with the resultant modem configuration.
[3] Related Equipment:
one 3872 Attachment Feature Code from the table below must be specified for
each 3872. depending upon the unit to which it is attached.
NOTE: For attachment to 1130. System/3. System/32.
System/34. S/360 mdl 20. 5010. 5110 or 5230. refer to
General System Division.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of his
responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 pages and in the Installation Planning section of the 3872 User's Guide. GA27-3058. The
customer is responsible for:
(1) Private line (non-switched) channel -- arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to provide a type 3002 voice
grade data channel (or equivalent) as described under
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --- ---
- - ---
- - - -.---------_.-
3872 Modem
DP Machines
(conrd)
3872
Attachment #
#9502
Machine
1826
2025
2701
2703
2715-2
2772
2780
2845
2848
3115
3125
3135,3135-3
3138
3271
3274
3275
3276
3601,3602
3614
Non-IBM
RPQ Machines
PRICES:
M 3872.2
May 79
9504
9505
9506
9507
9508
9509
9510
9511
9527
9525
9512
9550
9513
9558
9514
9557
9532
9532
9520
9524
Mdl
3872
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50%
3872
Machine
Attachment #
3631,3632
#9560
3651-25/50/759534
3684
9572
3704
9516
3705
9515
3735
9517
3741-2/4
9526
3747
9526
3767
9537
3771
9540
3773
9541
3774
9542
3775
9543
3776
9544
3777
9528
3780
9521
3791
9535
4331
8101
8130
8140
9571
95u9
9567
9568
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$
$2,575
94
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
MMMC
$25.00
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
The basic 3872 Modem. with no additional fsature required, is
used at the control. station in a centralized multipoint network.
Additional capabilities/configurations are provided by the following
features.
ALTERNATE VOICE (#1051, 1052). Provides signalling capability and a socket on the operator panel into which a custome,
provided handset may be plugged permitting voice communications
with the distant 3872 Modem(s). Data cannot be simultaneously
transmitted with voice. A handset is not provided. See 3872
User's Guide for description of handset. #1051 - for basic modem ... #1052 -- for Second Modem (#6302). Maximum: One of
each. Limitations: # 1051 cannot be installed with Switched Network (#7941) ... #1052 cannot be installed with Switched Network (#7942). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: #1052
requires Second Modeni (#6302).
AUTOMATIC CALL ORIGINATE (#1091).
Permits automatic
origination of a call by the using machine equipped with an IBM
autocall feature. Provides control to the common carrier Data
Coupler Type CBS (or equivalent) to dial telephone numbers and
to provide on-hook/off-hook control. Note: Can only be used with
Rotary Dial System. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Second Modem (#6302) or Switched Network Backup (#7951, 7952).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Switched Network (#7941) on 3872 and an IBM Auto Call feature
on the using machine.
FAN-OUT (#3901). This feature allows attachment, to the 3872,
of up to three IBM Teleprocessing Machines at one location ... see
Specify [3] for applicable machines. Only one of the attached
machines may transmit at a time.
This feature may be used at a tributary station in a centralized
multipoint network. In this configuration, multipoint programming
discipline will provide the selection/control of the specified IBM
terminals without any additional user involvement.
This feature may also be used to allow up to three of the specified
IBM Multiplexers, Communications Controllers, Integrated Communications Adapters, or Communications Adapters on 4331s at a
central site to share the same 3872 Modem for back-up purposes.
In this case, although all of the machines attached to the 3872 will
receive the incoming data simultaneously, the user switchover
procedure must ensure that only one machine is sending.
Maximum: One. Li.mitations: Cannot be installed with Second
Modem (#6302) or Switched Network (#7941). Field Installation:
Yes.
MULTIPOINT TRIBUTARY (#5101, 5102). Used on each modem
attached to tributary stations in a centralized multipoint network to
compensate for line distortion between the control and tributary
station. Operator adjustment on front panel. #5101 - for basic
modem ... #5102 -- for Second Modem (#6302). Maximum: One
of each. limitation: #5101 cannot be installed with Point-to-Point
(#6101) or Switched Network (#7941) ... #5102 cannot be
installed with Point-to-Point (#6102) or Switched Network
(#7942). Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750 for feature
#5101 ... Telecommunication cord #9751 for feature #5102.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #5102 requires Second
Modem (#6302).
POINT-TO-POINT (#6101, 6102). Used on modems at each end
of a point-to-point private line (non-switched) channel to compensate for line distortion. #6101 -- for basic modem ... #6102 -- for
Second Modem (#6302). Maximum: One of each. Limitation:
#6101 cannot be installed with Multipoint Tributary (#5101) or
Switched Network (#7941) ... #6102 cannot be installed with
Multipoint Tributary (#5102) or Switched Network (#7942).
Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750 for feature #6101 ...
Field
Telecommunication cord #9751 for feature #6102.
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #6102 requires Second Modem
(#6302).
SECOND MODEM (#6302). Permits two modems, each to operate on a separate line, to be housed in the same stand-alone
cabinet. The two modems share the same power supply.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Only the following features are allowed on either or both modems -- Alternate Voice (#1051,
1052), Point-to-Point (#6101, 6102), Multipoint Tributary (#5101,
5102), or Switched Network (#7941, 7942). Field Installation:
Available at time of manufacture only.
SWITCHED NETWORK (#7941, 7942). Used for operation over
public switched network via the common carrier Data Coupler type
CBS (or equivalent). Automatic answering of incoming calls will be
performed by the modem. Automatic equalization is effected at the
beginning of each call. #7941 -- for basic modem ... #7942 -- for
Second Modem (#6302). Conditioning of the telecommunication
service local loop for transmission of data faster than 300 bps is
required. It can communicate with another 3872 equipped with
Switched Network (#7941 or #7942), with Switched Network
Back-up (#7951) or with Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952). Maximum: One of each. Limitations:
#7941 cannot be installed with Alternate Voice (#1051), Fan-Oul
(#3901). MultipOint Tributary (#5101), or Point-to-Point (#6101)
... #7942 cannot be installed with Alternate Voice (#1052), Multipoint Tributary (#5102), or Point-to-Point (#6102). Specify:
Telecommunication cord #9752 for feature #7941 ... Telecommunication cord #9753 for feature #7942. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: #7942 requires Second Modem (#6302).
SWllCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#795'1). Provides the capability of attaching the 3872 to the public switched network as a
back-up to the private line (non-switched) channel. It can communicate with another 3872 equipped with Switched Network (#7941
or #7942), with Switched Network Back-up (#7951), or with
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952). A
fixed compromise equalizer is provided for the back-up operation.
A front panel switch permits operator selection of either the prime
or the back-up facility. Both facilities cannot be used simultaneously.
Attachment to the switched network is made via the common
carrier Data Access Arrangement type CDT (or equivalent). Calls
must be established and answered manually. Note: To use this
feature, operator intervention at the modem is required. Operator
intervention, program modification, or both may be required on the
using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS, DOS/VS,
OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional
customer program routines will be required, in existing BTAM
programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-up feature. For additional information, see the 3872
User's Guide. Conditioning of the telecommunication service local
loop for transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required.
Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Second
Modem (#6302), or Switched Network features (#7941, 7942 or
7952).
Specify:
Telecommunication
cord
#9754.
Field
Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP WITH AUTOMATIC ANSWER
(#7952). Same as Switched Network Back-up (#7951) plus the
added capability of automatically answering incoming calls when
attached to a common carrier Data Coupler type CBS (or equivalent). Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the modem is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or
both may be required on the using system/terminal.
This leature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS, DOS/VS,
OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional
customer routines will be required, in existing BTAM programming,
to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-up
feature. Conditioning of the telecommunication service local loop
for the transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required. For
additional information, see the 3872 User's Guide. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Second Modem (#6302), or
Switched Network features (#7941. 7942 or 7951). Specify:
Telecommunication cord #9754. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------------------_.-
- -----3872 Modem
M 3872.3
May 79
DP Machines
(conrd)
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Alternate Voice - Basic
Alternate Voice - Second
Automatic Call Originate
Fan-Out
Multlpt Tributary - Basic
Multlpt Tributary - Second
Point-to-Point - Basic
Polnt-to-Polnt - Second
Second Modem
Switched Network - Basic
Switched Network - Second
Switched Network Back-up
Switched Network Back-up
with Automatic Answer
#1051
1052
1091
3901
5101
5102
6101
6102
6302
7941
7942
7951
$ 16
7952
$ 455 $
16
16
10
455
910
607
424
424
212
212
2,115
455
455
303
.50
.50
9.50
1.00
3.50
3.50
1.50
1.50
17.00
9.00
9.00
3.50
16
455
4.00
16
33
21
15
15
7
7
77
* Multipoint Control Modem.
t For Basic Modem.
tt For Second Modem.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- - - ---- --',===
':' =
M 3874.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3874 MODEM
Purpose: A 4800 bps modem, with half-speed capability, used to
provide communications products with the means for transmitting
data over common carrier provided voiceband private line (nonswitched) channels, equivalent privately owned channels or
switched telecommunication networks.
Highlights: Modem operation is possible in half-duplex or duplex
mode over 4-wire duplex facilities or half-duplex over 2-wire
switched telecommunication networks.
Data Rates: 4800 bps with back-up half speed.
Equalization: Automatic.
Operation: Switched network or multipoint control, multipoint
tributary, point-to-point on a private line (non-switched) channel.
See "Special Features."
Built-in Diagnostics: Included in each modem are the following
diagnostic features accessible to the operator: (1) The modem
may be WRAP TESTED independently of the using machine and
telecommunication channel
(2) It may be LINE TESTED with a
remote modem and telecommunication channel, independently of
the attached business machine. The test may be one way or
remotely wrapped to the local modem ". (3) Facility is provided
to allow the attached machine to initiate a local wrap test independently from the telecommunication channel via an interface
lead.
Communications Facilities: Communications common carrier
provided voiceband private line (non-switched) channel, type
3002, with C 1 conditioning (or equivalent) as described in the
Bell System Technical Reference PUB 41004 dated Oct., 1973.
Privately
above.
Owned
Communications
Facilities:
Equivalent
to
Public Switched Telecommunication Networks: The customer
must be advised that satisfactory data transmission depends on
the characteristics of the switched network connection being
used ... see M 2700 pages for further details.
International Facilities: Transmission of data between the United
States and Canada on non-switched or switched facilities is
supported. (For non-switched operation, the channel in Canada
must be a schedule 4, type 4, with 4A conditioning.)
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (nonswitched) channel is by a cable, supplied with the 3874, which is
terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The
plug mates with a receptacle (WE 404B or 549A surface mount
or 439A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected to the
channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communication
equipment and is, upon customer request, ordinarily furnished by
the telecommunication service supplier.)
If the 3874 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951)
another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable is also
terminated with a four prong plug and requires the aforementioned type of receptacle which is connected to the Data Access
Arrangement COT (WE 1000A or equivalent).
If the 3874 is equipped with Switched Network (#7941) or
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952) a
cable is supplied with the feature which is terminated with spade
lugs for connection to the Data Coupler CBS (WE 1001 A series 5
or later or WE 1001 F or equivalent).
Related Equipment: The 3874 operates with IBM communications products capable of 4800 bps ... see "Related Equipment"
under "Specify." Modem clocking must be used. The 3874
modem must communicate with another appropriately configured
3874 or IBM 4800 bps Integrated Modem. The interconnecting
cable between the business machine and the modem must be
supplied by the business machine. If the 3874 is equipped with
the Automatic Call Originate feature (# 1091), the interconnecting
Auto Call cable between the attached machine and the modem
must be supplied by the attached machine.
Also inform the telecommunication service supplier that the
speed of data transmission will be 4800 bps and that appropriate conditioning on the local loop is required. The customer
must be made aware that the use of local loops not properly
conditioned for the speed of data transmission or the use of
special switched facilities may result in unsatisfactory data
transmission.
(3) For attaching the IBM provided line cable to the common
carrier provided Data Access Arrangements.
(4) Providing voice communications between modems attached to
non-switched lines to coordinate tests. This voice facility can
be provided by 3874 Alternate Voice feature. Information concerning the handset for the Alternate Voice feature is described
in the 3874 Modem User's Guide. The voice facility must be
located such that an operator can use it while operating the
controls on the front of the modem.
(5) If the 3874 is to be attached to a non-IBM product, the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the business machine.
(6) If the 3874 is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate
feature (# 1091), the interconnecting Auto-Call cable between
the business machine and the modem must be supplied by the
business machine.
See M 2700 pages for additional customer responsibilities.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific system
Publication: IBM 3874 Modem User's Guide, GA33-0002.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug -#9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V.
[2] Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication facility):
Specify one of the following for each connection to a private
line (non-switched) channel and for each connection to a
switched telecommunication network ... see "Attachment to
Facilities."
#9750 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a 3874 modem
provided with Point-toPoint (#6101), Multipoint Control
(#5100), or Multipoint Tributary (#5101) features to a
private line (non-switched) channel.
#9754 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a 3874 modem
provided with Switched Network (#7941) or Switched
Network Backup with Automatic Answer (#7952) features
to a switched telecommunication network terminated by a
Data Coupler type CBS.
#9752 -- Telecommunication cord to connect a 3874 modem
provided with Switched Network Backup (#7951) to a
switched telecommunication network terminated by a Data
Access Arrangement type COT.
A 10-foot cable will be provided as standard. If a longer cable
is required, indicate 15, 20 or 25 feet as the quantity of the
feature # specified. Note:
orders to add the Switched
Network Backup feature (#7951 or #7952) or to convert a
non-switched modem to switched network or to convert a
switched network to non-switched channel must include the
telecommunication cord specify number(s) compatible with the
resultant modem configuration.
[3] Related Equipment:
one 3874 Attachment Feature # from the table below m'usl be specified for
each 3874, depending upon the unit to which it is to be attached. NOTE: For attachment to 1130, 5010, 5110, 5231,
System/3, System/32, System/34, or S/360 mdl 20, refer to
General Systems Division.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of his
responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 pages and in the Installation Planning Section of the 3874 User's Guide, GA33-0002.
The customer is responsible for:
(1) Private line (non-switched) channel -- arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to provide a type 3002 voice
grade data channel with C 1 conditioning (or equivalent) as
described under "Communication Channel Specifications" in
the 3874 User's Guide. Also arranging for the installation of
the appropriate receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities."
(2) Switched Telecommunication Network -- arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting
device as described in "Attachment to Facilities."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =------ --=--':' =
M 3874.2
May 79
DP Machines
(conI' d)
3874
Attachment #
Machine
#9502
1826
9504
2025
9505
2701
2703
9506
9507
2715-2
2772
9508
9509
2780
9527
3115
9525
3125
9512
3135,3135-3
3138
9550
3271
9513
3274
9558
9514
3275
9557
3276
9532
3601,3602
9532
3614
Non-IBM
9520
9524
RPQ Machine
3874 Modem
PRICES:
Mdl
3874
Machine
3874
Attachment #
3631/3632
#9560
3651-25/50/759534
3684
9572
3704
9516
3705
9515
3735
9517
3771
9540
3773
9541
3774
9542
3775
9543
3776
9544
3777
9547
3780
9521
3791
9535
4331
9571
8101
8130
8140
9569
9567
9568
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 170
$ 145
Purchase
MMMC
$3,570
$ 66
Plan Offering: B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: B
Purchase Option: 50% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
Prerequisite: One of the following special features must be installed: Multipoint Control (#5100), Multipoint Tributary (#5101),
Point-to-Point (#6101) or Switched Network (#7941).
MULTIPOINT CONTROL (#5100).
Used on each modem attached to a control station in a centralized multipoint network. Provides for automatic equalization of the private line (non-switched)
channel from up to six tributary stations. Operator controls on
front panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Point-to-Point (#6101), Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Switched
Network (#7941). Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750. Field
Installation: Yes.
MULTIPOINT TRIBUTARY (#5101). Used on each modem attached to tributary stations in a centralized multipoint network.
Provides for automatic equalization of the private line (nonswitched) channel from the control station. Operator controls on
front panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Multipoint Control (#5100), Point-to-Point (#6101), or Switched
Network (#7941). Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750. Field
Installation: Yes.
Used on modems at each end of a
POINT-TO-POINT (#6101).
point-to-point private line (non-switched) channel. Provides automatic equalization of the channel. Operator controls on front panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Multipoint
Control (#5100), Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Switched Network (#7941). Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750. Field
Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK (#7941). Used for operation over public
switched network via the common carrier Data Coupler type CBS
(or equivalent). Automatic answering of incoming calls will be
performed by the modem. Automatic equalization is effected at the
beginning of each call. It can communicate with another 3874
equipped with Switched Network (#7941), with Switched Network
Backup (#7951), or with Switched Network Backup with Automatic Answer (#7952). Conditioning of the telecommunication service
local loop for the transmission of data faster than 300 bps is
required ... see "Customer Responsibilities." Maximum: One.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Alternate Voice (#1051),
Multipoint Control (#5100), Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Pointto-Point (#6101). See "Programming" section of sales manual for
restricted configurations. Specify: Telecommunication cord #9754.
Field Installation: Yes.
The following features are optional to enhance the modem
function.
ALTERNATE VOICE (#1051). Provides signalling capability and
a socket on the operator panel into which a customer provided
handset may be plugged, permitting voice communications with the
distant 3874 modem(s). Data cannot be simultaneously transmitted
with voice. A handset is not provided. See 3874 User's Guide for
description of handset. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with Switched Network (#7941) ... cannot be used when
a non-switched line 3874 modem is in Switched Network Back-up
operation. Field Installation: Yes.
AUTOMATIC
CALL ORIGINATE
(#1091).
Permits
origination of a call by using machine equipped with an IBM Auto
Call feature. Provides control to the common carrier Data Coupler,
type CBS (or equivalent) to dial telephone numbers and to provide
on hook/off hook control. Note: Can only be used with Rotary Dial
System. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Switched Network Back-up (#7951), Switched Network Back-up
with Automatic Answer (#7952), or Fan-out (#3901). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Switched Network (#7941) and
an IBM Auto Call feature on the using machine.
FAN-OUT (#3901).
This feature allows attachment to the 3874
of up to three IBM teleprocessing machines at one location. See
"Specify" for applicable machines. Only one of the attached
machines may transmit at a time. The feature may be used at a
tributary station in a centralized multipoint network. In this configuration,
multipoint programming discipline will provide the
selection/control of the specified IBM terminals without any additional user involvement.
This feature may also be used to allow up to three of the specified
IBM Multiplexers, Communications Controllers, Integrated Communications Adapters, or Communications Adapters on 4331 s at a
central site to share the same 3874 modem for back-up purposes.
In this case, although all of the machines attached to the 3874 will
receive the incoming data simultaneously, the user switchover
procedure must ensure that only one machine is sending.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Automatic
Call Originate (#1091). Is supported with restrictions by
3704/3705 NCP ... see "Programming" section of sales manual.
Field Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capability of attaching the 3874 modem to a public switched network as
a back-up to the prime leased facility. It can communicate at
4800/2400 bps with another 3874 equipped with Switched Network (#7941), Switched Network Back-up (#7951), or Switched
Network Back-up with Auto Answer (#7952). Attachment to the
switched network is made via the common carrier Data Access
Arrangement type COT (or equivalent). Calls must be established
and answered manually.
Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the modem is
required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both may
be required on the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS, DOS/VS,
OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional
customer program routines will be required in existing BT AM
programming to fully utilize the capabilities of feature #7951.
Conditioning of the telecommunication service local loop for the
transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required ... see
"Customer Responsibilities." Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with Switched Network (#7941), Switched Network
Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952), or Automatic Call Originate (#1091). See "Programming" section in sales manual for
restricted configurations. Specify: Telecommunication cord #9752.
Field Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP WITH AUTOMATIC ANSWER
(#7952). Same as Switched Network Back-up (#7951) plus the
added capability of automatically answering incoming calls. Requires attachment to a common carrier Data Coupler type CBS (or
equivalent). Conditioning of the telecommunication service local
loop for the transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required
... see "Customer Responsibilities." Note: To use this feature,
operator intervention at the modem is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both may be required on the using
system/terminal. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with Switched Network (#7941), Switched Network Back-up
(#7951),
or
Automatic
Call
Originate
(#1091).
See
"Programming" section in sales manual for restricted configurations. Specify: Telecommunication cord #9754. Field Installation:
Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
#1051 $ 18
Alternate Voice
Automatic Call Originate 1091
36
3901
29
Fan-out
5100
42
Multipoint Control
18
Multipoint Tributary
5101
18
Point-to-Point
6101
Switched Network
7941
36
Switched Network Bk-up 7951
24
Switched Network Back-up
with Automatic Answer 7952
29
automatic
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 15
31
25
36
15
15
31
20
25
$
383
765
638
893
383
383
765
510
$ .50
4.50
2.00
11.00
5.50
2.00
6.00
4.50
638
4.50
-------- -----------------_.- -----
M 3874.3
May 79
DP Machines
3874 Modem
(cont'd)
CONFIGURATION
i
3874
!
I MOiD~
~p
i
<7L_
y
*
"1
I
SWi"h.d'I-_--------,
Ne~twork
(7941)
,
Ni
I,
.------< this a SNP
COT
*.
• SWItched Network Prime Operation
Switcl1ed Network Back-up
Specify:
,. Power Cord
Cord
I3.2. Telecommunication
Related EqUIpment
L..-
J
e
I
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - ----==-.=
- ------=
~
M 3875.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3875 MODEM
Purpose: Provides communications terminals with the means of
transmitting data at 7200 bps, with half-speed capability, over
common carrier provided voiceband private line (non-switched)
channels, equivalent privately owned channels, or, at 3600 bps,
with half-speed capability, over switched telecommunication networks as a back-up to the private line (non-switched) charmel.
Highlights: Modem operation is possible in half-duplex or duplex
mode over 4-wire duplex facilities or half-duplex mode wi,th the
Switched Network Back-up feature over switched telecommunication networks.
Data Rates -- 7200 bps with back-up half-speed on private line
(non-switched) channels ... 3600 bps with back-up half-speed on
switched telecommunication networks.
Equalization -- manually adjustable by an operator on private line
(non-switched) channels. Fixed compromise on back-up switched
telecommunication networks.
Operation -- Multipoint control, multipoint tributary, point-to-point
on private line (non-switched) channel. Switched telecommunication network as a back-up to the private line (non-switched) channel. See "Special Features."
Built-in Diagnostics -- included in each modem are the following
diagnostic features accessible to the operator:
- The modem may be WRAP TESTED independently of the
using machine and telecommunication channel.
- The modem may be LINE TESTED with a remote end modem
and telecommunication channel independently of the attached business machines. The test may be one way or remotely wrapped back to the local modem.
Communications Facilities: Communications Common Carrier
provided voiceband private line (non-switched) channel, type 3002,
with C2 conditioning (or equivalent) as described in the Bell SyStem Technical Reference PUB 41004, dated Oct., 1973.
Normally the telecommunication service defined in the preceding
statement provides for satisfactory operation of the 3875. However, there may be unusual circumstances where the c;:hannel characteris!:cs exceed the tolerance level of the 3875. Where these
characteristics cause an unacceptable error rate, the customer
may request the telecommunication service supplier to provide 01
conditioning in addition to the C2 conditioning. 01 conditioning
may not be available in some locations. For this situation the
customer may request the telecommunication service supplier to
provide alternate routing or special engineering effort.
01 conditioning is NOT available under existing tariffs for multipoint networks. If an unacceptable error rate is encountered, the
alternatives available to the customer are to request the telecommunication service supplier to provide re-routing or special engineering effort.
The telecommunication service supplier may not always be able to
supply alternate routing or special engineering effort.
The operation of a multipoint network is more critical of line characteristics due to the cumulative effect of all the segments in the
network. Actual performance cannot be accurately predicted but
can only be ,established after the installation of the equipment.
The customer must be made aware of these exposures and the
available alternatives prior to ordering the equipment. See M 2700
pages - "Customer Responsibilies."
Privately Owned
above.
Communications Facilities -- equivalent to
Public Switched Network
Thtl customer must be advised that satisfactory data transmission
depends on the characteristics of the switched telecommunication
network connection being used ... see M 2700 pages for further
details.
International Facilities: Transmission of data between United
States and Canada is supported. (In Canada a Schedule 4, Type
4, channel with 4B conditioning is required. The equivalent of 01
conditioning is not available in Canada.)
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (nonswitched) channel is by a cable, supplied with the 3875, which is
terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B' or equivalent). The
plug mates with a receptacle (WE 404B or 549A surface mount or
493A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected to the channel. (The' receptacle is a conventional item of communication
equipment and is, upon customer request, ordinarily furnished by
the telecommunication service supplier.)
of receptacle which is connected to the Data Access Arrangement
type COT (WE 1000A or equivalent).
If the 3875 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up with
Automatic Answer (#7952) a cable is supplied with the feature
which is terminated with spade lugs for connection to the Data
Coupler type CBS (WE 1001 A series 5 or later or WE 1001 F or
equivalent).
Related Equipment: The 3875 Modem operates with the binary
synchronous control adapters of the IBM machines listed in the
table under "Specify." Modem clocking must be used. See M
2700 pages for facilities description.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of his
responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 pages and in the Installation Planning section of the 3875 User's Guide, GA33-0001. The
customer is responsible for:
(1) Private line (non-switched) channel - arranging for the communication common carrier to provide a voiceband private line
(non-switched) channel, type 3002, with C2 conditioning as
defined in the Bell System Technical Reference PUB 41004
"Data Communications Using Voiceband
Private
Line
Channels" (October, 1973). Arrange for the installation of the
appropriate receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities."
(2) Public switched telecommunication network -- arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting
device as described in "Attachment to Facilities" and for
attaching the IBM provided cable to the connecting device.
Also inform the telecommunication service supplier that the
speed of data transmission will be 3600 bps and that appropriate conditioning of the local loop is required. The customer
must be made aware that the use of local loops not appropriately conditioned for the speed of data transmission or the use
of special switched facilities may result in unsatisfactory data
transmission.
(3) Providing voice communications between control and tributary
stations to coordinate test or re-equalize. This voice facility
can be provided by the Alternate Voice feature. Information
concerning the handset for the Alternate Voice feature is described in the 3875 Modem User's Guide.
(4) When the 3875 is to be attached to other than an IBM machine, that business machine must provide the interconnecting
cable between the connector or digital equipment and the
modem.
PREREQUISITE: See "Teleprocessing Systems" in GI section of
sales manual.
Bibliography: GA24-3089
Publication: IBM 3875 User's Guide, GA33-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): For locking
plug - #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230
V. For non-lock plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or
#9887 for 230 V.
[2] Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication facility):
Specify one of the following for each connection to private line
(non-switched) channel or to a switched telecommunication
network.
#9750 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3875 modem
to a private line (non-switched) channel.
#9031 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3875 modem
equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951)
to a switched telecommunication network.
#9032 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3875 modem
equipped with Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952) to a switched telecommunication network.
A 10 foot cable will be supplied as standard. If a longer cable
is required, indicate 15, 20 or 25 feet as a quantity of the
orders to add Switched
feature number specified. NOTE:
Network Back-up (features #7951, #7952) must include the
telecommunication cord specify number for the appropriate
cord.
[3] Related Equipment Attachment:
one
3875 attachment feature must be specified with each 3875
order. NOTE: For attachment to System/3, System/32,
System/34 and S/360 mdl 20, see General Systems Division.
If the 3875 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951)
another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable is also terminated with a four prong plug and requires the aforementioned type
Not to be reproduced without written oermission.
--------- - -----------------_.3875 MODEM
M 3875.2
May 79
DP Machines
(conI' d)
3875
Attachment #
Machine
3875
Attachment #
Machine
3275
3276
3601/3602
3631/3632
3704
3705
3776
3777
3780
3791
4331
5010
2701
#9505
9506
2703
9508
2772
2780
9509
9527
3115
3125
9525
3135 (2)
9512
3135-3 (3)
9512
3138 (4)
9550
9513
3271
3274
9558
9520
Non-IBM
RPQ Machines 9524
#9514
9557
9532
9560
9516
9515
9544
9528
9521
9535
9571
9531
9569
9567
9568
8101
8130
8140
#7952 -- for attachment to common carrier Data Coupler type
CBS. Calls must be established manually and may
be answered either manually or automatically.
Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the modem is
required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both may
be required on the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS, DOS/VS,
OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional
customer program routines will be required, in existing BTAM
programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-up feature. Conditioning of the telecommunication local
loop for transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Telecommunication cord #9031 for #7951 ... Telecommunication cord #9032 for
#7952. Prerequisite: Point-to-Point (#6101), Multipoint Tributary
(#5101), or Control Station Equalizer (#1601).
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
(2) See "Limitations" in M 3135 pages.
(3) See "Limitations" in M 3135-3 pages.
(4) See "Limitations" in M 3138 pages.
Prices:
Mdl
3875
Rental Plan: B
Warranty: B
MAC/MRC
Purchase MMMC
$ 269
$7,275
Purchase Option: 50%
Useful Life Category: 2
$76.00
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 2
Alternate Voice
Control Station Equalizer
Fan Out
Multipoint Tributary
Point-to-Point
Switched Network Back-up
DAA type COT
DC type CBS
#1051 $ 16
1601
28
3901
28
5101
84
6101
28
7951
7952
SPECIAL FEATURES
The basic 3875 Modem (#9101) is used as the control station in
a centralized multipoint network. Specify: #9101 and telecommunication line cord #9750.
Additional capabilities/configurations are provided by the following
features.
ALTERNATE VOICE (#1051). Provides signalling capability, and
a jack on the operator panel into which the customer provided
handset may be plugged, permitting voice communication with the
other end. Data cannot be simultaneously transmitted with voice. A
handset is not provided. See 3875 User's Guide for description of
handset. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
CONTROL STATION EQUALIZER (#1601). Provides the capability for a multipoint control station to operate with the Switched
Network Back-up (#7951, 7952) features. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Multipoint Tributary (#5101)
or Point-to-Point (#6101). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Control Station Specify #9101.
FAN OUT (#3901).
Permits attachment, to one 3875, of up to
three business machines at one location. Only one of the machines may transmit at a time. The feature may be used at a
tributary station or on a multipoint configuration, in which case the
BSC
multipoint
line control
procedure will
handle the
selection/operation without any additional user involvement. The
feature may also be used to share the modem between two or
three multiplexers at a central site for back-up purposes. In this
case, though both multiplexers may receive the incoming data, the
user switchover procedures must ensure that both multiplexers are
not transmitting simultaneously. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
N
MULTIPOINT TRIBUTARY (#5101).
Used on each modem at
tributary stations in a centralized multipoint network to compensate
for channel distortion between the control modem and tributary
modem; Not required on the modem at the control station. Equalizer adjustments are on the operator panel. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Point-to-Point (#6101) or
Control Station Specify #9101 or Control Station Equalizer
(#1601). Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Telecommunication
cord #9750.
POINT-TO-POINT (#6101).
Used on modems at each end of a
point-to-point private line' (non-switched) channel to compensate
for the channel distortion. Equalizer adjustments are on the operator panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Multipoint Tributary (#5101) or Control Station Specify #9101 or
Control Sta.tion Equalizer. (#1601). Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750.
1>WITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951, 7952).
Provides the
capability of attaching the 3875 to a switched telecommunication
network as a back-up to the private line (non-switched) channel.
Operation is at 3600 bps with half-speed capability. A fixed compromise equalizer is provided for the back-up operation. A front
panel switch permits operator selection of either facility or speed.
Both facilities cannot be used simultaneously.
#7951 -- for attachment to the common carrier Data Access
Arrangement type COT. Calls must be established
and answered manually.
Nnl In he reoroduced without written permission.
67
67
$
455
758
758
2,270
758
$.50
7.00
3.50
15.00
7.00
1,820
1,820
4.50
4.50
--------- ----------= =- =':' =
M 3880
May 79
DP Machines
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 3880 STORAGE CONTROL
Prupou: Control unit for 3340/3344, 3333/3330, 3350 and 3370 direct
access storage.
The 3880 provides two independent control unit paths, called Storage
Directors. Each Storage Director provides for attachment of either up to
four 3340 mdl A2s, or up to four 3370 mdl Als, or up to four 3333s (any
model) and 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs in any combination ... see DASD Attachment Configuration under "SjecifY" below and 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344,
3350 and 3370 in "Machines.
Highlights: File organization and format are under program control, allowing random or sequential. processing of files. Multiple
requesting allows multiple overlapped operations on drives attached to each Storage Director. Data integrity is provided through
extensive error detection and correction capabilities. Advanced
logic and improved fault detection capability provide high availability.
Systems AttllCiunenu: The following DASD and Processor attachments
are supported:
Processor(s)
DASD
4341
3330, 3333, 3340
3344, 3350, 3370
S/370
Mdls 145, 145-3,148, 155-11, 158,
158-3,165-11,168,168-3
3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350
3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350
3031,3032,3033
Prerequisites: An available control unit position on a block. multiplexer
channel for each Storage Director. One unshared subchannel is required
for each logical address attached to a block multiplexer channel. On a
4341 Processor, Storage Directors attaching 3350 or 3370 DASD must be
attached to a 2.0 megabyte block multiplexer channel ... Storage Directors attaching 3330/3333 or 3340/3344 DASD may be attached to either
a 1.0 or a 2.0 megabyte block multiplexer channel. On a S/370 mdl
165-11 or 168, attachment is to the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). To attach the Two
Channel Switch - Pair (#8170) to a configuration control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#6149). To
attach the Two Channel Switch - Pair, Additional (#8171) to a configuration control panel. Maximum: One. Field Install4tion: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH - PAIR (#8170). To attach each Storage
Director to a second channel. Four unique channels may be
switched, two to each Storage Director or the same two channels
may be switched to both Storage Directors. The channels to be
switched may be on the same or different processors. An available control unit pOSition is required on each channel... see
"Prerequisites" above. Switching is under program control. Each
Storage Director can be dedicated to a single channel by means
of an enable/disable switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH - PAIR, ADDITIONAL (#8171). Adds
switching for two additional channels per Storage Director on a 3880
equipped with a Two Channel Switch - Pair (#8170), providing four
channel switch capability for both Storage Directors. Up to eight unique
channels may be switched, four to each Storage Director. Each Storage
Director can be dedicated to a subset of the four attached channels by
means of an enable/disable switch. Maximum; One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequuite: Two Channel Switch - Pair (#8170). Limitation:
When #8171 Is installed, 3340/3344s and 3370s may not be attached.
Special Feature Prices:
MLC
MRC 2 Yr
NC
Remote Switcll AttllCiunellt #6148 NC
Remote Swtcll AttllC", Add'i 6149 NC
NC
Two Chnl Switch - Pr
8170 $178 $150
400
Two Clutl Swtcll - Pr. Add" 8171
470
Maximum: For configurations attaching 3340/3344 DASD, the
Storage Director uses 64 contiguous addresses irrespective of the
number of drives attached. The 3340 model A2s on the first and
third strings may attach up to three 3340 model 81s/82s and/or
3344s in any combination. The 3340 model A2 on the second
string may attach up to three 3340 model 815/825. The 3340
model A2 on the fourth string may attach one 3340 model Bl or B2 if any
3344 is attached to the first and/or third strings; it may attach three 3340
model Bl s/Bls if there are no 3344s in the first or third strings.
For a Storage Director attaching 3370 DASD, a maximum of four
3370 model A1s, each with up to three 3370 model 81s may be
attached.
For a Storage Director attaching 3330/3333/3350 DASD, a maximum of
four 3333 mdlls, 3333 model11s, and/or 3350 model A2s/A2Fs in any
combinations may be attached. Each string with a 3333 model 1 or 11
may attach up to three 3330 model ls/2s or 11 s. Each string with a 3350
model A2/A2F may attach up to three 3350 model B2s/B2Fs or up to
two 3350 model Bls/B2Fs and a 3350 model C2/C2F.
Limitations
1. See 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3370 for system support limitations.
2.
3350 DASD attached to the 3880 must be in Native Mode format;
3330 models 1 and 11 Compatibility Mode are not supported.
Bibliography: GA26-1661
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9915 for 240 V. Note: 240 VAC is compatible with 230 VAC
systems.
•
• DASD Attachment Configuration: Two of the following must
be specified; one for each Storage Director. The same specify
feature may be specified twice. #9190 for 3340/3344, #9191
for 3370, or #9192 for 3330/3333/3350.
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062 for
sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, or #9065 for pebble gray.
•
Prices:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
MMMC/
AMMCR
$62,350
$160
$1,704 $1,450
3880
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Machine Group: 8
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 60%
Warranty: 8
Useful life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Initial Period of Maintenance Svc: 3 mos. Upper limit Percent: 5%
• Diskette-only specify feature. 'No fee when ordered at time of manufacture. $290 on
pun:hascd machines when attachment specify features are chanJcd via MES.
[reverse side is blank]
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
NC
NC
$6,450
17,200
NC
NC
$10
35
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - ----= - - :§~5:
M 3881.1
May 79
DP Machines
3881
OPTICAL MARK READER
Purpose: Reads machine printed and/or hand marked data online
into S/370 mdls 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148,
155 II and 158, or a 3031, 3032, 4331 or 4341 Processor, or
offline to either of two magnetic media: diskette or compatible
9-track magnetic tape via a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit m}ll 1.
For possible use with System/3, see GSD
manual.
Model 1
For use with a S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3,
138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155 II or 158, a 3031,3032,
4331, or 4341 Processor.
Model 2
Magnetic tape output via a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit
mdl1.
Model 3
Output data written on IBM Diskette.
Highlights: The 3881 is a high speed optical mark reader. Data
sheets are fed from a hopper with a 600-sheet capacity, through
the reading area and directed to one of two output stackers. The
main stacker has a capacity of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected
errors are directed to a separate stacker with a 100-sheet capacity. Documents are stacked in the same sequence as they were
entered in the hopper.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencils, or by a 3203, a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer indl 1 or 2
with a 52 or 63 character type bar with arrangement A, H or K,a
1443 mdl N1 or 2203 Printer mdl A1 with 52 or 63 character type
bar, a 3211 Printer, or a 5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print
chains or trains, the 1443/2203 type bar, or the 3216 Interchangeable Train Cartridge must be equipped with an enlarged
dash which replaces the standard dash ... see "Type Catalog."
Data Sheets: 3" x 3" to 9" x 12" ... up to 2,480 mark positions
printed on a side. Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows of
40. positions on .2" centers for printer compatibility. Vertical spacing is up to 6 to the inch for printer compatibility. Rows and columns can be grouped into various combinations to form fields for
the recording of source data.
Format Control Sheet: Used to load format control information
into the 3881. Format control will define:
- The area of the input data sheet which is to be read.
- The marks allowed or discrimination required within each
area.
- The sequence of the marking positions which make up the
marking matrices.
- The output desired (numeric, alpha, alphameric or multiple
mark format).
- The timing mark count which is expected on the sheets to be
processed.
- BCD Read (optional feature) requirements.
From one to six formats, each conSisting of one or more Format
Control Sheets, are read by the 3881 at the beginning of a job.
After reading the last Format Control Sheet, the data sheets of the
job to be processed are loaded in the 3881.
S/370 or 4300 Processors: Documents are read under computer
program control with speeds varying up to 6,000 documents/hour
and 4,000 -- 8-1/2" pages/hour. Data is transferred to the CPU
one page at a time on a fully buffered interrupt basis.
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit: Documents are read under control of
the 3881 at speeds varying up to 5,400 documents/hour and
3,700 -- 8-1/2" x II" pages/hour. The 3881 reads and fully
buffers a document after which the data from the· document is
written as one record on tape. An optical feature, Dual DenSity,
permits output at either 1 600 bpi PE or 800 bpi NRZI.
Diskette: Documents are read under control of the 3881 at
speeds varying up to 5,700 documents/hour (3" by 3") -- and
3,800 pages/hour (8-1/2" x 11".
The diskette drive and its control function are install&d within the
3881 mdl 3. Each magnetic diskette has a storage capacity of up
to 1 ,898 data records (128 characters each) with as many as 19
data sets per diskette. The contents of each document read by
the 3881 is written within one data record (a maximum of up to
128 characters). The diskette media written by the 3881 is compatible with such devices as the 3741, 3742, 3747 and the 3540.
PREREQUISITES:
Model 1 -- For S/370 mdls 115 and 125, an available control
unit position on the Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... see 3115
and 3125. For 8/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148,
155 II, 158, or a 3031 or 3032 Processor, an available position
on a byte multiplexer channel ... see 3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145,
3145-3, 3148,3155, 3158, 3031 or 3032. For a 4331 or 4341
Processor, an available position on a byte multiplexer channel ...
see 4331 or 4341. One 3881 can be attached.
Model 2 - A 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 equipped wltn
either Single Density (#3211) or Dual Density '(#3221) ... see
3410.
Model 3 - None.
Supplies: For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 1136940 or
1136430 on the 1403 (all models) and 1136430 on the 3203;
422536 on the 1443/2203; 1136964 on the 3211; 1136990 on
the 5203, or. equivalent ribbons capable of producing accepatable
marks. For non-readable background printing, use ribbon 419101,
or equivalent. Additional diskettes can be ordered
Format Control Sheets: 100 are provided with each 3881 ...
additional pads of 50 may be ordered
(GX21-9168).
Manuals: 3881 Reference Manual, GA21-9143 ... 3881 Systems
Design Guide, GC20-1751.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #990240r 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system or
3410 voltage. FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
[2]
Invalid Marking Condition Code: #9301 for Hex 3F
(unprintable), or #9302 for Hex 7C (printable). FIELD
INSTALLATION: Yes.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. FIELD INSTALLATION:
Yes.
[4] S/370 Adapter: #9551. Required when a 3881 mdl 1 is to be
attachedto a S/370 or a 4331 or 4341 Processor. FIELD
INSTALLATION: Yes.
[5] System/3 Adapter: #9552. For details, see GSD
manual.
[6] Kickstrips: #9431 ... if desired.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3881
1
2
3
$1,504
1,369
1,657
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$1,280
1,165
1,410
$51,390
46,800
59,940
$138
109
131
Plan Offering: Plari A,' Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: A
Metering: Mdl 1 - I/O Unit (Online)
Per Call: 2
Mdl 2 - Meter on 3410
Useful Life Category: 2
Mdl 3 - Meter on 3881
Warranty:B
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termin,ation Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable ... must be serial number 20001
or above for field upgrade to Model 3.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 2 to Model 1 $ 4,590
Model 2 to Model 3
13,140
Model 1 to Model 3
8,550
SPECIAL FEATURES
BCD READ (#1471).
Provides, In addition to the basic read
head, a second 1 2-position read head which allows the reading of
high-density, preprinted binary coding. These heads will read as
markS', digit "ones", the character "I" or a vertical bar (special
character). Each BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) character read will
be translated into its equivalent numeric EBCDIC code and transmitted to the CPU, the magnetic tape ur.:t, or diskette one byte per
character. Five of the twelve positions may contain BCD information which is weighted 1-2-4-8 parity from the reference (aligned)
edge. The first row of BCD data following the start BCD Field Mark
must indicate which 5 of the 1 2 positions will contain BCD data for
that field. If an invalid BCD character is read or an even parity
error is detected, an invalid marking condition code is sent to the
CPU, diskette, or magnetic tape unit. Field Installation: Yes.
DOCUMENT COUNTERS (#3450).
Provide.s two 5-position
counters to be incremented by one .of the documents processed
by the 3881. Counters can be manually reset to zero. Counter 1
increments by 1 for each accepted document ... Counter 2 increments by 1 for each selected document. Field Installation: Yes.
DUAL DENSITY (#3550). [Model 2 only] Permits the 3881 to
write on the 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit in either 800 bpi NRZI or
1600· bpi Phase Encoded modes. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Dual Density (#3221) on the 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 1.
Not to be reproduced withoutwriUen permission.
----
------- ---.:. =-: == ';" ==
M 3881.2
May 79
OP MachineS
3881 Optical Mark Reader (conI' d)
EXPANDED STORAGE (#3801). Provides for an additional 512
bytes of memory which may be required in those situations where
the number of formats. fields and characters processed exceed
the maximum number of positions available within the basic data
store. Maximum: One. Field In8tallatlon: Yes. The formula for .the
determination of this condition is as follows:
5(F + n) + BCD Bytes + Normal Bytes + S + I-E
E = 435 for 3881 mdls 1 and 2, or 307 for 3881 mdl 3.
Whel'll: F .;. Number of instruction fields used on all Format
Control Sheets loaded.
n = Number of different formats used with the alternate
format capability (from 1 to 6).
S - 7 if Serial Numbering (#6451) is installed and is
being used -- otherwise, S - O.
I - Total number of bytes required to store image format
data.
SERIAL NUMBERING (#6451). A device for printing consecutive
serial numbers on the form being processed. Will print 7-digit
number (2-digit batch and 5-digit serial number) which can be
manually set to zero or any desired setting. A reading of the
counter may be obtained and entered into the 3881 logic via a
marked Serial Number Card. Various options exist for the printing
of the number. A control switch provides either selective serial
numbering based on stacker selection, or a 7-digit batch number
without unit advancing. Concurrent with printing, the number will
be transmitted to the CPU or the output tape unit or the diskette.
Supplle8: Ribbon - uses IBM purple ribbon, 1136844 or equivalent.
Serial Number Card -- packets of 1 00
may be ordered
(SX21-9169). Field
In8tallatlon: Yes.
Special Feature Prlce8:
BCD Read
Document Counter8
Dual Den81ty
Expanded Storage
Serial Numbering
ETPI
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr
#1471 $ 61
22
3450
3550 156
3801
61
6451 183
$ 52
19
133
52
156
Purcha8e. MMMC
$2,150
853
5,410
2,150
6,325
$ 1.50
2.00
.50
.. 50
25.00
Document In8pection Gauge - one is furnished with each
3881 as a Customer Engineering tool. Used for checking printing alignment on data sheets. Additional gauges, PIN 2450145,
are $35 each
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3886.1
May 79
DP Machines
3886 OPTICAL CHARACTER READER
to document sizes, weights, and combinations thereof. These are
discussed in SRL GA21-9148.
Purpose: Optically reads OCR-A font and OCR-B font machine
printed numeric digits, alphabetic characters, and handprinted
numeric digits from a wide variety of forms. Attaches online to any
virtual storage S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor, or offline
to the 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 which provides compatible
9-track magnetic tape.
Model 1 For use with any virtual storage S/370 Processor; or
any 4300 Processor.
Supplies -- providing maximum flexibility in background ink colors
and intensities requires that ribbons used for printing 3886 input
are carefully selected. The following, or their equivalents, should be
used: For Film Ribbon Selectric 1136310 or 1136391 ... for Fabric
Ribbon Selectric 1136138 ... for 1403 (all models) 1136430 ... for
3211 ribbon 1136627 for 20-24 lb. Bond and 1136626 for all
heavier papers ... for 3203 (all mdls) 1136430 ... for 5211 rndl 2
1299243. Ribbons not having similiar characteristics may result in
reduced recognition performance and/or reduced ribbon life.
Model 2 For use offline with a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1.
PREREQUISITES:
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Highlights: The 3886 is a general purpose optical character recognition reader designed to meet a broad range of data entry requirements. It will read multiple lines of print from forms ranging in size
from 3 to 9 inches wide (direction of printing) and from 3 to 12
inches long. Allowable weights range from 16# to card stock ... see
" Documents and Printing."
Forms enter the 3886 from the input hopper which has a capacity
of one inch of forms. The forms are advanced line by line
(maximum 3 lines per inch) past a read station which incorporates a
total solid state scanning system to collect character images. These
images are analyzed by recognition programs within the 3886
recognition and control processor. After a complete line has been
recognized, certain user specified editing and output formatting
functions take place. The line output is then transmitted to the
S/370, any 4300 Processor. or to a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl
1.
After the complete form has been read it is directed to one of two
output stackers, each having a capacity of one inch of forms.
The recognition, machine control, and FE diagnostic microprograms
for the 3886 are supplied on an internal direct access storage
device. The use of these programs singly or in combination is
dependent on the configuration of the 3886 ... see "Configurator."
Input from several different sources can be read on the 3886. The
"Table of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices" below
shows the characters which are acceptable from typewriters. high
speed printers, lithograph. or, in the case of Numeric Handwriting,
a pencil.
Model 1 -- the online 3886 mdl 1 provides buffered timeindependent attachment to S / 370 mdl 115 and 125 via an optional
multiplexer channel, or to S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3.
148, 155 II, 158. 165 II. and 168 via byte multiplexer. block multiplexer or selector channels, or to a 3031, 3032, 3033. 4331 or
4341 Processor via byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channels.
Forms are read and other 3886 fUflctions are performed under
S/370 or 4300 Processor program control. The basic 3886 mdl 1
contains 24K bytes of Instruction Storage for machine control and
recognition microprogram storage.
Model 2 -- the offline 3886 mdl 2 operates independently of any
Processor. It produces compatible 9-track magnetic tape output via
the attachment of a 3410 Magnetic Tape. Unit mdl 1. The user
indicates form characteristics and processing requirements with
line / Field and Job Specification Sheets. These are translated on a
special 3886 run into the necessary Format Control information,
and then stored on the internal DASD for subseq·uent use.
Up to eight different form layouts (all one size) can be intermixed
within a batch (run). Certain editing and validation functions normally performed by the host Processor are also provided. These
include self-check digit (Modulus 10) calculation, column or crossfoot total verification, and field to field comparison. The results of
these functions can be specified to control stacker selection, Serial
Numbering and line Marking features if they are installed ... see
"Special Features." The basic 3886 mdl 2 contains 32K bytes of
Instruction Storage for machine control and recognition microprogram storage.
Speed -- document throughput depends upon 3886 model, document length, number and type of characters read, the amount of
output editing and formatting specified, and the user S/370 or
4300 Processor program (model 1).
On the model 1 speeds range from approximately 5,800 three-inch
long single line 8 character machine printed turnaround documents
per hour, to approximately 330 typewritten 8-1/2" x 11" pages
with 2,262 characters (29 lines of 78 characters).
On the model 2. speeds for the same forms range from approximately 5,200 documents to approximately 300 pages per hour. SRL
GA21-9148 contains formulas which should be used to determine
throughput for specific forms.
Documents and Printing -- the input forms and printing to be
read by the 3886 must conform to the established specifications
described in SRL GA21-9148. Only those ribbons (see "Supplies")
and background inks specifically meeting the outlined spectral.
criteria will give satisfactory performance. Certain restrictions apply
Model 1 -- an available control unit position on the Multiplexer
Channel (#5248) of a S/370 mdl 115 or 125, or a byte multiplexer, block multiplexer or selector channel of a S/370 mdl 135,
135-3, 138, 145. 145-3, 148. 155 II, 158, 165 II. 168, or a byte
multiplexer or block multiplexer channel on a 3031. 3032, 3033.
4331 or 434l.
Model 2 -- a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 ... if Single Density
(#3211) is on the 3410, a Single Density, Tape Adapter (#6490) is
required on the 3886 ... if Dual Density (#3221) is on the 3410. a
Dual Density. Tape Adapter (#6485) is required on the 3886. See
" Special Features."
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 4-wire. 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V. or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage. FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
[2) Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue. #9045
for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3) Upending Kit: #9840. if required ... loan basis on initial. machine
order only. remains property of IBM. Dimensions will be
29-1/2" wide. 60" long and 76" high.
[4) 3211/5211 Compatibility: #9701. if required ... only if predominantly reading 3211 or 5211 generated documents.
ETP/
MLC
MAC/
PRICES: Mdl
MRC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
3886
1
2
$2.591
2.791
$2.205
2.375
$83.520
89.910
$523
523
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: B
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Metering: Mdl 1 -- I/O Unit (Online)
Mdl 2 --I/O Unit (Offline)
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper limit Percent: 0%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $6.390
SPEC~L
FEATURES
DATA STORAGE. ADDITIONAL (#3210).
OCR-B Font and
Numeric handprinting recognition require this feature to handle the
more complex character shapes which appear in these fonts.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
HOPPER AND STACKER CAPACITY. ADDITIONAL (#4520).
The standard hopper and two stackers on the 3886 each have a
capacity of one inch of forms. This feature adds the motors. sensors. etc.. to increase that capacity to approximately 4 inches in
each. Field Installation: Yes.
INSTRUCTION STORAGE. ADDITIONAL (#4610). The recognition microprograms for alphameric machine printed fonts and
Numeric Handprinting require storage capacity greater than the
basic models of the 3886. as do combinations of fonts. This feature provides the necessary additional storage increments of 8K
bytes. Up to nine of these features may be added ... see
"Configurator." Field Installation: Yes.
LINE MARKING (#4720).
Provides a four-position fixed slug
printer (1. 2. 4 and 8) which prints 15 different codes to be used as
an aid to error correction procedures. It is used to indicate field
location or error type information in the margin of lines requiring
corrective action. 'It will also provide page marking capability to
indicate user controlled post-processing document handling information. line marking is under program control on the mdl 1 and is
controlled by coding on the specification sheets on mdl 2.
Ribbons: line marking may be done with a purple ribbon (414499)
or equivalent if marked documents are to be re-processed through
the 3886. Otherwise a black ribbon (414491) or equivalent may be
used.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Numbering/Marking Adapter (#5340).
NUMBERING/MARKING ADAPTER (#5340). Provides a group
of common parts necessary for the installation of Serial Numbering
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
M 3886.2
3886 Optical Character Reader (cont'd)
(#6450) and/or Line Marking (#4720). Maximum: One.
Installation: Yes.
May
ETP/
Field
NUMERIC HANDPRINTING (#5360).
Provides the additional
machine circuits to read the handprinted numbers 0-9 and the letter
X. For optimum operation, character shapes and spacing should
conform to the basic rules of handprinting as outlined in SRL
GA21-9148. Handprinting should be performed with ordinary #2
pencils or grade HB fine line lead for mechanical pencils. The NHP
feature includes the ability to read forms supplier preprinted Gothic
3/16" font numbers 0-9. The feature provides two modes of
operation, normal and verify. The appropriate mode can be selected on a field-by-field basis depending on the critical nature of the
data, the circumstances of form preparation, and the level of other
available
control
techniques.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: Data Storage, Add'i (#3210) and sufficient Instruction Storage, Add'i (#4610) ... see "Configurator."
SERIAL NUMBERING (#6450). Permits the sequential numbering
of forms as they are processed. A ten-position numbering head is
provided, of which five are unit advanced and five are stationary.
Selection of documents to be printed works in conjunction with
stacker selection. Ribbons: Serial Numbering may be done with a
purple ribbon (1136844) or equivalent if numbered documents are
to be re-processed through the 3886. Otherwise a black ribbon
(1136843) or equivalent may be used.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Numbering/Marking Adapter
(#5340).
TAPE ADAPTER, DUAL DENSITY (#64851.
[Model 2 only]
Provides the appropriate adapter, within the 3886, to attach a 3410
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 for writing at 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi
NRZI (Feature #3221 on 3410). Field Installation: Yes.
TAPE ADAPTER, SINGLE DENSITY (#61190).
[Model 2 only]
Provides the appropriate adapter, within the 3886, to attach a 3410
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 for writing at 1600 bpi PE (Feature
#3211 on the 3410). Field Installation: Yes.
VIDEO
COLLECT
FEATURES
(#8701,
8702,
8703).
Prerequisites: Each of the following Video Collect Features requires Additional Data Storage (#3210) plus two increments of
Additional Instruction Storage (#4610). in 'addition to the increments required to hold the font recognition programs as described
in Figure 10 of the 3886 SRLs (GA21-9147 and GA21-9154) and
the Configurator below. Limitations: The required 3277 mdl 1 or 2
(as described below) cannot be equipped with any of the following:
Operator Identification Card Reader (#4600), Selector Light Pen
(#6350). ASCII Character Set (#9091 or #9092). or ASCII Keyboard
(#4634 or #4635). For #8703, if a 3277 mdl 1, with the RPQ listed
below, is to be attached to the required 3272 Control Unit mdl 2, at
least one 3277 mdl 2 (with or without the RPQ) must also be attached to the same 3272 Control Unit for diagnostic purposes.
VIDEO COLLECT (#8701). [Model 2 only] Provides for direct
attachment of a 3277 Display Station mdl 1 with RPQ
to
a 3886 mdl 2. (No 3272 Control Unit is required.) Entries on Line
and Field Specification Sheets allow the 3886 to collect video
image data of reject characters in specified fields and / or the
collection of the video image of an entire field at either 0.006" or
0.012" resolution. Video image data will be displayed on the cable
for visual recognition. The
attached 3277 (with RPQ
display operator will key enter the correct data. The data r!;lcord
will be updated with the keyed information before being written to
tape. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites and Limitations:
See above.
VIDEO COLLECT (#8702). [Model 2 only] Entries on Line and
Field Specification Sheets cause collection of video image data of
reject characters in specified fields and / or the collection of the
video image of an entire field at either 0.006" or 0.012" resolution. Video image data is written to tape in record lengths that
match the user selected data record length. The tape can be
processed on a system and have the video image displayed on a
3277 Display Station mdl 1 or 2 equipped with RPQ 8K0438 and
attached to the CPU via a 3272 Control Unit mdl 2. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites and Limitations: See above.
VIDEO COLLECT (#8703'). [Model 1 only] Provides the ability
to collect video image data of reject characters in specified fields
and / or the collection of the video image of an entire field at either
0.006" or 0.012" resolution. The video image data can be transferred from the 3886 to the CPU by user written routines coded with
present 3886 Type I programming support. The display of video
image \lata will require a 3277 Display Station mdl 1 or 2 equipped with RPQ
and attached to the CPU via a 3272 Control Unit mdl 2. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites and
Limitations: See above.
i9
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Data Storage, Add'i
#3210
Hppr & Stkr Cp'ty, Add'i 4520
Instruction Storage, Add'i 4610
Line Marking
4720
Numbering/Marking Adptr 5340
Numeric Handprinting
5360
Serial Numbering
6450
Tape Adptr, Dual Density 6485
Tape Adptr, Single .Density 6490
Video Collect -- mdl 2
8701
Video Collect -- mdl 2
8702
Video Collect -- mdl 1
8703
$ 25 $ 21
209
132
143
36
170
209
36
19
121
NC
NC
178
112
122
31
145
178
31
16.
103
NC
NC
$ 844
$ .50
6,785
4,220
4,680
1,280
5,510
6,785
1,280
633
4,140
NC
NC
27.50
11.50
11.50
.50
31.50
27.50
.50
.50
2.50
NC
NC
CONFIGURATOR
All 3886 Optical Character Readers will be shipped containing an
internal DASD .. That device will contain all of the recognition microprograms for OCR-A font, OCR-B font and NHP. (See "Table of
Acceptable Characters." This configurator shows which features are
necessary in order to\- utilize all valid combinations of those recognition programs.
From the following table, find the combination of fonts which will
appear within anyone batch (run) of input forms. The features
shown on that line are required. If any other batch (run) will contain
another font, a greater quantity of #4610 may be required to cover
the maximum combination of fonts for all batches to be run in
various applications.
Quantitv of Features Which Must be Ordered
Numeric Numeric Alphamer· Alphomer·
OCR·A
OCR·B
it OCR·A
it DCR·B
Numeric
Hand·
printing
Instruction
Storage,
Add'I'
(#4610)
Numeric
Hand·
printing
(#53601
Data Stor·
age, Add'i
(#3210)
Single Machine Font Configurations
1'1'1,11,1
x
X
1
X
4
1
X
4
1
X
X
X
X
1
I
1
1
4
X
I
5
1
1
8
1
1
Combination OCR-A and. OCR-8 Configurations
X
X
X
X
1
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
X
5
1
X
6
1
.1
1
X
X
1
1
X
5
X
6
X
9
1
1
Equal or srnaller size comhinations of fonts will opera\\: on machines
with the required rcatures t#5360 and #321()).
*
Example: User batch to be processed will contain Alphameric
OCR-A font and Numeric Handprinting. This requires the following
features: Quantity of 5 of #4610 plus 1 of #5360 and 1 of #3210.
Other batches this user will be able to run can include the following
fonts or combinations of fonts:
Numeric-A
Numeric-B
Numeric~A and NHP
Numeric~B and NHP
Alphameric-B
Numeric-A
Numeric-B
Numeric-A
Numeric-A
Not to be reproduced without written perm.ission.
and
and
and
and
NumericcB
Alphameric-A
Numeric-B and NHP
Alphameric-B
M 3886.3
May 79
OP Machines
3886 Optical Character Reader
(cont'd)
TABLES OF ACCEPTABLE CHARACTERS AND PRINTING
DEVICES
(6)
(7)
OCR-A FONT, SIZE 1 C1)
1403 nulls 2. 3. 7. N I lor equivalenll. 3203 - all mdls lor equiva5211 mdl2 lenll. IBM Selectric,", Typewriter or
(sec nnte
equivalent. and IBM 311(N) (7l. NuII}
meric Set only fmm 3211 (sec note
ilL
Numeric
Alphameric
Numeric
0
.:L
0
:L
2
:3
•*
'2
-I
:3
"
5
"
5
10
10
blank
7
7
/I
/I
9
'Y"
Y
I
Ii
I
Ii
A N 8.
(
B 0
C P
+
ER
,
f
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Zm
(6}
II}
(2)
13}
;
~
S
T [Plus all
U Characters
V to left
Wexcept V]
X
V
Numeric Handprinting: Recognizes the following: I 2. 3 ... I; ,
Preprinted Gothic 3/16" font digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 can also be read. Blanks are not recognized in NHP. European Numeric Handprinting (ENHP) can be selected by proper codes
in the Format Control Record.·· This provides recognition of the 1
Conel and .., Cseven) commonly used in several European countries
in place of the NHP I and 7.
7 8 lOX.
Document Inspection Gauge P/N 2448299: One is furnished
with each 3886 as a customer engineering tool. It' is used for
checking printing alignment on data. sheets. Additional gauges are
$35 each.
)
»Q
,
Additional Characters
from IBM Selcctric®
Typewriler lor equivalenll Only.
ror Alphameric Character Set OCR-B for Optical Recognilion. 2nd
Edilion. dated October, 1971.
Minimum paper weight for documents produced on the 3111N) is 20 lb.
With the 5211. use of Reread on Reject and 20-24 lb. single pari
forms are required.
:
·.·
(3)
(Grp Erase)
'**
•I Z(41 (Char Erase}
(5}
The division of charactcrs into scts abovc rcfers to 3SS6 recognition
capahility. The appmpriate type catalog arrangemenls should be
referenced for high speed printer output character sets.
These characters arc recognized in mode I alphameric set ••
All these characters arc recognized only on mode 2 alphameric set ••
except Group Enlse•• and til which are rccognized in the numeric
sct also.
(4}
(5}
(6}
171
(S}
The LVM (long vertical mark} is recognized in all OCR-A character
sets. The LVL (preprinted long vertical line) is also recognized.
The liming mark dash 1-) can be substituted for a non OCR-A font
graphic (#} for Ihe purpose of printing timing marks. See "Type
Calalog" for delails.
The OCR Prinl Package (#54501. on the 3211 is a prerequisite for
OCR applications. Usc of the Reread On Reject capabHity and 20-24
lb. Bond is "ccommended for optimimu(1l performance. When other
papers arc used. customer lesting should be performed to assure
adequate rcading performance.
Minimum paper weighl for documents produced on the 3800 is 20 lb.
With the 5211. usc of Reread on Reject and 20-24 lb. single part
forms arc required.
*.
OCR-B FONT, SIZE 1 C1) C5)
Additional Characters
5211 mdl2 1403 mdls 2. 3, 7. N I (or equiva(sec note
from IBM Selectric@
Icnll. 3203 - all mdls lor equivalenll. 3211 (sec Note 4). 3800 (6).
Typewriter (or cquiva71
and IBM Sciectric® Typewriter (or lenll only. These can be
cquivalenll.
recognized in all OCRB Font Character Set •.
Numeric
0
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
A N
I $
2 *
3
4 /
5
B 0
-
(,
II
7
M
9
9
<
>
<
> m
+
II}
(2}
(3)
(4)
(5)
Alphameric
Numeric
II
+
I
~
••
C P
on
LVM) (2)
(Grp Erase)
:Char Erase)
E R
F S [Plus all
G T Cbaracters
H U to left]
I V
J W
KX
l V
M Z
Thc division of characters into sets above refers to 31186 recognition
capability. The appropriate Iype catalog arrangements should be
referenced for high speed printer output character sets.
The LVM (long vertical mark) is recognized in both numeric and
alphame"ic OCR-B but can only be preprinted or typed. The LVL
(long vertical line), a special case of the LVM. can also be recognized.*·
The timing mark dash (-} can be substitued ror the greater Ihan (»
for the purpose of printing liming marks. See "Type Catalog" for
details.
The OCR Print Package (#54501. on the 3211, is a prerequisite for
OCR applications. Use of the Reread On Reject capability and 20.24
lb. Bond is recommended for optimum performance. When other
papers are used. customer testing should be performed to a.~sure
adequate reading performance.
This is compatible with the European Computer Manufacturers
Associate revised OCR-B Font published in the Standard ECMA-II
.*3886SeeOCRtBMModel
3886 OCR Model I Componenl Reference Manual GA21-9147 and IBM
2 Componenl Reference Manual OAZI-91S4.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduce,d witl:'tout written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----
- -- --------=-=-==';"5:
M 3890.1
~ay
OP Machines
IBM 3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
Purpose: Reads magnetically inscribed data from card and paper
documents into any virtual storage 8/370 Processor except 3115
or 3125 via the byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel, or a
4331 or 4341 Processor via a byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel. Can be used offline for document sorting.
Models: The 3890 is available in twelve models;
Model A1 - six stackers
Modal A2 - twelve stackers
Model A3 -- eighteen stackers
Model A4 - twenty-four stackers
13,312 bytes of storage
(10,240 bytes If image
processing) for stacker
select program and
initialization data.
79
Base Weights - 1 6 to 44 Ibs. (basic weight is the weight of
500 sheets of 17" x 22" paper), 60 to 165 grams per square
meter.
Grain - long grain or short grain, except for 16 lb. paper,
which must be long grain.
Bibliography: Machine and Programming Description, GA24-3612.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9046 for white.
[3] Upending Kit: #9840, if required ... loan basis, remains the
property of IBM.
Model A5 - thirty stackers
[4] Cabling: #9181 for on the floor, if required.
Model A6 -- thirty-six stackers
[5] 8S2 Transmission Option: #9666. Codeline SS2's are not
treated as field defining symbols. Requirement for this option is
limited. Before specifying refer to IBM 3890 General Information Manual TNl (GN24-0647). FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
Model B1 -- six stackers
Model B2 -- twelve stackers
Model B3 - eighteen stackers
Model B4 - twenty-four stackers
29,696 bytes of storage
(26,624 bytes if image
processing) for stacker
select program and
initialization data.
Model B5 - thirty stackers
Model B6 - thirty-six stackers
Highlights: The 3890 is a buffered modular pocket reader sorter
which Is time independent. Documents are read at a minimum rate
of 2400 six-inch documents per minute. Actual throughput depends upon length of document. The formula for determining
approximate average rated throughput per minute Is: The percentage of non-card stock checks x [19200/(average document length'
which is 6" or greater plus 2")] + the percentage of card stock
checks x (1907). The primary component of the 3890 is the feed
module which contains the Input hopper, recognition circuits, logic
to determine stacker selection, merge feed, options when installed
and operator set-up and run panels.
[6] Tool Kits: Required for CE maintenance. For Rental Customer
- specify on first 3890 order for a customer. If required for a
multiple machine installation, an additional Tool Kit(s) is available
For Purchase Customers - specify
on each 3890 machine order. When installed rental 3890s are
purchased, a Tool Kit is to be ordered on a no-charge
for
each machine. Specify: #9766 for base machine ... #9767 for
Microfilming (#5111) ... #9768 for Item Numbering/Endorsing
(#4666).
PRICES
Rentsl
3890
Input Hopper - holds approximately 4800 documents and permits
convenient, continuous loading. A jogger is built into the hopper to
eliminate, jogging as a separate operation.
Merge Feed - permits the merging of documents into the normal
input stream from a separate hopper. Document capacity is 600.
Document merging is controlled by the user program. For example,
as part of job initialization, the user can specify the approximate
number of documents to be stacked in each pocket before a
document is fed from the hopper to that pocket. The 3890 will
maintain a document count for each pocket. The merge function
eliminates the need for programmed pocket lights. Limitation:
Does not permit the 3890 to function as a collator.
Logic and Control Section - Is Initialized by the CPU when online
and by a removable disk when offline. Initialization determines the
fields to be read, length of the fields, starting number for the item
numbering feature, merge feed controls, if Image processing is to
be performed, the stacker control Instruction algorithm to be used,
endorser. requirements, and whether the symbol error correction
option is to be used. With the symbol error correction option, the
3890 performs extensive logical analysis to determine if unreadable symbols can be replaced by internally-generated field defining
symbols. The 3890 performs all stacker select determinations
Independent of CPU control and transfers blocked data records to
the CPU. Due to the logical capability, the following functions are
standard "programmable" ... split field ... self-check number
verification ... multiple column control ... base number conversion
for fine sorting.
Purchase
3890
Mdl
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Basic
Monthly
Charge/
MRC
BETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 4,717 $ 4,015
5,469
4,655
5,295
6,221
6,973
5,935
7,725
6,575
8,477
7,215
5,863,
4,990
6,615
5,630
7,367
6,270
8,119
6,910
8,871
7,550
9,623
8,190
Purchase
Price
BaSic
MMC
$256,800
299,800
342,800
385,800
428,800
471,800
300,800
343,800
386,800
429,800
472,800
515,800
$ 166
222
258
294
330
366
226
262
298
334
370
406
Monthly
Use Charge
Rate ($/meter hr.)
$12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21.10
23.15
12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21.10
23.15
Add'i MMC
Rate ($/meter hr.)
$12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21,10
23.15
12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21.10
23.15
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Maintenance: Available 24 hrs. per day, 7 days per week.
Metering: I/O Unit (On-line/Off-line)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50% (not applicable to Monthly Use Charge)
Warranty: B
. Useful life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper limit Percent: 0%
Steckers - each pocket holds approximately 800 to 1000 doCuments. The operator can unload all but the last 200 - 300· documents without stopping the 3890. Pockal warning lights alert the
operator when a specific pocket is becoming full. The reject stacker is the first stacker ... the stacker closest to the input hopper.
Racks for output trays are above each stacker.
Documents - E13B magnetic characters, print quality, and codelirie arrangement on the documents must meet the specifications
recommended by the American Bankers ASSOCiation. Intermixed
paper and card documents within the following specifications can
be processed:
length - 4.85 to 8.75 inches (123 to 223mm).
Width - 2.75 to 4.17 inches (70 to 106mm).
Thickness - .0025 to .007 Inches (.064 to .178mm).
Carrier documents containing mutilated documents with a total
thickness up to .014 inches (.356mm) will also be transported.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------=-- =---- --=-----=
M 3890.2
. May19
~
DP Machines
3890 Docurrient Processor (conl'd)
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Special Feature Prices
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are .no additonal
installation charges)
From To
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A4
A5 "
Item Numbering /Endors #4666
Microfilming
.'
5111
S/370 Attachment
6370
A6
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
Purchase
86
$45,950 $88,950 $131,950$174,950 $217,950 $260,950
45,950
88,950 131,950 174,950 217,950
45,950 88,950 131,950 174,950
45,950
88,950 131,950
45,950
88,950
45,950
From To
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
A3
$43,000 $86,000 $129,OOO$172,OOO $215,000
43,000
86,000 129,000 172,000
43,000 86,000 129,000
43,000
86,000
43,000
From To
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A2
B2
B3
B4
B5
Rental
BMC/
MRC
S 77.5
2,303
108
BETP/ Monthly Use
MLC
Charge. Rate
2 yr
($/meter hr.)
S660
1,960
92
Purchase
Price.
BMMC
S 2.65
6.60
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
(S/meter hr.)
Item Numberlng/Endors #4666 S 46,290 $172.00 S 2.65
Microfilming
5111 132,250
100.00
6.60
S/370 Attachment
6370
4,070
10.00
B6
$43,000 $86,000 $129,000$172,000 $215,000
43,000
86,000 129,000 172,000
43,000 86,000 129,000
43,000
86,000
43,000'
SPECIAL FEATURES
ITEM NUMBERING/ENDORSING (#4666). Provides the capability of printing an 8-digit number and/or a full endors~ment on the
back of each document. The starting item number and 1 of 3 print
locations is determined by the user program at initialization. The
number can be im;remented on any document cycle based on the
user-provided" stacker control instruction parameters for the run.
The number can be configured by the user at installation to be a
combination of batch and serial number' or serial number only.
Vertical location of the item number is specified by the customer
and is normally set at the plant.
During run initialization, the user specifies whether endorsing is
active and one of three horizontal print positions. Vertical location
of endorsement is specified by the customer' and is normally set at
the plant. The design of the endorser facilitates operator changing
of endorser legends for users who have a requirement to print
different endorsements. The date portion of the endorser is set by
the operator. Specify: #9167 for endorsement at top, or #9168
for center. #9379 for number at bottom, or #9378 for center.ttt
Color of endorser ink to be used -- #9145 for black, #9147 for
purple, #9148 for red, or #9149 for blue. Field Installation: Yes.
MICROFILMING (#5111). Provides the capability of microfilming
items, either front and back (duplex) or front only (duo), being
processed on the IBM 3890. Items are selectively filmed under
program control at 3890 document speeds.' An eight-digit nu"mber
can be exposed on the film for every other document image recorded on film. The eight number pOtjitionscan be split into two
number fields which can be incremented or reset on any document
cycle under stacker control instruction parameters for the run.
During run initialization, the user specifies whether microfilming is
active, the mode of filming, and the starting. eight-digit number. A
frame mark is recorded on film for each document image for image
counting during retrieval. The camera provides a reduction ratio of
50 to 1 and a resolution of 120 lines per millimeter. The film is
advanced by a capstan drive system based upon the document
width to maximize the use of film. The film cassette, a purchase
only item (see M 10000 pages), provides space for take-up of the
film as well as the film supply: CapaCity of the cassette is 2,000
feet of .0027 polyester thin base film. Loading and unloading of
film from the cassette into the film transport is automatic under
operator control. Approximately 380,000 front and back Images of
an average intermix of documents can be recorded on 2,000 feet
of film. The film is spaced six inches every 215 feet to facilitate
splicing; if a 49 inch space is required, specify #9177. The film
to' be used is 16mm unpertorated thin base microfilm which must
be ordered on cores. Disclosure specifications covering the film,
cassette, and core on which the film must be wound, are available
from IBM Industry Relations/ Product Information, Dept.767, CHQ,
Old Orchard Road, Armonk, N. Y. 10504. Film must be ordered
on cores (Part No. 2648096 or Eiquivalent) with an 1/8 inch diameter hole center punched approximately seven feet from each end
of the film. Field Installation: Yes.
S/370 ATTACHMENT (#6370).
Permits attachment to any
virtual storage 8/370 Processor or 4300 Processor via the byte
multiplexer channel or the block multiplexer channel. This feature
is required on each 3890 attached to a 8/370 or any 4300
Processor. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes
ttt For tbe purpose. of minimizi", OVOtpri..1ilr1 of item ..umbers aDd e ..dorseme..",
38900 ordeied for Federal Reaeroe Bmb should specify #9167 for e ..dorsemeDt at top
md #9378 for item ..umber at center. AU other IIl8I:bines sboolcl specil'y #9168 for
endorsement at ceDter and #9379 for item Dumber at bottom.
Not ·.tobe reproduced without written. permission.
-------- --==- =-=
--- -==--';' ==
M 3895
May 79
DP Machines
3895 DOCUMENT READER/INSCRIBER
Purpose: Magnetically reads the E13B codeline inscribed on card
and paper documents, optically reads machine printed and intermixed unconstrained handprinted numeric amounts from checks
and/or deposit tickets, inscribes the amounts in the MICR codeline, and sorts into multiple stackers under control of the attached
S/370 model 125-2, 135, 138, 145, 148, 155 II, 158, 165 II or
1 68, or a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, or 4331 or 4341
Processor.
Modell
Six stackers
Model 2
Twelve stackers
HighlightS: The 3895 is a multi-stacker document reading and
inscribing device which is time independent. Documents are processed at a rated speed of 525 six-inch documents per minute.
Actual thruput depends on a number of factors including document
type, size, mix and quality; number of fields s~anned and/or
inscribed; number of characters printed; compleXity of the software; CPU load and priority of processing. The transport system
of the 3895 consists of the primary hopper, merge hopper, MICR
I, bar code reader. OCR reader, printer/inscriber, MICR II, endorser, and stackers.
Input Hopper -- holds approximately 5-1/2 inches of documents
in a gravity feed permitting non-stop feeding. The feeding and
processing of documents are controlled by the host CPU application support program. The maximum size document which can be
processed by the 3895 is 4-1/8 inches high and 9 inches·long.
Merge Hopper -- permits pinpoint merging of documents into the
transport path just prior to the OCR read station. All processing
functions except MICR I read and bar code read can be performed on documents from the merge feed. Document capacity
of the hooper is approximately 5-1/2 inches.
MICR I - the preprinted and/or MICR codeline is read at this
station using IBM's latest single gap reading technique. Data
read at this station is stored in a buffer and shifts in the buffer as
the document moves through the transport. This station also
contains a bar code reader. Special type documents such as
deposit documents may be recognized by a unique MICR field or
a preprinted bar code. The functional unit which serves to type
or identify these documents according to the pre-specified identification parameters is the Document Identification Handler. The
document moves from the MICR I station to the pre-scan station
and will be held if the OCR read station is not ready.
OCR Read - The printed or handprinted numeric amounts are
optically read at this station. Up to three fields of numeric information from each document may be read and stored in the buffer
for transmission to the CPU. Three types of documents will pass
under the scanner and will be treated differently based on the
type of document to be read as determined at the MICR I and bar
code station.
Document Type - Check: Document will be scanned to find
the amount location. The printed or handprinted amount will be
scanned and presented to the recognition logic. Amounts when
recognized will be placed in the buffer along with codeline data
read at MIC.R I.
Document Type - Deposit: The scanner will read individual
Ijne items on the deposit ticket. All line items read will be
stored internally in the 3895 and used to compare each check
or debit document during the scan process to assist in recognition of the amount. The 3895 recognizes the last item read on
the deposit ticket 0' the last line of the last deposit slip in a
multiple deposit slip transaction as a total and inserts· this in the
associated buffer along with the codeline data read at MICR I.
Document Type -- Tape Listing: Adding machine tape lists
from customers must be converted to machine processable
document sizes. The 3896 Tape-Document Converter performs
this operation. Individual line items will be scanned and stored
internally in the 3895 and used to compare each check or debit
document during the scan process to assist in recognition of
the amount. The last item on each list document will be placed
in the associated buffer.
Buffer: At the completion of the OCR scan process, a data
record for a document is stored in a buffer. This record consists
of control information and document data. The control information consists of type, format and size of document and validity
status of the MICR and OCR fields.
The data section consists of the MICR and OCR data fields read
from the document. The contents of the buffer are sent to the
CPU upon a request issued by the user application program.
The 3895 waits for the user application program to process the
contents of the buffer and send an output record back to the
3895. The output record must contain data and control information. The control information will contain the stacker number and
instructions to inscribe and print. The data will. consist of the
amount, the transaction code, and/or other data to be inscribed,
and the serial number to be printed.
Print: Two types of printing occur at this station. Data to be
printed is stored in the buffer. The inscriber/printer inscribes
E13B magnetic ink characters as defined in the ANSI Standards
X3.2 - 1970 and X3.3 -- 1970. Any two fields may be inscribed
in one pass -- amount and process codes are considered one
field. The serial number printer prints at eight characters per
inch and has the capability of printing up to 25 positions on the
face of the document. The printing by the serial number printer
of more than 15 positions or the inscribing of fields other than
the amount field will degrade throughput. Numeric digits 0-9, $,
Il. symbols may be printed. Blank may appear in any position.
limitations: $ may not be printed in positions 1, 2 and 15. Il.
may not be printed in positions 1, 14 and 15. Printing more
than 15 positions requires a minimum of 6.9 inch documents
from the primary hopper and 7.4 inch documents from the
merge hopper. 51-column cards may contain a maximum of 8
positions. Inscribing the auxiliary on-us field requires a 'minimum of 7-3/8 inch length documents.
MICR II -- The function of this station is to verify that the E13B
data inscribed is machine processable.
Endorser -- Documents can be endorsed in one of six fixed
pOSitions on the back of the document: During run initialization,
the user specifies whether endorsing is active and one of three
horizontal print positions. Vertical location of endorsement is
specified by the customer and is normally set at the plant. The
design of the endorser facilitates operator changing of endorser
legends for users who have a requirement to print different endorsements. The date portion of the endorsement is set by the
operator.
Stackers: -- Model 1 has six stackers and Model 2 has twelve
stackers, each having a capacity of 2-1/2 inches of free standing
documents. Stacker pairs 1 and 2, 3 and 4, and 5 and 6 may be
used in an overflow mode. Under this mode, only the odd numbered stacker selection is valid. Documents overflow from a full
stacker to other pocket in the pair if that stacker is not full.
Stackers 1 and 7 are at the top. Stackers 7 through 1 2 cannot
be used in overflow mode.
Document Path - The document path is generally in the shape
of a broad U, starting at the primary hopper located near the
upper right corner, as viewed from the front of the machine.
From here the documents feed downward through the aligner, the
first MICR read station and the bar code reader, then to the left
through the pre-scan, optical scanner, inscriber/printer, second
MICR read, and endorse stations. Documents are then fed upward into the stackers. The merge documents follow the same
path except that they are fed from the merge hopper, which is
located to the immediate left of the primary hopper and are sent
directly into the scanner station.
Deposit Slip First -- the 3895 internally stores the individual line
item amounts from a deposit slip or item list (adding machine
tape) and compares each check as it is read with the stored
amounts. This reduces substitutions and improves the OCR
performance. Therefore, deposits must be trayed so that a list of
the items immediately precedes the items to be read. If the
checks are listed on the deposit slip, they should follow the
deposit slip. If the checks are .listed on an adding machine tape,
the tape must be converted to a cut-form document processable
by the 3895 and identified by a bar code or other means. The
segments of the tape should be kept in order and trayed immediately preceding the checks listed.
3895 Document Designer & Printer Kit -- the IBM 3895 Document Designer and Printer Kit contains camera-ready artwork of
OCR field guide areas described in the Document Design Guidelines. The kit is used to design and create final artwork for 3895
input documents. The artwork is printed on a stable-base material. The IBM Document Designer and Printer Kit, SX24-3642, may
be purchased by the customer from IBM
for $96 each. For addition information, see the 3895 Document
Design Guidelines, GA24-3640.
Supplies:
MICR ribbon and fabric ribbon
Documents: E13B magnetic characters, print quality and codeline arrangement on the documents must meet the specifications
recommended by the American Bankers Association. Intermixed
paper and card documents within the following specifications can
be processed:
Length - 123 to 223mm (4.85 to 8.75 inches).
Width - 70 to 106mm (2.75 to 4.17 inches).
Thickness - .076 to .178mm (.003 to .007 inches).
Base Weights - 16 to 44 Ibs (basic weight is the weight of 500
sheets of 17" x 11" paper), 60 to 165 grams per square meter.
Grain - long grain or short grain, except for 16 Ib paper, which
must be long grain.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------=- =--- --=----':' =
DP Machines
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber
Publications:
-
M 3895 - 3896
May 79
(cont'd)
Special Feature Prices:
General Information - GA24-3645
Input Document Design Guidelines - GA24-3640
Input Document Designer and Printer Kit - SX24-3642
Installation M~nual/Physical Planning - GA24-3641
Machine & Programming Description - GA24-3620.
Field Coordinate Gauge - GX24-3646
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for. 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9046 for white.
[3] Upending Kit: #9840 if required ... loan basis, remains property of IBM.
[4] Endorsing: #9167 lor top track, or #9168 for center track.
[5] Endorsing Ink: #9145 for black, #9147 for purple, #9148 for
red, or #9149 for blue.
[6] Tool Kits: Required for CE maintenance. For Rental Customer
-- specify on first 3895 order for a customer. If required for a
multiple machine installation, an additional Tool Kit(s) is available
For Purchase Customer - specify on
each 3895 machine order. When installed rental 3895s are
purchased, a Tool Kit is to be ordered
. for
each machine. Specify: #9766 for base machine ... in addition,
#9767 is required for Microfilming (#5110).
Mdl
1
2
Mdl
1
2
Monthly Lease
Charge (5 yr)
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
$14,770 .095/100 docmnts
15,170 .099/100 docmnts
Basic Monthly
Maintenance Charge
$810
825
Purchase·
$535,000
550,000
Additional Monthly
Maintenance Charge Rate
.095/100 docmnts
.099/100 docmnts
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Maintenance: Available 24 hours/day, 7 days/week
Metering: I/O Unit (online)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 60% (not af./plicable to monthly use charges)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (There are no additional
installation charges.)
Model 1 to Model 2 ....... $15,000
Microfilming
#51.10
Monthly Lease
Charge (5 Yr)
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
Purchase
$ 2,725
$.019/100 dcmnts
$100,000
Maintenance Charge
Maintenance Charge Rate
$ 120
$.019/100 dcmnts
3896 TAPE-DOCUMENT CONVERTER
Purpose: A stand-alone console unit used to convert adding
machine tapes into ABA check size documents (tape copy tickets)
for input to the 3895 Document Reader/Inscriber. Tape copy (TC)
tickets provide deposit information that improves the performance
of the 3895.
Highlights: The 3896 is an electrostatic dry copier with a semiautomatic tape feed that will accept single part original noncarbon
back adding machine deposit tapes and copy them by tape or tape
section onto 95.116mm x 222.250mm (3.666" x 8.750") TC
tickets. The 3896 will accept an input tape with a ·basic weight of
12 Ibs to 24 Ibs and a minimum length of 88.9mm (3.5") and a
width of 3.81 mm to 101.6mm (1.5" to 4.0"). Tapes less than
88.9mm (3.5") in length may be manually copied. During the copy
cycle the TC tickets are non-mechanically printed with item reference track, tape number, copy number, and a bar code. The bar
code is used to identify the document to the 3895 and the other
information provides audit trail and balancing aids. TC tickets can
be automatically inscribed on the 3895 with a customer account
number and identified with both MICR and serial number printing
to facilitate further handling and processing on reader sorters.
Speed: A tape feeds in increments (copy cycles) of about
203.2mm (8").
A tape longer than 203.2mm requires additional tape feed and
copy cycles. After the first copy cycle which takes 8 seconds,
consecutively inserted short tapes or sections of the same tape
are copied in 2.4 seconds.
Stacker: At the end of the cycle, a TC ticket is fed into a reversing stacker which stacks the tickets in the correct order for
processing in the 3895. Tapes will be ejected into an open
container that can be emptied as required.
Operator Controls: Controls are provided among which is a
variable control to accommodate varying tape paper reflectances.
Paper Supply: A paper supply drawer holds a 95.116mm (3.666")
wide roll of paper supplying paper for the TC tickets. Paper is
available from IRD.
Toner: A special cartridge supplying the toner for the 3896 is
available
SPECIAL FEATURES
Manuals:
MICROFILMING (#5110). Provides the capability of microfilming
items, either front and back (duplex) or front only (duo), being
processed on the 3895. Items are selectively filmed under program control at 3895 document speeds. An eight-1
Document Processor
Document Reader/Inscriber
, No longer available.
PRINTER-KEYBOARD MODE (#5550').
Allows the 4331 Processor user to run an operating system which has been generated
for use either on (1) an IBM S/360 with a 1052 Printer-Keyboard
as operator console, or (2) an IBM S/370 with a 3210/3215
Console Printer-Keyboard used in conjunction with the standard
system keyboard, display and 3287 Printer. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3287 Printer.
SYSTEM/3 DATA IMPORT (#6305').
A feature which allows
attachment of IBM 3340-A2s for the purpose of reading data from
a 3348 Data Module which had been written by an IBM System/3
mdl 12 or 15. Up to two 3340-A2s may attach ... up to three
3340 model B units may attach to each 3340-A2. The 3348 Data
Module is read on a model A or B drive in a 3340 string attached
via the DASD Adapter (#3201). NOTE: The 3340 mdl C2 may not
attach. However, 3348 Data Modules recorded on the 3340 mdl
C2 can be read when the module is installed on a 4331-attached
3340 A or B model. This feature works in conjunction with
VSE/IBM System/3-3340 Data Import program ... see Programming section of sales manual for details. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: May not be installed if 231 X devices
attach to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421). The utility program supporting this feature operates only under DOS/VSE.
Prerequisites: 3340-A2 DASD and Feature Code #3201. See
Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901). NOTE: Feature
#7851 is NOT required as a prerequisite.
3340 DIRECT ATTACHMENT (#7851'). A feature allowing 3340
mdl A2s to attach to the DASD Adapter (#3201) and operate with
DOS/VSE, DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or VM/370 ... may attach up to two
3340 mdl A2s. Up to three 3340 model B units may attach to
each 3340 mdl A2. NOTE: Use of this feature introduces additional processor and channel demands and may have an 'effect on
systems performance. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: (a) May not be installed if 231 X devices attach to the
Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421 )... (b) A maximum of two
strings of 3340s may attach ... (c) If one string of 3340s is attached to a DASD Adapter (#3201) then only one string of 3310s
can perform DASD emulation (#7901). If two strings of 3340s are
attached to a DASD Adapter (#3201) no 3310's can perform
DASD emulation (#7901). Prerequisites: DASD Adapter (#3201)
... 3340 mdlA2. See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements
and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
(Note that the storage requirements are greater for two strings of
3340 than for one string.)
2311/2314/2319/3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE COMPATIBILITY (#7901'). A feature allowing 2311 and 2314/2319 disk
data sets to be emulated for DOS, DOS/VS and DOS/VSE operations, cn up to two consecutively addressed strings of natively
attached 3310 Direct Access Storage attached to the DASD Adap-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - ----------------_.--
M 4331.6
Jul79
DP Machines
4331 Processor (cont'd)
ter. Emulation is done on a 231 X volume basis mapped into predefined areas of the 3310 as follows:
up to 7 x 2311 volumes into one 3310 drive for a maximum of
28 volumes per 3310 string
up to 2 x 2314/2319 volumes into one 3310 drive for a maximum of 8 volumes per 3310 string.
(It is possible to emulate 231 X "Mini Volumes", and each successive 231 X Mini Volume emulated on the 3310 begins on a 231 X
full volume boundary.)
Use of this feature allows programs written for DOS, DOS/VS, or
DOS/VSE and 2311/2314/2319 DASD to be executed, with only
JCL modifications, using the 3310 Direct Access Storage. Operates when either System/370 mode or ECPS: VSE mode has been
IPL'ed. Data sets in fixed block mode may be intermixed on the
same 3310 volume with 231 X emulated data sets but may be
accessed concurrently only when ECPS: VSE mode is active.
NOTE: Use of this feature introduces additional processor and
channel demands and may have an effect on systems performance. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: (a)
2311/2314/2319 emulation only operates on up to two 3310 mdl
A2s and the 3310 mdl Bs attached to them ... (b) If one string of
3310s performs emulation of 231 X devices using this feature, then
the DASD Adapter (#3201) can only support one string of 3340s
using feature #7851. If two strings of 3310s perform emulation of
231 X devices using this feature, then the DASD Adapter may not
support direct attachment of 3340s through feature #7851 ... (c)
Does not operate with OS/VSl or VM/370 ... (d) The feature
supports both 2311 and 2314/2319 emulation but either 2311 or
2314/2319 must be selected at each IPL, not both.
Prerequisites: DASD Adapter (#3201). 3310 Direct Access Storage ... see "Machines." See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901). Program Order: Required for 3310 compatibility
order number 5747 -SA 1.
initialization routines. Order
ECPS:VM/370 (#8701").
The 4331
Processor provides
ECPS:VM/370 support at Level 19. This support is compatible
with VM/370 Release 6 and corresponding levels of the System
Extension program products. This level is also compatible with the
PLC that will provide VM/370 Release 5 support for the 4331.
The functional areas assisted include: Virtual Machine I/O, SVC
Handler, Privileged Instruction Emulation, and Virtual Interval
Timer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: May
only operate when System/370 mode. has been invoked by IPL.
May not be installed with 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
(#3950). Prerequisite: See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER
Provides the basic control and common circuits for the direct
attachment of up to 8 synchronous (BSC), asynchronous
(Start/Stop) or Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) communication lines in any combination, provided that only two of the three
types are installed and that the aggregate data rate capability of
up to 64,000 bps is not exceeded. For data rates achievable, see
GA33-1527. The maximum speed of each of the 8 lines is 9600
bps except one of the 8 line positions may be a synchronous high
speed line (BSC or SDLC) up to 56,000 bps and may operate
concurrently with other lines provided that the data rate limitations
are not exceeded. The Communications Adapter operates with
Start/Stop and BSC in 2703 Compatibility Mode. SDLC is supported only by ACF /VTAME operating under DOS/VSE, or
ACF/VTAME operating under VM/370 Release 6 with DOS/VSE
running as a guest.
Base
-
characters are:
Auto Answer
Autopoll operation
Multipoint station functions
EBCDIC transparent mode for BSC only
EBCDIC and ASCII code for BSC only
From the Display Console keyboard the user may specify some
configuration parameters for each separate telecommunications
line for each individual connection:
- select stand-by
- half speed operation for synchronous lines only (for both
clocked and nonclocked modems which have this capability).
- NRZI mode in SDLC mode.
- write interrupt (S/S only).
- read interrupt (S/S only).
- unit exception suppression (S/S only).
- error index byte mode (BSC only).
- ASCII code instead of EBCDIC (BSC only).
Other configuration parameters can be selected at installation time
and set by the IBM Customer Engineer.
- duplex instead of half duplex connection (two way alternate
data flow transmission).
- switched network facility instead of non-switched lines (for
external modems).
- new sync (for BSC or SDLC in multipoint primary station
function only).
- high speed operation for one line (BSC or SDLC only).
- connect Data Set to Line or Data Terminal Ready procedure.
- selection of WE202 or V.23 answer tone frequencies for
1200 bps integrated modems with automatic answering.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages for customer
responsibilities regarding communications facilities and services.
Communication Facilities: See M 2700 pages for communications
facility requirements with this feature.
Terminals Supported: The Data Communications Equipment and
remotely attachable Data Terminal Equipment (abbreviated
"terminals") supported by the Communications Adapter are shown
in the table below:
SDLC TERMINALS SUPPORTED
TYPE
SPEED IN KBPS
1.2/
0.6 2.4
Terminals:
3271-11,12 (3)
3274-1 C
3275-12 (3)
3276-11-14
3601
3602
3614
3624
3631
3632
3651-25, 75
3651-A50/B50
3651-A60/B60
3661
3684-1, 2
3767-1-3
3771-1-3
3774-1,2,P1,P2
3775-1,P1
3776-1,2
3776-3.4
3777-1,2,3
3791
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2.4/
1.2 4.8
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.8/
2.4 7.2
7.2/
3.6 9.6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20.456.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Controllers:
3705 (1)
Systems:
The Communications Adapter attaches up to eight lines via the
following optional features:
- Up to 8 line features without internal clock for attachment to
external modems (Data 'Circuit-terminating Equipment, DCE)
with clock.
- Up to 8 line features with internal clock for attachment to
external modems (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment, DCE)
without clock.
- Up to 1 synchronous high speed line feature.
- Up to 8 line features with integrated modems.
- Up to 8 line features with local attachments.
- Up to 8 line features with Digital Data Service Adapters.
- Autocall Unit interfaces for up to two of the installed lines.
3 System Diskelle-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskelle. $405 on
purchase machines to include any number of diskelle-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
4331
5320
5340
5380
8100
(2)
(5)
(5)
(5)
X
Notes:
1) 3705 supported as a primary station in a network using
ACF/VTAM Release 1 or ACF/VTAM Release 2.
2) Participant as a primary or a secondary station in a network
using ACF/VTAM Release 1 ()r ACF/VTAM Release 2.
3) Not supported by ACF /VTAME.
5) Supported as a 3770.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------------
-- --------_.-
M 4331.7
Jul79
DP Machines
4331 Processor
(cont'd)
BSC TERMINALS SUPPORTED
TYPE
SPEED IN KBPS
1.2/
0.6 2.4
2.4/
1.2 4.8
4.8/
2.4 7.2
7.2/
20.43.6 9.6 56.0(6)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (1)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2701(w360/370) X
3704
X
3705
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Terminals:
3271-1.2
3274-1C
3275-2
3276-1-4
3631 (7)
3632 (7)
3651-25.75
3651-A60.B60
3661
3684-1.2
3735
3741-2.4
3747
3771 (2)
3774. 3775 (2)
3776-1.2 (3)
3777-1.2 (3)
3780
5231-2 (9)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
)(
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Controllers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(l)
X (1)
X
Systems: (5)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3115
3125
3135
~~
4331
5010 (8)
~W~
~~~
5404
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
8100 (4)
Series 1(8)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
1) By RPQ.
2) Equivalent to 2770/2772.
3) Equivalent to 2770/3780.
4) Supported as a remote 3276.
5) With Communications Adapter.
6) 19.200 - 56.000 bps in line position 1.
7) See 3631 and/or 3832 in Machines for 3631/3632 features
required and software requirements for host connection.
8) Equivalent to 54 XX (System/3) under RPS V3/V4.
9) Equivalent to 3741-2. 4.
START/STOP TERMINALS SUPPORTED
Only terminals using IBM Terminal Control - Type 1 are supported.
TYPE
IBM Line Control Speed In BPS
75
2740-1
2740-2
2741
3767-1. 2. 3 (1)
5100 (2)
5110
CMC Selectric (1)
X
134.5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
300
600
1200
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
1) Equivalent to 2740 and/or 2741.134.5 bps speed needs 3767
RPQ
2) Equivalent to 2741.
AUTOCALL UNIT INTERFACE (#102()1). Provides an interface to
customer-supplied Automatic Calling Equipment allowing data links
with remote stations to be automatically established on the
switched telephone network. Automatic Calling Equipment complying with EIA RS 366 or CCITT V25 procedures may be attached.
For the appropriate Automatic Calling Equipment, refer to M 2700
pages. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Does
not operate with High Speed Modem Adapter (#4720). any features with 1200 bps Integrated Modem or with any non-switched
lines. Specify: Line position ... see Table 4 below. Prerequisites:
Communications Adapter. Base (#1601) and one EIA/CCITT
Interface (#3701) (in switched operation) for each Autocall Unit
Interface installed. Cable Order: Required. for attachment to
external equipment.
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER, BASE (#1601 2 ).
Allows attachment of up to eight lines (with up to two transmission modes) plus
Autocall Unit Interfaces (#1020) for up to two of the lines. The
aggregate data rate capability of the Communications Adapter is
64.000 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Line features for only two transmission mode versions may be
installed (SDLC and BSC. SDLC and SIS. or SIS and BSC) ... see
Table 4 below. SDLC is supported only by ACF /VTAME operating
under DOS/VSE, or ACF /VTAME operating under VM/370 Release 6 with DOS/VSE running as a guest. The aggregate data
rate capability of the Communications Adapter is 64.000 bps; line
features which exceed this aggregate data rate may be installed
but not operated concurrently. For data rates achievable see IBM
4331 Channel Characteristics. GA33-1527. When 231 X DASD is
attached to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421) no line feature
may be attached which runs at a speed greater than 9600 bps.
See features below for details. Each line attached operates with
one subchannel of the Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248). See
"System Subchannels" above for details. Specify: See Table 4.
"Communications Adapter Configuration Features and Position
Codes," for required specify codes for each line feature attached.
Prerequisites: Adapter Power Prerequisite (#1001) is required
when more than three telecommunications line features are attached. See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE (#3701 2 ). This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each feature provides for the attachment of one external modem having EIA RS 232-C. CCITT
V24/V28 interface for attachment to one switched or one nonswitched line. When this feature is installed in conjunction with
Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modem (#4695). a BSC or
SDLC line is supported. Non-switched lines with switched network
backup may be used where maximum line speed on non-switched
lines is 9600 bps. the maximum line speed on switched network
backup or switched networks is 4800 bps. When this feature is
installed in conjunction with Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked
Modems (#4696). then a BSC. Start/Stop. or SDLC line is supported. Transmission speeds supported are listed with feature
#4696 below. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation: Yes. Specify:
Start/Stop. SDLC and/or BSC operations are possible .. , see
Table 4 for Line Position Code and Transmission Mode Codes.
Prerequisites: Communications Adapter. Base (#1601). One Line
Attachment Base for Clocked Modems (#4695) or Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems (#4696) is required for each
feature (#3701) installed. Cable Order: Required. for attachment
to external equipment.
LINE ATTACHMENT BASE FOR CLOCKED MODEMS (#46952 ).
This feature is a prerequisite for all line adapters which attach to
modems (Data CirCUit-terminating Equipment) providing clocking.
See the various line features below to determine when it is required. Maximum: Eight. one per line installed. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations: A maximum of eight Line Attachment Bases may
be installed on each 4331 Communications Adapter. Each feature
(#4695) installed reduces by one the number of features (#4696)
allowable. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter. Base (#1601).
LINE ATTACHMENT BASE FOR NONCLOCKED MODEMS
(#4696').
This feature is a prerequisite for all line adapters
which attach to modems (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment)
which do not provide clocking. See the various features below to
determine when it is required. The clock speed internal to the
feature is wired by default to 134.5 bps for Start/Stop operation
and 1200 bps for BSC and SDLC operation. Otherwise.• the clock
speed can be wired at installation to one of the following:
• Start/Stop 75. 300. 600 or 1200 bps
• BSC
600
• SDLC
600
For BSC or SDLC operations. if 1200 bps is wired, then full speed
operation (1200 bps) or half-speed operation (600 bps) may be
selected from the operator console keyboard. Maximum: Eight.
one per line Installed. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A maximum of eight Line Attachment Bases may be installed on each
4331 Communications Adapter. Each feature (#4696) installed
reduces by one the number of features (#4695) allowable.
Prerequisite: Communications Adapter. Base (#1601).
HIGH SPEED MODEM ADAPTER (#4720'). The feature provides
for the attachment of an external modem with clock having a
CCITT V35 interface. One non-switched point-to-point BSC or
SDLC line may be operated with speeds of 20.400. 40,800.
, Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
Not to be reproduced without written Dermission.
--- - - ---':" -=
==-=
-- ----- ----
M 4331.8
Jul79
OP Machines
4331 Processor (cont'd)
48,000 or 56,000 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Operation is with up to 7 other lines, (speeds not
exceeding 9600 bps) subject to the overall aggregate data rate
limitation of 64,000 bps. (For data rates achievable see IBM 4331
Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527.) Cannot be installed with
231X OASO attached to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421).
cannot be installed with 3370 OASO attached (#9201) to the
DASD Adapter (#3201). Cannot be installed with Digital Data
Service Adapter (#5650) if the Digital Data Service Adapter operates at 56,000 bps (#9444). Specify: BSC and/or SOLC operations are possible '" see Table 4 for Line Position Code and
Transmission Mode Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601). Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modems
(#4695). Cable Order: Required for attachment to the external
modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#4781 2 ).
This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each
feature provides for the attachment of one non-switched BSC,
Start/Stop or SDLC line via an integrated 1200 bps modem. The
transmission speed can be strapped by the customer engineer for
Start/Stop operation up to 1200 bps and for BSC or SOLC operation at 600 or 1200 bps. Selection of two or four wire operation is
made at installation time. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: SDLC and/or BSC and/or Start/Stop operations are
possible ... see Table 4· for Line Position Code and Transmission
Mode Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base
(#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems
(#4696). Cable Order: Required for attachment to external equipment.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO ANSWER (#4782"). This feature may be intermixed with other line
features. Each feature provides for the attachment of one
switched network Start/Stop line via an integrated modem at
speeds up to 300 bps and for BSC or SDLC operation at 600 and
1200 bps. Attachment to the switched network is via an IBM
provided cable to a Data Access Arrangement type CBS or FCC
registered equivalent. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: SDLC and/or BSC and/or Start/Stop operations are
possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position Code and Transmission
Mode Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base
(#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems
(#4696). Cable Order: Required for attachment to external equipment.
1200· BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON SWITCHED WITH
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP AND MANUAL ANSWER
(#4787'). This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each feature provides for the attachment of one nonswitched line with Switched Network Backup (SNBU) and manual
answer, allowing BSC, Start/Stop or SOLC operations via an
integrated 1200 bps modem. The transmission speed can be
strapped by the customer engineer for Start/Stop operation up to
1200 bps and for BSC or SDLC operation at 600 or 1200 bps.
Attachment to the non-switched line is via an IBM provided cable
to the common carrier communication line via appropriate Data
Access Arrangement. Selection of two or four wire line operation
Is made at installation time. The cable group which is ordered also
provides for attachment to a Data Access Arrangement type COT
or FCC registered equivalent for manual answer. Maximum: Eight.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: SOLC and/or esc and/or
Start/Stop operations are possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position
Code and Transmission Mode Codes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems (#4696). Cable Order: Required for one cable
group which connects to non-switched line and to the switched
network.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED WITH
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP AND AUTO ANSWER (#47882 ).
This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each
feature provides for the attachment of one non-switched line with
Switched Network Backup (SNBU) and auto answer, aliowing BSC,
Start/Stop or SDLC operations via an integrated 1200 bps modem. The transmission speed can be strapped by the customer
engineer for Start/Stop operation up to 1200 bps and for BSC or
SDLC operation at 600 or 1200 bps. Attachment to the nonswitched line is 'via an IBM provided cable to the common carrier
communication line via an appropriate Data Access Arrangement.
The same cable group provides for attachment of the switched
network to a Data Access Arrangement type CBS or FCC registered equivalent for auto answer. Maximum: Eight. Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: SDLC and/or BSC and/or Start/Stop
operations are possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position Code and
Transmission Mode Codes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked
Modems (#4696). Cable Order: Required for one cable group
"which connects to the non-switched line and to the switched
network.
LOCAL ATTACHMENT INTERFACE (#4801
Provides circuits
and controls for the local attachment of one BSC or SDLC remote
station to the Communications Adapter without the use of modems
2 ).
at either device. Transmission speed can be strapped at installation time by the customer engineer at 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600
bps. The feature provides clocking for both the Communications
Adapter and the.terminal. The attached terminal must be equipped
with an EIA RS 232C or CCITI V24/V28 interface, have no Business Machine Clocking and have an external modem cable. The
distance to the terminal may be extended via a customer provided
cable to allow a maximum distance between Communications
Adapter and terminal of:
800 meters at 1200 bps
400 meters at 2400 bps
200 meters at 4800 bps
100 meters at 9600 bps
The feature includes cables to attach the Communications Adapter
to a customer-provided terminal plate and from the terminal plate
to the DTE external modem cable. Maximum: Eight. Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: SDLC and/or BSC operations are
possible ... see Table 4 for Transmission Mode and Line Position
Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601),
and Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modems (#4695). Cable
Order: Required for attachment to terminal plate.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (#5650'). Provides circuits
and controls for attachment of one BSC or SDLC line and includes
an internal Dataphone Digital Service (DDS) Adapter. The adapter
allows interface of American Telephone and Telegraph Private Line
DDS Network via the American Telephone and Telegraph Channel
Service Unit. The Digital Data Service Adapter will operate at
synchronous speeds of 2400, 4800, 9600 and 56,000 bps. The
speed must be set to the speed specified in the customer's order
for service to the common carrier at installation time. These line
features can be associated with each line position if the line speed
does not exceed 9600 bps. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations: If feature #5650 is installed with a speed of
56,000 bps (#9444), then: (1) High Speed Modem Adapter
(#4720) cannot be installed ... (2) 231X DASD attached to the
Slock Multiplexer Channel (#1421) cannot be installed ... (3)
3370 DASD attached (#9201) to the DASD Adapter (#3201)
cannot be instalied. Specify: #9444' for operation at 56,000 bps
... SDLC lind/or BSC operations are possible .. , see Table 4 for
Line Position Code, Transmission Mode Code, and line speed
selection codes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter, Base
(#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modems
(#4695). Cable Order: Required for attachment to external equipment.
, System Diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
, Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - -----------------_.-
M 4331.9
Jul79
DP Machines
4331 Processor
(conl'd)
TABLE 4
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER CONFIGURATION FEATURE AND
POSITION CODES
Fea-
,turc#
EIA/CCITT Interface (for
Clocked Modems) (6)
Req'd
Line
Attach
Base
#'
Line Position with Line Position Codes
I'
2'
3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8'
3701
4695
9531
9532
9533
9534
9535
9536
9537
9538
3701
4696
9521
9522
9523
9524
9525
9526
9527
9528
4720
4695
9501
4788
4696
9641
9642
9643
9644
9645
9646
9647
9648
EIA/CCITT In-
terface (for nODclocked Modoma) (6)
High Speed Modom AdaDter 7
1200 bps Intograted Modems:
NODswitched
with Switched
Network Backup
and Auto Ans
4787
4696
Switched with
Auto Ans
4782
4696
9651
9652
Nonswitched
4781
4696
9661
9662
5650
4695
9471
9472
9473
Digital Data
Sorvice Adptr for 2400, 4800,
9600 bps
for 56,000 bps
7) (8)
Lo.
#9904 for 230 V. 1-phase (mdls A2. C3. 03 only).
#9905 for .230 V. 3-phase (mdls C3. C6. 03. 06 only).
NOTE: When options are available. use of 3-phase power is
recommended. This would eliminate the need for rewiring for
system expansion to models C6 or 06.
[2J Power: Specify one -- #9490 for 5010 A and B models ...
#9491 for 5010 E models.
[3J Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow.
for gray. or #9046 for white.
#9043
for blue. #9045
[4J Storage Power Addition (#7401) required for systems with more
than SK of storage (5010 A and B models only) ... see "Special
Features."
Not to be reproduced without; written permission.
#3715
4621
4622
5731
7401
$
42
55
76
63
17
$908 $ 5.50
1.465
15.50
1.955
32.50
1.305
1.00
417
1.50
OP Machines
5028 Enclosure
M 5026 - 5028
May 79
(cont'd)
5028 OPERATOR STATION
Purpose: To provide an operator and computer input/output
device for System/7.
a
Highlights: The 5028 Operator Station provides keyboard. printer. paper tape punch. and paper tape reader. It is attached via a
multi-wire cable to a System/7 Processor Module. The printer.
paper tape reader. and paper tape punch operate at a speed of 10
characters per second. Transmission code is 7 level ASCII. wit!) the
8th level for "even parity." The paper tape reader and punch can
also read and punch 8-bit binary code without parity. The recording
tape is one inch wide and may be paper (Part No.s304469 or
426362). or lubricated. non-metallic plastic. A printing line is 72
characters with 6 lines per inch. Only single part paper may be
used for printing.
LOCAL REMOTE switches provide for offline and online operations.
The 5028 is used for program loading. data input/output. and
paper tape preparation.
The 5028 Operator Station must be available for system maintenance in all configurations. An Operator Station may be shared
among several System/7s. except those' with '5998-TO 1. The
customer must attach the Operator Station to the system requiring
maintenance prior to the arrival of a custorroer engineer. Delays due
to the relocation of an Operator Station from one system to another may result in extended down time. Before ordering a system
without an Operator Station. the customer must realize the above
condition as well as the procedure for diconnecting an Operator
Station which requires these steps: stop system; power off Operator Station; disconnect Operator Station; start system.
PREREQUISITE: 5010 Processor Module.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Input Power: 115 V AC. 1-phase. 60 Hz.
Specify: Cables. Use cable order form Z120-2368.
Supplies: A black ribbon. I BM Part No. 1136260 or equivalent. is
required.
PRICES:
5028
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
$179
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$152
Purchase
MMMC
$1.940
$69.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 50% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Cill!: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5029.1
May i'd
DP Machines
5029 MOL 1 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES
FOR SVSTEM/7
[Purchase only]
Purpose: 5029 mdl 1 is an accessory control number used for
ordering components and Termination Cards for connection of
customer signal wires to the System /7 interface. 5029 is not a
machine in itself,
Specify 5029 in the machine field only once per system for all
Termination Cards and components. Features on 5029 cannot be
ordered
Accessories in the 5029 are for purchase only
and no maintenance service is available. Normal parts warranty of
3 months applies to the accessories.
Highlights: 5029 Attachment Accessories provide a number of
cards and components used for connection of customer signals to
the System /7 as well as conditioning and filtering of signals. Standard circuits are offered for each type of sensor I/O point. Special
circuits can be constructed by the customer on the Custom Cards.
Termination Cards provides a screw-down terminal for connection
of customer wires. This feature offers several advantages, such as
(a) the customer can wire his signals to the cards prior to system
arrival at the site, thereby reducing the installation time ... (b) when
a system is upgraded, rewiring is merely a matter of unplugging the
cards from the old module and plugging them into the new module
... (c) sensor-based points may be quickly disconnected for trouble
shooting.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002.
ACCESSORIES
Table 1, below, shows a summary of the requirements for the
Attachment Accessories.
AI CUSTOM 1#1110J. This card contains screw terminals for
customer
connection
of
four
analog
input
signals
to
Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247 in 5014J, Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245 in
5014), Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012), Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249
in 5014). or Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 in 5012). Solder terminals are
provided for the customer addition of networks to each point to
complete the connection. This card should be used where the
customer desires to construct analog input networks of his own
design. Limitations: Use of this card can affect accuracy and
repeatability of the analog to digital conversion of analog signals
connected to it.
AI/MR FILTER (#1113J.
This card contains filter circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of four analog input signals to Multiplexer/MR16 1#5247 in 5014), Multiplexer/MD16
(#5245 in 5014). or Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012). Current
resistors can be added to the terminals. No provision is made to
add other components.
AI/MR RBT/FILTER 1#1114J. This card contains one resistance
bulb thermometer circuit plus three filter circuits for customer
connection of three analog input signals to Multiplexer / MR16
(#5247 in 5014). Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245 in 5014), or
Multiplexer / MR4 (#5246 in 5012). The resistance bulb circuit output can be used to calculate a reference junction temperature.
Current resistors cannot be added to the terminals. No provision is
made to add components. Maximum: 32 per Temperature Reference Attach. Prerequisite: Temperature Reference Attach (#7830)
in 5012 or 5014.
AI/MS CONNECTOR 1#1122J. This card contains circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of four analog input Signals to Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249 in 5014). or Multiplexer/MS4
(#5248 in 5012J' No filter circuits are provided. Current resistors
can be added to the terminals. No provision is made to add other
components. Limitation: Use of this card can affect accuracy and
repeatability of the analog to digital conversion of analog signals
connected to it.
AI/MS NON-POLARIZED FILTER 1#1121). This card contains
filter circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of four
analog input signals to Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249 in 5014), or
Multiplexer /MS4 (#5248 in 5012). The filter circuit is a nonpolarized network ... can accept both positive and negative signals.
Current resistors can be added to the terminals. No provision is
made to add other components.
AI/MS POLARIZED FILTER 1#1124). This card is identical to the
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter (#1121), except the filter circuit is
polarized ... accepts only a single polarized signal.
AI/MS RBT /NON-POLARIZED FILTER 1#1123).
This card
contains one resistance bulb thermometer circuit plus three filter
circuits for customer connection of three analog input signals to
Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249 in 5014) or Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 in
5012). The resistance bulb thermometer circuit output can be used
to calculate a referenece junction temperature. The filter circuit is a
non-polarized network ... can accept both positive and negative
signals. Current resistors cannot be added to the terminals. No
provision is made to add other components. Maximum: 32 per
Temperature Reference Attach. Prerequisite: Temperature Refer-
ence Attach (#7830) in 5012 or 5014.
CAPACITOR NON-POLARIZED 10UF 1#1570). A special capacitor used to construct the network on the AI / MS Non-Polarized
Filter (#1121) termination card. This 10 microfarad, 35 volt, nonpolarized capacitor has very low di-electric absorption, low leakage
and small physical size.
CONNECTOR, 3-PIN (#1240). This cable plug is used to connect
the customer analog output signal wires to the analog output points
on the 5012. One is required for each Analog Output Point (#1246
in 5012). Installation of wires on the connector is the customer's
responsibility.
CONNECTOR, 4-PIN 1#8185). This plug is used to connect the
2790 loop transmission lines to the 2790 Control (#8195) in the
5012. One is required for the 2790 Control (#8195) in 5012. This
plug is also used to connect to the external synchronization control
on the 5012 and 5014. One is. required for each 5014 and one for
1ach 5012 with Analog Input Control Mod B (#1232) or Analog
Input Control Mod C (#1213). Installation of wires on the connector
is a customer responsibility.
CURRENT RESISTOR 4-20 MA (#1670). This precision resistor
can be connected across analog input terminals to act as a current
shunt. It converts 4 to 20 milliamperes to 128 to 640 millivolts.
Limitation: Cannot be used on analog input termination cards
AI/MR RBT/Filter (#1114) or AI/MS RBT/Non-Polarized Filter
(#1123) .
CURRENT RESISTOR 10-50 MA (#1671). This precision resistor
can be connected across analog input terminals to act as a current
shunt. It converts 10 to 50 milliamperes to 128 to 640 millivolts.
Limitation: Cannot be used on analog input termination cards
AI/MR RBT /Filter (#1114) or AI/MS RBT /Non-Polarized Filter
(#1123).
01 CONTACT SENSE (#3281). This card contains contact sensing circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of eight
digital input signals to Digital Input Group (#3289 in 5012 and
5013) or Process Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013). One side of
each contact sense point is connected to a common 48 volts DC to
provide contact sensing capability. No provision is made to add
components.
01 CONTACT SENSE NON-ISOLATED (#3280). This card contains contact sensing circuits and screw terminals for customer
connection of eight digital input signals to Digital Input NonIsolated (#3292) in the 5012 or 5013. One side of each contact
sense point is connected to a common 48 volt DC to provide contact sensing capability. No provision is made to add components.
01 CUSTOM (#3282).
This card contains screw terminals for
customer connection of eight digital input signals to Digital Input
Group (#3289 in 5012 or 5013). Digital Input Non-Isolated (#3292
in 5012 or 5013). or Process Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013).
Solder terminals are provided for customer addition of networks to
each point to complete the connection. This card should be used
where the customer desires to use digital input networks of his
own design.
01 VOLTAGE SENSE (#3283).
This card contains circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of eight digital input
signals to Digital Input Group (#3289 in 5012 or 5013) or Process
Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013). No provision is made to add
components on this card.
DO CONNECTOR (#3410i. This card contains screw terminals
for direct customer connection of eight digital output signals to DO
Low Power Group (#3421 in 5012 or 5013), DO Medium Power
Group (#3422 in 5012 or 5013), DO Medium Power Non-Isolated
(#3424 in 5012 or 5013), or DO Contact Group (#3420 in 5012 or
5013). No provision is made to add components.
DO CUSTOM (#3430).
This card contains screw terminals for
customer connection of eight digital output signals to DO Low
Power Group (#3421 in 5012 or 5013). DO Medium Power Group
(#3422 in 5012 or 5013). DO Medium Power Non-Isolated (#3424
in 5012 or 5013). or DO Contact Group (#3420 in 5012 or 5013).
Solder terminals are provided for the customer addition of networks
to each point.
VOLTAGE CHECK (#1184).
This card provides seven voltage
outputs of either polarity suitable for use as an analog input checking source. The card can be plugged into a specific socket and
wired to one analog input point at a time to be used as a program
addressable voltage check source. The following voltage are provided: 4 volts, 512 millivolts, 128 millivolts, 64 millivolts, 32 millivolts, 15 millivolts, and 5 millivolts.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
DP Machines
5029 Mdl 1 Attachment Accessories for System/7
Accessories Prices:
Feature Purchase
AI Custom
#1110
AI/MR Filter
1113
AI/MR RBT/Filter
1114
AI/MS Connector
1122
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter
1121
AI/MS Polarized Filter
1124
AI/MS RBT/Non-Polarized Filter 1123
Capacitor Non-Polarized 10UF
1570
Connector. 3-Pin
1240
Connector.4-Pin
8185
Current Resistor 4-20 MA
1670
Current Resistor 10-50 MA
1671
01 Contact Sense
3281
01 Contact Sense Non-Isolated 3280
01 Custom
3282
01 Voltage Sense
3283
3410
DO Connector
DO Custom
3430
Voltage Check Card
1184
M 5029.2
May 79
(cont'd)
$ 30.00
28.00
144.00
35.00
71.00
52.00
217.00
7.00
3.50
4.00
4.00
2.50
39.00
68.00
39.00
37.00
28.00
36.00
70.00
Note: Specifications stated in the sales manual are a generalized
description of the system features. Detail specifications for
System/7 Sensor I/O features must be quoted or proposed from
the latest revision of the IBM System/7 Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA34-0004.
Sensor Input!Output Features
Analog
Input
(AI)
TABLE 1
External ~nalog
Digital
Sync
Input
(DII
putPUt
(AO)
Digital
Output
IDO)
2790
Control
5029 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES FOR SYSTEM17
Components Required to
Connect to each Sensor
In put/Output Feature
Analog
Input (AI)
Termination
Cards
~
c
AI Current
8.
Resistors
~
E
0
u
01 Termination Cards
AI/MR F;lter (#1113)
AI/MR RBT/Filter (#1114)
AI Custom (/Flll0)
AI/MS Connector (#1122)
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter (# 1121)
AI/MS Polar;zed (#1124)
AI/MS RBT/Non-Polar;zed F;lter (/F1123)
Total· Maximum Cards Der AI Group
Current Resistor 4 - 20 MA (# 1670)
Current Resistor 10-50 MA (#1671).
Total Maximum Resistors Der AI Group
01 Contact Sense (# 32811
(Used with Temperature Reference Attachment)
4
4
4
16
16
16
4
16
16
16
4
4
(Used with Temperature Reference Attachment)
16
16
16
2
01 Contact Sense Non-Isolated (1F3280)
DI Voltage Sense (#32B3)
DI Custom (i'I'32621
Total Maximum Cards per 01 Group
DOTermination Cards
2
2
DO C:mnector {'*'3410
2
DO Custom (#34301
Total Maximum Cards Der DO GroulJ
2
1 per
Connector, J.Pin (:fI: 1240)
Connectors
Connecto,. 4 P;n (/F81B5)
2
Pbint
~:~:~O
AI Voltage, Check Card (1/11184) is available to check AI
maximum,one per 5012 with #121"3 orft:1232; four per 5014.
Capacitor Non·Polarized 10 UF (#1570) ia available to construct custom networks.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
1 per
Loop
M 5203
May 79
DP Machines
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 5203 PRINTER
Purpose: The 5203 Printer mdl 3 is used for printed output for a
S/370 mdl 115.
For description and use of the 5203 mdls 1, 2 and 3 with S/3,
see GSD
manual.
Model 3
300 Ipm rated speed with a 48 character set.
INTERCHANGEABLE TRAIN CARTRIDGE, ADD'L (#4740).
An
additional operator changeable train cartridge containing from 48
to 120 different characters. See "Type Catalog" for feature numbers of available arrangements. Prerequisites: If any character set
containing more than 48 different characters is to be used, Universal Character Set Attachment (#8639) is required on the 5203. In
addition, Universal Charater Set Control (#9848) Is required on
the 3115 Processing Unit.
'
PRINT POSITIONS, 24 ADDITIONAL (#5558).
number of print positions from 96 to 120.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Highlights: The standard unit has 96 print positions ... can be
expanded to 120 or 132 positions. See "Special Features." Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch, under operator control. Horizontal
spacing is 10 characters to the inch.
One interchangeable train cartridge is supplied with the 5203 mdl
'3 ... see "Specify." Additional interchangeable train cartridges are
available ... see "Special Features."
When Universal Character Set Control (#9848) is installed on the
3115, and the 5203 is equipped with Universal Character Set
Attachment (#8639), interchangeable train cartridges containing
character sets from 49 to 120 characters can be used. Use of
such character sets may result in reduced throughput, depending
upon the character set being used and the text being printed. See
5203 Printer in "Type Catalog" for details.
Printed format is controlled by the stored program. Continuous
marginally punched forms are fed by a forms tractor. Maximum
forms dimensions are 16-3/4" wide and 14" long (edge-to-edge).
Minimum forms dimensions are 3-7/8" wide and 3" long (edge-toedge). Paper eject speed is 16.67" /second at 6 lines/inch ...
12" /second at 8 lines/inch.
Limitations: [1] Only marginally punched, pin fed, continuous
forms can be used on the 5203. No staples are permitted in
the print train area.
PRINT POSITIONS, 12 ADDITIONAL (#5559). [For field installation only... for plant installation of 132 print positions, order
#5560 below] Increases the number of print positions from 120
to 132. Prerequisite: Print Positions, 24 Add'l '(#5558) on the
5203.
PRINT POSITIONS, 36 ADDITIONAL (#5560).
number of print positions from 96 to 132.
Special Feature Prices:
[5] For S/370 mdl 115, the 5203 Printer mdl 3 requires 120 print
positions if this is the only printer on the system.
Maximum: Only one 5203 mdl 3 can be attached to a S/370 mdl
115.
ribbons
Prerequisites: For S/370 mdl 115 -- an Integrated 3203/5203
Printer Prerequisite (#4653) and Integrated 5203 Printer Mdl 3
Attachment (#4690) on the 3115.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V or
#9905 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Print Train Arrangement: Se,e 5203 Printer in "Type Catalog"
for arrangements and required feature #s.
[4] System Attachment Adapter: #9223 for attachment to S/370
mdl 115. Field Installable.
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
5203
3
$488
$10,880
$158
FIC
$2,145 $40.50
••
1,160
2.50 $205
587
NC
189
1,750
2.50
205
236
1.50 162
•• Installation by IBM is not normally required. However, if assistance is
required, charges will be made on a Time and Material basis.
[4] Forms sets which gave satisfactory results on 5203 mdls 1 and
2 may show a decrease in print quality when used on a 5203
mdl3.
Mdl
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Interchangeable Train
Cartridge, Add'i
#4740 $123
Print Positions, 24 Add'i
5558
59
Print POSitions, 12 Add'l 5559
29
Print Positions, 36 Add'i 5560
88
Universal Char Set Attach 8639
10
[3] Print quality and forms feeding varies with paper specifications,
ribbon and number of copies. Multiple copy forms of more than
four parts and forms with a first part heavier than 13-pounds
should be tested under operating conditions to determine that
results are satisfactory for the user's application.
PRICES:
Increases the
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ATTACHMENT (#8639).
Required if any Interchangeable Train Cartridge with more than 48
different characters is to be used. See 5203 Printer in "Type
Catalog" for details. Prerequisite: Universal Character Set Control
(#9848) on the 311 5.
[2] No representations or committments as to readability of 5203
printing by optical character recognition equipment shall be
made.
Supplies:
Increases the
Plan Offllring: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 40% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----
---- ---- - --.-==-=
--':' =
M 5213-5424
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 5213 PRINTER
IBM 5424 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT
Purpose: Optional console printer for the S/370 mdl 115 (5213
mdl 1 only) or S/370 mdl 125 (5213 mdl 1 only).
Purpose: A multi-function card input/output unit for attachment to
a 4331 Processor. Uses the 96-column card.
Model
For description and use of the 5213 mdl 1, 2 or 3 with the
System/3, see GSD
manual.
Model 1
Has a pin feed platen.
Model Changes: Model 1 to Model 2 -- requires a capacity replacement of machine.
Highlights: Prints serially at a rate of 85 cps. The maximum print
line is 132 positions at 10 characters/inch spacing. Line spacing
is 6 lines/inch. Electronic tab is provided under program control.
EBCDIC coded matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires,
each printing a dot in up to 4 of 7 possible positions. The 26
letters and 10 digits can be printed; the following special characters can also be printed:
&@#?¢$%.,;:'()_+-*/ t =~<>I~
Use of the "underscore" in conjunction with another character will
overprint the lowest matrix dot forming that character and is not
recommended. Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for form design considerations and limitations.
Model 1 -- has a pin feed platen, which feeds marginally punched
continuous forms 13-7/8" wide (hole-to-hole), provides single
space forms indexing under program control, and has high speed
tab left. Up to 6-part forms can be printed, with a maximum thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more than 3
parts are recommended). Forms length can be 3" to 14" in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous forms are not recommended. An optional forms stand stacker is available ... see
"Accessories" below.
Performance Considerations -- an analysis of each document type
to be printed is necessary to find actual throughput of a serial
printer. When used with dedicated printing jobs, throughput depends upon the ratio (R) of lines printed per page to the maximum
number of lines available per page and upon the number of character positions (C) in the printed line. Lines printed per minute
(LPM) can be approximated using formulas:
For Model 1 ... LPM =
EXAMPLE:
Then: LPM
2700!3.
RC + 5
where C is average number
of character positions.
For Model 1. If 22 of 66 lines on a page are printed, R
= 1/3. Assume a maximum line length of 75 character
positions.
= ~:3~~;)1{35) = 30 (approximate
throughput)
Prerequisites: An integrated 5213 Printer mdl
(#4692) on the 3115 or 3125 Processing Unit.
1 Attachment
Limitations: Only one printer can be attached to a 3115 or 3125
Processing Unit.
Supplies: Serial #12000 and below (mdl 1) -- a black ribbon, IBM
Part No. 1136906 or equivalent, is recommended. Serial # 12001
and above (mdl 1) -- a black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136970 or
equivalent, is recommended
PRICES:
5213
Mdl
250/60/60' cpm
500/120/120' cpm
, Print Speed: Is at the maximum rate of 60 or 120 cards per
minute on any or all of the first three lines. Printing on the
fourth (lower) line will cause reduction in throughput regardless
of whether or not printing occurs on any or all of the first three
lines. Resultant throughput is 48 cpm for a model A 1 and 96
cpm for a model A2.
Highlights: Provides the combined functions of a card reader,
punch, collator and interpreter in one unit. Permits collating,
gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching, punching of
calculated results, printing, and classifying of cards in a single
pass of the cards. Card sorting is also possible using a multiple
pass method under program control.
Input Section: Separate primary and secondary card hoppers,
each with a 2,000 card capacity, feed cards independently to a
common read station and on into separate wait stations. Depending upon the model, rated serial reading is at 250 or 500 cards
per minute from either hopper. The common reading unit is
checked for proper functioning on each read cycle. The card code
read is 6 rows consisting of B, A, 8, 4, 2, 1 punches representing
a 64-character set.
Output Section: From separate wait stations, cards are fed to a
common punch station, through the punch and cornering stations
to the print station, where up to 4 lines with up to 32 characters
per line can be printed on the card. Line designation is determined by the stored program. Characters represented are the
standard 64 character set corresponding to the 96-column card
code. Printing is by engraved typewheel. Cards are then selected
into any of the 4 stackers, each with a 600-card capacity. Depending upon the model, rated serial punching is at 60 or 120
cards/minute.
Multi-function: With the ability to move cards from either hopper
under independent control to the punching station and with complete stacker selection flexibility, the common card functions of
collating, reproducing, gangpunching, summary punching, and
selective stacking can be accomplished.
Maximum: One 5424 mdl A1 or A2 can be attached to an 4331
Processor.
Prerequisites: A 5424 Attachment (#3901) on the 4331 ... 4331
Attachment (#6510) on the 5424 itself. See "Special Features"
below.
Limitations:
1.
Detailed disclosure specifications describing the 96-coumn
card are available from the IBM Corp., Commercial Development Office, Armonk, New York. Card configur3tions or card
stocks which do not conform to these specifications may result
in unsatisfactory machine performance. The configurations
available from IBM
2.
OCR type font for use with current line IBM Optical Character
Reading Equipment is not available.
Bibliography: GC20-8080
Specify: Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V,
or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
Speed (Read/Punch/Print)
A1
A2
MAC/
MRC
Purcahse
MMMC
Supplies: The 5424 uses a cassette ribbon replaceable by the
customer
$ 179
$4,115
$ 66
Bibliography: Reference Manual, GA21-9167 (Available 3/79)
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3115 or 3125)
Maintenance: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Warranty: B
Accessories: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage.
•
Color: #9066 for pearl white ... must be specified.
PRICES:
5424
FORMS STAND STACKER (#4450)_
[Mdl 1 only] Permits
placement of continuous forms (out of carton) on the stand
above floor level and provides for continuous forms stacking
after printing.
Mdl
A1
A2
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$376
565
$7,810
10,340
MMMC
$185
266
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 35% Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Field install able.
t
No Educational Allowance:
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
--------=-- =
---'-=--':' =
M 5424 - 5425
May 19
DP Machines
5424 Multi-Function Card Unit (conI' d)
SPECIAL FEATURES
4331 ATTACHMENT (#6510). To attach a 5424 mdl A1 or A2 to
an 4331 Processor. Prerequisite: 5424 Attachment (#3901) on
the 4331. Maximum; One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices
4331 Attachment
#6510 $60
Purchase MMMC
$2,670
$6
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yrs
5425
A1
A2
$748
974
$637
829
Purchase
$15,560
18,960
IBM 5425 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT
A1
A2
$215
424
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 35% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Purpose: A multi-function card input/output unit for a 5/370 mdl
115, 125 ... uses the 96-column card.
Model
MMMC
Speed (Read/Punch/Print)
250/60/60' cpm
500/120/120' cpm
Model Changes: Field install able.
Highlights: Provides the combined functions of a card reader,
punch, collator and interpreter In one unit. Permits collating, gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching, punching of calculated
results, printing, and classifying of cards In a single pass of the
cards. Card sorting is also possible using a multiple pass method
under program control.
Input Section -- separate primary and secondary card hoppers,
each with a 2000-card capacity, feed cards independently to a
common read station and on into separate wait stations. Depending upon the model, rated serial reading is at 250 or 500
cards/minute from either hopper. The common reading unit is
checked for proper functioning on each read cycle. The card code
read on both models is 8 rows of 0, C, B, A, 8, 4, 2, 1 punches
representing a 256-character set.
Output Section - from separate wait stations, cards are fed to a
common punch station, through the punch and cornering stations,
to the print station, where up to 4 lines with up to 32 characters
per line can be printed on the card. Line designation is determined
by the stored program. Characters represented are the standard
64-character set corresponding to the 6-bit subset of the 96column card code. Printing is by engraved typewheel. Cards are
then selected into anyone of 4 stackers, each with a 600-card
capacity. Depending upon the model, rated serial punching is at
60 or 120 cards/minute.
Note: Punching Is eight rows representing a 256-character set.
Eight-row punching in columns 33-96 can overpunch print
positions 65-128.
Multi-function - with the ability to move cards from either hopper
under independent control to the punching stations and with complete stacker selection flexibility, the common card functions of
collating, reproducing, gangpunching, summary punching, and
selective stacking can be accomplished.
• Print Speed -- is at the maximum rate of 60 or 1 20
cards/minute when printing on any or all of the first three lines.
Printing on the fourth (lower) line will cause some reduction in
throughput regardless of whether or not printing occurs on any or
all of the first three lines. Resultant throughput is 48 cpm for mdl
A1 and 96 cpm for mdl A2. Uses a casette ribbon replaceable by
the customer
Maximum: One 5425 mdl A1 or A2 can be attached to a 5/370
mdl 115 or 125.
Prerequisites: An Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695) with
#9183 specified for mdl A1 or #9184 for mdl A2 on the 3115 or
3125.
Limitations: [1] Detailed disclosure speCifications describing the
96-column card are available from the IBM Corp., Commercial
Development Office, Armonk, New York. Card configurations or
card stocks which do not conform to these specifications may
result is unsatisfactory machine performance. The configurations
available from IBM
[2] OCR type font for use with current line IBM optical character
reading equipment is not available.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white ... must be consistent with
3115 or 3125.
[reverse side Is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5496.1
May 79
DP Machines
5496 DATA RECORDER
PRICES
5496
Purpose: An operator oriented key entry unit used to create the
96-column card as well as verify data which has been previously
recorded.
For use with System/3, 3740 System or. 5320,
manual.
see GSD
Model 1
Rated card read speed 20 columns per second.
Model 2
Rated card speed 60 columns per second. Minus
right adjust standard.
When equipped with a 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850), the
model 1 can be attached to a 2770 Data Communication System
for transmission and punching of 96 column card data or can be
attached to a 3741 Data Station/Programmable Work Station as
an auxiliary card reader.
When equipped with a 3735 Attachment (#7801), the model 1 can
be attached to a 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal for transmissions, reading, and punching of 96-column card data.
Hlghllght8: Buffered, key entry, punch and print areas ... 64character keyboard ... aLito skipping ... automatic duplicating at
electronic speeds .. four program levels .. , right adjust, size of
field can be 96 columns ... field erase ... word erase ... record
erase ... upper, lower and numeric shift control ... punches and
prints at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per second ... engraved printing '" reading via photosensors
... backlighted, easy-to-read column indicator ... hopper and stacker capacity of 350 cards ... 410 square inch reading board work
area ... rotational keyboard mobility ... auxiliary duplication is a
standard operation ... feed check light indicates card misfeed or
card jam ... stacker-full light.
Alphabetic, numeric and special character recording in cards can
be key verified on the same machine.
Notches verified correct cards on trailing edge of card ... manually
skipped columns verified as blanks ... programmed or manually
keyed auto verified fields will be verified ... programmed skipped
fields will not be verified for content ... right adjust fields are
programmable for testing proper number of blanks inserted .. .
when an error is detected, keyboard locks and error light is lit .. .
depressing error reset unlocks keyboard ... after third try on column in error, memory is changed to reflect corrected data ... at
end of corrected field, control reverts to first manual column of
corrected field for reverification ... completion of proper verify
routine allows blank cards to be manually Inserted In hopper and
repunch operation provides a corrected card with verify notch.
Incorrect card will be stacked without notching. Proper card formatting will enhance throughput when verifying ... see Operator's
Guide for details.
A cassette ribbon provides for rapid and easy operator Installation
A card gauge is provided without additional charge with each Data
Recorder. .
Limitation: Detailed disclosure specifications describing the 96column card are available from the IBM Corp., Commercial Development Office, Armonk, New York. Card configurations or card
stocks which do not conform to these speCifications may result in
unsatisfactory machine performance. The configurations available
from IBM
Manual: GA21-9086
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, non-lock plug):
#9881.
[2] When ordered as a component of a 2770 system,
2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850) Is required ... see
"Special Features."
[3] When ordered for attachment to a 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal, 3735 Attachment (#7801) Is required ... see
"Special Features."
[4] When ordered for attachment to a 3741
Data
Station/Programmable Work Station, 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850) is required ... see "Special Features."
[5] Print Wheel Arrangement: Slash-zero Is the standard numeric
character. If a non-slash zero (0) Is desired, specify #9490.
See Type Catalog TC 1 for field installation charge.
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purcha8e
MMMC
1
$203
210
$4,005
$59.50
61.50
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
4,135
Purchase Option: 40%
Useful Life Category: 2
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
Model Change8: Model 1, with serial number 51221 or above, can
be field upgraded to a Model 2.
SPECIAL FEATURES
8-BIT READ/pUNCH (#3666). [Model 1 only] Provides offline
capability to punch special 8-blt coded characters in 96-column
cards. Dependent on C/O-Bit switch setting, 5496 operates in
either conventional System/3 6-bit mode or Special 8-bit mode.
C/O switch ON permits 96-column cards punched with 256character set to be read into storage for subsequent punchout
(duplication) or manual keyboard entry of combined bit structures
to generate special 8-bit coded characters. Keyboard generated
characters utilize the multi-punch key metho.d. 8"blt characters are
not printable regardless of print switch setting.
In verify, the 8-bit mode of operation is inhibited regardless of the
C/O-Bit switch setting, thereby preventing the verification of 8-bit
coded characters.
Limitation: Cannot be installed on machines equipped with
System/3 Model 6 Attachment (#7501), 3735 Attachment
(#7801), or 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850). Field
In8tallatlon: Not recommended.
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER (#7061, 7062). Provides a means of
verifying precoded alphameric information at the same time it is
punched. Use of the feature requires that a check digit be added
to the basic code number to produce a self-check number. The
check digit is always placed in the units position of a selfchecking number. More than one self-checking field can be
checked per card. Correctly keyed cards are identified by "B" bit
punch in the space adjacent to column 32 of tier 1. Self-checked
fields bypassed via skip key depression will not carry the "B" bit
punch In the specified location. One of two versions of the feature
can be installed:
#7061 - Modulus 10 .. , factors (X2, X1 applied to alternate
positions) are the arithmetic weighting factors used to
arrive at the Modulus 10 check digit.
#7062 - Modulus 11 ... factors (X7, X6, X5, X4, X3, X2 applied
in that order) are the arithmetic weighting factors used to
arrive at the Modulus 11 check digit.
Limitations: Neither version will operate on a left-based nLimber ...
Self-check numbers of Modulus 10 are not compatible with those
of Modulus 11.
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6/5230 ATTACHMENT (#7501).
only) See GSD
manual for details and prices.
(Model 1
3735 ATTACHMENT (#7801). rModel 1 only) To attach the
5496 to the 3735 Programmable 13uffered Terminal. Operation is
under switch control on the 5496. When in "Terminal" position,
the 5496 may be used as either a card reader or a card punch for
punching of 96-column card data at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per second ... when in manual
pOSition, the 5496 operates as a standard machine. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with 8-Bit Read/Punch
(#3666). Specify: If desired, #9674 for ASCII print wheel and
keytops ... otherwise standard print wheel and keytops will be
supplied. [Available at time of manufacture only] Prerequl8lte:
5496 Attachment (#3950) on the 3735. Note: Signal cable and
connector required to attach a 5496 to a 3735 are included with
#3950 on the 3735.
.
2772/3741/5320 ATTACHMENT (#7850). [Model 1 only] Provides the ability to attach the 5496 Data Recorder mdl 1 to the
2772
Multi-Purpose
Control
Unit or the
3741
Data
Station/Programmable Work Station or to any model 5320. Operation is under switch control on the 5496. When in manual position,
the 5496 operates as a standard machine. When in "Terminal"
position, the 5496 may be used either as a card reader or as a
card punch for punching of 96-column card data. Attached online
to the 2772, the 5496 reads, punches, or punch/prints card data
at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per
second. Attached online to the 3741, the 5496 reads, punches or
punch/prints cards under control 'of the 3741 at the following
rated speeds: Card reading - 21 cards per minute ... punch/print
- 17 cards per minute.' Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
Installed with 8-Blt Read/Punch (#3666). [Available at time of
manufacture only] Specify: When ordered as a component of a
2770 system, If desired, specify #9674 for ASCII print wheel and
keytops ... otherwise standard print wheel and keytops will be
supplied. Prerequl8lte: 5496 Attachment (#3970) on the 2772 or
Data Recorder Attachment (#3200) on the 3741. Note: A signal
cable and connector required to attach a 5496 to a 2772 is Included In #3970 on the 2772. A 25 foot cable and connector
required to attach a 5496 to a 3741 Is Included In #3200 on the
3741.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- -~-- ----- ----
-- ---
M 5496.2
May 79
- =':' =
=- =-
DP Machines
5496 Data Recorder (cont'd)
MAC/
Special Feature Prices
MRC
8-Blt Read/Punch
#3666 $36
Self-Checklng Number
7061
38
Modulus 10
Modulus 11
7062
38
3735 Attachment
7801
55
2772/3741/5320 Attach 7850
55
Purchase MMMC
$ 763
$1.50
474
474
1,180
1,180
1.00
1.00
4.50
18.50
FIC
•
82
82
PO
PO
SPECIAL FEATURE COMBINATIONS - maximum combinations.
indicated by "X". are shown In vertical columns.
Model
I
8· Bit Read Punch #3666
SeIf·Check Number Modulus 10 or II #706117062
Svstem/3 Model 6 Attachment #1501
3735 Attachment #1801
2112/314115320 Attachment #1850
X
X
X
X
X
2
X
X
X
X
• Not recommended for field installation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --------===
------':' =
M 7330 - 7770
May 79
DP Machines
7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
• The following specifications can be changed in the field.
the 7770, are to be paid by the customer ... [3] DP Marketing
Representative must have customer obtain firm installation date for
transmission service before processing the OC card ... [4] 7770
Vocabulary Specification Sheet
must be completed
and submitted at least 90 days prior to installation.
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
Programming Support -- programming systems support is covered
under DOS and OS TCAM ... see "Programming."
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a system multiplexer
cl1annel ... one subchannel per input/output line.
7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT
Purpose: Provides a composed audio response to a digital inquiry
from a 1001 Data Transmission Terminal, a telephone set, or other
inquiry type terminal to a field-oriented S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40,
50, 65, 75, 85, 195 or any S/370 Processor, or any 4300
Processor.
Highlights: Connects a data processing system with telephone
and other inquiry type terminals through common carrier data sets
over appropriate communication services. The 7770 receives an
inquiry consisting of a series of coded characters from the inquiry
terminal.
The inquiry message and the response message are transmitted
between the 7770 and the processing unit character-by-character
under program control. There is no limitation on the length of the
inquiry or response message. Other major characteristics are:
Conversational Mode Operation under program control - inquiryanswer sequence may be repeated any number of times within the
same call without re-dialing the 7770 for each inquiry.
End of Inquiry (EOI) Character Recognition - terminals such as
the 1001 and 2730, and some push-buUont dialing devices are
capable of sending an EOI code which over-rides the 5-second
inter-digital timeout used in the 7770. EOI Disable (#3540) can
be ordered if the customer prefers that the EOI character on the
push-button dialing device not be used for this function '" see
"Special Features."
Primary Character Timeout Disconnect -- the 7770 answers an
incoming call and waits 32 seconds for the first inquiry character
to appear '" if it does not appear within this time, the call is abandoned, releasing the line for other service.
Inquiry characters are sent to the processor for translation and 99
codes are recognizeable. For valid codes, see SRL GA27-2712.
Vocabulary -- a 32-word American English vocabulary is provided
with the basic 7770. This can be expanded, in 16-word increments, to up to 128 words ... see .. Special Features." One word
of the vocabulary must be silence. Words may be specified by the
customer according to message requirements. However, lengthy
words must be split and will count as two words. See SRL
GA27-2712 for guidance in word selection. For field vocabulary
modifications, a replacement rotor will be shipped from the plant.
Input/Output Lines -- the basic unit handles up to four lines. The
number of lines can be expanded in 4-line increments to 48 lines
... see "Special Features." Random inquiries on all input/output
lines can be responded to simultaneously.
Configurations -- see the chart following "Special Features" for
various combinations and number of input/output lines possible,
and the special features required for them.
Communications -- the 7770 will operate with:
(a) 1001 Data Transmission Terminal
(b) Rotary dial telephone with associated push-buttont manual
dialing device for inquiry
(c) Rotary dial telephone with associated push-bultont type
card dialer device for inquiry
(d) Push-buttont manual dial telephonett
(e) Push-buttont type card dialer telephonett
(f) Rotary dial telephonettt
(g) Rotary dial card dialer telephonettt
Communication Facilities -- operates in half-duplex mode over
common carrier switched telephone network '" common carrier
leased private line switched telephone service .. , privately owned
communication networks of voice bandwidth. When operating over
a switched telephone network, telephone lines should be ordered
for receive-only service, with make-busy capability in the data set.
Customer Responsibilities -- the customer must be advised that:
[1] He is responsible for price quotations, installation and cost
(initial and recurring) of common carrier equipment and services ...
[2] Toll charages, if required for installation and maintenance of
5/360 mdl 25 -- Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... see 2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard)
see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 65, 75, 85, 195, or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -basic multiplexer channel of 2870 '" see 2870.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) .. ,
see 3115, 3125.
5/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148 -- multiplexer
channel (standard) .,. see 3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3,
3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031, 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel ( one is standard) '" see 3031, 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (two are standard) '"
see 3033.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (special feature) ...
see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard) '"
4341.
see
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Vocabulary Words: Submit completed Vocabulary Specification
Sheet .at least 90 days prior to installation ... for
guidance in word selection, see SRLGA-27-2712.
[4] Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped prior
to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
7770
3
$1,295
$48,370
$52.50
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
SPECIAL FEATURES
EOI DISABLE (#3540).
Allows EOI character of some
push-buttont dialer devices to be used as a data character instead of an EOI character. Maximum: One.
I/O LINE FRAME (#4668).
Required if more than sixteen
input/output lines are to be attached. Maximum: One.
I/O LINE EXPANDED (#4677).
Provides for four additional
input/output lines. Maximum: Eleven.
I/O LINE PANEL (#4679).
An additional panel for eight
input/output lines or portion thereof. One is required for each
increment of eight lines, or portion thereof, added beyond the first
eight lines. Maximum: Five.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that.] To turn power on or off on the 7770 without
generating spurious signals. Thus a CPU, if it can be logically
disconnected from the system before power is turned off, can
continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements,
t For example: TOUCH-TONE, trademark of Bell System, or
Touch-Calling, term used by General Telephone System.
tt Limited to areas served by telephone company central offices
equipped for push-button dialing.
ttt This is not a standard telephone company offering. If technically feasible for local conditions, it maybe offered on a
special assembly basis at discretion of a local telephone
company using a telephone dictation trunk device suitably
modified for this purpose.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=---=-- =-----':' =
M 7770
May 79
..,
DP Machines
7770 Audio Response Unit
(cont'd)
VOCABULARY WORDS, ADD'L (#8721). Each adds 16 vocabulary words. See SRL GA27-2712 for vocabulary word selection.
When ordered for field installation, a replacement rotor is shipped
from the plant. Maximum: Six #8721 s, for a maximum of 128
words on a 7770.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
#3540
EOI Disable
I/O Line Frame
4668
4677
I/O Line Expanded
4679
I/O Line Panel
4700
Isolation, Control Unit
Vocabulary Words, Add'i 8721
NC
NC
NC
$217 $8,065 $ 3.00
190
7,065 16.50
81
3,020
2.50
NC
NC
NC
108
4,030
3.00
$ 11
137
344
119
NC
166
7770 CONFIGURATION CHART ... Maximum Feature Configuration
Table.
FeatlUl!S
#4677
#4679
#4668
,. ,.
Uae Grou AlSilnmellt
R~
qulre4
I'-
S<\
'·11
13-16
17-20
:n·24
1
2
1
3
4
2
1
5
6
3
29-32
J3.J6
7
8
4
".... '1'"
9
.....
10 11
5
Mill. No. Fe.lures Allowed
11
5
1
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 8101.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
Loop Accessories and Wire: See Ml0000 pages for pricing and
ordering instructions.
IBM 8101 STORAGE AND INPUT /OUTPUT
UNIT
Purpose: Provides additional disk storage and device attachment
capability for the 8100 Information System.
Model A10
Device attachment capability
Model A11
29MB (29,327,360 bytes) - movable heads only
and device attachments
Model A13
64MB (64,520,192 bytes) - movable heads only
and device attachments
Maximum: Two per 8100 Information System with a 8130 Processor. One of the 8101 s may be configured with Communication
or Display/Printer features Type I or Type II. Four with an 8140
Processor. Two of the 8101 s may be configured with Communication or Display/Printer features Type I or Type II. The maximum is
one if the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B is attached to the
8130 Processor or three if the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B is
attached to the 8140 Processor. See Table 2 for 8100 System
maximums.
Highlights: The 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit provides
additional disk storage and device attachment capabilities for the
8100 Information System. The 8101 attaches to the I/O bus of the
8130 or 8140 Processor.
Disk storage for the 8101 mdls All and A 13 is provided by a
non-removable high speed direct access storage; Depending on
the model selected, disk storage of up to 64 million bytes with
movable heads is available. The disk storage operates at a data
rate of 1,031,000 bytes per second. The average access time is
27 milliseconds with an average rotational delay of 9.6 milliseconds. Removable diskette storage of 1 MB (985,088) is available
and operates at up to 62K bytes per second data rate. The diskette drive can read/write in basic data exchange format on either
the IBM Diskette 20 or the IBM Diskette Type 1.
The 8100 System can attach to any S/370 or 4300 Processor via
the 3704/3705 for SNA/SDLC or BSC line control. The 8100
System can attach to the ICA of the S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135 or
138 processors for BSC line control. The IBM 8100 System can
attach to the Communications Adapter of the 4331 Processor for
BSC and/or SDLC line control.
The 8101 extends the capability of the 8100 Information System
by providing for the attachment of a variety of input/output devices. These devices consist of displays, printers, magnetic tape,
controllers and data collection units. The devices may be attached
to the 8101 loops. data link attached loops. communication ports
or direct attachment to the 8101.
Communication Attached devices -- Devices that can be attached
to the communication ports of the 8101 are the - 3276 Control
Unit Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14 with 3278
Display Station mdls 1, 2. 3, 4, 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2 and 3289
Line Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3631 Plant Communication Controller
mdls 1 A. 1B - 3632 Plant Communication Controller mdl 1 A, 1 B 8775 Display Terminal mdls 11 and 12 -- 3767 Communication Terminal mdls 1. 2, 3 - 3842 Loop Control Unit - 2741 Communications Terminal -- TTY 33/35 or equivalent -- non-IBM terminals
conforming to 2780/3780 protocol -- 8130 Processor -- 8140
Processor - 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit.
Loop Attached Devices at 2400 or 9600 bps - Devices that can
be attached to a direct attached loop at 9600 bps or data link
attached loop at 2400 bps are the - 3287 Printer mdls 11, 12 3289 Printer mdl 3 with 3501 Card Reader and via the 3782 Card
Attachment Unit the 3521 Card Punch and 2502 Card Reader mdl
A 1 (see Note 1) -- 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdls 11, 12,
13, 14 with 3278 Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer
mdls 1, 2. 3289 Line Printer mdls 1. 2 - 8775 Display Terminal
mdls 11 and 12 - 3641 Reporting Terminal mdls 1. 2 - 3642 Encoder Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3643 Keyboard Display mdls 2, 3, 4 -3644 Automatic Data Unit - 3645 Printer - 3646 Scanner Control
Unit -3647 Time and Attendance Terminal.
Loop Attached Devices at 38,400 bps - Devices that can be
attached to a direct attached loop at 38,400 bps are the -- 3287
mdls 11 and 12. 8775 Display Station mdls 11 and 12.
Direct Attached Devices -- Devices that can be attached directly
to the 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit are the - 3277 Display
mdls 1, 2 - 3284 Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3286 Printer mdls 1. 2 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3288 Line Printer - 8809 Magnetic
Tape Unit mdl 1 A.
NOTE I: Dedication of a 9600 bps single lobe loop to the attachment of the
3289 mdl 3 printer should be considered in cases where the printer will be
heavily utilized.
Customer Set-up (CSU): The 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit
is deSignated as customer set-up thereby offering the customer
early availability and relocation flexibility. Aids and configurators
are provided to enable the 8101 to be properly ordered and configured. Set-up procedures for the customer will be shipped with
each machine. An 8101 installation verification program will be
shipped with each machine on a diskette. A clear indication that
the machine is operational will be given.
If the user relocates and / or interchanges attaching units from one
system to another, the user must consider priority and address
compatibility of the processor and its attachments.
Prerequisites: 8130 or 8140 Processor for mdls Al 0, Allor A 13.
The 8101 model Al 0 requires one Display and Printer Attachment
Type I (#9941) or Communication Attachment Type I (#9943).
Bibliography: Available at a later date.
Color: Pebble gray is the only color available.
Specify: [I] Voltage (120 VAC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): Specify
#9891 for non-lock plug or #9890 for locking plug. If 4.3
meter (14 tt) cable is not desired, specify #9986 for 1.8 meter
(6 ttl cable.
[2]
Cabling: For cabling information see Accessories pages
(Ml0000), appropriate 8100 System installation manuals and
Processor Site Preparation Guides.
[3] Processor Attachment: Specify #9931 for 8130 Processor or
#9932 for 8140 Processor.
[4] System Attachment: Each 8101 requires a specify code to
identify one of the four sets of I/O addresses. Specify one of
the following codes for each 8101 attaching to the same processor: #9921, #9922, #9923. or #9924.. These specify
codes may be selected in any sequence. Duplicate 'codes are
not permitted within a system. Relocation and/or interchange
of 8101 units from one system to another system requires
checking of the specify codes to avoid duplication.
[5] Device or Communication Attachment: One must be specified
for the 8101 mdl Al 0 . The mdl Al 0 provides as part of the
basic machine, the capabilities to attach Display/Printer or
Communication facilities. On initial orders for the mdl Al 0, one
of these capabilities must be specified. Further expansion of
the mdl Al 0 is provided by special features. These same capabilities are provided by special features for the mdls A 11 and
A 13. See Table 1 for additional configuration information.
#9941 -- Display and Printer Attachment Type 1: Provides, in
conjunction with feature #1505 and # 1506, the
capability for the attachment of 3277 Display, 3287
Printer and 3284, 3286 or 3288 Printers in any combination up to a maximum of twenty-four.
#9943 -- Communication Attachment Type 1: Provides the
capability for the attachment of loops and communication facilities in any combination up to a maximum
of four. Additional special features for line control
communication interface and modems are required to
complete each communication facility selected.
[6] Terminal Requirements: For attachment of 3640 family of
terminals see terminal requirements on the 8130 and/or 8140
Machine pages.
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
8101
A10
A11
A13
$201
477
524
$171
406
446
Purchase
$ 6,500
14,970
16,410
MMMC/
AMMCR
$17.00
55.50
63.50
Rental Plan: Plan 0
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model upgrade requires replacement of the disk
storage unit. Adequate provisions must be made for retaining data
contained on the disk storage unit and elimination of userproprietary information.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Field conversion charge for Model A10 to A11 is $ 9,570·
Field conversion charge for Model A10 to A13 is $11,010·
Field conversion charge for Model A 11 to A 13 is $ 2,500··
• For mdl Al 0 w /0 #1507 and no chnage in the Type 1 (see
Table 1) feature requirement. Submit an RPQ for all other conversions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- - - -- ----==-=
": =
M 8101.2
Jul79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
Performance: The maximum number of Features for Attaching
Communications (FA C) capable of concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the line, the communication facility, the operating system installed and the application work load. The maximum number of communication features which can be physically
installed can exceed the operational capability. Increased processor utilization will result from sustained operation of BSC at the
maximum aggregate data rate and may cause degradation of
activity operating at lower priority levels. Analysis should be performed to determine the impact.
Diagnostics: The 8100 System hardware and feature operation,
diagnostic support and maintenance support described in 8100
System publications are dependent on the presence of functional
support modules provided by Distributed Processing Programming
Executive (DPPX) or Distributed Processing Control Executive
(DPCX). Operational and maintenace conditions for the 8100
System are predicated on the presence of these functional support
modules. Customers ordering 8100 System hardware without
DPPX or DPCX should provide the functional support as contained
and described in the Functional Definition Manual 8100 which will
be available
at FCS.
[Mdls
DISPLAY AND PRINTER ATTACHMENT TYPE I (#1501).
A 11, A 13 only] Provides in conjunction with feature # 1505 and
#1506 the capability for the attachment of 3277 Display, 3287
Printer and 3284, 3286 or 3288 Printers in any combination up to
a maximum of twenty-four. Limitations: Not available with 8101
mdl A 10. Not available with Communication Attachment Type I
(#1503), Communication Attachment Type II (#1504) or Display
and Printer Attachment Type II (#1502). See Table 1 for additional information. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100 System
maximums. Field installation: Yes.
ProDISPLAY AND PRINTER ATTACHMENT TYPE II (#1502).
vides in conjunction with feature # 1505 and # 1506 the capability
for the attachment of 3277 Display, 3287 Printer and 3284, 3286
or 3288 Printers in any combination up to a maximum of twentyfour. Limitation: Not available with Display and Printer Attachment
Type I (#1501 or #9941) or Communication Attachment Type II
(#1504). See Table 1 for additional information. Maximum: One.
See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field Installation: Yes.
For field installation by purchase customer, see Note 2 under
Table 1. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I (#1503
or #9943).
COMMUNICATION ATTACHMENT TYPE I (#1503). [Mdls A 11,
A 13 only] Provides the capability for the attachment of loops and
communication ports in any combination up to a maximum of four.
Additional special features for line control, communication interface and modems are required to complete each communication
facility seiected. Limitations: Not available with 8101 mdl A 10.
Not available with Display And Printer Attachment Type I (#1501).
See Table 1 for additional information. Only available with port
positions one thru four. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100
System maximums. Field installation: Yes. For field installation by
purchase customer, see Note 2 under Table 1.
COMMUNICATION ATTACHMENT TYPE II (#1504). Provides the
capability for the attachment of loops and communication ports in
any combination up to a maximum of four. Additional special
features for line control, communication interface and modems are
required to complete each communication facility selected.
Limitation: Not available with Display and Printer Attachment Type
II (#1502) or Display and Printer Attachment Type I (#1501 or
#9941). See Table 1 for additional information. Only available
with port position five thru eight. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for
8100 System maximums. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Communication Attachment Type I (#1503 or #9943).
DISPLAY AND PRINTER ADAPTER (#1505).
Provides for the
attachment of the first four 3277 Display, 3287 Printer and 3284,
3286, 3288 Printers. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Display And
Printer Attachment Type I or II (#1501, #1502 or #9941).
DISPLAY AND PRINTER, ADDITIONAL (#1506).
Provides for
the attachment of additional 3277 Display, 3287 Printer and 3284,
3286 or 3288 Printers in any combination up to a maximum of
four. Maximum: Five. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums.
Field instailation: Yes. Prerequisite: Display And Printer Adapter
(#1505).
TABLE 1
When configuring the 8101 for Display/Printer and Communication
features, the Type I feature requirement should be determined
first. The Type II should then be configured if so required. The
table below shows the combinations of these features that may be
configured.
8101 Mdl Al0
Type I
Type II
#9941
OR
#9943 with #1502 or #1504
8101 Mdl Allor A13
Type I
Type II
#1501
OR
#1503 with #1502 or #1504
NOTE: Purchase customers must submit an RPQ for field installation of
#9943 with #1502 concurrent with removal of #9941 or field installation
of #1503 with #1502 concurrent with removal of #1501.
DISKETTE DRIVE AND MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#1507).
[Mdl A 10 only] Provides the capability for the attachment of one
Diskette 20 Drive (#4520) and one Magnetic Tape Attachment
(#4521). Limitations: Only available with 8101 mdl A 10. See
special features #4520 and #4521 for Diskette Drive and Tape
Attachment for the mdlA 11 and A 13. Maximum: One. See Table
2 for 8100 System maximums. Field installation: Yes.
CCITT V.35 INTERFACE (#1550). Provides interface to external
modems/data communication equipment at 56,000 bps or direct
connection at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: For speeds
up to 9600 bps one per selected communications feature (# 1601
or #1602). For operation at 56,000 bps one per 8101 unit, one
per 8100 System. Operation at 56,000 bps is mutually exclusive
with FAC codes 08, 09, and 21 and is not available when the
8101 is attached to the 8130 Processor. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with Clock (# 1601) or
SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602) and Multi-speed
Clock (#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in
the "Communication Capabilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1601).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems, direct connection and CCITT V~35 interface. Limitation:
In an 8100 System only ten of these features (#1601 or #1602)
may be active at one time. Maximum: Eight. See Table 2 for 8100
System maximums. The maximum is reduced by one for each
communications feature (#1602, 1603 or 1604) selected. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I
or II (#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify: Code as provided in
FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#1602).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital
Data Service Adapter (DDS A) interface, CCITT V.35 interface and
Loop Adapter. Limitation: In an 8100 System only ten of these
features (#1601 or #1602) may be active at one time. Maximum:
Eight. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. The maximum is
reduced by one for each communications feature (# 1601, 1603 or
1604) selected. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I or II (#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
BSC/SS COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1603). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems or direct connection. Limitations: Start/Stop communications are not available with integrated modems. In an 8100 'System with a 8130 Processor attached, the maximum aggregate BSC
data rate is 9600 bps and 330 bps for Start/Stop. With an 8140
Processor attached, the maximum aggregate data rate is 19,200
and 660 for Start/Stop. Maximum: Eight. See Table 2 for 8100
System maximums. The maximum is reduced by one for each
communications feature (#1601, 1602 or 1604) selected. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I
or II (#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify: Code as provided in
FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
BSC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1604).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital Data
Service Adapter (DDSA) interface and direct connection.
Limitation: In an 8100 System with a 8130 Processor attached,
the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is 9600 bps. With a 8140
Processor attached, the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is
19,200 bps. Maximum: Eight. See Table 2 for 8100 System
maximums. The maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature (# 1601, 1602 or 1603) selected. Field installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I or II
(#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify: Code as provided in FAC
description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =----- --=----':" =
M 8101.3
Jul79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
EIA RS-232-C INTERFACE (#3701). Provides interface to external modems/data communication equipment or direct connection
at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601. 1602, 1603 or 1604). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with
Business Machine Clock (# 1601), SDLC Communications without
Clock (#1602), BSC/SS Commuincations with Business Machine
Clock (#1603), BSC Communications without Clock (#1604),
SDLC Communications without Business Machine Clock (#1602)
and Multi-speed Clock (#5200), BSC Communications without
Business Machines Clock (#1604) and Multi-speed Clock
(#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the
"Communication Capabilities" section.
DISKETTE 20 DRIVE (#4520).
Provides 1 MB (985,088) of
removable diskette storage for the 8101 mdl A10, A11 or A13
operating at a data rate of up to 62KB per second. Maximum:
One. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Diskette Drive and Magnetic Tape Attachment
(# 1507) for the mdl A 10.
MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#4521).
Provides for the
attachment to the 8101 mdl A10, A11 or A13 of up to four 8809
Magnetic Tape Units, consisting of one 8809 mdl 1A plus two mdl
2s and one mdl 3. Limitation: Not available if the 8130 or 8140
Processor has the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B attached.
Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Diskette Drive and Magnetic Tape
Attachment (#1507) for the mdl A10.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4830).
Provides for the direct attachment of
a Single lobe loop at 9600 or 38,400 bps. Maximum: One per
selected communications feature (# 1602). Only one of these
features may operate at 38,400 bps in an 8100 System. See
Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. The maximum is reduced by
one for each selected communications facility attached to the
8101. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications
without Clock (#1602). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
LOOP ADAPTER SECOND LOBE (#4835).
Provides for the
attachment of a separate physical loop cable to extend the coverage and availability of the directly attached loop. Maximum: One
per Communication Attachment Type I or II (#1503, #1504 or
#9943). See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Loop Adapter (#4830). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
MULTI-SPEED CLOCK (#5200).
Provides business machine
clocking at 4800 bps and 9600 bps for direct connection. Can
provide multiple speeds simultaneously. Maximum: One with
Communication Attachment Type I (#1503 or #9943) for port
positions one thru four and one with Communication Attachment
Type II (#1504) for port positions five thru eight. See Table 2 for
8100 System maximums. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Communication Attachment Type I or II (#1503, #1504 or
#9943) and either SDLC Communications Feature without Business Machine Clock (#1602) or BSC Communications Feature
without Business Machine Clock (#1604). Specify: Code as
provided in FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities"
section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides
interface to common carrier leased facilities at 600 or 1200 bps.
Limitation: Not available for Start/Stop communication facilities.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601 or
#1603). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications with Business Machine Clock (#1601), or BSC/SS Communications with Business Machine Clock (#1603). Specify: Code
as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501).
Provides interface
to common carrier switched facilities with auto answer at 600 or
1200 bps, Limitation: Not available with BSC or Start/Stop communication facilities. Maximum: One per selected communications
feature (#1601), Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications with Business Machine Clock (#1601). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section,
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5660).
Provides
interface to AT&T Dataphone' Digital Service Network for transfer
of digital data at speeds of 2400, 4800, 9600 bps in point-to-point
or multipoint configurations or 56,000 bps in point-to-point configurations. Maximum: For speeds up to 9600 bps one per
selected communication feature (#1602 or #1604). For operation
at 56,000 bps one per 8101 unit, one per 8100 System. Operation at 56,000 bps is mutually exclusive with FAC codes 08, 09 or
29 and is not available when the 8101 is attached to the 8130
Processor. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with Clock (#1602) for operation to 56,000 bps or BSC
Communications without Clock (# 1604) for operation to 9600 bps.
Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in "Communication
Capabilities" section.
SECURITY COVER LOCKS (#6555). This feature provides key
operated security locks for the machine covers, restricting access
to the machine interior and external cable connector area. See
Security Lock Diskette (#6566) if diskette security is required.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY LOCK, DISKETTE (#6566). This feature provides a
key operated security lock to restrict access to the diskette magnetic media. It is accessible only by opening the front cover. For
maximum security, the Security Cover Lock (#6555) must be used
in addition to the diskette security lock. Additional or replacement
keys are not available from IBM. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
8100 System Maximums
The following table lists the system maximums common to the
8130, 8140 and 8101. Depending on the processor and special
features selected, these maximums may not be posssible. See the
appropriate Machines pages for additional feature information.
TABLE 2
Machlne/
Feature /Function
8101 See Note 3
Disp./Prt. Attach Fea
#1501, #1502, #9941
Display /Printer
Adapter #1505
Add'i #1506
Communications Attach
#1503, 9943
Communications Attach
#1504
Diskette Drive •
Tape Attachment
Communication Ports
SDLC, BSC/SS Loop
at 38.4K bps
2nd Lobe #4835
Multi-speed Clock #5200
System Processor
8130
8140
8140
8140
All
A31-A34 A41-A44 A51-A54
2
4
4
4
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
2
2
2
1
1
1
14
2
1
1
19
2
1
1
18
2
1
1
16
1
5
3
1
6
5
1
6
5
1
4
4
NOTE 3: Only one 8101 may have Communication and Display/Printer
features with the 8130 Processor. Only two 810 I units may have Communication and Display/Printer feature with the 8140 Processor.
• One additional Diskette Drive (#4520) is available on a 8101.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
2 yr
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
Display & Printer Attach
Type I
#1501 $ 27 $ 23 $ 900
Type II
1502
13
11
400
Commun Attach Type I
1503
27
23
900
Commun Attach Type II
1504
13
11
400
Display & Printer Adapter 1505
75
64
2,300
Display & Printer, Add'i
1506
13
11
420
Diskette Dr /Tape Attach 1507
27
23
900
CCITT V.35 Interface
1550
510
15
13
SDLC Communications
w Bus Machine Clock
1601
35
41
900
w/o/Bus Machine Clock 1602
35
30
840
BSC/SS Communications
w Bus Machine Clock
1603
19
16
670
BSC Communications
w /0 Bus Machine Clock 1604
12
10
450
EIA RS-232-C Interface
3701
12
10
400
Diskette 20 Drive
4520
94
80
2,880
Magnetic Tape Attach
4521
59
50
1,800
Loop Adapter
4830
20
17
605
Loop Adapter, 2nd Lobe 4835
20
17
605
Mult-speed Clock
5200
13
11
420
Modem, Integrated,
Non-switched
5500
16
668
19
Switched
5501
25
21
840
DDSA
5660
24
20
840
Security Cover Locks
6555
35SUC 35
Security Lock, Diskette
6566
30SUC 30
$ 4.00
.50
4.00
.50
15.00
3.00
4.00
2.00
8.00
7.50
3.00
2.50
4.00
27.50
9.00
4.00
4.00
1.50
5.00
6.50
2.00
N/C
N/C
COMMUNICATION CAPABII-ITIES
There are a variety of communication facilities (see M 2700 pages)
supported by the 8101 Features for Attaching Communications
(FAC) differing in speed, protocol and attachment interfaces.
These FAC codes have been categorized as Loop, SDLC, BSC and
Start/Stop. The user should select the desired communication
FAC code and refer to the full special feature description and the
FAC code description (identified by the abbreviation FAC No.) for
• Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- - ==- =':' =
-- -- ---------
M 8101.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
additional details. Reference to switched communications in the
FAC codes, refers to the communication link between the 8100
System and the S/370 or 4300 Processors.
The 8101 special features allow a maximum of eight communication capabilities to be configured and designated as communication ports. Each communication port position (1 thru 8) must
consist of a communications feature for SDLC, SSC or Start/Stop.
The SDLC communications feature is available with and without
business machine clock (#1601, #1602). The SSC/SS communications feature (#1603) is available with business machine clock
and the SSC Communications feature (# 1604) is available without
business machine clock. If an 8101 communications port is to
provide the attached facility with business machine clock at
speeds greater than 2400 bps the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) is required. The Multi-speed Clock feature (#5200) can
provide business machine clocking at speeds greater than 2400
bps.
In addition to selecting a communications feature (#1601, 1602,
1603, 1604) for each port configured in an 8101, a communication interface or integrated modem must be selected to support the
communication facility attaching to that port. Direct connect at
4800 and 9600 bps require the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200). Each port of the 8101 also requires the selection of a
specify code to indicate the System 8100 FAC code selected for
that port. Certain System 8100 FAC codes will require a second
specify code to select options available within that facility: 2/4
wire, line speed or multipoint control/tributary.
NOTE: The selected option specified within a given FA C and specific
port position can be changed in the field by Field Engineering. All
such changes are chargeable at the applicable FE hourly rate.
Port
#9101 #9102
- - - - LOOP - - FAC No.
FAC Code Description
FAC
FAC
FAC
FAC
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
SDLC
8
9
10
11
high speed single lobe at 38,400 bps
high speed two lobe at 38.400 bps
single lobe at 9600 bps
two lobes at 9600 bps
FAC 8 - Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe -- Required for operating
a loop ai 38,400 bps. Limitation: Not available with FAC 09 Loop,
High Speed, Two Lobe #9091 thru #9098 and FAC 21 and 29.
Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830. Maximum: One per 8101. One
per 8100 System. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I Port 2
Selection
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9083 #9084
#9085
#9086 #9087
#9088
#9081 #9082
FAC g - Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe -- Required for operating a
two lobe loop at 38,400 bps. Limitation: Not available with FAC
08 Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe (#9081 thru #9088) and FAC
21 and 29.
Prerequisites: #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Maximum: One per 8101. One per 8100 System. Specify: From
the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9093 #9094
#9095
#9096 #9097
#9098
#9091 #9092
FAC 10 - Loop, Single Lobe -- Required for operating a loop at
9600 bps. Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I Port 2
Selection
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9108
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9113 #9114
#9115
#9116 #9117
#9118
#9111 #9112
- - - SDLC - - FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 12
FAC 13
FAC 15
FAC 16
FAC 17
Integrated Modem
FAC 18
FAC 19
FAC Code Description
600 or 1200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (externai modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps, direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
Direct connect without clock
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
600 or 1 200 bps switched with auto answer
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 20
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 21
56,00 bps non-switched
CCITT V.3S
FAC 24
FAC 27
#9ASC where AS = FAC No. and C = Port Position.
#9106 #9107
Port
Specify Codes and FAC Code Descriptions:
FAC codes range in number from 08 to 61 resulting in FAC specify codes ranging in number from #9081 to #9618. Additional
codes must be specified for selected options. Those codes are
outlined in the FAC code descriptions. No two FAC codes can
occupy the same port position. Configuration Manual GA27-2876
will aid in assigning the port positions.
#9105
FAC Specify
Port I Port 2
Selection
FAC 25
A specify code number is required to identify the selected FAC
code and its physical port position. Communication Attachment
Type I (#9943, # 1503) is specified as port positions one thru
four and Communication Attachment Type II (#1504) is specified
as port positions five thru eight. The specify code is constructed
by concatenating the selected FAC and its port position to the
numeral 9. e.g.:
#9103 #9104
FAC 11 - Loop, Two Lobe -- Required for operating two lobe
loops at 9600 bps. Prerequisites: #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Maximum: One for ports one thru four and one for ports five thru
eight. Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 29
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps
Direct connect without clock (no r.,odem)
9600 bps
56,000 bps non-switched
FAC 12 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock '" operating with external modem without
clocking ... and point-to-point switched 2 wire ... or point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint 4 wire. Prerequisites:
#1601 and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9121 #9122
600 bps
9741
9742
1200 bps
9751
9752
#9123 #9124
9743
9744
9753
9754
#9125
9745
9755
#9126 #9127
9746
9747
9756
9757
#9128
9748
9758
FAC 13 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock '" with external data communication
equipment and clock .. , point-to-point switched with auto answer
to 4800 bps ... or point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint 4 wire. Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701. Specify:
From the table below, specify the required code to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9131 #9132
#9133 #9134
#9135
#9136 #9137
#9138
FAC 15 - EIA R5-232-C Interface -- 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminai or 8100 System must not provide business machine
clock) and direct connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: # 1601
and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I
Selection
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9151 #9152
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
9751
9752
2400 bps
9761
9762
#9153 #9154
9743
9744
9753
9754
9763
9764
#9155
9745
9755
9765
#9156 #9157
9746
9747
9756
9757
9766
9767
#9158
9748
9758
9768
FAC 16 - EIA R5-232-C Interface -- 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine ciock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: One Multi-speed
Clock (#5200) is required for port positions one thru fou!:.. or five
thru eight. Prerequisites: #1602, #3701 and #5200. ~pecify:
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9161 #9162
#9163 #9164
#9165
#9166 #9167
#9168
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----- --------==-=
':' =
M 8101.5
Jul79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit
4800 bps
9771
9772
9773 9774
9600 bps
9781
9782
9783 cn84
(cont'd)
9775
9776
9785
9786
9777
9787
9778
9788
FAC 17 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 40 feet.
Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9171 #9172
#9173 #9174
#9175
#9176 #9177
#9178
FAC 18 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... and point-topoint non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4
wire. Prerequisites: #1601 and #5500. Specify: From the table
below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration
for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9181 #9182
2-wire
600 bps
9851
9852
1200 bps
9861
9862
4-wire
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
9751
9752
#9183 #9184
#9185
#9186 #9187
#9188
9853
9863
9854
9864
985S
9865
91156
9866
9857
9867
9858
9868
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
9747
9757
9748
9758
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9191 #9192
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
97S1
97S2
#9193 #9194
9743 9744
9753 9754
#9195
9745
9755
#9196 #9197
9746 9747
9756 9757
#9198
9748
9758
FAC 20 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) - 2400, 4800, 9600 bps without business machine clock
... and 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Prerequisites: #1602 and #5660. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9201 #9202 #9203 #9204
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
9004
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023 9Ol4
9600 bps
9041
9042
9043
9044
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9O11
9012
9013 9014
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033 9034
9600 bps
9051
9052
9053 9054
#9205
#9206 #9207
#9208
9005
9025
9045
9006
9007
9008
9026
9027
9047
9028
9015
9035
9016
9036
9018
9038
9055
9056
9017
9037
9057
9046
9048
9058
FAC 21 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) - 56,000 bps without business machine clock ... and
point-to-point non-switched operation. Prerequisite: #1602 and
#5660. Maximum: One per 8101, system maximum is one per
8100 System (not available with FAC codes 8, 9 or 29). Specify:
From the table below, specify the required code to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
#9211 #9212
#9213 #9214
#9215
Port 7
Port 8
#9256 #9257
9776 9777
9786 9787
Port 6
#9258
9778
9788
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9271 #9272
#9273 #9274
#9275
#9276 #9277
#9278
FAC 29 - CCITT V.35 Interface - 56,000 bps without business
machine clock and external data communication equipment with
clock, and point-to-point non-switched. Limitation: Not available
when 8101 is attached to the 8130 Processor. Prerequisite:
# 1602 and #1550. Maximum: One per 8101. System maximum
is one per 8100 System. (not available with FAC codes 8, 9 and
21). Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9291 #9292
#9293 #9294
#9295
#9296 #9297
#9298
BSC - - FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 40
FAC 41
FAC 43
FAC Code Description
600 ro 1 200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external model"{l)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps, direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps, direct connect with
clock (no modem)
FAG 44
Integrated Modem
FAC 45
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 47
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 40 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600 ro 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem with no
clock ... pOint-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipOint
non-switched 4 wire. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify:
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9401 #9402
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
9751
9752
#9403 #9404
9743
9744
9753
9754
#9405
9745
9755
#9406 #9407
9746 9747
9756 9757
#9408
9748
9758
FAC 41 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... operating with external data communication equipment ... and point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ...
or multipoint non-switched 4 wire. Prerequisites: #1604 and
#3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required code
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9411 #9412
#9413 #9414
#9415
#9416 #9417
#9418
Port 8
Port
#9216 #9217
#9218
FAC 24 - CCITT V.35 Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Prerequisites: #1601 and #1550
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 43 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal must not provide business machine clock) and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
#9l41 #9242
600 bps
9741
9742
1200 bps
9751
97S2
2400 bps
9761
!f762
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port6
Port 5
Port7
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
#9253 #9254 #9255
9773
9774
9775
9783
9784
9785
FAC 27 - CCITT V.35 Interface - Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 1000 feet.
Prerequisites: #1602 and #1550. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC 19 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
switched with auto answer 2 wire. Prerequisites: # 1601 and
#5501. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port
#9251 #9252
4800 bps
9771
9772
9600 bps
9781
9782
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9243 #9244 #9245 #9246 #9247 #9l48
9745
9746 9747
9743 9744
9748
9753 9754
9758
9755
9756 9757
9766 9767
9768
9763 9764
9765
FAC 25 - CCITT V.35 Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Limitation: One Multi-speed Clock is
required for port pOSition one thru four or five thru eight.
Prerequlsltas: #1602, #1550 and #5200. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9431 #9432
Port
600 bps
9741
9742
1200 bps
9752
9751
2400 bps
9761
9762
#9433 #9434
9743
9744
9753
9754
9763
9764
#9435
9745
9755
976S
#9436 #9437
9746 9747
9756 9757
9766 9767
#9438
9748
9758
9768
FAC 44 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. limitation: One Multi-speed
Clock (#5200) is required for port position one thru four or five
thru eight. Prerequisites: #1604, #3701 and #5200. Specify:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =---- --=----':' =
M 8101.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port
#9441 #9442
4800 bps
9771
9772
9600 bps
9781
9782
Port 3
300 bps
600 bps
Port
#9451 #9452
2-wire
600 bps
9851
9852
1200 bps
9861
9862
4-wire
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
9751
9752
FAC 61
Port
110 bps
134.5bps
150 bps
300 bps
600 bps
Port 8
HOST AND TERMINAL MODEM FACILITIES
#9448
9778
9788
For communication facilities and modem attachment data, see the
M 2700 and appropriate Machines pages for additional information.
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9453 #9454
#9455
#9456 #9457
#9458
1200 bps integrated modem, switched and non-switched
Dataphone Digital Service Adapter
3863 Modem, switched and non-switched
3864 Modem, switched and non-switched
3865 Modem, non-switched
3872 Modem, switched and non-switched
3874 Modem, switched and non-switched
3875 Modem, non-switched
DIRECT CONNECTION ATTACHMENT
9853
9854
9864
9855
9865
9856
9866
9857
9867
9858
9868
9863
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
9747
9757
9748
9758
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
In addition to terminal attachment to the 8100 System through
common carrier facilities (see M 2700 pages) or local loops, attachment can be made by direct connect. The direct connect is
made by using the SOLe (FAC 15 or 16), BSC (FAC 43 or 44)
and Start/Stop (FAC 61). Shown below are the direct connect
attachable devices and required device feature numbers. The IBM
8100 Information System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27 -2877, will assist in the selection of direct connect cables.
FAC Attach
Code Device
IS
16
15
61
15,24
16,25
43
44
Speeds (bps)
Device Feature No_
3276
3276
3767
2741
8130/8140/8101
600, 1200, 2400
4800,9600
600, 1200, 2400
134.5
600, 1200, 2400
8775-11, 12
600, 1200, 2400
8130/8140
4800,9600
8775-11, 12
4800,9600
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
600, 1200, 2400
#3701 w/#9491 and #6302
#3701, w/#9491 and #6302
#3718, w/#9707, #9533
#9115 or #9120
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 15) or
#1550 (FAC 24)
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 16) or
#1550 (FAC 25)
Refer to specific device
See Note 4
Refer to specific device
See Note 4
4800,9600
Note 4: For attachment of devices that conform to 2780/3780 protocol.
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9603 #9604
9703
9704
9713
9714
9724
9723
9733
9734
9743
9744
Port 3
#9605
9705
9715
9725
9735
9745
#9606 #9607
9706
9707
9716
9717
9726
9727
9736
9737
9746
9747
#9608
9708
9718
9728
9738
9748
FAC 61 - EIA R8-232-C Interface - 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600
bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (the
attached terminal must provide its own business machine clock) ...
and direct connection to 40 feet. Limitation: The 600 bps line
speed is not available when the 8101 is attached to an 8130
Processor. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port
#9611 #9612
110 bps
9701
9702
134.5 bps 9711
9712
150 bps
9721
9722
9738
9748
Port 7
110, 134.5, 150, 300 or 600 bps
(external modem)
110, 134.5, 150, 300 or 600 bps, direct
connect with clock (no modem)
Port 2
9737
9747
Port 6
FAC Code Description
#9601 #9602
9701
9702
9711
9712
9721
9722
9731
9732
9741
9742
9736
9746
#9446 #9447
9776
9777
9786
9787
FAC 60 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 134.5, 300, 600 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with external modem ... and
point-to-point non-switched facilities. See M 2700 pages for specific information on communication facilities and other attachment
information.
Also 110 or 150 bps with business machine clock ... operating
with external modem ... and point-to-point non-switched facilities
will be provided under provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier
System Policy.
Limitation: The 600 bps line
speed is not available when the 8101 is attached to an 8130
Processor. Prerequisites: # 1603 and #3701. Specify: From the
iable below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
9735
9745
Port 5
START /STOP - - EIA RS-232-C
FAC 60
9734
9744
#9445
9775
9785
Port
#9471 #9472 #9473 #9474 #9475 #9476 #9477 #9478
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9004
9007
9008
9002
9003
9005
9006
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
9028
9042
4800 bps
9041
9043
9044
904S
9046
9047
9048
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9016
9018
9014
9015
9017
9011
9012
9013
4800 bps
9031
9036
9037
9038
9032
9033
9034
9035
9600 bps
9051
9052
9053
9OS4
9055
9056
9057
9058
FAC No,
9733
9743
Port 4
FAC 47 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps without business machine
clock ... 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Prerequisites: #1604 and #5660. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for toach port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1 Port 2
9732
9742
#9443 #9444
9773
9774
9783
9784
FAC 45 - Integrated Modem -- 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4 wire.
Prerequisites: #1603 and #5500. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1 Port 2
9731
9741
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9613 #9614
9703
9704
9713
9714
9723
9724
Port 3
#9615
9705
9715
9725
#9616 #9617
9706
9707
9716
9717
9727
9726
#9618
9708
9718
9728
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
- ------- --===
':' =
--
M 8130.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 8130 PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides control, storage, processing capability, disk
and diskette storage, and device attachment capabilities for the
IBM 8100 Information System.
Models: The following models of the 8130 are available depending on processor storage size and non-removable disk storage
size. Some models have fixed head capability as well as movable
heads for the non-removable, high speed, direct access disk
storage. All 8130 models include removable diskette storage with
up to 1 million bytes of storage.
Model
Base
Processor
Storsge (bytes)
Non Removsble
Disk Capacity
(million bytes)
Fixed Head
Capacity
(bytes)
A21
A22
A23
A24
256K
256K
256K
256K
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
None
131,072
None
131,072
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
Msxlmum: One per 8100 Information System.
Highlights: The 8130 Processor is a multi-level, interrupt driven
processor which provides control, processing capability, processor
storage, disk and diskette storage and communication features for
the 8100 Information System. The flexibility offered by the 8130
allows the user to configure a system for initial requirements, while
retaining the ability to modify the system to meet future needs.
3289 Printer mdl 3 with 3501 Card Reader and via the 3782 Card
Attachment Unit the 3521 Card Punch and 2502 Card Reader mdl
A1 (see Note 1) -- 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdls 11, 12,
13, 14 with 3278 Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer
mdls I, 2, 3289 Line Printer mdls 1, 2 -- 8775 Display Terminal
mdls II and 12 -- 3641 Reporting Terminal mdls 1, 2 - 3642 Encoder Printer mdls 1, 2 -- 3643 Keyboard Display mdls 2, 3, 4 3644 Automatic Data Unit -- 3645 Printer - 3646 Scanner Control
Unit - 3647 Time and Attendance Terminal.
Loop Attached Devices at 38,400 bps: Devices that can be
attached to a direct attached loop at 38.400 bps are the -- 3287
mdls 11, 12, 8775 Display Terminal mdls II and 12.
Direct Attached Devices: Devices that can be attached directly to
the processor are the - 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit -8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1B.
NOTE I: Dedication of a 9600 bps single lobe loop to the attachment of the
3289 mdl 3 printer should be considered in cases where the printer will be
heavily utilized.
Loop Accessories and Wire: See M 10000 pages for pricing and
ordering instructions.
Customer Set-up: The 8130 Processor is designated a customer
set-up unit thereby offering the customer early availability and
relocation flexibility. Aids and configurators are provided to facilitate the configuration and ordering of the 8130. Set-up procedures for the customer will be shipped with each machine. An
8130 installation verification program will be shipped with each
machine on a diskette. A clear indication that the machine is
operational will be given.
System control and processing is provided by machine program
instructions and up to eight I/O hardware interrupt levels provide
for interrupt processing. The 8130 provides 256K (262,144) bytes
of processor storage that can be expanded to a maximum of 512K
(524,288) bytes and provision for dynamic addressing and storage
protection for up to 4 million bytes of logical storage.
If the user relocates and/or interchanges attaching units from one
system to another, the user must consider priority and address
compatibility of the processor and its attachments.
The 8130 with a special feature for system expansion provides for
the attachment of up to two 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units
one of which may be configured with Communication and
Display/Printer Feature Type I or Type II, or one 8101 Storage
and Input/Output Unit and one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1B.
An alternate configuration can consist of a 8130, two 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units, and one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit
mdl 1 A. Up to three additional 8809 Magnetic Tape Units can be
attached to the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1A or 1B.
Color: Pebble gray is the only available color.
The 8130 Processor is provided with fixed high speed direct
access storage. Depending on the 8130 model selected, disk
storage of up to 64 million bytes with movable heads or up to 58
million bytes of disk storage with movable and fixed heads is
available. The disk storage operates at a data rate of 1.031 million bytes per second. The average access time is 27 milliseconds
with an average rotational delay of 9.6 milliseconds. Removable
diskette storage is available with up to 1MB (985,088) of storage
operating at up to 62K bytes per second data rate. The diskette
drive can read/write in basic data exchange format on either the
IBM diskette 2D or the IBM diskette Type 1.
[3] Programming Configuration: Specify #9700 for Distributed
Processing Programming Executive (DPPX), #9710 for Distributed Processing Control Executive (DPCX), #9720 for DPPX
and DPCX, or #9730 for all other configurations.
The 8100 System can attach to any S/370 or 4300 Processors
via the 3704/3705 for SNA/SDLC or BSC line control. The 8100
System can attach to the ICA of the 115, 125, 135 or 138 processors for BSC line control. The IBM 8100 System can attach to
the Communications Adapter of the 4331 Processor for BSC
and/or SDLC line control. For specific attachment, see M 2700
pages.
The capability of the 8100 Information System is further extended
by providing for the attachment of a variety of input/output devices. These devices may be attached to the 8130 via communication features which include data link, direct connect, and loops
that are direct attached or data link attached loops. The 8130
provides for the attachment of two communication ports which can
be expanded by optional features up to a maximum of six. With
the 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit attached, the communication ports physically attached can be further increased by eight,
providing an 8100 System maximum of fourteen communication
ports.
Communication Attached Devices: Devices that can be attached
to the communications ports are the - 3276 Control Unit Display
Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14 with 3278 Display Station
mdls 1, 2, 3,·4, 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2 and 3289 Line Printer
mdls I, 2 - 3767 Communication Terminals mdls 1, 2, 3 - 3631
Plant Communications Controller mdls 1 A, 1B - 3632 Plant Communications Controller mdls 1A, 1 B - 8775 Display Terminal mdls
II and 12 -- 2741 Communications Terminal - TTY 33/35 or equivalent - non-IBM terminals -conforming to the 2780/3780 line
protocol - 3842 Loop Control Unit - 8130 Processor - 8140
Processor -- 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit.
Loop AHached Devices at 2400 or 9600 bps: Devices that can
be attached to a direct attached loop at 9600 bps or data link
attached loop at 2400 bps are the - 3287 Printer mdls 11, 12, -
PREREQUISITES: None.
Bibliography: Available at a later date.
Specify: [1] (120 VAC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9891 for nonlocking plug, or #9890 for iocking plug. If 4.3 meter (14 ft)
power cable is not desired, specify #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 tt)
cable.
[2] Cabling: For cabling information see Accessories pages
(Ml0000), appropriate 8100 Information System Installation
manuals and Processor Site Preparation Guides.
[4] Terminal Requirements: Specify #9800 (off line 3640 terminal
exercisor) if ordering any of the following terminals: 3641,
3642, 3643, 3644, 3645, 3646 or 3647 1) On the initial order.
2) When the first terminal is ordered to attach via an 8101,
and none are attached to the processor.
3) Via
when the first terminal is field installed on an
8100 System.
Maximum: One per 8100 System. Field installation: Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC/
AMMCR
A21
A22
A23
A24
$705
729
752
776
$600
620
640
660
$24,000
24,720
25,440
26,160
$122
130
130
138
Rental Plan: Plan D
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model upgrade may require replacement of disk
storage unit. Adequate provisions must be made for retaining data
contained on disk storage unit and elimination of user proprietary
information.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
A21
A22
A23
To A22
$2,200
A23
A24
$2,500
2,300
$3,000
2,800
2,500
Customer price quotations and customer order and acknowledgement letters for purchase of
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- --------------_.-
8130 Processor
M 8130.2
Jul79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
Performance: The maximum number of Features for Attaching
Communications (FAC) capable of concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the line, communication facility, the operating
system installed and the application work load. The maximum
number of communication facilities which can be physically installed can exceed the operational capability. Increased processor
utilization will result from sustained operation of BSC at the maximum aggregate data rate and may cause degradation of activity
operating at lower priority levels. Analysis should be performed to
determine the impact.
Diagnostics: The 8100 System hardware and feature operation,
diagnostic support and maintenance support described in 8100
System publications are dependent on the presence of functional
support modules provided by DPPX, DPCX. Operational and maintenance conditions for the 8100 System are predicated on the
presence of these functional support modules. Customers ordering
8100 System hardware without DPPX or DPCX should provide the
functional support as contained and described in the Functional
Definition Manual 8100 which will be available
at FCS.
FEATURE EXPANSION TYPE 1 (#1520). Allows the 8130 to be
expanded from two communication ports to six communication
ports. # 1520 is required for the attachment of two lobe loops or
communication features requiring the Multi-speed Clock (#5200).
Maximum: One per 8130. Fietd Installation: Yes.
SYSTEM EXPANSION (#1530).
Provides programmable hardware interrupt levels and sublevel interrupt determination. Required
for attachment of up to two 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units
or one 8101 and/or one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1B directty
to the 8130. Maximum: One per 8130. Field installation: Yes.
CCITT V.35 INTERFACE (#1550).
Provides interface for data
transmission over direct connection at speeds up to 9600 bps.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601 or
# 1602). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications with Clock (#1601), SDLC Communications without Clock
(#1602) or SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602) and
Multi-speed Clock (#5200).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1601). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems, direct connection and CCITT V.35 interface. Limitation:
In an 8100 System only ten of these features (#1601 or #1602)
may be active at one time. Maximum: Two without Feature Expansion Type 1 (# 1520) .. , with # 1 520, the maximum is six. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8130. The
maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature
(#1602, 1603, 1604). Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Code as
provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communications Facilities"
section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#1602). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital
Data Service Adapter interface, CCITT V.35 interface and Loop
Adapter. Limitation: In an 8100 System only ten of these features
(#1601 or #1602) may be active at one time. Maximum: Two
without Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520), with "#1520, maximum is six. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2)
with a 8130. The maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature (#1601, 1603, 1604). Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions In the
"Communications Facilities" section.
BSC/SS COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1603). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems or direct connection. In an 8100 System the maximum
aggregate BSC data rate is 9600 bps and 330 bps for Start/Stop.
Limitation: Start/Stop communications not available with integrated modems. Maximum: Two without Feature Expansion Type 1
(#1520), with #1520 maximum is six. Maximum is fourteen per
8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8130. The maximum is reduced
by one for each communications feature (# 1601. 1602, 1604).
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communications Facilities" section.
BSC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1604).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital Data
Service Adapter interface and direct connection. Limitation: In an
8100 System the maximum aggregate BSC data rate Is 9600 bps.
Maximum: Two without Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520), six
with #1520. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2)
with a 8130. The maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature (#1601, 1602, 1603). Field installation: Yes.
Specify: Code as provided in FAC decriptions In the
"Communications Facilities" section.
PROCESSOR STORAGE TYPE 1 .(#1710).
Provides 128K
(131,072) bytes of additional processor storage. Maximum: One
per 8130. Limitation: Not available if Processor Storage Type 2
(#1720) is selected. Field Installation: Yes.
PROCESSOR STORAGE TYPE 2 (#1720).
Provides 256K
(262,144) bytes of additional processor storage. Maximum: One
per 8130. Limitations: Not available if Processor Storage Type 1
(#1710) is selected. Field installation: Yes.
EIA RS-232-C INTERFACE (#3701). Provides interface to externai modems/data communication equipment or direct connection
at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601,1602,1603 or 1604). Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications with Clock
(#1601), SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602), BSC/SS
Communications with Clock (#1603), BSC Communications without Ciock (#1604), SDLC Communications without Business Machine Clock (#1602) and Multi-speed Clock (#5200), or BSC
Communications without Business Machine Clock (#1604) and
Multi-speed Clock (#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC
description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
KEYLOCK (#4655).
This keylock feature provides processor
security by the selection of three modes of operation. These
consist of -- Disable power on and disable operator panel... Enable power on but disable operator panel ... Enable power on and
enable operator panel. For additional or replacement keys, see
Ml0000 pages. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4830).
Provides for direct attachment of a
single lobe loop at 9600 or 38,400 bps. Maximum: Two without
Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520). With #1520, the maximum is
six. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a
8130. Only one of these features may operate at 38,400 bps in
an 8100 System. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications without Clock (# 1602). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
LOOP ADAPTER SECOND LOBE (#4835).
Provides for the
attachment of a separate physical loop cable to extend the coverage and availability of the directly attached loop. Maximum: Three
per 8130. Maximum is five per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a
8130. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Loop Adapter
(#4830) and Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520). Specify: Code
as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities"
section.
MULTI-SPEED CLOCK (#5200).
Provides business machines
clocking at 4800 bps and 9600 bps for direct connection. Can
provide multiple speeds simultaneously. Limitation: Available for
port positions three through six only. Maximum: One. Maximum is
three per 8100 System with a 8130. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) and either
SDLC Communications Feature without Clock (#1602) or BSC
Communications Feature without Clock (#1604). Specify: Code
as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities"
section.
Provides
MODEM, INTEGRATED, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
interface to common carrier leased facilities at 600 or 1 200 bps.
Limitation: Not available for Start/Stop communication facilities.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601 or
#1603). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications Adapter with Clock (#1601) or BSC/SS Communications
with Clock (#1603). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section:
Provides Interface
MODEM, INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501).
to common carrier switched facilities with Auto Answer at 600 or
1200 bps. Limitation: Not available with BSC or Start/Stop communication facilities. Maximum: One per selected communications
feature (#1601). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications with Ciock (#1601). Specify: Code as provided
in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5660).
Provides
interface to AT&T Dataphone" Digital Service Network for transfer of digital data at speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps. Available
for point-to-point line configurations or multipoint line configurations. Maximum: One per selected communications feature
(#1602 or #1604). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications without Clock (#1602), or BSC Communications
without Clock (#1604). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
SECURITY COVER LOCKS (#6555). This feature provides key
operated security locks for the machines covers, restricting access
to the machine interior and external cable connector area. See
Security Lock Diskette (#6566) if diskette security is required.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY LOCK, DISKETTE (#6566). This feature provides a
key operated security lock to restrict access to the diskette magnetic media. It is accessable only by opening the front cover. For
maximum system security, the Security Cover Lock (#6555) must
be used in addition to the diskette security lock. Additional or
replacement keys are not available from IBM. Maximum: One.
Field installation: Yes.
'" '" Registered Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(
\
----------=- ==
---- - --':' =
M 8130.3
Jul79
DP Machines
8130 Processor (cont'd)
NOTE 2: An 8100 System consisting of a 8130 Processor and attached 8\01
Storage and Input/Output Unit.
Special Feature Prices
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Faa Expansion Type 1 #1520 $ 14 $ 12
System Expansion
1530
71
60
CCITT V.35 Interface
1550
15
13
SDLC Communication Fea
w Bus Machine Clock 1601
41
35
w/o Bus Machine Clock 1602
35
30
BSC/SS Communication Fea
16
w Bus Machine Clock
1603
19
BSC Communication Fea
w/o Bus Machine Clock 1604
12
10
Processor Stor Type 1 1710'
82
70
Processor Stor Type 2
1720
165
140
EIA RS-232-C Interface 3701
12
10
Keylock
4655
50SUC 17
Loop Adapter
4830
20
Loop Adapter 2nd Lobe 4835
20
17
Multl-spead Clock
5200
13
11
Modem, Integrated,
Non-switched
19
16
5500
21
Switched
5501
25
20
DDSA
5660
24
Security Cover Locks
6555
35SUC Security Lock Diskette 6566
30SUC -
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
S
405
2,400
510
$ .50
900
840
8.00
7.50
670
3.00
450
2,250
4,500
400
50
605
605
420
2.50
7.50
14.50
4.00
N/C
4.00
4.00
1.50
668
840
5.00
6.50
2.00
N/C
N/C
codes must be specified for selected options. These codes are
outlined in the FAC code descriptions. No two FAC codes can
occupy the same port position. Configuration Manual GA27-2876
will aid is aSSigning the port positions.
---LOOP---
10.50
2.00
FAC No.
FAC Code Description
FAC
FAC
FAC
FAC
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
SDLC
840
35
30
• Customers who elect to ,purchase one of these features and
anticipate later ordering additional storage should consider purchase of the larger storage initially because field upgrade requires
replacement of the initial feature.
COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES
There is a variety of communication capabilities (see M 2700
pages) supported by the 8130 Features for Attaching Communications (FAC) differing in speed, protocol and attachment interfaces.
These FAC codes have been categorized as Loop, SDLC, SSC and
Start/Stop. The user should select the desired communication
FAC code and refer to the full special feature description and the
FAC code description (identified by the abbreviation FAC NO.) for
additional details. Reference to switched communications in the
FAC codes refers to the communications link between the 8100
System and the S/370 or 4300 Processors.
The 8130 special features allow a maximum of six communication
capabilities to be configured and designated as communication
ports. Each communication port position (1 thru 6) must consist of
a communications feature for SDLC, SSC or Start/Stop.
The SDLC communications feature is available with and without
business machine clock (#1601, 1602). The SSC/SS communications feature (#1603) is available with business machine clock
and the SSC Communications Feature (#1604) is available without
business machine clock. If an 8130 communications port is to
provide the attached facility with business machine clock at
speeds greater than 2400 bps the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) Is required. One Multi-speed Clock feature (#5200) can
provide business machine clocking at speeds greater than 2400
bps to any or all of port positions three thru six.
In addition to selecting a communications feature (#1601, 1602,
1603, 1604) for each port configured in an 8130, a communication interface or integrated modem must be selected to support the
communication facility attaching to that port. A two lobe loop port
requires three special features (#1602, #4830 and #4835) in
addition to Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520). Direct connect at
4800 and 9600 bps require the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) and the Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) if the 8130
supplies the business machine clock. Each port of the 8130
requires the selection of a specify code to indicate the System
8100 FAC code selected for that port. Certain System 8100 FAC
codes will require a second specify code to select options available within that facility: 2/4 wire, line speed or multipoint
control/tributary.
NOTE: The selected option jecified within a given FAC and specific
port pOSition can be change in the field by Field Engineering. All
such changes are chargeable at the applicable FE hourly rate.
8
9
10
11
FAC 8 - Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe -- Required for operating
a loop at 38,400 bps. Limitations: Not available with FAC 09
Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe (#9094 thru #9096) and FAC 21
and 29. Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830.
Maximum: One per 8130. Maximum one per 8100 System.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9081 #9082 #9083 #9084 #9085 #9086
A specify code number Is required to identify the selected FAC
code and its physical port position. The specify code is constructed by concatenating the selected FAC and its port position to the
numeral 9, e.g.:
#9ABC where AS - FAC No .... C - Port Position.
FAC codes range in number from 08 to 61 resulting in FAC specify codes ranging in number from #9081 to #9616. Additional
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 9 - Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe -- Required for operating a
two lobe loop at 38,400 bps. Limitations: 'Not available with FAC
08 Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe (#9081 thru #9086) and FAC
21 and 29. Available for ports 4, 5 or 6 only. Prerequisites:
#1520, #1602, #4830 and #4835. Maximum: One per 8130.
Maximum one per 8100 System. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for the
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
#9094 #9095 #9096
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 10 - Loop, Single Lobe - Required for operating a loop at
9600 bps. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1
(#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602
and #4830. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9101 #9102 #9103 #9104 #9105 #9106
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port6
FAC 11 - Loop, Two Lobe - Required for operating two lobe
loops at 9600 bps. Limitation: Available for port positions 4, 5 or
6 only. Prerequisites: #1520, #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port4
Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
#9114 #9115 #9116
Port 5
Port 6
SDLC--FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 12
FAC 13
FAC 15
FAC 16
FAC 17
Integrated Modem
FAC 18
FAC 19
FAC Code Description
600 or 1 200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect with
clock (no modem)
Direct connect without clock
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
600 or 1 200 bps switched w Auto Answer
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 20
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
CCITT V.35
FAC 24
Specify and FAC Code Descriptions:
high speed single lobe at 38,400 bps
high speed two lobe at 38,400 bps
single lobe at 9600 bps
two lobes at 9600 bps
FAC 25
FAC 27
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
600, 1 200 or 2400 bps
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps
Direct connect without clock (no modem)
9600 bps
FAC 12 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600 or 1 200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem without
clocking ... and point-to-point switched 2 wire ... or polnt-to-polnt
non-swltched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint 4 wire. Limitation: .Re-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --------------==
--=':' =
M 8130.4
Jul79
DP Machines
8130 Processor (cont'd)
quires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4,
5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1601 and #3701. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9121 #9122 #9123 #9124 #1925 #1926
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745 9746
9751
9752 9753 9754
9755 9756
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 13 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... with external data communication
equipment and clock ... point-ta-point switched with auto answer
to 4800 bps ... or point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint 4 wire. LImitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1
(#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602
and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port 1 Port 2
Port 3
Port 4 POrt 5
Port 6
#9131 #9132 #9133 #9134 #9135 #9136
FAC 15 - EIA R8-232-C Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal or 8100 System must not provide business machine
clock) and direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Requires
Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and
6. Prerequisites: #1601 and #3701. Specify: From the table
below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration
for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
#9151 #9152 #9153 #9154 #9155 #9156
9741
9742
9743
9744 9745
9746
9751
9752
9753
9754 9755
9756
9761
9762 9763 9764
9765 9766
Port 2 POrt 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 16 - EIA R8-232-C Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide machine clock) ... and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: #1520, #1602, #3701
and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
Port 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
N/A #9163 #9164 #9165 #9166
N/A 9773 9774 9775 9776
N/A 9783 9784 9785 9786
FAC 17 - EIA R8-232-C Interface -- up to 9600 bps without business machine clock '" operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 40 feet.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port
2 wire
600 bps
1200 bps
4-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9201 #9202 #9203 #9204 #9205 #9206
Port
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9003 9004
9005
9006
9002
9026
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9600 bps
9041
9042
9043 9044
9045
9046
Multipoint Tributar.y
2400 bps
9011
9012
9013 9014
9015
9016
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033 9034
9035
9036
9600 bps
9053
9054
9055
9056
9051
9052
FAC 24 - CCITT V.35 Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port pOSitions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1601 and #1550. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
#9241 #9242 #9243 #9244 #9245 #9246
9745
9746
9741
9742
9743
9744
9755
9756
9751
9752
9753 9754
9765
9766
9761
9762
9763 9764
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 25 - CCITT V.35 Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Prerequisites: #1520, #1602,
#1550 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
N/A #9253 #9254 #9255 #9256
9773 9774
9775
9776
N/A
9784
9785
9786
N/A 9783
FAC 27 - CCITT V.35 Interface - Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 1000 feet.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602 and #1550.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9271 #9272 #9273 #9274 #9275 #9276
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
---BSC--Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9171 #9172 #9173 #9174 #9175 #9176
FAC 18 - Integrated Modem -- 600 or 1200 bps ... and point-topoint non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4
wire. LImitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for
port poSitions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1601 and #5500.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
FAC 20 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) - 2400, 4800, 9600 bps without business machine clock
... and 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1
(#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602
and #5660. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9181 #9182 #9183 #9184 #9185 #9186
9851
9861
9852
9862
9853
9863
9854
9864
9855
9865
9856
9866
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 40
FAC 41
FAC 43
FAC 44
Integrated Modem
FAC 45
FAC Code Description
600 or 1 200 bps - external modem
Up to 9600 bps - external modem
600, 1200 or 2400 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
AT&T Detaphone Digital Service
FAC 47
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 19 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps .. , point-ta-point
switched with auto answer 2 wire. Prerequisites: #1601 a:nd
#5501. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 40 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem with no
clock ... point-ta-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint
non-switched 4 wire. Limitation: Reql:Jires Feature Expansion
Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites:
#1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
SelectiOn
Port 1
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9191 #9192 #9193 #9194 #9195 #9196
9741
9742
9743 9744 9745 9746
9751
9752 9753 9754
9755 9756
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6
#9401 #9402 #9403 #9404 #9405 #9406
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
(
"
\
------- ----===
------ - --':' =
M 8130.5
Jul79
DP Machines
8130 Processor (cont'd)
FAC 41 - EIA RS-232oC Inter1ace - Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with external data communication
equipment ... and point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint non-switched 4 wire. Limitation: Requires Feature
Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1604 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9411 #9412 #9413 #9414 #9415 #9416
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
ness machine clock ... operating with external modem ... and pointto-point non-switched facilities. See M 2700 pages for specific
information on communication facilities and other attachment
information.
Also 110 or 150 bps with business machine clock ... operating
with external modem ... and point-to-point non-switched facilities
will be provided under provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier
System Policy
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC 43 - EIA RS-232oC Inter1ace - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal must not provide business machine clock) and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion
Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites:
#1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
110 bps
134.5 bps
150 bps
300 bps
#9601 #9602 #9603 #9604 #9605 #9606
9701
9702
9703
9704
9705
9706
9711
9713
9712
9714
9715
9716
9722
9726
9721
9723
9724
9725
9733
9735
9732
9736
9731
9734
FAC Specify
Selection
FAC 61 - EIA RS-232oC Interface -- 110, 134.5, 150 or 300 bps
with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (the
attached terminal must provide its own business machine clock) ...
and direct connection to 40 feet. Limitation: Requires Feature
Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9431 #9432 #9433 #9434 #9435 #9436
9741
9742 9743
9744
9745 9746
9751
9754
9753
9752
9755 9756
9761
9764
9763
9762
9766
9765
FAC 44 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: #1520, #1604,
#3701 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
N/A #9443 #9444 #9445 #9446
9774 9775
9776
N/A 9773
9786
9783 9784
9785
N/A
FAC 45 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4 wire.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1603 and #5500.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
2-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
4-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
110 bps
134.5 bps
150 bps
300 bps
#9611 #9612 #9613 #9614 #9615 #9616
9701
9703 9704
9706
9702
9705
9711
9712
9713
9714
9715
9716
9721
9723
9722
9724
9725
9726
9731
9733
9735
9736
9732
9734
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
HOST AND TERMINAL MODEM ATTACHMENT
For communication facilities and modem attachment data, see the
M 2700 pages and appropriate machine pages.
1200 bps integrated modem, switched and non-switched
Dataphone Digital Service Adapter
3863 Modem, switched and non-switched
3864 Modem, switched and non·switched
3865 Modem, non·switched
3872 Modem, switched and non-switched
3874 Modem, switched and non-switched
3875 Modem, non-switched
Port 6
#9451 #9452 #9453 #9454 #9455 #9456
9851
9861
9852
9862
9853
9863
9854
9864
9855
9865
9856
9866
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
FAC 47 - Digital Network Inter1ace (to ATaT Dataphone Digital
Service) - 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps without business machine
clock ... 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Limitation: Requires feature expansion Type 1 (#1520)
for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1604 and
#5660. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port
#9471 #9472 #9473 #9474 #9475 #9476
Point-to-polnt O[ Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002 9003
9004 9005 9IlO6
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023 9024
N2n 9026
9600 bps
9041
9042
8043 9044 0045 900ia
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9011
901:.!
9013 0014
~~~b
i"016
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033 9034 1103(- 9036
9600 bps
9051
9052 9053 9054 9055 9056
- - - START/STOP - - •
FAC No.
elA RS-232oC
FAC 60
FAC 61
FAC Code ::)eserlptlon
110, 134.5, 150 or 300 bps
(external modem)
110, 134.5, 150 or 300 bps
direct connect with clock (no modem)
DIRECT CONNECTION ATTACHMENT
In addition to terminal attachment to the 8100 System through
common carrier facilities (see M 2700 pages) or local loops, attachment can be made by direct connect. The direct connect is
made by using the SDLC (FAC 15 or 16), BSC (FAC 43 or 44)
and Start/Stop (FAC 61). Shown below are the direct connect
attachable devices and required device feature numbers. The IBM
8100 Information System Installation Manual - Physical Planning
GA27-2877 will assist in the selection of direct connect cables.
FAC
Code
IS
16
IS
61
15,24
~6,
2!
Attach
Device
Speeds (bps)
Oevlce Feature No.
2741
8130/8140/8101
600, 12OCt, 2400
4800, 96JO
600, 1200, 2400
134.5
60'), 1200,2400
R775-11, 12
600, 1200, 2400
8130/81oW
4800,96011
#3701, w/#9491 and #6302
#3701, w/#9491 and #6302
m718, w/#9707, #9533
#9115 or #9120
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC IS) or
#1550 (FAC 24)
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 16) or
#1550 (FAC 25)
Refer to specific device
See Note 3
Refer to specific device
See Note 3
3::76
3276
37~7
8775-11,12
4800,9600
43
~7P'1)/3780
600, 1200, 2400
44
.t'r"tocol
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
Line
4"00,9600
NOTE 3: For attachment of devices that conform to 2780/3780 line protocol.
FAC 60 - EIA RS-232oC Inter1ace - 134.5 or 300 bps with busi-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse .ide is blank)
\
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._---------=-- =- --=
-----':' =
M 8140.1
Jul79
DP Machines
lent -- non-IBM terminals conforming to the 2780/3780 line protocol -- 3842 Loop Control Unit --8130 Processor -- 8140 Processor
-- 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit.
IBM 8140 PRO.CESSOR
Purpose: Provides control, storage, processing capability, disk
and diskette storage and device attachment capabilities for the
IBM 8100 Information System.
Model
Base
Procesaor
Storage (bytes)
Non Removable
Dlak Capacity
(million bytes)
Fixed Head
CapaCity
(bytes)
A31
A32
A33
A34
A41
A42
A43
A44
A51
A52
A53
A54
256K
256K
256K
256K
320K
320K
320K
320K
512K
512K
512K
512K
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
None
131,072
None
131,072
None'
131,072'
None'
131,072 '
None
131,072
None
131,072
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(327,680)
(327,680)
(327,680)
(327,680)
(524,288)
(524,288)
(524,288)
(524,288)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
, These models include Floating Point Arithmetic.
Maximum: One per 8100 Information System.
Highlights: The 8140 Processor is a multi-level, interrupt driven
processor which provides control, processing capability, process
storage, disk and diskette storage and communications features
for the 8100 information System. The flexibility offered by the
8140 allows the user to configure a system for initial requirements,
while retaining the ability to modify the system to meet future
needs.
System control and processing is provided by machine program
Instructions. The 8140 mdl A41 thru A44 also includes additional
Instructions for floating point arithmetic. Eight I/O interrupt levels
provide for Interrupt processing. The 8140 offers various amounts
of processor storage of which 4,096 bytes are read only storage
and not available lor user programs. Processor storage can be
expanded up to a maximum of 384K (393,216) for the model A31
thru 34. Fixed amounts of 320K (327,680) bytes for the model
A41 thru A44 and 512K (524,288) bytes for the model A51 thru
A54. Capability for dynamic addressing and storage protection for
up to 4 million bytes of logical storage is also available.
The 8140 allows for the attachment of up to four 8101 Storage
and Input/Output Units two of which may be configured with
Communication and Display/Printer Feature Type I or Type II, or
three 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units and one 8809 MagnetIc Tape Unit mdl 1 B. An alternate configuration can consist of a
8140, four 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units, and one 8809
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1A. Up to three additional 8809 Magnetic
Tape Units can be attached to the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl
1A or 1B.
The 8140 Processor is provided with fixed high speed direct
access storage. Depending on the 8140 model selected, disk
storage of up to 64 million bytes with movable heads or up to 58
million bytes of disk storage with movable and fixed heads is
available. The disk storage operates at a data rate of 1.031 million bytes per second. The average access time is 27 milliseconds
with an average rotational delay of 9.6 milliseconds. Removable
diskette storage is available with up to 1MB (985,088) of storage
operating at up to 62K bytes per second data rate. The diskette
drive can read/write in basic data exchange format on either the
IBM Diskette 20 or the IBM Diskette Type 1.
The 8100 System can attach to any S/370 or 4300 Processors
via the 3704/3705 for SNA/SDLC or BSC line control. The 8100
System attaches to the ICA of the 115, 125, 135 or 138 processors for BSC line control. The IBM 8100 System can attach to
the Communications Adapter of the 4331 Processor for BSC
and/or SDLC line control. For specific attachment see M 2700
pages.
The capability of the 8100 Information System is further extended
by providing for the attachment of a variety of input/output devices. These devices may be attached to the 8140 via communication features which Include data link, direct connect, and loops
that are direct attached or data link attached. The number of
communication ports that can be attached to the 8140 is three for
the model A31 thru A34 and two for the model A41 thru A44. The
8140 mdl A51 thru A54 requires the 8101 Storage and
Input/Output Unit for the attachment of communication ports.
\,
Commlinlcatlon Attached Devices - Devcies that can be attached
to the communication ports are the - 3276 Control Unit Display
Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14 with 3278 Display Station
mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2, and 3289 Line Printer
mdls 1, 2 - 3767 Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2, 3 -- 3631
Plant Communication Controller mdls 1A, 1B - 3632 Piant Communication Controller mdls 1 A, 1 B -8775 Display Terminal mdls II
and 11 - 2741 Communications Terminal - TTY 33/35 or equiva-
Loop Attached Devices at 2400 or 9600 bps -- Devices that can
be attached to a direct attached loop at 9600 bps or data link
attached loop at 2400 bps are the - 3287 Printer mdls 11, 12 3289 Printer mdl 3 with 3501 Card Reader and via the 3782 Card
Attachment Unit the 3521 Card Punch and 2502 Card Reader mdl
A1 (see Note 1) - 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdls 11, 12,
13, 14 with 3278 Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer
mdls 1, 2, 3289 Line Printer mdls 1, 2 - 8775 Display Terminal
mdls II and 12 - 3641 Reporting Terminal mdls 1, 2 -- 3642 Endorser Printer mdls 1, 2 -- 3643 Keyboard Display mdls 2, 3, 4 -3644 Automatic Data Unit -- 3645 Printer -- 3646 Scanner Control
Unit -- 3647 Time and Attendance Terminal.
Loop Attached Devices at 38,400 bps -- Devices that can be
attached to a direct attached loop at 38,400 bps are the -3287
mdls 11 and 12, 8775 Display Terminal mdls 11 and 12.
Direct Attached Devices - Devices that can be attached directly
to the processor are the -- 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit,
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1B.
Note I; Dedication of a 9600 bps single lobe loop to the attachment of the
3289 mdl 3 printer should be con.idered in .....es where the printer will be
heavily utilized.
Customer Set-up: The 8140 Processor is designated as a customer set-up unit thereby offering the customer early availability
and relocation flexibility. Aids and configurators are provided to
facilitate the configuration and ordering of the 8140. Set-up procedures for the customer will be shipped with each machine. An
8140 installation verification program will be shipped with each
machine on a diskette. A clear indication that the machine is
operational will be given.
If the user relocates and/or interchanges attaching units from one
system to another, the user must consider priority and address
compatibility of the processor and its attachments.
Prerequisites: None.
Bibliography: Available at a later date.
Color: Pebble gray is the only available color.
Specify: [1] Voltage (120 VAC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): Specify
#9891 for non-lock plug, or #9890 for locking plug. If 4.3
meter (14 ft) power cable is not desired, specify #9986 for 1.8
meter (6 It) cable.
[2] Cabling: For cabling information see Accessories pages
(M10000), appropriate 8100 Information System installation
manuals and Processor Site Preparation Guides.
[3] Programming Configuration: Specify #9700 for Distributed
Processing Programming Executive (DPPX), #9710 for Distributed Processing Control Executive (DPCX), #9720 for DPPX
and DPCX, or #9730 for all other configurations.
[4] Terminal Requirements: Specify #9800 (off line 31>40 terminal
exercisor) if ordering any of the following terminals: 3641,
3642, 3643, 3644, 3645, 3646 or 3647 1) On the intital order.
2) When the first terminal is ordered to attach via an 8101,
and none are attached to the processor.
3)
when the first terminal is field installed on an
8100 System.
Maximum: One per 8100 System. Field installation: Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
8140
A31
A32
A33
A34
A41
A42
A43
A44
A51
A52
A53
A54
MRC
MLC
2 yr
$1,128 $ 960
1,152
980
1,175 1,000
1,199 1.,020
1,416 1,205
1,439 1,225
1,463 1,245
1,486 1,265
1,739 1 ,480
1,763 1,500
1,786 1,520
1,810 1,540
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
$33,060
33,780
34,500
35,220
40,260
40,980
41,700
42,420
45,540
46,260
46,980
47,700
$173
181
181
189
212
220
220
228
233
241
241
249
Rental Plan: Plan 0
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Op\ion: 55%
Per Call: 1
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Warranty: B
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model upgrades are available, however, model
changes from 8140-A3X to 8140-A4X are not recommended. for
field installation. For model changes that require replacement of
disk storage unit, adequate provisions must be made for retaining
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---
-------- - ==--';' ==
M 8140.2
Jul 79
==::::
DP Machines
8140 Processor (cont'd)
data contained in disk storage and elimination of user-proprietary
information,
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges for the following model upgrades)
From
A32
To Mdl'
A33
A34
A31
A32
A33
$2,200 $2,500 $3,000
2,300 2,800
2,500
A41
A42
A43
$2,200 $2,500 $3,000
2,300 2,800
2,500
A51
A52
A53
$2,200 $2,500 $3,000
2,300 2,800
2,500
A42
A52
A43
A53
A44
A54
• Customer price Quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM,"
For all other model changes the purchase customer must submit
an RPQ.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Performance: The maximum number of Features for Attaching
Communications (FAC) capable of concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the line, communication facilities, the operating system installed and the application. work load. The r:naximl;lm
number of communication features which can be physically installed can exceed the operational capability. Increased processor
utilization will result from sustained operation of BSC at the maximum aggregate data rate and may cause degradation of activity
operating at lower priority levels. Analysis should be performed to
determine the impact.
Diagnostics: The 8100 System hardware and feature operation,
diagnostic support and maintenance support described in ~1 00
System publications are dependent on the presence of functional
support modules provided by DPPX or DPCX, Operational and
maintenance conditions for the 8100 System are predicated on the
presence of these functional support modules. Customers ordering
8100 System hardware without DPPX or DPCX should provide the
functional support as contained and described in the Functional
Definition Manual 8100 which will be available
at FCS.
STORAGE INCREMENT 128K (#1490). Provides 131,072 bytes
of additional processor storage. The ordering of the additional
Quantities of this feature will allow the expansion of the 8140 mdl
A31 thru A34 storage up to a maximum of 393,216 bytes.
Maximum: One for 8140 mdl A31 thru A34. Field Installation:
Yes.
CCITT V.35 INTERFACE (#1550). Provides interface to External
Modems/Data Communication equipment to 56,000 bps or Direct
Connection at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: For speeds
up to 9600 bps one per selected communications feature (#1601
or #1602). For operation at 56,000 bps one per 8140 Processor,
one per 8100 System. Not available with FAC codes 8, 9 and 21.
Field installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with
Clock (#1601), SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602) and
Multi-speed Clock (#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC
description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1601).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems, direct connection and CCITT V.35 interface. Limitation:
Not available with the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545)
on the 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Not available with the 8140 mdl
A51 thru A54. In an 8100 System only ten of these features
(#1601 or #1602) may be active at one time. Maximum: Three
with the 8140 mdl A31 thru A34 and two with the mdl A41 thru
A44. Maximum is nineteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a
8140 mdl A31 thru A34, eighteen with a 8140 mdl A41 thru A44,
or sixteen with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The maximum is
reduced by one for each communications feature (#1602, 1603 or
1604) selected. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#1602).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital
Data Service Adapter (DDSA) interface, CCITT V.35 interface and
Loop Adapter. Limitation: Not available with the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545) on the 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Not
available with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. In an 8100 System
only ten of these features (#1601 or #1602) may be active at
one time. Maximum: Three with 8140 mdl A31 thru A34 and two
with mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is nineteen per 8100 System
(see Note 2) with a 8140 mdl A31 thru A34, eighteen with a 8140
mdl A41 thru A44, or sixteen with a 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The
maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature
(#1601, 1603 or 1604) selected. ~1~ld In~tallatio~: Yes. Sl?ec~fY:
Code as provided in FAC descrlpllons In the Communication
Facilities" section.
BSC/SS COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1603). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems or direct connection. Limitation: Start/Stop communications are not available with integrated modems. Not available with
the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545) on the 8140 mdl
A41 thru A44. Not available with the 8140 mdl ASl thru A54. In
an 8100 System the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is 19,200
bps and 660 bps for Start/Stop. Maximum: Three with 8140 mdl
A31 thru A34 and two with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is
nineteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8140 mdl A31 thru
A34, eighteen with a 8140 mdl A41 thru A44, or sixteen with a
8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The maximum is reduced by one for
each communications feature (#1601, 1602 or 1604) selected.
Field installation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
BSC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1604).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital Data
Service Adapter (DDSA) interface and direct connection.
Limitation: Not available with the Expanded Function Operator
Panel (#4545) on the 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Not available with
8140 mdl A51 thru A54. In an 8100 System the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is 19,200 bps. Maximum: Three with 8140
mdl A31 thru A34 and two with mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is
nineteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8140 mdl A31 thru
A34, eighteen with a 8140 mdl A41 thru A44, or sixteen with a
8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The maximum is reduced by one for
each communications feature (#1601, 1602, 1603) selected.
Field installation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
EIA RS-232-G INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides interface to external modems/data communication equipment or direct connection
at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One per selected c?mmunications feature (#1601, 1602, 1603, 1604).
Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with Clock
(#1601), SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602), BSC/SS
Communications with Clock (#1603), BSC Communications without Clock (#1604), SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602)
and Multi-speed Clock (#5200), BSC Communications without
Business Machine Clock (#1604) and Multi-speed Clock (#5200).
Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the
"Communication Facilities" section.
This
EXPANDED FUNCTION OPERATOR PANEL (#4545).
feature provides operator access to processor storage, program
stop and restart capability and current operating indicators.
Limitations: Not available on a 8140 mdl A41 thru A44 with SDLC
or BSC/SS Communications (#1601, 1602, 1603, 1604), Loop
Adapter (#4830), or the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
KEYLOCK (#4655).
This key lock feature provides processor
security by the selection of three modes of operation. These consist of - Disable power on and operator panel functions ... Enable
power on but disable operator panel ... Enable power on and full
operator panel functions. For additional or replacement keys, see
Ml0000 pages. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4830), Provides for the direct attachment of
a single lobe loop at 9600 or 38,400 bps. Limitations: Not available with the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545) on the
8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Not available with the 8140 mdl A51 thru
A54. Maximum: Three with 8140 mdl A31 thru A34 and two with
mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is nineteen per 8100 System (see
Note 2) with a 8140 mdl A31 thru A34, eighteen with 8140 mdl
A41 thru A44, or sixteen with a 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. Only one
of these features may operate at 38,400 bps In an 8100 System.
The maximum is reduced by one for each selected communications facility attached to the 8140. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: SDLC Communications without Clock (# 1602).
Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the
"Communication Facilities" section.
LOOP ADAPTER SECOND LOBE (#4835).
Provides for the
attachment of a separate physical loop cable to extend the.coverage and availability of the directly· attached loop. LimitatiQn: Not
available. with 8140 mdl ASl thru A54. Maximum: Two per 8140
mdl A31 thru A34 and mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is six per
81 00 System (see Note 2) with the 81 40 mdl A31 thru A34 and
mdl A41 thru A44 or four with 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Loop Adapter (#4830). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication
Facilities" section. Loop Accessories and Wire: See M10000
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----.:. =-=
- -==--';' ==
M 8140.3
Jul79
DP Machines
8140 Processor
(cont'd)
pages for pricing and ordering instructions.
NOTE 2: An 8100 System consisting of an 8140 Processor and attached 8101
Storage and Input/Output Unit.
MULTI-SPEED CLOCK (#5200).
Provides business machine
clocking at 4800 bps and 9600 bps for direct connection facilities.
Can provide multiple speeds simultaneously. Limitation: Not available with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. Maximum: One per 8140
mdl A31 thru A34 and mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is five per
8100 System with the 8140 mdl A31 thru A34 and A41 thru A44,
or four with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: SDLC Communications without Business Machine
Clock (#1602), or BSC Communications without Business Machine
Clock (#1604). Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in
the "Communication Facilities" section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides
interface to common carrier leased facilities at 600 or 1200 bps.
Limitation: Not available for Start/Stop communication facilities.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601 or
# 1603). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Adapter with Clock (#1601), or BSC/SS Communications
with Clock (# 1603). Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501). Provides interface
to common carrier switched facilities with auto answer at 600 or
1200 bps. Limitation: Not available with BSC and Start/Stop
communication facilities. Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications with Clock (# 1601). Specify: Code as provided
in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5660).
Provides
interface to AT&T Dataphone' Digital Service Network for transfer
of digital data at speeds of 2400, 4800, 9600 in point-to-point or
multipoint configurations, or 56,000 bps in point-to-point configurations. Maximum: For speeds up to 9600 bps one per selected
communications feature (# 1602 or # 1604). For operation at
56,000 bps one per 8140 Processor, one per 8100 System. Not
available with FAC code 8, 9 or 29. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602) for
operation to 56,000 or BSC Communications without Clock
(#1604) for operation to 9600 bps. Specify: Code as provided in
FAC description in "Communication Capabilities" section.
SECURITY COVER LOCKS (#6555).
This feature provides key
operated security locks for the machine coverS, resricting access
to the machine interior and external cable connector area. See
Security Lock Diskette (#6566) if diskette security is required.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
SECURITY LOCK, DISKETTE (#6566).
This feature provides a
key operated security lock to restrict access to the diskette magnetic media. It is accessible only by opening the front cover. For
maximum security, the Security Cover Lock (#6555) must be used
in addition to the diskette security lock. Additional or replacement
keys are not available from IBM. Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Storage Increment 128K#1490 $306 $260
CCITT V.35 Interface
1550
15
13
SDLC Communications
w Bus Machine Clock
1601
41
35
w/o Bus Machine Clock 1602
35
30
BSC/SS Communications
16
w Bus Machine Clock
1603
19
BSC Communications
w/o Bus Machine Clock 1604
12
10
EIA RS-232-C Interface
3701
12
10
Exp Funct Opertr Panel 4545
82
70
Keylock
4655
50SUC Loop Adapter
4830
20
17
Loop Adapter 2nd Lobe 4835
20
17
Multi-speed Clock
5200
11
13
Modem, Int, Non-switch 5500
16
19
Modem. Int, Switched
5501
25
21
DDS A
5660
24
20
Security Cover Locks
6555
35SUC Security Lock, Diskette
6566
30SUC -
feature description and the FAC code description (identified by the
abbreviation FAC No.) for additional details. Reference to switched
communications in the FAC codes refers to the communication link
between the 8100 System and the S/370.
The 8140 special features allow a maximum of three communication capabilities to be configured and designated as communication ports. Each communication port position (1 thru 3) must
consist of a communications feature for SOLC, BSC or Start/Stop.
The SOLC communications feature is available with and without
business machine clock (#1601, 1602). The BSC/SS communications feature (#1603) is available with business machine clock
and the BSC communications feature (#1604) is available without
business machine clock. If an 8140 communications port is to
provide the attached facility with business machine clock at
speeds greater than 2400 bps the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) is required. One Multi-speed Clock feature (#5200) can
provide business machine clocking at speeds greater than 2400
bps.
In addition to selecting a communications feature (# 1601, 1602,
1603, 1604) for each port configured in an 8140, a communication interface or integrated modem must be selected to support the
communication facility attaching to that port. A two lobe loop port
requires three special features (#1602, #4830 and #4835).
Direct connect at 4800 and 9600 bps requires the Multi-speed
Clock feature (#5200). Each port of the 8140 also requires the
selection of a specify code to indicate the System 8100 FAC code
selected for that port. Certain System 8100 facilities will require a
second specify code to select options available within that facility:
2/4 wire, line speed or multipoint control/tributary.
NOTE: The selected option specified within a given FA C and specific
port position can be changed in the field by Field Engineering. All
such changes are chargeable at the applicable FE hourly rate.
Specify Codes and FAC Code Descriptions:
A specify code number is required to identify the selected FAC
code and its physical port position. The specify code is constructed by concatenating the selected FAC and its port position to the
numeral 9, e.g.:
#9ABC where AB = FAC No. and C = Port Position
FAC codes range in number from 08 to 61 resulting in FAC specify codes ranging in number from #9081 to #9613. Additional
codes may be specified for selected options. These codes are
outlined in the FAC code descriptions. No two FAC codes can
occupy the same port position. Configuration Manual GA27-2876
will aid in assigning the port positions.
- - - LOOP - - -
$30.00
2.00
900
840
8.00
7.50
670
3.00
450
400
2,400
50
605
605
420
668
840
840
35
30
2.50
4.00
30.50
N/C
4.00
4.00
1.50
5.00
6.50
2.00
N/C
N/C
Communication Facilities
There are a variety of communication facilities (see M 2700 pages)
supported by the 8140 mdls A31 thru A44 Features for Attaching
Communications (FAC) which differ in speed, protocol and attachment interfaces. These FAC codes have been categorized as
Loop, SOLC, BSC and Start/Stop. The user should select the
desired communication FAC code and refer to the full special
FAC Code Description
FAC
FAC
FAC
FAC
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
SDLC
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
$6,240
510
FAC No.
8
9
10
11
high speed single lobe at 38,400 bps
high speed two lobe at 38,400 bps
single lobe at 9600 bps
two lobes at 9600 bps
FAC 8 - Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe -- Required for operating
a loop at 38,400 bps. Limitations: Not available with FAC 09
Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe (#9091 thru 9092) and FAC 21 and
29. Port position three not available with 8140 mdls A41 thru A44.
Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830. Maximum: One per 8140.
Maximum one per 8100 System. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for the
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port
#9081
#9082 #9083
Port 3
FAC 9 - Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe -- Required for operating a
two lobe loop at 38,400 bps. Limitations: Not available with FAC
08 Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe (#9081 thru #9083) and FAC
21 and 29.
Prerequisites: #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Maximum: One per 8140. Maximum one per 8100 System.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9091 #9092 N/A
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 10 - Loop, Single Lobe -- Required for operating a loop at
9600 bps. Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140
mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830. Specify:
, Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------
-- -------=== ':' =
M 8140.4
JuJ 79
DP Machines
8140 Processor (cont'd)
From the table below, specify the required code to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9101 #9102 #9103
FAC 11
loops at
Specify:
plete the
Port 2
Port 3
- Loop, Two Lobe -- Required for operating two lobe
9600 bps. Prerequisites: #1602, #4830 and #4835.
From the table below, specify the required code to comconfiguration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9111 #9112 N/A
Port 2
Port 3
---SDLC--FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 12
FAC 13
FAC 15
FAC 16
FAC 17
Integrated Modem
FAC 18
FAC 19
FAC Code Description
600 or 1 200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps direct connect with
clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect with
clock (no modem)
Direct connect without clock
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
600 or 1 200 bps switched with auto answer
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 20
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 21
56,000 bps non-switched
CCITT V.35
FAC 24
FAC 25
FAC 27
FAC 29
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps
Direct connect without clock (no modem)
9600 bps
56,000 bps non-switched
FAC 12 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem without
clocking ... and point-to-point switched 2 wire ... or point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint 4 wire. Limitation: Port
position three not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44.
Prerequisites: #1601 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9121 #9122 #9123
9741
9742
9743
9751
9752
9753
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 13 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... with external data communication
equipment and clock ... point-to-point switched with auto answer
to 4800 bps ... or point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint 4 wire. Limitation: Port position three not available with
8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9131 #9132 #9133
FAC 15 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal or 8100 System must not provide business machine
clock) and direct connection up to 40 feet. limitation: Port position three not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44.
Prerequisites: #1601 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9151 #9152 #9153
9741
9742
9743
9751
9752
9753
9761
9762
9763
FAC 16 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Port position three not
available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602,
#3701 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
#9161 #9162 #9163
9771
9772
9773
9781
9782
9783
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 17 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 40 feet.
Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140 mdl A41
thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9171 #9172 #9173
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 18 - Integrated Modem -- 600 or 1200 bps ... and point-topoint non-switched 20r 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4
wire. Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140 mdl
A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1601 and #5500. Specify: From
the table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
2-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
4-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9181 #9182 #9183
9851
9861
9852
9862
9853
9863
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
FAC 19 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
switched with auto answer 2 wire. Limitation: Port position three
not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1601
and #5501. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9191 #9192 #9193
9741
9742
9743
9752
9753
9751
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 20 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 2400, 4800, 9600 bps without business machine clock
... and 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140
mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602 and #5660. Specify:
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9201 #9202 #9203
Port
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
9600 bps
9041
9042
9043
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9011
9012
9013
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033
9600 bps
9051
9052
9053
FAC 21 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 56,000 bps without business machine clock .,. and
point-to-point non-switched operation. Limitation: Port position
three not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites:
#1602 and #5660. Maximum: One per 8140. Maximum is one
per 8100 System (not available with FAC codes 8, 9 and 29).
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9211 #9212 #9213
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 24 - CCITT V.35 Interface -- 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Limitation: Port position three not
available with 8140 mdlA41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1601 and
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ---- =
--- ----=== ':'
M 8140.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
8140 Processor (conl'd)
#1550. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
#9241 #9242 #9243
9741
9742
9743
9751
9752
9753
9761
9763
9762
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 25 - CCITT V.35 Interface -- 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Limitation: Port pOSition three not
available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602,
#1550 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
#9251 #9252 #9253
9771
9772
9773
9781
9783
9782
Port 2
Port 3
FAC 27 - CCITT V.35 Interface - Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 1000 feet.
Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140 mdl A41
thru A44. Prerequisites: #1602 and #1550. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9271 #9272 #9273
FAC 29 - CCITT V.35 Interface - 56,000 bps without business
machine clock and external data communication equipment with
clock, and point-to-point non-switched. limitation: Port position
three not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites:
#1602 and #1550. Maximum: One per 8140. Maximum is one
per 8100 System (not available with FAC codes 8, 9 and 21).
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9291 #9292 #9293
Port
---BSC--FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 40
FAC 41
FAC 43
FAC 44
Integrated Modem
FAC 45
FAC Code Description
600 or 1 200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 47
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 40 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem with no
clock ... point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint
non-switched 4 wire. Limitation: Port position three not available
with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
FAC 43 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal must not provide business machine clock) and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Port position three not
available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1603 and
#3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9411 #9412 #9413
Port 2
Port 3
Port 2
Port 3
#9441 #9442 #9443
9771
9772
9773
9783
9781
9782
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
FAC 45 - Integrated Modem -- 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4 wire.
Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140 mdl A41
thru A44. Prerequisites: #1603 and #5500. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9451 #9452 #9453
Port
2-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
4-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
9851
9861
9852
9862
9853
9863
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
FAC 47 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps without business machine
clock ... 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Limitation: Port position three not available with 8140
mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1604 and #5660. Specify:
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
#9471 #9472 #9473
Port
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
9600 bps
9041
9042
9043
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9011
9012
9013
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033
9600 bps
9051
9053
9052
- - - - START/STOP
FAC NO.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 60
Port 3
FAC 41 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... operating with external data communication equipment ... and point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire '"
or multipoint non-switched 4 wire. Limitation: Port pOSition three
not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1604
and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
Port 3
FAC 44 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Port position three not
available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1604,
#3701 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 61
#9401 #9402 #9403
9741
9742
9743
9751
9752
9753
Port 2
#9431 #9432 #9433
9741
9742
9743
9751
9752
9753
9761
9762
9763
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
FAC Code Description
110, 134.5, 150, 300 or 600 bps
(external modem)
110, 134.5, 150, 300 or 600 bps
direct connect with clock (no modem)
FAC 60 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 134.5, 300, 600 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with external modem ... and
pOint-to-point non-switched facilities. See M 2700 pages for specific information on communication facilities and other attachment
information.
Also 110 or 150 bps with business machine clock ... operating
with external modem ... and point-to-point non-switched facilities
will be provided under provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier
System Policy.
limitation: Port position three not
available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites: #1603 and
#3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Port 2
Port 3
--------=-- =------- --=--':' =
M 8140.6
Jul79
DP Machines
8140 Processor (cont'd)
Port
#9601 #9602 #9603
11 0 bps
9701
9702
9703
134,5 bps
9711
9712
9713
150 bps
9721
9722
9723
300 bps
9731
9732
9733
600 bps
9741
9742
9743
FAC 61 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600
bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (the
attached terminal must provide its own business machine clock .. ,
and direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Port position
three not available with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Prerequisites:
#1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
110 bps
134.5 bps
150 bps
300 bps
600 bps
#9611 #9612 #9613
9701
9702
9703
9711
9712
9713
9723
9721
9722
9732
9733
9731
9742
9743
9741
Port 2
Port 3
HOST AND TERMINAL MODEM FACILITIES
For communication facilities' and modem attachment data, see the
M 2700 pages and appropriate machines pages for additional
information.
1200 bps integrated modem, switched and non-switched
Dataphone Digital Service Adapter
3863 Modem, switched and non-switched
3864 Modem, switched and non-switched
3865 Modem, non-switched
3872 modem, switched and non-switched
3874 modem, switched and non-switched
3875 modem, non-switched
DIRECT CONNECTION ATTACHMENT
In addition to terminal attachment to the 8100 System through
common carrier facilities (see M 2700 pages) or local loops, attachment can be made by direct connect. The direct connect is
made by using the SDLC (FAC 15 or 16), BSC (FAC 43 or 44)
and Start/Stop (FAC 61) facilities. Shown below are the direct
connect attachable devices and required device feature numbers.
The IBM 8100 Information System Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA27-2877, will assist in the selection of direct connect
cables.
FAC
Code
Attach
Device
Speeds (bps)
Device Feature No.
15
16
IS
61
15,24
3276
3276
3767
2741
8130/8140/8101
600, 1200, 2400
4800,9600
600, 1200, 2400
134.5
600, 1200, 2400
8775-11, 12
600, 1200, 2400
16,25
8130/8140
4800,9600
#3701, w/#9491 and #8302
#3701, w/#9491 and #8302
#3718 w/#9707, #9533
#9115 or #9120
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 15) or
#1550 (FAC 24)
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 16) or
#1550 (FAC 25)
Refer to specific device
See Note 3
Refer to specific device
See Note 3
43
44
8775-11, 12
4800,9600
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
2780/3780 Line
Protor,ol
600, 1200, 2400
4800,9600
NOTE 3: For attachment of devices tbat conform to 2780/3780 protocol.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- = ':' =
=- ='
--- -----------
M 8775.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
tBM 8775 DISPLAY TERMINAL
Purpose: A high function cathode ray tube display terminal which
provides a means of entering data to or receiving data from the
8100 Information System. APL, Extended highlighting, multiple
partitions, and extended data entry capabilities are available. A
keyboard or a Selector Light Pen permit an operator to display
and manipulate data on the screen in a flexible and efficient manner. Other functions include Audible Alarm, Security Keylock and
Magnetic Slot Reader. The 8775 meets both general and unique
display requirements with its set of basic and optional features.
MODELS - Loop A'tlleh
Model 1
Displays 960, 1920 or 2560 characters in the 9x 1 6
character matrix size
Model 2
Displays 960, 1920, or 2560 characters in the
9x16 character matrix size or 3440 characters in
the 9x12 character matrix size
MODELS - SNA/SDLC Data Link Attaeh oper CommUIJica,ion
Facili,ies
Modelll
Displays 960, 1920 or 2560 characters in the 9x16
character matrix size.
Model12
Displays 960, 1920, 2560 characters in the 9x16 character matrix size or 3440 characters in the 9x12 character
matrix size.
The 8775 Display Terminal communicates with an 8130 or 8140
processor using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) over either
direct or data link attach loops or via data link attach over communication facilities. The basic 8775 offers equivalent function and is
upward data stream compatible with the 3276/3278.
Highlights: Displays 960, 1920 or 2560 characters in a 9x16
character matrix, or 3440 characters in a 9x12 character matrix
(models 2 and 12 only).
The number of characters displayed is determined under operator
control. All configurations Include 62 alphanumeric and 32 special
characters, the Space, and Null characters. Use of 3270 Field
Formatting capability permits individual fields of data on the
screen to be program defined with various attributes such as
protected/unprotected, alphanumeric/numeric, normal/highlighted
Intensity, displayable/non-displayable, and selector light pen
detection allowed/disallowed.
at 2400 bps (1200 bps half-speed option) may be connected to
the 8100 System via the 3842 Loop Control Unit and the 3872
Modem. The 3842 can be connected multipoint or point-to-point
on a leased transmission facility to a 3872 modem at the 8100
System site of operation.
The 8775 may communicate to an 8100 Information System using Synchronous Data link Control (SDLC) transmission over data link nonswitched communication facilities.
Communication Facilities: The 8775 operates in data half duplex mode
over non-switched facilities in 2 or 4 wire point to point or 4 wire multipoint configurations at transmission speeds of 1200/600, 2000, 2400/1200,
4800/2400, 7200/3600, and 9600 bps on non-switched facilities D3, D3M,
D4, D4M, D5, D5M, D6, D6M, D7M, Xl, X1M, X2, X2M, X3, X3M.
Refer to M 2700 pages.
Modems: A 1200 bps integrated modem feature (#5500) or an external
IBM modem may be attached to. an 8775. External modems require the
External Modem Interface (#3701).
MODEMS
3872 mdl1 -- 2400/1200
3874 mdl1 -- 4800/2400
3875 mdl1 -- 7200/3600
For communication capabilities, product utilization and special features
see the M 2700 pages and appropriate modem pages for additional
information.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of the problem determination and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood and used by the operator. See "Customer Responsibility"
below.
Customer Set-up (CSU): The 8775 is designated Customer Setup, thereby offering customers ease of set up and relocation
flexibility.
One copy of the CSU
instructions, Problem Determination GUide, and Trouble Report
form are shipped with each 8775.
Customer Responsibility The customer is responsible for:
•
Adequate site, system and other vendor prepration.
•
Receipt at customer's receving dock, unpacking and placement of 8775 display terminal.
Enhanced function, which includes APL, extended highlighting,
multiple partitions and field validation, is offered as a new feature.
•
Physical set up, connection of cables incorporating protected
customer access areas, and checkout.
Operator Fectors: The 8775 has an anti-reflective screen. Indicators are displayed on the bottom row of the screen, outside the
data display area, and provide useful operator information. Updating the screen from the host is accomplished without refresh
interrupt (i.e., no blinking). The keyboard, which is low in profile,
provides a palm rest area and has separators to help prevent
accidental striking of control keys. The operator may select one of
several cursor modes.
•
Contact Field Engineering to make cable connections of IBM
CSU units to non-CSU units where customer access area is
not provided.
•
Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation.
•
Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
Editing Facilities: Cursor move, tab, home key, back tab, insert,
delete, extended erase (erase to end-of-field, erase all keyboard
input data, and erase entire screen) and cursor select keys are all
basic. All alphanumeric, special symbol, and cursor move keys
have typematlc capability. Double speed cursor typematlc is attained with a simultaneous depressing of the ALT key and a horizontal cursor positioning key. The cursor select function provides
an alternative to the selector light pen function. Fields of data may
be selected by positioning the cursor then using the cursor select
key.
•
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping dock at time of discontinuance; appropriate instructions
will be provided by IBM.
Input Flexibility: A choice of keyboards or the the selector light
pen provide input flexibility ... see "Special Features" below.
Fields of data can be selected by positioning the cursor and operating the cursor select key, instead of using the selector light pen.
Twelve Program Function (PF) keys are basic with all typewriter
keyboards; seven or more PF keys are available on all Data Entry
Keyboards.
Security Facilities: A special non-displayed input mode provides
for fields of data to be program-defined so that they will accept
data entered from the keyboard without displaying the data on the
screen. A Security Keylock (optional) prevents modification or
display of data in the display buffer unless the key is turned to the
"on" position. The Set Up Keylock (optional) controls access via
the keyboard to change the terminal address. Those capabilities
and the terminal's ability to identify itself to the host program,
allow customer-supplied security program routines to control
access to data and to record an audit of actions, A MagnetiC Slot
Reader is available to enter system user identification.
Bibliography: Refer to An Introduction to the IBM 8775 Display
Terminal, GC33-3040.
Specify: [1] Voltage (120V AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 2.8
meter (9 foot) power cable is not desired, specify #9511 for
1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable,
or #9513 for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
[2] Attachment: Specify the following:
#9221 - for attachment to the 8130 Processor
#9222 - for attachment to the 8140 Processor.
[3] Distribution of Magnetic Media for Enhanced Function Feature
(#3624) or MUltiple Partitions and Scrolling (#5110). Specify:
#9491 - for one 8775 on each 8100 system.
#9492 - for all other 8775s on each 8100 system.
Note: For each 8100 System with one or more 8775 (with
#3624 or #511(J) attached, one and only one 8775 should
specify #9491. Care should be exercised when relocating
8775s that this relationship is maintained.
If #9491 is specified also select #9425 Diskette 20 to Identify
the type of magnetic media. Additional shipping Instructions are
also required.
Communications: 8775 display terminals are attached to
customer-owned loops or data link attached, to an 8100 Information
System. A direct loop to an 8100 System processor may operate
at 34.8K bps, or 9600 bps, this operating speed being determined
by the customer at order time. A data link attached loop operating
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------------=- =----=--':' =
M 8775.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
8775 Display Terminal (cont'd)
Whenever the Enhanced Function Feature (#3624) or Multiple
Partitions and Scrolling (#5110) is updated by an EC the magnetic
media will be sent to the address associated with the TPC for
each display terminal designated by specify #9491.
All 8775s with #3624 or #5110 are attached to a system which
is assigned a TPC (Teleprocessing Control Number). This TPC
identifys a network associated with an 8100 Rvstem or a central site facility. The TPC,
is a six character code. TPC is
assigned subsequent to delivery of the 8775 when the machine
serial numlJer is known.
[4] Communication Cable: A 1.8 meter (6 foot) communication
cable is provided for attachment to a direct or data link attached loop. If the 1.8 meter cable is not desired, specify #9405
for a 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
A 6.1 meter (20foot) communication cable is provided as standardfor
attachment to standalone modems or to the communication facility
when an integrated modem is used or to the communication facility
when a DDS adapter is used. If the standard communication cable is
not desired, specify #9061 for 3.0 meter (lOfoot) cable, #9062for 9.1
meter (30 foot) cable or #9063 for 12.2 meter (40 foot) cable. With
the CCnT V35 Interface (#1550) feature, a 3.0 meter (10 foot) cable
is supplied.
[5] Character Set: #9082 for EBCDIC Character Set - used in
conjunction with 75-key Typewriter Keyboard or Data Entry
Keyboard or 87-key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard.
PRICES:
8775
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
1
$ 74
$ 63
83
71
68
76
2
11
12
80
89
Purchase
$2,835
3,195
2,935
3,295
MMMC/
AMMCR
$ 19
19
23
23
Rental Plan: Plan D
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Yes, as shown below. Field installation: Yes.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $650
From Model 11 to Model 12 ..... $650
SPECIAL FEATURES
SET UP KEYLOCK (#1009). Controls access to change the unit
address of the terminal. Maximum: One. Field Installatiom Yes.
An alarm sounded under program
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
control to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is also sounded when a character is
entered into the next-to-Iast position on the screen. The operator
may adjust the volume of the tone. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1488). Required for attachment of IBM 1200 bps Integrated ModemfeatUTe (#5500) or any external modem that does not provide its own clocking and operates at
1200/600 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
FEATURE STORAGE (#3622).
Provides the storage capacity
required for enhanced function or Multiple Partitions and Scrolling
(#5110). Maximum: One. Field Instal.latlon: Yes. Note: The En-
hanced Function Feature and Multiple Partitions and Scrolling consist of
two sets of data contained on magnetic media. Either set but not both can
be loaded into the 8775 via the 8100 system at a given time. Refer to
"Specify" for information on the shipment of the magnetic media to the
proper location.
ENHANCED FUNCTION FEATURE (#3624). Provides the ability
to display APL characters, to highlight data, display data in userdefined partitions and to validate data fields as they are entered
into the display terminal from the operator keyboard. Highlight is
on a per character basis in one of three user selectable modes,
blink, reverse video or underscore, and, additionally, on a field
basis for Intensity. Partitioning provides the ability to display data
in up to eight user defined rectangular partitions and for the host
or user to interact individually with the data within each partition.
APL provides the ability to display the space (blank) and the
unique characters consisting of 94 EBCDIC, 81 APL specific, 37
characters unique to 3270 text and 10 new graphic characters.
Validation provides:
Mandatory Enter - Data must be entered into this field to permit
entry to the host.
Mandatory Fill - All positions in this field must be filled to permit
entry to the host.
Trigger Field - Causes the contents of the field to be sent from
the display when data has been entered into the field and
the cursor leaves the field.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Feature
Storage (#3622), Feature Adapter (#3905). If APL is used, 87key APL Typewriter Keyboard (#4626) is required. If keyboard
selectable highlighting is desired, 87-key keyboards (#4626 or
#4627) are required.
FEATURE ADAPTER (#3905).
Provides the logic and control
necessary to perform the enhanced function. Maximum: One.
Field installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Feature Storage (#3622) or
Enhanced Function (#3624).
KEYBOARDS
#4621 - 75-key Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like layout,
movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. Twelve program
function keys are included in the top row of data keys through
use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character
Set (#9082).
#4622 -- 75-key Data Entry Keyboard, movable with 35 data
keys, 10 program function keys and 30 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4623 - 75-key Data Entry Keyboard. keypunch layout, movable, with 35 data keys, 10 program function keys and 30 control
keys. This is the recommended keyboard for high volume data
entry. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4626 - 87-key EBCDIC Typewriter/APL Keyboard, an 87-key
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard (ref #4627) with modified keytops
to allow entry of 81 APL specific characters in addition to the
94-character EBCDIC set. An APL On/Off key controls whether
the keyboard is in basic EBCDIC typewriter or APL mode. In
contrast to the 87-key EBCDiC typewriter keyboard without APL
(ref. #4627), this keyboard has only twelve program function
keys (PF1 thru PF1 2) which are the group of twelve keys to the
right of the main keyboard area. Prerequisites: Enhanced Function Feature (#3624), EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4627 - 87-key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 49 alphanumeric data keys, 26 control
keys and 1 2 program function keys (24 total PF keys). Twelve of
the program function keys are included in the top row of the data
keys through the use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite:
EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
Maximum: One of the above keyboards. Field Installation: Yes.
The keyboard is set up by the customer. Specify: If 0.9 meter (3
foot) keyboard cable is not desired, specify #9399 for 1.8 meter
cable.
Limitation:
Keyboards
used
on
(6
foot)
3275/3276/3277/3278 machines are not interchangeable with
keyboards used on 8775 machines.
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690).
Provides the ability to
lock the keyboard if a, non-numeric key (other than 0-9, minus (-),
decimal sign, or dup) is depressed in a pre-defined numeric-only
field. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
ATTACHMENT FEATURE [Md11 or 2J Each 8775 must be equipped with a loop adapter which provides the capability to attach to
a direct or data link attached loop of the 8100 System.
Provides the capability to attach to a
LOOP ADAPTER (#4850).
direct or data link attached loop of an 8100 System. Direct loop
may operate at a data rate of 38.4K bps or 9600 bps. The data
link attached loop operates at a data rate of 2400 bps with a
half-speed option of 1 200 bps. Operating speed of 38.4KB,
9.6KB, or 2.4KB is determined by the customer at order time,
half-speed of 1200 bps can be selected by the operator. Data link
attached loops are connected via 3842 Loop Control Unit.
Specify: On initial order or by change by service representative.
#9822 for 2400 bps ... #9825 for 9600 bps ... #9829 for 38.4K
bps. The data rate of a loop cannot be higher than that of the
slowest device attached to the loop. Consideration should be given
to attaching devices slower than the 8775 on a separate loop
when the maximum data rate of the 877!5 is required. Maxlm,"'n:
One.
MONOCASE SWITCH (#4944). Provides the choice to display
either uppercase characters only or both uppercase and lowercase
characters. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
MAGNETIC READER CONTROL (#4999). Provides the capability
of attaching a Magnetic Slot Reader which reads encoded information (numeric only) from a magnetic stripe. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"-------- -- --=
---=--- =-----':' =
M 8775.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
8775 Display Terminal (cont'd)
MULTIPLE PARTITIONS AND SCROLLING (#5110). Multiple
partitions provide the ability to display data in up to eight user defined
rectangular partitions and for the host or user to interact indiVidually with
data within each partition. Scrolling prOVides the ability with any designated partition for user interaction with a data record longer than prOVided for by the physical size of the visible portion of that partition. The
operator controls the movement of data either up or down through the use
of Scrolling control keys located on the keyboard. A n additional scrolling
buffer of a maximum of 58 lines of 80 characters to a line (4640 characters) is provided. The actual scrolling capability is dependent upon
screen/partilion configuration. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Feature Storage (#3622).
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340).
A lock and key which prevents
modification or display of data in the display terminal when in the
"Off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SELECTOR LIGHT PEN (#6350).
A hand-held, pen-like device
which permits the operator to select fields of data from a display
for input into the host system. The Selector Light Pen, while not
being used. can be placed in a recess of the keyboard which is
used for user's incidental items. Selector Pen (and Cursor Select)
operations include a new designator character "&". When this
designator is used, the Read Modified operation results in the
return of both the addresses and the data of all modified fields on
the screen. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
Telecommunication Features
Each 8775 mdl 11 or 12 must be equipped with one of the followin!
communication features; CCITT V35 Interface (#1550), External Modem Interface (#3701), 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500). DDS
Adapter (#5650 or #5651).
CCITT V35 INTERFACE (#1550). Provides a CCITT V35 interface
for direct connection up to 1000 feet operating without a modem. Speeds
of 600, 1200. 2400, 4800 and 9600 bps are supported. Business Machine
Clocking (#1488) is not required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes
on mdls 11 and 12. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701. #4850.
#5500, #5650 or #5651.
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS232C interface and appropriate code to attach either an external IBM
modem or PTT mandatory modem. Refer to M 2700 pages. Other
external non-IBM modems may be attached subject to the multiple
system supplier bulletin. Provides interface to Data Service Unit for
allachment at AT & T Dataphone Digital Service. Supports speeds of
600, 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200 and 9600 bps. Also supports direct
connection up to a distance of 40 feet at speeds of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600 bps. Business Machine Clocking (#1488) is not required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes on mdls 11 ond 12. Prerequisite:
Business Machine Clocking (#1488) required for those modems which do
not provide their own clocking. Limitation: Cannot be installed with:
#1550, #4850, #5500, #5650 or #5651.
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides an integrated modem at speeds of 1200/600 bps for operation
over non-switched communication facilities. No external modem is reo
qUired. Specify: #9651 for use with four wire faCility or #9651 for use
with two wire facility. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes on mdls 11
and 12. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1550, #3701, #4850,
#5650 or #5651. Prerequisite: Business Machine Clocking (#1488).
Special Feature Prices:
MLC
2 yr
Set Up Keylock
Audible Alarm
#1009 $ 60SUC 1090
2
2
1488
6
5
15
1550
13
Feature Storage
3622
19
16
Enhanced Function
3624 N/C N/C
External Modem Interface
3701
12
10
Feature Adapter
3905
11
9
Keyboard 75-key Typewriter
4621
13
11
75-key Data Entry
4622
13
11
75-key Data Entry
(Keypunch Layout)
4623
13
11
87-key Typewriter / APL 4626
18
15
87-key Typewriter
4627
18
15
Keyboard Numeric Lock 4690 N/C N/C
Loop Adapter
8
4850
7
Monocase Switch
4944 N/C N/C
Mag Reader Control
4999
11
9
Mult Partitions & Scroll
5110 N/C N/C
Business Machine Clock
CCITT V35 Interface
1200 bps Int Modem
Non-switched
DDSA - Pt to Pt
DDSA - Multipt Tributary
Security Keylock
Selector Light Pen
5500
5650
5651
6340
6350
19
16
24
20
24
20
35SUC 15
13
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
$60
90
225
510
720
N/C
N/C
N/C
1.00
2.00
$ 3.00
N/C
400
4.00
405
1.50
495
495
2.50
3.50
495
675
675
N/C
315
N/C
405
3.50
3.00
3.00
N/C
1.50
N/C
2.00
N/C
N/C
668
840
840
5.00
2.00
2.00
35
585
N/C
.50
ACCESSORIES
The following are available on a purchase only basis. Order the
Part No. indicated below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages.
See M10000 for additional information and field installation.
MAGNETIC SLOT READER (Part No. 4123500) -- a free-standing
Magnetic Slot Reader (MSR) that reads encoded information from
a magnetic stripe. It attaches by a 1.5 meter cable through the
Magnetic Reader Control (#4999). The MSR has 3 lights and a
buzzer which provide feedback to the user on the status of the
read data. The MSR accommodates a wide range (height and
length) of magnetic striped plastic cards such as: 10 badges,
security operator identification cards, etc. These cards can be
encoded with numeric only up to 40 characters at 75 bits per
inch, or up to 65 characters at 127 bits per inch.
Note: Magnetic cards coded with the Alternate End of Massage
character (hexidecimal "C") cannot be read by this reader. The
MSR cannot be used to log on to an SNA network. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Valid for numeric only. Prerequisite: Magnetic
Reader Control (#4999).
MERCURY BATTERY (Part No. 1743456) - provides power to
maintain critical information while the terminal is powered off. This
supply item is a 4.14 volt non-rechargeable mercury battery. This
battery has a shelf life of 1 year under normal conditions and can
be expected to provide 3.5 years of normal operation. One battery
is supplied at no additional charge with the initial order. Discharged batteries should be returned to IBM for disposal. Field
Installation: Yes, by customer.
DDS ADAPTER (#5650 for point to point operation; #5651 for multipoint tributary operation). An adapter for SDLC data transmission at
speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps over the AT & T non-switched
Dataphone" Digital Service Network. The DDS Adapter interfaces to a
DDS channel service unit, the customer site termination of the DDS
network. Specify: #9822 for 2400 bps ... #9823 for 4800 bps ... #9825
for 9600 bps. Maximum: One #5650 or #5651. Field Installation: Yes on
mdls 11 and 12. Limitations: Cannot be installed with #1550, #3701,
#4850, #5500.
ill
MRC
Trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =---- --=
----":' =
IBM
M 8809
Ju179
DP Machines
8809
MAGNETIC TAPE
UNIT
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit for the 4331 Processor and the 8100
Information System. Provides high speed save/restore capability
for fixed DASD as well as satisfying the DB/DC journaling, tape
interchange and processing of the using system.
Model 1 A
First drive which attaches to the 8101 Storage
and I/O Unit or to the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit
Adapter on the 4331 Processor.
Moael lB
First drive which attaches to the 8130 or 8140
Processor.
Model 2
Second or fourth drive which attaches to the first
(Model 1 A or 1 B), third drive (Model 3), or fifth
drive (Model 3), respectively.
Model 3
Third drive or fifth drive which attaches to a
Model 2.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
HIGHLIGHTS
The 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit transports tape directly from reel to
reel without capstans or vacuum columns, with tape tension and
velocity controlled electronically.
The 8809 will operate in one of two operating modes selectable by
the host processor. The first mode is start/stop mode, in which
the 8809 runs at .3175 meters per second (12.5 inches per second) to achieve a 20,000 bytes per second instantaneous data
rate. The second mode is streaming mode in which the 8809 runs
at 2.54 meters per second (100 inches per second) to achieve a
160,000 bytes per second instantaneous data rate for volume
dumps.
Tapes written in either start/stop or streaming mode have an
identical tape format. This 63 bytes per millimeter (1600 bytes per
inch) phase encoded tape format permits the compatable interchange of tapes with IBM 2400 and IBM 3400 tape subsystems
operating with the same recording format and density.
Note: The 8100 Information System will require dedicated operation to achieve streaming mode for
save/restore volume dumps. The 4331 Processor may
require dedicated operation and/or selection of the
long gap (30.5mm or 1.2") mode in order to achieve
acceptable performance in streaming mode.
Checking: Each byte is parity checked while tape is being read.
Data written on tape is read back and checked as in reading, with
full parity check.
Error Correction: Single track error correction "in flight"' takes
place similar to other IBM tape products in 63bpmm (1600bpi)
Phase Encoded Mode during read operations.
Characteristics
Tape Speed (± 5%)
Start/Stop
Streaming"
.3175 m/s
(12.5 ips)
20kb/s
40ms
44ms
2.54 m/s
(100 ips)
160kb/s
295ms
295ms
Data Rate, Instantaneous
Access Time (Write)
Access Time (Read)
IBG Time, Nominal 0.6 inch gap
(1.524 em)
48ms
IBG Time, Nominal 1.2 inch gap
(3.048 cm)
96ms
Rewind Time (2400 ft reel)
(732 meters)
2.6 min
6ms
12ms
2.6 min
• Refer to IBM 8809 Magnetic Tape Introduction, GA26-1659,
for additional details.
Maximums:
specifications as stated in Tape Specifications for One-half Inch
Tape Units, GA32-0006-5. IBM Multi-System Tape (MST) is recommended for use on the 8809 in the Extended Environment.
Assuming media requirements are met, the 8809 accommodates
most industry standard reel sizes of 15.9 centimeters (6.25
inches), 17.8 centimeters (7.0 inches), 21.6 centimeters (8.5
inches), and 26.7 centimeters (10.5 inches).
Limitations: The reel inertia is critical to the 8809 motion control
system. An example of a reel that does not meet the 8809 inertia
requirement is the 26.7 cm (10.5 inch) large hub reel (P /N
1669031) that is designed to hold 366 meters (1200 feet) of tape.
A detailed description of tape reel inertias is contained in the Tape
Specifications Manual, GA32-0006-5 and The IBM 8809 Magnetic
Tape Unit Introduction, GA26-1659.
Interchange of tape written on an 8809 at its extended environment with a current IBM tape drive at its non-extended environment may result in an inter-layer slippage, permanent, or temporary errors. A detailed description of tape environmental requirements is contained in the
Tape Specifications Manual,
GA32-0006-5.
Bibliography: Tape Specifications for IBM One-Half Inch Tape
Units at: 556. 800, 1600, and 6250 BPI, GA32-006-5.
IBM 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Introduction, GA26-1659,
Introduction to the IBM Information System, GA27-2875.
IBM 8100 Information System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2877.
IBM 8100 Information System Configura tor, GA27-2876.
IBM 4300 Processors Summary and Input/Output and Data Communications Equipment Configura tor, GA33-1523.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual - Physical Planning for
System/360, System/370, and 4300 Processors, GC22-7064.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3 wire, 60HZ); #9911 for 120V, #9902
for 208V, or #9914 for 240V.
•
8100 System Attachment: #9606.
4331 Processor Attachment: #9607.
•
Color (4331 Processor only):
#9060 for Willow Green
#9061 for Garnet Rose
#9062 for Sunrise Yellow
#9063 for Classic Blue
#9064 for Charcoal Brown
#9065 for Pebble Grey
PRICES: Mdl
8809 lA
lB
2
3
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
$341
417
303
341
$290
355
258
290
$10,440
12,780
9,270
10,440
MMMC/
AMMCR
$48
63
43
48
Plan Offering: Plan D
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Machine Group: D
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5
Termination Charge Percent: 25
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
8100 SYSTEM MULTI-DRIVE FEATURE (#4920). (8809 Modell B
only) Required on a mdl 18 if more than one tape drive (additional
mdl 2 or mdl 3) is attached to an 8100 System.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
MMMC/
2 YR Purchase AMMCR
8100 System Multi-drive
Feature
#4920
$12
$10
8100 Information System -- up to four 8809 units can be
attached to an IBM 8100 Information System: Model 1 A or 1 B
followed by a model 2, model 3 and another model 2.
4331 Processor -- up to six 8809 units can be attached to a
4331 Processor: Model 1 A followed by a model 2, model 3,
model 2, model 3, and another model 2.
Prerequisites: [For Model 1 A]
8100 Information System
A. Magnetic Tape Attachment (#4521) on the 8101 Storage
and I/O Unit.
B. Diskette Drive and Magnetic Tape Attachment (#1507)
on the 8101 Model Al0.
4331 Processor
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Adapter (#4910).
Magnetic Tape: The media required for the 8809 must meet the
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$360
$1.00
-----.!'::;f~
M 10000.1
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
ENDORSER PLATES
The Endorser Plate is made to the customer's specifications. An additional charge is made for an endorser plate
that requires art and layout work which cannot be accomplished by straight line type setting. This additional cl>arge
applies to single plate orders and the first plale of multiple plate ordars. Documents can be endorsed with date,
indentification number and the bank's legal endorsement.
.
It is. recommended that the customer stock at least one spare endorser plate for each group of machines with
identical plates, since plates cannot be immediately replaced.
Feature
Prices: For 802 or 803 - no artwork required
#3792
For 1201 - no artwork required
3792
For 1203 or 1260, w Serial Numbering/Endorsing (#3791) - no artwork req'd 3792
For 1203 (old style plate) - no artwork required (Field Installation Only)
3794
For 1210, 1219, 1241, 1412, 1419 or 1421 - no artwork required
3792
• •• Art and layout work, if required for any of the above - Additional Charge
3796
Blank Endorser Plate (Plant Installation Only)
3793
Purchase
$ 48
48
53
53
77
J5····
No Charge
FIC·
$ 13
13
••
••
13
••
PO
• FIC applies to field installation on both rental and purchase machines.
•• Not applicable.
• •• Artwork for old style 1203 Endorser Plate cannot be used for the Serial Numbering/Endorsing Plate. If artwork
is required, the charge for #3796 will apply.
•••• Service Charge.
Replacement: Mechanical and Capacity Replacement Machines: 801, 802, 803 or 1201 replaced by 803 or 1201 ... 1203
replaced by 1203 ... 1260 replaced by 1260 ... 1210,1219, 1241,1412,1419 or 1421 replaced by 1419 - a
replacement endorser plate will be shipped with each replacement machine at no charge when the machine being
replaced has an endorser. If any change in plate design is desired, there is a charge only for art and layout work
(#3796), if applicable. The endorser plate on a displaced machine is to be left with the machine, but defaced and
rendered unusable.
Installed Machines: The normal plate charge will apply whenever replacement of a worn or damaged plate is
required. Charges for art and layout work are to be added, if applicable. Note: Endorser plates are interchangeable
only within the group of machines listed on each line under "Prices."
Specify: [1] For shipment with machine, order #3792 or #3793. For field installation, order #3792
... for old style 1203 plate, order #3794. In all cases, If art and layout work is required for #3792
or #3794, also order #3796.
[2] If #3792 is ordered on several machines, for shipment with machines, or if #3792 or #3794 is ordered for
.
must
field installation, a completed Endorser Plate Specification Sheet
be forwarded .
for each machine. If available, a sample endorsement should be attached to each
Spec Sheet.
[3] For a rnechanlcal or replacement machine, order Endorser Plate (#9140) at no charge. If any change in plate
design is desired, the charge for art and layout work (#3796) is to be added if applicable. Attach sample
endorsement to the Endorser Plate Spec Sheet and forward to the plant.
[4] When ordering #3792, #3793 or #9140 for shipment with a machine, specify color of Ink to be used - #9145
for black, #9146 for green, #9147 for purple, or #9148 for red.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - ----------_.--------
M 10000.2
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
Purchase
Feature
FORMS STAND
Purchase
Permits placement of continuous forms (out of carton) on Btand above
floor level and provides for stacking after printing. This accessory
is a two-shelf forms stand.
For 2213, 3284, 3286, 3287, 3645, 3713, 3735, 3767. 3771,
3773,3774.3784.3791.3792
#4450
For 2152
4450
For 5213
4450
$71
61
50
MMMC
MMMC
NC
NC
NC
FIC
FIC
NC
NC
NC
Permits feeding of continuous forms from the carton and provides for forms stacking after printing. This accessory
is a one-shelf forms stand.
For 3288. 3610. 3612. 3615. 3618. 3775ttt
$54
#4450
NC
NC
ttt On the 3775 it is recommended that forms be used out of carton,
MMMC
$ 65
TM
$ 15
Ne
Ne
15
Provides guide for continuous forms or for mounting rolls of paper. Includes a
tear bar. Order
Part No. 1858653.
LONG FORMS
STACKER GUIDES
(for 3211)
Useful on 3211 when it is required to print on forms having a fanfold depth greater
than 18". One guide supports the paper supply stack and the other extends the
stacking area to accommodate the long folds, The rear stacker guide prevents
automatic operation of the power stacker folding belts only when in use.
Order
Part No. 2471661.
265
tlLLUMINATING LAMP
(802/803)
Bulbs are not included.
order #4610.
42
Ne
Ne
ttROLL PAPER
HOLDER
(for 2740 or 2741)
Provides for mounting of rolls of paper or continuous forms. Includes a tear bar
and forms guide. Order
Part No. 1186101.
65
TM
STACKER FOR 1403
(For use with
Selective Tape
Listing Feature)
Used by 1403s equipped with Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6410. 6411) for orderly stacking of both
selective listing tapes and fold pack paper. It is mounted on the back of the printer directly beneath
the present stacker rolls. The pocket separators can be moved to obtain 4 to 8 pockets which will stack
3.1" or 1 ,5" width paper respectively. Combinations of 3.1" and 1.5" width papers can be processed
on the same run. Each pocket holds approximately 1.000' of fanfold paper. or 20' of selective listing
tapes. The stacker contains its own motor which drives the stacker roll shaft. When the Selective Tape
Listing Feature is not in use. the stacker can be easily removed.
order #6413
FIC
Purchase
FORMS GUIDE/ROLL
PAPER HOLDER
(for 3735)
350.00
t If shipped prior to June I.
TM
NC
1963 on a Single Use·Charge basis, may be retained by rental customers at any time in the future if they so desire. Where shipped on or
after June I, 1963. the items are to be removed when rental machines are discontinued.
tt If ordered on a Single Use-Charge basis prior to August 6, 1973, may be retained by rental customers at any time in the future if they so desire, Upon machine
discontinuance, if a customer does not desire to retain roll paper holder, it is to be returned with the machine, If ordered on a purchase basis, the roll paper holder
remains the property of the customer and is to be removed when a rental machine is discontinued,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._----------= =---=--":' =
M 10000.3
May 79
DP Machines
CABLES
3277 Display Sta
3278 Display Sta
3284 Printer
3286 Printer
3287 Printer
3288 Line Printer
ACCESSORIES
Cables and or associated parts to attach the subject machines to the 3271/3272 Control Units and 3276
Control Unit Display Stations may be purchased from a customer selected source. For the proper
identification, installation, and application of the subject cable and parts, see IBM 3270 Installation
Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance
of these cables and their associated parts.
Purchase Price
Assm #
Bulk #
Part #
Assm #
Bulk #
Part #
Part #
Part #
Part #
Part #
Part #
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
2621414
1833106
5252643
1830818
5252899
Cable Assembly Indoor
Coax Wire (Note 1)
Connector Kit (Note 1)
Cable Assembly Outdoor
Coax Wire (Note 2)
Connector Kit (Note 2)
Modification Kit (Note 3)
Station Protector Attachment Kit (Note 5)
Adapter (Note 7)
Station Protector Kit, Gas (Note 4)
Station Protector Element, Gas (Note 6)
Order
See Cable Assm. No. 2577672
$ 4.50
See Cable Assm. No. 1833108
7.30
5.30
16.70
2.65
48.75
8.40
Specify Part #, Assembly # or Bulk # as appropriate.
Note 1: Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors no. 1836444) required for each indoor cable
assembly.
Note 2: Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors no. 1836447) required for each outdoor cable
assembly.
Note 3: Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize the existing installed cables by use of this
modification kit. One kit required for each cable.
Note 4: Must be useCl with outdoor cable assembly when installed outdoors (either above or below ground level).
One kit required for each cable assembly.
Note 5: Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One kit required for each cable assembly.
Note 6: Replacement station protector elements.
Note 7: Used to join t'M) 2577672 or two 1833108 cable assemblies together.
CABLES
(3600)
CABLES
(3650, 3660, 3680)
Cables to attach 3600 units may be purchased from IBM or a customer-selected source ... see Physical Planning
Manual GA27-2766 for cable and connector specifications. The customer is responsible for installation and
maintenance Of these cables. Assembled cables may be purchased from IBM at the prices shown below. Order
Specify bulk cable number, cable assembly number or part number as
appropriate.
Item No.
Description
ASSM 1 563155
ASSM 1741656
ASSM 1745348
ASSM 1745372
ASSM 1745349
ASSM 1745350
BULK 5252769
BULK 5252913
PART 1561344
PART 1745363
PART 5252765
PART 5252766
PART 5420242
Loop Cable Assembly
Cable Assy (joining 2 telephone lines)
Cable Assy (3603 to Loop Terminal Box)
Cable Assy (Loop Repeater to Loop Terminal Box)
Cable Assy (DDA to 3603)
Cable Assy (3603 to Leased Lines)
Bulk Cable (2 Conductor)
Bulk Cable (4 Conductor)
Strain Relief
Connector Assembly (3603)
Male Plug
Female Plug
Mini-Ty (used with 1745363)
Maximum Length
Purchase Price
609.6m(2000')
NIA
7.62m(25')
7.62m(25')
7.62m(25')
7,62m(25')
NIA
NIA
$.10
18.00
2.75
4.00
.05
Buik loop cable to attach 3650, 3660 or 3680 units may be purchased from IBM or a customer selected source ...
see Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3074, or 3680 Site Planning Guide for bulk loop specifications. The customer
is responsible for installation and maintenance of these cables. The bulk cable may be purchased from IBM at the
price shown below. Order
Specify bulk cable number and number
of feet desired.
Bulk Cable No.
Purchase Price
5165886 Price per Foot
CABLES
(3790, 3730)
Cables to attach 3730 and 3790 units may be purchased from IBM or a customer selected source. specifications
and usage. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these cables. Coaxial cables,
connections and accessories for the 3277 and 3288 are applicable when these parts are attached to the 3790
system. Refer to 3270 Cable Accessory section for prices and part numbers.
Unit
3791
3792
3791
3791
3791
3791
3791
Notes:
Cable
Assm No.
Use
1832533
1832533
1454167
1836445(P IN)
2577672
2577672
2577672
2577672
1833108
Keyboard-Printer
Keyboard-Printer
75 Condo Cable Bulk
Connector Group
Aux. Control Unit
3760 mdl 1 and 3
3762 (indoor)
3732, 3736 (indoor)
3732, 3736 (outdoor)
Maximum
Length
Purchase Price
Per Foot
Base +
Note
48'
48'
$61.85
2,000'
2,000'
2,000'
2,000'
2,000'
2
3
3
3
1. Communications cable consisting of bulk cable #1454167 and connector group # 1836445.
2. Contains connector assemblies for both ends of communications cable.
3. Indoor cable. For coax wire and connector kits refer to 3270 Cable Accessory section for
prices and part numbers.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'--------
- =-=
- ==--==---';'::
M 10000.4
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
Purcha.. MMMC
FlC
LOCKS AHD KEYS
1062: The 1062 is equipped with three locks (Teller A. Teller B. and Auditor) and a complement of keys ... two Teller A.
two Teller B. one Master Teller (to fit both Teller A and Teller B locks and. normally. other 1062 Teller locks in the
same Installation). and one Auditor (normally fits all Auditor locks in the Installation). Additional or replacement keys
may be purchased. Locks may be changed In the field. Hote: Removed locks should be destroyed locally.
1062 Key. each
Specify: For each set of keys - Machine Serlal Number ... Key
(Teller A or B. Master Teller. or Auditor) ... Key Identification
Number (stamped on key).
$ 2.50
1062 Lock. field installation
For rental customer. each
11.00sUC
For purchase customer. Price based on return of old lock to IBM. ea
11.00
Specify: For field replacement of lock - Machine Serial Number and
Lock (Teller A or B. Auditor) ... Indicate any compatibility requirements
(such as master teller key interchangeability) with locks on other
units in the system. Each replacement lock Includes two keys.
3275.3276.
3277. 3278. 3732:
NC
HC
HC
HC
NC
NC
The 3275. 3276. 3277. 3278 or 3732 with the Security Keylock (#6340) special feature Is shipped with two keys.
Adultional keys may be purchased only from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys only to original purchaser.)
3275/3276/3277/3278/3732 Key (#2577741). each
2.50
HC
HC
3601: The 3601 Is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
Indicate serial number of lock.
3601 Key. each
2.50
NC
HC
3610.3612: The 3610 mdl 2 and 3612 mdl 2 with the Journal Takeup with Locked Cover (#4651) special feature are shipped
with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
Indicate serial number of lock.
3610 mdl 2/3612 mdl 2 Key. each
2.50
HC
HC
3610 mdl 4: The 3610 mdl 4 is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
Indicate serial number of lock.
3610 mdl 4 Key. each
2.50
NC
NC
3631: The 3631 is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
Indicate serial number of lock.
2.50
3631 Key. each
HC
HC
3653: The 3653 is equipped with a cash drawer lock and can be equipped with an optional journal lock (#9322). The
terminal is shipped with two cash drawer keys. The cash drawer lock will be randomly selected unless specified
otherwise from the M 3653 pages. If the customer wishes to add or replace keys or locks with a specific
identification number (stamped on lock and key) he should state the 3653's machine serial number and the Key
Identification Number. Hote: Without a Key Identification Number. the order should state Machine Serial Number and
the words "NEW LOCK REQUIRED." If the optional journal lock Is specified. the terminal will be shipped with (wo
journal keys also. Additional or replacement keys may be purchased from IBM or a local locksmith. Locks may be
changed in the field.
3653
3653
3653
3653
Cash Drawer Lock including two keys. Part No. 1851088. each
Cash Drawer Lock Key. ea (order by machine type & lock serial no
Journal Lock. Part No. 5998329, each
Journal Lock Key. Part No. 5182285. ea (order by machine type
and Part No.)
3.50
2.50
NC
NC
HC
NC
3.50
NC
HC
2.50
HC
HC
3663: 3663 Supermarket Terminal stations are equipped with three locks and a complement of keys. Locks and keys are
as follows:
,
Cash drawer lock - randomly selected lock. number unless specified otherwise from the M 3663 page (2 keys
shipped as standard).
Till Lock - standard key fits all tills (1 key shipped as standard per till).
Summary Journal Lock (optional feature #4660) - standard key fits all summary journals (1 key shipped as
standard per journal).
.
Additional or replacement keys may be purchased from IBM or a local locksmith. Locks may be changed In the
field.
_
If the
customer wishes to add or replace keys or locks with a speclilc identification number (stamped on lock and keys)
he should state the 3663's Machine Serial Number and the Key Identification Number. If the customer does not
specify key number, a new lock with keys will be randomly selected. Hote: Without a Key Identification Number. the
order should state Machine Serial Number and the words "NEW LOCK REQUIRED."
3663 Cash Drawer Key. ea (specify Machine Serial No. and Key
Identification Number)
3663 Till 'Key • each
3663 Summary Journal Key. each
3663 Cash Drawer Keylock with 2 keys. (Specify Machine Serial No. and
the Key Identification Number being replaced)
2.50
2.50
2.50
NC
HC
HC
HC
HC
HC
3.50
HC
NC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------:5:
=-=:5
~=
M 10000.5
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
LOCKS AND KEYS (cont'd)
Purcha..
MMMC
FIe
3683. 3684: The 3683 and 3684 are equipped with a cash drawer lock and can be equipped with an optional Journal Lock
(#4690). optional Manager Keylock (#4905). and (3664 only) optional Diskette Cover Lock (#3310). The cash
drawer lock and all other locks ordered will be shipped with two keys. The cash drawer lock. journal lock. manager
lock. and diskette cover lock will be randomly selected unless specified otherwise from the M 3683 and M 3664
pages. If the customer wishes to replace a unique lock the order should state the 3683 or 3664 machine serial
number. lock name and the lock Identification number (stamped on lock). (Note: Without an identification number.
the order should state machine serial number. lock name and the words "NEW LOCK REQUIRED. ") Additional or
replacement keys may be purchased from a local locksmith. locks may be purchased from IBM and may be
changed In the field.
The following randomly selected locks may be ordered by part number.
3683/3664 Cash Drawer Lock Including 2 keys. Part NO. 8543281. each
3683/3684 Journal Lock. Part No. 8543820. each
3683/3664 Manager Lock. Part No. 8547992. each
3684 Diskette Cover Lock. Part No. 8543820. each
••
••
••
••
Ne
NC
NC
Ne
NC
NC
NC
NC·
3735: The 3735 with Keylock (#4695) special feature Is shipped with two keys. Additional or replacement keys may be
purchased only from IBM.
Key Identification Number (stamped on key and lock barrel) must be specified on each order.
If the Key Identification
A new Keylock (#4695) special feature must be ordered
Number cannot be supplied.
3735 Key. each
2.50
3747 Key. each
3747 Lock. field Installation .,. for rental customer. each
3747 Lock. field Installation ... for purchase customer (price based on
return of old lock to IBM). each
NC
NC
2.50
11.00suc
NC
NC
NC
NC
11.00
Ne
NC
3767: The 3767 with Security Keylock (#6660) feature Is shipped with two keys. Additional or replacement keys may be
purchased only from IBM.
.
Key Identification Number (stamped on key and lock barrel) must be specified on each order. A
if the Key Identification Number cannot be
new Security Keylock (#6660) special feature must be ordered
supplied.
2.50
3767 Key. each.
NC
NC
3289-3.
3771.3773.3774.
3775. 3778. 3777: The 3289-3. 3771. 3773. 3774. 3775. 3776 or 3777 with Keylock (#4650) special feature Is Shipped with two
keys. Additional or replacement keys may be purchased only from IBM.
.
A customer authorization letter with Key Identification Number stamped on key and lock barrel) must accompany
each order.
2.50
3289-3. 3771. 3773. 3774. 3775; 3776. 3777 Key. each
NC
NC
3780: The 3780 with Keylock (#4650) Is shipped with two keys. Additional or replacement keys may be purchased only
Key
from IBM.
Note:
Identification number (stamped on key) must be specified on each order.
Without Key identification Number. a new Keylock (#4650) must be ordered.
2.50
3780 Key. each
Ne
NC
3780. 3762. 3791.
3792: The 3780. 3762. 3791 or 3792 with Security Keylock (#6350) Is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be
purchased only from I B M . ·
.
Indicate serial number of lock on the order.
3760. 3762. 3791 or 3792 Key. each
2.50
NC
Ne
3793: The 3793 Powerllne Keylock (#5560) is shipped with two keys. Additional or replacement keys may be purchased
from IBM.
Key
Note: Without
Identification Number (stamped on key) must be specified on order.
Key Identification Number. a new feature (#5560) must be ordered.
2.50
NC
NC
3793 Key. each
8130. 8140. 8101: The 8130. 8140 or 8101 with Keylock (#4655J Is ,hipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased only
from IBM.
Indicate serial number of lock on the order.
8130.8140.8101 Key. each
2.50
Ne
NC
8775: The 8775 with the Security Keylock (#6340) feature is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased
only from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys only to original purchaser.)
8775 Security Key. each
(to be announced)
NC
Ne
8775: The 8775 with the Set Up Keylock (#1009) feature is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased
only from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys only to original purchaser.)
8775 Set Up Key. each
(to be announced)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
NC
NC
._-------- ----
- - - ---':' =
==-=
M 10000.6
May 79
DP Machines
MOTOR GENERATOR
AND STARTER
(5/370 - 3032.
3033.3165.
3168)
ACCESSORIES
These units are not manufactured by IBM and are available on a purchase only basis. Units must be ordered
one year in advance of Insta"ation. Manufacturer's warranty will be extended to the purchaser. Insta"ation.
checkout and maintenance will not be provided by IBM and any expenses involved must be borne by the customer.
see 8/360 Installation Planning Manua( GC22-6820. for installation requirements.
For S/370 mdl 185, 168, 3032 or 3033 Proceseor: If a motor generator set is chosen as the power source. then
one Motor Generator Set (with intema"y mounted starter) is required for each S/370 mdl 165 and 168. 3062
Attached Processing Unit and 3032 or 3033 Processor. Two are required for a 168 MP systerr.. one for each MP
CPU. Specify: Feature # for Motor Generator Seton 3032.3033.3062.3165 or 3168 machine order
Feature Purchase Prlcet
208/230 VAC. 3-phase. 60 Hz - Motor Generator Set
440 VAC. 3-phase. 60 Hz - Motor Generator Set
~7
$2~400
9449
2MOO
Note: If more than one MG set Is desired on initial order. specify quantity at the indicated prices.
If additional MG set Is to be ordered for delivery after system, order
as follows:
Part No. Purchase Prlcet
2574790
2574290
Motor Generator Set ... 208/230 VAC
Motor Generator Set ... 440 VAC
$2~400
20,400
t
FOB shipping point with freight prepaid designation within the 48 contiguous states. For domestic accounts outside the 48 contiguous U.S., transportation costs are
prepaid to pori of embarkation in the U.S.
PIN FEED PlATENS
(1033. 1447.2213
mdl 1. 2740. 2741.
3713. 3735. 3793)
For feeding of continuous forms that have pre-punched feed holes. On anyone machine, one pin feed platen
may be ordered for shipment with the machine in lieu of the standard solid platen. The platen becomes the
property of the customer and cannot be returned for credit.
order the applicable Feature #
Indicated below.
Regular Pin Feed Platen - available for 1033. 1447. 2213 mdl 1.2740.2741.3674.3735.3793.
3713- a pin feed platen with 6 lines/inch spacing Is standard on the 3713. On initial machine order. anyone of
three hole-ta-hole forms widths may be specified ... see 3713 "Machines" page. If Adjustable Margin
Feature (#1115) is ordered. anyone hole-ta-hole forms width from 5-1/4" to 13-7/8" (#9151 thru
#9168 ... see below) may be ordered in lieu of the choice listed under "Specify" on the 3713 "Machines"
page.
Feature Purchase
For 1033.1447.2213 mdl 1.
2740. 2741. 3735. 3793. In lieu of standard friction feed platen
(max .• one per machine) ... on 3735 or 3793. only 6 lines/inch
is available.
Pin Feed Platen (regular)
#9509
$ 61.75
MMMC
NC
FIC
PO"
Specify: [1] #9509 at price indicated ... [21 line Spacing and Hole-ta-hole width: One feature #. depending upon forms width
and line spacing. from "Line Spacing" below Prerequisite: On 1447. 2213 mdl 1. 2740 and 2741. the appropriate
Feature # for line spacing on the basic machine (#9435 for 6 lines/inch. or #9436 for 8 lines/inch) is required ...
see " Specify" under each unit in "Machines."
Line Spacing - with either #9509 or #9510. one of the following Feature #s must be specified in accordance
with line spacing and hole-ta-hole width of the forms which will be used.
Over-all Forms Hole-to-hole Writing
Width
Width
Line
5-3/4"
6-1/2"
8"
6-1/2"
9-1/2"
9-7/8"
10-3/8"
10-1/2"
10-5/8"
11-3/4"
12"
13"
13-5/8"
14-3/8"
SPLIT FRICTION
FEED PLATEN
(for 2740 mdl 2)
5-1/4"
6"
7-1/2"
8"
9"
9-3/8"
9-7/8"
10"
10-1/8"
11-1/4"
11-1/2"
12-1/2"
13-1/8"
13-7/8"
4-5/8"
5-3/8"
6-7/8"
7-3/8"
8-3/8"
8-3/4"
9-1/4"
9-3/8"
9-1/2"
10-5/8"
10-7/8"
11-7/8"
12-1/2"
13-1/4"
Fea. # for Line Spacing
6 Lines/Inch
8 Lines/Inch
#9151
9152
9153
9154
9155
9156
9157
9158
9159
9160
9161
9167
9162
9168"
#9272
9273
9274
9275
9278
9279
9260
9281
9287
9282
9268"
[Plant Insta"ation only] A two section platen with the split located to provide a 5-1/2" printing line on
the left and 7-1/2" printing line on the right. Prerequisite: Document Insertion (#3401 or #3402) and Line
Feeding. 6 lineS/inch (#9435) on the 2740 mdl 2. Note: On anyone machine. only one split friction feed
platen may be ordered for plant Insta"ation in lieu of the standard friction feed platen. For additional
friction feed platens. split friction feed platens.
MMMC
FlC
Feature Purchase
Split Friction Feed Platen. in lieu of friction feed Platen
... maximum. one per machine.
#9600
$ 76
NC
PO
• Available only for 2213 mdl I, 2740, 2741 or 3713. Use of this platen on the 2740/2741 does not extend the writing line beyond 13".
"" #9509 at the prices indicated are to be uaed only for ordering the plant installation of a pin feed platen in lieu of the standard friction feed platen on original orden
• for these machines.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------
== =-= :IV:
M 10000.7
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
PRINT BELT, ADDITIONAL [3288, 3281, 3775, 3778, 3784, 3791, 3792]
Permits customer to obtain more than one character set print belt for various applications.
F. .ture
For 3288: 64-charactar EBCDIC
12O-character TN/T11 EBCDIC. Sans Sarlf font
5920
5921
Purch...
MMMC
FlC
180
180
A metal belt with engraved font. See appropriate "Machines" page for restrictions and
limitations. The belt can be used Interchangeably with the one provided on the machine.
120 LPM Max - 3775
155 LPM Max - 3289-1.3764.3791.3792
300 LPM Max - 3776-1
400 LPM Max - 3289-2. 3. 4. 3776-2
Available In EBCDIC and ASCII character arrangements.
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
3289·.3776.3764.3791.3792
46-character ASCII
3289·. 3775. 3776. 3764. 3791. 3792 ~haracter ASCII
3289·. 3775. 3776. 3764. 3791. 3792 94-character ASCII
3776
46-character EBCDIC
(HN Character Sat)
3289. 3776. 3764. 3791 .3792
46-character EBCDIC
3289. 3775. 3776. 3764. 3791. 3792 64-character EBCDIC
3289. 3775. 3776. 3764. 3791. 3792 94-charecter EBCDIC
3289
125-char Text Print EBCDIC
3791. 96-char EBCDIC (word processing) Courier Typestyle
3791. 96-char EBCDIC (word processing) Artisan Typestyle
3791. 126-char EBCDIC (data & word procesalng) & ASCII
5811··
5812··
5813··
180
180
180
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5831
5832
5833
180
180
180
180
180
170
170
170
410 LPM Max - available In EBCDIC and ASCII character arrangements.
For
For
For
For
3791
3791
3791
3791. 126-char EBCDIC (data
46-character EBCDIC/ASCII
64-character EBCDIC
94-character EBCDIC
& word proc8salng) & ASCII
5825
5826
5827
5834
180
180
180
170
• 3289 mcIII 1 1llCl2 only•
•• ASCII F:atuN (#1201) is prerequisite on 3775 or 3776. For 3784. ASCII Feature (#1201) is prerequisite on 3774. ASCII Feature (#9022) required on 3791. For 3289.
SCS Operation is not available with ASCII.
PRINT BELT, ADDITIONAL [3262]
Permits the customer to obtain more than one character set print belt for various applications. When ordering. use one feature# for
character set size and one feature # for character height. Installation and replacement of these belts are the customer's reaponslbility.
" customer desires to have IBM Field Engineering replace or Install the print belt. the CE time will be billed to the customer.
F. .ture
46-character EBCDIC
#5940
~haracter EBCDIC (optimized) 5948
~haracter EBCDIC
5944
96-character EBCDIC
5948·
Purch...
MMMC
$170
170
170
170
Character Set Height
2.0mm (.079")
2.4mm (.095")
5851
5950
• Available only with 2.4mm (.095") character height (#5950).
3274,3271,3771,3777,8775
MERCURY BATTERY
To provide power to sustain the master key of the Encrypt/Decrypt feature (#3680) on the 3274 Control Unit.
3276 Control Unit Display Station. 3776 Communication Terminel mdl 3 or 4. 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3.
or maintain customer set up Information In 8775 Display Terminal when normal power is not present. A 4.14 volt
mercury battery (IBM Part No. 1743458). This battery has a she" life of 1 year under normal conditions. and can
be expected to provide 3.5 years of normal service.
' .
Discharged batteries should be returned to IBM for
dlaposal. Return Information Is printed on the label of the battery.
Purch...
Mercury Battery. IBM Part No. 1743458
Not to be reproduced, without written permiss.ion.
$ 17
MMMC
._-------- ----
- - - --==-=
':' =
M 10000.8
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
3683/3684
TOTALS RETENTION
BATTERY
To provide power for 240 bytes of storage to secure totals, transaction sequence number, terminal address, and
other user defined data against power off or power Interruptions. Power source (Eveready #E134, Mallory TRl34R
or equivalent) Is customer replaceable. The capacity rating of these type batteries when new Is approximately 1000
milliamp hours. The life of the battery Is determined by the shelf life which Is approximately gOOO hours. This
means that if a battery is installed in a 3683 or 3684 six months after manufacture, its useful machine life will be 6
months on the average.
It is recommended that the users· program test the battery state at least once par day. When the battery condition
reaches the low threshhold state, there is approximately 72 hours of battery life left. Procurement and replacement
of the battery is the customer's responsibility. Customer must ensure that the power is "ON" the terminal when the
battery is replaced or all information will be lost.
3683/3684
STORAGE RETENTION
To provide power to retain data and programs in main storsge and registers during primary power interruption. A
BATTERY
12.5 volt battery is shipped with the initial order for this feature (Storage Retention #7785). For reDlacement
batteries order IBM Part Number 8543856 (or equivalent)
Purcha..
Nickel Cadmium Battery, IBM Part No. 8543856
••
MMMC
••
Tobe~
Not to be reproduced without written permission.·
--- - ----
-------- --== = ~ =
M 10000.9
May 79
DP Machines
ACCE SSOR I ES
3600 ACCESSORIES
Accessories for 3600 System equipment may be purchased from IBM or a customer selected source.
Part Number
Description
Purchase Price
3601 mdl1
78999
Fuse (.5 Slow Blow)
$ 0.55
3603
111262
1176668
Fuse (.4 Slow Blow)
Fuse (1.5A Slow Blow)
0.45
0.80
1561332
1561341
1561342
Blank Base for Customization
Clear Protective Overlay
Preprinted (Group 1)
Preprinted (Group 2)
0.90
1.10
2.40
2.45
4942506
4942515
4943749
White Background 45 Key
Blue Insert 1 5 Key
Clear Protective Cover 45 Key
2.30
1.65
1.40
1652103
1702817
1702847
1702848
1702849
1702867
Fuse Holder Assembly
Display Filter - Standard
Keyboard Overlay - Standard
Keyboard Overlay - Blank except for Numerics
Keyboard Overlay - Protective Cover
Keyboard Overlay - Std Fctn Key Nomenclature
Calculator Numeric Arrangement
Display Filter -Blank Red
Keyboard Overlay - Blank Fctn Key Nomenclature
Calculator Numeric Arrangement
1.50
3.45
1.65
1.65
0.50
3604 Keytop Lables
Mdls 1, 2, 3 ,4
156233~
3604 Overlays
Models 5,6
3606/3608
1702904
1702934
1.65
2.05
1.65
3603
1745353
5929886
Jumper Assembly (Signal Attenuation)
Wall Plate Assembly
1.05
13.50
The following accessories may be obtained
Diskettes ... Magnetic Passbook Labels ... Ink Rolls ... 3618 Printer Ribbon
3600 System
LOOP REPEATER
(P IN 4400002) Plugs into the Loop cable and redrives all signals being transmitted in a 3600 Finance
Communication System. Each Loop Repeater contains Loop redriving capabilities which allow for the extension of
the Loop cable length by 2000 feet. Loop Repeaters may be employed on a Loop to extend its overall length to a
maximum of 20,000 cable-feet. The unit can be physically mounted on a wall in an out-of-the-way location.
Prerequisite: An operating 3600 System Local Loop or Remote Subloop.
Bibliography: GC22-0005
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be advised that: [1] The customer is responsible for making certain
that the use of the equipment complies with all Federal. State. and Local Laws. Regulations. and "Ordinances ... [2]
The customer is responsible for price quotations, installation and cost (initial and recurring) of common carrier
equipment and service '" [31 The customer is responsible for the set-up of the unit ... [4] The customer will
determine the failing unit (see 'Maintenance" below) ... [5] The customer is responsible for determining the required
number of spares.
Physical Planning and Set-up: Physical planning and set-up is the responsibility of the customer. Attachment to the
Loop cable is provided by ordering External Signal Cable Assembly (IBM PIN 1745372), or equivalent ... see IBM
3600 Finance Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2766.
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing unit with a spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient
spare units for such use. The number of spare units recommended is dependent upon the number of units the
customer has installed, application requirements, physical locations and layouts. However, the minimum number of
spare units recommended is shown in the following table:
Number of
Loop Repeaters
Installed
Minimum Number
Spares Recommended
100
200
300
500
1000
1500
2000
2
2
3
4
Number of
Loop Repeaters
Installed
Minimum Number
Spares Recommended
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
12
14
16
18
19
21
6
9
10
warranty: Service is available at the designated IBM Repair Center during the 90 day warranty period, which
commences 30 days following date of shipment from the plant of manufacture (Raleigh). It shall be the customer's
reponsibility to set up the equipment. It shall be the customer's responsibility to determine the failing unit and
remove it from the Loop, and if the unit is still under warranty, to pack it in the designated shipping container and
ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center. IBM will return the serviced unit, shipping charges prepaid.
There is no regularly scheduled preventative maintenance recommended by IBM on these units.
Maintenance agreements are not available. FE on-site service will not be provided.
Ordering: Order Part No. 4400002
Loop Repeater, each
Loop Repeater, each
Machine
Part No.
Purchase Price
3601
3602
4400002
4400002
$350
350
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------------_.-
---.----- ---- ---
M 10000.10
May 79
DP Machines
ACCESSORIES
3614 LOGO PANEL
#9401 or #9402
A purchase only accessory for either a 3614 mdl 1, 2,11 or 12. The personalization panel provides an area on the
top half of the front of the 3614 that can be personalized by the customer
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.3
Linearized : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date : 2013:10:31 17:56:52-08:00
Modify Date : 2013:10:31 22:04:47-07:00
Metadata Date : 2013:10:31 22:04:47-07:00
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:25bc1423-dd3d-4984-a5db-4b123c5c9f28
Instance ID : uuid:123265ef-b2f9-4c06-9e0b-4f0a60cc5851
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseNone
Page Count : 576
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools